Book
Scholarship On Teaching - Type: Book - 500 results
Select an item by clicking its checkbox
Promoting Diversity in College Classrooms: Innovative Responses for the Curriculum, Faculty and Institutions
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. This journal presents a collection a essays that offer several new perspectives on teaching practice; give descriptive and narrative accounts of curricular and teaching innovations; and discusses a range of shared learnings obtained from public university, community college, and private college multicultural change processes. (From the Publisher)
Journal Issue. This journal presents a collection a essays that offer several new perspectives on teaching practice; give descriptive and narrative accounts of curricular and teaching innovations; and discusses a range of shared learnings obtained from public university, community college, and private college multicultural change processes. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. This journal presents a collection a essays that offer several new perspectives on teaching practice; give descriptive and narrative accounts of curricular and teaching innovations; and discusses a range of shared learnings obtained from public university, community college, and private college multicultural change processes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Dynamics of Diversity in the Teaching-Learning Process: A Faculty Development Model for Analysis and Action (Linda S. Marchesani, Maurianne Adams)
ch. 2 Racial Identity Development: Understanding Racial Dynamics in College Classrooms and on Campus (Rita Hardiman, Bailey W. Jackson)
ch. 3 Bias Issues in the Classroom: Encounters with the Teaching Self (Gerald Weinstein, Kathy Obear )
ch. 4 International and Multicultural Education: Unrelated Adversaries or Successful Partners? (June Noronha)
ch. 5 Cultural Pluralism and Core Curricula (Betty Schmitz)
ch. 6 Diversity in Required Writing Courses (Marcia S. Curtis, Anne J. Herrington)
ch. 7 Curricular Innovations: Social Diversity as Course Content (Maurianne Adams, Linda S. Marchesani)
ch. 8 Monoculturalism to Multiculturalism: Lessons from Three Public Universities (John A. Hunt ... [et al.] )
ch. 9 Community College Contexts for Diversity: Miami-Dade Community College and Joliet Junior College (Mardee S. Jenrette, J.Q. Adams)
ch. 10 Institutional Transformation for Multicultural Education: Bloomfield College and St. Norbert College (Martha J. LaBare, Stuart G. Lang)
Index
Journal Issue. This journal presents a collection a essays that offer several new perspectives on teaching practice; give descriptive and narrative accounts of curricular and teaching innovations; and discusses a range of shared learnings obtained from public university, community college, and private college multicultural change processes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Dynamics of Diversity in the Teaching-Learning Process: A Faculty Development Model for Analysis and Action (Linda S. Marchesani, Maurianne Adams)
ch. 2 Racial Identity Development: Understanding Racial Dynamics in College Classrooms and on Campus (Rita Hardiman, Bailey W. Jackson)
ch. 3 Bias Issues in the Classroom: Encounters with the Teaching Self (Gerald Weinstein, Kathy Obear )
ch. 4 International and Multicultural Education: Unrelated Adversaries or Successful Partners? (June Noronha)
ch. 5 Cultural Pluralism and Core Curricula (Betty Schmitz)
ch. 6 Diversity in Required Writing Courses (Marcia S. Curtis, Anne J. Herrington)
ch. 7 Curricular Innovations: Social Diversity as Course Content (Maurianne Adams, Linda S. Marchesani)
ch. 8 Monoculturalism to Multiculturalism: Lessons from Three Public Universities (John A. Hunt ... [et al.] )
ch. 9 Community College Contexts for Diversity: Miami-Dade Community College and Joliet Junior College (Mardee S. Jenrette, J.Q. Adams)
ch. 10 Institutional Transformation for Multicultural Education: Bloomfield College and St. Norbert College (Martha J. LaBare, Stuart G. Lang)
Index


Teaching for Diversity and Social Justice: A Sourcebook
Additional Info:
Teaching for Diversity and Social Justice is a much needed resource that addresses the need to facilitate communication and understanding between members of diverse social groups. It provides a unified framework by which students can engage and critically analyze several forms of social oppression and discrimination. (From the Publisher)
Teaching for Diversity and Social Justice is a much needed resource that addresses the need to facilitate communication and understanding between members of diverse social groups. It provides a unified framework by which students can engage and critically analyze several forms of social oppression and discrimination. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Teaching for Diversity and Social Justice is a much needed resource that addresses the need to facilitate communication and understanding between members of diverse social groups. It provides a unified framework by which students can engage and critically analyze several forms of social oppression and discrimination. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Theoretical Foundations for Social Justice Education (Lee Anne Bell)
ch. 2 Conceptual Foundations for Social Justice Courses (Maurianne Adams)
ch. 3 Pedagogical Frameworks for Social Justice Education (Rita Hardiman, Bailey Jackson, & Pat Griffin)
ch. 4 Designing Social Justice Education Courses (Lee Anne Bell, Pat Griffin)
ch. 5 Introductory Module for the Single Issue Courses (Pat Griffin, Matt Ouellett, & Lee Anne Bell)
ch. 6 Racism Curriculum Design (Lee Anne Bell, Barbara J. Love, & Rosemarie A. Roberts)
ch. 7 Sexism Curriculum Design (Lee Anne Bell, Khyati Y. Joshi, Ximena Zúñiga, & Pat Griffin)
ch. 8 Heterosexism Curriculum Design (Steven Botkin, JoAnne Jones, Tanya Kachwaha)
ch. 9 Antisemitism Curriculum Design (Pat Griffin, Katja Hahn D’Errico, Bobbie Harro, Tom Schiff)
ch. 10 Ableism Curriculum Design (Chase Catalano, Linda McCarthy, Davey Shlasko, & Maurianne Adams)
ch. 11 Classism Curriculum Design(Maurianne Adams and Khyati Y. Joshi)
ch. 12 Multiple Issues Course Overview (Maurianne Adams, Katja Hahn d’Errico)
ch. 13 Facilitating Social Justice Education Courses (Betsy Leondar-Wright and Felice Yeskel)
ch. 14 Knowing Ourselves As Instructors (Pat Griffin, Madeline L. Peters, Robin M. Smith)
ch. 15 Knowing Our Students (Barbara J. Love and Kathy Phillips)
ch. 16 Knowing Ourselves As Social Justice Educators (Lee Anne Bell, Barbara Love, Sharon Washington)
ch. 17 Knowing Our Students (Maurianne Adams, JoAnne Jones, Beverly Daniel Tatum)
References
Index
Teaching for Diversity and Social Justice is a much needed resource that addresses the need to facilitate communication and understanding between members of diverse social groups. It provides a unified framework by which students can engage and critically analyze several forms of social oppression and discrimination. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Theoretical Foundations for Social Justice Education (Lee Anne Bell)
ch. 2 Conceptual Foundations for Social Justice Courses (Maurianne Adams)
ch. 3 Pedagogical Frameworks for Social Justice Education (Rita Hardiman, Bailey Jackson, & Pat Griffin)
ch. 4 Designing Social Justice Education Courses (Lee Anne Bell, Pat Griffin)
ch. 5 Introductory Module for the Single Issue Courses (Pat Griffin, Matt Ouellett, & Lee Anne Bell)
ch. 6 Racism Curriculum Design (Lee Anne Bell, Barbara J. Love, & Rosemarie A. Roberts)
ch. 7 Sexism Curriculum Design (Lee Anne Bell, Khyati Y. Joshi, Ximena Zúñiga, & Pat Griffin)
ch. 8 Heterosexism Curriculum Design (Steven Botkin, JoAnne Jones, Tanya Kachwaha)
ch. 9 Antisemitism Curriculum Design (Pat Griffin, Katja Hahn D’Errico, Bobbie Harro, Tom Schiff)
ch. 10 Ableism Curriculum Design (Chase Catalano, Linda McCarthy, Davey Shlasko, & Maurianne Adams)
ch. 11 Classism Curriculum Design(Maurianne Adams and Khyati Y. Joshi)
ch. 12 Multiple Issues Course Overview (Maurianne Adams, Katja Hahn d’Errico)
ch. 13 Facilitating Social Justice Education Courses (Betsy Leondar-Wright and Felice Yeskel)
ch. 14 Knowing Ourselves As Instructors (Pat Griffin, Madeline L. Peters, Robin M. Smith)
ch. 15 Knowing Our Students (Barbara J. Love and Kathy Phillips)
ch. 16 Knowing Ourselves As Social Justice Educators (Lee Anne Bell, Barbara Love, Sharon Washington)
ch. 17 Knowing Our Students (Maurianne Adams, JoAnne Jones, Beverly Daniel Tatum)
References
Index

Ministerial Formation in a Multifaith Milieu: Implications of Interfaith Dialogue for Theological Education
Additional Info:
It is generally accepted that theological education and ministerial formation must both take place "in context". The context, in most parts of the world today, is one of religious pluralism where Christians must live in dialogue and grow in commmunity with neighbours of other faiths. Ministers have a crucial role in shaping the attitudes of church people, especially in the area of interfaith relations. How may they be equipped to ...
It is generally accepted that theological education and ministerial formation must both take place "in context". The context, in most parts of the world today, is one of religious pluralism where Christians must live in dialogue and grow in commmunity with neighbours of other faiths. Ministers have a crucial role in shaping the attitudes of church people, especially in the area of interfaith relations. How may they be equipped to ...
Additional Info:
It is generally accepted that theological education and ministerial formation must both take place "in context". The context, in most parts of the world today, is one of religious pluralism where Christians must live in dialogue and grow in commmunity with neighbours of other faiths. Ministers have a crucial role in shaping the attitudes of church people, especially in the area of interfaith relations. How may they be equipped to play this positive role? What, in other words, are the implications of interfaith dialogue for theological education?
That was the question discussed by a group of theological teachers when they met in Malaysia in June 1985, called together by the World Council of Churches' Programme on Theological Education (PTE) and the Dialogue Sub-unit. Ministerial Formation in a Multifaith Milieu presents an informal report of that meeting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 A Step Forward (T.K. Thomas)
ch. 2 A Reflective Report ( S. Wesley Ariarajah)
ch. 3 Introducing the Concern (Samuel Amirtham)
ch. 4 Teaching Theology in a MultiFaith Context (M. Thomas Thangaraj)
ch. 5 A Response from Another Context
ch. 6 The Perspective of Pluralism in Theological Education (Diana Eck)
ch. 7 A Response
ch. 8 Implications of Interfaith Dialogue for the Teaching of Mission and Evangelism (Elizabeth G. Dominguez)
ch. 9 A Group Response
ch. 10 Ministerial Formation in a Multifaith Parish (Rienzie Perera)
ch. 11 A Response
ch. 12 Theological Education in a Pluralistic Context: An Overall Assessment (J. Paul Rajashekar)
Appendix
It is generally accepted that theological education and ministerial formation must both take place "in context". The context, in most parts of the world today, is one of religious pluralism where Christians must live in dialogue and grow in commmunity with neighbours of other faiths. Ministers have a crucial role in shaping the attitudes of church people, especially in the area of interfaith relations. How may they be equipped to play this positive role? What, in other words, are the implications of interfaith dialogue for theological education?
That was the question discussed by a group of theological teachers when they met in Malaysia in June 1985, called together by the World Council of Churches' Programme on Theological Education (PTE) and the Dialogue Sub-unit. Ministerial Formation in a Multifaith Milieu presents an informal report of that meeting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 A Step Forward (T.K. Thomas)
ch. 2 A Reflective Report ( S. Wesley Ariarajah)
ch. 3 Introducing the Concern (Samuel Amirtham)
ch. 4 Teaching Theology in a MultiFaith Context (M. Thomas Thangaraj)
ch. 5 A Response from Another Context
ch. 6 The Perspective of Pluralism in Theological Education (Diana Eck)
ch. 7 A Response
ch. 8 Implications of Interfaith Dialogue for the Teaching of Mission and Evangelism (Elizabeth G. Dominguez)
ch. 9 A Group Response
ch. 10 Ministerial Formation in a Multifaith Parish (Rienzie Perera)
ch. 11 A Response
ch. 12 Theological Education in a Pluralistic Context: An Overall Assessment (J. Paul Rajashekar)
Appendix

The Experience of Being in Graduate School: An Exploration
Additional Info:
There is much at stake in the graduate enterprise. Here students are prepared to become leaders, professionals, researchers, and scholars who will be responsible for the advancement of our knowledge and well-being. But what of the students themselves? What do they go through in graduate school? What is the graduate experience like? This volume of New Directions for Higher Education addresses the graduate experience from the standpoint of the students ...
There is much at stake in the graduate enterprise. Here students are prepared to become leaders, professionals, researchers, and scholars who will be responsible for the advancement of our knowledge and well-being. But what of the students themselves? What do they go through in graduate school? What is the graduate experience like? This volume of New Directions for Higher Education addresses the graduate experience from the standpoint of the students ...
Additional Info:
There is much at stake in the graduate enterprise. Here students are prepared to become leaders, professionals, researchers, and scholars who will be responsible for the advancement of our knowledge and well-being. But what of the students themselves? What do they go through in graduate school? What is the graduate experience like? This volume of New Directions for Higher Education addresses the graduate experience from the standpoint of the students themselves. From a variety of perspectives and across many fields of study, these chapters present what students have reported about their experience through interviews, surveys, ongoing discussions, and autobiographies. This is the 101st issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Higher Education. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals section. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Reflections on the Graduate Student Experience: An Overview - Melissa Anderson
ch. 2 "Grand Possibilities and Perilous Business": Academic Autobiographers on Graduate Education - Steven Weiland
ch. 3 Survival Skills for Graduate School and Beyond - Beth A. Fischer, Michael J. Zigmond
ch. 4 Developing Self-Authorship in Graduate School - Marcia B. Baxter Magolda
ch. 5 Beginning Graduate School: Explaining First-Year Doctoral Attrition - Chris M. Golde
ch. 6 Students' Perspectives on Their Master's Degree Experiences: Disturbing the Conventional Wisdom - Clifton F. Conrad, Katherine M. Duren, Jennifer Grant Haworth
ch. 7 Preparing College Faculty - Jerry G. Gaff, Anne S. Pruitt-Logan
ch. 8 Best Practices for Enculturation: Collegiality, Mentoring, and Structure - Peg Boyle, Bob Boice
ch. 9 If We Want Things to Stay as They Are, Things Will Have to Change - Jules B. LaPidus
There is much at stake in the graduate enterprise. Here students are prepared to become leaders, professionals, researchers, and scholars who will be responsible for the advancement of our knowledge and well-being. But what of the students themselves? What do they go through in graduate school? What is the graduate experience like? This volume of New Directions for Higher Education addresses the graduate experience from the standpoint of the students themselves. From a variety of perspectives and across many fields of study, these chapters present what students have reported about their experience through interviews, surveys, ongoing discussions, and autobiographies. This is the 101st issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Higher Education. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals section. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Reflections on the Graduate Student Experience: An Overview - Melissa Anderson
ch. 2 "Grand Possibilities and Perilous Business": Academic Autobiographers on Graduate Education - Steven Weiland
ch. 3 Survival Skills for Graduate School and Beyond - Beth A. Fischer, Michael J. Zigmond
ch. 4 Developing Self-Authorship in Graduate School - Marcia B. Baxter Magolda
ch. 5 Beginning Graduate School: Explaining First-Year Doctoral Attrition - Chris M. Golde
ch. 6 Students' Perspectives on Their Master's Degree Experiences: Disturbing the Conventional Wisdom - Clifton F. Conrad, Katherine M. Duren, Jennifer Grant Haworth
ch. 7 Preparing College Faculty - Jerry G. Gaff, Anne S. Pruitt-Logan
ch. 8 Best Practices for Enculturation: Collegiality, Mentoring, and Structure - Peg Boyle, Bob Boice
ch. 9 If We Want Things to Stay as They Are, Things Will Have to Change - Jules B. LaPidus

Changing the Way We Grade Student Performance: Classroom Assessment and the New Learning Paradigm
Additional Info:
Assigning grades to student work raises many dilemmas for college and university teachers. This volume helps teachers deal with these dilemmas by providing rubrics to be used as guides for scoring various kinds of student performance. The authors offer a range of alternative approaches to assessing student performance that are rooted in the belief that students should be active rather than passive learners.They draw on their own classroom experience ...
Assigning grades to student work raises many dilemmas for college and university teachers. This volume helps teachers deal with these dilemmas by providing rubrics to be used as guides for scoring various kinds of student performance. The authors offer a range of alternative approaches to assessing student performance that are rooted in the belief that students should be active rather than passive learners.They draw on their own classroom experience ...
Additional Info:
Assigning grades to student work raises many dilemmas for college and university teachers. This volume helps teachers deal with these dilemmas by providing rubrics to be used as guides for scoring various kinds of student performance. The authors offer a range of alternative approaches to assessing student performance that are rooted in the belief that students should be active rather than passive learners.They draw on their own classroom experience to explain how to use each assessment measure presented--including developing criteria, integrating peer and self-assessment, and assigning grades--and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each. This is the 74th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals section. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Why Talk About Different Ways to Grade? The Shift from Traditional Assessment to Alternative Assessment (Rebecca S. Anderson)
ch. 2 Unveiling Some of the Mystery of Professional Judgment in Classroom Assessment (Bruce W. Speck)
ch. 3 Grading Classroom Participation (John C. Bean, Dean Peterson)
ch. 4 Designing and Grading Oral Communication Assignments(Brooke L. Quigley)
ch. 5 Designing and Grading Written Assignments (Eric H. Hobson)
ch. 6 Grading Cooperative Projects (Karl A. Smith)
ch. 7 Evaluating Technology-Based Processes and Products(Gary R. Morrison, Steven M. Ross)
ch. 8 Portfolios: Purposeful Collections of Student Work(Joan A. Mullin)
ch. 9 Grading Inquiry Projects (Beverly Busching)
ch. 10 Grading Student Performance in Real-World Settings (Patricia A. Scanlon, Michael P. Ford)
Index
Assigning grades to student work raises many dilemmas for college and university teachers. This volume helps teachers deal with these dilemmas by providing rubrics to be used as guides for scoring various kinds of student performance. The authors offer a range of alternative approaches to assessing student performance that are rooted in the belief that students should be active rather than passive learners.They draw on their own classroom experience to explain how to use each assessment measure presented--including developing criteria, integrating peer and self-assessment, and assigning grades--and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each. This is the 74th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals section. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Why Talk About Different Ways to Grade? The Shift from Traditional Assessment to Alternative Assessment (Rebecca S. Anderson)
ch. 2 Unveiling Some of the Mystery of Professional Judgment in Classroom Assessment (Bruce W. Speck)
ch. 3 Grading Classroom Participation (John C. Bean, Dean Peterson)
ch. 4 Designing and Grading Oral Communication Assignments(Brooke L. Quigley)
ch. 5 Designing and Grading Written Assignments (Eric H. Hobson)
ch. 6 Grading Cooperative Projects (Karl A. Smith)
ch. 7 Evaluating Technology-Based Processes and Products(Gary R. Morrison, Steven M. Ross)
ch. 8 Portfolios: Purposeful Collections of Student Work(Joan A. Mullin)
ch. 9 Grading Inquiry Projects (Beverly Busching)
ch. 10 Grading Student Performance in Real-World Settings (Patricia A. Scanlon, Michael P. Ford)
Index


Classroom Assessment Techniques: A Handbook for College Teachers, 2nd ed.
Additional Info:
This revised and greatly expanded edition of the 1988 handbook offers teachers at all levels of experience detailed, how-to advice on classroom assessment—from what it is and how it works to planning, implementing, and analyzing assessment projects. The authors illustrate their approach through twelve case studies that detail the real-life classroom experiences of teachers carrying out successful classroom assessment projects. (From the Publisher)
This revised and greatly expanded edition of the 1988 handbook offers teachers at all levels of experience detailed, how-to advice on classroom assessment—from what it is and how it works to planning, implementing, and analyzing assessment projects. The authors illustrate their approach through twelve case studies that detail the real-life classroom experiences of teachers carrying out successful classroom assessment projects. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This revised and greatly expanded edition of the 1988 handbook offers teachers at all levels of experience detailed, how-to advice on classroom assessment—from what it is and how it works to planning, implementing, and analyzing assessment projects. The authors illustrate their approach through twelve case studies that detail the real-life classroom experiences of teachers carrying out successful classroom assessment projects. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Part 1 Getting Started in Classroom Assessment
ch. 1 What Is Classroom Assessment?
ch. 2 The Teaching Goals Inventory
ch. 3 First Steps
ch. 4 Planning and Implementing Classroom Assessment Projects
ch. 5 Twelve Examples of Successful Projects
Part 2 Classroom Assessment Techniques
ch. 6 Choosing the Right Technique
ch. 7 Techniques for Assessing Course-Related Knowledge and Skills
ch. 8 Techniques for Assessing Learner Attitudes, Values, and Self-Awareness
ch. 9 Techniques for Assessing Learner Reactions to Instruction
pt. 3 Building on What We Have Learned
ch. 10 Lessons and Insights from Six Years of Use
ch. 11 Taking the Next Steps in Classroom Assessment and Research
A. Colleges Participating in the 1990 Teaching Goals Inventory Survey
B. Teaching Goals Inventory and Self-Scorable Worksheet
C. 1990 Comparative Data on the Teaching Goals Inventory in Community Colleges
D. 1990 Comparative Data on the Teaching Goals Inventory in Four-Year Colleges
E. Bibliography of Resources on Classroom Research and Assessment
References
Index
This revised and greatly expanded edition of the 1988 handbook offers teachers at all levels of experience detailed, how-to advice on classroom assessment—from what it is and how it works to planning, implementing, and analyzing assessment projects. The authors illustrate their approach through twelve case studies that detail the real-life classroom experiences of teachers carrying out successful classroom assessment projects. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Part 1 Getting Started in Classroom Assessment
ch. 1 What Is Classroom Assessment?
ch. 2 The Teaching Goals Inventory
ch. 3 First Steps
ch. 4 Planning and Implementing Classroom Assessment Projects
ch. 5 Twelve Examples of Successful Projects
Part 2 Classroom Assessment Techniques
ch. 6 Choosing the Right Technique
ch. 7 Techniques for Assessing Course-Related Knowledge and Skills
ch. 8 Techniques for Assessing Learner Attitudes, Values, and Self-Awareness
ch. 9 Techniques for Assessing Learner Reactions to Instruction
pt. 3 Building on What We Have Learned
ch. 10 Lessons and Insights from Six Years of Use
ch. 11 Taking the Next Steps in Classroom Assessment and Research
A. Colleges Participating in the 1990 Teaching Goals Inventory Survey
B. Teaching Goals Inventory and Self-Scorable Worksheet
C. 1990 Comparative Data on the Teaching Goals Inventory in Community Colleges
D. 1990 Comparative Data on the Teaching Goals Inventory in Four-Year Colleges
E. Bibliography of Resources on Classroom Research and Assessment
References
Index
Additional Info:
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the ...
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the ...
Additional Info:
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the twenty-nine cases are grouped in three sections, each with an introduction, focusing on the classroom, departments and institutions, and the changing culture in higher education. Features include a listing of case abstracts, discussion questions, essays about using cases in faculty development, and a bibliography. This collection is a useful resource for college, department, and faculty development center libraries — certain to be pulled off the shelf often for individual reflection and faculty development programming. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Part I: Resource Materials
ch. 1 Stories for Reflective Teaching: using cases in faculty development (Chris M. Anson)
ch. 2 In Case You're Writing a Case: some suggestions (Kathryn Heltne Swanson)
Part II: Cases about Classrooms
ch. 3 Critical Thinking or Thinking Critically (James H. Smith)
ch. 4 Group Cases: one professor's dilemma (Srinivasan Ragothaman)
ch. 5 Judgment Day (Marie McNeff)
ch. 6 The Loafing Letdown (Ronald A. Klocke)
ch. 7 The Case of the Harassed Teacher (Tony Filipvitch)
ch. 8 Yes, Virginia, You're in a Pickle (Mary R. DeMaine)
ch. 9 Too Much Thinking (Richard Jewell)
ch. 10 Grade Expectations (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 11 The Jonas Incident (Chris M. Anson)
Part III:Cases about Departments and Institutions
ch. 12 The Academic Purist (Deborah Petersen-Perlman)
ch. 13 Best in the Class (Carol Rutz)
ch. 14 The Fly in the Ointment (James Swanson)
ch. 15 Risky Business (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 16 To 'B' or not to 'B': a case of academic appeal (Benedict J. Arogyaswamy)
ch. 17 To Tell or not to Tell (Shamsul Huda, Argirl L. Morgan, and William Serban)
ch. 18 Unpopular Senior Professor (Bruce L. Smith)
ch. 19 Wendy Lamb (Tom Mason and Melissa Shepard)
ch. 20 Assessment at Woebegone State (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 21 Is Something Rotten in Denmark? (Rebecca Kamm)
ch. 22 Teaching Semantics: euphemisms, taboos, and obscenities (Richard Betting)
Part IV: Cases about the Changing Culture As It Affects Higher Education
ch. 23 The Cancer Student (Carol Rutz)
ch. 24 Facing the Reality of Students' Preparation and Research Skills (Deborah Peterson-Perlman)
ch. 25 Faltering Steps Under the Americans with Disabilities Act (Richard W. Metcalf)
ch. 26 Jalen (Eugene Hermitte and Phyllis Worthy Dawkins)
ch. 27 Special Circumstances (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 28 They're Acting Really Squirrelly (Thomas D. Peacock)
ch. 29 Organic Lab is Hell (Maria C. Milletti and Elva Mae Nicholson)
ch. 30 Who's Learning? (Beverly J. Stratton)
ch. 31 Dissin' the Prof (Susan J. Huber)
Bibliography
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the twenty-nine cases are grouped in three sections, each with an introduction, focusing on the classroom, departments and institutions, and the changing culture in higher education. Features include a listing of case abstracts, discussion questions, essays about using cases in faculty development, and a bibliography. This collection is a useful resource for college, department, and faculty development center libraries — certain to be pulled off the shelf often for individual reflection and faculty development programming. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Part I: Resource Materials
ch. 1 Stories for Reflective Teaching: using cases in faculty development (Chris M. Anson)
ch. 2 In Case You're Writing a Case: some suggestions (Kathryn Heltne Swanson)
Part II: Cases about Classrooms
ch. 3 Critical Thinking or Thinking Critically (James H. Smith)
ch. 4 Group Cases: one professor's dilemma (Srinivasan Ragothaman)
ch. 5 Judgment Day (Marie McNeff)
ch. 6 The Loafing Letdown (Ronald A. Klocke)
ch. 7 The Case of the Harassed Teacher (Tony Filipvitch)
ch. 8 Yes, Virginia, You're in a Pickle (Mary R. DeMaine)
ch. 9 Too Much Thinking (Richard Jewell)
ch. 10 Grade Expectations (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 11 The Jonas Incident (Chris M. Anson)
Part III:Cases about Departments and Institutions
ch. 12 The Academic Purist (Deborah Petersen-Perlman)
ch. 13 Best in the Class (Carol Rutz)
ch. 14 The Fly in the Ointment (James Swanson)
ch. 15 Risky Business (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 16 To 'B' or not to 'B': a case of academic appeal (Benedict J. Arogyaswamy)
ch. 17 To Tell or not to Tell (Shamsul Huda, Argirl L. Morgan, and William Serban)
ch. 18 Unpopular Senior Professor (Bruce L. Smith)
ch. 19 Wendy Lamb (Tom Mason and Melissa Shepard)
ch. 20 Assessment at Woebegone State (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 21 Is Something Rotten in Denmark? (Rebecca Kamm)
ch. 22 Teaching Semantics: euphemisms, taboos, and obscenities (Richard Betting)
Part IV: Cases about the Changing Culture As It Affects Higher Education
ch. 23 The Cancer Student (Carol Rutz)
ch. 24 Facing the Reality of Students' Preparation and Research Skills (Deborah Peterson-Perlman)
ch. 25 Faltering Steps Under the Americans with Disabilities Act (Richard W. Metcalf)
ch. 26 Jalen (Eugene Hermitte and Phyllis Worthy Dawkins)
ch. 27 Special Circumstances (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 28 They're Acting Really Squirrelly (Thomas D. Peacock)
ch. 29 Organic Lab is Hell (Maria C. Milletti and Elva Mae Nicholson)
ch. 30 Who's Learning? (Beverly J. Stratton)
ch. 31 Dissin' the Prof (Susan J. Huber)
Bibliography

Assessment for Excellence: The Philosophy and Practice of Assessment and Evaluation in Higher Education
Additional Info:
In this detailed study, Astin examines why assessment activity has produced such meager results and, just as important, how existing activities can be improved. The author also discusses what new assessment practices can be implemented and shares specific and sometimes startling ideas on: How assessment information can most effectively be used for evaluation How results can be used to enlighten and inform the practitioner How practical, technical, and political problems ...
In this detailed study, Astin examines why assessment activity has produced such meager results and, just as important, how existing activities can be improved. The author also discusses what new assessment practices can be implemented and shares specific and sometimes startling ideas on: How assessment information can most effectively be used for evaluation How results can be used to enlighten and inform the practitioner How practical, technical, and political problems ...
Additional Info:
In this detailed study, Astin examines why assessment activity has produced such meager results and, just as important, how existing activities can be improved. The author also discusses what new assessment practices can be implemented and shares specific and sometimes startling ideas on: How assessment information can most effectively be used for evaluation How results can be used to enlighten and inform the practitioner How practical, technical, and political problems can be overcome when building an assessment database from student and faculty input How the movement of externally mandated assessments in various states is having a negative impact on higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Philosophy and Logic of Assessment
ch. 2 A Conceptual Model for Assessment
ch. 3 Assessing Outcomes
ch. 4 Assessing Student Inputs
ch. 5 Assessing the Environment
ch. 6 Analyzing Assessment Data
ch. 7 Use of Assessment Results
ch. 8 Building a Data Base
ch. 9 Assessment as Direct Feedback to the Learner
ch. 10 Assessment and Equity
ch. 11 Assessment and Public Policy
ch. 12 The Future of Assessment
Appendix
Statistical Analysis of Longitudinal Data
References
Index
In this detailed study, Astin examines why assessment activity has produced such meager results and, just as important, how existing activities can be improved. The author also discusses what new assessment practices can be implemented and shares specific and sometimes startling ideas on: How assessment information can most effectively be used for evaluation How results can be used to enlighten and inform the practitioner How practical, technical, and political problems can be overcome when building an assessment database from student and faculty input How the movement of externally mandated assessments in various states is having a negative impact on higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Philosophy and Logic of Assessment
ch. 2 A Conceptual Model for Assessment
ch. 3 Assessing Outcomes
ch. 4 Assessing Student Inputs
ch. 5 Assessing the Environment
ch. 6 Analyzing Assessment Data
ch. 7 Use of Assessment Results
ch. 8 Building a Data Base
ch. 9 Assessment as Direct Feedback to the Learner
ch. 10 Assessment and Equity
ch. 11 Assessment and Public Policy
ch. 12 The Future of Assessment
Appendix
Statistical Analysis of Longitudinal Data
References
Index

Theological Perspectives on Christian Formation: A reader on theology and Christian education
Additional Info:
Twenty-nine articles from international journals that 'will provide the reader with both a comprehensive map of how contemporary Christian theologians approach the tasks of Christian education, and also skillfully selected excursions in the complex terrain. (From the Publisher)
Twenty-nine articles from international journals that 'will provide the reader with both a comprehensive map of how contemporary Christian theologians approach the tasks of Christian education, and also skillfully selected excursions in the complex terrain. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Twenty-nine articles from international journals that 'will provide the reader with both a comprehensive map of how contemporary Christian theologians approach the tasks of Christian education, and also skillfully selected excursions in the complex terrain. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Foreword(Stephen W. Sykes)
ch. 1 Theology and Christian education theory (Jeff Astley, Colin Crowder)
1.1 Contemporary approaches to Christian education (Jack L. Seymour)
1.2 Theological and educational concepts: problems of integration and differentiation (Karl Ernst Farley)
1.3 Can church education be theological education? (Edward Farley)
1.4 Religious education and theology (James Michale Lee)
ch. 2 Theological foundations: the bible
2.1 Passion and perspective: two dimensions of education in the bible (Walter Brueggemann)
2.2 The reaction against classical education in the New Testament (E.A. Judge)
2.3 'Tell it slant'(John Tinsley)
ch. 3 Theological foundations: the church
3.1 The gesture of a truthful story (Stanley Hauerwas)
3.2 No longer strangers: the church and its educational ministry (Craig R. Dykstra)
3.3 Educating in the Spirit (Carol Lakey Hess)
ch. 4 Theological approaches: postliberal theology
4.1 The significance of postliberalism for religious education (Gregory C. Higgins)
4.2 Theology and belonging: Christian identity and the doing of theology (Lucien Richard)
ch. 5 Theological approaches: liberation theology
5.1 Education, liberation and the church (Paulo Freire)
5.2 Liberation theology and Christian education theory (Frank Marangos)
ch. 6 Theological approaches: feminist theology
6.1 The unity of the sacred and the public possibilities from feminist theology(Mary Elizabeth Moore)
6.2 Feminist images of redemption in education (Mary C. Grey)
ch. 7 Spiritual formation and the worshipping community
7.1 Christian affections and the catechumenate (John A. Berntsen)
7.2 The role of worship in Christian learning (Jeff Astley)
7.3 The formative power of the congregation (Craig R. Dykstra)
ch. 8 Spiritual formation and minesterial education
8.1 Transformation in Christian education (James E. Loder)
8.2 Spiritual formation and theological education (George Lindbeck)
8.3 Theological education and education for church leadership (Charles M. Wood)
ch. 9 The theological education debate
9.1 Thinking theologically about theological education (Francis Schussler Fiorenza)
9.2 Theological inquiry and theological education (Charles M. Wood)
9.3 Emerging issues and theological education (Rebecca S. Chopp)
9.4 Can virtue be taught? Education, character and the soul (David Tracy)
ch. 10 Theology, education and the university
10.1 Theology in the context of the university (Stephen Toulmin)
10.2 The place of theology in the study of religion (Edward Farley)
10.3 Theology: university and church. Is a synergism possible?(Claude Welch)
Select bibliography
Acknowledgements
Index of subjects
Index of names
Twenty-nine articles from international journals that 'will provide the reader with both a comprehensive map of how contemporary Christian theologians approach the tasks of Christian education, and also skillfully selected excursions in the complex terrain. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Foreword(Stephen W. Sykes)
ch. 1 Theology and Christian education theory (Jeff Astley, Colin Crowder)
1.1 Contemporary approaches to Christian education (Jack L. Seymour)
1.2 Theological and educational concepts: problems of integration and differentiation (Karl Ernst Farley)
1.3 Can church education be theological education? (Edward Farley)
1.4 Religious education and theology (James Michale Lee)
ch. 2 Theological foundations: the bible
2.1 Passion and perspective: two dimensions of education in the bible (Walter Brueggemann)
2.2 The reaction against classical education in the New Testament (E.A. Judge)
2.3 'Tell it slant'(John Tinsley)
ch. 3 Theological foundations: the church
3.1 The gesture of a truthful story (Stanley Hauerwas)
3.2 No longer strangers: the church and its educational ministry (Craig R. Dykstra)
3.3 Educating in the Spirit (Carol Lakey Hess)
ch. 4 Theological approaches: postliberal theology
4.1 The significance of postliberalism for religious education (Gregory C. Higgins)
4.2 Theology and belonging: Christian identity and the doing of theology (Lucien Richard)
ch. 5 Theological approaches: liberation theology
5.1 Education, liberation and the church (Paulo Freire)
5.2 Liberation theology and Christian education theory (Frank Marangos)
ch. 6 Theological approaches: feminist theology
6.1 The unity of the sacred and the public possibilities from feminist theology(Mary Elizabeth Moore)
6.2 Feminist images of redemption in education (Mary C. Grey)
ch. 7 Spiritual formation and the worshipping community
7.1 Christian affections and the catechumenate (John A. Berntsen)
7.2 The role of worship in Christian learning (Jeff Astley)
7.3 The formative power of the congregation (Craig R. Dykstra)
ch. 8 Spiritual formation and minesterial education
8.1 Transformation in Christian education (James E. Loder)
8.2 Spiritual formation and theological education (George Lindbeck)
8.3 Theological education and education for church leadership (Charles M. Wood)
ch. 9 The theological education debate
9.1 Thinking theologically about theological education (Francis Schussler Fiorenza)
9.2 Theological inquiry and theological education (Charles M. Wood)
9.3 Emerging issues and theological education (Rebecca S. Chopp)
9.4 Can virtue be taught? Education, character and the soul (David Tracy)
ch. 10 Theology, education and the university
10.1 Theology in the context of the university (Stephen Toulmin)
10.2 The place of theology in the study of religion (Edward Farley)
10.3 Theology: university and church. Is a synergism possible?(Claude Welch)
Select bibliography
Acknowledgements
Index of subjects
Index of names
Additional Info:
Banks enters the debate on contemporary theological education with a comprehensive and refreshingly practical call to a missional model for theological education. He strives to root this model in a greater appreciation for biblical perspectives on formation for ministry.... Banks provides an extensive review of historical and contemporary issues and models of theological education. His review is critical, and while his missional model is ambitious, he does not avoid facing ...
Banks enters the debate on contemporary theological education with a comprehensive and refreshingly practical call to a missional model for theological education. He strives to root this model in a greater appreciation for biblical perspectives on formation for ministry.... Banks provides an extensive review of historical and contemporary issues and models of theological education. His review is critical, and while his missional model is ambitious, he does not avoid facing ...
Additional Info:
Banks enters the debate on contemporary theological education with a comprehensive and refreshingly practical call to a missional model for theological education. He strives to root this model in a greater appreciation for biblical perspectives on formation for ministry.... Banks provides an extensive review of historical and contemporary issues and models of theological education. His review is critical, and while his missional model is ambitious, he does not avoid facing the practical consequences and challenges faced by those who would move toward what he considers a more authentic approach to the formation of persons called to theological education as teachers and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part One - Reassessing Theological Education: The Present Stage of Debate
ch. 1 Retrieving Aspects of the "Classical" Model
ch. 2 Revising Aspects of the "Vocational" Model
ch. 3 Developing a More "Synthetic" Model
ch. 4 Some Final Responses to the Debate
Part Two - Backing Into the Future: A Biblical Angle of Vision
ch. 1 The Relevance of a Biblical Starting Point
ch. 2 Ministry Formation Before Christ
ch. 3 Ministry Formation by Christ
ch. 4 Ministry Formation After Christ
Part Three - Developing A Missional Model: From the Margins to the Center
ch. 1 Beyond Mission-Oriented and Missiological Education
ch. 2 Recasting Major Issues in the Debate
ch. 3 The Nature of Learning in a Missional Model
ch. 4 Reconceiving Teaching as a Missional Practice
Part Four - Bringing About Systemic Change: Some Guideposts To Reform
ch. 1 Reconfiguring the Student Profile
ch. 2 Rethinking Personal and Communal Formation
ch. 3 Refashioning Key Institutional Cultures
ch. 4 Reshaping the Theological Curriculum
Conclusion
ch. 1 Further Barriers to Institutional Reform
ch. 2 Other Avenues for Change
Index
Banks enters the debate on contemporary theological education with a comprehensive and refreshingly practical call to a missional model for theological education. He strives to root this model in a greater appreciation for biblical perspectives on formation for ministry.... Banks provides an extensive review of historical and contemporary issues and models of theological education. His review is critical, and while his missional model is ambitious, he does not avoid facing the practical consequences and challenges faced by those who would move toward what he considers a more authentic approach to the formation of persons called to theological education as teachers and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part One - Reassessing Theological Education: The Present Stage of Debate
ch. 1 Retrieving Aspects of the "Classical" Model
ch. 2 Revising Aspects of the "Vocational" Model
ch. 3 Developing a More "Synthetic" Model
ch. 4 Some Final Responses to the Debate
Part Two - Backing Into the Future: A Biblical Angle of Vision
ch. 1 The Relevance of a Biblical Starting Point
ch. 2 Ministry Formation Before Christ
ch. 3 Ministry Formation by Christ
ch. 4 Ministry Formation After Christ
Part Three - Developing A Missional Model: From the Margins to the Center
ch. 1 Beyond Mission-Oriented and Missiological Education
ch. 2 Recasting Major Issues in the Debate
ch. 3 The Nature of Learning in a Missional Model
ch. 4 Reconceiving Teaching as a Missional Practice
Part Four - Bringing About Systemic Change: Some Guideposts To Reform
ch. 1 Reconfiguring the Student Profile
ch. 2 Rethinking Personal and Communal Formation
ch. 3 Refashioning Key Institutional Cultures
ch. 4 Reshaping the Theological Curriculum
Conclusion
ch. 1 Further Barriers to Institutional Reform
ch. 2 Other Avenues for Change
Index

Assessment in Practice: Putting Principles to Work on College Campuses
Additional Info:
Good practice in assessment is taking place on hundreds of campuses across the country, yet much of this work goes unreported. Now, Assessment in Practice brings together in one volume the best current knowledge of assessment methods that work and principles that should be incorporated into all effective assessment efforts - whether at institutional, program, or departmental levels.
Drawing from 165 actual cases-and reporting 86 of them in their entirety, ...
Good practice in assessment is taking place on hundreds of campuses across the country, yet much of this work goes unreported. Now, Assessment in Practice brings together in one volume the best current knowledge of assessment methods that work and principles that should be incorporated into all effective assessment efforts - whether at institutional, program, or departmental levels.
Drawing from 165 actual cases-and reporting 86 of them in their entirety, ...
Additional Info:
Good practice in assessment is taking place on hundreds of campuses across the country, yet much of this work goes unreported. Now, Assessment in Practice brings together in one volume the best current knowledge of assessment methods that work and principles that should be incorporated into all effective assessment efforts - whether at institutional, program, or departmental levels.
Drawing from 165 actual cases-and reporting 86 of them in their entirety, in the words of those who developed them-the authors illustrate methods and techniques covering a wide range of assessment objectives in diverse types of institutions. Classroom assessment topics include mathematics, foreign language, technology, and more. Topics on overall institutional effectiveness range from student motivation in standardized testing to a multiple-campus, course-embedded approach to assessment of general education. A helpful cross-referencing system that enables readers to access cases by assessment objective, institutional type, and measurement method is included. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 - Identifying Principles of Good Practice In Assessment
ch. 1 Assessment: It Starts with What Matters Most.
ch. 2 An Imaginative Consideration of Learning.
ch. 3 The Road to Success Is Paved with Goals.
ch. 4 It's Not Only Where They End Up, But How They Get There.
ch 5. Assessment Doesn't Just Happen, It Evolves.
ch. 6 Involvement in Assessment: A Collaborative Endeavor.
ch. 7 Making Data Meaningful.
ch. 8 The Important Part Is What You Do With It.
ch. 9 The Train Is Leaving the Station.
ch. 10 Perhaps There Are Ten?
Part 2 - Examples of Effective Assessment Practices
ch. 11 Assessing Student Achievement in the Major.
ch. 12 Assessing Student Achievement in General Education.
ch. 13 Assessing Student Development and Progress.
ch. 14 Assessment at the Classroom Level.
ch. 15 Faculty Development to Promote Assessment.
ch. 16 Developing a Campus-Wide Approach to the Assessment.
ch. 17 Has Assessment Made a Difference?
Resources:
A. Carnegie Classification Code Definitions
B. List of Contributors.
Good practice in assessment is taking place on hundreds of campuses across the country, yet much of this work goes unreported. Now, Assessment in Practice brings together in one volume the best current knowledge of assessment methods that work and principles that should be incorporated into all effective assessment efforts - whether at institutional, program, or departmental levels.
Drawing from 165 actual cases-and reporting 86 of them in their entirety, in the words of those who developed them-the authors illustrate methods and techniques covering a wide range of assessment objectives in diverse types of institutions. Classroom assessment topics include mathematics, foreign language, technology, and more. Topics on overall institutional effectiveness range from student motivation in standardized testing to a multiple-campus, course-embedded approach to assessment of general education. A helpful cross-referencing system that enables readers to access cases by assessment objective, institutional type, and measurement method is included. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 - Identifying Principles of Good Practice In Assessment
ch. 1 Assessment: It Starts with What Matters Most.
ch. 2 An Imaginative Consideration of Learning.
ch. 3 The Road to Success Is Paved with Goals.
ch. 4 It's Not Only Where They End Up, But How They Get There.
ch 5. Assessment Doesn't Just Happen, It Evolves.
ch. 6 Involvement in Assessment: A Collaborative Endeavor.
ch. 7 Making Data Meaningful.
ch. 8 The Important Part Is What You Do With It.
ch. 9 The Train Is Leaving the Station.
ch. 10 Perhaps There Are Ten?
Part 2 - Examples of Effective Assessment Practices
ch. 11 Assessing Student Achievement in the Major.
ch. 12 Assessing Student Achievement in General Education.
ch. 13 Assessing Student Development and Progress.
ch. 14 Assessment at the Classroom Level.
ch. 15 Faculty Development to Promote Assessment.
ch. 16 Developing a Campus-Wide Approach to the Assessment.
ch. 17 Has Assessment Made a Difference?
Resources:
A. Carnegie Classification Code Definitions
B. List of Contributors.

Variations on a Teaching/Learning Workshop: Pedagogy and Faculty Development in Religious Studies
Additional Info:
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forward
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 How It All Came About
ch. 2 The Tools of Teaching: The New England / Maritimes Workshop
ch. 3 Non-Textual Materials and Gender: The Eastern International Workshop
ch. 4 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southeast
ch. 5 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southwest
ch. 6 What Made Them Work?
ch. 7 Implications for Faculty Development
Appendix
Index
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forward
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 How It All Came About
ch. 2 The Tools of Teaching: The New England / Maritimes Workshop
ch. 3 Non-Textual Materials and Gender: The Eastern International Workshop
ch. 4 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southeast
ch. 5 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southwest
ch. 6 What Made Them Work?
ch. 7 Implications for Faculty Development
Appendix
Index


Teaching and the Case Method: Text, Cases and Readings, 3rd Edition
Additional Info:
This third edition of Teaching and the Case Method is a further response to increased national and international interest in teaching, teachers, and learning, as well as the pressing need to enhance instructional effectiveness in the widest possible variety of settings. Like its predecessors, this edition celebrates the joys of teaching and learning at their best and emphasizes the reciprocal exchange of wisdom that teachers and students can experience. It ...
This third edition of Teaching and the Case Method is a further response to increased national and international interest in teaching, teachers, and learning, as well as the pressing need to enhance instructional effectiveness in the widest possible variety of settings. Like its predecessors, this edition celebrates the joys of teaching and learning at their best and emphasizes the reciprocal exchange of wisdom that teachers and students can experience. It ...
Additional Info:
This third edition of Teaching and the Case Method is a further response to increased national and international interest in teaching, teachers, and learning, as well as the pressing need to enhance instructional effectiveness in the widest possible variety of settings. Like its predecessors, this edition celebrates the joys of teaching and learning at their best and emphasizes the reciprocal exchange of wisdom that teachers and students can experience. It is based on the belief that teaching is not purely a matter of inborn talent. On the contrary, the knowledge, skills, and attitudes that make for excellence in teaching can be analyzed, abstracted, and learned. One key premise of Teaching and the Case Method is that all teaching and learning involve a core of universally applicable principles that can be discerned and absorbed through the study and discussion of cases. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching and the Case Method: Premises and Practices
Readings
Thinking in Education
Teachers Also Must Learn
Premises and Practices of Discussion Teaching
Teaching with Cases at the Harvard Business School
ch. 2 The Seminar Program
Section 1. Teaching and the Case Method of Discussion: Opportunities, Dilemmas, and Risks
Cases
The French Lession
The Day the Heat Went On
The Introduction
Readings
Why Teach?
The Dreaded Discussion: Ten ways to Start
The Gifted Can't Weigh That Giraffe
Seven Questions for Testing My Teaching
Section 2. The Roles, Responsibilities, and Skills of the Case Discussion Leader
Cases
``Look at the Fish!'': Karen Prentiss and Professor Lockwood
``How Do You Expect Us to Get This If It Isn't in Your Notes?''
``Trouble in Stat. 1B''
The Case of the Dethroned Section Leader The Professor-Student Barrier to Growth
Bike Riding and the Art of Learning
Louis Agassiz as a Teacher
Personal Thoughts on Teaching and Learning
Section 3. Establishing, Monitoring, and Modifying a Teaching/Learning Contract
Cases
A Question of Cookies
George Perkins
Ernie Building
The Offended Colonel
Reading
Sandboxes and Honeybees
Section 4. Questioning, Listening, and Responding: The Key Skill Requirements
Cases
Assistant Professor Graham and Ms. Macomber
Bill Jones
Bound Feet
Class on World Hunger
Reading
A Little Coffee to the Rescue
Section 5. The Critical Instructional Choice: Guidance vs. Control
Cases
That Discussion Just Fell Apart
We're Just Wasting Our Time
The Section Just Took Over: A Student's Reflections
Barn Raising: Collaborative Group Process in Seminars
Six Common Non-Facilitating Teaching Behaviors
Section 6. The Case Discussion Leader in Action: Operational Challenges and Opportunities
The Teacher-Student Relationship
Cases
The Puzzling Student
An Earthquake Had Started
Evaluation and Discipline
Cases
Bob Lunt
``The Blank Page''
Herr Faber's New Course
Readings
Angels on a Pin
Should I Fail Her?
Gender
Cases
The Thin Grey Line
A Night School Episode
The Blooper of the Week
Peter Morgan
Diversity
Cases
``Am I Going to Have to Do This by Myself?'': Diversity and the Discussion Teacher
Japanese Students' Participation in U.S. Classrooms: A Sociolinguistic Perspective
Section 7. Ethical Dilemmas and the Case Discussion Process
Cases
Message Intended and Message Received
``When the Cat's Away''
Bob Thompson
I Felt as If My World Had Just Collapsed!
Reading
Teaching and Teachers: Three Views
Section 8. Some Wider Questions
Cases
Who Should Teach?
Winter Oak
ch. 3 Improving Current Practice: Reflection and Reappraisal
Next Steps: Writing Cases for Your Own Teaching Seminars
Reading
The Uses of Videotape Replay
Student Learning Beyond the Classroom: Implications for a Discussion Methods Teacher
Reading
Leading Discussion in a Lecture Course: Some Maxims and an Exhortation
One Teacher's Nightmare: Cases (A) and (B) and Teaching Note
Readings
Memorandum to Michelangelo: Tenure Denied
Good Teaching: A Matter of Living the Mystery
This third edition of Teaching and the Case Method is a further response to increased national and international interest in teaching, teachers, and learning, as well as the pressing need to enhance instructional effectiveness in the widest possible variety of settings. Like its predecessors, this edition celebrates the joys of teaching and learning at their best and emphasizes the reciprocal exchange of wisdom that teachers and students can experience. It is based on the belief that teaching is not purely a matter of inborn talent. On the contrary, the knowledge, skills, and attitudes that make for excellence in teaching can be analyzed, abstracted, and learned. One key premise of Teaching and the Case Method is that all teaching and learning involve a core of universally applicable principles that can be discerned and absorbed through the study and discussion of cases. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching and the Case Method: Premises and Practices
Readings
Thinking in Education
Teachers Also Must Learn
Premises and Practices of Discussion Teaching
Teaching with Cases at the Harvard Business School
ch. 2 The Seminar Program
Section 1. Teaching and the Case Method of Discussion: Opportunities, Dilemmas, and Risks
Cases
The French Lession
The Day the Heat Went On
The Introduction
Readings
Why Teach?
The Dreaded Discussion: Ten ways to Start
The Gifted Can't Weigh That Giraffe
Seven Questions for Testing My Teaching
Section 2. The Roles, Responsibilities, and Skills of the Case Discussion Leader
Cases
``Look at the Fish!'': Karen Prentiss and Professor Lockwood
``How Do You Expect Us to Get This If It Isn't in Your Notes?''
``Trouble in Stat. 1B''
The Case of the Dethroned Section Leader The Professor-Student Barrier to Growth
Bike Riding and the Art of Learning
Louis Agassiz as a Teacher
Personal Thoughts on Teaching and Learning
Section 3. Establishing, Monitoring, and Modifying a Teaching/Learning Contract
Cases
A Question of Cookies
George Perkins
Ernie Building
The Offended Colonel
Reading
Sandboxes and Honeybees
Section 4. Questioning, Listening, and Responding: The Key Skill Requirements
Cases
Assistant Professor Graham and Ms. Macomber
Bill Jones
Bound Feet
Class on World Hunger
Reading
A Little Coffee to the Rescue
Section 5. The Critical Instructional Choice: Guidance vs. Control
Cases
That Discussion Just Fell Apart
We're Just Wasting Our Time
The Section Just Took Over: A Student's Reflections
Barn Raising: Collaborative Group Process in Seminars
Six Common Non-Facilitating Teaching Behaviors
Section 6. The Case Discussion Leader in Action: Operational Challenges and Opportunities
The Teacher-Student Relationship
Cases
The Puzzling Student
An Earthquake Had Started
Evaluation and Discipline
Cases
Bob Lunt
``The Blank Page''
Herr Faber's New Course
Readings
Angels on a Pin
Should I Fail Her?
Gender
Cases
The Thin Grey Line
A Night School Episode
The Blooper of the Week
Peter Morgan
Diversity
Cases
``Am I Going to Have to Do This by Myself?'': Diversity and the Discussion Teacher
Japanese Students' Participation in U.S. Classrooms: A Sociolinguistic Perspective
Section 7. Ethical Dilemmas and the Case Discussion Process
Cases
Message Intended and Message Received
``When the Cat's Away''
Bob Thompson
I Felt as If My World Had Just Collapsed!
Reading
Teaching and Teachers: Three Views
Section 8. Some Wider Questions
Cases
Who Should Teach?
Winter Oak
ch. 3 Improving Current Practice: Reflection and Reappraisal
Next Steps: Writing Cases for Your Own Teaching Seminars
Reading
The Uses of Videotape Replay
Student Learning Beyond the Classroom: Implications for a Discussion Methods Teacher
Reading
Leading Discussion in a Lecture Course: Some Maxims and an Exhortation
One Teacher's Nightmare: Cases (A) and (B) and Teaching Note
Readings
Memorandum to Michelangelo: Tenure Denied
Good Teaching: A Matter of Living the Mystery

The Misteaching of Academic Discourses: The Politics of Language in the Classroom
Additional Info:
Bartolome explores issues in teaching working-class minority students the mainstream academic ways of speaking necessary for success in school. Drawing from her own experience as a white teacher of Mexican- American students, she reveals the veiled antagonism between students and teacher, emphasizes the political dimensions of language, and critiques the dominant deficit ideology that underlies the cultural difference explanation of academic underachievement among linguistic minority students. (From the Publisher)
Bartolome explores issues in teaching working-class minority students the mainstream academic ways of speaking necessary for success in school. Drawing from her own experience as a white teacher of Mexican- American students, she reveals the veiled antagonism between students and teacher, emphasizes the political dimensions of language, and critiques the dominant deficit ideology that underlies the cultural difference explanation of academic underachievement among linguistic minority students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Bartolome explores issues in teaching working-class minority students the mainstream academic ways of speaking necessary for success in school. Drawing from her own experience as a white teacher of Mexican- American students, she reveals the veiled antagonism between students and teacher, emphasizes the political dimensions of language, and critiques the dominant deficit ideology that underlies the cultural difference explanation of academic underachievement among linguistic minority students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
ch. 1 Understanding Academic Discourses
ch. 2 Language and Ideology: The (Il)literacy of Linguistic-Minority Students
ch. 3 A Potentially Ideal Classroom
ch. 4 The Misteaching of Academic Discourses: Three Discourse Events
ch. 5 Student Language Performance on Language Tasks
ch. 6 Rethinking Academic Discourses: Some Pedagogical Comments
Notes
Index
Bartolome explores issues in teaching working-class minority students the mainstream academic ways of speaking necessary for success in school. Drawing from her own experience as a white teacher of Mexican- American students, she reveals the veiled antagonism between students and teacher, emphasizes the political dimensions of language, and critiques the dominant deficit ideology that underlies the cultural difference explanation of academic underachievement among linguistic minority students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
ch. 1 Understanding Academic Discourses
ch. 2 Language and Ideology: The (Il)literacy of Linguistic-Minority Students
ch. 3 A Potentially Ideal Classroom
ch. 4 The Misteaching of Academic Discourses: Three Discourse Events
ch. 5 Student Language Performance on Language Tasks
ch. 6 Rethinking Academic Discourses: Some Pedagogical Comments
Notes
Index

Practicing Our Faith: A Way of Life for a Searching People
Additional Info:
With its ecumenical perspectives and its comprehensive consideration of Christian practices, this is a fitting volume to inaugurate Jossey-Bass's new Religion in Practice series. The volume's editor, Dorothy Bass, a United Church of Christ minister and Director of the Valparaiso Project on the Education and Formation of People in Faith, identifies the book's audience as those who seek a way of life rich in faith and integrity. Bass and Craig ...
With its ecumenical perspectives and its comprehensive consideration of Christian practices, this is a fitting volume to inaugurate Jossey-Bass's new Religion in Practice series. The volume's editor, Dorothy Bass, a United Church of Christ minister and Director of the Valparaiso Project on the Education and Formation of People in Faith, identifies the book's audience as those who seek a way of life rich in faith and integrity. Bass and Craig ...
Additional Info:
With its ecumenical perspectives and its comprehensive consideration of Christian practices, this is a fitting volume to inaugurate Jossey-Bass's new Religion in Practice series. The volume's editor, Dorothy Bass, a United Church of Christ minister and Director of the Valparaiso Project on the Education and Formation of People in Faith, identifies the book's audience as those who seek a way of life rich in faith and integrity. Bass and Craig Dykstra, v-p for religion at the Lilly Endowment, provide opening and closing essays, which focus, respectively, on the yearning of believers for ways to incorporate faith in their lives and on how to keep the practice of faith alive. In the book's 12 central essays, a wide variety of theologians from a range of Christian communities explores practices vital to Christian daily life. These practices include honoring the body, providing hospitality, caring for the household, keeping Sabbath, speaking truthfully, forgiving and shaping worthy communities. All of the practices are informed by two essential Christian practices: prayer and Bible study. This excellent collection of essays presents ways of thinking about and engaging in a spiritual life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Times of Yearning, Practices of Faith (Craig Dykstra, and Dorthy C. Bass)
ch. 2 Honoring the Body (Stephanie Paulsell)
ch. 3 Hospitality (Ana Maria Pineda)
ch. 4 Household Economics (Sharon Daloz Parks)
ch. 5 Saying Yes and Saying No (M. Shawn Copeland)
ch. 6 Keeping Sabbath (Dorthy C. Bass)
ch. 7 Testimony (Thomas Hoyt, Jr.)
ch. 8 Discernment (Frank Rogers, Jr.)
ch. 9 Shaping Communities (Larry Rasmussen)
ch. 10 Forgiveness (L. Gregory Jones)
ch. 11 Healing (John Koenig)
ch. 12 Dying Well (Amy Plantinga Pauw)
ch. 13 Singing Our Lives (Don E. Saliers)
ch. 14 Growing in the Practices of Faith (Dorothy C. Bass, and Craig Dykstra)
References
The Contributors
Index
Index of Scripture References
With its ecumenical perspectives and its comprehensive consideration of Christian practices, this is a fitting volume to inaugurate Jossey-Bass's new Religion in Practice series. The volume's editor, Dorothy Bass, a United Church of Christ minister and Director of the Valparaiso Project on the Education and Formation of People in Faith, identifies the book's audience as those who seek a way of life rich in faith and integrity. Bass and Craig Dykstra, v-p for religion at the Lilly Endowment, provide opening and closing essays, which focus, respectively, on the yearning of believers for ways to incorporate faith in their lives and on how to keep the practice of faith alive. In the book's 12 central essays, a wide variety of theologians from a range of Christian communities explores practices vital to Christian daily life. These practices include honoring the body, providing hospitality, caring for the household, keeping Sabbath, speaking truthfully, forgiving and shaping worthy communities. All of the practices are informed by two essential Christian practices: prayer and Bible study. This excellent collection of essays presents ways of thinking about and engaging in a spiritual life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Times of Yearning, Practices of Faith (Craig Dykstra, and Dorthy C. Bass)
ch. 2 Honoring the Body (Stephanie Paulsell)
ch. 3 Hospitality (Ana Maria Pineda)
ch. 4 Household Economics (Sharon Daloz Parks)
ch. 5 Saying Yes and Saying No (M. Shawn Copeland)
ch. 6 Keeping Sabbath (Dorthy C. Bass)
ch. 7 Testimony (Thomas Hoyt, Jr.)
ch. 8 Discernment (Frank Rogers, Jr.)
ch. 9 Shaping Communities (Larry Rasmussen)
ch. 10 Forgiveness (L. Gregory Jones)
ch. 11 Healing (John Koenig)
ch. 12 Dying Well (Amy Plantinga Pauw)
ch. 13 Singing Our Lives (Don E. Saliers)
ch. 14 Growing in the Practices of Faith (Dorothy C. Bass, and Craig Dykstra)
References
The Contributors
Index
Index of Scripture References


Engaging Ideas: The Professor's Guide to Integrating Writing, Critical Thinking, and Active Learning in the Classroom
Additional Info:
A practical nuts and bolts guide for teachers from any discipline who want to design interest-provoking writing and critical thinking activities and incorporate them into their courses in a way that encourages inquiry, exploration, discussion and debate. (From the Publisher)
A practical nuts and bolts guide for teachers from any discipline who want to design interest-provoking writing and critical thinking activities and incorporate them into their courses in a way that encourages inquiry, exploration, discussion and debate. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A practical nuts and bolts guide for teachers from any discipline who want to design interest-provoking writing and critical thinking activities and incorporate them into their courses in a way that encourages inquiry, exploration, discussion and debate. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Foreword
The Author
ch. 1 Using Writing to Promote Thinking: A Busy Professor's Guide to the Whole Book
ch. 2 How Writing Is Related to Critical Thinking
ch. 3 Engaging All Learners: Valuing Professional and Personal Writing
ch. 4 Dealing with Issues of Grammar and Correctness
ch. 5 Formal Writing Assignments
ch. 6 Informal, Exploratory Writing Activities
ch. 7 Designing Tasks for Active Thinking and Learning
ch. 8 Helping Students Read Difficult Texts
ch. 9 Coaching Thinking Through the Use of Small Groups
ch. 10 Alternative Approaches to Active Learning in the Classroom
ch. 11 Enhancing Learning and Critical Thinking in Essay Exams
ch. 12 Encouraging Engagement and Inquiry in Research Papers
ch. 13 Coaching the Writing Process and Handling the Paper Load
ch. 14 Writing Comments on Students' Papers
ch. 15 Developing and Applying Grading Criteria
References
Index
A practical nuts and bolts guide for teachers from any discipline who want to design interest-provoking writing and critical thinking activities and incorporate them into their courses in a way that encourages inquiry, exploration, discussion and debate. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Foreword
The Author
ch. 1 Using Writing to Promote Thinking: A Busy Professor's Guide to the Whole Book
ch. 2 How Writing Is Related to Critical Thinking
ch. 3 Engaging All Learners: Valuing Professional and Personal Writing
ch. 4 Dealing with Issues of Grammar and Correctness
ch. 5 Formal Writing Assignments
ch. 6 Informal, Exploratory Writing Activities
ch. 7 Designing Tasks for Active Thinking and Learning
ch. 8 Helping Students Read Difficult Texts
ch. 9 Coaching Thinking Through the Use of Small Groups
ch. 10 Alternative Approaches to Active Learning in the Classroom
ch. 11 Enhancing Learning and Critical Thinking in Essay Exams
ch. 12 Encouraging Engagement and Inquiry in Research Papers
ch. 13 Coaching the Writing Process and Handling the Paper Load
ch. 14 Writing Comments on Students' Papers
ch. 15 Developing and Applying Grading Criteria
References
Index

Virtual Faith: The Irreverent Spiritual Quest of Generation X
Additional Info:
Reveals the deep and pervasive search for meaning that haunts Generation X. This book is must reading for anyone who would understand the spirituality of young people at the turn of a new millennium.—Robert A. Ludwig, author of Reconstructing Catholicism for a New Generation In Virtual Faith, Beaudoin explores fashion, music videos, and cyberspace concluding that his generation has fashioned a theology radically different from, but no less potent ...
Reveals the deep and pervasive search for meaning that haunts Generation X. This book is must reading for anyone who would understand the spirituality of young people at the turn of a new millennium.—Robert A. Ludwig, author of Reconstructing Catholicism for a New Generation In Virtual Faith, Beaudoin explores fashion, music videos, and cyberspace concluding that his generation has fashioned a theology radically different from, but no less potent ...
Additional Info:
Reveals the deep and pervasive search for meaning that haunts Generation X. This book is must reading for anyone who would understand the spirituality of young people at the turn of a new millennium.—Robert A. Ludwig, author of Reconstructing Catholicism for a New Generation In Virtual Faith, Beaudoin explores fashion, music videos, and cyberspace concluding that his generation has fashioned a theology radically different from, but no less potent or valid than, that of their elders. Beaudoin's investigation of popular culture uncovers four themes that underpin his generation's theology. First, all institutions are suspect — especially organized religion. Second, personal experience is everything, and every form of intense personal experience is potentially spiritual. Third, suffering is also spiritual. Finally, this generation sees ambiguity as a central element of faith. This book opens a long overdue conversation about where and how we find meaning, and how we all can encourage each other in this central human searching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Why Religion Still Matters: GenX, Pop Culture, and the Search for God
ch. 1 A GenX Journey: Living on the Boundary Between Religion and Culture
ch. 2 Formed by Pop Culture: The Shared Immersion That Makes Us a Generation
ch. 3 Being Virtually Religious: Appreciating GenX Irreverence
Part Two: How Religion Still Matters: Four Central Themes in GenX Religiosity
ch. 4 Institutions Are Suspect
ch. 5 Experience Is Key
ch. 6 Suffering Has a Religious Dimension
ch. 7 Ambiguity Is Central to Faith
Part Three: Being Religious Now: A New Understanding
ch. 8 Making the Virtual Lead Somewhere: A Spiritual Challenge to Generation X
ch. 9 Rediscovering Humility in Ministry: A Spiritual Challenge from Generation X
Conclusion: Giving Irreverence Its Due
Reveals the deep and pervasive search for meaning that haunts Generation X. This book is must reading for anyone who would understand the spirituality of young people at the turn of a new millennium.—Robert A. Ludwig, author of Reconstructing Catholicism for a New Generation In Virtual Faith, Beaudoin explores fashion, music videos, and cyberspace concluding that his generation has fashioned a theology radically different from, but no less potent or valid than, that of their elders. Beaudoin's investigation of popular culture uncovers four themes that underpin his generation's theology. First, all institutions are suspect — especially organized religion. Second, personal experience is everything, and every form of intense personal experience is potentially spiritual. Third, suffering is also spiritual. Finally, this generation sees ambiguity as a central element of faith. This book opens a long overdue conversation about where and how we find meaning, and how we all can encourage each other in this central human searching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Why Religion Still Matters: GenX, Pop Culture, and the Search for God
ch. 1 A GenX Journey: Living on the Boundary Between Religion and Culture
ch. 2 Formed by Pop Culture: The Shared Immersion That Makes Us a Generation
ch. 3 Being Virtually Religious: Appreciating GenX Irreverence
Part Two: How Religion Still Matters: Four Central Themes in GenX Religiosity
ch. 4 Institutions Are Suspect
ch. 5 Experience Is Key
ch. 6 Suffering Has a Religious Dimension
ch. 7 Ambiguity Is Central to Faith
Part Three: Being Religious Now: A New Understanding
ch. 8 Making the Virtual Lead Somewhere: A Spiritual Challenge to Generation X
ch. 9 Rediscovering Humility in Ministry: A Spiritual Challenge from Generation X
Conclusion: Giving Irreverence Its Due


Women's Ways of Knowing: The Development of Self, Voice and Mind
Additional Info:
Despite the progress of the women's movement, many women still feel silenced in their families and schools. Based on in-depth interviews with 135 women, this moving and important book explains why. (From the Publisher)
Despite the progress of the women's movement, many women still feel silenced in their families and schools. Based on in-depth interviews with 135 women, this moving and important book explains why. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Despite the progress of the women's movement, many women still feel silenced in their families and schools. Based on in-depth interviews with 135 women, this moving and important book explains why. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction:: To the Other Side of Silence
Part I The Ways of Knowing
ch. 1 Silence
ch. 2 Received Knowledge: Listening to the Voices of Others
ch. 3 Subjective Knowledge: The Inner Voice
ch. 4 Subjective Knowledge: The Quest for Self
ch. 5 Procedural Knowledge: The Voice of Reason
ch. 6 Procedural Knowledge: Separate and Connected Knowing
ch. 7 Constructed Knowledge: Integrating the Voices
Part II: Development in Context: Families and Schools
ch. 8 Family Life and The Politics of Talk
ch. 9 Toward an Education for Women
ch. 10 Connected Teaching
Appendix A: Interview Schedule
Appendix B: Educational Dialectics
References
Despite the progress of the women's movement, many women still feel silenced in their families and schools. Based on in-depth interviews with 135 women, this moving and important book explains why. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction:: To the Other Side of Silence
Part I The Ways of Knowing
ch. 1 Silence
ch. 2 Received Knowledge: Listening to the Voices of Others
ch. 3 Subjective Knowledge: The Inner Voice
ch. 4 Subjective Knowledge: The Quest for Self
ch. 5 Procedural Knowledge: The Voice of Reason
ch. 6 Procedural Knowledge: Separate and Connected Knowing
ch. 7 Constructed Knowledge: Integrating the Voices
Part II: Development in Context: Families and Schools
ch. 8 Family Life and The Politics of Talk
ch. 9 Toward an Education for Women
ch. 10 Connected Teaching
Appendix A: Interview Schedule
Appendix B: Educational Dialectics
References
Additional Info:
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on ...
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on ...
Additional Info:
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on the flaws of autonomy that weaken the academy, he develops a more "relational model," which emphasizes "togetherness," "constructive education," "roles and virtues," "hospitality," and "thoughtfulness." He defines and reviews criticism, and he covers topics such as faculty individualism, departmental separatism, generational differences, codes of ethics, collective bargaining, and the competition in the academy for funding and students. The author does not call for an "unreachable academic utopia," but rather for change toward incorporating the collegial ethic of hospitableness and thoughtfulness. Not a bad idea in a world that often seems self-absorbed and disconnected. Upper-division undergraduates through professionals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
ch. 1 Assessing the Academy
ch. 2 Self and Community in the Collegium
ch. 3 Professionalism: Academic or Collegial?
ch. 4 Institutions: Fragmented or Connected?
ch. 5 Relationality in Teaching and Scholarship
ch. 6 Creating and Nourishing Communities of Hope
Epilogue
Bibliography
Index
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on the flaws of autonomy that weaken the academy, he develops a more "relational model," which emphasizes "togetherness," "constructive education," "roles and virtues," "hospitality," and "thoughtfulness." He defines and reviews criticism, and he covers topics such as faculty individualism, departmental separatism, generational differences, codes of ethics, collective bargaining, and the competition in the academy for funding and students. The author does not call for an "unreachable academic utopia," but rather for change toward incorporating the collegial ethic of hospitableness and thoughtfulness. Not a bad idea in a world that often seems self-absorbed and disconnected. Upper-division undergraduates through professionals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
ch. 1 Assessing the Academy
ch. 2 Self and Community in the Collegium
ch. 3 Professionalism: Academic or Collegial?
ch. 4 Institutions: Fragmented or Connected?
ch. 5 Relationality in Teaching and Scholarship
ch. 6 Creating and Nourishing Communities of Hope
Epilogue
Bibliography
Index


Teaching for Diversity
Additional Info:
In the charged atmosphere of the debate on multicultural issues, higher education professionals must take action, even in the face of incomplete information and complicated arguments and counter arguments, and are often expected to set standards when many assumptions are made in deep-rooted, taken-for-granted institutional practices. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning speaks in a practical way to administrators, instructors, faculty/TA developers, and support staff who ...
In the charged atmosphere of the debate on multicultural issues, higher education professionals must take action, even in the face of incomplete information and complicated arguments and counter arguments, and are often expected to set standards when many assumptions are made in deep-rooted, taken-for-granted institutional practices. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning speaks in a practical way to administrators, instructors, faculty/TA developers, and support staff who ...
Additional Info:
In the charged atmosphere of the debate on multicultural issues, higher education professionals must take action, even in the face of incomplete information and complicated arguments and counter arguments, and are often expected to set standards when many assumptions are made in deep-rooted, taken-for-granted institutional practices. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning speaks in a practical way to administrators, instructors, faculty/TA developers, and support staff who work in the multicultural classroom and offers valuable information that will serve as a basis for recognizing and solving issues in diversity. This is the 49th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Cultural Inclusion in the American College Classroom (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 2 Acknowledging the Learning Styles of Diverse Student Populations: Implications for Instructional Design(Mary Sorcinelli)
ch. 3 Stirring It Up: The Inclusive Classroom (Delivee L. Wright)
ch. 4 Ensuring Equitable Participation in College Classes (L. Dee Fink)
ch. 5 Inside Feminist Classrooms: An Ethnographic Approach(L. Dee Fink)
ch. 6 Creating Multicultural Classrooms: An Experience-Derived Faculty Development Program (Karron G. Lewis)
ch. 7 Improving the Climate: Eight Universities Meet the Challenges of Diversity(LuAnn Wilkerson and Karron G. Lewis)
ch. 8 The Future Is Now: A Call for Action and List of Resources (Nancy A. Diamond)
Index
In the charged atmosphere of the debate on multicultural issues, higher education professionals must take action, even in the face of incomplete information and complicated arguments and counter arguments, and are often expected to set standards when many assumptions are made in deep-rooted, taken-for-granted institutional practices. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning speaks in a practical way to administrators, instructors, faculty/TA developers, and support staff who work in the multicultural classroom and offers valuable information that will serve as a basis for recognizing and solving issues in diversity. This is the 49th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Cultural Inclusion in the American College Classroom (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 2 Acknowledging the Learning Styles of Diverse Student Populations: Implications for Instructional Design(Mary Sorcinelli)
ch. 3 Stirring It Up: The Inclusive Classroom (Delivee L. Wright)
ch. 4 Ensuring Equitable Participation in College Classes (L. Dee Fink)
ch. 5 Inside Feminist Classrooms: An Ethnographic Approach(L. Dee Fink)
ch. 6 Creating Multicultural Classrooms: An Experience-Derived Faculty Development Program (Karron G. Lewis)
ch. 7 Improving the Climate: Eight Universities Meet the Challenges of Diversity(LuAnn Wilkerson and Karron G. Lewis)
ch. 8 The Future Is Now: A Call for Action and List of Resources (Nancy A. Diamond)
Index

Educating for an Ecologically Sustainable Culture: Rethinking Moral Education, Creativity, Intelligence and Other Modern Orthodoxies
Additional Info:
This book is a wake-up call for environmentalists who need to consider how current educational ideals and practices undermine efforts to create a more sustainable future. It is also a wake-up call for educators who continue to base their reform efforts on the primacy of the individual, while ignoring the fact that the individual is nested in culture, and culture is nested in (and thus dependent upon) natural ecosystems. Bowers ...
This book is a wake-up call for environmentalists who need to consider how current educational ideals and practices undermine efforts to create a more sustainable future. It is also a wake-up call for educators who continue to base their reform efforts on the primacy of the individual, while ignoring the fact that the individual is nested in culture, and culture is nested in (and thus dependent upon) natural ecosystems. Bowers ...
Additional Info:
This book is a wake-up call for environmentalists who need to consider how current educational ideals and practices undermine efforts to create a more sustainable future. It is also a wake-up call for educators who continue to base their reform efforts on the primacy of the individual, while ignoring the fact that the individual is nested in culture, and culture is nested in (and thus dependent upon) natural ecosystems. Bowers argues that the modern way of understanding moral education, creativity, intelligence, and the role of direct experience in the learning process cannot be supported by evidence. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Toward a Radical and Ecologically Sustainable Approach to Moral Education
ch. 3 Rethinking the Modern Ideal of Creativity
ch. 4 Educational Computing and the Ecological Crisis: Some Critical Concerns
ch. 5 Toward an Ecological View of Intelligence
ch. 6 Toward the Recovery of Trans-Generational Communication in the Educational Process
ch. 7 Educational Models of Community and Environmental Renewal
References
Index
This book is a wake-up call for environmentalists who need to consider how current educational ideals and practices undermine efforts to create a more sustainable future. It is also a wake-up call for educators who continue to base their reform efforts on the primacy of the individual, while ignoring the fact that the individual is nested in culture, and culture is nested in (and thus dependent upon) natural ecosystems. Bowers argues that the modern way of understanding moral education, creativity, intelligence, and the role of direct experience in the learning process cannot be supported by evidence. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Toward a Radical and Ecologically Sustainable Approach to Moral Education
ch. 3 Rethinking the Modern Ideal of Creativity
ch. 4 Educational Computing and the Ecological Crisis: Some Critical Concerns
ch. 5 Toward an Ecological View of Intelligence
ch. 6 Toward the Recovery of Trans-Generational Communication in the Educational Process
ch. 7 Educational Models of Community and Environmental Renewal
References
Index

Education, Cultural Myths, and the Ecological Crisis: Toward Deep Changes
Additional Info:
Bowers examines how the educational process perpetuates cultural myths that contribute to the ecological crisis, particularly how thought patterns from the past are reproduced through the metaphorical language used in the classroom. He suggests that a more ecologically sustainable ideology is being formulated by such writers as Aldo Leopold and Wendell Berry. (From the Publisher)
Bowers examines how the educational process perpetuates cultural myths that contribute to the ecological crisis, particularly how thought patterns from the past are reproduced through the metaphorical language used in the classroom. He suggests that a more ecologically sustainable ideology is being formulated by such writers as Aldo Leopold and Wendell Berry. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Bowers examines how the educational process perpetuates cultural myths that contribute to the ecological crisis, particularly how thought patterns from the past are reproduced through the metaphorical language used in the classroom. He suggests that a more ecologically sustainable ideology is being formulated by such writers as Aldo Leopold and Wendell Berry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Cultural Aspects of the Ecological Crisis
ch. 2 The Conservative Misinterpretation of the Educational Crisis
ch. 3 The Liberal Impasse: Technocrats and Emancipators
ch. 4 Anthropocentrism in Textbooks
ch. 5 Toward Deep Changes in the Educational Process
ch. 6 The Political and Spiritual Dimensions of the Ecological Crisis: Toward a New Sense of Balance
Notes
Index
Bowers examines how the educational process perpetuates cultural myths that contribute to the ecological crisis, particularly how thought patterns from the past are reproduced through the metaphorical language used in the classroom. He suggests that a more ecologically sustainable ideology is being formulated by such writers as Aldo Leopold and Wendell Berry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Cultural Aspects of the Ecological Crisis
ch. 2 The Conservative Misinterpretation of the Educational Crisis
ch. 3 The Liberal Impasse: Technocrats and Emancipators
ch. 4 Anthropocentrism in Textbooks
ch. 5 Toward Deep Changes in the Educational Process
ch. 6 The Political and Spiritual Dimensions of the Ecological Crisis: Toward a New Sense of Balance
Notes
Index

Confronting Diversity Issues on Campus
Additional Info:
Controversies about affirmative action hires, admission policies, intercultural relations in the classroom, the role of ethnic studies departments, and changes in course curriculum all seem to swirl around the changing ethnic composition of the campus. How do we all get along? Tackling this question are authors Bowser, Auletta, and Jones, who suggest some practical strategies for dealing with questions of racism, diversity, and intercultural communication. (From the Publisher)
Controversies about affirmative action hires, admission policies, intercultural relations in the classroom, the role of ethnic studies departments, and changes in course curriculum all seem to swirl around the changing ethnic composition of the campus. How do we all get along? Tackling this question are authors Bowser, Auletta, and Jones, who suggest some practical strategies for dealing with questions of racism, diversity, and intercultural communication. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Controversies about affirmative action hires, admission policies, intercultural relations in the classroom, the role of ethnic studies departments, and changes in course curriculum all seem to swirl around the changing ethnic composition of the campus. How do we all get along? Tackling this question are authors Bowser, Auletta, and Jones, who suggest some practical strategies for dealing with questions of racism, diversity, and intercultural communication. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Unwritten Organization
The Unwritten Rules
The Power of Networks
People of Color as Perceived Threats
What Can Be Done?
Ideas for Improving Treatment of Students of Color
Ideas for Improving Treatment of Faculty of Color
ch. 2 What Did You Say You Were? Am I a Racist?
Racism and Self-Identity for Whites
Racism and Self-Identity for People of Color
The Myths and Realities of Racism
What Can Be Done?
ch. 3 Communication, Communication, Communication!
Communication: Racial Dividers and Connectors
Why Race and Power Matter
ch. 4 Dealing With Conflict and Diversity in the Academic Community
The Purpose of Education
Issues of Access and Affirmative Action
Freedom of Speech: Fighting Words
Ethnic Studies and Multicultural Education
Summary
ch. 5 Toward New Racial and Cultural Boundaries in the Academy
Communities of Interest Defined
Redefining Communities of Interests
Models of Success
Selected References and Suggested Readings
About the Authors
Controversies about affirmative action hires, admission policies, intercultural relations in the classroom, the role of ethnic studies departments, and changes in course curriculum all seem to swirl around the changing ethnic composition of the campus. How do we all get along? Tackling this question are authors Bowser, Auletta, and Jones, who suggest some practical strategies for dealing with questions of racism, diversity, and intercultural communication. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Unwritten Organization
The Unwritten Rules
The Power of Networks
People of Color as Perceived Threats
What Can Be Done?
Ideas for Improving Treatment of Students of Color
Ideas for Improving Treatment of Faculty of Color
ch. 2 What Did You Say You Were? Am I a Racist?
Racism and Self-Identity for Whites
Racism and Self-Identity for People of Color
The Myths and Realities of Racism
What Can Be Done?
ch. 3 Communication, Communication, Communication!
Communication: Racial Dividers and Connectors
Why Race and Power Matter
ch. 4 Dealing With Conflict and Diversity in the Academic Community
The Purpose of Education
Issues of Access and Affirmative Action
Freedom of Speech: Fighting Words
Ethnic Studies and Multicultural Education
Summary
ch. 5 Toward New Racial and Cultural Boundaries in the Academy
Communities of Interest Defined
Redefining Communities of Interests
Models of Success
Selected References and Suggested Readings
About the Authors


Scholarship Reconsidered: Priorities of the Professoriate
Additional Info:
Ernest L. Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered offers a new paradigm that recognizes the full range of scholarly activity by college and university faculty and questions the existence of a reward system that pushed faculty toward research and publication and away from teaching. (From the Publisher)
Ernest L. Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered offers a new paradigm that recognizes the full range of scholarly activity by college and university faculty and questions the existence of a reward system that pushed faculty toward research and publication and away from teaching. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Ernest L. Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered offers a new paradigm that recognizes the full range of scholarly activity by college and university faculty and questions the existence of a reward system that pushed faculty toward research and publication and away from teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Preface
ch. 1 Scholarship over Time.
ch. 2 Enlarging the Perspective.
ch. 3 The Faculty: A Mosaic of Talent.
ch. 4 The Creativity Contract.
ch. 5 The Campuses: Diversity with Dignity.
ch. 6 A New Generation of Scholars.
ch. 7 Scholarship and Community.
Ernest L. Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered offers a new paradigm that recognizes the full range of scholarly activity by college and university faculty and questions the existence of a reward system that pushed faculty toward research and publication and away from teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Preface
ch. 1 Scholarship over Time.
ch. 2 Enlarging the Perspective.
ch. 3 The Faculty: A Mosaic of Talent.
ch. 4 The Creativity Contract.
ch. 5 The Campuses: Diversity with Dignity.
ch. 6 A New Generation of Scholars.
ch. 7 Scholarship and Community.

Practically Speaking: A Sourcebook for Instructional Consultants in Higher Education
Additional Info:
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying ...
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying ...
Additional Info:
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying the knowledge base underlying instructional consultation, examining current practices, and recommending how best practices might best be disseminated. This book is the result of the think tank's work. The book offers a thoughtful blend of research-based principles and practical advice. It speaks practically to the practitioner. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Skills and techniques of instructional consultation. Interactions of teaching improvement / Kathleen T. Brinko
Instructional consulting : a guide for developing professional knowledge / L. Dee Fink
Creative art of effective consultation / Laura L.B. Border
First meeting with the client / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collecting information using class observation / Karron Lewis
Small group methods for collecting information from students / Richard Tiberius
Collecting information using videotape / Eric Kristensen
Collecting information using student ratings / Michael Theall, Jennifer Franklin
Data review and follow up consultation / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collaborative consultation for international faculty / Erin Porter, Ghislaine Kozuh
Consulting with faculty in small groups / William C. Rando
Programmatic approaches to instructional consultation. Overview of instructional consultation in North America / Diane E. Morrison
Microteaching, teaching laboratory, and alliances for change / Richard Tiberius
Partners in learning : breaking down the barriers around teaching / Myrna Smith
Small Group Instructional Diagnosis (SGID) / Lisa Firing Lenze
Instructional skills workshop program : a peer based model for the improvement of teaching and learning / Judy Wilbee
Teaching improvement process / Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Considerations in setting up a peer consultant program / Michael Kerwin
Context of instructional consultation. Higher education in North America / Charles Claxton
Local variables that affect consultation / Diane E. Morrison
Variability among faculty / Mary Ann Shea
Faculty face student diversity / Milton G. Spann, Jr., Suella McCrimmon
Effects of classroom environments / Gabriele Bauer
Identifying and assessing your consultation style / Laura L.B. Border
Developmental stages of an educational consultant : theoretical perspective / Richard Tiberius, Jane Tipping, Ronald Smith
Personal account of the development of one consultant / David Way
Evaluating instructional consultation. Issues in evaluating consultation ; Evaluating a teaching consultation service / Glenn R. Erickson
Evaluating a consultation program for part time faculty / Barbara J. Millis
Training instructional consultants. Instructional consultants as reflective practitioners / Ronald Smith
Training new consultants in the Connecticut Community Technical College system / Bille Searle, Patricia A. Cook
Training new consultants in the Kentucky Community College system : the teaching consultants' workshop / Michael Kerwin, Judy Rhoads
Training TA's as consultants at the University of Michigan ; workshop for peer mentors / Beverly Black, Bronwen Gates
Professional development for consultants at the University of Washington's Center for Instructional Development and Research / Jody D. Nyquist, Donald H. Wulff
Training new consultants at Stanford University : the TA Consultants Program / Michele Marincovich
Reflecting on practice : observing ourselves consulting / Barbara Hofer, Beverly Black, Linda Acitelli
Using case studies to train instructional consultants / Barbara J. Millis
Professional organizations of instructional consultation / Kathleen T. Brinko
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying the knowledge base underlying instructional consultation, examining current practices, and recommending how best practices might best be disseminated. This book is the result of the think tank's work. The book offers a thoughtful blend of research-based principles and practical advice. It speaks practically to the practitioner. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Skills and techniques of instructional consultation. Interactions of teaching improvement / Kathleen T. Brinko
Instructional consulting : a guide for developing professional knowledge / L. Dee Fink
Creative art of effective consultation / Laura L.B. Border
First meeting with the client / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collecting information using class observation / Karron Lewis
Small group methods for collecting information from students / Richard Tiberius
Collecting information using videotape / Eric Kristensen
Collecting information using student ratings / Michael Theall, Jennifer Franklin
Data review and follow up consultation / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collaborative consultation for international faculty / Erin Porter, Ghislaine Kozuh
Consulting with faculty in small groups / William C. Rando
Programmatic approaches to instructional consultation. Overview of instructional consultation in North America / Diane E. Morrison
Microteaching, teaching laboratory, and alliances for change / Richard Tiberius
Partners in learning : breaking down the barriers around teaching / Myrna Smith
Small Group Instructional Diagnosis (SGID) / Lisa Firing Lenze
Instructional skills workshop program : a peer based model for the improvement of teaching and learning / Judy Wilbee
Teaching improvement process / Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Considerations in setting up a peer consultant program / Michael Kerwin
Context of instructional consultation. Higher education in North America / Charles Claxton
Local variables that affect consultation / Diane E. Morrison
Variability among faculty / Mary Ann Shea
Faculty face student diversity / Milton G. Spann, Jr., Suella McCrimmon
Effects of classroom environments / Gabriele Bauer
Identifying and assessing your consultation style / Laura L.B. Border
Developmental stages of an educational consultant : theoretical perspective / Richard Tiberius, Jane Tipping, Ronald Smith
Personal account of the development of one consultant / David Way
Evaluating instructional consultation. Issues in evaluating consultation ; Evaluating a teaching consultation service / Glenn R. Erickson
Evaluating a consultation program for part time faculty / Barbara J. Millis
Training instructional consultants. Instructional consultants as reflective practitioners / Ronald Smith
Training new consultants in the Connecticut Community Technical College system / Bille Searle, Patricia A. Cook
Training new consultants in the Kentucky Community College system : the teaching consultants' workshop / Michael Kerwin, Judy Rhoads
Training TA's as consultants at the University of Michigan ; workshop for peer mentors / Beverly Black, Bronwen Gates
Professional development for consultants at the University of Washington's Center for Instructional Development and Research / Jody D. Nyquist, Donald H. Wulff
Training new consultants at Stanford University : the TA Consultants Program / Michele Marincovich
Reflecting on practice : observing ourselves consulting / Barbara Hofer, Beverly Black, Linda Acitelli
Using case studies to train instructional consultants / Barbara J. Millis
Professional organizations of instructional consultation / Kathleen T. Brinko


Developing Critical Thinkers: Challenging Adults to Explore Alternative Ways of Thinking and Acting
Additional Info:
"Developing Critical Thinkers" is a book practitioners and others interested in applying critical thinking principles will find extremely useful. The writing is clear, the examples are many, and the ideas are well grounded in theory and research. (From the Publisher)
"Developing Critical Thinkers" is a book practitioners and others interested in applying critical thinking principles will find extremely useful. The writing is clear, the examples are many, and the ideas are well grounded in theory and research. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
"Developing Critical Thinkers" is a book practitioners and others interested in applying critical thinking principles will find extremely useful. The writing is clear, the examples are many, and the ideas are well grounded in theory and research. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Understanding Critical Thinking in Adult Life.
Practical Approaches for Developing Critical Thinkers.
Helping Adults Learn to Think Critically in Different Arenas of Life.
"Developing Critical Thinkers" is a book practitioners and others interested in applying critical thinking principles will find extremely useful. The writing is clear, the examples are many, and the ideas are well grounded in theory and research. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Understanding Critical Thinking in Adult Life.
Practical Approaches for Developing Critical Thinkers.
Helping Adults Learn to Think Critically in Different Arenas of Life.
Additional Info:
Offers a variety of practical ideas, tools, and techniques for creating democratic classrooms. The authors suggest exercises to get discussion started, strategies for maintaining its momentum, ways to elicit a diversity of views and voices, ideas for creative groupings and formats, and processes to encourage student participation. In exploring the role of the teacher in discussion, they address the tensions and possibilities arising from ethnic, cultural, social class, and gender ...
Offers a variety of practical ideas, tools, and techniques for creating democratic classrooms. The authors suggest exercises to get discussion started, strategies for maintaining its momentum, ways to elicit a diversity of views and voices, ideas for creative groupings and formats, and processes to encourage student participation. In exploring the role of the teacher in discussion, they address the tensions and possibilities arising from ethnic, cultural, social class, and gender ...
Additional Info:
Offers a variety of practical ideas, tools, and techniques for creating democratic classrooms. The authors suggest exercises to get discussion started, strategies for maintaining its momentum, ways to elicit a diversity of views and voices, ideas for creative groupings and formats, and processes to encourage student participation. In exploring the role of the teacher in discussion, they address the tensions and possibilities arising from ethnic, cultural, social class, and gender difference. Throughout, they emphasize how discussion fosters democratic participation and enhances learning, and they review how to balance the voices of students and teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Gratitudes
The Authors
ch. 1 Discussion in a Democratic Society
ch. 2 How Discussion Helps Learning and Enlivens Classrooms
ch. 3 Preparing for Discussion
ch. 4 Getting Discussion Started
ch. 5 Keeping Discussion Going Through Questioning, Listening, and Responding
ch. 6 Keeping Discussion Going Through Creative Grouping
ch. 7 Discussion in Culturally Diverse Classrooms
ch. 8 Discussing Across Gender Differences
ch. 9 Keeping Students' Voices in Balance
ch. 10 Keeping Teachers' Voices in Balance
ch. 11 Evaluating Discussion
References
Index
Offers a variety of practical ideas, tools, and techniques for creating democratic classrooms. The authors suggest exercises to get discussion started, strategies for maintaining its momentum, ways to elicit a diversity of views and voices, ideas for creative groupings and formats, and processes to encourage student participation. In exploring the role of the teacher in discussion, they address the tensions and possibilities arising from ethnic, cultural, social class, and gender difference. Throughout, they emphasize how discussion fosters democratic participation and enhances learning, and they review how to balance the voices of students and teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Gratitudes
The Authors
ch. 1 Discussion in a Democratic Society
ch. 2 How Discussion Helps Learning and Enlivens Classrooms
ch. 3 Preparing for Discussion
ch. 4 Getting Discussion Started
ch. 5 Keeping Discussion Going Through Questioning, Listening, and Responding
ch. 6 Keeping Discussion Going Through Creative Grouping
ch. 7 Discussion in Culturally Diverse Classrooms
ch. 8 Discussing Across Gender Differences
ch. 9 Keeping Students' Voices in Balance
ch. 10 Keeping Teachers' Voices in Balance
ch. 11 Evaluating Discussion
References
Index

The Education of the Practical Theologian: Responses to Joseph Hough and John Cobb
Additional Info:
The essays in this volume ... were prepared for a conference sponsored by the Institute for the Advanced Study of Religion of the Divinity School of the University of Chicago on October 8-11, 1987. (From the Publisher)
The essays in this volume ... were prepared for a conference sponsored by the Institute for the Advanced Study of Religion of the Divinity School of the University of Chicago on October 8-11, 1987. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The essays in this volume ... were prepared for a conference sponsored by the Institute for the Advanced Study of Religion of the Divinity School of the University of Chicago on October 8-11, 1987. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Theological Education: Biblical Studies (Schussler Fiorenza)
ch. 2 Christian Theology and Theological Education (Odgen)
ch. 3 Judaism in Christian Theological Education: Some New Implications (Pawlikowski)
ch. 4 Practical Wisdom and Theological Education (Paris)
ch. 5 When the Center Cannot Contain the Margins (Chopp)
ch. 6 A Religious Educator's Response (Groome)
ch. 7 Religious Imagination and the Cultivation of Christian Worlds or, the Minister as Christian (Bricoleur, and Reynolds)
Responses: Hough, Cobb
The essays in this volume ... were prepared for a conference sponsored by the Institute for the Advanced Study of Religion of the Divinity School of the University of Chicago on October 8-11, 1987. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Theological Education: Biblical Studies (Schussler Fiorenza)
ch. 2 Christian Theology and Theological Education (Odgen)
ch. 3 Judaism in Christian Theological Education: Some New Implications (Pawlikowski)
ch. 4 Practical Wisdom and Theological Education (Paris)
ch. 5 When the Center Cannot Contain the Margins (Chopp)
ch. 6 A Religious Educator's Response (Groome)
ch. 7 Religious Imagination and the Cultivation of Christian Worlds or, the Minister as Christian (Bricoleur, and Reynolds)
Responses: Hough, Cobb


Collaborative Learning: Higher Education, Interdependence, and the Authority of Knowledge, 2d ed.
Additional Info:
The author argues for collaborative learning at the college and university level, a method which engenders interdependence among peers rather than cultivating passivity, authoritarianism, irresponsibility, and hyper-competitiveness. (From the Publisher)
The author argues for collaborative learning at the college and university level, a method which engenders interdependence among peers rather than cultivating passivity, authoritarianism, irresponsibility, and hyper-competitiveness. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The author argues for collaborative learning at the college and university level, a method which engenders interdependence among peers rather than cultivating passivity, authoritarianism, irresponsibility, and hyper-competitiveness. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Collaboration, Conversation, and Reacculturation
ch. 2 Consensus Groups: One Kind of Classroom Collaboration
ch. 3 Writing and Collaboration
ch. 4 Toward Reconstructing American Classrooms
ch. 5 Collaborative Learning and Cooperative Learning
ch. 6 Peer Tutoring and Institutional Change
ch. 7 Collaborative Learning and Computers
ch. 8 Education as Conversation
ch. 9 The Authority of College and University Professors
ch. 10 Science and Engineering in a Poststructural World
ch. 11 The Procrustean Bed of Cognitive Thought
ch. 12 A Plurality of Forces, Desires, and Not Wholly Commensurable Visions
ch. 13 Reading Literature as Common Property
ch. 14 A Nonfoundational Curriculum
ch. 15 Collaborative Learning and the Collaboratively Learned: A Postscript on Graduate Education
App. A Classroom and Laboratory Design
App. B Research on Collaborative Learning
App. C Some Notes on Nesting
Notes
Glossary
Works Cited
Index
The author argues for collaborative learning at the college and university level, a method which engenders interdependence among peers rather than cultivating passivity, authoritarianism, irresponsibility, and hyper-competitiveness. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Collaboration, Conversation, and Reacculturation
ch. 2 Consensus Groups: One Kind of Classroom Collaboration
ch. 3 Writing and Collaboration
ch. 4 Toward Reconstructing American Classrooms
ch. 5 Collaborative Learning and Cooperative Learning
ch. 6 Peer Tutoring and Institutional Change
ch. 7 Collaborative Learning and Computers
ch. 8 Education as Conversation
ch. 9 The Authority of College and University Professors
ch. 10 Science and Engineering in a Poststructural World
ch. 11 The Procrustean Bed of Cognitive Thought
ch. 12 A Plurality of Forces, Desires, and Not Wholly Commensurable Visions
ch. 13 Reading Literature as Common Property
ch. 14 A Nonfoundational Curriculum
ch. 15 Collaborative Learning and the Collaboratively Learned: A Postscript on Graduate Education
App. A Classroom and Laboratory Design
App. B Research on Collaborative Learning
App. C Some Notes on Nesting
Notes
Glossary
Works Cited
Index

Perspectives on Plagiarism and Intellectual Property in a Postmodern World
Additional Info:
This book offers a wealth of thinking about the complex and often contradictory definitions surrounding the concepts of plagiarism and intellectual property. The authors show that plagiarism is not nearly as simple and clear cut a phenomenon as we may think. Contributors offer many definitions and facets of plagiarism and intellectual property, demonstrating that if defining a supposedly "simple" concept is difficult, then applying multiple definitions is even harder, creating ...
This book offers a wealth of thinking about the complex and often contradictory definitions surrounding the concepts of plagiarism and intellectual property. The authors show that plagiarism is not nearly as simple and clear cut a phenomenon as we may think. Contributors offer many definitions and facets of plagiarism and intellectual property, demonstrating that if defining a supposedly "simple" concept is difficult, then applying multiple definitions is even harder, creating ...
Additional Info:
This book offers a wealth of thinking about the complex and often contradictory definitions surrounding the concepts of plagiarism and intellectual property. The authors show that plagiarism is not nearly as simple and clear cut a phenomenon as we may think. Contributors offer many definitions and facets of plagiarism and intellectual property, demonstrating that if defining a supposedly "simple" concept is difficult, then applying multiple definitions is even harder, creating practical problems in many realms. This volume exposes the range and breadth of these overlapping and complex issues, reflecting a postmodern sensibility of fragmentation, and clarifies some of the confusion, not by reducing plagiarism to ever-simpler definitions and providing new or better rules to apply, but by complicating the issue, examining what plagiarism and intellectual property are (and are not) in our more or less postmodern world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Pt. I Definitions
Legal and Historical Definitions
Copy Wrong: Plagiarism, Process, Property, and the Law (Laurie Stearns)
Originality, Authenticity, Imitation, and Plagiarism: Augustine's Chinese Cousins (C. Jan Swearingen)
Intellectual Property, Authority, and Social Formation: Sociohistorical Perspectives on the Author Function (James Thomas Zebroski)
Competing Notions of Authorship: A Historical Look at Students and Textbooks on Plagiarism and Cheating (Sue Carter Simmons)
Academic Definitions
Whose Words These Are I Think I Know: Plagiarism, the Postmodern, and Faculty Attitudes (Alice M. Roy)
"But I Wasn't Cheating": Plagiarism and Cross-Cultural Mythology (Lisa Buranen)
A Distant Mirror or Through the Looking Glass? Plagiarism and Intellectual Property in Japanese Education (L.M. Dryden)
The New Abolitionism Comes to Plagiarism (Rebecca Moore Howard)
Literary and Theoretical Definitions
The Illusion of Modernist Allusion and the Politics of Postmodern Plagiarism (Kevin J.H. Dettmar)
Poaching and Plagiarizing: Property, Plagiarism, and Feminist Futures (Deborah Halbert)
From Kant to Foucault: What Remains of the Author in Postmodernism (Gilbert Larochelle)
Imperial Plagiarism
Literary Borrowing and Historical Compilation in Medieval China (Robert André LaFleur)
Pt. II Applications
In the Writing Center
Writing Centers and Plagiarism (Irene L Clark)
Writing Centers and Intellectual Property: Are Faculty Members and Students Differently Entitled? (Carol Peterson Haviland and Joan Mullin)
Plagiarism, Rhetorical Theory, and the Writing Center: New Approaches, New Locations (Linda Shamoon and Deborah H. Burns)
In Academic Administration
Confusion and Conflict about Plagiarism in Law Schools and Law Practice (Terri LeClercq)
Student Plagiarism as an Institutional and Social Issue
When Collaboration Becomes Plagiarism: The Administrative Perspective (Edward M. White)
In Instruction and Research
Plagiarism as Metaphor (David Leight
The Ethics of Appropriation in Peer Writing Groups (Candace Spigelman)
The Role of Scholarly Citations in Disciplinary Economies (Shirley K. Rose)
In the Marketplace
Brand Name Use in Creative Writing: Genericide or Language Right? (Shawn M. Clankie)
GenX Occupies the Cultural Commons: Ethical Practices and Perceptions of Fair Use (John Livingston-Webber
Works Cited
Contributors
Index
This book offers a wealth of thinking about the complex and often contradictory definitions surrounding the concepts of plagiarism and intellectual property. The authors show that plagiarism is not nearly as simple and clear cut a phenomenon as we may think. Contributors offer many definitions and facets of plagiarism and intellectual property, demonstrating that if defining a supposedly "simple" concept is difficult, then applying multiple definitions is even harder, creating practical problems in many realms. This volume exposes the range and breadth of these overlapping and complex issues, reflecting a postmodern sensibility of fragmentation, and clarifies some of the confusion, not by reducing plagiarism to ever-simpler definitions and providing new or better rules to apply, but by complicating the issue, examining what plagiarism and intellectual property are (and are not) in our more or less postmodern world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Pt. I Definitions
Legal and Historical Definitions
Copy Wrong: Plagiarism, Process, Property, and the Law (Laurie Stearns)
Originality, Authenticity, Imitation, and Plagiarism: Augustine's Chinese Cousins (C. Jan Swearingen)
Intellectual Property, Authority, and Social Formation: Sociohistorical Perspectives on the Author Function (James Thomas Zebroski)
Competing Notions of Authorship: A Historical Look at Students and Textbooks on Plagiarism and Cheating (Sue Carter Simmons)
Academic Definitions
Whose Words These Are I Think I Know: Plagiarism, the Postmodern, and Faculty Attitudes (Alice M. Roy)
"But I Wasn't Cheating": Plagiarism and Cross-Cultural Mythology (Lisa Buranen)
A Distant Mirror or Through the Looking Glass? Plagiarism and Intellectual Property in Japanese Education (L.M. Dryden)
The New Abolitionism Comes to Plagiarism (Rebecca Moore Howard)
Literary and Theoretical Definitions
The Illusion of Modernist Allusion and the Politics of Postmodern Plagiarism (Kevin J.H. Dettmar)
Poaching and Plagiarizing: Property, Plagiarism, and Feminist Futures (Deborah Halbert)
From Kant to Foucault: What Remains of the Author in Postmodernism (Gilbert Larochelle)
Imperial Plagiarism
Literary Borrowing and Historical Compilation in Medieval China (Robert André LaFleur)
Pt. II Applications
In the Writing Center
Writing Centers and Plagiarism (Irene L Clark)
Writing Centers and Intellectual Property: Are Faculty Members and Students Differently Entitled? (Carol Peterson Haviland and Joan Mullin)
Plagiarism, Rhetorical Theory, and the Writing Center: New Approaches, New Locations (Linda Shamoon and Deborah H. Burns)
In Academic Administration
Confusion and Conflict about Plagiarism in Law Schools and Law Practice (Terri LeClercq)
Student Plagiarism as an Institutional and Social Issue
When Collaboration Becomes Plagiarism: The Administrative Perspective (Edward M. White)
In Instruction and Research
Plagiarism as Metaphor (David Leight
The Ethics of Appropriation in Peer Writing Groups (Candace Spigelman)
The Role of Scholarly Citations in Disciplinary Economies (Shirley K. Rose)
In the Marketplace
Brand Name Use in Creative Writing: Genericide or Language Right? (Shawn M. Clankie)
GenX Occupies the Cultural Commons: Ethical Practices and Perceptions of Fair Use (John Livingston-Webber
Works Cited
Contributors
Index


Dialogue in Teaching: Theory and Practice
Additional Info:
Dialogue in Teaching presents a detailed examination of dialogue as a cluster of related dialogical styles and approaches, not just a single entity. The author offers a critical and conceptual study of the nature of dialogue and a discussion of concrete issues in teaching with dialogue: how it works, why it is beneficial for teaching, how it sometimes fails, and how to improve on it. Organizing his book around the ...
Dialogue in Teaching presents a detailed examination of dialogue as a cluster of related dialogical styles and approaches, not just a single entity. The author offers a critical and conceptual study of the nature of dialogue and a discussion of concrete issues in teaching with dialogue: how it works, why it is beneficial for teaching, how it sometimes fails, and how to improve on it. Organizing his book around the ...
Additional Info:
Dialogue in Teaching presents a detailed examination of dialogue as a cluster of related dialogical styles and approaches, not just a single entity. The author offers a critical and conceptual study of the nature of dialogue and a discussion of concrete issues in teaching with dialogue: how it works, why it is beneficial for teaching, how it sometimes fails, and how to improve on it. Organizing his book around the metaphor of playing a game, Burbules speaks to scholars and teachers, in sophisticated yet accessible language, about a topic of great interest to both groups. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreward
Introduction
ch. 1 Why Dialogue? Why Theory and Practice?
ch. 2 The Dialogic Relation
ch. 3 Playing the Dialogue Game
ch. 4 Rules in the Dialogue Game
ch. 5 Movies in the Dialogue Game
ch. 6 Four Types of Dialogue
Interlude: A Dialogue on Teaching
ch. 7 Why Dialogues Fail
References
Index
Dialogue in Teaching presents a detailed examination of dialogue as a cluster of related dialogical styles and approaches, not just a single entity. The author offers a critical and conceptual study of the nature of dialogue and a discussion of concrete issues in teaching with dialogue: how it works, why it is beneficial for teaching, how it sometimes fails, and how to improve on it. Organizing his book around the metaphor of playing a game, Burbules speaks to scholars and teachers, in sophisticated yet accessible language, about a topic of great interest to both groups. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreward
Introduction
ch. 1 Why Dialogue? Why Theory and Practice?
ch. 2 The Dialogic Relation
ch. 3 Playing the Dialogue Game
ch. 4 Rules in the Dialogue Game
ch. 5 Movies in the Dialogue Game
ch. 6 Four Types of Dialogue
Interlude: A Dialogue on Teaching
ch. 7 Why Dialogues Fail
References
Index
Additional Info:
You have finished your Ph.D. and landed your first academic job. Scanning the fine print, you realize the introductory class you have been assigned to teach is being held in an auditorium. A really big auditorium. Panic begins to set in. . . . In this handy and practical book, Elisa Carbone offers a wealth of sound advice on how to deal with a large class, from the first day to end-of-semester ...
You have finished your Ph.D. and landed your first academic job. Scanning the fine print, you realize the introductory class you have been assigned to teach is being held in an auditorium. A really big auditorium. Panic begins to set in. . . . In this handy and practical book, Elisa Carbone offers a wealth of sound advice on how to deal with a large class, from the first day to end-of-semester ...
Additional Info:
You have finished your Ph.D. and landed your first academic job. Scanning the fine print, you realize the introductory class you have been assigned to teach is being held in an auditorium. A really big auditorium. Panic begins to set in. . . . In this handy and practical book, Elisa Carbone offers a wealth of sound advice on how to deal with a large class, from the first day to end-of-semester evaluations. Full of examples taken from many different disciplines, Teaching Large Classes will be an ideal companion for any teacher facing the challenge of the large introductory class. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Listening to the Experts
ch. 1 Starting the Semester: The First Class
ch. 2 Personalizing the Large Class
ch. 3 Lecturing 101: Getting Your Students to Listen
ch. 4 Lecturing 102: Using Stories and Examples
ch. 5 Using Demonstrations, Visual Aids, and Technology
ch. 6 Active Learning in a Large Class
ch. 7 Are There Any Questions?
ch. 8 Assessment and Feedback in Large Classes
ch. 9 Managing Student Behavior
ch. 10 Working Effectively With Teaching Assistants (TAs)
Index
About the Author
You have finished your Ph.D. and landed your first academic job. Scanning the fine print, you realize the introductory class you have been assigned to teach is being held in an auditorium. A really big auditorium. Panic begins to set in. . . . In this handy and practical book, Elisa Carbone offers a wealth of sound advice on how to deal with a large class, from the first day to end-of-semester evaluations. Full of examples taken from many different disciplines, Teaching Large Classes will be an ideal companion for any teacher facing the challenge of the large introductory class. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Listening to the Experts
ch. 1 Starting the Semester: The First Class
ch. 2 Personalizing the Large Class
ch. 3 Lecturing 101: Getting Your Students to Listen
ch. 4 Lecturing 102: Using Stories and Examples
ch. 5 Using Demonstrations, Visual Aids, and Technology
ch. 6 Active Learning in a Large Class
ch. 7 Are There Any Questions?
ch. 8 Assessment and Feedback in Large Classes
ch. 9 Managing Student Behavior
ch. 10 Working Effectively With Teaching Assistants (TAs)
Index
About the Author
Additional Info:
The aim of this book is both to raise questions about the contemporary theological enterprise and to suggest ways to improve theological education at the college, seminary, and graduate levels. With that in mind the editors have here gathered together important essays by leading theologians and prominent bishops that provide expert assessment of the present state of Catholic theological education and its future prospects, treating a full range of the ...
The aim of this book is both to raise questions about the contemporary theological enterprise and to suggest ways to improve theological education at the college, seminary, and graduate levels. With that in mind the editors have here gathered together important essays by leading theologians and prominent bishops that provide expert assessment of the present state of Catholic theological education and its future prospects, treating a full range of the ...
Additional Info:
The aim of this book is both to raise questions about the contemporary theological enterprise and to suggest ways to improve theological education at the college, seminary, and graduate levels. With that in mind the editors have here gathered together important essays by leading theologians and prominent bishops that provide expert assessment of the present state of Catholic theological education and its future prospects, treating a full range of the most pressing topics, from undergraduate and graduate programs to the role of bishops and the task of inculturation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
List of Abbreviations
Introduction (Patrick W. Carey)
ch. 1 Theological Education in the Catholic Tradition (Avery Dulles)
ch. 2 Catholic Higher Education as Historical Context for Theological Education (Philip Gleason)
ch. 3 Mission and Identity in Catholic Universities (Joseph A. Komonchak)
ch. 4 Catechesis Isn't Just for Children Anymore (Berard L. Marthaler)
ch. 5 Theological Education in the Undergraduate Core Curriculum (Monika K. Hellwig)
ch. 6 Introduction of Theology in the Catholic Tradition (Arthur L. Kennedy)
ch. 7 The Undergraduate Theology Major (Lawrence S. Cunningham)
ch. 8 Challenges for Catholic Graduate Theological Education (Matthew L. Lamb)
ch. 9 The Future of Graduate Education in Theology: A Clear Sky with the Possibility of a Late Afternoon Thunderstorm (William M. Shea)
ch. 10 Faculty Research and Catholic Identity (John C. Haughey)
ch. 11 Theological Education in Seminaries (Robert J. Wister)
ch. 12 Theological Faculty and Programs in Seminaries (Katarina Schuth)
ch. 13 Theology's Place in a Catholic University (James L. Heft)
ch. 14 Institutional Resources in the Seminary ((Thomas R. Kopfensteiner)
ch. 15 Bishops and Theologians (Francis E. George)
ch. 16 Theologians and Bishops (Robert P. Imbelli)
ch. 17 Faith: Normative for Bishops and Theologians (Oscar H. Lipscomb)
ch. 18 Theologians and Bishops: With Each Other (John J. Leibrecht)
ch. 19 Inculturation and Acculturation for an American Bishop and Theologian (Donald E. Pelotte)
ch. 20 Biblical Studies in University and Seminary Theology (Lawrence E. Boadt)
ch. 21 Historical Theology in the Curriculum (Joseph T. Lienhard)
ch. 22 Liturgy: The Integrative Center of the Theological Disciplines (Susan K. Wood)
ch. 23 The Divorce of Spirituality from Theology (Keith J. Egan)
ch. 24 The Integration of Theology and Spirituality: a View from the Seminary (Austin C. Doran)
ch. 25 Theological Education of African American Catholics (M. Shawn Copeland)
ch. 26 Catholic Theological Education and U.S. Hispanics (Roberto S. Goizueta)
Afterword (Earl C. Muller)
Selected Bibliography on Theological Education in American Catholic Higher Education, 1881-1995 (Pamela C. Young)
Contributors
Index
The aim of this book is both to raise questions about the contemporary theological enterprise and to suggest ways to improve theological education at the college, seminary, and graduate levels. With that in mind the editors have here gathered together important essays by leading theologians and prominent bishops that provide expert assessment of the present state of Catholic theological education and its future prospects, treating a full range of the most pressing topics, from undergraduate and graduate programs to the role of bishops and the task of inculturation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
List of Abbreviations
Introduction (Patrick W. Carey)
ch. 1 Theological Education in the Catholic Tradition (Avery Dulles)
ch. 2 Catholic Higher Education as Historical Context for Theological Education (Philip Gleason)
ch. 3 Mission and Identity in Catholic Universities (Joseph A. Komonchak)
ch. 4 Catechesis Isn't Just for Children Anymore (Berard L. Marthaler)
ch. 5 Theological Education in the Undergraduate Core Curriculum (Monika K. Hellwig)
ch. 6 Introduction of Theology in the Catholic Tradition (Arthur L. Kennedy)
ch. 7 The Undergraduate Theology Major (Lawrence S. Cunningham)
ch. 8 Challenges for Catholic Graduate Theological Education (Matthew L. Lamb)
ch. 9 The Future of Graduate Education in Theology: A Clear Sky with the Possibility of a Late Afternoon Thunderstorm (William M. Shea)
ch. 10 Faculty Research and Catholic Identity (John C. Haughey)
ch. 11 Theological Education in Seminaries (Robert J. Wister)
ch. 12 Theological Faculty and Programs in Seminaries (Katarina Schuth)
ch. 13 Theology's Place in a Catholic University (James L. Heft)
ch. 14 Institutional Resources in the Seminary ((Thomas R. Kopfensteiner)
ch. 15 Bishops and Theologians (Francis E. George)
ch. 16 Theologians and Bishops (Robert P. Imbelli)
ch. 17 Faith: Normative for Bishops and Theologians (Oscar H. Lipscomb)
ch. 18 Theologians and Bishops: With Each Other (John J. Leibrecht)
ch. 19 Inculturation and Acculturation for an American Bishop and Theologian (Donald E. Pelotte)
ch. 20 Biblical Studies in University and Seminary Theology (Lawrence E. Boadt)
ch. 21 Historical Theology in the Curriculum (Joseph T. Lienhard)
ch. 22 Liturgy: The Integrative Center of the Theological Disciplines (Susan K. Wood)
ch. 23 The Divorce of Spirituality from Theology (Keith J. Egan)
ch. 24 The Integration of Theology and Spirituality: a View from the Seminary (Austin C. Doran)
ch. 25 Theological Education of African American Catholics (M. Shawn Copeland)
ch. 26 Catholic Theological Education and U.S. Hispanics (Roberto S. Goizueta)
Afterword (Earl C. Muller)
Selected Bibliography on Theological Education in American Catholic Higher Education, 1881-1995 (Pamela C. Young)
Contributors
Index

Power/Knowledge/Pedagogy: The Meaning of Democratic Education in Unsettling Times
Additional Info:
The essays in this volume explore the educational implications of unsettling shifts in contemporary culture associated with postmodernism. These shifts include the fragmentation of established power blocs, the emergence of a politics of identity, growing inequalities between the haves and the have-nots in a new global economy, and the rise in influence of popular culture in defining who we are. In the academy, postmodernism has been associated with the emergence ...
The essays in this volume explore the educational implications of unsettling shifts in contemporary culture associated with postmodernism. These shifts include the fragmentation of established power blocs, the emergence of a politics of identity, growing inequalities between the haves and the have-nots in a new global economy, and the rise in influence of popular culture in defining who we are. In the academy, postmodernism has been associated with the emergence ...
Additional Info:
The essays in this volume explore the educational implications of unsettling shifts in contemporary culture associated with postmodernism. These shifts include the fragmentation of established power blocs, the emergence of a politics of identity, growing inequalities between the haves and the have-nots in a new global economy, and the rise in influence of popular culture in defining who we are. In the academy, postmodernism has been associated with the emergence of new theoretical perspectives that are unsettling the way we think about education. These shifts, the authors suggest, are deeply contradictory and may lead in divergent political directions—some of them quite dangerous
Power/Knowledge/Pedagogy examines these issues with regard to four broad domains of educational inquiry: state educational policy and curriculum reform, student identity formation, the curriculum as a text, and critical pedagogy. The book contributes to the dialogue on the forging of a new commonsense discourse on democratic educational renewal, attuned to the changing times in which we live. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Critical Educational Theory in Unsettling Times (Dennis Carlson and Michael W. Apple)
ch. 1 State Educational Policy And Curriculum Reform In Unsettling Times: Education in Unsettling Times: Public Intellectuals and the Promise of Cultural Studies (Henry Giroux)
ch. 2 Pulp Fictions: Education, Markets, and the Information Superhighway (Jane Kenway)
ch. 3 Citizens or Consumers? Continuity and Change in Contemporary Education Policy (Geoff Whitty)
ch. 4 Respondent: "Distressed Worlds": Social Justice Through Educational Transformations (Madeleine Arnot)
ch. 5 Becoming Right: Education and the Formation of Conservative Movements (Michael W. Apple and Anita Oliver)
ch. 6 On Shaky Grounds: Constructing White Working-Class Masculinities in the Late Twentieth Century (Michelle Fine, Lois Weis, and Judi Addelston)
ch. 7 Self and Education: Reversals and Cycles (Philip Wexler)
ch. 8 Respondent: Self Education: Identity, Self, and the New Politics of Education (Dennis Carlson)
ch. 9 Danger in the Safety Zone: Notes on Race, Resentment, and the Discourse of Crime, Violence, and Suburban Security (Cameron McCarthy, et al.)
ch. 10 Fiction, Fantasy, and Femininities: Popular Texts and Young Women’s Literacies (Linda K. Christian-Smith)
ch. 11 Image Is Nothing: Struggling to Unsettle Basal Readers and More (Patrick Shannon and Patricia Crawford)
ch. 12 Respondent: Loose Change: The Production of Texts (William G. Tierney)
ch. 13 On the Limits to Empowerment Through Critical and Feminist Pedagogies (Jennifer M. Gore)
ch. 14 Who Will Survive America? Pedagogy as Cultural Preservation (Gloria Ladson-Billings)
ch. 15 Global Politics and Local Antagonisms: Research and Practice as Dissent and Possibility (Peter McLaren and Kris Gutierrez)
ch. 16 Respondent: Pedagogy for an Oppositional Community (Kathleen Weiler)
The essays in this volume explore the educational implications of unsettling shifts in contemporary culture associated with postmodernism. These shifts include the fragmentation of established power blocs, the emergence of a politics of identity, growing inequalities between the haves and the have-nots in a new global economy, and the rise in influence of popular culture in defining who we are. In the academy, postmodernism has been associated with the emergence of new theoretical perspectives that are unsettling the way we think about education. These shifts, the authors suggest, are deeply contradictory and may lead in divergent political directions—some of them quite dangerous
Power/Knowledge/Pedagogy examines these issues with regard to four broad domains of educational inquiry: state educational policy and curriculum reform, student identity formation, the curriculum as a text, and critical pedagogy. The book contributes to the dialogue on the forging of a new commonsense discourse on democratic educational renewal, attuned to the changing times in which we live. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Critical Educational Theory in Unsettling Times (Dennis Carlson and Michael W. Apple)
ch. 1 State Educational Policy And Curriculum Reform In Unsettling Times: Education in Unsettling Times: Public Intellectuals and the Promise of Cultural Studies (Henry Giroux)
ch. 2 Pulp Fictions: Education, Markets, and the Information Superhighway (Jane Kenway)
ch. 3 Citizens or Consumers? Continuity and Change in Contemporary Education Policy (Geoff Whitty)
ch. 4 Respondent: "Distressed Worlds": Social Justice Through Educational Transformations (Madeleine Arnot)
ch. 5 Becoming Right: Education and the Formation of Conservative Movements (Michael W. Apple and Anita Oliver)
ch. 6 On Shaky Grounds: Constructing White Working-Class Masculinities in the Late Twentieth Century (Michelle Fine, Lois Weis, and Judi Addelston)
ch. 7 Self and Education: Reversals and Cycles (Philip Wexler)
ch. 8 Respondent: Self Education: Identity, Self, and the New Politics of Education (Dennis Carlson)
ch. 9 Danger in the Safety Zone: Notes on Race, Resentment, and the Discourse of Crime, Violence, and Suburban Security (Cameron McCarthy, et al.)
ch. 10 Fiction, Fantasy, and Femininities: Popular Texts and Young Women’s Literacies (Linda K. Christian-Smith)
ch. 11 Image Is Nothing: Struggling to Unsettle Basal Readers and More (Patrick Shannon and Patricia Crawford)
ch. 12 Respondent: Loose Change: The Production of Texts (William G. Tierney)
ch. 13 On the Limits to Empowerment Through Critical and Feminist Pedagogies (Jennifer M. Gore)
ch. 14 Who Will Survive America? Pedagogy as Cultural Preservation (Gloria Ladson-Billings)
ch. 15 Global Politics and Local Antagonisms: Research and Practice as Dissent and Possibility (Peter McLaren and Kris Gutierrez)
ch. 16 Respondent: Pedagogy for an Oppositional Community (Kathleen Weiler)

Organizing a Christian Mind: A Theology of Higher Education
Additional Info:
"The sadness I feel," writes Denise Carmody, "stems from watching the capitulation of good schools, both Christian and secular, to the pragmatism of recent times and their concomitant loss of a pervasive vision of their enterprise." Such capitulation has produced a serious crisis in American higher education, including also church-sponsored higher education, leading to a preoccupation with research and publication instead of teaching and to frequent inattention to ultimate human ...
"The sadness I feel," writes Denise Carmody, "stems from watching the capitulation of good schools, both Christian and secular, to the pragmatism of recent times and their concomitant loss of a pervasive vision of their enterprise." Such capitulation has produced a serious crisis in American higher education, including also church-sponsored higher education, leading to a preoccupation with research and publication instead of teaching and to frequent inattention to ultimate human ...
Additional Info:
"The sadness I feel," writes Denise Carmody, "stems from watching the capitulation of good schools, both Christian and secular, to the pragmatism of recent times and their concomitant loss of a pervasive vision of their enterprise." Such capitulation has produced a serious crisis in American higher education, including also church-sponsored higher education, leading to a preoccupation with research and publication instead of teaching and to frequent inattention to ultimate human questions. Following an introductory discussion of teaching, research and publication, and "the difference that God makes," the book moves through such topics as human nature, physical nature, politics, divinity or ultimate reality, and education (including community services, academic freedom, and the arts and sciences). A concluding chapter focuses on vision in higher education, that is, gaining a clear sense of what a collegiate venture wants to do and the kind of curriculum and teaching that squares with what a college is trying to achieve. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 On Human Nature
ch. 2 On Physical Nature
ch. 3 On Politics
ch. 4 On Divinity
ch. 5 Education Revisited
Conclusion
Index
"The sadness I feel," writes Denise Carmody, "stems from watching the capitulation of good schools, both Christian and secular, to the pragmatism of recent times and their concomitant loss of a pervasive vision of their enterprise." Such capitulation has produced a serious crisis in American higher education, including also church-sponsored higher education, leading to a preoccupation with research and publication instead of teaching and to frequent inattention to ultimate human questions. Following an introductory discussion of teaching, research and publication, and "the difference that God makes," the book moves through such topics as human nature, physical nature, politics, divinity or ultimate reality, and education (including community services, academic freedom, and the arts and sciences). A concluding chapter focuses on vision in higher education, that is, gaining a clear sense of what a collegiate venture wants to do and the kind of curriculum and teaching that squares with what a college is trying to achieve. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 On Human Nature
ch. 2 On Physical Nature
ch. 3 On Politics
ch. 4 On Divinity
ch. 5 Education Revisited
Conclusion
Index

She Can Read: Feminist Reading Strategies for Biblical Narrative
Additional Info:
Using the research of feminist literary critics and building upon the work of feminist biblical scholars, Emily Cheney offers three strategies for women whose ecclesiastical traditions expect them to base their sermons on biblical texts, and for women who want their sermons to reflect a feminist consciousness and compassion. The strategies focus on gender reversal, analogy, and women as exchange objects, all tested on several texts without female characters from ...
Using the research of feminist literary critics and building upon the work of feminist biblical scholars, Emily Cheney offers three strategies for women whose ecclesiastical traditions expect them to base their sermons on biblical texts, and for women who want their sermons to reflect a feminist consciousness and compassion. The strategies focus on gender reversal, analogy, and women as exchange objects, all tested on several texts without female characters from ...
Additional Info:
Using the research of feminist literary critics and building upon the work of feminist biblical scholars, Emily Cheney offers three strategies for women whose ecclesiastical traditions expect them to base their sermons on biblical texts, and for women who want their sermons to reflect a feminist consciousness and compassion. The strategies focus on gender reversal, analogy, and women as exchange objects, all tested on several texts without female characters from the Gospel of Matthew. A concluding section reflects upon what role the authority of the text plays when readers use these strategies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
List of Abbreviations
Introduction
ch. 1 The Need for Reading Strategies
ch. 2 Scholarship of Feminist Literary Critics
ch. 3 Gender Reversal
ch. 4 Analogy
ch. 5 Women as Exchange Objects
ch. 6 Application of the Strategies to Mt. 1:18-25
Conclusion
Appendix: Sample Sermon
Notes
Bibliography of Works Cited
Scripture Index
General Index
Using the research of feminist literary critics and building upon the work of feminist biblical scholars, Emily Cheney offers three strategies for women whose ecclesiastical traditions expect them to base their sermons on biblical texts, and for women who want their sermons to reflect a feminist consciousness and compassion. The strategies focus on gender reversal, analogy, and women as exchange objects, all tested on several texts without female characters from the Gospel of Matthew. A concluding section reflects upon what role the authority of the text plays when readers use these strategies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
List of Abbreviations
Introduction
ch. 1 The Need for Reading Strategies
ch. 2 Scholarship of Feminist Literary Critics
ch. 3 Gender Reversal
ch. 4 Analogy
ch. 5 Women as Exchange Objects
ch. 6 Application of the Strategies to Mt. 1:18-25
Conclusion
Appendix: Sample Sermon
Notes
Bibliography of Works Cited
Scripture Index
General Index

Hurrying Toward Zion: Universities, Divinity Schools, and American Protestantism
Additional Info:
The colorful study of university divinity schools in America.
This historical analysis of American Protestant university-related divinity schools tells their story in terms of powerful social and cultural forces that decisively influenced American education in general and Protestant theological education in particular. (From the Publisher)
The colorful study of university divinity schools in America.
This historical analysis of American Protestant university-related divinity schools tells their story in terms of powerful social and cultural forces that decisively influenced American education in general and Protestant theological education in particular. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The colorful study of university divinity schools in America.
This historical analysis of American Protestant university-related divinity schools tells their story in terms of powerful social and cultural forces that decisively influenced American education in general and Protestant theological education in particular. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Visions and Strategies of Influence
pt. I Specialization
ch. 1 Strategies for a System of Education
ch. 2 Educating to Understand the Other
ch. 3 Theological and Religious Sciences
pt. II Professionalization
ch. 4 Theory and Practice
ch. 5 Two Yokes of Responsibility
pt. III Formation and Reform
ch. 6 Social Class and Social Gospel
ch. 7 Formation and the Heritage of Revolt
pt. IV Pluralism
ch. 8 The Challenge of Social and Cultural Diversity
ch. 9 The Challenge of the Multiversity
Conclusion: The Ambiguities of a Heritage
Notes
Index
The colorful study of university divinity schools in America.
This historical analysis of American Protestant university-related divinity schools tells their story in terms of powerful social and cultural forces that decisively influenced American education in general and Protestant theological education in particular. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Visions and Strategies of Influence
pt. I Specialization
ch. 1 Strategies for a System of Education
ch. 2 Educating to Understand the Other
ch. 3 Theological and Religious Sciences
pt. II Professionalization
ch. 4 Theory and Practice
ch. 5 Two Yokes of Responsibility
pt. III Formation and Reform
ch. 6 Social Class and Social Gospel
ch. 7 Formation and the Heritage of Revolt
pt. IV Pluralism
ch. 8 The Challenge of Social and Cultural Diversity
ch. 9 The Challenge of the Multiversity
Conclusion: The Ambiguities of a Heritage
Notes
Index


Saving Work: Feminist Practices of Theological Education
Additional Info:
One of the most significant changes in theological education during the past two decades has been a dramatic rise in the enrollment of women in the seminaries. In this ground-breaking book, Rebecca Chopp explores the impact these new voices are having on theological education. She looks at how women and men are actually forming a new Christian praxis through their engagement with feminist practices and thought that often exist outside ...
One of the most significant changes in theological education during the past two decades has been a dramatic rise in the enrollment of women in the seminaries. In this ground-breaking book, Rebecca Chopp explores the impact these new voices are having on theological education. She looks at how women and men are actually forming a new Christian praxis through their engagement with feminist practices and thought that often exist outside ...
Additional Info:
One of the most significant changes in theological education during the past two decades has been a dramatic rise in the enrollment of women in the seminaries. In this ground-breaking book, Rebecca Chopp explores the impact these new voices are having on theological education. She looks at how women and men are actually forming a new Christian praxis through their engagement with feminist practices and thought that often exist outside the sphere of official recognition. This important book will be a starting point for dialogue about the role theological education will play as this new Christian praxis emerges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Women as Subjects of Theological Education?
ch. 2 Shaking the Foundations: The Practice of Narrativity
ch. 3 Places of Grace: The Practice of Ekklesia
ch. 4 The Warming Quilt of God: The Practice of Theology
ch. 5 A Particular Vision: New Ways of Thinking about Theological Education
Notes
Index
One of the most significant changes in theological education during the past two decades has been a dramatic rise in the enrollment of women in the seminaries. In this ground-breaking book, Rebecca Chopp explores the impact these new voices are having on theological education. She looks at how women and men are actually forming a new Christian praxis through their engagement with feminist practices and thought that often exist outside the sphere of official recognition. This important book will be a starting point for dialogue about the role theological education will play as this new Christian praxis emerges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Women as Subjects of Theological Education?
ch. 2 Shaking the Foundations: The Practice of Narrativity
ch. 3 Places of Grace: The Practice of Ekklesia
ch. 4 The Warming Quilt of God: The Practice of Theology
ch. 5 A Particular Vision: New Ways of Thinking about Theological Education
Notes
Index
Additional Info:
Everyday Knowledge and Uncommon Truths: Women of the Academy draws on the life experience and varied backgrounds of academic women from the United States, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. To provide diverse perspectives on women's experiences of being and knowing in and outside the academy, contributors draw on a range of critical approaches derived from feminism, post-structuralism, postmodernism, critical education theory, discourse theory and analysis, narrative inquiry, and life histories. (...
Everyday Knowledge and Uncommon Truths: Women of the Academy draws on the life experience and varied backgrounds of academic women from the United States, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. To provide diverse perspectives on women's experiences of being and knowing in and outside the academy, contributors draw on a range of critical approaches derived from feminism, post-structuralism, postmodernism, critical education theory, discourse theory and analysis, narrative inquiry, and life histories. (...
Additional Info:
Everyday Knowledge and Uncommon Truths: Women of the Academy draws on the life experience and varied backgrounds of academic women from the United States, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. To provide diverse perspectives on women's experiences of being and knowing in and outside the academy, contributors draw on a range of critical approaches derived from feminism, post-structuralism, postmodernism, critical education theory, discourse theory and analysis, narrative inquiry, and life histories. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editor's Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Feminism in New Times
ch. 2 Unsettling Academic/Feminist Identity
ch. 3 Her-story: Life History as a Strategy of Resistance to Being Constituted Woman in Academe
ch. 4 Strangers in a Strange Land: A Woman Studying Women's Literacies
ch. 5 The Backlash Factor: Women, Intellectual Labour and Student Evaluation of Courses and Teaching
ch. 6 Can Feminist Voices Survive and Transform the Academy?
ch. 7 Deconstructing Feminist Pedagogy: Seeing That Which Is Ordinarily Obscured by the Familiar
ch. 8 Asian Women Leaders of Higher Education: Stories of Strength and Self Discovery
ch. 9 Dancing on the Sharp Edge of the Sword: Women Faculty of Color in White Academe
ch. 10 Negotiating Daily Life in the Academy and at Home
ch. 11 Feeling Blue, Seeing Red, and Turning Fifty: Moving in from the Margins
ch. 12 Against the Grain: Reflections on the Construction of Everyday Knowledge and Uncommon Truths
About the Editors and Contributors
Index
Everyday Knowledge and Uncommon Truths: Women of the Academy draws on the life experience and varied backgrounds of academic women from the United States, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. To provide diverse perspectives on women's experiences of being and knowing in and outside the academy, contributors draw on a range of critical approaches derived from feminism, post-structuralism, postmodernism, critical education theory, discourse theory and analysis, narrative inquiry, and life histories. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editor's Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Feminism in New Times
ch. 2 Unsettling Academic/Feminist Identity
ch. 3 Her-story: Life History as a Strategy of Resistance to Being Constituted Woman in Academe
ch. 4 Strangers in a Strange Land: A Woman Studying Women's Literacies
ch. 5 The Backlash Factor: Women, Intellectual Labour and Student Evaluation of Courses and Teaching
ch. 6 Can Feminist Voices Survive and Transform the Academy?
ch. 7 Deconstructing Feminist Pedagogy: Seeing That Which Is Ordinarily Obscured by the Familiar
ch. 8 Asian Women Leaders of Higher Education: Stories of Strength and Self Discovery
ch. 9 Dancing on the Sharp Edge of the Sword: Women Faculty of Color in White Academe
ch. 10 Negotiating Daily Life in the Academy and at Home
ch. 11 Feeling Blue, Seeing Red, and Turning Fifty: Moving in from the Margins
ch. 12 Against the Grain: Reflections on the Construction of Everyday Knowledge and Uncommon Truths
About the Editors and Contributors
Index
Additional Info:
This unusual book begins each chapter by posing a question with which college and university teachers can be expected to identify; and then goes on to answer the question by presenting a series of examples; finally, each chapter closes with 'second thoughts', presenting a viewpoint somewhat distinct from that taken by John Cowan. This book will assist university teachers to plan and run innovative activities to enable their students to ...
This unusual book begins each chapter by posing a question with which college and university teachers can be expected to identify; and then goes on to answer the question by presenting a series of examples; finally, each chapter closes with 'second thoughts', presenting a viewpoint somewhat distinct from that taken by John Cowan. This book will assist university teachers to plan and run innovative activities to enable their students to ...
Additional Info:
This unusual book begins each chapter by posing a question with which college and university teachers can be expected to identify; and then goes on to answer the question by presenting a series of examples; finally, each chapter closes with 'second thoughts', presenting a viewpoint somewhat distinct from that taken by John Cowan. This book will assist university teachers to plan and run innovative activities to enable their students to engage in effective reflective learning; it will help them adapt other teachers' work for use with their own students; and will give them a rationale for the place of reflective teaching and learning in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface - Why This Book Was Written
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 What is Meant in Education by 'Reflecting'?
ch. 3 What Does Reflection Have to Offer in Education?
ch. 4 Is There a Methodology You Can and Should Follow?
ch. 5 What Can You Do to Encourage Students to Reflect?
ch. 6 What is Involved for Students in Analytical Reflection?
ch. 7 What is Involved in Evaluative Reflection?
ch. 8 How Can You Adapt Ideas from My Teaching, for Yours?
ch. 9 How Should You Get Started?
ch. 10 How Can Such Innovations Be Evaluated?
ch. 11 Where Should You Read about Other Work in This Field?
A Postscript: Final Reflections
References
Index
This unusual book begins each chapter by posing a question with which college and university teachers can be expected to identify; and then goes on to answer the question by presenting a series of examples; finally, each chapter closes with 'second thoughts', presenting a viewpoint somewhat distinct from that taken by John Cowan. This book will assist university teachers to plan and run innovative activities to enable their students to engage in effective reflective learning; it will help them adapt other teachers' work for use with their own students; and will give them a rationale for the place of reflective teaching and learning in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface - Why This Book Was Written
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 What is Meant in Education by 'Reflecting'?
ch. 3 What Does Reflection Have to Offer in Education?
ch. 4 Is There a Methodology You Can and Should Follow?
ch. 5 What Can You Do to Encourage Students to Reflect?
ch. 6 What is Involved for Students in Analytical Reflection?
ch. 7 What is Involved in Evaluative Reflection?
ch. 8 How Can You Adapt Ideas from My Teaching, for Yours?
ch. 9 How Should You Get Started?
ch. 10 How Can Such Innovations Be Evaluated?
ch. 11 Where Should You Read about Other Work in This Field?
A Postscript: Final Reflections
References
Index

Common Fire: Leading Lives of Commitment in a Complex World
Additional Info:
This book is as much, perhaps more, an exhortation to action than a piece of social science research. In an age when the idols of the tribe or the centrality of self are aggrandized, is it possible to restore a sense of human purpose that extends beyond place or person? To answer this question a core of 100 people, determined as "capable of sustaining commitment to the common good in the ...
This book is as much, perhaps more, an exhortation to action than a piece of social science research. In an age when the idols of the tribe or the centrality of self are aggrandized, is it possible to restore a sense of human purpose that extends beyond place or person? To answer this question a core of 100 people, determined as "capable of sustaining commitment to the common good in the ...
Additional Info:
This book is as much, perhaps more, an exhortation to action than a piece of social science research. In an age when the idols of the tribe or the centrality of self are aggrandized, is it possible to restore a sense of human purpose that extends beyond place or person? To answer this question a core of 100 people, determined as "capable of sustaining commitment to the common good in the face of global complexity," were interviewed, not so much to "prove hypotheses" but to develop "fertile insights" for further research and action in order to "kindle a common fire and forge a new synthesis of practical wisdom." This requires people who can regard space as hospitable, inhabited by mentors and others capable of demonstrating that one can and ought to make a difference in the world; people who can develop habits of mind to engage others and a symbolic world, including the world of story and faith, capable of sustaining a committed consciousness. Two "interludes" describe those who exhibit that concern for the commons, and an epilogue suggests an individual and collective strategy to nourish the sense of the collective. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Connection and Complexity: The Challenge of the New Commons
ch. 2 Community: Becoming at Home in the World
ch. 3 Compassion: Living Within and Beyond the Tribe
ch. 4 Conviction: Developing Critical Habits of Mind
ch. 5 Courage: A Responsible Imagination
ch. 6 Confession: The Struggle with Fallibility
ch. 7 Commitment: The Power of the Double Negative
Epilogue Compass Points: The Power of Location and Direction
This book is as much, perhaps more, an exhortation to action than a piece of social science research. In an age when the idols of the tribe or the centrality of self are aggrandized, is it possible to restore a sense of human purpose that extends beyond place or person? To answer this question a core of 100 people, determined as "capable of sustaining commitment to the common good in the face of global complexity," were interviewed, not so much to "prove hypotheses" but to develop "fertile insights" for further research and action in order to "kindle a common fire and forge a new synthesis of practical wisdom." This requires people who can regard space as hospitable, inhabited by mentors and others capable of demonstrating that one can and ought to make a difference in the world; people who can develop habits of mind to engage others and a symbolic world, including the world of story and faith, capable of sustaining a committed consciousness. Two "interludes" describe those who exhibit that concern for the commons, and an epilogue suggests an individual and collective strategy to nourish the sense of the collective. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Connection and Complexity: The Challenge of the New Commons
ch. 2 Community: Becoming at Home in the World
ch. 3 Compassion: Living Within and Beyond the Tribe
ch. 4 Conviction: Developing Critical Habits of Mind
ch. 5 Courage: A Responsible Imagination
ch. 6 Confession: The Struggle with Fallibility
ch. 7 Commitment: The Power of the Double Negative
Epilogue Compass Points: The Power of Location and Direction

Ethics and the University
Additional Info:
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular ...
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular ...
Additional Info:
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular cases should play in teaching of ethics. Also looks at sexual ethics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The ethics boom, philosophy, and the university
ch. 2 Academic freedom, academic ethics, and professorial ethics
ch. 3 The new world of research ethics: a preliminary map
ch. 4 Science: after such knowledge, what responsibility?
ch. 5 University research and the wages of commerce
ch. 6 Of Babbage and kings: a study of a plagiarism complaint
ch. 7 Ethics across the curriculum
ch. 8 Case method
ch. 9 A moral problem in teaching of practical ethics
ch. 10 Sex and the university
Index
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular cases should play in teaching of ethics. Also looks at sexual ethics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The ethics boom, philosophy, and the university
ch. 2 Academic freedom, academic ethics, and professorial ethics
ch. 3 The new world of research ethics: a preliminary map
ch. 4 Science: after such knowledge, what responsibility?
ch. 5 University research and the wages of commerce
ch. 6 Of Babbage and kings: a study of a plagiarism complaint
ch. 7 Ethics across the curriculum
ch. 8 Case method
ch. 9 A moral problem in teaching of practical ethics
ch. 10 Sex and the university
Index

Supervising the PhD: A Guide to Success
Additional Info:
This guide to supervising doctoral research is a practical handbook for both the novice and the experienced higher degree supervisor. It looks at how to get students to produce good PhD theses on time, and how to prevent failed theses. (From the Publisher)
This guide to supervising doctoral research is a practical handbook for both the novice and the experienced higher degree supervisor. It looks at how to get students to produce good PhD theses on time, and how to prevent failed theses. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This guide to supervising doctoral research is a practical handbook for both the novice and the experienced higher degree supervisor. It looks at how to get students to produce good PhD theses on time, and how to prevent failed theses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface and acknowledgements
ch. 1 A most persuasive piece of argument
ch. 2 Caught and held by a cobweb: getting the student started
ch. 3 The balance between tradition and progress: designing and planning a project
ch. 4 Old manuscripts: the literature review
ch. 5 Heavy and thankless task: overseeing the data collection
ch. 6 Disagreeableness and danger: keeping up the student's motivation
ch. 7 Contorted corkscrew: the getting and giving of judgement
ch. 8 An emotional excitement: writing up the thesis
ch. 9 A lack of genuine interest: choosing the right external and preparing the student for the examination
ch. 10 The brave pretence at confidence: launching the student's career
ch. 11 A rather unpromising consignment: selecting successful students and building a research culture
Appendix: Further reading
References
Index
The Society for Research into Higher Education
This guide to supervising doctoral research is a practical handbook for both the novice and the experienced higher degree supervisor. It looks at how to get students to produce good PhD theses on time, and how to prevent failed theses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface and acknowledgements
ch. 1 A most persuasive piece of argument
ch. 2 Caught and held by a cobweb: getting the student started
ch. 3 The balance between tradition and progress: designing and planning a project
ch. 4 Old manuscripts: the literature review
ch. 5 Heavy and thankless task: overseeing the data collection
ch. 6 Disagreeableness and danger: keeping up the student's motivation
ch. 7 Contorted corkscrew: the getting and giving of judgement
ch. 8 An emotional excitement: writing up the thesis
ch. 9 A lack of genuine interest: choosing the right external and preparing the student for the examination
ch. 10 The brave pretence at confidence: launching the student's career
ch. 11 A rather unpromising consignment: selecting successful students and building a research culture
Appendix: Further reading
References
Index
The Society for Research into Higher Education

Quantum Learning: Unleashing the Genius in You
Additional Info:
Learning Was Never Like This !
Take control of your life... free your natural genius to perform to its true potential. Quantum Learning features a revolutionary new format that introduces the reader to a world of learning unlike any other.
Never before has a guide been designed to accomodate the unique learning style of the individual. Whether you're a professional, a student, or a person who simply ...
Learning Was Never Like This !
Take control of your life... free your natural genius to perform to its true potential. Quantum Learning features a revolutionary new format that introduces the reader to a world of learning unlike any other.
Never before has a guide been designed to accomodate the unique learning style of the individual. Whether you're a professional, a student, or a person who simply ...
Additional Info:
Learning Was Never Like This !
Take control of your life... free your natural genius to perform to its true potential. Quantum Learning features a revolutionary new format that introduces the reader to a world of learning unlike any other.
Never before has a guide been designed to accomodate the unique learning style of the individual. Whether you're a professional, a student, or a person who simply wants to improve his or her learning capacity, this extraordinary guide will increase your personal power, help you learn more, earn more, and take you where you want to go.
Inside you will learn:
-How to spark your motivation.
-How to master high-tech note-taking techniques.
-How to discover your own personal learning style and cultivate a winning attitude.
- How to work your own memory miracles, how to write with confidence, and much, much more!
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 relearning how to learn
ch. 2 the limitless power of your mind
ch. 3 the power of WIIFM-- what in it for me?
ch. 4 setting the stage: the right learning environment
ch. 5 cultivating a winning attitude: what would you do if you knew you couldn't fail
ch. 6 discovering your personal learning style
ch. 7 techniques of high-tech note-taking
ch 8 write with confidence
ch. 9 work your own memory miracles!
ch. 10 blast off with power reading
ch. 11 think logically, thinking creatively
ch. 12 making the quantum learning leap
recommended resources
index
Learning Was Never Like This !
Take control of your life... free your natural genius to perform to its true potential. Quantum Learning features a revolutionary new format that introduces the reader to a world of learning unlike any other.
Never before has a guide been designed to accomodate the unique learning style of the individual. Whether you're a professional, a student, or a person who simply wants to improve his or her learning capacity, this extraordinary guide will increase your personal power, help you learn more, earn more, and take you where you want to go.
Inside you will learn:
-How to spark your motivation.
-How to master high-tech note-taking techniques.
-How to discover your own personal learning style and cultivate a winning attitude.
- How to work your own memory miracles, how to write with confidence, and much, much more!
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 relearning how to learn
ch. 2 the limitless power of your mind
ch. 3 the power of WIIFM-- what in it for me?
ch. 4 setting the stage: the right learning environment
ch. 5 cultivating a winning attitude: what would you do if you knew you couldn't fail
ch. 6 discovering your personal learning style
ch. 7 techniques of high-tech note-taking
ch 8 write with confidence
ch. 9 work your own memory miracles!
ch. 10 blast off with power reading
ch. 11 think logically, thinking creatively
ch. 12 making the quantum learning leap
recommended resources
index


Designing & Assessing Courses & Curricula: A Practical Guide
Additional Info:
Designing and Assessing Courses and Curricula reflects the best current knowledge and practice in course and curriculum design and connects this knowledge with the critical task of assessing and learning outcomes at both course and curricular levels. Tested and refined through long-term use and study, the change model presented in this book shows how to move from concept to actualization, from theory to practice. (From the Publisher)
Designing and Assessing Courses and Curricula reflects the best current knowledge and practice in course and curriculum design and connects this knowledge with the critical task of assessing and learning outcomes at both course and curricular levels. Tested and refined through long-term use and study, the change model presented in this book shows how to move from concept to actualization, from theory to practice. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Designing and Assessing Courses and Curricula reflects the best current knowledge and practice in course and curriculum design and connects this knowledge with the critical task of assessing and learning outcomes at both course and curricular levels. Tested and refined through long-term use and study, the change model presented in this book shows how to move from concept to actualization, from theory to practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 A Learning-Centered Approach to Course and Curriculum Design
ch. 2 Systematic Design: Model and Benefits
ch. 3 Making the Decision to Go Ahead
ch. 4 Getting Started
ch. 5 Linking Goals, Courses, and Curricula
ch. 6 Gathering and Analyzing Essential Data
ch. 7 Developing a Design for an Ideal Course or Curriculum
ch. 8 Adjusting from the Ideal to the Possible
ch. 9 Clarifying Instructional Goals and Objectives
ch. 10 Designing Assessment Instruments and Procedures
ch. 11 Designing the Learning Experience
ch. 12 Selecting and Using Technology
ch. 13 Developing a Learning-Centered Syllabus
ch. 14 Cultivating a Respect for Diversity
ch. 15 Implementing, Evaluating, and Refining the Course or Curriculum
ch. 16 Learning from Experience
Resource A Questions for Evaluating a College Course
Resource B Case Studies in Developing Learning Outcomes
Resource C Mathematics Prerequisites and Student Success in Introductory Courses: Final Report
Resource D Sample Alumni Survey for Evaluating Program Effectiveness and Needs
Resource E Additional Case Studies in Course Design
Resource F Developing an Institutional Assessment Culture at Truman State University
Resource G Qualities of the Liberally Educated Person: A Description of Important Competencies
Resource H Sample Copyright Agreement
Resource I Teaching Goals Inventory: Self-Scorable Version
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Designing and Assessing Courses and Curricula reflects the best current knowledge and practice in course and curriculum design and connects this knowledge with the critical task of assessing and learning outcomes at both course and curricular levels. Tested and refined through long-term use and study, the change model presented in this book shows how to move from concept to actualization, from theory to practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 A Learning-Centered Approach to Course and Curriculum Design
ch. 2 Systematic Design: Model and Benefits
ch. 3 Making the Decision to Go Ahead
ch. 4 Getting Started
ch. 5 Linking Goals, Courses, and Curricula
ch. 6 Gathering and Analyzing Essential Data
ch. 7 Developing a Design for an Ideal Course or Curriculum
ch. 8 Adjusting from the Ideal to the Possible
ch. 9 Clarifying Instructional Goals and Objectives
ch. 10 Designing Assessment Instruments and Procedures
ch. 11 Designing the Learning Experience
ch. 12 Selecting and Using Technology
ch. 13 Developing a Learning-Centered Syllabus
ch. 14 Cultivating a Respect for Diversity
ch. 15 Implementing, Evaluating, and Refining the Course or Curriculum
ch. 16 Learning from Experience
Resource A Questions for Evaluating a College Course
Resource B Case Studies in Developing Learning Outcomes
Resource C Mathematics Prerequisites and Student Success in Introductory Courses: Final Report
Resource D Sample Alumni Survey for Evaluating Program Effectiveness and Needs
Resource E Additional Case Studies in Course Design
Resource F Developing an Institutional Assessment Culture at Truman State University
Resource G Qualities of the Liberally Educated Person: A Description of Important Competencies
Resource H Sample Copyright Agreement
Resource I Teaching Goals Inventory: Self-Scorable Version
References
Name Index
Subject Index

Improving the Environment for Learning
Additional Info:
This book identifies optimal practices or "benchmarks" for creating a quality learning environment within higher education and outlines steps faculty and administrators can take to improve student learning. Author Janet Donald integrates extensive research on teaching and learning with findings from her in-depth interviews with faculty and administrators at four of America's premier research institutions. She focuses on key factors influencing learning, identifies practices and policies central to effectiveness, and ...
This book identifies optimal practices or "benchmarks" for creating a quality learning environment within higher education and outlines steps faculty and administrators can take to improve student learning. Author Janet Donald integrates extensive research on teaching and learning with findings from her in-depth interviews with faculty and administrators at four of America's premier research institutions. She focuses on key factors influencing learning, identifies practices and policies central to effectiveness, and ...
Additional Info:
This book identifies optimal practices or "benchmarks" for creating a quality learning environment within higher education and outlines steps faculty and administrators can take to improve student learning. Author Janet Donald integrates extensive research on teaching and learning with findings from her in-depth interviews with faculty and administrators at four of America's premier research institutions. She focuses on key factors influencing learning, identifies practices and policies central to effectiveness, and offers timely and feasible solutions for meeting student learning challenges. Using the voices of faculty, administrators, and members of higher education centers, Donald investigates institutional missions and priorities. She examines how learning goals vary across the disciplines and what this means in terms of student outcomes. She also describes practices that support the improvement of teaching and she discusses classroom assessment techniques that measure learning and teaching. Donald examines student selection and access - especially questions of quality and diversity - and discusses how to foster motivation for learning. In addition, she provides strategies for recognizing teaching in tenure and reward systems and points out the importance of academic leadership. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Frameworks for Improving Learning
ch. 2 The Role of the Disciplines in the Quality of Learning
ch. 3 Student Selection and Access
ch. 4 Fostering Students' Motivation for Learning
ch. 5 Improving Instruction by Focusing on Learning
ch. 6 Providing Institutional Support for the Improvement of Teaching
ch. 7 Using Assessment of Define Tasks and Measure Learning
ch. 8 Faculty Responsibilities, Rewards, and Assessment
ch. 9 Institutional Assessment to Improve Learning
References <
Index
This book identifies optimal practices or "benchmarks" for creating a quality learning environment within higher education and outlines steps faculty and administrators can take to improve student learning. Author Janet Donald integrates extensive research on teaching and learning with findings from her in-depth interviews with faculty and administrators at four of America's premier research institutions. She focuses on key factors influencing learning, identifies practices and policies central to effectiveness, and offers timely and feasible solutions for meeting student learning challenges. Using the voices of faculty, administrators, and members of higher education centers, Donald investigates institutional missions and priorities. She examines how learning goals vary across the disciplines and what this means in terms of student outcomes. She also describes practices that support the improvement of teaching and she discusses classroom assessment techniques that measure learning and teaching. Donald examines student selection and access - especially questions of quality and diversity - and discusses how to foster motivation for learning. In addition, she provides strategies for recognizing teaching in tenure and reward systems and points out the importance of academic leadership. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Frameworks for Improving Learning
ch. 2 The Role of the Disciplines in the Quality of Learning
ch. 3 Student Selection and Access
ch. 4 Fostering Students' Motivation for Learning
ch. 5 Improving Instruction by Focusing on Learning
ch. 6 Providing Institutional Support for the Improvement of Teaching
ch. 7 Using Assessment of Define Tasks and Measure Learning
ch. 8 Faculty Responsibilities, Rewards, and Assessment
ch. 9 Institutional Assessment to Improve Learning
References <
Index


Embracing Contraries: Explorations in Learning and Teaching
Additional Info:
Peter Elbow's widely acclaimed and original theories on the writing process, set forth in Writing Without Teachers and Writing With Power, have earned him a reputation as a leading educational innovator. Now Elbow has drawn together twelve of his essays on the nature of learning and teaching to suggest a comprehensive philosophy of education. At once theoretical and down-to-earth, this collection will appeal not only to teachers, adminitrators and students, ...
Peter Elbow's widely acclaimed and original theories on the writing process, set forth in Writing Without Teachers and Writing With Power, have earned him a reputation as a leading educational innovator. Now Elbow has drawn together twelve of his essays on the nature of learning and teaching to suggest a comprehensive philosophy of education. At once theoretical and down-to-earth, this collection will appeal not only to teachers, adminitrators and students, ...
Additional Info:
Peter Elbow's widely acclaimed and original theories on the writing process, set forth in Writing Without Teachers and Writing With Power, have earned him a reputation as a leading educational innovator. Now Elbow has drawn together twelve of his essays on the nature of learning and teaching to suggest a comprehensive philosophy of education. At once theoretical and down-to-earth, this collection will appeal not only to teachers, adminitrators and students, but to anyone with a love of learning.
Elbow explores the "contraries" in the educational process, in particular his theory that clear thinking can be enhanced by inviting indecision, incoherence, and paradoxical thinking. The essays, written over a period of twenty-five years, are engaged in a single enterprise: to arrive at insights or conclusions about learning and teaching while still doing justice to the "rich messiness" of intellectual inquiry. Drawing his conclusions from his own perplexities as a student and as a teacher, Elbow discusses the value of interdisciplinary teaching, his theory of "cooking" (an interaction of conflicting ideas), the authority relationship in teaching and the value of specifying learning objectives. A full section is devoted to evaluation and feedback, both of students and faculty. Finally, Elbow focuses on the need to move beyond the skepticism of critical thinking to what he calls "methodological belief" -- an ability to embrace more than one point of view. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 The Learning Process
ch. 1 Nondisciplinary Courses and the Two Roots of Real Learning
ch. 2 Cooking: The Interaction of Conflicting Elements
ch. 3 Teaching Two Kinds of Thinking by Teaching Writing
Part 2 The Teaching Process
ch. 4 Exploring My Teaching
ch. 5 The Pedagogy of the Bamboozled
ch. 6 Trying to Teach While Thinking About the End
ch. 7 Embracing Contraries in the Teaching Process
Part 3 The Evaluation Process
ch. 8 Evaluating Students More Accurately
ch. 9 Collaborative Peer Evaluation by Faculty
ch. 9a Visiting Pete Sinclair
ch. 9b On Being Visited
ch. 9c Contraries in Responding
ch. 10 Trustworthiness in Evaluation
Part 4 Contraries and Inquiry
ch. 11 The Value of Dialectic
ch. 12 Methodological Doubting and Believing: Contraries in Inquiring
Bibliography
Index
Peter Elbow's widely acclaimed and original theories on the writing process, set forth in Writing Without Teachers and Writing With Power, have earned him a reputation as a leading educational innovator. Now Elbow has drawn together twelve of his essays on the nature of learning and teaching to suggest a comprehensive philosophy of education. At once theoretical and down-to-earth, this collection will appeal not only to teachers, adminitrators and students, but to anyone with a love of learning.
Elbow explores the "contraries" in the educational process, in particular his theory that clear thinking can be enhanced by inviting indecision, incoherence, and paradoxical thinking. The essays, written over a period of twenty-five years, are engaged in a single enterprise: to arrive at insights or conclusions about learning and teaching while still doing justice to the "rich messiness" of intellectual inquiry. Drawing his conclusions from his own perplexities as a student and as a teacher, Elbow discusses the value of interdisciplinary teaching, his theory of "cooking" (an interaction of conflicting ideas), the authority relationship in teaching and the value of specifying learning objectives. A full section is devoted to evaluation and feedback, both of students and faculty. Finally, Elbow focuses on the need to move beyond the skepticism of critical thinking to what he calls "methodological belief" -- an ability to embrace more than one point of view. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 The Learning Process
ch. 1 Nondisciplinary Courses and the Two Roots of Real Learning
ch. 2 Cooking: The Interaction of Conflicting Elements
ch. 3 Teaching Two Kinds of Thinking by Teaching Writing
Part 2 The Teaching Process
ch. 4 Exploring My Teaching
ch. 5 The Pedagogy of the Bamboozled
ch. 6 Trying to Teach While Thinking About the End
ch. 7 Embracing Contraries in the Teaching Process
Part 3 The Evaluation Process
ch. 8 Evaluating Students More Accurately
ch. 9 Collaborative Peer Evaluation by Faculty
ch. 9a Visiting Pete Sinclair
ch. 9b On Being Visited
ch. 9c Contraries in Responding
ch. 10 Trustworthiness in Evaluation
Part 4 Contraries and Inquiry
ch. 11 The Value of Dialectic
ch. 12 Methodological Doubting and Believing: Contraries in Inquiring
Bibliography
Index

Teaching Positions: Difference, Pedagogy and the Power of Address
Additional Info:
Drawing on media studies, literary theory, and the work of psychoanalytical feminist theorist Shoshana Felman, Ellsworth (curriculum and instruction, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) portrays the work of pedagogy as a performance practice. She argues that pedagogy's mode of address - its positioning of teachers and students in relation to one another - is crucial in the success or failure of education efforts. (From the Publisher)
Drawing on media studies, literary theory, and the work of psychoanalytical feminist theorist Shoshana Felman, Ellsworth (curriculum and instruction, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) portrays the work of pedagogy as a performance practice. She argues that pedagogy's mode of address - its positioning of teachers and students in relation to one another - is crucial in the success or failure of education efforts. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Drawing on media studies, literary theory, and the work of psychoanalytical feminist theorist Shoshana Felman, Ellsworth (curriculum and instruction, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) portrays the work of pedagogy as a performance practice. She argues that pedagogy's mode of address - its positioning of teachers and students in relation to one another - is crucial in the success or failure of education efforts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Part I Teaching as a Scene of Address
ch. 1 Mode of Address: It's a Film Thing
ch. 2 The Paradoxical Power of Address: It's an Education Thing, Too
ch. 3 "Who" Learns? "Who" Teaches? Figuring the Unconscious in Pedagogy
ch. 4 Who Does Communicative Dialogue Think You Are?
ch. 5 Communicative Dialogue: Control Through Continuity
ch. 6 The Power of Discontinuity: Teaching Through Analytic Dialogue
Part II Teaching Through Paradoxical Modes of Address
ch. 7 A Paradox: Teaching as the Taking of Action Without a Positive Reference
ch. 8 A Second Paradox: The Paradox of Power and Authority in Teaching
ch. 9 A Third Paradox: Teaching as a Performance Suspended in the Space Between Self and Other
ch. 10 A Fourth Paradox: Teaching as Performance Suspended in Time - Interactive Pedagogy in New Media
ch. 11 A Fifth Paradox: Pedagogy as a Performance Suspended in Thought - The Power of a Magical Realist Address in Academic Writing
Coda
References
Index
About the Author
Drawing on media studies, literary theory, and the work of psychoanalytical feminist theorist Shoshana Felman, Ellsworth (curriculum and instruction, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) portrays the work of pedagogy as a performance practice. She argues that pedagogy's mode of address - its positioning of teachers and students in relation to one another - is crucial in the success or failure of education efforts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Part I Teaching as a Scene of Address
ch. 1 Mode of Address: It's a Film Thing
ch. 2 The Paradoxical Power of Address: It's an Education Thing, Too
ch. 3 "Who" Learns? "Who" Teaches? Figuring the Unconscious in Pedagogy
ch. 4 Who Does Communicative Dialogue Think You Are?
ch. 5 Communicative Dialogue: Control Through Continuity
ch. 6 The Power of Discontinuity: Teaching Through Analytic Dialogue
Part II Teaching Through Paradoxical Modes of Address
ch. 7 A Paradox: Teaching as the Taking of Action Without a Positive Reference
ch. 8 A Second Paradox: The Paradox of Power and Authority in Teaching
ch. 9 A Third Paradox: Teaching as a Performance Suspended in the Space Between Self and Other
ch. 10 A Fourth Paradox: Teaching as Performance Suspended in Time - Interactive Pedagogy in New Media
ch. 11 A Fifth Paradox: Pedagogy as a Performance Suspended in Thought - The Power of a Magical Realist Address in Academic Writing
Coda
References
Index
About the Author

The Globalization of Theological Education
Additional Info:
These probing essays, factual case studies and critical commentaries by thirty-nine prominent scholars, educators, seminary administrators and church executives together address the emerging issues of the globalization of theological education. What does it mean to minister in a world of both interdependence and polarization? How can leaders be prepared to build up a church able and willing to respond to the challenge of global witness and service? What new ways ...
These probing essays, factual case studies and critical commentaries by thirty-nine prominent scholars, educators, seminary administrators and church executives together address the emerging issues of the globalization of theological education. What does it mean to minister in a world of both interdependence and polarization? How can leaders be prepared to build up a church able and willing to respond to the challenge of global witness and service? What new ways ...
Additional Info:
These probing essays, factual case studies and critical commentaries by thirty-nine prominent scholars, educators, seminary administrators and church executives together address the emerging issues of the globalization of theological education. What does it mean to minister in a world of both interdependence and polarization? How can leaders be prepared to build up a church able and willing to respond to the challenge of global witness and service? What new ways of teaching and learning can seminaries and congregations develop toward the ultimate goal of faithfully and effectively embracing all of God's creation? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forewords (Walter Brueggemann, Daniel J. Harrington, Garth M. Rosell, and Barbaraa Brown Zikmund)
Introduction (David A. Roozen, Alice Frazer Evans, and Robert A. Evans)
ch. 1 An Historical Survey
Essay: Justo L. González, and Catherine G. González
Case Study: Winning Over the Faculty - The director of a seminary globalization program faces strong opposition from a traditional faculty member.
Teaching Note
Commentary: Susan Brooks Thistlethwaite
ch. 2 Meanings of Globalization
Essay: William E. Lesher
Case Study: Why Globalization? The faculty of an established seminary struggles with the theological rationale for a globilization program and debates the value of experimental education
Teaching Note
Commentary: M. Shawn Copeland
ch. 3 Globalization as Evangelism
Essay: Paul G. Hiebert
Case Study: Changing the Face of the Parish
A parish priest, whose concept of ministry was shaped by required foreign language study, counsels members of his congregation threatened by a growing Hispanic population in their parish and suggestions of a Spanish Mass
Teaching Note
Commentary: Harold J. Recinos
ch. 4 Globalization as Ecumenical/Interfaith Dialogue
Essay: Jane I. Smith
Case Study: Sacred Sites
An Australian pastor must decide on his demination's role in a dispute between the Australian government and an Aborginial community's claim of sacred land.
Teaching Note
Commentary: L. Shannon Jung
ch. 5 Globalization as Cross-Cultural Dialogue
Essay: Robert J. Schreiter
Case Study: Text and Context
A debate between seminary faculty members about written vs. oral reports raises implications for the validity of academic requirements for extension education courses in indigenous communities
Teaching Note
Commentary: Pierre Goldberger
ch. 6 Globalization as Justice
Essay: Alice Frazer Evans and Robert A. Evans
Case Study: Evangelicals in a New Key
A Latin American student in a North American evangelical seminary faces a vocational dilemma as eh questions the relevance of his theological education for addressing "third-world" poverty.
Teaching Note
Commentary: W. L. Herzfeld
ch. 7 Liberation: Gender, Race, and Class
Essay: Toinette M. Eugeme
Case Study: To Go Home Again
A white middle-class seminarian struggles to reconcile her experiences in a required "developing world" immersion seminar with her understanding of the mission of the North American church and the purpose of seminary education
Teaching Note
Commentary: Daniel Spencer
ch. 8 Implications of Globalization for Biblical Understanding
Essay: Craig L. Blomberg
Case Study: Affirmation of Life
A Latin American seminary deals with the implications for its lifestyle and investment policies as a consequence of a radically revised program of study based on biblical and contextual analyses
Teaching Note
Commentary: Elsa Tamez
ch. 9 Global Economy and the Globalization of Theological Education
Essay: M. Douglas Meeks
Case Study: A Place for Reconciliation
A Sough African seminary faculty is divided over the seminary's role int he rebuilding of a community devastated by the economic and political repercussions of apartheid.
Teaching Note
Commentary: Itumeleng J. Mosala
ch. 10 Liberating Pedagogies in the Globalization of Theological Education
Essay: William Bean Kennedy
Case Study: More Questions Than Answers
A dramatic encounter during an international seminar challenges an experienced ethics professor to revise his approach to teaching and his relationship to international students
Teaching Note
Commentary: Heidi Hadsell do Nascimento
ch. 11 Institutional Change and the Globalization of Theological Education
Essay: David A. Roozen
Case Study: Globalization Gone Wild
The president of a seminary involved in a five-year globalization program encounters the complexity of institutional change as he faces competing demands for time and resources
Teaching Note
Commentary: Eleanor Scott Meyers
ch. 12 Mutuality in Global Education
Essay: Mortimer Arias
Cast Study: Apart from His People
Jamaican church leaders debate the costs and benefits of international education following a meeting with a young pastor, trained abroad, who is experiencing serious conflict with his Jamaican parishoners.
Teaching Note
Commentary: Henry S. Wilson
Contributors
Case Authors
Erskine Clarke, Columbia Theological Seminary
Gordon Dicker, United Theological Seminary Australia
Alice Frazer Evans, Plowshares Institute
Robert A. Evans, Plowshares Institute
Lisa Jafta, Rhodes University, South Africa
G. Douglass LEwis, Wesley Theological Seminary
James N. Pankratz, Concord College, Canada
Anne Reissner, Maryknoll School of Theology
Robert L. Stivers, Pacific Lutheran University
Richard F. Vieth, Lancaster Theological Seminary
Ronald C. White, Huntington Library and University of Southern California
These probing essays, factual case studies and critical commentaries by thirty-nine prominent scholars, educators, seminary administrators and church executives together address the emerging issues of the globalization of theological education. What does it mean to minister in a world of both interdependence and polarization? How can leaders be prepared to build up a church able and willing to respond to the challenge of global witness and service? What new ways of teaching and learning can seminaries and congregations develop toward the ultimate goal of faithfully and effectively embracing all of God's creation? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forewords (Walter Brueggemann, Daniel J. Harrington, Garth M. Rosell, and Barbaraa Brown Zikmund)
Introduction (David A. Roozen, Alice Frazer Evans, and Robert A. Evans)
ch. 1 An Historical Survey
Essay: Justo L. González, and Catherine G. González
Case Study: Winning Over the Faculty - The director of a seminary globalization program faces strong opposition from a traditional faculty member.
Teaching Note
Commentary: Susan Brooks Thistlethwaite
ch. 2 Meanings of Globalization
Essay: William E. Lesher
Case Study: Why Globalization? The faculty of an established seminary struggles with the theological rationale for a globilization program and debates the value of experimental education
Teaching Note
Commentary: M. Shawn Copeland
ch. 3 Globalization as Evangelism
Essay: Paul G. Hiebert
Case Study: Changing the Face of the Parish
A parish priest, whose concept of ministry was shaped by required foreign language study, counsels members of his congregation threatened by a growing Hispanic population in their parish and suggestions of a Spanish Mass
Teaching Note
Commentary: Harold J. Recinos
ch. 4 Globalization as Ecumenical/Interfaith Dialogue
Essay: Jane I. Smith
Case Study: Sacred Sites
An Australian pastor must decide on his demination's role in a dispute between the Australian government and an Aborginial community's claim of sacred land.
Teaching Note
Commentary: L. Shannon Jung
ch. 5 Globalization as Cross-Cultural Dialogue
Essay: Robert J. Schreiter
Case Study: Text and Context
A debate between seminary faculty members about written vs. oral reports raises implications for the validity of academic requirements for extension education courses in indigenous communities
Teaching Note
Commentary: Pierre Goldberger
ch. 6 Globalization as Justice
Essay: Alice Frazer Evans and Robert A. Evans
Case Study: Evangelicals in a New Key
A Latin American student in a North American evangelical seminary faces a vocational dilemma as eh questions the relevance of his theological education for addressing "third-world" poverty.
Teaching Note
Commentary: W. L. Herzfeld
ch. 7 Liberation: Gender, Race, and Class
Essay: Toinette M. Eugeme
Case Study: To Go Home Again
A white middle-class seminarian struggles to reconcile her experiences in a required "developing world" immersion seminar with her understanding of the mission of the North American church and the purpose of seminary education
Teaching Note
Commentary: Daniel Spencer
ch. 8 Implications of Globalization for Biblical Understanding
Essay: Craig L. Blomberg
Case Study: Affirmation of Life
A Latin American seminary deals with the implications for its lifestyle and investment policies as a consequence of a radically revised program of study based on biblical and contextual analyses
Teaching Note
Commentary: Elsa Tamez
ch. 9 Global Economy and the Globalization of Theological Education
Essay: M. Douglas Meeks
Case Study: A Place for Reconciliation
A Sough African seminary faculty is divided over the seminary's role int he rebuilding of a community devastated by the economic and political repercussions of apartheid.
Teaching Note
Commentary: Itumeleng J. Mosala
ch. 10 Liberating Pedagogies in the Globalization of Theological Education
Essay: William Bean Kennedy
Case Study: More Questions Than Answers
A dramatic encounter during an international seminar challenges an experienced ethics professor to revise his approach to teaching and his relationship to international students
Teaching Note
Commentary: Heidi Hadsell do Nascimento
ch. 11 Institutional Change and the Globalization of Theological Education
Essay: David A. Roozen
Case Study: Globalization Gone Wild
The president of a seminary involved in a five-year globalization program encounters the complexity of institutional change as he faces competing demands for time and resources
Teaching Note
Commentary: Eleanor Scott Meyers
ch. 12 Mutuality in Global Education
Essay: Mortimer Arias
Cast Study: Apart from His People
Jamaican church leaders debate the costs and benefits of international education following a meeting with a young pastor, trained abroad, who is experiencing serious conflict with his Jamaican parishoners.
Teaching Note
Commentary: Henry S. Wilson
Contributors
Case Authors
Erskine Clarke, Columbia Theological Seminary
Gordon Dicker, United Theological Seminary Australia
Alice Frazer Evans, Plowshares Institute
Robert A. Evans, Plowshares Institute
Lisa Jafta, Rhodes University, South Africa
G. Douglass LEwis, Wesley Theological Seminary
James N. Pankratz, Concord College, Canada
Anne Reissner, Maryknoll School of Theology
Robert L. Stivers, Pacific Lutheran University
Richard F. Vieth, Lancaster Theological Seminary
Ronald C. White, Huntington Library and University of Southern California
Additional Info:
As academic service-learning continues to grow rapidly, practitioners are discovering a pressing need for solid empirical research about learning outcomes. Where's the Learning in Service-Learning? helps define learning expectations, presents data about learning, and links program characteristics with learning outcomes. It is the first book to explore the experience of service-learning as a valid learning activity. (From the Publisher)
As academic service-learning continues to grow rapidly, practitioners are discovering a pressing need for solid empirical research about learning outcomes. Where's the Learning in Service-Learning? helps define learning expectations, presents data about learning, and links program characteristics with learning outcomes. It is the first book to explore the experience of service-learning as a valid learning activity. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
As academic service-learning continues to grow rapidly, practitioners are discovering a pressing need for solid empirical research about learning outcomes. Where's the Learning in Service-Learning? helps define learning expectations, presents data about learning, and links program characteristics with learning outcomes. It is the first book to explore the experience of service-learning as a valid learning activity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Authors
ch. 1 Identifying the Learning Outcomes of Service
ch. 2 Personal and Interpersonal Development
ch. 3 Understanding and Applying Knowledge
ch. 4 Engagement, Curiosity, and Reflective Practice
ch. 5 Critical Thinking
ch. 6 Perspective Transformation
ch. 7 Citizenship
ch. 8 Program Characteristics of Effective Service-Learning
ch. 9 Strengthening the Role of Service in the College Curriculum
Resource A College and University Participants in the Studies
Resource B Sample and Methods of the Studies
Resource C Survey and Interview Instruments
Resource D Survey Regression Tables: Impact of Service-Learning
Resource E Survey Regression Tables: Impact of Program Characteristics
Resource F Interview Regression Tables: Impact of Well-Integrated
Service-Learning
References
Index
As academic service-learning continues to grow rapidly, practitioners are discovering a pressing need for solid empirical research about learning outcomes. Where's the Learning in Service-Learning? helps define learning expectations, presents data about learning, and links program characteristics with learning outcomes. It is the first book to explore the experience of service-learning as a valid learning activity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Authors
ch. 1 Identifying the Learning Outcomes of Service
ch. 2 Personal and Interpersonal Development
ch. 3 Understanding and Applying Knowledge
ch. 4 Engagement, Curiosity, and Reflective Practice
ch. 5 Critical Thinking
ch. 6 Perspective Transformation
ch. 7 Citizenship
ch. 8 Program Characteristics of Effective Service-Learning
ch. 9 Strengthening the Role of Service in the College Curriculum
Resource A College and University Participants in the Studies
Resource B Sample and Methods of the Studies
Resource C Survey and Interview Instruments
Resource D Survey Regression Tables: Impact of Service-Learning
Resource E Survey Regression Tables: Impact of Program Characteristics
Resource F Interview Regression Tables: Impact of Well-Integrated
Service-Learning
References
Index

Academic Couples: Problems and Promises
Additional Info:
How do the careers and lives of academic couples differ from those of other academics? What advantages and disadvantages do they face, and what problems and opportunities do their increasing numbers present to academic institutions? Sixteen experts address these and many other questions in Academic Couples, offering new research and much vital information. (From the Publisher)
How do the careers and lives of academic couples differ from those of other academics? What advantages and disadvantages do they face, and what problems and opportunities do their increasing numbers present to academic institutions? Sixteen experts address these and many other questions in Academic Couples, offering new research and much vital information. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
How do the careers and lives of academic couples differ from those of other academics? What advantages and disadvantages do they face, and what problems and opportunities do their increasing numbers present to academic institutions? Sixteen experts address these and many other questions in Academic Couples, offering new research and much vital information. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Changes in American Society: The Context for Academic Couples (Karen Miller-Loessi)
ch. 2 The History of Women and Couples in Academe (Paula E. Stephan and Mary Mathewes Kassis)
ch. 3 For the Good of the Race: Married African-American Academics - A Historical Perspective (Linda M. Perkins)
ch. 4 POSSLQs and PSSSLQs: Unmarried Academic Couples(Dorothy C. Miller and Anita Skeen)
ch. 5 The Status of Academic Couples in U.S. Institutions (S. Astin and Jeffrey F. Milem)
ch. 6 The Scholarly Productivity of Academic Couples (Marcia L. Bellas)
ch. 7 Are Academic Partners at a Disadvantage? (Marianne A. Ferber and Emily P. Hoffman)
ch. 8 Work-Family Policies for Faculty: How "Career- and Family-Friendly" Is Academe? (Phylis Hutton Raabe)
ch. 9 From Antinepotism Rules to Programs for Partners: Legal Issues (Elaine W. Shoben)
ch. 10 Academic Couples: The View from the Administration (Lilli S. Hornig)
ch. 11 Programs for Academic Partners: How Well Can They Work? (Jane W. Loeb)
Findings and Conclusions (Jane W. Loeb and Marianne A. Ferber)
Contributors
Index
How do the careers and lives of academic couples differ from those of other academics? What advantages and disadvantages do they face, and what problems and opportunities do their increasing numbers present to academic institutions? Sixteen experts address these and many other questions in Academic Couples, offering new research and much vital information. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Changes in American Society: The Context for Academic Couples (Karen Miller-Loessi)
ch. 2 The History of Women and Couples in Academe (Paula E. Stephan and Mary Mathewes Kassis)
ch. 3 For the Good of the Race: Married African-American Academics - A Historical Perspective (Linda M. Perkins)
ch. 4 POSSLQs and PSSSLQs: Unmarried Academic Couples(Dorothy C. Miller and Anita Skeen)
ch. 5 The Status of Academic Couples in U.S. Institutions (S. Astin and Jeffrey F. Milem)
ch. 6 The Scholarly Productivity of Academic Couples (Marcia L. Bellas)
ch. 7 Are Academic Partners at a Disadvantage? (Marianne A. Ferber and Emily P. Hoffman)
ch. 8 Work-Family Policies for Faculty: How "Career- and Family-Friendly" Is Academe? (Phylis Hutton Raabe)
ch. 9 From Antinepotism Rules to Programs for Partners: Legal Issues (Elaine W. Shoben)
ch. 10 Academic Couples: The View from the Administration (Lilli S. Hornig)
ch. 11 Programs for Academic Partners: How Well Can They Work? (Jane W. Loeb)
Findings and Conclusions (Jane W. Loeb and Marianne A. Ferber)
Contributors
Index

Developing Senior Faculty as Teachers
Additional Info:
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, ...
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, ...
Additional Info:
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, on the ability of professors--most of whom have been teaching for many years--to provide appropriate classroom experiences and learning assistance.
Faculty demographics present a start contrast: the professoriate, mostly white and male, will continue to age as the large faculty cohort hired in the 1960s and early 1970s reaches mid- and late career. More than half of all full-time faculty members in 1988 were over forty-five, nearly two-thirds had tenure, and relatively few between the ages of forty-five and sixty anticipated leaving their current position. The faculty members who face the challenges and opportunities of the college classroom in the 1990s are a seasoned, stable, and job-secure group. Happily for students and for institutions, faculty members frequently focus their energies on teaching in their later decades of their careers; to date, institutions seeking to support this crucial refocusing have not had resources or models to draw upon.
If senior faculty in their last decades of professional service do, in fact, turn their collective energies to improving teaching and learning, the potential for long-term impact on collegiate education is tremendous. Engaging senior faculty, who control the reward structure, in reflection on how excellent teaching is best supported can fundamentally alter institutional priorities toward a more appropriate balance between teaching and research--and create a better teaching environment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Mark LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 1 The Senior Faculty: A Portrait and Literature Review(R. Eugene Rice, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 2 Institutions Matter: Campus Teaching Environments' Impact on Senior Faculty (Mark W. LaCelle-Peterson, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 3 Primal Origins and Later Correctives for Midcareer Disillusionment (Robert Boice)
ch. 4 Designing a Reward System to Promote the Career Development of Senior Faculty (Donald W. Farmer)
ch. 5 Building Coalitions for Faculty Revitalization: The Case of Long Island University's Brooklyn Campus (Bernice Braid)
ch. 6 Redefining the Role of Senior Faculty at a Research University (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 7 Revitalizing Senior Faculty Through Statewide Efforts (Barbara Leigh Smith, Myrna J. Smith)
ch. 8 The Senior Faculty: Higher Education's Plentiful Yet Largely Untapped Resource (Martin J. Finkelstein, Nina Dorset Jemmott)
ch. 9 Resources for Developing Senior Faculty as Teachers (Robert K. Seal)
Index
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, on the ability of professors--most of whom have been teaching for many years--to provide appropriate classroom experiences and learning assistance.
Faculty demographics present a start contrast: the professoriate, mostly white and male, will continue to age as the large faculty cohort hired in the 1960s and early 1970s reaches mid- and late career. More than half of all full-time faculty members in 1988 were over forty-five, nearly two-thirds had tenure, and relatively few between the ages of forty-five and sixty anticipated leaving their current position. The faculty members who face the challenges and opportunities of the college classroom in the 1990s are a seasoned, stable, and job-secure group. Happily for students and for institutions, faculty members frequently focus their energies on teaching in their later decades of their careers; to date, institutions seeking to support this crucial refocusing have not had resources or models to draw upon.
If senior faculty in their last decades of professional service do, in fact, turn their collective energies to improving teaching and learning, the potential for long-term impact on collegiate education is tremendous. Engaging senior faculty, who control the reward structure, in reflection on how excellent teaching is best supported can fundamentally alter institutional priorities toward a more appropriate balance between teaching and research--and create a better teaching environment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Mark LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 1 The Senior Faculty: A Portrait and Literature Review(R. Eugene Rice, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 2 Institutions Matter: Campus Teaching Environments' Impact on Senior Faculty (Mark W. LaCelle-Peterson, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 3 Primal Origins and Later Correctives for Midcareer Disillusionment (Robert Boice)
ch. 4 Designing a Reward System to Promote the Career Development of Senior Faculty (Donald W. Farmer)
ch. 5 Building Coalitions for Faculty Revitalization: The Case of Long Island University's Brooklyn Campus (Bernice Braid)
ch. 6 Redefining the Role of Senior Faculty at a Research University (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 7 Revitalizing Senior Faculty Through Statewide Efforts (Barbara Leigh Smith, Myrna J. Smith)
ch. 8 The Senior Faculty: Higher Education's Plentiful Yet Largely Untapped Resource (Martin J. Finkelstein, Nina Dorset Jemmott)
ch. 9 Resources for Developing Senior Faculty as Teachers (Robert K. Seal)
Index

The New Academic Generation: A Profession in Transformation
Additional Info:
Higher education researchers Martin Finkelstein, Robert Seal, and Jack Schuster focus on the changing face of American academe, as women, foreign-born, and minority scholars enter the professorate in large numbers. Considering this trend, the authors argue that the next generation will usher in an era of dramatic changes and that the long-term implications of these changes will be profound. 7 illustrations. (From the Publisher)
Higher education researchers Martin Finkelstein, Robert Seal, and Jack Schuster focus on the changing face of American academe, as women, foreign-born, and minority scholars enter the professorate in large numbers. Considering this trend, the authors argue that the next generation will usher in an era of dramatic changes and that the long-term implications of these changes will be profound. 7 illustrations. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Higher education researchers Martin Finkelstein, Robert Seal, and Jack Schuster focus on the changing face of American academe, as women, foreign-born, and minority scholars enter the professorate in large numbers. Considering this trend, the authors argue that the next generation will usher in an era of dramatic changes and that the long-term implications of these changes will be profound. 7 illustrations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures and Tables
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Context: The Faculty at a Crossroads
ch. 2 Taking the Measure of a New Academic Generation
ch. 3 Demographic Contours of the New Academic Generation
ch. 4 The Preparation and Careers of the New Academic Generation
ch. 5 The New Academic Generation at Work
ch. 6 The Attitudes and Values of the New Academic Generation
ch. 7 The New Academic Generation and the Future of American Higher Education
App. A Extended Tables
App. B Selected Comparisons of New- and Senior-Faculty Cohorts
App. C 1993 National Study of Postsecondary Faculty: Faculty Questionnaire
Notes
References
Index
Higher education researchers Martin Finkelstein, Robert Seal, and Jack Schuster focus on the changing face of American academe, as women, foreign-born, and minority scholars enter the professorate in large numbers. Considering this trend, the authors argue that the next generation will usher in an era of dramatic changes and that the long-term implications of these changes will be profound. 7 illustrations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures and Tables
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Context: The Faculty at a Crossroads
ch. 2 Taking the Measure of a New Academic Generation
ch. 3 Demographic Contours of the New Academic Generation
ch. 4 The Preparation and Careers of the New Academic Generation
ch. 5 The New Academic Generation at Work
ch. 6 The Attitudes and Values of the New Academic Generation
ch. 7 The New Academic Generation and the Future of American Higher Education
App. A Extended Tables
App. B Selected Comparisons of New- and Senior-Faculty Cohorts
App. C 1993 National Study of Postsecondary Faculty: Faculty Questionnaire
Notes
References
Index

New Perspectives on Designing and Implementing Effective Workshops
Additional Info:
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power ...
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power ...
Additional Info:
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power dynamics in the intensity of the workshop atmosphere. This is the 76th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Workshop Planning (Thomas J. Sork)
ch. 2. Motivationwith a Mission: Understanding Motivation and Culture in Workshop Design (Raymond J. Wlodkowski)
ch. 3. Group Learning in Workshops (Anne M. Will)
ch. 4. Negotiating Power Dynamics in Workshops (Juanita Johnson-Bailey, Ronald M. Cervero)
ch. 5. Residential Workshops (Gretchen Bersch, Jean Anderson Fleming)
ch. 6. Workshops at a Distance (Chere Campbell Gibson, Terry L. Gibson)
ch. 7. Workshop Evaluation: Old Myths and New Wisdom (Grover J. Andrews)
ch. 8. Confessions of a Workshop-aholic (Doe Hentschel)
ch. 9. The Workshop Through New Eyes (Jean Anderson Fleming)
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power dynamics in the intensity of the workshop atmosphere. This is the 76th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Workshop Planning (Thomas J. Sork)
ch. 2. Motivationwith a Mission: Understanding Motivation and Culture in Workshop Design (Raymond J. Wlodkowski)
ch. 3. Group Learning in Workshops (Anne M. Will)
ch. 4. Negotiating Power Dynamics in Workshops (Juanita Johnson-Bailey, Ronald M. Cervero)
ch. 5. Residential Workshops (Gretchen Bersch, Jean Anderson Fleming)
ch. 6. Workshops at a Distance (Chere Campbell Gibson, Terry L. Gibson)
ch. 7. Workshop Evaluation: Old Myths and New Wisdom (Grover J. Andrews)
ch. 8. Confessions of a Workshop-aholic (Doe Hentschel)
ch. 9. The Workshop Through New Eyes (Jean Anderson Fleming)

Sociology, Theology and the Curriculum
Additional Info:
In this new volume, theologians reflect on sociological methods, explore social theories of the human agent, and offer a theological transformation of sociology. Spanning such developments as local, non-stipendiary ministries, the identification of the roots of church growth, and giving voice to gay and lesbian Christians, this collection of innovative essays provides a fascinating and important dialogue on how the seemingly disparate fields of sociology and theology can illuminate and ...
In this new volume, theologians reflect on sociological methods, explore social theories of the human agent, and offer a theological transformation of sociology. Spanning such developments as local, non-stipendiary ministries, the identification of the roots of church growth, and giving voice to gay and lesbian Christians, this collection of innovative essays provides a fascinating and important dialogue on how the seemingly disparate fields of sociology and theology can illuminate and ...
Additional Info:
In this new volume, theologians reflect on sociological methods, explore social theories of the human agent, and offer a theological transformation of sociology. Spanning such developments as local, non-stipendiary ministries, the identification of the roots of church growth, and giving voice to gay and lesbian Christians, this collection of innovative essays provides a fascinating and important dialogue on how the seemingly disparate fields of sociology and theology can illuminate and enrich one other. This is essential reading for anyone concerned with the shifting dynamics of these two disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part I Foundations
ch. 1 Christian Foundations, Sociological Fundamentals (Rev Canon Prof David Martin)
ch. 2 A Theological Response to Sociology (Rev Canon Prof Ronald Preston)
Part II Theoretical Perspectives
ch. 3 Theological Reflection and Sociological Method (Andrew Dawson)
ch. 4 Social Theories of the Human Agent and Monastic Dialogue (Jeff Vass)
ch. 5 The Problem of Charismatic Religious Experience for the Sociology of Religion: Label or Libel? (Rev Canon Dr Martyn Percy)
ch. 6 Sociological Methodologies and the Changing Nature of Contemporary Fundamentalism(Stephen J. Hunt)
ch. 7 Sociology in Evangelical Theological Colleges (Tony Walter)
ch. 8 Is Self-assigned Religious Affiliation Socially Significant?
Part III Empirical Perspectives
ch. 9 The Socialization of Glossolalia (Mark Cartledge)
ch. 10 Pentecostalism: Charismata and Church Growth (William K. Kay)
ch. 11 Student Expectations of a Church College
ch. 12 Sociology Students and Christianity in a Church College (Bernadette Casey Et Al)
ch. 13 Immanent Faith: Young People in Late Modernity (Sylvia Collins)
ch. 14 Gay and Lesbian Christians: The Lived Experiences (Andrew K.t. Yip)
ch. 15 Developing Identity as a Local Non-stipendiary Priest (Rev Canon Dr Michael Wes)
Name Index
Subject Index
In this new volume, theologians reflect on sociological methods, explore social theories of the human agent, and offer a theological transformation of sociology. Spanning such developments as local, non-stipendiary ministries, the identification of the roots of church growth, and giving voice to gay and lesbian Christians, this collection of innovative essays provides a fascinating and important dialogue on how the seemingly disparate fields of sociology and theology can illuminate and enrich one other. This is essential reading for anyone concerned with the shifting dynamics of these two disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part I Foundations
ch. 1 Christian Foundations, Sociological Fundamentals (Rev Canon Prof David Martin)
ch. 2 A Theological Response to Sociology (Rev Canon Prof Ronald Preston)
Part II Theoretical Perspectives
ch. 3 Theological Reflection and Sociological Method (Andrew Dawson)
ch. 4 Social Theories of the Human Agent and Monastic Dialogue (Jeff Vass)
ch. 5 The Problem of Charismatic Religious Experience for the Sociology of Religion: Label or Libel? (Rev Canon Dr Martyn Percy)
ch. 6 Sociological Methodologies and the Changing Nature of Contemporary Fundamentalism(Stephen J. Hunt)
ch. 7 Sociology in Evangelical Theological Colleges (Tony Walter)
ch. 8 Is Self-assigned Religious Affiliation Socially Significant?
Part III Empirical Perspectives
ch. 9 The Socialization of Glossolalia (Mark Cartledge)
ch. 10 Pentecostalism: Charismata and Church Growth (William K. Kay)
ch. 11 Student Expectations of a Church College
ch. 12 Sociology Students and Christianity in a Church College (Bernadette Casey Et Al)
ch. 13 Immanent Faith: Young People in Late Modernity (Sylvia Collins)
ch. 14 Gay and Lesbian Christians: The Lived Experiences (Andrew K.t. Yip)
ch. 15 Developing Identity as a Local Non-stipendiary Priest (Rev Canon Dr Michael Wes)
Name Index
Subject Index
Additional Info:
This book represents some of the last writings by Paulo Freire, who has been acclaimed one of the most important educators of the 20th century. Pedagogy of the Heart is filled with Freire's reminiscences of his early life and meditations "under my mango tree." Many of these will be familiar themes to those who have walked with Freire before. For those coming to his work for the first time, Pedagogy ...
This book represents some of the last writings by Paulo Freire, who has been acclaimed one of the most important educators of the 20th century. Pedagogy of the Heart is filled with Freire's reminiscences of his early life and meditations "under my mango tree." Many of these will be familiar themes to those who have walked with Freire before. For those coming to his work for the first time, Pedagogy ...
Additional Info:
This book represents some of the last writings by Paulo Freire, who has been acclaimed one of the most important educators of the 20th century. Pedagogy of the Heart is filled with Freire's reminiscences of his early life and meditations "under my mango tree." Many of these will be familiar themes to those who have walked with Freire before. For those coming to his work for the first time, Pedagogy of the Heart will open new doors to the interrelations of education and political struggle. Further enhancing the text are substantive notes by Ana Maria Araujo Freire. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Under the Shade of a Mango Tree
Solitude-Communion
Life Support and the World
My First World
Hope
The Limit of the Right
Neoliberals and Progressives
Democratic Administration
Lessons from Exile
The "Lefts" and the Right
Seriousness and Happiness
Dialogism
My Faith and Hope
Notes
This book represents some of the last writings by Paulo Freire, who has been acclaimed one of the most important educators of the 20th century. Pedagogy of the Heart is filled with Freire's reminiscences of his early life and meditations "under my mango tree." Many of these will be familiar themes to those who have walked with Freire before. For those coming to his work for the first time, Pedagogy of the Heart will open new doors to the interrelations of education and political struggle. Further enhancing the text are substantive notes by Ana Maria Araujo Freire. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Under the Shade of a Mango Tree
Solitude-Communion
Life Support and the World
My First World
Hope
The Limit of the Right
Neoliberals and Progressives
Democratic Administration
Lessons from Exile
The "Lefts" and the Right
Seriousness and Happiness
Dialogism
My Faith and Hope
Notes


Intelligence Reframed: Multiple Intelligences for the 21st Century
Additional Info:
Harvard psychologist Howard Gardner has been acclaimed as the most influential educational theorist since John Dewey. His ideas about intelligence and creativity - explicated in such bestselling books as Frames of Mind and Multiple Intelligences (over 200,000 copies in print combined) - have revolutionized our thinking. In his groundbreaking 1983 book Frames of Mind, Howard Gardner first introduced the theory of multiple intelligences, which posits that intelligence is more than a single ...
Harvard psychologist Howard Gardner has been acclaimed as the most influential educational theorist since John Dewey. His ideas about intelligence and creativity - explicated in such bestselling books as Frames of Mind and Multiple Intelligences (over 200,000 copies in print combined) - have revolutionized our thinking. In his groundbreaking 1983 book Frames of Mind, Howard Gardner first introduced the theory of multiple intelligences, which posits that intelligence is more than a single ...
Additional Info:
Harvard psychologist Howard Gardner has been acclaimed as the most influential educational theorist since John Dewey. His ideas about intelligence and creativity - explicated in such bestselling books as Frames of Mind and Multiple Intelligences (over 200,000 copies in print combined) - have revolutionized our thinking. In his groundbreaking 1983 book Frames of Mind, Howard Gardner first introduced the theory of multiple intelligences, which posits that intelligence is more than a single property of the human mind. That theory has become widely accepted as one of the seminal ideas of the twentieth century and continues to attract attention all over the world. Now in Intelligence Reframed, Gardner provides a much-needed report on the theory, its evolution and revisions. He offers practical guidance on the educational uses of the theory and responds to the critiques leveled against him. He also introduces two new intelligences (existential intelligence and naturalist intelligence) and argues that the concept of intelligence should be broadened, but not so absurdly that it includes every human virtue and value. Ultimately, argues Gardner, possessing a basic set of seven or eight intelligences is not only a unique trademark of the human species, but also perhaps even a working definition of the species. Gardner also offers provocative ideas about creativity, leadership, and moral excellence, and speculates about the relationship between multiple intelligences and the world of work in the future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Intelligence and Individuality
ch. 2 Before Multiple Intelligences
ch. 3 The Theory of Multiple Intelligences: A Personal Perspective
ch. 4 Are There Additional Intelligences?
ch. 5 Is There a Moral Intelligence?
ch. 6 Myths and Realities about Multiple Intelligences
ch. 7 Issues and Answers Regarding Multiple Intelligences
ch. 8 The Intelligences of Creators and Leaders
ch. 9 Multiple Intelligences in Schools
ch. 10 Multiple Approaches to Understanding
ch. 11 Multiple Intelligences in the Wider World
ch. 12 Who Owns Intelligence?
Notes
Appendix A Books and Articles by Howard Gardner
Appendix B Other Works About the Theory of Multiple Intelligences
Appendix C Videos, Newsletters, and Miscellany
Appendix D Contacts on Multiple Intelligences Theory and Its Applications
Index
Harvard psychologist Howard Gardner has been acclaimed as the most influential educational theorist since John Dewey. His ideas about intelligence and creativity - explicated in such bestselling books as Frames of Mind and Multiple Intelligences (over 200,000 copies in print combined) - have revolutionized our thinking. In his groundbreaking 1983 book Frames of Mind, Howard Gardner first introduced the theory of multiple intelligences, which posits that intelligence is more than a single property of the human mind. That theory has become widely accepted as one of the seminal ideas of the twentieth century and continues to attract attention all over the world. Now in Intelligence Reframed, Gardner provides a much-needed report on the theory, its evolution and revisions. He offers practical guidance on the educational uses of the theory and responds to the critiques leveled against him. He also introduces two new intelligences (existential intelligence and naturalist intelligence) and argues that the concept of intelligence should be broadened, but not so absurdly that it includes every human virtue and value. Ultimately, argues Gardner, possessing a basic set of seven or eight intelligences is not only a unique trademark of the human species, but also perhaps even a working definition of the species. Gardner also offers provocative ideas about creativity, leadership, and moral excellence, and speculates about the relationship between multiple intelligences and the world of work in the future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Intelligence and Individuality
ch. 2 Before Multiple Intelligences
ch. 3 The Theory of Multiple Intelligences: A Personal Perspective
ch. 4 Are There Additional Intelligences?
ch. 5 Is There a Moral Intelligence?
ch. 6 Myths and Realities about Multiple Intelligences
ch. 7 Issues and Answers Regarding Multiple Intelligences
ch. 8 The Intelligences of Creators and Leaders
ch. 9 Multiple Intelligences in Schools
ch. 10 Multiple Approaches to Understanding
ch. 11 Multiple Intelligences in the Wider World
ch. 12 Who Owns Intelligence?
Notes
Appendix A Books and Articles by Howard Gardner
Appendix B Other Works About the Theory of Multiple Intelligences
Appendix C Videos, Newsletters, and Miscellany
Appendix D Contacts on Multiple Intelligences Theory and Its Applications
Index
Additional Info:
In an era in which the teaching enterprise is freighted with tactics, techniques, and methods, M. Robert Gardner guides us back to the spirit of teaching. He writes especially about the dilemmas and challenges of teaching, about how it feels to be trying to teach. A clinical teacher of psychiatry and psychoanalysis for over four decades, Gardner is both enlightening and entertaining in relating his own teacherly struggles, including his ...
In an era in which the teaching enterprise is freighted with tactics, techniques, and methods, M. Robert Gardner guides us back to the spirit of teaching. He writes especially about the dilemmas and challenges of teaching, about how it feels to be trying to teach. A clinical teacher of psychiatry and psychoanalysis for over four decades, Gardner is both enlightening and entertaining in relating his own teacherly struggles, including his ...
Additional Info:
In an era in which the teaching enterprise is freighted with tactics, techniques, and methods, M. Robert Gardner guides us back to the spirit of teaching. He writes especially about the dilemmas and challenges of teaching, about how it feels to be trying to teach. A clinical teacher of psychiatry and psychoanalysis for over four decades, Gardner is both enlightening and entertaining in relating his own teacherly struggles, including his efforts to harness the teacher's ever-present furor to teach" and thence to discern and engage his students' "hidden questions." Written in simple but evocative prose, On Trying to Teach is a wonderful companion volume to Self Inquiry (1983). In the earlier work, Gardner explored the play between patient and analyst; now, in the same gracefully self-reflective voice, he turns to the play between student and teacher. Gardner's provocative, often iconoclastic musings will goad teachers of all subjects to reflect anew on their calling, on what exactly it means to teach. Analysts and other clinical readers will take special pleasure in the humane psychoanalytic sensibility that not only infuses Gardner's own teaching, but shapes his approach to the most basic questions about teaching and learning in general. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
On Essaying Teaching
Beginnings
Bk. I The School of Soft Knocks
The Furor to Teach
The Unknown Student
Gulliver at Home and Abroad
On Teacherly Versatility
The Warp and the Woof
On Creativity, Discipline, and Other Desiderata
A Concise History of Teaching
Concise Addendum to a Concise History of Teaching
Bk. II A Gentle Symbiosis: The Student and the Teacher
On New and Old Beginnings
Gumbel's Gambit
Hidden Questions
On Catching Burrs
A Brief Case Of Hidden-Question Chasing
More on the Besetting Challenges of Hidden-Question Catching
Some Added Questions on the Question of What Attention to Hidden Questions Is Good For
On Passing Events
Other Clues to Hidden Questions
On Purple Trees, Purple Cows, Telling Right from Wrong, and Bearing the Distresses of Being Wrong
More Reflections on the Nature of Hidden Questions
Once More Backward
On the Importance of Being a Bit Off
On Trying to Teach in Large Groups as Well as Small, or Almost as Well
On Finding Three-Ring Circuses and on Other Merits of Tending to Hidden Questions
Afterword: Studenthood
Other Thoughts on Assessing Teaching
In an era in which the teaching enterprise is freighted with tactics, techniques, and methods, M. Robert Gardner guides us back to the spirit of teaching. He writes especially about the dilemmas and challenges of teaching, about how it feels to be trying to teach. A clinical teacher of psychiatry and psychoanalysis for over four decades, Gardner is both enlightening and entertaining in relating his own teacherly struggles, including his efforts to harness the teacher's ever-present furor to teach" and thence to discern and engage his students' "hidden questions." Written in simple but evocative prose, On Trying to Teach is a wonderful companion volume to Self Inquiry (1983). In the earlier work, Gardner explored the play between patient and analyst; now, in the same gracefully self-reflective voice, he turns to the play between student and teacher. Gardner's provocative, often iconoclastic musings will goad teachers of all subjects to reflect anew on their calling, on what exactly it means to teach. Analysts and other clinical readers will take special pleasure in the humane psychoanalytic sensibility that not only infuses Gardner's own teaching, but shapes his approach to the most basic questions about teaching and learning in general. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
On Essaying Teaching
Beginnings
Bk. I The School of Soft Knocks
The Furor to Teach
The Unknown Student
Gulliver at Home and Abroad
On Teacherly Versatility
The Warp and the Woof
On Creativity, Discipline, and Other Desiderata
A Concise History of Teaching
Concise Addendum to a Concise History of Teaching
Bk. II A Gentle Symbiosis: The Student and the Teacher
On New and Old Beginnings
Gumbel's Gambit
Hidden Questions
On Catching Burrs
A Brief Case Of Hidden-Question Chasing
More on the Besetting Challenges of Hidden-Question Catching
Some Added Questions on the Question of What Attention to Hidden Questions Is Good For
On Passing Events
Other Clues to Hidden Questions
On Purple Trees, Purple Cows, Telling Right from Wrong, and Bearing the Distresses of Being Wrong
More Reflections on the Nature of Hidden Questions
Once More Backward
On the Importance of Being a Bit Off
On Trying to Teach in Large Groups as Well as Small, or Almost as Well
On Finding Three-Ring Circuses and on Other Merits of Tending to Hidden Questions
Afterword: Studenthood
Other Thoughts on Assessing Teaching

Teaching Large Classes
Additional Info:
With this splendid monograph by Allan Gredalof the Society for Teaching and Learning in Higher Education launches its new series of Green Guides. Each guide will deal with some aspect of teaching and learning in higher education. They will be solidly based on relevant research and theory, but the approach will be pragmatic and applied. The guides will be short, with an emphasis on clear, jargon-free expression, and plentiful examples ...
With this splendid monograph by Allan Gredalof the Society for Teaching and Learning in Higher Education launches its new series of Green Guides. Each guide will deal with some aspect of teaching and learning in higher education. They will be solidly based on relevant research and theory, but the approach will be pragmatic and applied. The guides will be short, with an emphasis on clear, jargon-free expression, and plentiful examples ...
Additional Info:
With this splendid monograph by Allan Gredalof the Society for Teaching and Learning in Higher Education launches its new series of Green Guides. Each guide will deal with some aspect of teaching and learning in higher education. They will be solidly based on relevant research and theory, but the approach will be pragmatic and applied. The guides will be short, with an emphasis on clear, jargon-free expression, and plentiful examples of how the ideas being discussed relate to real teaching situations faced by Canadian academics. Another feature of the guides is their reasonable price, which is made possible by the generous donation of time by STLHE members in writing, reviewing, editing, and distributing these valuable resources.
The idea of Grene Guides originated with our sister organization on the other side of hte world, the Higher Education and Research Development Society of Australasia. HERDSA published its first guide in 1984, and they have now published more htan 20 guides on a wide range of topics related to teaching and learning in higher education. HERDSA has very generously allowed us to use their title for the series, and we will shortly be embarking on a collaborative endeavour to jointly publish some titles in both Canada and Australia. This arrangement has been greatly facilitated by the generous help of Dr. Kym Fraser of Monash University, who chairs the HERDSA publications committee.
Other Grene Guides are in the works and will be published shortly. Meanwhile, any readers inspired to make their own proposals for a new guide are invited to contact one of their series editors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
ch. 1 Preliminary Matters
ch. 2 What is a large class? Do you teach one?
ch. 3 Some fundamental and general problems
ch. 4 Facing our anxiety
ch. 5 Passion, intensity, and energy
ch. 6 Motivatiing
With this splendid monograph by Allan Gredalof the Society for Teaching and Learning in Higher Education launches its new series of Green Guides. Each guide will deal with some aspect of teaching and learning in higher education. They will be solidly based on relevant research and theory, but the approach will be pragmatic and applied. The guides will be short, with an emphasis on clear, jargon-free expression, and plentiful examples of how the ideas being discussed relate to real teaching situations faced by Canadian academics. Another feature of the guides is their reasonable price, which is made possible by the generous donation of time by STLHE members in writing, reviewing, editing, and distributing these valuable resources.
The idea of Grene Guides originated with our sister organization on the other side of hte world, the Higher Education and Research Development Society of Australasia. HERDSA published its first guide in 1984, and they have now published more htan 20 guides on a wide range of topics related to teaching and learning in higher education. HERDSA has very generously allowed us to use their title for the series, and we will shortly be embarking on a collaborative endeavour to jointly publish some titles in both Canada and Australia. This arrangement has been greatly facilitated by the generous help of Dr. Kym Fraser of Monash University, who chairs the HERDSA publications committee.
Other Grene Guides are in the works and will be published shortly. Meanwhile, any readers inspired to make their own proposals for a new guide are invited to contact one of their series editors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
ch. 1 Preliminary Matters
ch. 2 What is a large class? Do you teach one?
ch. 3 Some fundamental and general problems
ch. 4 Facing our anxiety
ch. 5 Passion, intensity, and energy
ch. 6 Motivatiing
Additional Info:
During the twentieth century, theological and religious perspectives have been marginalized, if not utterly excluded, in many of our colleges and universities. The essays in this book argue in different ways for the critical, appreciative, inclusion of theological and religious perspectives in higher education. The contributors believe that even in our secular, religiously disestablished era, religion and God continue to occupy an important and dynamic role in personal and social ...
During the twentieth century, theological and religious perspectives have been marginalized, if not utterly excluded, in many of our colleges and universities. The essays in this book argue in different ways for the critical, appreciative, inclusion of theological and religious perspectives in higher education. The contributors believe that even in our secular, religiously disestablished era, religion and God continue to occupy an important and dynamic role in personal and social ...
Additional Info:
During the twentieth century, theological and religious perspectives have been marginalized, if not utterly excluded, in many of our colleges and universities. The essays in this book argue in different ways for the critical, appreciative, inclusion of theological and religious perspectives in higher education. The contributors believe that even in our secular, religiously disestablished era, religion and God continue to occupy an important and dynamic role in personal and social life. If our colleges and universities are to fulfill their higher aspirations of educating whole persons for the real world in all of its diversity and challenge, we need to go bravely against the flow and "give God tenure." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Contributors
Introduction: Should God Get Tenure? (David W. Gill)
ch. 1 On Being a Professor: The Case of Socrates (Bruce R. Reichenbach)
ch. 2 Academic Excellence: Cliche or Humanizing Vision? (Merold Westphal)
ch. 3 Religion, Science, and the Humanities in the Liberal Arts Curriculum (H. Newton Malony)
ch. 4 Tolstoy and Freud on Our Need for God (Robert C. Roberts)
ch. 5 Religious Toleration and Human rights (Paul A. Marshall)
ch. 6 Christianity, Higher Education, and Socially Marginalized Voices (Lauree Hersh Meyer)
ch. 7 Diversity, Christianity, and Higher Education (Robert G. Clouse)
ch. 8 Evangelical Civility and the Academic Calling (Richard J. Mouw)
ch. 9 Ethics With and Without God (David W. Gill)
ch. 10 C. S. Lewis on Eros as a Means of Grace (Corbin Scott Carnell)
ch. 11 Faith and Imagination (Jill Pelaez Baumgaertner)
ch. 12 Prayer and Higher Education (Carnegie Samuel Calian)
ch. 13 What We Can Learn About Higher Education from the Jesuit (W. Ward Gasque)
ch. 14 The Evangelical Mind in America (Mark A. Knoll)
ch. 15 The Brethren and Higher Education: Tension and Tradition (Donald F. Durnbaugh)
Postscript: J. Omar Good: The Man and His Legacy (Earl C. Kaylor, Jr)
During the twentieth century, theological and religious perspectives have been marginalized, if not utterly excluded, in many of our colleges and universities. The essays in this book argue in different ways for the critical, appreciative, inclusion of theological and religious perspectives in higher education. The contributors believe that even in our secular, religiously disestablished era, religion and God continue to occupy an important and dynamic role in personal and social life. If our colleges and universities are to fulfill their higher aspirations of educating whole persons for the real world in all of its diversity and challenge, we need to go bravely against the flow and "give God tenure." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Contributors
Introduction: Should God Get Tenure? (David W. Gill)
ch. 1 On Being a Professor: The Case of Socrates (Bruce R. Reichenbach)
ch. 2 Academic Excellence: Cliche or Humanizing Vision? (Merold Westphal)
ch. 3 Religion, Science, and the Humanities in the Liberal Arts Curriculum (H. Newton Malony)
ch. 4 Tolstoy and Freud on Our Need for God (Robert C. Roberts)
ch. 5 Religious Toleration and Human rights (Paul A. Marshall)
ch. 6 Christianity, Higher Education, and Socially Marginalized Voices (Lauree Hersh Meyer)
ch. 7 Diversity, Christianity, and Higher Education (Robert G. Clouse)
ch. 8 Evangelical Civility and the Academic Calling (Richard J. Mouw)
ch. 9 Ethics With and Without God (David W. Gill)
ch. 10 C. S. Lewis on Eros as a Means of Grace (Corbin Scott Carnell)
ch. 11 Faith and Imagination (Jill Pelaez Baumgaertner)
ch. 12 Prayer and Higher Education (Carnegie Samuel Calian)
ch. 13 What We Can Learn About Higher Education from the Jesuit (W. Ward Gasque)
ch. 14 The Evangelical Mind in America (Mark A. Knoll)
ch. 15 The Brethren and Higher Education: Tension and Tradition (Donald F. Durnbaugh)
Postscript: J. Omar Good: The Man and His Legacy (Earl C. Kaylor, Jr)

The Impact of Technology on Faculty Development, Life, and Work
Additional Info:
A critical and global issue in higher education today is the implementation of technology in our individual, institutional, and collective settings for the enhancement of teaching and learning in the widest sense. (From the Publisher)
A critical and global issue in higher education today is the implementation of technology in our individual, institutional, and collective settings for the enhancement of teaching and learning in the widest sense. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A critical and global issue in higher education today is the implementation of technology in our individual, institutional, and collective settings for the enhancement of teaching and learning in the widest sense. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Technology's Impact on Faculty Life and Work (Roger G. Baldwin )
ch. 2 Brave New World? The Challenge of Technology to Time-Honored Pedagogies and Traditional Structures (Anita Gandolfo )
ch. 3 Instructional Design for the New Technologies (Frank Gillespie )
ch. 4 Community On-Line: New Professional Environments for Higher Education (Tony Di Petta )
ch. 5 Overcoming Obstacles Through Use: A Case Study(Karen T. Carey, Shelly M. Dorn )
ch. 6 Using Technology in Faculty Development: Practical Examples (Kay Herr Gillespie ; with contributors)
Index
A critical and global issue in higher education today is the implementation of technology in our individual, institutional, and collective settings for the enhancement of teaching and learning in the widest sense. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Technology's Impact on Faculty Life and Work (Roger G. Baldwin )
ch. 2 Brave New World? The Challenge of Technology to Time-Honored Pedagogies and Traditional Structures (Anita Gandolfo )
ch. 3 Instructional Design for the New Technologies (Frank Gillespie )
ch. 4 Community On-Line: New Professional Environments for Higher Education (Tony Di Petta )
ch. 5 Overcoming Obstacles Through Use: A Case Study(Karen T. Carey, Shelly M. Dorn )
ch. 6 Using Technology in Faculty Development: Practical Examples (Kay Herr Gillespie ; with contributors)
Index
Additional Info:
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social ...
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social ...
Additional Info:
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social roles of Protestant theologians and the educational institutions in which they have pursued their scholarship and teaching. Ranging from analyses of the New England Puritan Cotton Mather to contemporary theologians as "public intellectuals," Gilpin proposes that we find out what theology is by asking what theologians do. By showing how particular cultural problems have always shaped the work of theologians, Gilpin's work profoundly illuminates the foundations of American academic theology, providing insights that will help guide its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: What Do Theologians Do?
ch. 1 The Fruition of the Seminary Ideal, 1720-1830
ch. 2 Scholarship and the Culture of Protestantism, 1830-1880
ch. 3 The Case for Theology in the University, 1880-1930
ch. 4 Intellectual Center of the Church's Life, 1930-1960
ch. 5 The Background of Possibilities
Notes
Index
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social roles of Protestant theologians and the educational institutions in which they have pursued their scholarship and teaching. Ranging from analyses of the New England Puritan Cotton Mather to contemporary theologians as "public intellectuals," Gilpin proposes that we find out what theology is by asking what theologians do. By showing how particular cultural problems have always shaped the work of theologians, Gilpin's work profoundly illuminates the foundations of American academic theology, providing insights that will help guide its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: What Do Theologians Do?
ch. 1 The Fruition of the Seminary Ideal, 1720-1830
ch. 2 Scholarship and the Culture of Protestantism, 1830-1880
ch. 3 The Case for Theology in the University, 1880-1930
ch. 4 Intellectual Center of the Church's Life, 1930-1960
ch. 5 The Background of Possibilities
Notes
Index

Scholarship Assessed: Evaluation of the Professoriate
Additional Info:
Begun under the oversight of Ernest L. Boyer and completed by authors Glassick, Huber, and Maeroff, Scholarship Assessed examines the changing nature of scholarship in today's colleges and universities. It proposes new standards for assessing scholarship and evaluating faculty with special emphasis on methods for documenting effective scholarship. Based on the findings of the Carnegie Foundation's National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, this is an excellent ...
Begun under the oversight of Ernest L. Boyer and completed by authors Glassick, Huber, and Maeroff, Scholarship Assessed examines the changing nature of scholarship in today's colleges and universities. It proposes new standards for assessing scholarship and evaluating faculty with special emphasis on methods for documenting effective scholarship. Based on the findings of the Carnegie Foundation's National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, this is an excellent ...
Additional Info:
Begun under the oversight of Ernest L. Boyer and completed by authors Glassick, Huber, and Maeroff, Scholarship Assessed examines the changing nature of scholarship in today's colleges and universities. It proposes new standards for assessing scholarship and evaluating faculty with special emphasis on methods for documenting effective scholarship. Based on the findings of the Carnegie Foundation's National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, this is an excellent resource for anyone engaged in the debate about creating institutional standards of rigor and quality in our colleges and universities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Prologue: Scholarship - A Personal Journey
ch. 1 Scholarship in Transition
ch. 2 Standards of Scholarly Work
ch. 3 Documenting Scholarship
ch. 4 Trusting the Process
ch. 5 The Qualities of a Scholar
App. A Questionnaire for the National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, 1994
App. B Results of the National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, 1994
App. C Technical Notes
App. D Carnegie Classifications
Notes
Index
Begun under the oversight of Ernest L. Boyer and completed by authors Glassick, Huber, and Maeroff, Scholarship Assessed examines the changing nature of scholarship in today's colleges and universities. It proposes new standards for assessing scholarship and evaluating faculty with special emphasis on methods for documenting effective scholarship. Based on the findings of the Carnegie Foundation's National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, this is an excellent resource for anyone engaged in the debate about creating institutional standards of rigor and quality in our colleges and universities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Prologue: Scholarship - A Personal Journey
ch. 1 Scholarship in Transition
ch. 2 Standards of Scholarly Work
ch. 3 Documenting Scholarship
ch. 4 Trusting the Process
ch. 5 The Qualities of a Scholar
App. A Questionnaire for the National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, 1994
App. B Results of the National Survey on the Reexamination of Faculty Roles and Rewards, 1994
App. C Technical Notes
App. D Carnegie Classifications
Notes
Index

Gender on Campus: Issues for College Women
Additional Info:
Where adolescents and young adults are looking for a solid, wide-ranging introduction to gender issues, Gmelch's survey may be a useful acquisition. Although its focus is the college campus, cultural anthropologist Gmelch, head of the women's studies program at Union College, takes a straightforward, practical approach that may be helpful in other contexts as well. Gmelch incorporates discussions of race, class, disability, sexual identity, body image, violence, and substance abuse ...
Where adolescents and young adults are looking for a solid, wide-ranging introduction to gender issues, Gmelch's survey may be a useful acquisition. Although its focus is the college campus, cultural anthropologist Gmelch, head of the women's studies program at Union College, takes a straightforward, practical approach that may be helpful in other contexts as well. Gmelch incorporates discussions of race, class, disability, sexual identity, body image, violence, and substance abuse ...
Additional Info:
Where adolescents and young adults are looking for a solid, wide-ranging introduction to gender issues, Gmelch's survey may be a useful acquisition. Although its focus is the college campus, cultural anthropologist Gmelch, head of the women's studies program at Union College, takes a straightforward, practical approach that may be helpful in other contexts as well. Gmelch incorporates discussions of race, class, disability, sexual identity, body image, violence, and substance abuse in brief but focused chapters on gender issues; and she includes material on language and gender, opportunities for women in sports, and treatment of women in the media, the workplace in general, and politics. Each chapter closes with bullet-pointed "Did You Know?" and "What You Can Do" lists and annotated comments on videos and organizations; most include one or two apropos cartoons (sources include Nicole Hollander, Garry Trudeau, and the New Yorker). Mary Carroll (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Gender Issues on Campus
ch. 1 What Is Feminism?
ch. 2 Sexism in the Genderless Classroom
ch. 3 Language and Gender
ch. 4 Women and Sports
Dealing With Diversity
ch. 5 Sexual Identity and Homophobia
ch. 6 Racism in the Colorblind Academy
ch. 7 Beyond the Coed
ch. 8 Women and Disability
Sexuality and the Body
ch. 9 Eating and Body Image
ch. 10 Women, Drinking, and Drugs
ch. 11 Sexuality and Reproductive Issues
ch. 12 Rape and Sexual Assault
College and Beyond
ch. 13 Women in the Media
ch. 14 Women and Work
ch. 15 Women and Politics
Appendix Safety on Campus
Notes
Index
Where adolescents and young adults are looking for a solid, wide-ranging introduction to gender issues, Gmelch's survey may be a useful acquisition. Although its focus is the college campus, cultural anthropologist Gmelch, head of the women's studies program at Union College, takes a straightforward, practical approach that may be helpful in other contexts as well. Gmelch incorporates discussions of race, class, disability, sexual identity, body image, violence, and substance abuse in brief but focused chapters on gender issues; and she includes material on language and gender, opportunities for women in sports, and treatment of women in the media, the workplace in general, and politics. Each chapter closes with bullet-pointed "Did You Know?" and "What You Can Do" lists and annotated comments on videos and organizations; most include one or two apropos cartoons (sources include Nicole Hollander, Garry Trudeau, and the New Yorker). Mary Carroll (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Gender Issues on Campus
ch. 1 What Is Feminism?
ch. 2 Sexism in the Genderless Classroom
ch. 3 Language and Gender
ch. 4 Women and Sports
Dealing With Diversity
ch. 5 Sexual Identity and Homophobia
ch. 6 Racism in the Colorblind Academy
ch. 7 Beyond the Coed
ch. 8 Women and Disability
Sexuality and the Body
ch. 9 Eating and Body Image
ch. 10 Women, Drinking, and Drugs
ch. 11 Sexuality and Reproductive Issues
ch. 12 Rape and Sexual Assault
College and Beyond
ch. 13 Women in the Media
ch. 14 Women and Work
ch. 15 Women and Politics
Appendix Safety on Campus
Notes
Index


Teaching with Style: A Practical Guide to Enhancing Learning by Understanding Teaching and Learning Styles
Additional Info:
Practical
Grasha never strays from showing readers how the content applies to them and their teaching.
Comprehensive
The book takes the reader on a journey that includes an understanding of the elements of teaching and learning styles; the need for discovering Who am I as a teacher? and What do I want to become?; personal change processes in teaching; exploring one's philosophy of teaching; and an integrative ...
Practical
Grasha never strays from showing readers how the content applies to them and their teaching.
Comprehensive
The book takes the reader on a journey that includes an understanding of the elements of teaching and learning styles; the need for discovering Who am I as a teacher? and What do I want to become?; personal change processes in teaching; exploring one's philosophy of teaching; and an integrative ...
Additional Info:
Practical
Grasha never strays from showing readers how the content applies to them and their teaching.
Comprehensive
The book takes the reader on a journey that includes an understanding of the elements of teaching and learning styles; the need for discovering Who am I as a teacher? and What do I want to become?; personal change processes in teaching; exploring one's philosophy of teaching; and an integrative model for selecting instructional processes that are keyed to different blends of the Expert, Formal Authority, Personal Model, Facilitator, and Delegator styles of teaching and the Independent, Avoidant, Collaborative, Dependent, Competitive, and Participant learning styles.
Creative
Written to integrate the involvement of a workshop with the information of a text, Teaching With Style captures and holds our attention. Throughout each of the eight chapters, a variety of self-reflection activities - including the Teaching Styles Inventory, Grasha-Riechmann Student Learning Style Scales, Metaphors We Teach By Questionnaire, inventories of Psychological Type, Theoretical and HIstorical Assumptions About Teaching, and numerous checklists - help faculty motivate learners, promote critical thinking, encourage active learning and retention, and develop self-directed learners.
Scholarly
Provides citations to more than 200 works by researchers and practitioners across disciplines.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Identifying the Elements of Teaching Style
ch. 2 The Role of Self-Reflection in Enhancing Our Teaching Style
ch. 3 Developing a Conceptual Base for Our Teaching Style
ch. 4 An Integrated Model of Teaching and Learning Style
ch. 5 Teaching and Learning Styles in the Management of Five Basic Instructional Concerns
ch. 6 Managing the Expert, Formal Authority, Personal Model Styles
ch. 7 Developing Consultant, Resource Person, Active Listening, and Group Process Skills
ch. 8 Managing the Facilitator and Delegator Style of Teaching
References
Subject/Author Index
Practical
Grasha never strays from showing readers how the content applies to them and their teaching.
Comprehensive
The book takes the reader on a journey that includes an understanding of the elements of teaching and learning styles; the need for discovering Who am I as a teacher? and What do I want to become?; personal change processes in teaching; exploring one's philosophy of teaching; and an integrative model for selecting instructional processes that are keyed to different blends of the Expert, Formal Authority, Personal Model, Facilitator, and Delegator styles of teaching and the Independent, Avoidant, Collaborative, Dependent, Competitive, and Participant learning styles.
Creative
Written to integrate the involvement of a workshop with the information of a text, Teaching With Style captures and holds our attention. Throughout each of the eight chapters, a variety of self-reflection activities - including the Teaching Styles Inventory, Grasha-Riechmann Student Learning Style Scales, Metaphors We Teach By Questionnaire, inventories of Psychological Type, Theoretical and HIstorical Assumptions About Teaching, and numerous checklists - help faculty motivate learners, promote critical thinking, encourage active learning and retention, and develop self-directed learners.
Scholarly
Provides citations to more than 200 works by researchers and practitioners across disciplines.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Identifying the Elements of Teaching Style
ch. 2 The Role of Self-Reflection in Enhancing Our Teaching Style
ch. 3 Developing a Conceptual Base for Our Teaching Style
ch. 4 An Integrated Model of Teaching and Learning Style
ch. 5 Teaching and Learning Styles in the Management of Five Basic Instructional Concerns
ch. 6 Managing the Expert, Formal Authority, Personal Model Styles
ch. 7 Developing Consultant, Resource Person, Active Listening, and Group Process Skills
ch. 8 Managing the Facilitator and Delegator Style of Teaching
References
Subject/Author Index

Calling: Essays on Teaching in the Mother Tongue
Additional Info:
With a mixture of autobiographical facts and literary insights, the author (English, Kalamazoo Coll.) supports her belief that the ``motherheart must be at the center of all teaching.'' Teachers should ``create an environment where human beings can grow in and toward the fullness of themselves.'' This type of teaching is exemplified by the women teachers in higher education of the mid-1800s who, as the author found following ...
With a mixture of autobiographical facts and literary insights, the author (English, Kalamazoo Coll.) supports her belief that the ``motherheart must be at the center of all teaching.'' Teachers should ``create an environment where human beings can grow in and toward the fullness of themselves.'' This type of teaching is exemplified by the women teachers in higher education of the mid-1800s who, as the author found following ...
Additional Info:
With a mixture of autobiographical facts and literary insights, the author (English, Kalamazoo Coll.) supports her belief that the ``motherheart must be at the center of all teaching.'' Teachers should ``create an environment where human beings can grow in and toward the fullness of themselves.'' This type of teaching is exemplified by the women teachers in higher education of the mid-1800s who, as the author found following her ``calling'' to Kalamazoo College, were the leaders in a profession that often brings teacher and student together in crisis situations, situations that the author believes are better confronted from a feminist perspective. This is a well-written, often humorous account of one woman's entry into the feminist side of academe. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The fortunate fall
The fair arcadian hill, or "Yes there really is"
Alma mater
A rite of passage
Serafina: an angel in my house
A good and worthy voice
Man hating: voices in the dark
Teacher’s pet
Orphans of the storm: the F-word and the post-feminist generation
Vocation
A purple creature
No abstract fires: a new year’s message
Unlearning not to speak, or Why the caged bird sings
A room of one’s own revisited, or, Running away to New Jersey and other holy places
To the land of the dead and back again: my "last lecture."
With a mixture of autobiographical facts and literary insights, the author (English, Kalamazoo Coll.) supports her belief that the ``motherheart must be at the center of all teaching.'' Teachers should ``create an environment where human beings can grow in and toward the fullness of themselves.'' This type of teaching is exemplified by the women teachers in higher education of the mid-1800s who, as the author found following her ``calling'' to Kalamazoo College, were the leaders in a profession that often brings teacher and student together in crisis situations, situations that the author believes are better confronted from a feminist perspective. This is a well-written, often humorous account of one woman's entry into the feminist side of academe. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The fortunate fall
The fair arcadian hill, or "Yes there really is"
Alma mater
A rite of passage
Serafina: an angel in my house
A good and worthy voice
Man hating: voices in the dark
Teacher’s pet
Orphans of the storm: the F-word and the post-feminist generation
Vocation
A purple creature
No abstract fires: a new year’s message
Unlearning not to speak, or Why the caged bird sings
A room of one’s own revisited, or, Running away to New Jersey and other holy places
To the land of the dead and back again: my "last lecture."

Sharing Faith: A Comprehensive Approach to Religious Education and Pastoral Ministry
Additional Info:
The long-awaited masterwork from the author of Christian Religious Education in which he applies the "shared praxis" approach to the whole of religious education and pastoral ministry. (From the Publisher)
The long-awaited masterwork from the author of Christian Religious Education in which he applies the "shared praxis" approach to the whole of religious education and pastoral ministry. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The long-awaited masterwork from the author of Christian Religious Education in which he applies the "shared praxis" approach to the whole of religious education and pastoral ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part 1 Foundations
Prologue
ch. 1 Educating for Conation in Christian Faith
ch. 2 Epistemology Re-visioned: In Search of Conation
ch. 3 The Dimensions and Dynamics of "Being" Engaged for Conation in Christian Faith
Part 2 An Approach: Shared Christian Praxis
ch. 4 An Overview of Shared Christian Praxis
ch. 5 The Focusing Activity in Shared Praxis
ch. 6 Movement 1: Naming/Expressing "Present Action"
ch. 7 Movement 2: Critical Reflection on Present Action
ch. 8 Movement 3: Making Accessible Christian Story and Vision
ch. 9 Movement 4: Dialectical Hermeneutics to Appropriate Story/Vision to Participants’ Stories and Visions
The long-awaited masterwork from the author of Christian Religious Education in which he applies the "shared praxis" approach to the whole of religious education and pastoral ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part 1 Foundations
Prologue
ch. 1 Educating for Conation in Christian Faith
ch. 2 Epistemology Re-visioned: In Search of Conation
ch. 3 The Dimensions and Dynamics of "Being" Engaged for Conation in Christian Faith
Part 2 An Approach: Shared Christian Praxis
ch. 4 An Overview of Shared Christian Praxis
ch. 5 The Focusing Activity in Shared Praxis
ch. 6 Movement 1: Naming/Expressing "Present Action"
ch. 7 Movement 2: Critical Reflection on Present Action
ch. 8 Movement 3: Making Accessible Christian Story and Vision
ch. 9 Movement 4: Dialectical Hermeneutics to Appropriate Story/Vision to Participants’ Stories and Visions

Christian Religious Education: Sharing our Story and Vision
Additional Info:
Blends the best contemporary biblical scholarship, theology, and theories of education to give a coherent account of the nature, purpose, context, method, stages, and role of teachers in Christian education. (From the Publisher)
Blends the best contemporary biblical scholarship, theology, and theories of education to give a coherent account of the nature, purpose, context, method, stages, and role of teachers in Christian education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Blends the best contemporary biblical scholarship, theology, and theories of education to give a coherent account of the nature, purpose, context, method, stages, and role of teachers in Christian education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Nature of Christian Religious Education
Education in Time
A Coming to Terms
The Purpose of Christian Religious Education
Education for the Kingdom of God
For Christian Faith
For Human Freedom
The Context of Christian Religious Education
On Becoming Christian Together
An Approach To Christian Religious Education: Shared Praxis
In Search of a "Way of Knowing" for Christian Religious Education
Some Philosophical Roots for a Praxis Way of Knowing
Shared Christian Praxis
Shared Praxis in Praxis
Readiness For Christian Religious Education by Shared Praxis
Shared Praxis from a Piagetian Perspective
The Copartners in Christian Religious Education
Our Students, Our Selves
Postscript: Until Break of Day
Bibliography
Index
Blends the best contemporary biblical scholarship, theology, and theories of education to give a coherent account of the nature, purpose, context, method, stages, and role of teachers in Christian education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Nature of Christian Religious Education
Education in Time
A Coming to Terms
The Purpose of Christian Religious Education
Education for the Kingdom of God
For Christian Faith
For Human Freedom
The Context of Christian Religious Education
On Becoming Christian Together
An Approach To Christian Religious Education: Shared Praxis
In Search of a "Way of Knowing" for Christian Religious Education
Some Philosophical Roots for a Praxis Way of Knowing
Shared Christian Praxis
Shared Praxis in Praxis
Readiness For Christian Religious Education by Shared Praxis
Shared Praxis from a Piagetian Perspective
The Copartners in Christian Religious Education
Our Students, Our Selves
Postscript: Until Break of Day
Bibliography
Index

Honored but Invisible: An Inside Look at Teaching in Community Colleges
Additional Info:
Based on the most extensive research on community college teaching to date, this book examines the nature of teaching and the institutional forces that shape it in a variety of course settings, ranging from innovative approaches to complex subjects to conventional didactic instruction.
Drawing on observations of and interviews with over 300 instructors and administrators, this book documents the idiosyncratic instructional practices of teachers who learn to teach primarily ...
Based on the most extensive research on community college teaching to date, this book examines the nature of teaching and the institutional forces that shape it in a variety of course settings, ranging from innovative approaches to complex subjects to conventional didactic instruction.
Drawing on observations of and interviews with over 300 instructors and administrators, this book documents the idiosyncratic instructional practices of teachers who learn to teach primarily ...
Additional Info:
Based on the most extensive research on community college teaching to date, this book examines the nature of teaching and the institutional forces that shape it in a variety of course settings, ranging from innovative approaches to complex subjects to conventional didactic instruction.
Drawing on observations of and interviews with over 300 instructors and administrators, this book documents the idiosyncratic instructional practices of teachers who learn to teach primarily by trial and error. It argues that in order to realize their enormous potential, community colleges must take greater advantage of the many institutional influences on the quality of teaching--such as personnel policies, instructor training, and the culture established by administrators--only then will they be able to successfully carry out their many roles in both mainstream education and in workforce development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Who Cares for Teaching in Community Colleges? The Rationale and Methodology of Our Inquiry
ch. 1 Instructors' Approaches to Pedagogy and the Multiple Conceptions of "Good Teaching"
ch. 2 The Modal Classroom: The Varieties of Lecture/Discussion
ch. 3 Lecture/Workshop and "Hands-On" Learning: The Complexities of Occupational Instruction
ch. 4 Literacy Practices in the Classroom: The Foundation of Schooling
ch. 5 Remedial/Developmental Education: The Best and the Worst
ch. 6 Standards and Content: The Special Dilemmas of Community Colleges
ch. 7 Innovative Practices: The Pedagogical and Institutional Challenges
ch. 8 The Institutional Influences on Teaching: The Potential Power of "Teaching Colleges"
ch. 9 Funding and Policy: The Neglect of Teaching
ch. 10 Alternative Futures: Creating the "Teaching College"
References
Appendix
Index
Based on the most extensive research on community college teaching to date, this book examines the nature of teaching and the institutional forces that shape it in a variety of course settings, ranging from innovative approaches to complex subjects to conventional didactic instruction.
Drawing on observations of and interviews with over 300 instructors and administrators, this book documents the idiosyncratic instructional practices of teachers who learn to teach primarily by trial and error. It argues that in order to realize their enormous potential, community colleges must take greater advantage of the many institutional influences on the quality of teaching--such as personnel policies, instructor training, and the culture established by administrators--only then will they be able to successfully carry out their many roles in both mainstream education and in workforce development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Who Cares for Teaching in Community Colleges? The Rationale and Methodology of Our Inquiry
ch. 1 Instructors' Approaches to Pedagogy and the Multiple Conceptions of "Good Teaching"
ch. 2 The Modal Classroom: The Varieties of Lecture/Discussion
ch. 3 Lecture/Workshop and "Hands-On" Learning: The Complexities of Occupational Instruction
ch. 4 Literacy Practices in the Classroom: The Foundation of Schooling
ch. 5 Remedial/Developmental Education: The Best and the Worst
ch. 6 Standards and Content: The Special Dilemmas of Community Colleges
ch. 7 Innovative Practices: The Pedagogical and Institutional Challenges
ch. 8 The Institutional Influences on Teaching: The Potential Power of "Teaching Colleges"
ch. 9 Funding and Policy: The Neglect of Teaching
ch. 10 Alternative Futures: Creating the "Teaching College"
References
Appendix
Index

Computer Networking and Scholarly Communication in the Twenty-First-Century University
Additional Info:
This book explores the various ways in which computer networking, and more specifically the Internet, is changing the practices, the structure, and the products of academic scholarship. It considers research, teaching, and dissemination of knowledge across a range of disciplines in the humanities, sciences, and social sciences in order to identify particular uses of networking that will come to constitute the academic world of the future. The contributors consider such ...
This book explores the various ways in which computer networking, and more specifically the Internet, is changing the practices, the structure, and the products of academic scholarship. It considers research, teaching, and dissemination of knowledge across a range of disciplines in the humanities, sciences, and social sciences in order to identify particular uses of networking that will come to constitute the academic world of the future. The contributors consider such ...
Additional Info:
This book explores the various ways in which computer networking, and more specifically the Internet, is changing the practices, the structure, and the products of academic scholarship. It considers research, teaching, and dissemination of knowledge across a range of disciplines in the humanities, sciences, and social sciences in order to identify particular uses of networking that will come to constitute the academic world of the future. The contributors consider such themes as how networking and particular software environments can be used to support inquiry within research specialties and how scholars in diverse disciplines respond to the availability of new networked channels of scholarly communication. In the context of education, they argue that networking can reconfigure the process of learning, encompassing new audiences, new relationships with teachers, and new learning skills adapted for the network environment. The products of such new configurations are also discussed. The future of electronic journal publication is considered by innovators who have designed some of the first experiments in refereed electronic journal publication. Finally, the new responsibilities and roles of the academic library and academic publishers in a networked environment are debated. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Computer Networking, Communication, and Scholarship (Teresa M. Harrison and Timothy Stephen)
ch. 2 How Is the Medium the Message? Notes on the Design of Networked Communication (Peter Lyman)
ch. 3 Institutional and Policy Issues in the Development of the Digital Library (Brian Kahin)
ch. 4 Assessing the Costs of Technopoly: Constructing Scholarly Services in Today's Network Environment (Timothy Stephen and Teresa M. Harrison)
ch. 5 Computer Networking and Textual Sources in the Humanities (Susan Hockey)
ch. 6 Cooperative and Collaborative Mediated Research (Duncan Sanderson)
ch. 7 How Do You Get a Hundred Strangers to Agree?: Computer Mediated Communication and Collaboration (Fay Sudweeks and Sheizaf Rafaeli)
ch. 8 Living Inside the (Operating) System: Community in Virtual Reality (John Unsworth)
ch. 9 The Multifaceted and Novel Nature of Using Cyber-Texts as Research Data
ch. 10 Computer Networking in Ornithology (Jack P. Hailman)
ch. 11 Roadmap to Scholarly Electronic Communication and Publishing at the American Mathematical Society (David L. Rodgers, Kevin W. Curnow, Drury R. Burton, Greg S. Ullmann, William B. Woolf)
ch. 12 The Labyrinth: An Electronic Information Network for Medieval Studies (Deborah Everhart)
ch. 13 Online Education: The Future (Linda Harasim)
ch. 14 Hypermedia and Higher Education (J. L. Lemke)
ch. 15 Equal Access to Computer Networks for Students and Scholars with Disabilities (Sheryl E. Burgstahler)
ch. 16 Medieval Misfits: An Undergraduate Discussion List (Carolyn P. Schriber)
ch. 17 VICE in REST (William D. Graziadei)
ch. 18 The Solidarity Network: Universities, Computer-Mediated Communication, and Labor Studies in Canada (Jeff Taylor)
ch. 19 Creating a Virtual Academic Community: Scholarship and Community in Wide-Area Multiple-User Synchronous Discussions (Michael Day, Eric Crump, Rebeca Rickly)
ch. 20 Dimensions of Electronic Journals (Brian Gaines)
ch. 21 Electronic Academic Journals: From Disciplines to "Seminars"? (Jean-Claude Guédon)
ch. 22 The Electronic Journal and Its Implications for the Electronic Library (Cliff McKnight, Andrew Dillon, Brian Shackel)
ch. 23 The Role of Academic Libraries in the Dissemination of Scholarly Information in the Electronic Environment (Lyman Ross, Paul Philbin, Merri Beth Lavagnino, Albert Joy)
ch. 24 The Body in the Virtual Library: Rethinking Scholarly Communication (Kenneth Arnold)
ch. 25 Equality in Access to Network Information by Scholars with Disabilities (Tom McNulty)
ch. 26 Building New Tools for the Twenty-First-Century University: Providing Access to Visual Information (David L. Austin)
ch. 27 A Short Primer for Communicating on the Global Net (John December)
List of Contributors
Index
This book explores the various ways in which computer networking, and more specifically the Internet, is changing the practices, the structure, and the products of academic scholarship. It considers research, teaching, and dissemination of knowledge across a range of disciplines in the humanities, sciences, and social sciences in order to identify particular uses of networking that will come to constitute the academic world of the future. The contributors consider such themes as how networking and particular software environments can be used to support inquiry within research specialties and how scholars in diverse disciplines respond to the availability of new networked channels of scholarly communication. In the context of education, they argue that networking can reconfigure the process of learning, encompassing new audiences, new relationships with teachers, and new learning skills adapted for the network environment. The products of such new configurations are also discussed. The future of electronic journal publication is considered by innovators who have designed some of the first experiments in refereed electronic journal publication. Finally, the new responsibilities and roles of the academic library and academic publishers in a networked environment are debated. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Computer Networking, Communication, and Scholarship (Teresa M. Harrison and Timothy Stephen)
ch. 2 How Is the Medium the Message? Notes on the Design of Networked Communication (Peter Lyman)
ch. 3 Institutional and Policy Issues in the Development of the Digital Library (Brian Kahin)
ch. 4 Assessing the Costs of Technopoly: Constructing Scholarly Services in Today's Network Environment (Timothy Stephen and Teresa M. Harrison)
ch. 5 Computer Networking and Textual Sources in the Humanities (Susan Hockey)
ch. 6 Cooperative and Collaborative Mediated Research (Duncan Sanderson)
ch. 7 How Do You Get a Hundred Strangers to Agree?: Computer Mediated Communication and Collaboration (Fay Sudweeks and Sheizaf Rafaeli)
ch. 8 Living Inside the (Operating) System: Community in Virtual Reality (John Unsworth)
ch. 9 The Multifaceted and Novel Nature of Using Cyber-Texts as Research Data
ch. 10 Computer Networking in Ornithology (Jack P. Hailman)
ch. 11 Roadmap to Scholarly Electronic Communication and Publishing at the American Mathematical Society (David L. Rodgers, Kevin W. Curnow, Drury R. Burton, Greg S. Ullmann, William B. Woolf)
ch. 12 The Labyrinth: An Electronic Information Network for Medieval Studies (Deborah Everhart)
ch. 13 Online Education: The Future (Linda Harasim)
ch. 14 Hypermedia and Higher Education (J. L. Lemke)
ch. 15 Equal Access to Computer Networks for Students and Scholars with Disabilities (Sheryl E. Burgstahler)
ch. 16 Medieval Misfits: An Undergraduate Discussion List (Carolyn P. Schriber)
ch. 17 VICE in REST (William D. Graziadei)
ch. 18 The Solidarity Network: Universities, Computer-Mediated Communication, and Labor Studies in Canada (Jeff Taylor)
ch. 19 Creating a Virtual Academic Community: Scholarship and Community in Wide-Area Multiple-User Synchronous Discussions (Michael Day, Eric Crump, Rebeca Rickly)
ch. 20 Dimensions of Electronic Journals (Brian Gaines)
ch. 21 Electronic Academic Journals: From Disciplines to "Seminars"? (Jean-Claude Guédon)
ch. 22 The Electronic Journal and Its Implications for the Electronic Library (Cliff McKnight, Andrew Dillon, Brian Shackel)
ch. 23 The Role of Academic Libraries in the Dissemination of Scholarly Information in the Electronic Environment (Lyman Ross, Paul Philbin, Merri Beth Lavagnino, Albert Joy)
ch. 24 The Body in the Virtual Library: Rethinking Scholarly Communication (Kenneth Arnold)
ch. 25 Equality in Access to Network Information by Scholars with Disabilities (Tom McNulty)
ch. 26 Building New Tools for the Twenty-First-Century University: Providing Access to Visual Information (David L. Austin)
ch. 27 A Short Primer for Communicating on the Global Net (John December)
List of Contributors
Index
Additional Info:
The purpose of this volume, according to the editors, "is to provide historical perspective necessary for measuring the strength, vitality, and character as well as the weaknesses and failures of evangelical theological institutions." This study accomplishes this goal by examining the origins, distinctive contributions, and tensions within theological education in the evangelical tradition. The essays are organized by themes: a historical survey of theological training in various theological traditions, the ...
The purpose of this volume, according to the editors, "is to provide historical perspective necessary for measuring the strength, vitality, and character as well as the weaknesses and failures of evangelical theological institutions." This study accomplishes this goal by examining the origins, distinctive contributions, and tensions within theological education in the evangelical tradition. The essays are organized by themes: a historical survey of theological training in various theological traditions, the ...
Additional Info:
The purpose of this volume, according to the editors, "is to provide historical perspective necessary for measuring the strength, vitality, and character as well as the weaknesses and failures of evangelical theological institutions." This study accomplishes this goal by examining the origins, distinctive contributions, and tensions within theological education in the evangelical tradition. The essays are organized by themes: a historical survey of theological training in various theological traditions, the place of spiritual formation, the role of women in theological education, the relationship between the academy and the church, and perspectives on the future of evangelical theological education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Richard J. Mouw)
Introduction (D. G. Hart, R. Albert Mohler, Jr.)
Contributors
ch. 1 The Baptist Tradition (Timothy George)
ch. 2 The Early Methodist Episcopal Experience (Russell E. Richey)
ch. 3 Holiness Churches (Melvin E. Dieter)
ch. 4 Presbyterian and Methodist Education (Gary Scott Smith)
ch. 5 The Era of Protestant Orthodoxy (Richard A. Muller)
ch. 6 New Divinity Schools of the Prophets (David W. Kling)
ch. 7 The Nineteenth Century (James E. Bradley)
ch. 8 Ministry to Women in the Antebellum Seminaries (Karen E. Gedge)
ch. 9 Learning in the Margins (Virginia Lieson Brereton)
ch. 10 Science and the Presbyterian Academies (Nina Reid-Maroney)
ch. 11 Spurgeon and British Evangelical Theological Education (David W. Bebbington)
ch. 12 Kuyper and Dutch Theological Education (James D. Bratt)
ch. 13 Canadian Protestant Theological Education (James D. Bratt)
ch. 14 Educating the Church (Gabriel Fackre)
ch. 15 Thinking of the Future (Albert Mohler, Jr.)
ch. 16 Challenge of Evangelical Theological Education (Albert Mohler, Jr.)
ch. 17 Educating for a Countercultural Spirituality (David F. Wells)
Bibliographical Essay (D. G. Hart)
Index
The purpose of this volume, according to the editors, "is to provide historical perspective necessary for measuring the strength, vitality, and character as well as the weaknesses and failures of evangelical theological institutions." This study accomplishes this goal by examining the origins, distinctive contributions, and tensions within theological education in the evangelical tradition. The essays are organized by themes: a historical survey of theological training in various theological traditions, the place of spiritual formation, the role of women in theological education, the relationship between the academy and the church, and perspectives on the future of evangelical theological education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Richard J. Mouw)
Introduction (D. G. Hart, R. Albert Mohler, Jr.)
Contributors
ch. 1 The Baptist Tradition (Timothy George)
ch. 2 The Early Methodist Episcopal Experience (Russell E. Richey)
ch. 3 Holiness Churches (Melvin E. Dieter)
ch. 4 Presbyterian and Methodist Education (Gary Scott Smith)
ch. 5 The Era of Protestant Orthodoxy (Richard A. Muller)
ch. 6 New Divinity Schools of the Prophets (David W. Kling)
ch. 7 The Nineteenth Century (James E. Bradley)
ch. 8 Ministry to Women in the Antebellum Seminaries (Karen E. Gedge)
ch. 9 Learning in the Margins (Virginia Lieson Brereton)
ch. 10 Science and the Presbyterian Academies (Nina Reid-Maroney)
ch. 11 Spurgeon and British Evangelical Theological Education (David W. Bebbington)
ch. 12 Kuyper and Dutch Theological Education (James D. Bratt)
ch. 13 Canadian Protestant Theological Education (James D. Bratt)
ch. 14 Educating the Church (Gabriel Fackre)
ch. 15 Thinking of the Future (Albert Mohler, Jr.)
ch. 16 Challenge of Evangelical Theological Education (Albert Mohler, Jr.)
ch. 17 Educating for a Countercultural Spirituality (David F. Wells)
Bibliographical Essay (D. G. Hart)
Index


Teaching American Students: A Guide for International Faculty and Teaching Assistants
Additional Info:
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities ...
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities ...
Additional Info:
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities and offers practical strategies for teaching, including how to give clear presentations, how to teach interactively, and how to communicate effectively. Also included are illustrative examples as well as advice from international faculty and teaching assistants. Appendices offer concrete suggestions on topics from planning the first day of class to grading papers and problem sets. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Starting out : a quick guide for beginning teachers
ch. 2 Assumptions that affect teaching in the American classroom
ch. 3 Bridging the gap : approaching your students and helping them approach you
ch. 4 Giving presentations that students can understand
ch. 5 Leading a discussion : providing direction and continuity
ch. 6 Understanding meanings beyond words
ch. 7 Appendices
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities and offers practical strategies for teaching, including how to give clear presentations, how to teach interactively, and how to communicate effectively. Also included are illustrative examples as well as advice from international faculty and teaching assistants. Appendices offer concrete suggestions on topics from planning the first day of class to grading papers and problem sets. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Starting out : a quick guide for beginning teachers
ch. 2 Assumptions that affect teaching in the American classroom
ch. 3 Bridging the gap : approaching your students and helping them approach you
ch. 4 Giving presentations that students can understand
ch. 5 Leading a discussion : providing direction and continuity
ch. 6 Understanding meanings beyond words
ch. 7 Appendices
Additional Info:
American church-related liberal arts colleges are dedicated to two traditions: Christian thought and liberal learning. According to Haynes, the moral continuity of these traditions was severed by the Holocaust. Because so many representations of these traditions contributed to the Nazis' ideological and physical efforts to annihilate millions of men, women, and children, it is unclear whether these traditions can any longer be said to facilitate human flourishing. Haynes presents a ...
American church-related liberal arts colleges are dedicated to two traditions: Christian thought and liberal learning. According to Haynes, the moral continuity of these traditions was severed by the Holocaust. Because so many representations of these traditions contributed to the Nazis' ideological and physical efforts to annihilate millions of men, women, and children, it is unclear whether these traditions can any longer be said to facilitate human flourishing. Haynes presents a ...
Additional Info:
American church-related liberal arts colleges are dedicated to two traditions: Christian thought and liberal learning. According to Haynes, the moral continuity of these traditions was severed by the Holocaust. Because so many representations of these traditions contributed to the Nazis' ideological and physical efforts to annihilate millions of men, women, and children, it is unclear whether these traditions can any longer be said to facilitate human flourishing. Haynes presents a convincing argument that the post-Holocaust church-related college can participate in the restoration of these ruptured traditions through a commitment to Holocaust Education. This book provides valuable information for teachers who already offer a Holocaust course or for those who are considering doing so. In addition, the author presents an accurate picture of Holocaust Education at church-related colleges through an analysis of his nationwide survey. This book will be an important resource for scholars, teachers, and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Preface
ch. 1 Holocaust Education in America: Reviewing, Assessing, Imagining
ch. 2 The Church-Related College: Identifying the Tradition, Privileging the Tradition
ch. 3 Ordinary, Educated Men: The Holocaust and the Liberal Arts Ideal
ch. 4 The Long Journey: The Holocaust and the Christian Scholar
ch. 5 The Postmodern Challenge: The Holocaust and Higher Education in the Twenty-first Century
ch. 6 Toward Effective Holocaust Education: Challenges and Strategies
ch. 7 A Radical Proposal for Holocaust Education
App A Survey of Holocaust Education at American Church-Related Liberal Arts Colleges
Bibliography
Index
American church-related liberal arts colleges are dedicated to two traditions: Christian thought and liberal learning. According to Haynes, the moral continuity of these traditions was severed by the Holocaust. Because so many representations of these traditions contributed to the Nazis' ideological and physical efforts to annihilate millions of men, women, and children, it is unclear whether these traditions can any longer be said to facilitate human flourishing. Haynes presents a convincing argument that the post-Holocaust church-related college can participate in the restoration of these ruptured traditions through a commitment to Holocaust Education. This book provides valuable information for teachers who already offer a Holocaust course or for those who are considering doing so. In addition, the author presents an accurate picture of Holocaust Education at church-related colleges through an analysis of his nationwide survey. This book will be an important resource for scholars, teachers, and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Preface
ch. 1 Holocaust Education in America: Reviewing, Assessing, Imagining
ch. 2 The Church-Related College: Identifying the Tradition, Privileging the Tradition
ch. 3 Ordinary, Educated Men: The Holocaust and the Liberal Arts Ideal
ch. 4 The Long Journey: The Holocaust and the Christian Scholar
ch. 5 The Postmodern Challenge: The Holocaust and Higher Education in the Twenty-first Century
ch. 6 Toward Effective Holocaust Education: Challenges and Strategies
ch. 7 A Radical Proposal for Holocaust Education
App A Survey of Holocaust Education at American Church-Related Liberal Arts Colleges
Bibliography
Index

The Department Chair as Academic Leader
Additional Info:
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and ...
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and ...
Additional Info:
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and Deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Acknowledgments
Roles and Responsibilities: Past, Present, and Future
The Academic Department: A New Geography
Roles and Responsibilities of Department Chairs
The Department and its People
The Chair and Department Members
Recruiting the Department's Constituents
Faculty Work and Workload
Developing and Evaluating Department Members
The Department and its Operations
The Department as a Collectivity
Curriculum, Pedagogy, and Student Advising
Resource Management for Chairs
Strategic Planning in the Department
The Department and the University
The Chair and the Dean
Legal Issues for Chairs
Evaluating the Department
The Chair and External Audiences
Epilogue
Index
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and Deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Acknowledgments
Roles and Responsibilities: Past, Present, and Future
The Academic Department: A New Geography
Roles and Responsibilities of Department Chairs
The Department and its People
The Chair and Department Members
Recruiting the Department's Constituents
Faculty Work and Workload
Developing and Evaluating Department Members
The Department and its Operations
The Department as a Collectivity
Curriculum, Pedagogy, and Student Advising
Resource Management for Chairs
Strategic Planning in the Department
The Department and the University
The Chair and the Dean
Legal Issues for Chairs
Evaluating the Department
The Chair and External Audiences
Epilogue
Index

Developing Teaching Style in Adult Education
Additional Info:
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Pt. 1 Exploring the Personal Side of Teaching
ch. 1 Relating Personal Growth and Teaching Style
ch. 2 Understanding Basic Concepts of Teaching and Learning
ch. 3 Analyzing the Instructional Process
Pt. 2 Reflecting on the Teaching and Learning Exchange
ch. 4 Content
ch. 5 Environment
ch. 6 The Teacher
ch. 7 The Learning Community
ch. 8 The Learner
Pt. 3 Integrating Teaching Concepts with Teaching Style
ch. 9 Matching Methods to Teaching Style
ch. 10 Developing a Personal Style
Resource A. The Van Tilburg/Heimlich Teaching Beliefs Scale
Resource B. The Norland/Heimlich Teaching Values Scale
Resource C. Focusing on Culture as a Characteristic of Learners
Resource D. Representative Teaching Methods and Techniques
References
Index
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Pt. 1 Exploring the Personal Side of Teaching
ch. 1 Relating Personal Growth and Teaching Style
ch. 2 Understanding Basic Concepts of Teaching and Learning
ch. 3 Analyzing the Instructional Process
Pt. 2 Reflecting on the Teaching and Learning Exchange
ch. 4 Content
ch. 5 Environment
ch. 6 The Teacher
ch. 7 The Learning Community
ch. 8 The Learner
Pt. 3 Integrating Teaching Concepts with Teaching Style
ch. 9 Matching Methods to Teaching Style
ch. 10 Developing a Personal Style
Resource A. The Van Tilburg/Heimlich Teaching Beliefs Scale
Resource B. The Norland/Heimlich Teaching Values Scale
Resource C. Focusing on Culture as a Characteristic of Learners
Resource D. Representative Teaching Methods and Techniques
References
Index

Caretakers of Our Common House: Women's Development in Communities of Faith
Additional Info:
The author provides a provocative description of ways society's institutions have colluded to undermine the full development of women and girls. Relies on Gilligan and Kegan's theories of development; critiques Neibuhr's theology of sacrifice. Weaves biblical stories of women and personal stories into the data and suggests ways that parents, families -- and communities of faith can create environments in which girls and women may find their own voices as ...
The author provides a provocative description of ways society's institutions have colluded to undermine the full development of women and girls. Relies on Gilligan and Kegan's theories of development; critiques Neibuhr's theology of sacrifice. Weaves biblical stories of women and personal stories into the data and suggests ways that parents, families -- and communities of faith can create environments in which girls and women may find their own voices as ...
Additional Info:
The author provides a provocative description of ways society's institutions have colluded to undermine the full development of women and girls. Relies on Gilligan and Kegan's theories of development; critiques Neibuhr's theology of sacrifice. Weaves biblical stories of women and personal stories into the data and suggests ways that parents, families -- and communities of faith can create environments in which girls and women may find their own voices as expressions of authentic selves. This book is being used by a women's discussion group in an Episcopal parish. Participants find it very provocative and insightful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Theology and Women: Giving Our Selves Away
ch. 2 The Dance of Human Development: In Celebration of "Sheila"
ch. 3 Rebuilding Our Mothers' House: Caretaking and Being in Genuine Relation
ch. 4 Your Daughters Shall Prophesy: "Safe-Houses" for Raising Girls in Families and Communities of Faith
ch. 5 Wrestling with Our Sisters: Together Building Our Households of Faith
ch. 6 Women and Conversational Education: Hard Dialogue and Deep Connections in Communities of Faith
ch. 7 Caretaking Leadership: Women of Fire and Mothers of Israel
Notes
Selective Bibliography
Index
The author provides a provocative description of ways society's institutions have colluded to undermine the full development of women and girls. Relies on Gilligan and Kegan's theories of development; critiques Neibuhr's theology of sacrifice. Weaves biblical stories of women and personal stories into the data and suggests ways that parents, families -- and communities of faith can create environments in which girls and women may find their own voices as expressions of authentic selves. This book is being used by a women's discussion group in an Episcopal parish. Participants find it very provocative and insightful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Theology and Women: Giving Our Selves Away
ch. 2 The Dance of Human Development: In Celebration of "Sheila"
ch. 3 Rebuilding Our Mothers' House: Caretaking and Being in Genuine Relation
ch. 4 Your Daughters Shall Prophesy: "Safe-Houses" for Raising Girls in Families and Communities of Faith
ch. 5 Wrestling with Our Sisters: Together Building Our Households of Faith
ch. 6 Women and Conversational Education: Hard Dialogue and Deep Connections in Communities of Faith
ch. 7 Caretaking Leadership: Women of Fire and Mothers of Israel
Notes
Selective Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
Drawing upon classical and modern theological resources as well as postmodern pedagogical theories, Peter Hodgson argues that God's Wisdom, incarnate in paradigmatic teachers such as Jesus of Nazareth, forms and transforms human beings by evoking critical thinking, heightened imagination, and liberating practice. This groundbreaking book reexamines the place of religion in liberal education and the relationship between religious and theological studies. (From the Publisher)
Drawing upon classical and modern theological resources as well as postmodern pedagogical theories, Peter Hodgson argues that God's Wisdom, incarnate in paradigmatic teachers such as Jesus of Nazareth, forms and transforms human beings by evoking critical thinking, heightened imagination, and liberating practice. This groundbreaking book reexamines the place of religion in liberal education and the relationship between religious and theological studies. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Drawing upon classical and modern theological resources as well as postmodern pedagogical theories, Peter Hodgson argues that God's Wisdom, incarnate in paradigmatic teachers such as Jesus of Nazareth, forms and transforms human beings by evoking critical thinking, heightened imagination, and liberating practice. This groundbreaking book reexamines the place of religion in liberal education and the relationship between religious and theological studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction: Teaching as a Religious Vocation
Religious Dimensions of Teaching
"The Lord's Way of Education"
ch. 2 God as Teacher: Classical and Modern Theologies
The Hebraic and Hellenic Heritages: Torah and Paideia
The Greek Fathers: The Alexandrines and Cappadocians
Latin Theology: Augustine, Aquinas, Bonaventure
Reformed Theology: Calvin and Bushnell
The Enlightenment: Lessing and Herder
Speculative and Existential Philosophy: Hegel and Kierkegaard
ch. 3 Transformative Pedagogy: Modern and Postmodern Theories
Education and Life Formation
The Rhythm of Education
Constructive and Interactive Knowledge
Education as the Practice of Freedom
Connected Teaching and Cooperative Learning
ch. 4 God's Wisdom: Education as Paideia
The Figure of Wisdom: Sophia/Spirit 8
The Incarnation of Wisdom
The Pedagogy of Wisdom: Paideia
ch. 5 Conclusion: Paideia in Higher Education Today
Paideia in Liberal Education
Paideia in Religious and Theological Studies
Notes
Index
Drawing upon classical and modern theological resources as well as postmodern pedagogical theories, Peter Hodgson argues that God's Wisdom, incarnate in paradigmatic teachers such as Jesus of Nazareth, forms and transforms human beings by evoking critical thinking, heightened imagination, and liberating practice. This groundbreaking book reexamines the place of religion in liberal education and the relationship between religious and theological studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction: Teaching as a Religious Vocation
Religious Dimensions of Teaching
"The Lord's Way of Education"
ch. 2 God as Teacher: Classical and Modern Theologies
The Hebraic and Hellenic Heritages: Torah and Paideia
The Greek Fathers: The Alexandrines and Cappadocians
Latin Theology: Augustine, Aquinas, Bonaventure
Reformed Theology: Calvin and Bushnell
The Enlightenment: Lessing and Herder
Speculative and Existential Philosophy: Hegel and Kierkegaard
ch. 3 Transformative Pedagogy: Modern and Postmodern Theories
Education and Life Formation
The Rhythm of Education
Constructive and Interactive Knowledge
Education as the Practice of Freedom
Connected Teaching and Cooperative Learning
ch. 4 God's Wisdom: Education as Paideia
The Figure of Wisdom: Sophia/Spirit 8
The Incarnation of Wisdom
The Pedagogy of Wisdom: Paideia
ch. 5 Conclusion: Paideia in Higher Education Today
Paideia in Liberal Education
Paideia in Religious and Theological Studies
Notes
Index

Beyond Clericalism: The Congregation as a Focus for Theological Education
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part One:
A Congregational Paradigm for Theological Education (James F. Hopewell )
On the Christian Congregation (David H. Kelsey)
Ministry of the World: A New Professional Paradigm (John B. Cobb)
Which Congregations? A Mission Focus for Theological Education (Letty Russell)
A Theological Curriculum About and Against the Church (David H. Kelsey)
Friends in the Family: Church, Seminary, and Theological Education (Marjorie Hewitt Suchocki)
Part Two:
Disciplinary Perspectives on the Study of the Congregation
Historical Studies
A Study of the Congregation in History (Jane Dempsey Douglass)
The Congregation and New Testament Studies (Carl Holladay)
The Historian and the Congregation (E. Brooks Holifield)
Practical Studies
Pastoral Care and the Study of the Congregation (Don S. Browning)
The Ministry of a Congregation: Rethinking Christian Ethics for a Chuch-Centered Seminary (Stanley Hauerwas)
Toward A Christian Feminist Liberation Hermeneutic for Demystifying Class Reality in Local Congregations (Beverly W. Harrison)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part One:
A Congregational Paradigm for Theological Education (James F. Hopewell )
On the Christian Congregation (David H. Kelsey)
Ministry of the World: A New Professional Paradigm (John B. Cobb)
Which Congregations? A Mission Focus for Theological Education (Letty Russell)
A Theological Curriculum About and Against the Church (David H. Kelsey)
Friends in the Family: Church, Seminary, and Theological Education (Marjorie Hewitt Suchocki)
Part Two:
Disciplinary Perspectives on the Study of the Congregation
Historical Studies
A Study of the Congregation in History (Jane Dempsey Douglass)
The Congregation and New Testament Studies (Carl Holladay)
The Historian and the Congregation (E. Brooks Holifield)
Practical Studies
Pastoral Care and the Study of the Congregation (Don S. Browning)
The Ministry of a Congregation: Rethinking Christian Ethics for a Chuch-Centered Seminary (Stanley Hauerwas)
Toward A Christian Feminist Liberation Hermeneutic for Demystifying Class Reality in Local Congregations (Beverly W. Harrison)

Religious Higher Education in the United States: A Source Book
Additional Info:
Higher education today suffers from lack of a clearly articulated purpose-a deficiency particularly challenging to religious-affiliated institutions. What is the relationship of secular learning to the faith that originally undergirded these institutions? This book offers the reader answers to this and other major questions currently facing denomination-affiliated institutions of higher education. Following a chapter on civil government's relationships to these institutions, 24 chapters survey the colleges, universities, and seminaries associated with ...
Higher education today suffers from lack of a clearly articulated purpose-a deficiency particularly challenging to religious-affiliated institutions. What is the relationship of secular learning to the faith that originally undergirded these institutions? This book offers the reader answers to this and other major questions currently facing denomination-affiliated institutions of higher education. Following a chapter on civil government's relationships to these institutions, 24 chapters survey the colleges, universities, and seminaries associated with ...
Additional Info:
Higher education today suffers from lack of a clearly articulated purpose-a deficiency particularly challenging to religious-affiliated institutions. What is the relationship of secular learning to the faith that originally undergirded these institutions? This book offers the reader answers to this and other major questions currently facing denomination-affiliated institutions of higher education. Following a chapter on civil government's relationships to these institutions, 24 chapters survey the colleges, universities, and seminaries associated with denominations. Each chapter begins with an historical essay followed by annotated bibliographic entries covering primary and secondary sources dating back to 1986 on various denomination-connected institutions. There are 614 bibliographic entries, an epilogue on critical issues covered throughout the book, as well as a subject and author index. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Thomas C. Hunt, and James C. Carper)
ch. 1 Government Aid to and Regulation of Religious colleges and universities (Ralph D. Mawdsley)
ch. 2 The educational system of the church of Jesus Christ of latter day saints (Robert L. Millett)
ch. 3 Quakers and higher education (William C. Kashatus)
ch. 4 Lutheran college education in the US (Richard W. Solberg)
ch. 5 Reformed colleges and seminaries (Peter P. DeBoer)
ch. 6 Higher Education among Churches of Christ (Robert E. Hooper)
ch. 7 Moravian colleges and universities (Daniel R. Gilbert)
ch. 8 United Church of Christ colleges, universities and seminaries (Lowell H. Zuck)
ch. 9 Disciples of Christ colleges, universities and seminaries (John M. Imbler)
ch. 10 Episcopal colleges and universities (Donald S. Armentrout)
ch. 11 Higher education institutions of the Church of the Brethren (Kenneth M. Shaffer)
ch. 12 Foursquare Gospel Church colleges (John C. Holmes)
ch. 13 Wesleyan Colleges and University (John C. Holmes)
ch. 14 Free Methodist Colleges (John C. Holmes)
ch. 15 Catholic Higher Education in the US (Gerald P. Fogarty, S. J., Mary A. Grant, Anna M. Donnelly)
ch. 16 Baptist Colleges and Universities (Jerry M. Self)
ch. 17 Seventh Day Adventist higher Education in the US (George R. Knight)
ch. 18 Jewish Seminaries and colleges (Harold S. Wechsler)
ch. 19 American Bible colleges (Virginia Lieson Brereton)
ch. 20 Higher education in the United Methodist Church (L. Glenn Tyndall)
ch. 21 Mennonite Institutions of higher education (Donovan D. Steiner, and Judy H. Mullet)
ch. 22 Independent Christian colleges and universities (William Vance Trollinger, Jr.)
ch. 23 Church of the Nazarene Universities, colleges and theological seminaries (Harold E. Raser)
ch. 24 Pentecostal colleges and seminaries
Epilogue (Edith L. Blumhofer)
Indexes
Higher education today suffers from lack of a clearly articulated purpose-a deficiency particularly challenging to religious-affiliated institutions. What is the relationship of secular learning to the faith that originally undergirded these institutions? This book offers the reader answers to this and other major questions currently facing denomination-affiliated institutions of higher education. Following a chapter on civil government's relationships to these institutions, 24 chapters survey the colleges, universities, and seminaries associated with denominations. Each chapter begins with an historical essay followed by annotated bibliographic entries covering primary and secondary sources dating back to 1986 on various denomination-connected institutions. There are 614 bibliographic entries, an epilogue on critical issues covered throughout the book, as well as a subject and author index. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Thomas C. Hunt, and James C. Carper)
ch. 1 Government Aid to and Regulation of Religious colleges and universities (Ralph D. Mawdsley)
ch. 2 The educational system of the church of Jesus Christ of latter day saints (Robert L. Millett)
ch. 3 Quakers and higher education (William C. Kashatus)
ch. 4 Lutheran college education in the US (Richard W. Solberg)
ch. 5 Reformed colleges and seminaries (Peter P. DeBoer)
ch. 6 Higher Education among Churches of Christ (Robert E. Hooper)
ch. 7 Moravian colleges and universities (Daniel R. Gilbert)
ch. 8 United Church of Christ colleges, universities and seminaries (Lowell H. Zuck)
ch. 9 Disciples of Christ colleges, universities and seminaries (John M. Imbler)
ch. 10 Episcopal colleges and universities (Donald S. Armentrout)
ch. 11 Higher education institutions of the Church of the Brethren (Kenneth M. Shaffer)
ch. 12 Foursquare Gospel Church colleges (John C. Holmes)
ch. 13 Wesleyan Colleges and University (John C. Holmes)
ch. 14 Free Methodist Colleges (John C. Holmes)
ch. 15 Catholic Higher Education in the US (Gerald P. Fogarty, S. J., Mary A. Grant, Anna M. Donnelly)
ch. 16 Baptist Colleges and Universities (Jerry M. Self)
ch. 17 Seventh Day Adventist higher Education in the US (George R. Knight)
ch. 18 Jewish Seminaries and colleges (Harold S. Wechsler)
ch. 19 American Bible colleges (Virginia Lieson Brereton)
ch. 20 Higher education in the United Methodist Church (L. Glenn Tyndall)
ch. 21 Mennonite Institutions of higher education (Donovan D. Steiner, and Judy H. Mullet)
ch. 22 Independent Christian colleges and universities (William Vance Trollinger, Jr.)
ch. 23 Church of the Nazarene Universities, colleges and theological seminaries (Harold E. Raser)
ch. 24 Pentecostal colleges and seminaries
Epilogue (Edith L. Blumhofer)
Indexes


Making Teaching Community Property: A Menu for Peer Collaboration and Peer Review
Additional Info:
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of ...
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of ...
Additional Info:
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of resources. Offers lessons campuses can use to create more effective systems for the formal evaluation and reward of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface by Russell Edgerton
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching Circles: Starting the Conversation; Setting a Scholarly Tone Teaching Circles in the History Department at Kent State University by John Jameson; Fostering Collective Responsibility for Student Learning Teaching Seminars in the University of North Carolina at Charlotte Mathematics Department by Charles Burnap and Miriam Leiva; Learning Together An Online Faculty Conversation About Online Student Conversation at Rio Hondo College by Susan Obler
ch. 2 Reciprocal Visits and Observations: Opening the Classroom Door; Reciprocal Classroom Visits An Experiment in the Temple University History Department by William Cutler and Howard Spodek; The Teacher Observation/Peer Support (TOPS) Program at California State University-Dominguez Hills by Kathleen McEnerney and Jamie L. Webb; The Featured Faculty Program at Eastern Michigan University byDeborah DeZure
ch. 3 Mentoring: Teachers Teaching Other Teachers; A New Faculty Mentoring Program in the Stanford English Department byDavid Halliburton;The Faculty Tutorial Program at Saint Olaf College by Jonathan Hill; The Issue of Supply Fostering Senior Faculty Leadership at The College of Saint Catherine by Marilou Eldred
ch. 4 A Focus on Student Learning; Interviewing Each Other's Students in the Legal Studies Program at the University of Georgia by Peter Shedd; Classroom Assessment as a Context for Faculty Conversation and Collaboration at California State University-Long Beach by Susan Nummedal; Making Students More Active Agents in Their Learning TQM in the Syracuse University School of Business by Frances Zollers
ch. 5 Portfolios: Putting the Pieces Together; Inventing a New Genre The Course Portfolio at the University of Wisconsin-La Crosse by William Cerbin; Developing a Course Portfolio in Math A Report From the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar
ch. 6 Team Teaching and Teaching Teams; Teaching Teams in the Math Department at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar; A Team Approach to Course Design and Teaching in an Integrated Arts and Humanities Course at Alverno College by Kevin Casey; Coordinated Studies A Model for Faculty Collaboration and Team Teaching in a Consortium of Washington Campuses by Jean MacGregor; Team Teaching About Teaching the Disciplines The Pedagogy Seminar at Millersville University by Barbara Stengel
ch. 7 Collaborative Inquiry and Pedagogical Scholarship; Collaborative Inquiry in the Teaching of Writing Theory and Practice at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Joy Ritchie; Collaborative Inquiry in an Early Childhood Education Course at the University of Wyoming by Jane Nelson; A Collaborative, Comparative Study of Student Learning in Chemistry at the University of Wisconsin-Madison by John Wright
ch. 8 Departmental Occasions for Collaboration; The Pedagogical Colloquium Focusing on Teaching in the Hiring Process in the Stanford University History Department by Richard Roberts; A Professional Development Program for Graduate Students Fostering Collaboration in the Writing Program at Northern Arizona University by Geoffrey Chase; The Departmental Teaching Library A Mathematics Course File at the University of North Carolina at Charlotte by Charles Burnap
ch. 9 Intercampus Collaboration and external Review of Teaching External Peer Review of Teaching A New Effort in the Chemistry Department at IUPUI by David Malik; Piloting Long Distance Interviews With Students as a Potential Component of the External Peer Review of Teaching by Jere Morehead
Conclusion: From Peer Collaboration to Peer Review
About the AAHE Teaching Initiative
About the AAHE’s Peer Review of Teaching Project
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of resources. Offers lessons campuses can use to create more effective systems for the formal evaluation and reward of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface by Russell Edgerton
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching Circles: Starting the Conversation; Setting a Scholarly Tone Teaching Circles in the History Department at Kent State University by John Jameson; Fostering Collective Responsibility for Student Learning Teaching Seminars in the University of North Carolina at Charlotte Mathematics Department by Charles Burnap and Miriam Leiva; Learning Together An Online Faculty Conversation About Online Student Conversation at Rio Hondo College by Susan Obler
ch. 2 Reciprocal Visits and Observations: Opening the Classroom Door; Reciprocal Classroom Visits An Experiment in the Temple University History Department by William Cutler and Howard Spodek; The Teacher Observation/Peer Support (TOPS) Program at California State University-Dominguez Hills by Kathleen McEnerney and Jamie L. Webb; The Featured Faculty Program at Eastern Michigan University byDeborah DeZure
ch. 3 Mentoring: Teachers Teaching Other Teachers; A New Faculty Mentoring Program in the Stanford English Department byDavid Halliburton;The Faculty Tutorial Program at Saint Olaf College by Jonathan Hill; The Issue of Supply Fostering Senior Faculty Leadership at The College of Saint Catherine by Marilou Eldred
ch. 4 A Focus on Student Learning; Interviewing Each Other's Students in the Legal Studies Program at the University of Georgia by Peter Shedd; Classroom Assessment as a Context for Faculty Conversation and Collaboration at California State University-Long Beach by Susan Nummedal; Making Students More Active Agents in Their Learning TQM in the Syracuse University School of Business by Frances Zollers
ch. 5 Portfolios: Putting the Pieces Together; Inventing a New Genre The Course Portfolio at the University of Wisconsin-La Crosse by William Cerbin; Developing a Course Portfolio in Math A Report From the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar
ch. 6 Team Teaching and Teaching Teams; Teaching Teams in the Math Department at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar; A Team Approach to Course Design and Teaching in an Integrated Arts and Humanities Course at Alverno College by Kevin Casey; Coordinated Studies A Model for Faculty Collaboration and Team Teaching in a Consortium of Washington Campuses by Jean MacGregor; Team Teaching About Teaching the Disciplines The Pedagogy Seminar at Millersville University by Barbara Stengel
ch. 7 Collaborative Inquiry and Pedagogical Scholarship; Collaborative Inquiry in the Teaching of Writing Theory and Practice at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Joy Ritchie; Collaborative Inquiry in an Early Childhood Education Course at the University of Wyoming by Jane Nelson; A Collaborative, Comparative Study of Student Learning in Chemistry at the University of Wisconsin-Madison by John Wright
ch. 8 Departmental Occasions for Collaboration; The Pedagogical Colloquium Focusing on Teaching in the Hiring Process in the Stanford University History Department by Richard Roberts; A Professional Development Program for Graduate Students Fostering Collaboration in the Writing Program at Northern Arizona University by Geoffrey Chase; The Departmental Teaching Library A Mathematics Course File at the University of North Carolina at Charlotte by Charles Burnap
ch. 9 Intercampus Collaboration and external Review of Teaching External Peer Review of Teaching A New Effort in the Chemistry Department at IUPUI by David Malik; Piloting Long Distance Interviews With Students as a Potential Component of the External Peer Review of Teaching by Jere Morehead
Conclusion: From Peer Collaboration to Peer Review
About the AAHE Teaching Initiative
About the AAHE’s Peer Review of Teaching Project

Discerning the Call: Advancing the Quality of Ordained Leadership
Additional Info:
In 1986, 43 percent of Disciples clergy were between fifty and sixty. Where will their replacements come from, and how can we help them recognize and respond to their call? (From the Publisher)
In 1986, 43 percent of Disciples clergy were between fifty and sixty. Where will their replacements come from, and how can we help them recognize and respond to their call? (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In 1986, 43 percent of Disciples clergy were between fifty and sixty. Where will their replacements come from, and how can we help them recognize and respond to their call? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
(individual authors not identified)
Introduction
ch. 1 Practical, spiritual, and intellectual criteria for ministry
ch. 2 Ecclesiastical linkages
ch. 3 Congregational enlistment
ch. 4 Faith development
ch. 5 Changing North American demographics
ch. 6 Disciples women in ministry
ch. 7 Characteristics for success
Afterword
Notes
Bibliography
In 1986, 43 percent of Disciples clergy were between fifty and sixty. Where will their replacements come from, and how can we help them recognize and respond to their call? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
(individual authors not identified)
Introduction
ch. 1 Practical, spiritual, and intellectual criteria for ministry
ch. 2 Ecclesiastical linkages
ch. 3 Congregational enlistment
ch. 4 Faith development
ch. 5 Changing North American demographics
ch. 6 Disciples women in ministry
ch. 7 Characteristics for success
Afterword
Notes
Bibliography
Additional Info:
Learning in groups has deep historical roots in adult education, and adult educators use groups frequently in structuring learning experiences. Also, groups form the basis for mauch informal adult learning, both within and outside institutional boundaries. Although many adult educators espouse the value of learning in groups, the topic has been a relatively minor theme in the field's recent literature. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult ...
Learning in groups has deep historical roots in adult education, and adult educators use groups frequently in structuring learning experiences. Also, groups form the basis for mauch informal adult learning, both within and outside institutional boundaries. Although many adult educators espouse the value of learning in groups, the topic has been a relatively minor theme in the field's recent literature. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult ...
Additional Info:
Learning in groups has deep historical roots in adult education, and adult educators use groups frequently in structuring learning experiences. Also, groups form the basis for mauch informal adult learning, both within and outside institutional boundaries. Although many adult educators espouse the value of learning in groups, the topic has been a relatively minor theme in the field's recent literature. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education is to examine selected aspects of learning in groups, including both theoretical concepts and actual practice. The chapter authors assess the status of group learning in adult education; the volume should be helpful to adult educators as they reflect on their use of groups. This is the 71st issue in the journal series New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
Issues and Trends to Take Us into the Twenty-First Century
Competence in Teaching at a Distance
Interactivity: From Agents to Outcomes
Visual Thinking: Let Them See What You Are Saying
Student-Centered Instruction for the Design of Telecourses
Learner Development: Beyond the Technology
Teaching by Television
Teaching by Telephone
The Internet: A Learning Environment
Networked Learning Environments
Evaluating Teaching and Learning at a Distance
Copyright: Opportunities and Restrictions for the Teleinstructor
Distance Learning and the Digital Library: Transforming the Library into an Information Centerave Article
Managing Information Resources and Services in a Distance Environment
Learning in groups has deep historical roots in adult education, and adult educators use groups frequently in structuring learning experiences. Also, groups form the basis for mauch informal adult learning, both within and outside institutional boundaries. Although many adult educators espouse the value of learning in groups, the topic has been a relatively minor theme in the field's recent literature. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education is to examine selected aspects of learning in groups, including both theoretical concepts and actual practice. The chapter authors assess the status of group learning in adult education; the volume should be helpful to adult educators as they reflect on their use of groups. This is the 71st issue in the journal series New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
Issues and Trends to Take Us into the Twenty-First Century
Competence in Teaching at a Distance
Interactivity: From Agents to Outcomes
Visual Thinking: Let Them See What You Are Saying
Student-Centered Instruction for the Design of Telecourses
Learner Development: Beyond the Technology
Teaching by Television
Teaching by Telephone
The Internet: A Learning Environment
Networked Learning Environments
Evaluating Teaching and Learning at a Distance
Copyright: Opportunities and Restrictions for the Teleinstructor
Distance Learning and the Digital Library: Transforming the Library into an Information Centerave Article
Managing Information Resources and Services in a Distance Environment

Handbook for Associate Instructors
Additional Info:
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
Additional Info:
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
Table Of Content:
1 Associate Instructor as Teacher
1 Preparing to Teach
2 Your Own Class
4 A Section of a Larger Class
5 The Syllabus
6 Class Rolls and Grade Books
6 Course Packets and Readers
7 Classrooms
7 Office Hours
9 Ideas for Teaching
9 Choosing an Instructional Style
11 First Class Survival Tips
12 Skills of a Good Teacher
12 Show You Care
14 Keep Students Engaged
16 Communication Checklist
20 Using Instructional Media
25 Discussion Sections
25 Preparing for Discussions
27 Facilitating Discussions
28 Problems With Discussions
30 Laboratory Sections
30 Preparing Lab Sections
31 Managing Lab Sections
31 Safety Procedures
31 Student Preparation
32 Supervising the Experiment
32 Refrain from giving outright answers
33 Lecturing
33 Preparing Lectures
36 Questioning in the Classroom
37 Rewarding Student Participation and Providing Feedback
38 Teaching Outside the Field of Specialty
39 Evaluation of Student Performance
39 Determining Evaluative Criteria
40 Test Construction
42 Constructing Writing Assignments
43 Responding to Student Writing
45 Grading
46 Recording and Distribution of Grades
46 Complaints about Grades
47 The University Grading System
48 Evaluation of Instruction
48 Teacher-Course Evaluation Options for AIs
50 Ethics and the Associate Instructor
50 Academic Integrity
50 Academic Misconduct
52 Privacy of Student Records
52 Letters of Recommendation
53 Sexual Harassment
54 Assisting Emotionally Troubled Students
54 Assisting Students with Disabilities
54 Diversity
54 Accomodating Religious Holidays
55 Teachings with Student Diversity in Mind
59 Cultural Differences for International AIs
60 What Help is Available for New Instructors?
61 Sources
62 Bibliography on College Teaching
64 References
Appendix: Instructor's Guide to Student Services
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
Table Of Content:
1 Associate Instructor as Teacher
1 Preparing to Teach
2 Your Own Class
4 A Section of a Larger Class
5 The Syllabus
6 Class Rolls and Grade Books
6 Course Packets and Readers
7 Classrooms
7 Office Hours
9 Ideas for Teaching
9 Choosing an Instructional Style
11 First Class Survival Tips
12 Skills of a Good Teacher
12 Show You Care
14 Keep Students Engaged
16 Communication Checklist
20 Using Instructional Media
25 Discussion Sections
25 Preparing for Discussions
27 Facilitating Discussions
28 Problems With Discussions
30 Laboratory Sections
30 Preparing Lab Sections
31 Managing Lab Sections
31 Safety Procedures
31 Student Preparation
32 Supervising the Experiment
32 Refrain from giving outright answers
33 Lecturing
33 Preparing Lectures
36 Questioning in the Classroom
37 Rewarding Student Participation and Providing Feedback
38 Teaching Outside the Field of Specialty
39 Evaluation of Student Performance
39 Determining Evaluative Criteria
40 Test Construction
42 Constructing Writing Assignments
43 Responding to Student Writing
45 Grading
46 Recording and Distribution of Grades
46 Complaints about Grades
47 The University Grading System
48 Evaluation of Instruction
48 Teacher-Course Evaluation Options for AIs
50 Ethics and the Associate Instructor
50 Academic Integrity
50 Academic Misconduct
52 Privacy of Student Records
52 Letters of Recommendation
53 Sexual Harassment
54 Assisting Emotionally Troubled Students
54 Assisting Students with Disabilities
54 Diversity
54 Accomodating Religious Holidays
55 Teachings with Student Diversity in Mind
59 Cultural Differences for International AIs
60 What Help is Available for New Instructors?
61 Sources
62 Bibliography on College Teaching
64 References
Appendix: Instructor's Guide to Student Services

Joining Together: Group Theory and Group Skills
Additional Info:
This best-selling book is a broad integrative overview of group dynamics. It introduces readers to the theory and research findings needed to understand how to make groups effective and to the skills required to apply that knowledge in practical situations. Joining Together illustrates how this knowledge and mastery of skills creates choices, opportunities, and successes for each individual. No other book offers the scope of coverage and the range of ...
This best-selling book is a broad integrative overview of group dynamics. It introduces readers to the theory and research findings needed to understand how to make groups effective and to the skills required to apply that knowledge in practical situations. Joining Together illustrates how this knowledge and mastery of skills creates choices, opportunities, and successes for each individual. No other book offers the scope of coverage and the range of ...
Additional Info:
This best-selling book is a broad integrative overview of group dynamics. It introduces readers to the theory and research findings needed to understand how to make groups effective and to the skills required to apply that knowledge in practical situations. Joining Together illustrates how this knowledge and mastery of skills creates choices, opportunities, and successes for each individual. No other book offers the scope of coverage and the range of experiential exercises of Joining Together. Bridges the gap between theory and practice by combining theoretical and empirical knowledge with practical ways to apply it to the groups in which readers belong. For anyone interested in group dynamics in business, psychology, and social work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface.
ch. 1. Group Dynamics..
ch. 2. Experiential Learning..
ch. 3. Group Goals, Social Interdependence, and Trust..
ch. 4. Communication Within Groups..
ch. 5. Leadership..
ch. 6. Using Power..
ch. 7. Decision Making..
ch. 8. Controversy and Creativity.
ch. 9. Managing Conflict of Interests..
ch. 10. Valuing Diversity..
ch. 11. Cooperative Learning in the Classroom..
ch. 12. Leading Growth and Counseling Groups..
ch. 13. Team Development, Team Training..
ch. 14. Epilogue..
Appendix: Answers..
Glossary..
References..
Index.
This best-selling book is a broad integrative overview of group dynamics. It introduces readers to the theory and research findings needed to understand how to make groups effective and to the skills required to apply that knowledge in practical situations. Joining Together illustrates how this knowledge and mastery of skills creates choices, opportunities, and successes for each individual. No other book offers the scope of coverage and the range of experiential exercises of Joining Together. Bridges the gap between theory and practice by combining theoretical and empirical knowledge with practical ways to apply it to the groups in which readers belong. For anyone interested in group dynamics in business, psychology, and social work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface.
ch. 1. Group Dynamics..
ch. 2. Experiential Learning..
ch. 3. Group Goals, Social Interdependence, and Trust..
ch. 4. Communication Within Groups..
ch. 5. Leadership..
ch. 6. Using Power..
ch. 7. Decision Making..
ch. 8. Controversy and Creativity.
ch. 9. Managing Conflict of Interests..
ch. 10. Valuing Diversity..
ch. 11. Cooperative Learning in the Classroom..
ch. 12. Leading Growth and Counseling Groups..
ch. 13. Team Development, Team Training..
ch. 14. Epilogue..
Appendix: Answers..
Glossary..
References..
Index.

Turning Professors into Teachers: A New Approach to Faculty Development and Student Learning
Additional Info:
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Conditions of a New Pedagogy for Undergraduate Learning
An inquiry-oriented approach to faculty development and student learning
Thinking styles in the disciplines and in student learning
Promoting student learning
Three professors report about observing their teaching and their students' learning
Tools for understanding students - the Omnibus personality inventory
Tools for understanding students - the interview
Interviews about teaching and student learning with a biologist and a political scientist
Reenvisioning undergraduate teaching
References
Index
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Conditions of a New Pedagogy for Undergraduate Learning
An inquiry-oriented approach to faculty development and student learning
Thinking styles in the disciplines and in student learning
Promoting student learning
Three professors report about observing their teaching and their students' learning
Tools for understanding students - the Omnibus personality inventory
Tools for understanding students - the interview
Interviews about teaching and student learning with a biologist and a political scientist
Reenvisioning undergraduate teaching
References
Index
Additional Info:
Today's Colleges and Universities face a new environment in which information technology is rapidly becoming the preferred mode of learning and academic institutions can no longer rely on traditional methods to survive and prosper. In this collection of essays, seven highly respected institutional, association, and financial leaders examine the formidable challenges facing all types of campuses. (From the Publisher)
Today's Colleges and Universities face a new environment in which information technology is rapidly becoming the preferred mode of learning and academic institutions can no longer rely on traditional methods to survive and prosper. In this collection of essays, seven highly respected institutional, association, and financial leaders examine the formidable challenges facing all types of campuses. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Today's Colleges and Universities face a new environment in which information technology is rapidly becoming the preferred mode of learning and academic institutions can no longer rely on traditional methods to survive and prosper. In this collection of essays, seven highly respected institutional, association, and financial leaders examine the formidable challenges facing all types of campuses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Can Colleges and Universities Survive in the Information Age?
ch. 2 Competitive Strategies for Higher Education in the Information Age
ch. 3 Assessing the New Competitive Landscape
ch. 4 The New Technologies and the Future of Residential Undergraduate Education
ch. 5 Developing and Using Technology as a Strategic Asset
ch. 6 Tying Things Together: Advice for the Practitioner
Index
Today's Colleges and Universities face a new environment in which information technology is rapidly becoming the preferred mode of learning and academic institutions can no longer rely on traditional methods to survive and prosper. In this collection of essays, seven highly respected institutional, association, and financial leaders examine the formidable challenges facing all types of campuses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Can Colleges and Universities Survive in the Information Age?
ch. 2 Competitive Strategies for Higher Education in the Information Age
ch. 3 Assessing the New Competitive Landscape
ch. 4 The New Technologies and the Future of Residential Undergraduate Education
ch. 5 Developing and Using Technology as a Strategic Asset
ch. 6 Tying Things Together: Advice for the Practitioner
Index

In Plato's Cave
Additional Info:
In this candid and delightful memoir, Alvin Kernan recalls his life as a student, professor, provost, and dean during turbulent decades of change in the hallowed halls of Columbia, Williams, Oxford, Yale, and Princeton. His vividly remembered account is a unique personal story and more--it is also a history of what has been won, and lost, in the culture wars of the second half of the twentieth century. (From the ...
In this candid and delightful memoir, Alvin Kernan recalls his life as a student, professor, provost, and dean during turbulent decades of change in the hallowed halls of Columbia, Williams, Oxford, Yale, and Princeton. His vividly remembered account is a unique personal story and more--it is also a history of what has been won, and lost, in the culture wars of the second half of the twentieth century. (From the ...
Additional Info:
In this candid and delightful memoir, Alvin Kernan recalls his life as a student, professor, provost, and dean during turbulent decades of change in the hallowed halls of Columbia, Williams, Oxford, Yale, and Princeton. His vividly remembered account is a unique personal story and more--it is also a history of what has been won, and lost, in the culture wars of the second half of the twentieth century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Shifting Educational Plates
ch. 1 Theater and Reality in Greenwich Village: Columbia, 1946
ch. 2 The Other End of the Log: Williams College, 1946-1949
ch. 3 Chatter About Shelley: Oxford, 1949-1951
ch. 4 See My George Gascoigne: Yale Graduate School, 1951-1954
ch. 5 Keeping Them Quiet: Yale, 1954-1960
ch. 6 The Two Cultures, Science and Literature
ch. 7 Publish or Perish: Tenure at Yale, 1960-1964
ch. 8 Goodbye, Boola Boola: Yale Administration, 1964-1970
ch. 9 When Do We Want It? Now! The Bobby Seale Trial, New Haven, 1970
ch. 10 Question All Authority: The Breakdown of Meaning and Language, Yale, 1970-1973
ch. 11 A Long Walk After Lunch: Princeton and the Later 1970s
ch. 12 The New Technology Calls All in Doubt: Television, Books, Libraries, Computers
ch. 13 No Obligation to Be Right, Only to Be Interesting: Teaching as Power and Politics, Princeton, the 1980s
ch. 14 The Break Between Generations, Retirement
Epilogue: The Dogs Bark, the Caravan Passes On
Index
In this candid and delightful memoir, Alvin Kernan recalls his life as a student, professor, provost, and dean during turbulent decades of change in the hallowed halls of Columbia, Williams, Oxford, Yale, and Princeton. His vividly remembered account is a unique personal story and more--it is also a history of what has been won, and lost, in the culture wars of the second half of the twentieth century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Shifting Educational Plates
ch. 1 Theater and Reality in Greenwich Village: Columbia, 1946
ch. 2 The Other End of the Log: Williams College, 1946-1949
ch. 3 Chatter About Shelley: Oxford, 1949-1951
ch. 4 See My George Gascoigne: Yale Graduate School, 1951-1954
ch. 5 Keeping Them Quiet: Yale, 1954-1960
ch. 6 The Two Cultures, Science and Literature
ch. 7 Publish or Perish: Tenure at Yale, 1960-1964
ch. 8 Goodbye, Boola Boola: Yale Administration, 1964-1970
ch. 9 When Do We Want It? Now! The Bobby Seale Trial, New Haven, 1970
ch. 10 Question All Authority: The Breakdown of Meaning and Language, Yale, 1970-1973
ch. 11 A Long Walk After Lunch: Princeton and the Later 1970s
ch. 12 The New Technology Calls All in Doubt: Television, Books, Libraries, Computers
ch. 13 No Obligation to Be Right, Only to Be Interesting: Teaching as Power and Politics, Princeton, the 1980s
ch. 14 The Break Between Generations, Retirement
Epilogue: The Dogs Bark, the Caravan Passes On
Index


The Art of Theological Reflection
Additional Info:
Here is a book for the millions of Christians who want to make a vital connection between their faith and their lives. This practical book provides a way for all of us to experience greater meaning in life and a more tangible sense of God's creative presence. (From the Publisher)
Here is a book for the millions of Christians who want to make a vital connection between their faith and their lives. This practical book provides a way for all of us to experience greater meaning in life and a more tangible sense of God's creative presence. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Here is a book for the millions of Christians who want to make a vital connection between their faith and their lives. This practical book provides a way for all of us to experience greater meaning in life and a more tangible sense of God's creative presence. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Searching for a Way to Be Faithful
ch. 2 The Movement Toward Insight: The Human Process of Coming to Wisdom
ch. 3 Theology as a Form of Human Reflection
ch. 4 Personal Theological Reflection
ch. 5 Guiding Groups in Theological Reflection
ch. 6 Creating Designs for Theological Reflection
ch. 7 Conclusion
Notes
Resources For Theological Reflection: An Annotated Bibliography
Here is a book for the millions of Christians who want to make a vital connection between their faith and their lives. This practical book provides a way for all of us to experience greater meaning in life and a more tangible sense of God's creative presence. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Searching for a Way to Be Faithful
ch. 2 The Movement Toward Insight: The Human Process of Coming to Wisdom
ch. 3 Theology as a Form of Human Reflection
ch. 4 Personal Theological Reflection
ch. 5 Guiding Groups in Theological Reflection
ch. 6 Creating Designs for Theological Reflection
ch. 7 Conclusion
Notes
Resources For Theological Reflection: An Annotated Bibliography
Additional Info:
Unauthorized Methods makes accessible some of the best theoretical innovations in critical pedagogy of the last decade. The contributors consider how an integration of popular culture and cultural studies into the lesson plan can enrich and reinvigorate the learning experience. These essays, ranging widely in topic and educational level, are grounded in theory but intended for practical application. By focusing on classroom methods, the contributors provide educators with techniques, strategies, ...
Unauthorized Methods makes accessible some of the best theoretical innovations in critical pedagogy of the last decade. The contributors consider how an integration of popular culture and cultural studies into the lesson plan can enrich and reinvigorate the learning experience. These essays, ranging widely in topic and educational level, are grounded in theory but intended for practical application. By focusing on classroom methods, the contributors provide educators with techniques, strategies, ...
Additional Info:
Unauthorized Methods makes accessible some of the best theoretical innovations in critical pedagogy of the last decade. The contributors consider how an integration of popular culture and cultural studies into the lesson plan can enrich and reinvigorate the learning experience. These essays, ranging widely in topic and educational level, are grounded in theory but intended for practical application. By focusing on classroom methods, the contributors provide educators with techniques, strategies, and examples designed to transform the classroom into a truly multicultural and democratic space. Unauthorized Methods will be an indispensable resource for teachers, students, and policy makers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editor's Foreword
ch. 1 Lesson Plans from the Outer Limits: Unauthorized Methods (Joe L. Kincheloe and Shirley R. Steinberg)
ch. 2 Towards an Alternative Pedagogy (Ivor F. Goodson)
ch. 3 Nurturing the Imagination of Resistance: Young Adults as Creators of Knowledge (Kathleen S. Berry)
ch. 4 Gorillas ... Oops: Guerrillas in our Midst - (RE)dux: Kitchen Knowledge (Karen Anijar, Joshuea Anijar, Ronald Gonzales, and Lana Krievis)
ch. 5 The Critical Transformation of a Special Education Classroom: A Beginning Teacher Puts Theory into Practice (Nina Zaragoza and Marge Scardina)
ch. 6 A Textbook for Everyone: Balancing Canons and Culture in English Textbooks (Timothy A. Dohrer)
ch. 7 Deep Viewing: A Critical Look at Visual Texts (Ann Watts Pailliotet)
ch. 8 Still Crazy After All of These Years: Teaching Critical Media Literacy (Ladi Semali)
ch. 9 Bilingual Education in America: In Search of Equity and Social Justice (Lourdes Diaz Soto)
ch. 10 Innovative Pedagogy in Art Education (Dennis E. Fehr)
ch. 11 Teacher Says, Simon Says: Dualism in Science Learning (David B. Pushkin)
ch. 12 Teaching/Learning Mathematics in School (Peter M. Appelbaum)
ch. 13 Surfing and Getting Wired in a Fifth Grade Classroom: Critical Pedagogical Methods and Techno-Culture (John A. Weaver and Karen Grindall)
ch. 14 Teachers and Administrators: A Vision of Prophetic Practice (Patrick Slattery and Rebecca McElfresh Spehler)
Notes on Editors and Contributors
Index
Unauthorized Methods makes accessible some of the best theoretical innovations in critical pedagogy of the last decade. The contributors consider how an integration of popular culture and cultural studies into the lesson plan can enrich and reinvigorate the learning experience. These essays, ranging widely in topic and educational level, are grounded in theory but intended for practical application. By focusing on classroom methods, the contributors provide educators with techniques, strategies, and examples designed to transform the classroom into a truly multicultural and democratic space. Unauthorized Methods will be an indispensable resource for teachers, students, and policy makers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editor's Foreword
ch. 1 Lesson Plans from the Outer Limits: Unauthorized Methods (Joe L. Kincheloe and Shirley R. Steinberg)
ch. 2 Towards an Alternative Pedagogy (Ivor F. Goodson)
ch. 3 Nurturing the Imagination of Resistance: Young Adults as Creators of Knowledge (Kathleen S. Berry)
ch. 4 Gorillas ... Oops: Guerrillas in our Midst - (RE)dux: Kitchen Knowledge (Karen Anijar, Joshuea Anijar, Ronald Gonzales, and Lana Krievis)
ch. 5 The Critical Transformation of a Special Education Classroom: A Beginning Teacher Puts Theory into Practice (Nina Zaragoza and Marge Scardina)
ch. 6 A Textbook for Everyone: Balancing Canons and Culture in English Textbooks (Timothy A. Dohrer)
ch. 7 Deep Viewing: A Critical Look at Visual Texts (Ann Watts Pailliotet)
ch. 8 Still Crazy After All of These Years: Teaching Critical Media Literacy (Ladi Semali)
ch. 9 Bilingual Education in America: In Search of Equity and Social Justice (Lourdes Diaz Soto)
ch. 10 Innovative Pedagogy in Art Education (Dennis E. Fehr)
ch. 11 Teacher Says, Simon Says: Dualism in Science Learning (David B. Pushkin)
ch. 12 Teaching/Learning Mathematics in School (Peter M. Appelbaum)
ch. 13 Surfing and Getting Wired in a Fifth Grade Classroom: Critical Pedagogical Methods and Techno-Culture (John A. Weaver and Karen Grindall)
ch. 14 Teachers and Administrators: A Vision of Prophetic Practice (Patrick Slattery and Rebecca McElfresh Spehler)
Notes on Editors and Contributors
Index
Additional Info:
Religious Advocacy and American History explores the general question of bias and objectivity in higher learning from the perspective of the role of religious convictions in the study of American history. The contributors to this book, many of whom are leading historians of American religion and culture, address primarily two related questions. First, how do personal religious convictions influence one's own research, writing, and teaching? And, second, what place should ...
Religious Advocacy and American History explores the general question of bias and objectivity in higher learning from the perspective of the role of religious convictions in the study of American history. The contributors to this book, many of whom are leading historians of American religion and culture, address primarily two related questions. First, how do personal religious convictions influence one's own research, writing, and teaching? And, second, what place should ...
Additional Info:
Religious Advocacy and American History explores the general question of bias and objectivity in higher learning from the perspective of the role of religious convictions in the study of American history. The contributors to this book, many of whom are leading historians of American religion and culture, address primarily two related questions. First, how do personal religious convictions influence one's own research, writing, and teaching? And, second, what place should personal beliefs have within American higher education? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Christian Advocacy and the Rules of the Academic Game (George M. Marsden)
ch. 2 Traditional Christianity and the Possibility of Historical Knowledge (Mark A. Noll)
ch. 3 On Critical History (Bruce Kuklick)
ch. 4 Advocacy and Academe (Murray G. Murphey)
Marxism, Christianity, and Bias in the Study of Southern Slave Society (Eugene D. Genovese)
ch. 5 Advocacy and the Writing of American Women's History (Elizabeth Fox. Genovese)
ch. 6 In Search of the Fourth "R": The Treatment of Religion in American History Textbooks and Survey Courses (Paul Boyer)
ch. 7 What's So Special about the University, Anyway? (D.G. Hart)
ch. 8 Understanding the Past, Using the Past: Reflections on Two Approaches to History (Grant Wacker)
ch. 9 A Transcendentalist's Aristotle: Non-evangelical Reflections on Conviction and the Writing of History (Catherine L. Albanese)
ch. 10 Seldon's Choice: Variations on a Theme by Asimov (Paul A. Carter)
ch. 11 One Historian's Sundays (Leslie Woodcock Tentler)
Afterword
Religious Advocacy and American History explores the general question of bias and objectivity in higher learning from the perspective of the role of religious convictions in the study of American history. The contributors to this book, many of whom are leading historians of American religion and culture, address primarily two related questions. First, how do personal religious convictions influence one's own research, writing, and teaching? And, second, what place should personal beliefs have within American higher education? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Christian Advocacy and the Rules of the Academic Game (George M. Marsden)
ch. 2 Traditional Christianity and the Possibility of Historical Knowledge (Mark A. Noll)
ch. 3 On Critical History (Bruce Kuklick)
ch. 4 Advocacy and Academe (Murray G. Murphey)
Marxism, Christianity, and Bias in the Study of Southern Slave Society (Eugene D. Genovese)
ch. 5 Advocacy and the Writing of American Women's History (Elizabeth Fox. Genovese)
ch. 6 In Search of the Fourth "R": The Treatment of Religion in American History Textbooks and Survey Courses (Paul Boyer)
ch. 7 What's So Special about the University, Anyway? (D.G. Hart)
ch. 8 Understanding the Past, Using the Past: Reflections on Two Approaches to History (Grant Wacker)
ch. 9 A Transcendentalist's Aristotle: Non-evangelical Reflections on Conviction and the Writing of History (Catherine L. Albanese)
ch. 10 Seldon's Choice: Variations on a Theme by Asimov (Paul A. Carter)
ch. 11 One Historian's Sundays (Leslie Woodcock Tentler)
Afterword


Thinking About Teaching and Learning: Developing Habits of Learning with First Year College and University Students
Additional Info:
Here is a compelling read for every teacher in higher education who wants to refresh or reexamine his or her classroom practice.
Building on the insights offered by recent discoveries about the biological basis of learning, and on his own thought-provoking definitions of teaching, learning and education, the author proceeds to the practical details of instruction that teachers are most interested in — the things that make or break ...
Here is a compelling read for every teacher in higher education who wants to refresh or reexamine his or her classroom practice.
Building on the insights offered by recent discoveries about the biological basis of learning, and on his own thought-provoking definitions of teaching, learning and education, the author proceeds to the practical details of instruction that teachers are most interested in — the things that make or break ...
Additional Info:
Here is a compelling read for every teacher in higher education who wants to refresh or reexamine his or her classroom practice.
Building on the insights offered by recent discoveries about the biological basis of learning, and on his own thought-provoking definitions of teaching, learning and education, the author proceeds to the practical details of instruction that teachers are most interested in — the things that make or break teaching.
Practical and thoughtful, and based on forty years of teaching, wide reading and much reflection, Robert Leamnson provides teachers with a map to develop their own teaching philosophy, and effective nuts-and-bolts advice.
His approach is particularly useful for those facing a cohort of first year students less prepared for college and university. He is concerned to develop in his students habits and skills that will equip them for a lifetime of learning.
He is especially alert to the psychology of students. He also understands, and has experienced, the typical frustration and exasperation teachers feel when students ingeniously elude their teachers' loftiest goals and strategies. Most important, he has good advice about how to cope with the challenge.
This guide will appeal to college teachers in all disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Thinking About Thinking About Teaching: How a philosophy of teaching develops and why it is important to have one
ch. 2 The Biological Basis of Learning: Learning as brain change, rather than brain use
ch. 3 Language: On the questionable utility of unexpressed ideas
ch. 4 Today's First-Year Students: Culture, motivation and preparation
ch. 5 Teaching and Pedagogy: How the way we teach affects the way students learn
ch. 6 The Classroom: The classroom as dynamic arena - What students are really doing
ch. 7 Writing and other Technologies: Technology, old, and new, and as a means to an end
ch. 8 Final Thoughts: Reflections and ruminations
App Two sample assignment sheets
References
Annotated Bibliography
Index
Here is a compelling read for every teacher in higher education who wants to refresh or reexamine his or her classroom practice.
Building on the insights offered by recent discoveries about the biological basis of learning, and on his own thought-provoking definitions of teaching, learning and education, the author proceeds to the practical details of instruction that teachers are most interested in — the things that make or break teaching.
Practical and thoughtful, and based on forty years of teaching, wide reading and much reflection, Robert Leamnson provides teachers with a map to develop their own teaching philosophy, and effective nuts-and-bolts advice.
His approach is particularly useful for those facing a cohort of first year students less prepared for college and university. He is concerned to develop in his students habits and skills that will equip them for a lifetime of learning.
He is especially alert to the psychology of students. He also understands, and has experienced, the typical frustration and exasperation teachers feel when students ingeniously elude their teachers' loftiest goals and strategies. Most important, he has good advice about how to cope with the challenge.
This guide will appeal to college teachers in all disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Thinking About Thinking About Teaching: How a philosophy of teaching develops and why it is important to have one
ch. 2 The Biological Basis of Learning: Learning as brain change, rather than brain use
ch. 3 Language: On the questionable utility of unexpressed ideas
ch. 4 Today's First-Year Students: Culture, motivation and preparation
ch. 5 Teaching and Pedagogy: How the way we teach affects the way students learn
ch. 6 The Classroom: The classroom as dynamic arena - What students are really doing
ch. 7 Writing and other Technologies: Technology, old, and new, and as a means to an end
ch. 8 Final Thoughts: Reflections and ruminations
App Two sample assignment sheets
References
Annotated Bibliography
Index

Crisis in the Church: The Plight of Theological Education
Additional Info:
Drawing on his wealth of experience as both a seminary professor and minister, John Leith identifies and confronts the contemporary crisis in theological education. He argues that the crisis in the seminaries is interwoven with the crisis in the church, and that the secularization of educational institutions has led seminaries to move away from their primary responsibility - preparing pastors for ministry. (From the Publisher)
Drawing on his wealth of experience as both a seminary professor and minister, John Leith identifies and confronts the contemporary crisis in theological education. He argues that the crisis in the seminaries is interwoven with the crisis in the church, and that the secularization of educational institutions has led seminaries to move away from their primary responsibility - preparing pastors for ministry. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Drawing on his wealth of experience as both a seminary professor and minister, John Leith identifies and confronts the contemporary crisis in theological education. He argues that the crisis in the seminaries is interwoven with the crisis in the church, and that the secularization of educational institutions has led seminaries to move away from their primary responsibility - preparing pastors for ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 The Crisis
ch. 2 The Boundaries of Christian Faith
ch. 3 Teaching the Church's Faith
ch. 4 Teaching Church Practice
ch. 5 On Choosing a Seminary Professor
ch. 6 The Moral Use of Endowments
ch. 7 Seminary Constituencies and Boards
ch. 8 The Recruitment of Students
Epilogue
Notes
Drawing on his wealth of experience as both a seminary professor and minister, John Leith identifies and confronts the contemporary crisis in theological education. He argues that the crisis in the seminaries is interwoven with the crisis in the church, and that the secularization of educational institutions has led seminaries to move away from their primary responsibility - preparing pastors for ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 The Crisis
ch. 2 The Boundaries of Christian Faith
ch. 3 Teaching the Church's Faith
ch. 4 Teaching Church Practice
ch. 5 On Choosing a Seminary Professor
ch. 6 The Moral Use of Endowments
ch. 7 Seminary Constituencies and Boards
ch. 8 The Recruitment of Students
Epilogue
Notes

The Growing Use of Part-Time Faculty: Understanding Causes and Effects
Additional Info:
Part-time and temporary faculty now constitute a majority of all those teaching in colleges and universities. This volume presents analyses of the changes in academic work, in faculty careers, and in the economic conditions in higher education that are associated with the shift away from full-time academic jobs. Issues for research, policy, and practice are discussed.
The chapters in this volume were originally prepared for a conference on ...
Part-time and temporary faculty now constitute a majority of all those teaching in colleges and universities. This volume presents analyses of the changes in academic work, in faculty careers, and in the economic conditions in higher education that are associated with the shift away from full-time academic jobs. Issues for research, policy, and practice are discussed.
The chapters in this volume were originally prepared for a conference on ...
Additional Info:
Part-time and temporary faculty now constitute a majority of all those teaching in colleges and universities. This volume presents analyses of the changes in academic work, in faculty careers, and in the economic conditions in higher education that are associated with the shift away from full-time academic jobs. Issues for research, policy, and practice are discussed.
The chapters in this volume were originally prepared for a conference on part-time and adjunct faculty sponsored by the Alfred P. Sloan Foundation.This is the 104th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Higher Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Using Part-Time Faculty More Effectively (F. Jacobs)
A Framework for Assessing Trends in Academic Careers (J. Lawrence)
The Changing Pattern of Employment Relations (M. Rasell & E. Appelbaum)
The Subfaculty (D. Langenberg)
Variations in the Characteristics of Part-Time Faculty by General Fields of Instruction and Research (E. Benjamin)
Implications for Knowledge Production and Careers in Science (C. Gaddy)
Two-Tiered Faculty Systems and Organizational Outcomes (P. Tolbert)
Part-Time Faculty, Quality Programs, and Economic Realities (J. Haeger)
Adjunct Faculty in the Community College: Realities and Challenges (B. Wyles)
New Directions for Research, Policy Development, and Practice (D. Leslie)
Part-time and temporary faculty now constitute a majority of all those teaching in colleges and universities. This volume presents analyses of the changes in academic work, in faculty careers, and in the economic conditions in higher education that are associated with the shift away from full-time academic jobs. Issues for research, policy, and practice are discussed.
The chapters in this volume were originally prepared for a conference on part-time and adjunct faculty sponsored by the Alfred P. Sloan Foundation.This is the 104th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Higher Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Using Part-Time Faculty More Effectively (F. Jacobs)
A Framework for Assessing Trends in Academic Careers (J. Lawrence)
The Changing Pattern of Employment Relations (M. Rasell & E. Appelbaum)
The Subfaculty (D. Langenberg)
Variations in the Characteristics of Part-Time Faculty by General Fields of Instruction and Research (E. Benjamin)
Implications for Knowledge Production and Careers in Science (C. Gaddy)
Two-Tiered Faculty Systems and Organizational Outcomes (P. Tolbert)
Part-Time Faculty, Quality Programs, and Economic Realities (J. Haeger)
Adjunct Faculty in the Community College: Realities and Challenges (B. Wyles)
New Directions for Research, Policy Development, and Practice (D. Leslie)

Peers in the Classroom: Case Studies in Adult Higher Education
Additional Info:
From one student's off hand remark, the idea of a casebook for use in adult education grew into a reality. Regina Lopata Logan and Robert M. Fromberg have collected twenty cases representing various experiences of faculty, students, and administrators which, while not necessarily representing historical facts, are all true. These cases convey a sense of the dynamism and complexity that educators of adults and adult students experience when they return ...
From one student's off hand remark, the idea of a casebook for use in adult education grew into a reality. Regina Lopata Logan and Robert M. Fromberg have collected twenty cases representing various experiences of faculty, students, and administrators which, while not necessarily representing historical facts, are all true. These cases convey a sense of the dynamism and complexity that educators of adults and adult students experience when they return ...
Additional Info:
From one student's off hand remark, the idea of a casebook for use in adult education grew into a reality. Regina Lopata Logan and Robert M. Fromberg have collected twenty cases representing various experiences of faculty, students, and administrators which, while not necessarily representing historical facts, are all true. These cases convey a sense of the dynamism and complexity that educators of adults and adult students experience when they return to school in the midst of busy adult roles and responsibilities. This is an ideal workbook for those involved in higher education, especially faculty developers, deans, department chairs, or anyone else who teaches about adults in the classroom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part 1: Adult Higher Education and the Use of Case Studies
Using Cases to Promote Adult Learning
Using Cases to Create a Culture of Teaching and Learning
Including Adult Students in Case Discussions
Part 2: Cases from a Faculty Perspective
Of Pride and Prejudice
Stuart
Practicing Theory
The Crush
A Case of Dislike
The Dominating Auditor
The Group that Couldn't Keep Up
A Case of Culture Shock
The Case of the Bewildered Student
Seeing Strengths and Weaknesses
A Brief Course in Conflict
Part 3: Cases from a Student Perspective
Confronting the Grade
A Case of Diffidence
To Hell in a Handbasket
Bridging the Gap
Real Work
Part 4: Cases from an Administrative Perspective
Freedom" Principles and Paradoxes
The Case of the Mixed Message
The Purloined Letter
The Art and Science of Teaching the Arts and Sciences: The Case of the New Faculty Developer
About the Authors
From one student's off hand remark, the idea of a casebook for use in adult education grew into a reality. Regina Lopata Logan and Robert M. Fromberg have collected twenty cases representing various experiences of faculty, students, and administrators which, while not necessarily representing historical facts, are all true. These cases convey a sense of the dynamism and complexity that educators of adults and adult students experience when they return to school in the midst of busy adult roles and responsibilities. This is an ideal workbook for those involved in higher education, especially faculty developers, deans, department chairs, or anyone else who teaches about adults in the classroom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part 1: Adult Higher Education and the Use of Case Studies
Using Cases to Promote Adult Learning
Using Cases to Create a Culture of Teaching and Learning
Including Adult Students in Case Discussions
Part 2: Cases from a Faculty Perspective
Of Pride and Prejudice
Stuart
Practicing Theory
The Crush
A Case of Dislike
The Dominating Auditor
The Group that Couldn't Keep Up
A Case of Culture Shock
The Case of the Bewildered Student
Seeing Strengths and Weaknesses
A Brief Course in Conflict
Part 3: Cases from a Student Perspective
Confronting the Grade
A Case of Diffidence
To Hell in a Handbasket
Bridging the Gap
Real Work
Part 4: Cases from an Administrative Perspective
Freedom" Principles and Paradoxes
The Case of the Mixed Message
The Purloined Letter
The Art and Science of Teaching the Arts and Sciences: The Case of the New Faculty Developer
About the Authors

Three Rival Versions of Moral Enquiry: Encyclopedia, Genealogy and Tradition
Additional Info:
Alasdair MacIntyre—whom Newsweek has called "one of the foremost moral philosophers in the English-speaking world"—here presents his 1988 Gifford Lectures as an expansion of his earlier work Whose Justice? Which Rationality? He begins by considering the cultural and philosophical distance dividing Lord Gifford's late nineteenth-century world from our own. The outlook of that earlier world, MacIntyre claims, was definitively articulated in the Ninth Edition of the Encyclopaedia Brittanica, which ...
Alasdair MacIntyre—whom Newsweek has called "one of the foremost moral philosophers in the English-speaking world"—here presents his 1988 Gifford Lectures as an expansion of his earlier work Whose Justice? Which Rationality? He begins by considering the cultural and philosophical distance dividing Lord Gifford's late nineteenth-century world from our own. The outlook of that earlier world, MacIntyre claims, was definitively articulated in the Ninth Edition of the Encyclopaedia Brittanica, which ...
Additional Info:
Alasdair MacIntyre—whom Newsweek has called "one of the foremost moral philosophers in the English-speaking world"—here presents his 1988 Gifford Lectures as an expansion of his earlier work Whose Justice? Which Rationality? He begins by considering the cultural and philosophical distance dividing Lord Gifford's late nineteenth-century world from our own. The outlook of that earlier world, MacIntyre claims, was definitively articulated in the Ninth Edition of the Encyclopaedia Brittanica, which conceived of moral enquiry as both providing insight into and continuing the rational progress of mankind into ever greater enlightenment. MacIntyre compares that conception of moral enquiry to two rival conceptions also formulated in the late nineteenth century: that of Nietzsche's Zur Genealogie der Moral and that expressed in the encyclical letter of Pope Leo XIII Aeterni Patris.
The lectures focus on Aquinas's integration of Augustinian and Aristotelian modes of enquiry, the inability of the encyclopaedists' standpoint to withstand Thomistic or genealogical criticism, and the problems confronting the contemporary post-Nietzschean genealogist. MacIntyre concludes by considering the implications for education in universities and colleges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Adam Gifford's Project in Context
Genealogies and Subversions
Too Many Thomisms?
The Augustinian Conception of Moral Enquiry
Aristotle and/or/against Augustine: Rival Traditions of Enquiry
Aquinas and the Rationality of Tradition
In the Aftermath of Defeated Tradition
Tradition against Encyclopaedia
Tradition against Genealogy
Reconceiving the University as an Institution and the Lecture as a Genre
Index
Alasdair MacIntyre—whom Newsweek has called "one of the foremost moral philosophers in the English-speaking world"—here presents his 1988 Gifford Lectures as an expansion of his earlier work Whose Justice? Which Rationality? He begins by considering the cultural and philosophical distance dividing Lord Gifford's late nineteenth-century world from our own. The outlook of that earlier world, MacIntyre claims, was definitively articulated in the Ninth Edition of the Encyclopaedia Brittanica, which conceived of moral enquiry as both providing insight into and continuing the rational progress of mankind into ever greater enlightenment. MacIntyre compares that conception of moral enquiry to two rival conceptions also formulated in the late nineteenth century: that of Nietzsche's Zur Genealogie der Moral and that expressed in the encyclical letter of Pope Leo XIII Aeterni Patris.
The lectures focus on Aquinas's integration of Augustinian and Aristotelian modes of enquiry, the inability of the encyclopaedists' standpoint to withstand Thomistic or genealogical criticism, and the problems confronting the contemporary post-Nietzschean genealogist. MacIntyre concludes by considering the implications for education in universities and colleges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Adam Gifford's Project in Context
Genealogies and Subversions
Too Many Thomisms?
The Augustinian Conception of Moral Enquiry
Aristotle and/or/against Augustine: Rival Traditions of Enquiry
Aquinas and the Rationality of Tradition
In the Aftermath of Defeated Tradition
Tradition against Encyclopaedia
Tradition against Genealogy
Reconceiving the University as an Institution and the Lecture as a Genre
Index


147 Practical Tips for Teaching Professors
Additional Info:
Whether you're new to teaching or an experienced veteran, this is a book you'll want to keep handy. From pre-term activities right through final exams, grading, and evaluation, 147 Practical Tips covers all the important phases of the teaching process.
Educators use 147 Practical Tips for a quick idea to spice up a class. Teaching and learning centers keep shelf copies as a reference for faculty and teaching assistants. And ...
Whether you're new to teaching or an experienced veteran, this is a book you'll want to keep handy. From pre-term activities right through final exams, grading, and evaluation, 147 Practical Tips covers all the important phases of the teaching process.
Educators use 147 Practical Tips for a quick idea to spice up a class. Teaching and learning centers keep shelf copies as a reference for faculty and teaching assistants. And ...
Additional Info:
Whether you're new to teaching or an experienced veteran, this is a book you'll want to keep handy. From pre-term activities right through final exams, grading, and evaluation, 147 Practical Tips covers all the important phases of the teaching process.
Educators use 147 Practical Tips for a quick idea to spice up a class. Teaching and learning centers keep shelf copies as a reference for faculty and teaching assistants. And Chairs and Deans give the book to their faculty during orientation. Take advantage of the special pricing to the right so your colleagues can share these teaching tips. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Before You Begin
Class Organization
The First Day
At the Bell: 1, 2, 3 Go!
Physicality
-Delivery
-Movement
-Blackboards
Lecturing as Performance Art
Teaching Your Students to Think
Examples
Helping Your Students Read
Large Lectures
-Student Input
-Preparation
-Delivery
Discussion
-Teacher Participation
-Student Participation
-Concept and Structure
-Odds and Ends
Group Projects
How Are You Teaching?
-Check with Your Students
-Reacting to Student Evaluations
-Do It Yourself!
Motivating Your Students to Read
Work With Your Colleagues
Motivation: Critical Moments
Evaluating Your Students
-Grading Written Assignments
-Grading Participation
-Grading Tests
Reviewing: One More Time
-Reviews Can Help Students Cope with Exam Anxiety
-Reviews Can Help Motivate Students
-Reviews Can Provide Summary and Perspective
-Reviews Can Focus on Specific Areas of Need
-Reviews Can Aim at Specific Exam Items
-Reviews Can Provide Fresh Angles and Approaches
Final Words
(16 contributors listed in the acknowledgments)
Whether you're new to teaching or an experienced veteran, this is a book you'll want to keep handy. From pre-term activities right through final exams, grading, and evaluation, 147 Practical Tips covers all the important phases of the teaching process.
Educators use 147 Practical Tips for a quick idea to spice up a class. Teaching and learning centers keep shelf copies as a reference for faculty and teaching assistants. And Chairs and Deans give the book to their faculty during orientation. Take advantage of the special pricing to the right so your colleagues can share these teaching tips. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Before You Begin
Class Organization
The First Day
At the Bell: 1, 2, 3 Go!
Physicality
-Delivery
-Movement
-Blackboards
Lecturing as Performance Art
Teaching Your Students to Think
Examples
Helping Your Students Read
Large Lectures
-Student Input
-Preparation
-Delivery
Discussion
-Teacher Participation
-Student Participation
-Concept and Structure
-Odds and Ends
Group Projects
How Are You Teaching?
-Check with Your Students
-Reacting to Student Evaluations
-Do It Yourself!
Motivating Your Students to Read
Work With Your Colleagues
Motivation: Critical Moments
Evaluating Your Students
-Grading Written Assignments
-Grading Participation
-Grading Tests
Reviewing: One More Time
-Reviews Can Help Students Cope with Exam Anxiety
-Reviews Can Help Motivate Students
-Reviews Can Provide Summary and Perspective
-Reviews Can Focus on Specific Areas of Need
-Reviews Can Aim at Specific Exam Items
-Reviews Can Provide Fresh Angles and Approaches
Final Words
(16 contributors listed in the acknowledgments)
Additional Info:
At the end of his 1994 book, The Soul of the American University, George Marsden advanced a modest proposal for an enhanced role for religious faith in today's scholarship. This "unscientific postscript" helped spark a heated debate that spilled out of the pages of academic journals and The Chronicle of Higher Education into mainstream media such as The New York Times, and marked Marsden as one of the leading participants in ...
At the end of his 1994 book, The Soul of the American University, George Marsden advanced a modest proposal for an enhanced role for religious faith in today's scholarship. This "unscientific postscript" helped spark a heated debate that spilled out of the pages of academic journals and The Chronicle of Higher Education into mainstream media such as The New York Times, and marked Marsden as one of the leading participants in ...
Additional Info:
At the end of his 1994 book, The Soul of the American University, George Marsden advanced a modest proposal for an enhanced role for religious faith in today's scholarship. This "unscientific postscript" helped spark a heated debate that spilled out of the pages of academic journals and The Chronicle of Higher Education into mainstream media such as The New York Times, and marked Marsden as one of the leading participants in the debates concerning religion and public life. Marsden now gives his proposal a fuller treatment in The Outrageous Idea of Christian Scholarship, a thoughtful and thought-provoking book on the relationship of religious faith and intellectual scholarship. More than a response to Marsden's critics, The Outrageous Idea of Christian Scholarship takes the next step towards demonstrating what the ancient relationship of faith and learning might mean for the academy today. Marsden argues forcefully that mainstream American higher education needs to be more open to explicit expressions of faith and to accept what faith means in an intellectual context. Contemporary university culture is hollow at its core, Marsden writes. Not only does it lack a spiritual center, but it is without any real alternative. He argues that a religiously diverse culture will be an intellectually richer one, and it is time for scholars and institutions to take the intellectual dimensions of their faith seriously and become active participants in the highest level of academic discourse. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Why Christian Perspectives Are Not Welcomed
ch. 2 The Arguments for Silence
ch. 3 Christian Scholarship and the Rules of the Academic Game
ch. 4 What Difference Could It Possibly Make?
ch. 5 The Positive Contributions of Theological Context
ch. 6 Building Academic Communities
Getting Specific: A Readable Appendix
Notes
Index
At the end of his 1994 book, The Soul of the American University, George Marsden advanced a modest proposal for an enhanced role for religious faith in today's scholarship. This "unscientific postscript" helped spark a heated debate that spilled out of the pages of academic journals and The Chronicle of Higher Education into mainstream media such as The New York Times, and marked Marsden as one of the leading participants in the debates concerning religion and public life. Marsden now gives his proposal a fuller treatment in The Outrageous Idea of Christian Scholarship, a thoughtful and thought-provoking book on the relationship of religious faith and intellectual scholarship. More than a response to Marsden's critics, The Outrageous Idea of Christian Scholarship takes the next step towards demonstrating what the ancient relationship of faith and learning might mean for the academy today. Marsden argues forcefully that mainstream American higher education needs to be more open to explicit expressions of faith and to accept what faith means in an intellectual context. Contemporary university culture is hollow at its core, Marsden writes. Not only does it lack a spiritual center, but it is without any real alternative. He argues that a religiously diverse culture will be an intellectually richer one, and it is time for scholars and institutions to take the intellectual dimensions of their faith seriously and become active participants in the highest level of academic discourse. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Why Christian Perspectives Are Not Welcomed
ch. 2 The Arguments for Silence
ch. 3 Christian Scholarship and the Rules of the Academic Game
ch. 4 What Difference Could It Possibly Make?
ch. 5 The Positive Contributions of Theological Context
ch. 6 Building Academic Communities
Getting Specific: A Readable Appendix
Notes
Index

The Secularization of the Academy
Additional Info:
A searching exploration of a century and a half of higher education in American culture. This book will enliven, and inform, the wide-ranging discussion now taking place. Bringing together eleven new essays--most published here for the first time--on the secularization of American, British, and Canadian higher education, this text maps some of the major contours of a largely unexplored topic. It focuses on the histories of leading universities since the ...
A searching exploration of a century and a half of higher education in American culture. This book will enliven, and inform, the wide-ranging discussion now taking place. Bringing together eleven new essays--most published here for the first time--on the secularization of American, British, and Canadian higher education, this text maps some of the major contours of a largely unexplored topic. It focuses on the histories of leading universities since the ...
Additional Info:
A searching exploration of a century and a half of higher education in American culture. This book will enliven, and inform, the wide-ranging discussion now taking place. Bringing together eleven new essays--most published here for the first time--on the secularization of American, British, and Canadian higher education, this text maps some of the major contours of a largely unexplored topic. It focuses on the histories of leading universities since the late nineteenth century, analyzing the transition from an era when organized Christianity and its ideals had a major role in leading institutions of higher education to an era when they have almost none. This book is an important resource for students of religion and the history of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Introduction
ch. 1 The Soul of the American University: An Historical Overview (George M. Marsden )
ch. 2 From Evangelicalism to Liberalism: Public Midwestern Universities in Nineteenth-Century America (Bradley J. Longfield)
ch. 3 Secularization and Sacralization: Speculations on Some Religious Origins of the Secular Humanities Curriculum, 1850-1900 (James Turner )
ch. 4 Faith and Learning in the Age of the University: The Academic Ministry of Daniel Coit Gilman (D.G. Hart )
ch. 5 "For God, for Country, and for Yale": Yale, Religion, and Higher Education between the World Wars (Bradley J. Longfield )
ch. 6 "The Survival of Recognizably Protestant Colleges": Reflections on Old-Line Protestantism, 1950-1990 (Robert Wood Lynn )
ch. 7 American Learning and the Problem of Religious Studies (D.G. Hart )
ch. 8 American Catholic Higher Education, 1940-1990: The Ideological Context (Philip Gleason )
ch. 9 The Secularization of British Universities since the Mid-Nineteenth Century (David Bebbington )
ch. 10 Protestant Colleges in Canada: Past and Future (G.A. Rawlyk)
ch. 11 Christianity and the University in America: A Bibliographical Essay (D.G. Hart.)
Index
A searching exploration of a century and a half of higher education in American culture. This book will enliven, and inform, the wide-ranging discussion now taking place. Bringing together eleven new essays--most published here for the first time--on the secularization of American, British, and Canadian higher education, this text maps some of the major contours of a largely unexplored topic. It focuses on the histories of leading universities since the late nineteenth century, analyzing the transition from an era when organized Christianity and its ideals had a major role in leading institutions of higher education to an era when they have almost none. This book is an important resource for students of religion and the history of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Introduction
ch. 1 The Soul of the American University: An Historical Overview (George M. Marsden )
ch. 2 From Evangelicalism to Liberalism: Public Midwestern Universities in Nineteenth-Century America (Bradley J. Longfield)
ch. 3 Secularization and Sacralization: Speculations on Some Religious Origins of the Secular Humanities Curriculum, 1850-1900 (James Turner )
ch. 4 Faith and Learning in the Age of the University: The Academic Ministry of Daniel Coit Gilman (D.G. Hart )
ch. 5 "For God, for Country, and for Yale": Yale, Religion, and Higher Education between the World Wars (Bradley J. Longfield )
ch. 6 "The Survival of Recognizably Protestant Colleges": Reflections on Old-Line Protestantism, 1950-1990 (Robert Wood Lynn )
ch. 7 American Learning and the Problem of Religious Studies (D.G. Hart )
ch. 8 American Catholic Higher Education, 1940-1990: The Ideological Context (Philip Gleason )
ch. 9 The Secularization of British Universities since the Mid-Nineteenth Century (David Bebbington )
ch. 10 Protestant Colleges in Canada: Past and Future (G.A. Rawlyk)
ch. 11 Christianity and the University in America: A Bibliographical Essay (D.G. Hart.)
Index

Teaching What You're Not: Identity Politics in Higher Education
Additional Info:
There was a time not long ago when the only complaints students levied against professors were that they assigned too much work or that their lectures were delivered in a soporific monotone. Today, radical changes in the composition of the university, the ongoing revision of canons and curricula, and the politicization of knowledge have profoundly altered the landscape, introducing an identity-based definition of credibility as an entirely new precondition of ...
There was a time not long ago when the only complaints students levied against professors were that they assigned too much work or that their lectures were delivered in a soporific monotone. Today, radical changes in the composition of the university, the ongoing revision of canons and curricula, and the politicization of knowledge have profoundly altered the landscape, introducing an identity-based definition of credibility as an entirely new precondition of ...
Additional Info:
There was a time not long ago when the only complaints students levied against professors were that they assigned too much work or that their lectures were delivered in a soporific monotone. Today, radical changes in the composition of the university, the ongoing revision of canons and curricula, and the politicization of knowledge have profoundly altered the landscape, introducing an identity-based definition of credibility as an entirely new precondition of authority. As a result, questions that previous generations of educators never considered have taken on a central importance: Can whites teach African American literature effectively and legitimately? What is at issue when a man teaches a women's studies course? How effectively can a straight woman educate students about gay and lesbian history? What are the political implications of the study of the colonizers by the colonized? More generally, how does the identity of an educator affect his or her credibility with students and with other educators? In incident after well-publicized incident, these abstract questions have turned up in America's classrooms and in national media, often trivialized as the latest example of PC excess. Going beyond simplistic headlines, Teaching What You're Not broaches these and many other difficult questions. With contributions from scholars in a variety of disciplines, the book examines the ways in which historical, cultural, and personal identities impact on pedagogy and scholarship. Teaching What You're Not gets at the heart of the ongoing debates about identity politics in the academy, and society at large. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Identity Politics in the College Classroom, or Whose Issue Is This, Anyway? (Katherine J. Mayberry)
ch. 2 Redefining America: Literature, Multiculturalism, Pedagogy Nancy J. Peterson)
ch. 3 Straight Teacher/Queer Classroom: Teaching as an Ally Barbara Scott Winkler)
ch. 4 The Outsider's Gaze (Janet M. Powers)
ch. 5 No Middle Ground? Men Teaching Feminism (J. Scott Johnson, Jennifer Kellen, Gret Seibert, Celia Shaughnessy)
ch. 6 The Discipline of History and the Demands of Identity Politics (Christie Farnham)
ch. 7 Teaching What I'm Not: An Able-Bodied Woman Teaches Literature by Women with Disabilities (Barbara Dibernard)
ch. 8 Theory, Practice, and the Battered (Woman) Teacher (Celeste M. Condit)
ch. 9 Teaching What the Truth Compels You to Teach: A Historian's View (Jacqueline Jones)
ch. 10 Pro/(Con)fessing Otherness: Trans(cending)national Identities in the English Classroom (Lavina Dhingra Shankar)
ch. 11 Caliban in the Classroom (Indira Karamcheti)
ch. 12 A Paradox of Silence: Reflections of a Man Who Teaches Women's Studies (Craig W. Heller)
ch. 13 Teaching in the Multiracial Classroom: Reconsidering "Benito Cereno" (Robert S. Levine)
ch. 14 "Young Man, Tell Our Stories of How We Made It Over": Beyond the Politics of Identity (Gary L. Lemons)
ch. 15 Disciplines and Their Discomforts: The Challenges of Study and Service Abroad (Gerard Aching)
ch. 16 Scratching Heads: The Importance of Sensitivity in an Analysis of "Others" Donna J. Watson)
ch. 17 Who Holds the Mirror? Creating "the Consciousness of Others" (Mary Elizabeth Lanser)
ch. 18 Daughters of the Dust, the White Woman Viewer, and the Unborn Child (Renee R. Curry)
Contributors
Index
There was a time not long ago when the only complaints students levied against professors were that they assigned too much work or that their lectures were delivered in a soporific monotone. Today, radical changes in the composition of the university, the ongoing revision of canons and curricula, and the politicization of knowledge have profoundly altered the landscape, introducing an identity-based definition of credibility as an entirely new precondition of authority. As a result, questions that previous generations of educators never considered have taken on a central importance: Can whites teach African American literature effectively and legitimately? What is at issue when a man teaches a women's studies course? How effectively can a straight woman educate students about gay and lesbian history? What are the political implications of the study of the colonizers by the colonized? More generally, how does the identity of an educator affect his or her credibility with students and with other educators? In incident after well-publicized incident, these abstract questions have turned up in America's classrooms and in national media, often trivialized as the latest example of PC excess. Going beyond simplistic headlines, Teaching What You're Not broaches these and many other difficult questions. With contributions from scholars in a variety of disciplines, the book examines the ways in which historical, cultural, and personal identities impact on pedagogy and scholarship. Teaching What You're Not gets at the heart of the ongoing debates about identity politics in the academy, and society at large. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Identity Politics in the College Classroom, or Whose Issue Is This, Anyway? (Katherine J. Mayberry)
ch. 2 Redefining America: Literature, Multiculturalism, Pedagogy Nancy J. Peterson)
ch. 3 Straight Teacher/Queer Classroom: Teaching as an Ally Barbara Scott Winkler)
ch. 4 The Outsider's Gaze (Janet M. Powers)
ch. 5 No Middle Ground? Men Teaching Feminism (J. Scott Johnson, Jennifer Kellen, Gret Seibert, Celia Shaughnessy)
ch. 6 The Discipline of History and the Demands of Identity Politics (Christie Farnham)
ch. 7 Teaching What I'm Not: An Able-Bodied Woman Teaches Literature by Women with Disabilities (Barbara Dibernard)
ch. 8 Theory, Practice, and the Battered (Woman) Teacher (Celeste M. Condit)
ch. 9 Teaching What the Truth Compels You to Teach: A Historian's View (Jacqueline Jones)
ch. 10 Pro/(Con)fessing Otherness: Trans(cending)national Identities in the English Classroom (Lavina Dhingra Shankar)
ch. 11 Caliban in the Classroom (Indira Karamcheti)
ch. 12 A Paradox of Silence: Reflections of a Man Who Teaches Women's Studies (Craig W. Heller)
ch. 13 Teaching in the Multiracial Classroom: Reconsidering "Benito Cereno" (Robert S. Levine)
ch. 14 "Young Man, Tell Our Stories of How We Made It Over": Beyond the Politics of Identity (Gary L. Lemons)
ch. 15 Disciplines and Their Discomforts: The Challenges of Study and Service Abroad (Gerard Aching)
ch. 16 Scratching Heads: The Importance of Sensitivity in an Analysis of "Others" Donna J. Watson)
ch. 17 Who Holds the Mirror? Creating "the Consciousness of Others" (Mary Elizabeth Lanser)
ch. 18 Daughters of the Dust, the White Woman Viewer, and the Unborn Child (Renee R. Curry)
Contributors
Index

Critical Pedagogy and a Predatory Culture: Oppositional Politics in a Postmodern Era
Additional Info:
Critical Pedagogy and Predatory Culture is a major contribution to the radical literature on culture, identity and the politics of schooling, especially as it addresses the challenge and the promise of school and social reform through what the author calls a "critical multiculturalism." The author's approach to what he calls "predatory culture" and his exploration of recent debates over the role of public institutions and the state within such culture ...
Critical Pedagogy and Predatory Culture is a major contribution to the radical literature on culture, identity and the politics of schooling, especially as it addresses the challenge and the promise of school and social reform through what the author calls a "critical multiculturalism." The author's approach to what he calls "predatory culture" and his exploration of recent debates over the role of public institutions and the state within such culture ...
Additional Info:
Critical Pedagogy and Predatory Culture is a major contribution to the radical literature on culture, identity and the politics of schooling, especially as it addresses the challenge and the promise of school and social reform through what the author calls a "critical multiculturalism." The author's approach to what he calls "predatory culture" and his exploration of recent debates over the role of public institutions and the state within such culture offers the discerning reader a unique combination of neo-marxist and post-structuralist theory--referred to by the author as "resistance of postmodernist critique." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgements
Introduction: education as a political issue
Pt. I Pedagogy, culture, and the body
ch. 1 Radical pedagogy as cultural politics: beyond the discourse of critique and anti-utopianism
ch. 2 Schooling the postmodern body: critical pedagogy and the politics of enfleshment
Pt. II Critical agency, border narratives and resistance multiculturalism
ch. 3 Border disputes: multicultural narrative, Rasquachismo, and critical pedagogy in postmodern America
ch. 4 White terror and oppositional agency: towards a critical multiculturalism
ch. 5 Pedagogies of dissent and transformation: a dialogue with Kris Gutierrez
Pt. III Postcolonial pedagogies and the politics of difference
ch. 6 Postmodernism, postcolonialism, and pedagogy
ch. 7 Multiculturalism and the postmodern critique: towards a pedagogy of resistance and transformation
ch. 8 Critical pedagogy and the pragmatics of justice
Notes
References
Index
Critical Pedagogy and Predatory Culture is a major contribution to the radical literature on culture, identity and the politics of schooling, especially as it addresses the challenge and the promise of school and social reform through what the author calls a "critical multiculturalism." The author's approach to what he calls "predatory culture" and his exploration of recent debates over the role of public institutions and the state within such culture offers the discerning reader a unique combination of neo-marxist and post-structuralist theory--referred to by the author as "resistance of postmodernist critique." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgements
Introduction: education as a political issue
Pt. I Pedagogy, culture, and the body
ch. 1 Radical pedagogy as cultural politics: beyond the discourse of critique and anti-utopianism
ch. 2 Schooling the postmodern body: critical pedagogy and the politics of enfleshment
Pt. II Critical agency, border narratives and resistance multiculturalism
ch. 3 Border disputes: multicultural narrative, Rasquachismo, and critical pedagogy in postmodern America
ch. 4 White terror and oppositional agency: towards a critical multiculturalism
ch. 5 Pedagogies of dissent and transformation: a dialogue with Kris Gutierrez
Pt. III Postcolonial pedagogies and the politics of difference
ch. 6 Postmodernism, postcolonialism, and pedagogy
ch. 7 Multiculturalism and the postmodern critique: towards a pedagogy of resistance and transformation
ch. 8 Critical pedagogy and the pragmatics of justice
Notes
References
Index

Leading from the Center: The Emerging Role of the Chief Academic Officer in Theological Schools
Additional Info:
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part One: Roles, Responsibilities, and Relationships
ch. 1 The Nature and Scope of the Dean's Work
ch. 2 Managerial and Leadership Roles
ch. 3 The Dean-President Relationship
ch. 4 The Dean-Faculty Relationship
ch. 5 The Dean's Work with Senior Administrators, Boards, and Church Leaders
Part Two: Administration as a Vocation
ch. 6 Recruitment and Hiring of Chief Academic Officers
ch. 7 Evaluation and Professional Development
ch. 8 Academic Leadership: The Challenges Ahead
Afterword Advice to Prospective Deans
Appendices
Acknowledgements
Index
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part One: Roles, Responsibilities, and Relationships
ch. 1 The Nature and Scope of the Dean's Work
ch. 2 Managerial and Leadership Roles
ch. 3 The Dean-President Relationship
ch. 4 The Dean-Faculty Relationship
ch. 5 The Dean's Work with Senior Administrators, Boards, and Church Leaders
Part Two: Administration as a Vocation
ch. 6 Recruitment and Hiring of Chief Academic Officers
ch. 7 Evaluation and Professional Development
ch. 8 Academic Leadership: The Challenges Ahead
Afterword Advice to Prospective Deans
Appendices
Acknowledgements
Index

Academic Leadership: A Study of Chief Academic Officers in Theological Schools
Additional Info:
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Leading from the center : the role of the chief academic officer / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 2 Challenges of academic administration : rewards and stresses in the role of the chief academic officer / by Karen M. Ristau
ch. 3 Career paths and hiring practices of chief academic officers in theological schools / by Mary Abdul-Rahman
ch. 4 Professional development for chief academic officers / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 5 Dean-faculty relationships / by Jeanne P. McLean with Nicholas Cafarelli
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Leading from the center : the role of the chief academic officer / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 2 Challenges of academic administration : rewards and stresses in the role of the chief academic officer / by Karen M. Ristau
ch. 3 Career paths and hiring practices of chief academic officers in theological schools / by Mary Abdul-Rahman
ch. 4 Professional development for chief academic officers / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 5 Dean-faculty relationships / by Jeanne P. McLean with Nicholas Cafarelli
Additional Info:
This book seeks to be responsible both to biblical scholarship and to pedagogical inquiry. It focuses on wisdom texts in the Bible (Proverbs, Job, Ecclesiastes, Ecclesiasticus, Wisdom of Solomon, and the Synoptic Gospels) and on inferences about teaching and learning that can be drawn from these texts. Acknowledging that we cannot reconstruct the practices of the wise teachers of the biblical tradition with historical methods, Meltbert nevertheless argues that the ...
This book seeks to be responsible both to biblical scholarship and to pedagogical inquiry. It focuses on wisdom texts in the Bible (Proverbs, Job, Ecclesiastes, Ecclesiasticus, Wisdom of Solomon, and the Synoptic Gospels) and on inferences about teaching and learning that can be drawn from these texts. Acknowledging that we cannot reconstruct the practices of the wise teachers of the biblical tradition with historical methods, Meltbert nevertheless argues that the ...
Additional Info:
This book seeks to be responsible both to biblical scholarship and to pedagogical inquiry. It focuses on wisdom texts in the Bible (Proverbs, Job, Ecclesiastes, Ecclesiasticus, Wisdom of Solomon, and the Synoptic Gospels) and on inferences about teaching and learning that can be drawn from these texts. Acknowledging that we cannot reconstruct the practices of the wise teachers of the biblical tradition with historical methods, Meltbert nevertheless argues that the wisdom texts presumably embody not only what these teachers wanted readers to learn but also how it was to be learned.
What do the literary forms and content of these texts presuppose, entail, or imply about reader-learners and about learning and teaching processes? Are some teaching-learning approaches more suitable than others for these texts or more likely to foster engagement with particular themes? Using a variation of reader-response criticism (the "readerly approach"), Melchert engages the wisdom texts (whose authorship is anonymous and whose particular historical-cultural context cannot be reconstructed with any confidence) in an effort to determine why the sages said and taught as they did and what contemporary teachers and learners might pick up from them about teaching, learning, and being wisely religious in a postmodern world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Abbreviations
Introduction: Then, Now, and Maybe
ch. 1 "Listen, My Child": Proverbs
ch. 2 The Presence of Absence: Job
ch. 3 The Absence of Presence: Ecclesiastes
ch. 4 Sleeping with the Enemy: Education amid Culture Wars
ch. 5 Woman Wisdom: Education as Playing in the Presence of God
ch. 6 Why Didn't Jesus Tell Bible Stories?
ch. 7 What Counts as Education in a Wisdom Approach?
Index of Biblical References
Index of Subjects and Authors
This book seeks to be responsible both to biblical scholarship and to pedagogical inquiry. It focuses on wisdom texts in the Bible (Proverbs, Job, Ecclesiastes, Ecclesiasticus, Wisdom of Solomon, and the Synoptic Gospels) and on inferences about teaching and learning that can be drawn from these texts. Acknowledging that we cannot reconstruct the practices of the wise teachers of the biblical tradition with historical methods, Meltbert nevertheless argues that the wisdom texts presumably embody not only what these teachers wanted readers to learn but also how it was to be learned.
What do the literary forms and content of these texts presuppose, entail, or imply about reader-learners and about learning and teaching processes? Are some teaching-learning approaches more suitable than others for these texts or more likely to foster engagement with particular themes? Using a variation of reader-response criticism (the "readerly approach"), Melchert engages the wisdom texts (whose authorship is anonymous and whose particular historical-cultural context cannot be reconstructed with any confidence) in an effort to determine why the sages said and taught as they did and what contemporary teachers and learners might pick up from them about teaching, learning, and being wisely religious in a postmodern world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Abbreviations
Introduction: Then, Now, and Maybe
ch. 1 "Listen, My Child": Proverbs
ch. 2 The Presence of Absence: Job
ch. 3 The Absence of Presence: Ecclesiastes
ch. 4 Sleeping with the Enemy: Education amid Culture Wars
ch. 5 Woman Wisdom: Education as Playing in the Presence of God
ch. 6 Why Didn't Jesus Tell Bible Stories?
ch. 7 What Counts as Education in a Wisdom Approach?
Index of Biblical References
Index of Subjects and Authors

A Professor's Work
Additional Info:
A Professor's Work attempts to clear up questions about the role of the college professor in society by providing a field study of what a professor actually does. The author organizes a year of his work and his colleagues into an overview of a years teaching, research, and service. The first section describes the service work, including a depiction of the search for a new faculty member, and a committee ...
A Professor's Work attempts to clear up questions about the role of the college professor in society by providing a field study of what a professor actually does. The author organizes a year of his work and his colleagues into an overview of a years teaching, research, and service. The first section describes the service work, including a depiction of the search for a new faculty member, and a committee ...
Additional Info:
A Professor's Work attempts to clear up questions about the role of the college professor in society by providing a field study of what a professor actually does. The author organizes a year of his work and his colleagues into an overview of a years teaching, research, and service. The first section describes the service work, including a depiction of the search for a new faculty member, and a committee that investigated the appearance of extremely large general educational classes. Then the teaching section focuses on the teaching and evaluation of a single course, and the dealing with problems encountered by the wide variety of students who attend an urban university. Finally, the research section exposes the relationship of writing and publishing to the conflicts and interactions of scholars and with the impact the study had on the university community. The author also includes a representation of community activities, the relationship of a professor's work to his family life, and an evaluation of professors studied against two theoretical models of professional behavior and activity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Perceptions of the Professor
ch. 2 Inside the Department
ch. 3 How an Intrepid Band of Professors Confronted the General Education Monsters
ch. 4 University Encounters
ch. 5 But Don't Professors Also Teach Courses
ch. 6 And Of Course There Were Students
ch. 7 The Scholar Writes War and Peace, Participates in the Scientific Enterprise, and Receives a Call From the East
ch. 8 A Professor's Work Photographs
ch. 9 Serving the Community
ch. 10 Even Professors Have Families
ch. 11 Is the Professor a Professional?
Cast
References
About the Author
A Professor's Work attempts to clear up questions about the role of the college professor in society by providing a field study of what a professor actually does. The author organizes a year of his work and his colleagues into an overview of a years teaching, research, and service. The first section describes the service work, including a depiction of the search for a new faculty member, and a committee that investigated the appearance of extremely large general educational classes. Then the teaching section focuses on the teaching and evaluation of a single course, and the dealing with problems encountered by the wide variety of students who attend an urban university. Finally, the research section exposes the relationship of writing and publishing to the conflicts and interactions of scholars and with the impact the study had on the university community. The author also includes a representation of community activities, the relationship of a professor's work to his family life, and an evaluation of professors studied against two theoretical models of professional behavior and activity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Perceptions of the Professor
ch. 2 Inside the Department
ch. 3 How an Intrepid Band of Professors Confronted the General Education Monsters
ch. 4 University Encounters
ch. 5 But Don't Professors Also Teach Courses
ch. 6 And Of Course There Were Students
ch. 7 The Scholar Writes War and Peace, Participates in the Scientific Enterprise, and Receives a Call From the East
ch. 8 A Professor's Work Photographs
ch. 9 Serving the Community
ch. 10 Even Professors Have Families
ch. 11 Is the Professor a Professional?
Cast
References
About the Author
Additional Info:
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted ...
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted ...
Additional Info:
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted by researchers at the National Center on Postsecondary Teaching, Learning, and Assessment, Faculty in New Jobs shows how faculty and institutions can work together to ease the transition to a new job and facilitate the process of mastering academic work. Robert Menges and his associates offer practical, real-world advice covering all phases of the faculty career--from the difficult early process of settling in, to becoming socially and academically established, to ultimately building the institutional supports necessary for a successful career.
The authors provide newcomers with valuable strategies for adapting to campus culture, building professional relationships, establishing a teaching style, and successfully juggling the diverse responsibilities of the faculty role. They also explain what institutions can do to select, support, and evaluate faculty more effectively. They describe the institutional climate that supports effective faculty transitions into and out of academia. They discuss what administrators can do to help faculty better understand and participate in the institutional culture, while also challenging and changing it in positive ways. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Contributors
ch. 1 Being a Newcomer
ch. 2 Dilemmas of Newly Hired Faculty
ch. 3 New Faculty Talk About Stress
ch. 4 Experiences of Women, Experiences of Men
ch. 5 Perspectives from Faculty of Color
ch. 6 Mentoring and Collegiality
ch. 7 Learning What Students Understand
ch. 8 Seeking and Using Feedback
ch. 9 Feeling in Control
ch. 10 Faculty Well-Being and Vitality
ch. 11 How Disciplinary Consensus Affects Faculty
ch. 12 Establishing a Teaching Development Culture
ch. 13 Learning from Leavers
ch. 14 Accountability for Faculty Welfare
Index
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted by researchers at the National Center on Postsecondary Teaching, Learning, and Assessment, Faculty in New Jobs shows how faculty and institutions can work together to ease the transition to a new job and facilitate the process of mastering academic work. Robert Menges and his associates offer practical, real-world advice covering all phases of the faculty career--from the difficult early process of settling in, to becoming socially and academically established, to ultimately building the institutional supports necessary for a successful career.
The authors provide newcomers with valuable strategies for adapting to campus culture, building professional relationships, establishing a teaching style, and successfully juggling the diverse responsibilities of the faculty role. They also explain what institutions can do to select, support, and evaluate faculty more effectively. They describe the institutional climate that supports effective faculty transitions into and out of academia. They discuss what administrators can do to help faculty better understand and participate in the institutional culture, while also challenging and changing it in positive ways. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Contributors
ch. 1 Being a Newcomer
ch. 2 Dilemmas of Newly Hired Faculty
ch. 3 New Faculty Talk About Stress
ch. 4 Experiences of Women, Experiences of Men
ch. 5 Perspectives from Faculty of Color
ch. 6 Mentoring and Collegiality
ch. 7 Learning What Students Understand
ch. 8 Seeking and Using Feedback
ch. 9 Feeling in Control
ch. 10 Faculty Well-Being and Vitality
ch. 11 How Disciplinary Consensus Affects Faculty
ch. 12 Establishing a Teaching Development Culture
ch. 13 Learning from Leavers
ch. 14 Accountability for Faculty Welfare
Index


Learning in Adulthood: A Comprehensive Guide, 2nd ed.
Additional Info:
The second edition of Learning in Adulthood integrates the most important contributions to adult learning in the last decade. The result is an updated, comprehensive synthesis of what we now know about adult learning--including the context in which it takes place, who the participants are, what they learn and why, the nature of the learning process itself, major theoretical developments, and much more. Sharan Merriam and Rosemary Caffarella reveal how ...
The second edition of Learning in Adulthood integrates the most important contributions to adult learning in the last decade. The result is an updated, comprehensive synthesis of what we now know about adult learning--including the context in which it takes place, who the participants are, what they learn and why, the nature of the learning process itself, major theoretical developments, and much more. Sharan Merriam and Rosemary Caffarella reveal how ...
Additional Info:
The second edition of Learning in Adulthood integrates the most important contributions to adult learning in the last decade. The result is an updated, comprehensive synthesis of what we now know about adult learning--including the context in which it takes place, who the participants are, what they learn and why, the nature of the learning process itself, major theoretical developments, and much more. Sharan Merriam and Rosemary Caffarella reveal how sociocultural influences can create specific developmental needs and interests, and how such social factors as race, class, and gender can shape learning. From this background, they construct a more inclusive perspective on adult learning, guiding readers toward new ways of thinking about teaching, learning, and the broader social implications of adult education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Pt. 1 The Context and Provision of Adult Learning
ch. 1 Adult Learning and Contemporary Society
ch. 2 Learning Opportunities in Adulthood
ch. 3 Participation in Adult Education
ch. 4 Providing Learning Opportunities
Pt. 2 Adult Development and Learning
ch. 5 Biological and Psychological Development
ch. 6 Sociocultural and Integrative Perspectives on Development
ch. 7 Cognitive Development in Adulthood
ch. 8 Intelligence and Aging
Pt. 3 The Learning Process
ch. 9 Memory, Cognition, and the Brain
ch. 10 Experience and Learning
ch. 11 Key Theories of Learning
Pt. 4 The Learning Transaction with Adults
ch. 12 Andragogy and Other Models of Adult Learning
ch. 13 Self-Directed Learning
ch. 14 Transformational Learning
ch. 15 Critical Theory, Postmodern, and Feminist Perspectives
Pt. 5 Reflections on Practice
ch. 16 Ethics and Adult Learning
ch. 17 Integrating Theory and Practice
References
Name Index
Subject Index
The second edition of Learning in Adulthood integrates the most important contributions to adult learning in the last decade. The result is an updated, comprehensive synthesis of what we now know about adult learning--including the context in which it takes place, who the participants are, what they learn and why, the nature of the learning process itself, major theoretical developments, and much more. Sharan Merriam and Rosemary Caffarella reveal how sociocultural influences can create specific developmental needs and interests, and how such social factors as race, class, and gender can shape learning. From this background, they construct a more inclusive perspective on adult learning, guiding readers toward new ways of thinking about teaching, learning, and the broader social implications of adult education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Pt. 1 The Context and Provision of Adult Learning
ch. 1 Adult Learning and Contemporary Society
ch. 2 Learning Opportunities in Adulthood
ch. 3 Participation in Adult Education
ch. 4 Providing Learning Opportunities
Pt. 2 Adult Development and Learning
ch. 5 Biological and Psychological Development
ch. 6 Sociocultural and Integrative Perspectives on Development
ch. 7 Cognitive Development in Adulthood
ch. 8 Intelligence and Aging
Pt. 3 The Learning Process
ch. 9 Memory, Cognition, and the Brain
ch. 10 Experience and Learning
ch. 11 Key Theories of Learning
Pt. 4 The Learning Transaction with Adults
ch. 12 Andragogy and Other Models of Adult Learning
ch. 13 Self-Directed Learning
ch. 14 Transformational Learning
ch. 15 Critical Theory, Postmodern, and Feminist Perspectives
Pt. 5 Reflections on Practice
ch. 16 Ethics and Adult Learning
ch. 17 Integrating Theory and Practice
References
Name Index
Subject Index


Transformative Dimensions of Adult Learning
Additional Info:
Transformative Dimensions of Adult Learning describes the dynamics of how adults learn--and how their perceptions are transformed by learning--as a framework for formulating educational theory and practice. It presents an in-depth analysis of the ways in which adults learn, how they make meaning of the learning experience, and how their lives can be transformed by it. (From the Publisher)
Transformative Dimensions of Adult Learning describes the dynamics of how adults learn--and how their perceptions are transformed by learning--as a framework for formulating educational theory and practice. It presents an in-depth analysis of the ways in which adults learn, how they make meaning of the learning experience, and how their lives can be transformed by it. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Transformative Dimensions of Adult Learning describes the dynamics of how adults learn--and how their perceptions are transformed by learning--as a framework for formulating educational theory and practice. It presents an in-depth analysis of the ways in which adults learn, how they make meaning of the learning experience, and how their lives can be transformed by it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Making Meaning: The Dynamics of Learning
ch. 2. Meaning Perspectives: How We Understand Experience
ch. 3. Intentional Learning: A Process of Problem Solving
ch. 4. Making Meaning Through Reflection
ch. 5. Distorted Assumptions: Uncovering Errors in Learning
ch. 6. Perspective Transformation: How Learning Leads to Change
ch. 7. Fostering Transformative Adult Learning
Transformative Dimensions of Adult Learning describes the dynamics of how adults learn--and how their perceptions are transformed by learning--as a framework for formulating educational theory and practice. It presents an in-depth analysis of the ways in which adults learn, how they make meaning of the learning experience, and how their lives can be transformed by it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Making Meaning: The Dynamics of Learning
ch. 2. Meaning Perspectives: How We Understand Experience
ch. 3. Intentional Learning: A Process of Problem Solving
ch. 4. Making Meaning Through Reflection
ch. 5. Distorted Assumptions: Uncovering Errors in Learning
ch. 6. Perspective Transformation: How Learning Leads to Change
ch. 7. Fostering Transformative Adult Learning


Fostering Critical Reflection in Adulthood
Additional Info:
This book presents successful programs, techniques, and strategies for helping adult learners tap into their rich and diverse life experiences as a basis for growth and lifelong learning. (From the Publisher)
This book presents successful programs, techniques, and strategies for helping adult learners tap into their rich and diverse life experiences as a basis for growth and lifelong learning. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book presents successful programs, techniques, and strategies for helping adult learners tap into their rich and diverse life experiences as a basis for growth and lifelong learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Precipitating Critical Self-Reflection: Six Exemplary Programs.
Helping Learners Become Critically Reflective: Six Key Approaches.
Uncovering and Mapping the Personal Perspectives of Learners.
This book presents successful programs, techniques, and strategies for helping adult learners tap into their rich and diverse life experiences as a basis for growth and lifelong learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Precipitating Critical Self-Reflection: Six Exemplary Programs.
Helping Learners Become Critically Reflective: Six Key Approaches.
Uncovering and Mapping the Personal Perspectives of Learners.
Additional Info:
This definitive "how-to" book on cooperative learning at the postsecondary level is designed to serve as a vital resource for faculty who use a collaborative approach to education. It offers an overview of the cooperative learning process, including its rationale, research base, value, and practical implementation. The authors also describe a variety of approaches to cooperative learning drawn from complementary movements such as classroom research, writing across the curriculum, computer ...
This definitive "how-to" book on cooperative learning at the postsecondary level is designed to serve as a vital resource for faculty who use a collaborative approach to education. It offers an overview of the cooperative learning process, including its rationale, research base, value, and practical implementation. The authors also describe a variety of approaches to cooperative learning drawn from complementary movements such as classroom research, writing across the curriculum, computer ...
Additional Info:
This definitive "how-to" book on cooperative learning at the postsecondary level is designed to serve as a vital resource for faculty who use a collaborative approach to education. It offers an overview of the cooperative learning process, including its rationale, research base, value, and practical implementation. The authors also describe a variety of approaches to cooperative learning drawn from complementary movements such as classroom research, writing across the curriculum, computer technology, and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part 1 Overviews of Cooperative Learning and Teaching and Learning
ch. 1 An Overview of Cooperative Learning in Higher Education
ch. 2 Why Change?
Part 2 Classroom Management
ch. 3 Planning a Cooperative Course
ch. 4 Managing the Cooperative Classroom
Part 3 Structuring the Cooperative Classroom
ch. 5 Beginning Structures
ch. 6 Structures for Problem Solving in Teams
ch. 7 Basic Paired Teaching
ch. 8 Reciprocal Teaching
ch. 9 Specialized Uses of Cooperative-Learning Principles
ch. 10 Using Cooperative Technology to Enhance Learning
Part 4 Assessing the Cooperative Classroom
ch. 11 Promoting Learning through Responsible Assessment
ch. 12 Using Teacher-Collected Assessment Data to Strengthen Cooperative Courses
ch. 13 Colleague-Assisted Assessment Procedures
Part 5 Supporting Cooperative Efforts
ch. 14 Supporting Faculty's Cooperative Efforts
Bibliography
Index
This definitive "how-to" book on cooperative learning at the postsecondary level is designed to serve as a vital resource for faculty who use a collaborative approach to education. It offers an overview of the cooperative learning process, including its rationale, research base, value, and practical implementation. The authors also describe a variety of approaches to cooperative learning drawn from complementary movements such as classroom research, writing across the curriculum, computer technology, and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part 1 Overviews of Cooperative Learning and Teaching and Learning
ch. 1 An Overview of Cooperative Learning in Higher Education
ch. 2 Why Change?
Part 2 Classroom Management
ch. 3 Planning a Cooperative Course
ch. 4 Managing the Cooperative Classroom
Part 3 Structuring the Cooperative Classroom
ch. 5 Beginning Structures
ch. 6 Structures for Problem Solving in Teams
ch. 7 Basic Paired Teaching
ch. 8 Reciprocal Teaching
ch. 9 Specialized Uses of Cooperative-Learning Principles
ch. 10 Using Cooperative Technology to Enhance Learning
Part 4 Assessing the Cooperative Classroom
ch. 11 Promoting Learning through Responsible Assessment
ch. 12 Using Teacher-Collected Assessment Data to Strengthen Cooperative Courses
ch. 13 Colleague-Assisted Assessment Procedures
Part 5 Supporting Cooperative Efforts
ch. 14 Supporting Faculty's Cooperative Efforts
Bibliography
Index


Showing How: The Act of Teaching
Additional Info:
Here is a thoroughly original work on the meaning of teaching by one who has been widely credited with reshaping the field of religious education in the United States, and to have had a significant effect also in many other countries. Part 1 establishes a fundamental meaning for "to teach," grounding it in its most basic forms and moving from examples in the nonhuman world (what the mountain teaches the mountain ...
Here is a thoroughly original work on the meaning of teaching by one who has been widely credited with reshaping the field of religious education in the United States, and to have had a significant effect also in many other countries. Part 1 establishes a fundamental meaning for "to teach," grounding it in its most basic forms and moving from examples in the nonhuman world (what the mountain teaches the mountain ...
Additional Info:
Here is a thoroughly original work on the meaning of teaching by one who has been widely credited with reshaping the field of religious education in the United States, and to have had a significant effect also in many other countries. Part 1 establishes a fundamental meaning for "to teach," grounding it in its most basic forms and moving from examples in the nonhuman world (what the mountain teaches the mountain climber) to communal and nonverbal forms of teaching among humans. Part 2 explores the languages of teaching and the diverse forms of speech appropriate to teaching: rhetorical forms, including storytelling and preaching; therapeutic languages; and religion's preservation of these languages in ritualized settings, including confessing and mourning. Part 3 draws out the implications of a full understanding of "to teach" for education, the school, and the teaching of morality. Showing How addresses schoolteachers, parents, counselors, ministers, administrators, and all who recognize teaching as a fundamental human act. By exposing the root meaning of teaching, the book represents a challenge to any proposals for educational reform. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching as a Moral Dilemma
ch. 2 Regrounding the Verb "To Teach"
ch. 3 Teaching by Design
ch. 4 Teaching with the End in View
ch. 5 Teaching to Remove Obstacles
ch. 6 Teaching the Conversation
ch. 7 Educational Forms of Teaching
ch. 8 Teaching in School
ch. 9 Teaching Morally, Teaching Morality
Conclusion
Notes
Index
Here is a thoroughly original work on the meaning of teaching by one who has been widely credited with reshaping the field of religious education in the United States, and to have had a significant effect also in many other countries. Part 1 establishes a fundamental meaning for "to teach," grounding it in its most basic forms and moving from examples in the nonhuman world (what the mountain teaches the mountain climber) to communal and nonverbal forms of teaching among humans. Part 2 explores the languages of teaching and the diverse forms of speech appropriate to teaching: rhetorical forms, including storytelling and preaching; therapeutic languages; and religion's preservation of these languages in ritualized settings, including confessing and mourning. Part 3 draws out the implications of a full understanding of "to teach" for education, the school, and the teaching of morality. Showing How addresses schoolteachers, parents, counselors, ministers, administrators, and all who recognize teaching as a fundamental human act. By exposing the root meaning of teaching, the book represents a challenge to any proposals for educational reform. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching as a Moral Dilemma
ch. 2 Regrounding the Verb "To Teach"
ch. 3 Teaching by Design
ch. 4 Teaching with the End in View
ch. 5 Teaching to Remove Obstacles
ch. 6 Teaching the Conversation
ch. 7 Educational Forms of Teaching
ch. 8 Teaching in School
ch. 9 Teaching Morally, Teaching Morality
Conclusion
Notes
Index
Additional Info:
Responding to increasing enrollments of students of color, students with disabilities, students whose first language is not English, and students entering college in their mid-twenties or later, many colleges and universities are including multicultural issues in their course and curriculum preparation. Faculty members and administrators involved in multicultural initiatives will find here a suggested framework for making course and curriculum changes, along with specific examples and scenarios from a variety ...
Responding to increasing enrollments of students of color, students with disabilities, students whose first language is not English, and students entering college in their mid-twenties or later, many colleges and universities are including multicultural issues in their course and curriculum preparation. Faculty members and administrators involved in multicultural initiatives will find here a suggested framework for making course and curriculum changes, along with specific examples and scenarios from a variety ...
Additional Info:
Responding to increasing enrollments of students of color, students with disabilities, students whose first language is not English, and students entering college in their mid-twenties or later, many colleges and universities are including multicultural issues in their course and curriculum preparation. Faculty members and administrators involved in multicultural initiatives will find here a suggested framework for making course and curriculum changes, along with specific examples and scenarios from a variety of disciplines. At the heart of the book is a two-dimensional model for infusing multicultural elements into a course or curriculum. The model identifies three levels of change (exclusive, inclusive, transformed) and four course components in which change can be applied (content, instructional strategies, assessment of student knowledge, and classroom dynamics). The authors suggest that instructors approach course change by focusing on one or more of these components and identifying a target level, depending on the instructor's multicultural goals and the nature of the discipline. The book draws upon the skills of experienced college and university educators to show how the model may be applied in specific disciplines and courses. This book is an indispensable, thoroughly documented resource. It will appeal to all post-secondary educators and administrators interested in creating an academic environment that reflects the needs of today's students and the reality of today's diverse society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Background
An Overview of the Book
Authors and Affiliations
ch. 1 A Rationale and Framework for Course Change
ch. 2 What a Course Will Look Like After Multicultural Change
ch. 3 Doing Multiculturalism: Conceptualizing Curricular Change
ch. 4 Instructional Strategies
ch. 5 Assessment of Student Learning
ch. 6 Classroom Dynamics: Disclosing the Hidden Curriculum
ch. 7 Creating an Enabling Learning Environment for Non-Native Speakers of English
ch. 8 Making Mathematics Instruction Inclusive
ch. 9 Multicultural Science: Focus on the Biological and Environmental Sciences
ch. 10 The Humanities
ch. 11 Integrating Race and Gender into Introductory Economics
ch. 12 Multicultural Infusion in Teacher Education: Foundations and Applications
ch. 13 Integrating Transcultural Knowledge into Nursing Curricula: An American Indian Example
ch. 14 The Community College Curriculum
ch. 15 Evaluating the Results of Multicultural Education: Taking the Long Way Home
ch. 16 Organizational Change and Implementation Strategies for
Multicultural Infusion
References
Index
Responding to increasing enrollments of students of color, students with disabilities, students whose first language is not English, and students entering college in their mid-twenties or later, many colleges and universities are including multicultural issues in their course and curriculum preparation. Faculty members and administrators involved in multicultural initiatives will find here a suggested framework for making course and curriculum changes, along with specific examples and scenarios from a variety of disciplines. At the heart of the book is a two-dimensional model for infusing multicultural elements into a course or curriculum. The model identifies three levels of change (exclusive, inclusive, transformed) and four course components in which change can be applied (content, instructional strategies, assessment of student knowledge, and classroom dynamics). The authors suggest that instructors approach course change by focusing on one or more of these components and identifying a target level, depending on the instructor's multicultural goals and the nature of the discipline. The book draws upon the skills of experienced college and university educators to show how the model may be applied in specific disciplines and courses. This book is an indispensable, thoroughly documented resource. It will appeal to all post-secondary educators and administrators interested in creating an academic environment that reflects the needs of today's students and the reality of today's diverse society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Background
An Overview of the Book
Authors and Affiliations
ch. 1 A Rationale and Framework for Course Change
ch. 2 What a Course Will Look Like After Multicultural Change
ch. 3 Doing Multiculturalism: Conceptualizing Curricular Change
ch. 4 Instructional Strategies
ch. 5 Assessment of Student Learning
ch. 6 Classroom Dynamics: Disclosing the Hidden Curriculum
ch. 7 Creating an Enabling Learning Environment for Non-Native Speakers of English
ch. 8 Making Mathematics Instruction Inclusive
ch. 9 Multicultural Science: Focus on the Biological and Environmental Sciences
ch. 10 The Humanities
ch. 11 Integrating Race and Gender into Introductory Economics
ch. 12 Multicultural Infusion in Teacher Education: Foundations and Applications
ch. 13 Integrating Transcultural Knowledge into Nursing Curricula: An American Indian Example
ch. 14 The Community College Curriculum
ch. 15 Evaluating the Results of Multicultural Education: Taking the Long Way Home
ch. 16 Organizational Change and Implementation Strategies for
Multicultural Infusion
References
Index

God's Fierce Whimsy: Christian Feminism and Theological Education
Additional Info:
This book is the written record of seven feminists' commitment to practice what they preach-to make incarnate both the fierce and the whimsical character of that which is born in every shared effort to teach and learn with minds set on justice. (From the Publisher)
This book is the written record of seven feminists' commitment to practice what they preach-to make incarnate both the fierce and the whimsical character of that which is born in every shared effort to teach and learn with minds set on justice. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book is the written record of seven feminists' commitment to practice what they preach-to make incarnate both the fierce and the whimsical character of that which is born in every shared effort to teach and learn with minds set on justice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 In Search of Common Ground
ch. 2 Can We Be Different But Not Alienated? An Exchange of Letters
ch. 3 In My Voice You Will Hear Pain
ch. 4 Our God-Stories: Sharing Images
ch. 5 The Shape and Significance of Feminist Theology: A Christian Perspective
ch. 6 Trashing the Terrible, Titillating Lesbian: Dialoguing on Sexuality
ch. 7 The Mud and the Flower
Notes
Selected Bibliography
This book is the written record of seven feminists' commitment to practice what they preach-to make incarnate both the fierce and the whimsical character of that which is born in every shared effort to teach and learn with minds set on justice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 In Search of Common Ground
ch. 2 Can We Be Different But Not Alienated? An Exchange of Letters
ch. 3 In My Voice You Will Hear Pain
ch. 4 Our God-Stories: Sharing Images
ch. 5 The Shape and Significance of Feminist Theology: A Christian Perspective
ch. 6 Trashing the Terrible, Titillating Lesbian: Dialoguing on Sexuality
ch. 7 The Mud and the Flower
Notes
Selected Bibliography
Additional Info:
These days, when popular religious movements are enthusiastic rather than reflective, it is particularly helpful for students to be given better ways of grasping the significance and strengths of their own beliefs. Nancey Murphy's new book presents the methods of contemporary argumentation analysis in a way that helps readers develop habits of critical reading and thinking that serve them well not only in religion, but in other fields of experience ...
These days, when popular religious movements are enthusiastic rather than reflective, it is particularly helpful for students to be given better ways of grasping the significance and strengths of their own beliefs. Nancey Murphy's new book presents the methods of contemporary argumentation analysis in a way that helps readers develop habits of critical reading and thinking that serve them well not only in religion, but in other fields of experience ...
Additional Info:
These days, when popular religious movements are enthusiastic rather than reflective, it is particularly helpful for students to be given better ways of grasping the significance and strengths of their own beliefs. Nancey Murphy's new book presents the methods of contemporary argumentation analysis in a way that helps readers develop habits of critical reading and thinking that serve them well not only in religion, but in other fields of experience and action. At one and the same time easy to read, and deep in its implications, her book is something of a tour de force. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Claims and Grounds
ch. 2 Warrants and Backing
ch. 3 Qualifiers and Rebuttals
ch. 4 Hypothetical Reasoning
ch. 5 Rhetoric and Communication
ch. 6 Academic Papers
ch. 7 Reasoning in Sermons
ch. 8 Reasoning in Ethics
ch. 9 Reasoning in History
ch. 10 Reasoning in Biblical Studies
ch. 11 Reasoning in Theology
ch. 12 Relating the Theological Disciplines
ch. 13 Philosophy of Religion
ch. 14 Apologetics and Religious Pluralism
These days, when popular religious movements are enthusiastic rather than reflective, it is particularly helpful for students to be given better ways of grasping the significance and strengths of their own beliefs. Nancey Murphy's new book presents the methods of contemporary argumentation analysis in a way that helps readers develop habits of critical reading and thinking that serve them well not only in religion, but in other fields of experience and action. At one and the same time easy to read, and deep in its implications, her book is something of a tour de force. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Claims and Grounds
ch. 2 Warrants and Backing
ch. 3 Qualifiers and Rebuttals
ch. 4 Hypothetical Reasoning
ch. 5 Rhetoric and Communication
ch. 6 Academic Papers
ch. 7 Reasoning in Sermons
ch. 8 Reasoning in Ethics
ch. 9 Reasoning in History
ch. 10 Reasoning in Biblical Studies
ch. 11 Reasoning in Theology
ch. 12 Relating the Theological Disciplines
ch. 13 Philosophy of Religion
ch. 14 Apologetics and Religious Pluralism

Faith, Hype and Clarity: Teaching About Religion in American Schools and Colleges
Additional Info:
In an effort to provide clarity about the highly charged issue of religion in US classrooms, Nash (College of Education and Social Services, Univ. of Vermont) describes and critiques four diverse religious positions, namely, fundamentalist, prophetic, alternative spiritualities, and post-theist. He uses a narrative approach, asking such questions as, is it workable? is it convincing? does it move people and provide a sense of purpose, community, moral action? and does ...
In an effort to provide clarity about the highly charged issue of religion in US classrooms, Nash (College of Education and Social Services, Univ. of Vermont) describes and critiques four diverse religious positions, namely, fundamentalist, prophetic, alternative spiritualities, and post-theist. He uses a narrative approach, asking such questions as, is it workable? is it convincing? does it move people and provide a sense of purpose, community, moral action? and does ...
Additional Info:
In an effort to provide clarity about the highly charged issue of religion in US classrooms, Nash (College of Education and Social Services, Univ. of Vermont) describes and critiques four diverse religious positions, namely, fundamentalist, prophetic, alternative spiritualities, and post-theist. He uses a narrative approach, asking such questions as, is it workable? is it convincing? does it move people and provide a sense of purpose, community, moral action? and does it explain the unknown? Chapters cover the positive and negative aspects of the four religious positions Nash describes. They outline a methodology and curriculum of religious education, focusing on these four positions, which have gathered much strength throughout society and have created controversy in communities in the United States and around the world. Relevant readings are integrated into the text, which purports to help schools and colleges move toward "religious literacy." For a similar perspective, see Richard J. Bernstein's The New Constellation: The Ethical-Political Horizons of Modernity/Postmodernity (1992). Suitable for upper-division undergraduates and beyond; recommended especially for use by teachers and policy makers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Transcendental Narratives and Education
ch. 2 The Fundamentalist Narrative
ch. 3 The Failure of the Fundamentalist Narrative
ch. 4 The Prophetic Narrative
ch. 5 The Failure of the Prophetic Narrative
ch. 6 The Alternative Spiritualities Narrative
ch. 7 The Failure of the Alternative Spiritualities Narrative
ch. 8 The Post-Theist Narrative
ch. 9 The Failure of the Post-Theist Narrative
References
Index
About the Author
In an effort to provide clarity about the highly charged issue of religion in US classrooms, Nash (College of Education and Social Services, Univ. of Vermont) describes and critiques four diverse religious positions, namely, fundamentalist, prophetic, alternative spiritualities, and post-theist. He uses a narrative approach, asking such questions as, is it workable? is it convincing? does it move people and provide a sense of purpose, community, moral action? and does it explain the unknown? Chapters cover the positive and negative aspects of the four religious positions Nash describes. They outline a methodology and curriculum of religious education, focusing on these four positions, which have gathered much strength throughout society and have created controversy in communities in the United States and around the world. Relevant readings are integrated into the text, which purports to help schools and colleges move toward "religious literacy." For a similar perspective, see Richard J. Bernstein's The New Constellation: The Ethical-Political Horizons of Modernity/Postmodernity (1992). Suitable for upper-division undergraduates and beyond; recommended especially for use by teachers and policy makers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Transcendental Narratives and Education
ch. 2 The Fundamentalist Narrative
ch. 3 The Failure of the Fundamentalist Narrative
ch. 4 The Prophetic Narrative
ch. 5 The Failure of the Prophetic Narrative
ch. 6 The Alternative Spiritualities Narrative
ch. 7 The Failure of the Alternative Spiritualities Narrative
ch. 8 The Post-Theist Narrative
ch. 9 The Failure of the Post-Theist Narrative
References
Index
About the Author


Classroom Communication: Collected Readings for Effective Discussion and Questioning
Additional Info:
Are you dismayed by the lack of discussion and questioning in your classroom? Good two-way communication can be difficult. Classroom Communication explains how effective strategies can get students out of the "tell me, show me" attitude and into lively participation.
This book offers ideas on how to start and facilitate discussion, utilize group dynamics, and in-corporate discussion participation into grading. Each section ends with questions and suggestions for ...
Are you dismayed by the lack of discussion and questioning in your classroom? Good two-way communication can be difficult. Classroom Communication explains how effective strategies can get students out of the "tell me, show me" attitude and into lively participation.
This book offers ideas on how to start and facilitate discussion, utilize group dynamics, and in-corporate discussion participation into grading. Each section ends with questions and suggestions for ...
Additional Info:
Are you dismayed by the lack of discussion and questioning in your classroom? Good two-way communication can be difficult. Classroom Communication explains how effective strategies can get students out of the "tell me, show me" attitude and into lively participation.
This book offers ideas on how to start and facilitate discussion, utilize group dynamics, and in-corporate discussion participation into grading. Each section ends with questions and suggestions for individual reflection, moving concepts from the page into the classroom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part 1 Readings on Discussion
ch. 1 The Dreaded discussion: Ten ways to start (Peter Frederick)
ch. 2 Classroom structures which encourage student participation (William H. Bergquist, and Steven R. Phillips)
ch. 3 Teaching using discussion (Willilam Ewens)
ch. 4 Improving Discussion (William E. Cahsin, and Philip C. McKnight)
ch. 5 Grading Seminar performance (Edward G. Clarke)
ch. 6 Designing discussions as group inquiry (John H. Clarke)
Part 2 Readings on Questioning
ch. 7 Learning to Question (Ralsph Thompson)
ch. 8 Research Summary: Are professors part of the problem? (Maryellen Weimer)
ch. 9 Questioning in the college classroom (Ronald T. Hyman)
ch. 10 Planning questions (Stephanie Goodwin, and Colleqgues)
Are you dismayed by the lack of discussion and questioning in your classroom? Good two-way communication can be difficult. Classroom Communication explains how effective strategies can get students out of the "tell me, show me" attitude and into lively participation.
This book offers ideas on how to start and facilitate discussion, utilize group dynamics, and in-corporate discussion participation into grading. Each section ends with questions and suggestions for individual reflection, moving concepts from the page into the classroom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part 1 Readings on Discussion
ch. 1 The Dreaded discussion: Ten ways to start (Peter Frederick)
ch. 2 Classroom structures which encourage student participation (William H. Bergquist, and Steven R. Phillips)
ch. 3 Teaching using discussion (Willilam Ewens)
ch. 4 Improving Discussion (William E. Cahsin, and Philip C. McKnight)
ch. 5 Grading Seminar performance (Edward G. Clarke)
ch. 6 Designing discussions as group inquiry (John H. Clarke)
Part 2 Readings on Questioning
ch. 7 Learning to Question (Ralsph Thompson)
ch. 8 Research Summary: Are professors part of the problem? (Maryellen Weimer)
ch. 9 Questioning in the college classroom (Ronald T. Hyman)
ch. 10 Planning questions (Stephanie Goodwin, and Colleqgues)
Additional Info:
In Learning from Our Lives: Women, Research, and Autobiography in Education, eleven women who are eminent educational researchers speak out intimately, and from these autobiographical accounts, readers experience how research that emerges from diverse women's lives shapes (and reshapes) educational knowledge and discourse. The book offers thoughtful insights into how the field of education might change as women assume positions of intellectual leadership. The distinguished list of contributors includes Kathryn ...
In Learning from Our Lives: Women, Research, and Autobiography in Education, eleven women who are eminent educational researchers speak out intimately, and from these autobiographical accounts, readers experience how research that emerges from diverse women's lives shapes (and reshapes) educational knowledge and discourse. The book offers thoughtful insights into how the field of education might change as women assume positions of intellectual leadership. The distinguished list of contributors includes Kathryn ...
Additional Info:
In Learning from Our Lives: Women, Research, and Autobiography in Education, eleven women who are eminent educational researchers speak out intimately, and from these autobiographical accounts, readers experience how research that emerges from diverse women's lives shapes (and reshapes) educational knowledge and discourse. The book offers thoughtful insights into how the field of education might change as women assume positions of intellectual leadership. The distinguished list of contributors includes Kathryn H. Au, Concha Delgado-Gaitan, Maxine Greene, Patricia J. Gumport, Gloria Ladson-Billings, Ellen Condliffe Lagemann, Martha Montero-Sieburth, Anna Neumann, Nel Noddings, Penelope L. PEterson, and Linda f. Winfield. The book will be an important resource for graduate courses in foundations, teacher education, philosophy of education, women and education, research methods, sociology of education, and politics and education; general readers will find it fascinating reading as well. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Researching Lives: Women, Scholarship, and Autobiography in Education (Anna Neumann, and Penelope L. Peterson)
ch. 2 Exclusions and Awakenings (Maxine Greene)
ch. 3 Dismantling Borders (Concha Delgado-Gaitan)
ch. 4 For colored girls who have considered suicide when the academy's not enough: Reflections of an African American Woman Scholar (Gloria Ladson-Billings)
ch. 5 Schooling, Literacy, and Cultural Diversity in Research and Personal Experience (Kathryn H. Au)
ch. 6 Ways Without Words: Learning from Silence and Story in Post-Holocaust Lives (Anna Neumann)
ch. 7 The Weaving of Personal Origins and Research: Reencuentro y Reflexion en la Investigacion (Martha Montero-Sieburth)
ch. 8 A Subjective Necessity: Being and Becoming an Historian of Education (Ellen Confliffe Lagemann)
ch. 9 Accident, Awareness, and Actualization (Nel Noddings)
ch. 10 First Words. Still Words (Patrica J. Gumport)
ch. 11 Multiple Dimensions of Reality: Recollections of an African American Woman Scholar (Linda F. Winfield)
ch. 12 Learning Out of School and In: Self and Experience at Home, School, and Work (Penelope L. Peterson)
ch. 13 Learning from Research and Everyday Life (Anna Neumann, and Penelope L. Peterson)
About the Editors and the Contributors
Index
In Learning from Our Lives: Women, Research, and Autobiography in Education, eleven women who are eminent educational researchers speak out intimately, and from these autobiographical accounts, readers experience how research that emerges from diverse women's lives shapes (and reshapes) educational knowledge and discourse. The book offers thoughtful insights into how the field of education might change as women assume positions of intellectual leadership. The distinguished list of contributors includes Kathryn H. Au, Concha Delgado-Gaitan, Maxine Greene, Patricia J. Gumport, Gloria Ladson-Billings, Ellen Condliffe Lagemann, Martha Montero-Sieburth, Anna Neumann, Nel Noddings, Penelope L. PEterson, and Linda f. Winfield. The book will be an important resource for graduate courses in foundations, teacher education, philosophy of education, women and education, research methods, sociology of education, and politics and education; general readers will find it fascinating reading as well. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Researching Lives: Women, Scholarship, and Autobiography in Education (Anna Neumann, and Penelope L. Peterson)
ch. 2 Exclusions and Awakenings (Maxine Greene)
ch. 3 Dismantling Borders (Concha Delgado-Gaitan)
ch. 4 For colored girls who have considered suicide when the academy's not enough: Reflections of an African American Woman Scholar (Gloria Ladson-Billings)
ch. 5 Schooling, Literacy, and Cultural Diversity in Research and Personal Experience (Kathryn H. Au)
ch. 6 Ways Without Words: Learning from Silence and Story in Post-Holocaust Lives (Anna Neumann)
ch. 7 The Weaving of Personal Origins and Research: Reencuentro y Reflexion en la Investigacion (Martha Montero-Sieburth)
ch. 8 A Subjective Necessity: Being and Becoming an Historian of Education (Ellen Confliffe Lagemann)
ch. 9 Accident, Awareness, and Actualization (Nel Noddings)
ch. 10 First Words. Still Words (Patrica J. Gumport)
ch. 11 Multiple Dimensions of Reality: Recollections of an African American Woman Scholar (Linda F. Winfield)
ch. 12 Learning Out of School and In: Self and Experience at Home, School, and Work (Penelope L. Peterson)
ch. 13 Learning from Research and Everyday Life (Anna Neumann, and Penelope L. Peterson)
About the Editors and the Contributors
Index

Students With Disabilities: Building a Partnership in Equal Access to Learning
Additional Info:
Cover title.
"A resource for faculty and staff at the University of Notre Dame"--Cover.
Cover title.
"A resource for faculty and staff at the University of Notre Dame"--Cover.
Additional Info:
Cover title.
"A resource for faculty and staff at the University of Notre Dame"--Cover.
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Section 1 - Overview
ch. 1 The University of Notre Dame's Office for Students with disabilities
ch. 2 The Qualified Student
ch. 3 Thoughts about the Classroom Environment
ch. 4 Test Adaptation and Administration
ch. 5 Faculty Dilemmas and Challenges - Personal Experiences
Section 2 - Resources
ch. 6 Assistive Technology
ch. 7 Visual Impairments
ch. 8 Mobility and Dexterity
ch. 9 Students with Attention Deficit Disorder and Learning Disabilities
ch. 10 Hearing Impairments
ch. 11 Speech Impairments
Cover title.
"A resource for faculty and staff at the University of Notre Dame"--Cover.
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Section 1 - Overview
ch. 1 The University of Notre Dame's Office for Students with disabilities
ch. 2 The Qualified Student
ch. 3 Thoughts about the Classroom Environment
ch. 4 Test Adaptation and Administration
ch. 5 Faculty Dilemmas and Challenges - Personal Experiences
Section 2 - Resources
ch. 6 Assistive Technology
ch. 7 Visual Impairments
ch. 8 Mobility and Dexterity
ch. 9 Students with Attention Deficit Disorder and Learning Disabilities
ch. 10 Hearing Impairments
ch. 11 Speech Impairments

The Learning Revolution: The Challenge of Information Technology in the Academy
Additional Info:
This book addresses the fundamental changes occurring in higher education, centering on productivity, quality, access, and competitiveness. The 15 chapters illustrate how public and private institutions are providing leadership for the higher education revolution. (From the Publisher)
This book addresses the fundamental changes occurring in higher education, centering on productivity, quality, access, and competitiveness. The 15 chapters illustrate how public and private institutions are providing leadership for the higher education revolution. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book addresses the fundamental changes occurring in higher education, centering on productivity, quality, access, and competitiveness. The 15 chapters illustrate how public and private institutions are providing leadership for the higher education revolution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "The Learning Revolution: (Diana G. Oblinger and Sean C. Rush)
ch. 2 "The Transformation of Higher Education" (Michael Hooker)
ch. 3 "Another Paradigm Shift" (Charlie Tuller)
ch. 4 "Higher Education in the Information Age" (Gregory C. Farrington)
ch. 5 "Moving Toward a Mobile Teaching and Learning Environment: Using Notebook Computers" (Donald Sargeant)
ch. 6 "Project Vision: Toward More Active and Collaborative Learning" (Robert E. Dunham)
ch. 7 "Reengineering the Undergraduate Curriculum" (Jack M. Wilson)
ch. 8 "Collaborative Legal Education" (Steve H. Nickles and Craig Runde)
ch. 9 "Transforming the Community College" (Terry O'Banion)
ch. 10 "Tradition and Change in Quest of Excellence" (Thomas K. Hearn, Jr.)
ch. 11 "The Library of the Future" (Suzanne E. Thorin and Virginia D. Sorkin)
ch. 12 "A Learning Enterprise for the CyberCentury: The Western Governors University" (Michael O. Leavitt)
ch. 13 "Life on the Wired Campus: How Information Technology Will Shape Institutional Futures" (William F. Massy)
ch. 14 "Asynchronous Learning Networks: New Possibilities" (A. Frank Mayadas);
ch. 15 "Challenges of the Learning Revolution"
This book addresses the fundamental changes occurring in higher education, centering on productivity, quality, access, and competitiveness. The 15 chapters illustrate how public and private institutions are providing leadership for the higher education revolution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "The Learning Revolution: (Diana G. Oblinger and Sean C. Rush)
ch. 2 "The Transformation of Higher Education" (Michael Hooker)
ch. 3 "Another Paradigm Shift" (Charlie Tuller)
ch. 4 "Higher Education in the Information Age" (Gregory C. Farrington)
ch. 5 "Moving Toward a Mobile Teaching and Learning Environment: Using Notebook Computers" (Donald Sargeant)
ch. 6 "Project Vision: Toward More Active and Collaborative Learning" (Robert E. Dunham)
ch. 7 "Reengineering the Undergraduate Curriculum" (Jack M. Wilson)
ch. 8 "Collaborative Legal Education" (Steve H. Nickles and Craig Runde)
ch. 9 "Transforming the Community College" (Terry O'Banion)
ch. 10 "Tradition and Change in Quest of Excellence" (Thomas K. Hearn, Jr.)
ch. 11 "The Library of the Future" (Suzanne E. Thorin and Virginia D. Sorkin)
ch. 12 "A Learning Enterprise for the CyberCentury: The Western Governors University" (Michael O. Leavitt)
ch. 13 "Life on the Wired Campus: How Information Technology Will Shape Institutional Futures" (William F. Massy)
ch. 14 "Asynchronous Learning Networks: New Possibilities" (A. Frank Mayadas);
ch. 15 "Challenges of the Learning Revolution"

Requiem: A Lament in Three Movements
Additional Info:
In a post-liberal critique of the mainline establishment, Oden identifies the failures of contemporary theological education and its accompanying ideology, maps out the ultra-liberalization of church bureaucracies and special interest politics, and calls for a return to classical Christian theological roots and categories.
In a post-liberal critique of the mainline establishment, Oden identifies the failures of contemporary theological education and its accompanying ideology, maps out the ultra-liberalization of church bureaucracies and special interest politics, and calls for a return to classical Christian theological roots and categories.
Additional Info:
In a post-liberal critique of the mainline establishment, Oden identifies the failures of contemporary theological education and its accompanying ideology, maps out the ultra-liberalization of church bureaucracies and special interest politics, and calls for a return to classical Christian theological roots and categories.
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Richard John Neuhaus
ch. 1 Introit: Affectionate Anguish
ch. 2 Overture: The Feast I Left
ch. 3 Interlude: The Feast I Missed
ch. 4 Allegro: The Feast I Did Not Expect
ch. 5 Postlude: The Young Fogeys
Appendix A: Can a Goddess Be Politically Correct?
Appendix B: Case Study: Is Anything at All Incompatible with Christian Teaching?
Appendix C: Documents of Ancient Ecumenical Orthodoxy
Appendix D: Postmodern Paleo-orthodox Writers: An Expanding List
Index
In a post-liberal critique of the mainline establishment, Oden identifies the failures of contemporary theological education and its accompanying ideology, maps out the ultra-liberalization of church bureaucracies and special interest politics, and calls for a return to classical Christian theological roots and categories.
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Richard John Neuhaus
ch. 1 Introit: Affectionate Anguish
ch. 2 Overture: The Feast I Left
ch. 3 Interlude: The Feast I Missed
ch. 4 Allegro: The Feast I Did Not Expect
ch. 5 Postlude: The Young Fogeys
Appendix A: Can a Goddess Be Politically Correct?
Appendix B: Case Study: Is Anything at All Incompatible with Christian Teaching?
Appendix C: Documents of Ancient Ecumenical Orthodoxy
Appendix D: Postmodern Paleo-orthodox Writers: An Expanding List
Index
Additional Info:
Teachers choose their vocation for reasons of the heart, because they care deeply about their students and about their subject. But the demands of teaching cause too many educators to lose heart. Is it possible to take heart in teaching once more so that we can continue to do what good teachers always do - give heart to our students? In The Courage to Teach, Parker Palmer takes teachers on ...
Teachers choose their vocation for reasons of the heart, because they care deeply about their students and about their subject. But the demands of teaching cause too many educators to lose heart. Is it possible to take heart in teaching once more so that we can continue to do what good teachers always do - give heart to our students? In The Courage to Teach, Parker Palmer takes teachers on ...
Additional Info:
Teachers choose their vocation for reasons of the heart, because they care deeply about their students and about their subject. But the demands of teaching cause too many educators to lose heart. Is it possible to take heart in teaching once more so that we can continue to do what good teachers always do - give heart to our students? In The Courage to Teach, Parker Palmer takes teachers on an inner journey toward reconnecting with their vocation and their students - and recovering their passion for one of the most difficult and important of human endeavors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Gratitudes
Introduction: Teaching from Within
I The Heart of a Teacher: Identity and Integrity in Teaching
II A Culture of Fear: Education and the Disconnected Life
III The Hidden Wholeness: Paradox in Teaching and Learning
IV Knowing in Community: Joined by the Grace of Great Things
V Teaching in Community: A Subject-Centered Education
VI Learning in Community: The Conversation of Colleagues
VII Divided No More: Teaching from a Heart of Hope
Notes
The Author
Index
Teachers choose their vocation for reasons of the heart, because they care deeply about their students and about their subject. But the demands of teaching cause too many educators to lose heart. Is it possible to take heart in teaching once more so that we can continue to do what good teachers always do - give heart to our students? In The Courage to Teach, Parker Palmer takes teachers on an inner journey toward reconnecting with their vocation and their students - and recovering their passion for one of the most difficult and important of human endeavors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Gratitudes
Introduction: Teaching from Within
I The Heart of a Teacher: Identity and Integrity in Teaching
II A Culture of Fear: Education and the Disconnected Life
III The Hidden Wholeness: Paradox in Teaching and Learning
IV Knowing in Community: Joined by the Grace of Great Things
V Teaching in Community: A Subject-Centered Education
VI Learning in Community: The Conversation of Colleagues
VII Divided No More: Teaching from a Heart of Hope
Notes
The Author
Index


To Know as We are Known: Education as a Spiritual Journey
Additional Info:
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Knowing is loving
ch. 2 Education as spiritual formation
ch. 3 The teaching behind the teaching
ch. 4 What is truth?
ch. 5 To teach is to create a space...
ch. 6 ...In which obedience to truth is practiced
ch. 7 The spiritual formation of teachers
Notes
Index
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Knowing is loving
ch. 2 Education as spiritual formation
ch. 3 The teaching behind the teaching
ch. 4 What is truth?
ch. 5 To teach is to create a space...
ch. 6 ...In which obedience to truth is practiced
ch. 7 The spiritual formation of teachers
Notes
Index
Additional Info:
With wisdom, compassion, and gentle humor, Parker J. Palmer invites us to listen to the inner teacher and follow its leadings toward a sense of meaning and purpose. Telling stories from his own life and the lives of others who have made a difference, he shares insights gained from darkness and depression as well as fulfillment and joy, illuminating a pathway toward vocation for all who seek the true calling ...
With wisdom, compassion, and gentle humor, Parker J. Palmer invites us to listen to the inner teacher and follow its leadings toward a sense of meaning and purpose. Telling stories from his own life and the lives of others who have made a difference, he shares insights gained from darkness and depression as well as fulfillment and joy, illuminating a pathway toward vocation for all who seek the true calling ...
Additional Info:
With wisdom, compassion, and gentle humor, Parker J. Palmer invites us to listen to the inner teacher and follow its leadings toward a sense of meaning and purpose. Telling stories from his own life and the lives of others who have made a difference, he shares insights gained from darkness and depression as well as fulfillment and joy, illuminating a pathway toward vocation for all who seek the true calling of their lives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Gratitudes.
Listening to Life.
Now I Become Myself.
When Way Closes.
All the Way Down.
Leading from Within.
There Is a Season.
Notes.
The Author.
With wisdom, compassion, and gentle humor, Parker J. Palmer invites us to listen to the inner teacher and follow its leadings toward a sense of meaning and purpose. Telling stories from his own life and the lives of others who have made a difference, he shares insights gained from darkness and depression as well as fulfillment and joy, illuminating a pathway toward vocation for all who seek the true calling of their lives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Gratitudes.
Listening to Life.
Now I Become Myself.
When Way Closes.
All the Way Down.
Leading from Within.
There Is a Season.
Notes.
The Author.
Additional Info:
Assessment Clear and Simple is "Assessment 101" in a book -- a concise, step-by-step guide written for everyone who participates in the assessment process. This practical book helps to make assessment simple, cost-efficient, and useful to the institution, while at the same time meeting the requirements of accreditation agencies, legislatures, review boards, and others. Assessment Clear and Simple can help your institution employ assessment as a powerful instrument for improvement and ...
Assessment Clear and Simple is "Assessment 101" in a book -- a concise, step-by-step guide written for everyone who participates in the assessment process. This practical book helps to make assessment simple, cost-efficient, and useful to the institution, while at the same time meeting the requirements of accreditation agencies, legislatures, review boards, and others. Assessment Clear and Simple can help your institution employ assessment as a powerful instrument for improvement and ...
Additional Info:
Assessment Clear and Simple is "Assessment 101" in a book -- a concise, step-by-step guide written for everyone who participates in the assessment process. This practical book helps to make assessment simple, cost-efficient, and useful to the institution, while at the same time meeting the requirements of accreditation agencies, legislatures, review boards, and others. Assessment Clear and Simple can help your institution employ assessment as a powerful instrument for improvement and provide a basis for wiser planning, budgeting, and change in curriculum, pedagogy, staffing, programming, and student support. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 The Essentials of Successful Assessment
ch. 2 Developing Definitions, Goals, and Plans
ch. 3 Encouraging Involvement in Assessment
ch. 4 Selecting Methods and Approaches
ch. 5 Using Performance Measures and Portfolios for Assessment
ch. 6 Using Tests, Classroom Assignments, and Classroom Assessment
ch. 7 Listening to Students' Voices
ch. 8 Relating Assessment to the World of Work
ch. 9 Assessing General Education
ch. 10 Assessing Campus Environments and Student Experiences
ch. 11 Reporting and Using Assessment Results
ch. 12 A Matter of Choices
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Assessment Clear and Simple is "Assessment 101" in a book -- a concise, step-by-step guide written for everyone who participates in the assessment process. This practical book helps to make assessment simple, cost-efficient, and useful to the institution, while at the same time meeting the requirements of accreditation agencies, legislatures, review boards, and others. Assessment Clear and Simple can help your institution employ assessment as a powerful instrument for improvement and provide a basis for wiser planning, budgeting, and change in curriculum, pedagogy, staffing, programming, and student support. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 The Essentials of Successful Assessment
ch. 2 Developing Definitions, Goals, and Plans
ch. 3 Encouraging Involvement in Assessment
ch. 4 Selecting Methods and Approaches
ch. 5 Using Performance Measures and Portfolios for Assessment
ch. 6 Using Tests, Classroom Assignments, and Classroom Assessment
ch. 7 Listening to Students' Voices
ch. 8 Relating Assessment to the World of Work
ch. 9 Assessing General Education
ch. 10 Assessing Campus Environments and Student Experiences
ch. 11 Reporting and Using Assessment Results
ch. 12 A Matter of Choices
References
Name Index
Subject Index


Critical Thinking and the Academic Study of Religion
Additional Info:
This work responds to a renewed emphasis on teaching in the academy. Written from the perspective of a classroom teacher, it is a practical application of the principles behind the Critical Thinking movement to the study of religion. Emphasizing that the acquisition of critical thinking depends less on what is taught than on how it is taught, the author presents concrete examples from his own experience to illustrate a student ...
This work responds to a renewed emphasis on teaching in the academy. Written from the perspective of a classroom teacher, it is a practical application of the principles behind the Critical Thinking movement to the study of religion. Emphasizing that the acquisition of critical thinking depends less on what is taught than on how it is taught, the author presents concrete examples from his own experience to illustrate a student ...
Additional Info:
This work responds to a renewed emphasis on teaching in the academy. Written from the perspective of a classroom teacher, it is a practical application of the principles behind the Critical Thinking movement to the study of religion. Emphasizing that the acquisition of critical thinking depends less on what is taught than on how it is taught, the author presents concrete examples from his own experience to illustrate a student centered approach to teaching. By demonstrating how the study of religion contributes to the development of critical thinking - through the acquisition of problem-solving, decision-making, and metacognitive skills - Penaskovic suggests its value to a broader liberal arts curriculum as well. Both a theoretical review of Critical Thinking and a "nuts-and-bolts" manual on how it can be used and assessed in the classroom, this work will challenge new and veteran teachers alike to re-examine and renew what they do in the classroom. The book includes a selected, annotated bibliography on Critical Thinking. Every teacher of religion will want to read this book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Preface
ch. 1 What Is Critical Thinking?
ch. 2 Barriers to Critical Thinking?
ch. 3 The Three Levels of Learning
ch. 4 Teaching in the Active Mode
ch. 5 Cooperative Learning
ch. 6 Critical Thinking and Creativity
ch. 7 The Assessment of Critical Thinking
ch. 8 Unsolved Mysteries
Appendix A: Glossary of Terms
Select Annotated Bibliography
This work responds to a renewed emphasis on teaching in the academy. Written from the perspective of a classroom teacher, it is a practical application of the principles behind the Critical Thinking movement to the study of religion. Emphasizing that the acquisition of critical thinking depends less on what is taught than on how it is taught, the author presents concrete examples from his own experience to illustrate a student centered approach to teaching. By demonstrating how the study of religion contributes to the development of critical thinking - through the acquisition of problem-solving, decision-making, and metacognitive skills - Penaskovic suggests its value to a broader liberal arts curriculum as well. Both a theoretical review of Critical Thinking and a "nuts-and-bolts" manual on how it can be used and assessed in the classroom, this work will challenge new and veteran teachers alike to re-examine and renew what they do in the classroom. The book includes a selected, annotated bibliography on Critical Thinking. Every teacher of religion will want to read this book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Preface
ch. 1 What Is Critical Thinking?
ch. 2 Barriers to Critical Thinking?
ch. 3 The Three Levels of Learning
ch. 4 Teaching in the Active Mode
ch. 5 Cooperative Learning
ch. 6 Critical Thinking and Creativity
ch. 7 The Assessment of Critical Thinking
ch. 8 Unsolved Mysteries
Appendix A: Glossary of Terms
Select Annotated Bibliography

Forms of Intellectual and Ethical Development in the College Years
Additional Info:
Since its original publication in 1970, this landmark book by William Perry has remained the cornerstone of much of the student development research that followed. Using research conducted with Harvard undergraduates over a fifteen-year period, Perry derived an enduring framework for characterizing student development - a scheme so accurate that it still informs and advances investigations into student development across genders and cultures. Drawing from firsthand accounts, Perry traces a path ...
Since its original publication in 1970, this landmark book by William Perry has remained the cornerstone of much of the student development research that followed. Using research conducted with Harvard undergraduates over a fifteen-year period, Perry derived an enduring framework for characterizing student development - a scheme so accurate that it still informs and advances investigations into student development across genders and cultures. Drawing from firsthand accounts, Perry traces a path ...
Additional Info:
Since its original publication in 1970, this landmark book by William Perry has remained the cornerstone of much of the student development research that followed. Using research conducted with Harvard undergraduates over a fifteen-year period, Perry derived an enduring framework for characterizing student development - a scheme so accurate that it still informs and advances investigations into student development across genders and cultures. Drawing from firsthand accounts, Perry traces a path from students' adolescence into adulthood. His nine-stage model describes the steps that move students from a simplistic, categorical view of knowledge to a more complex, contextual view of the world and of themselves. Throughout this journey of cognitive development, Perry reveals, the most significant changes occur in forms in which people perceive their world rather than in the particulars of their attitudes and concerns. He shows ultimately that the nature of intellectual development is such that we should pay as much attention to the processes we use as to the content. In a new introduction to this classic work, Lee Knefelkamp - a close colleague of Perry's and a leading expert on college student development - evaluates the book's place in the literature of higher education. Knefelkamp explains how the Perry scheme has shaped current thinking about student development and discusses the most significant research that has since evolved from Perry's groundbreaking effort. Forms of Ethical and Intellectual Development in the College Years is a work that every current and future student services professional must have in their library. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction and Resume
Context of Students' Reports
The Students' Experience
Concepts of the Scheme
The Development Scheme
Critique
Since its original publication in 1970, this landmark book by William Perry has remained the cornerstone of much of the student development research that followed. Using research conducted with Harvard undergraduates over a fifteen-year period, Perry derived an enduring framework for characterizing student development - a scheme so accurate that it still informs and advances investigations into student development across genders and cultures. Drawing from firsthand accounts, Perry traces a path from students' adolescence into adulthood. His nine-stage model describes the steps that move students from a simplistic, categorical view of knowledge to a more complex, contextual view of the world and of themselves. Throughout this journey of cognitive development, Perry reveals, the most significant changes occur in forms in which people perceive their world rather than in the particulars of their attitudes and concerns. He shows ultimately that the nature of intellectual development is such that we should pay as much attention to the processes we use as to the content. In a new introduction to this classic work, Lee Knefelkamp - a close colleague of Perry's and a leading expert on college student development - evaluates the book's place in the literature of higher education. Knefelkamp explains how the Perry scheme has shaped current thinking about student development and discusses the most significant research that has since evolved from Perry's groundbreaking effort. Forms of Ethical and Intellectual Development in the College Years is a work that every current and future student services professional must have in their library. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction and Resume
Context of Students' Reports
The Students' Experience
Concepts of the Scheme
The Development Scheme
Critique

Five Perspectives on Teaching in Adult and Higher Education
Additional Info:
Presents five different perspectives on teaching adults, based on interviews with 253 teachers of adults in Asia and North America. After an overview of a general model of teaching and an introduction to the perspectives, Section II details the transmission, apprenticeship, developmental, nurturing, and social reform perspectives, presenting each as a legitimate way of teaching. Each perspective is described as an interrelated set of actions, intentions, and beliefs, and then illustrated ...
Presents five different perspectives on teaching adults, based on interviews with 253 teachers of adults in Asia and North America. After an overview of a general model of teaching and an introduction to the perspectives, Section II details the transmission, apprenticeship, developmental, nurturing, and social reform perspectives, presenting each as a legitimate way of teaching. Each perspective is described as an interrelated set of actions, intentions, and beliefs, and then illustrated ...
Additional Info:
Presents five different perspectives on teaching adults, based on interviews with 253 teachers of adults in Asia and North America. After an overview of a general model of teaching and an introduction to the perspectives, Section II details the transmission, apprenticeship, developmental, nurturing, and social reform perspectives, presenting each as a legitimate way of teaching. Each perspective is described as an interrelated set of actions, intentions, and beliefs, and then illustrated within contexts of adult education practices. Section III comments on analytical tools and evaluation of teaching methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Section I
The Research Lens: A General Model of Teaching
Indicators of Commitment: Actions, Intentions, and Beliefs
Alternative Frames of Understanding: Introduction to Five Perspectives
Section II
The Transmission Perspective: Effective Delivery of Content
The Apprenticeship Perspective: Modelling Ways of Being
The Development Perspective: Cultivating Ways of Thinking
The Nurturing Perspective: Facilitating Self-efficacy
Section III
Analytical Tools: Epistemic, Normative, and Procedural Beliefs
Analyzing Perspectives: Identifying Commitments and Belief Structures
Evaluating Teaching: Approaches That Are Equitable and Rigorous
Author Index
Subject Index
Presents five different perspectives on teaching adults, based on interviews with 253 teachers of adults in Asia and North America. After an overview of a general model of teaching and an introduction to the perspectives, Section II details the transmission, apprenticeship, developmental, nurturing, and social reform perspectives, presenting each as a legitimate way of teaching. Each perspective is described as an interrelated set of actions, intentions, and beliefs, and then illustrated within contexts of adult education practices. Section III comments on analytical tools and evaluation of teaching methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Section I
The Research Lens: A General Model of Teaching
Indicators of Commitment: Actions, Intentions, and Beliefs
Alternative Frames of Understanding: Introduction to Five Perspectives
Section II
The Transmission Perspective: Effective Delivery of Content
The Apprenticeship Perspective: Modelling Ways of Being
The Development Perspective: Cultivating Ways of Thinking
The Nurturing Perspective: Facilitating Self-efficacy
Section III
Analytical Tools: Epistemic, Normative, and Procedural Beliefs
Analyzing Perspectives: Identifying Commitments and Belief Structures
Evaluating Teaching: Approaches That Are Equitable and Rigorous
Author Index
Subject Index


Charting Your Course: How to Prepare to Teach More Effectively
Additional Info:
Good teaching begins with good preparation. But many instructors and teaching assistants are unsure about how to plan their courses in order to teach more effectively.
Charting Your Course is a systematic approach to course planning that applies to all disciplines and course types. Prégent stresses analysis, planning, critical thinking, and careful evaluation and provides step-by-step examples of how actual new courses were designed and prepared. Whatever ...
Good teaching begins with good preparation. But many instructors and teaching assistants are unsure about how to plan their courses in order to teach more effectively.
Charting Your Course is a systematic approach to course planning that applies to all disciplines and course types. Prégent stresses analysis, planning, critical thinking, and careful evaluation and provides step-by-step examples of how actual new courses were designed and prepared. Whatever ...
Additional Info:
Good teaching begins with good preparation. But many instructors and teaching assistants are unsure about how to plan their courses in order to teach more effectively.
Charting Your Course is a systematic approach to course planning that applies to all disciplines and course types. Prégent stresses analysis, planning, critical thinking, and careful evaluation and provides step-by-step examples of how actual new courses were designed and prepared. Whatever type of course you teach, use Charting Your Course to complement your current planning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1: Analyzing the Conditions of Your Teaching Situation
ch. 2: Formulating Course Objectives
ch. 3: Planning to Evaluate Learning
ch. 4: Choosing Your Teaching Methods
ch. 5: Choosing Your Teaching Materials
ch. 6: Detailed Course Planning
ch. 7: Preparing and Delivering a Lecture
ch. 8: Training Students for Group Work
ch. 9: Evaluating Your Teaching
Conclusion
Bibliography
Good teaching begins with good preparation. But many instructors and teaching assistants are unsure about how to plan their courses in order to teach more effectively.
Charting Your Course is a systematic approach to course planning that applies to all disciplines and course types. Prégent stresses analysis, planning, critical thinking, and careful evaluation and provides step-by-step examples of how actual new courses were designed and prepared. Whatever type of course you teach, use Charting Your Course to complement your current planning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1: Analyzing the Conditions of Your Teaching Situation
ch. 2: Formulating Course Objectives
ch. 3: Planning to Evaluate Learning
ch. 4: Choosing Your Teaching Methods
ch. 5: Choosing Your Teaching Materials
ch. 6: Detailed Course Planning
ch. 7: Preparing and Delivering a Lecture
ch. 8: Training Students for Group Work
ch. 9: Evaluating Your Teaching
Conclusion
Bibliography

Dialogues for Diversity: Community and Ethnicity on Campus
Additional Info:
Provides organized materials intended to help groups of individuals on campus toward focused discussions of the role of ethnic diversity in the daily life of colleges and universities. The (welcome) aim is to help such groups find their own common ground, not to tell them what that common ground should be. Produced by the Project on Campus Community and Diversity of the Accrediting Commission for Senior Colleges and Universities of ...
Provides organized materials intended to help groups of individuals on campus toward focused discussions of the role of ethnic diversity in the daily life of colleges and universities. The (welcome) aim is to help such groups find their own common ground, not to tell them what that common ground should be. Produced by the Project on Campus Community and Diversity of the Accrediting Commission for Senior Colleges and Universities of ...
Additional Info:
Provides organized materials intended to help groups of individuals on campus toward focused discussions of the role of ethnic diversity in the daily life of colleges and universities. The (welcome) aim is to help such groups find their own common ground, not to tell them what that common ground should be. Produced by the Project on Campus Community and Diversity of the Accrediting Commission for Senior Colleges and Universities of the Western Association of Schools and Colleges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Participants in the Development of Dialogues for Diversity
A Note to Users
Topic One: Mission and Diversity
Topic Two: The Social Context
Topic Three: Diversity and Quality
Topic Four: Community and Campus Climate
Topic Five: Student Development and Ethnic Identity
Topic Six: The Faculty Role
Topic Seven: Leadership for Diversity
Topic Eight: Planning and Conducting
Discussions of Ethnic Diversity
Index
Provides organized materials intended to help groups of individuals on campus toward focused discussions of the role of ethnic diversity in the daily life of colleges and universities. The (welcome) aim is to help such groups find their own common ground, not to tell them what that common ground should be. Produced by the Project on Campus Community and Diversity of the Accrediting Commission for Senior Colleges and Universities of the Western Association of Schools and Colleges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Participants in the Development of Dialogues for Diversity
A Note to Users
Topic One: Mission and Diversity
Topic Two: The Social Context
Topic Three: Diversity and Quality
Topic Four: Community and Campus Climate
Topic Five: Student Development and Ethnic Identity
Topic Six: The Faculty Role
Topic Seven: Leadership for Diversity
Topic Eight: Planning and Conducting
Discussions of Ethnic Diversity
Index

The University in Ruins
Additional Info:
It is no longer clear what role the University plays in society. The structure of the contemporary University is changing rapidly, and we have yet to understand what precisely these changes will mean. Is a new age dawning for the University, the renaissance of higher education under way? Or is the University in the twilight of its social function, the demise of higher education fast approaching? We can answer such ...
It is no longer clear what role the University plays in society. The structure of the contemporary University is changing rapidly, and we have yet to understand what precisely these changes will mean. Is a new age dawning for the University, the renaissance of higher education under way? Or is the University in the twilight of its social function, the demise of higher education fast approaching? We can answer such ...
Additional Info:
It is no longer clear what role the University plays in society. The structure of the contemporary University is changing rapidly, and we have yet to understand what precisely these changes will mean. Is a new age dawning for the University, the renaissance of higher education under way? Or is the University in the twilight of its social function, the demise of higher education fast approaching? We can answer such questions only if we look carefully at the different roles the University has played historically and then imagine how it might be possible to live, and to think, amid the ruins of the University. Tracing the roots of the modern American University in German philosophy and in the work of British thinkers such as Newman and Arnold, Bill Readings argues that the integrity of the modern University has been linked to the nation-state, which it has served by promoting and protecting the idea of a national culture. But now the nation-state is in decline, and national culture no longer needs to be either promoted or protected. Increasingly, universities are turning into transnational corporations, and the idea of culture is being replaced by the discourse of "excellence." On the surface, this does not seem particularly pernicious. The author cautions, however, that we should not embrace this techno-bureaucratic approach too quickly. The new University of Excellence is a corporation driven by market forces, and, as such, is more interested in profit margins than in thought. Readings urges us to imagine how to think, without concession to corporate excellence or recourse to romantic nostalgia within an institution in ruins. The result is a passionate appeal for a new community of thinkers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 The Idea of Excellence
ch. 3 The Decline of the Nation-State
ch. 4 The University within the Limits of Reason
ch. 5 The University and the Idea of Culture
ch. 6 Literary Culture
ch. 7 Culture Wars and Cultural Studies
ch. 8 The Posthistorical University
ch. 9 The Time of Study: 1968
ch. 10 The Scene of Teaching
ch. 11 Dwelling in the Ruins
ch. 12 The Community of Dissensus
Notes
Index
It is no longer clear what role the University plays in society. The structure of the contemporary University is changing rapidly, and we have yet to understand what precisely these changes will mean. Is a new age dawning for the University, the renaissance of higher education under way? Or is the University in the twilight of its social function, the demise of higher education fast approaching? We can answer such questions only if we look carefully at the different roles the University has played historically and then imagine how it might be possible to live, and to think, amid the ruins of the University. Tracing the roots of the modern American University in German philosophy and in the work of British thinkers such as Newman and Arnold, Bill Readings argues that the integrity of the modern University has been linked to the nation-state, which it has served by promoting and protecting the idea of a national culture. But now the nation-state is in decline, and national culture no longer needs to be either promoted or protected. Increasingly, universities are turning into transnational corporations, and the idea of culture is being replaced by the discourse of "excellence." On the surface, this does not seem particularly pernicious. The author cautions, however, that we should not embrace this techno-bureaucratic approach too quickly. The new University of Excellence is a corporation driven by market forces, and, as such, is more interested in profit margins than in thought. Readings urges us to imagine how to think, without concession to corporate excellence or recourse to romantic nostalgia within an institution in ruins. The result is a passionate appeal for a new community of thinkers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 The Idea of Excellence
ch. 3 The Decline of the Nation-State
ch. 4 The University within the Limits of Reason
ch. 5 The University and the Idea of Culture
ch. 6 Literary Culture
ch. 7 Culture Wars and Cultural Studies
ch. 8 The Posthistorical University
ch. 9 The Time of Study: 1968
ch. 10 The Scene of Teaching
ch. 11 Dwelling in the Ruins
ch. 12 The Community of Dissensus
Notes
Index

The Making of the Modern University: Intellectual Transformation and the Marginalization of Morality
Additional Info:
What is the purpose of higher education, and how should we pursue it? Debates over these issues raged in the late nineteenth century as reformers introduced a new kind of university - one dedicated to free inquiry and the advancement of knowledge. In the first major study of moral education in American universities. Julie Reuben examines the consequences of these debates for modern intellectual life. Based on extensive research at ...
What is the purpose of higher education, and how should we pursue it? Debates over these issues raged in the late nineteenth century as reformers introduced a new kind of university - one dedicated to free inquiry and the advancement of knowledge. In the first major study of moral education in American universities. Julie Reuben examines the consequences of these debates for modern intellectual life. Based on extensive research at ...
Additional Info:
What is the purpose of higher education, and how should we pursue it? Debates over these issues raged in the late nineteenth century as reformers introduced a new kind of university - one dedicated to free inquiry and the advancement of knowledge. In the first major study of moral education in American universities. Julie Reuben examines the consequences of these debates for modern intellectual life. Based on extensive research at eight universities - Harvard, Yale, Columbia, Johns Hopkins, Chicago, Stanford, Michigan, and California at Berkeley - Reuben examines the aims of university reformers in the context of nineteenth-century ideas about truth. She argues that these educators tried to apply new scientific standards to moral education, but that their modernization efforts ultimately failed. By exploring the complex interaction between institutional and intellectual change, Reuben enhances our understanding of the modern university, the secularization of intellectual life, and the association of scientific objectivity with value-neutrality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 The Unity of Truth
ch. 2 Science and Religion Reconceived
ch. 3 The Open University
ch. 4 The Reconstruction of Religion
ch. 5 Scientific Substitutes for Religion
ch. 6 Value-Free Science
ch. 7 From Truth to Beauty
ch. 8 Administrative Order
Conclusion
Notes
Index
What is the purpose of higher education, and how should we pursue it? Debates over these issues raged in the late nineteenth century as reformers introduced a new kind of university - one dedicated to free inquiry and the advancement of knowledge. In the first major study of moral education in American universities. Julie Reuben examines the consequences of these debates for modern intellectual life. Based on extensive research at eight universities - Harvard, Yale, Columbia, Johns Hopkins, Chicago, Stanford, Michigan, and California at Berkeley - Reuben examines the aims of university reformers in the context of nineteenth-century ideas about truth. She argues that these educators tried to apply new scientific standards to moral education, but that their modernization efforts ultimately failed. By exploring the complex interaction between institutional and intellectual change, Reuben enhances our understanding of the modern university, the secularization of intellectual life, and the association of scientific objectivity with value-neutrality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 The Unity of Truth
ch. 2 Science and Religion Reconceived
ch. 3 The Open University
ch. 4 The Reconstruction of Religion
ch. 5 Scientific Substitutes for Religion
ch. 6 Value-Free Science
ch. 7 From Truth to Beauty
ch. 8 Administrative Order
Conclusion
Notes
Index

Beyond the Classics: Essays in Religious Studies and Liberal Education
Additional Info:
Taken ad seriatim, these essays present a wide range of differing theoretical positions and practical strategies for reform. It is our hope that, when read from this point of view, they will evoke the kind of very specific discussions, debates and actions that will be required if real change is to occur. (From the Publisher)
Taken ad seriatim, these essays present a wide range of differing theoretical positions and practical strategies for reform. It is our hope that, when read from this point of view, they will evoke the kind of very specific discussions, debates and actions that will be required if real change is to occur. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Taken ad seriatim, these essays present a wide range of differing theoretical positions and practical strategies for reform. It is our hope that, when read from this point of view, they will evoke the kind of very specific discussions, debates and actions that will be required if real change is to occur. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Reconstructing liberal education : a religious studies perspective (Frank E. Reynolds)
ch. 2 University, the liberal arts, and the teaching and study of religion (Charles H. Long)
ch. 3 "Seeking an end to the primary text" or "putting an end to the text as primary" (Lawrence E. Sullivan)
ch. 4 Rethinking the humanities for the 1990s : redressing the balance (George W. Pickering)
ch. 5 Confidence and criticism : religious studies and the public purposes of liberal education (Robin W. Lovin) -- Education and the intellectual virtues (Lee H. Yearly)
ch. 6 Legal status of religious studies programs in public higher education (W. Royce Clark)
ch. 7 Four modes of discourse : blurred genres in the study of religion (Sheryl L. Burkhalter)
ch. 8 Beyond ours and theirs : the global character of religious studies (James H. Foard)
ch. 9 Religious studies and exposure to multiple worlds in the liberal arts curriculum (Judith A. Berling)
ch. 10 Writing across the curriculum : a religious studies contribution ( James H. Foard)
ch. 11 Dearth in Venice (William R. Darrow)
Taken ad seriatim, these essays present a wide range of differing theoretical positions and practical strategies for reform. It is our hope that, when read from this point of view, they will evoke the kind of very specific discussions, debates and actions that will be required if real change is to occur. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Reconstructing liberal education : a religious studies perspective (Frank E. Reynolds)
ch. 2 University, the liberal arts, and the teaching and study of religion (Charles H. Long)
ch. 3 "Seeking an end to the primary text" or "putting an end to the text as primary" (Lawrence E. Sullivan)
ch. 4 Rethinking the humanities for the 1990s : redressing the balance (George W. Pickering)
ch. 5 Confidence and criticism : religious studies and the public purposes of liberal education (Robin W. Lovin) -- Education and the intellectual virtues (Lee H. Yearly)
ch. 6 Legal status of religious studies programs in public higher education (W. Royce Clark)
ch. 7 Four modes of discourse : blurred genres in the study of religion (Sheryl L. Burkhalter)
ch. 8 Beyond ours and theirs : the global character of religious studies (James H. Foard)
ch. 9 Religious studies and exposure to multiple worlds in the liberal arts curriculum (Judith A. Berling)
ch. 10 Writing across the curriculum : a religious studies contribution ( James H. Foard)
ch. 11 Dearth in Venice (William R. Darrow)

Academic Service Learning: A Pedagogy of Action and Reflection
Additional Info:
College and university teachers who struggle to connect instruction with students' real world experiences have found much of value in service learning. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning presents an academic conception of service learning, described as a pedagogical model that intentionally integrates academic learning and relevant community service.
Contributors provide a conceptual structure for academic service learning, describe successful programs, and discuss issues that ...
College and university teachers who struggle to connect instruction with students' real world experiences have found much of value in service learning. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning presents an academic conception of service learning, described as a pedagogical model that intentionally integrates academic learning and relevant community service.
Contributors provide a conceptual structure for academic service learning, describe successful programs, and discuss issues that ...
Additional Info:
College and university teachers who struggle to connect instruction with students' real world experiences have found much of value in service learning. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning presents an academic conception of service learning, described as a pedagogical model that intentionally integrates academic learning and relevant community service.
Contributors provide a conceptual structure for academic service learning, describe successful programs, and discuss issues that faculty and administrators must consider as they incorporate service into courses and curricula. This is the 73rd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals section. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Academic Service Learning: Its Meaning and Relevance(Kathleen Maas Weigert)
ch. 2. De-Platonizing and Democratizing Education as the Bases of Service Learning(Ira Harkavy, Lee Benson)
ch. 3. Academic Service Learning: A Counterproductive Pedagogy(Jeffrey P. F. Howard)
ch. 4. A Pedagogy for Citizenship: Service Learning and Democratic Education(Meta MAndel-Reyes)
ch. 5. Critical Multiculturalism and Service Learning(Robert A. Rhoads)
ch. 6. Reading, Writing, and Reflection(David D. Cooper)
ch. 7. Participatory Action Research as Service Learning(Kenneth M. Reardon)
ch. 8. A Service Learning Research AgAnda for the Next Five Years(Dwight E. Giles, Jr., Janet Eyler)
ch. 9. Addressing Academic Culture: Service Learning, Organizations, and Faculty Work(Kelly Ward)
ch. 10. A Service Learning Approach to Faculty Development(Edward Zlotkowski)
ch. 11. Resources for Research and Practice in Service Learning(D. Scott Dixon)
College and university teachers who struggle to connect instruction with students' real world experiences have found much of value in service learning. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning presents an academic conception of service learning, described as a pedagogical model that intentionally integrates academic learning and relevant community service.
Contributors provide a conceptual structure for academic service learning, describe successful programs, and discuss issues that faculty and administrators must consider as they incorporate service into courses and curricula. This is the 73rd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals section. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Academic Service Learning: Its Meaning and Relevance(Kathleen Maas Weigert)
ch. 2. De-Platonizing and Democratizing Education as the Bases of Service Learning(Ira Harkavy, Lee Benson)
ch. 3. Academic Service Learning: A Counterproductive Pedagogy(Jeffrey P. F. Howard)
ch. 4. A Pedagogy for Citizenship: Service Learning and Democratic Education(Meta MAndel-Reyes)
ch. 5. Critical Multiculturalism and Service Learning(Robert A. Rhoads)
ch. 6. Reading, Writing, and Reflection(David D. Cooper)
ch. 7. Participatory Action Research as Service Learning(Kenneth M. Reardon)
ch. 8. A Service Learning Research AgAnda for the Next Five Years(Dwight E. Giles, Jr., Janet Eyler)
ch. 9. Addressing Academic Culture: Service Learning, Organizations, and Faculty Work(Kelly Ward)
ch. 10. A Service Learning Approach to Faculty Development(Edward Zlotkowski)
ch. 11. Resources for Research and Practice in Service Learning(D. Scott Dixon)


Feminist Teaching in Theory and Practice: Situating Power & Knowledge in Poststructural Classrooms
Additional Info:
Using a feminist poststructural focus, Ropers-Huilman (Louisiana State Univ.) investigates feminist teachers' positions and styles in order to examine the practices of a theory of teaching. She explores teachers' reflections on power and gender, how they operate in the classroom, and their experiences as innovators in feminist teaching. No one particular approach or process is emphasized. The application of theory to practice allows the 22 teachers who were interviewed to explore ...
Using a feminist poststructural focus, Ropers-Huilman (Louisiana State Univ.) investigates feminist teachers' positions and styles in order to examine the practices of a theory of teaching. She explores teachers' reflections on power and gender, how they operate in the classroom, and their experiences as innovators in feminist teaching. No one particular approach or process is emphasized. The application of theory to practice allows the 22 teachers who were interviewed to explore ...
Additional Info:
Using a feminist poststructural focus, Ropers-Huilman (Louisiana State Univ.) investigates feminist teachers' positions and styles in order to examine the practices of a theory of teaching. She explores teachers' reflections on power and gender, how they operate in the classroom, and their experiences as innovators in feminist teaching. No one particular approach or process is emphasized. The application of theory to practice allows the 22 teachers who were interviewed to explore and debate the interaction between students and teachers. The complexity of investigating feminist practices, rather than just the teachers themselves, allows a more flexible look at the issues and the social forces defining their interpretations. Ropers-Huilman explores factors contributing to the many forms of feminist teaching and how power affects and shapes the experience. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editor's Foreword
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Puzzling My Way Toward/Through Feminist Teaching
Pt. I Engaging Change: Social Forces and Feminist Teaching Practice
ch. 2 Multiplicity in Action: Working Through Identities
ch. 3 Unsettling Roles: Teacher and Student Interactions
ch. 4 Mapping the Terrain: Institutional Barriers, Supports, and Strategies
Pt. II Engaging Power: Critical Tensions and Resistances
ch. 5 Powerful Places: (De)constructing Power and Resistance
ch. 6 Situated Texts: Negotiating Knowledge and Knowing
ch. 7 Classroom Ruptures: Politics of Difference
ch. 8 Powers of Language: Interrogating Silence and Speech
ch. 9 Intersections and Interruptions: Letting Loose with Disruption
Notes
References
Index
About the Author
Using a feminist poststructural focus, Ropers-Huilman (Louisiana State Univ.) investigates feminist teachers' positions and styles in order to examine the practices of a theory of teaching. She explores teachers' reflections on power and gender, how they operate in the classroom, and their experiences as innovators in feminist teaching. No one particular approach or process is emphasized. The application of theory to practice allows the 22 teachers who were interviewed to explore and debate the interaction between students and teachers. The complexity of investigating feminist practices, rather than just the teachers themselves, allows a more flexible look at the issues and the social forces defining their interpretations. Ropers-Huilman explores factors contributing to the many forms of feminist teaching and how power affects and shapes the experience. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editor's Foreword
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Puzzling My Way Toward/Through Feminist Teaching
Pt. I Engaging Change: Social Forces and Feminist Teaching Practice
ch. 2 Multiplicity in Action: Working Through Identities
ch. 3 Unsettling Roles: Teacher and Student Interactions
ch. 4 Mapping the Terrain: Institutional Barriers, Supports, and Strategies
Pt. II Engaging Power: Critical Tensions and Resistances
ch. 5 Powerful Places: (De)constructing Power and Resistance
ch. 6 Situated Texts: Negotiating Knowledge and Knowing
ch. 7 Classroom Ruptures: Politics of Difference
ch. 8 Powers of Language: Interrogating Silence and Speech
ch. 9 Intersections and Interruptions: Letting Loose with Disruption
Notes
References
Index
About the Author
Additional Info:
Every teacher wants to improve teaching effectiveness, and a good place to begin is by understanding the various ways students perceive and process information.
Learning Style Perspectives addresses the learning needs of the students, taking into consideration individual preferences for absorbing and retaining material in an auditory, visual, or tactile manner. Lynne Celli Sarasin gives an overview of major theorists and synthesizes those theories into an approach to ...
Every teacher wants to improve teaching effectiveness, and a good place to begin is by understanding the various ways students perceive and process information.
Learning Style Perspectives addresses the learning needs of the students, taking into consideration individual preferences for absorbing and retaining material in an auditory, visual, or tactile manner. Lynne Celli Sarasin gives an overview of major theorists and synthesizes those theories into an approach to ...
Additional Info:
Every teacher wants to improve teaching effectiveness, and a good place to begin is by understanding the various ways students perceive and process information.
Learning Style Perspectives addresses the learning needs of the students, taking into consideration individual preferences for absorbing and retaining material in an auditory, visual, or tactile manner. Lynne Celli Sarasin gives an overview of major theorists and synthesizes those theories into an approach to teaching which is easily applied in any college or university classroom setting. The characteristics of auditory, visual, and tactile learners are described along with appropriate teaching techniques, student reactions, and evaluation of each style of learning. Includes easily referenced charts of descriptors, teaching strategies, and student behaviors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Tour of Learning Styles
ch. 3 Postsecondary Students and Learning Styles
ch. 4 Auditory Learners
ch. 5 Visual Learners
ch. 6 Tactile Learners
ch. 7 Significance of Learning Styles Research
Every teacher wants to improve teaching effectiveness, and a good place to begin is by understanding the various ways students perceive and process information.
Learning Style Perspectives addresses the learning needs of the students, taking into consideration individual preferences for absorbing and retaining material in an auditory, visual, or tactile manner. Lynne Celli Sarasin gives an overview of major theorists and synthesizes those theories into an approach to teaching which is easily applied in any college or university classroom setting. The characteristics of auditory, visual, and tactile learners are described along with appropriate teaching techniques, student reactions, and evaluation of each style of learning. Includes easily referenced charts of descriptors, teaching strategies, and student behaviors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Tour of Learning Styles
ch. 3 Postsecondary Students and Learning Styles
ch. 4 Auditory Learners
ch. 5 Visual Learners
ch. 6 Tactile Learners
ch. 7 Significance of Learning Styles Research

Proclaiming and Sustaining Excellence: Assessment as a Faculty Role
Additional Info:
This book provides a brief history of the most recent wave of assessment in higher education, particularly focused on the faculty role in assessment. It traces major conceptual, methodological, political and policy advances in assessment over the past decade. The authors suggest some ways of thinking about assessment, strategies, and next steps which they view as necessary for more clearly envisioning assessment as a faculty role. (From the Publisher)
This book provides a brief history of the most recent wave of assessment in higher education, particularly focused on the faculty role in assessment. It traces major conceptual, methodological, political and policy advances in assessment over the past decade. The authors suggest some ways of thinking about assessment, strategies, and next steps which they view as necessary for more clearly envisioning assessment as a faculty role. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book provides a brief history of the most recent wave of assessment in higher education, particularly focused on the faculty role in assessment. It traces major conceptual, methodological, political and policy advances in assessment over the past decade. The authors suggest some ways of thinking about assessment, strategies, and next steps which they view as necessary for more clearly envisioning assessment as a faculty role. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Conceptual or theoretical advances such as the talent-development or value-added perspective
ch. 2 Methodological advances such as multiple measures of performance
ch. 3 Policy advances, including changing notions of accountability
ch. 4 The faculty's involvement in assessments, with examples
ch. 5 Envisioning assessment as a faculty role in a supportive fiscal and policy context
This book provides a brief history of the most recent wave of assessment in higher education, particularly focused on the faculty role in assessment. It traces major conceptual, methodological, political and policy advances in assessment over the past decade. The authors suggest some ways of thinking about assessment, strategies, and next steps which they view as necessary for more clearly envisioning assessment as a faculty role. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Conceptual or theoretical advances such as the talent-development or value-added perspective
ch. 2 Methodological advances such as multiple measures of performance
ch. 3 Policy advances, including changing notions of accountability
ch. 4 The faculty's involvement in assessments, with examples
ch. 5 Envisioning assessment as a faculty role in a supportive fiscal and policy context

Multicultural Teaching in the University
Additional Info:
This important book includes more than twenty essays by faculty from different disciplines, each articulating the multiple dimensions and components of multicultural teaching. Teachers discuss their own teaching methods and classes in terms of course content, process and discourse, and diversity among faculty and students in the classroom. This volume integrates new scholarship that reflects a more expansive notion of knowledge, and suggests new ways to communicate with diverse populations ...
This important book includes more than twenty essays by faculty from different disciplines, each articulating the multiple dimensions and components of multicultural teaching. Teachers discuss their own teaching methods and classes in terms of course content, process and discourse, and diversity among faculty and students in the classroom. This volume integrates new scholarship that reflects a more expansive notion of knowledge, and suggests new ways to communicate with diverse populations ...
Additional Info:
This important book includes more than twenty essays by faculty from different disciplines, each articulating the multiple dimensions and components of multicultural teaching. Teachers discuss their own teaching methods and classes in terms of course content, process and discourse, and diversity among faculty and students in the classroom. This volume integrates new scholarship that reflects a more expansive notion of knowledge, and suggests new ways to communicate with diverse populations of students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Part 1 The Meaning of Multicultural Teaching: An Introduction
Part 2 Courses on Intergroup Relations
ch. 1 Teaching About Ethnic Identity and Intergroup Relations
ch. 2 Continuing the Legacy: On the Importance of Praxis in the Education of Social Work Students and Teachers
ch. 3 Teaching With and About Conflict in the Classroom
ch. 4 Latinos in the United States: A Framework for Teaching
ch. 5 Reflections on the Teaching of Multicultural Courses
Part 3 Courses on Racism, Sexism, and Diversity
ch. 6 Anti-Racism and Multiculturalism in a Law School Class
ch. 7 Our Lives, Our Histories
ch. 8 "A Circle of Learners": Teaching About Gender, Race, and Class ch. 9 Multicultural Teaching in Public Health: A Course on Gender, Race, Ethnicity, and Health
ch. 10 The Latina: A Teaching Experience
ch. 11 Lesbian Studies and Multicultural Teaching: A Challenge in Diversity
ch. 12 The 1988 Presidential Campaign and Multicultural Education
Part 4 General Courses Giving Attention to Diversity
ch. 13 Seeing the Whole of the Moon
ch. 14 How I Teach Mathematics to Minorities
ch. 15 Racial Bias in Science Education
ch. 16 Waking Up to the World: A Multicultural Approach to Writing
ch. 17 Should and Can a White, Heterosexual, Middle-Class Man Teach Students About Social Inequality and Oppression? One Person's Experience and Reflections
ch. 18 On Engaging Students in a Multicultural Course on a Global Scale: Risks, Costs, and Rewards
ch. 19 Social Psychology
Part 5 Teacher Training and Nonformal Education
ch. 20 Dialogue Groups: An Innovative Approach to Multicultural Learning
ch. 21 Combating Homophobia Through Education
ch. 22 FAIRteach: Faculty Development on Issues of Racism and Diversity
ch. 23 Constructing a Teaching Assistant Training Program with a Multicultural Emphasis
Part 6 Roundtable Discussion: The Insiders' Critique of Multicultural Teaching
Part 7 Questions and Responses on Multicultural Teaching and Conflict in the Classroom
Part 8 Classroom and Workshop Exercises
Selected Bibliography
Index
About the Contributors
This important book includes more than twenty essays by faculty from different disciplines, each articulating the multiple dimensions and components of multicultural teaching. Teachers discuss their own teaching methods and classes in terms of course content, process and discourse, and diversity among faculty and students in the classroom. This volume integrates new scholarship that reflects a more expansive notion of knowledge, and suggests new ways to communicate with diverse populations of students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Part 1 The Meaning of Multicultural Teaching: An Introduction
Part 2 Courses on Intergroup Relations
ch. 1 Teaching About Ethnic Identity and Intergroup Relations
ch. 2 Continuing the Legacy: On the Importance of Praxis in the Education of Social Work Students and Teachers
ch. 3 Teaching With and About Conflict in the Classroom
ch. 4 Latinos in the United States: A Framework for Teaching
ch. 5 Reflections on the Teaching of Multicultural Courses
Part 3 Courses on Racism, Sexism, and Diversity
ch. 6 Anti-Racism and Multiculturalism in a Law School Class
ch. 7 Our Lives, Our Histories
ch. 8 "A Circle of Learners": Teaching About Gender, Race, and Class ch. 9 Multicultural Teaching in Public Health: A Course on Gender, Race, Ethnicity, and Health
ch. 10 The Latina: A Teaching Experience
ch. 11 Lesbian Studies and Multicultural Teaching: A Challenge in Diversity
ch. 12 The 1988 Presidential Campaign and Multicultural Education
Part 4 General Courses Giving Attention to Diversity
ch. 13 Seeing the Whole of the Moon
ch. 14 How I Teach Mathematics to Minorities
ch. 15 Racial Bias in Science Education
ch. 16 Waking Up to the World: A Multicultural Approach to Writing
ch. 17 Should and Can a White, Heterosexual, Middle-Class Man Teach Students About Social Inequality and Oppression? One Person's Experience and Reflections
ch. 18 On Engaging Students in a Multicultural Course on a Global Scale: Risks, Costs, and Rewards
ch. 19 Social Psychology
Part 5 Teacher Training and Nonformal Education
ch. 20 Dialogue Groups: An Innovative Approach to Multicultural Learning
ch. 21 Combating Homophobia Through Education
ch. 22 FAIRteach: Faculty Development on Issues of Racism and Diversity
ch. 23 Constructing a Teaching Assistant Training Program with a Multicultural Emphasis
Part 6 Roundtable Discussion: The Insiders' Critique of Multicultural Teaching
Part 7 Questions and Responses on Multicultural Teaching and Conflict in the Classroom
Part 8 Classroom and Workshop Exercises
Selected Bibliography
Index
About the Contributors


Educating the Reflective Practitioner: Toward a New Design for Teaching and Learning in the Professions
Additional Info:
Doctors, architects, lawyers and engineers are all trained in schools that emphasize technique but neglect the key element of artistry that distinguishes the true professional. Today's professional is a drudge, mechanically applying privileged knowledge to rote tasks. That is Schon's diagnosis of higher education, and as a remedy he recommends learning by doing. To teach skills of improvisation and problem-framing, he feels our universities should borrow the methods used in ...
Doctors, architects, lawyers and engineers are all trained in schools that emphasize technique but neglect the key element of artistry that distinguishes the true professional. Today's professional is a drudge, mechanically applying privileged knowledge to rote tasks. That is Schon's diagnosis of higher education, and as a remedy he recommends learning by doing. To teach skills of improvisation and problem-framing, he feels our universities should borrow the methods used in ...
Additional Info:
Doctors, architects, lawyers and engineers are all trained in schools that emphasize technique but neglect the key element of artistry that distinguishes the true professional. Today's professional is a drudge, mechanically applying privileged knowledge to rote tasks. That is Schon's diagnosis of higher education, and as a remedy he recommends learning by doing. To teach skills of improvisation and problem-framing, he feels our universities should borrow the methods used in art studios, dance conservatories, athletics coaching, craft appenticeships and psychoanalytic training. In all these settings, a dialogue between student and coach in a low-risk atmosphere encourages creativity. Despite its academic prose, this primer by an MIT urban studies professor will enlighten students, teachers and professionals. Schon concludes the book (a sequel to The Reflective Practitioner with a description of his attempt to create a ``studiolike'' curriculum for MIT's city planning courses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Roles of Artistry in Professional Education.
The Architectural Studio: A Prototype of Education for Reflection-in-Action.
Examples and Experiments.
Implications for Professional Education.
Doctors, architects, lawyers and engineers are all trained in schools that emphasize technique but neglect the key element of artistry that distinguishes the true professional. Today's professional is a drudge, mechanically applying privileged knowledge to rote tasks. That is Schon's diagnosis of higher education, and as a remedy he recommends learning by doing. To teach skills of improvisation and problem-framing, he feels our universities should borrow the methods used in art studios, dance conservatories, athletics coaching, craft appenticeships and psychoanalytic training. In all these settings, a dialogue between student and coach in a low-risk atmosphere encourages creativity. Despite its academic prose, this primer by an MIT urban studies professor will enlighten students, teachers and professionals. Schon concludes the book (a sequel to The Reflective Practitioner with a description of his attempt to create a ``studiolike'' curriculum for MIT's city planning courses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Roles of Artistry in Professional Education.
The Architectural Studio: A Prototype of Education for Reflection-in-Action.
Examples and Experiments.
Implications for Professional Education.

Reason for the Hope: The Futures of Roman Catholic Theologates
Additional Info:
This new 8-volume series brings us the seasoned fruits of modern scholarship. The authors are personally and pastorally aware of the theological concerns and challenges of our time and are attuned to the needs of contemporary students. (From the Publisher)
This new 8-volume series brings us the seasoned fruits of modern scholarship. The authors are personally and pastorally aware of the theological concerns and challenges of our time and are attuned to the needs of contemporary students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This new 8-volume series brings us the seasoned fruits of modern scholarship. The authors are personally and pastorally aware of the theological concerns and challenges of our time and are attuned to the needs of contemporary students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
Introduction: Background, Methodology, and Scope of the Study
Part I. Historical background
A. How the Seminary Developed
B. The Houses of Study of Religious Orders and Congregations: A Historical Sketch
Part II. Mission and Management
A. Missions of Theologates
B. Governance
C. Finances
Part III. Personnel and Students
A. Administration
B. Faculty
C. Students
Part IV. Formation Programs for Future Ministers
A. Personal and Spiritual Formation
B. Academic Formation
C. Pastoral Formation and Field Education
Part V. Future Goals and Directions of Tehologates in Relation to the Needs of the Roman Catholic Church in the United States
A. Church and Society: Theologate Response to Special Concerns
B. The Futures of the Roman Catholic Theologates: Challenges and Opportunities
Appendices
Bibliography
Index
This new 8-volume series brings us the seasoned fruits of modern scholarship. The authors are personally and pastorally aware of the theological concerns and challenges of our time and are attuned to the needs of contemporary students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
Introduction: Background, Methodology, and Scope of the Study
Part I. Historical background
A. How the Seminary Developed
B. The Houses of Study of Religious Orders and Congregations: A Historical Sketch
Part II. Mission and Management
A. Missions of Theologates
B. Governance
C. Finances
Part III. Personnel and Students
A. Administration
B. Faculty
C. Students
Part IV. Formation Programs for Future Ministers
A. Personal and Spiritual Formation
B. Academic Formation
C. Pastoral Formation and Field Education
Part V. Future Goals and Directions of Tehologates in Relation to the Needs of the Roman Catholic Church in the United States
A. Church and Society: Theologate Response to Special Concerns
B. The Futures of the Roman Catholic Theologates: Challenges and Opportunities
Appendices
Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
In Seminaries, Theologates, and the Future of Church Ministry, Sr. Schuth details some of the ways seminaries are responding to the ministerial requirements of the Church of today and tomorrow. Extensive research images of Church, priesthood, and ministry are taken from a broad sample of faculty, students, administrators, and trustees to answer such questions as: What is the nature of the local and universal mission of the Church in which ...
In Seminaries, Theologates, and the Future of Church Ministry, Sr. Schuth details some of the ways seminaries are responding to the ministerial requirements of the Church of today and tomorrow. Extensive research images of Church, priesthood, and ministry are taken from a broad sample of faculty, students, administrators, and trustees to answer such questions as: What is the nature of the local and universal mission of the Church in which ...
Additional Info:
In Seminaries, Theologates, and the Future of Church Ministry, Sr. Schuth details some of the ways seminaries are responding to the ministerial requirements of the Church of today and tomorrow. Extensive research images of Church, priesthood, and ministry are taken from a broad sample of faculty, students, administrators, and trustees to answer such questions as: What is the nature of the local and universal mission of the Church in which people seek to serve these days? What is their vision of the church's future? How must people be prepared to carry, out the vision they hold about the church's ministry? What are their fears, hopes, anxieties about ministering in the Church? and What would be their one wish for the future? Studies of what parishioners expect of their Church and ministers complement the internal views. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
Introduction
Background
Methodology
Outline of the Study
Part I. Context
ch. 1 Surviving the Shaking of the Foundations: United States Catholicism in the Twenty-First Century
ch. 2 Reaping Harvests, Sowing Seeds: Vatican Influences and National Developments in United States Seminaries from the Mid-Nineteen Eighties to the Present
ch. 3 The Priest as Parish Leader: A Contextual Analysis
Part II. Mission and Members of Theologate Communities
ch. 4 The Mission of Theologates
ch. 5 Students and Their Backgrounds: Religious, Intellectual, and Human
ch. 6 Board Members, Administrators, and Faculties
Part III. Formation Programs
ch. 7 Evolution and Development of Formation Programs
ch. 8 Human and Spiritual Formation in Theologates
ch. 9 Intellectual Formation
ch. 10 Pastoral Field Education
Part IV. The Future
ch. 11 Perceptions about Church and Ministry
ch. 12 Perceptions about Priesthood
Conclusion
Appendix A: Theologate Ownership and Operation
Bibliography
Index
In Seminaries, Theologates, and the Future of Church Ministry, Sr. Schuth details some of the ways seminaries are responding to the ministerial requirements of the Church of today and tomorrow. Extensive research images of Church, priesthood, and ministry are taken from a broad sample of faculty, students, administrators, and trustees to answer such questions as: What is the nature of the local and universal mission of the Church in which people seek to serve these days? What is their vision of the church's future? How must people be prepared to carry, out the vision they hold about the church's ministry? What are their fears, hopes, anxieties about ministering in the Church? and What would be their one wish for the future? Studies of what parishioners expect of their Church and ministers complement the internal views. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
Introduction
Background
Methodology
Outline of the Study
Part I. Context
ch. 1 Surviving the Shaking of the Foundations: United States Catholicism in the Twenty-First Century
ch. 2 Reaping Harvests, Sowing Seeds: Vatican Influences and National Developments in United States Seminaries from the Mid-Nineteen Eighties to the Present
ch. 3 The Priest as Parish Leader: A Contextual Analysis
Part II. Mission and Members of Theologate Communities
ch. 4 The Mission of Theologates
ch. 5 Students and Their Backgrounds: Religious, Intellectual, and Human
ch. 6 Board Members, Administrators, and Faculties
Part III. Formation Programs
ch. 7 Evolution and Development of Formation Programs
ch. 8 Human and Spiritual Formation in Theologates
ch. 9 Intellectual Formation
ch. 10 Pastoral Field Education
Part IV. The Future
ch. 11 Perceptions about Church and Ministry
ch. 12 Perceptions about Priesthood
Conclusion
Appendix A: Theologate Ownership and Operation
Bibliography
Index

Curriculum, Religion, and Public Education: Conversations for an Enlarging Public Square
Additional Info:
Along the fault line of public education and conservative religious beliefs, this break-through volume explores five curriculum arenas that have been "ground zero" in community debate—science and human evolution, textbook selection, sexuality instruction, character development, and outcome-based education. Curriculum, Religion, and Public Education will assist educators, parents, and community leaders in crossing boundaries to communicate with "the others," and in the process transform schools—and ourselves. (From the Publisher)
Along the fault line of public education and conservative religious beliefs, this break-through volume explores five curriculum arenas that have been "ground zero" in community debate—science and human evolution, textbook selection, sexuality instruction, character development, and outcome-based education. Curriculum, Religion, and Public Education will assist educators, parents, and community leaders in crossing boundaries to communicate with "the others," and in the process transform schools—and ourselves. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Along the fault line of public education and conservative religious beliefs, this break-through volume explores five curriculum arenas that have been "ground zero" in community debate—science and human evolution, textbook selection, sexuality instruction, character development, and outcome-based education. Curriculum, Religion, and Public Education will assist educators, parents, and community leaders in crossing boundaries to communicate with "the others," and in the process transform schools—and ourselves. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction (James T. Sears)
Pt. I Foundations for Conversations
ch. 1 History, Religion, and Schooling: A Context for Conversation (James C. Carper)
ch. 2 Encounters in Law, Philosophy, Religion, and Education Commentary (Richard John Neuhaus, Martin E. Marty, Maxine Greens, George Marsden, and Michael W. McConnell)
ch. 3 Crossing Boundaries and Becoming the Other: Voices Across Borders (James T. Sears)
ch. 4 Dialogue, Religion, and Tolerance: How to Talk to People Who Are Wrong About (Almost) Everything (Kenneth A. Strike)
Pt. II Textbooks: Whose Stories are to be Told?
ch. 5 Religion and the Textbooks (Gilbert T. Sewall)
ch. 6 It's Not About the Books: Textbook Controversies and the Need for Uncertain Conversations (J. Dan Marshall)
Suggested Additional Readings on Textbooks (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. III Values in the Public Schools: What and Whose Values Should be Taught?
ch. 7 Why a Functional Definition of Religion Is Necessary If Justice Is to Be Achieved in Public Education (Richard A. Baer, Jr.
ch. 8 Moral Education as a Form of Life (Nel Noddings)
Community Dialogue: Is There a Common Moral Framework That Schools Can Embrace? (Carolyn Murphy, James T. Sears, and Bob Shearer et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Values (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. IV Sexuality Education: What Does Teaching Sexual Responsibility Mean?
ch. 9 Sex Education Should Exclusively Endorse Abstinence... (George A. Rekers, and Richard C. Hohn)
ch. 10 Teaching and Researching Sexualities in a Socially Responsible Manner (James T. Sears)
Community Dialogue: Sexual Behaviors and Sexual Cultures (Carolyn Murphy, Bob Shearer, Gary Burgess, et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Sexuality Education (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. V Outcome-Based Education: Who Should Set the Standards?
ch. 11 The Fundamentalist Right, the "New Paradigm," and Outcome-Based Education (Dennis Carlson)
ch. 12 Outcome-Based Education: Can It Be Redeemed? (Charles L. Glenn)
Community Dialogue: A Matter of Fairness and Equity (Carolyn Murphy, James T. Sears, and Bob Shearer et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Outcome-Based Education (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. VI Science: Who and What are we?
ch. 13 The Problem of Dogmatism in Science Education (Nancy W. Brickhouse, and William J. Letts, IV)
ch. 14 The Two Controversies over Evolution (Phillip E. Johnson)
Community Dialogue: From Six Days to 4.6 Billion Years (Carolyn Murphy, James T. Sears, Bob Shearer et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Science (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. VII A Concluding Conversation Among Education Scholars (James T. Sears, Richard Baer, and Paul S. Brantley et al.)
Index
About the Editor and the Contributors
Along the fault line of public education and conservative religious beliefs, this break-through volume explores five curriculum arenas that have been "ground zero" in community debate—science and human evolution, textbook selection, sexuality instruction, character development, and outcome-based education. Curriculum, Religion, and Public Education will assist educators, parents, and community leaders in crossing boundaries to communicate with "the others," and in the process transform schools—and ourselves. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction (James T. Sears)
Pt. I Foundations for Conversations
ch. 1 History, Religion, and Schooling: A Context for Conversation (James C. Carper)
ch. 2 Encounters in Law, Philosophy, Religion, and Education Commentary (Richard John Neuhaus, Martin E. Marty, Maxine Greens, George Marsden, and Michael W. McConnell)
ch. 3 Crossing Boundaries and Becoming the Other: Voices Across Borders (James T. Sears)
ch. 4 Dialogue, Religion, and Tolerance: How to Talk to People Who Are Wrong About (Almost) Everything (Kenneth A. Strike)
Pt. II Textbooks: Whose Stories are to be Told?
ch. 5 Religion and the Textbooks (Gilbert T. Sewall)
ch. 6 It's Not About the Books: Textbook Controversies and the Need for Uncertain Conversations (J. Dan Marshall)
Suggested Additional Readings on Textbooks (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. III Values in the Public Schools: What and Whose Values Should be Taught?
ch. 7 Why a Functional Definition of Religion Is Necessary If Justice Is to Be Achieved in Public Education (Richard A. Baer, Jr.
ch. 8 Moral Education as a Form of Life (Nel Noddings)
Community Dialogue: Is There a Common Moral Framework That Schools Can Embrace? (Carolyn Murphy, James T. Sears, and Bob Shearer et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Values (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. IV Sexuality Education: What Does Teaching Sexual Responsibility Mean?
ch. 9 Sex Education Should Exclusively Endorse Abstinence... (George A. Rekers, and Richard C. Hohn)
ch. 10 Teaching and Researching Sexualities in a Socially Responsible Manner (James T. Sears)
Community Dialogue: Sexual Behaviors and Sexual Cultures (Carolyn Murphy, Bob Shearer, Gary Burgess, et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Sexuality Education (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. V Outcome-Based Education: Who Should Set the Standards?
ch. 11 The Fundamentalist Right, the "New Paradigm," and Outcome-Based Education (Dennis Carlson)
ch. 12 Outcome-Based Education: Can It Be Redeemed? (Charles L. Glenn)
Community Dialogue: A Matter of Fairness and Equity (Carolyn Murphy, James T. Sears, and Bob Shearer et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Outcome-Based Education (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. VI Science: Who and What are we?
ch. 13 The Problem of Dogmatism in Science Education (Nancy W. Brickhouse, and William J. Letts, IV)
ch. 14 The Two Controversies over Evolution (Phillip E. Johnson)
Community Dialogue: From Six Days to 4.6 Billion Years (Carolyn Murphy, James T. Sears, Bob Shearer et al.)
Suggested Additional Readings on Science (Elaine Lindsey, and James T. Sears)
Pt. VII A Concluding Conversation Among Education Scholars (James T. Sears, Richard Baer, and Paul S. Brantley et al.)
Index
About the Editor and the Contributors
Additional Info:
This volume gathers together papers from a broad variety of voices in biblical criticism and theological studies. The papers are divided into four major sections in keeping with their major concerns and aims: Biblical interpretation and theological education, social location and Biblical pedagogy in the US, social location and Biblical pedagogy in global perspective, and Biblical interpretation. (From the Publisher)
This volume gathers together papers from a broad variety of voices in biblical criticism and theological studies. The papers are divided into four major sections in keeping with their major concerns and aims: Biblical interpretation and theological education, social location and Biblical pedagogy in the US, social location and Biblical pedagogy in global perspective, and Biblical interpretation. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This volume gathers together papers from a broad variety of voices in biblical criticism and theological studies. The papers are divided into four major sections in keeping with their major concerns and aims: Biblical interpretation and theological education, social location and Biblical pedagogy in the US, social location and Biblical pedagogy in global perspective, and Biblical interpretation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Pedagogical Discourse and Practices in Contemporary Biblical Criticism
Part I Biblical Interpretation and Theological Education
ch. 1 Theological Education in a New Context: Reflections from the Perspective of Brazilian Theology (Paulo Fernando Carneiro de Andrade)
ch. 2 Constructive Theology and Biblical Worlds (Peter Hodgson)
ch. 3 Globalization in Theological Education (Joseph C. Hough, Jr.)
ch. 4 Jesus/the Native: Biblical Studies from a Postcolonial Perspective (Kwok Pui-lan)
ch. 5 Four Faces of Theology: Four Johannine Conversations (Jean-Pierre Ruiz)
Part II Social Location and Biblical Pedagogy in the United States
ch. 6 Crossing the Line: Three Scenes of Divine-Human Engagement in the Hebrew Bible (Francisco Garcia-Treto)
ch. 7 Reading from an Indigenous Place (Mark Lewis Taylor)
ch. 8 Pedagogical Discourse and Practices in Cultural Studies: Toward a Contextual Biblical Pedagogy (Fernando F. Segovia)
ch. 9 A New Teaching with Authority: A Re-evaluation of the Authority of the Bible (Mary Ann Tolbert)
ch. 10 A Meeting of Worlds: African Americans and the Bible (Vincent L. Wimbush)
Part III Social Location and Biblical Pedagogy in Global Perspective
ch. 11 A Reading of the Story of the Tower of Babel from the Perspective of Non-Identity: Gen 11:1-9 in the Context of Its Production (J. Severino Croatto)
ch. 12 "Go Therefore and Make Disciples of All Nations" (Matt 28:19a): A Postcolonial Perspective on Biblical Criticism and Pedagogy (Musa W. Duba)
ch. 13 Cross-Textual Interpretation and Its Implications for Biblical Studies (Archie C. C. Lee)
ch. 14 Biblical Exegesis and Its Shortcomings in Theological Education (Temba L. J. Mafico)
ch. 15 The Hermeneutics of Liberation: Theoretical Grounding for the Communitarian Reading of the Bible (Pablo Richard)
ch. 16 Biblical Studies in India: From Imperialistic Scholarship to Postcolonial Interpretation (R.S. Sugirtharajah)
Part IV Biblical Interpretation: Pedagogical Practices
ch. 17 A Rhetorical Paradigm for Pedagogy (Rebecca S. Chopp)
ch. 18 Reading the Bible in the Global Context: Issues in Methodology and Pedagogy (Denise Dombkowski Hopkins, Sharon H. Ringe, and Frederick C. Tiffany)
ch. 19 Crossing Borders: Biblical Studies in a Trans-Cultural World (Kathleen M. O'Connor)
ch. 20 Weaving a New Web of Creative Remembering (Elaine M. Wainwright)
ch. 21 Lessons for North America from a Third-World Seminary (Antoinette Clark Wire)
Contributors
Index
This volume gathers together papers from a broad variety of voices in biblical criticism and theological studies. The papers are divided into four major sections in keeping with their major concerns and aims: Biblical interpretation and theological education, social location and Biblical pedagogy in the US, social location and Biblical pedagogy in global perspective, and Biblical interpretation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Pedagogical Discourse and Practices in Contemporary Biblical Criticism
Part I Biblical Interpretation and Theological Education
ch. 1 Theological Education in a New Context: Reflections from the Perspective of Brazilian Theology (Paulo Fernando Carneiro de Andrade)
ch. 2 Constructive Theology and Biblical Worlds (Peter Hodgson)
ch. 3 Globalization in Theological Education (Joseph C. Hough, Jr.)
ch. 4 Jesus/the Native: Biblical Studies from a Postcolonial Perspective (Kwok Pui-lan)
ch. 5 Four Faces of Theology: Four Johannine Conversations (Jean-Pierre Ruiz)
Part II Social Location and Biblical Pedagogy in the United States
ch. 6 Crossing the Line: Three Scenes of Divine-Human Engagement in the Hebrew Bible (Francisco Garcia-Treto)
ch. 7 Reading from an Indigenous Place (Mark Lewis Taylor)
ch. 8 Pedagogical Discourse and Practices in Cultural Studies: Toward a Contextual Biblical Pedagogy (Fernando F. Segovia)
ch. 9 A New Teaching with Authority: A Re-evaluation of the Authority of the Bible (Mary Ann Tolbert)
ch. 10 A Meeting of Worlds: African Americans and the Bible (Vincent L. Wimbush)
Part III Social Location and Biblical Pedagogy in Global Perspective
ch. 11 A Reading of the Story of the Tower of Babel from the Perspective of Non-Identity: Gen 11:1-9 in the Context of Its Production (J. Severino Croatto)
ch. 12 "Go Therefore and Make Disciples of All Nations" (Matt 28:19a): A Postcolonial Perspective on Biblical Criticism and Pedagogy (Musa W. Duba)
ch. 13 Cross-Textual Interpretation and Its Implications for Biblical Studies (Archie C. C. Lee)
ch. 14 Biblical Exegesis and Its Shortcomings in Theological Education (Temba L. J. Mafico)
ch. 15 The Hermeneutics of Liberation: Theoretical Grounding for the Communitarian Reading of the Bible (Pablo Richard)
ch. 16 Biblical Studies in India: From Imperialistic Scholarship to Postcolonial Interpretation (R.S. Sugirtharajah)
Part IV Biblical Interpretation: Pedagogical Practices
ch. 17 A Rhetorical Paradigm for Pedagogy (Rebecca S. Chopp)
ch. 18 Reading the Bible in the Global Context: Issues in Methodology and Pedagogy (Denise Dombkowski Hopkins, Sharon H. Ringe, and Frederick C. Tiffany)
ch. 19 Crossing Borders: Biblical Studies in a Trans-Cultural World (Kathleen M. O'Connor)
ch. 20 Weaving a New Web of Creative Remembering (Elaine M. Wainwright)
ch. 21 Lessons for North America from a Third-World Seminary (Antoinette Clark Wire)
Contributors
Index

The Calling of Education
Additional Info:
Throughout his long and prolific career, Edward Shils brought an extraordinary knowledge of academic institutions to discussions about higher education. The Calling of Education features Shils's most illuminating and incisive writing on this topic from the last twenty-five years of his life. The first essay, "The Academic Ethic," articulates the unique ethical demands of the academic profession and directs special attention to the integration of teaching and research. Other pieces, ...
Throughout his long and prolific career, Edward Shils brought an extraordinary knowledge of academic institutions to discussions about higher education. The Calling of Education features Shils's most illuminating and incisive writing on this topic from the last twenty-five years of his life. The first essay, "The Academic Ethic," articulates the unique ethical demands of the academic profession and directs special attention to the integration of teaching and research. Other pieces, ...
Additional Info:
Throughout his long and prolific career, Edward Shils brought an extraordinary knowledge of academic institutions to discussions about higher education. The Calling of Education features Shils's most illuminating and incisive writing on this topic from the last twenty-five years of his life. The first essay, "The Academic Ethic," articulates the unique ethical demands of the academic profession and directs special attention to the integration of teaching and research. Other pieces, including Shils's renowned Jefferson lectures, focus on perennial issues in higher learning: the meaning of academic freedom, the connection between universities and the state, and the criteria for appointing individuals to academic positions.
Edward Shils understood the university as a great symphonic conductor comprehends the value of each instrument and section, both separately and in cooperation. The Calling of Education offers Shils's insightful perspective on problems that are no less pressing than when he first confronted them. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 The Academic Ethic
ch. 2 The Criteria of Academic Appointment
ch. 3 Do We Still Need Academic Freedom?
ch. 4 The Eighth Jefferson Lecture in the Humanities: "Render unto Caesar..." - Government, Society, and the Universities in Their Reciprocal Rights and Duties
ch. 5 The Idea of the University: Obstacles and Opportunities in Contemporary Societies
ch. 6 The Modern University and Liberal Democracy
Index
Throughout his long and prolific career, Edward Shils brought an extraordinary knowledge of academic institutions to discussions about higher education. The Calling of Education features Shils's most illuminating and incisive writing on this topic from the last twenty-five years of his life. The first essay, "The Academic Ethic," articulates the unique ethical demands of the academic profession and directs special attention to the integration of teaching and research. Other pieces, including Shils's renowned Jefferson lectures, focus on perennial issues in higher learning: the meaning of academic freedom, the connection between universities and the state, and the criteria for appointing individuals to academic positions.
Edward Shils understood the university as a great symphonic conductor comprehends the value of each instrument and section, both separately and in cooperation. The Calling of Education offers Shils's insightful perspective on problems that are no less pressing than when he first confronted them. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 The Academic Ethic
ch. 2 The Criteria of Academic Appointment
ch. 3 Do We Still Need Academic Freedom?
ch. 4 The Eighth Jefferson Lecture in the Humanities: "Render unto Caesar..." - Government, Society, and the Universities in Their Reciprocal Rights and Duties
ch. 5 The Idea of the University: Obstacles and Opportunities in Contemporary Societies
ch. 6 The Modern University and Liberal Democracy
Index


When Students Have Power: Negotiating Authority in a Critical Pedagogy
Additional Info:
What happens when teachers share power with students? In this profound book, Ira Shor--the inventor of critical pedagogy in the United States-- relates the story of an experiment that nearly went out of control.
Shor provides the reader with a reenactment of one semester that shows what really can happen when one applies the theory and democratizes the classroom. This is the story of one class in which ...
What happens when teachers share power with students? In this profound book, Ira Shor--the inventor of critical pedagogy in the United States-- relates the story of an experiment that nearly went out of control.
Shor provides the reader with a reenactment of one semester that shows what really can happen when one applies the theory and democratizes the classroom. This is the story of one class in which ...
Additional Info:
What happens when teachers share power with students? In this profound book, Ira Shor--the inventor of critical pedagogy in the United States-- relates the story of an experiment that nearly went out of control.
Shor provides the reader with a reenactment of one semester that shows what really can happen when one applies the theory and democratizes the classroom. This is the story of one class in which Shor tried to fully share with his students control of the curriculum and of the classroom. After twenty years of practicing critical teaching, he unexpectedly found himself faced with a student uprising that threatened the very possibility of learning. How Shor resolves these problems, while remaining true to his commitment to power-sharing and radical pedagogy, is the crux of the book. Unconventional in both form and substance, this deeply personal work weaves together student voices and thick descriptions of classroom experience with pedagogical theory to illuminate the power relations that must be negotiated if true learning is to take place. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Siberian Syndrome: Students as Exiles in the Culture War of the Classroom
ch. 2 Sharing Power, Democratizing Authority, and Mediating Resistance
ch. 3 Escaping Siberia: Students Ask, "Why Come to Class?"
ch. 4 Power-Sharing and the Birth of the "After-Class Group"
ch. 5 The "After-Class Group" Constructs the Unknown
ch. 6 Power Is Knowledge - "Positive Resistance" and "Ultra-Expectations"
ch. 7 Can Siberia Become a Critical Territory?
ch. 8 Siberian Harvest: Measuring the Yield of Power-Sharing
Afterword
Bibliography
Index
What happens when teachers share power with students? In this profound book, Ira Shor--the inventor of critical pedagogy in the United States-- relates the story of an experiment that nearly went out of control.
Shor provides the reader with a reenactment of one semester that shows what really can happen when one applies the theory and democratizes the classroom. This is the story of one class in which Shor tried to fully share with his students control of the curriculum and of the classroom. After twenty years of practicing critical teaching, he unexpectedly found himself faced with a student uprising that threatened the very possibility of learning. How Shor resolves these problems, while remaining true to his commitment to power-sharing and radical pedagogy, is the crux of the book. Unconventional in both form and substance, this deeply personal work weaves together student voices and thick descriptions of classroom experience with pedagogical theory to illuminate the power relations that must be negotiated if true learning is to take place. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Siberian Syndrome: Students as Exiles in the Culture War of the Classroom
ch. 2 Sharing Power, Democratizing Authority, and Mediating Resistance
ch. 3 Escaping Siberia: Students Ask, "Why Come to Class?"
ch. 4 Power-Sharing and the Birth of the "After-Class Group"
ch. 5 The "After-Class Group" Constructs the Unknown
ch. 6 Power Is Knowledge - "Positive Resistance" and "Ultra-Expectations"
ch. 7 Can Siberia Become a Critical Territory?
ch. 8 Siberian Harvest: Measuring the Yield of Power-Sharing
Afterword
Bibliography
Index

Approaches to Teaching Non-Native English Speakers Across the Curriculum
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning makes the knowledge and skills of academic specialists available to subject-area faculty who deal with the writing and oral communication styles of non-native users of English in their classrooms. The chapters offer information and much-needed advice in nontechnical language about ways to help these students improve their writing and speaking skills in content-area courses. The volume also considers the points of ...
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning makes the knowledge and skills of academic specialists available to subject-area faculty who deal with the writing and oral communication styles of non-native users of English in their classrooms. The chapters offer information and much-needed advice in nontechnical language about ways to help these students improve their writing and speaking skills in content-area courses. The volume also considers the points of ...
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning makes the knowledge and skills of academic specialists available to subject-area faculty who deal with the writing and oral communication styles of non-native users of English in their classrooms. The chapters offer information and much-needed advice in nontechnical language about ways to help these students improve their writing and speaking skills in content-area courses. The volume also considers the points of view of the students themselves and discusses their differing levels of intent about becoming proficient in English writing and speaking. The authors are specialists from institutions of higher education across the United States, and their academic fields included English as a Second Language, composition theory, editing, technical editing, interpersonal communication, oral communication, and linguistics. Faculty, especially those involved in writing-across-the-curriculum programs, will find this an invaluable help in dealing with the writing aspects of their courses, and those in charge of faculty development activities will particularly welcome this volume for use in their seminars. This is the 70th issues of the journals New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. My Language, My Culture: International Variations in Standards for English (James C. Stalker)
ch. 2. Which Non-Native Speaker? (Joy M. Reid)
ch. 3. Why Do They Get It When I Say "Gingivitis" But Not When I Say "Gum Swelling"? (Bruce Maylath)
ch. 4. Respect for Religious Differences: The Case of Muslim Students (Bruce W. Speck)
ch. 5. Cultural Norms Affect Oral Communication in the Classroom (Ellen Johnson)
ch. 6. Using the "Writing Process" with Non-Native Users of English (Kimberly Koffolt, Sheryl L. Holt)
ch. 7. Building Editing Skills: Putting Students at the Center of the Editing Process (Robin Murie)
ch. 8. Responding to Grammar Errors (Sheryl L. Holt)
ch. 9. How Cultural Differences Affect Written and Oral Communication: The Case of Peer Response Groups (Gayle L. Nelson)
ch. 10. Please Speak Up: Asian Immigrant Students in American College Classrooms (Barbara D. Hodne)
ch. 11. What Teachers Can Do to Relieve Problems Identified by International Students (Debra S. Lee)
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning makes the knowledge and skills of academic specialists available to subject-area faculty who deal with the writing and oral communication styles of non-native users of English in their classrooms. The chapters offer information and much-needed advice in nontechnical language about ways to help these students improve their writing and speaking skills in content-area courses. The volume also considers the points of view of the students themselves and discusses their differing levels of intent about becoming proficient in English writing and speaking. The authors are specialists from institutions of higher education across the United States, and their academic fields included English as a Second Language, composition theory, editing, technical editing, interpersonal communication, oral communication, and linguistics. Faculty, especially those involved in writing-across-the-curriculum programs, will find this an invaluable help in dealing with the writing aspects of their courses, and those in charge of faculty development activities will particularly welcome this volume for use in their seminars. This is the 70th issues of the journals New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. My Language, My Culture: International Variations in Standards for English (James C. Stalker)
ch. 2. Which Non-Native Speaker? (Joy M. Reid)
ch. 3. Why Do They Get It When I Say "Gingivitis" But Not When I Say "Gum Swelling"? (Bruce Maylath)
ch. 4. Respect for Religious Differences: The Case of Muslim Students (Bruce W. Speck)
ch. 5. Cultural Norms Affect Oral Communication in the Classroom (Ellen Johnson)
ch. 6. Using the "Writing Process" with Non-Native Users of English (Kimberly Koffolt, Sheryl L. Holt)
ch. 7. Building Editing Skills: Putting Students at the Center of the Editing Process (Robin Murie)
ch. 8. Responding to Grammar Errors (Sheryl L. Holt)
ch. 9. How Cultural Differences Affect Written and Oral Communication: The Case of Peer Response Groups (Gayle L. Nelson)
ch. 10. Please Speak Up: Asian Immigrant Students in American College Classrooms (Barbara D. Hodne)
ch. 11. What Teachers Can Do to Relieve Problems Identified by International Students (Debra S. Lee)

The Next Generation: Preparing Graduate Students for the Professional Responsibilities of College Teachers
Additional Info:
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in ...
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in ...
Additional Info:
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in campus visits during which they attended department and faculty meetings, observed and sometimes taught classes, and met with individual faculty members who assumed mentoring roles and with whom every aspect of the campus, cultural, career and professional life of the college teacher could be explored. The second activity provides the Teaching Fellows with an opportunity to reflect on what they learned at the colleges and involves two kinds of seminar: (1) the core seminar, which brings the experience of contact/encounter into the structure of graduate training; and (2) the disciplinary seminar, which focuses on the connection between scholarly work and teaching, helps prepare the graduate students within their disciplines, and serves as a means of reimagining and restructuring the graduate programs themselves. Findings show that doctoral students, if given the chance, are eager to engage in the work of academic leadership, even at the beginning of their careers and that a major factor in enhancing their willingness to assume an active role is their encounters with college faculty members. Several recommendations are offered and discussed for future consideration. These are: (1) that coalitions should be built to promote reform; (2) that graduate training must include preparation for the full range of professional responsibilities, especially teaching; (3) that support and incentives should be built for participation of graduate educators in these reform efforts; and (4) that alternative, especially collaborative, models should be developed for improving graduate preparation. (From the Publisher)
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in campus visits during which they attended department and faculty meetings, observed and sometimes taught classes, and met with individual faculty members who assumed mentoring roles and with whom every aspect of the campus, cultural, career and professional life of the college teacher could be explored. The second activity provides the Teaching Fellows with an opportunity to reflect on what they learned at the colleges and involves two kinds of seminar: (1) the core seminar, which brings the experience of contact/encounter into the structure of graduate training; and (2) the disciplinary seminar, which focuses on the connection between scholarly work and teaching, helps prepare the graduate students within their disciplines, and serves as a means of reimagining and restructuring the graduate programs themselves. Findings show that doctoral students, if given the chance, are eager to engage in the work of academic leadership, even at the beginning of their careers and that a major factor in enhancing their willingness to assume an active role is their encounters with college faculty members. Several recommendations are offered and discussed for future consideration. These are: (1) that coalitions should be built to promote reform; (2) that graduate training must include preparation for the full range of professional responsibilities, especially teaching; (3) that support and incentives should be built for participation of graduate educators in these reform efforts; and (4) that alternative, especially collaborative, models should be developed for improving graduate preparation. (From the Publisher)

Developing New and Junior Faculty
Additional Info:
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, ...
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, ...
Additional Info:
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, or academic administrators, all can learn how to create more supportive and stimulating environments for the newest members of their academic communities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Ann E. Austin)
ch. 1 New and Junior Faculty: A Review of the Literature (M.J. Finkelstein, N.W. LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 2 The Pretenure Years: A Longitudinal Perspective (D. Olsen, M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 3 New and Junior Faculty Stress: Research and Responses (M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 4 Orientation Programs for New Faculty (D. Fink)
ch. 5 Lessons Learned About Mentoring (R. Boice)
ch. 6 Improving Junior Faculty Scholarship (D.K. Jarvis)
ch. 7 Supporting Junior Faculty Through a Teaching Fellows Program (A.E. Austin)
ch. 8 The Role of the Chairperson in Support of Junior Faculty (D.W. Wheeler)
Summary and Further Reflections
Index
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, or academic administrators, all can learn how to create more supportive and stimulating environments for the newest members of their academic communities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Ann E. Austin)
ch. 1 New and Junior Faculty: A Review of the Literature (M.J. Finkelstein, N.W. LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 2 The Pretenure Years: A Longitudinal Perspective (D. Olsen, M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 3 New and Junior Faculty Stress: Research and Responses (M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 4 Orientation Programs for New Faculty (D. Fink)
ch. 5 Lessons Learned About Mentoring (R. Boice)
ch. 6 Improving Junior Faculty Scholarship (D.K. Jarvis)
ch. 7 Supporting Junior Faculty Through a Teaching Fellows Program (A.E. Austin)
ch. 8 The Role of the Chairperson in Support of Junior Faculty (D.W. Wheeler)
Summary and Further Reflections
Index

Apologia: Contextualization, Globalization, and Mission in Theological Education
Additional Info:
Apologia is about contemporary theological education--its current state and its future. While many current trends in seminaries and departments of theology bring important new insights to the study of religion, says Max Stackhouse they also erode-- sometimes unwittingly--the capacity to speak of God, truth, and justice with warranted confidence. Theology is thereby undermined in all arenas--not only in academia, but in the life of the church and society.
This ...
Apologia is about contemporary theological education--its current state and its future. While many current trends in seminaries and departments of theology bring important new insights to the study of religion, says Max Stackhouse they also erode-- sometimes unwittingly--the capacity to speak of God, truth, and justice with warranted confidence. Theology is thereby undermined in all arenas--not only in academia, but in the life of the church and society.
This ...
Additional Info:
Apologia is about contemporary theological education--its current state and its future. While many current trends in seminaries and departments of theology bring important new insights to the study of religion, says Max Stackhouse they also erode-- sometimes unwittingly--the capacity to speak of God, truth, and justice with warranted confidence. Theology is thereby undermined in all arenas--not only in academia, but in the life of the church and society.
This book not only exposes the frailties of several current ideologies, but also draws noted scholars from five continents and a seminary faculty into an interdisciplinary discussion of the most significant recent literature on theological education. The results are fresh proposals for the reconstructing of theological education on foundations that are contextually alert, globally concerned, and mission-oriented.
Apologia is a ground-breaking work, a book that begins and ends in dialogue, and points toward the ways in which Christian theology will have to redefine itself if it is to actively shape, and not merely reflect, the context in which we live. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part I A Dialogue
ch. 1 An Introduction
ch. 2 Our Context
ch. 3 Texts and Contexts
ch. 4 Affirmations and Translations
Part II Wider Discussions
ch. 5 Consultations and Globalization
ch. 6 Praxis and Solidarity
ch. 7 Poesis and Contextuality
ch. 8 Theoria and Phenomenology
Part III A Proposal
ch. 9 Apologia
ch. 10 Orthodoxy?
ch. 11 Praxiology?
ch. 12 Doxology
Appendix 1 A Response to Apologia, with Special Reference to Problems of Text and Context
Appendix 2 A Response to Apologia, with Special Reference to the Seminary as a Faith Community
Apologia is about contemporary theological education--its current state and its future. While many current trends in seminaries and departments of theology bring important new insights to the study of religion, says Max Stackhouse they also erode-- sometimes unwittingly--the capacity to speak of God, truth, and justice with warranted confidence. Theology is thereby undermined in all arenas--not only in academia, but in the life of the church and society.
This book not only exposes the frailties of several current ideologies, but also draws noted scholars from five continents and a seminary faculty into an interdisciplinary discussion of the most significant recent literature on theological education. The results are fresh proposals for the reconstructing of theological education on foundations that are contextually alert, globally concerned, and mission-oriented.
Apologia is a ground-breaking work, a book that begins and ends in dialogue, and points toward the ways in which Christian theology will have to redefine itself if it is to actively shape, and not merely reflect, the context in which we live. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part I A Dialogue
ch. 1 An Introduction
ch. 2 Our Context
ch. 3 Texts and Contexts
ch. 4 Affirmations and Translations
Part II Wider Discussions
ch. 5 Consultations and Globalization
ch. 6 Praxis and Solidarity
ch. 7 Poesis and Contextuality
ch. 8 Theoria and Phenomenology
Part III A Proposal
ch. 9 Apologia
ch. 10 Orthodoxy?
ch. 11 Praxiology?
ch. 12 Doxology
Appendix 1 A Response to Apologia, with Special Reference to Problems of Text and Context
Appendix 2 A Response to Apologia, with Special Reference to the Seminary as a Faith Community

Enhancing Student Learning: Setting the Campus Context
Additional Info:
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array ...
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array ...
Additional Info:
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array of social, athletic, academic, and artistic events, all of which would enrich, enhance, and give deeper meaning to the learning that occurs in the classroom. With its emphasis upon partnership building and interdisciplinary collaboration, this work will be extremely useful to student affairs professionals, college administrators, and faculty members as they work together to design courses and programs that will optimize student learning. Co-published with American College Personnel Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Enhancing Student Learning
ch. 1 A Framework to Enhance Student Learning
ch. 2 Theories of Learning for College Students
ch. 3 Cultural Differences in Student Learning and Development
ch. 4 Learning and Development from Theory to Practice
ch. 5 Student Affairs and Learning in the Community College
ch. 6 Service-Learning: Exemplifying the Connections between Theory and Practice
ch. 7 Assessing Student Learning
ch. 8 Setting a New Context for Student Learning
About the Contributors
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array of social, athletic, academic, and artistic events, all of which would enrich, enhance, and give deeper meaning to the learning that occurs in the classroom. With its emphasis upon partnership building and interdisciplinary collaboration, this work will be extremely useful to student affairs professionals, college administrators, and faculty members as they work together to design courses and programs that will optimize student learning. Co-published with American College Personnel Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Enhancing Student Learning
ch. 1 A Framework to Enhance Student Learning
ch. 2 Theories of Learning for College Students
ch. 3 Cultural Differences in Student Learning and Development
ch. 4 Learning and Development from Theory to Practice
ch. 5 Student Affairs and Learning in the Community College
ch. 6 Service-Learning: Exemplifying the Connections between Theory and Practice
ch. 7 Assessing Student Learning
ch. 8 Setting a New Context for Student Learning
About the Contributors

Service-Learning: A Movement's Pioneers Reflect on its Origins, Practice, and Future
Additional Info:
In this fascinating collection of stories, leaders in service-learning describe their early efforts to combine education with social action. Their reflections help construct a pedagogy of service-learning to inspire newcomers and guide program development. The authors assess pioneering experiences and recommend future policy and practice, emphasizing the critical need to preserve an activist commitment as programs become increasingly institutionalized. This highly readable book will assist academic leaders, faculty members, student ...
In this fascinating collection of stories, leaders in service-learning describe their early efforts to combine education with social action. Their reflections help construct a pedagogy of service-learning to inspire newcomers and guide program development. The authors assess pioneering experiences and recommend future policy and practice, emphasizing the critical need to preserve an activist commitment as programs become increasingly institutionalized. This highly readable book will assist academic leaders, faculty members, student ...
Additional Info:
In this fascinating collection of stories, leaders in service-learning describe their early efforts to combine education with social action. Their reflections help construct a pedagogy of service-learning to inspire newcomers and guide program development. The authors assess pioneering experiences and recommend future policy and practice, emphasizing the critical need to preserve an activist commitment as programs become increasingly institutionalized. This highly readable book will assist academic leaders, faculty members, student services professionals, educational researchers, adult educators, and public policymakers who seek a common understanding of the origins, purposes, and objectives of this vital learning initiative. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Helping a "New" Field Discover Its History
ch. 2 Early Connections Between Service and Education
ch. 3 Seeds of Commitment: Personal Accounts of the Pioneers
ch. 4 First Professional Steps: A Journey into Uncharted Territory
ch. 5 Which Side Were They On? The Pioneers Target Higher Education
ch. 6 Strategy and Practice: Empowering Students to Serve Communities
ch. 7 Strategy and Practice: Empowering Communities Through Student Service
ch. 8 Mainstream or Margins? The Dilemma of Institutionalization
ch. 9 Helps, Hindrances, and Accomplishments: Reflections on the Pioneer Experience
ch. 10 Passing the Torch: Advice to Today's Practitioners and Students
App. A Strands of Service-Learning
App. B An Organizational Journey to Service-Learning
References
Index
In this fascinating collection of stories, leaders in service-learning describe their early efforts to combine education with social action. Their reflections help construct a pedagogy of service-learning to inspire newcomers and guide program development. The authors assess pioneering experiences and recommend future policy and practice, emphasizing the critical need to preserve an activist commitment as programs become increasingly institutionalized. This highly readable book will assist academic leaders, faculty members, student services professionals, educational researchers, adult educators, and public policymakers who seek a common understanding of the origins, purposes, and objectives of this vital learning initiative. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Helping a "New" Field Discover Its History
ch. 2 Early Connections Between Service and Education
ch. 3 Seeds of Commitment: Personal Accounts of the Pioneers
ch. 4 First Professional Steps: A Journey into Uncharted Territory
ch. 5 Which Side Were They On? The Pioneers Target Higher Education
ch. 6 Strategy and Practice: Empowering Students to Serve Communities
ch. 7 Strategy and Practice: Empowering Communities Through Student Service
ch. 8 Mainstream or Margins? The Dilemma of Institutionalization
ch. 9 Helps, Hindrances, and Accomplishments: Reflections on the Pioneer Experience
ch. 10 Passing the Torch: Advice to Today's Practitioners and Students
App. A Strands of Service-Learning
App. B An Organizational Journey to Service-Learning
References
Index

Church-Affiliated Higher Education
Additional Info:
Stoltzfus shows us the pressures on religious colleges towards assimilation into the mainstream, but also shows us the surprising strength of those colleges and the unique ways in which each acts to pass on the living tradition of its faith. (From the Publisher)
Stoltzfus shows us the pressures on religious colleges towards assimilation into the mainstream, but also shows us the surprising strength of those colleges and the unique ways in which each acts to pass on the living tradition of its faith. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Stoltzfus shows us the pressures on religious colleges towards assimilation into the mainstream, but also shows us the surprising strength of those colleges and the unique ways in which each acts to pass on the living tradition of its faith. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction, Purpose and Methods
ch. 2 A Review of the Literature
ch. 3 Presbyterian "PHI" College
ch. 4 Roman Catholic "BETA" College
ch. 5 Wesleyan "KAPPA" College
ch. 6 Findings
ch. 7 Future Possibilities in Church-Affiliated Higher Education
Appendix I. Author's Autobiographical Note
Appendix II. Governance in Mennonite Church Colleges
Appendix III. Research Instruments
Stoltzfus shows us the pressures on religious colleges towards assimilation into the mainstream, but also shows us the surprising strength of those colleges and the unique ways in which each acts to pass on the living tradition of its faith. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction, Purpose and Methods
ch. 2 A Review of the Literature
ch. 3 Presbyterian "PHI" College
ch. 4 Roman Catholic "BETA" College
ch. 5 Wesleyan "KAPPA" College
ch. 6 Findings
ch. 7 Future Possibilities in Church-Affiliated Higher Education
Appendix I. Author's Autobiographical Note
Appendix II. Governance in Mennonite Church Colleges
Appendix III. Research Instruments

The Education Feminism Reader
Additional Info:
The Education Feminism Reader is an anthology of the most important and influential essays written in feminist education theory since the late seventies. Attentive to the quality and diversity of this growing field, The Reader presents the thinking of traditionally liberal feminists, radical postmodern theorists, women of color and those feminists with psychological, philosophical and political agendas.
Contributors: Maxine Greene, Carol Gilligan, Bonnie Thornton Dill, Valerie Walkerdine, Linda ...
The Education Feminism Reader is an anthology of the most important and influential essays written in feminist education theory since the late seventies. Attentive to the quality and diversity of this growing field, The Reader presents the thinking of traditionally liberal feminists, radical postmodern theorists, women of color and those feminists with psychological, philosophical and political agendas.
Contributors: Maxine Greene, Carol Gilligan, Bonnie Thornton Dill, Valerie Walkerdine, Linda ...
Additional Info:
The Education Feminism Reader is an anthology of the most important and influential essays written in feminist education theory since the late seventies. Attentive to the quality and diversity of this growing field, The Reader presents the thinking of traditionally liberal feminists, radical postmodern theorists, women of color and those feminists with psychological, philosophical and political agendas.
Contributors: Maxine Greene, Carol Gilligan, Bonnie Thornton Dill, Valerie Walkerdine, Linda J. Nicholson, Madeleine Arnot, Jane Roland Martin, Barbara Houston, Ruth E. Zambrana, Madeleine Gramet, Nel Noddings, Patricia J. Thompson, Nona Lyons, Lynda Stone, Barbara McKellar, Patti Lather, Jo Anne Pagano, Sue Middleton, Elizabeth Ellsworth, Dianne Smith, Joyce E. King, Deanne Bogdan. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Notes to the Text
Introducing Education Feminism
ch. 1 The Lived World (1978) (Maxine Greene)
ch. 2 Woman's Place in Man's Life Cycle (1979) (Carol Gilligan)
ch. 3 Race, Class, and Gender: Prospects for an All-Inclusive Sisterhood (1983) (Bonnie Thornton Dill)
ch. 4 Femininity as Performance (1987) (Valerie Walkerdine)
ch. 5 Women and Schooling (1980) (Linda J. Nicholson)
ch. 6 Male Hegemony, Social Class, and Women's Education (1982) (Madeleine Arnot)
ch. 7 Excluding Women from the Educational Realm (1982) (Jane Roland Martin)
ch. 8 Should Public Education be Gender Free? (1985) (Barbara Houston)
ch. 9 Toward Understanding the Educational Trajectory and Socialization of Latina Women (1988) (Ruth E. Zambrana)
ch. 10 Conception, Contradiction, and Curriculum (1988) (Madeleine Gramet)
ch. 11 An Ethic of Caring and its Implications for Instructional Arrangements (1988) (Nel Noddings)
ch. 12 Beyond Gender: Equity Issues for Home Economics Education (1986) (Patricia J. Thompson)
ch. 13 Dilemmas of Knowing: Ethical and Epistemological Dimensions of Teachers' Work and Development (1990) (Nona Lyons)
ch. 14 Toward a Transformational Theory of Teaching (1988) (Lynda Stone)
ch. 15 Only the Fittest of the Fittest Will Survive: Black Women and Education (1989) (Barbara McKellar)
ch. 16 The Absent Presence: Patriarchy, Capitalism, and the Nature of Teacher Work (1987) (Pattie Lather)
ch. 17 Teaching Women (1988) (Jo Anne Pagano)
ch. 18 Schooling and Radicalisation: Life Histories of New Zealand Feminist Teachers (1987) (Sue Middleton)
ch. 19 Why Doesn't this Feel Empowering? Working Through the Repressive Myths of Critical Pedagogy (1989) (Elizabeth Ellsworth)
ch. 20 "Why Do We have to Read About Girls Living in Australia and London?": Reflections from a Womanist Theorist on Critical Education (1991) (Dianne Smith)
ch. 21 Dysconscious Racism: Ideology, Identity, and the Miseducation of Teachers (1991) (Joyce E. King)
ch. 22 When Is a Singing School (Not) a Chorus? The Emancipatory Agenda in Feminist Pedagogy and Literature Education (1993) (Deanne Bogdan)
Index
Contributors
The Education Feminism Reader is an anthology of the most important and influential essays written in feminist education theory since the late seventies. Attentive to the quality and diversity of this growing field, The Reader presents the thinking of traditionally liberal feminists, radical postmodern theorists, women of color and those feminists with psychological, philosophical and political agendas.
Contributors: Maxine Greene, Carol Gilligan, Bonnie Thornton Dill, Valerie Walkerdine, Linda J. Nicholson, Madeleine Arnot, Jane Roland Martin, Barbara Houston, Ruth E. Zambrana, Madeleine Gramet, Nel Noddings, Patricia J. Thompson, Nona Lyons, Lynda Stone, Barbara McKellar, Patti Lather, Jo Anne Pagano, Sue Middleton, Elizabeth Ellsworth, Dianne Smith, Joyce E. King, Deanne Bogdan. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Notes to the Text
Introducing Education Feminism
ch. 1 The Lived World (1978) (Maxine Greene)
ch. 2 Woman's Place in Man's Life Cycle (1979) (Carol Gilligan)
ch. 3 Race, Class, and Gender: Prospects for an All-Inclusive Sisterhood (1983) (Bonnie Thornton Dill)
ch. 4 Femininity as Performance (1987) (Valerie Walkerdine)
ch. 5 Women and Schooling (1980) (Linda J. Nicholson)
ch. 6 Male Hegemony, Social Class, and Women's Education (1982) (Madeleine Arnot)
ch. 7 Excluding Women from the Educational Realm (1982) (Jane Roland Martin)
ch. 8 Should Public Education be Gender Free? (1985) (Barbara Houston)
ch. 9 Toward Understanding the Educational Trajectory and Socialization of Latina Women (1988) (Ruth E. Zambrana)
ch. 10 Conception, Contradiction, and Curriculum (1988) (Madeleine Gramet)
ch. 11 An Ethic of Caring and its Implications for Instructional Arrangements (1988) (Nel Noddings)
ch. 12 Beyond Gender: Equity Issues for Home Economics Education (1986) (Patricia J. Thompson)
ch. 13 Dilemmas of Knowing: Ethical and Epistemological Dimensions of Teachers' Work and Development (1990) (Nona Lyons)
ch. 14 Toward a Transformational Theory of Teaching (1988) (Lynda Stone)
ch. 15 Only the Fittest of the Fittest Will Survive: Black Women and Education (1989) (Barbara McKellar)
ch. 16 The Absent Presence: Patriarchy, Capitalism, and the Nature of Teacher Work (1987) (Pattie Lather)
ch. 17 Teaching Women (1988) (Jo Anne Pagano)
ch. 18 Schooling and Radicalisation: Life Histories of New Zealand Feminist Teachers (1987) (Sue Middleton)
ch. 19 Why Doesn't this Feel Empowering? Working Through the Repressive Myths of Critical Pedagogy (1989) (Elizabeth Ellsworth)
ch. 20 "Why Do We have to Read About Girls Living in Australia and London?": Reflections from a Womanist Theorist on Critical Education (1991) (Dianne Smith)
ch. 21 Dysconscious Racism: Ideology, Identity, and the Miseducation of Teachers (1991) (Joyce E. King)
ch. 22 When Is a Singing School (Not) a Chorus? The Emancipatory Agenda in Feminist Pedagogy and Literature Education (1993) (Deanne Bogdan)
Index
Contributors

The Ethics of Teaching, 3rd ed.
Additional Info:
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 What this book is about
ch. 2 Punishment and due process
ch. 3 Intellectual freedom
ch. 4 Equal treatment of students
ch. 5 Dealing with diversity : multiculturalism and religion
ch. 6 Democracy, professionalism, and teaching with integrity
ch. 7 Conclusions and postscript
ch. 8 Supplemental case studies
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 What this book is about
ch. 2 Punishment and due process
ch. 3 Intellectual freedom
ch. 4 Equal treatment of students
ch. 5 Dealing with diversity : multiculturalism and religion
ch. 6 Democracy, professionalism, and teaching with integrity
ch. 7 Conclusions and postscript
ch. 8 Supplemental case studies

Learning Environments for Women's Adult Development: Bridges Toward Change
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education explores emerging theory and practice in adult development, adult learning, and feminist pedagogy for learning environments designed to meet women's needs. Adult women learners face special challenges as they enter or reenter higher education. Research and experience suggest that historical and current education approaches may not serve men and women equally. The central aim of this book is to help ...
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education explores emerging theory and practice in adult development, adult learning, and feminist pedagogy for learning environments designed to meet women's needs. Adult women learners face special challenges as they enter or reenter higher education. Research and experience suggest that historical and current education approaches may not serve men and women equally. The central aim of this book is to help ...
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education explores emerging theory and practice in adult development, adult learning, and feminist pedagogy for learning environments designed to meet women's needs. Adult women learners face special challenges as they enter or reenter higher education. Research and experience suggest that historical and current education approaches may not serve men and women equally. The central aim of this book is to help make learning environments more supportive of reentry women in their ongoing development. Many of the practices showcased in this sourcebook emerged from programs of alternative higher education as they endeavored to meet the needs of an increasingly diverse population of learners. The different pedagogical approaches described herein help a woman learner shape the narrative of her evolving self in multiple life contexts. Ultimately, the kinds of educational practices described in this volume will prove effective in promoting lifelong learning and development for both women and men. This is the 65th issue in the journal series New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes (Catherine Marienau, and Kathleen Taylor)
ch. 1 Bridging Practice and Theory for Women's Adult Development (Kathleen Taylor, and Catherine Marienau)
ch. 2 Journal Writing: A Tool for Women Developing as Knowers (Phyllis Walden)
ch. 3 Sitting Beside Herself: Self-Assessment and Women's Adult Development ( Kathleen Taylor)
ch. 4 Prior Learning Assessment, Critical Self-Reflection, and Reentry Women's Development (Jan Droegkamp, and Kathleen Taylor)
ch. 5 In Their Own Voices: Women Learning About Their Own Development (Catherine Marienau)
ch. 6 Teaching to the Development Needs of Nonmainstream Learners (Linda Gajdusek, Helen Gillotte)
ch. 7 A Developmental Core Curriculum for Adult Women Learners (Rosemarie Carfagna)
ch. 8 Multiple Roles of the Mentor Supporting Women's Adult Development (Mayra Bloom)
ch. 9 Linking Learning, Teaching, and Development (Morris Fiddler, and Catherine Marienau)
ch. 10 Speaking Her Mind: Adult Learning and Women's Adult Development (Kathleen Taylor)
Conclusion
Index
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education explores emerging theory and practice in adult development, adult learning, and feminist pedagogy for learning environments designed to meet women's needs. Adult women learners face special challenges as they enter or reenter higher education. Research and experience suggest that historical and current education approaches may not serve men and women equally. The central aim of this book is to help make learning environments more supportive of reentry women in their ongoing development. Many of the practices showcased in this sourcebook emerged from programs of alternative higher education as they endeavored to meet the needs of an increasingly diverse population of learners. The different pedagogical approaches described herein help a woman learner shape the narrative of her evolving self in multiple life contexts. Ultimately, the kinds of educational practices described in this volume will prove effective in promoting lifelong learning and development for both women and men. This is the 65th issue in the journal series New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes (Catherine Marienau, and Kathleen Taylor)
ch. 1 Bridging Practice and Theory for Women's Adult Development (Kathleen Taylor, and Catherine Marienau)
ch. 2 Journal Writing: A Tool for Women Developing as Knowers (Phyllis Walden)
ch. 3 Sitting Beside Herself: Self-Assessment and Women's Adult Development ( Kathleen Taylor)
ch. 4 Prior Learning Assessment, Critical Self-Reflection, and Reentry Women's Development (Jan Droegkamp, and Kathleen Taylor)
ch. 5 In Their Own Voices: Women Learning About Their Own Development (Catherine Marienau)
ch. 6 Teaching to the Development Needs of Nonmainstream Learners (Linda Gajdusek, Helen Gillotte)
ch. 7 A Developmental Core Curriculum for Adult Women Learners (Rosemarie Carfagna)
ch. 8 Multiple Roles of the Mentor Supporting Women's Adult Development (Mayra Bloom)
ch. 9 Linking Learning, Teaching, and Development (Morris Fiddler, and Catherine Marienau)
ch. 10 Speaking Her Mind: Adult Learning and Women's Adult Development (Kathleen Taylor)
Conclusion
Index

Motivation from Within: Approaches for Encouraging Faculty and Students to Excel
Additional Info:
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Motivation and Diversity
Motivation and Diversity: A Framework for Teaching.
Student Motivation and Epistemological Beliefs (Michael B. Paulsen & Kenneth A. Feldman).
Motivation for Higher-Order Learning (Janet G. Donald).
Motivation and Methods
Using the ARCS Motivational Process in Computer-Based Instruction and Distance Education (John M. Keller).
CORE Elements of Student Motivation in Problem-Based Learning (Marjorie M. MacKinnon).
The Motivational Benefits of Cooperative Learning (Theodore Panitz)
Motivation and The Institution
Faculty Motivation: The Role of Supportive Teaching Culture (Kenneth A. Feldman & Michael B. Paulsen).
Motivation in Interdisciplinary Programs (Edward B. Nuhfer).
Institutional Improvement and Motivated Faculty: A Case Study (Donald W. Farmer).
Conclusion
What Have We Learned? A Synthesis and Some Guidelines for Effective Motivation in Higher Education (Michael Theall & Jennifer Franklin)
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Motivation and Diversity
Motivation and Diversity: A Framework for Teaching.
Student Motivation and Epistemological Beliefs (Michael B. Paulsen & Kenneth A. Feldman).
Motivation for Higher-Order Learning (Janet G. Donald).
Motivation and Methods
Using the ARCS Motivational Process in Computer-Based Instruction and Distance Education (John M. Keller).
CORE Elements of Student Motivation in Problem-Based Learning (Marjorie M. MacKinnon).
The Motivational Benefits of Cooperative Learning (Theodore Panitz)
Motivation and The Institution
Faculty Motivation: The Role of Supportive Teaching Culture (Kenneth A. Feldman & Michael B. Paulsen).
Motivation in Interdisciplinary Programs (Edward B. Nuhfer).
Institutional Improvement and Motivated Faculty: A Case Study (Donald W. Farmer).
Conclusion
What Have We Learned? A Synthesis and Some Guidelines for Effective Motivation in Higher Education (Michael Theall & Jennifer Franklin)

Beyond Theological Tourism: Mentoring as a Grassroots Approach to Theological Education
Additional Info:
Since the early days of liberation theology, Northern Hemisphere theological education has used the phrase "solidarity with the oppressed" to denote the religiously and morally appropriate response to situations of violence and oppression. Yet efforts to inculcate solidarity of heart and mind often devolve into a kind of "theological tourism" wherein professors and students visit oppressed communities without truly participating as subjects in the subjectivity of the marginalized. Beyond Theological ...
Since the early days of liberation theology, Northern Hemisphere theological education has used the phrase "solidarity with the oppressed" to denote the religiously and morally appropriate response to situations of violence and oppression. Yet efforts to inculcate solidarity of heart and mind often devolve into a kind of "theological tourism" wherein professors and students visit oppressed communities without truly participating as subjects in the subjectivity of the marginalized. Beyond Theological ...
Additional Info:
Since the early days of liberation theology, Northern Hemisphere theological education has used the phrase "solidarity with the oppressed" to denote the religiously and morally appropriate response to situations of violence and oppression. Yet efforts to inculcate solidarity of heart and mind often devolve into a kind of "theological tourism" wherein professors and students visit oppressed communities without truly participating as subjects in the subjectivity of the marginalized. Beyond Theological Tourism shows how one group of theological teacher-mentors and students attempt to overcome the limits of visits as "tourists of the revolution" to exotic locations. Starting from the challenge of Robert Evans of the Plowshares Institute, a group of Chicago-based Christians struggled with new modes of education for prospective ministers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
ch. 1 Beyond Theological Tourism
ch. 2 Stand by Me
ch. 3 Globalization in the Hyde Park Seminaries: A History in Process
ch. 4 Education for Ministry in an Urbanized World: The Chicago Connection
ch. 5 The Theory and Practice of Transformative Education: The Chicago Mentoring Model
ch. 6 Ministry on the Boundaries: Cooperation without Exploitation
ch. 7 Ministry with Persons in Female Prostitution
ch. 8 A Matter of Homelessness
ch. 9 Theological Reflection in the Community Based Model
ch. 10 Mentoring for Transformation
ch. 11 Individual and Social Transformation
Appendixes
Notes
Since the early days of liberation theology, Northern Hemisphere theological education has used the phrase "solidarity with the oppressed" to denote the religiously and morally appropriate response to situations of violence and oppression. Yet efforts to inculcate solidarity of heart and mind often devolve into a kind of "theological tourism" wherein professors and students visit oppressed communities without truly participating as subjects in the subjectivity of the marginalized. Beyond Theological Tourism shows how one group of theological teacher-mentors and students attempt to overcome the limits of visits as "tourists of the revolution" to exotic locations. Starting from the challenge of Robert Evans of the Plowshares Institute, a group of Chicago-based Christians struggled with new modes of education for prospective ministers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
ch. 1 Beyond Theological Tourism
ch. 2 Stand by Me
ch. 3 Globalization in the Hyde Park Seminaries: A History in Process
ch. 4 Education for Ministry in an Urbanized World: The Chicago Connection
ch. 5 The Theory and Practice of Transformative Education: The Chicago Mentoring Model
ch. 6 Ministry on the Boundaries: Cooperation without Exploitation
ch. 7 Ministry with Persons in Female Prostitution
ch. 8 A Matter of Homelessness
ch. 9 Theological Reflection in the Community Based Model
ch. 10 Mentoring for Transformation
ch. 11 Individual and Social Transformation
Appendixes
Notes

Taking Women Seriously: Lessons and Legacies for Educating the Majority
Additional Info:
Over the past 25 years, research findings have continued to underscore the direct and positive impact of women's colleges--institutions where the academic aspirations of women are the focus of the entire educational community. This book identifies the distinctive characteristics that make these colleges preeminent contributors of achieving women to the wider society. The authors also explain how the lessons and legacies of these institutions have the potential to enhance the education ...
Over the past 25 years, research findings have continued to underscore the direct and positive impact of women's colleges--institutions where the academic aspirations of women are the focus of the entire educational community. This book identifies the distinctive characteristics that make these colleges preeminent contributors of achieving women to the wider society. The authors also explain how the lessons and legacies of these institutions have the potential to enhance the education ...
Additional Info:
Over the past 25 years, research findings have continued to underscore the direct and positive impact of women's colleges--institutions where the academic aspirations of women are the focus of the entire educational community. This book identifies the distinctive characteristics that make these colleges preeminent contributors of achieving women to the wider society. The authors also explain how the lessons and legacies of these institutions have the potential to enhance the education environment at all colleges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
List of Tables
Foreword
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
Introduction Writing History Differently
Pt. 1 Women's Colleges within the Context of American Higher Education
Pt. 2 Three Major Ways of Knowing Provide Lessons from Women's Colleges
Pt. 3 Legacies from Women's Colleges Serve As Institutional Models
Pt. 4 Women's Colleges and the Meaning of Taking Women Seriously
Additional Resources
Supplement to Ch. 1 Connecting with Global Issues
Supplement to Ch. 2 Tracking Frames of Reference
Supplement to Ch. 3 From Baccalaureate Origins to Institutional Productivity
Supplement to Ch. 4 Social Science Approaches to Studying College Impact
Supplement to Ch. 5 A Look Inside "A Look Inside"
References
Index
Over the past 25 years, research findings have continued to underscore the direct and positive impact of women's colleges--institutions where the academic aspirations of women are the focus of the entire educational community. This book identifies the distinctive characteristics that make these colleges preeminent contributors of achieving women to the wider society. The authors also explain how the lessons and legacies of these institutions have the potential to enhance the education environment at all colleges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
List of Tables
Foreword
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
Introduction Writing History Differently
Pt. 1 Women's Colleges within the Context of American Higher Education
Pt. 2 Three Major Ways of Knowing Provide Lessons from Women's Colleges
Pt. 3 Legacies from Women's Colleges Serve As Institutional Models
Pt. 4 Women's Colleges and the Meaning of Taking Women Seriously
Additional Resources
Supplement to Ch. 1 Connecting with Global Issues
Supplement to Ch. 2 Tracking Frames of Reference
Supplement to Ch. 3 From Baccalaureate Origins to Institutional Productivity
Supplement to Ch. 4 Social Science Approaches to Studying College Impact
Supplement to Ch. 5 A Look Inside "A Look Inside"
References
Index


A Life in School: What the Teacher Learned
Additional Info:
Tompkins is an English professor at Duke. The book is autobiographical and profoundly evocative. It is an intense interpretation of the innertwinings of her personal and professional life. Tompkins discusses her life--from elementary school, through her doctoral program at Yale, through her life as a nontenured and then tenured faculty member--and, in the process, discusses issues that are important to so many of us in the Academy. She writes wonderfully ...
Tompkins is an English professor at Duke. The book is autobiographical and profoundly evocative. It is an intense interpretation of the innertwinings of her personal and professional life. Tompkins discusses her life--from elementary school, through her doctoral program at Yale, through her life as a nontenured and then tenured faculty member--and, in the process, discusses issues that are important to so many of us in the Academy. She writes wonderfully ...
Additional Info:
Tompkins is an English professor at Duke. The book is autobiographical and profoundly evocative. It is an intense interpretation of the innertwinings of her personal and professional life. Tompkins discusses her life--from elementary school, through her doctoral program at Yale, through her life as a nontenured and then tenured faculty member--and, in the process, discusses issues that are important to so many of us in the Academy. She writes wonderfully about teaching, learning, and working at a research university. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Dream of Authority
ch. 2 P.S. 98
ch. 3 Forever
ch. 4 Other People
ch. 5 Teachers
ch. 6 Talking in Class
ch. 7 Higher Education
ch. 8 Making It
ch. 9 Ash Wednesday
ch. 10 The Day I Walked Out of Class
ch. 11 Postcards From the Edge
ch. 12 Reverie
ch. 13 Karate Lesson
ch. 14 Let's Get Lost
ch. 15 The Way We Live Now
ch. 16 Coffee
ch. 17 Time Out
ch. 18 The Cloister and the Heart
Epilogue: Chair, Table, Lamp
List of Works Cited
Tompkins is an English professor at Duke. The book is autobiographical and profoundly evocative. It is an intense interpretation of the innertwinings of her personal and professional life. Tompkins discusses her life--from elementary school, through her doctoral program at Yale, through her life as a nontenured and then tenured faculty member--and, in the process, discusses issues that are important to so many of us in the Academy. She writes wonderfully about teaching, learning, and working at a research university. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Dream of Authority
ch. 2 P.S. 98
ch. 3 Forever
ch. 4 Other People
ch. 5 Teachers
ch. 6 Talking in Class
ch. 7 Higher Education
ch. 8 Making It
ch. 9 Ash Wednesday
ch. 10 The Day I Walked Out of Class
ch. 11 Postcards From the Edge
ch. 12 Reverie
ch. 13 Karate Lesson
ch. 14 Let's Get Lost
ch. 15 The Way We Live Now
ch. 16 Coffee
ch. 17 Time Out
ch. 18 The Cloister and the Heart
Epilogue: Chair, Table, Lamp
List of Works Cited


Designing Courses for Higher Education
Additional Info:
Susan Toohey focuses not on teaching techniques but on the strategic decisions which must be made before a course begins. She provides realistic advice for university and college teachers on how to design more effective courses without underestimating the complexity of the task facing course developers. In particular, she examines fully the challenges involved in leading course design teams, getting agreement among teaching staff and managing organizational politics. (From the ...
Susan Toohey focuses not on teaching techniques but on the strategic decisions which must be made before a course begins. She provides realistic advice for university and college teachers on how to design more effective courses without underestimating the complexity of the task facing course developers. In particular, she examines fully the challenges involved in leading course design teams, getting agreement among teaching staff and managing organizational politics. (From the ...
Additional Info:
Susan Toohey focuses not on teaching techniques but on the strategic decisions which must be made before a course begins. She provides realistic advice for university and college teachers on how to design more effective courses without underestimating the complexity of the task facing course developers. In particular, she examines fully the challenges involved in leading course design teams, getting agreement among teaching staff and managing organizational politics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Introduction
ch. 1 Pressures for Change
ch. 2 The Course Design Process
ch. 3 Beliefs, Values and Ideologies in Course Design
ch. 4 Thinking about Goals and Content
ch. 5 The Structure of the Course
ch. 6 Making Learning Opportunities More Flexible
ch. 7 Deciding on Goals and Objectives for Units of Study
ch. 8 Choosing Teaching Strategies
ch. 9 Assessment
ch. 10 Implementing the New Course
References
Index
The Society for Research into Higher Education
Susan Toohey focuses not on teaching techniques but on the strategic decisions which must be made before a course begins. She provides realistic advice for university and college teachers on how to design more effective courses without underestimating the complexity of the task facing course developers. In particular, she examines fully the challenges involved in leading course design teams, getting agreement among teaching staff and managing organizational politics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Introduction
ch. 1 Pressures for Change
ch. 2 The Course Design Process
ch. 3 Beliefs, Values and Ideologies in Course Design
ch. 4 Thinking about Goals and Content
ch. 5 The Structure of the Course
ch. 6 Making Learning Opportunities More Flexible
ch. 7 Deciding on Goals and Objectives for Units of Study
ch. 8 Choosing Teaching Strategies
ch. 9 Assessment
ch. 10 Implementing the New Course
References
Index
The Society for Research into Higher Education

Education for Reflective Ministry
Additional Info:
Written by one of today’s leading theorists in the field of pastoral theology, Volume 24 in the Louvain Theological & Pastoral Monographs series critically evaluates the diverse educational models available for ministry in today’s societal and ecclesial context in the West.
Johannes van der Ven also proposes his own "reflective ministry" model designed to teach pastors to make self-reliant—yet foundationally sound—choices when working in their own unique ...
Written by one of today’s leading theorists in the field of pastoral theology, Volume 24 in the Louvain Theological & Pastoral Monographs series critically evaluates the diverse educational models available for ministry in today’s societal and ecclesial context in the West.
Johannes van der Ven also proposes his own "reflective ministry" model designed to teach pastors to make self-reliant—yet foundationally sound—choices when working in their own unique ...
Additional Info:
Written by one of today’s leading theorists in the field of pastoral theology, Volume 24 in the Louvain Theological & Pastoral Monographs series critically evaluates the diverse educational models available for ministry in today’s societal and ecclesial context in the West.
Johannes van der Ven also proposes his own "reflective ministry" model designed to teach pastors to make self-reliant—yet foundationally sound—choices when working in their own unique ministry settings. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Complexity and Dynamics of Religion
ch. 2 The Need for a New Educational Perspective for Ministry
ch. 3 Reflective Ministry in Context
ch. 4 Educational Conditions for Reflective Ministry
ch. 5 General Summary and Conclusions
Written by one of today’s leading theorists in the field of pastoral theology, Volume 24 in the Louvain Theological & Pastoral Monographs series critically evaluates the diverse educational models available for ministry in today’s societal and ecclesial context in the West.
Johannes van der Ven also proposes his own "reflective ministry" model designed to teach pastors to make self-reliant—yet foundationally sound—choices when working in their own unique ministry settings. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Complexity and Dynamics of Religion
ch. 2 The Need for a New Educational Perspective for Ministry
ch. 3 Reflective Ministry in Context
ch. 4 Educational Conditions for Reflective Ministry
ch. 5 General Summary and Conclusions


Learning to Listen, Learning to Teach: The Power of Dialogue in Educating Adults
Additional Info:
In this updated version of her landmark book Learning to Listen, Learning to Teach, celebrated adult educator Jane Vella revisits her twelve principles of dialogue education with a new theoretical perspective gleaned from the discipline of quantum physics. Vella sees the path to learning as a holistic, integrated, spiritual, and energetic process. She uses engaging, personal stories of her work in a variety of adult learning settings, in different countries ...
In this updated version of her landmark book Learning to Listen, Learning to Teach, celebrated adult educator Jane Vella revisits her twelve principles of dialogue education with a new theoretical perspective gleaned from the discipline of quantum physics. Vella sees the path to learning as a holistic, integrated, spiritual, and energetic process. She uses engaging, personal stories of her work in a variety of adult learning settings, in different countries ...
Additional Info:
In this updated version of her landmark book Learning to Listen, Learning to Teach, celebrated adult educator Jane Vella revisits her twelve principles of dialogue education with a new theoretical perspective gleaned from the discipline of quantum physics. Vella sees the path to learning as a holistic, integrated, spiritual, and energetic process. She uses engaging, personal stories of her work in a variety of adult learning settings, in different countries and with different educational purposes, to show readers how to utilize the twelve principles in their own practice with any type of adult learner, anywhere.
New material includes: the latest research on learning tasks; updated ways to do needs assessment; and new insights from the field of quantum physics applied to adult teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword to the 1994 Edition
Preface to the Revised Edition 2002
The Author
Pt. 1 A Process That Works and Why
ch. 1 Twelve Principles for Effective Adult Learning
ch. 2 Quantum Thinking and Dialogue Education
ch. 3 How the Principles Inform Course Design: Two Examples
Pt. 2 The Principles in Practice: Across Cultures and Around the World
ch. 4 Learning Needs and Resources Assessment: Taking the First Step in Dialogue
ch. 5 Safety: Creating a Safe Environment for Learning
ch. 6 Sound Relationships: Using the Power of Friendship
ch. 7 Sequence and Reinforcement: Supporting Their Learning
ch. 8 Praxis: Turning Practice into Action and Reflection
ch. 9 Learners as Decision Makers: Harnessing the Power of Self Through Respect
ch. 10 Learning with Ideas, Feelings, and Actions: Using the Whole Person
ch. 11 Immediacy: Teaching What Is Really Useful to Learners
ch. 12 Assuming New Roles for Dialogue: Embracing the Death of the Professor
ch. 13 Teamwork: Celebrating Learning Together
ch. 14 Engagement: Learning Actively
ch. 15 Accountability: Knowing How They Know They Know
Pt. 3 Becoming an Effective Teacher of Adults
ch. 16 Reviewing the Twelve Principles and Quantum Thinking
ch. 17 How Do You Know You Know? Supposing and Proposing
App Ways of Doing Needs Assessment
References
Index
In this updated version of her landmark book Learning to Listen, Learning to Teach, celebrated adult educator Jane Vella revisits her twelve principles of dialogue education with a new theoretical perspective gleaned from the discipline of quantum physics. Vella sees the path to learning as a holistic, integrated, spiritual, and energetic process. She uses engaging, personal stories of her work in a variety of adult learning settings, in different countries and with different educational purposes, to show readers how to utilize the twelve principles in their own practice with any type of adult learner, anywhere.
New material includes: the latest research on learning tasks; updated ways to do needs assessment; and new insights from the field of quantum physics applied to adult teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword to the 1994 Edition
Preface to the Revised Edition 2002
The Author
Pt. 1 A Process That Works and Why
ch. 1 Twelve Principles for Effective Adult Learning
ch. 2 Quantum Thinking and Dialogue Education
ch. 3 How the Principles Inform Course Design: Two Examples
Pt. 2 The Principles in Practice: Across Cultures and Around the World
ch. 4 Learning Needs and Resources Assessment: Taking the First Step in Dialogue
ch. 5 Safety: Creating a Safe Environment for Learning
ch. 6 Sound Relationships: Using the Power of Friendship
ch. 7 Sequence and Reinforcement: Supporting Their Learning
ch. 8 Praxis: Turning Practice into Action and Reflection
ch. 9 Learners as Decision Makers: Harnessing the Power of Self Through Respect
ch. 10 Learning with Ideas, Feelings, and Actions: Using the Whole Person
ch. 11 Immediacy: Teaching What Is Really Useful to Learners
ch. 12 Assuming New Roles for Dialogue: Embracing the Death of the Professor
ch. 13 Teamwork: Celebrating Learning Together
ch. 14 Engagement: Learning Actively
ch. 15 Accountability: Knowing How They Know They Know
Pt. 3 Becoming an Effective Teacher of Adults
ch. 16 Reviewing the Twelve Principles and Quantum Thinking
ch. 17 How Do You Know You Know? Supposing and Proposing
App Ways of Doing Needs Assessment
References
Index

Women Teaching for Change: Gender, Class and Power
Additional Info:
Applying theory to practice, Women Teaching for Change reveals the complexity of being a feminist teacher in a public school setting, in which the forces of sexism, racism, and classism, which so characterize society as a whole, are played out in multiracial, multicultural classrooms. "A fine book, a rich melding of critical theory in education, feminist literature, and pedagogical experience and expertise." Maxine Green, Columbia University. (From the Publisher)
Applying theory to practice, Women Teaching for Change reveals the complexity of being a feminist teacher in a public school setting, in which the forces of sexism, racism, and classism, which so characterize society as a whole, are played out in multiracial, multicultural classrooms. "A fine book, a rich melding of critical theory in education, feminist literature, and pedagogical experience and expertise." Maxine Green, Columbia University. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Applying theory to practice, Women Teaching for Change reveals the complexity of being a feminist teacher in a public school setting, in which the forces of sexism, racism, and classism, which so characterize society as a whole, are played out in multiracial, multicultural classrooms. "A fine book, a rich melding of critical theory in education, feminist literature, and pedagogical experience and expertise." Maxine Green, Columbia University. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction by Henry A. Giroux and Paulo Freire
Critical Educational Theory
Feminist Analyses of Gender and Schooling
Feminist Methodology
The Dialects of Gender in the Lives of Feminist Teachers
The Struggle for a Critical Literacy
Gender, Race and Class in the Feminist Classroom
Conclusion
Bibliography
Index
Applying theory to practice, Women Teaching for Change reveals the complexity of being a feminist teacher in a public school setting, in which the forces of sexism, racism, and classism, which so characterize society as a whole, are played out in multiracial, multicultural classrooms. "A fine book, a rich melding of critical theory in education, feminist literature, and pedagogical experience and expertise." Maxine Green, Columbia University. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction by Henry A. Giroux and Paulo Freire
Critical Educational Theory
Feminist Analyses of Gender and Schooling
Feminist Methodology
The Dialects of Gender in the Lives of Feminist Teachers
The Struggle for a Critical Literacy
Gender, Race and Class in the Feminist Classroom
Conclusion
Bibliography
Index

How Am I Teaching? Forms and Activities for Acquiring Instructional Input
Additional Info:
If you're like most instructors, this is a question that you've asked yourself many times. That's why Weimer, Parrett, and Kerns have compiled this guide–so it's easier to get the answers that you need to this crucial question.
How Am I Teaching? contains nine forms and activities that allow you to gather information about what you're doing and how well you're doing it. The authors begin with ...
If you're like most instructors, this is a question that you've asked yourself many times. That's why Weimer, Parrett, and Kerns have compiled this guide–so it's easier to get the answers that you need to this crucial question.
How Am I Teaching? contains nine forms and activities that allow you to gather information about what you're doing and how well you're doing it. The authors begin with ...
Additional Info:
If you're like most instructors, this is a question that you've asked yourself many times. That's why Weimer, Parrett, and Kerns have compiled this guide–so it's easier to get the answers that you need to this crucial question.
How Am I Teaching? contains nine forms and activities that allow you to gather information about what you're doing and how well you're doing it. The authors begin with a simple diagnostic matrix to guide you to the form or activity which best suits your needs. Then they summarize each of the nine tools, highlighting the value and limitations. Make copies of whichever tool(s) you've selected and you're on your way to better teaching! (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Section 1 Classroom Environment Inventory
Section 2 Course Materials Review (Peer Version)
Section 3 Course Materials Review (Student Version)
Section 4 How Do You Teach?
Section 5 Instructor Self-Evaluation
Section 6 Made-to-Order Form for Instructional Observation (Peer Version)
Section 7 Made-to-Order Form for Instructional Observation (Student Version)
Section 8 Open-Ended Questionnaire
Section 9 Self- or Colleague-Analysis of Videotaped Teaching Sample
Section 10 Specifically, What Needs Improvement? (Instructor Version)
Section 11 Specifically, What Needs Improvement? (Student Version)
Section 12 Teacher Behaviors Inventory
If you're like most instructors, this is a question that you've asked yourself many times. That's why Weimer, Parrett, and Kerns have compiled this guide–so it's easier to get the answers that you need to this crucial question.
How Am I Teaching? contains nine forms and activities that allow you to gather information about what you're doing and how well you're doing it. The authors begin with a simple diagnostic matrix to guide you to the form or activity which best suits your needs. Then they summarize each of the nine tools, highlighting the value and limitations. Make copies of whichever tool(s) you've selected and you're on your way to better teaching! (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Section 1 Classroom Environment Inventory
Section 2 Course Materials Review (Peer Version)
Section 3 Course Materials Review (Student Version)
Section 4 How Do You Teach?
Section 5 Instructor Self-Evaluation
Section 6 Made-to-Order Form for Instructional Observation (Peer Version)
Section 7 Made-to-Order Form for Instructional Observation (Student Version)
Section 8 Open-Ended Questionnaire
Section 9 Self- or Colleague-Analysis of Videotaped Teaching Sample
Section 10 Specifically, What Needs Improvement? (Instructor Version)
Section 11 Specifically, What Needs Improvement? (Student Version)
Section 12 Teacher Behaviors Inventory

Improving College Teaching: Strategies for Developing Instructional Effectiveness
Additional Info:
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Removing Barriers to Teaching Improvement
ch. 1. What Makes the Improvement of College Teaching Difficult?
ch. 2. Overcoming Faculty Resistance and Encouraging Participation
ch. 3. Improving Teaching: A Five-Step Process
Part Two: Key Elements of Successful Instructional Development
ch. 4. Ongoing Assessment and Feedback
ch. 5. A Flexible Mix of Improvement Activities
ch. 6. Colleagues Assisting Colleagues
ch. 7. Supportive Academic Leaders
Part Three: Institutional Options for Improving College Teaching
ch. 8. Organizational and Administrative Approaches
ch. 9. Profiles of Teaching Improvement Programs
ch. 10. Closing Advice on Improving College Teaching
Resources: A. How Do You Teach? A Checklist for Developing Instructional
Awareness B. Guidelines for Classroom Observation
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Removing Barriers to Teaching Improvement
ch. 1. What Makes the Improvement of College Teaching Difficult?
ch. 2. Overcoming Faculty Resistance and Encouraging Participation
ch. 3. Improving Teaching: A Five-Step Process
Part Two: Key Elements of Successful Instructional Development
ch. 4. Ongoing Assessment and Feedback
ch. 5. A Flexible Mix of Improvement Activities
ch. 6. Colleagues Assisting Colleagues
ch. 7. Supportive Academic Leaders
Part Three: Institutional Options for Improving College Teaching
ch. 8. Organizational and Administrative Approaches
ch. 9. Profiles of Teaching Improvement Programs
ch. 10. Closing Advice on Improving College Teaching
Resources: A. How Do You Teach? A Checklist for Developing Instructional
Awareness B. Guidelines for Classroom Observation

Empowering Women in Higher Education
Additional Info:
The issue of women's status in higher education continues to be contested. Building on her experience as a teacher in higher education and as a staff developer, the author discusses successful practices which have empowered women, and examines the issues which concern women students and staff in higher education. The first part focuses on women students, their needs and experiences and the changes to courses, teaching and learning practices which ...
The issue of women's status in higher education continues to be contested. Building on her experience as a teacher in higher education and as a staff developer, the author discusses successful practices which have empowered women, and examines the issues which concern women students and staff in higher education. The first part focuses on women students, their needs and experiences and the changes to courses, teaching and learning practices which ...
Additional Info:
The issue of women's status in higher education continues to be contested. Building on her experience as a teacher in higher education and as a staff developer, the author discusses successful practices which have empowered women, and examines the issues which concern women students and staff in higher education. The first part focuses on women students, their needs and experiences and the changes to courses, teaching and learning practices which encourage women's learning. The second part examines women staff and issues such as recruitment, training, promotion and balancing teaching pressures with family life. Gina Wisker's book is essential reading for all women working in higher education, from graduate students to full professors, for staff development groups and administrators, and men teaching women students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Section A: Towards Women-centred Teaching Strategies
ch. 1 Women Students and Mature Women Returners: Needs and Developments
ch. 2 The Curriculum and Change
ch. 3 Women-centred Teaching, Learning and Assessment Strategies
ch. 4 Women's Studies Courses
ch. 5 Women's Studies: Specific Case Studies
Section B: What's So Special About Women in Higher Education?
ch. 6 Pyramids and Glass Ceilings: Women's Positions in Higher Education and the Management House
ch. 7 Women as Managers
ch. 8 Assertiveness, Confidence-building and Positive Interactions
ch. 9 Leadership Issues
ch. 10 Women Chairing Meetings and Supervising Others
ch. 11 Managing the Balancing Act
ch. 12 Conclusion
Index
The issue of women's status in higher education continues to be contested. Building on her experience as a teacher in higher education and as a staff developer, the author discusses successful practices which have empowered women, and examines the issues which concern women students and staff in higher education. The first part focuses on women students, their needs and experiences and the changes to courses, teaching and learning practices which encourage women's learning. The second part examines women staff and issues such as recruitment, training, promotion and balancing teaching pressures with family life. Gina Wisker's book is essential reading for all women working in higher education, from graduate students to full professors, for staff development groups and administrators, and men teaching women students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Section A: Towards Women-centred Teaching Strategies
ch. 1 Women Students and Mature Women Returners: Needs and Developments
ch. 2 The Curriculum and Change
ch. 3 Women-centred Teaching, Learning and Assessment Strategies
ch. 4 Women's Studies Courses
ch. 5 Women's Studies: Specific Case Studies
Section B: What's So Special About Women in Higher Education?
ch. 6 Pyramids and Glass Ceilings: Women's Positions in Higher Education and the Management House
ch. 7 Women as Managers
ch. 8 Assertiveness, Confidence-building and Positive Interactions
ch. 9 Leadership Issues
ch. 10 Women Chairing Meetings and Supervising Others
ch. 11 Managing the Balancing Act
ch. 12 Conclusion
Index
Additional Info:
This completely revised edition of Enhancing Adult Motivation to Learn offers updated, culturally responsive practical advice and strategies in the jargon-free, readable style that made the original work so popular. This valuable resource is for teachers, trainers, and anyone who wants learning to be a motivating experience for all adults. (From the Publisher)
This completely revised edition of Enhancing Adult Motivation to Learn offers updated, culturally responsive practical advice and strategies in the jargon-free, readable style that made the original work so popular. This valuable resource is for teachers, trainers, and anyone who wants learning to be a motivating experience for all adults. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This completely revised edition of Enhancing Adult Motivation to Learn offers updated, culturally responsive practical advice and strategies in the jargon-free, readable style that made the original work so popular. This valuable resource is for teachers, trainers, and anyone who wants learning to be a motivating experience for all adults. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 How Motivation Affects Instruction
ch. 2 Characteristics and Skills of a Motivating Instructor
ch. 3 What Motivates Adults to Learn
ch. 4 Establishing Inclusion Among Adult Learners
ch. 5 Helping Adults Develop Positive Attitudes Toward Learning
ch. 6 Enhancing Meaning in Learning Activities
ch. 7 Engendering Competence Among Adult Learners
ch. 8 Building Motivational Strategies into Instructional Designs
Epilogue: Being an Effective Instructor of Adults
Appendix: Observation Guide for Culturally Responsive Teaching and Learning (Adult Version)
References
Name Index
Subject Index
This completely revised edition of Enhancing Adult Motivation to Learn offers updated, culturally responsive practical advice and strategies in the jargon-free, readable style that made the original work so popular. This valuable resource is for teachers, trainers, and anyone who wants learning to be a motivating experience for all adults. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 How Motivation Affects Instruction
ch. 2 Characteristics and Skills of a Motivating Instructor
ch. 3 What Motivates Adults to Learn
ch. 4 Establishing Inclusion Among Adult Learners
ch. 5 Helping Adults Develop Positive Attitudes Toward Learning
ch. 6 Enhancing Meaning in Learning Activities
ch. 7 Engendering Competence Among Adult Learners
ch. 8 Building Motivational Strategies into Instructional Designs
Epilogue: Being an Effective Instructor of Adults
Appendix: Observation Guide for Culturally Responsive Teaching and Learning (Adult Version)
References
Name Index
Subject Index

The Formation of Christian Understanding: Theological Hermeneutics
Additional Info:
Reissued in response to many requests, this is a book about the Bible--specifically about Christian ways of relating to, using, and understanding Christian scripture and tradition. Professor Wood demonstrates that the aim of Christian understanding is the knowledge of God and the changes in outlook on the Bible that came with the rise of biblical criticism. (From the Publisher)
Reissued in response to many requests, this is a book about the Bible--specifically about Christian ways of relating to, using, and understanding Christian scripture and tradition. Professor Wood demonstrates that the aim of Christian understanding is the knowledge of God and the changes in outlook on the Bible that came with the rise of biblical criticism. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Reissued in response to many requests, this is a book about the Bible--specifically about Christian ways of relating to, using, and understanding Christian scripture and tradition. Professor Wood demonstrates that the aim of Christian understanding is the knowledge of God and the changes in outlook on the Bible that came with the rise of biblical criticism. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the First Edition
ch. 1 The Task of Theological Hermeneutics
ch. 2 The Aims of Christian Understanding
ch. 3 The Conditions of Christian Understanding
ch. 4 The Canon of Christian Understanding
ch. 5 Christian Understanding as a Critical Task
Notes
Index
Reissued in response to many requests, this is a book about the Bible--specifically about Christian ways of relating to, using, and understanding Christian scripture and tradition. Professor Wood demonstrates that the aim of Christian understanding is the knowledge of God and the changes in outlook on the Bible that came with the rise of biblical criticism. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the First Edition
ch. 1 The Task of Theological Hermeneutics
ch. 2 The Aims of Christian Understanding
ch. 3 The Conditions of Christian Understanding
ch. 4 The Canon of Christian Understanding
ch. 5 Christian Understanding as a Critical Task
Notes
Index

Mentoring Revisited: Making an Impact on Individuals and Institutions
Additional Info:
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will ...
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will ...
Additional Info:
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will bring new challenges to higher education. Academic institutions must renew their responsibility to support the developmental needs of all their members. This commitment to support human growth is also part of institutional regeneration. An integrated, comprehensive model of personal and organizational development that includes mentoring for students, faculty, staff, and administrators can make a significant contribution to the best use of human resources, community building, and institutional vitality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 New Directions for Mentoring: An Organizational Development Perspective (Marie A. Wunsch )
ch. 2 Mentoring: An Adult Developmental Perspective (Mary L. Otto)
ch. 3 Developing Mentoring Programs: Major Themes and Issues (Marie A. Wunsch)
ch. 4 Mentoring Undergraduate Minority Students: An Overview, Survey, and Model Program (Melvin C. Terrell, and R. Kipp Hassel)
ch. 5 Developing a Freshman Mentoring Program: A Small College Experience (Keith B. Wilson)
ch. 6 Enabling the Success of Junior Faculty Women Through Mentoring (Linda K. Johnsrud)
ch. 7 Mentoring New Faculty for Teaching and Research (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 8 Forging the Ties That Bind: Peer Mentoring Part-Time Faculty (Barbara J. Mills)
ch. 9 Mentoring Faculty at the Departmental Level (Kay U. Herr)
ch. 10 Mentoring Faculty for Midcareer Issues (Daniel W. Wheeler, B.J. Wheeler)
ch. 11 Peer Mentoring Among Graduate Students of Color: Expanding the Mentoring Relationship James Bonilla, Carleton Pickron, Travis Tatum)
ch. 12 Taking a Cultural Journey Through Mentorship: A Personal Story (Virgie O. Chattergy)
ch. 13 Mentoring Minority Graduate Students: A West Indian Narrative (Christine A. Stanley)
Appendix: A Checklist for Developing, Implementing, and Assessing Mentoring Programs
Index
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will bring new challenges to higher education. Academic institutions must renew their responsibility to support the developmental needs of all their members. This commitment to support human growth is also part of institutional regeneration. An integrated, comprehensive model of personal and organizational development that includes mentoring for students, faculty, staff, and administrators can make a significant contribution to the best use of human resources, community building, and institutional vitality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 New Directions for Mentoring: An Organizational Development Perspective (Marie A. Wunsch )
ch. 2 Mentoring: An Adult Developmental Perspective (Mary L. Otto)
ch. 3 Developing Mentoring Programs: Major Themes and Issues (Marie A. Wunsch)
ch. 4 Mentoring Undergraduate Minority Students: An Overview, Survey, and Model Program (Melvin C. Terrell, and R. Kipp Hassel)
ch. 5 Developing a Freshman Mentoring Program: A Small College Experience (Keith B. Wilson)
ch. 6 Enabling the Success of Junior Faculty Women Through Mentoring (Linda K. Johnsrud)
ch. 7 Mentoring New Faculty for Teaching and Research (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 8 Forging the Ties That Bind: Peer Mentoring Part-Time Faculty (Barbara J. Mills)
ch. 9 Mentoring Faculty at the Departmental Level (Kay U. Herr)
ch. 10 Mentoring Faculty for Midcareer Issues (Daniel W. Wheeler, B.J. Wheeler)
ch. 11 Peer Mentoring Among Graduate Students of Color: Expanding the Mentoring Relationship James Bonilla, Carleton Pickron, Travis Tatum)
ch. 12 Taking a Cultural Journey Through Mentorship: A Personal Story (Virgie O. Chattergy)
ch. 13 Mentoring Minority Graduate Students: A West Indian Narrative (Christine A. Stanley)
Appendix: A Checklist for Developing, Implementing, and Assessing Mentoring Programs
Index


Educating Citizens in a Multicultural Society
Additional Info:
The thousands of immigrants who enter the United States each year, the increasing number of children who speak a first language other than English in the schools, and the ever-widening gap between rich and poor are some of the realities that educators face today. Given these conditions, it is increasingly difficult to prepare students for democratic citizenship. Bringing together years of work as an expert on multicultural education, James Banks ...
The thousands of immigrants who enter the United States each year, the increasing number of children who speak a first language other than English in the schools, and the ever-widening gap between rich and poor are some of the realities that educators face today. Given these conditions, it is increasingly difficult to prepare students for democratic citizenship. Bringing together years of work as an expert on multicultural education, James Banks ...
Additional Info:
The thousands of immigrants who enter the United States each year, the increasing number of children who speak a first language other than English in the schools, and the ever-widening gap between rich and poor are some of the realities that educators face today. Given these conditions, it is increasingly difficult to prepare students for democratic citizenship. Bringing together years of work as an expert on multicultural education, James Banks shows how we can prepare students to effectively participate in a society that reflects ethnic, cultural, and class diversity at the same time that we promote national unity and the public good. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Preface
Part I Citizenship Education and Diversity
ch. 1 Reconstructing Citizenship Education
ch. 2 Citizenship Education in a Multicultural Society
ch. 3 Teaching Social Studies for Decision-Making and Citizen Action
Pt. II Citizenship Education and Epistemological Issues
ch. 4 Ethnicity, Social Science Research, and Education
ch. 5 The Persistence of Ethnicity: Research and Teaching Implications
Pt. III Citizenship Education and the Dimensions of Multicultural Education
ch. 6 Multicultural Education and Curriculum Transformation
ch. 7 Equity Pedagogy and Multicultural Education
ch. 8 Citizenship Education and the Development of Democratic Racial Attitudes
Pt. IV Educating Teachers, Leaders, and Citizens
ch. 9 Teaching Multicultural Literacy to Teachers
ch. 10 Multicultural Education: Goals for the Twenty-First Century
ch. 11 Cultural Democracy and Citizenship Education
References
Index
About the Author
The thousands of immigrants who enter the United States each year, the increasing number of children who speak a first language other than English in the schools, and the ever-widening gap between rich and poor are some of the realities that educators face today. Given these conditions, it is increasingly difficult to prepare students for democratic citizenship. Bringing together years of work as an expert on multicultural education, James Banks shows how we can prepare students to effectively participate in a society that reflects ethnic, cultural, and class diversity at the same time that we promote national unity and the public good. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Preface
Part I Citizenship Education and Diversity
ch. 1 Reconstructing Citizenship Education
ch. 2 Citizenship Education in a Multicultural Society
ch. 3 Teaching Social Studies for Decision-Making and Citizen Action
Pt. II Citizenship Education and Epistemological Issues
ch. 4 Ethnicity, Social Science Research, and Education
ch. 5 The Persistence of Ethnicity: Research and Teaching Implications
Pt. III Citizenship Education and the Dimensions of Multicultural Education
ch. 6 Multicultural Education and Curriculum Transformation
ch. 7 Equity Pedagogy and Multicultural Education
ch. 8 Citizenship Education and the Development of Democratic Racial Attitudes
Pt. IV Educating Teachers, Leaders, and Citizens
ch. 9 Teaching Multicultural Literacy to Teachers
ch. 10 Multicultural Education: Goals for the Twenty-First Century
ch. 11 Cultural Democracy and Citizenship Education
References
Index
About the Author

Quick Hits: Successful Strategies by Award Winning Teachers
Additional Info:
The first Quick Hits were collected in 1991 at a colloquium of Indiana University faculty who had gathered to exchange tips about successful teaching. Each participant described a particular challenge and explained how he or she handled it. There are four main areas: General Teaching Tips, Student Motivation and Involvement, Philosophies of Teaching and Learning, and Discipline-Specific Ideas. Covered are such subjects as first days, teamwork, student boredom, classroom leadership, writing, ...
The first Quick Hits were collected in 1991 at a colloquium of Indiana University faculty who had gathered to exchange tips about successful teaching. Each participant described a particular challenge and explained how he or she handled it. There are four main areas: General Teaching Tips, Student Motivation and Involvement, Philosophies of Teaching and Learning, and Discipline-Specific Ideas. Covered are such subjects as first days, teamwork, student boredom, classroom leadership, writing, ...
Additional Info:
The first Quick Hits were collected in 1991 at a colloquium of Indiana University faculty who had gathered to exchange tips about successful teaching. Each participant described a particular challenge and explained how he or she handled it. There are four main areas: General Teaching Tips, Student Motivation and Involvement, Philosophies of Teaching and Learning, and Discipline-Specific Ideas. Covered are such subjects as first days, teamwork, student boredom, classroom leadership, writing, science, history, music...and much more. (From the Publisher)
The first Quick Hits were collected in 1991 at a colloquium of Indiana University faculty who had gathered to exchange tips about successful teaching. Each participant described a particular challenge and explained how he or she handled it. There are four main areas: General Teaching Tips, Student Motivation and Involvement, Philosophies of Teaching and Learning, and Discipline-Specific Ideas. Covered are such subjects as first days, teamwork, student boredom, classroom leadership, writing, science, history, music...and much more. (From the Publisher)

Teaching Well and Liking It: Motivating Faculty to Teach Effectively
Additional Info:
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the ...
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the ...
Additional Info:
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the modern university.
With college and university administrators worried about how to encourage faculty to devote energy to teaching, and students and their parents concerned that faculty are not dedicated to their teaching responsibilities, and faculty themselves feeling guilty and disappointed at their own failure to find satisfaction in teaching, the time is right for a book that explores the factors that inspire, nurture, and reward good teaching. Motivation, as volume editor James L. Bess points out, is a key factor when it comes to commitment, preparation, sustained effort, and performance in any work.
In fact, the effectiveness of any system of higher education is highly contingent on the quality of the teaching enterprise. What is learned, how much is learned, and progress in the psychosocial maturation of the student learner depend on the willingness of college and university faculty to devote long hours to all aspects of teaching. This collection of essays examines personal motivation to teach--both internal and external--as well as organizational conditions such as job characteristics, leadership, and student diversity, and system-wide conditions such as career phases, public policy, politics, and the vagaries of the academicmarketplace. It addresses the issues both theoretically and practically, drawing on the academic and hands-on experience of authors from many fields, including psychology, higher education, business, public policy, and sociology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Meaning of Human Motivation
ch. 2 Wanting to Be a Good Teacher: What Have We Learned to Date?
ch. 3 Beyond Male Theory: A Feminist Perspective on Teaching Motivation
ch. 4 Self-Determined Teaching: Opportunities and Obstacles
ch. 5 Intrinsic Motivation and Effective Teaching: A Flow Analysis
ch. 6 Behavior Modification in a Loosely Coupled System of Higher Education
ch. 7 Expectancy Theory Approaches to Faculty Motivation
ch. 8 Implications of Goal-Setting Theory for Faculty Motivation
ch. 9 Organizational Cultures and Faculty Motivation
ch. 10 Organization Design and Job Characteristics
ch. 11 Technology and Teaching Motivation
ch. 12 Leadership and Faculty Motivation
ch. 13 Student Diversity: Challenge and Potential for Faculty Motivation
ch. 14 Assessment and Evaluation Techniques
ch. 15 The Influence of Faculty Backgrounds on the Motivation to Teach
ch. 16 Career Phases and Their Effect on Faculty Motivation
ch. 17 The Academic Marketplace and the Motivation to Teach
ch. 18 Public Policy and Faculty Motivation
ch. 19 The Politics of Motivation: A Comparative Perspective
ch. 20 Fostering Faculty Motivation to Teach: Approaches to Faculty Development
ch. 21 The Motivation to Teach: Perennial Conundrums
Contributors
Name Index
Subject Index
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the modern university.
With college and university administrators worried about how to encourage faculty to devote energy to teaching, and students and their parents concerned that faculty are not dedicated to their teaching responsibilities, and faculty themselves feeling guilty and disappointed at their own failure to find satisfaction in teaching, the time is right for a book that explores the factors that inspire, nurture, and reward good teaching. Motivation, as volume editor James L. Bess points out, is a key factor when it comes to commitment, preparation, sustained effort, and performance in any work.
In fact, the effectiveness of any system of higher education is highly contingent on the quality of the teaching enterprise. What is learned, how much is learned, and progress in the psychosocial maturation of the student learner depend on the willingness of college and university faculty to devote long hours to all aspects of teaching. This collection of essays examines personal motivation to teach--both internal and external--as well as organizational conditions such as job characteristics, leadership, and student diversity, and system-wide conditions such as career phases, public policy, politics, and the vagaries of the academicmarketplace. It addresses the issues both theoretically and practically, drawing on the academic and hands-on experience of authors from many fields, including psychology, higher education, business, public policy, and sociology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Meaning of Human Motivation
ch. 2 Wanting to Be a Good Teacher: What Have We Learned to Date?
ch. 3 Beyond Male Theory: A Feminist Perspective on Teaching Motivation
ch. 4 Self-Determined Teaching: Opportunities and Obstacles
ch. 5 Intrinsic Motivation and Effective Teaching: A Flow Analysis
ch. 6 Behavior Modification in a Loosely Coupled System of Higher Education
ch. 7 Expectancy Theory Approaches to Faculty Motivation
ch. 8 Implications of Goal-Setting Theory for Faculty Motivation
ch. 9 Organizational Cultures and Faculty Motivation
ch. 10 Organization Design and Job Characteristics
ch. 11 Technology and Teaching Motivation
ch. 12 Leadership and Faculty Motivation
ch. 13 Student Diversity: Challenge and Potential for Faculty Motivation
ch. 14 Assessment and Evaluation Techniques
ch. 15 The Influence of Faculty Backgrounds on the Motivation to Teach
ch. 16 Career Phases and Their Effect on Faculty Motivation
ch. 17 The Academic Marketplace and the Motivation to Teach
ch. 18 Public Policy and Faculty Motivation
ch. 19 The Politics of Motivation: A Comparative Perspective
ch. 20 Fostering Faculty Motivation to Teach: Approaches to Faculty Development
ch. 21 The Motivation to Teach: Perennial Conundrums
Contributors
Name Index
Subject Index

Responsive Teaching: An Ecological Approach to Classroom Patterns of Culture, Language and Thought
Additional Info:
Responsive Teaching: An Ecological Approach to Classroom Patterns of Language, Culture, and Thought, the fourth title in this series, provides a conceptual basis for recognizing the classroom as an ecology of lingistic and cultural patterns that should be taken into account as part of the teacher's professional decision making. It argues that the orchestration of classroom behavior cannot be separated from the students primary culture. Chapters discuss the metaphorical nature ...
Responsive Teaching: An Ecological Approach to Classroom Patterns of Language, Culture, and Thought, the fourth title in this series, provides a conceptual basis for recognizing the classroom as an ecology of lingistic and cultural patterns that should be taken into account as part of the teacher's professional decision making. It argues that the orchestration of classroom behavior cannot be separated from the students primary culture. Chapters discuss the metaphorical nature ...
Additional Info:
Responsive Teaching: An Ecological Approach to Classroom Patterns of Language, Culture, and Thought, the fourth title in this series, provides a conceptual basis for recognizing the classroom as an ecology of lingistic and cultural patterns that should be taken into account as part of the teacher's professional decision making. It argues that the orchestration of classroom behavior cannot be separated from the students primary culture. Chapters discuss the metaphorical nature of language and thought, primary socialization, non-verbal communication, framing and social control, the classroom as an ecology of power, culturally responsive supervision, and educating teachers for the 21st century - all from a cultural and linguistic point of view.
The authors challenge the Cartesian tradition of viewing the student as a culture-free individual, and the classroom as a problem in management. They draw on Gregory Bateson's ideas help to illuminate student behavior as a form of communication about social relationships - one that relies heavily on culturally embedded patterns - and to reveal the classroom as a mental ecology where thought processes of others are encoded in the metaphorical language used to introduce new concepts. The book emphasizes that responsive teaching involves being sensitive to how the ecology of patterns (behavior and thought) reflects cultural differences and may be a source of miscommunication and alienation. (From the Publisher)
Responsive Teaching: An Ecological Approach to Classroom Patterns of Language, Culture, and Thought, the fourth title in this series, provides a conceptual basis for recognizing the classroom as an ecology of lingistic and cultural patterns that should be taken into account as part of the teacher's professional decision making. It argues that the orchestration of classroom behavior cannot be separated from the students primary culture. Chapters discuss the metaphorical nature of language and thought, primary socialization, non-verbal communication, framing and social control, the classroom as an ecology of power, culturally responsive supervision, and educating teachers for the 21st century - all from a cultural and linguistic point of view.
The authors challenge the Cartesian tradition of viewing the student as a culture-free individual, and the classroom as a problem in management. They draw on Gregory Bateson's ideas help to illuminate student behavior as a form of communication about social relationships - one that relies heavily on culturally embedded patterns - and to reveal the classroom as a mental ecology where thought processes of others are encoded in the metaphorical language used to introduce new concepts. The book emphasizes that responsive teaching involves being sensitive to how the ecology of patterns (behavior and thought) reflects cultural differences and may be a source of miscommunication and alienation. (From the Publisher)

Greening the College Curriculum: A Guide to Environmental Teaching in the Liberal Arts
Additional Info:
Greening the College Curriculum provides the tools college and university faculty need to meet personal and institutional goals for integrating environmental issues into the curriculum. Leading educators from a wide range of fields, including anthropology, biology, economics, geography, history, literature, journalism, philosophy, political science, and religion, describe their experience introducing environmental issues into their teaching. (From the Publisher)
Greening the College Curriculum provides the tools college and university faculty need to meet personal and institutional goals for integrating environmental issues into the curriculum. Leading educators from a wide range of fields, including anthropology, biology, economics, geography, history, literature, journalism, philosophy, political science, and religion, describe their experience introducing environmental issues into their teaching. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Greening the College Curriculum provides the tools college and university faculty need to meet personal and institutional goals for integrating environmental issues into the curriculum. Leading educators from a wide range of fields, including anthropology, biology, economics, geography, history, literature, journalism, philosophy, political science, and religion, describe their experience introducing environmental issues into their teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Jonathan Collett and Stephen Karakashian)
ch. 1 Reinventing Higher Education (David W. Orr)
ch. 2 Anthropology (William Balée)
ch. 3 Biology (David G. Campbell and Vern Durkee)
ch. 4 Economics (Gerald Alonzo Smith)
ch. 5 Geography (Lisa Naughton-Treves and Emily Young)
ch. 6 History (John Opie and Michael Black)
ch. 7 Literature (Vernon Owen Grumbling)
ch. 8 Media and Journalism (Karl Grossman and Ann Filemyr)
ch. 9 Philosophy (Holmes Rolston III)
ch. 10 Political Science (Michael E. Kraft)
ch. 11 Religion (Steven C. Rockefeller)
ch. 12 Reinventing the Classroom: Connected Teaching (Jonathan Collett)
Contributors
Greening the College Curriculum provides the tools college and university faculty need to meet personal and institutional goals for integrating environmental issues into the curriculum. Leading educators from a wide range of fields, including anthropology, biology, economics, geography, history, literature, journalism, philosophy, political science, and religion, describe their experience introducing environmental issues into their teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Jonathan Collett and Stephen Karakashian)
ch. 1 Reinventing Higher Education (David W. Orr)
ch. 2 Anthropology (William Balée)
ch. 3 Biology (David G. Campbell and Vern Durkee)
ch. 4 Economics (Gerald Alonzo Smith)
ch. 5 Geography (Lisa Naughton-Treves and Emily Young)
ch. 6 History (John Opie and Michael Black)
ch. 7 Literature (Vernon Owen Grumbling)
ch. 8 Media and Journalism (Karl Grossman and Ann Filemyr)
ch. 9 Philosophy (Holmes Rolston III)
ch. 10 Political Science (Michael E. Kraft)
ch. 11 Religion (Steven C. Rockefeller)
ch. 12 Reinventing the Classroom: Connected Teaching (Jonathan Collett)
Contributors

Gendered Subjects: The Dynamics of Feminist Teaching
Additional Info:
Two decades after the first Women's Studies courses appeared on campuses in the US, feminist research and teaching are now thriving around the world. The editors of this book provide a rich sample of theoretical and practical reflections on classroom experience by teachers of Women's Studies over the past ten years, raising provocative questions which apply broadly to many areas of progressive teaching. The collection features new, unpublished and original ...
Two decades after the first Women's Studies courses appeared on campuses in the US, feminist research and teaching are now thriving around the world. The editors of this book provide a rich sample of theoretical and practical reflections on classroom experience by teachers of Women's Studies over the past ten years, raising provocative questions which apply broadly to many areas of progressive teaching. The collection features new, unpublished and original ...
Additional Info:
Two decades after the first Women's Studies courses appeared on campuses in the US, feminist research and teaching are now thriving around the world. The editors of this book provide a rich sample of theoretical and practical reflections on classroom experience by teachers of Women's Studies over the past ten years, raising provocative questions which apply broadly to many areas of progressive teaching. The collection features new, unpublished and original work as well as a selection of the best articles to have appeared in recent years. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part one - Frameworks and definitions
ch. 1 The politics of nurturance
ch. 2 Taking women students seriously
ch. 3 Classroom pedagogy and the new scholarship on women
ch. 4 Women's studies - a knowledge of one's own
ch. 5 The educational process of Women's Studies in Argentina - reflections on theory and technique
Part two - Transforming the disciplines
ch. 6 Feminist pedagogy as subversive activity
ch. 7 Teaching mediation - a feminist perspective on the study of law
ch. 8 Staging the feminist classroom - a theoretical model
Part three - Teaching as other
ch. 9 Pink elephants - confessions of a black feminist in an all white, mostly male English department...
ch. 10 Is there room for me in the closet, or my life as the only lesbian professor
ch. 11 A male feminist in a women's college classroom
Part four - Experience as text
ch. 12 Breaking silences - life in the feminist classroom
ch. 13 Black-eyed blues connections - teaching black women
Part five - Theory as text
ch. 14 Suspicious pleasures - on teaching feminist theory
ch. 15 The spectacle of gender - cinema and psyche
ch. 16 Mastery, identity and the politics of work - a feminist teacher in the graduate classroom
Part six - Authority and affect
ch. 17 Authority in the feminist classroom - a contradiction in terms?
ch. 18 Anger and authority in the introductory Women's Studies classroom
Part seven - Communication across differences
ch. 19 How racial differences helped us discover our common ground
ch. 20 Toward a pedagogy of Everywoman's Studies
ch. 21 Combating the marginalization of black women in the classroom
ch. 22 Teaching the feminist minority
Pedagogy of the oppressors?
Bibliography
Index
Two decades after the first Women's Studies courses appeared on campuses in the US, feminist research and teaching are now thriving around the world. The editors of this book provide a rich sample of theoretical and practical reflections on classroom experience by teachers of Women's Studies over the past ten years, raising provocative questions which apply broadly to many areas of progressive teaching. The collection features new, unpublished and original work as well as a selection of the best articles to have appeared in recent years. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part one - Frameworks and definitions
ch. 1 The politics of nurturance
ch. 2 Taking women students seriously
ch. 3 Classroom pedagogy and the new scholarship on women
ch. 4 Women's studies - a knowledge of one's own
ch. 5 The educational process of Women's Studies in Argentina - reflections on theory and technique
Part two - Transforming the disciplines
ch. 6 Feminist pedagogy as subversive activity
ch. 7 Teaching mediation - a feminist perspective on the study of law
ch. 8 Staging the feminist classroom - a theoretical model
Part three - Teaching as other
ch. 9 Pink elephants - confessions of a black feminist in an all white, mostly male English department...
ch. 10 Is there room for me in the closet, or my life as the only lesbian professor
ch. 11 A male feminist in a women's college classroom
Part four - Experience as text
ch. 12 Breaking silences - life in the feminist classroom
ch. 13 Black-eyed blues connections - teaching black women
Part five - Theory as text
ch. 14 Suspicious pleasures - on teaching feminist theory
ch. 15 The spectacle of gender - cinema and psyche
ch. 16 Mastery, identity and the politics of work - a feminist teacher in the graduate classroom
Part six - Authority and affect
ch. 17 Authority in the feminist classroom - a contradiction in terms?
ch. 18 Anger and authority in the introductory Women's Studies classroom
Part seven - Communication across differences
ch. 19 How racial differences helped us discover our common ground
ch. 20 Toward a pedagogy of Everywoman's Studies
ch. 21 Combating the marginalization of black women in the classroom
ch. 22 Teaching the feminist minority
Pedagogy of the oppressors?
Bibliography
Index


Tools for Teaching
Additional Info:
A rich compendium of classroom-tested strategies and suggestions designed to improve the teaching practice of beginning, mid-career, and senior faculty members. Forty-nine teaching tools cover both traditional tasks, writing a course syllabus, delivering a lecture and newer, broader concerns, such as responding to diversity, and using technology. (From the Publisher)
A rich compendium of classroom-tested strategies and suggestions designed to improve the teaching practice of beginning, mid-career, and senior faculty members. Forty-nine teaching tools cover both traditional tasks, writing a course syllabus, delivering a lecture and newer, broader concerns, such as responding to diversity, and using technology. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A rich compendium of classroom-tested strategies and suggestions designed to improve the teaching practice of beginning, mid-career, and senior faculty members. Forty-nine teaching tools cover both traditional tasks, writing a course syllabus, delivering a lecture and newer, broader concerns, such as responding to diversity, and using technology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Preparing or Revising a Course
ch. 2 The Course Syllabus
ch. 3 The First Day of Class
ch. 4 Academic Accommodations for Students with Disabilities
ch. 5 Diversity and Complexity in the Classroom: Considerations of Race, Ethnicity, and Gender
ch. 6 Reentry Students
ch. 7 Teaching Academically Diverse Students
ch. 8 Leading a Discussion
ch. 9 Encouraging Student Participation in Discussion
ch. 10 Asking Questions
ch. 11 Fielding Students' Questions
ch. 12 Preparing to Teach the Large Lecture Course
ch. 13 Delivering a Lecture
ch. 14 Explaining Clearly
ch. 15 Personalizing the Large Lecture Class
ch. 16 Supplements and Alternatives to Lecturing: Encouraging Student Participation
ch. 17 Maintaining Instructional Quality with Limited Resources
ch. 18 Collaborative Learning: Group Work and Study Teams
ch. 19 Role Playing and Case Studies
ch. 20 Fieldwork
ch. 21 Helping Students Learn
ch. 22 Learning Styles and Preferences
ch. 23 Motivating Students
ch. 24 Helping Students Write Better in All Courses
ch. 25 Designing Effective Writing Assignments
ch. 26 Evaluating Students' Written Work
ch. 27 Homework: Problem Sets
ch. 28 Quizzes, Tests, and Exams
ch. 29 Allaying Students' Anxieties About Tests
ch. 30 Multiple-Choice and Matching Tests
ch. 31 Short-Answer and Essay Tests
ch. 32 Grading Practices
ch. 33 Calculating and Assigning Grades
ch. 34 Preventing Academic Dishonesty
ch. 35 Chalkboards
ch. 36 Flipcharts
ch. 37 Transparencies and Overhead Projectors
ch. 38 Slides
ch. 39 Films and Videotapes
ch. 40 Computers and Multimedia
ch. 41 Fast Feedback
ch. 42 Watching Yourself on Videotape
ch. 43 Self-Evaluation and the Teaching Dossier
ch. 44 Holding Office Hours
ch. 45 Academic Advising and Mentoring Undergraduates
ch. 46 Guiding, Training, and Supervising Graduate Student Instructors
ch. 47 The Last Days of Class
ch. 48 Student Rating Forms
ch. 49 Writing Letters of Recommendation
Index
A rich compendium of classroom-tested strategies and suggestions designed to improve the teaching practice of beginning, mid-career, and senior faculty members. Forty-nine teaching tools cover both traditional tasks, writing a course syllabus, delivering a lecture and newer, broader concerns, such as responding to diversity, and using technology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Preparing or Revising a Course
ch. 2 The Course Syllabus
ch. 3 The First Day of Class
ch. 4 Academic Accommodations for Students with Disabilities
ch. 5 Diversity and Complexity in the Classroom: Considerations of Race, Ethnicity, and Gender
ch. 6 Reentry Students
ch. 7 Teaching Academically Diverse Students
ch. 8 Leading a Discussion
ch. 9 Encouraging Student Participation in Discussion
ch. 10 Asking Questions
ch. 11 Fielding Students' Questions
ch. 12 Preparing to Teach the Large Lecture Course
ch. 13 Delivering a Lecture
ch. 14 Explaining Clearly
ch. 15 Personalizing the Large Lecture Class
ch. 16 Supplements and Alternatives to Lecturing: Encouraging Student Participation
ch. 17 Maintaining Instructional Quality with Limited Resources
ch. 18 Collaborative Learning: Group Work and Study Teams
ch. 19 Role Playing and Case Studies
ch. 20 Fieldwork
ch. 21 Helping Students Learn
ch. 22 Learning Styles and Preferences
ch. 23 Motivating Students
ch. 24 Helping Students Write Better in All Courses
ch. 25 Designing Effective Writing Assignments
ch. 26 Evaluating Students' Written Work
ch. 27 Homework: Problem Sets
ch. 28 Quizzes, Tests, and Exams
ch. 29 Allaying Students' Anxieties About Tests
ch. 30 Multiple-Choice and Matching Tests
ch. 31 Short-Answer and Essay Tests
ch. 32 Grading Practices
ch. 33 Calculating and Assigning Grades
ch. 34 Preventing Academic Dishonesty
ch. 35 Chalkboards
ch. 36 Flipcharts
ch. 37 Transparencies and Overhead Projectors
ch. 38 Slides
ch. 39 Films and Videotapes
ch. 40 Computers and Multimedia
ch. 41 Fast Feedback
ch. 42 Watching Yourself on Videotape
ch. 43 Self-Evaluation and the Teaching Dossier
ch. 44 Holding Office Hours
ch. 45 Academic Advising and Mentoring Undergraduates
ch. 46 Guiding, Training, and Supervising Graduate Student Instructors
ch. 47 The Last Days of Class
ch. 48 Student Rating Forms
ch. 49 Writing Letters of Recommendation
Index

Recognizing Faculty Work: Reward Systems for the Year 2000
Additional Info:
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward ...
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward ...
Additional Info:
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward structures are illustrated. Reference materials from scholarly associations and accreditation agencies are included to demonstrate disciplinary perspectives. A model for change is presented along with criteria for assessing a promotion and tenure system. A professional portfolio to document the work of faculty is also described. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Changing Priorities and the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 2 Instituting Change in the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 3 Differences Among the Disciplines (Bronwyn E. Adam, Alton O. Roberts)
ch. 4 Institutional Approaches to the Issues of Reward and Scholarship (Alton O. Roberts, Jon F. Wergin, Bronwyn E. Adam)
ch. 5 Revitalizing Faculty Work Through Intrinsic Rewards (Robert C. Froh, Robert J. Menges, Charles J. Walker)
ch. 6 Representing Faculty Work: The Professional Portfolio (Robert C. Froh, Peter J. Gray, Leo M. Lambert)
Appendix: Departmental Statements on Faculty Rewards
Index
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward structures are illustrated. Reference materials from scholarly associations and accreditation agencies are included to demonstrate disciplinary perspectives. A model for change is presented along with criteria for assessing a promotion and tenure system. A professional portfolio to document the work of faculty is also described. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Changing Priorities and the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 2 Instituting Change in the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 3 Differences Among the Disciplines (Bronwyn E. Adam, Alton O. Roberts)
ch. 4 Institutional Approaches to the Issues of Reward and Scholarship (Alton O. Roberts, Jon F. Wergin, Bronwyn E. Adam)
ch. 5 Revitalizing Faculty Work Through Intrinsic Rewards (Robert C. Froh, Robert J. Menges, Charles J. Walker)
ch. 6 Representing Faculty Work: The Professional Portfolio (Robert C. Froh, Peter J. Gray, Leo M. Lambert)
Appendix: Departmental Statements on Faculty Rewards
Index

The Gender Question in Education: Theory, Pedagogy and Politics
Additional Info:
Four leading philosophers of education offer a sophisticated but accessible introduction to the central debates about the role of gender in educational practice, policymaking, and theory. (From the Publisher)
Four leading philosophers of education offer a sophisticated but accessible introduction to the central debates about the role of gender in educational practice, policymaking, and theory. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Four leading philosophers of education offer a sophisticated but accessible introduction to the central debates about the role of gender in educational practice, policymaking, and theory. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 A Conceptual Analysis of Sexism and Sexist Education
ch. 2 Genderized Education: Tradition Reconsidered
ch. 3 Freeing the Children: The Abolition of Gender
ch. 4 Gender Freedom and the Subtleties of Sexist Education
ch. 5 The Androgynous Classroom: Liberation or Tyranny?
ch. 6 Theorizing Gender: How Much of It Do We Need?
ch. 7 The Ethics of Care and Education: A New Paradigm, Its Critics, and Its Educational Significance
ch. 8 Describing the Emperor's New Clothes: Three Myths of Educational (In-)Equity
ch. 9 The Perils and Paradoxes of the Bearded Mothers
ch. 10 Is Rapprochement Possible Between Educational Criticism and Nurturance?
ch. 11 Role Models: Help or Hindrance in the Pursuit of Autonomy?
ch. 12 An Ethics of Care Takes On Pluralism
ch. 13 The Moral Politics of Sex Education
ch. 14 Women's Physical Education: A Gender-Sensitive Perspective
ch. 15 Political Correctness: The Debate Continues
References
About the Book and Authors
Index
Four leading philosophers of education offer a sophisticated but accessible introduction to the central debates about the role of gender in educational practice, policymaking, and theory. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 A Conceptual Analysis of Sexism and Sexist Education
ch. 2 Genderized Education: Tradition Reconsidered
ch. 3 Freeing the Children: The Abolition of Gender
ch. 4 Gender Freedom and the Subtleties of Sexist Education
ch. 5 The Androgynous Classroom: Liberation or Tyranny?
ch. 6 Theorizing Gender: How Much of It Do We Need?
ch. 7 The Ethics of Care and Education: A New Paradigm, Its Critics, and Its Educational Significance
ch. 8 Describing the Emperor's New Clothes: Three Myths of Educational (In-)Equity
ch. 9 The Perils and Paradoxes of the Bearded Mothers
ch. 10 Is Rapprochement Possible Between Educational Criticism and Nurturance?
ch. 11 Role Models: Help or Hindrance in the Pursuit of Autonomy?
ch. 12 An Ethics of Care Takes On Pluralism
ch. 13 The Moral Politics of Sex Education
ch. 14 Women's Physical Education: A Gender-Sensitive Perspective
ch. 15 Political Correctness: The Debate Continues
References
About the Book and Authors
Index

The Fragility of Knowledge: Theological Education in the Church and the University
Additional Info:
In a sequel to his 1983 work, Theologia, Farley develops a conceptual apparatus for re-thinking the structure of theological education in church, seminary, and university which is unified by a hermeneutical approach. He defines this approach as acts of interpretation which yield understanding, and argues that it requires ordered learning and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
In a sequel to his 1983 work, Theologia, Farley develops a conceptual apparatus for re-thinking the structure of theological education in church, seminary, and university which is unified by a hermeneutical approach. He defines this approach as acts of interpretation which yield understanding, and argues that it requires ordered learning and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In a sequel to his 1983 work, Theologia, Farley develops a conceptual apparatus for re-thinking the structure of theological education in church, seminary, and university which is unified by a hermeneutical approach. He defines this approach as acts of interpretation which yield understanding, and argues that it requires ordered learning and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 - Theology and University education
ch. 1 The Fragility of knowledge - hermeneutic paradigms in the enlightenment tradition
ch. 2 The Fragility of knowledge - The corruption and redemption of knowledge
ch. 3 The Fragmentation of Knowledge - Specialty fields and the university
ch. 4 The place of theology in the study of religion
Part 2 - The Study of Theology
ch. 5 Can Church education be theological education?
ch. 6 The structure of theological study - reformulating the problem
ch. 7 The structure of theological study - mapping the terrain
ch. 8 The structure of theological study - disciplines and curricula
In a sequel to his 1983 work, Theologia, Farley develops a conceptual apparatus for re-thinking the structure of theological education in church, seminary, and university which is unified by a hermeneutical approach. He defines this approach as acts of interpretation which yield understanding, and argues that it requires ordered learning and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 - Theology and University education
ch. 1 The Fragility of knowledge - hermeneutic paradigms in the enlightenment tradition
ch. 2 The Fragility of knowledge - The corruption and redemption of knowledge
ch. 3 The Fragmentation of Knowledge - Specialty fields and the university
ch. 4 The place of theology in the study of religion
Part 2 - The Study of Theology
ch. 5 Can Church education be theological education?
ch. 6 The structure of theological study - reformulating the problem
ch. 7 The structure of theological study - mapping the terrain
ch. 8 The structure of theological study - disciplines and curricula

Theologia: The Fragmentation and Unity of Theological Education
Additional Info:
Farley points to a series of developments in theological education which have led to the loss of a defining theological vision. Theology used to be, and still ought to be "not just objective science, but a personal knowledge of God and the things of God." (From the Publisher)
Farley points to a series of developments in theological education which have led to the loss of a defining theological vision. Theology used to be, and still ought to be "not just objective science, but a personal knowledge of God and the things of God." (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Farley points to a series of developments in theological education which have led to the loss of a defining theological vision. Theology used to be, and still ought to be "not just objective science, but a personal knowledge of God and the things of God." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 - The displacement of Theologia
ch. 1 Theologia - the History of a Concept From 'the study of theology' to theological encyclopedia
ch. 2 Schleiermacher and the beginning of the encyclopedic movement
ch. 3 The triumph of the fourfold pattern
Part 2 - Issues and elements for a reform-oriented conversation
ch. 4 A critique of the fourfold pattern
ch. 5 The recovery of Theologia
ch. 6 Theologia in clergy education
Farley points to a series of developments in theological education which have led to the loss of a defining theological vision. Theology used to be, and still ought to be "not just objective science, but a personal knowledge of God and the things of God." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 - The displacement of Theologia
ch. 1 Theologia - the History of a Concept From 'the study of theology' to theological encyclopedia
ch. 2 Schleiermacher and the beginning of the encyclopedic movement
ch. 3 The triumph of the fourfold pattern
Part 2 - Issues and elements for a reform-oriented conversation
ch. 4 A critique of the fourfold pattern
ch. 5 The recovery of Theologia
ch. 6 Theologia in clergy education

Black Teachers On Teaching
Additional Info:
Black Teachers on Teaching is a riveting and honest portrait of the politics and philosophies of the education of black children over the last fifty years. Foster, a leading expert on black educators and the history of black education, has interviewed pioneering teachers from across the country. In presenting their experiences, black teachers go on the record about mixed-race classrooms, the losses and gains accompanying desegregation, repeated cycles of attempted ...
Black Teachers on Teaching is a riveting and honest portrait of the politics and philosophies of the education of black children over the last fifty years. Foster, a leading expert on black educators and the history of black education, has interviewed pioneering teachers from across the country. In presenting their experiences, black teachers go on the record about mixed-race classrooms, the losses and gains accompanying desegregation, repeated cycles of attempted ...
Additional Info:
Black Teachers on Teaching is a riveting and honest portrait of the politics and philosophies of the education of black children over the last fifty years. Foster, a leading expert on black educators and the history of black education, has interviewed pioneering teachers from across the country. In presenting their experiences, black teachers go on the record about mixed-race classrooms, the losses and gains accompanying desegregation, repeated cycles of attempted and abandoned reform efforts, and the differing attitudes toward and perceptions of black students among black and white teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Part I The Elders
ch. 1 Everett Dawson
ch. 2 Ora Benson
ch. 3 Ruby Middleton Forsythe
ch. 4 Madge Scott
ch. 5 Leroy Lovelace
ch. 6 Bernadine B. Morris
Part II The Veterans
ch. 7 Cheryl Thigpen
ch. 8 Ethel Tanner
ch. 9 Etta Joan Marks
ch. 10 Lorraine Lawrence
ch. 11 Edouard Plummer
ch. 12 Millicent Byard Gray
ch. 13 Pamela Otis Ogonu
ch. 14 Lerone Swift
ch. 15 Joelle Vanderall
ch. 16 Louise Mason
ch. 17 Bobbie Duvon
ch. 18 Mabel Bettie Moss
Part III The Novices
ch. 19 Leonard Collins
ch. 20 Ashallah Williams
Black Teachers on Teaching is a riveting and honest portrait of the politics and philosophies of the education of black children over the last fifty years. Foster, a leading expert on black educators and the history of black education, has interviewed pioneering teachers from across the country. In presenting their experiences, black teachers go on the record about mixed-race classrooms, the losses and gains accompanying desegregation, repeated cycles of attempted and abandoned reform efforts, and the differing attitudes toward and perceptions of black students among black and white teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Part I The Elders
ch. 1 Everett Dawson
ch. 2 Ora Benson
ch. 3 Ruby Middleton Forsythe
ch. 4 Madge Scott
ch. 5 Leroy Lovelace
ch. 6 Bernadine B. Morris
Part II The Veterans
ch. 7 Cheryl Thigpen
ch. 8 Ethel Tanner
ch. 9 Etta Joan Marks
ch. 10 Lorraine Lawrence
ch. 11 Edouard Plummer
ch. 12 Millicent Byard Gray
ch. 13 Pamela Otis Ogonu
ch. 14 Lerone Swift
ch. 15 Joelle Vanderall
ch. 16 Louise Mason
ch. 17 Bobbie Duvon
ch. 18 Mabel Bettie Moss
Part III The Novices
ch. 19 Leonard Collins
ch. 20 Ashallah Williams


Pedagogy of the Oppressed
Additional Info:
This text argues that the ignorance and lethargy of the poor are the direct result of the whole economic, social and political domination. By being kept in a situation in which it is practically impossible to achieve a critical awareness and response the disadvantaged are kept "submerged". The book suggests that in some countries the oppressors use the system to maintain this "culture of silence". Through the right kind of ...
This text argues that the ignorance and lethargy of the poor are the direct result of the whole economic, social and political domination. By being kept in a situation in which it is practically impossible to achieve a critical awareness and response the disadvantaged are kept "submerged". The book suggests that in some countries the oppressors use the system to maintain this "culture of silence". Through the right kind of ...
Additional Info:
This text argues that the ignorance and lethargy of the poor are the direct result of the whole economic, social and political domination. By being kept in a situation in which it is practically impossible to achieve a critical awareness and response the disadvantaged are kept "submerged". The book suggests that in some countries the oppressors use the system to maintain this "culture of silence". Through the right kind of education, the book suggests, avoiding authoritarian teacher-pupil models and based on the actual experiences of students and on continual shared investigation, every human being, no matter how impoverished or illiterate, can develop a new awareness of self, and the right to be heard. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Publisher's Foreword
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 The justification for a pedagogy of the oppressed; the contradiction between the oppressors and the oppressed, and how it is overcome; oppression and the oppressors; oppression and the oppressed; liberation: not a gift, not a self-achievement, but a mutual process.
ch. 2 The "banking" concept of education as an instrument of oppression - its presuppositions - a critique; the problem-posing concept of education as an instrument for liberation - its presuppositions; the "banking" concept and the teacher-student contradiction; the problem-posing concept and the supersedence of the teacher-student contradiction; education: a mutual process, world-mediated; people as uncompleted beings, conscious of their incompletion, and their attempt to be more fully human.
ch. 3 Dialogics - the essence of education as the practice of freedom; dialogics and dialogue; dialogue and the search for program content; the human-world relationship, "generative themes," and the program content of education as the practice of freedom; the investigation of "generative themes" and its methodology; the awakening of critical consciousness through the investigation of "generative themes"; the various stages of the investigation.
ch. 4 Antidialogics and dialogics as matrices of opposing theories of cultural action: the former as an instrument of oppression and the latter as an instrument of liberation; the theory of antidialogical action and its characteristics: conquest, divide and rule, manipulation, and cultural invasion; the theory of dialogical action and its characteristics: cooperation, unity, organization, and cultural synthesis.
This text argues that the ignorance and lethargy of the poor are the direct result of the whole economic, social and political domination. By being kept in a situation in which it is practically impossible to achieve a critical awareness and response the disadvantaged are kept "submerged". The book suggests that in some countries the oppressors use the system to maintain this "culture of silence". Through the right kind of education, the book suggests, avoiding authoritarian teacher-pupil models and based on the actual experiences of students and on continual shared investigation, every human being, no matter how impoverished or illiterate, can develop a new awareness of self, and the right to be heard. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Publisher's Foreword
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 The justification for a pedagogy of the oppressed; the contradiction between the oppressors and the oppressed, and how it is overcome; oppression and the oppressors; oppression and the oppressed; liberation: not a gift, not a self-achievement, but a mutual process.
ch. 2 The "banking" concept of education as an instrument of oppression - its presuppositions - a critique; the problem-posing concept of education as an instrument for liberation - its presuppositions; the "banking" concept and the teacher-student contradiction; the problem-posing concept and the supersedence of the teacher-student contradiction; education: a mutual process, world-mediated; people as uncompleted beings, conscious of their incompletion, and their attempt to be more fully human.
ch. 3 Dialogics - the essence of education as the practice of freedom; dialogics and dialogue; dialogue and the search for program content; the human-world relationship, "generative themes," and the program content of education as the practice of freedom; the investigation of "generative themes" and its methodology; the awakening of critical consciousness through the investigation of "generative themes"; the various stages of the investigation.
ch. 4 Antidialogics and dialogics as matrices of opposing theories of cultural action: the former as an instrument of oppression and the latter as an instrument of liberation; the theory of antidialogical action and its characteristics: conquest, divide and rule, manipulation, and cultural invasion; the theory of dialogical action and its characteristics: cooperation, unity, organization, and cultural synthesis.

Learning to Question: A Pedagogy of Liberation
Additional Info:
This book is a conversation between Antonio Faundez and Paulo Freire. They discuss their work in the Portugese speaking countries of Africa (Guinea-Bissau, Mazambique, Angola) and their attempts to apply the principles of empowerment through literacy that is their trademark. (From the Publisher)
This book is a conversation between Antonio Faundez and Paulo Freire. They discuss their work in the Portugese speaking countries of Africa (Guinea-Bissau, Mazambique, Angola) and their attempts to apply the principles of empowerment through literacy that is their trademark. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book is a conversation between Antonio Faundez and Paulo Freire. They discuss their work in the Portugese speaking countries of Africa (Guinea-Bissau, Mazambique, Angola) and their attempts to apply the principles of empowerment through literacy that is their trademark. (From the Publisher)
This book is a conversation between Antonio Faundez and Paulo Freire. They discuss their work in the Portugese speaking countries of Africa (Guinea-Bissau, Mazambique, Angola) and their attempts to apply the principles of empowerment through literacy that is their trademark. (From the Publisher)

Creating a Learning Society: Initiatives for Education and Technology
Additional Info:
The Aspen Institute's Forum on Communications and Society (FOCAS) is a group of chief executive officers or their equivalents from business, government and the nonprofit sector who meet annually to suggest innovative ways that business, government, and the nonprofit sector can collaborate to use communications and information goods and services for the betterment of society. This report incorporates the work of FOCAS members and their representatives to address specific issues ...
The Aspen Institute's Forum on Communications and Society (FOCAS) is a group of chief executive officers or their equivalents from business, government and the nonprofit sector who meet annually to suggest innovative ways that business, government, and the nonprofit sector can collaborate to use communications and information goods and services for the betterment of society. This report incorporates the work of FOCAS members and their representatives to address specific issues ...
Additional Info:
The Aspen Institute's Forum on Communications and Society (FOCAS) is a group of chief executive officers or their equivalents from business, government and the nonprofit sector who meet annually to suggest innovative ways that business, government, and the nonprofit sector can collaborate to use communications and information goods and services for the betterment of society. This report incorporates the work of FOCAS members and their representatives to address specific issues of technology in the K-12 classroom, as well as broader issues of lifelong learning and technology outside the classroom. In particular, the report offers a range of initiatives for overcoming the barriers to funding the implementation of technology in schools and training teachers how to integrate technology in the classroom. Emphasis is placed on the creation of incentives for students and educators to use technology to enhance learning. The body of the report is divided into three main sections. The first section discusses learning and technology; the changing paradigm for learning; the challenge of universal access; the potential of educational technology; technology needs of American schools; barriers to equitable access; and the need for collaboration. The second section focuses on promoting equitable access to technology in the classroom; critical issues of funding; networking the classroom; creating a responsive local technology demand and delivery system; teacher support and training; and promoting public support. The third section discusses technology and learning outside the classroom; the need for a new learning environment; barriers to lifelong learning; public attitudes toward education/learning; the role of technology; developing community-based resources for learning; and building a society that values lifelong learning. Appendices include Societal Goals Working Group Report, FOCAS representatives and resources, and the Aspen Institute Communications and Society Program. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Report
Part 1- Learning and technology
Part 2 - Promoting equitable access to technology in the classroom
Teacher support and training
Promoting public support
Part 3 - Technology and learning outside the classroom
Endnotes
Appendices
The Aspen Institute's Forum on Communications and Society (FOCAS) is a group of chief executive officers or their equivalents from business, government and the nonprofit sector who meet annually to suggest innovative ways that business, government, and the nonprofit sector can collaborate to use communications and information goods and services for the betterment of society. This report incorporates the work of FOCAS members and their representatives to address specific issues of technology in the K-12 classroom, as well as broader issues of lifelong learning and technology outside the classroom. In particular, the report offers a range of initiatives for overcoming the barriers to funding the implementation of technology in schools and training teachers how to integrate technology in the classroom. Emphasis is placed on the creation of incentives for students and educators to use technology to enhance learning. The body of the report is divided into three main sections. The first section discusses learning and technology; the changing paradigm for learning; the challenge of universal access; the potential of educational technology; technology needs of American schools; barriers to equitable access; and the need for collaboration. The second section focuses on promoting equitable access to technology in the classroom; critical issues of funding; networking the classroom; creating a responsive local technology demand and delivery system; teacher support and training; and promoting public support. The third section discusses technology and learning outside the classroom; the need for a new learning environment; barriers to lifelong learning; public attitudes toward education/learning; the role of technology; developing community-based resources for learning; and building a society that values lifelong learning. Appendices include Societal Goals Working Group Report, FOCAS representatives and resources, and the Aspen Institute Communications and Society Program. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Report
Part 1- Learning and technology
Part 2 - Promoting equitable access to technology in the classroom
Teacher support and training
Promoting public support
Part 3 - Technology and learning outside the classroom
Endnotes
Appendices

Pedagogy and the Politics of Hope
Additional Info:
Henry A. Giroux is one of the most respected and well-known critical education scholars, social critics, and astute observers of popular culture in the modern world. For those who follow his considerably influential work in critical pedagogy and social criticism, this first-ever collection of his classic writings, augmented by a new essay, is a must-have volume that reveals his evolution as a scholar. In it, he takes on three major ...
Henry A. Giroux is one of the most respected and well-known critical education scholars, social critics, and astute observers of popular culture in the modern world. For those who follow his considerably influential work in critical pedagogy and social criticism, this first-ever collection of his classic writings, augmented by a new essay, is a must-have volume that reveals his evolution as a scholar. In it, he takes on three major ...
Additional Info:
Henry A. Giroux is one of the most respected and well-known critical education scholars, social critics, and astute observers of popular culture in the modern world. For those who follow his considerably influential work in critical pedagogy and social criticism, this first-ever collection of his classic writings, augmented by a new essay, is a must-have volume that reveals his evolution as a scholar. In it, he takes on three major considerations central to pedagogy and schooling. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editors' Foreword
ch. 1 Schooling and the Culture of Positivism: Notes on the Death of History
ch. 2 Culture and Rationality in Frankfurt School Thought: Ideological Foundations for a Theory of Social Education
ch. 3 Ideology and Agency in the Process of Schooling
ch. 4 Authority, Intellectuals, and the Politics of Practical Learning
ch. 5 Radical Pedagogy and the Politics of Student Voice
ch. 6 Border Pedagogy in the Age of Postmodernism
ch. 7 Disturbing the Peace: Writing in the Cultural Studies Classroom
ch. 8 Rethinking the Boundaries of Educational Discourse: Modernism, Postmodernism, and Feminism
ch. 9 Insurgent Multiculturalism and the Promise of Pedagogy
ch. 10 Public Intellectuals and the Culture of Reaganism in the 1990s
List of Credits
About the Book and Author
Index
Henry A. Giroux is one of the most respected and well-known critical education scholars, social critics, and astute observers of popular culture in the modern world. For those who follow his considerably influential work in critical pedagogy and social criticism, this first-ever collection of his classic writings, augmented by a new essay, is a must-have volume that reveals his evolution as a scholar. In it, he takes on three major considerations central to pedagogy and schooling. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Editors' Foreword
ch. 1 Schooling and the Culture of Positivism: Notes on the Death of History
ch. 2 Culture and Rationality in Frankfurt School Thought: Ideological Foundations for a Theory of Social Education
ch. 3 Ideology and Agency in the Process of Schooling
ch. 4 Authority, Intellectuals, and the Politics of Practical Learning
ch. 5 Radical Pedagogy and the Politics of Student Voice
ch. 6 Border Pedagogy in the Age of Postmodernism
ch. 7 Disturbing the Peace: Writing in the Cultural Studies Classroom
ch. 8 Rethinking the Boundaries of Educational Discourse: Modernism, Postmodernism, and Feminism
ch. 9 Insurgent Multiculturalism and the Promise of Pedagogy
ch. 10 Public Intellectuals and the Culture of Reaganism in the 1990s
List of Credits
About the Book and Author
Index

Teachers as Intellectuals: Toward a Critical Pedagogy of Learning
Additional Info:
Teachers as Intellectuals is a book for all practitioners and all members of the general community. Giroux demands reader involvement, transformation, and empowerment. He helps understand that the political relationship between schools and society is neither artificial nor neutral nor necessarily negative. Rather, school personnel have a positive and dynamic political role to play. (From the Publisher)
Teachers as Intellectuals is a book for all practitioners and all members of the general community. Giroux demands reader involvement, transformation, and empowerment. He helps understand that the political relationship between schools and society is neither artificial nor neutral nor necessarily negative. Rather, school personnel have a positive and dynamic political role to play. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Teachers as Intellectuals is a book for all practitioners and all members of the general community. Giroux demands reader involvement, transformation, and empowerment. He helps understand that the political relationship between schools and society is neither artificial nor neutral nor necessarily negative. Rather, school personnel have a positive and dynamic political role to play. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Rethinking the Language of Schooling
Rethinking in Language of Schooling
Toward a New Sociology of Curriculum
Social Education in the Classroom: The Dynamics of the Hidden Curriculum
Overcoming Behavioral and Humanistic Objectives
Literacy, Writing, and the Politics of Voice
Writing and Critical Thinking in the Social Studies
Mass Culture and the Rise of the New Illiteracy: Implications for Reading
Critical Pedagogy, Cultural Politics, and the Discourse of Experience
Culture, Power, and Transformation in the Work of Paulo Freire: Toward a Politics of Education
Teaching, Intellectual Work, and Education as Cultural Politics
Teachers as Transformative Intellectuals
Curriculum Study and Cultural Studies
The Need for Cultural Studies
Teacher Education and the Politics of Democratic Reform
Toward a Language of Critique and Possibility
Crisis and Possibilities in Education
Reproducing Reproduction: The Politics of Tracking
Antonio Gramsci
Solidarity, Ethics, and Possibility in Critical Education
Index
Teachers as Intellectuals is a book for all practitioners and all members of the general community. Giroux demands reader involvement, transformation, and empowerment. He helps understand that the political relationship between schools and society is neither artificial nor neutral nor necessarily negative. Rather, school personnel have a positive and dynamic political role to play. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Rethinking the Language of Schooling
Rethinking in Language of Schooling
Toward a New Sociology of Curriculum
Social Education in the Classroom: The Dynamics of the Hidden Curriculum
Overcoming Behavioral and Humanistic Objectives
Literacy, Writing, and the Politics of Voice
Writing and Critical Thinking in the Social Studies
Mass Culture and the Rise of the New Illiteracy: Implications for Reading
Critical Pedagogy, Cultural Politics, and the Discourse of Experience
Culture, Power, and Transformation in the Work of Paulo Freire: Toward a Politics of Education
Teaching, Intellectual Work, and Education as Cultural Politics
Teachers as Transformative Intellectuals
Curriculum Study and Cultural Studies
The Need for Cultural Studies
Teacher Education and the Politics of Democratic Reform
Toward a Language of Critique and Possibility
Crisis and Possibilities in Education
Reproducing Reproduction: The Politics of Tracking
Antonio Gramsci
Solidarity, Ethics, and Possibility in Critical Education
Index

Postmodernism, Feminism, and Cultural Politics: Redrawing Educational Boundaries
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction Modernism, Postmodernism, and Feminism: Rethinking the Boundaries of Educational Discourse (Henry A. Giroux)
ch. 1 Reading Images Critically: Toward a Postmodern Pedagogy (Douglas Kellner)
ch. 2 An Ethic of Solidarity and Difference (Sharon Welch)
ch. 3 Presence of Mind in the Absence of Body (Linda Brodkey and Michelle Fine)
ch. 4 Raging Hormones and Powerful Cars: The Construction of Men's Sexuality in School Sex Education and Popular Adolescent Films (Mariamne H. Whatley)
ch. 5 Schooling the Postmodern Body: Critical Pedagogy and the Politics of Enfleshment (Peter L. McLaren)
ch. 6 Women Dancing Back: Disruption and the Politics of Pleasure (Leslie Gotfrit)
ch. 7 The Making of the Boy: Meditations on What Grammar School Did With, To, and For My Body (Philip R. D. Corrigan)
ch. 8 Postmodernism as Border Pedagogy: Redefining the Boundaries of Race and Ethnicity (Henry A. Giroux)
Notes and References
Index
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction Modernism, Postmodernism, and Feminism: Rethinking the Boundaries of Educational Discourse (Henry A. Giroux)
ch. 1 Reading Images Critically: Toward a Postmodern Pedagogy (Douglas Kellner)
ch. 2 An Ethic of Solidarity and Difference (Sharon Welch)
ch. 3 Presence of Mind in the Absence of Body (Linda Brodkey and Michelle Fine)
ch. 4 Raging Hormones and Powerful Cars: The Construction of Men's Sexuality in School Sex Education and Popular Adolescent Films (Mariamne H. Whatley)
ch. 5 Schooling the Postmodern Body: Critical Pedagogy and the Politics of Enfleshment (Peter L. McLaren)
ch. 6 Women Dancing Back: Disruption and the Politics of Pleasure (Leslie Gotfrit)
ch. 7 The Making of the Boy: Meditations on What Grammar School Did With, To, and For My Body (Philip R. D. Corrigan)
ch. 8 Postmodernism as Border Pedagogy: Redefining the Boundaries of Race and Ethnicity (Henry A. Giroux)
Notes and References
Index

A Practical Guide to Alternative Assessment
Additional Info:
Joan Herman, Pamela Aschbacher, and Lynn Winters offer cogent guidance on the creation and use of alternative measures of student achievement. They present a systemic and iterative process model that links assessment with decisions affecting curriculum and instruction, according to developmental theories of learning and cognition.
The authors review the purposes of assessment and provide a substantive rationale for alternative structures. The heart of the book is the illumination ...
Joan Herman, Pamela Aschbacher, and Lynn Winters offer cogent guidance on the creation and use of alternative measures of student achievement. They present a systemic and iterative process model that links assessment with decisions affecting curriculum and instruction, according to developmental theories of learning and cognition.
The authors review the purposes of assessment and provide a substantive rationale for alternative structures. The heart of the book is the illumination ...
Additional Info:
Joan Herman, Pamela Aschbacher, and Lynn Winters offer cogent guidance on the creation and use of alternative measures of student achievement. They present a systemic and iterative process model that links assessment with decisions affecting curriculum and instruction, according to developmental theories of learning and cognition.
The authors review the purposes of assessment and provide a substantive rationale for alternative structures. The heart of the book is the illumination of several key assessment issues that reaffirm our knowledge that assessment tasks must be informed by the most important elements of instructional practice.
Includes sample forms and figures to help readers begin revamping their assessment programs. (From the Publisher)
Joan Herman, Pamela Aschbacher, and Lynn Winters offer cogent guidance on the creation and use of alternative measures of student achievement. They present a systemic and iterative process model that links assessment with decisions affecting curriculum and instruction, according to developmental theories of learning and cognition.
The authors review the purposes of assessment and provide a substantive rationale for alternative structures. The heart of the book is the illumination of several key assessment issues that reaffirm our knowledge that assessment tasks must be informed by the most important elements of instructional practice.
Includes sample forms and figures to help readers begin revamping their assessment programs. (From the Publisher)

Christian Identity and Theological Education
Additional Info:
This book is the result of a study conducted by the Association of Theological Schools with the support of the Lilly Endowment, which investigates the "multifaceted study of theological education." The purpose of the study is to engage in pragmatic ways to revise theological curricula in light of the present global situation. (From the Publisher)
This book is the result of a study conducted by the Association of Theological Schools with the support of the Lilly Endowment, which investigates the "multifaceted study of theological education." The purpose of the study is to engage in pragmatic ways to revise theological curricula in light of the present global situation. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book is the result of a study conducted by the Association of Theological Schools with the support of the Lilly Endowment, which investigates the "multifaceted study of theological education." The purpose of the study is to engage in pragmatic ways to revise theological curricula in light of the present global situation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Problematic of Theological Education
ch. 2 The Identity of the Church
ch. 3 The Practice of the Christian Community
ch. 4 Professional Church Leadership
ch. 5 The Education of Practical Theologians
Author Index
This book is the result of a study conducted by the Association of Theological Schools with the support of the Lilly Endowment, which investigates the "multifaceted study of theological education." The purpose of the study is to engage in pragmatic ways to revise theological curricula in light of the present global situation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Problematic of Theological Education
ch. 2 The Identity of the Church
ch. 3 The Practice of the Christian Community
ch. 4 Professional Church Leadership
ch. 5 The Education of Practical Theologians
Author Index

Models of Teaching, 4th ed
Additional Info:
Covers Major Models of Teaching. Teaching Models. Designed for use as a main or supplemental text in undergraduate- or graduate-level courses entitled Elementary Curriculum, Introduction to Instruction, Introduction to Teaching, Models of Teaching, and Instructional Methods. (From the Publisher)
Covers Major Models of Teaching. Teaching Models. Designed for use as a main or supplemental text in undergraduate- or graduate-level courses entitled Elementary Curriculum, Introduction to Instruction, Introduction to Teaching, Models of Teaching, and Instructional Methods. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Covers Major Models of Teaching. Teaching Models. Designed for use as a main or supplemental text in undergraduate- or graduate-level courses entitled Elementary Curriculum, Introduction to Instruction, Introduction to Teaching, Models of Teaching, and Instructional Methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part I Frame Of Reference
ch. 1 Beginning The Inquiry: Tooling Up the Community of Learners
ch. 2 Where Do Models Of Teaching Come From?: How Are They Used?
ch. 3 Teaching As Inquiry: Taking Off from the Research Base
ch. 4 The Construction Of Knowledge, Metacognitions, And Conceptions Of Intelligence
ch. 5 Teaching And Equity: Gender, Money, Race, and ch. 6 Partners In Learning: From Dyads to Group Investigation
ch. 7 Role Playing: Studying Social Behavior and Values
ch. 8 Jurisprudential Inquiry: Learning to Think about Social Policy
ch. 9 Adapting To Individual Differences: Conceptual Systems Theory
Part II The Information-processing Family: Learning to Think by Thinking
ch. 10 Thinking Inductively: Collecting, Organizing, and Manipulating Data
ch. 11 Attaining Concepts: The Basic Thinking Skills
ch. 12 Scientific Inquiry And Inquiry Training: The Art of Making Inferences
ch. 13 Memorization: Getting the Facts Straight
ch. 14 Synectics: Enhancing Creative Thought
ch. 15 Learning from Presentations: Advance Organizers
ch. 16 The Developing Intellect: Adjusting Models to Cognitive Development
Part III The Personal Family: Focus on the Person
ch. 17 Nondirective Teaching: The Learner at the Center
ch. 18 Concepts Of Self: Modeling Rich States of Growth
Part IV The Behavioral Systems Family: Behavior Theory
ch. 19 Mastery Learning And Programmed Instruction
ch. 20 Direct Instruction
ch. 21 Learning From Simulations: Training and Self-Training
Part V Professional Skill
ch. 22 The Conditions Of Learning: Focusing and Planning Instruction
ch. 23 How To Learn A Teaching Repertoire: The Professional Learning Communityv ch. 24 Learning Styles And Models Of Teaching: Making Discomfort Productive
Appendix: Peer Coaching Guides
Advance Organizer
Cooperative Learning Organization
Jurisprudential Model
Synectics
Concept Attainment
Inquiry Training
Assists to Memory
Role Playing
Inductive Thinking
References
Index
Covers Major Models of Teaching. Teaching Models. Designed for use as a main or supplemental text in undergraduate- or graduate-level courses entitled Elementary Curriculum, Introduction to Instruction, Introduction to Teaching, Models of Teaching, and Instructional Methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part I Frame Of Reference
ch. 1 Beginning The Inquiry: Tooling Up the Community of Learners
ch. 2 Where Do Models Of Teaching Come From?: How Are They Used?
ch. 3 Teaching As Inquiry: Taking Off from the Research Base
ch. 4 The Construction Of Knowledge, Metacognitions, And Conceptions Of Intelligence
ch. 5 Teaching And Equity: Gender, Money, Race, and ch. 6 Partners In Learning: From Dyads to Group Investigation
ch. 7 Role Playing: Studying Social Behavior and Values
ch. 8 Jurisprudential Inquiry: Learning to Think about Social Policy
ch. 9 Adapting To Individual Differences: Conceptual Systems Theory
Part II The Information-processing Family: Learning to Think by Thinking
ch. 10 Thinking Inductively: Collecting, Organizing, and Manipulating Data
ch. 11 Attaining Concepts: The Basic Thinking Skills
ch. 12 Scientific Inquiry And Inquiry Training: The Art of Making Inferences
ch. 13 Memorization: Getting the Facts Straight
ch. 14 Synectics: Enhancing Creative Thought
ch. 15 Learning from Presentations: Advance Organizers
ch. 16 The Developing Intellect: Adjusting Models to Cognitive Development
Part III The Personal Family: Focus on the Person
ch. 17 Nondirective Teaching: The Learner at the Center
ch. 18 Concepts Of Self: Modeling Rich States of Growth
Part IV The Behavioral Systems Family: Behavior Theory
ch. 19 Mastery Learning And Programmed Instruction
ch. 20 Direct Instruction
ch. 21 Learning From Simulations: Training and Self-Training
Part V Professional Skill
ch. 22 The Conditions Of Learning: Focusing and Planning Instruction
ch. 23 How To Learn A Teaching Repertoire: The Professional Learning Communityv ch. 24 Learning Styles And Models Of Teaching: Making Discomfort Productive
Appendix: Peer Coaching Guides
Advance Organizer
Cooperative Learning Organization
Jurisprudential Model
Synectics
Concept Attainment
Inquiry Training
Assists to Memory
Role Playing
Inductive Thinking
References
Index

The Ethics of Teaching
Additional Info:
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Pt. I The Classroom Ambiance
ch. 1 Instructors' Classroom Policies
ch. 2 Student Deportment in the Classroom
Pt. II The Classroom Learning Experience
ch. 3 nstructors' Presentation Style and Content
ch. 4 Required In-Class Learning Activities
Pt. III Assessment of Students
ch. 5 Testing and Other Academic Evaluations
ch. 6 Grading Methods
ch. 7 Feedback to Students
ch. 8 Writing Reference Letters for Students
ch. 9 Biased Treatment of Students
ch. 10 Academic Dishonesty
Pt. IV Outside the Classroom
ch. 11 Availability to Students
ch. 12 Student-Faculty Interactions
Pt. V Relationships in Academia
ch. 13 Multiple Role Relations and Conflicts of Interest
ch. 14 Interprofessional Relations
ch. 15 Exploitation of Students
ch. 16 Discrimination
ch. 17 Manipulative Students and Instructors
ch. 18 Supervising, Advising, and Collaboration With Students
Pt. VI Responsibilities to Students and Colleagues
ch. 19 Instructor Competency
ch. 20 Confidentiality Issues
ch. 21 Political and Public Statements
ch. 22 Responsibilities to the Institution
Afterword: Prevention and Peer Intervention
References
Subject Index
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Pt. I The Classroom Ambiance
ch. 1 Instructors' Classroom Policies
ch. 2 Student Deportment in the Classroom
Pt. II The Classroom Learning Experience
ch. 3 nstructors' Presentation Style and Content
ch. 4 Required In-Class Learning Activities
Pt. III Assessment of Students
ch. 5 Testing and Other Academic Evaluations
ch. 6 Grading Methods
ch. 7 Feedback to Students
ch. 8 Writing Reference Letters for Students
ch. 9 Biased Treatment of Students
ch. 10 Academic Dishonesty
Pt. IV Outside the Classroom
ch. 11 Availability to Students
ch. 12 Student-Faculty Interactions
Pt. V Relationships in Academia
ch. 13 Multiple Role Relations and Conflicts of Interest
ch. 14 Interprofessional Relations
ch. 15 Exploitation of Students
ch. 16 Discrimination
ch. 17 Manipulative Students and Instructors
ch. 18 Supervising, Advising, and Collaboration With Students
Pt. VI Responsibilities to Students and Colleagues
ch. 19 Instructor Competency
ch. 20 Confidentiality Issues
ch. 21 Political and Public Statements
ch. 22 Responsibilities to the Institution
Afterword: Prevention and Peer Intervention
References
Subject Index


To Understand God Truly: What's Theological About a Theological School
Additional Info:
Kelsey argues that the central purpose of a theological school is to understand God more truly, that Christian traditions intersect with the Greek idea of education as paideia and the much later German idea of education as wissenschaft to create the models of theological schooling operative today, and that the issues facing theological education arise because of the conflicting understandings of the world and God embodied in these ideas. He ...
Kelsey argues that the central purpose of a theological school is to understand God more truly, that Christian traditions intersect with the Greek idea of education as paideia and the much later German idea of education as wissenschaft to create the models of theological schooling operative today, and that the issues facing theological education arise because of the conflicting understandings of the world and God embodied in these ideas. He ...
Additional Info:
Kelsey argues that the central purpose of a theological school is to understand God more truly, that Christian traditions intersect with the Greek idea of education as paideia and the much later German idea of education as wissenschaft to create the models of theological schooling operative today, and that the issues facing theological education arise because of the conflicting understandings of the world and God embodied in these ideas. He proposes reconceptualizing ways of thinking about theological education based on the desire to understand God more truly and to do so in the concrete particularities of faith communities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Pt. 1 Locating a Theological School
ch. 1 Orientation: Or, After the Fall
ch. 2 Crossroads Hamlets
ch. 3 Excellence as Paideia
ch. 4 Excellence as Wissenschaft and Professionalism
Pt. 2 A Proposal
ch. 5 Utopia
ch. 6 Borrowed Language
ch. 7 Congregations
ch. 8 A Theological School
ch. 9 A Theological School's Course of Study
ch. 10 Between Athens and Berlin
Epilogue
Select Bibliography of Books Cited
Index
Kelsey argues that the central purpose of a theological school is to understand God more truly, that Christian traditions intersect with the Greek idea of education as paideia and the much later German idea of education as wissenschaft to create the models of theological schooling operative today, and that the issues facing theological education arise because of the conflicting understandings of the world and God embodied in these ideas. He proposes reconceptualizing ways of thinking about theological education based on the desire to understand God more truly and to do so in the concrete particularities of faith communities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Pt. 1 Locating a Theological School
ch. 1 Orientation: Or, After the Fall
ch. 2 Crossroads Hamlets
ch. 3 Excellence as Paideia
ch. 4 Excellence as Wissenschaft and Professionalism
Pt. 2 A Proposal
ch. 5 Utopia
ch. 6 Borrowed Language
ch. 7 Congregations
ch. 8 A Theological School
ch. 9 A Theological School's Course of Study
ch. 10 Between Athens and Berlin
Epilogue
Select Bibliography of Books Cited
Index

Increasing the Teaching Role of Academic Libraries
Additional Info:
The quiet revolution that has occurred in academic libraries has resulted in the development of programs of bibliographic or library instruction. The chapters in this volume reflect the tremendous diversity and scope of activities that fall under the umbrella of a bibliographic or library instruction program. The goal of all of these activities is to help individuals develop the intellectual and manipulative skill needed for the retrieval, assimilation, and critical ...
The quiet revolution that has occurred in academic libraries has resulted in the development of programs of bibliographic or library instruction. The chapters in this volume reflect the tremendous diversity and scope of activities that fall under the umbrella of a bibliographic or library instruction program. The goal of all of these activities is to help individuals develop the intellectual and manipulative skill needed for the retrieval, assimilation, and critical ...
Additional Info:
The quiet revolution that has occurred in academic libraries has resulted in the development of programs of bibliographic or library instruction. The chapters in this volume reflect the tremendous diversity and scope of activities that fall under the umbrella of a bibliographic or library instruction program. The goal of all of these activities is to help individuals develop the intellectual and manipulative skill needed for the retrieval, assimilation, and critical analysis of information. This volume is intended to provide a compact overview of this expanding area of library service. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching, research, and service : the academic library's role (Carla J. Stoffle, Alan E. Guskin, and Joseph A. Boisse)
ch. 2 Emerson's library legacy : concepts of bibliographic instruction (John Mark Tucker)
ch. 3 Library use and the development of critical thought (Stephen H. Plum)
ch. 4 Patterns for research (Cerise Oberman)
ch. 5 Alternatives to the term paper (Evan I. Farber)
ch. 6 The faculty/librarian partnership (Rose Ann Simon)
ch. 7 Bibliographic instruction programs in academic libraries (Hannelore B. Rader)
ch. 8 Improving teaching : how a clearinghouse helps (Carolyn A. Kirkendall)
ch. 9 More information : bibliographic instruction resources (Linda L. Phillips)
Concluding comments (Thomas G. Kirk)
The quiet revolution that has occurred in academic libraries has resulted in the development of programs of bibliographic or library instruction. The chapters in this volume reflect the tremendous diversity and scope of activities that fall under the umbrella of a bibliographic or library instruction program. The goal of all of these activities is to help individuals develop the intellectual and manipulative skill needed for the retrieval, assimilation, and critical analysis of information. This volume is intended to provide a compact overview of this expanding area of library service. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching, research, and service : the academic library's role (Carla J. Stoffle, Alan E. Guskin, and Joseph A. Boisse)
ch. 2 Emerson's library legacy : concepts of bibliographic instruction (John Mark Tucker)
ch. 3 Library use and the development of critical thought (Stephen H. Plum)
ch. 4 Patterns for research (Cerise Oberman)
ch. 5 Alternatives to the term paper (Evan I. Farber)
ch. 6 The faculty/librarian partnership (Rose Ann Simon)
ch. 7 Bibliographic instruction programs in academic libraries (Hannelore B. Rader)
ch. 8 Improving teaching : how a clearinghouse helps (Carolyn A. Kirkendall)
ch. 9 More information : bibliographic instruction resources (Linda L. Phillips)
Concluding comments (Thomas G. Kirk)

Web-Based Instruction
Additional Info:
This book covers all significant aspects of the design, development, delivery, and evaluation of instruction using Internet's World Wide Web. In 59 chapters, this 480-page-volume, 7 x 10 inches, provides users of the Web with online sources, case studies, references, and other forms of information regarding ways to use this new techology to improve opportunities for learning at all levels. Nearly one hundred authors, representing institutions situated throughout the world, participated in the ...
This book covers all significant aspects of the design, development, delivery, and evaluation of instruction using Internet's World Wide Web. In 59 chapters, this 480-page-volume, 7 x 10 inches, provides users of the Web with online sources, case studies, references, and other forms of information regarding ways to use this new techology to improve opportunities for learning at all levels. Nearly one hundred authors, representing institutions situated throughout the world, participated in the ...
Additional Info:
This book covers all significant aspects of the design, development, delivery, and evaluation of instruction using Internet's World Wide Web. In 59 chapters, this 480-page-volume, 7 x 10 inches, provides users of the Web with online sources, case studies, references, and other forms of information regarding ways to use this new techology to improve opportunities for learning at all levels. Nearly one hundred authors, representing institutions situated throughout the world, participated in the writing of this timely volume-using the Web to coordinate their efforts, thus assuring a remarkably complete treatment of this important topic. E-mail and World Wide Web addresses are given for all chapter authors, most of whom have active Web sites that can provide additional information to readers of the book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
SECTION I WEB-BASED TRAINING: INTRODUCTION
ch. 1 Web-Based Training: An Introduction (Badrul H. Khan)
ch. 2 Web-Based Training: Advantages and Limitations (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 3 Web-Based Training: Benefits and Obstacles to Success (Zane Berge, Mauri Collins, and Tim Fitzsimmons)
ch. 4 Infostructures: Technology, Learning, and Organizations (Greg Kearsley and Michael J. Marquardt)
ch. 5 Emerging Learning Trends and the World Wide Web (Ellen D. Wagner)
ch. 6 Glossary of Terms in Web-Based Training (Rick Hall)
ch. 7 Web-Based Training Resources (Manal A. El-Tigi and Badrul H. Khan)
SECTION II WEB-BASED TRAINING: DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT PERSPECTIVES
ch. 8 A Framework for Web-Based Learning (Badrul H. Khan)
ch. 9 Designing Instructional Templates for Web-Based Training (Robert J. Mills, Kimberly A. Lawless, and M. David Merrill)
ch. 10 A Practical Model for Conversational Web-Based Training: A Response from the Past to the Needs of the Future (Alexander J. Romiszowski and Echeol Chang)
ch. 11 Web Architectures for Learning (Peter G. Fairweather, Richard B. Lam, and Lei Kuang)
ch. 12 The Web and Model-Centered Instruction (Andrew S. Gibbons, Kimberly A. Lawless, Thor A. Anderson, and Joel Duffin)
ch. 13 Activity Theory and Web-Based Training, (David Peal and Brent G. Wilson)
ch. 14 Design and Development Issues in Web-Based Training (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 15 Web-Based Training Site Design Principles: A Literature Review and Synthesis (Richard H. Hall) ch. 16 Developing Synchronous Web-Based Training for Adults in the Workplace (Margaret M. Driscoll)
ch. 17 Web-Based Instructional Methods for Corporate Training Curricula (Pamela D. Loughner, Douglas M. Harvey, and William D. Milheim)
ch. 18 Developing Web-Based Training for a Global Corporate Community (Judy Cossel Rice, Miles Day Coleman, Vincent E. Shrader, Joanne P. Hall, Sharon A. Gibb, and Reo H. McBride)
ch. 19 Accommodating People with Disabilities in Web-Based Training Programs (Alan Cantor)
ch. 20 An Instructional Design-Based Approach to Developing Online Learning Environments (Bob Hoffman and Donn C. Ritchie)
ch. 21 Playing Interactive Training Games on the Web (Sivasailam Thiagarajan and Raja Thiagarajan)
ch. 22 Simulations for Web-Based Training (Harry A. Pappo)
ch. 23 HyperInquiry: Surfing Below the Surface of the Web (John V. Dempsey and Brenda C. Litchfield)
ch. 24 Practical Guidelines for Facilitating Team Activities in Web-Based Training (Margaret Bailey and Lara Luetkehans)
ch. 25 Industry-University Partnerships in Web-Based Learning: A Working Model (Colla J. MacDonald and Martha Gabriel)
ch. 26 Managing the Development and Evolution of Web-Based Training: A Service Bureau Concept (Thomas M. Welsh and Ben L. Anderson)
ch. 27 Designing Practical Websites for Interactive Training (John G. Hedberg, Christine Brown, John L. Larkin, and Shirley Agostinho)
ch. 28 Design Strategies for Web-Based Training: Using Bandwidth Effectively (David R. Moore and Barbara B. Lockee)
ch. 29 Ideas on Designing Web Pages for OnlineTraining (Don E. Descy)
ch. 30 Web-Based Training: Current Status of This Instructional Tool (William D. Milheim and Brenda Bannan-Ritland)
ch. 31 Review of Web-Based Assessment Tools (Jianping Zhang, Badrul H. Khan, Andrew S. Gibbons, and Yun Ni)
ch. 32 Online Testing Methods in Web-Based Training Courses (Sunil Hazari)
ch. 33 Software Tools for Online Course Management and Delivery (Ann E. Barron and Chet Lyskawa)
ch. 34 Planning for Web-Based Course Management (Henryk R. Marcinkiewicz and Eva M. Ross)
ch. 35 Web-Based Training Administration (Jason D. Baker)
ch. 36 Project Support Sites: A Project Management Tool for Constructing Web-Based Training (Lee T. Gotcher)
ch. 37 Current and Ideal Practices in Designing, Developing, and Delivering Web-Based Training (Carlos Villalba and Alexander J.Romiszowski)
ch. 38 Pedagogy and Web-Based Course Authoring Tools: Issues and Implications (Nada H. Dabbagh, Brenda Bannan-Ritland and Kate Flannery Silc)
ch. 39 A Framework for a Comprehensive Web-Based Authoring System (Badrul H. Khan and David A. Ealy)
SECTION III WEB-BASED TRAINING: IMPLEMENTATION AND EVALUATION PERSPECTIVES
ch. 40 Case Studies of Web-Based Training Sites (Badrul H. Khan, Deborah Waddill, and Jane A. McDonald)
ch. 41 Implementation Issues in Web-Based Training (Kinshuk and Ashok Patel)
ch. 42 Copyright Issues in Web-Based Training (David Throne)
ch. 43 Needed: Digital Libraries for Web-Based Training (John Schmitz)
ch. 44 Positioning for Effectiveness: Applying Marketing Concepts to Web-Based Training (Nancy M. Levenburg)
ch. 45 Benchmarking Educational Technology for Military Planners (R. Thomas Goodden)
ch. 46 Designing Web-Based Learning Environments at the Department of Defense: New Solutions (Sharon G. Fisher and Will S. Peratino)
ch. 47 Repurposing Instructor-Led Training into Web-Based Training: A Case Study and Lessons Learned (Kenneth G. Brown, Karen R. Milner, J. Kevin Ford, and Wendy Golden)
ch. 48 A Corporate/College Partnership for Web-Based Training (Sharon Gray, Suzanne McCann, Earl Robinson, and Sean Warner)
ch. 49 The Future of Continuing Medical Education on the Web (Henry L. Shapiro)
ch. 50 Long Distance Collaborative Authentic Learning (CAL): Recommendations for Problem-Based Training on the Web (Alison A. Carr-Chellman)
ch. 51 Supporting Adult Learners in Web-Based Training (Larry R. Hudson, Linda Greer, and Teresa Buhler)
ch. 52 Web-Based Case Studies: A Multipurpose Tool for the Training Toolkit (M. Elizabeth Hrabe, Mable B. Kinzie, and Marti F. Julian)
ch. 53 Web-Based Rapid Prototyping as a Strategy for Training University Faculty to Teach Web-Based Courses (Betty A. Collis)
ch.. 54 Support for Teachers Enhancing Performance in Schools: An EPSS Professional Development Tool (Pamela Taylor Northrup, Karen L. Rasmussen, and Janet K. Pilcher)
ch. 55 Integrating Web-Based Technology into Teacher-Preparation Training Programs (Nella B. Anderson, LeAnn McKinzie, Don C. Johnson, Jarvis W. Hampton, and Trey McCallie)
ch. 56 The Teachers' Internet Use Guide: Web-Based Training for Educators David Hoffman, Lorraine Sherry, Jonathan Lurie, and Jason McDaniel)
ch. 57 Virtual U: A Hub for Excellence in Education, Training and Learning Resources (Badrul H. Khan)
ch. 58 Evaluating Web-Based Training: The Quest for the Information-Age Employee (Joanne P. Hall and Conrad A. Gottfredson)
ch. 59 Evaluating Web-Based Training Programs (Zane L. Berge)
ch. 60 Online Implementation of Kirkpatrick's Four Levels of Evaluation Using Web Databases (Harvi Singh)
ch. 61 Usability Testing of Web-Based Training (Michael Hughes and Loren Burke)
ch. 62 Cost Analysis and Return on Investment (ROI) for Distance Education (Kent L. Gustafson and Lynne Schrum)
ch. 63 Usability Testing and Return-on-Investment Studies: Key Evaluation Strategies for Web-Based Training (Thomas C. Reeves and Bryan J. Carter)
This book covers all significant aspects of the design, development, delivery, and evaluation of instruction using Internet's World Wide Web. In 59 chapters, this 480-page-volume, 7 x 10 inches, provides users of the Web with online sources, case studies, references, and other forms of information regarding ways to use this new techology to improve opportunities for learning at all levels. Nearly one hundred authors, representing institutions situated throughout the world, participated in the writing of this timely volume-using the Web to coordinate their efforts, thus assuring a remarkably complete treatment of this important topic. E-mail and World Wide Web addresses are given for all chapter authors, most of whom have active Web sites that can provide additional information to readers of the book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
SECTION I WEB-BASED TRAINING: INTRODUCTION
ch. 1 Web-Based Training: An Introduction (Badrul H. Khan)
ch. 2 Web-Based Training: Advantages and Limitations (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 3 Web-Based Training: Benefits and Obstacles to Success (Zane Berge, Mauri Collins, and Tim Fitzsimmons)
ch. 4 Infostructures: Technology, Learning, and Organizations (Greg Kearsley and Michael J. Marquardt)
ch. 5 Emerging Learning Trends and the World Wide Web (Ellen D. Wagner)
ch. 6 Glossary of Terms in Web-Based Training (Rick Hall)
ch. 7 Web-Based Training Resources (Manal A. El-Tigi and Badrul H. Khan)
SECTION II WEB-BASED TRAINING: DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT PERSPECTIVES
ch. 8 A Framework for Web-Based Learning (Badrul H. Khan)
ch. 9 Designing Instructional Templates for Web-Based Training (Robert J. Mills, Kimberly A. Lawless, and M. David Merrill)
ch. 10 A Practical Model for Conversational Web-Based Training: A Response from the Past to the Needs of the Future (Alexander J. Romiszowski and Echeol Chang)
ch. 11 Web Architectures for Learning (Peter G. Fairweather, Richard B. Lam, and Lei Kuang)
ch. 12 The Web and Model-Centered Instruction (Andrew S. Gibbons, Kimberly A. Lawless, Thor A. Anderson, and Joel Duffin)
ch. 13 Activity Theory and Web-Based Training, (David Peal and Brent G. Wilson)
ch. 14 Design and Development Issues in Web-Based Training (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 15 Web-Based Training Site Design Principles: A Literature Review and Synthesis (Richard H. Hall) ch. 16 Developing Synchronous Web-Based Training for Adults in the Workplace (Margaret M. Driscoll)
ch. 17 Web-Based Instructional Methods for Corporate Training Curricula (Pamela D. Loughner, Douglas M. Harvey, and William D. Milheim)
ch. 18 Developing Web-Based Training for a Global Corporate Community (Judy Cossel Rice, Miles Day Coleman, Vincent E. Shrader, Joanne P. Hall, Sharon A. Gibb, and Reo H. McBride)
ch. 19 Accommodating People with Disabilities in Web-Based Training Programs (Alan Cantor)
ch. 20 An Instructional Design-Based Approach to Developing Online Learning Environments (Bob Hoffman and Donn C. Ritchie)
ch. 21 Playing Interactive Training Games on the Web (Sivasailam Thiagarajan and Raja Thiagarajan)
ch. 22 Simulations for Web-Based Training (Harry A. Pappo)
ch. 23 HyperInquiry: Surfing Below the Surface of the Web (John V. Dempsey and Brenda C. Litchfield)
ch. 24 Practical Guidelines for Facilitating Team Activities in Web-Based Training (Margaret Bailey and Lara Luetkehans)
ch. 25 Industry-University Partnerships in Web-Based Learning: A Working Model (Colla J. MacDonald and Martha Gabriel)
ch. 26 Managing the Development and Evolution of Web-Based Training: A Service Bureau Concept (Thomas M. Welsh and Ben L. Anderson)
ch. 27 Designing Practical Websites for Interactive Training (John G. Hedberg, Christine Brown, John L. Larkin, and Shirley Agostinho)
ch. 28 Design Strategies for Web-Based Training: Using Bandwidth Effectively (David R. Moore and Barbara B. Lockee)
ch. 29 Ideas on Designing Web Pages for OnlineTraining (Don E. Descy)
ch. 30 Web-Based Training: Current Status of This Instructional Tool (William D. Milheim and Brenda Bannan-Ritland)
ch. 31 Review of Web-Based Assessment Tools (Jianping Zhang, Badrul H. Khan, Andrew S. Gibbons, and Yun Ni)
ch. 32 Online Testing Methods in Web-Based Training Courses (Sunil Hazari)
ch. 33 Software Tools for Online Course Management and Delivery (Ann E. Barron and Chet Lyskawa)
ch. 34 Planning for Web-Based Course Management (Henryk R. Marcinkiewicz and Eva M. Ross)
ch. 35 Web-Based Training Administration (Jason D. Baker)
ch. 36 Project Support Sites: A Project Management Tool for Constructing Web-Based Training (Lee T. Gotcher)
ch. 37 Current and Ideal Practices in Designing, Developing, and Delivering Web-Based Training (Carlos Villalba and Alexander J.Romiszowski)
ch. 38 Pedagogy and Web-Based Course Authoring Tools: Issues and Implications (Nada H. Dabbagh, Brenda Bannan-Ritland and Kate Flannery Silc)
ch. 39 A Framework for a Comprehensive Web-Based Authoring System (Badrul H. Khan and David A. Ealy)
SECTION III WEB-BASED TRAINING: IMPLEMENTATION AND EVALUATION PERSPECTIVES
ch. 40 Case Studies of Web-Based Training Sites (Badrul H. Khan, Deborah Waddill, and Jane A. McDonald)
ch. 41 Implementation Issues in Web-Based Training (Kinshuk and Ashok Patel)
ch. 42 Copyright Issues in Web-Based Training (David Throne)
ch. 43 Needed: Digital Libraries for Web-Based Training (John Schmitz)
ch. 44 Positioning for Effectiveness: Applying Marketing Concepts to Web-Based Training (Nancy M. Levenburg)
ch. 45 Benchmarking Educational Technology for Military Planners (R. Thomas Goodden)
ch. 46 Designing Web-Based Learning Environments at the Department of Defense: New Solutions (Sharon G. Fisher and Will S. Peratino)
ch. 47 Repurposing Instructor-Led Training into Web-Based Training: A Case Study and Lessons Learned (Kenneth G. Brown, Karen R. Milner, J. Kevin Ford, and Wendy Golden)
ch. 48 A Corporate/College Partnership for Web-Based Training (Sharon Gray, Suzanne McCann, Earl Robinson, and Sean Warner)
ch. 49 The Future of Continuing Medical Education on the Web (Henry L. Shapiro)
ch. 50 Long Distance Collaborative Authentic Learning (CAL): Recommendations for Problem-Based Training on the Web (Alison A. Carr-Chellman)
ch. 51 Supporting Adult Learners in Web-Based Training (Larry R. Hudson, Linda Greer, and Teresa Buhler)
ch. 52 Web-Based Case Studies: A Multipurpose Tool for the Training Toolkit (M. Elizabeth Hrabe, Mable B. Kinzie, and Marti F. Julian)
ch. 53 Web-Based Rapid Prototyping as a Strategy for Training University Faculty to Teach Web-Based Courses (Betty A. Collis)
ch.. 54 Support for Teachers Enhancing Performance in Schools: An EPSS Professional Development Tool (Pamela Taylor Northrup, Karen L. Rasmussen, and Janet K. Pilcher)
ch. 55 Integrating Web-Based Technology into Teacher-Preparation Training Programs (Nella B. Anderson, LeAnn McKinzie, Don C. Johnson, Jarvis W. Hampton, and Trey McCallie)
ch. 56 The Teachers' Internet Use Guide: Web-Based Training for Educators David Hoffman, Lorraine Sherry, Jonathan Lurie, and Jason McDaniel)
ch. 57 Virtual U: A Hub for Excellence in Education, Training and Learning Resources (Badrul H. Khan)
ch. 58 Evaluating Web-Based Training: The Quest for the Information-Age Employee (Joanne P. Hall and Conrad A. Gottfredson)
ch. 59 Evaluating Web-Based Training Programs (Zane L. Berge)
ch. 60 Online Implementation of Kirkpatrick's Four Levels of Evaluation Using Web Databases (Harvi Singh)
ch. 61 Usability Testing of Web-Based Training (Michael Hughes and Loren Burke)
ch. 62 Cost Analysis and Return on Investment (ROI) for Distance Education (Kent L. Gustafson and Lynne Schrum)
ch. 63 Usability Testing and Return-on-Investment Studies: Key Evaluation Strategies for Web-Based Training (Thomas C. Reeves and Bryan J. Carter)

Mastering the Techniques of Teaching, 2nd ed
Additional Info:
Lowman expands his earlier model of effective teaching to place more emphasis on motivational skill and commitment to teaching. In this second edition, he presents still more options on how to organize classes and use group work to promote learning. (From the Publisher)
Lowman expands his earlier model of effective teaching to place more emphasis on motivational skill and commitment to teaching. In this second edition, he presents still more options on how to organize classes and use group work to promote learning. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Lowman expands his earlier model of effective teaching to place more emphasis on motivational skill and commitment to teaching. In this second edition, he presents still more options on how to organize classes and use group work to promote learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 What Constitutes Exemplary Teaching?
ch. 2 Understanding Classroom Dynamics
ch. 3 Developing Interpersonal Skills and Teaching Style
ch. 4 Analyzing and Improving Classroom Performance
ch. 5 Selecting and Organizing Material for Classroom Presentations
ch. 6 Enhancing Learning Through Classroom Discussion
ch. 7 Planning Course content and Teaching techniques to Maximize Interest
ch. 8 Integrating Learning In and Out of the Classroom
ch. 9 Evaluating Student Performance
ch. 10 The Art, Craft and Techniques of Exemplary
Teaching
References
Indexes
Lowman expands his earlier model of effective teaching to place more emphasis on motivational skill and commitment to teaching. In this second edition, he presents still more options on how to organize classes and use group work to promote learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 What Constitutes Exemplary Teaching?
ch. 2 Understanding Classroom Dynamics
ch. 3 Developing Interpersonal Skills and Teaching Style
ch. 4 Analyzing and Improving Classroom Performance
ch. 5 Selecting and Organizing Material for Classroom Presentations
ch. 6 Enhancing Learning Through Classroom Discussion
ch. 7 Planning Course content and Teaching techniques to Maximize Interest
ch. 8 Integrating Learning In and Out of the Classroom
ch. 9 Evaluating Student Performance
ch. 10 The Art, Craft and Techniques of Exemplary
Teaching
References
Indexes

Student Self-Evaluation: Fostering Reflective Learning
Additional Info:
For several decades, college teachers have been asking students to engage in self-evaluation, to reflect on their academic work and describe and evaluate it in writing. Student self-evaluation is both a process--consisting of acts of reflecting, composing, and writing--and a product, a writtten document. Student self-evaluation does not obviate the need for student exams and papers, crucial indicators of student mastery of material or complexity of thinking. Rather, student self-evaluation ...
For several decades, college teachers have been asking students to engage in self-evaluation, to reflect on their academic work and describe and evaluate it in writing. Student self-evaluation is both a process--consisting of acts of reflecting, composing, and writing--and a product, a writtten document. Student self-evaluation does not obviate the need for student exams and papers, crucial indicators of student mastery of material or complexity of thinking. Rather, student self-evaluation ...
Additional Info:
For several decades, college teachers have been asking students to engage in self-evaluation, to reflect on their academic work and describe and evaluate it in writing. Student self-evaluation is both a process--consisting of acts of reflecting, composing, and writing--and a product, a writtten document. Student self-evaluation does not obviate the need for student exams and papers, crucial indicators of student mastery of material or complexity of thinking. Rather, student self-evaluation supplements and complements that information by asking students to describe in their own words their learning and its value to them. This writing, and the conversations that faculty members and students have about it, can be instructional, illuminating, and at times transformative. Student self-evaluation is primarily a learning strategy, but it is also a promising assessment approach: while enriching learning for students, it also can help teachers and institutions learn about student learning. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning introduces the many forms of student self-evaluation in undergraduate teaching settings and describes how student self-evaluation creates connections between learners and learning, knowers and the known, and the self and the mind. This is the 56th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Student Self-Evaluation: An Introduction and Rationale (Edith Kusnic, and Mary Lou Finley)
ch. 2 Self-Evaluation: Settings and Uses (Carl J. Waluconis)
ch. 3 Learning Self-Evaluation: Challenges for Students (Jean MacGregor)
ch. 4 Work, Reflection, and Community: Conditions That Support Writing Self-Evaluations (Marie Eaton, Rita Pougiales)
ch. 5 Beyond "Mildly Interesting Facts": Student Self-Evaluations and Outcomes Assessment (William S. Moore, Steve Hunter)
ch. 6 Student Self-Evaluations and Developmental Change (Richard H. Haswell)
ch. 7 Appendix
Index
For several decades, college teachers have been asking students to engage in self-evaluation, to reflect on their academic work and describe and evaluate it in writing. Student self-evaluation is both a process--consisting of acts of reflecting, composing, and writing--and a product, a writtten document. Student self-evaluation does not obviate the need for student exams and papers, crucial indicators of student mastery of material or complexity of thinking. Rather, student self-evaluation supplements and complements that information by asking students to describe in their own words their learning and its value to them. This writing, and the conversations that faculty members and students have about it, can be instructional, illuminating, and at times transformative. Student self-evaluation is primarily a learning strategy, but it is also a promising assessment approach: while enriching learning for students, it also can help teachers and institutions learn about student learning. This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning introduces the many forms of student self-evaluation in undergraduate teaching settings and describes how student self-evaluation creates connections between learners and learning, knowers and the known, and the self and the mind. This is the 56th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Student Self-Evaluation: An Introduction and Rationale (Edith Kusnic, and Mary Lou Finley)
ch. 2 Self-Evaluation: Settings and Uses (Carl J. Waluconis)
ch. 3 Learning Self-Evaluation: Challenges for Students (Jean MacGregor)
ch. 4 Work, Reflection, and Community: Conditions That Support Writing Self-Evaluations (Marie Eaton, Rita Pougiales)
ch. 5 Beyond "Mildly Interesting Facts": Student Self-Evaluations and Outcomes Assessment (William S. Moore, Steve Hunter)
ch. 6 Student Self-Evaluations and Developmental Change (Richard H. Haswell)
ch. 7 Appendix
Index

The Feminist Classroom
Additional Info:
This book provides an intimate view of how feminist teachers are revolutionizing higher education. Drawing on in-depth interviews and on-site observations, and using the actual words of students and teachers, the authors take the reader into the classrooms of seventeen feminist college professors at six colleges and universities - Lewis and Clark College, Wheaton College, the University of Arizona, Towson State University, Spelman College, and San Francisco State University. As ...
This book provides an intimate view of how feminist teachers are revolutionizing higher education. Drawing on in-depth interviews and on-site observations, and using the actual words of students and teachers, the authors take the reader into the classrooms of seventeen feminist college professors at six colleges and universities - Lewis and Clark College, Wheaton College, the University of Arizona, Towson State University, Spelman College, and San Francisco State University. As ...
Additional Info:
This book provides an intimate view of how feminist teachers are revolutionizing higher education. Drawing on in-depth interviews and on-site observations, and using the actual words of students and teachers, the authors take the reader into the classrooms of seventeen feminist college professors at six colleges and universities - Lewis and Clark College, Wheaton College, the University of Arizona, Towson State University, Spelman College, and San Francisco State University. As these teachers integrate feminist and multicultural content into the curriculum, they demonstrate that pedagogy concerns not only "teaching techniques" but the whole process of the construction of knowledge in classrooms. Learning derives from relationships and interactions among teachers, students, and subject materials, not from any single perspective. In showing how the integration of feminist and multicultural content revitalizes the classroom, the book portrays innovative teaching in action. Feminist and cultural studies scholars have demonstrated that American higher education has traditionally represented the world in terms of the perspectives and achievements of a dominant minority. To educate students for a complex multicultural World, the voices of those who have been excluded need to emerge. There is widespread concern today about the quality of teaching in our colleges, particularly the predominance of lecturing and passive modes of learning. This important book presents a vision of teaching that counteracts the silence and alienation these practices engender. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Breaking Through Illusion
ch. 2 Creating a Kaleidoscope: Portraits of Six Institutions
ch. 3 Mastery
ch. 4 Voice
ch. 5 Authority
ch. 6 Positionality
ch. 7 Toward Positional Pedagogies
ch. 8 Looking Back, Looking Forward
Notes
Bibliography
Index
This book provides an intimate view of how feminist teachers are revolutionizing higher education. Drawing on in-depth interviews and on-site observations, and using the actual words of students and teachers, the authors take the reader into the classrooms of seventeen feminist college professors at six colleges and universities - Lewis and Clark College, Wheaton College, the University of Arizona, Towson State University, Spelman College, and San Francisco State University. As these teachers integrate feminist and multicultural content into the curriculum, they demonstrate that pedagogy concerns not only "teaching techniques" but the whole process of the construction of knowledge in classrooms. Learning derives from relationships and interactions among teachers, students, and subject materials, not from any single perspective. In showing how the integration of feminist and multicultural content revitalizes the classroom, the book portrays innovative teaching in action. Feminist and cultural studies scholars have demonstrated that American higher education has traditionally represented the world in terms of the perspectives and achievements of a dominant minority. To educate students for a complex multicultural World, the voices of those who have been excluded need to emerge. There is widespread concern today about the quality of teaching in our colleges, particularly the predominance of lecturing and passive modes of learning. This important book presents a vision of teaching that counteracts the silence and alienation these practices engender. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Breaking Through Illusion
ch. 2 Creating a Kaleidoscope: Portraits of Six Institutions
ch. 3 Mastery
ch. 4 Voice
ch. 5 Authority
ch. 6 Positionality
ch. 7 Toward Positional Pedagogies
ch. 8 Looking Back, Looking Forward
Notes
Bibliography
Index

Collaborative Learning: Underlying Processes and Effective Techniques
Additional Info:
The demographic makeup of the student population in higher education has changed in dramatic ways over the past decade. These changes have motivated questions about what constitutes knowledge and about how we learn and understand new concepts, processes, and skills. Working from the premise that knowledge is not a quantifiable mass of information to be transmitted but rather a socially constituted process of making meaning within constantly changing and interacting ...
The demographic makeup of the student population in higher education has changed in dramatic ways over the past decade. These changes have motivated questions about what constitutes knowledge and about how we learn and understand new concepts, processes, and skills. Working from the premise that knowledge is not a quantifiable mass of information to be transmitted but rather a socially constituted process of making meaning within constantly changing and interacting ...
Additional Info:
The demographic makeup of the student population in higher education has changed in dramatic ways over the past decade. These changes have motivated questions about what constitutes knowledge and about how we learn and understand new concepts, processes, and skills. Working from the premise that knowledge is not a quantifiable mass of information to be transmitted but rather a socially constituted process of making meaning within constantly changing and interacting contexts, the authors of this volume seek to define and extend current understanding of collaborative learning in higher education. Each chapter blends theory and practice as it explores a particular aspect of the processes underlying collaborative learning. Case studies from three universities demonstrate collaborative learning in action, its potential and its challenges. This volume uses information about current developments in collaborative learning across the country to extend our understanding of its possibilities and offer guidance to faculty who wish to establish effective collaborative learning classrooms. This is the 59th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Is This Collaboration?(Jeanne Marcum Gerlach)
ch. 2 Teacher as Co-conspirator: Knowledge and Authority in Collaborative Learning (James L. Flannery)
ch. 3 Developing Collaborative Skills in College Students (Kris Bosworth)
ch. 4 Group Dynamics: Understanding Group Success and Failure in Collaborative Learning (Judith E. Miller, John Trimbur, and John M. Wilkes)
ch. 5 Critical Thinking and Collaborative Learning (Craig E. Nelson)
ch. 6 Computer Technology and Collaborative Learning (Patricia Sullivan)
ch. 7 Assessing Effectiveness in the Collaborative Classroom (Sharon Farago Cramer)
ch. 8 Case Studies (Allen Emerson ... et al.)
ch. 9 Freedom Transformed: Toward a Developmental Model for the Construction of Collaborative Learning Environments (Sharon J. Hamilton)
Index
The demographic makeup of the student population in higher education has changed in dramatic ways over the past decade. These changes have motivated questions about what constitutes knowledge and about how we learn and understand new concepts, processes, and skills. Working from the premise that knowledge is not a quantifiable mass of information to be transmitted but rather a socially constituted process of making meaning within constantly changing and interacting contexts, the authors of this volume seek to define and extend current understanding of collaborative learning in higher education. Each chapter blends theory and practice as it explores a particular aspect of the processes underlying collaborative learning. Case studies from three universities demonstrate collaborative learning in action, its potential and its challenges. This volume uses information about current developments in collaborative learning across the country to extend our understanding of its possibilities and offer guidance to faculty who wish to establish effective collaborative learning classrooms. This is the 59th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Is This Collaboration?(Jeanne Marcum Gerlach)
ch. 2 Teacher as Co-conspirator: Knowledge and Authority in Collaborative Learning (James L. Flannery)
ch. 3 Developing Collaborative Skills in College Students (Kris Bosworth)
ch. 4 Group Dynamics: Understanding Group Success and Failure in Collaborative Learning (Judith E. Miller, John Trimbur, and John M. Wilkes)
ch. 5 Critical Thinking and Collaborative Learning (Craig E. Nelson)
ch. 6 Computer Technology and Collaborative Learning (Patricia Sullivan)
ch. 7 Assessing Effectiveness in the Collaborative Classroom (Sharon Farago Cramer)
ch. 8 Case Studies (Allen Emerson ... et al.)
ch. 9 Freedom Transformed: Toward a Developmental Model for the Construction of Collaborative Learning Environments (Sharon J. Hamilton)
Index

College Teaching: From Theory to Practice
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
How practice is shaped by personal theories
Cognitive learning strategies and college teaching
Practical implications of cognitive theories
What theories of motivation say about why learners learn
Practical proposals for motivating students
The social context of teaching and learning
Effective social arrangements for teaching and learning
Theories and metaphors we teach by
Table Of Content:
How practice is shaped by personal theories
Cognitive learning strategies and college teaching
Practical implications of cognitive theories
What theories of motivation say about why learners learn
Practical proposals for motivating students
The social context of teaching and learning
Effective social arrangements for teaching and learning
Theories and metaphors we teach by

Coping with Faculty Stress
Additional Info:
Stress can be beneficial if it triggers growth and improves the professor's performance. But it can be destructive if it leads to burnout, alcoholism, tension headaches, irritability, and boredom. The destructive consequences of faculty stress are not inevitable. They result solely from improperly managing and reacting to stressful events. This volume spells out the specific causes of faculty stress in the mid 1980's. It offers practical and proven ways of ...
Stress can be beneficial if it triggers growth and improves the professor's performance. But it can be destructive if it leads to burnout, alcoholism, tension headaches, irritability, and boredom. The destructive consequences of faculty stress are not inevitable. They result solely from improperly managing and reacting to stressful events. This volume spells out the specific causes of faculty stress in the mid 1980's. It offers practical and proven ways of ...
Additional Info:
Stress can be beneficial if it triggers growth and improves the professor's performance. But it can be destructive if it leads to burnout, alcoholism, tension headaches, irritability, and boredom. The destructive consequences of faculty stress are not inevitable. They result solely from improperly managing and reacting to stressful events. This volume spells out the specific causes of faculty stress in the mid 1980's. It offers practical and proven ways of coping with the many stressful situations facing today's professors. The objective is not to try to escape the effects of stress - for it is an inevitable part of academic life - but rather to channel and control our responses to it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes
ch. 1 Academic burnout - Faculty responsibility and institutional climate
ch. 2 Research findings on causes of academic stress
ch. 3 What colleges and universities can do about faculty stressors
ch. 4 The stress-producing working conditions of part-time faculty
ch. 5 Faculty stress - the tension between career demands and "having it all"
ch. 6 Short term coping techniques for managing stress
ch. 7 Long-term stress management
ch. 8 Institutional preventative stress management
ch. 9 The faculty renewal program at University of Georgia
Stress can be beneficial if it triggers growth and improves the professor's performance. But it can be destructive if it leads to burnout, alcoholism, tension headaches, irritability, and boredom. The destructive consequences of faculty stress are not inevitable. They result solely from improperly managing and reacting to stressful events. This volume spells out the specific causes of faculty stress in the mid 1980's. It offers practical and proven ways of coping with the many stressful situations facing today's professors. The objective is not to try to escape the effects of stress - for it is an inevitable part of academic life - but rather to channel and control our responses to it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes
ch. 1 Academic burnout - Faculty responsibility and institutional climate
ch. 2 Research findings on causes of academic stress
ch. 3 What colleges and universities can do about faculty stressors
ch. 4 The stress-producing working conditions of part-time faculty
ch. 5 Faculty stress - the tension between career demands and "having it all"
ch. 6 Short term coping techniques for managing stress
ch. 7 Long-term stress management
ch. 8 Institutional preventative stress management
ch. 9 The faculty renewal program at University of Georgia

Disciplinary Differences in Teaching and Learning: Implications for Practice
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning increases our knowledge and understanding of the causes and consequences of disciplinary differences in the patterns of teaching and learning, in the instructional strategies to increase teaching effectiveness, in the culture and environment in which teaching takes place, and in faculty and students' attitudes, goals, beliefs, values, philosophies, and orientations toward instruction. Despite their practical and pervasive influence, disciplinary differences have ...
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning increases our knowledge and understanding of the causes and consequences of disciplinary differences in the patterns of teaching and learning, in the instructional strategies to increase teaching effectiveness, in the culture and environment in which teaching takes place, and in faculty and students' attitudes, goals, beliefs, values, philosophies, and orientations toward instruction. Despite their practical and pervasive influence, disciplinary differences have ...
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning increases our knowledge and understanding of the causes and consequences of disciplinary differences in the patterns of teaching and learning, in the instructional strategies to increase teaching effectiveness, in the culture and environment in which teaching takes place, and in faculty and students' attitudes, goals, beliefs, values, philosophies, and orientations toward instruction. Despite their practical and pervasive influence, disciplinary differences have been subjected to relatively little systematic study, especially in their effect on the quality of teaching and learning in higher education. This volume both provides new summaries of important studies on disciplinary differences and points out promising directions for further research. This is the 64th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Disciplinary differences in knowledge validation(Janet G. Donald)
ch. 2 What is taught in an undergraduate lecture? : differences between a matched pair of pure and applied disciplines (Nira Hativa)
ch. 3 Disciplinary differences in classroom teaching behaviors (Harry G. Murray and Robert D. Renaud)
ch. 4 The relationship of disciplinary differences and the value of class preparation time to student ratings of teaching (Jennifer Franklin and Michael Theall)
ch. 5 Disciplinary and institutional differences in undergraduate education goals (John C. Smart and Corinna A. Ethington)
ch. 6 Disciplines with an affinity for the improvement of undergraduate education (John M. Braxton)
ch. 7 Discipline-specific pedagogical knowledge in linguistics and Spanish (Lisa Firing Lenze)
ch. 8 Subject-matter differences in secondary schools : connections to higher education (Susan S. Stodolsky and Pamela L. Grossman)
ch. 9 Disciplinary differences in what is taught and in students' perceptions of what they learn and of how they are taught (William E. Cashin and Ronald G. Downey)
ch. 10 Approaches to studying and perceptions of the learning environment across disciplines (Noel Entwhistle and Hilary Tait)
ch. 11 Disciplinary differences in students' perceptions of success : modifying misperceptions with attributional retraining (Verena H. Menec and Raymond P. Perry)
Concluding remarks : on the meaning of disciplinary differences
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning increases our knowledge and understanding of the causes and consequences of disciplinary differences in the patterns of teaching and learning, in the instructional strategies to increase teaching effectiveness, in the culture and environment in which teaching takes place, and in faculty and students' attitudes, goals, beliefs, values, philosophies, and orientations toward instruction. Despite their practical and pervasive influence, disciplinary differences have been subjected to relatively little systematic study, especially in their effect on the quality of teaching and learning in higher education. This volume both provides new summaries of important studies on disciplinary differences and points out promising directions for further research. This is the 64th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Disciplinary differences in knowledge validation(Janet G. Donald)
ch. 2 What is taught in an undergraduate lecture? : differences between a matched pair of pure and applied disciplines (Nira Hativa)
ch. 3 Disciplinary differences in classroom teaching behaviors (Harry G. Murray and Robert D. Renaud)
ch. 4 The relationship of disciplinary differences and the value of class preparation time to student ratings of teaching (Jennifer Franklin and Michael Theall)
ch. 5 Disciplinary and institutional differences in undergraduate education goals (John C. Smart and Corinna A. Ethington)
ch. 6 Disciplines with an affinity for the improvement of undergraduate education (John M. Braxton)
ch. 7 Discipline-specific pedagogical knowledge in linguistics and Spanish (Lisa Firing Lenze)
ch. 8 Subject-matter differences in secondary schools : connections to higher education (Susan S. Stodolsky and Pamela L. Grossman)
ch. 9 Disciplinary differences in what is taught and in students' perceptions of what they learn and of how they are taught (William E. Cashin and Ronald G. Downey)
ch. 10 Approaches to studying and perceptions of the learning environment across disciplines (Noel Entwhistle and Hilary Tait)
ch. 11 Disciplinary differences in students' perceptions of success : modifying misperceptions with attributional retraining (Verena H. Menec and Raymond P. Perry)
Concluding remarks : on the meaning of disciplinary differences

Ethical Dimensions of College and University Teaching: Understanding and Honoring the Special Relationship Between Teachers and Students
Additional Info:
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a ...
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a ...
Additional Info:
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a voice more effective than any proclamation. They also answer calls for accountability from the public, the press, and politicians. In all, teaching ethically requires transformations of structures, attitudes, and persons--faculty as well as students--if faculty are to meet fully their responsibilities to themselves, to their students, and to society. This is the 66th issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The ethics of teaching / David C. Smith
Teaching the subject: developmental identities in teaching / Mary Burgan
The ethics of student-faculty friendships / Richard L. Baker, Jr.
Between apathy and advocacy: teaching and modeling ethical reflection / Karen Hanson
nstitutional commitment to fairness in college teaching / Rita Cobb Rodabaugh
Differentiating the related concepts of ethics, morality, law and justice / Terry T. Ray
The ethics of knowledge / Clark Kerr
Ethical principles for college and university teaching / Harry Murray, Eileen Gillese, Madeline Lennon, Paul Mercer, Marilyn Robinson
Making responsible academic ethical decisions / Charles H. Reynolds
Intervening with colleagues / Patricia Keith-Spiegel, Arno F. Wittig, David V. Perkins, Deborah Ware Balogh, Bernard E. Whitley, Jr.
Reflecting on the ethics and values of our practice / Ronald A. Smith
Toward more ethical teaching / Linc. Fisch
Ethics in teaching: putting it together / Kathleen McGrory.
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a voice more effective than any proclamation. They also answer calls for accountability from the public, the press, and politicians. In all, teaching ethically requires transformations of structures, attitudes, and persons--faculty as well as students--if faculty are to meet fully their responsibilities to themselves, to their students, and to society. This is the 66th issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The ethics of teaching / David C. Smith
Teaching the subject: developmental identities in teaching / Mary Burgan
The ethics of student-faculty friendships / Richard L. Baker, Jr.
Between apathy and advocacy: teaching and modeling ethical reflection / Karen Hanson
nstitutional commitment to fairness in college teaching / Rita Cobb Rodabaugh
Differentiating the related concepts of ethics, morality, law and justice / Terry T. Ray
The ethics of knowledge / Clark Kerr
Ethical principles for college and university teaching / Harry Murray, Eileen Gillese, Madeline Lennon, Paul Mercer, Marilyn Robinson
Making responsible academic ethical decisions / Charles H. Reynolds
Intervening with colleagues / Patricia Keith-Spiegel, Arno F. Wittig, David V. Perkins, Deborah Ware Balogh, Bernard E. Whitley, Jr.
Reflecting on the ethics and values of our practice / Ronald A. Smith
Toward more ethical teaching / Linc. Fisch
Ethics in teaching: putting it together / Kathleen McGrory.

Honoring Exemplary Teaching
Additional Info:
Many colleges and universities are attempting to increase the recognition they give to those faculty who go beyond mere competence and truly represent the best teaching higher education has to offer. What is the promise of programs to honor exemplary teaching? What pitfalls must they avoid? This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning describes programs in a variety of settings and with varying purposes. It reviews research relevant ...
Many colleges and universities are attempting to increase the recognition they give to those faculty who go beyond mere competence and truly represent the best teaching higher education has to offer. What is the promise of programs to honor exemplary teaching? What pitfalls must they avoid? This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning describes programs in a variety of settings and with varying purposes. It reviews research relevant ...
Additional Info:
Many colleges and universities are attempting to increase the recognition they give to those faculty who go beyond mere competence and truly represent the best teaching higher education has to offer. What is the promise of programs to honor exemplary teaching? What pitfalls must they avoid? This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning describes programs in a variety of settings and with varying purposes. It reviews research relevant to selection criteria, and it offers guidelines for planning and implementing the kinds of programs most likely to be effective. This is the 65th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Awards to individuals / Robert J. Menges
Awards to groups: the university of Wisconsin system's departmental teaching award / Susan Kahn
The "certification" paradigm / Hoke Smith, Barbara Walvoord
Teaching academies: honoring and promoting teaching through a community of expertise / Nancy Van Note Chism, Jane M. Fraser, Robert L. Arnold
Characteristics of exemplary teachers / Joseph Lowman
Identifying exemplary teaching: using data from course and teacher evaluations / Kenneth A. Feldman
Identifying exemplary teachers: evidence from colleagues, administrators and alumni / John A. Centra
Relating exemplary teaching to student learning / Thomas A. Angelo
Using portfolios to document teaching excellence / Laurie Richlin, Brenda Manning
Honoring exemplary teaching in research universities / Mary Deane Sorcinelli, Barbara Gross Davis
Honoring exemplary teaching: the two-year college setting / Mardee Jenrette, Karen Hays
Honoring exemplary teaching in the liberal arts institution / Kenneth J. Zahorski
Decentralized/ departmental reward systems / Joyce Povlacs Lunde, Leverne A. Barrett
Promoting exemplary teaching: the case of the U.S. military academy / George B. Forsythe, Anita Gandolfo
Promoting excellence in teaching in pharmaceutical education: the master teacher credentialling program / Susan M. Meyer, Richard P. Penna
Consistency within diversity: guidelines for programs to honor exemplary teaching / Marilla D. Svinicki, Robert J. Menges.
Many colleges and universities are attempting to increase the recognition they give to those faculty who go beyond mere competence and truly represent the best teaching higher education has to offer. What is the promise of programs to honor exemplary teaching? What pitfalls must they avoid? This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning describes programs in a variety of settings and with varying purposes. It reviews research relevant to selection criteria, and it offers guidelines for planning and implementing the kinds of programs most likely to be effective. This is the 65th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Awards to individuals / Robert J. Menges
Awards to groups: the university of Wisconsin system's departmental teaching award / Susan Kahn
The "certification" paradigm / Hoke Smith, Barbara Walvoord
Teaching academies: honoring and promoting teaching through a community of expertise / Nancy Van Note Chism, Jane M. Fraser, Robert L. Arnold
Characteristics of exemplary teachers / Joseph Lowman
Identifying exemplary teaching: using data from course and teacher evaluations / Kenneth A. Feldman
Identifying exemplary teachers: evidence from colleagues, administrators and alumni / John A. Centra
Relating exemplary teaching to student learning / Thomas A. Angelo
Using portfolios to document teaching excellence / Laurie Richlin, Brenda Manning
Honoring exemplary teaching in research universities / Mary Deane Sorcinelli, Barbara Gross Davis
Honoring exemplary teaching: the two-year college setting / Mardee Jenrette, Karen Hays
Honoring exemplary teaching in the liberal arts institution / Kenneth J. Zahorski
Decentralized/ departmental reward systems / Joyce Povlacs Lunde, Leverne A. Barrett
Promoting exemplary teaching: the case of the U.S. military academy / George B. Forsythe, Anita Gandolfo
Promoting excellence in teaching in pharmaceutical education: the master teacher credentialling program / Susan M. Meyer, Richard P. Penna
Consistency within diversity: guidelines for programs to honor exemplary teaching / Marilla D. Svinicki, Robert J. Menges.

Bringing Problem-Based Learning to Higher Education: Theory and Practice
Additional Info:
Problem-based learning has become a widespread teaching methodology in disciplines where students must learn to apply knowledge, not just acquire it. This volume describes the basics of the method, along with the variables that affect its success. The chapters provide examples of its application in a wide range of disciplines, including medicine, business, education, engineering, mathematics, and the sciences. The authors make a persuasive argument that professional fields as well ...
Problem-based learning has become a widespread teaching methodology in disciplines where students must learn to apply knowledge, not just acquire it. This volume describes the basics of the method, along with the variables that affect its success. The chapters provide examples of its application in a wide range of disciplines, including medicine, business, education, engineering, mathematics, and the sciences. The authors make a persuasive argument that professional fields as well ...
Additional Info:
Problem-based learning has become a widespread teaching methodology in disciplines where students must learn to apply knowledge, not just acquire it. This volume describes the basics of the method, along with the variables that affect its success. The chapters provide examples of its application in a wide range of disciplines, including medicine, business, education, engineering, mathematics, and the sciences. The authors make a persuasive argument that professional fields as well as academic fields would find much to recommend PBL as a standard teaching method. This is the 68th issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Problem-Based Learning in Medicine and Beyond: A Brief Overview
ch. 2 Connecting Problem-Based Practices with Educational Theory
ch. 3 Tutors and Small Groups in Problem-Based Learning: Lessons from the Literature
ch. 4 Problem-Based Learning in Business Education: Curriculum Design and Implementation Issues
ch. 5 The Power of Problem-Based Learning in Teaching Introductory Science Courses
ch. 6 Problem-Based Learning in Leadership Education
ch. 7 Twenty-Up: Problem-Based Learning with a Large Group
ch. 8 Time Expenditure, Workload, and Student Satisfaction in Problem-Based Learning
ch. 9 An Active Approach to Calculus
ch. 10 Problem-Based Learning for Large Classes in Chemical Engineering
ch. 11 Concluding Comments
Index
Problem-based learning has become a widespread teaching methodology in disciplines where students must learn to apply knowledge, not just acquire it. This volume describes the basics of the method, along with the variables that affect its success. The chapters provide examples of its application in a wide range of disciplines, including medicine, business, education, engineering, mathematics, and the sciences. The authors make a persuasive argument that professional fields as well as academic fields would find much to recommend PBL as a standard teaching method. This is the 68th issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Problem-Based Learning in Medicine and Beyond: A Brief Overview
ch. 2 Connecting Problem-Based Practices with Educational Theory
ch. 3 Tutors and Small Groups in Problem-Based Learning: Lessons from the Literature
ch. 4 Problem-Based Learning in Business Education: Curriculum Design and Implementation Issues
ch. 5 The Power of Problem-Based Learning in Teaching Introductory Science Courses
ch. 6 Problem-Based Learning in Leadership Education
ch. 7 Twenty-Up: Problem-Based Learning with a Large Group
ch. 8 Time Expenditure, Workload, and Student Satisfaction in Problem-Based Learning
ch. 9 An Active Approach to Calculus
ch. 10 Problem-Based Learning for Large Classes in Chemical Engineering
ch. 11 Concluding Comments
Index

Teaching and Learning at a Distance: What It Takes to Effectively Design, Deliver and Evaluate Programs
Additional Info:
Teaching and learning at a distance is an area of education that is growing rapidly alongside the technology that makes it possible. But success in this area requires more than advanced technology; it requires skillful instructors, well-designed courses, and students ready to learn from the format. This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning provides insights from experienced practitioners into what is needed to make teaching and learning at ...
Teaching and learning at a distance is an area of education that is growing rapidly alongside the technology that makes it possible. But success in this area requires more than advanced technology; it requires skillful instructors, well-designed courses, and students ready to learn from the format. This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning provides insights from experienced practitioners into what is needed to make teaching and learning at ...
Additional Info:
Teaching and learning at a distance is an area of education that is growing rapidly alongside the technology that makes it possible. But success in this area requires more than advanced technology; it requires skillful instructors, well-designed courses, and students ready to learn from the format. This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning provides insights from experienced practitioners into what is needed to make teaching and learning at a distance successful for everyone involved. This is the 71st issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Issues and Trends
ch. 1. Issues and TrAnds to Take Us into the Twenty-First Century (George P. Connick).
Part Two: Instructional Design Principles for Distance Learning.
ch. 2. Competence in Teaching at a Distance (Thomas E. Cyrs).
ch. 3. Interactivity: From Agents to Outcomes (Ellen D. Wagner).
ch. 4. Visual Thinking: Let Them See What You Are Saying (Thomas E. Cyrs)
ch. 5. Student-Centered Instruction for the Design of Telecourses (M. Winston Egan, Gordon S. Gibb).
ch. 6. Learner Development: Beyond the Technology (Darcy Walsh Hardy, Mary H. Boaz).
Part Three: Alternative Delivery Systems for Distance Learning.
ch. 7. Teaching by Television (Virginia A. OstAndorf).
ch. 8. Teaching by Telephone (Christine H. Olgren).
ch. 9. The Internet: A Learning Environment (Rory McGreal).
ch. 10. Networked Learning Environments (Alan G. Chute, Pamela K. Sayers, Richard P. Gardner).
Part Four: Administrative Issues for the Distance Instructor.
ch. 11. Evaluating Teaching and Learning at a Distance (Michael R. Simonson).
ch. 12. Copyright: Opportunities and Restrictions for the Teleinstructor (Janis H. Bruwelheide).
ch. 13. Distance Learning and the Digital Library: Transforming the Library into an Information Center (Roberta L. Derlin, Edward Erazo).
ch. 14. Managing Information Resources and Services in a Distance Environment (Robert S. Tolsma)
Teaching and learning at a distance is an area of education that is growing rapidly alongside the technology that makes it possible. But success in this area requires more than advanced technology; it requires skillful instructors, well-designed courses, and students ready to learn from the format. This issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning provides insights from experienced practitioners into what is needed to make teaching and learning at a distance successful for everyone involved. This is the 71st issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Issues and Trends
ch. 1. Issues and TrAnds to Take Us into the Twenty-First Century (George P. Connick).
Part Two: Instructional Design Principles for Distance Learning.
ch. 2. Competence in Teaching at a Distance (Thomas E. Cyrs).
ch. 3. Interactivity: From Agents to Outcomes (Ellen D. Wagner).
ch. 4. Visual Thinking: Let Them See What You Are Saying (Thomas E. Cyrs)
ch. 5. Student-Centered Instruction for the Design of Telecourses (M. Winston Egan, Gordon S. Gibb).
ch. 6. Learner Development: Beyond the Technology (Darcy Walsh Hardy, Mary H. Boaz).
Part Three: Alternative Delivery Systems for Distance Learning.
ch. 7. Teaching by Television (Virginia A. OstAndorf).
ch. 8. Teaching by Telephone (Christine H. Olgren).
ch. 9. The Internet: A Learning Environment (Rory McGreal).
ch. 10. Networked Learning Environments (Alan G. Chute, Pamela K. Sayers, Richard P. Gardner).
Part Four: Administrative Issues for the Distance Instructor.
ch. 11. Evaluating Teaching and Learning at a Distance (Michael R. Simonson).
ch. 12. Copyright: Opportunities and Restrictions for the Teleinstructor (Janis H. Bruwelheide).
ch. 13. Distance Learning and the Digital Library: Transforming the Library into an Information Center (Roberta L. Derlin, Edward Erazo).
ch. 14. Managing Information Resources and Services in a Distance Environment (Robert S. Tolsma)

Teaching in the Information Age: The Role of Educational Technology
Additional Info:
New instructional programs and services involving technology are being established which have significant implications for the way teaching and learning will be conducted in the future. This volume contains 10 papers which examine some of the current trends in instructional technology in higher education and discuss implications for teaching and learning in the postsecondary setting. (From the Publisher)
New instructional programs and services involving technology are being established which have significant implications for the way teaching and learning will be conducted in the future. This volume contains 10 papers which examine some of the current trends in instructional technology in higher education and discuss implications for teaching and learning in the postsecondary setting. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
New instructional programs and services involving technology are being established which have significant implications for the way teaching and learning will be conducted in the future. This volume contains 10 papers which examine some of the current trends in instructional technology in higher education and discuss implications for teaching and learning in the postsecondary setting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Instructional Technology and the Faculty Member
ch. 2 New Directions in Presentation Graphics: Impact on Teaching and Learning
ch. 3 Multimedia and the Teaching-Learning Process in Higher Education
ch. 4 Academic Computing: How to Address the Teaching and Learning Challenge
ch. 5 Computer Communications and Learning
ch. 6 Distance Education: Meeting Diverse Learners' Needs in a Changing World
ch. 7 The Emerging Potential of Virtual Reality in Postsecondary Education
ch. 8 The Research Library and Emerging Information Technology
ch. 9 The Future of Campus Media Centers
ch. 10 Faculty Development's Role in Improving Undergraduate Education
Index
New instructional programs and services involving technology are being established which have significant implications for the way teaching and learning will be conducted in the future. This volume contains 10 papers which examine some of the current trends in instructional technology in higher education and discuss implications for teaching and learning in the postsecondary setting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Instructional Technology and the Faculty Member
ch. 2 New Directions in Presentation Graphics: Impact on Teaching and Learning
ch. 3 Multimedia and the Teaching-Learning Process in Higher Education
ch. 4 Academic Computing: How to Address the Teaching and Learning Challenge
ch. 5 Computer Communications and Learning
ch. 6 Distance Education: Meeting Diverse Learners' Needs in a Changing World
ch. 7 The Emerging Potential of Virtual Reality in Postsecondary Education
ch. 8 The Research Library and Emerging Information Technology
ch. 9 The Future of Campus Media Centers
ch. 10 Faculty Development's Role in Improving Undergraduate Education
Index

The Changing Face of College Teaching
Additional Info:
It has been suggested that the greatest educational reform will come not through the sweeping changes of large institutionally mandated programs but through the small, day-to-day improvements that faculty members make in their own courses. The faculty is the first line of revolution in teaching; without their cooperation, no change is possible; with it, no challenge is impossible. This volume provides some insights into how individual instructors can make interesting ...
It has been suggested that the greatest educational reform will come not through the sweeping changes of large institutionally mandated programs but through the small, day-to-day improvements that faculty members make in their own courses. The faculty is the first line of revolution in teaching; without their cooperation, no change is possible; with it, no challenge is impossible. This volume provides some insights into how individual instructors can make interesting ...
Additional Info:
It has been suggested that the greatest educational reform will come not through the sweeping changes of large institutionally mandated programs but through the small, day-to-day improvements that faculty members make in their own courses. The faculty is the first line of revolution in teaching; without their cooperation, no change is possible; with it, no challenge is impossible. This volume provides some insights into how individual instructors can make interesting changes in their classes and in their approaches to teaching in general. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Changing the face of your teaching / Marilla D. Svinicki
ch. 2 Collaborative learning : shared inquiry as a process of reform / Jean MacGregor
ch. 3 Writing to learn : back to another basic / Sandra Tomlinson
ch. 4 Teaching with cases : learning to question / John Boehrer, Marty Linsky
ch. 5 Rescue to perishing : a new approach to supplemental instruction / Calvin B. Peters
ch. 6 Classroom assessment : improving learning quality where it matters not / Thomas A. Angelo
ch. 7 Assessing and improving students' learning strategies / Paul R. Pintrich, Glenn Ross Johnston
ch. 8 Grades : their influence on students and faculty / Fred Janzow, James Eison
ch. 9 Using pyschological models to understand student motivation / Ann F. Lucas
ch. 10 "Study" your way to better teaching / Maryellen Weimer
It has been suggested that the greatest educational reform will come not through the sweeping changes of large institutionally mandated programs but through the small, day-to-day improvements that faculty members make in their own courses. The faculty is the first line of revolution in teaching; without their cooperation, no change is possible; with it, no challenge is impossible. This volume provides some insights into how individual instructors can make interesting changes in their classes and in their approaches to teaching in general. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Changing the face of your teaching / Marilla D. Svinicki
ch. 2 Collaborative learning : shared inquiry as a process of reform / Jean MacGregor
ch. 3 Writing to learn : back to another basic / Sandra Tomlinson
ch. 4 Teaching with cases : learning to question / John Boehrer, Marty Linsky
ch. 5 Rescue to perishing : a new approach to supplemental instruction / Calvin B. Peters
ch. 6 Classroom assessment : improving learning quality where it matters not / Thomas A. Angelo
ch. 7 Assessing and improving students' learning strategies / Paul R. Pintrich, Glenn Ross Johnston
ch. 8 Grades : their influence on students and faculty / Fred Janzow, James Eison
ch. 9 Using pyschological models to understand student motivation / Ann F. Lucas
ch. 10 "Study" your way to better teaching / Maryellen Weimer

Using Active Learning in College Classrooms: A Range of Options for Faculty
Additional Info:
In this volume the authors take a second look at the use of active learning in higher education. The chapters describe the concept of the active learning continuum and tie various practical examples of active learning to that concept. They illustrate how important it is to consider context in the design of active learning to get maximum benefit. This is the 67th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching ...
In this volume the authors take a second look at the use of active learning in higher education. The chapters describe the concept of the active learning continuum and tie various practical examples of active learning to that concept. They illustrate how important it is to consider context in the design of active learning to get maximum benefit. This is the 67th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching ...
Additional Info:
In this volume the authors take a second look at the use of active learning in higher education. The chapters describe the concept of the active learning continuum and tie various practical examples of active learning to that concept. They illustrate how important it is to consider context in the design of active learning to get maximum benefit. This is the 67th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The active learning continuum : choosing activities to engage students in the classroom (Charles C. Bonwell and Tracey E. Sutherland)
ch. 2 Providing structure : the critical element (Judith E. Miller, James E. Groccia, and John M. Wilkes)
ch. 3 Enhancing the lecture : revitalizing a traditional format (Charles C. Bonwell)
ch. 4 Encouraging self-assessment : writing as active learning (Eric H. Hobson)
ch. 5 Using electronic tools to promote active learning (David H. Gillette)
ch. 6 Cooperative learning : make "groupwork" work (Karl A. Smith)
ch. 7 Emerging issues in the discussion of active learning (Tracey E. Sutherland)
In this volume the authors take a second look at the use of active learning in higher education. The chapters describe the concept of the active learning continuum and tie various practical examples of active learning to that concept. They illustrate how important it is to consider context in the design of active learning to get maximum benefit. This is the 67th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The active learning continuum : choosing activities to engage students in the classroom (Charles C. Bonwell and Tracey E. Sutherland)
ch. 2 Providing structure : the critical element (Judith E. Miller, James E. Groccia, and John M. Wilkes)
ch. 3 Enhancing the lecture : revitalizing a traditional format (Charles C. Bonwell)
ch. 4 Encouraging self-assessment : writing as active learning (Eric H. Hobson)
ch. 5 Using electronic tools to promote active learning (David H. Gillette)
ch. 6 Cooperative learning : make "groupwork" work (Karl A. Smith)
ch. 7 Emerging issues in the discussion of active learning (Tracey E. Sutherland)

Writing to Learn: Strategies for Assigning and Responding to Writing Across the Disciplines
Additional Info:
This volume provides instructors who teach writing with an array of strategies and philosophies about the way writing is learned, both in the context of a discipline and as an independent skill. Focusing primarily on the best ways to give feedback about written work, the authors describe a host of alternatives that have a solid foundation in research. This is the 69th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching ...
This volume provides instructors who teach writing with an array of strategies and philosophies about the way writing is learned, both in the context of a discipline and as an independent skill. Focusing primarily on the best ways to give feedback about written work, the authors describe a host of alternatives that have a solid foundation in research. This is the 69th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching ...
Additional Info:
This volume provides instructors who teach writing with an array of strategies and philosophies about the way writing is learned, both in the context of a discipline and as an independent skill. Focusing primarily on the best ways to give feedback about written work, the authors describe a host of alternatives that have a solid foundation in research. This is the 69th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 High Stakes and Low Stakes in Assigning and Responding to Writing (Peter Elbow)
ch. 2 Writing Back and Forth: Class Letters (Toby Fulwiler)
ch. 3 Mentoring, Modeling, Monitoring, Motivating: Response to Students' Ungraded Writing as Academic Conversation (Art Young)
ch. 4 Peer Response to Low Stakes Writing in a WAC Literature Classroom (M. Elizabeth Sargent)
ch. 5 Student Writing in Philosophy: A Sketch of Five Techniques (Stephen M. Fishman)
ch. 6 Developing and Responding to Major Writing Projects (Anne J. Herrington)
ch. 7 Negotiating the Margins: Some Principles for Responding to Our Students' Writing, Some Strategies for Helping Students Read Our Comments (Elizabeth Hodges)
ch. 8 When Less is More: Principles for Responding in the Disciplines (Ronald F. Lunsford)
ch. 9 In Our Own Voices: Using Recorded Commentary to Respond to Writing (Chris M. Anson)
ch. 10 Responding to Writing On-Line (Gail E. Hawisher and Charles Moran)
ch. 11 Grading Student Writing: Making It Simpler, Fairer, Clearer (Peter Elbow)
ch. 12 The Role of Faculty Development Programs in Helping Teachers to Improve Student Learning Through Writing (Elizabeth Ann Caldwell and Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
This volume provides instructors who teach writing with an array of strategies and philosophies about the way writing is learned, both in the context of a discipline and as an independent skill. Focusing primarily on the best ways to give feedback about written work, the authors describe a host of alternatives that have a solid foundation in research. This is the 69th issue of the journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 High Stakes and Low Stakes in Assigning and Responding to Writing (Peter Elbow)
ch. 2 Writing Back and Forth: Class Letters (Toby Fulwiler)
ch. 3 Mentoring, Modeling, Monitoring, Motivating: Response to Students' Ungraded Writing as Academic Conversation (Art Young)
ch. 4 Peer Response to Low Stakes Writing in a WAC Literature Classroom (M. Elizabeth Sargent)
ch. 5 Student Writing in Philosophy: A Sketch of Five Techniques (Stephen M. Fishman)
ch. 6 Developing and Responding to Major Writing Projects (Anne J. Herrington)
ch. 7 Negotiating the Margins: Some Principles for Responding to Our Students' Writing, Some Strategies for Helping Students Read Our Comments (Elizabeth Hodges)
ch. 8 When Less is More: Principles for Responding in the Disciplines (Ronald F. Lunsford)
ch. 9 In Our Own Voices: Using Recorded Commentary to Respond to Writing (Chris M. Anson)
ch. 10 Responding to Writing On-Line (Gail E. Hawisher and Charles Moran)
ch. 11 Grading Student Writing: Making It Simpler, Fairer, Clearer (Peter Elbow)
ch. 12 The Role of Faculty Development Programs in Helping Teachers to Improve Student Learning Through Writing (Elizabeth Ann Caldwell and Mary Deane Sorcinelli)

Teaching through Academic Advising: A Faculty Perspective
Additional Info:
This volume in the New Directions for Teaching and Learning Series offers faculty writings on academic advising as a form of teaching. The issue examines several facets of advising including the university's role in supporting advising as an educational tool, faculty advisors as mentors, the relationship between advising and student assessment, and suggestions for faculty who want to improve their mastery of advising. Advising in specific academic areas such as ...
This volume in the New Directions for Teaching and Learning Series offers faculty writings on academic advising as a form of teaching. The issue examines several facets of advising including the university's role in supporting advising as an educational tool, faculty advisors as mentors, the relationship between advising and student assessment, and suggestions for faculty who want to improve their mastery of advising. Advising in specific academic areas such as ...
Additional Info:
This volume in the New Directions for Teaching and Learning Series offers faculty writings on academic advising as a form of teaching. The issue examines several facets of advising including the university's role in supporting advising as an educational tool, faculty advisors as mentors, the relationship between advising and student assessment, and suggestions for faculty who want to improve their mastery of advising. Advising in specific academic areas such as humanities, sciences, and social sciences are included. Also, the volume includes a discussion of the unique advising needs of specialized student groups such as honor students, first year students, and members of ethnic or cultural minorities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Educating the whole person (Robert M. Berdahl)
ch. 2 Faculty speak to advising (James Kelly)
ch. 3 Advising special populations of students (Diane W. Strommer)
ch. 4 Professional development and training for faculty advisers (Carol C. Ryan)
ch. 5 Advising in the arts: Some thoughts and observations for arts advisers (William J. Kelly)
ch. 6 Social science advising (Gilbert Geis, Ted L. Huston)
ch. 7 The role of faculty advising in science and engineering (J.R. Cogdell)
ch. 8 Advising women considering nontraditional fields of study (Leodocia M. Pope)
ch. 9 Faculty as mentors (Jeanne M. Lagowski, James W. Vick)
ch. 10 Academic advising and assessment (Gary R. Hanson, Christine Huston)
ch. 11 The professional status of teachers and academic advisers: It matters (Barbara K. Wade, Edgar P. Yoder)
ch. 12 Resources for academic advising (Virginia N. Gordon)
This volume in the New Directions for Teaching and Learning Series offers faculty writings on academic advising as a form of teaching. The issue examines several facets of advising including the university's role in supporting advising as an educational tool, faculty advisors as mentors, the relationship between advising and student assessment, and suggestions for faculty who want to improve their mastery of advising. Advising in specific academic areas such as humanities, sciences, and social sciences are included. Also, the volume includes a discussion of the unique advising needs of specialized student groups such as honor students, first year students, and members of ethnic or cultural minorities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Educating the whole person (Robert M. Berdahl)
ch. 2 Faculty speak to advising (James Kelly)
ch. 3 Advising special populations of students (Diane W. Strommer)
ch. 4 Professional development and training for faculty advisers (Carol C. Ryan)
ch. 5 Advising in the arts: Some thoughts and observations for arts advisers (William J. Kelly)
ch. 6 Social science advising (Gilbert Geis, Ted L. Huston)
ch. 7 The role of faculty advising in science and engineering (J.R. Cogdell)
ch. 8 Advising women considering nontraditional fields of study (Leodocia M. Pope)
ch. 9 Faculty as mentors (Jeanne M. Lagowski, James W. Vick)
ch. 10 Academic advising and assessment (Gary R. Hanson, Christine Huston)
ch. 11 The professional status of teachers and academic advisers: It matters (Barbara K. Wade, Edgar P. Yoder)
ch. 12 Resources for academic advising (Virginia N. Gordon)

Promoting Civility: A Teaching Challenge
Additional Info:
If we take a passive view of classroom behavior, we fail in a crucial part of our role as educators: creating a democratic and effective learning environment for a diverse student body. (From the Publisher)
If we take a passive view of classroom behavior, we fail in a crucial part of our role as educators: creating a democratic and effective learning environment for a diverse student body. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
If we take a passive view of classroom behavior, we fail in a crucial part of our role as educators: creating a democratic and effective learning environment for a diverse student body. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Incivility in Dyadic Teaching and Learning (Richard G. Tiberius & Edred Flak).
ch. 2. Promoting Internal Civility: Understanding Our Beliefs About Teaching and Students (Sally Kuhlenschmidt).
ch. 3. Feelings from the Back Row: Negotiating Sensitive Issues in Large Classes (Corly Petersen Brooke).
ch. 4. Students Behaving Badly in Large Classes (Elisa Carbone).
ch. 5. Strategies for Dealing with Difficult Behavior (Sally Kuhlenschmidt & Lois Layne).
ch. 6. After the Eruption: Managing Conflict in the Classroom (Susan A Holton).
ch. 7. Faculty Responsibility for Promoting Conflict-Free College Classrooms (James A. Anderson).
ch. 8. Civility, Leadership, and the Classroom (Steven M. Richardson).
ch. 9. The Prevention and Cure of Campus Disputes (Richard Hebein).
If we take a passive view of classroom behavior, we fail in a crucial part of our role as educators: creating a democratic and effective learning environment for a diverse student body. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Incivility in Dyadic Teaching and Learning (Richard G. Tiberius & Edred Flak).
ch. 2. Promoting Internal Civility: Understanding Our Beliefs About Teaching and Students (Sally Kuhlenschmidt).
ch. 3. Feelings from the Back Row: Negotiating Sensitive Issues in Large Classes (Corly Petersen Brooke).
ch. 4. Students Behaving Badly in Large Classes (Elisa Carbone).
ch. 5. Strategies for Dealing with Difficult Behavior (Sally Kuhlenschmidt & Lois Layne).
ch. 6. After the Eruption: Managing Conflict in the Classroom (Susan A Holton).
ch. 7. Faculty Responsibility for Promoting Conflict-Free College Classrooms (James A. Anderson).
ch. 8. Civility, Leadership, and the Classroom (Steven M. Richardson).
ch. 9. The Prevention and Cure of Campus Disputes (Richard Hebein).

Education for Ministry: Reform and Renewal in Theological Education
Additional Info:
Questions about education for Christian ministry are currently the subject of lively debate in both Church and society. Major constructive proposals have been made from within several church traditions. Though Catholics have been a part of those ecumenical discussions, they are only beginning to contribute from their rich resources. This work is a dialogue with the questions and issues already raised in other traditions, with special attention to the contribution ...
Questions about education for Christian ministry are currently the subject of lively debate in both Church and society. Major constructive proposals have been made from within several church traditions. Though Catholics have been a part of those ecumenical discussions, they are only beginning to contribute from their rich resources. This work is a dialogue with the questions and issues already raised in other traditions, with special attention to the contribution ...
Additional Info:
Questions about education for Christian ministry are currently the subject of lively debate in both Church and society. Major constructive proposals have been made from within several church traditions. Though Catholics have been a part of those ecumenical discussions, they are only beginning to contribute from their rich resources. This work is a dialogue with the questions and issues already raised in other traditions, with special attention to the contribution a Catholic perspective can offer. Education for Ministry asks questions about the whole range of ministerial activities that are coming to life in the Roman tradition in North America. It provides students with an opportunity to reflect on their preparation for a life of ministry. (From the Publisher)
Questions about education for Christian ministry are currently the subject of lively debate in both Church and society. Major constructive proposals have been made from within several church traditions. Though Catholics have been a part of those ecumenical discussions, they are only beginning to contribute from their rich resources. This work is a dialogue with the questions and issues already raised in other traditions, with special attention to the contribution a Catholic perspective can offer. Education for Ministry asks questions about the whole range of ministerial activities that are coming to life in the Roman tradition in North America. It provides students with an opportunity to reflect on their preparation for a life of ministry. (From the Publisher)

Empowering Education: Critical Teaching for Social Change
Additional Info:
Ira Shor is a pioneer in the field of critical education who ror over twenty years has been experimenting with learning methods. His work creatively adapts the ideas of Brazilian educator Paulo Freire for North American classrooms. In Empowering Education Shor offers a comprehensive theory and practice for critical pedagogy. For Shor, empowering education is a student-centered, critical and democratic pedagogy for studying any subject matter and for self and ...
Ira Shor is a pioneer in the field of critical education who ror over twenty years has been experimenting with learning methods. His work creatively adapts the ideas of Brazilian educator Paulo Freire for North American classrooms. In Empowering Education Shor offers a comprehensive theory and practice for critical pedagogy. For Shor, empowering education is a student-centered, critical and democratic pedagogy for studying any subject matter and for self and ...
Additional Info:
Ira Shor is a pioneer in the field of critical education who ror over twenty years has been experimenting with learning methods. His work creatively adapts the ideas of Brazilian educator Paulo Freire for North American classrooms. In Empowering Education Shor offers a comprehensive theory and practice for critical pedagogy. For Shor, empowering education is a student-centered, critical and democratic pedagogy for studying any subject matter and for self and social change. It takes shape as a dialogue in which teachers and students mutually investigate everyday themes, social issues, and academic knowledge. Through dialogue and problem-posing, students become active agents of their learning. This book shows how students can develop as critical thinkers, inspired learners, skilled workers, and involved citizens. Shor carefully analyzes obstacles to and resources for empowering education, suggesting ways for teachers to transform traditional approaches into critical and democratic ones. He offers many examples and applications for the elementary grades through college and adult education.
"One of the most intelligent discussions of the unique function of education in a democratic society since the work of John Dewey. This theoretically compelling and practically useful book addresses the economic, political, and personal needs of students. Shor has emerged as the most reliable discussant of the uses of the work of Paulo Freire in the U.S."--James Berlin, Purdue University Ira Shor, professor of English at the Graduate Center of the City University of New York and the College of Staten Island, is author of Critical Teaching and Everyday Life, and Culture Wars: School and Society in the Conservative Restoration, 1969-1984, both published by the University of Chicago Press. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction The First Day of Class: Passing the Test
ch. 1 Education Is Politics: An Agenda for Empowerment
ch. 2 Problem-Posing: Situated and Multicultural Learning
ch. 3 Three Roads to Critical Thought: Generative, Topical, and Academic Themes
ch. 4 Critical Dialogue versus Teacher-Talk: Classroom Discourse and Social Inequality
ch. 5 Rethinking Knowledge and Society: "Desocialization" and "Critical Consciousness"
ch. 6 Democratic Authority: Resistance, Subject Matter, and the Learning Process
ch. 7 Critical Teaching and Classroom Research: An Interdisciplinary Field for Activist Learning
ch. 8 Becoming an Empowering Educator: Obstacles to and Resources for Critical Teaching
ch. 9 The Third Idiom: Inventing a Transformative Discourse for Education
References
Author Index
Subject Index
Ira Shor is a pioneer in the field of critical education who ror over twenty years has been experimenting with learning methods. His work creatively adapts the ideas of Brazilian educator Paulo Freire for North American classrooms. In Empowering Education Shor offers a comprehensive theory and practice for critical pedagogy. For Shor, empowering education is a student-centered, critical and democratic pedagogy for studying any subject matter and for self and social change. It takes shape as a dialogue in which teachers and students mutually investigate everyday themes, social issues, and academic knowledge. Through dialogue and problem-posing, students become active agents of their learning. This book shows how students can develop as critical thinkers, inspired learners, skilled workers, and involved citizens. Shor carefully analyzes obstacles to and resources for empowering education, suggesting ways for teachers to transform traditional approaches into critical and democratic ones. He offers many examples and applications for the elementary grades through college and adult education.
"One of the most intelligent discussions of the unique function of education in a democratic society since the work of John Dewey. This theoretically compelling and practically useful book addresses the economic, political, and personal needs of students. Shor has emerged as the most reliable discussant of the uses of the work of Paulo Freire in the U.S."--James Berlin, Purdue University Ira Shor, professor of English at the Graduate Center of the City University of New York and the College of Staten Island, is author of Critical Teaching and Everyday Life, and Culture Wars: School and Society in the Conservative Restoration, 1969-1984, both published by the University of Chicago Press. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction The First Day of Class: Passing the Test
ch. 1 Education Is Politics: An Agenda for Empowerment
ch. 2 Problem-Posing: Situated and Multicultural Learning
ch. 3 Three Roads to Critical Thought: Generative, Topical, and Academic Themes
ch. 4 Critical Dialogue versus Teacher-Talk: Classroom Discourse and Social Inequality
ch. 5 Rethinking Knowledge and Society: "Desocialization" and "Critical Consciousness"
ch. 6 Democratic Authority: Resistance, Subject Matter, and the Learning Process
ch. 7 Critical Teaching and Classroom Research: An Interdisciplinary Field for Activist Learning
ch. 8 Becoming an Empowering Educator: Obstacles to and Resources for Critical Teaching
ch. 9 The Third Idiom: Inventing a Transformative Discourse for Education
References
Author Index
Subject Index

Multicultural Education, Critical Pedagogy and the Politics of Difference
Additional Info:
Here is a comprehensive view of leading theories and practices of multicultural education from scholars of various racial and ethnic groups. The perspectives of those often left out of scholarly debate are well represented in this book. Those perspectives offer significant insights into the ways in which dominant ideologies and classroom practices have functioned to serve only one segment of the American population. (From the Publisher)
Here is a comprehensive view of leading theories and practices of multicultural education from scholars of various racial and ethnic groups. The perspectives of those often left out of scholarly debate are well represented in this book. Those perspectives offer significant insights into the ways in which dominant ideologies and classroom practices have functioned to serve only one segment of the American population. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Here is a comprehensive view of leading theories and practices of multicultural education from scholars of various racial and ethnic groups. The perspectives of those often left out of scholarly debate are well represented in this book. Those perspectives offer significant insights into the ways in which dominant ideologies and classroom practices have functioned to serve only one segment of the American population. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction: Exploring Connections to Build a Critical Multiculturalism
ch. 1 White Terror and Oppositional Agency: Towards a Critical Multiculturalism (Peter L. McLaren)
ch. 2 Literacy for Stupidification: The Pedagogy of the Big Lies (Donaldo Macedo)
ch. 3 White Culture and the Politics of Racial Difference: Implications for Multiculturalism (Stephen Haymes)
ch. 4 Critical Multiculturalism and Democratic Schooling: An Interview with Peter L. McLaren and Joe Kincheloe (Shirley R. Steinberg)
ch. 5 Mirror Images on Common Issues: Parallels between Multicultural Education and Critical Pedagogy (Geneva Gay)
ch. 6 From Brown Heroes and Holidays to Assimilationist Agendas: Reconsidering the Critiques of Multicultural Education (Sonia Nieto)
ch. 7 Multicultural, Critical, Feminine, and Constructive Pedagogies Seen through the Lives of Youth: A Call for the Revisioning of These and Beyond: Toward a Pedagogy for the Next Century (John Rivera and Mary Poplin)
ch. 8 The Problem with Origins: Race and the Contrapuntal Nature of the Educational Experience (Cameron McCarthy)
ch. 9 Postmodernism, the "Politically Correct," and Liberatory Pedagogy (Carl Allsup)
ch. 10 Culture as an Ongoing Dialog: Implications for Multicultural Teacher Education (Carmen Montecinos)
ch. 11 Whose Voice Is It Anyway?: Vocalizing Multicultural Analysis (Mary Ritchie)
ch. 12 Buscando America: The Contributions of Critical Latino Educators to the Academic Development and Empowerment of Latino Students in the U.S. (Antonio Darder)
ch. 13 An African-centered Pedagogy in Dialog with Liberatory Multiculturalism (Khaula Murtadha)
ch. 14 Multicultural Education beyond the Classroom (Evelyn Newman Phillips)
ch. 15 Cultural Diversity in Higher Education: An American Indian Perspective (Janine Pease-Windy Boy)
ch. 16 Reflections on My Use of Multicultural and Critical Pedagogy When Students Are White (Christine Sleeter)
Afterword
Notes on Contributors
Index
Here is a comprehensive view of leading theories and practices of multicultural education from scholars of various racial and ethnic groups. The perspectives of those often left out of scholarly debate are well represented in this book. Those perspectives offer significant insights into the ways in which dominant ideologies and classroom practices have functioned to serve only one segment of the American population. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction: Exploring Connections to Build a Critical Multiculturalism
ch. 1 White Terror and Oppositional Agency: Towards a Critical Multiculturalism (Peter L. McLaren)
ch. 2 Literacy for Stupidification: The Pedagogy of the Big Lies (Donaldo Macedo)
ch. 3 White Culture and the Politics of Racial Difference: Implications for Multiculturalism (Stephen Haymes)
ch. 4 Critical Multiculturalism and Democratic Schooling: An Interview with Peter L. McLaren and Joe Kincheloe (Shirley R. Steinberg)
ch. 5 Mirror Images on Common Issues: Parallels between Multicultural Education and Critical Pedagogy (Geneva Gay)
ch. 6 From Brown Heroes and Holidays to Assimilationist Agendas: Reconsidering the Critiques of Multicultural Education (Sonia Nieto)
ch. 7 Multicultural, Critical, Feminine, and Constructive Pedagogies Seen through the Lives of Youth: A Call for the Revisioning of These and Beyond: Toward a Pedagogy for the Next Century (John Rivera and Mary Poplin)
ch. 8 The Problem with Origins: Race and the Contrapuntal Nature of the Educational Experience (Cameron McCarthy)
ch. 9 Postmodernism, the "Politically Correct," and Liberatory Pedagogy (Carl Allsup)
ch. 10 Culture as an Ongoing Dialog: Implications for Multicultural Teacher Education (Carmen Montecinos)
ch. 11 Whose Voice Is It Anyway?: Vocalizing Multicultural Analysis (Mary Ritchie)
ch. 12 Buscando America: The Contributions of Critical Latino Educators to the Academic Development and Empowerment of Latino Students in the U.S. (Antonio Darder)
ch. 13 An African-centered Pedagogy in Dialog with Liberatory Multiculturalism (Khaula Murtadha)
ch. 14 Multicultural Education beyond the Classroom (Evelyn Newman Phillips)
ch. 15 Cultural Diversity in Higher Education: An American Indian Perspective (Janine Pease-Windy Boy)
ch. 16 Reflections on My Use of Multicultural and Critical Pedagogy When Students Are White (Christine Sleeter)
Afterword
Notes on Contributors
Index

Faith and Knowledge: Mainline Protestantism and American Higher Education
Additional Info:
Sloan explores the impact that the Protestant theological renaissance (1925-1960) had on American colleges and universities, focusing in particular on the church's most significant claim to have a continuing voice in higher education. He traces the role of the national ecumenical and denominational organizations, and studies the changing place of college chaplains. (From the Publisher)
Sloan explores the impact that the Protestant theological renaissance (1925-1960) had on American colleges and universities, focusing in particular on the church's most significant claim to have a continuing voice in higher education. He traces the role of the national ecumenical and denominational organizations, and studies the changing place of college chaplains. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Sloan explores the impact that the Protestant theological renaissance (1925-1960) had on American colleges and universities, focusing in particular on the church's most significant claim to have a continuing voice in higher education. He traces the role of the national ecumenical and denominational organizations, and studies the changing place of college chaplains. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Church, the University, and the Faith-Knowledge Issue: The Background
ch. 2 The Church and the Crisis in the University
ch. 3 The Church Engages Higher Education: The Campaign Is Launched
ch. 4 The Theologians and the Two-Realm Theory of Truth
ch. 5 The Campaign Collapses: The Student Movement
ch. 6 Collapse and Rout: The Faculty
ch. 7 Protestantism and Its Postmodern Prospects: Some Reflections on the Present and Future
Index
Sloan explores the impact that the Protestant theological renaissance (1925-1960) had on American colleges and universities, focusing in particular on the church's most significant claim to have a continuing voice in higher education. He traces the role of the national ecumenical and denominational organizations, and studies the changing place of college chaplains. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Church, the University, and the Faith-Knowledge Issue: The Background
ch. 2 The Church and the Crisis in the University
ch. 3 The Church Engages Higher Education: The Campaign Is Launched
ch. 4 The Theologians and the Two-Realm Theory of Truth
ch. 5 The Campaign Collapses: The Student Movement
ch. 6 Collapse and Rout: The Faculty
ch. 7 Protestantism and Its Postmodern Prospects: Some Reflections on the Present and Future
Index

Adult Learning and Development: Perspectives from Educational Psychology
Additional Info:
Adult education occurs whenever individuals engage in sustained, systematic learning in order to affect changes in their attitudes, knowledge, skills, or belief systems. Learning, instruction, and developmental processes are the primary foci of educational psychology research and theorizing, but educational psychologists' work in these domains has centered primarily on the childhood and adolescent school years. More recently, however, a number of educational psychologists have studied learning and development in adulthood. ...
Adult education occurs whenever individuals engage in sustained, systematic learning in order to affect changes in their attitudes, knowledge, skills, or belief systems. Learning, instruction, and developmental processes are the primary foci of educational psychology research and theorizing, but educational psychologists' work in these domains has centered primarily on the childhood and adolescent school years. More recently, however, a number of educational psychologists have studied learning and development in adulthood. ...
Additional Info:
Adult education occurs whenever individuals engage in sustained, systematic learning in order to affect changes in their attitudes, knowledge, skills, or belief systems. Learning, instruction, and developmental processes are the primary foci of educational psychology research and theorizing, but educational psychologists' work in these domains has centered primarily on the childhood and adolescent school years. More recently, however, a number of educational psychologists have studied learning and development in adulthood. The results of these efforts have resulted in what is now called adult educational psychology.
The purpose of this volume is to introduce this new subfield within educational psychology. Section 1 focuses on the interplay between learning and development in adulthood, how various forms of instruction lead to different learning outcomes for adults, description of the diverse social contexts in which adult learning takes place, and the development of metacognitive knowledge across the life span. Section 2 describes both research and theory pertaining to adult intellectual functioning, thinking, and problem-solving skills within various contexts. Section 3 describes research in a variety of adult learning domains; discusses the cognitive and behavioral dimensions of reading in adulthood and the applications of reading in real-life circumstances; examines an educational intervention developed to promote forgiveness; and relates the outcomes of an intervention designed to educate parents about their children's mathematics learning. Section 4 summarizes the themes and issues running throughout this, the first book that has sought to span the gulf betweenadult education, adult development, and educational psychology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 What Does Educational Psychology Know About Adult Learning and Development?
ch. 2 We Learn, Therefore We Develop: Learning Versus Development - or Developing Learning?
ch. 3 Abstraction, the Will, the Self, and Models of Learning in Adulthood
ch. 4 Extending Sociocultural Theory to Adult Learning
ch. 5 On the Development of Adult Metacognition
ch. 6 Changing Mind, Changing World: Practical Intelligence and Tacit Knowledge in Adult Learning
ch. 7 The Role of Adults' Beliefs About Knowledge in School, Work, and Everyday Life
ch. 8 Adult Intelligence: Sketch of a Theory and Applications to Learning and Education
ch. 9 Mnemonic Strategies for Adult Learner
ch. 10 Adult Age Differences in Reading and Remembering Text and Using This Information to Make Decisions in Everyday Life
ch. 11 The Educational Psychology of Reading in Adulthood
ch. 12 Forgiveness Education With Adult Learners
ch. 13 Contributions of Parent Education to Adult Development
ch. 14 Toward an Adult Educational Psychology
Author Index
Subject Index
Adult education occurs whenever individuals engage in sustained, systematic learning in order to affect changes in their attitudes, knowledge, skills, or belief systems. Learning, instruction, and developmental processes are the primary foci of educational psychology research and theorizing, but educational psychologists' work in these domains has centered primarily on the childhood and adolescent school years. More recently, however, a number of educational psychologists have studied learning and development in adulthood. The results of these efforts have resulted in what is now called adult educational psychology.
The purpose of this volume is to introduce this new subfield within educational psychology. Section 1 focuses on the interplay between learning and development in adulthood, how various forms of instruction lead to different learning outcomes for adults, description of the diverse social contexts in which adult learning takes place, and the development of metacognitive knowledge across the life span. Section 2 describes both research and theory pertaining to adult intellectual functioning, thinking, and problem-solving skills within various contexts. Section 3 describes research in a variety of adult learning domains; discusses the cognitive and behavioral dimensions of reading in adulthood and the applications of reading in real-life circumstances; examines an educational intervention developed to promote forgiveness; and relates the outcomes of an intervention designed to educate parents about their children's mathematics learning. Section 4 summarizes the themes and issues running throughout this, the first book that has sought to span the gulf betweenadult education, adult development, and educational psychology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 What Does Educational Psychology Know About Adult Learning and Development?
ch. 2 We Learn, Therefore We Develop: Learning Versus Development - or Developing Learning?
ch. 3 Abstraction, the Will, the Self, and Models of Learning in Adulthood
ch. 4 Extending Sociocultural Theory to Adult Learning
ch. 5 On the Development of Adult Metacognition
ch. 6 Changing Mind, Changing World: Practical Intelligence and Tacit Knowledge in Adult Learning
ch. 7 The Role of Adults' Beliefs About Knowledge in School, Work, and Everyday Life
ch. 8 Adult Intelligence: Sketch of a Theory and Applications to Learning and Education
ch. 9 Mnemonic Strategies for Adult Learner
ch. 10 Adult Age Differences in Reading and Remembering Text and Using This Information to Make Decisions in Everyday Life
ch. 11 The Educational Psychology of Reading in Adulthood
ch. 12 Forgiveness Education With Adult Learners
ch. 13 Contributions of Parent Education to Adult Development
ch. 14 Toward an Adult Educational Psychology
Author Index
Subject Index

More Quick Hits: Successful Strategies by Award-Winning Teachers
Additional Info:
Learning used to be taken for granted by teachers. No more. Growing numbers of teachers realize that teaching does not always promote learning. More Quick Hits offers simple but successful strategies that award-winning teachers have found promote learning.
Included among these strategies are tips for designing courses and environments that promote learning, and advice on creating learning communities — communities where not only students learn, but teachers do too.<...
Learning used to be taken for granted by teachers. No more. Growing numbers of teachers realize that teaching does not always promote learning. More Quick Hits offers simple but successful strategies that award-winning teachers have found promote learning.
Included among these strategies are tips for designing courses and environments that promote learning, and advice on creating learning communities — communities where not only students learn, but teachers do too.<...
Additional Info:
Learning used to be taken for granted by teachers. No more. Growing numbers of teachers realize that teaching does not always promote learning. More Quick Hits offers simple but successful strategies that award-winning teachers have found promote learning.
Included among these strategies are tips for designing courses and environments that promote learning, and advice on creating learning communities — communities where not only students learn, but teachers do too.
More Quick Hits also includes special sections on service and learning, technology and learning, and using assessment and evaluation for learning. Finally, More Quick Hits offers thoughts on how teachers themselves learn about teaching, including through their mistakes. An annotated "Quick List" of weightier resources on teaching and learning is included at the end of the volume, and "Quick Wits" — words and pictures to both encourage and amuse — are sprinkled throughout the book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Designing courses and environments for learning
ch. 2 Creating learning communities
ch. 3 Fostering critical and creative thinking
ch. 4 Helping students direct their own learning
ch. 5 Service and learning
ch. 6 Technology and learning
ch. 7 Using assessment and evaluation for learning
ch. 8 Learning to teach and teaching to learn
ch. 9 Quick list: Recommended books on teaching
Index of contributors
Index of subjects
Learning used to be taken for granted by teachers. No more. Growing numbers of teachers realize that teaching does not always promote learning. More Quick Hits offers simple but successful strategies that award-winning teachers have found promote learning.
Included among these strategies are tips for designing courses and environments that promote learning, and advice on creating learning communities — communities where not only students learn, but teachers do too.
More Quick Hits also includes special sections on service and learning, technology and learning, and using assessment and evaluation for learning. Finally, More Quick Hits offers thoughts on how teachers themselves learn about teaching, including through their mistakes. An annotated "Quick List" of weightier resources on teaching and learning is included at the end of the volume, and "Quick Wits" — words and pictures to both encourage and amuse — are sprinkled throughout the book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Designing courses and environments for learning
ch. 2 Creating learning communities
ch. 3 Fostering critical and creative thinking
ch. 4 Helping students direct their own learning
ch. 5 Service and learning
ch. 6 Technology and learning
ch. 7 Using assessment and evaluation for learning
ch. 8 Learning to teach and teaching to learn
ch. 9 Quick list: Recommended books on teaching
Index of contributors
Index of subjects

Shifting Boundaries: Contextual Approaches to the Structure of Theological Education
Additional Info:
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social ...
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social ...
Additional Info:
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social roles of Protestant theologians and the educational institutions in which they have pursued their scholarship and teaching. Ranging from analyses of the New England Puritan Cotton Mather to contemporary theologians as "public intellectuals," Gilpin proposes that we find out what theology "is by asking what theologians "do. By showing how particular cultural problems have always shaped the work of theologians, Gilpin's work profoundly illuminates the foundations of American academic theology, providing insights that will help guide its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Reconceiving practice (Craig Dykstra)
ch. 2 Situating the structure (Rebecca S. Chopp)
ch. 3 The historical consciousness and the study of theology (Walter E. Wyman, Jr.)
ch. 4 Theological and religious studies (Francis Schèussler Fiorenza)
ch. 5 Beyond a mono-religious theological education (Paul F. Knitter)
ch. 6 Overcoming alienation in theological education (Peter J. Paris)
ch. 7 Christian social ethics as a theological discipline (Thomas W. Ogletree)
ch. 8 Theology against the disciplines (John B. Cobb, Jr.) Celebrating difference, resisting domination (Mark Kline Taylor)
ch. 9 Toward a fundamental and strategic practical theology (Don S. Browning)
At a time of widespread perplexity about the social role of humanistic scholarship, few disciplines are as anxious about their nature and purposes as academic theology. In this important work, W. Clark Gilpin, dean of the University of Chicago Divinity School, proposes that American theological scholarship become responsible to a threefold public: the churches, the academic community, and civil society. Gilpin approaches this goal indirectly, by investigating the historic social roles of Protestant theologians and the educational institutions in which they have pursued their scholarship and teaching. Ranging from analyses of the New England Puritan Cotton Mather to contemporary theologians as "public intellectuals," Gilpin proposes that we find out what theology "is by asking what theologians "do. By showing how particular cultural problems have always shaped the work of theologians, Gilpin's work profoundly illuminates the foundations of American academic theology, providing insights that will help guide its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Reconceiving practice (Craig Dykstra)
ch. 2 Situating the structure (Rebecca S. Chopp)
ch. 3 The historical consciousness and the study of theology (Walter E. Wyman, Jr.)
ch. 4 Theological and religious studies (Francis Schèussler Fiorenza)
ch. 5 Beyond a mono-religious theological education (Paul F. Knitter)
ch. 6 Overcoming alienation in theological education (Peter J. Paris)
ch. 7 Christian social ethics as a theological discipline (Thomas W. Ogletree)
ch. 8 Theology against the disciplines (John B. Cobb, Jr.) Celebrating difference, resisting domination (Mark Kline Taylor)
ch. 9 Toward a fundamental and strategic practical theology (Don S. Browning)
Additional Info:
This book provides teachers and trainers with sensitive and practical help in working effectively with groups of culturally diverse learners. Raymond J. Wlodkowski and Margery B. Ginsberg combine their respective expertise in motivation and multiculturalism to go beyond the usual rhetoric on promoting diversity, offering real-world guidance and suggestions for successful teaching in today's changing classroom environment. Using a motivational framework for culturally responsive teaching complete with extensive examples and ...
This book provides teachers and trainers with sensitive and practical help in working effectively with groups of culturally diverse learners. Raymond J. Wlodkowski and Margery B. Ginsberg combine their respective expertise in motivation and multiculturalism to go beyond the usual rhetoric on promoting diversity, offering real-world guidance and suggestions for successful teaching in today's changing classroom environment. Using a motivational framework for culturally responsive teaching complete with extensive examples and ...
Additional Info:
This book provides teachers and trainers with sensitive and practical help in working effectively with groups of culturally diverse learners. Raymond J. Wlodkowski and Margery B. Ginsberg combine their respective expertise in motivation and multiculturalism to go beyond the usual rhetoric on promoting diversity, offering real-world guidance and suggestions for successful teaching in today's changing classroom environment. Using a motivational framework for culturally responsive teaching complete with extensive examples and illustrations, the authors describe the values, learning strategies, and structures necessary to establish inclusion, develop attitude, enhance meaning, and engender competence. By considering a set of eight guidelines, teachers and trainers can learn how to revise syllabus and assessment formats, form cooperative collegial groups, and create action plans for implementing a culturally responsive pedagogy. Diversity and Motivation shows all postsecondary faculty, instructors, trainers, and administrators how to create safe and respectful learning environments with teaching practices that cross disciplines and cultures to engage the motivation and honor the integrity of all learners. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Understanding Relationships Between Culture and Motivation to Learn
ch. 2 Establishing Inclusion
ch. 3 Developing Attitude
ch. 4 Enhancing Meaning
ch. 5 Engendering Competence
ch. 6 Implementing a Culturally Responsive Pedagogy
Resource: A. Facilitating Equitable Discussions Within the Multicultural Classroom
Resource: A. Effective Lecturing Within the Multicultural Classroom
Resource: B. Cooperative Lesson Worksheet
Resource: C. Evaluator Assessment
Resource: D. Evaluative Descriptors for Narrative Assessment
References
Name Index
Subject Index
This book provides teachers and trainers with sensitive and practical help in working effectively with groups of culturally diverse learners. Raymond J. Wlodkowski and Margery B. Ginsberg combine their respective expertise in motivation and multiculturalism to go beyond the usual rhetoric on promoting diversity, offering real-world guidance and suggestions for successful teaching in today's changing classroom environment. Using a motivational framework for culturally responsive teaching complete with extensive examples and illustrations, the authors describe the values, learning strategies, and structures necessary to establish inclusion, develop attitude, enhance meaning, and engender competence. By considering a set of eight guidelines, teachers and trainers can learn how to revise syllabus and assessment formats, form cooperative collegial groups, and create action plans for implementing a culturally responsive pedagogy. Diversity and Motivation shows all postsecondary faculty, instructors, trainers, and administrators how to create safe and respectful learning environments with teaching practices that cross disciplines and cultures to engage the motivation and honor the integrity of all learners. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Understanding Relationships Between Culture and Motivation to Learn
ch. 2 Establishing Inclusion
ch. 3 Developing Attitude
ch. 4 Enhancing Meaning
ch. 5 Engendering Competence
ch. 6 Implementing a Culturally Responsive Pedagogy
Resource: A. Facilitating Equitable Discussions Within the Multicultural Classroom
Resource: A. Effective Lecturing Within the Multicultural Classroom
Resource: B. Cooperative Lesson Worksheet
Resource: C. Evaluator Assessment
Resource: D. Evaluative Descriptors for Narrative Assessment
References
Name Index
Subject Index

Vision and Discernment: An Orientation in Theological Study
Additional Info:
This book offers an orientation in Christian theology, broadly conceived. Its subject is not that single discipline in the theological curriculum to which the title of 'theology' is nowadays often reserved, but rather the whole curriculum, or the whole range of disciplines which together constitute the enterprise of Christian theology, and whose study constitutes theological education. (From the Publisher)
This book offers an orientation in Christian theology, broadly conceived. Its subject is not that single discipline in the theological curriculum to which the title of 'theology' is nowadays often reserved, but rather the whole curriculum, or the whole range of disciplines which together constitute the enterprise of Christian theology, and whose study constitutes theological education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book offers an orientation in Christian theology, broadly conceived. Its subject is not that single discipline in the theological curriculum to which the title of 'theology' is nowadays often reserved, but rather the whole curriculum, or the whole range of disciplines which together constitute the enterprise of Christian theology, and whose study constitutes theological education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Toward understanding our context
ch. 2 Theology as critical inquiry
ch. 3 Three dimensions of theology
ch. 4 Vision and discernment
ch. 5 Theological inquiry and theological education
Index
This book offers an orientation in Christian theology, broadly conceived. Its subject is not that single discipline in the theological curriculum to which the title of 'theology' is nowadays often reserved, but rather the whole curriculum, or the whole range of disciplines which together constitute the enterprise of Christian theology, and whose study constitutes theological education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Toward understanding our context
ch. 2 Theology as critical inquiry
ch. 3 Three dimensions of theology
ch. 4 Vision and discernment
ch. 5 Theological inquiry and theological education
Index

Women and Teaching
Additional Info:
Themes for a Spirituality of Pedagogy (1988 Madeleva Lecture in Spirituality), Maria Harris. An essay that focuses on teaching as a form of spirituality; five different themes that resonate in the lives of women are explored: silence, remembering, ritual mourning, artistry, and birthing. (From the Publisher)
Themes for a Spirituality of Pedagogy (1988 Madeleva Lecture in Spirituality), Maria Harris. An essay that focuses on teaching as a form of spirituality; five different themes that resonate in the lives of women are explored: silence, remembering, ritual mourning, artistry, and birthing. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Themes for a Spirituality of Pedagogy (1988 Madeleva Lecture in Spirituality), Maria Harris. An essay that focuses on teaching as a form of spirituality; five different themes that resonate in the lives of women are explored: silence, remembering, ritual mourning, artistry, and birthing. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Impulses
ch. 1 Silence
ch. 2 Remembering
ch. 3 Ritual Mourning
ch. 4 Artistry
ch. 5 Birthing
ch. 6 Notes
Index
Themes for a Spirituality of Pedagogy (1988 Madeleva Lecture in Spirituality), Maria Harris. An essay that focuses on teaching as a form of spirituality; five different themes that resonate in the lives of women are explored: silence, remembering, ritual mourning, artistry, and birthing. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Impulses
ch. 1 Silence
ch. 2 Remembering
ch. 3 Ritual Mourning
ch. 4 Artistry
ch. 5 Birthing
ch. 6 Notes
Index

Reshaping Religious Education: Conversations on Contemporary Practice
Additional Info:
In this profound and provocative book, acclaimed authors Maria Harris and Gabriel Moran challenge the religious education community to risk change. Writing in the form of a give-and-take conversation, a conversation that includes Jewish educator Sherry Blumberg and European educator Friedrich Schweitzer: the authors incorporate ecumenical and international perspectives into their analysis of the state of contemporary religious education - and its future. (From the Publisher)
In this profound and provocative book, acclaimed authors Maria Harris and Gabriel Moran challenge the religious education community to risk change. Writing in the form of a give-and-take conversation, a conversation that includes Jewish educator Sherry Blumberg and European educator Friedrich Schweitzer: the authors incorporate ecumenical and international perspectives into their analysis of the state of contemporary religious education - and its future. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In this profound and provocative book, acclaimed authors Maria Harris and Gabriel Moran challenge the religious education community to risk change. Writing in the form of a give-and-take conversation, a conversation that includes Jewish educator Sherry Blumberg and European educator Friedrich Schweitzer: the authors incorporate ecumenical and international perspectives into their analysis of the state of contemporary religious education - and its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Over the Years
Pt. 1 Foundations
ch. 1 The Curriculum of Education
ch. 2 The Aims of Religious Education
ch. 3 Teaching the Way
Pt. 2 Development
ch. 4 The Roots of Modern Development
ch. 5 Development and Gender
ch. 6 Development and Death
Pt. 3 Spirituality
ch. 7 Spirituality and its Roots
ch. 8 Doing Justice
ch. 9 Proclaiming Jubilee
Pt. 4 Toward a Wider World
ch. 10 What Christians Can Learn from Jews
ch. 11 International Conversation
ch. 12 The Years Ahead
Notes
Index
In this profound and provocative book, acclaimed authors Maria Harris and Gabriel Moran challenge the religious education community to risk change. Writing in the form of a give-and-take conversation, a conversation that includes Jewish educator Sherry Blumberg and European educator Friedrich Schweitzer: the authors incorporate ecumenical and international perspectives into their analysis of the state of contemporary religious education - and its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Over the Years
Pt. 1 Foundations
ch. 1 The Curriculum of Education
ch. 2 The Aims of Religious Education
ch. 3 Teaching the Way
Pt. 2 Development
ch. 4 The Roots of Modern Development
ch. 5 Development and Gender
ch. 6 Development and Death
Pt. 3 Spirituality
ch. 7 Spirituality and its Roots
ch. 8 Doing Justice
ch. 9 Proclaiming Jubilee
Pt. 4 Toward a Wider World
ch. 10 What Christians Can Learn from Jews
ch. 11 International Conversation
ch. 12 The Years Ahead
Notes
Index

40 Ways to Teach in Groups
Additional Info:
Leypoldt provides forty distinct ways to teach young people and adults, with diagrams to illustrate each method. (From the Publisher)
Leypoldt provides forty distinct ways to teach young people and adults, with diagrams to illustrate each method. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Leypoldt provides forty distinct ways to teach young people and adults, with diagrams to illustrate each method. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching In Groups
ch. 2 Which Way is Best For Me?
ch. 3 The Forty Ways to Teach
ch. 4 Book Report
ch. 5 Brainstorming
ch. 6 Buzz Groups
ch. 7 Case study
ch. 8 Chain-Reaction Forum
ch. 9 Circle Response
ch. 10 Colloquy
ch. 11 Couple Buzzers
ch. 12 Debate Forum
ch. 13 Demonstration- Work Group
ch. 14 Depth Bible Encounter
ch. 15 Expanding Panel
ch. 16 Field Trip
ch. 17 Film Talk-Back
ch. 18 Gallery Conversations
ch. 19 Group Discussion
ch. 20 Group Drawing
ch. 21 Group Response Team
ch. 22 Group Writing
ch. 23 Inductive Bible Study
ch. 24 Interview Forum
ch. 25 Lecture
ch. 26 Lecture Forum
ch. 27 Listening Teams
ch. 28 Music Forum
ch. 29 Panel
ch. 30 Panel Forum
ch. 31 Play-Reading Talk-Back
ch. 32 Questions and Answers
ch. 33 Reaction Panel
ch. 34 Research and Report
ch. 35 Role-Playing
ch. 36 Screened Speech
ch. 37 Seminar
ch. 38 Sermon Forum
ch. 39 Symposium
ch. 40 Symposium Dialogue
ch. 41 Symposium Forum
ch. 42 Work Groups
ch. 43 Workshop
ch. 44 Evaluation
ch. 45 Bibliography
ch. 46 Appendix
Leypoldt provides forty distinct ways to teach young people and adults, with diagrams to illustrate each method. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching In Groups
ch. 2 Which Way is Best For Me?
ch. 3 The Forty Ways to Teach
ch. 4 Book Report
ch. 5 Brainstorming
ch. 6 Buzz Groups
ch. 7 Case study
ch. 8 Chain-Reaction Forum
ch. 9 Circle Response
ch. 10 Colloquy
ch. 11 Couple Buzzers
ch. 12 Debate Forum
ch. 13 Demonstration- Work Group
ch. 14 Depth Bible Encounter
ch. 15 Expanding Panel
ch. 16 Field Trip
ch. 17 Film Talk-Back
ch. 18 Gallery Conversations
ch. 19 Group Discussion
ch. 20 Group Drawing
ch. 21 Group Response Team
ch. 22 Group Writing
ch. 23 Inductive Bible Study
ch. 24 Interview Forum
ch. 25 Lecture
ch. 26 Lecture Forum
ch. 27 Listening Teams
ch. 28 Music Forum
ch. 29 Panel
ch. 30 Panel Forum
ch. 31 Play-Reading Talk-Back
ch. 32 Questions and Answers
ch. 33 Reaction Panel
ch. 34 Research and Report
ch. 35 Role-Playing
ch. 36 Screened Speech
ch. 37 Seminar
ch. 38 Sermon Forum
ch. 39 Symposium
ch. 40 Symposium Dialogue
ch. 41 Symposium Forum
ch. 42 Work Groups
ch. 43 Workshop
ch. 44 Evaluation
ch. 45 Bibliography
ch. 46 Appendix

Transforming Knowledge
Additional Info:
Transforming Knowledge suggests that education can serve neither the quest for knowledge nor the promise of a genuinely democratic system until some very basic intellectual errors are uncovered and corrected. Examining the heritage of a tradition created primarily by white Euro-American men who considered themselves the norm and the ideal for all humankind, Elizabeth Kamarck Minnich identifies these errors, characterizes them, and demonstrates how they work to distort and limit ...
Transforming Knowledge suggests that education can serve neither the quest for knowledge nor the promise of a genuinely democratic system until some very basic intellectual errors are uncovered and corrected. Examining the heritage of a tradition created primarily by white Euro-American men who considered themselves the norm and the ideal for all humankind, Elizabeth Kamarck Minnich identifies these errors, characterizes them, and demonstrates how they work to distort and limit ...
Additional Info:
Transforming Knowledge suggests that education can serve neither the quest for knowledge nor the promise of a genuinely democratic system until some very basic intellectual errors are uncovered and corrected. Examining the heritage of a tradition created primarily by white Euro-American men who considered themselves the norm and the ideal for all humankind, Elizabeth Kamarck Minnich identifies these errors, characterizes them, and demonstrates how they work to distort and limit our knowledge. She cites work primarily by feminist scholars and activists, but also from ethnic, peace, and ecological studies, and argues that a reorientation of education and thus thinking and thus knowledge makes sense.
This book is the result of more than twenty years of work in higher education during which the author talked with thousands of faculty members, administrators, students, and community people about the necessity to transform the curriculum in this country. Drawing also on her years of work with Hannah Arendt and on Dewey, Kant, Plato, and Socrates, Minnich confronts the "dominant meaning system" that perpetuates errors in thinking, particularly faulty generalization and universalization, circular reasoning, mystified concepts, and partial knowledge.
In light of the heated debate in which such critics as William Bennett and Allen Bloom charge that a return to "the classics" is the only acceptable route for education, Transforming Knowledge offers a philosophical analysis of the cultural, intellectual, political tradition behind our curriculum. Minnich warns that it is in and through education that a culture, and polity, not only tries to perpetuate but enacts the kinds of thinking it welcomes, and discards and/or discredits the kinds it fears. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction : still transforming knowledge
Still transforming knowledge : circling out, pressing deeper
ch. 1 No one beginning
ch. 2 Contextual approaches : thinking about
ch. 3 Conceptual approaches : thinking through
ch. 4 Errors basic to dominant tradition
ch. 5 Circling back, keeping going
Transforming Knowledge suggests that education can serve neither the quest for knowledge nor the promise of a genuinely democratic system until some very basic intellectual errors are uncovered and corrected. Examining the heritage of a tradition created primarily by white Euro-American men who considered themselves the norm and the ideal for all humankind, Elizabeth Kamarck Minnich identifies these errors, characterizes them, and demonstrates how they work to distort and limit our knowledge. She cites work primarily by feminist scholars and activists, but also from ethnic, peace, and ecological studies, and argues that a reorientation of education and thus thinking and thus knowledge makes sense.
This book is the result of more than twenty years of work in higher education during which the author talked with thousands of faculty members, administrators, students, and community people about the necessity to transform the curriculum in this country. Drawing also on her years of work with Hannah Arendt and on Dewey, Kant, Plato, and Socrates, Minnich confronts the "dominant meaning system" that perpetuates errors in thinking, particularly faulty generalization and universalization, circular reasoning, mystified concepts, and partial knowledge.
In light of the heated debate in which such critics as William Bennett and Allen Bloom charge that a return to "the classics" is the only acceptable route for education, Transforming Knowledge offers a philosophical analysis of the cultural, intellectual, political tradition behind our curriculum. Minnich warns that it is in and through education that a culture, and polity, not only tries to perpetuate but enacts the kinds of thinking it welcomes, and discards and/or discredits the kinds it fears. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction : still transforming knowledge
Still transforming knowledge : circling out, pressing deeper
ch. 1 No one beginning
ch. 2 Contextual approaches : thinking about
ch. 3 Conceptual approaches : thinking through
ch. 4 Errors basic to dominant tradition
ch. 5 Circling back, keeping going

Teaching from the Heart: Theology and Educational Method
Additional Info:
The author argues for an organic or process approach to religious, moral, and theological education. She takes up five reigning educational methods (case study, gestalt, phenomenological, narrative, conscientizing), gauges their strengths, weaknesses, and theological promise, and offers practical reformulations of each method. (From the Publisher)
The author argues for an organic or process approach to religious, moral, and theological education. She takes up five reigning educational methods (case study, gestalt, phenomenological, narrative, conscientizing), gauges their strengths, weaknesses, and theological promise, and offers practical reformulations of each method. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The author argues for an organic or process approach to religious, moral, and theological education. She takes up five reigning educational methods (case study, gestalt, phenomenological, narrative, conscientizing), gauges their strengths, weaknesses, and theological promise, and offers practical reformulations of each method. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Passion about Methodology
ch. 2 Midwife Teaching: Case Study Method
ch. 3 Integrative Teaching: Gestalt Method
ch. 4 Incarnational Teaching: Phenomenological Method
ch. 5 Relational Teaching: Narrative Method
ch. 6 Liberative Teaching: Conscientizing Method
ch. 7 The Art of Teaching from the Heart: The Heart of the Matter
Index
The author argues for an organic or process approach to religious, moral, and theological education. She takes up five reigning educational methods (case study, gestalt, phenomenological, narrative, conscientizing), gauges their strengths, weaknesses, and theological promise, and offers practical reformulations of each method. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Passion about Methodology
ch. 2 Midwife Teaching: Case Study Method
ch. 3 Integrative Teaching: Gestalt Method
ch. 4 Incarnational Teaching: Phenomenological Method
ch. 5 Relational Teaching: Narrative Method
ch. 6 Liberative Teaching: Conscientizing Method
ch. 7 The Art of Teaching from the Heart: The Heart of the Matter
Index

The Active Life: A Spirituality of Work, Creativity, and Caring
Additional Info:
The Active Life is Parker J. Palmer's deep and graceful exploration of a spirituality for the busy, sometimes frenetic lives many of us lead. Telling evocative stories from a variety of religious traditions, including Taoist, Jewish, and Christian, Palmer shows that the spiritual life does not mean abandoning the world but engaging it more deeply through life-giving action. He celebrates both the problems and potentials of the active life, revealing ...
The Active Life is Parker J. Palmer's deep and graceful exploration of a spirituality for the busy, sometimes frenetic lives many of us lead. Telling evocative stories from a variety of religious traditions, including Taoist, Jewish, and Christian, Palmer shows that the spiritual life does not mean abandoning the world but engaging it more deeply through life-giving action. He celebrates both the problems and potentials of the active life, revealing ...
Additional Info:
The Active Life is Parker J. Palmer's deep and graceful exploration of a spirituality for the busy, sometimes frenetic lives many of us lead. Telling evocative stories from a variety of religious traditions, including Taoist, Jewish, and Christian, Palmer shows that the spiritual life does not mean abandoning the world but engaging it more deeply through life-giving action. He celebrates both the problems and potentials of the active life, revealing how much they have to teach us about ourselves, the world, and God. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface (1999)
ch. 1. Spirituality in Action: On Being Fully Alive
ch. 2. Action and Contemplation: A Living Paradox
ch. 3. "Active Life": The Shadow Side
ch. 4. "The Woodcarver": A Model for Right Action
ch. 5. "The Angel": Action, Failure, and Suffering
ch. 6. "Jesus in the Desert": The Temptations in Action
ch. 7. "Loaves and Fishes": Acts of Scarcity or Abundance
ch. 8. "Threatened with Resurrection": Acts of Death or New Life
Notes About the Author
The Active Life is Parker J. Palmer's deep and graceful exploration of a spirituality for the busy, sometimes frenetic lives many of us lead. Telling evocative stories from a variety of religious traditions, including Taoist, Jewish, and Christian, Palmer shows that the spiritual life does not mean abandoning the world but engaging it more deeply through life-giving action. He celebrates both the problems and potentials of the active life, revealing how much they have to teach us about ourselves, the world, and God. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface (1999)
ch. 1. Spirituality in Action: On Being Fully Alive
ch. 2. Action and Contemplation: A Living Paradox
ch. 3. "Active Life": The Shadow Side
ch. 4. "The Woodcarver": A Model for Right Action
ch. 5. "The Angel": Action, Failure, and Suffering
ch. 6. "Jesus in the Desert": The Temptations in Action
ch. 7. "Loaves and Fishes": Acts of Scarcity or Abundance
ch. 8. "Threatened with Resurrection": Acts of Death or New Life
Notes About the Author

The Critical Years: Young Adults & The Search for Meaning, Faith & Commitment
Additional Info:
A key study for understanding the transformation of meaning in young adults. (From the Publisher)
A key study for understanding the transformation of meaning in young adults. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A key study for understanding the transformation of meaning in young adults. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Elusiveness of Adulthood
ch. 2 Meaning-Making: An Activity of Faith
ch. 3 Developmental Theories: Insights into the Motion of Faith
ch. 4 The Journey Toward Mature Faith: A Model
ch. 5 Young Adult Faith: Promise and Vulnerability
ch. 6 Imagination: The Power of Adult Faith
ch. 7 Higher Education: A Community of Imagination
ch. 8 Culture as Mentor
Appendices
Notes
Index
A key study for understanding the transformation of meaning in young adults. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Elusiveness of Adulthood
ch. 2 Meaning-Making: An Activity of Faith
ch. 3 Developmental Theories: Insights into the Motion of Faith
ch. 4 The Journey Toward Mature Faith: A Model
ch. 5 Young Adult Faith: Promise and Vulnerability
ch. 6 Imagination: The Power of Adult Faith
ch. 7 Higher Education: A Community of Imagination
ch. 8 Culture as Mentor
Appendices
Notes
Index

Models of Adult Religious Education Practice
Additional Info:
MODELS OF ADULT RELIGIOUS EDUCATION PRACTICE offers a foundational rationale plus a wide inventory of workable teaching procedures for vitalizing the religious education of adults. No other major book on adult religious education offers as wide a range of concrete teaching procedures as does this volume. The distinctiveness of this book lies in its holism. It provides concrete practical models for teaching cognitive, affective, and lifestyle outcomes to all kinds ...
MODELS OF ADULT RELIGIOUS EDUCATION PRACTICE offers a foundational rationale plus a wide inventory of workable teaching procedures for vitalizing the religious education of adults. No other major book on adult religious education offers as wide a range of concrete teaching procedures as does this volume. The distinctiveness of this book lies in its holism. It provides concrete practical models for teaching cognitive, affective, and lifestyle outcomes to all kinds ...
Additional Info:
MODELS OF ADULT RELIGIOUS EDUCATION PRACTICE offers a foundational rationale plus a wide inventory of workable teaching procedures for vitalizing the religious education of adults. No other major book on adult religious education offers as wide a range of concrete teaching procedures as does this volume. The distinctiveness of this book lies in its holism. It provides concrete practical models for teaching cognitive, affective, and lifestyle outcomes to all kinds of adult learners in all kinds of settings. This volume has been widely praised by major authorities in adult education and religious education, including Allen Tough, Nancy Foltz, Ron Habermas, and Kenneth Gangel. (From the Publisher)
MODELS OF ADULT RELIGIOUS EDUCATION PRACTICE offers a foundational rationale plus a wide inventory of workable teaching procedures for vitalizing the religious education of adults. No other major book on adult religious education offers as wide a range of concrete teaching procedures as does this volume. The distinctiveness of this book lies in its holism. It provides concrete practical models for teaching cognitive, affective, and lifestyle outcomes to all kinds of adult learners in all kinds of settings. This volume has been widely praised by major authorities in adult education and religious education, including Allen Tough, Nancy Foltz, Ron Habermas, and Kenneth Gangel. (From the Publisher)

Growing in the Life of Faith: Education and Christian Practices
Additional Info:
Craig Dykstra worked with Rev. Dr. Dorothy Bass to write Practicing Our Faith -- another classic book high on the recommended reading list. Growing in the Life of Faith explores the areas of ministry and Christian education with flair, sensitivity, and an imaginative compassion that is sure to touch and inspire readers, ministers, and educators. Dykstra's compassionate stance and creative and subtle nuances, respectful of varying points of view without ...
Craig Dykstra worked with Rev. Dr. Dorothy Bass to write Practicing Our Faith -- another classic book high on the recommended reading list. Growing in the Life of Faith explores the areas of ministry and Christian education with flair, sensitivity, and an imaginative compassion that is sure to touch and inspire readers, ministers, and educators. Dykstra's compassionate stance and creative and subtle nuances, respectful of varying points of view without ...
Additional Info:
Craig Dykstra worked with Rev. Dr. Dorothy Bass to write Practicing Our Faith -- another classic book high on the recommended reading list. Growing in the Life of Faith explores the areas of ministry and Christian education with flair, sensitivity, and an imaginative compassion that is sure to touch and inspire readers, ministers, and educators. Dykstra's compassionate stance and creative and subtle nuances, respectful of varying points of view without denigrating any and beign supportive of general enlightened approaches parallels his work in the Lilly Foundation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword to the second edition
Introduction : mystery and manners
ch. 1 The hunger for daily bread
ch. 2 The faithful life
ch. 3 Growing in faith
ch. 4 The power of Christian practices
ch. 5 Education in Christian practices
ch. 6 The formative power of the congregation
ch. 7 Family promises
ch. 8 Youth and the language of faith
ch. 9 Communities of conviction in religion and higher education
ch. 10 Love's knowledge and theological education
ch. 11 When the Bible happens
ch. 12 Learning to be sent
ch. 13 "My teacher, we made bread ..."
A guide for study and conversation
Craig Dykstra worked with Rev. Dr. Dorothy Bass to write Practicing Our Faith -- another classic book high on the recommended reading list. Growing in the Life of Faith explores the areas of ministry and Christian education with flair, sensitivity, and an imaginative compassion that is sure to touch and inspire readers, ministers, and educators. Dykstra's compassionate stance and creative and subtle nuances, respectful of varying points of view without denigrating any and beign supportive of general enlightened approaches parallels his work in the Lilly Foundation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword to the second edition
Introduction : mystery and manners
ch. 1 The hunger for daily bread
ch. 2 The faithful life
ch. 3 Growing in faith
ch. 4 The power of Christian practices
ch. 5 Education in Christian practices
ch. 6 The formative power of the congregation
ch. 7 Family promises
ch. 8 Youth and the language of faith
ch. 9 Communities of conviction in religion and higher education
ch. 10 Love's knowledge and theological education
ch. 11 When the Bible happens
ch. 12 Learning to be sent
ch. 13 "My teacher, we made bread ..."
A guide for study and conversation


Teaching the Introductory Course in Religious Studies: A Sourcebook
Additional Info:
The objective of this volume was to collect resources to assist teachers of undergraduate courses in religious studies - especially those teachers whose training has been limited to only one religious tradition - and to provide reflection on the changing nature of the liberal arts curriculum, and the role that religious studies plays within it. (From the Publisher)
The objective of this volume was to collect resources to assist teachers of undergraduate courses in religious studies - especially those teachers whose training has been limited to only one religious tradition - and to provide reflection on the changing nature of the liberal arts curriculum, and the role that religious studies plays within it. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The objective of this volume was to collect resources to assist teachers of undergraduate courses in religious studies - especially those teachers whose training has been limited to only one religious tradition - and to provide reflection on the changing nature of the liberal arts curriculum, and the role that religious studies plays within it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction (Mark Juergensmeyer)
Part 1. Types of Introductory Courses
ch. 1 Thinking About the Introductory Course: Some Preliminary Questions (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 2 Teaching Religion and Religions: The "World Religions" Course (Ninian Smart)
ch. 3 The "Introduction to Religion" Course: The Template (William Darrow)
ch. 4 The "Introduction to Religious Studies" Course (Mark Juergensmeyer)
Part 2. Thinking About the Traditions
ch. 5 The Pros and Cons of Thinking of Religion as Tradition (Ninian Smart)
ch. 6 Teaching the Hindu Tradition (J.S. Hawley)
ch. 7 The Sikh Tradition (Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 8 Chinese Religion (Judith Berling)
ch. 9 Japanese Religions (Miriam Levering)
ch. 10 Introducing Buddhism (Frank Reynolds)
ch. 11 Placing Islam (Richard Martin, and William Darrow)
ch. 12 Ancient Mediterranean and Near Eastern Religions (William Darrow)
ch. 13 Iranian Religions (William Darrow)
ch. 14 Judaism (William Scott Green)
ch. 15 Teaching the Christian Tradition (Carol Zaleski)
ch. 16 Teaching African-American Religions (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 17 Native North and South American Religions (Lawrence Sullivan)
ch. 18 Australian Aboriginal Religion (John Hilary Martin, O.P.)
ch. 19 Teaching African Religions (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 20 Teaching About Religion in America (Howard Miller)
ch. 21 Secular Ideologies: How Do They Figure in Religious Studies Courses? (Ninian Smart)
Part 3. "How I Teach the Introductory Course": A Symposium
ch. 22 The Introductory Course, The Most Important Course (Wilfred Cantwell Smith)
ch. 23 The Introductory Course: Less is Better (Jonathan Z. Smith)
ch. 24 How I Teach the Introductory Course (Robert Bellah)
ch. 25 The Introductory Course: A Balanced Approach (Ninian Smart)
ch. 26 Another World to Live In: Teaching the Introductory Course Philosophically (Huston Smith)
ch. 27 Religion as Language (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 28 A Brief Argument in Favor of an Endangered Species: The World Religion Survey Course (Mark Juergensmeyer)
Part 4. The Classroom Experience
ch. 29 The Classroom Scene: Teaching, Material Culture and Religion (Richard Carp)
ch. 30 Using Audio-Visual Resources to Teach About Religion (Richard Carp)
ch. 31 Tricks of the Trade (Gurudharm Singh Khalsa)
ch. 32 Riddle Me a Riddle: Bringing Those Absent into Religious Studies (Susan Henking)
ch. 33 Bibliographic Resources on Gender and Religion (Susan Henking)
ch. 34 Basic Readings in the Academic Study of Religion (Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 35 Course Syllabi (William Darrow, and Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 36 Bibliography of Texts and Other Resources (William Darrow, and Gurudharm Singh Khalsa)
The objective of this volume was to collect resources to assist teachers of undergraduate courses in religious studies - especially those teachers whose training has been limited to only one religious tradition - and to provide reflection on the changing nature of the liberal arts curriculum, and the role that religious studies plays within it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction (Mark Juergensmeyer)
Part 1. Types of Introductory Courses
ch. 1 Thinking About the Introductory Course: Some Preliminary Questions (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 2 Teaching Religion and Religions: The "World Religions" Course (Ninian Smart)
ch. 3 The "Introduction to Religion" Course: The Template (William Darrow)
ch. 4 The "Introduction to Religious Studies" Course (Mark Juergensmeyer)
Part 2. Thinking About the Traditions
ch. 5 The Pros and Cons of Thinking of Religion as Tradition (Ninian Smart)
ch. 6 Teaching the Hindu Tradition (J.S. Hawley)
ch. 7 The Sikh Tradition (Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 8 Chinese Religion (Judith Berling)
ch. 9 Japanese Religions (Miriam Levering)
ch. 10 Introducing Buddhism (Frank Reynolds)
ch. 11 Placing Islam (Richard Martin, and William Darrow)
ch. 12 Ancient Mediterranean and Near Eastern Religions (William Darrow)
ch. 13 Iranian Religions (William Darrow)
ch. 14 Judaism (William Scott Green)
ch. 15 Teaching the Christian Tradition (Carol Zaleski)
ch. 16 Teaching African-American Religions (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 17 Native North and South American Religions (Lawrence Sullivan)
ch. 18 Australian Aboriginal Religion (John Hilary Martin, O.P.)
ch. 19 Teaching African Religions (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 20 Teaching About Religion in America (Howard Miller)
ch. 21 Secular Ideologies: How Do They Figure in Religious Studies Courses? (Ninian Smart)
Part 3. "How I Teach the Introductory Course": A Symposium
ch. 22 The Introductory Course, The Most Important Course (Wilfred Cantwell Smith)
ch. 23 The Introductory Course: Less is Better (Jonathan Z. Smith)
ch. 24 How I Teach the Introductory Course (Robert Bellah)
ch. 25 The Introductory Course: A Balanced Approach (Ninian Smart)
ch. 26 Another World to Live In: Teaching the Introductory Course Philosophically (Huston Smith)
ch. 27 Religion as Language (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 28 A Brief Argument in Favor of an Endangered Species: The World Religion Survey Course (Mark Juergensmeyer)
Part 4. The Classroom Experience
ch. 29 The Classroom Scene: Teaching, Material Culture and Religion (Richard Carp)
ch. 30 Using Audio-Visual Resources to Teach About Religion (Richard Carp)
ch. 31 Tricks of the Trade (Gurudharm Singh Khalsa)
ch. 32 Riddle Me a Riddle: Bringing Those Absent into Religious Studies (Susan Henking)
ch. 33 Bibliographic Resources on Gender and Religion (Susan Henking)
ch. 34 Basic Readings in the Academic Study of Religion (Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 35 Course Syllabi (William Darrow, and Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 36 Bibliography of Texts and Other Resources (William Darrow, and Gurudharm Singh Khalsa)


Cases and Course Design
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Cases and Course Design (Robert L. Stivers)
ch. 2 Case Writing and Teaching in a Seminary: Reflecting on Ministry Experience (V. Sue Zabel)
ch. 3 Law and Order: Waco, Texas, 1993, Revisited (Leland E. Elhard)
ch. 4 Sopater's Body (David E. Frederickson)
ch. 5 Adult Learners, Feminist Practices, and the Use of Cases (Carol Allen)
ch. 6 A Study of Case Studies (Anne Reissner)
ch. 7 Case Studies and the Teaching of History (Garth M. Rosell)
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Cases and Course Design (Robert L. Stivers)
ch. 2 Case Writing and Teaching in a Seminary: Reflecting on Ministry Experience (V. Sue Zabel)
ch. 3 Law and Order: Waco, Texas, 1993, Revisited (Leland E. Elhard)
ch. 4 Sopater's Body (David E. Frederickson)
ch. 5 Adult Learners, Feminist Practices, and the Use of Cases (Carol Allen)
ch. 6 A Study of Case Studies (Anne Reissner)
ch. 7 Case Studies and the Teaching of History (Garth M. Rosell)

Descartes' Error: Emotion, Reason, and the Human Brain
Additional Info:
Since Descartes famously proclaimed, “I think, therefore I am,” science has often overlooked emotions as the source of a person's true being. Even modern neuroscience has tended, until recently, to concentrate on the cognitive aspects of brain function, disregarding emotions. This attitude began to change with the publication of Descartes' Error in 1995. Antonio Damasio—“one of the world's leading neurologists” (The New York Times)—challenged traditional ideas about the connection ...
Since Descartes famously proclaimed, “I think, therefore I am,” science has often overlooked emotions as the source of a person's true being. Even modern neuroscience has tended, until recently, to concentrate on the cognitive aspects of brain function, disregarding emotions. This attitude began to change with the publication of Descartes' Error in 1995. Antonio Damasio—“one of the world's leading neurologists” (The New York Times)—challenged traditional ideas about the connection ...
Additional Info:
Since Descartes famously proclaimed, “I think, therefore I am,” science has often overlooked emotions as the source of a person's true being. Even modern neuroscience has tended, until recently, to concentrate on the cognitive aspects of brain function, disregarding emotions. This attitude began to change with the publication of Descartes' Error in 1995. Antonio Damasio—“one of the world's leading neurologists” (The New York Times)—challenged traditional ideas about the connection between emotions and rationality. In this wondrously engaging book, Damasio takes the reader on a journey of scientific discovery through a series of case studies, demonstrating what many of us have long suspected: emotions are not a luxury, they are essential to rational thinking and to normal social behavior. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
PART I Unpleasantness in Vermont
Gage's Brain Revealed
A Modern Phineas Gage
In Colder Blood
PART II Assembling an Explanation
Biological Regulation and Survival
Emotions and Feelings
The Somatic-Marker Hypothesis
PART III Testing the Somatic-Marker Hypothesis
The Body-Minded Brain
A Passion for Reasoning
Postscriptum
Notes and References
Further Reading
Acknowledgments
Index
Since Descartes famously proclaimed, “I think, therefore I am,” science has often overlooked emotions as the source of a person's true being. Even modern neuroscience has tended, until recently, to concentrate on the cognitive aspects of brain function, disregarding emotions. This attitude began to change with the publication of Descartes' Error in 1995. Antonio Damasio—“one of the world's leading neurologists” (The New York Times)—challenged traditional ideas about the connection between emotions and rationality. In this wondrously engaging book, Damasio takes the reader on a journey of scientific discovery through a series of case studies, demonstrating what many of us have long suspected: emotions are not a luxury, they are essential to rational thinking and to normal social behavior. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
PART I Unpleasantness in Vermont
Gage's Brain Revealed
A Modern Phineas Gage
In Colder Blood
PART II Assembling an Explanation
Biological Regulation and Survival
Emotions and Feelings
The Somatic-Marker Hypothesis
PART III Testing the Somatic-Marker Hypothesis
The Body-Minded Brain
A Passion for Reasoning
Postscriptum
Notes and References
Further Reading
Acknowledgments
Index


"Where a Magic Dwells: A Teaching Casebook for Instructors of Religion in the University"
Additional Info:
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Case 1 - Can you show me the way? (Bradley Herling and Douglas Hadley)
Case 2 - Daniel in the lion's den (Mark H. Mann)
Case 3 - The Opium of the classroom (Stephen Dawson)
Case 4 - The undermined student (Robert Parks)
Case 5 - The case of the untouchable topic (Douglas Hadley)
Case 6 - Zev and the crying presenter (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 7 - When is enough, enough? (Greg Farr)
Case 8 - The sacred and the profane (Andrew Irvine and Bradley Herling)
Case 9 - Who am I? (Michael Mitchell)
Case 10 - Oh, my God, it's alive! (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 11 - The voice of my beloved! Behold, he comes... (Bradely Herling)
Case 12 - Can Thomas Olafson still be saved?(Alina Feld)
Insider notes
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Case 1 - Can you show me the way? (Bradley Herling and Douglas Hadley)
Case 2 - Daniel in the lion's den (Mark H. Mann)
Case 3 - The Opium of the classroom (Stephen Dawson)
Case 4 - The undermined student (Robert Parks)
Case 5 - The case of the untouchable topic (Douglas Hadley)
Case 6 - Zev and the crying presenter (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 7 - When is enough, enough? (Greg Farr)
Case 8 - The sacred and the profane (Andrew Irvine and Bradley Herling)
Case 9 - Who am I? (Michael Mitchell)
Case 10 - Oh, my God, it's alive! (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 11 - The voice of my beloved! Behold, he comes... (Bradely Herling)
Case 12 - Can Thomas Olafson still be saved?(Alina Feld)
Insider notes
Additional Info:
Drawing on the myth of Mentor as companion and advisor to Odysseus, preeminent educational mentoring expert Laurent A. Daloz uses the metaphor of the mythic journey as a way of making sense of life's changes. He looks closely at what good teachers and mentors actually do, and inspires post-secondary educators to think of their work in fresh new ways. This classic, beautifully written work has been newly updated and is ...
Drawing on the myth of Mentor as companion and advisor to Odysseus, preeminent educational mentoring expert Laurent A. Daloz uses the metaphor of the mythic journey as a way of making sense of life's changes. He looks closely at what good teachers and mentors actually do, and inspires post-secondary educators to think of their work in fresh new ways. This classic, beautifully written work has been newly updated and is ...
Additional Info:
Drawing on the myth of Mentor as companion and advisor to Odysseus, preeminent educational mentoring expert Laurent A. Daloz uses the metaphor of the mythic journey as a way of making sense of life's changes. He looks closely at what good teachers and mentors actually do, and inspires post-secondary educators to think of their work in fresh new ways. This classic, beautifully written work has been newly updated and is available for the first time in paperback. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Adult Learning As Development
First Shards: The Search for Meaning as a Motive for Learning.
Mentors, Myths, and Metamorphosis: Education as a Transformational Journey.
Maps of Transformation: How Adults Change and Develop.
Learning As A Transformative Journey
The Deep and Savage Way: The Unsettling First Steps of an Educational Journey.
The Dynamic of Transformation: How Learning Changes the Learner.
Returning Home: Helping Adults Integrate New Insights.
Fostering Adult Learning
The Ecology of Adult Learning: Barriers and Incentives to Learning and Growth.
The Yoda Factor: Guiding Adults Through Difficult Transitions.
The Art of the Mentor: Limits and Possibilities.
Drawing on the myth of Mentor as companion and advisor to Odysseus, preeminent educational mentoring expert Laurent A. Daloz uses the metaphor of the mythic journey as a way of making sense of life's changes. He looks closely at what good teachers and mentors actually do, and inspires post-secondary educators to think of their work in fresh new ways. This classic, beautifully written work has been newly updated and is available for the first time in paperback. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Adult Learning As Development
First Shards: The Search for Meaning as a Motive for Learning.
Mentors, Myths, and Metamorphosis: Education as a Transformational Journey.
Maps of Transformation: How Adults Change and Develop.
Learning As A Transformative Journey
The Deep and Savage Way: The Unsettling First Steps of an Educational Journey.
The Dynamic of Transformation: How Learning Changes the Learner.
Returning Home: Helping Adults Integrate New Insights.
Fostering Adult Learning
The Ecology of Adult Learning: Barriers and Incentives to Learning and Growth.
The Yoda Factor: Guiding Adults Through Difficult Transitions.
The Art of the Mentor: Limits and Possibilities.


Engines For Education
Additional Info:
Most six-year-olds can't wait to go to school on that first day in September. It's a sign of coming of age. They get to go to school like the big kids. For an alarmingly large number of these children, however, boredom, anxiety, and fear of learning quickly set in.
This happens because societies build schools that achieve much less than they promise, are frustrating for students, and generally ...
Most six-year-olds can't wait to go to school on that first day in September. It's a sign of coming of age. They get to go to school like the big kids. For an alarmingly large number of these children, however, boredom, anxiety, and fear of learning quickly set in.
This happens because societies build schools that achieve much less than they promise, are frustrating for students, and generally ...
Additional Info:
Most six-year-olds can't wait to go to school on that first day in September. It's a sign of coming of age. They get to go to school like the big kids. For an alarmingly large number of these children, however, boredom, anxiety, and fear of learning quickly set in.
This happens because societies build schools that achieve much less than they promise, are frustrating for students, and generally fail to help children become adults who can think for themselves. The development of flexible, inquiring minds has rarely been the primary consideration in the design of educational systems. Making students into proper members of society has usually been of much greater concern than developing students who are creative thinkers. Today's schools are organized around yesterday's ideas, needs, and resources.
The purpose of this volume is to raise consciousness about the changes needed in the educational system. It is concerned with what is wrong with the educational system and how to improve it. It presents a pragmatic view of what education could be through the use of computer technology — technology permitting us to pursue the radical notion that children must be allowed to guide their own education because interested learners learn more. Children can and will become voracious learners if they are in charge of their own education. This does not mean letting them play video games all day, but it does mean allowing them to pursue the intellectual goals that interest them, rather than being force-fed knowledge according to someone else's schedule. The school system must face the responsibility of creating learning environments that are so much fun that children cannot wait to get up in the morning and go to school. This volume describes the progress being made at The Institute for the Learning Sciences using computers to provide motivating environments for learning — environments that enable students to explore new worlds, and learn things by doing them. This technology will allow society to support what is one of the most important parts of a good educational system: the cultivation of individual initiative in students. This text documents the authors' work from the cognitive psychology which underlies it on through to guided tours of a number of the software learning environments they've developed. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Colophon
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Time for a Change
ch. 2 What Makes People Smart
ch. 3 Cultural Unliteracy
ch. 4 Natural Learning
ch. 5 Learning By Doing
ch. 6 Incidental Learning
ch. 7 Learning By Reflection
ch. 8 Case-Based Teaching
ch. 9 Learning By Exploring
ch. 10 Goal-Directed Learning and Creating the Software We Need
ch. 11 Goal-Based Scenarios and the Open Curriculum
ch. 12 A Look to the Future
Epilogue
References
Author Index
Subject Index
Most six-year-olds can't wait to go to school on that first day in September. It's a sign of coming of age. They get to go to school like the big kids. For an alarmingly large number of these children, however, boredom, anxiety, and fear of learning quickly set in.
This happens because societies build schools that achieve much less than they promise, are frustrating for students, and generally fail to help children become adults who can think for themselves. The development of flexible, inquiring minds has rarely been the primary consideration in the design of educational systems. Making students into proper members of society has usually been of much greater concern than developing students who are creative thinkers. Today's schools are organized around yesterday's ideas, needs, and resources.
The purpose of this volume is to raise consciousness about the changes needed in the educational system. It is concerned with what is wrong with the educational system and how to improve it. It presents a pragmatic view of what education could be through the use of computer technology — technology permitting us to pursue the radical notion that children must be allowed to guide their own education because interested learners learn more. Children can and will become voracious learners if they are in charge of their own education. This does not mean letting them play video games all day, but it does mean allowing them to pursue the intellectual goals that interest them, rather than being force-fed knowledge according to someone else's schedule. The school system must face the responsibility of creating learning environments that are so much fun that children cannot wait to get up in the morning and go to school. This volume describes the progress being made at The Institute for the Learning Sciences using computers to provide motivating environments for learning — environments that enable students to explore new worlds, and learn things by doing them. This technology will allow society to support what is one of the most important parts of a good educational system: the cultivation of individual initiative in students. This text documents the authors' work from the cognitive psychology which underlies it on through to guided tours of a number of the software learning environments they've developed. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Colophon
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Time for a Change
ch. 2 What Makes People Smart
ch. 3 Cultural Unliteracy
ch. 4 Natural Learning
ch. 5 Learning By Doing
ch. 6 Incidental Learning
ch. 7 Learning By Reflection
ch. 8 Case-Based Teaching
ch. 9 Learning By Exploring
ch. 10 Goal-Directed Learning and Creating the Software We Need
ch. 11 Goal-Based Scenarios and the Open Curriculum
ch. 12 A Look to the Future
Epilogue
References
Author Index
Subject Index


The Feminist Teacher Anthology: Pedagogies and Classroom Strategies
Additional Info:
Each selected essay is introduced by its original author who updates the chapter topic. Drawing on examples from their own experiences, the authors provide practical classroom strategies such as readings and resources, writing assignments, classroom exercises, and guidance for using journals, multimedia workshops, and new technologies. (From the Publisher)
Each selected essay is introduced by its original author who updates the chapter topic. Drawing on examples from their own experiences, the authors provide practical classroom strategies such as readings and resources, writing assignments, classroom exercises, and guidance for using journals, multimedia workshops, and new technologies. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Each selected essay is introduced by its original author who updates the chapter topic. Drawing on examples from their own experiences, the authors provide practical classroom strategies such as readings and resources, writing assignments, classroom exercises, and guidance for using journals, multimedia workshops, and new technologies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Collectively Speaking
Part I - Encountering the Classroom: Developing Feminist Strategies
ch. 1 The Radicalization of a Teacher (Carla Golden)
ch. 2 My Introduction to "Introduction to Women's Studies:" The Role of the Teacher's Authority in the Feminist Classroom (Frances A. Maher)
ch. 3 Warming Up the Classroom Climate for Women (Sue V. Rosser)
ch. 4 Rewriting the Future: The Feminist Challenge to the Malestream Curriculum (Karen J. Warren)
ch. 5 Resistance to Generalizations in the Classroom (Susanne Bohmer)
ch. 6 The Power of No (Martha E. Thompson)
ch. 7 Reflections on Teaching: "Gender, Race, and Class" (Joy James)
ch. 8 Reshaping the Introductory Women's Studies Course: Dealing Up Front with Anger, Resistance, and Reality (Ardeth Deay, and Judith Stitzel)
ch. 9 Enhancing Feminist Pedagogy. Multimedia Workshops on Women's Experience with the Newspaper and Home (Berenice Fisher)
ch. 10 This Class Meets in Cyberspace: Women's Studies via Distance Education (Ellen Cronan Rose)
Part II - Bringing The World Into The Feminist Classroom
ch. 11 Integrating the Study of Race, Gender, and Class: Some Preliminary Observations (Paula Rothenberg)
ch. 12 Homophobia and Sexism as Popular Values (David Bleich)
ch. 13 Breaking the Silence: Sexual Preference in the Composition Classroom (Allison Berg, Jean Kowaleski, Caroline Le Guin, Ellen Weinauer, and Eric A. Wolfe)
ch. 14 A Discourse on the Care and Handling of Feminist Administrators (Lynette Carpenter)
ch. 15 The Hand and the Hammer: A Brief Critique of the Overhead Projector (Eloise Knowlton)
ch. 16 Lesbian Instructor Comes Out: The Personal Is Pedagogy (Janet Wright)
ch. 17 Would You Rather Be a Goddess or a Cyborg? (Suzanne K. Damarin)
ch. 18 Educating the Living, Remembering the Dead: The Montreal Massacre as Metaphor (Jennifer Scanlon)
ch. 19 Gender, Race, and Radicalism: Teaching the Autobiographies of Native and African American Women Activists (Joy James)
Index
Each selected essay is introduced by its original author who updates the chapter topic. Drawing on examples from their own experiences, the authors provide practical classroom strategies such as readings and resources, writing assignments, classroom exercises, and guidance for using journals, multimedia workshops, and new technologies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Collectively Speaking
Part I - Encountering the Classroom: Developing Feminist Strategies
ch. 1 The Radicalization of a Teacher (Carla Golden)
ch. 2 My Introduction to "Introduction to Women's Studies:" The Role of the Teacher's Authority in the Feminist Classroom (Frances A. Maher)
ch. 3 Warming Up the Classroom Climate for Women (Sue V. Rosser)
ch. 4 Rewriting the Future: The Feminist Challenge to the Malestream Curriculum (Karen J. Warren)
ch. 5 Resistance to Generalizations in the Classroom (Susanne Bohmer)
ch. 6 The Power of No (Martha E. Thompson)
ch. 7 Reflections on Teaching: "Gender, Race, and Class" (Joy James)
ch. 8 Reshaping the Introductory Women's Studies Course: Dealing Up Front with Anger, Resistance, and Reality (Ardeth Deay, and Judith Stitzel)
ch. 9 Enhancing Feminist Pedagogy. Multimedia Workshops on Women's Experience with the Newspaper and Home (Berenice Fisher)
ch. 10 This Class Meets in Cyberspace: Women's Studies via Distance Education (Ellen Cronan Rose)
Part II - Bringing The World Into The Feminist Classroom
ch. 11 Integrating the Study of Race, Gender, and Class: Some Preliminary Observations (Paula Rothenberg)
ch. 12 Homophobia and Sexism as Popular Values (David Bleich)
ch. 13 Breaking the Silence: Sexual Preference in the Composition Classroom (Allison Berg, Jean Kowaleski, Caroline Le Guin, Ellen Weinauer, and Eric A. Wolfe)
ch. 14 A Discourse on the Care and Handling of Feminist Administrators (Lynette Carpenter)
ch. 15 The Hand and the Hammer: A Brief Critique of the Overhead Projector (Eloise Knowlton)
ch. 16 Lesbian Instructor Comes Out: The Personal Is Pedagogy (Janet Wright)
ch. 17 Would You Rather Be a Goddess or a Cyborg? (Suzanne K. Damarin)
ch. 18 Educating the Living, Remembering the Dead: The Montreal Massacre as Metaphor (Jennifer Scanlon)
ch. 19 Gender, Race, and Radicalism: Teaching the Autobiographies of Native and African American Women Activists (Joy James)
Index

Creating Learning Communities: A Practical Guide to Winning Support, Organizing for Change, and Implementing Programs
Additional Info:
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a ...
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a ...
Additional Info:
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a guide to the essentials of this rewarding new program area, including how to design, fund, staff, manage, and integrate learning communities into different campuses. Drawing from their own experience, as well as from experiences of campuses around the country, Nancy S. Shapiro and Jodi H. Levine provide both a sound theoretical rationale and nuts-and-bolts advice on the logistical, administrative, financial, and turf-related issues of creating an effective learning community. And perhaps most important, they show how to ensure that such communities embody and fulfill the objectives for which they were established. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Introduction: Why Learning Communities?
ch. 2 Types and Models of Learning Communities
ch. 3 Creating a Campus Culture for Learning Communities
ch. 4 Developing the Curricula
ch. 5 Recasting Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 6 Building Administrative Partnerships
ch. 7 Putting Administrative Structures in Place
ch. 8 Evaluating and Assessing Learning Communities
ch. 9 How Learning Communities Affect Students, Faculty, and the Institution
ch. 10 Concluding Advice and Reflections on Creating Learning Communities
App Learning Communities Contacts
References
Index
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a guide to the essentials of this rewarding new program area, including how to design, fund, staff, manage, and integrate learning communities into different campuses. Drawing from their own experience, as well as from experiences of campuses around the country, Nancy S. Shapiro and Jodi H. Levine provide both a sound theoretical rationale and nuts-and-bolts advice on the logistical, administrative, financial, and turf-related issues of creating an effective learning community. And perhaps most important, they show how to ensure that such communities embody and fulfill the objectives for which they were established. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Introduction: Why Learning Communities?
ch. 2 Types and Models of Learning Communities
ch. 3 Creating a Campus Culture for Learning Communities
ch. 4 Developing the Curricula
ch. 5 Recasting Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 6 Building Administrative Partnerships
ch. 7 Putting Administrative Structures in Place
ch. 8 Evaluating and Assessing Learning Communities
ch. 9 How Learning Communities Affect Students, Faculty, and the Institution
ch. 10 Concluding Advice and Reflections on Creating Learning Communities
App Learning Communities Contacts
References
Index


Changing College Classrooms: New Teaching and Learning Strategies for an Increasingly Complex World
Additional Info:
"This book is an exciting and highly useful addition to the literature on higher education and teaching. It provides concrete information and suggestions for the improvement of teaching, student learning, and the whole educational process" - from the foreword by Lee R. Kershner, former Senior Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs, California State University System (CSU), and Jacquelyn Ann K. Kegley, co-chair, Advisory Board. CSU Institute for Teaching and Learning. Providing ...
"This book is an exciting and highly useful addition to the literature on higher education and teaching. It provides concrete information and suggestions for the improvement of teaching, student learning, and the whole educational process" - from the foreword by Lee R. Kershner, former Senior Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs, California State University System (CSU), and Jacquelyn Ann K. Kegley, co-chair, Advisory Board. CSU Institute for Teaching and Learning. Providing ...
Additional Info:
"This book is an exciting and highly useful addition to the literature on higher education and teaching. It provides concrete information and suggestions for the improvement of teaching, student learning, and the whole educational process" - from the foreword by Lee R. Kershner, former Senior Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs, California State University System (CSU), and Jacquelyn Ann K. Kegley, co-chair, Advisory Board. CSU Institute for Teaching and Learning. Providing college students with the knowledge, skills, and abilities that will prepare them for today's complex world demands a major transformation in college classrooms - from passive to active learning, from traditional textbooks to hands-on use of technology, from restrictive ways of thinking to diverse multicultural perspectives. This book combines a range of promising instructional strategies with helpful guidelines for assessing the effectiveness of instruction. It will help faculty and administrators equip students with the creative, critical, technological, and problem-solving skills - as well as a coherent sense of multicultural awareness - necessary to thrive in a rapidly changing society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
The Editor
The Contributors
ch. 1 Rethinking College Instruction for a Changing World
Part 1 Instructional Strategies That Promote Active Learning
ch. 2 Inquiry as a Tool in Critical Thinking
ch. 3 Using Examples to Teach Concepts
ch. 4 Fostering Creativity Through Problem Solving
ch. 5 Cooperative Learning in the Classroom
ch. 6 Questioning Techniques for the Active Classroom
Part 2 Developing Multicultural Understanding
ch. 7 Cultural Diversity and Curricular Coherence
ch. 8 Experiential Approaches to Enhancing Cultural Awareness
ch. 9 Unmasking the Myths of Racism
ch. 10 Strategies for Teaching in a Multicultural Environment
Part 3 Teaching With and About New Technologies
ch. 11 Using the Internet for Teaching, Learning, and Research
ch. 12 Enhancing Learning with Interactive Video
ch. 13 Hypermedia as an Instructional Resource
ch. 14 Software Ethics: Teaching by Example
Part 4 Assessing Teaching Effectiveness and Learning Outcomes
ch. 15 Using Assessment to Develop a Culture of Evidence
ch. 16 How Classroom Assessment Can Improve Teaching and Learning
ch. 17 Student Portfolios as an Assessment Tool
ch. 18 Assessment's Role in Strengthening the Core Curriculum
ch. 19 Closing Thoughts: Creating a New Scholarship of College Teaching
Name Index
Subject Index
"This book is an exciting and highly useful addition to the literature on higher education and teaching. It provides concrete information and suggestions for the improvement of teaching, student learning, and the whole educational process" - from the foreword by Lee R. Kershner, former Senior Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs, California State University System (CSU), and Jacquelyn Ann K. Kegley, co-chair, Advisory Board. CSU Institute for Teaching and Learning. Providing college students with the knowledge, skills, and abilities that will prepare them for today's complex world demands a major transformation in college classrooms - from passive to active learning, from traditional textbooks to hands-on use of technology, from restrictive ways of thinking to diverse multicultural perspectives. This book combines a range of promising instructional strategies with helpful guidelines for assessing the effectiveness of instruction. It will help faculty and administrators equip students with the creative, critical, technological, and problem-solving skills - as well as a coherent sense of multicultural awareness - necessary to thrive in a rapidly changing society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
The Editor
The Contributors
ch. 1 Rethinking College Instruction for a Changing World
Part 1 Instructional Strategies That Promote Active Learning
ch. 2 Inquiry as a Tool in Critical Thinking
ch. 3 Using Examples to Teach Concepts
ch. 4 Fostering Creativity Through Problem Solving
ch. 5 Cooperative Learning in the Classroom
ch. 6 Questioning Techniques for the Active Classroom
Part 2 Developing Multicultural Understanding
ch. 7 Cultural Diversity and Curricular Coherence
ch. 8 Experiential Approaches to Enhancing Cultural Awareness
ch. 9 Unmasking the Myths of Racism
ch. 10 Strategies for Teaching in a Multicultural Environment
Part 3 Teaching With and About New Technologies
ch. 11 Using the Internet for Teaching, Learning, and Research
ch. 12 Enhancing Learning with Interactive Video
ch. 13 Hypermedia as an Instructional Resource
ch. 14 Software Ethics: Teaching by Example
Part 4 Assessing Teaching Effectiveness and Learning Outcomes
ch. 15 Using Assessment to Develop a Culture of Evidence
ch. 16 How Classroom Assessment Can Improve Teaching and Learning
ch. 17 Student Portfolios as an Assessment Tool
ch. 18 Assessment's Role in Strengthening the Core Curriculum
ch. 19 Closing Thoughts: Creating a New Scholarship of College Teaching
Name Index
Subject Index

The Soul of the American University: From Protestant Establishment to Established Nonbelief
Additional Info:
In this bold reexamination of the role of religion in higher education, Marsden provides a fascinating look at the histories of many pacesetting universities, including Harvard, Yale, and the University of California at Berkeley. The author argues for a new place for traditional religious perspectives in American universities. (From the Publisher)
In this bold reexamination of the role of religion in higher education, Marsden provides a fascinating look at the histories of many pacesetting universities, including Harvard, Yale, and the University of California at Berkeley. The author argues for a new place for traditional religious perspectives in American universities. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In this bold reexamination of the role of religion in higher education, Marsden provides a fascinating look at the histories of many pacesetting universities, including Harvard, Yale, and the University of California at Berkeley. The author argues for a new place for traditional religious perspectives in American universities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Prologue (I): God and Buckley at Yale (1951)
Prologue (II): Henry Sloane Coffin's Yale (1897)
Prologue (III): A "Christian College"? The Yale of Noah Porter and William Graham Sumner (1879-1881
Pt. I The Establishment of Protestant Nonsectarianism
ch. 1 The Burden of Christendom: Seventeenth-Century Harvard
ch. 2 The New Queen of the Sciences and the New Republic
ch. 3 Two Kinds of Sectarianism
ch. 4 A Righteous Consensus, Whig Style
Pt. II Defining the American University in a Scientific Age
ch. 5 American Practicality and Germanic Ideals: Two Visions for Reform
ch. 6 The Christian Legacy in the Epoch of Science
ch. 7 Positive Christianity versus Positivism at Noah Porter's Yale
ch. 8 California: Revolution without Much Ideology
ch. 9 Methodological Secularization and Its Christian Rationale at Hopkins
ch. 10 Liberal Protestantism at Michigan: New England Intentions with Jeffersonian Results
ch. 11 Harvard and the Religion of Humanity
ch. 12 Holding the Line at Princeton
ch. 13 Making the World Safe from the Traditionalist Establishment
ch. 14 The Low-Church Idea of a University
Pt. III When the Tie No Longer Binds
ch. 15 The Trouble with the Old-Time Religion
ch. 16 The Elusive Ideal of Academic Freedom
ch. 17 The Fundamentalist Menace
ch. 18 The Obstacles to a Christian Presence
ch. 19 Outsiders
ch. 20 Searching for a Soul
ch. 21 A Church with the Soul of a Nation
ch. 22 Liberal Protestantism without Protestantism
Concluding Unscientific Postscript
Index
In this bold reexamination of the role of religion in higher education, Marsden provides a fascinating look at the histories of many pacesetting universities, including Harvard, Yale, and the University of California at Berkeley. The author argues for a new place for traditional religious perspectives in American universities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Prologue (I): God and Buckley at Yale (1951)
Prologue (II): Henry Sloane Coffin's Yale (1897)
Prologue (III): A "Christian College"? The Yale of Noah Porter and William Graham Sumner (1879-1881
Pt. I The Establishment of Protestant Nonsectarianism
ch. 1 The Burden of Christendom: Seventeenth-Century Harvard
ch. 2 The New Queen of the Sciences and the New Republic
ch. 3 Two Kinds of Sectarianism
ch. 4 A Righteous Consensus, Whig Style
Pt. II Defining the American University in a Scientific Age
ch. 5 American Practicality and Germanic Ideals: Two Visions for Reform
ch. 6 The Christian Legacy in the Epoch of Science
ch. 7 Positive Christianity versus Positivism at Noah Porter's Yale
ch. 8 California: Revolution without Much Ideology
ch. 9 Methodological Secularization and Its Christian Rationale at Hopkins
ch. 10 Liberal Protestantism at Michigan: New England Intentions with Jeffersonian Results
ch. 11 Harvard and the Religion of Humanity
ch. 12 Holding the Line at Princeton
ch. 13 Making the World Safe from the Traditionalist Establishment
ch. 14 The Low-Church Idea of a University
Pt. III When the Tie No Longer Binds
ch. 15 The Trouble with the Old-Time Religion
ch. 16 The Elusive Ideal of Academic Freedom
ch. 17 The Fundamentalist Menace
ch. 18 The Obstacles to a Christian Presence
ch. 19 Outsiders
ch. 20 Searching for a Soul
ch. 21 A Church with the Soul of a Nation
ch. 22 Liberal Protestantism without Protestantism
Concluding Unscientific Postscript
Index

The Pleasures of Academe: A Celebration and Defense of Higher Education
Additional Info:
In this book, the distinguished historian James Axtell offers a compelling defense of higher education. Drawing on national statistics, broad-ranging scholarship, and delightful anecdotes, Axtell reminds us of the dedication of professors and the increasing demands placed on them. He describes the professional work cycle, the evolution of scholarship in the past three decades, the importance of "habitual scholarship," and the best ways to judge a university. He discusses, with ...
In this book, the distinguished historian James Axtell offers a compelling defense of higher education. Drawing on national statistics, broad-ranging scholarship, and delightful anecdotes, Axtell reminds us of the dedication of professors and the increasing demands placed on them. He describes the professional work cycle, the evolution of scholarship in the past three decades, the importance of "habitual scholarship," and the best ways to judge a university. He discusses, with ...
Additional Info:
In this book, the distinguished historian James Axtell offers a compelling defense of higher education. Drawing on national statistics, broad-ranging scholarship, and delightful anecdotes, Axtell reminds us of the dedication of professors and the increasing demands placed on them. He describes the professional work cycle, the evolution of scholarship in the past three decades, the importance of "habitual scholarship," and the best ways to judge a university. He discusses, with imagination and wit, the many pleasures of academic life, including intercollegiate sports, the "benign pathology" of loving and collecting books, teaching and service outside the classroom, life in college towns, and working vacations. Axtell persuasively confronts the major critics of higher education, arguing that they have perpetuated misunderstandings of tenure, research, teaching, curricular change, and professional politics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: In Praise of the University
Acknowledgments
Academic
ch. 1 (Mis)Understanding Academic Work
ch. 2 Scholarship Reconsidered
ch. 3 Twenty-five Reasons to Publish
ch. 4 Encountering the Other
ch. 5 What Makes a University Great?
Pleasures
ch. 6 Confessions of a Bibliolater
ch. 7 The Making of a Scholar-Athlete
ch. 8 Between Disciplines
ch. 9 Extracurriculum
ch. 10 College Towns
ch. 11 Academic Vacations
Conclusion: Professors, Critics, and Higher Education
Notes
Index
In this book, the distinguished historian James Axtell offers a compelling defense of higher education. Drawing on national statistics, broad-ranging scholarship, and delightful anecdotes, Axtell reminds us of the dedication of professors and the increasing demands placed on them. He describes the professional work cycle, the evolution of scholarship in the past three decades, the importance of "habitual scholarship," and the best ways to judge a university. He discusses, with imagination and wit, the many pleasures of academic life, including intercollegiate sports, the "benign pathology" of loving and collecting books, teaching and service outside the classroom, life in college towns, and working vacations. Axtell persuasively confronts the major critics of higher education, arguing that they have perpetuated misunderstandings of tenure, research, teaching, curricular change, and professional politics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: In Praise of the University
Acknowledgments
Academic
ch. 1 (Mis)Understanding Academic Work
ch. 2 Scholarship Reconsidered
ch. 3 Twenty-five Reasons to Publish
ch. 4 Encountering the Other
ch. 5 What Makes a University Great?
Pleasures
ch. 6 Confessions of a Bibliolater
ch. 7 The Making of a Scholar-Athlete
ch. 8 Between Disciplines
ch. 9 Extracurriculum
ch. 10 College Towns
ch. 11 Academic Vacations
Conclusion: Professors, Critics, and Higher Education
Notes
Index
Additional Info:
Ways of Thinking, Ways of Teaching presents a new model of teacher thinking and action–one that explains teacher decisions about what and how to teach. Combining qualitative and quantitative data drawn from observations and interviews with urban teachers of writing, George Hillocks argues that teacher knowledge is not simply transferred from some source to the teacher. Rather, it is constructed on the basis of assumptions about epistemology, students, and ...
Ways of Thinking, Ways of Teaching presents a new model of teacher thinking and action–one that explains teacher decisions about what and how to teach. Combining qualitative and quantitative data drawn from observations and interviews with urban teachers of writing, George Hillocks argues that teacher knowledge is not simply transferred from some source to the teacher. Rather, it is constructed on the basis of assumptions about epistemology, students, and ...
Additional Info:
Ways of Thinking, Ways of Teaching presents a new model of teacher thinking and action–one that explains teacher decisions about what and how to teach. Combining qualitative and quantitative data drawn from observations and interviews with urban teachers of writing, George Hillocks argues that teacher knowledge is not simply transferred from some source to the teacher. Rather, it is constructed on the basis of assumptions about epistemology, students, and subject matter. The fact of this construction helps to explain why teacher education has had so little effect on changing the classroom behavior of teachers from one generation to the next. Unlike other research on teacher thinking, this book examines what actually happens in composition classrooms, presenting large chunks of representative transcripts for analysis. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Matters of Significance: Differences Among Teachers
ch. 2 Knowledge in Classrooms
ch. 3 Profiles of Teaching
ch. 4 Knowledge of Students, Purpose, and Content
ch. 5 Substance and Constructivist Teaching
ch. 6 The Construction of Curriculum
ch. 7 The Dynamics of Teacher Thinking
ch. 8 Implications
References
Index
About the Author
Ways of Thinking, Ways of Teaching presents a new model of teacher thinking and action–one that explains teacher decisions about what and how to teach. Combining qualitative and quantitative data drawn from observations and interviews with urban teachers of writing, George Hillocks argues that teacher knowledge is not simply transferred from some source to the teacher. Rather, it is constructed on the basis of assumptions about epistemology, students, and subject matter. The fact of this construction helps to explain why teacher education has had so little effect on changing the classroom behavior of teachers from one generation to the next. Unlike other research on teacher thinking, this book examines what actually happens in composition classrooms, presenting large chunks of representative transcripts for analysis. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Matters of Significance: Differences Among Teachers
ch. 2 Knowledge in Classrooms
ch. 3 Profiles of Teaching
ch. 4 Knowledge of Students, Purpose, and Content
ch. 5 Substance and Constructivist Teaching
ch. 6 The Construction of Curriculum
ch. 7 The Dynamics of Teacher Thinking
ch. 8 Implications
References
Index
About the Author

To Know as We Are Known: A Spirituality of Education
Additional Info:
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Knowing is loving
ch. 2 Education as spiritual formation
ch. 3 The teaching behind the teaching
ch. 4 What is truth?
ch. 5 To teach is to create a space...
ch. 6 ...In which obedience to truth is practiced
ch. 7 The spiritual formation of teachers
Notes
Index
This primer on authentic education explores how mind and heart can work together in the learning process. Moving beyond the bankruptcy of our current model of education, Parker Palmer finds the soul of education through a lifelong cultivation of the wisdom each of us possesses and can share to benefit others. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Knowing is loving
ch. 2 Education as spiritual formation
ch. 3 The teaching behind the teaching
ch. 4 What is truth?
ch. 5 To teach is to create a space...
ch. 6 ...In which obedience to truth is practiced
ch. 7 The spiritual formation of teachers
Notes
Index

Learning in Social Action: A Contribution to Understanding Informal Education
Additional Info:
This book seeks to increase our understanding of those informal circumstances in which people learn. Adult educators, Professor Foley argues, ought not to neglect the importance of the incidental learning which can take place when people become involved in voluntary organisations, social struggles and political activity. In developing this argument, he uses case studies from the USA, Australia and Third World countries and embracing very diverse political, environmental, women's, and ...
This book seeks to increase our understanding of those informal circumstances in which people learn. Adult educators, Professor Foley argues, ought not to neglect the importance of the incidental learning which can take place when people become involved in voluntary organisations, social struggles and political activity. In developing this argument, he uses case studies from the USA, Australia and Third World countries and embracing very diverse political, environmental, women's, and ...
Additional Info:
This book seeks to increase our understanding of those informal circumstances in which people learn. Adult educators, Professor Foley argues, ought not to neglect the importance of the incidental learning which can take place when people become involved in voluntary organisations, social struggles and political activity. In developing this argument, he uses case studies from the USA, Australia and Third World countries and embracing very diverse political, environmental, women's, and workers' struggles. He shows how involvement in social action can help people to unlearn dominant, oppressive discourses and learn instead oppositional, liberatory ones. He relates these processes of informal learning in contested contexts to current thinking and practice in adult education and points the way to a more radical agenda. For adult educators, community workers and others working with socially engaged citizens, the insights and lessons of this book ought to be especially useful as they try to develop their own practice in such contexts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Ideology, Discourse and Learning
ch. 3 Learning in a Green Campaign
ch. 4 The Neighbourhood House: Site of Struggle, Site of Learning
ch. 5 Adult Education and Capitalist Reorganisation
ch. 6 Learning in Brazilian Women's Organisations
ch. 7 Political Education in the Zimbabwe Liberation Struggle
ch. 8 Conclusion
Bibliography
Index
This book seeks to increase our understanding of those informal circumstances in which people learn. Adult educators, Professor Foley argues, ought not to neglect the importance of the incidental learning which can take place when people become involved in voluntary organisations, social struggles and political activity. In developing this argument, he uses case studies from the USA, Australia and Third World countries and embracing very diverse political, environmental, women's, and workers' struggles. He shows how involvement in social action can help people to unlearn dominant, oppressive discourses and learn instead oppositional, liberatory ones. He relates these processes of informal learning in contested contexts to current thinking and practice in adult education and points the way to a more radical agenda. For adult educators, community workers and others working with socially engaged citizens, the insights and lessons of this book ought to be especially useful as they try to develop their own practice in such contexts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Ideology, Discourse and Learning
ch. 3 Learning in a Green Campaign
ch. 4 The Neighbourhood House: Site of Struggle, Site of Learning
ch. 5 Adult Education and Capitalist Reorganisation
ch. 6 Learning in Brazilian Women's Organisations
ch. 7 Political Education in the Zimbabwe Liberation Struggle
ch. 8 Conclusion
Bibliography
Index


Learning and Development: Making Connections to Enhance Teaching
Additional Info:
A ready reference to learning process in college students, or lack there of, and how instructors can help them transform their own education for the better. This comprehensive resource offers readers a proven approach to strengthening persistence and achievement in post-secondary education. (From the Publisher)
A ready reference to learning process in college students, or lack there of, and how instructors can help them transform their own education for the better. This comprehensive resource offers readers a proven approach to strengthening persistence and achievement in post-secondary education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A ready reference to learning process in college students, or lack there of, and how instructors can help them transform their own education for the better. This comprehensive resource offers readers a proven approach to strengthening persistence and achievement in post-secondary education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Pt. 1 Understanding Learning and Development
ch. 1 Today's Learners
ch. 2 Theories of Personal Development and Learning
ch. 3 Theories Related to Cognitive Development and Learning
ch. 4 A Framework for Effective Practice
Pt. 2 Applying Research to Teaching
ch. 5 Self and Identity
ch. 6 Motivation
ch. 7 Interaction with the Environment
ch. 8 Ways of Knowing
ch. 9 Learning Styles and Preferences
ch. 10 Self-Regulation and Goal Setting
Pt. 3 New Teaching Perspectives
ch. 11 Critical Reflection on Practice
ch. 12 Educator as Innovator, Researcher, and Change Agent
A ready reference to learning process in college students, or lack there of, and how instructors can help them transform their own education for the better. This comprehensive resource offers readers a proven approach to strengthening persistence and achievement in post-secondary education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Pt. 1 Understanding Learning and Development
ch. 1 Today's Learners
ch. 2 Theories of Personal Development and Learning
ch. 3 Theories Related to Cognitive Development and Learning
ch. 4 A Framework for Effective Practice
Pt. 2 Applying Research to Teaching
ch. 5 Self and Identity
ch. 6 Motivation
ch. 7 Interaction with the Environment
ch. 8 Ways of Knowing
ch. 9 Learning Styles and Preferences
ch. 10 Self-Regulation and Goal Setting
Pt. 3 New Teaching Perspectives
ch. 11 Critical Reflection on Practice
ch. 12 Educator as Innovator, Researcher, and Change Agent
Additional Info:
Here, at last, is a volume that explores and analyzes learning as a distinctive experience for women. The authors are all established adult education professionals and recognized authorities on women as adult learners. Together, they examine and compare theimportance of such factors as sense of identity, self-esteem, social world, and power in what and how women learn. Drawing from extensive research and scholarship, as well as from personal stories, they ...
Here, at last, is a volume that explores and analyzes learning as a distinctive experience for women. The authors are all established adult education professionals and recognized authorities on women as adult learners. Together, they examine and compare theimportance of such factors as sense of identity, self-esteem, social world, and power in what and how women learn. Drawing from extensive research and scholarship, as well as from personal stories, they ...
Additional Info:
Here, at last, is a volume that explores and analyzes learning as a distinctive experience for women. The authors are all established adult education professionals and recognized authorities on women as adult learners. Together, they examine and compare theimportance of such factors as sense of identity, self-esteem, social world, and power in what and how women learn. Drawing from extensive research and scholarship, as well as from personal stories, they reveal the numerous ways in which women experience the learning process. They explain, for example, how women often become personally connected to the object and process of learning. They also analyze these different experiences to show education and training professionals how to better design and conduct programs for women. Women as Learners offers specific recommendations to improve all types of formal and informal adult educational programs, including literacy education, counseling and support groups, workplace training, and professional development activities. Concise yet comprehensive, this long-awaited book provides the most current principles for practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Women's Learning: A Kaleidoscope
ch. 2 Contexts of Women's Learning
ch. 3 Women's Self and Learning
ch. 4 Talk, Identity, & Power: Voice and Silence in Women's Learning
ch. 5 Women's Knowing and Learning
ch. 6 Transformative Learning in the Lives of Women, Ann Brooks
ch. 7 Feminist Pedagogy in Three Movements: Stories from the Field, Elizabeth J. Tisdell
ch. 8 Re-Searching for Women's Learning
ch. 9 Re-Vision Learning Opportunities for Women, Jane M. Hugo
ch. 10 Creating Knowledge about Women Learners
Here, at last, is a volume that explores and analyzes learning as a distinctive experience for women. The authors are all established adult education professionals and recognized authorities on women as adult learners. Together, they examine and compare theimportance of such factors as sense of identity, self-esteem, social world, and power in what and how women learn. Drawing from extensive research and scholarship, as well as from personal stories, they reveal the numerous ways in which women experience the learning process. They explain, for example, how women often become personally connected to the object and process of learning. They also analyze these different experiences to show education and training professionals how to better design and conduct programs for women. Women as Learners offers specific recommendations to improve all types of formal and informal adult educational programs, including literacy education, counseling and support groups, workplace training, and professional development activities. Concise yet comprehensive, this long-awaited book provides the most current principles for practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Women's Learning: A Kaleidoscope
ch. 2 Contexts of Women's Learning
ch. 3 Women's Self and Learning
ch. 4 Talk, Identity, & Power: Voice and Silence in Women's Learning
ch. 5 Women's Knowing and Learning
ch. 6 Transformative Learning in the Lives of Women, Ann Brooks
ch. 7 Feminist Pedagogy in Three Movements: Stories from the Field, Elizabeth J. Tisdell
ch. 8 Re-Searching for Women's Learning
ch. 9 Re-Vision Learning Opportunities for Women, Jane M. Hugo
ch. 10 Creating Knowledge about Women Learners


Learning That Lasts: Integrating Learning, Development, and Performance in College and Beyond
Additional Info:
Today's colleges and universities face increasing pressure to develop programs and curricula that will teach students how to handle life's unexpected challenges and events. For educators and policymakers, this urgency will only grow as new global trends emerge and social expectations change. This timely book explores what it means for learners to transform themselves and for educators to foster essential skills for learning, leading, teamwork, and adapting with integrity in ...
Today's colleges and universities face increasing pressure to develop programs and curricula that will teach students how to handle life's unexpected challenges and events. For educators and policymakers, this urgency will only grow as new global trends emerge and social expectations change. This timely book explores what it means for learners to transform themselves and for educators to foster essential skills for learning, leading, teamwork, and adapting with integrity in ...
Additional Info:
Today's colleges and universities face increasing pressure to develop programs and curricula that will teach students how to handle life's unexpected challenges and events. For educators and policymakers, this urgency will only grow as new global trends emerge and social expectations change. This timely book explores what it means for learners to transform themselves and for educators to foster essential skills for learning, leading, teamwork, and adapting with integrity in college and beyond.
The authors begin by defining "learning that lasts" as the successful integration of learning, development, and performance. Drawing on two decades of longitudinal studies of student learning in the highly acclaimed curriculum at Alverno College and on leading educational theories, Marcia Mentkowski and her associates set forth a theory of deep and durable learning that includes practical strategies for enabling a wide range of students to cultivate integrative and expansive capabilities across a lifetime. They present concrete suggestions on the ways that faculty and academic staff can work together to forge effective curricula, design innovative programs, implement key institutional goals, and renegotiate the college culture. They analyze compelling research results, collaborative inquiry by consortia of institutions, and twenty-five years of experience to illuminate what educators and administrators must achieve so that increasingly varied learners can realize their goals and potential.
Learning That Lasts intertwines educational theory, practice, and research by demonstrating how learning frameworks can shape curricula, teaching strategy, and assessment. It presents core curriculumprinciples for practice and it also systematically tests assumptions about student learning, development, and performance. This landmark volume provides a detailed blueprint for understanding and promoting purposeful, responsible contribution to work, personal, and civic life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Themes and Purposes
Educators' Ways of Knowing About Learning
Exploring Learning in College and Beyond
Student as Learner
Learner as Developing Person
Graduate as Performer and Contributor
Interpreting and Envisioning Learning That Lasts
Integrating Domains of Growth Through Transformative Learning
Creating the Learning-to-Teaching Connection
Fostering Learning That Lasts
Integrating Theory, Research, and Practice
Thinking Through a Curriculum for Learning That Lasts
Rethinking Inquiry That Improves Teaching and Learning
Transforming the College Culture Toward Learning That Lasts.
Looking Ahead
Today's colleges and universities face increasing pressure to develop programs and curricula that will teach students how to handle life's unexpected challenges and events. For educators and policymakers, this urgency will only grow as new global trends emerge and social expectations change. This timely book explores what it means for learners to transform themselves and for educators to foster essential skills for learning, leading, teamwork, and adapting with integrity in college and beyond.
The authors begin by defining "learning that lasts" as the successful integration of learning, development, and performance. Drawing on two decades of longitudinal studies of student learning in the highly acclaimed curriculum at Alverno College and on leading educational theories, Marcia Mentkowski and her associates set forth a theory of deep and durable learning that includes practical strategies for enabling a wide range of students to cultivate integrative and expansive capabilities across a lifetime. They present concrete suggestions on the ways that faculty and academic staff can work together to forge effective curricula, design innovative programs, implement key institutional goals, and renegotiate the college culture. They analyze compelling research results, collaborative inquiry by consortia of institutions, and twenty-five years of experience to illuminate what educators and administrators must achieve so that increasingly varied learners can realize their goals and potential.
Learning That Lasts intertwines educational theory, practice, and research by demonstrating how learning frameworks can shape curricula, teaching strategy, and assessment. It presents core curriculumprinciples for practice and it also systematically tests assumptions about student learning, development, and performance. This landmark volume provides a detailed blueprint for understanding and promoting purposeful, responsible contribution to work, personal, and civic life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Themes and Purposes
Educators' Ways of Knowing About Learning
Exploring Learning in College and Beyond
Student as Learner
Learner as Developing Person
Graduate as Performer and Contributor
Interpreting and Envisioning Learning That Lasts
Integrating Domains of Growth Through Transformative Learning
Creating the Learning-to-Teaching Connection
Fostering Learning That Lasts
Integrating Theory, Research, and Practice
Thinking Through a Curriculum for Learning That Lasts
Rethinking Inquiry That Improves Teaching and Learning
Transforming the College Culture Toward Learning That Lasts.
Looking Ahead

Adult Learning and the Internet
Additional Info:
More than thirty-six million people in the United States are already using the Internet, and many more will join them in the years to come. Tools such as e-mail, Web browsers, and on-line conferencing present exciting opportunities for both adult learners and their instructors. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education is to explore the effects of the Internet on adult learning--both as that ...
More than thirty-six million people in the United States are already using the Internet, and many more will join them in the years to come. Tools such as e-mail, Web browsers, and on-line conferencing present exciting opportunities for both adult learners and their instructors. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education is to explore the effects of the Internet on adult learning--both as that ...
Additional Info:
More than thirty-six million people in the United States are already using the Internet, and many more will join them in the years to come. Tools such as e-mail, Web browsers, and on-line conferencing present exciting opportunities for both adult learners and their instructors. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education is to explore the effects of the Internet on adult learning--both as that learning is facilitated through formal instruction and as it occurs spontaneously in the experiences of individuals and groups--and to provide guidance to adult and continuing educators searching for ways to use the Internet more effectively in their practice. Taken as a whole, the sourcebook provides a thorough survey of the research literature. The chapters also reflect the hard-won personal experiences of the authors, all of whom are directly involved in the use of Internet technologies to facilitate adult learning. This is the 78th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching and Learning Internet Skills (Brad Cahoon)
ch. 2 Intranets for Learning and Performance Support (Linda S. Gilbert)
ch. 3 Course Development on the World Wide Web (Kathleen P. King)
ch. 4 Adult Learners and Internet-Based Distance Education (Daniel V. Eastmond)
ch. 5 Facilitating Group Learning on the Internet (Margaret E. Holt, Pamela B. Kleiber, Jill Dianne Swenson, E. Frances Rees, Judy Milton)
ch. 6 On-Line Education: A Study of Emerging Pedagogy (Lynne Schrum)
ch. 7 Ethical Considerations in Internet-Based Adult Education (Margaret E. Holt)
ch. 8 Adult Learning and the Internet: Themes and Things to Come (Brad Cahoon)
More than thirty-six million people in the United States are already using the Internet, and many more will join them in the years to come. Tools such as e-mail, Web browsers, and on-line conferencing present exciting opportunities for both adult learners and their instructors. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education is to explore the effects of the Internet on adult learning--both as that learning is facilitated through formal instruction and as it occurs spontaneously in the experiences of individuals and groups--and to provide guidance to adult and continuing educators searching for ways to use the Internet more effectively in their practice. Taken as a whole, the sourcebook provides a thorough survey of the research literature. The chapters also reflect the hard-won personal experiences of the authors, all of whom are directly involved in the use of Internet technologies to facilitate adult learning. This is the 78th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching and Learning Internet Skills (Brad Cahoon)
ch. 2 Intranets for Learning and Performance Support (Linda S. Gilbert)
ch. 3 Course Development on the World Wide Web (Kathleen P. King)
ch. 4 Adult Learners and Internet-Based Distance Education (Daniel V. Eastmond)
ch. 5 Facilitating Group Learning on the Internet (Margaret E. Holt, Pamela B. Kleiber, Jill Dianne Swenson, E. Frances Rees, Judy Milton)
ch. 6 On-Line Education: A Study of Emerging Pedagogy (Lynne Schrum)
ch. 7 Ethical Considerations in Internet-Based Adult Education (Margaret E. Holt)
ch. 8 Adult Learning and the Internet: Themes and Things to Come (Brad Cahoon)


Education for Judgement: The Artistry of Discussion Leadership
Additional Info:
The contributors to Education for Judgement maintain that the elements of great teaching can be identified and consciously practiced. Many of the essays describe the building blocks of successful group leadership: negotiating a "contract" governing the conduct of the group; orchestrating a constructive process of questioning,listening,and responding; encouraging independent thinking; and guiding participants toward useful roles in their interaction with one another. The other chapters in the volume ...
The contributors to Education for Judgement maintain that the elements of great teaching can be identified and consciously practiced. Many of the essays describe the building blocks of successful group leadership: negotiating a "contract" governing the conduct of the group; orchestrating a constructive process of questioning,listening,and responding; encouraging independent thinking; and guiding participants toward useful roles in their interaction with one another. The other chapters in the volume ...
Additional Info:
The contributors to Education for Judgement maintain that the elements of great teaching can be identified and consciously practiced. Many of the essays describe the building blocks of successful group leadership: negotiating a "contract" governing the conduct of the group; orchestrating a constructive process of questioning,listening,and responding; encouraging independent thinking; and guiding participants toward useful roles in their interaction with one another. The other chapters in the volume take a broader,more philosophical view of discussion leadership. They cover the ethical considerations of discussion teaching,the special challenges of teaching technical material using this method,and one pioneering effort ot introduce a participative mode of medical education. First-person accounts of discussion leaders' experiences provide useful insights into the joys and pitfalls of teaching by the discussion method. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forward
Preface
Part 1 Learning and Teaching
ch. 1 Barriers and Gateways to Learning
ch. 2 Premises and Practices of Discussion Teaching
Part 2 Personal Odysseys
ch. 3 Tulips, Tinfoil and Teaching: Journal of a Freshman Teacher
ch. 4 Great Beginnings
ch. 5 Changing Ground: A Medical School Lecturer Turns to Discussion Teaching
ch. 6 Every Student Teaches and Every Teacher Learns: The Reciprocal Gift of Discussion Teaching
Part 3 Building Blocks
ch. 7 Establishing a Teaching/Learning Contract
ch. 8 With Open Ears: Listening and the Art of Discussion Teaching
ch. 9 The Discussion Teacher in Action: Questioning, Listening and Response
Part 4 Critical Challenges
ch. 10 Patterns of Participation
ch. 11 Teaching Technical Material
ch. 12 "To See Ourselves as Others See Us": The Rewards of Classroom Observation
ch. 13 Discovering the Semester
ch. 14 Encouraging Independent Thinking
Part 5..Education for Judgment
ch. 15 Having It by Heart: Some Reflections on Knowing Too Much
ch. 16 Undue Influence: Confessions from an Uneasy Discussion Leader
ch. 17 A Delicate Balance: Ethical Dilemmas and the Discussion Process
Index
The contributors to Education for Judgement maintain that the elements of great teaching can be identified and consciously practiced. Many of the essays describe the building blocks of successful group leadership: negotiating a "contract" governing the conduct of the group; orchestrating a constructive process of questioning,listening,and responding; encouraging independent thinking; and guiding participants toward useful roles in their interaction with one another. The other chapters in the volume take a broader,more philosophical view of discussion leadership. They cover the ethical considerations of discussion teaching,the special challenges of teaching technical material using this method,and one pioneering effort ot introduce a participative mode of medical education. First-person accounts of discussion leaders' experiences provide useful insights into the joys and pitfalls of teaching by the discussion method. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forward
Preface
Part 1 Learning and Teaching
ch. 1 Barriers and Gateways to Learning
ch. 2 Premises and Practices of Discussion Teaching
Part 2 Personal Odysseys
ch. 3 Tulips, Tinfoil and Teaching: Journal of a Freshman Teacher
ch. 4 Great Beginnings
ch. 5 Changing Ground: A Medical School Lecturer Turns to Discussion Teaching
ch. 6 Every Student Teaches and Every Teacher Learns: The Reciprocal Gift of Discussion Teaching
Part 3 Building Blocks
ch. 7 Establishing a Teaching/Learning Contract
ch. 8 With Open Ears: Listening and the Art of Discussion Teaching
ch. 9 The Discussion Teacher in Action: Questioning, Listening and Response
Part 4 Critical Challenges
ch. 10 Patterns of Participation
ch. 11 Teaching Technical Material
ch. 12 "To See Ourselves as Others See Us": The Rewards of Classroom Observation
ch. 13 Discovering the Semester
ch. 14 Encouraging Independent Thinking
Part 5..Education for Judgment
ch. 15 Having It by Heart: Some Reflections on Knowing Too Much
ch. 16 Undue Influence: Confessions from an Uneasy Discussion Leader
ch. 17 A Delicate Balance: Ethical Dilemmas and the Discussion Process
Index

Reaffirming Higher Education
Additional Info:
The American college and university today must assess what difference scholarship makes to teaching and what teaching means to scholarship. Reaffirming Higher Education asks who teaches, what, to whom, and why. The authors maintain that what matters in higher learning is learning, while denying that scholarship detracts from teaching. The authors outline reform and renewal for both the institutional and personal dimensions of higher learning that would encompass the ideal ...
The American college and university today must assess what difference scholarship makes to teaching and what teaching means to scholarship. Reaffirming Higher Education asks who teaches, what, to whom, and why. The authors maintain that what matters in higher learning is learning, while denying that scholarship detracts from teaching. The authors outline reform and renewal for both the institutional and personal dimensions of higher learning that would encompass the ideal ...
Additional Info:
The American college and university today must assess what difference scholarship makes to teaching and what teaching means to scholarship. Reaffirming Higher Education asks who teaches, what, to whom, and why. The authors maintain that what matters in higher learning is learning, while denying that scholarship detracts from teaching. The authors outline reform and renewal for both the institutional and personal dimensions of higher learning that would encompass the ideal of the academic ethic. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contents
Preface
ch. 1 Who Should Teach in a University?
ch. 2 What Should Universities Teach?
ch. 3 Who Should Go to College?
ch. 4 What is at Stake on Campus?
Epilogue: The Major Matters Most of All
Bibliography
Index
The American college and university today must assess what difference scholarship makes to teaching and what teaching means to scholarship. Reaffirming Higher Education asks who teaches, what, to whom, and why. The authors maintain that what matters in higher learning is learning, while denying that scholarship detracts from teaching. The authors outline reform and renewal for both the institutional and personal dimensions of higher learning that would encompass the ideal of the academic ethic. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contents
Preface
ch. 1 Who Should Teach in a University?
ch. 2 What Should Universities Teach?
ch. 3 Who Should Go to College?
ch. 4 What is at Stake on Campus?
Epilogue: The Major Matters Most of All
Bibliography
Index


What's the Use of Lectures?
Additional Info:
In this first American edition of a best-selling classic, Donald Bligh draws from decades of research and hands-on experience to help college and university teachers develop and use lectures effectively. What's the Use of Lectures? is an indispensable guide for anyone who aspires to be a skilled lecturer and teacher. It examines the nature of teaching and learning in a classroom lecture--describing how students learn, how much knowledge they retain, ...
In this first American edition of a best-selling classic, Donald Bligh draws from decades of research and hands-on experience to help college and university teachers develop and use lectures effectively. What's the Use of Lectures? is an indispensable guide for anyone who aspires to be a skilled lecturer and teacher. It examines the nature of teaching and learning in a classroom lecture--describing how students learn, how much knowledge they retain, ...
Additional Info:
In this first American edition of a best-selling classic, Donald Bligh draws from decades of research and hands-on experience to help college and university teachers develop and use lectures effectively. What's the Use of Lectures? is an indispensable guide for anyone who aspires to be a skilled lecturer and teacher. It examines the nature of teaching and learning in a classroom lecture--describing how students learn, how much knowledge they retain, and how to enhance their attention and motivation. Bligh builds on this information to share strategies forcreating organized, thoughtful, and effective lectures. Topics include taking notes, using handouts, practicing different formats and styles, obtaining feedback, overcoming difficulties, evaluating the lecture, and testing alternative methods when lecturing is not adequate. Also included are tables and diagrams to illustrate different approaches to lecturing. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 What Objectives can Lectures Achieve?
ch. 1 Evidence of What Lectures Achieve
Part 2 What Factors Affect the Acquisition of Information?
ch. 2 Factors Influencing Memory
ch. 3 Factors Affecting Students' Attention
ch. 4 Motivating Students
Part 3 What Lecture Techniques Apply these Factors Most Effectively?
ch. 5 Lecture Organization
ch. 6 Making a Point
ch. 7 Reasons and Explanations
ch. 8 Aids to Comprehending a Point
ch. 9 Note Taking in Lectures
ch. 10 The Purpose, Preparation, and Use of Handouts
ch. 11 Lecture Styles
ch. 12 Ways of Obtaining Feedback
ch. 13 Evaluation of Lectures
ch. 14 Overcoming Common Difficulties
ch. 15 Lectures for the Promotion of Thought
ch. 16 Lectures to Teach Attitudes
Part 4 Alternatives when Lecturing is Inadequate
ch. 17 The Lecture Method Alone is Rarely Adequate
ch. 18 Teaching Methods to Use with Lectures
ch. 19 Some Combinations of Teaching Methods
Part 5 Preparation for the use of Lectures
ch. 20 Thinking the Lecture Through
ch. 21 Writing the Notes
ch. 22 Lecturing for the First Time
ch. 23 Conclusion
In this first American edition of a best-selling classic, Donald Bligh draws from decades of research and hands-on experience to help college and university teachers develop and use lectures effectively. What's the Use of Lectures? is an indispensable guide for anyone who aspires to be a skilled lecturer and teacher. It examines the nature of teaching and learning in a classroom lecture--describing how students learn, how much knowledge they retain, and how to enhance their attention and motivation. Bligh builds on this information to share strategies forcreating organized, thoughtful, and effective lectures. Topics include taking notes, using handouts, practicing different formats and styles, obtaining feedback, overcoming difficulties, evaluating the lecture, and testing alternative methods when lecturing is not adequate. Also included are tables and diagrams to illustrate different approaches to lecturing. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 What Objectives can Lectures Achieve?
ch. 1 Evidence of What Lectures Achieve
Part 2 What Factors Affect the Acquisition of Information?
ch. 2 Factors Influencing Memory
ch. 3 Factors Affecting Students' Attention
ch. 4 Motivating Students
Part 3 What Lecture Techniques Apply these Factors Most Effectively?
ch. 5 Lecture Organization
ch. 6 Making a Point
ch. 7 Reasons and Explanations
ch. 8 Aids to Comprehending a Point
ch. 9 Note Taking in Lectures
ch. 10 The Purpose, Preparation, and Use of Handouts
ch. 11 Lecture Styles
ch. 12 Ways of Obtaining Feedback
ch. 13 Evaluation of Lectures
ch. 14 Overcoming Common Difficulties
ch. 15 Lectures for the Promotion of Thought
ch. 16 Lectures to Teach Attitudes
Part 4 Alternatives when Lecturing is Inadequate
ch. 17 The Lecture Method Alone is Rarely Adequate
ch. 18 Teaching Methods to Use with Lectures
ch. 19 Some Combinations of Teaching Methods
Part 5 Preparation for the use of Lectures
ch. 20 Thinking the Lecture Through
ch. 21 Writing the Notes
ch. 22 Lecturing for the First Time
ch. 23 Conclusion
Additional Info:
This innovative volume offers the first sustained examination of the myriad ways Asian American Studies is taught at the university level. Through this lens, this volume illuminates key debates in U.S. society about pedagogy, multiculturalism, diversity, racial and ethnic identities, and communities formed on these bases. Asian American Studies shares critical concerns with other innovative fields that query representation, positionality, voice, and authority in the classroom as well as ...
This innovative volume offers the first sustained examination of the myriad ways Asian American Studies is taught at the university level. Through this lens, this volume illuminates key debates in U.S. society about pedagogy, multiculturalism, diversity, racial and ethnic identities, and communities formed on these bases. Asian American Studies shares critical concerns with other innovative fields that query representation, positionality, voice, and authority in the classroom as well as ...
Additional Info:
This innovative volume offers the first sustained examination of the myriad ways Asian American Studies is taught at the university level. Through this lens, this volume illuminates key debates in U.S. society about pedagogy, multiculturalism, diversity, racial and ethnic identities, and communities formed on these bases. Asian American Studies shares critical concerns with other innovative fields that query representation, positionality, voice, and authority in the classroom as well as in the larger society. Acknowledging these issues, twenty-one distinguished contributors illustrate how disciplinary and interdisciplinary approaches to Asian American Studies can be utilized to make teaching and learning about diversity more effective. "Teaching Asian America" thus offers new and exciting insights about the state of ethnic studies and about the challenges of pluralism that face us as we move into the twenty-first century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction (Lane Ryo Hirabayashi)
ch. 2 Queer/Asian American/Canons (David L. Eng)
ch. 3 Teaching Asian American History (Gary Y. Okihiro)
ch. 4 "Just What Do I Think I'm Doing?" Enactments of Identity and Authority in the Asian American Literature Classroom (Patricia A. Sakurai)
ch. 5 The Case for Class: Introduction to the Political Economy of Asian American Communities in the San Francisco Bay Area (Ben Kobashigawa)
ch. 6 Critical Pedagogy in Asian American Studies: Reflections on an Experiment in Teaching (Keith Osajima)
ch. 7 Unity of Theory and Practice: Integrating Feminist Pedagogy Into Asian American Studies (Diane C. Fujino)
ch. 8 Contemporary Asian American Men's Issues (Jachinson W. Chan)
ch. 9 Teaching Against the Grain: Thoughts on Asian American Studies and "Nontraditional" Students (Ji-Song Ku)
ch. 10 Reflections on Diversity and Inclusion: South Asians and Asian American Studies (Madhulika S. Khandelwal)
ch. 11 A Contending Pedagogy: Asian American Studies as Extracurricular Praxis (Laura Hyun Yi Kang)
ch. 12 Reflections on Teaching about Asian American Communities (Timothy P. Fong)
ch. 13 Psychology and the Teaching of Asian American Studies (Ramsay Liem)
ch. 14 Beyond the Missionary Position: Reflections on Teaching Student Activism from the Bottom Up (Eric C. Wat)
ch. 15 Vietnamese American Studies: Notes toward a New Paradigm (Chung Hoang Chuong)
ch. 16 Empowering the Bayanihan Spirit: Teaching Filipina/o American Studies (Emily Porcincula Lawsin)
ch. 17 Building Community Spirit: A Writing Course on the Indian American Experience (Rosane Rocher)
ch. 18 Teaching the Asian American Experience through Film (Jun Xing)
ch. 19 Teaching Asian American Studies in Community Colleges (Susie Ling)
ch. 20 The Politics of Teaching Asian American Literature Amidst Middle-Class, Caucasian Students "East of California" (Sheng-mei Ma)
App.: Resources for Innovation/Excellence in Teaching: A Select, Annotated Bibliography (Malcolm Collier and Lane Ryo Hirabayashi)
Index
About the Contributors
This innovative volume offers the first sustained examination of the myriad ways Asian American Studies is taught at the university level. Through this lens, this volume illuminates key debates in U.S. society about pedagogy, multiculturalism, diversity, racial and ethnic identities, and communities formed on these bases. Asian American Studies shares critical concerns with other innovative fields that query representation, positionality, voice, and authority in the classroom as well as in the larger society. Acknowledging these issues, twenty-one distinguished contributors illustrate how disciplinary and interdisciplinary approaches to Asian American Studies can be utilized to make teaching and learning about diversity more effective. "Teaching Asian America" thus offers new and exciting insights about the state of ethnic studies and about the challenges of pluralism that face us as we move into the twenty-first century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction (Lane Ryo Hirabayashi)
ch. 2 Queer/Asian American/Canons (David L. Eng)
ch. 3 Teaching Asian American History (Gary Y. Okihiro)
ch. 4 "Just What Do I Think I'm Doing?" Enactments of Identity and Authority in the Asian American Literature Classroom (Patricia A. Sakurai)
ch. 5 The Case for Class: Introduction to the Political Economy of Asian American Communities in the San Francisco Bay Area (Ben Kobashigawa)
ch. 6 Critical Pedagogy in Asian American Studies: Reflections on an Experiment in Teaching (Keith Osajima)
ch. 7 Unity of Theory and Practice: Integrating Feminist Pedagogy Into Asian American Studies (Diane C. Fujino)
ch. 8 Contemporary Asian American Men's Issues (Jachinson W. Chan)
ch. 9 Teaching Against the Grain: Thoughts on Asian American Studies and "Nontraditional" Students (Ji-Song Ku)
ch. 10 Reflections on Diversity and Inclusion: South Asians and Asian American Studies (Madhulika S. Khandelwal)
ch. 11 A Contending Pedagogy: Asian American Studies as Extracurricular Praxis (Laura Hyun Yi Kang)
ch. 12 Reflections on Teaching about Asian American Communities (Timothy P. Fong)
ch. 13 Psychology and the Teaching of Asian American Studies (Ramsay Liem)
ch. 14 Beyond the Missionary Position: Reflections on Teaching Student Activism from the Bottom Up (Eric C. Wat)
ch. 15 Vietnamese American Studies: Notes toward a New Paradigm (Chung Hoang Chuong)
ch. 16 Empowering the Bayanihan Spirit: Teaching Filipina/o American Studies (Emily Porcincula Lawsin)
ch. 17 Building Community Spirit: A Writing Course on the Indian American Experience (Rosane Rocher)
ch. 18 Teaching the Asian American Experience through Film (Jun Xing)
ch. 19 Teaching Asian American Studies in Community Colleges (Susie Ling)
ch. 20 The Politics of Teaching Asian American Literature Amidst Middle-Class, Caucasian Students "East of California" (Sheng-mei Ma)
App.: Resources for Innovation/Excellence in Teaching: A Select, Annotated Bibliography (Malcolm Collier and Lane Ryo Hirabayashi)
Index
About the Contributors

Bright College Years: Inside the American Campus Today
Additional Info:
On one level, the world of higher education is still, as Matthews puts it, 'a chunk of the 20th century dropped live and squabbling on the threshold of the 21st.' But behind the stately trees and lovely towers a powerful hidden life has taken root, as academe is buffeted by the same economic and demographic forces that are drastically reshaping the rest of society. What's going on in there? ...
On one level, the world of higher education is still, as Matthews puts it, 'a chunk of the 20th century dropped live and squabbling on the threshold of the 21st.' But behind the stately trees and lovely towers a powerful hidden life has taken root, as academe is buffeted by the same economic and demographic forces that are drastically reshaping the rest of society. What's going on in there? ...
Additional Info:
On one level, the world of higher education is still, as Matthews puts it, 'a chunk of the 20th century dropped live and squabbling on the threshold of the 21st.' But behind the stately trees and lovely towers a powerful hidden life has taken root, as academe is buffeted by the same economic and demographic forces that are drastically reshaping the rest of society. What's going on in there? And while we're at it, what exactly, these days, is college for? Tracking and mapping the academic year, Matthews casts a searchlight in turn on those who learn, those who teach, and those who arrange, especially the makers and managers of money and image whose methods shape higher education more strongly every year. In the process, she goes behind the scenes at every type of school: enormous state universities like Texas or Arizona, where finding French class requires a map and a bus ticket; sleek country-club schools like Vanderbilt or USC, where student allowances can exceed faculty salaries; fiercely specialized colleges like Cal Tech, where students dream in computer languages; struggling trailer-house campuses like South Dakota's Sinte Gleska, the nation's first Native American university. Throughout, Matthews keeps in unsparing focus the conflicts between our competing images of what college is supposed to be: show business, rite of passage, profit machine, private planet, gateway to knowledge and power. Irreverent, engrossing, vastly entertaining, and intensely observed, Bright College Years is one veteran journalist's (and native daughter's) inside scoop on a beloved American institution in the grip of enormous change. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Summer - The Price of Passage
Fall - Dreaming in C
Fall Break - Through the Groves
Winter - Important Minds
Spring Break - Behind Closed Doors
Spring - The Imagekeepers
Summer - Eternity's Eye
On one level, the world of higher education is still, as Matthews puts it, 'a chunk of the 20th century dropped live and squabbling on the threshold of the 21st.' But behind the stately trees and lovely towers a powerful hidden life has taken root, as academe is buffeted by the same economic and demographic forces that are drastically reshaping the rest of society. What's going on in there? And while we're at it, what exactly, these days, is college for? Tracking and mapping the academic year, Matthews casts a searchlight in turn on those who learn, those who teach, and those who arrange, especially the makers and managers of money and image whose methods shape higher education more strongly every year. In the process, she goes behind the scenes at every type of school: enormous state universities like Texas or Arizona, where finding French class requires a map and a bus ticket; sleek country-club schools like Vanderbilt or USC, where student allowances can exceed faculty salaries; fiercely specialized colleges like Cal Tech, where students dream in computer languages; struggling trailer-house campuses like South Dakota's Sinte Gleska, the nation's first Native American university. Throughout, Matthews keeps in unsparing focus the conflicts between our competing images of what college is supposed to be: show business, rite of passage, profit machine, private planet, gateway to knowledge and power. Irreverent, engrossing, vastly entertaining, and intensely observed, Bright College Years is one veteran journalist's (and native daughter's) inside scoop on a beloved American institution in the grip of enormous change. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Summer - The Price of Passage
Fall - Dreaming in C
Fall Break - Through the Groves
Winter - Important Minds
Spring Break - Behind Closed Doors
Spring - The Imagekeepers
Summer - Eternity's Eye

The Multicultural Campus: Strategies for Transforming Higher Education
Additional Info:
The Multicultural Campus brings together administrators, faculty, and students to offer strategies that will alter the academic environment of the future. Hispanic, African, and Asian American educational leaders examine the obstacles they have faced, as minorities, climbing up the predominantly white career ladder in American universities. Firsthand accounts show how change on governance, executive, faculty, and curricula levels will help us better educate all students in our nation's growing pluralistic ...
The Multicultural Campus brings together administrators, faculty, and students to offer strategies that will alter the academic environment of the future. Hispanic, African, and Asian American educational leaders examine the obstacles they have faced, as minorities, climbing up the predominantly white career ladder in American universities. Firsthand accounts show how change on governance, executive, faculty, and curricula levels will help us better educate all students in our nation's growing pluralistic ...
Additional Info:
The Multicultural Campus brings together administrators, faculty, and students to offer strategies that will alter the academic environment of the future. Hispanic, African, and Asian American educational leaders examine the obstacles they have faced, as minorities, climbing up the predominantly white career ladder in American universities. Firsthand accounts show how change on governance, executive, faculty, and curricula levels will help us better educate all students in our nation's growing pluralistic society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I Introduction and Overview
Introduction: Presenting the Context
ch. 1 Future Strategies and Actions: Creating Multicultural Higher Education Campuses (Leonard A. Valverde)
Part II Administrators' Perspectives
ch. 2 Challenges and Opportunities for Leaders of Color (Chang-Lin Tien)
ch. 3 External Agents Fostering Multiculturalism (Howard L. Simmons)
ch. 4 Race and Ethnicity in Academia (Enrique (Henry) T. Trueba)
ch. 5 Campus Climate and Students of Color (Myrtis H. Powell)
Part III Faculty Perspectives
ch. 6 Career Patterns of People of Color in Academia (Flora Ida Ortiz)
ch. 7 Leading from the Margins in the Ivory Tower (A. Reynaldo Conteras
ch. 8 African American Women Faculty and Administrators: Surviving the Multiple Barriers of Discrimination (Vanessa Allen-Brown
Part IV Student Perspective
ch. 9 An African Student's View of Educational Leadership (Abayomi Adejokun)
About the Authors
Index
The Multicultural Campus brings together administrators, faculty, and students to offer strategies that will alter the academic environment of the future. Hispanic, African, and Asian American educational leaders examine the obstacles they have faced, as minorities, climbing up the predominantly white career ladder in American universities. Firsthand accounts show how change on governance, executive, faculty, and curricula levels will help us better educate all students in our nation's growing pluralistic society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I Introduction and Overview
Introduction: Presenting the Context
ch. 1 Future Strategies and Actions: Creating Multicultural Higher Education Campuses (Leonard A. Valverde)
Part II Administrators' Perspectives
ch. 2 Challenges and Opportunities for Leaders of Color (Chang-Lin Tien)
ch. 3 External Agents Fostering Multiculturalism (Howard L. Simmons)
ch. 4 Race and Ethnicity in Academia (Enrique (Henry) T. Trueba)
ch. 5 Campus Climate and Students of Color (Myrtis H. Powell)
Part III Faculty Perspectives
ch. 6 Career Patterns of People of Color in Academia (Flora Ida Ortiz)
ch. 7 Leading from the Margins in the Ivory Tower (A. Reynaldo Conteras
ch. 8 African American Women Faculty and Administrators: Surviving the Multiple Barriers of Discrimination (Vanessa Allen-Brown
Part IV Student Perspective
ch. 9 An African Student's View of Educational Leadership (Abayomi Adejokun)
About the Authors
Index


The Enneagram Intelligences: Understanding Personality for Effective Teaching and Learning
Additional Info:
First taught in the United States in 1971, the Enneagram is now used in counseling settings, corporations, university classrooms (including Stanford Business School) and other educational institutions. The Enneagram system is a model of human development which describes nine patterns of personality. Each type is distinct with its own point of view and focus of attention based on nine psychological strategies. Janet Levine has analyzed the system and refined it for ...
First taught in the United States in 1971, the Enneagram is now used in counseling settings, corporations, university classrooms (including Stanford Business School) and other educational institutions. The Enneagram system is a model of human development which describes nine patterns of personality. Each type is distinct with its own point of view and focus of attention based on nine psychological strategies. Janet Levine has analyzed the system and refined it for ...
Additional Info:
First taught in the United States in 1971, the Enneagram is now used in counseling settings, corporations, university classrooms (including Stanford Business School) and other educational institutions. The Enneagram system is a model of human development which describes nine patterns of personality. Each type is distinct with its own point of view and focus of attention based on nine psychological strategies. Janet Levine has analyzed the system and refined it for use by educators and students in the quest to facilitate teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Ch. 1 Background to the Enneagram System
Ch. 2 The Enneagram Triads Personality Indicator for Educators
Ch. 3 The Enneagram Intelligences In-depth
Enneatype Two: The Helper
Enneatype Three: The Performer
Enneatype Four: The Royal Family
Enneatype Five: The Observer
Enneatype Six: The Questioner
Enneatype Seven: The Optimist
Enneatype Eight: The Boss
Enneatype Nine: The Peacekeeper
Enneatype One: The Perfectionist
Ch. 4 Attention Practices
Ch. 5 The Enneagram and the MBTI
Ch. 6 The Enneagram System - A Lens for the 21st Century
First taught in the United States in 1971, the Enneagram is now used in counseling settings, corporations, university classrooms (including Stanford Business School) and other educational institutions. The Enneagram system is a model of human development which describes nine patterns of personality. Each type is distinct with its own point of view and focus of attention based on nine psychological strategies. Janet Levine has analyzed the system and refined it for use by educators and students in the quest to facilitate teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Ch. 1 Background to the Enneagram System
Ch. 2 The Enneagram Triads Personality Indicator for Educators
Ch. 3 The Enneagram Intelligences In-depth
Enneatype Two: The Helper
Enneatype Three: The Performer
Enneatype Four: The Royal Family
Enneatype Five: The Observer
Enneatype Six: The Questioner
Enneatype Seven: The Optimist
Enneatype Eight: The Boss
Enneatype Nine: The Peacekeeper
Enneatype One: The Perfectionist
Ch. 4 Attention Practices
Ch. 5 The Enneagram and the MBTI
Ch. 6 The Enneagram System - A Lens for the 21st Century

Addressing the Spiritual Dimensions of Adult Learning: What Educators Can Do
Additional Info:
In this issue, the authors argue that adult educators must find ways to add a spiritual dimension to their practice if they are to take a truly comprehensive approach to adult education, one that meets all of adult learners needs. They show how an integral part of adult education is helping learners discover a sense of meaning and purpose in their lives, a feeling of connection with something larger than ...
In this issue, the authors argue that adult educators must find ways to add a spiritual dimension to their practice if they are to take a truly comprehensive approach to adult education, one that meets all of adult learners needs. They show how an integral part of adult education is helping learners discover a sense of meaning and purpose in their lives, a feeling of connection with something larger than ...
Additional Info:
In this issue, the authors argue that adult educators must find ways to add a spiritual dimension to their practice if they are to take a truly comprehensive approach to adult education, one that meets all of adult learners needs. They show how an integral part of adult education is helping learners discover a sense of meaning and purpose in their lives, a feeling of connection with something larger than themselves. The contributors discuss how mentoring, self-directed learning, and dialogue can be used to promote spiritual development, and advocate the learning covenant as a way of formalizing the sanctity of the bond between learners and educators. They draw on examples from settings as varied as continuing professional education, community development, and health education to show how a spiritual dimension has been been successfully integrated into adult education programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 A Spirited Epistemology: Honoring the Adult Learner (Jane Vella)
ch. 2 Reckoning with the Spiritual Lives of Adult Educators (Linda J. Vogel)
ch. 3 Spiritual Dimensions of Informal Learning (Leona M. English)
ch. 4 The Learning Covenant (R.E.Y. Wickett)
ch. 5 Continuing Professional Education: A Spiritually Based Program (Lynda W. Miller )
ch. 6 Learning from Native Adult Education (Jeffrey A. Orr)
ch. 7 Community Development and Adult Education: Locating Practice in Its Roots (Wilf E. Bean)
ch. 8 The Spiritual Dimensions of Lay Ministry Programs (Catherine P. Zeph)
ch. 9 Controversy, Questions, and Suggestions for Further Reading (Marie A. Gillen, Leona M. English)
In this issue, the authors argue that adult educators must find ways to add a spiritual dimension to their practice if they are to take a truly comprehensive approach to adult education, one that meets all of adult learners needs. They show how an integral part of adult education is helping learners discover a sense of meaning and purpose in their lives, a feeling of connection with something larger than themselves. The contributors discuss how mentoring, self-directed learning, and dialogue can be used to promote spiritual development, and advocate the learning covenant as a way of formalizing the sanctity of the bond between learners and educators. They draw on examples from settings as varied as continuing professional education, community development, and health education to show how a spiritual dimension has been been successfully integrated into adult education programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 A Spirited Epistemology: Honoring the Adult Learner (Jane Vella)
ch. 2 Reckoning with the Spiritual Lives of Adult Educators (Linda J. Vogel)
ch. 3 Spiritual Dimensions of Informal Learning (Leona M. English)
ch. 4 The Learning Covenant (R.E.Y. Wickett)
ch. 5 Continuing Professional Education: A Spiritually Based Program (Lynda W. Miller )
ch. 6 Learning from Native Adult Education (Jeffrey A. Orr)
ch. 7 Community Development and Adult Education: Locating Practice in Its Roots (Wilf E. Bean)
ch. 8 The Spiritual Dimensions of Lay Ministry Programs (Catherine P. Zeph)
ch. 9 Controversy, Questions, and Suggestions for Further Reading (Marie A. Gillen, Leona M. English)

Strategies for Energizing Large Classes: From Small Groups to Learning Communities
Additional Info:
The large introductory lecture classes common on most campuses pose a particular challenge to instructors who want to encourage the active student involvement that is a vital part of the learning process. (From the Publisher)
The large introductory lecture classes common on most campuses pose a particular challenge to instructors who want to encourage the active student involvement that is a vital part of the learning process. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The large introductory lecture classes common on most campuses pose a particular challenge to instructors who want to encourage the active student involvement that is a vital part of the learning process. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. The Argument for Making Large Classes Seem Small. (James L. Cooper)
ch. 2. Getting Started: Informal Small-Group Strategies in Large Classes. (James L. Cooper, Pamela Robinson)
ch. 3. Going Deeper: Formal Small-Group Learning in Large Classes. (Karl A. Smith)
ch. 4. Restructuring Large Classes to Create Communities of Learners. (Jean MacGregor )
ch. 5. Implementing Small-Group Instructions: Insights from Successful Practitioners. (James L. Cooper, Jean MacGregor, Karl A Smith, Pamela Robinson)
ch. 6. Making Small-Group Learning and Learning Communities a Widespread Reality. (Karl A. Smith, Jean MacGregor)
The large introductory lecture classes common on most campuses pose a particular challenge to instructors who want to encourage the active student involvement that is a vital part of the learning process. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. The Argument for Making Large Classes Seem Small. (James L. Cooper)
ch. 2. Getting Started: Informal Small-Group Strategies in Large Classes. (James L. Cooper, Pamela Robinson)
ch. 3. Going Deeper: Formal Small-Group Learning in Large Classes. (Karl A. Smith)
ch. 4. Restructuring Large Classes to Create Communities of Learners. (Jean MacGregor )
ch. 5. Implementing Small-Group Instructions: Insights from Successful Practitioners. (James L. Cooper, Jean MacGregor, Karl A Smith, Pamela Robinson)
ch. 6. Making Small-Group Learning and Learning Communities a Widespread Reality. (Karl A. Smith, Jean MacGregor)


Teaching to Promote Intellectual and Personal Maturity: Incorporating Students' Worldviews and Identities into the Learning Process
Additional Info:
Revealing that it is not what students think, but rather how they think that is important to the learning process, the contributors to this issue explore the full-range of cognitive and emotional dimensions that influence how individuals learn—and they describe teaching practices for building on these to help students develop intellectually and personally. They examine how students' unique understanding of their individual experience, themselves, and the ways knowledge is ...
Revealing that it is not what students think, but rather how they think that is important to the learning process, the contributors to this issue explore the full-range of cognitive and emotional dimensions that influence how individuals learn—and they describe teaching practices for building on these to help students develop intellectually and personally. They examine how students' unique understanding of their individual experience, themselves, and the ways knowledge is ...
Additional Info:
Revealing that it is not what students think, but rather how they think that is important to the learning process, the contributors to this issue explore the full-range of cognitive and emotional dimensions that influence how individuals learn—and they describe teaching practices for building on these to help students develop intellectually and personally. They examine how students' unique understanding of their individual experience, themselves, and the ways knowledge is constructed can mediate learning. They look at the influence of gender, race, ethnicity, and sexual orientation in shaping the learning process and examine how to create a culturally responsive learning environment for both students and faculty. The issue also explores the role of service learning in developing a strong sense of the caring self, examines the opportunities and challenges of expressing cultural identity in the learning community, and offers various strategies for linking learning goals to students' views of knowledge. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Meaning-Making in the Learning and Teaching Process (Michael Ignelzi)
ch. 2 Learning to Make Reflective Judgments (Patricia M. King)
ch. 3 Toward a More Connected Vision of Higher Education (Blythe McVicker Clinchy)
ch. 4 Democratic Citizenship and Service Learning: Advancing the Caring Self (Robert A. Rhoads)
ch. 5 Creating a Culturally Responsive Learning Environment for African American Students (Mary F. Howard-Hamilton)
ch. 6 Identity Development of High-Ability Black Collegians (Sharon Fries-Britt)
ch. 7 Expressing Cultural Identity in the Learning Community: Opportunities and Challenges (Anna M. Ortiz)
ch. 8 Creating a Positive Learning Environment for Gay, Lesbian, and Bisexual Students (Nancy J. Evans)
ch. 9 Teaching to Promote Holistic Learning and Development (Marcia B. Baxter Magolda)
Index
Revealing that it is not what students think, but rather how they think that is important to the learning process, the contributors to this issue explore the full-range of cognitive and emotional dimensions that influence how individuals learn—and they describe teaching practices for building on these to help students develop intellectually and personally. They examine how students' unique understanding of their individual experience, themselves, and the ways knowledge is constructed can mediate learning. They look at the influence of gender, race, ethnicity, and sexual orientation in shaping the learning process and examine how to create a culturally responsive learning environment for both students and faculty. The issue also explores the role of service learning in developing a strong sense of the caring self, examines the opportunities and challenges of expressing cultural identity in the learning community, and offers various strategies for linking learning goals to students' views of knowledge. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Meaning-Making in the Learning and Teaching Process (Michael Ignelzi)
ch. 2 Learning to Make Reflective Judgments (Patricia M. King)
ch. 3 Toward a More Connected Vision of Higher Education (Blythe McVicker Clinchy)
ch. 4 Democratic Citizenship and Service Learning: Advancing the Caring Self (Robert A. Rhoads)
ch. 5 Creating a Culturally Responsive Learning Environment for African American Students (Mary F. Howard-Hamilton)
ch. 6 Identity Development of High-Ability Black Collegians (Sharon Fries-Britt)
ch. 7 Expressing Cultural Identity in the Learning Community: Opportunities and Challenges (Anna M. Ortiz)
ch. 8 Creating a Positive Learning Environment for Gay, Lesbian, and Bisexual Students (Nancy J. Evans)
ch. 9 Teaching to Promote Holistic Learning and Development (Marcia B. Baxter Magolda)
Index

Methodism and Education 1849-1902: J.H. Rigg, Romanism, and Wesleyan Schools
Additional Info:
This thorough history of the Wesleyan Methodist educational efforts in Victorian England discusses the influence of Dr. James Harrison Rigg, Principal of Westminster Training College, who dominated his church and who made friendships with senior politicians of the day. The book also Looks in depth at the influence of anti-Catholicism, which was rampant in the Methodist church of the era. (From the Publisher)
This thorough history of the Wesleyan Methodist educational efforts in Victorian England discusses the influence of Dr. James Harrison Rigg, Principal of Westminster Training College, who dominated his church and who made friendships with senior politicians of the day. The book also Looks in depth at the influence of anti-Catholicism, which was rampant in the Methodist church of the era. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This thorough history of the Wesleyan Methodist educational efforts in Victorian England discusses the influence of Dr. James Harrison Rigg, Principal of Westminster Training College, who dominated his church and who made friendships with senior politicians of the day. The book also Looks in depth at the influence of anti-Catholicism, which was rampant in the Methodist church of the era. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Abbreviations
ch. 1 Introduction: Methodism and Education before 1859
ch. 2 The Ascendancy of Dr. J. H. Rigg
ch. 3 The Wesleyans and the 1870 Education Act
ch. 4 The Wesleyan Church in the School Board Era, 1871-1875
ch. 5 The Wesleyans and the Sandon Education Act, 1874-1876
ch. 6 The Wesleyan Educational Decline, 1877-1885
ch. 7 The Wesleyans and the Cross Commission, 1885-1891
ch. 8 The Free Education Issue, 1884-1891
ch. 9 Dr. Rigg's Last Years of Influence, 1892-1902
ch. 10 What Manner of Man was James Harrison Rigg?
App. A Number of Wesleyan Schools and Scholars
App. B Statistics of the Committee of Council on Education
App. C Rate of Annual Grant per Scholar in Average Attendance
App. D J. H. Rigg's Placements
App. E Presidents of the Methodist Conference
Bibliography
Index
This thorough history of the Wesleyan Methodist educational efforts in Victorian England discusses the influence of Dr. James Harrison Rigg, Principal of Westminster Training College, who dominated his church and who made friendships with senior politicians of the day. The book also Looks in depth at the influence of anti-Catholicism, which was rampant in the Methodist church of the era. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Abbreviations
ch. 1 Introduction: Methodism and Education before 1859
ch. 2 The Ascendancy of Dr. J. H. Rigg
ch. 3 The Wesleyans and the 1870 Education Act
ch. 4 The Wesleyan Church in the School Board Era, 1871-1875
ch. 5 The Wesleyans and the Sandon Education Act, 1874-1876
ch. 6 The Wesleyan Educational Decline, 1877-1885
ch. 7 The Wesleyans and the Cross Commission, 1885-1891
ch. 8 The Free Education Issue, 1884-1891
ch. 9 Dr. Rigg's Last Years of Influence, 1892-1902
ch. 10 What Manner of Man was James Harrison Rigg?
App. A Number of Wesleyan Schools and Scholars
App. B Statistics of the Committee of Council on Education
App. C Rate of Annual Grant per Scholar in Average Attendance
App. D J. H. Rigg's Placements
App. E Presidents of the Methodist Conference
Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
Deborah Core offers practical guidance for beginning seminary students who feel overwhelmed and under-prepared to write the number and quality of papers their courses require.
The book begins with reflections on writing as a sacred action, then addresses such practical matters as choosing and researching a topic; outlining, drafting, and polishing a paper; and using the proper format for footnotes and bibliography. Also included are sample papers in ...
Deborah Core offers practical guidance for beginning seminary students who feel overwhelmed and under-prepared to write the number and quality of papers their courses require.
The book begins with reflections on writing as a sacred action, then addresses such practical matters as choosing and researching a topic; outlining, drafting, and polishing a paper; and using the proper format for footnotes and bibliography. Also included are sample papers in ...
Additional Info:
Deborah Core offers practical guidance for beginning seminary students who feel overwhelmed and under-prepared to write the number and quality of papers their courses require.
The book begins with reflections on writing as a sacred action, then addresses such practical matters as choosing and researching a topic; outlining, drafting, and polishing a paper; and using the proper format for footnotes and bibliography. Also included are sample papers in MLA and Chicago styles and an overview of grammar and usage. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Abbreviations
Preface
ch. 1. Why Write?
ch. 2. Beginning and Beyond
ch. 3. Reading to Write
ch. 4. Seminary Research Papers
ch. 5. A Brief Manual of Usage
Appendix 1 Using Inclusive Language
Appendix 2 Writing Essay Exams
Deborah Core offers practical guidance for beginning seminary students who feel overwhelmed and under-prepared to write the number and quality of papers their courses require.
The book begins with reflections on writing as a sacred action, then addresses such practical matters as choosing and researching a topic; outlining, drafting, and polishing a paper; and using the proper format for footnotes and bibliography. Also included are sample papers in MLA and Chicago styles and an overview of grammar and usage. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Abbreviations
Preface
ch. 1. Why Write?
ch. 2. Beginning and Beyond
ch. 3. Reading to Write
ch. 4. Seminary Research Papers
ch. 5. A Brief Manual of Usage
Appendix 1 Using Inclusive Language
Appendix 2 Writing Essay Exams

Mending the Cracks in the Ivory Tower: Strategies for Conflict Management in Higher Education
Additional Info:
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "What's It All About? Conflict in Academia" (Susan A Holton)
ch. 2 "Administration in an Age of Conflict" (Gerald Graff)
ch. 3 "The Janus Syndrome: Managing Conflict from the Middle" (Walter H. Gmelch)
ch. 4 "Chairs as Department Managers: Working with Support Staff" (Mary Lou Higgerson)
ch. 5 "Spanning the Abyss: Managing Conflict Between Deans and Chairs"(Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 "The Cutting Edge: The Dean and Conflict" (Nancy L. Sorenson)
ch. 7 "And Never the Twain Shall Meet: Administrator-Faculty Conflict"(Judith A. Sturnick)
ch. 8 "Managing Conflict on the Front Lines: Lessons from the Journals of a Former Dean and Provost" (Clara M. Lovett)
ch. 9 "Student Affairs and Academic Affairs: Partners in Conflict Resolution" (Lynn Willett)
ch. 10 "Can We Agree To Disagree? Faculty-Faculty Conflict" (Cynthia Berryman-Fink)
ch. 11 "Views from Different Sides of the Desk: Conflict Between Faculty and Students" (John W. "Sam" Keltner)
ch. 12 "Student-Student Conflict: Whose Problem Is It Anyway?" (Janet Rifkin)
ch. 13 "Conflict Resolution in the Academy: A Modest Proposal" (Joel M. Douglas)
ch. 14 "Academic Mortar To Mend the Cracks: The Holton Model for Conflict Management" (Susan A Holton)
Appendix: "Conflict Management Programs for Administrators"
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "What's It All About? Conflict in Academia" (Susan A Holton)
ch. 2 "Administration in an Age of Conflict" (Gerald Graff)
ch. 3 "The Janus Syndrome: Managing Conflict from the Middle" (Walter H. Gmelch)
ch. 4 "Chairs as Department Managers: Working with Support Staff" (Mary Lou Higgerson)
ch. 5 "Spanning the Abyss: Managing Conflict Between Deans and Chairs"(Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 "The Cutting Edge: The Dean and Conflict" (Nancy L. Sorenson)
ch. 7 "And Never the Twain Shall Meet: Administrator-Faculty Conflict"(Judith A. Sturnick)
ch. 8 "Managing Conflict on the Front Lines: Lessons from the Journals of a Former Dean and Provost" (Clara M. Lovett)
ch. 9 "Student Affairs and Academic Affairs: Partners in Conflict Resolution" (Lynn Willett)
ch. 10 "Can We Agree To Disagree? Faculty-Faculty Conflict" (Cynthia Berryman-Fink)
ch. 11 "Views from Different Sides of the Desk: Conflict Between Faculty and Students" (John W. "Sam" Keltner)
ch. 12 "Student-Student Conflict: Whose Problem Is It Anyway?" (Janet Rifkin)
ch. 13 "Conflict Resolution in the Academy: A Modest Proposal" (Joel M. Douglas)
ch. 14 "Academic Mortar To Mend the Cracks: The Holton Model for Conflict Management" (Susan A Holton)
Appendix: "Conflict Management Programs for Administrators"

Academic Leadership: A Practical Guide to Chairing the Department
Additional Info:
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written ...
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written ...
Additional Info:
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written in plain, easy-to-understand language. It deals with everyday duties from attracting and hiring the most qualified people to dismissing those who don't work out, and from encouraging good teaching and research to dealing with difficult faculty members. The book also includes helpful summaries, checklists, tables and sample forms. Academic Leadership: A Practical Guide to Chairing the Department is a must-have resource book for the newly appointed department head that wants to avoid the trial-and-error management method. Dr. Leaming has been a department head at five universities and a dean at two. And he has laid out a roadmap that will come in handy continually for even the experienced person who still has a distance to travel down the administrative highway. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword.
Preface.
Part I: Leadership.
1. Advice for New Chairpersons.
2. Seven Habits of Successful Chairpersons.
3. Providing Leadership.
4. Duties and Responsibilities of Chairpersons.
5. Timesaving Tips for Effective Chairpersons.
6. Communicating.
Part II: Department.
7. Developing a Departmental Vision.
8. Improving Your Department.
9. Developing Outcome Assessment Programs.
10. Managing Change.
11. Building and Maintaining Morale.
12. Managing Conflict.
13. Working With Constituents.
14. Working With Your Dean.
15. Dealing With Curriculum Matters.
16. Conducting Effective Meetings.
17. Budget and Financial Management.
Part III: Legal Issues.
18. Avoiding Legal Problems.
19. Understanding Sexual Harassment and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Part IV: Faculty.
20. Recruiting and Hiring Faculty.
21. Retaining, Mentoring, and Terminating Faculty.
22. Strategies for Faculty Development.
23. Evaluating Faculty Performance.
24. Handling Promotion and Tenure Issues.
25. Dealing With Chronic Low Achievers.
26. Dealing With Difficult Faculty.
Part V: Students.
27. Recruiting and Retaining Students.
28. Dealing With Emotional and Disrespectful Student Behavior.
Part VI: Looking Ahead.
29. Moving Up the Administrative Ladder.
30. Where Do You Go From Here?
Appendixes.
Index.
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written in plain, easy-to-understand language. It deals with everyday duties from attracting and hiring the most qualified people to dismissing those who don't work out, and from encouraging good teaching and research to dealing with difficult faculty members. The book also includes helpful summaries, checklists, tables and sample forms. Academic Leadership: A Practical Guide to Chairing the Department is a must-have resource book for the newly appointed department head that wants to avoid the trial-and-error management method. Dr. Leaming has been a department head at five universities and a dean at two. And he has laid out a roadmap that will come in handy continually for even the experienced person who still has a distance to travel down the administrative highway. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword.
Preface.
Part I: Leadership.
1. Advice for New Chairpersons.
2. Seven Habits of Successful Chairpersons.
3. Providing Leadership.
4. Duties and Responsibilities of Chairpersons.
5. Timesaving Tips for Effective Chairpersons.
6. Communicating.
Part II: Department.
7. Developing a Departmental Vision.
8. Improving Your Department.
9. Developing Outcome Assessment Programs.
10. Managing Change.
11. Building and Maintaining Morale.
12. Managing Conflict.
13. Working With Constituents.
14. Working With Your Dean.
15. Dealing With Curriculum Matters.
16. Conducting Effective Meetings.
17. Budget and Financial Management.
Part III: Legal Issues.
18. Avoiding Legal Problems.
19. Understanding Sexual Harassment and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Part IV: Faculty.
20. Recruiting and Hiring Faculty.
21. Retaining, Mentoring, and Terminating Faculty.
22. Strategies for Faculty Development.
23. Evaluating Faculty Performance.
24. Handling Promotion and Tenure Issues.
25. Dealing With Chronic Low Achievers.
26. Dealing With Difficult Faculty.
Part V: Students.
27. Recruiting and Retaining Students.
28. Dealing With Emotional and Disrespectful Student Behavior.
Part VI: Looking Ahead.
29. Moving Up the Administrative Ladder.
30. Where Do You Go From Here?
Appendixes.
Index.

The Professional Development of Graduate Teaching Assistants
Additional Info:
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing ...
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing ...
Additional Info:
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing an effective program. It is an ideal resource for all those who are interested in developing or improving TA training programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Preparing graduate students to teach: Past, present, and future (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 2 The role of centralized programs in preparing graduate students to teach (Jacqueline Mintz)
ch. 3 The disciplinary/departmental context of TA training (Shirley Ronkowski)
ch. 4 Thinking developmentally about TAs (Jody D. Nyquist)
ch. 5 Creating a foundation for instructional decisions (Marilla D. Svinicki)
ch. 6 Strategies for responding to diversity in the classroom (Mathew L. Ouellett and Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 7 Getting started with TA training on your campus (Frederic Stout)
ch. 8 Teaching teaching: The importance of courses on teaching in TA training programs (Michele Marincovich)
ch. 9 International TA training and beyond (Ellen Sarkisian & Virginia Maurer)
ch. 10 Helping TAs improve undergraduate writing (Jack Prostko)
ch. 11 Technology and TA training (Michael J. Albright)
ch. 12 Evaluating TA teaching (Beverly Black and Matt Kaplan)
ch. 13 Teaching portfolios as a tool for TA development (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 14 Evaluating TA programs (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 15 TA certificate programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Patricia H. Featherstone and Howard C. Johnson)
ch. 16 Preparing future faculty programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Jerry G. Gaff, and Anne Pruitt-Logan
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing an effective program. It is an ideal resource for all those who are interested in developing or improving TA training programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Preparing graduate students to teach: Past, present, and future (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 2 The role of centralized programs in preparing graduate students to teach (Jacqueline Mintz)
ch. 3 The disciplinary/departmental context of TA training (Shirley Ronkowski)
ch. 4 Thinking developmentally about TAs (Jody D. Nyquist)
ch. 5 Creating a foundation for instructional decisions (Marilla D. Svinicki)
ch. 6 Strategies for responding to diversity in the classroom (Mathew L. Ouellett and Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 7 Getting started with TA training on your campus (Frederic Stout)
ch. 8 Teaching teaching: The importance of courses on teaching in TA training programs (Michele Marincovich)
ch. 9 International TA training and beyond (Ellen Sarkisian & Virginia Maurer)
ch. 10 Helping TAs improve undergraduate writing (Jack Prostko)
ch. 11 Technology and TA training (Michael J. Albright)
ch. 12 Evaluating TA teaching (Beverly Black and Matt Kaplan)
ch. 13 Teaching portfolios as a tool for TA development (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 14 Evaluating TA programs (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 15 TA certificate programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Patricia H. Featherstone and Howard C. Johnson)
ch. 16 Preparing future faculty programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Jerry G. Gaff, and Anne Pruitt-Logan
Additional Info:
Learning from Our Lives is the first professional guide to using educational biography with adult learners. It offers anecdotes and narratives, interpretations and analyses, and numerous examples of different biographical approaches. Written for practitioners who conduct adult educational programs in formal or informal settings, this book can help teachers, trainers, career counselors, and human resource professionals to empower learners in assuming greater responsibility for their education and development. (From the ...
Learning from Our Lives is the first professional guide to using educational biography with adult learners. It offers anecdotes and narratives, interpretations and analyses, and numerous examples of different biographical approaches. Written for practitioners who conduct adult educational programs in formal or informal settings, this book can help teachers, trainers, career counselors, and human resource professionals to empower learners in assuming greater responsibility for their education and development. (From the ...
Additional Info:
Learning from Our Lives is the first professional guide to using educational biography with adult learners. It offers anecdotes and narratives, interpretations and analyses, and numerous examples of different biographical approaches. Written for practitioners who conduct adult educational programs in formal or informal settings, this book can help teachers, trainers, career counselors, and human resource professionals to empower learners in assuming greater responsibility for their education and development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Learning as an Active Search for Meaning
ch. 2 Understanding Biographical Approaches to Learning
ch. 3 From Life History to Educational Biography
ch. 4 How Adults Educate Themselves
ch. 5 Exploring Adults' Ways of Thinking
ch. 6 Learners' Needs, Motivations, and Dreams
ch. 7 Helping Learners Put Words to Their Lives
ch. 8 Giving Evaluation Another Meaning
ch. 9 Creating Conditions for Successful Learning in Adult Life
References
Index
Learning from Our Lives is the first professional guide to using educational biography with adult learners. It offers anecdotes and narratives, interpretations and analyses, and numerous examples of different biographical approaches. Written for practitioners who conduct adult educational programs in formal or informal settings, this book can help teachers, trainers, career counselors, and human resource professionals to empower learners in assuming greater responsibility for their education and development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Learning as an Active Search for Meaning
ch. 2 Understanding Biographical Approaches to Learning
ch. 3 From Life History to Educational Biography
ch. 4 How Adults Educate Themselves
ch. 5 Exploring Adults' Ways of Thinking
ch. 6 Learners' Needs, Motivations, and Dreams
ch. 7 Helping Learners Put Words to Their Lives
ch. 8 Giving Evaluation Another Meaning
ch. 9 Creating Conditions for Successful Learning in Adult Life
References
Index

Free Speech in the College Community
Additional Info:
Illustrates problems with free speech encountered by today's college and university administrators with fictional cases based on real life incidents involving inflammatory speakers, hate e-mail, art, and the Internet, and suggests guidelines. (From the Publisher)
Illustrates problems with free speech encountered by today's college and university administrators with fictional cases based on real life incidents involving inflammatory speakers, hate e-mail, art, and the Internet, and suggests guidelines. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Illustrates problems with free speech encountered by today's college and university administrators with fictional cases based on real life incidents involving inflammatory speakers, hate e-mail, art, and the Internet, and suggests guidelines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
I Who Needs a Speech Code?
II The Outspoken University Professor
III Free Speech and New Technologies
IV The Constitution and the Off-Campus Speaker
V Gays, Greeks, and Others
VI Free Press on the College Campus
VII Artistic Freedom on Campus
VIII Academic Research and Academic Freedom
IX Religious Speech on the Public Campus
X Free Speech on the Private Campus
XI Postscript
Sources and References
Index
Illustrates problems with free speech encountered by today's college and university administrators with fictional cases based on real life incidents involving inflammatory speakers, hate e-mail, art, and the Internet, and suggests guidelines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
I Who Needs a Speech Code?
II The Outspoken University Professor
III Free Speech and New Technologies
IV The Constitution and the Off-Campus Speaker
V Gays, Greeks, and Others
VI Free Press on the College Campus
VII Artistic Freedom on Campus
VIII Academic Research and Academic Freedom
IX Religious Speech on the Public Campus
X Free Speech on the Private Campus
XI Postscript
Sources and References
Index


Let Ministry Teach: A Guide to Theological Reflection
Additional Info:
Drawing upon 17 years of experience in theology, Dr. Kinast describes a step-by-step approach to help students and experienced ministers learn what their ministers teaches. Through examples, practical suggestions, and principles grounded in process theology, readers of this book explore the full range of resources needed for meaningful theological reflection. (From the Publisher)
Drawing upon 17 years of experience in theology, Dr. Kinast describes a step-by-step approach to help students and experienced ministers learn what their ministers teaches. Through examples, practical suggestions, and principles grounded in process theology, readers of this book explore the full range of resources needed for meaningful theological reflection. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Drawing upon 17 years of experience in theology, Dr. Kinast describes a step-by-step approach to help students and experienced ministers learn what their ministers teaches. Through examples, practical suggestions, and principles grounded in process theology, readers of this book explore the full range of resources needed for meaningful theological reflection. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Where's the Theology? Ministerial Experience and Theological Reflection
ch. 2 What Am I Looking For? Describing Experiences for Theological Reflection
ch. 3 How Did I Get Here? Entering and Experience
ch. 4 That Reminds Me: Theological Reflection as Illustration
ch. 5 Now I Begin to See: Theological Reflection as Application
ch. 6 Is That What You Mean? Theological Reflection as Interpretation
ch. 7 Now What Do I Do? Enacting the Learning
Bibliography
Drawing upon 17 years of experience in theology, Dr. Kinast describes a step-by-step approach to help students and experienced ministers learn what their ministers teaches. Through examples, practical suggestions, and principles grounded in process theology, readers of this book explore the full range of resources needed for meaningful theological reflection. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Where's the Theology? Ministerial Experience and Theological Reflection
ch. 2 What Am I Looking For? Describing Experiences for Theological Reflection
ch. 3 How Did I Get Here? Entering and Experience
ch. 4 That Reminds Me: Theological Reflection as Illustration
ch. 5 Now I Begin to See: Theological Reflection as Application
ch. 6 Is That What You Mean? Theological Reflection as Interpretation
ch. 7 Now What Do I Do? Enacting the Learning
Bibliography

Religious Education and the Brain
Additional Info:
What if what we know about our brains and the way humans think was applied to the way we nurture each other in faith? Would we do it differently? What if we let cognitive science inform our educational strategies and the ways we help each other form our spirits? What if we began to believe that brain research and scientific investigation could reveal something of our spiritual nature and destiny?" ...
What if what we know about our brains and the way humans think was applied to the way we nurture each other in faith? Would we do it differently? What if we let cognitive science inform our educational strategies and the ways we help each other form our spirits? What if we began to believe that brain research and scientific investigation could reveal something of our spiritual nature and destiny?" ...
Additional Info:
What if what we know about our brains and the way humans think was applied to the way we nurture each other in faith? Would we do it differently? What if we let cognitive science inform our educational strategies and the ways we help each other form our spirits? What if we began to believe that brain research and scientific investigation could reveal something of our spiritual nature and destiny?" These questions are at the heart of Jerry Larsen's fascinating and sure-to-be-talked-about book. Writing in a clear, accessible style, Larsen offers a model and methods for joining the discoveries of brain science with the work of religious education. He touches on the discoveries about the left and right brain thinking styles, multiple intelligence, memory mechanisms, meaning-making strategies and on the nature of consciousness. And he reflects on the belief that we can do religious education better if we take cues from what we know about the God-given network between our ears. This book is unique. There are no other books on the market on the subject of religious education and the brain. Enhanced with practical charts and illustrations, and with great ecumenical appeal, it will make useful reading for religious educators, religious professionals, and teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Lessons of the Brain
ch. 2 The Meaning Factory
ch. 3 The Role of the Religious Educator/Factory Consultant
ch. 4 Religious Education as Model Building
ch. 5 Perception: Doors to the Factory
ch. 6 A Pedagogy of Perception
ch. 7 Metaphor and Understanding
ch. 8 I Remember
ch. 9 Driving Memory into Being
ch. 10 The Sevenfold Path to Religious Intelligence
ch. 11 Pilgrim Mind
ch. 12 The Emergence of Consciousness
Epilogue
What if what we know about our brains and the way humans think was applied to the way we nurture each other in faith? Would we do it differently? What if we let cognitive science inform our educational strategies and the ways we help each other form our spirits? What if we began to believe that brain research and scientific investigation could reveal something of our spiritual nature and destiny?" These questions are at the heart of Jerry Larsen's fascinating and sure-to-be-talked-about book. Writing in a clear, accessible style, Larsen offers a model and methods for joining the discoveries of brain science with the work of religious education. He touches on the discoveries about the left and right brain thinking styles, multiple intelligence, memory mechanisms, meaning-making strategies and on the nature of consciousness. And he reflects on the belief that we can do religious education better if we take cues from what we know about the God-given network between our ears. This book is unique. There are no other books on the market on the subject of religious education and the brain. Enhanced with practical charts and illustrations, and with great ecumenical appeal, it will make useful reading for religious educators, religious professionals, and teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Lessons of the Brain
ch. 2 The Meaning Factory
ch. 3 The Role of the Religious Educator/Factory Consultant
ch. 4 Religious Education as Model Building
ch. 5 Perception: Doors to the Factory
ch. 6 A Pedagogy of Perception
ch. 7 Metaphor and Understanding
ch. 8 I Remember
ch. 9 Driving Memory into Being
ch. 10 The Sevenfold Path to Religious Intelligence
ch. 11 Pilgrim Mind
ch. 12 The Emergence of Consciousness
Epilogue


The Art of Teaching Adults: How to Become an Exceptional Instructor and Facilitator
Additional Info:
The Art brims with practical tips on a range of need-to-know topics, including how to plan sessions; set up a class room; facilitate group work; deliver lively lectures; ask questions effectively; generate participation; assign projects; design tests and quizzes; use visual aids; assess courses; and more. (From the Publisher)
The Art brims with practical tips on a range of need-to-know topics, including how to plan sessions; set up a class room; facilitate group work; deliver lively lectures; ask questions effectively; generate participation; assign projects; design tests and quizzes; use visual aids; assess courses; and more. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The Art brims with practical tips on a range of need-to-know topics, including how to plan sessions; set up a class room; facilitate group work; deliver lively lectures; ask questions effectively; generate participation; assign projects; design tests and quizzes; use visual aids; assess courses; and more. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Planning a session
Declaring objectives
Setting up the room
Getting packed
Using icebreakers
Contracting for learning
Working in groups
Delivering lively lectures
Asking beautiful questions
Flexing learning styles
Observing group behavior
Rallying learning circles
Brewing brainstorms
Directing role-plays
Teaching by demonstration
Generating participation
Studying cases
Reading together
Inviting experts
learning outside the classroom
Assigning projects
Using journals
Processing feedback
Learning autobiographically
Designing tests and quizzes
Projecting overhead
Presenting with PowerPoint
Flipping charts
Showing videos
Assessing the course
Glossary
Notes
Index
The Art brims with practical tips on a range of need-to-know topics, including how to plan sessions; set up a class room; facilitate group work; deliver lively lectures; ask questions effectively; generate participation; assign projects; design tests and quizzes; use visual aids; assess courses; and more. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Planning a session
Declaring objectives
Setting up the room
Getting packed
Using icebreakers
Contracting for learning
Working in groups
Delivering lively lectures
Asking beautiful questions
Flexing learning styles
Observing group behavior
Rallying learning circles
Brewing brainstorms
Directing role-plays
Teaching by demonstration
Generating participation
Studying cases
Reading together
Inviting experts
learning outside the classroom
Assigning projects
Using journals
Processing feedback
Learning autobiographically
Designing tests and quizzes
Projecting overhead
Presenting with PowerPoint
Flipping charts
Showing videos
Assessing the course
Glossary
Notes
Index


Teaching for Justice: Concepts and Models for Service-Learning in Peace Studies
Additional Info:
Tenth in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, this book shows how both peace studies and service-learning have been developing new ideas of how social learning takes place as a community process in conflict situations and what the dynamics of peace building are. The process has created a new niche in academia for preparing students to become social change agents. The enthusiasm of the contributors in this book gives the ...
Tenth in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, this book shows how both peace studies and service-learning have been developing new ideas of how social learning takes place as a community process in conflict situations and what the dynamics of peace building are. The process has created a new niche in academia for preparing students to become social change agents. The enthusiasm of the contributors in this book gives the ...
Additional Info:
Tenth in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, this book shows how both peace studies and service-learning have been developing new ideas of how social learning takes place as a community process in conflict situations and what the dynamics of peace building are. The process has created a new niche in academia for preparing students to become social change agents. The enthusiasm of the contributors in this book gives the reader a new vision of what is possible on college campuses in community-based peace and service-learning at a time when there is a critical need for peace-building skills. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 "Conceptual Essays": "Moral Dimensions of Peace Studies: A Case for Service-Learning" (Kathleen Maas Weigert)
"Peace Studies, Pedagogy, and Social Change" (Robin J. Crews)
"Service-Learning as Education: Learning from the Experience of Experience" (Michael Schratz and Rob Walker)
Part 2 "Service-Learning in Peace Studies Programs": "Study, Act, Reflect, and Analyze: Service-Learning and the Program on Justice and Peace at Georgetown University" (Sam Marullo, Mark Lance, and Henry Schwarz)
"Justice and Peace Studies at the University of St. Thomas" (David Whitten Smith and Michael Haasl)
"Student Contributions to Public Life: Peace and Justice Studies at the University of San Francisco" (Anne R. Roschelle, Jennifer Turpin, and Robert Elias)
"Peace Building through Foreign Study in Northern Ireland: The Earlham College Example" (Anthony Bing)
"The International and National Voluntary Service Training Program (INVST) at the University of Colorado at Boulder" (James R. Scarritt and Seana Lowe)
"The Institute for Conflict Analysis and Resolution's Modest Experiment in Service-Learning" (Frank Blechman)
"Peaceful Intent: Integrating Service-Learning within a Master's in International Service at Roehampton Institute London" (Christopher Walsh and Andrew Garner)
Part 3 "Service-Learning Courses in Peace Studies": "Learning about Peace through Service: Introduction to Peace and Conflict Studies at the University of Colorado at Boulder" (Robin J. Crews)
"Learning about Peace: Five Ways Service-Learning Can Strengthen the Curriculum" (Martha C. Merrill)
"Hunger for Justice: Service-Learning in Feminist/Liberation Theology" (Michele James-Deramo)
"Service-Learning in Methods of Peacemaking at Earlham College" (Howard Richards and Mary Schwendener-Holt)
"Teaching Attitudes of Cultural Understanding through Service-Learning" (Mary B. Kimsey)
"A Mini-Internship in an Introductory Peace Studies Course: Contributions to Service Learning" (John MacDougall)
An annotated bibliography of Internet and World Wide Web resources and national and international organizations is appended.
(All papers include references.)
Tenth in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, this book shows how both peace studies and service-learning have been developing new ideas of how social learning takes place as a community process in conflict situations and what the dynamics of peace building are. The process has created a new niche in academia for preparing students to become social change agents. The enthusiasm of the contributors in this book gives the reader a new vision of what is possible on college campuses in community-based peace and service-learning at a time when there is a critical need for peace-building skills. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 "Conceptual Essays": "Moral Dimensions of Peace Studies: A Case for Service-Learning" (Kathleen Maas Weigert)
"Peace Studies, Pedagogy, and Social Change" (Robin J. Crews)
"Service-Learning as Education: Learning from the Experience of Experience" (Michael Schratz and Rob Walker)
Part 2 "Service-Learning in Peace Studies Programs": "Study, Act, Reflect, and Analyze: Service-Learning and the Program on Justice and Peace at Georgetown University" (Sam Marullo, Mark Lance, and Henry Schwarz)
"Justice and Peace Studies at the University of St. Thomas" (David Whitten Smith and Michael Haasl)
"Student Contributions to Public Life: Peace and Justice Studies at the University of San Francisco" (Anne R. Roschelle, Jennifer Turpin, and Robert Elias)
"Peace Building through Foreign Study in Northern Ireland: The Earlham College Example" (Anthony Bing)
"The International and National Voluntary Service Training Program (INVST) at the University of Colorado at Boulder" (James R. Scarritt and Seana Lowe)
"The Institute for Conflict Analysis and Resolution's Modest Experiment in Service-Learning" (Frank Blechman)
"Peaceful Intent: Integrating Service-Learning within a Master's in International Service at Roehampton Institute London" (Christopher Walsh and Andrew Garner)
Part 3 "Service-Learning Courses in Peace Studies": "Learning about Peace through Service: Introduction to Peace and Conflict Studies at the University of Colorado at Boulder" (Robin J. Crews)
"Learning about Peace: Five Ways Service-Learning Can Strengthen the Curriculum" (Martha C. Merrill)
"Hunger for Justice: Service-Learning in Feminist/Liberation Theology" (Michele James-Deramo)
"Service-Learning in Methods of Peacemaking at Earlham College" (Howard Richards and Mary Schwendener-Holt)
"Teaching Attitudes of Cultural Understanding through Service-Learning" (Mary B. Kimsey)
"A Mini-Internship in an Introductory Peace Studies Course: Contributions to Service Learning" (John MacDougall)
An annotated bibliography of Internet and World Wide Web resources and national and international organizations is appended.
(All papers include references.)

Teaching and Learning on the Edge of the Millennium: Building on What We Have Learned
Additional Info:
In honor of the new century and the twentieth anniversary of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, this issue reviews the past and current research on teaching, learning, and motivation, and envisions where the field is headed in the next century. (From the Publisher)
In honor of the new century and the twentieth anniversary of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, this issue reviews the past and current research on teaching, learning, and motivation, and envisions where the field is headed in the next century. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In honor of the new century and the twentieth anniversary of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, this issue reviews the past and current research on teaching, learning, and motivation, and envisions where the field is headed in the next century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Theory and Research on Learning and Teaching.
ch. 1. New Directions in Learning and Motivation (Marilla D. Svinicki).
ch. 2. New Directions for Theory and Research on Teaching: A Review of the Past Twenty Years (Michael Theall ).
Part Two: A Reprise of Popular topics: Where Are They Now?.
ch. 3. Group-Based Learning (Russell Y. Garth).
ch. 4. Can We Teach Without Communicating? (Jean M. Civikly-Powell).
ch. 5. Teaching for Critical Thinking: Helping College Students Develop the Skills and Dispositions of a Critical Thinker (Diane F. Halpern).
ch. 6. Development and Adaptations of the Seven Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education (Arthur W. Chickering, Zelda F. Gamson).
ch. 7. Taking Diversity Seriously: New Developments in Teaching for Diversity (Laura L. B. Border ).
ch. 8. Teaching in the Information Age: A New Look (Michael J. Albright).
Part Three: And Now What?.
ch. 9. New Directions for New Directions? (Marilla D. Svinicki).
In honor of the new century and the twentieth anniversary of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, this issue reviews the past and current research on teaching, learning, and motivation, and envisions where the field is headed in the next century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Theory and Research on Learning and Teaching.
ch. 1. New Directions in Learning and Motivation (Marilla D. Svinicki).
ch. 2. New Directions for Theory and Research on Teaching: A Review of the Past Twenty Years (Michael Theall ).
Part Two: A Reprise of Popular topics: Where Are They Now?.
ch. 3. Group-Based Learning (Russell Y. Garth).
ch. 4. Can We Teach Without Communicating? (Jean M. Civikly-Powell).
ch. 5. Teaching for Critical Thinking: Helping College Students Develop the Skills and Dispositions of a Critical Thinker (Diane F. Halpern).
ch. 6. Development and Adaptations of the Seven Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education (Arthur W. Chickering, Zelda F. Gamson).
ch. 7. Taking Diversity Seriously: New Developments in Teaching for Diversity (Laura L. B. Border ).
ch. 8. Teaching in the Information Age: A New Look (Michael J. Albright).
Part Three: And Now What?.
ch. 9. New Directions for New Directions? (Marilla D. Svinicki).
Additional Info:
The postmodern condition, in which instrumentalism finally usurps all other considerations, has produced a kind of intellectual paralysis in the world of education. The authors of this book show how such postmodernist thinkers as Derrida, Foucault, and Lyotard illuminate puzzling aspects of education, arguing that educational theory is currently at an impasse. They argue that we need these new and disturbing ideas in order to "think again" fruitfully and creatively ...
The postmodern condition, in which instrumentalism finally usurps all other considerations, has produced a kind of intellectual paralysis in the world of education. The authors of this book show how such postmodernist thinkers as Derrida, Foucault, and Lyotard illuminate puzzling aspects of education, arguing that educational theory is currently at an impasse. They argue that we need these new and disturbing ideas in order to "think again" fruitfully and creatively ...
Additional Info:
The postmodern condition, in which instrumentalism finally usurps all other considerations, has produced a kind of intellectual paralysis in the world of education. The authors of this book show how such postmodernist thinkers as Derrida, Foucault, and Lyotard illuminate puzzling aspects of education, arguing that educational theory is currently at an impasse. They argue that we need these new and disturbing ideas in order to "think again" fruitfully and creatively about education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Acknowledgments
Retrospect
ch. 1 Poststructuralism and the Spectre of Relativism
ch. 2 Foundations Demolished, Sovereigns Deposed: The New Politics of Knowledge
ch. 3 The Ascription of Identity
ch. 4 Literacy Under the Microscope
ch. 5 Shifting, Shifted, ... Shattered: The Ethical Self
ch. 6 Giving Someone a Lesson
ch. 7 Telling Stories Out of School
ch. 8 The Responsibility of Desire
ch. 9 Folly, Words, Wigs, Rags
ch. 10 Learning by Heart
ch. 11 The Learning Pharmacy
ch. 12 Reading Education
Prospect
References
Author Index
Subject Index
The postmodern condition, in which instrumentalism finally usurps all other considerations, has produced a kind of intellectual paralysis in the world of education. The authors of this book show how such postmodernist thinkers as Derrida, Foucault, and Lyotard illuminate puzzling aspects of education, arguing that educational theory is currently at an impasse. They argue that we need these new and disturbing ideas in order to "think again" fruitfully and creatively about education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Acknowledgments
Retrospect
ch. 1 Poststructuralism and the Spectre of Relativism
ch. 2 Foundations Demolished, Sovereigns Deposed: The New Politics of Knowledge
ch. 3 The Ascription of Identity
ch. 4 Literacy Under the Microscope
ch. 5 Shifting, Shifted, ... Shattered: The Ethical Self
ch. 6 Giving Someone a Lesson
ch. 7 Telling Stories Out of School
ch. 8 The Responsibility of Desire
ch. 9 Folly, Words, Wigs, Rags
ch. 10 Learning by Heart
ch. 11 The Learning Pharmacy
ch. 12 Reading Education
Prospect
References
Author Index
Subject Index

Teaching Large Classes Well
Additional Info:
Until now, though seasoned practitioners know of the problems and have implemented solutions, a practical compendium of advice on teaching and learning in large classes has not appeared in the literature. This volume is an attempt to remedy that omission. It is intended to provide faculty who are teaching a large course for the first time practical advice that will ease the transition from small to large classes. It is ...
Until now, though seasoned practitioners know of the problems and have implemented solutions, a practical compendium of advice on teaching and learning in large classes has not appeared in the literature. This volume is an attempt to remedy that omission. It is intended to provide faculty who are teaching a large course for the first time practical advice that will ease the transition from small to large classes. It is ...
Additional Info:
Until now, though seasoned practitioners know of the problems and have implemented solutions, a practical compendium of advice on teaching and learning in large classes has not appeared in the literature. This volume is an attempt to remedy that omission. It is intended to provide faculty who are teaching a large course for the first time practical advice that will ease the transition from small to large classes. It is the sort of volume every department head should hand out along with teaching assignments for large sections and pass on to colleagues who labor hard and conscientiously in these difficult instructional situations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Large classes and learning (Christopher Knapper)
ch. 2 Students' perceptions of large classes (Donald H. Wulff, Jody D. Nyquist, Robert D. Abbott)
ch. 3 Six Keys to effective instruction in large classes: Advice from a practitioner (J. Richard Aronson)
ch. 4 Dealing with details in a large class (Robert P. Brooks)
ch. 5 Student involvement: Active learning in large classes (Peter J. Frederick)
ch. 6 Lecturing: Essential communication strategies (Richard L. Weaver II, Howard W. Cotrell )
ch. 7 Giving students feedback (Joseph Lowman)
ch. 8 Acquiring student feedback that improves instruction (Harry G. Murray)
ch. 9 A bibliography of ideas for practitioners (Maryellen Gleason Weimer, Mary-Margaret Kerns)
Until now, though seasoned practitioners know of the problems and have implemented solutions, a practical compendium of advice on teaching and learning in large classes has not appeared in the literature. This volume is an attempt to remedy that omission. It is intended to provide faculty who are teaching a large course for the first time practical advice that will ease the transition from small to large classes. It is the sort of volume every department head should hand out along with teaching assignments for large sections and pass on to colleagues who labor hard and conscientiously in these difficult instructional situations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Large classes and learning (Christopher Knapper)
ch. 2 Students' perceptions of large classes (Donald H. Wulff, Jody D. Nyquist, Robert D. Abbott)
ch. 3 Six Keys to effective instruction in large classes: Advice from a practitioner (J. Richard Aronson)
ch. 4 Dealing with details in a large class (Robert P. Brooks)
ch. 5 Student involvement: Active learning in large classes (Peter J. Frederick)
ch. 6 Lecturing: Essential communication strategies (Richard L. Weaver II, Howard W. Cotrell )
ch. 7 Giving students feedback (Joseph Lowman)
ch. 8 Acquiring student feedback that improves instruction (Harry G. Murray)
ch. 9 A bibliography of ideas for practitioners (Maryellen Gleason Weimer, Mary-Margaret Kerns)

Between Church and State
Additional Info:
At the end of the twentieth century, the ongoing battle between religion and public education is once again a burning issue in the United States. In this book, James Fraser shows that though these battles have been going on for as long as there have been public schools, there has never been any consensus about the proper relationship between religion and public education. Looking at the most difficult question of ...
At the end of the twentieth century, the ongoing battle between religion and public education is once again a burning issue in the United States. In this book, James Fraser shows that though these battles have been going on for as long as there have been public schools, there has never been any consensus about the proper relationship between religion and public education. Looking at the most difficult question of ...
Additional Info:
At the end of the twentieth century, the ongoing battle between religion and public education is once again a burning issue in the United States. In this book, James Fraser shows that though these battles have been going on for as long as there have been public schools, there has never been any consensus about the proper relationship between religion and public education. Looking at the most difficult question of how private issues of faith can be reconciled with the very public nature of schooling, James Fraser paints a picture of our multicultural society that takes our relationship with God into account. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 From Holy Commonwealth to the Strange Compromise of 1789
ch. 2 Creating an American Common School and a Common Faith: Horace Mann and the Protestant Public Schools, 1789-1860
ch. 3 Who Defines What Is Common? Roman Catholics and the Common School Movement, 1801-1892
ch. 4 Literacy in the African American Community: Church and School in Slave and Free Communities, 1802-1902
ch. 5 Native American Religion, Christian Missionaries, and Government Schools, 1819-1926
ch. 6 Protestant, Catholic, Jew: Immigration and Nativism from the Blaine Amendment to the Scopes Trial, 1875-1925
ch. 7 Prayer, Bible Reading, and Federal Money: The Expanding Role of Congress and the Supreme Court, 1925-1968
ch. 8 Culture Wars, Creationism, and the Reagan Revolution, 1968-1990
ch. 9 Changing School Boards, Curriculum, and the Constitution, 1990-
ch. 10 What's Next? Prayers, Vouchers, and Creationism: The Battle for the Schools of the Twenty-First Century
Notes
For Further Reading
Index
At the end of the twentieth century, the ongoing battle between religion and public education is once again a burning issue in the United States. In this book, James Fraser shows that though these battles have been going on for as long as there have been public schools, there has never been any consensus about the proper relationship between religion and public education. Looking at the most difficult question of how private issues of faith can be reconciled with the very public nature of schooling, James Fraser paints a picture of our multicultural society that takes our relationship with God into account. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 From Holy Commonwealth to the Strange Compromise of 1789
ch. 2 Creating an American Common School and a Common Faith: Horace Mann and the Protestant Public Schools, 1789-1860
ch. 3 Who Defines What Is Common? Roman Catholics and the Common School Movement, 1801-1892
ch. 4 Literacy in the African American Community: Church and School in Slave and Free Communities, 1802-1902
ch. 5 Native American Religion, Christian Missionaries, and Government Schools, 1819-1926
ch. 6 Protestant, Catholic, Jew: Immigration and Nativism from the Blaine Amendment to the Scopes Trial, 1875-1925
ch. 7 Prayer, Bible Reading, and Federal Money: The Expanding Role of Congress and the Supreme Court, 1925-1968
ch. 8 Culture Wars, Creationism, and the Reagan Revolution, 1968-1990
ch. 9 Changing School Boards, Curriculum, and the Constitution, 1990-
ch. 10 What's Next? Prayers, Vouchers, and Creationism: The Battle for the Schools of the Twenty-First Century
Notes
For Further Reading
Index
Additional Info:
The dawning of the second millennium finds many Christian colleges and universities in a search for identity. Grappling with the often confused and misunderstood topic of academic freedom is essential to defining this identity. This new book by a widely respected practitioner offers the most articulate and informed discussion of academic freedom available. Anthony Diekema, who has spent the past forty years in higher education, provides a practical perspective on ...
The dawning of the second millennium finds many Christian colleges and universities in a search for identity. Grappling with the often confused and misunderstood topic of academic freedom is essential to defining this identity. This new book by a widely respected practitioner offers the most articulate and informed discussion of academic freedom available. Anthony Diekema, who has spent the past forty years in higher education, provides a practical perspective on ...
Additional Info:
The dawning of the second millennium finds many Christian colleges and universities in a search for identity. Grappling with the often confused and misunderstood topic of academic freedom is essential to defining this identity. This new book by a widely respected practitioner offers the most articulate and informed discussion of academic freedom available. Anthony Diekema, who has spent the past forty years in higher education, provides a practical perspective on the much-maligned topic of academic freedom. The volume offers reflection on the extensive scholarly literature on academic freedom against the backdrop of personal experience. In the course of the book Diekema develops a sound working definition of the concept of academic freedom, assesses the threats it faces, acknowledges the significance of worldview in its implementation, explores the policy implications for its protection and promotion in Christian colleges, and provides some practical advice to those who are called to address the subject of academic freedom in their own institutions. As one might expect from a college president on a subject most often addressed by faculty—and among them usually by those who have been the “target” of actual academic freedom cases—this book is neither a totally sympathetic nor a thoroughly intellectual essay. Hoping to incite as well as to inform, Diekema, an unabashed defender of academic freedom, seeks to prescribe some movement in an academy that has lost its way toward an ethos of freedom. Critical yet constructive and hopeful, this volume is must reading for college administrators, faculty members, boards of trustees, students, and influential constituents of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 The Search for Definition
ch. 3 Threats to Academic Freedom
Ideological Imperialism and Dogmatism
Political Correctness and Intolerance of Religion
Prior Restraint and Censorship
The "Chilling Effect" and Self-Censorship
Governmental and Institutional Influence
Toward Vigilance Against the Threats
ch. 4 Academic Freedom in the Context of Worldview
Worldview and Enlightenment Objectivity
Academic Freedom and Christian Worldview
Academic Freedom: Means or End?
Academic Freedom as Christian Freedom
Personal and Corporate Academic Freedom
ch. 5 Policy Development in the Christian College: Modest Proposal
Definitions of Academic Freedom
Academic Freedom and Faculty Tenure
A Socratic Covenant
Academic Freedom and Christian Scholarship
Academic Freedom: College and Church
Academic Freedom and Freedom of Speech
Protection and Promotion of Academic Freedom
ch. 6 Reflections:Toward an Ethos of Freedom
Appendix
An Expanded Statement of the Mission of Calvin College
Bibliography and Selected Reading List
Index
The dawning of the second millennium finds many Christian colleges and universities in a search for identity. Grappling with the often confused and misunderstood topic of academic freedom is essential to defining this identity. This new book by a widely respected practitioner offers the most articulate and informed discussion of academic freedom available. Anthony Diekema, who has spent the past forty years in higher education, provides a practical perspective on the much-maligned topic of academic freedom. The volume offers reflection on the extensive scholarly literature on academic freedom against the backdrop of personal experience. In the course of the book Diekema develops a sound working definition of the concept of academic freedom, assesses the threats it faces, acknowledges the significance of worldview in its implementation, explores the policy implications for its protection and promotion in Christian colleges, and provides some practical advice to those who are called to address the subject of academic freedom in their own institutions. As one might expect from a college president on a subject most often addressed by faculty—and among them usually by those who have been the “target” of actual academic freedom cases—this book is neither a totally sympathetic nor a thoroughly intellectual essay. Hoping to incite as well as to inform, Diekema, an unabashed defender of academic freedom, seeks to prescribe some movement in an academy that has lost its way toward an ethos of freedom. Critical yet constructive and hopeful, this volume is must reading for college administrators, faculty members, boards of trustees, students, and influential constituents of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 The Search for Definition
ch. 3 Threats to Academic Freedom
Ideological Imperialism and Dogmatism
Political Correctness and Intolerance of Religion
Prior Restraint and Censorship
The "Chilling Effect" and Self-Censorship
Governmental and Institutional Influence
Toward Vigilance Against the Threats
ch. 4 Academic Freedom in the Context of Worldview
Worldview and Enlightenment Objectivity
Academic Freedom and Christian Worldview
Academic Freedom: Means or End?
Academic Freedom as Christian Freedom
Personal and Corporate Academic Freedom
ch. 5 Policy Development in the Christian College: Modest Proposal
Definitions of Academic Freedom
Academic Freedom and Faculty Tenure
A Socratic Covenant
Academic Freedom and Christian Scholarship
Academic Freedom: College and Church
Academic Freedom and Freedom of Speech
Protection and Promotion of Academic Freedom
ch. 6 Reflections:Toward an Ethos of Freedom
Appendix
An Expanded Statement of the Mission of Calvin College
Bibliography and Selected Reading List
Index


The Courage to Teach: A Guide for Reflection and Renewal
Additional Info:
This guide will help teachers, individually and in groups, reflect on their teaching and renew their sense of vocation by exploring the inner landscape of their lives along Palmer's three dimensions--intellectual, emotional, and spiritual. The guide will raise questions, examine ideas and images, and suggest practices that emerge from the many insights in The Courage to Teach. (From the Publisher)
This guide will help teachers, individually and in groups, reflect on their teaching and renew their sense of vocation by exploring the inner landscape of their lives along Palmer's three dimensions--intellectual, emotional, and spiritual. The guide will raise questions, examine ideas and images, and suggest practices that emerge from the many insights in The Courage to Teach. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This guide will help teachers, individually and in groups, reflect on their teaching and renew their sense of vocation by exploring the inner landscape of their lives along Palmer's three dimensions--intellectual, emotional, and spiritual. The guide will raise questions, examine ideas and images, and suggest practices that emerge from the many insights in The Courage to Teach. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preparing for A Process of Reflection
Individual Study
Group Study* Leadership and Membership * Physical Space * Intellectual Space * Emotional Space * Spiritual
A Word of Encouragement
Questions and Activities for Each Chapter
The Heart of a Teacher: Identity and Integrity in Teaching
A Culture of Fear: Education and the Disconnected Life
The Hidden Wholeness: Paradox in Teaching and Learning
Knowing in Community: Joined by the Grace of Great Things
Teaching in Community: A Subject-Centered Education
Learning in Community: The Conversation of Colleagues
Divided No More: Teaching from a Heart of Hope
Appendix A: The Clearness Committee: A Communal Approach to Discernment
Appendix B: About the Center for Teacher Formation
Appendix C: About Parker J. Palmer
This guide will help teachers, individually and in groups, reflect on their teaching and renew their sense of vocation by exploring the inner landscape of their lives along Palmer's three dimensions--intellectual, emotional, and spiritual. The guide will raise questions, examine ideas and images, and suggest practices that emerge from the many insights in The Courage to Teach. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preparing for A Process of Reflection
Individual Study
Group Study* Leadership and Membership * Physical Space * Intellectual Space * Emotional Space * Spiritual
A Word of Encouragement
Questions and Activities for Each Chapter
The Heart of a Teacher: Identity and Integrity in Teaching
A Culture of Fear: Education and the Disconnected Life
The Hidden Wholeness: Paradox in Teaching and Learning
Knowing in Community: Joined by the Grace of Great Things
Teaching in Community: A Subject-Centered Education
Learning in Community: The Conversation of Colleagues
Divided No More: Teaching from a Heart of Hope
Appendix A: The Clearness Committee: A Communal Approach to Discernment
Appendix B: About the Center for Teacher Formation
Appendix C: About Parker J. Palmer


Using Student Teams in the Classroom: A Faculty Guide
Additional Info:
Teamwork builds cooperation, problem solving, active learning, and responsibility; such skills are increasingly important in both the classroom and in the workplace. For faculty who want to actively engage students with both the material and one another by using teamwork, this book answers many questions including:
• What happens when one student dominates the group?
• What do we do about students who sit back and are passive or resistant?<...
Teamwork builds cooperation, problem solving, active learning, and responsibility; such skills are increasingly important in both the classroom and in the workplace. For faculty who want to actively engage students with both the material and one another by using teamwork, this book answers many questions including:
• What happens when one student dominates the group?
• What do we do about students who sit back and are passive or resistant?<...
Additional Info:
Teamwork builds cooperation, problem solving, active learning, and responsibility; such skills are increasingly important in both the classroom and in the workplace. For faculty who want to actively engage students with both the material and one another by using teamwork, this book answers many questions including:
• What happens when one student dominates the group?
• What do we do about students who sit back and are passive or resistant?
• How can tasks be designed to elicit full participation and engagement of every student in the group?
• How do we evaluate group work?
The examples in this book are drawn from a wide variety of fields, including architecture, biology, ceramics, engineering, and English. The range of imaginative strategies—all of which include students working in groups—is evidence of the wealth of ways in which cooperative learning can be incorporated in college classrooms. The authors marry diverse examples and practical applications with solid explanations of the caveats of cooperative learning and a deep respect for how such pedagogical changes will challenge long-held beliefs and practices. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 and Part 2:
ch. 1 "Teamwork Theory and Discussion"
ch. 2 "Technology and Teamwork"
ch. 3 "Exercise for Students: How Do I Learn Bet?"
ch. 4 "Guidelines for Student Teams"
ch. 5 "Group Exercises"
ch. 6 "Managing Conflict"
ch. 7 "Team Evaluation"
ch. 8 "Top-Notch Tips for Team Learning"
ch. 9 "Enhancing Performance in Small Groups"
ch. 10 "Spectators and Gladiators"
ch. 11 "Betty Miles's Worst Nightmare: A Cooperative Learning Dilemma."
Part 3 contains 28 activities from Syracuse University
Teamwork builds cooperation, problem solving, active learning, and responsibility; such skills are increasingly important in both the classroom and in the workplace. For faculty who want to actively engage students with both the material and one another by using teamwork, this book answers many questions including:
• What happens when one student dominates the group?
• What do we do about students who sit back and are passive or resistant?
• How can tasks be designed to elicit full participation and engagement of every student in the group?
• How do we evaluate group work?
The examples in this book are drawn from a wide variety of fields, including architecture, biology, ceramics, engineering, and English. The range of imaginative strategies—all of which include students working in groups—is evidence of the wealth of ways in which cooperative learning can be incorporated in college classrooms. The authors marry diverse examples and practical applications with solid explanations of the caveats of cooperative learning and a deep respect for how such pedagogical changes will challenge long-held beliefs and practices. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part 1 and Part 2:
ch. 1 "Teamwork Theory and Discussion"
ch. 2 "Technology and Teamwork"
ch. 3 "Exercise for Students: How Do I Learn Bet?"
ch. 4 "Guidelines for Student Teams"
ch. 5 "Group Exercises"
ch. 6 "Managing Conflict"
ch. 7 "Team Evaluation"
ch. 8 "Top-Notch Tips for Team Learning"
ch. 9 "Enhancing Performance in Small Groups"
ch. 10 "Spectators and Gladiators"
ch. 11 "Betty Miles's Worst Nightmare: A Cooperative Learning Dilemma."
Part 3 contains 28 activities from Syracuse University
Additional Info:
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make ...
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make ...
Additional Info:
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make extensive use of real-life situations; and provide generic examples of letters, checklists, and orientations that can be adapted to individual contexts.
This book provides the tools chairs need to adapt habit and intuition into effective management practices. The advice will help department chairs achieve the mission and objective of their own units, as well as their colleges and campuses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Organizing the search for a new faculty member
ch. 2 Negotiating the job offer
ch. 3 Providing information before and upon arrival
ch. 4 Addressing professional/institutional questions
ch. 5 Planning an effective departmental orientation
ch. 6 Orienting new faculty to teaching
ch. 7 Addressing service concerns
ch. 8 Developing full-year orientation programs
ch. 9 Creating mentoring relationships
ch. 10 Demystifying the promotion and tenure process
ch. 11 Developing productive researchers and effective teachers
ch. 12 Monitoring service obligations
ch. 13 Explaining evaluation procedures
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make extensive use of real-life situations; and provide generic examples of letters, checklists, and orientations that can be adapted to individual contexts.
This book provides the tools chairs need to adapt habit and intuition into effective management practices. The advice will help department chairs achieve the mission and objective of their own units, as well as their colleges and campuses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Organizing the search for a new faculty member
ch. 2 Negotiating the job offer
ch. 3 Providing information before and upon arrival
ch. 4 Addressing professional/institutional questions
ch. 5 Planning an effective departmental orientation
ch. 6 Orienting new faculty to teaching
ch. 7 Addressing service concerns
ch. 8 Developing full-year orientation programs
ch. 9 Creating mentoring relationships
ch. 10 Demystifying the promotion and tenure process
ch. 11 Developing productive researchers and effective teachers
ch. 12 Monitoring service obligations
ch. 13 Explaining evaluation procedures


Leading Academic Change: Essential Roles for Department Chairs
Additional Info:
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, ...
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, ...
Additional Info:
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, faculty reward systems, and post-tenure review. They offer effective models to help department chairs and administrators work through the change process, including recommendations based on real-world experiences. They also integrate the latest research with examples of best practices into a readable, accessible format. Whether you are a department chair, administrator, or a faculty member aspiring to improve your department, Leading Academic Change is the expert's guide to mobilizing faculty energy towards academic success. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Questions and Activities for Each Chapter
A Teamwork Approach to Change in the Academic Department (A. Lucas)
A Collaborative Model for Leading Academic Change (A. Lucas)
Handling Resistance to Change (S. Cheldelin)
Transforming Departments into Productive Learning Communities (T. Angelo)
The Collaborative Role of the Chair in Departmental Change
The Departmental Statement on Promotion and Tenure: A Key to Successful Leadership (R. Diamond)
Post-Tenure Review (C. Licata)
Strengthening the Departmental Voice in the Faculty Reward System (H. Altman)
Leading Innovative Change in Curriculum and Teaching
Monitoring and Improving Educational Quality in the Academic Department (L. Gardiner)
Service Learning and the Engaged Department: A Strategy with Many Uses (E. Zlotkowski)
Giving Faculty Ownership of Technological Change in the Department (A. Bates)
Leading Curriculum Renewal (A. Ferren & K. Mussell)
The Academy as Learning Community: Contradiction in Terms or Realizable Future? (P. Senge)
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, faculty reward systems, and post-tenure review. They offer effective models to help department chairs and administrators work through the change process, including recommendations based on real-world experiences. They also integrate the latest research with examples of best practices into a readable, accessible format. Whether you are a department chair, administrator, or a faculty member aspiring to improve your department, Leading Academic Change is the expert's guide to mobilizing faculty energy towards academic success. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Questions and Activities for Each Chapter
A Teamwork Approach to Change in the Academic Department (A. Lucas)
A Collaborative Model for Leading Academic Change (A. Lucas)
Handling Resistance to Change (S. Cheldelin)
Transforming Departments into Productive Learning Communities (T. Angelo)
The Collaborative Role of the Chair in Departmental Change
The Departmental Statement on Promotion and Tenure: A Key to Successful Leadership (R. Diamond)
Post-Tenure Review (C. Licata)
Strengthening the Departmental Voice in the Faculty Reward System (H. Altman)
Leading Innovative Change in Curriculum and Teaching
Monitoring and Improving Educational Quality in the Academic Department (L. Gardiner)
Service Learning and the Engaged Department: A Strategy with Many Uses (E. Zlotkowski)
Giving Faculty Ownership of Technological Change in the Department (A. Bates)
Leading Curriculum Renewal (A. Ferren & K. Mussell)
The Academy as Learning Community: Contradiction in Terms or Realizable Future? (P. Senge)

Education, Religion, and the Common Good: Advancing a Distinctly American Conversation about Religion's Role in Our Shared Life
Additional Info:
The preeminent authority on religion in America advances an important public dialogue on the proper role of religion in educating and forming the next generation within a pluralist society. (From the Publisher)
The preeminent authority on religion in America advances an important public dialogue on the proper role of religion in educating and forming the next generation within a pluralist society. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The preeminent authority on religion in America advances an important public dialogue on the proper role of religion in educating and forming the next generation within a pluralist society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Why Read This Book?
Just What Are We Talking About, Anyway?
Why This Civil Conversation Is Urgent.
A Historical Map of the Present Situation.
Religion and Education: The Pitfalls of Engaging a Complex Issue.
Why Religion Belongs in Publicly Funded Primary and Secondary Education
The Religious Schooling Response.
Public Universities and Graduate Education.
Religion and Higher Education: A Specific AgAnda for Advancing the Conversation.
After Listening, a Time to Act.
Resources.
Notes.
The Author
. About the Public Religion Project.
Index.
The preeminent authority on religion in America advances an important public dialogue on the proper role of religion in educating and forming the next generation within a pluralist society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Why Read This Book?
Just What Are We Talking About, Anyway?
Why This Civil Conversation Is Urgent.
A Historical Map of the Present Situation.
Religion and Education: The Pitfalls of Engaging a Complex Issue.
Why Religion Belongs in Publicly Funded Primary and Secondary Education
The Religious Schooling Response.
Public Universities and Graduate Education.
Religion and Higher Education: A Specific AgAnda for Advancing the Conversation.
After Listening, a Time to Act.
Resources.
Notes.
The Author
. About the Public Religion Project.
Index.
Additional Info:
In Taking Learning to Task, Vella draws from current theory and practice to explore the meaning and power of learning tasks. To illustrate this unique approach, she provides seven steps to planning learning-centered courses, four types of learning tasks, a checklist of principles and practices, critical questions for instructional design, key components for evaluation, and other invaluable tools." "Taking Learning to Task is a hands-on, practical guide to designing effective ...
In Taking Learning to Task, Vella draws from current theory and practice to explore the meaning and power of learning tasks. To illustrate this unique approach, she provides seven steps to planning learning-centered courses, four types of learning tasks, a checklist of principles and practices, critical questions for instructional design, key components for evaluation, and other invaluable tools." "Taking Learning to Task is a hands-on, practical guide to designing effective ...
Additional Info:
In Taking Learning to Task, Vella draws from current theory and practice to explore the meaning and power of learning tasks. To illustrate this unique approach, she provides seven steps to planning learning-centered courses, four types of learning tasks, a checklist of principles and practices, critical questions for instructional design, key components for evaluation, and other invaluable tools." "Taking Learning to Task is a hands-on, practical guide to designing effective learning tasks for diverse learners and diverse content. Teachers, trainers, and all types of instructors will find a wealth of advice for refining their day-to-day practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Learning Tasks: Assumptions and Definition.
ch. 2. Comparing Teaching Tasks and Learning Tasks.
ch. 3. Learning Tasks As Part of a Complete Design.
ch. 4. Four Types of Learning Tasks.
ch. 5. The Power of Action: "The Verb's the Thing".
ch. 6. Principles to Guide Design.
ch. 7. The Art of Leading Learning Tasks.
ch. 8. Time and the Learning Task.
ch. 9. Checkpoint: Reviewing Concepts Through Examples.
ch. 10. Matching Tasks to the Group: One Size Does Not Fit All.
ch. 11. Tasks for Distance Learning and the Internet.
ch. 12. Using Learning Tasks: Twenty Reasons and Twenty Principles.
Resources.
A. Learning Tasks in Action: A Workshop Model.
B. Example of a Distance-Learning Course.
C. Technical Guide for Designing and Using Learning Tasks.
In Taking Learning to Task, Vella draws from current theory and practice to explore the meaning and power of learning tasks. To illustrate this unique approach, she provides seven steps to planning learning-centered courses, four types of learning tasks, a checklist of principles and practices, critical questions for instructional design, key components for evaluation, and other invaluable tools." "Taking Learning to Task is a hands-on, practical guide to designing effective learning tasks for diverse learners and diverse content. Teachers, trainers, and all types of instructors will find a wealth of advice for refining their day-to-day practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Learning Tasks: Assumptions and Definition.
ch. 2. Comparing Teaching Tasks and Learning Tasks.
ch. 3. Learning Tasks As Part of a Complete Design.
ch. 4. Four Types of Learning Tasks.
ch. 5. The Power of Action: "The Verb's the Thing".
ch. 6. Principles to Guide Design.
ch. 7. The Art of Leading Learning Tasks.
ch. 8. Time and the Learning Task.
ch. 9. Checkpoint: Reviewing Concepts Through Examples.
ch. 10. Matching Tasks to the Group: One Size Does Not Fit All.
ch. 11. Tasks for Distance Learning and the Internet.
ch. 12. Using Learning Tasks: Twenty Reasons and Twenty Principles.
Resources.
A. Learning Tasks in Action: A Workshop Model.
B. Example of a Distance-Learning Course.
C. Technical Guide for Designing and Using Learning Tasks.
Additional Info:
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the ...
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the ...
Additional Info:
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the learning journey by using the hand-on worksheets and exericses in this unique resource. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Author
ch. 1 Grounding the Work: Focusing on Learning
ch. 2 Working the Ground: Considering Context
ch. 3 To Everything There Is a Season: Predictable Phases
ch. 4 Tilling the Soil: Preparing
ch. 5 Planting Seeds: Negotiating
ch. 6 Nurturing Growth: Enabling
ch. 7 Reaping the Harvest: Coming to Closure
ch. 8 Regenerating Personal Growth Through Mentoring
App. A Creating a Mentoring Culture
App. B Digging Deeper: Resources for Further Learning
References
Index
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the learning journey by using the hand-on worksheets and exericses in this unique resource. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Author
ch. 1 Grounding the Work: Focusing on Learning
ch. 2 Working the Ground: Considering Context
ch. 3 To Everything There Is a Season: Predictable Phases
ch. 4 Tilling the Soil: Preparing
ch. 5 Planting Seeds: Negotiating
ch. 6 Nurturing Growth: Enabling
ch. 7 Reaping the Harvest: Coming to Closure
ch. 8 Regenerating Personal Growth Through Mentoring
App. A Creating a Mentoring Culture
App. B Digging Deeper: Resources for Further Learning
References
Index

The Catholic University as Promise and Project: Reflections in a Jesuit Idiom
Additional Info:
The remarkable development of the Catholic university in the United States has raised questions about its continued identity, its promise, and its academic constituents. Michael J. Buckley, S.J., explores these issues, especially as they have been experienced in the history and contemporary commitments of Jesuit higher education. (From the Publisher)
The remarkable development of the Catholic university in the United States has raised questions about its continued identity, its promise, and its academic constituents. Michael J. Buckley, S.J., explores these issues, especially as they have been experienced in the history and contemporary commitments of Jesuit higher education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The remarkable development of the Catholic university in the United States has raised questions about its continued identity, its promise, and its academic constituents. Michael J. Buckley, S.J., explores these issues, especially as they have been experienced in the history and contemporary commitments of Jesuit higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Pt. 1 Crisis, Choice, and the Catholic University
ch. 1 The Catholic University and the Promise Inherent in its Identity
ch. 2 The Church and its Responsibility to Foster Knowledge
ch. 3 A Conversation with a Friend
Pt. 2 "The Universities of the Society"
ch. 4 Ignatius' Understanding of the Jesuit University
ch. 5 Humanism and Jesuit Theology
Pt. 3 Contemporary Signs of Contradiction
ch. 6 The Search for a New Humanism: The University and the Concern for Justice
ch. 7 The Catholic University as Pluralistic Forum
Pt. 4 Towards the Love of Wisdom
ch. 8 Philosophic Grammar and the Other Disciplines
ch. 9 Wisdom, Religion, and the Liberal Arts: Towards the Construction of Theology
Notes
Index
The remarkable development of the Catholic university in the United States has raised questions about its continued identity, its promise, and its academic constituents. Michael J. Buckley, S.J., explores these issues, especially as they have been experienced in the history and contemporary commitments of Jesuit higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Pt. 1 Crisis, Choice, and the Catholic University
ch. 1 The Catholic University and the Promise Inherent in its Identity
ch. 2 The Church and its Responsibility to Foster Knowledge
ch. 3 A Conversation with a Friend
Pt. 2 "The Universities of the Society"
ch. 4 Ignatius' Understanding of the Jesuit University
ch. 5 Humanism and Jesuit Theology
Pt. 3 Contemporary Signs of Contradiction
ch. 6 The Search for a New Humanism: The University and the Concern for Justice
ch. 7 The Catholic University as Pluralistic Forum
Pt. 4 Towards the Love of Wisdom
ch. 8 Philosophic Grammar and the Other Disciplines
ch. 9 Wisdom, Religion, and the Liberal Arts: Towards the Construction of Theology
Notes
Index

The African American Student's Guide to Surviving Graduate School
Additional Info:
What does it take to get into and through graduate school? What special challenges, opportunities, and issues face an African American graduate student? The African American Student's Guide to Surviving Graduate School offers a practical roadmap to help African American students get the most out of their graduate school experience. The book covers a number of issues, including creating a program of study, financial aid, and the dissertation process. Author ...
What does it take to get into and through graduate school? What special challenges, opportunities, and issues face an African American graduate student? The African American Student's Guide to Surviving Graduate School offers a practical roadmap to help African American students get the most out of their graduate school experience. The book covers a number of issues, including creating a program of study, financial aid, and the dissertation process. Author ...
Additional Info:
What does it take to get into and through graduate school? What special challenges, opportunities, and issues face an African American graduate student? The African American Student's Guide to Surviving Graduate School offers a practical roadmap to help African American students get the most out of their graduate school experience. The book covers a number of issues, including creating a program of study, financial aid, and the dissertation process. Author Alicia Isaac thoroughly covers the entire graduate process, offering case studies, anecdotes, words of wisdom from prominent African Americans, checklists, and self-assessment scales to provide a useful guide for students involved in or considering graduate study. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Graduate School Is...
ch. 2 Making the Right Choice about Where To Go to Graduate School and Getting in with Money
ch. 3 Developing a Master Plan
ch. 4 Staying in the Game
ch. 5 Know When to Leave the Party
ch. 6 A Handbook for Mastering the Moves
ch. 7 Selecting and Managing Your Major Professor and Advisory Committee
ch. 8 Getting Through the Thesis or Dissertation
ch. 9 Surviving the Defense
ch. 10 Looking Back and Moving Forward
ch. 11 When Racism Rears Its Ugly Head
What does it take to get into and through graduate school? What special challenges, opportunities, and issues face an African American graduate student? The African American Student's Guide to Surviving Graduate School offers a practical roadmap to help African American students get the most out of their graduate school experience. The book covers a number of issues, including creating a program of study, financial aid, and the dissertation process. Author Alicia Isaac thoroughly covers the entire graduate process, offering case studies, anecdotes, words of wisdom from prominent African Americans, checklists, and self-assessment scales to provide a useful guide for students involved in or considering graduate study. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Graduate School Is...
ch. 2 Making the Right Choice about Where To Go to Graduate School and Getting in with Money
ch. 3 Developing a Master Plan
ch. 4 Staying in the Game
ch. 5 Know When to Leave the Party
ch. 6 A Handbook for Mastering the Moves
ch. 7 Selecting and Managing Your Major Professor and Advisory Committee
ch. 8 Getting Through the Thesis or Dissertation
ch. 9 Surviving the Defense
ch. 10 Looking Back and Moving Forward
ch. 11 When Racism Rears Its Ugly Head

Reforming the Higher Education Curriculum: Internationalizing the Campus
Additional Info:
With the concept of a global village now a reality, institutions of higher learning must broaden their thinking beyond American social, cultural, and economic borders. Reforming the Higher Education Curriculum is a collection of papers that explores how a college or university can plan and implement a systemwide program for internationalizing the curriculum throughout the entire university. The contributors argue that a thorough overhaul of the higher education curriculum is ...
With the concept of a global village now a reality, institutions of higher learning must broaden their thinking beyond American social, cultural, and economic borders. Reforming the Higher Education Curriculum is a collection of papers that explores how a college or university can plan and implement a systemwide program for internationalizing the curriculum throughout the entire university. The contributors argue that a thorough overhaul of the higher education curriculum is ...
Additional Info:
With the concept of a global village now a reality, institutions of higher learning must broaden their thinking beyond American social, cultural, and economic borders. Reforming the Higher Education Curriculum is a collection of papers that explores how a college or university can plan and implement a systemwide program for internationalizing the curriculum throughout the entire university. The contributors argue that a thorough overhaul of the higher education curriculum is necessary to turn out graduates with true international skills and perspectives. Among the strategies recommended are courses and programs that involve study abroad, intensive study of foreign languages, and opportunities to cultivate intellectual, professional, and personal associations with people from other cultures. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributor Biographies
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Portraits of an International Curriculum: An Uncommon Multidimensional Perspective (Josef A. Mestenhauser)
ch. 2 Culture in Curriculum: Internationalizing Learning by Design (Kerry Freedman)
ch. 3 The Impossibility of Internationalizing Students by Adding Materials to Courses (Marion L. Lundy Dobbert)
ch. 4 Global Academies as Strategic Self-Organizing "Think Tanks"(Athur M. Harkins)
ch. 5 The Role of Foreign Languages in the Internationalization of the Curriculum (Michael F. Metcalf)
ch. 6 Teaching about Cognition and Cognitive Development: How to Internationalize the Topic (Herbert L. Pick, Jr.)
ch. 7 Internationalization through Networking and Curricular Infusion (John J. Cogan)
ch. 8 Mind Opening through Music: An Internationalized Music Curriculum (C. Victor Fung)
ch. 9 Internationalization of Course Work in Soil Science and Agronomy (Peter Graham)
ch. 10 Explaining Ourselves through Others' Cultural Visions: A Mini Course on America (Harvey B. Sarles)
ch. 11 Curriculum by Bytes - Using Technology to Enhance International Education (R. Michael Philson)
ch. 12 Internationalization through the Lens of Evaluation (Susan Lewis English)
ch. 13 Divisional Strategies to Internationalize a Campus Portrait: Results, Resistance, and Recommendations from a Case Study at a U.S. University (Brenda J. Ellinghoe)
Index
With the concept of a global village now a reality, institutions of higher learning must broaden their thinking beyond American social, cultural, and economic borders. Reforming the Higher Education Curriculum is a collection of papers that explores how a college or university can plan and implement a systemwide program for internationalizing the curriculum throughout the entire university. The contributors argue that a thorough overhaul of the higher education curriculum is necessary to turn out graduates with true international skills and perspectives. Among the strategies recommended are courses and programs that involve study abroad, intensive study of foreign languages, and opportunities to cultivate intellectual, professional, and personal associations with people from other cultures. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributor Biographies
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Portraits of an International Curriculum: An Uncommon Multidimensional Perspective (Josef A. Mestenhauser)
ch. 2 Culture in Curriculum: Internationalizing Learning by Design (Kerry Freedman)
ch. 3 The Impossibility of Internationalizing Students by Adding Materials to Courses (Marion L. Lundy Dobbert)
ch. 4 Global Academies as Strategic Self-Organizing "Think Tanks"(Athur M. Harkins)
ch. 5 The Role of Foreign Languages in the Internationalization of the Curriculum (Michael F. Metcalf)
ch. 6 Teaching about Cognition and Cognitive Development: How to Internationalize the Topic (Herbert L. Pick, Jr.)
ch. 7 Internationalization through Networking and Curricular Infusion (John J. Cogan)
ch. 8 Mind Opening through Music: An Internationalized Music Curriculum (C. Victor Fung)
ch. 9 Internationalization of Course Work in Soil Science and Agronomy (Peter Graham)
ch. 10 Explaining Ourselves through Others' Cultural Visions: A Mini Course on America (Harvey B. Sarles)
ch. 11 Curriculum by Bytes - Using Technology to Enhance International Education (R. Michael Philson)
ch. 12 Internationalization through the Lens of Evaluation (Susan Lewis English)
ch. 13 Divisional Strategies to Internationalize a Campus Portrait: Results, Resistance, and Recommendations from a Case Study at a U.S. University (Brenda J. Ellinghoe)
Index

Rituals, Ceremonies, and Cultural Meaning in Higher Education
Additional Info:
College students and graduates have fond memories of campus events such as commencement, founder's days, convocations, and baccalaureate. These events, defined as rites of passage, secular ceremonies, or cultural performances, create a special feel to a campus remembered for years to come. Borrowing from interpretive anthropology, the author spotlights the following ideas: culture is revealed and forms of life are expressed through the actions and words of community members; human ...
College students and graduates have fond memories of campus events such as commencement, founder's days, convocations, and baccalaureate. These events, defined as rites of passage, secular ceremonies, or cultural performances, create a special feel to a campus remembered for years to come. Borrowing from interpretive anthropology, the author spotlights the following ideas: culture is revealed and forms of life are expressed through the actions and words of community members; human ...
Additional Info:
College students and graduates have fond memories of campus events such as commencement, founder's days, convocations, and baccalaureate. These events, defined as rites of passage, secular ceremonies, or cultural performances, create a special feel to a campus remembered for years to come. Borrowing from interpretive anthropology, the author spotlights the following ideas: culture is revealed and forms of life are expressed through the actions and words of community members; human communities are dynamic, complex, and ever-changing environments revealed through analysis of cultural events; and commonplace rituals and ceremonies play a central role in the cultural work of human meaning. The purpose of the book is to explore campus culture as revealed through rituals and ceremonies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
The Rituals of Higher Education
Presidential Inauguration
Rites of Passage: Structuralism
Charter Day
Secular Ceremonies: Action, Order, and Evocation
Second Semester Convocation
Structure, Communitas, and Liminality
Baccalaureate
Cultural Performances: Rehearsals and Informality
Junior Show
Messages, Meanings, and Root Paradigms
Mary Lyon's Birthday Celebration
Old Traditions in New Places: The Oxymoron of "New" Rituals
Alumnae Parade and Laurel Chain
Constructivist Inquiry and Higher Education Rituals
References
Index
College students and graduates have fond memories of campus events such as commencement, founder's days, convocations, and baccalaureate. These events, defined as rites of passage, secular ceremonies, or cultural performances, create a special feel to a campus remembered for years to come. Borrowing from interpretive anthropology, the author spotlights the following ideas: culture is revealed and forms of life are expressed through the actions and words of community members; human communities are dynamic, complex, and ever-changing environments revealed through analysis of cultural events; and commonplace rituals and ceremonies play a central role in the cultural work of human meaning. The purpose of the book is to explore campus culture as revealed through rituals and ceremonies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
The Rituals of Higher Education
Presidential Inauguration
Rites of Passage: Structuralism
Charter Day
Secular Ceremonies: Action, Order, and Evocation
Second Semester Convocation
Structure, Communitas, and Liminality
Baccalaureate
Cultural Performances: Rehearsals and Informality
Junior Show
Messages, Meanings, and Root Paradigms
Mary Lyon's Birthday Celebration
Old Traditions in New Places: The Oxymoron of "New" Rituals
Alumnae Parade and Laurel Chain
Constructivist Inquiry and Higher Education Rituals
References
Index


Ms. Mentor's Impeccable Advice for Women in Academia
Additional Info:
In question-and-answer form, Ms. Mentor advises academic women about issues they daren't discuss openly, such as: How does one really clamber onto the tenure track when the job market is so nasty, brutish, and small? Is there such a thing as the perfectly marketable dissertation topic? How does a meek young woman become a tiger of an authority figure in the classroom and get stupendous teaching evaluations? How does one ...
In question-and-answer form, Ms. Mentor advises academic women about issues they daren't discuss openly, such as: How does one really clamber onto the tenure track when the job market is so nasty, brutish, and small? Is there such a thing as the perfectly marketable dissertation topic? How does a meek young woman become a tiger of an authority figure in the classroom and get stupendous teaching evaluations? How does one ...
Additional Info:
In question-and-answer form, Ms. Mentor advises academic women about issues they daren't discuss openly, such as: How does one really clamber onto the tenure track when the job market is so nasty, brutish, and small? Is there such a thing as the perfectly marketable dissertation topic? How does a meek young woman become a tiger of an authority figure in the classroom and get stupendous teaching evaluations? How does one cope with sexual harassment, grandiosity, and bizarre behavior from entrenched colleagues? Ms. Mentor's readers will find answers to the secret queries they were afraid to ask anyone else. They'll discover what it really takes to get tenure; what to wear to academic occasions; when to snicker, when to hide, what to eat, and when to sue. They'll find out how to get firmly planted in the rich red earth of tenure. Ms. Mentor's wisdom grows out of many a real-life experience: she guarantees that some readers will squirm. She lavishly dispenses witty advice, and valuable information, while despising psychobabble, postcomprehensible jargon, and pontification by anyone other than herself. She also insists that sisterhood is, and must be, powerful. Readers of Ms. Mentor's Impeccable Advice for Women in Academia are in for an unusual treat. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Graduate School: The Rite of Passage
ch. 2 The Job Hunt
ch. 3 The Conference Scence
ch. 4 First Year on the Job
ch. 5 The Perils and Pleasures of Teaching
ch. 6 When Cultures Collide
ch. 7 Muddles and Puzzles
ch. 8 Slouching Toward Tenure
ch. 9 Post-Tenure
ch. 10 Emerita: The Golden Years
ch. 11 Final Words
Bibliography: Women in Academia and Other Readings Sampled by Ms. Mentor
Index
In question-and-answer form, Ms. Mentor advises academic women about issues they daren't discuss openly, such as: How does one really clamber onto the tenure track when the job market is so nasty, brutish, and small? Is there such a thing as the perfectly marketable dissertation topic? How does a meek young woman become a tiger of an authority figure in the classroom and get stupendous teaching evaluations? How does one cope with sexual harassment, grandiosity, and bizarre behavior from entrenched colleagues? Ms. Mentor's readers will find answers to the secret queries they were afraid to ask anyone else. They'll discover what it really takes to get tenure; what to wear to academic occasions; when to snicker, when to hide, what to eat, and when to sue. They'll find out how to get firmly planted in the rich red earth of tenure. Ms. Mentor's wisdom grows out of many a real-life experience: she guarantees that some readers will squirm. She lavishly dispenses witty advice, and valuable information, while despising psychobabble, postcomprehensible jargon, and pontification by anyone other than herself. She also insists that sisterhood is, and must be, powerful. Readers of Ms. Mentor's Impeccable Advice for Women in Academia are in for an unusual treat. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Graduate School: The Rite of Passage
ch. 2 The Job Hunt
ch. 3 The Conference Scence
ch. 4 First Year on the Job
ch. 5 The Perils and Pleasures of Teaching
ch. 6 When Cultures Collide
ch. 7 Muddles and Puzzles
ch. 8 Slouching Toward Tenure
ch. 9 Post-Tenure
ch. 10 Emerita: The Golden Years
ch. 11 Final Words
Bibliography: Women in Academia and Other Readings Sampled by Ms. Mentor
Index


Teaching and Learning with Cases: A Guidebook
Additional Info:
Drawing on experiences from a range of fields, including public administration, policy analysis, law, teacher training, ethics, and undergraduate education, this book is intended to be a practical, process-oriented guide to teaching, writing, and learning with cases. The guide is organized into four parts: (1) "Teaching with Cases: Principles" (concerned with the different meanings of the term "case method" in various domains of teaching, with sources of resistance to case teaching, ...
Drawing on experiences from a range of fields, including public administration, policy analysis, law, teacher training, ethics, and undergraduate education, this book is intended to be a practical, process-oriented guide to teaching, writing, and learning with cases. The guide is organized into four parts: (1) "Teaching with Cases: Principles" (concerned with the different meanings of the term "case method" in various domains of teaching, with sources of resistance to case teaching, ...
Additional Info:
Drawing on experiences from a range of fields, including public administration, policy analysis, law, teacher training, ethics, and undergraduate education, this book is intended to be a practical, process-oriented guide to teaching, writing, and learning with cases. The guide is organized into four parts: (1) "Teaching with Cases: Principles" (concerned with the different meanings of the term "case method" in various domains of teaching, with sources of resistance to case teaching, and with strategic issues teachers face in deciding what and how to teach); (2) "Teaching with Cases: Techniques" (concerned with the practice of case teaching ranging from the basics to the more advanced "tricks of the trade" practiced by experienced instructors; content could be covered in a case teaching workshop of three to five days in length); (3) "Curriculum Planning" (describes the types of cases available and provides guidelines for selecting appropriate cases to use for teaching); (4) "Case Writing" (approaches case writing as the subject might be handled in a case writing workshop designed to produce usable new cases). An appendix contains a teaching case, a teaching note, and a case analysis. References include a selected bibliography of case teaching and case learning guides and literature, case catalogs, and on-line resources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface - Why This Book?
Part I Teaching with Cases: Principles
ch. 1 What Is the Case Method?
ch. 2 "Case Teaching Is Not for Me!"
ch. 3 Why Do We Teach? The Strategic Question
ch. 4 How We Should Teach: The Strategic Answer
Part II Teaching with Cases: Techniques
ch. 5 Teaching with Cases: The Basics
ch. 6 Sizing Up Your Learners
ch. 7 Teaching Notes and Class Plans: Creating Them, Using Them
ch. 8 Case Discussion: Preparation
ch. 9 Case Discussion: Tricks of the Trade
ch. 10 Case Discussion: Closure
Part III Curriculum Planning
ch. 11 Choosing Cases: Curriculums and Courses
ch. 12 Choosing Cases: Types, Formats, and Lengths
ch. 13 Choosing Cases: The Star-Quality Case
Part IV Case Writing
ch. 14 Writing a Case: The Basics
ch. 15 Research for a Teaching Case
ch. 16 Writing a Case Draft
A Teaching Case: "Roles of Consultants in Project Formulation"
A Teaching Note
A Case Analysis
References
Index
About the Author
Drawing on experiences from a range of fields, including public administration, policy analysis, law, teacher training, ethics, and undergraduate education, this book is intended to be a practical, process-oriented guide to teaching, writing, and learning with cases. The guide is organized into four parts: (1) "Teaching with Cases: Principles" (concerned with the different meanings of the term "case method" in various domains of teaching, with sources of resistance to case teaching, and with strategic issues teachers face in deciding what and how to teach); (2) "Teaching with Cases: Techniques" (concerned with the practice of case teaching ranging from the basics to the more advanced "tricks of the trade" practiced by experienced instructors; content could be covered in a case teaching workshop of three to five days in length); (3) "Curriculum Planning" (describes the types of cases available and provides guidelines for selecting appropriate cases to use for teaching); (4) "Case Writing" (approaches case writing as the subject might be handled in a case writing workshop designed to produce usable new cases). An appendix contains a teaching case, a teaching note, and a case analysis. References include a selected bibliography of case teaching and case learning guides and literature, case catalogs, and on-line resources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface - Why This Book?
Part I Teaching with Cases: Principles
ch. 1 What Is the Case Method?
ch. 2 "Case Teaching Is Not for Me!"
ch. 3 Why Do We Teach? The Strategic Question
ch. 4 How We Should Teach: The Strategic Answer
Part II Teaching with Cases: Techniques
ch. 5 Teaching with Cases: The Basics
ch. 6 Sizing Up Your Learners
ch. 7 Teaching Notes and Class Plans: Creating Them, Using Them
ch. 8 Case Discussion: Preparation
ch. 9 Case Discussion: Tricks of the Trade
ch. 10 Case Discussion: Closure
Part III Curriculum Planning
ch. 11 Choosing Cases: Curriculums and Courses
ch. 12 Choosing Cases: Types, Formats, and Lengths
ch. 13 Choosing Cases: The Star-Quality Case
Part IV Case Writing
ch. 14 Writing a Case: The Basics
ch. 15 Research for a Teaching Case
ch. 16 Writing a Case Draft
A Teaching Case: "Roles of Consultants in Project Formulation"
A Teaching Note
A Case Analysis
References
Index
About the Author

Globalizing Education: Trends and Applications
Additional Info:
Globalising Education is a systematic and thoroughly researched study of how technologies have altered the delivery and reception of education. Mason examines how global education is actually delivered in practice, case studies which investigate current developments and applications in the USA, Europe, the UK and Australia, and conclusions drawn from the issues covered. She studies the huge impact of the World Wide Web on current educational practice, exploring the implications ...
Globalising Education is a systematic and thoroughly researched study of how technologies have altered the delivery and reception of education. Mason examines how global education is actually delivered in practice, case studies which investigate current developments and applications in the USA, Europe, the UK and Australia, and conclusions drawn from the issues covered. She studies the huge impact of the World Wide Web on current educational practice, exploring the implications ...
Additional Info:
Globalising Education is a systematic and thoroughly researched study of how technologies have altered the delivery and reception of education. Mason examines how global education is actually delivered in practice, case studies which investigate current developments and applications in the USA, Europe, the UK and Australia, and conclusions drawn from the issues covered. She studies the huge impact of the World Wide Web on current educational practice, exploring the implications for students, teachers and the larger institutional framework, and provides an important overview of the current technology and the technologies to come. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of illustrations
Preface
Part I Issues in globalising education
ch. 1 The globalisation of education
ch. 2 Media for delivering global education
ch. 3 Pedagogy and global education
ch. 4 Students and technology-mediated education
ch. 5 Organising a global education programme
Part II Applications of global education
ch. 6 Global Executive MBA, Duke University, North Carolina
ch. 7 Graduate Certificate in Open and Distance Learning, USQ
ch. 8 Jones Education Company: from TV to the Internet
ch. 9 IBM global training and education
ch. 10 The UK Open University: from national to global education provider
Part III Trends in globalisation
ch. 11 Current trends
ch. 12 Future trends
Bibliography
Index
Globalising Education is a systematic and thoroughly researched study of how technologies have altered the delivery and reception of education. Mason examines how global education is actually delivered in practice, case studies which investigate current developments and applications in the USA, Europe, the UK and Australia, and conclusions drawn from the issues covered. She studies the huge impact of the World Wide Web on current educational practice, exploring the implications for students, teachers and the larger institutional framework, and provides an important overview of the current technology and the technologies to come. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of illustrations
Preface
Part I Issues in globalising education
ch. 1 The globalisation of education
ch. 2 Media for delivering global education
ch. 3 Pedagogy and global education
ch. 4 Students and technology-mediated education
ch. 5 Organising a global education programme
Part II Applications of global education
ch. 6 Global Executive MBA, Duke University, North Carolina
ch. 7 Graduate Certificate in Open and Distance Learning, USQ
ch. 8 Jones Education Company: from TV to the Internet
ch. 9 IBM global training and education
ch. 10 The UK Open University: from national to global education provider
Part III Trends in globalisation
ch. 11 Current trends
ch. 12 Future trends
Bibliography
Index

A Handbook on Legal Issues in Theological Field Education
Additional Info:
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
(Collaborative effort of the Presbyterian Theological Field Educators (PTFE)
Preface
ch. 1 Legal issues and theological field education
ch. 2 How can students and supervisors get themselves and their theological schools in trouble in a field education placement?
ch. 3 What do field educators need to know about students?
ch. 4 What do field educators need to know about supervisors?
ch. 5 Legal issues and the administration of theological field education
ch. 6 Legal issues and the teaching of theological field education
Resources
Appendix
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
(Collaborative effort of the Presbyterian Theological Field Educators (PTFE)
Preface
ch. 1 Legal issues and theological field education
ch. 2 How can students and supervisors get themselves and their theological schools in trouble in a field education placement?
ch. 3 What do field educators need to know about students?
ch. 4 What do field educators need to know about supervisors?
ch. 5 Legal issues and the administration of theological field education
ch. 6 Legal issues and the teaching of theological field education
Resources
Appendix
Additional Info:
In The University Gets Religion: Religious Studies in American Higher Education, historian D. G. Hart examines the rise of religion to its current place as one of the largest academic disciplines in contemporary higher education. Protestant ministers and faculty were especially influential in arguing for the importance of religion to a truly "liberal" education, staffing departments and designing curricula to reflect their own Protestant assumptions about the value of religion ...
In The University Gets Religion: Religious Studies in American Higher Education, historian D. G. Hart examines the rise of religion to its current place as one of the largest academic disciplines in contemporary higher education. Protestant ministers and faculty were especially influential in arguing for the importance of religion to a truly "liberal" education, staffing departments and designing curricula to reflect their own Protestant assumptions about the value of religion ...
Additional Info:
In The University Gets Religion: Religious Studies in American Higher Education, historian D. G. Hart examines the rise of religion to its current place as one of the largest academic disciplines in contemporary higher education. Protestant ministers and faculty were especially influential in arguing for the importance of religion to a truly "liberal" education, staffing departments and designing curricula to reflect their own Protestant assumptions about the value of religion not just for higher education but for American culture in general. Though many educators originally found religion too sectarian and unscientific for colleges and universities, religious studies nevertheless emerged after World War II as a crucial element of a liberal education.
But the success of mainstream Protestantism in fostering the academic study of religion has become the field's greatest burden. Over the last twenty-five years, religion scholars have distanced themselves from traditional Protestant orientations while looking for topics better suited to America's cultural diversity. As a result, religion is in the awkward position of being one of the largest scholarly disciplines while simultaneously lacking a solid academic justification. It may be time, Hart argues, for academics to stop trying to secure a religion-friendly university.
The first sustained history of the academic study of religion at American universities, The University Gets Religion: Religious Studies in American Higher Education is a timely book that explores the present-day implications of religious studies' Protestant past. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface and Acknowledgments
Introduction: Why Study Religion?
Part I: The Age of the University, 1870-1925
ch. 1 Enlightened Christianity and the Founding of the University
ch. 2 Protestant Divinity in the Shadow of the University
ch. 3 The Emergence of a Pattern
Part II: The Age of the Protestant Establishment, 1925-1965
ch. 4 Religious Studies and the Humanities
ch. 5 Finding a Place for Theology
ch. 6 The Good Book for Tough Times
ch. 7 Church History for the Nation
Part III: The Age of the American Academy of Religion, 1965-Present
ch. 8 Religious Studies and the Failure of the Christian Academy
ch. 9 Religious Studies in Post-Protestant America
ch. 10 Religious Studies, the Would-be Discipline
Conclusion: Whither Religion in the University?
Notes
Bibliographical Essay
Index
In The University Gets Religion: Religious Studies in American Higher Education, historian D. G. Hart examines the rise of religion to its current place as one of the largest academic disciplines in contemporary higher education. Protestant ministers and faculty were especially influential in arguing for the importance of religion to a truly "liberal" education, staffing departments and designing curricula to reflect their own Protestant assumptions about the value of religion not just for higher education but for American culture in general. Though many educators originally found religion too sectarian and unscientific for colleges and universities, religious studies nevertheless emerged after World War II as a crucial element of a liberal education.
But the success of mainstream Protestantism in fostering the academic study of religion has become the field's greatest burden. Over the last twenty-five years, religion scholars have distanced themselves from traditional Protestant orientations while looking for topics better suited to America's cultural diversity. As a result, religion is in the awkward position of being one of the largest scholarly disciplines while simultaneously lacking a solid academic justification. It may be time, Hart argues, for academics to stop trying to secure a religion-friendly university.
The first sustained history of the academic study of religion at American universities, The University Gets Religion: Religious Studies in American Higher Education is a timely book that explores the present-day implications of religious studies' Protestant past. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface and Acknowledgments
Introduction: Why Study Religion?
Part I: The Age of the University, 1870-1925
ch. 1 Enlightened Christianity and the Founding of the University
ch. 2 Protestant Divinity in the Shadow of the University
ch. 3 The Emergence of a Pattern
Part II: The Age of the Protestant Establishment, 1925-1965
ch. 4 Religious Studies and the Humanities
ch. 5 Finding a Place for Theology
ch. 6 The Good Book for Tough Times
ch. 7 Church History for the Nation
Part III: The Age of the American Academy of Religion, 1965-Present
ch. 8 Religious Studies and the Failure of the Christian Academy
ch. 9 Religious Studies in Post-Protestant America
ch. 10 Religious Studies, the Would-be Discipline
Conclusion: Whither Religion in the University?
Notes
Bibliographical Essay
Index


Learning as Transformation: Critical Perspectives on a Theory in Progress
Additional Info:
In 1978, Jack Mezirow introduced the concept of transformative learning in his groundbreaking study of women who returned to community college to continue their education. As their understanding of personal, cultural, and social histories grew, so did the students' ability to modify their assumptions and expectations of learning. Since that time, transformative learning has inspired a significant body of research and theory. This volume continues the work begun over twenty years ...
In 1978, Jack Mezirow introduced the concept of transformative learning in his groundbreaking study of women who returned to community college to continue their education. As their understanding of personal, cultural, and social histories grew, so did the students' ability to modify their assumptions and expectations of learning. Since that time, transformative learning has inspired a significant body of research and theory. This volume continues the work begun over twenty years ...
Additional Info:
In 1978, Jack Mezirow introduced the concept of transformative learning in his groundbreaking study of women who returned to community college to continue their education. As their understanding of personal, cultural, and social histories grew, so did the students' ability to modify their assumptions and expectations of learning. Since that time, transformative learning has inspired a significant body of research and theory. This volume continues the work begun over twenty years ago—revealing the impact of transformative learning on the theory and practice of adult education
Fifteen of the field's top scholars and practitioners join Jack Mezirow in these pages. Together, they review the core principles of transformation theory, analyze the process of transformative learning, describe different types of learning and learners, suggest key conditions for socially responsible learning, explore group and organizational learning, and present revelations from the latest research. They also share real-world examples drawn from their own experiences as educators and assess the evolution of transformative learning in practice and philosophy. Learning as Transformation presents an intimate portrait of a powerful learning concept and invites educators, researchers, and scholars to consider the implications of transformative learning in their own professional work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Developing Concepts of Transformative Learning
Learning to Think Like an Adult: Core Concepts of Transformation Theory (J. Mezirow)
What "Form" Transforms? A Constructive-Developmental Approach to Transformative Learning (R. Kegan)
Inequality, Development, and Connected Knowing (M. Belenky & A. Stanton
Transformative Learning for the Common Good (L. Daloz)
Transformative Learning as Ideology Critique (S. Brookfield)
Fostering Transformative Learning in Practice
Teaching with Developmental Intention (K. Taylor)
Individual Differences and Transformative Learning (P. Cranton)
Transformation in a Residential Adult Learning Community (J. Cohen & D. Piper)
Creating New Habits of Mind in Small Groups (E. Kasl & D. Elias)
Organizational Learning and Transformation (L. Yorks & V. Marsick)
Moving Ahead From Practice to Theory
Analyzing Research on Transformative Learning Theory (E. Taylor)
Theory Building and the Search for Common Ground (C. Wiessner & J. Mezirow)
In 1978, Jack Mezirow introduced the concept of transformative learning in his groundbreaking study of women who returned to community college to continue their education. As their understanding of personal, cultural, and social histories grew, so did the students' ability to modify their assumptions and expectations of learning. Since that time, transformative learning has inspired a significant body of research and theory. This volume continues the work begun over twenty years ago—revealing the impact of transformative learning on the theory and practice of adult education
Fifteen of the field's top scholars and practitioners join Jack Mezirow in these pages. Together, they review the core principles of transformation theory, analyze the process of transformative learning, describe different types of learning and learners, suggest key conditions for socially responsible learning, explore group and organizational learning, and present revelations from the latest research. They also share real-world examples drawn from their own experiences as educators and assess the evolution of transformative learning in practice and philosophy. Learning as Transformation presents an intimate portrait of a powerful learning concept and invites educators, researchers, and scholars to consider the implications of transformative learning in their own professional work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Developing Concepts of Transformative Learning
Learning to Think Like an Adult: Core Concepts of Transformation Theory (J. Mezirow)
What "Form" Transforms? A Constructive-Developmental Approach to Transformative Learning (R. Kegan)
Inequality, Development, and Connected Knowing (M. Belenky & A. Stanton
Transformative Learning for the Common Good (L. Daloz)
Transformative Learning as Ideology Critique (S. Brookfield)
Fostering Transformative Learning in Practice
Teaching with Developmental Intention (K. Taylor)
Individual Differences and Transformative Learning (P. Cranton)
Transformation in a Residential Adult Learning Community (J. Cohen & D. Piper)
Creating New Habits of Mind in Small Groups (E. Kasl & D. Elias)
Organizational Learning and Transformation (L. Yorks & V. Marsick)
Moving Ahead From Practice to Theory
Analyzing Research on Transformative Learning Theory (E. Taylor)
Theory Building and the Search for Common Ground (C. Wiessner & J. Mezirow)
Additional Info:
With an ever increasing emphasis on continuing professional development, in-service training, plus widening participation in further and higher education, the importance of group learning has never been higher. Collaborative and co-operative learning is a crucial method for helping people get the most out learning, and because it offers the possibility to teach higher numbers, or diverse groups of people successfully, it has become an important technique for educators and trainers ...
With an ever increasing emphasis on continuing professional development, in-service training, plus widening participation in further and higher education, the importance of group learning has never been higher. Collaborative and co-operative learning is a crucial method for helping people get the most out learning, and because it offers the possibility to teach higher numbers, or diverse groups of people successfully, it has become an important technique for educators and trainers ...
Additional Info:
With an ever increasing emphasis on continuing professional development, in-service training, plus widening participation in further and higher education, the importance of group learning has never been higher. Collaborative and co-operative learning is a crucial method for helping people get the most out learning, and because it offers the possibility to teach higher numbers, or diverse groups of people successfully, it has become an important technique for educators and trainers to call upon. Using the well-known, tried and tested 500 Tips format, this book provides practical, user friendly, easy-to-use advice and support which will enhance learning and training. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Foreword
ch. 1 Learning with others
ch. 2 Getting groups going
ch. 3 Particular group learning contexts
ch. 4 Exercises and processes for groups
ch. 5 Groups behaving badly?
ch. 6 Assessing group learning
Further Reading
Index
With an ever increasing emphasis on continuing professional development, in-service training, plus widening participation in further and higher education, the importance of group learning has never been higher. Collaborative and co-operative learning is a crucial method for helping people get the most out learning, and because it offers the possibility to teach higher numbers, or diverse groups of people successfully, it has become an important technique for educators and trainers to call upon. Using the well-known, tried and tested 500 Tips format, this book provides practical, user friendly, easy-to-use advice and support which will enhance learning and training. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Foreword
ch. 1 Learning with others
ch. 2 Getting groups going
ch. 3 Particular group learning contexts
ch. 4 Exercises and processes for groups
ch. 5 Groups behaving badly?
ch. 6 Assessing group learning
Further Reading
Index

Inspiring Students: Case Studies in Motivating the Learner
Additional Info:
This book looks specifically at the problems of teaching students in higher education taking courses outside their main area of interest. This book brings together an international collection of case studies from North America, Australia, New Zealand and the UK in which practicing university teachers describe strategies which they have adopted to inspire their students. Each case study is presented in a way which enables the transfer of the key ...
This book looks specifically at the problems of teaching students in higher education taking courses outside their main area of interest. This book brings together an international collection of case studies from North America, Australia, New Zealand and the UK in which practicing university teachers describe strategies which they have adopted to inspire their students. Each case study is presented in a way which enables the transfer of the key ...
Additional Info:
This book looks specifically at the problems of teaching students in higher education taking courses outside their main area of interest. This book brings together an international collection of case studies from North America, Australia, New Zealand and the UK in which practicing university teachers describe strategies which they have adopted to inspire their students. Each case study is presented in a way which enables the transfer of the key ideas to other teachers, regardless of their subject discipline. The editors provide an introduction to the book and review the key lessons to be learnt from the case studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on Contributors
Editors' Introductory Remarks
ch. 1 Inspiring Students: An Introduction (Stephen Fallows and Kemal Ahmet)
ch. 2 Experiential Learning Through Practicals (Kehmal Ahmet and Stephen Fallows)
ch. 3 Teaching Science to Non-science Students Using a Student-centred Classroom (Calvin S. Kalman)
ch. 4 Problem-based Learning (Peter Ommundsen)
ch. 5 Enhancing Motivation and Learning Through Collaboration and the Use of Problems (John R. Savery)
ch. 6 Simulation in Management Education (Mark W. Teale)
ch. 7 Inspiring Students in a Health Studies Programme (Andréa Riesch Toepell)
ch. 8 Introducing Computing and Information Systems (Johnathan Lean, Terry Mangles, and Johnathan Moizer)
ch. 9 Introducing Communication Skills (Susan Nichols)
ch. 10 Library and Information Skills for the Reluctant Student (Carol Primrose)
ch. 11 Communications Skills Using Legal, Ethical and Professional Issues (AC Lynn Zelmer)
ch. 12 Mathematics Appreciation (Josefina Alvarez)
ch. 13 Working With Students to Enhance an Unpopular Course (Anne Arnold and John Truran)
ch. 14 Student-led Investigations to Introduce Statistics (Graham Clarke)
ch. 15 Work-based Assessments to Improve Learning (John Flynn)
ch. 16 The Biology of Numbers (Philip Hammond, Jim Aiton, Gareth Hughes and Ian Nimmo)
ch. 17 Introducing an Interdisciplinary Course (Balasubramanyam Chandramohan)
ch. 18 The 'Art' in Introducing Technology to Non-technologists (Ian McPherson)
ch. 19 Editors' Concluding Comments (Stephen Fallows)
Contact Details
Index
This book looks specifically at the problems of teaching students in higher education taking courses outside their main area of interest. This book brings together an international collection of case studies from North America, Australia, New Zealand and the UK in which practicing university teachers describe strategies which they have adopted to inspire their students. Each case study is presented in a way which enables the transfer of the key ideas to other teachers, regardless of their subject discipline. The editors provide an introduction to the book and review the key lessons to be learnt from the case studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on Contributors
Editors' Introductory Remarks
ch. 1 Inspiring Students: An Introduction (Stephen Fallows and Kemal Ahmet)
ch. 2 Experiential Learning Through Practicals (Kehmal Ahmet and Stephen Fallows)
ch. 3 Teaching Science to Non-science Students Using a Student-centred Classroom (Calvin S. Kalman)
ch. 4 Problem-based Learning (Peter Ommundsen)
ch. 5 Enhancing Motivation and Learning Through Collaboration and the Use of Problems (John R. Savery)
ch. 6 Simulation in Management Education (Mark W. Teale)
ch. 7 Inspiring Students in a Health Studies Programme (Andréa Riesch Toepell)
ch. 8 Introducing Computing and Information Systems (Johnathan Lean, Terry Mangles, and Johnathan Moizer)
ch. 9 Introducing Communication Skills (Susan Nichols)
ch. 10 Library and Information Skills for the Reluctant Student (Carol Primrose)
ch. 11 Communications Skills Using Legal, Ethical and Professional Issues (AC Lynn Zelmer)
ch. 12 Mathematics Appreciation (Josefina Alvarez)
ch. 13 Working With Students to Enhance an Unpopular Course (Anne Arnold and John Truran)
ch. 14 Student-led Investigations to Introduce Statistics (Graham Clarke)
ch. 15 Work-based Assessments to Improve Learning (John Flynn)
ch. 16 The Biology of Numbers (Philip Hammond, Jim Aiton, Gareth Hughes and Ian Nimmo)
ch. 17 Introducing an Interdisciplinary Course (Balasubramanyam Chandramohan)
ch. 18 The 'Art' in Introducing Technology to Non-technologists (Ian McPherson)
ch. 19 Editors' Concluding Comments (Stephen Fallows)
Contact Details
Index

The New Faculty Member : Supporting and Fostering Professional Development
Additional Info:
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive ...
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive ...
Additional Info:
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive beginnings. In this book, Robert Boice offers a range of proven support strategies designed to help new faculty thrive--from campuswide programs for nurturing newcomers to projects that help them to help themselves. Boice identifies the major challenges facing most new faculty--teaching, scholarly writing, and simply fitting in as colleagues--and provides tested solutions for helping them cope. He outlines a structured mentoring program to build collegiality through social support networks. And he presents specific techniques for helping new faculty find time, fluency, and balance as writers, including advice on dealing with editorial evaluations or rejections. The author also details a variety of self-help projects, including exercise and mood management groups run largely by new faculty, as well as faculty handbooks and newsletters. And perhaps most important, he tells how to gain the crucial support of department chairs, deans, and other administrators, secure funds to get programs off the ground, and keep new programs manageable and successful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Introduction: New Faculty--A Neglected Resource
Pt. 1 Obstacles Confronting New Faculty Members
ch. 2 Gaining the Acceptance of Colleagues
ch. 3 Establishing Teaching Styles and Skills
ch. 4 Developing Habits of Writing Productivity
Pt. 2 Helping New Faculty Overcome Obstacles
ch. 5 Mentoring to Build Collegiality
ch. 6 Establishing Basic Teaching Skills
ch. 7 Encouraging Scholarly Productivity
ch. 8 Helping New Faculty Help Themselves
Pt. 3 Building an Institutional Support System
ch. 9 Recruitment and Orientation
ch. 10 Retention and Tenure
ch. 11 Tailoring Programs to Special Needs
ch. 12 Enlisting Chairs and Other Administrators
ch. 13 Strategies for Getting Programs Under Way
Resource: Questionnaire Used to Interview New Faculty
References
Index
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive beginnings. In this book, Robert Boice offers a range of proven support strategies designed to help new faculty thrive--from campuswide programs for nurturing newcomers to projects that help them to help themselves. Boice identifies the major challenges facing most new faculty--teaching, scholarly writing, and simply fitting in as colleagues--and provides tested solutions for helping them cope. He outlines a structured mentoring program to build collegiality through social support networks. And he presents specific techniques for helping new faculty find time, fluency, and balance as writers, including advice on dealing with editorial evaluations or rejections. The author also details a variety of self-help projects, including exercise and mood management groups run largely by new faculty, as well as faculty handbooks and newsletters. And perhaps most important, he tells how to gain the crucial support of department chairs, deans, and other administrators, secure funds to get programs off the ground, and keep new programs manageable and successful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Introduction: New Faculty--A Neglected Resource
Pt. 1 Obstacles Confronting New Faculty Members
ch. 2 Gaining the Acceptance of Colleagues
ch. 3 Establishing Teaching Styles and Skills
ch. 4 Developing Habits of Writing Productivity
Pt. 2 Helping New Faculty Overcome Obstacles
ch. 5 Mentoring to Build Collegiality
ch. 6 Establishing Basic Teaching Skills
ch. 7 Encouraging Scholarly Productivity
ch. 8 Helping New Faculty Help Themselves
Pt. 3 Building an Institutional Support System
ch. 9 Recruitment and Orientation
ch. 10 Retention and Tenure
ch. 11 Tailoring Programs to Special Needs
ch. 12 Enlisting Chairs and Other Administrators
ch. 13 Strategies for Getting Programs Under Way
Resource: Questionnaire Used to Interview New Faculty
References
Index

Tracing Common Themes: Comparative Courses in the Study of Religion
Additional Info:
This volume focuses theoretically and practically on thematic approaches for teaching comparative courses in religion. It seeks to address the impact that the comparative study of religion has had on the humanities, how it has fared in the various pedagogic shifts discerned in the liberal arts over the last decade, and how the study of religion can serve to globalize humanities education in our increasingly culturally and religiously plural world. (...
This volume focuses theoretically and practically on thematic approaches for teaching comparative courses in religion. It seeks to address the impact that the comparative study of religion has had on the humanities, how it has fared in the various pedagogic shifts discerned in the liberal arts over the last decade, and how the study of religion can serve to globalize humanities education in our increasingly culturally and religiously plural world. (...
Additional Info:
This volume focuses theoretically and practically on thematic approaches for teaching comparative courses in religion. It seeks to address the impact that the comparative study of religion has had on the humanities, how it has fared in the various pedagogic shifts discerned in the liberal arts over the last decade, and how the study of religion can serve to globalize humanities education in our increasingly culturally and religiously plural world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Thematic Comparison in Teaching the History of Religion (John B. Carman, and Steven P. Hopkins)
ch. 2 A Thematic Course in the Study of Religion (Kendall W. Folkert, Edited by John E. Cort)
ch. 3 A Mega-Theme for an Introductory Course in Religious Studies (Frederick J. Streng)
ch. 4 Pilgrimage as a Thematic Introduction to the Comparative Study of Religion (Richard R. Niebuhr)
ch. 5 Pilgrimage Out West (John Stratton Hawley)
ch. 6 'Healing' as a Theme in Teaching the Study of Religion in a Liberal Arts Setting (Linda Barnes)
ch. 7 The Strange in the Midst of the Familiar: A Thematic Seminar on Sacrifice (Michael D. Swartz)
ch. 8 The Symbol of Destruction and the Destruction of Symbol: Sacrifice as a Thematic Course Focus (William R. Darrow)
ch. 9 Mysticism: A Popular and Problematic Course (Frederick J. Streng)
ch. 10 Spiritual Practices in Historical Perspective (Carol Zaleski)
ch. 11 Understanding the Self: East and West--An Interdisciplinary Study of a Theme (Fredrick J. Streng)
ch. 12 Bourgeois Relativism and the Comparative Study of the Self (Lee H. Yearley)
ch. 13 Scriptures and Classics (William A. Graham)
ch. 14 Words, Truth, and Power (Miriam Levering)
ch. 15 Religion and Gender: A Comparative Approach (Miriam Levering)
ch. 16 Women in African-American Religions: The Caribbean and South America (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 17 Teaching Comparative Religious Ethics (Brown W. Lovin, and Frank E. Reynolds)
ch. 18 Comparative Ethics (Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 19 Creativity and Art: Artists, Shamans, and Cosmology (Thomas V. Peterson)
ch. 20 Better Questions: Introduction to the History of Religion and Art (Richard M. Carp)
ch. 21 Concluding Reflections: The Fulcrum of Comparison (John B. Carman, and Steven P. Hopkins)
This volume focuses theoretically and practically on thematic approaches for teaching comparative courses in religion. It seeks to address the impact that the comparative study of religion has had on the humanities, how it has fared in the various pedagogic shifts discerned in the liberal arts over the last decade, and how the study of religion can serve to globalize humanities education in our increasingly culturally and religiously plural world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Thematic Comparison in Teaching the History of Religion (John B. Carman, and Steven P. Hopkins)
ch. 2 A Thematic Course in the Study of Religion (Kendall W. Folkert, Edited by John E. Cort)
ch. 3 A Mega-Theme for an Introductory Course in Religious Studies (Frederick J. Streng)
ch. 4 Pilgrimage as a Thematic Introduction to the Comparative Study of Religion (Richard R. Niebuhr)
ch. 5 Pilgrimage Out West (John Stratton Hawley)
ch. 6 'Healing' as a Theme in Teaching the Study of Religion in a Liberal Arts Setting (Linda Barnes)
ch. 7 The Strange in the Midst of the Familiar: A Thematic Seminar on Sacrifice (Michael D. Swartz)
ch. 8 The Symbol of Destruction and the Destruction of Symbol: Sacrifice as a Thematic Course Focus (William R. Darrow)
ch. 9 Mysticism: A Popular and Problematic Course (Frederick J. Streng)
ch. 10 Spiritual Practices in Historical Perspective (Carol Zaleski)
ch. 11 Understanding the Self: East and West--An Interdisciplinary Study of a Theme (Fredrick J. Streng)
ch. 12 Bourgeois Relativism and the Comparative Study of the Self (Lee H. Yearley)
ch. 13 Scriptures and Classics (William A. Graham)
ch. 14 Words, Truth, and Power (Miriam Levering)
ch. 15 Religion and Gender: A Comparative Approach (Miriam Levering)
ch. 16 Women in African-American Religions: The Caribbean and South America (Karen McCarthy Brown)
ch. 17 Teaching Comparative Religious Ethics (Brown W. Lovin, and Frank E. Reynolds)
ch. 18 Comparative Ethics (Mark Juergensmeyer)
ch. 19 Creativity and Art: Artists, Shamans, and Cosmology (Thomas V. Peterson)
ch. 20 Better Questions: Introduction to the History of Religion and Art (Richard M. Carp)
ch. 21 Concluding Reflections: The Fulcrum of Comparison (John B. Carman, and Steven P. Hopkins)

bell hooks' Engaged Pedagogy
Additional Info:
Offers a critical analysis of hooks' engaged pedagogy and its promise for the teaching/learning process, and assesses the relevance of strategies entailed in her engaged pedagogy to a Third World context. Part I presents her social theory as expressed in her critique of capitalism, patriarchy, and White supremacy in American society. Part II presents her education theory, and Part III discusses issues arising from application of engaged pedagogy to ...
Offers a critical analysis of hooks' engaged pedagogy and its promise for the teaching/learning process, and assesses the relevance of strategies entailed in her engaged pedagogy to a Third World context. Part I presents her social theory as expressed in her critique of capitalism, patriarchy, and White supremacy in American society. Part II presents her education theory, and Part III discusses issues arising from application of engaged pedagogy to ...
Additional Info:
Offers a critical analysis of hooks' engaged pedagogy and its promise for the teaching/learning process, and assesses the relevance of strategies entailed in her engaged pedagogy to a Third World context. Part I presents her social theory as expressed in her critique of capitalism, patriarchy, and White supremacy in American society. Part II presents her education theory, and Part III discusses issues arising from application of engaged pedagogy to the educational system of Kenya. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Acknowledgments
Prologue
Pt. I bell hooks' Social Theory
ch. 1 Racism
ch. 2 Sexism
ch. 3 Classism
ch. 4 Reflections on hooks' Social Theory
Pt. II bell hooks' Educational Theory
ch. 5 Related Theories
ch. 6 Major Components of Engaged Pedagogy
ch. 7 Teachers' Role in a Transformative Education
ch. 8 Limits of Engaged Pedagogy
ch. 9 Reflections on hooks' Educational Theory
Pt. III Relevance of bell hooks' Educational Theory to a Third-World Context
ch. 10 Relevance of hooks' Social Critique
ch. 11 Racism, Sexism, and Classism
ch. 12 Relevance of hooks' Engaged Pedagogy
ch. 13 Reflections on hooks' Relevance to a Third-World Context
Epilogue
References
Index
Offers a critical analysis of hooks' engaged pedagogy and its promise for the teaching/learning process, and assesses the relevance of strategies entailed in her engaged pedagogy to a Third World context. Part I presents her social theory as expressed in her critique of capitalism, patriarchy, and White supremacy in American society. Part II presents her education theory, and Part III discusses issues arising from application of engaged pedagogy to the educational system of Kenya. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Acknowledgments
Prologue
Pt. I bell hooks' Social Theory
ch. 1 Racism
ch. 2 Sexism
ch. 3 Classism
ch. 4 Reflections on hooks' Social Theory
Pt. II bell hooks' Educational Theory
ch. 5 Related Theories
ch. 6 Major Components of Engaged Pedagogy
ch. 7 Teachers' Role in a Transformative Education
ch. 8 Limits of Engaged Pedagogy
ch. 9 Reflections on hooks' Educational Theory
Pt. III Relevance of bell hooks' Educational Theory to a Third-World Context
ch. 10 Relevance of hooks' Social Critique
ch. 11 Racism, Sexism, and Classism
ch. 12 Relevance of hooks' Engaged Pedagogy
ch. 13 Reflections on hooks' Relevance to a Third-World Context
Epilogue
References
Index

Interdisciplinary Courses and Team Teaching: New Arrangements for Learning
Additional Info:
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively ...
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively ...
Additional Info:
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively implemented, is fulfilling for both educator and student. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I Structure and Delivery of Courses
ch. 1 Interdisciplinary Courses and Team Teaching: Definitions and Examples
ch. 2 The Rationale for Interdisciplinary Courses: The Problem of Specialization
ch. 3 Structuring and Delivering Interdisciplinary Courses: Approximating the Ideal
ch. 4 When Faculty Work in Teams: Learning from the Research on Groups and Teams
ch. 5 Faculty and Student Perceptions of Team Teaching: Satisfactions and Frustrations
ch. 6 Future Prospects for Interdisciplinary Courses: Issues and Problems
Part II Selected Examples of Courses
ch. 7 Examples of Interdisciplinary Courses and Programs
Conclusion
Notes
Index
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively implemented, is fulfilling for both educator and student. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I Structure and Delivery of Courses
ch. 1 Interdisciplinary Courses and Team Teaching: Definitions and Examples
ch. 2 The Rationale for Interdisciplinary Courses: The Problem of Specialization
ch. 3 Structuring and Delivering Interdisciplinary Courses: Approximating the Ideal
ch. 4 When Faculty Work in Teams: Learning from the Research on Groups and Teams
ch. 5 Faculty and Student Perceptions of Team Teaching: Satisfactions and Frustrations
ch. 6 Future Prospects for Interdisciplinary Courses: Issues and Problems
Part II Selected Examples of Courses
ch. 7 Examples of Interdisciplinary Courses and Programs
Conclusion
Notes
Index

Good Practice in Tenure Evaluation: Advice for Tenured Faculty, Department Chairs, and Academic Administrators
Additional Info:
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over ...
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over ...
Additional Info:
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over time among candidates with different personal characteristics, such as race, gender, disability, and national origin. A third necessity is candor in the evaluation of tenure-track faculty. Periodic evaluations should be candid and expressed in plain English. The fourth theme is that of caring for unsuccessful candidates. Faculty and administrators must treat an unsuccessful tenure candidate with professionalism and decency. Active efforts to assist the candidate in relocating to another position are of mutual benefit to the individual and the institution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Summary
ch. 1 Clarity in Standards and Procedures for Tenure Evaluation
ch. 2 Consistency in Tenure Decisions
ch. 3 Candor in the Evaluation of Tenure-Track Faculty
ch. 4 Caring for Unsuccessful Candidates
Conclusion: Moving Forward
Endnotes
Bibliography
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over time among candidates with different personal characteristics, such as race, gender, disability, and national origin. A third necessity is candor in the evaluation of tenure-track faculty. Periodic evaluations should be candid and expressed in plain English. The fourth theme is that of caring for unsuccessful candidates. Faculty and administrators must treat an unsuccessful tenure candidate with professionalism and decency. Active efforts to assist the candidate in relocating to another position are of mutual benefit to the individual and the institution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Summary
ch. 1 Clarity in Standards and Procedures for Tenure Evaluation
ch. 2 Consistency in Tenure Decisions
ch. 3 Candor in the Evaluation of Tenure-Track Faculty
ch. 4 Caring for Unsuccessful Candidates
Conclusion: Moving Forward
Endnotes
Bibliography
Additional Info:
Teaching with Your Mouth Shut is not intended as a manual for teachers; it aims to provoke reflection on the many ways teaching can be organized. (From the Publisher)
Teaching with Your Mouth Shut is not intended as a manual for teachers; it aims to provoke reflection on the many ways teaching can be organized. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Teaching with Your Mouth Shut is not intended as a manual for teachers; it aims to provoke reflection on the many ways teaching can be organized. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Teaching with Your Mouth Shut
Let the Books Do the Talking
Let the Students Do the Talking
Let Us Inquire Together
Speaking with Your Mouth Shut: The Art of Writing
Experiences That Teach: Creating Blueprints for Learning
Refusing to "Teach": Separating Power and Authority in the Classroom
Teaching with a Colleague
Conclusion: Providing Experience, Provoking Reflection
Teaching with Your Mouth Shut is not intended as a manual for teachers; it aims to provoke reflection on the many ways teaching can be organized. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Teaching with Your Mouth Shut
Let the Books Do the Talking
Let the Students Do the Talking
Let Us Inquire Together
Speaking with Your Mouth Shut: The Art of Writing
Experiences That Teach: Creating Blueprints for Learning
Refusing to "Teach": Separating Power and Authority in the Classroom
Teaching with a Colleague
Conclusion: Providing Experience, Provoking Reflection

Reinventing Ourselves: Interdisciplinary Education, Collaborative Learning, and Experimentation in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Reinventing Ourselves examines the experiences of and lessons learned from a variety of institutions that pioneered new approaches for more effective teaching and learning. Many of the colleges included in this volume began as both educational and social experiments, representing new ways of thinking about educational goals, curricular organization, institutional governance, and faculty roles and rewards. With new calls for both rethinking our approaches to teaching and learning, and for ...
Reinventing Ourselves examines the experiences of and lessons learned from a variety of institutions that pioneered new approaches for more effective teaching and learning. Many of the colleges included in this volume began as both educational and social experiments, representing new ways of thinking about educational goals, curricular organization, institutional governance, and faculty roles and rewards. With new calls for both rethinking our approaches to teaching and learning, and for ...
Additional Info:
Reinventing Ourselves examines the experiences of and lessons learned from a variety of institutions that pioneered new approaches for more effective teaching and learning. Many of the colleges included in this volume began as both educational and social experiments, representing new ways of thinking about educational goals, curricular organization, institutional governance, and faculty roles and rewards. With new calls for both rethinking our approaches to teaching and learning, and for reviewing the traditional boundaries within institutions and between disciplines, this book offers a rich store of ideas from which to draw. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Preface
Foreword
Section I: Historical Perspectives and Institutional Examples
ch. 1 Dangerous Outposts: Progressive Experiments in Higher Education in the 1920s and 1930s (Steven R. Coleman)
ch. 2 The Innovative Colleges and Universities of the 1960s and 1970s: Lessons from Six Alternative Institutions (Joy Rosenzweig Kliewer)
ch. 3 Interdisciplinary Education at Hampshire College: Bringing People Together Around Ideas (Ann P. McNeal, and Frederick Stirton Weaver)
ch. 4 Evergreen at Twenty-Five: Sustaining Long-Term Innovation (Barbara Leigh Smith)
ch. 5 Bridging Theory and Practice: Public Service at The Evergreen State College (Magda Costantino, Emily Decker, Jeanine L. Elliott, Tina Kuckkahn, and Helen Lee)
Section II: Powerful Pedagogies
Part One: Learning Communities
ch. 6 Learning Communities: A Convergence Zone for Statewide Educational Reform (Barbara Leigh Smith)
ch. 7 Integration and Assessment of Service-Learning in Learning Communities (Karen Kashmanian Oates, and Laura Gaither)
ch. 8 Uncommon Sense: Liberal Education, Learning Communities, and the Transformative Quest (Les K. Adler)
ch. 9 Toward an Interdisciplinary Epistemology: Faculty Culture and Institutional Change (Grant H. Cornwell, and Eve W. Stoddard)
ch. 10 Voices in Seminar: Ideologies and Identities (Susan Fiksdal)
Part Two: Rethinking Teaching and Learning
ch. 11 Powerful Pedagogies (William H. Newell)
ch. 12 Should the Teacher Know the Answer? Two Ways to Organize Interdisciplinary Study Around Inquiry (Donald L. Finkel)
ch. 13 Jenny's Painting: Multiple Forms of Communication in the Classroom (Mark Pedelty)
ch. 14 Student-Active Science in Interdisciplinary Studies: Problems and Solutions (Janet F. Ott)
ch. 15 Increasing Access in the Sciences Through Interdisciplinary Feminist Perspectives (Gary L. Bornzin)
ch. 16 Building an Organization that Reflects Interdiscplinarity (Anne G. Scott, and Celestino Fernández)
ch. 17 The Academic Department in a Multidisciplinary Context: An Argument for the Administrative Holding Company Amidst Communities of Learners (Joseph J. Comprone)
ch. 18 Alternative Ways of Organizing: The Importance of Organizational Culture (Sandra J. Sarkela)
ch. 19 Reconceptualizing the Faculty Role: Alternative Models (James R. Chen, Michael V. Fortunato, Alan Mandell, Susan Oaks, and Ducan RyanMann)
Section III: Taking Stock and Looking Ahead
ch. 20 Interdisciplinary Assessment for Interdisciplinary Programs (Karl L. Schilling)v ch. 21 Students on Interdisciplinary Education: How They Learn and What They Learn (John McCann)
ch. 22 Learning to See Academic Culture Through the Eyes of the Participants: An Ethnographic/Folkloristic Approach to Analyzing and Assessing the Cultures of Alternative Institutions (Peter Tommerup)
ch. 23 The Interdisciplinary Variable: Then and Now (Julie Thompson Klein)
ch. 24 Joining the Conversation: An Essay in Guiding Images for College Teaching and Learning (Robert H. Knapp, Jr.)
ch. 25 After the Revolution: New Directions for Alternative Education (Robert Benedetti)
ch. 26 Knowledge, Politics, and Interdisciplinary Education (Charles W. Anderson)
Index
Reinventing Ourselves examines the experiences of and lessons learned from a variety of institutions that pioneered new approaches for more effective teaching and learning. Many of the colleges included in this volume began as both educational and social experiments, representing new ways of thinking about educational goals, curricular organization, institutional governance, and faculty roles and rewards. With new calls for both rethinking our approaches to teaching and learning, and for reviewing the traditional boundaries within institutions and between disciplines, this book offers a rich store of ideas from which to draw. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Preface
Foreword
Section I: Historical Perspectives and Institutional Examples
ch. 1 Dangerous Outposts: Progressive Experiments in Higher Education in the 1920s and 1930s (Steven R. Coleman)
ch. 2 The Innovative Colleges and Universities of the 1960s and 1970s: Lessons from Six Alternative Institutions (Joy Rosenzweig Kliewer)
ch. 3 Interdisciplinary Education at Hampshire College: Bringing People Together Around Ideas (Ann P. McNeal, and Frederick Stirton Weaver)
ch. 4 Evergreen at Twenty-Five: Sustaining Long-Term Innovation (Barbara Leigh Smith)
ch. 5 Bridging Theory and Practice: Public Service at The Evergreen State College (Magda Costantino, Emily Decker, Jeanine L. Elliott, Tina Kuckkahn, and Helen Lee)
Section II: Powerful Pedagogies
Part One: Learning Communities
ch. 6 Learning Communities: A Convergence Zone for Statewide Educational Reform (Barbara Leigh Smith)
ch. 7 Integration and Assessment of Service-Learning in Learning Communities (Karen Kashmanian Oates, and Laura Gaither)
ch. 8 Uncommon Sense: Liberal Education, Learning Communities, and the Transformative Quest (Les K. Adler)
ch. 9 Toward an Interdisciplinary Epistemology: Faculty Culture and Institutional Change (Grant H. Cornwell, and Eve W. Stoddard)
ch. 10 Voices in Seminar: Ideologies and Identities (Susan Fiksdal)
Part Two: Rethinking Teaching and Learning
ch. 11 Powerful Pedagogies (William H. Newell)
ch. 12 Should the Teacher Know the Answer? Two Ways to Organize Interdisciplinary Study Around Inquiry (Donald L. Finkel)
ch. 13 Jenny's Painting: Multiple Forms of Communication in the Classroom (Mark Pedelty)
ch. 14 Student-Active Science in Interdisciplinary Studies: Problems and Solutions (Janet F. Ott)
ch. 15 Increasing Access in the Sciences Through Interdisciplinary Feminist Perspectives (Gary L. Bornzin)
ch. 16 Building an Organization that Reflects Interdiscplinarity (Anne G. Scott, and Celestino Fernández)
ch. 17 The Academic Department in a Multidisciplinary Context: An Argument for the Administrative Holding Company Amidst Communities of Learners (Joseph J. Comprone)
ch. 18 Alternative Ways of Organizing: The Importance of Organizational Culture (Sandra J. Sarkela)
ch. 19 Reconceptualizing the Faculty Role: Alternative Models (James R. Chen, Michael V. Fortunato, Alan Mandell, Susan Oaks, and Ducan RyanMann)
Section III: Taking Stock and Looking Ahead
ch. 20 Interdisciplinary Assessment for Interdisciplinary Programs (Karl L. Schilling)v ch. 21 Students on Interdisciplinary Education: How They Learn and What They Learn (John McCann)
ch. 22 Learning to See Academic Culture Through the Eyes of the Participants: An Ethnographic/Folkloristic Approach to Analyzing and Assessing the Cultures of Alternative Institutions (Peter Tommerup)
ch. 23 The Interdisciplinary Variable: Then and Now (Julie Thompson Klein)
ch. 24 Joining the Conversation: An Essay in Guiding Images for College Teaching and Learning (Robert H. Knapp, Jr.)
ch. 25 After the Revolution: New Directions for Alternative Education (Robert Benedetti)
ch. 26 Knowledge, Politics, and Interdisciplinary Education (Charles W. Anderson)
Index

The Children Are Watching: How the Media Teach About Diversity
Additional Info:
Carlos Cortés has been a first-hand observer and participant in the growth of multiculturalism and multicultural education from their birth in the social movements of the 1960s to the present day. In this unique collection of essays about diversity, society, and education, he provides readers with valuable insights, both from his own life story and from some of the most thought-provoking articles he has written over the past three ...
Carlos Cortés has been a first-hand observer and participant in the growth of multiculturalism and multicultural education from their birth in the social movements of the 1960s to the present day. In this unique collection of essays about diversity, society, and education, he provides readers with valuable insights, both from his own life story and from some of the most thought-provoking articles he has written over the past three ...
Additional Info:
Carlos Cortés has been a first-hand observer and participant in the growth of multiculturalism and multicultural education from their birth in the social movements of the 1960s to the present day. In this unique collection of essays about diversity, society, and education, he provides readers with valuable insights, both from his own life story and from some of the most thought-provoking articles he has written over the past three decades. In many ways, Cortés's personal and professional story is the story of the multicultural movement itself, and this volume gives witness to the struggles and successes that Cortés and many others have experienced while striving to create a place for the voices, values, and visions of racial and ethnic groups in our culturally diverse nation and shrinking world.
This one-of-a-kind reflective history:
* Examines the evolving nature of multiculturalism and multicultural education as a dynamic and interactive process.
* Features the perspective of a historian who has participated in the multicultural education movement.
* Urges readers to reflect on their own lives, careers, and efforts to meet the challenges and opportunities of our increasingly diverse society.
* Helps educators examine their own reasons for participating in the struggle to build a better multicultural future for our children. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Preface
Prologue: It Began with the Gypsies
ch. 1 Holly and Melissa's Multicultural Curriculum
ch. 2 The Societal Curriculum
ch. 3 Mediamakers as Multicultural Curriculum Developers
ch. 4 Media Products as Multicultural Textbooks
ch. 5 Mass Media and Multicultural Learning
ch. 6 October 1997 : A Multicultural Media Journal
ch. 7 The Contemporary Media Curriculum as School Context
ch. 8 Mass Media, Multiculturalism, and Schools
ch. 9 Struggling with Stereotypes: Uses and Abuses of a Critical Concept
ch. 10 Multicultural Education in the Cyberspace Era
Epilogue: She's Black, I'm White
References
Index
About the Author
Carlos Cortés has been a first-hand observer and participant in the growth of multiculturalism and multicultural education from their birth in the social movements of the 1960s to the present day. In this unique collection of essays about diversity, society, and education, he provides readers with valuable insights, both from his own life story and from some of the most thought-provoking articles he has written over the past three decades. In many ways, Cortés's personal and professional story is the story of the multicultural movement itself, and this volume gives witness to the struggles and successes that Cortés and many others have experienced while striving to create a place for the voices, values, and visions of racial and ethnic groups in our culturally diverse nation and shrinking world.
This one-of-a-kind reflective history:
* Examines the evolving nature of multiculturalism and multicultural education as a dynamic and interactive process.
* Features the perspective of a historian who has participated in the multicultural education movement.
* Urges readers to reflect on their own lives, careers, and efforts to meet the challenges and opportunities of our increasingly diverse society.
* Helps educators examine their own reasons for participating in the struggle to build a better multicultural future for our children. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Foreword
Preface
Prologue: It Began with the Gypsies
ch. 1 Holly and Melissa's Multicultural Curriculum
ch. 2 The Societal Curriculum
ch. 3 Mediamakers as Multicultural Curriculum Developers
ch. 4 Media Products as Multicultural Textbooks
ch. 5 Mass Media and Multicultural Learning
ch. 6 October 1997 : A Multicultural Media Journal
ch. 7 The Contemporary Media Curriculum as School Context
ch. 8 Mass Media, Multiculturalism, and Schools
ch. 9 Struggling with Stereotypes: Uses and Abuses of a Critical Concept
ch. 10 Multicultural Education in the Cyberspace Era
Epilogue: She's Black, I'm White
References
Index
About the Author

Insider, Outsider and Gender Identities in the Religion Classroom
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Insider, Outsider, and Gender Identities in the Religion Classroom (Laurie L. Patton) ch. 2 Crossovers and Cross-ups: A Cautionary (NancyFalk)
ch. 3 Mindfield or Mindfield: Teaching Religion in a Multicultural Classroom (Zayn R. Kassam)
ch. 4 Taking Myself Seriously: Transformation of a Working Pedagogical Model (Marcia Y. Riggs)
ch. 5 Spotlight on Teaching: Insider/Outsider (Francisca Cho)
ch. 6 Holy Shock at Sacred Cities: "Rocks Are not my Problem" "Why aren't Women Allowed to make the Pilgrimage to Mecca?" (Kimberly Patton)
ch. 7 Teaching Critical Theory (Miriam Peskowitz)
Journal Issue. (This issue, and all "Spotlight on Teaching" issues prior to 1999, are not available on the AAR website.)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Insider, Outsider, and Gender Identities in the Religion Classroom (Laurie L. Patton) ch. 2 Crossovers and Cross-ups: A Cautionary (NancyFalk)
ch. 3 Mindfield or Mindfield: Teaching Religion in a Multicultural Classroom (Zayn R. Kassam)
ch. 4 Taking Myself Seriously: Transformation of a Working Pedagogical Model (Marcia Y. Riggs)
ch. 5 Spotlight on Teaching: Insider/Outsider (Francisca Cho)
ch. 6 Holy Shock at Sacred Cities: "Rocks Are not my Problem" "Why aren't Women Allowed to make the Pilgrimage to Mecca?" (Kimberly Patton)
ch. 7 Teaching Critical Theory (Miriam Peskowitz)

Race Matters
Additional Info:
First published in 1993 on the one-year anniversary of the L.A. riots, Race Matters has since become an American classic. Beacon Press is proud to present this hardcover edition with a new introduction by Cornel West. The issues that it addresses are as controversial and urgent as before, and West's insights remain fresh, exciting, and timely. Now more than ever, Race Matters is a book for all Americans—one that ...
First published in 1993 on the one-year anniversary of the L.A. riots, Race Matters has since become an American classic. Beacon Press is proud to present this hardcover edition with a new introduction by Cornel West. The issues that it addresses are as controversial and urgent as before, and West's insights remain fresh, exciting, and timely. Now more than ever, Race Matters is a book for all Americans—one that ...
Additional Info:
First published in 1993 on the one-year anniversary of the L.A. riots, Race Matters has since become an American classic. Beacon Press is proud to present this hardcover edition with a new introduction by Cornel West. The issues that it addresses are as controversial and urgent as before, and West's insights remain fresh, exciting, and timely. Now more than ever, Race Matters is a book for all Americans—one that will help us build a genuine multiracial democracy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface 1993
Introduction: Race Matters
ch. 1 Nihilism in Black America
ch. 2 The Pitfalls of Racial Reasoning
ch. 3 The Crisis of Black Leadership
ch. 4 Demystifying the New Black Conservatism
ch. 5 Beyond Affirmative Action: Equality and Identity
ch. 6 On Black-Jewish Relations
ch. 7 Black Sexuality: The Taboo Subject
ch. 8 Malcolm X and Black Rage
Epilogue
First published in 1993 on the one-year anniversary of the L.A. riots, Race Matters has since become an American classic. Beacon Press is proud to present this hardcover edition with a new introduction by Cornel West. The issues that it addresses are as controversial and urgent as before, and West's insights remain fresh, exciting, and timely. Now more than ever, Race Matters is a book for all Americans—one that will help us build a genuine multiracial democracy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface 1993
Introduction: Race Matters
ch. 1 Nihilism in Black America
ch. 2 The Pitfalls of Racial Reasoning
ch. 3 The Crisis of Black Leadership
ch. 4 Demystifying the New Black Conservatism
ch. 5 Beyond Affirmative Action: Equality and Identity
ch. 6 On Black-Jewish Relations
ch. 7 Black Sexuality: The Taboo Subject
ch. 8 Malcolm X and Black Rage
Epilogue

How Scholars Trumped Teachers: Change without Reform in University Curriculum, Teaching, and Research, 1890-1990
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 How the Invention of the University-College Led to a Century of Dilemmas and a Tradition of Reform at Stanford
ch. 2 How Universities Tame Reform to Preserve the Research Imperative: Or Why There Is Change Without Reform
ch. 3 Scholar-Teachers in the Stanford History Department, 1891-1990
ch. 4 A Sturdy Way of Preparing Physicians: The School of Medicine, 1908-1990
ch. 5 How Research Trumped Teaching in History and Medicine
ch. 6 Scholars or Teachers: How Much Change is Possible?
Notes
References
Index
About the Author
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 How the Invention of the University-College Led to a Century of Dilemmas and a Tradition of Reform at Stanford
ch. 2 How Universities Tame Reform to Preserve the Research Imperative: Or Why There Is Change Without Reform
ch. 3 Scholar-Teachers in the Stanford History Department, 1891-1990
ch. 4 A Sturdy Way of Preparing Physicians: The School of Medicine, 1908-1990
ch. 5 How Research Trumped Teaching in History and Medicine
ch. 6 Scholars or Teachers: How Much Change is Possible?
Notes
References
Index
About the Author


Becoming a Critically Reflective Teacher
Additional Info:
Building on the insights of his highly acclaimed earlier work, The Skillful Teacher, Stephen D. Brookfield offers a very personal and accessible guide to how faculty at any level and across all disciplines can improve their teaching. Applying the principles of adult learning, Brookfield thoughtfully guides teachers through the processes of becoming critically reflective about teaching, confronting the contradictions involved in creating democratic classrooms, and using critical reflection as a ...
Building on the insights of his highly acclaimed earlier work, The Skillful Teacher, Stephen D. Brookfield offers a very personal and accessible guide to how faculty at any level and across all disciplines can improve their teaching. Applying the principles of adult learning, Brookfield thoughtfully guides teachers through the processes of becoming critically reflective about teaching, confronting the contradictions involved in creating democratic classrooms, and using critical reflection as a ...
Additional Info:
Building on the insights of his highly acclaimed earlier work, The Skillful Teacher, Stephen D. Brookfield offers a very personal and accessible guide to how faculty at any level and across all disciplines can improve their teaching. Applying the principles of adult learning, Brookfield thoughtfully guides teachers through the processes of becoming critically reflective about teaching, confronting the contradictions involved in creating democratic classrooms, and using critical reflection as a tool for continuous personal and professional development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 What It Means to Be a Critically Reflective Teacher
ch. 2 Becoming Critically Reflective: A Process of Learning and Change
ch. 3 Learning to Know Ourselves: The Value of Autobiography
ch. 4 Surprised by the Familiar: What Autobiographies Reveal
ch. 5 Seeing Ourselves Through Our Students' Eyes
ch. 6 Understanding Classroom Dynamics: The Critical Incident Questionnaire
ch. 7 Holding Critical Conversations About Teaching
ch. 8 Solving Problems Collaboratively: The Good Practices Audit
ch. 9 Storming the Citadel: Reading Theory Critically
ch. 10 Using the Literature of Critical Reflection
ch. 11 Negotiating the Risks of Critical Reflection
ch. 12 Creating a Culture of Reflection
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Building on the insights of his highly acclaimed earlier work, The Skillful Teacher, Stephen D. Brookfield offers a very personal and accessible guide to how faculty at any level and across all disciplines can improve their teaching. Applying the principles of adult learning, Brookfield thoughtfully guides teachers through the processes of becoming critically reflective about teaching, confronting the contradictions involved in creating democratic classrooms, and using critical reflection as a tool for continuous personal and professional development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 What It Means to Be a Critically Reflective Teacher
ch. 2 Becoming Critically Reflective: A Process of Learning and Change
ch. 3 Learning to Know Ourselves: The Value of Autobiography
ch. 4 Surprised by the Familiar: What Autobiographies Reveal
ch. 5 Seeing Ourselves Through Our Students' Eyes
ch. 6 Understanding Classroom Dynamics: The Critical Incident Questionnaire
ch. 7 Holding Critical Conversations About Teaching
ch. 8 Solving Problems Collaboratively: The Good Practices Audit
ch. 9 Storming the Citadel: Reading Theory Critically
ch. 10 Using the Literature of Critical Reflection
ch. 11 Negotiating the Risks of Critical Reflection
ch. 12 Creating a Culture of Reflection
References
Name Index
Subject Index

The Reflective Practitioner: How Professionals Think in Action
Additional Info:
A leading MIT social scientist and consultant examines five professions—engineering, architecture, management, psychotherapy, and town planning—to show how professionals really go about solving problems. (From the Publisher)
A leading MIT social scientist and consultant examines five professions—engineering, architecture, management, psychotherapy, and town planning—to show how professionals really go about solving problems. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A leading MIT social scientist and consultant examines five professions—engineering, architecture, management, psychotherapy, and town planning—to show how professionals really go about solving problems. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Crisis of Confidence in Professional Knowledge
ch. 2 From Technical Rationality to Reflection-in-Action
ch. 3 Design as a Reflective Conversation with the Situation
ch. 4 Psychotherapy: The Patient as a Universe of One
ch. 5 The Structure of Reflection-in-Action
ch. 6 Reflective Practice in the Science-Based Professions
ch. 7 Town Planning: Limits to Reflection-in-Action
ch. 8 The Art of Managing: Reflection-in-Action Within an Organizational Learning System
ch. 9 Patterns and Limits of Reflection-in-Action Across the Professions
ch. 10 Implications for the Professions and Their Place in Society
Notes
Index
A leading MIT social scientist and consultant examines five professions—engineering, architecture, management, psychotherapy, and town planning—to show how professionals really go about solving problems. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Crisis of Confidence in Professional Knowledge
ch. 2 From Technical Rationality to Reflection-in-Action
ch. 3 Design as a Reflective Conversation with the Situation
ch. 4 Psychotherapy: The Patient as a Universe of One
ch. 5 The Structure of Reflection-in-Action
ch. 6 Reflective Practice in the Science-Based Professions
ch. 7 Town Planning: Limits to Reflection-in-Action
ch. 8 The Art of Managing: Reflection-in-Action Within an Organizational Learning System
ch. 9 Patterns and Limits of Reflection-in-Action Across the Professions
ch. 10 Implications for the Professions and Their Place in Society
Notes
Index

Leadership Without Easy Answers
Additional Info:
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and ...
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and ...
Additional Info:
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and expectations as from any leader's inability to meet them. His book gets at both of these problems, offering a practical approach to leadership for those who lead as well as those who look to them for answers. Fitting the theory and practice of leadership to our extraordinary times, the book promotes a new social contract, a revitalization of our civic life just when we most need it. Drawing on a dozen years of research among managers, officers, and politicians in the public realm and the private sector, among the nonprofits, and in teaching, Heifetz presents clear, concrete prescriptions for anyone who needs to take the lead in almost any situation, under almost any organizational conditions, no matter who is in charge, His strategy applies not only to people at the top but also to those who must lead without authority--activists as well as presidents, managers as well as workers on the front line. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Pt. I Setting the Frame
ch. 1 Values in Leadership
ch. 2 To Lead or Mislead?
ch. 3 The Roots of Authority
Pt. II Leading With Authority
ch. 4 Mobilizing Adaptive Work
ch. 5 Applying Power
ch. 6 On a Razor's Edge
ch. 7 Falling Off the Edge
Pt. III Leading Without Authority
ch. 8 Creative Deviance on the Frontline
ch. 9 Modulating the Provocation
Pt. IV Staying Alive
ch. 10 Assassination
ch. 11 The Personal Challenge
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and expectations as from any leader's inability to meet them. His book gets at both of these problems, offering a practical approach to leadership for those who lead as well as those who look to them for answers. Fitting the theory and practice of leadership to our extraordinary times, the book promotes a new social contract, a revitalization of our civic life just when we most need it. Drawing on a dozen years of research among managers, officers, and politicians in the public realm and the private sector, among the nonprofits, and in teaching, Heifetz presents clear, concrete prescriptions for anyone who needs to take the lead in almost any situation, under almost any organizational conditions, no matter who is in charge, His strategy applies not only to people at the top but also to those who must lead without authority--activists as well as presidents, managers as well as workers on the front line. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Pt. I Setting the Frame
ch. 1 Values in Leadership
ch. 2 To Lead or Mislead?
ch. 3 The Roots of Authority
Pt. II Leading With Authority
ch. 4 Mobilizing Adaptive Work
ch. 5 Applying Power
ch. 6 On a Razor's Edge
ch. 7 Falling Off the Edge
Pt. III Leading Without Authority
ch. 8 Creative Deviance on the Frontline
ch. 9 Modulating the Provocation
Pt. IV Staying Alive
ch. 10 Assassination
ch. 11 The Personal Challenge
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index

The Time Bind: When Work Becomes Home and Home Becomes Work
Additional Info:
In her remarkable new book, The Time Bind, Arlie Hochschild brings us startling news of the ways in which home is being invaded by the time pressures and efficiencies of work, while the workplace is, for many parents, being transformed into a strange kind of surrogate home. For three years at a Fortune 500 company, she interviewed everyone from top executives to factory hands, sat in on business meetings, followed sales ...
In her remarkable new book, The Time Bind, Arlie Hochschild brings us startling news of the ways in which home is being invaded by the time pressures and efficiencies of work, while the workplace is, for many parents, being transformed into a strange kind of surrogate home. For three years at a Fortune 500 company, she interviewed everyone from top executives to factory hands, sat in on business meetings, followed sales ...
Additional Info:
In her remarkable new book, The Time Bind, Arlie Hochschild brings us startling news of the ways in which home is being invaded by the time pressures and efficiencies of work, while the workplace is, for many parents, being transformed into a strange kind of surrogate home. For three years at a Fortune 500 company, she interviewed everyone from top executives to factory hands, sat in on business meetings, followed sales teams onto golf courses, and trailed working parents and their children through their days. In a series of vivid portraits, Hochschild paints a surprising picture of couples as time thieves, children as emotional bill-collectors, spouses as efficiency experts, parents who feel like helpful mothers and fathers mainly to their workmates, and women who - like generations of men before them - flee the pressures of home for the relief of work. Hochschild's groundbreaking study exposes our crunch-time world and reveals how, after the first shift at work and the second at home, comes the third, and hardest, shift of repairing the damage created by the first two. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Waving Window
ch. 2 Managed Values and Long Days
ch. 3 An Angel of an Idea
ch. 4 Family Values and Reversed Worlds
ch. 5 Giving at the Office
ch. 6 The Administrative Mother
ch. 7 "All My Friends Are Worker Bees": Being a Part-Time Professional
ch. 8 "I'm Still Married": Work as an Escape Valve
ch. 9 "Catching Up on the Soaps": Male Pioneers in the Culture of Time
ch. 10 What If the Boss Says No?
ch. 11 "I Want Them to Grow Up to Be Good Single Moms"
ch. 12 The Overextended Family
ch. 13 Overtime Hounds
ch. 14 The Third Shift
ch. 15 Evading the Time Bind
ch. 16 Making Time
Appendix
Endnotes
Bibliography
Index
In her remarkable new book, The Time Bind, Arlie Hochschild brings us startling news of the ways in which home is being invaded by the time pressures and efficiencies of work, while the workplace is, for many parents, being transformed into a strange kind of surrogate home. For three years at a Fortune 500 company, she interviewed everyone from top executives to factory hands, sat in on business meetings, followed sales teams onto golf courses, and trailed working parents and their children through their days. In a series of vivid portraits, Hochschild paints a surprising picture of couples as time thieves, children as emotional bill-collectors, spouses as efficiency experts, parents who feel like helpful mothers and fathers mainly to their workmates, and women who - like generations of men before them - flee the pressures of home for the relief of work. Hochschild's groundbreaking study exposes our crunch-time world and reveals how, after the first shift at work and the second at home, comes the third, and hardest, shift of repairing the damage created by the first two. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Waving Window
ch. 2 Managed Values and Long Days
ch. 3 An Angel of an Idea
ch. 4 Family Values and Reversed Worlds
ch. 5 Giving at the Office
ch. 6 The Administrative Mother
ch. 7 "All My Friends Are Worker Bees": Being a Part-Time Professional
ch. 8 "I'm Still Married": Work as an Escape Valve
ch. 9 "Catching Up on the Soaps": Male Pioneers in the Culture of Time
ch. 10 What If the Boss Says No?
ch. 11 "I Want Them to Grow Up to Be Good Single Moms"
ch. 12 The Overextended Family
ch. 13 Overtime Hounds
ch. 14 The Third Shift
ch. 15 Evading the Time Bind
ch. 16 Making Time
Appendix
Endnotes
Bibliography
Index

Coming of Age in Academe: Rekindling Women's Hopes and Reforming the Academy
Additional Info:
At what price entry? Philosopher of education Jane Roland Martin contends that feminist scholars have traded in their idealism for a place in the academy. In Coming of Age in Academe, she looks at the ways that academic feminists have become estranged from women.
Determining that this is the "membership fee" the academy exacts on all its members, she calls for the academy's transformation. Part one explores the chilly ...
At what price entry? Philosopher of education Jane Roland Martin contends that feminist scholars have traded in their idealism for a place in the academy. In Coming of Age in Academe, she looks at the ways that academic feminists have become estranged from women.
Determining that this is the "membership fee" the academy exacts on all its members, she calls for the academy's transformation. Part one explores the chilly ...
Additional Info:
At what price entry? Philosopher of education Jane Roland Martin contends that feminist scholars have traded in their idealism for a place in the academy. In Coming of Age in Academe, she looks at the ways that academic feminists have become estranged from women.
Determining that this is the "membership fee" the academy exacts on all its members, she calls for the academy's transformation. Part one explores the chilly research climate for feminist scholars, the academic traps of essentialism and aerial distance, and the education gap in the feminist text. In part two, Martin likens the behavior of present-day feminist scholars to nineteenth-century immigrants to the United States and examines their assimilation into the world of work, politics and the professions. She finds that when you look at higher education, you see what a brutal filter of women it is. Part three highlights the academy's "brain drain" and its containment of women and then proposes actions both great and small that aim at fundamental change. In this rousing call to action, Martin concludes that the dissociation from women that the academy demands--its "entrance fee"--can only be stopped by radically reforming the gendered system on which the academy is based. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Preface
Pt. 1 What Price Women's Belonging?
Introduction
ch. 1 Estrangement from Each Other
ch. 2 Estrangement from Women's Lived Experience
ch. 3 Estrangement from "Women's" Occupations
Pt. 2 An Immigrant Interpretation
ch. 1 Women as Immigrants
ch. 2 The New Gender Tracking
ch. 3 Higher Education as Filter
ch. 4 Assimilation or Transformation, That Is the Question
Pt. 3 Add Women and Transform
ch. 1 The Brain Drain
ch. 2 Tales of Containment
ch. 3 Actions Great and Small
Conclusion
Notes
Works Cite
d Index
At what price entry? Philosopher of education Jane Roland Martin contends that feminist scholars have traded in their idealism for a place in the academy. In Coming of Age in Academe, she looks at the ways that academic feminists have become estranged from women.
Determining that this is the "membership fee" the academy exacts on all its members, she calls for the academy's transformation. Part one explores the chilly research climate for feminist scholars, the academic traps of essentialism and aerial distance, and the education gap in the feminist text. In part two, Martin likens the behavior of present-day feminist scholars to nineteenth-century immigrants to the United States and examines their assimilation into the world of work, politics and the professions. She finds that when you look at higher education, you see what a brutal filter of women it is. Part three highlights the academy's "brain drain" and its containment of women and then proposes actions both great and small that aim at fundamental change. In this rousing call to action, Martin concludes that the dissociation from women that the academy demands--its "entrance fee"--can only be stopped by radically reforming the gendered system on which the academy is based. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Preface
Pt. 1 What Price Women's Belonging?
Introduction
ch. 1 Estrangement from Each Other
ch. 2 Estrangement from Women's Lived Experience
ch. 3 Estrangement from "Women's" Occupations
Pt. 2 An Immigrant Interpretation
ch. 1 Women as Immigrants
ch. 2 The New Gender Tracking
ch. 3 Higher Education as Filter
ch. 4 Assimilation or Transformation, That Is the Question
Pt. 3 Add Women and Transform
ch. 1 The Brain Drain
ch. 2 Tales of Containment
ch. 3 Actions Great and Small
Conclusion
Notes
Works Cite
d Index


Becoming Multicultural: Personal and Social Construction through Critical Teaching
Additional Info:
This book argues that becoming multicultural is a process of recursive cycles that must involve confrontational dialogue for change. Multicultural education texts often describe multiculturalism as a process where a person develops competencies of perceiving, evaluating, believing, and doing in multiple ways. However, the dynamic, fluid and changing qualities central to the process of interpersonal interaction often results in mastery of a product, focusing on lists of static features of ...
This book argues that becoming multicultural is a process of recursive cycles that must involve confrontational dialogue for change. Multicultural education texts often describe multiculturalism as a process where a person develops competencies of perceiving, evaluating, believing, and doing in multiple ways. However, the dynamic, fluid and changing qualities central to the process of interpersonal interaction often results in mastery of a product, focusing on lists of static features of ...
Additional Info:
This book argues that becoming multicultural is a process of recursive cycles that must involve confrontational dialogue for change. Multicultural education texts often describe multiculturalism as a process where a person develops competencies of perceiving, evaluating, believing, and doing in multiple ways. However, the dynamic, fluid and changing qualities central to the process of interpersonal interaction often results in mastery of a product, focusing on lists of static features of generalized groups rather than on the individuals who make up those groups.
Rather than listing and describing objectified features of cultural groups from a theoretical view, this book details the interactions of 21 ethnically diverse individuals through one classroom experience. First, the personal histories and meanings constructed from lived experience are detailed and analyzed to reveal the ways in which personal identity constructions influence learning events in a singular classroom context. Second, from this analysis, the author develops a conceptual model for the process of becoming multicultural. Then the author applies the model to herself and describes specific ways in which interaction with these individuals has influenced her present teaching strategies for expecting and facilitating confrontational dialogue toward developing education that is multicultural. Specifically the book addresses the questions: 1) What does it mean to become multicultural? 2) What does it mean to be culturally sensitive? 3) How can the process of multiculturalism be facilitated in a classroom setting? 4) What is the teacher's role in the multicultural classroom? 5) What are some expected/predictable outcomes of a multicultural classroom? Includes bibliography and index. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures and Tables
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Defining Perspectives
ch. 2 Being and Becoming Multicultural
ch. 3 Constructing a Critical Context
ch. 4 Constructing Self as Object: Salient Autobiographical Experiences
ch. 5 Deconstructing Self as Object
ch. 6 (Re)Presenting Self as Subject
ch. 7 Lived Truth and Distorted Honesty
ch. 8 Implications for Critical Teaching
References
Index
This book argues that becoming multicultural is a process of recursive cycles that must involve confrontational dialogue for change. Multicultural education texts often describe multiculturalism as a process where a person develops competencies of perceiving, evaluating, believing, and doing in multiple ways. However, the dynamic, fluid and changing qualities central to the process of interpersonal interaction often results in mastery of a product, focusing on lists of static features of generalized groups rather than on the individuals who make up those groups.
Rather than listing and describing objectified features of cultural groups from a theoretical view, this book details the interactions of 21 ethnically diverse individuals through one classroom experience. First, the personal histories and meanings constructed from lived experience are detailed and analyzed to reveal the ways in which personal identity constructions influence learning events in a singular classroom context. Second, from this analysis, the author develops a conceptual model for the process of becoming multicultural. Then the author applies the model to herself and describes specific ways in which interaction with these individuals has influenced her present teaching strategies for expecting and facilitating confrontational dialogue toward developing education that is multicultural. Specifically the book addresses the questions: 1) What does it mean to become multicultural? 2) What does it mean to be culturally sensitive? 3) How can the process of multiculturalism be facilitated in a classroom setting? 4) What is the teacher's role in the multicultural classroom? 5) What are some expected/predictable outcomes of a multicultural classroom? Includes bibliography and index. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures and Tables
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Defining Perspectives
ch. 2 Being and Becoming Multicultural
ch. 3 Constructing a Critical Context
ch. 4 Constructing Self as Object: Salient Autobiographical Experiences
ch. 5 Deconstructing Self as Object
ch. 6 (Re)Presenting Self as Subject
ch. 7 Lived Truth and Distorted Honesty
ch. 8 Implications for Critical Teaching
References
Index

Mentor in a Manual: Climbing the Academic Ladder to Tenure
Additional Info:
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Allan W. Ostar
Publisher's Notes
Preface to the Anniversary Edition
Preface to the Second Edition
ch. 1: Acquiring a Professional Frame of Mind
ch. 2: Getting to Know Your Territory
ch. 3: Grasping Generic Institutional Expectations
ch. 4: Appreciating the Practical Politics of Getting Promoted
ch. 5: The Teaching Challenge: Preparing to Teach
ch. 6: The Teaching Challenge: In the Classroom
ch. 7: The Teaching Challenge: Outside the Classroom
ch. 8: The Research Paradigm
ch. 9: The Service Syndrome
ch. 10: A Bottom Line: Getting Published
ch. 11: Bell, Candle, and Book
ch. 12: Presenting Your Credentials for the Ultimate Decision
Appendix A: What Do I Do if I Don’t Make Tenure?
Appendix B: Suggested Readings
Index
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Allan W. Ostar
Publisher's Notes
Preface to the Anniversary Edition
Preface to the Second Edition
ch. 1: Acquiring a Professional Frame of Mind
ch. 2: Getting to Know Your Territory
ch. 3: Grasping Generic Institutional Expectations
ch. 4: Appreciating the Practical Politics of Getting Promoted
ch. 5: The Teaching Challenge: Preparing to Teach
ch. 6: The Teaching Challenge: In the Classroom
ch. 7: The Teaching Challenge: Outside the Classroom
ch. 8: The Research Paradigm
ch. 9: The Service Syndrome
ch. 10: A Bottom Line: Getting Published
ch. 11: Bell, Candle, and Book
ch. 12: Presenting Your Credentials for the Ultimate Decision
Appendix A: What Do I Do if I Don’t Make Tenure?
Appendix B: Suggested Readings
Index

Race, Class, and Gender in the United States
Additional Info:
Like its preceding editions, this fourth edition of Race, Class, and Gender in the United States: An Integrated Study undertakes a study of race, gender, and sexuality within the context of class. With 28 new readings and 5 revised readings, this edition also contains an entirely new section entitled "'Us' and 'Them': Becoming an American." This section examines the ways in which the concept of "citizen" has been constructed in the United ...
Like its preceding editions, this fourth edition of Race, Class, and Gender in the United States: An Integrated Study undertakes a study of race, gender, and sexuality within the context of class. With 28 new readings and 5 revised readings, this edition also contains an entirely new section entitled "'Us' and 'Them': Becoming an American." This section examines the ways in which the concept of "citizen" has been constructed in the United ...
Additional Info:
Like its preceding editions, this fourth edition of Race, Class, and Gender in the United States: An Integrated Study undertakes a study of race, gender, and sexuality within the context of class. With 28 new readings and 5 revised readings, this edition also contains an entirely new section entitled "'Us' and 'Them': Becoming an American." This section examines the ways in which the concept of "citizen" has been constructed in the United States over time and studies the role that issues of race, class, and gender have played in determining who is included inand excluded from - this category. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Pt. I The Social Construction of Difference: Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality
Pt. II "Us" and "Them": Becoming an American
Pt. III Understanding Racism, Sexism, and Class Privilege
Pt. IV The Economics of Race, Class, and Gender in the United States
Pt. V Many Voices, Many Lives: Some Consequences of Racial, Gender, and Class Inequality
Pt. VI How it Happened: Race and Gender Issues in U.S. Law
Pt. VII Creating and Maintaining Hierarchies: Stereotypes, Ideology, Language, Violence, and Social Control
Pt. VIII Revisioning the Future
Index
Like its preceding editions, this fourth edition of Race, Class, and Gender in the United States: An Integrated Study undertakes a study of race, gender, and sexuality within the context of class. With 28 new readings and 5 revised readings, this edition also contains an entirely new section entitled "'Us' and 'Them': Becoming an American." This section examines the ways in which the concept of "citizen" has been constructed in the United States over time and studies the role that issues of race, class, and gender have played in determining who is included inand excluded from - this category. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Pt. I The Social Construction of Difference: Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality
Pt. II "Us" and "Them": Becoming an American
Pt. III Understanding Racism, Sexism, and Class Privilege
Pt. IV The Economics of Race, Class, and Gender in the United States
Pt. V Many Voices, Many Lives: Some Consequences of Racial, Gender, and Class Inequality
Pt. VI How it Happened: Race and Gender Issues in U.S. Law
Pt. VII Creating and Maintaining Hierarchies: Stereotypes, Ideology, Language, Violence, and Social Control
Pt. VIII Revisioning the Future
Index

The Sacred and The Secular University
Additional Info:
American higher education was transformed between the end of the Civil War and the beginning of World War I. During this period, U.S. colleges underwent fundamental changes--changes that helped to create the modern university we know today. Most significantly, the study of the sciences and the humanities effectively dissolved the Protestant framework of learning by introducing a new secularized curriculum. This secularization has long been recognized as a decisive ...
American higher education was transformed between the end of the Civil War and the beginning of World War I. During this period, U.S. colleges underwent fundamental changes--changes that helped to create the modern university we know today. Most significantly, the study of the sciences and the humanities effectively dissolved the Protestant framework of learning by introducing a new secularized curriculum. This secularization has long been recognized as a decisive ...
Additional Info:
American higher education was transformed between the end of the Civil War and the beginning of World War I. During this period, U.S. colleges underwent fundamental changes--changes that helped to create the modern university we know today. Most significantly, the study of the sciences and the humanities effectively dissolved the Protestant framework of learning by introducing a new secularized curriculum. This secularization has long been recognized as a decisive turning point in the history of American education. Until now, however, there has been remarkably little attention paid to the details of how this transformation came about. Here, at last, Jon Roberts and James Turner identify the forces and explain the events that reformed the college curriculum during this era.
The first section of the book examines how the study of science became detached from theological considerations. Previously, one of the primary pursuits of "natural scientists" was to achieve an understanding of the workings of the divine in earthly events. During the late nineteenth century, however, scientists reduced the scope of their inquiries to subjects that could be isolated, measured, and studied objectively. In pursuit of "scientific truth," they were drawn away from the larger "truths" that they had once sought. On a related path, social scientists began to pursue the study of human society more scientifically, attempting to generalize principles of behavior from empirically observed events.
The second section describes the revolution that occurred in the humanities, beginning in the mid-nineteenth century, when the study of humanities was largely the study of Greek and Latin. By 1900, however, the humanities were much more broadly construed, including such previously unstudied subjects as literature, philosophy, history, and art history. The "triumph of the humanities" represented a significant change in attitudes about what constituted academic knowledge and, therefore, what should be a part of the college curriculum.
The Sacred and the Secular University rewrites the history of higher education in the United States. It will interest all readers who are concerned about American universities and about how the content of a "college education" has changed over the course of the last century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreward
Acknowledgements
Introduction by John F. Wilson
Part One: The Sciences
ch. 1 Religion, Science, and Higher Education
ch. 2 The Emergence of the Human Sciences
ch. 3 Knowledge and Inquiry in the Ascendant
Part Two: The Humanities
ch. 4 The Triumph of the Humanities
ch. 5 The Boon and Bane of Specialization
ch. 6 Two Ideals of Knowledge
ch. 7 For and against Secularization
Notes
Index
American higher education was transformed between the end of the Civil War and the beginning of World War I. During this period, U.S. colleges underwent fundamental changes--changes that helped to create the modern university we know today. Most significantly, the study of the sciences and the humanities effectively dissolved the Protestant framework of learning by introducing a new secularized curriculum. This secularization has long been recognized as a decisive turning point in the history of American education. Until now, however, there has been remarkably little attention paid to the details of how this transformation came about. Here, at last, Jon Roberts and James Turner identify the forces and explain the events that reformed the college curriculum during this era.
The first section of the book examines how the study of science became detached from theological considerations. Previously, one of the primary pursuits of "natural scientists" was to achieve an understanding of the workings of the divine in earthly events. During the late nineteenth century, however, scientists reduced the scope of their inquiries to subjects that could be isolated, measured, and studied objectively. In pursuit of "scientific truth," they were drawn away from the larger "truths" that they had once sought. On a related path, social scientists began to pursue the study of human society more scientifically, attempting to generalize principles of behavior from empirically observed events.
The second section describes the revolution that occurred in the humanities, beginning in the mid-nineteenth century, when the study of humanities was largely the study of Greek and Latin. By 1900, however, the humanities were much more broadly construed, including such previously unstudied subjects as literature, philosophy, history, and art history. The "triumph of the humanities" represented a significant change in attitudes about what constituted academic knowledge and, therefore, what should be a part of the college curriculum.
The Sacred and the Secular University rewrites the history of higher education in the United States. It will interest all readers who are concerned about American universities and about how the content of a "college education" has changed over the course of the last century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreward
Acknowledgements
Introduction by John F. Wilson
Part One: The Sciences
ch. 1 Religion, Science, and Higher Education
ch. 2 The Emergence of the Human Sciences
ch. 3 Knowledge and Inquiry in the Ascendant
Part Two: The Humanities
ch. 4 The Triumph of the Humanities
ch. 5 The Boon and Bane of Specialization
ch. 6 Two Ideals of Knowledge
ch. 7 For and against Secularization
Notes
Index

The Wolf Shall Dwell with the Lamb: A Spirituality for Leadership in a Multicultural Community
Additional Info:
A multicultural conference has convened. Everything is in place, and the participants arrive brimming with goodwill and even better intentions. Surely this time...! But, no. Halfway through the meetings, communication grinds to a halt, and people retreat to the safety of their own groups. What happened? And how can we keep it from happening again? Those are the questions this book proposes to answer. (From the Publisher)
A multicultural conference has convened. Everything is in place, and the participants arrive brimming with goodwill and even better intentions. Surely this time...! But, no. Halfway through the meetings, communication grinds to a halt, and people retreat to the safety of their own groups. What happened? And how can we keep it from happening again? Those are the questions this book proposes to answer. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A multicultural conference has convened. Everything is in place, and the participants arrive brimming with goodwill and even better intentions. Surely this time...! But, no. Halfway through the meetings, communication grinds to a halt, and people retreat to the safety of their own groups. What happened? And how can we keep it from happening again? Those are the questions this book proposes to answer. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The “Peaceable Realm” as a Vision of an Ideal Multicultural Community
ch. 2 What Makes a lamb Different from a Wolf? Understanding Cultural Differences in the Perception of Power
ch. 3 Differences in the Perception of Power and Their Consequences for Leadership
ch. 4 What Does the Bible Say to the Powerful and the Powerless?
ch. 5 A Fresh Look at Pentecost as the Beginning of a Multicultural Church Community
ch. 6 Who Has Power and Who Doesn’t?: Power Analysis, an Essential Skill for Leadership in a Multicultural Community
ch. 7 The Wolves Lie Down with the Lambs, a Case Study
ch. 8 Living Out the Fullness of the Gospel in the Peaceable Realm
ch. 9 Mutual Invitation as Mutual Employment
ch. 10 Media as Means of Distributing Power
ch. 11 Liturgy as Spiritual Dscipline for Leadership in a Multicultural Community
Appendix A Mutual Invitation
Appendix B Using Photolanguage in Small Group Communication
Appendix C Community Bible Study
A multicultural conference has convened. Everything is in place, and the participants arrive brimming with goodwill and even better intentions. Surely this time...! But, no. Halfway through the meetings, communication grinds to a halt, and people retreat to the safety of their own groups. What happened? And how can we keep it from happening again? Those are the questions this book proposes to answer. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The “Peaceable Realm” as a Vision of an Ideal Multicultural Community
ch. 2 What Makes a lamb Different from a Wolf? Understanding Cultural Differences in the Perception of Power
ch. 3 Differences in the Perception of Power and Their Consequences for Leadership
ch. 4 What Does the Bible Say to the Powerful and the Powerless?
ch. 5 A Fresh Look at Pentecost as the Beginning of a Multicultural Church Community
ch. 6 Who Has Power and Who Doesn’t?: Power Analysis, an Essential Skill for Leadership in a Multicultural Community
ch. 7 The Wolves Lie Down with the Lambs, a Case Study
ch. 8 Living Out the Fullness of the Gospel in the Peaceable Realm
ch. 9 Mutual Invitation as Mutual Employment
ch. 10 Media as Means of Distributing Power
ch. 11 Liturgy as Spiritual Dscipline for Leadership in a Multicultural Community
Appendix A Mutual Invitation
Appendix B Using Photolanguage in Small Group Communication
Appendix C Community Bible Study


In Over Our Heads: The Mental Demands of Modern Life
Additional Info:
If contemporary culture were a school, with all the tasks and expectations meted out by modern life as its curriculum, would anyone graduate? In the spirit of a sympathetic teacher, Robert Kegan guides us through this tricky curriculum, assessing the fit between its complex demands and our mental capacities, and showing what happens when we find ourselves, as we so often do, in over our heads. In this dazzling intellectual ...
If contemporary culture were a school, with all the tasks and expectations meted out by modern life as its curriculum, would anyone graduate? In the spirit of a sympathetic teacher, Robert Kegan guides us through this tricky curriculum, assessing the fit between its complex demands and our mental capacities, and showing what happens when we find ourselves, as we so often do, in over our heads. In this dazzling intellectual ...
Additional Info:
If contemporary culture were a school, with all the tasks and expectations meted out by modern life as its curriculum, would anyone graduate? In the spirit of a sympathetic teacher, Robert Kegan guides us through this tricky curriculum, assessing the fit between its complex demands and our mental capacities, and showing what happens when we find ourselves, as we so often do, in over our heads. In this dazzling intellectual tour, he completely reintroduces us to the psychological landscape of our private and public lives. A decade ago in The Evolving Self, Kegan presented a dynamic view of the development of human consciousness. Here he applies this widely acclaimed theory to the mental complexity of adulthood. As parents and partners, employees and bosses, citizens and leaders, we constantly confront a bewildering array of expectations, prescriptions, claims, and demands, as well as an equally confusing assortment of expert opinions that tell us what each of these roles entails. Surveying the disparate expert "literatures," which normally take no account of each other, Kegan brings them together to reveal, for the first time, what these many demands have in common. Our frequent frustration in trying to meet these complex and often conflicting claims results, he shows us, from a mismatch between the way we ordinarily know the world and the way we are unwittingly expected to understand it. In Over Our Heads provides us entirely fresh perspectives on a number of cultural controversies - the "abstinence vs. safe sex" debate, the diversity movement, communication across genders, the meaning of postmodernism. What emerges in these pages is a theory of evolving ways of knowing that allows us to view adult development much as we view child development, as an open-ended process born of the dynamic interaction of cultural demands and emerging mental capabilities. If our culture is to be a good "school," as Kegan suggests, it must offer, along with a challenging curriculum. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
pt. I The Mental Demand of Adolescence
ch. 1 The Hidden Curriculum of Youth: "Whaddaya Want from Me?"
ch. 2 Coaching the Curriculum: A Bridge Must Be Well Anchored on Either Side
pt. II The Mental Demand of Private Life: Parenting and Partnering
ch. 3 Parenting: Minding Our Children
ch. 4 Partnering: Love and Consciousness
pt. III The Mental Demand of Public Life: Work and Self-Expansion
ch. 5 Working: On Seeking to Hire the Self-Employed
ch. 6 Dealing with Difference: Communication between the Sexes/Communication between the Theories
ch. 7 Healing: The Undiscussed Demands of Psychotherapy
ch. 8 Learning: "The Teacher Wants Us to Be Self-Directing"
pt. IV The Mental Demand of Postmodern Life
ch. 9 Conflict, Leadership, and Knowledge Creation
ch. 10 On Being Good Company for the Wrong Journey
Epilogue
Notes
Index
If contemporary culture were a school, with all the tasks and expectations meted out by modern life as its curriculum, would anyone graduate? In the spirit of a sympathetic teacher, Robert Kegan guides us through this tricky curriculum, assessing the fit between its complex demands and our mental capacities, and showing what happens when we find ourselves, as we so often do, in over our heads. In this dazzling intellectual tour, he completely reintroduces us to the psychological landscape of our private and public lives. A decade ago in The Evolving Self, Kegan presented a dynamic view of the development of human consciousness. Here he applies this widely acclaimed theory to the mental complexity of adulthood. As parents and partners, employees and bosses, citizens and leaders, we constantly confront a bewildering array of expectations, prescriptions, claims, and demands, as well as an equally confusing assortment of expert opinions that tell us what each of these roles entails. Surveying the disparate expert "literatures," which normally take no account of each other, Kegan brings them together to reveal, for the first time, what these many demands have in common. Our frequent frustration in trying to meet these complex and often conflicting claims results, he shows us, from a mismatch between the way we ordinarily know the world and the way we are unwittingly expected to understand it. In Over Our Heads provides us entirely fresh perspectives on a number of cultural controversies - the "abstinence vs. safe sex" debate, the diversity movement, communication across genders, the meaning of postmodernism. What emerges in these pages is a theory of evolving ways of knowing that allows us to view adult development much as we view child development, as an open-ended process born of the dynamic interaction of cultural demands and emerging mental capabilities. If our culture is to be a good "school," as Kegan suggests, it must offer, along with a challenging curriculum. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
pt. I The Mental Demand of Adolescence
ch. 1 The Hidden Curriculum of Youth: "Whaddaya Want from Me?"
ch. 2 Coaching the Curriculum: A Bridge Must Be Well Anchored on Either Side
pt. II The Mental Demand of Private Life: Parenting and Partnering
ch. 3 Parenting: Minding Our Children
ch. 4 Partnering: Love and Consciousness
pt. III The Mental Demand of Public Life: Work and Self-Expansion
ch. 5 Working: On Seeking to Hire the Self-Employed
ch. 6 Dealing with Difference: Communication between the Sexes/Communication between the Theories
ch. 7 Healing: The Undiscussed Demands of Psychotherapy
ch. 8 Learning: "The Teacher Wants Us to Be Self-Directing"
pt. IV The Mental Demand of Postmodern Life
ch. 9 Conflict, Leadership, and Knowledge Creation
ch. 10 On Being Good Company for the Wrong Journey
Epilogue
Notes
Index

Knowledge, Difference, and Power: Essays Inspired by Women's Ways of Knowing
Additional Info:
Ten years ago, Mary Belenky, Blythe Clinchy, Nancy Goldberger, and Jill Tarule wrote Women's Ways of Knowing, a book The New York Times Book Review called "a framework for future research on women, knowledge, and identity." In the decade that followed, their theory of women's psychology, development, and ways of knowing has been applied in several fields, from the social sciences to the humanities, women's studies, education, psychology, and law. ...
Ten years ago, Mary Belenky, Blythe Clinchy, Nancy Goldberger, and Jill Tarule wrote Women's Ways of Knowing, a book The New York Times Book Review called "a framework for future research on women, knowledge, and identity." In the decade that followed, their theory of women's psychology, development, and ways of knowing has been applied in several fields, from the social sciences to the humanities, women's studies, education, psychology, and law. ...
Additional Info:
Ten years ago, Mary Belenky, Blythe Clinchy, Nancy Goldberger, and Jill Tarule wrote Women's Ways of Knowing, a book The New York Times Book Review called "a framework for future research on women, knowledge, and identity." In the decade that followed, their theory of women's psychology, development, and ways of knowing has been applied in several fields, from the social sciences to the humanities, women's studies, education, psychology, and law. But even as it was embraced by readers, Women's Ways of Knowing also became the center of a fierce debate within academic circles. Now, in 14 illuminating new essays, the original authors and invited contributors explore how the theory introduced in Women's Ways of Knowing has developed and shifted over the years and how it has been received, applied, used, and abused. The authors, and others, respond to critics of the original theory. The essays also expand the original argument beyond gender and knowing to address the complicating factors of race, class, and culture. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: The Beginning of the Story: Collaboration and Separation
Introduction: Looking Backward, Looking Forward
ch. 1 Reconfiguring Teaching and Knowing in the College Classroom (Ann Stanton)
ch. 2 Women's Ways of "Knowing" Law: Feminist Legal Epistemology, Pedagogy, and Jurisprudence (Carrie Menkel-Meadow)
ch. 3 Embodying Knowledge, Knowing Desire: Authority and Split Subjectivities in Girls' Epistemological Development (Elizabeth Debold, Deborah Tolman, and Lyn Mikel Brown)
ch. 4 Connected Knowing in Constructive Psychotherapy (Michael J. Mahoney)
ch. 5 Women's Ways of Knowing in Women's Studies, Feminist Pedagogies, and Feminist Theory (A. Maher with Mary Kay Tetreault)
ch. 6 Unknown Women and Unknowing Research: Consequences of Color and Class in Feminist Psychology (Vanessa M. Bing and Paela Trotman Reid)
ch. 7 Connected and Separate Knowing: Toward a Marriage of Two Minds (Blythe McVicker Clinchy)
ch. 8 Reason's "Femininity": A Case for Connected Knowing (Sara Ruddick)
ch. 9 Voices in Dialogue: Collaborative Ways of Knowing (Jill Mattuck Tarule)
ch. 10 Speech Is Silver, Silence Is Gold: The Asymmetrical Intersubjectivity of Communicative Action (Patrocinio P. Schweickart)
ch. 11 Cultural Imperatives and Diversity in Ways of Knowing (Nancy Rule Goldberger)
ch. 12 Strategic Suspensions: Feminists of Color Theorize the Production of Knowledge (Ada Hurtado)
ch. 13 Public Homeplaces: Nurturing the Development of People, Families, and Communities (Mary Field Belenky)
ch. 14 Gendered Ways of Knowing and the "Epistemological Crisis" of the West (Sandra Harding)
Contributors
Index
Ten years ago, Mary Belenky, Blythe Clinchy, Nancy Goldberger, and Jill Tarule wrote Women's Ways of Knowing, a book The New York Times Book Review called "a framework for future research on women, knowledge, and identity." In the decade that followed, their theory of women's psychology, development, and ways of knowing has been applied in several fields, from the social sciences to the humanities, women's studies, education, psychology, and law. But even as it was embraced by readers, Women's Ways of Knowing also became the center of a fierce debate within academic circles. Now, in 14 illuminating new essays, the original authors and invited contributors explore how the theory introduced in Women's Ways of Knowing has developed and shifted over the years and how it has been received, applied, used, and abused. The authors, and others, respond to critics of the original theory. The essays also expand the original argument beyond gender and knowing to address the complicating factors of race, class, and culture. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: The Beginning of the Story: Collaboration and Separation
Introduction: Looking Backward, Looking Forward
ch. 1 Reconfiguring Teaching and Knowing in the College Classroom (Ann Stanton)
ch. 2 Women's Ways of "Knowing" Law: Feminist Legal Epistemology, Pedagogy, and Jurisprudence (Carrie Menkel-Meadow)
ch. 3 Embodying Knowledge, Knowing Desire: Authority and Split Subjectivities in Girls' Epistemological Development (Elizabeth Debold, Deborah Tolman, and Lyn Mikel Brown)
ch. 4 Connected Knowing in Constructive Psychotherapy (Michael J. Mahoney)
ch. 5 Women's Ways of Knowing in Women's Studies, Feminist Pedagogies, and Feminist Theory (A. Maher with Mary Kay Tetreault)
ch. 6 Unknown Women and Unknowing Research: Consequences of Color and Class in Feminist Psychology (Vanessa M. Bing and Paela Trotman Reid)
ch. 7 Connected and Separate Knowing: Toward a Marriage of Two Minds (Blythe McVicker Clinchy)
ch. 8 Reason's "Femininity": A Case for Connected Knowing (Sara Ruddick)
ch. 9 Voices in Dialogue: Collaborative Ways of Knowing (Jill Mattuck Tarule)
ch. 10 Speech Is Silver, Silence Is Gold: The Asymmetrical Intersubjectivity of Communicative Action (Patrocinio P. Schweickart)
ch. 11 Cultural Imperatives and Diversity in Ways of Knowing (Nancy Rule Goldberger)
ch. 12 Strategic Suspensions: Feminists of Color Theorize the Production of Knowledge (Ada Hurtado)
ch. 13 Public Homeplaces: Nurturing the Development of People, Families, and Communities (Mary Field Belenky)
ch. 14 Gendered Ways of Knowing and the "Epistemological Crisis" of the West (Sandra Harding)
Contributors
Index

What's the Point in Discussion?
Additional Info:
Shows how to make learning and teaching by discussion more effective by using an approach that promotes the enhanced creativity of those involved in discussion groups of all types. Explains how to design discussion tasks to teach problem solving, decision making, and interpersonal skills, drawing on modern cognitive psychology and group dynamics. For university teachers, industry trainers, and those in human resources. Distributed by ISBS. Bligh is recognized as a ...
Shows how to make learning and teaching by discussion more effective by using an approach that promotes the enhanced creativity of those involved in discussion groups of all types. Explains how to design discussion tasks to teach problem solving, decision making, and interpersonal skills, drawing on modern cognitive psychology and group dynamics. For university teachers, industry trainers, and those in human resources. Distributed by ISBS. Bligh is recognized as a ...
Additional Info:
Shows how to make learning and teaching by discussion more effective by using an approach that promotes the enhanced creativity of those involved in discussion groups of all types. Explains how to design discussion tasks to teach problem solving, decision making, and interpersonal skills, drawing on modern cognitive psychology and group dynamics. For university teachers, industry trainers, and those in human resources. Distributed by ISBS. Bligh is recognized as a pioneer in university staff development, and maintains consultancies on staff appraisal, training, and professional development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part I What can Discussion Achieve?
ch. 1 Discussion is effective, but not efficient, to teach information
ch. 2 Discussion methods can teach thinking
ch. 3 Discussion can develop attitudes, values and motivation
ch. 4 Specific methods teach interpersonal skills
Part II What Discussion Tasks Develop Thought and Attitudes?
ch. 5 Listening and attending
ch. 6 Tasks to help group members understand and talk
ch. 7 The use of reason
ch. 8 Problem-solving
ch. 9 Teaching creativity
ch. 10 Decision-making and judgement
ch. 11 Developing `affect'
Part III What Factors Affect Interaction in Discussion Groups?
ch. 12 What motives and emotions affect group members?
ch. 13 How is a group influenced by its tasks?
ch. 14 Norms, conformity and deviants
ch. 15 Which characteristics of group members make a difference?
ch. 16 Factors related to group size
ch. 17 Group structure and leadership
ch. 18 The history and previous experience of the group
ch. 19 The influence of the environment
ch. 20 Patterns of interaction in small group discussion
Part IV A Developmental Sequence of Discussion Methods
ch. 21 Tutorless groups
ch. 22 Tutorless groups with procedures for particular tasks
ch. 23 Tutor participation in discussion
Appendices
References
Index
Shows how to make learning and teaching by discussion more effective by using an approach that promotes the enhanced creativity of those involved in discussion groups of all types. Explains how to design discussion tasks to teach problem solving, decision making, and interpersonal skills, drawing on modern cognitive psychology and group dynamics. For university teachers, industry trainers, and those in human resources. Distributed by ISBS. Bligh is recognized as a pioneer in university staff development, and maintains consultancies on staff appraisal, training, and professional development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part I What can Discussion Achieve?
ch. 1 Discussion is effective, but not efficient, to teach information
ch. 2 Discussion methods can teach thinking
ch. 3 Discussion can develop attitudes, values and motivation
ch. 4 Specific methods teach interpersonal skills
Part II What Discussion Tasks Develop Thought and Attitudes?
ch. 5 Listening and attending
ch. 6 Tasks to help group members understand and talk
ch. 7 The use of reason
ch. 8 Problem-solving
ch. 9 Teaching creativity
ch. 10 Decision-making and judgement
ch. 11 Developing `affect'
Part III What Factors Affect Interaction in Discussion Groups?
ch. 12 What motives and emotions affect group members?
ch. 13 How is a group influenced by its tasks?
ch. 14 Norms, conformity and deviants
ch. 15 Which characteristics of group members make a difference?
ch. 16 Factors related to group size
ch. 17 Group structure and leadership
ch. 18 The history and previous experience of the group
ch. 19 The influence of the environment
ch. 20 Patterns of interaction in small group discussion
Part IV A Developmental Sequence of Discussion Methods
ch. 21 Tutorless groups
ch. 22 Tutorless groups with procedures for particular tasks
ch. 23 Tutor participation in discussion
Appendices
References
Index

Getting It Published: A Guide for Scholars and Anyone Else Serious about Serious Books
Additional Info:
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from ...
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from ...
Additional Info:
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from basics on publishers and their duties, to the details of writing, editing, and presenting a proposal; surviving the review process; the details of contracts; writing for collections and anthologies; and how to present the finished manuscript. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 What Do Publishers Do?
ch. 3 Writing the Manuscript
ch. 4 Selecting a Publisher
ch. 5 Your Proposal
ch. 6 What Editors Look For
ch. 7 Surviving the Review Process
ch. 8 What a Contract Means
ch. 9 Collections and Anthologies
ch. 10 Quotations, Pictures, and Other Headaches
ch. 11 How to Deliver a Manuscript
ch. 12 And Then What Happens to It
ch. 13 This Book - And the Next
For Further Reading
Index
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from basics on publishers and their duties, to the details of writing, editing, and presenting a proposal; surviving the review process; the details of contracts; writing for collections and anthologies; and how to present the finished manuscript. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 What Do Publishers Do?
ch. 3 Writing the Manuscript
ch. 4 Selecting a Publisher
ch. 5 Your Proposal
ch. 6 What Editors Look For
ch. 7 Surviving the Review Process
ch. 8 What a Contract Means
ch. 9 Collections and Anthologies
ch. 10 Quotations, Pictures, and Other Headaches
ch. 11 How to Deliver a Manuscript
ch. 12 And Then What Happens to It
ch. 13 This Book - And the Next
For Further Reading
Index

Outbursts in Academe: Multiculturalism and Other Sources of Conflict
Additional Info:
Outbursts in Academe advances a new theoretical notion in the composition classroom: the concept of "outburst" as a single, researchable moment in the lives of teachers and students. (From the Publisher)
Outbursts in Academe advances a new theoretical notion in the composition classroom: the concept of "outburst" as a single, researchable moment in the lives of teachers and students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Outbursts in Academe advances a new theoretical notion in the composition classroom: the concept of "outburst" as a single, researchable moment in the lives of teachers and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Outbursts: The Theory and a Guide to Reading (K. Dixon & W. Archibald)
ch. 1 Immodest Proposals Cyborg Bodies: Race, Class, Gender, and Communications Technology (C. Winkelmann)
ch. 2 Macho in the Killing Zone or How to Survive Multicultural Reality (B. Davis)
ch. 3 Responses: Whose Icon? (J. Degan)
ch. 4 Beyond Stereotypes: Las Latinas Caught Between Linguas y Culturas (A. Perez)
ch. 5 Inter-view One: Reading Conflict in English Studies (K. Dixon)
ch. 6 Classroom Conflicts
ch. 7 Revisiting White Feminist Authority or Gang Life in the University Classroom (K. Dixon)
ch. 8 Essays That Never Were: Deaf Identity and Resistance in the Mainstream Classroom (J. Anderson)
ch. 9 A Captivity Narrative: Indians, Mixedbloods, and the "White" Academy (S. Lyons)
ch. 10 Responses: "Mixedblood" Rhetorics and the Concept of "Outbursts"(P. Bizzell)
ch. 11 Beyond Liberal and Cultural Approaches to Social Justice (E. Flynn)
ch. 12 Formations of "Multicultural" Selves and Institutions
ch. 13 Inter-view Two: Lost Outbursts (K. Dixon)
ch. 14 Super-Mammy or Super-Sellout? Young, Black, and Female in the Academy (D. Paul)
ch. 15 "Lost and Melted in the Pot": Multicultural Literacy in Predominantly White Classrooms (D. Starke-Meyerring)
ch. 16 Response: Dangerous Critique: Academic Freedom and Institutional Constraint (S. Dilks)
Outbursts in Academe advances a new theoretical notion in the composition classroom: the concept of "outburst" as a single, researchable moment in the lives of teachers and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Outbursts: The Theory and a Guide to Reading (K. Dixon & W. Archibald)
ch. 1 Immodest Proposals Cyborg Bodies: Race, Class, Gender, and Communications Technology (C. Winkelmann)
ch. 2 Macho in the Killing Zone or How to Survive Multicultural Reality (B. Davis)
ch. 3 Responses: Whose Icon? (J. Degan)
ch. 4 Beyond Stereotypes: Las Latinas Caught Between Linguas y Culturas (A. Perez)
ch. 5 Inter-view One: Reading Conflict in English Studies (K. Dixon)
ch. 6 Classroom Conflicts
ch. 7 Revisiting White Feminist Authority or Gang Life in the University Classroom (K. Dixon)
ch. 8 Essays That Never Were: Deaf Identity and Resistance in the Mainstream Classroom (J. Anderson)
ch. 9 A Captivity Narrative: Indians, Mixedbloods, and the "White" Academy (S. Lyons)
ch. 10 Responses: "Mixedblood" Rhetorics and the Concept of "Outbursts"(P. Bizzell)
ch. 11 Beyond Liberal and Cultural Approaches to Social Justice (E. Flynn)
ch. 12 Formations of "Multicultural" Selves and Institutions
ch. 13 Inter-view Two: Lost Outbursts (K. Dixon)
ch. 14 Super-Mammy or Super-Sellout? Young, Black, and Female in the Academy (D. Paul)
ch. 15 "Lost and Melted in the Pot": Multicultural Literacy in Predominantly White Classrooms (D. Starke-Meyerring)
ch. 16 Response: Dangerous Critique: Academic Freedom and Institutional Constraint (S. Dilks)

Scholarship Revisited: Perspectives on the Scholarship of Teaching
Additional Info:
Despite growing literature and research, the scholarship of teaching is a subject that has experienced considerable ambiguity, as well as unresolved issues in its assessment and evaluation. With innovative and practical solutions designed to improve the scholarly process as a whole, this issue presents the outcomes of a Delphi Study conducted by an international panel of academics working in postsecondary teaching and learning and faculty evaluation scholarship. Examining the growth ...
Despite growing literature and research, the scholarship of teaching is a subject that has experienced considerable ambiguity, as well as unresolved issues in its assessment and evaluation. With innovative and practical solutions designed to improve the scholarly process as a whole, this issue presents the outcomes of a Delphi Study conducted by an international panel of academics working in postsecondary teaching and learning and faculty evaluation scholarship. Examining the growth ...
Additional Info:
Despite growing literature and research, the scholarship of teaching is a subject that has experienced considerable ambiguity, as well as unresolved issues in its assessment and evaluation. With innovative and practical solutions designed to improve the scholarly process as a whole, this issue presents the outcomes of a Delphi Study conducted by an international panel of academics working in postsecondary teaching and learning and faculty evaluation scholarship. Examining the growth in the scholarship of teaching from different perspectives, the authors identify its important components, define its characteristics and outcomes, and reach consensus on its most pressing issues. They discuss in greater depth a model to guide much needed educational development initiatives as well as the crucial role of the faculty developer in promoting effective growth and development. Achieving their goal to present the scholarship of teaching in a way that is consistent with its research, the authors have contributed a valuable resource for current and future scholarship in this important field. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Conceptualizing the Scholarship of Teaching and Identifying Unresolved Issues(Carolin Kreber)
ch. 1 The Framework for This Volume
ch. 2 The Relation Between Research and the Scholarship of Teaching (Michael B. Paulsen)
ch. 3 Assessing the Scholarship of Teaching: Valid Decisions from Valid Evidence (Michael Theall, John A. Centra)
ch. 4 Learning More from the Wisdom of Practice (Maryellen Weimer)
ch. 5 Scholarly Teaching and the Scholarship of Teaching (Laurie Richlin)
ch. 6 Expertise and the Scholarship of Teaching (Ronald Smith)
ch. 7 The Scholarship of Teaching and Its Implementation in Faculty Development and Graduate Education (Carolin Kreber)
ch. 8 Making Explicit the Development Toward the Scholarship of Teaching (Cynthia B. Weston, Lynn McAlpine)
ch. 9 Observations, Reflections, and Speculations: What We Have Learned About the Scholarship of Teaching and Where It Might Lead (Carolin Kreber)
Index
Despite growing literature and research, the scholarship of teaching is a subject that has experienced considerable ambiguity, as well as unresolved issues in its assessment and evaluation. With innovative and practical solutions designed to improve the scholarly process as a whole, this issue presents the outcomes of a Delphi Study conducted by an international panel of academics working in postsecondary teaching and learning and faculty evaluation scholarship. Examining the growth in the scholarship of teaching from different perspectives, the authors identify its important components, define its characteristics and outcomes, and reach consensus on its most pressing issues. They discuss in greater depth a model to guide much needed educational development initiatives as well as the crucial role of the faculty developer in promoting effective growth and development. Achieving their goal to present the scholarship of teaching in a way that is consistent with its research, the authors have contributed a valuable resource for current and future scholarship in this important field. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Conceptualizing the Scholarship of Teaching and Identifying Unresolved Issues(Carolin Kreber)
ch. 1 The Framework for This Volume
ch. 2 The Relation Between Research and the Scholarship of Teaching (Michael B. Paulsen)
ch. 3 Assessing the Scholarship of Teaching: Valid Decisions from Valid Evidence (Michael Theall, John A. Centra)
ch. 4 Learning More from the Wisdom of Practice (Maryellen Weimer)
ch. 5 Scholarly Teaching and the Scholarship of Teaching (Laurie Richlin)
ch. 6 Expertise and the Scholarship of Teaching (Ronald Smith)
ch. 7 The Scholarship of Teaching and Its Implementation in Faculty Development and Graduate Education (Carolin Kreber)
ch. 8 Making Explicit the Development Toward the Scholarship of Teaching (Cynthia B. Weston, Lynn McAlpine)
ch. 9 Observations, Reflections, and Speculations: What We Have Learned About the Scholarship of Teaching and Where It Might Lead (Carolin Kreber)
Index


The Skillful Teacher: On Technique, Trust and Responsiveness in the Classroom
Additional Info:
The widely-renowned adult educator Stephen Brookfield explains how teachers in settings as diverse as college, adult education, and secondary school can resolve common teaching dilemmas by becoming more responsive to the emotions, tensions, and pace of student learning in order to build trust and overcome students' resistance to learning. (From the Publisher)
The widely-renowned adult educator Stephen Brookfield explains how teachers in settings as diverse as college, adult education, and secondary school can resolve common teaching dilemmas by becoming more responsive to the emotions, tensions, and pace of student learning in order to build trust and overcome students' resistance to learning. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The widely-renowned adult educator Stephen Brookfield explains how teachers in settings as diverse as college, adult education, and secondary school can resolve common teaching dilemmas by becoming more responsive to the emotions, tensions, and pace of student learning in order to build trust and overcome students' resistance to learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching: A Complex and Passionate Experience
ch. 2 Developing a Personal Vision of Teaching
ch. 3 Teaching Responsively
ch. 4 Understanding the Tensions and Emotions of Learning
ch. 5 Adjusting Teaching to the Rhythms of Learning
ch. 6 Lecturing Creatively
ch. 7 Preparing for Discussion
ch. 8 Facilitating Discussions
ch. 9 Using Simulations and Role Playing
ch. 10 Giving Helpful Evaluations
ch. 11 Overcoming Resistance to Learning
ch. 12 Building Trust with Students
ch. 13 Dealing with the Political Realities of Teaching
ch. 14 Some Truths About Skillful Teaching
The widely-renowned adult educator Stephen Brookfield explains how teachers in settings as diverse as college, adult education, and secondary school can resolve common teaching dilemmas by becoming more responsive to the emotions, tensions, and pace of student learning in order to build trust and overcome students' resistance to learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teaching: A Complex and Passionate Experience
ch. 2 Developing a Personal Vision of Teaching
ch. 3 Teaching Responsively
ch. 4 Understanding the Tensions and Emotions of Learning
ch. 5 Adjusting Teaching to the Rhythms of Learning
ch. 6 Lecturing Creatively
ch. 7 Preparing for Discussion
ch. 8 Facilitating Discussions
ch. 9 Using Simulations and Role Playing
ch. 10 Giving Helpful Evaluations
ch. 11 Overcoming Resistance to Learning
ch. 12 Building Trust with Students
ch. 13 Dealing with the Political Realities of Teaching
ch. 14 Some Truths About Skillful Teaching


Wise Women: Reflections of Teachers at Midlife
Additional Info:
Wise Women is a collection of autobiographical essays by important and renowned teachers at mid-life. The essays, which are deeply personal, will focus on how these women negotiate the psychological, physical, and social changes brought on by menopause and how the aging process affects their lives as professionals, feminists, writers, mentors, and instructors in the academy. The book addresses such questions as the following: What challenges are left for the ...
Wise Women is a collection of autobiographical essays by important and renowned teachers at mid-life. The essays, which are deeply personal, will focus on how these women negotiate the psychological, physical, and social changes brought on by menopause and how the aging process affects their lives as professionals, feminists, writers, mentors, and instructors in the academy. The book addresses such questions as the following: What challenges are left for the ...
Additional Info:
Wise Women is a collection of autobiographical essays by important and renowned teachers at mid-life. The essays, which are deeply personal, will focus on how these women negotiate the psychological, physical, and social changes brought on by menopause and how the aging process affects their lives as professionals, feminists, writers, mentors, and instructors in the academy. The book addresses such questions as the following: What challenges are left for the feminists who came of age during the women's movement and now have achieved academic success? How do women teachers experience their aging selves in the classroom? and What legacy will mid-life women leave their younger women colleagues? All of these questions, as well as many others, are covered in this insightful and groundbreaking work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Part I Body & Time
ch. 1. Teaching Where I Was Taught: Coming Home (Mary Gordon)
ch. 2. Game Plans (Mimi Schwartz)
ch. 3. "Pregnant with [Myself], at Last": Images of Midlife/A Journal Entry (Jan Zlotnik Schmidt)
ch. 4. "Saturating Language with Love": Variations on a Dream (Marlene A. Schiwy)
ch. 5. The Time of Our Lives: The Public Life of Teaching (Patricia C. Phillips)
Part II Ripening & Rootedness
ch. 6. Reverie (Jane Tompkins)
ch. 7. Goodbye, Ms. Chips (Julia Alvarez)
ch. 8. But Tell Me, Do You Like Teaching? (Patricia Hampl)
ch. 9. Me, Myself, Menopause, and I (Dona Lee Davis)
ch. 10. Reflections on Teaching (and Life in General) Once You've Become a Grandmother (Jean Bethke Elshtain)
ch. 11. Mud Ponies (Diane Glancy)
ch. 12. Unsettled Weather (Gail B. Griffin)
Part III Feisty & Girls
ch. 13. Academic Witchery: Snakes and Snails and Scholarly Tales (Dean Falk)
ch. 14. Choice Points and Courage (Diane F. Halpern)
ch. 15. I Can't Hear ... I Can't See ... I Can't Remember Anything (Lynne Taetzsch)
ch. 16. Memories of a "First Woman" (Tikva Simone Frymer)
ch. 17. Rant for Old Teachers (Paula Gunn Allen)
Part IV Teaching in Time
ch. 18. A Teaching Life (Christa L. Walck)
ch. 19. Too Soon Old, Too Late Smart (Gayle Pemberton)
ch. 20. Ecstasy: Teaching and Learning without Limits (Bell Hooks)
ch. 21. Re-viewing Our Professional Lives: Talking (and Listening) for a Living (Margaret Matlin)
ch. 22. On Statutes and Dogs, Poems and "Regs," and Life inside the Classroom (Judy Scales-Trent)
ch. 23. Exploring Critical Feminist Pedagogy: Revelations and Confessions about Teaching at Midlife (Esther Ngan-ling Chow)
Part V Community & Generativity
ch. 24. Themes That Link through Time (Sue V. Rosser)
ch. 25. Naming, Sharing, Speaking: Teaching in Midlife (Jean F. O'Barr)
ch. 26. "Thinking Back through [My] Mother": Reclaiming Anger, Advocacy, and Pleasure in Teaching (Judith A. Dorney)
ch. 27. Charis = Light = Grace (Phyllis R. Freeman)
Notes and References
Selected Bibliography
Contributors
Acknowledgments
Wise Women is a collection of autobiographical essays by important and renowned teachers at mid-life. The essays, which are deeply personal, will focus on how these women negotiate the psychological, physical, and social changes brought on by menopause and how the aging process affects their lives as professionals, feminists, writers, mentors, and instructors in the academy. The book addresses such questions as the following: What challenges are left for the feminists who came of age during the women's movement and now have achieved academic success? How do women teachers experience their aging selves in the classroom? and What legacy will mid-life women leave their younger women colleagues? All of these questions, as well as many others, are covered in this insightful and groundbreaking work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Part I Body & Time
ch. 1. Teaching Where I Was Taught: Coming Home (Mary Gordon)
ch. 2. Game Plans (Mimi Schwartz)
ch. 3. "Pregnant with [Myself], at Last": Images of Midlife/A Journal Entry (Jan Zlotnik Schmidt)
ch. 4. "Saturating Language with Love": Variations on a Dream (Marlene A. Schiwy)
ch. 5. The Time of Our Lives: The Public Life of Teaching (Patricia C. Phillips)
Part II Ripening & Rootedness
ch. 6. Reverie (Jane Tompkins)
ch. 7. Goodbye, Ms. Chips (Julia Alvarez)
ch. 8. But Tell Me, Do You Like Teaching? (Patricia Hampl)
ch. 9. Me, Myself, Menopause, and I (Dona Lee Davis)
ch. 10. Reflections on Teaching (and Life in General) Once You've Become a Grandmother (Jean Bethke Elshtain)
ch. 11. Mud Ponies (Diane Glancy)
ch. 12. Unsettled Weather (Gail B. Griffin)
Part III Feisty & Girls
ch. 13. Academic Witchery: Snakes and Snails and Scholarly Tales (Dean Falk)
ch. 14. Choice Points and Courage (Diane F. Halpern)
ch. 15. I Can't Hear ... I Can't See ... I Can't Remember Anything (Lynne Taetzsch)
ch. 16. Memories of a "First Woman" (Tikva Simone Frymer)
ch. 17. Rant for Old Teachers (Paula Gunn Allen)
Part IV Teaching in Time
ch. 18. A Teaching Life (Christa L. Walck)
ch. 19. Too Soon Old, Too Late Smart (Gayle Pemberton)
ch. 20. Ecstasy: Teaching and Learning without Limits (Bell Hooks)
ch. 21. Re-viewing Our Professional Lives: Talking (and Listening) for a Living (Margaret Matlin)
ch. 22. On Statutes and Dogs, Poems and "Regs," and Life inside the Classroom (Judy Scales-Trent)
ch. 23. Exploring Critical Feminist Pedagogy: Revelations and Confessions about Teaching at Midlife (Esther Ngan-ling Chow)
Part V Community & Generativity
ch. 24. Themes That Link through Time (Sue V. Rosser)
ch. 25. Naming, Sharing, Speaking: Teaching in Midlife (Jean F. O'Barr)
ch. 26. "Thinking Back through [My] Mother": Reclaiming Anger, Advocacy, and Pleasure in Teaching (Judith A. Dorney)
ch. 27. Charis = Light = Grace (Phyllis R. Freeman)
Notes and References
Selected Bibliography
Contributors
Acknowledgments


The Practice of Change: Concepts and Models for Service-Learning in Women's Studies
Additional Info:
This volume, seventh in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, explores the important lessons women's history and women's studies hold for the broader service-learning community and the critical opportunity for women's studies to reconnect with its activist past. The book includes essays with real examples of service-learning projects in women's studies and lists an extensive bibliography of service-learning and women's studies sources. (From the Publisher)
This volume, seventh in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, explores the important lessons women's history and women's studies hold for the broader service-learning community and the critical opportunity for women's studies to reconnect with its activist past. The book includes essays with real examples of service-learning projects in women's studies and lists an extensive bibliography of service-learning and women's studies sources. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This volume, seventh in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, explores the important lessons women's history and women's studies hold for the broader service-learning community and the critical opportunity for women's studies to reconnect with its activist past. The book includes essays with real examples of service-learning projects in women's studies and lists an extensive bibliography of service-learning and women's studies sources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Theory and History
On Critical Thinking and Connected Knowing (Blythe McVicker Clinchy)
Educating the Artist: A Political Statement (S.A. Bachman, with D. Attyah)
A Feminist Challenge to Community Service: A Call to Politicize Service-Learning (Tobi Walker)
The History of Women and Service in the United States: A Rich and Complex Heritage (Helen Damon-Moore)
Service-Learning and Women's Studies: A Community College Perspective (Karen Bojar)
Part Two: Educating For Action
The "Different Voice" of Service (Catherine Ludlum Foos)
Learning Across Boundaries: Women' Studies, Praxis, and Community Service (Mary Trigg and Barbara J. Balliet)
Women's Studies and Community-Based Service-Learning: A Natural Affinity (Patricia A. Washington)
Educated in Agency: Student Reflections on the Feminist Service-Learning Classroom (Melissa Kesler Gilbert)
The Urban Educational Initiative: Supporting Educational Partnerships With Young, Urban Girls (Kimberly Farah and Kerrissa Heffernan)
Part Three: Narrating The Journey
Women, AIDS, and Social Justice: An Autobiography of Activism and Academia (Sally Zierler)
TCBY in Limón, Costa Rica: Women's Studies and the (Re)construction of Identity in International Service-Learning (Debra J. Liebowitz)
"Civic Character" Engaged: Adult Learners and Service-Learning (Eve Allegra Raimon and Jan L. Hitchcock)
Resolving a Conundrum: Incorporating Service-Learning Into a Women and the Law Course (Mary Pat Treuthart)
Bibliography
This volume, seventh in the Service-Learning in the Disciplines Series, explores the important lessons women's history and women's studies hold for the broader service-learning community and the critical opportunity for women's studies to reconnect with its activist past. The book includes essays with real examples of service-learning projects in women's studies and lists an extensive bibliography of service-learning and women's studies sources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Theory and History
On Critical Thinking and Connected Knowing (Blythe McVicker Clinchy)
Educating the Artist: A Political Statement (S.A. Bachman, with D. Attyah)
A Feminist Challenge to Community Service: A Call to Politicize Service-Learning (Tobi Walker)
The History of Women and Service in the United States: A Rich and Complex Heritage (Helen Damon-Moore)
Service-Learning and Women's Studies: A Community College Perspective (Karen Bojar)
Part Two: Educating For Action
The "Different Voice" of Service (Catherine Ludlum Foos)
Learning Across Boundaries: Women' Studies, Praxis, and Community Service (Mary Trigg and Barbara J. Balliet)
Women's Studies and Community-Based Service-Learning: A Natural Affinity (Patricia A. Washington)
Educated in Agency: Student Reflections on the Feminist Service-Learning Classroom (Melissa Kesler Gilbert)
The Urban Educational Initiative: Supporting Educational Partnerships With Young, Urban Girls (Kimberly Farah and Kerrissa Heffernan)
Part Three: Narrating The Journey
Women, AIDS, and Social Justice: An Autobiography of Activism and Academia (Sally Zierler)
TCBY in Limón, Costa Rica: Women's Studies and the (Re)construction of Identity in International Service-Learning (Debra J. Liebowitz)
"Civic Character" Engaged: Adult Learners and Service-Learning (Eve Allegra Raimon and Jan L. Hitchcock)
Resolving a Conundrum: Incorporating Service-Learning Into a Women and the Law Course (Mary Pat Treuthart)
Bibliography


Connecting Past and Present: Concepts and Models for Service-Learning in History
Additional Info:
This volume, 16th in a series about service learning and the academic disciplines, focuses on the ways service learning adds immediacy and relevance to the study of history. The authors of this collection provide answers to why history and service learning should be connected, and they describe strategies to bring this about. (From the Publisher)
This volume, 16th in a series about service learning and the academic disciplines, focuses on the ways service learning adds immediacy and relevance to the study of history. The authors of this collection provide answers to why history and service learning should be connected, and they describe strategies to bring this about. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This volume, 16th in a series about service learning and the academic disciplines, focuses on the ways service learning adds immediacy and relevance to the study of history. The authors of this collection provide answers to why history and service learning should be connected, and they describe strategies to bring this about. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "Service-Learning as a Strategy for Advancing the Contemporary University and the Discipline of History"
ch. 2 "Service-Learning, Academically Based Community Service, and the Historic Mission of the American Urban Research University"
ch. 3 "Emerson's Prophecy"
ch. 4 "Service-Learning and History: Training the Metaphorical Mind"
ch. 5 "The Turnerian Frontier: A New Approach to the Study of the American Character"
ch. 6 "Reflections of a Historian Teaching a Service-Learning Course about Poverty and Homelessness in America"
ch. 7 "History as Public Work"
ch. 8 "Reclaiming the Historical Tradition of Service in the African American Community"
ch. 9 "Service-Learning as a Tool of Engagement: From Thomas Aquinas to Che Guevara"
ch. 10 "Serving and Learning in the Chilean Desert"
ch. 11 "Classical Studies and the Search for Community"
ch. 12 "The Unspoken Purposes of Service-Learning: Teaching the Holocaust"
This volume, 16th in a series about service learning and the academic disciplines, focuses on the ways service learning adds immediacy and relevance to the study of history. The authors of this collection provide answers to why history and service learning should be connected, and they describe strategies to bring this about. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "Service-Learning as a Strategy for Advancing the Contemporary University and the Discipline of History"
ch. 2 "Service-Learning, Academically Based Community Service, and the Historic Mission of the American Urban Research University"
ch. 3 "Emerson's Prophecy"
ch. 4 "Service-Learning and History: Training the Metaphorical Mind"
ch. 5 "The Turnerian Frontier: A New Approach to the Study of the American Character"
ch. 6 "Reflections of a Historian Teaching a Service-Learning Course about Poverty and Homelessness in America"
ch. 7 "History as Public Work"
ch. 8 "Reclaiming the Historical Tradition of Service in the African American Community"
ch. 9 "Service-Learning as a Tool of Engagement: From Thomas Aquinas to Che Guevara"
ch. 10 "Serving and Learning in the Chilean Desert"
ch. 11 "Classical Studies and the Search for Community"
ch. 12 "The Unspoken Purposes of Service-Learning: Teaching the Holocaust"


Beyond the Tower: Concepts and Models for Service-Learning in Philosophy
Additional Info:
This volume is part of a series of 18 monographs service learning and the academic disciplines. This collection focuses on the use of service learning as an approach to teaching and learning in philosophy. (From the Publisher)
This volume is part of a series of 18 monographs service learning and the academic disciplines. This collection focuses on the use of service learning as an approach to teaching and learning in philosophy. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This volume is part of a series of 18 monographs service learning and the academic disciplines. This collection focuses on the use of service learning as an approach to teaching and learning in philosophy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part 1 "Service-Learning as a Mode of Philosophical Inquiry," focus on the epistemological and philosophical aspects of service-learning as a pedagogy: "Knowledge, Foundations, and Discourse: Philosophical Support for Service-Learning" (Goodwin Liu); "Feminism, Postmodernism, and Service-Learning" (Irene E. Harvey); "Listening to the Evidence: Service Activity and Understanding Social Phenomena" (Hugh Lacey); "The Use of a Philosopher: Socrates and Myles Horton" (John Wallace); "Praxis-Informed Philosophy" (C. David Lisman); "Fluid Boundaries: Service-Learning and the Experience of Community" (Cathy Ludlum Foos); "Service-Learning, Citizenship, and the Philosophy of Law" (Stephen L. Esquith); and "Deepening Democratic Participation through Deweyan Pragmatism" (Judith M. Green).
Part 2 "Course Narratives,": "Service-Learning as a Vehicle for Teaching Philosophy" (Eugene J. Valentine); "Service-Learning in Perspectives on Poverty" (Carolyn H. Magid); "Service-Learning in Ethics: A New Pedagogical Approach to the Old Theory-vs.-Practice Challenge" (Sally J. Scholz); "The Power of Service-Learning in Developing Critical-Thinking Skills" (Mary Esther Schnaubelt); and "Sojourning in the Art World: Service-Learning in Philosophy of Art" (Dan Lloyd). An afterword, "Philosophical Inquiry as Responsible Engagement" (William M. Sullivan), is included.
A 40-item annotated bibliography is appended. (All essays contain references.)
This volume is part of a series of 18 monographs service learning and the academic disciplines. This collection focuses on the use of service learning as an approach to teaching and learning in philosophy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Part 1 "Service-Learning as a Mode of Philosophical Inquiry," focus on the epistemological and philosophical aspects of service-learning as a pedagogy: "Knowledge, Foundations, and Discourse: Philosophical Support for Service-Learning" (Goodwin Liu); "Feminism, Postmodernism, and Service-Learning" (Irene E. Harvey); "Listening to the Evidence: Service Activity and Understanding Social Phenomena" (Hugh Lacey); "The Use of a Philosopher: Socrates and Myles Horton" (John Wallace); "Praxis-Informed Philosophy" (C. David Lisman); "Fluid Boundaries: Service-Learning and the Experience of Community" (Cathy Ludlum Foos); "Service-Learning, Citizenship, and the Philosophy of Law" (Stephen L. Esquith); and "Deepening Democratic Participation through Deweyan Pragmatism" (Judith M. Green).
Part 2 "Course Narratives,": "Service-Learning as a Vehicle for Teaching Philosophy" (Eugene J. Valentine); "Service-Learning in Perspectives on Poverty" (Carolyn H. Magid); "Service-Learning in Ethics: A New Pedagogical Approach to the Old Theory-vs.-Practice Challenge" (Sally J. Scholz); "The Power of Service-Learning in Developing Critical-Thinking Skills" (Mary Esther Schnaubelt); and "Sojourning in the Art World: Service-Learning in Philosophy of Art" (Dan Lloyd). An afterword, "Philosophical Inquiry as Responsible Engagement" (William M. Sullivan), is included.
A 40-item annotated bibliography is appended. (All essays contain references.)


Teaching from a Multicultural Perspective
Additional Info:
The authors of this volume, all experienced teachers and administrators, outline how to teach in a multicultural environment. They suggest classroom strategies, curriculum reforms and assessment tools that work for all students. (From the Publisher)
The authors of this volume, all experienced teachers and administrators, outline how to teach in a multicultural environment. They suggest classroom strategies, curriculum reforms and assessment tools that work for all students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The authors of this volume, all experienced teachers and administrators, outline how to teach in a multicultural environment. They suggest classroom strategies, curriculum reforms and assessment tools that work for all students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Once You Accept, Then You Can Teach (Juan C. Gonzalez)
ch. 2 Diversity and Change on Campus (Helen R. Roberts)
ch. 3 Teaching All Students Equally (Ray Lou)
ch. 4 Including Multicultural Content and Perspectives in Your Courses (Otis Scott)
ch. 5 Languages and Cultures in the Classroom (Ann Johns)
ch. 6 Equity in Classroom Assessment (Olita Harris)
ch. 7 On Becoming a Mensch or a Mentor (Delores Huff)
Appendix: A Student Profile Questionnaire
About the Authors
The authors of this volume, all experienced teachers and administrators, outline how to teach in a multicultural environment. They suggest classroom strategies, curriculum reforms and assessment tools that work for all students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Once You Accept, Then You Can Teach (Juan C. Gonzalez)
ch. 2 Diversity and Change on Campus (Helen R. Roberts)
ch. 3 Teaching All Students Equally (Ray Lou)
ch. 4 Including Multicultural Content and Perspectives in Your Courses (Otis Scott)
ch. 5 Languages and Cultures in the Classroom (Ann Johns)
ch. 6 Equity in Classroom Assessment (Olita Harris)
ch. 7 On Becoming a Mensch or a Mentor (Delores Huff)
Appendix: A Student Profile Questionnaire
About the Authors


No Angel in the Classroom: Teaching Through Feminist Discourse
Additional Info:
Taking a fresh look at questions that have long troubled teachers committed to social change, No Angel in the Classroom: Feminist Pedagogy as Political Practice provides a richly conceptualized and down-to-earth account of feminist teaching in higher education. Long-time feminist educator, Berenice Malka Fisher, gives a nuanced interpretation of second wave feminist consciousness-raising that bridges the gap between feminist activism and the academy. Candid classroom stories bring out the contradictions ...
Taking a fresh look at questions that have long troubled teachers committed to social change, No Angel in the Classroom: Feminist Pedagogy as Political Practice provides a richly conceptualized and down-to-earth account of feminist teaching in higher education. Long-time feminist educator, Berenice Malka Fisher, gives a nuanced interpretation of second wave feminist consciousness-raising that bridges the gap between feminist activism and the academy. Candid classroom stories bring out the contradictions ...
Additional Info:
Taking a fresh look at questions that have long troubled teachers committed to social change, No Angel in the Classroom: Feminist Pedagogy as Political Practice provides a richly conceptualized and down-to-earth account of feminist teaching in higher education. Long-time feminist educator, Berenice Malka Fisher, gives a nuanced interpretation of second wave feminist consciousness-raising that bridges the gap between feminist activism and the academy. Candid classroom stories bring out the contradictions embedded in many activist ideals of the 1970s, while Fisher’s informed analysis builds on these tensions, offering a complex account of experience, emotion, thought, and action in feminist teaching. By developing a theory carefully shaped around practice. Fisher presents a thoughtful repsonse to the numerous attacks on “feminist pedagogy” launced in the 1980s and 90s. No Angel in the Classroom does not offer simple solutions, yet it helps politically engaged teachers to think through knotty problems that arise in their work. Can feminist teachers exercise authority without being authoritarian? Should “caring” lie at the core of feminist teaching’? Where does “safety” fit into classes in which teachers and students voice strong opinions and talk about personal matters? How can feminist teaching give serious attention to “differences” such as race, class, and sexual orientation? Intended for both veteran and beginning teachers, as well as others committed to social change, this groundbreaking book provides a pedagogical vision that inspires both passion and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Where I Come From
ch. 1 What Is Feminist Pedagogy?
ch. 2 Is Women's Experience the Best Teacher? Different Ways of Knowing
ch. 3 The Rocky Road to Feminist Empowerment: Questioning Authority
ch. 4 No Angel in the Classroom: Exploring the Ethic of Care
ch. 5 Dangerous Curves: Safety and Self-Disclosure
ch. 6 "Women Do Not Say 'We'": Difference and the Ideal of Community
ch. 7 Innocents and Intellectuals: Is There Hope for Feminist Teaching
Postscript: Where Can I Go from Here?
Notes
Bibliography
Index
About the Author
Taking a fresh look at questions that have long troubled teachers committed to social change, No Angel in the Classroom: Feminist Pedagogy as Political Practice provides a richly conceptualized and down-to-earth account of feminist teaching in higher education. Long-time feminist educator, Berenice Malka Fisher, gives a nuanced interpretation of second wave feminist consciousness-raising that bridges the gap between feminist activism and the academy. Candid classroom stories bring out the contradictions embedded in many activist ideals of the 1970s, while Fisher’s informed analysis builds on these tensions, offering a complex account of experience, emotion, thought, and action in feminist teaching. By developing a theory carefully shaped around practice. Fisher presents a thoughtful repsonse to the numerous attacks on “feminist pedagogy” launced in the 1980s and 90s. No Angel in the Classroom does not offer simple solutions, yet it helps politically engaged teachers to think through knotty problems that arise in their work. Can feminist teachers exercise authority without being authoritarian? Should “caring” lie at the core of feminist teaching’? Where does “safety” fit into classes in which teachers and students voice strong opinions and talk about personal matters? How can feminist teaching give serious attention to “differences” such as race, class, and sexual orientation? Intended for both veteran and beginning teachers, as well as others committed to social change, this groundbreaking book provides a pedagogical vision that inspires both passion and critical thinking. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Where I Come From
ch. 1 What Is Feminist Pedagogy?
ch. 2 Is Women's Experience the Best Teacher? Different Ways of Knowing
ch. 3 The Rocky Road to Feminist Empowerment: Questioning Authority
ch. 4 No Angel in the Classroom: Exploring the Ethic of Care
ch. 5 Dangerous Curves: Safety and Self-Disclosure
ch. 6 "Women Do Not Say 'We'": Difference and the Ideal of Community
ch. 7 Innocents and Intellectuals: Is There Hope for Feminist Teaching
Postscript: Where Can I Go from Here?
Notes
Bibliography
Index
About the Author
Additional Info:
This timely look at the state of Christian higher education in America contains descriptive, historical narratives that explore how fourteen Christian colleges and universities are successfully integrating faith and learning on their campuses despite the challenges posed by the increasingly pluralistic nature of modern culture. Written by respected representatives from seven major faith traditions - Roman Catholic, Lutheran, Reformed, Mennonite, Evangelical, Wesleyan/Holiness, and Baptist/Restorationist - these narratives are ...
This timely look at the state of Christian higher education in America contains descriptive, historical narratives that explore how fourteen Christian colleges and universities are successfully integrating faith and learning on their campuses despite the challenges posed by the increasingly pluralistic nature of modern culture. Written by respected representatives from seven major faith traditions - Roman Catholic, Lutheran, Reformed, Mennonite, Evangelical, Wesleyan/Holiness, and Baptist/Restorationist - these narratives are ...
Additional Info:
This timely look at the state of Christian higher education in America contains descriptive, historical narratives that explore how fourteen Christian colleges and universities are successfully integrating faith and learning on their campuses despite the challenges posed by the increasingly pluralistic nature of modern culture. Written by respected representatives from seven major faith traditions - Roman Catholic, Lutheran, Reformed, Mennonite, Evangelical, Wesleyan/Holiness, and Baptist/Restorationist - these narratives are also preceded by introductory essays that define the worldview and theological heritage of each given tradition and ask what that tradition can contribute to the task of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
What Can the Roman Catholic Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Faith and Learning at the College of Saint Benedict and Saint John's University
The University of Portland: Center of Christian Humanism
What Can the Lutheran Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Religious Vision and Academic Quest at St. Olaf College
Faith and Learning at California Lutheran University
What Can the Reformed Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Piety and Progress: A History of Calvin College
Whitworth College: Evangelical in the Reformed Tradition
What Can the Mennonite Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Goshen College and Its Church Relations: History and Reflections
Religious Idealism and Academic Vocation at Fresno Pacific College
What Can the Evangelical/Interdenominational Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Faith and Learning at Wheaton College
Clarity through Ambiguity: Transforming Tensions at Seattle Pacific University
What Can the Wesleyan/Holiness Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
The History and Character of Messiah College, 1909-1995
Point Loma Nazarene College: Modernization in Christian Higher Education
What Can the Baptist Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Christian Identity and Academic Rigor: The Case of Samford University
What Can the Church of Christ Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Faith and Learning at Pepperdine University
The Christian University: Maintaining Distinctions in a Pluralistic Culture
Notes on Contributors
This timely look at the state of Christian higher education in America contains descriptive, historical narratives that explore how fourteen Christian colleges and universities are successfully integrating faith and learning on their campuses despite the challenges posed by the increasingly pluralistic nature of modern culture. Written by respected representatives from seven major faith traditions - Roman Catholic, Lutheran, Reformed, Mennonite, Evangelical, Wesleyan/Holiness, and Baptist/Restorationist - these narratives are also preceded by introductory essays that define the worldview and theological heritage of each given tradition and ask what that tradition can contribute to the task of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
What Can the Roman Catholic Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Faith and Learning at the College of Saint Benedict and Saint John's University
The University of Portland: Center of Christian Humanism
What Can the Lutheran Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Religious Vision and Academic Quest at St. Olaf College
Faith and Learning at California Lutheran University
What Can the Reformed Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Piety and Progress: A History of Calvin College
Whitworth College: Evangelical in the Reformed Tradition
What Can the Mennonite Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Goshen College and Its Church Relations: History and Reflections
Religious Idealism and Academic Vocation at Fresno Pacific College
What Can the Evangelical/Interdenominational Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Faith and Learning at Wheaton College
Clarity through Ambiguity: Transforming Tensions at Seattle Pacific University
What Can the Wesleyan/Holiness Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
The History and Character of Messiah College, 1909-1995
Point Loma Nazarene College: Modernization in Christian Higher Education
What Can the Baptist Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Christian Identity and Academic Rigor: The Case of Samford University
What Can the Church of Christ Tradition Contribute to Christian Higher Education?
Faith and Learning at Pepperdine University
The Christian University: Maintaining Distinctions in a Pluralistic Culture
Notes on Contributors

The Future Compatible Campus: Planning, Designing, and Implementing Information Technology in the Academy
Additional Info:
The Future Compatible Campus can assist all of us in framing a workable plan and translating that plan into action. We know that we must prepare for the future; Oblinger and Rush help us do so with intelligence and forethought. (From the Publisher)
The Future Compatible Campus can assist all of us in framing a workable plan and translating that plan into action. We know that we must prepare for the future; Oblinger and Rush help us do so with intelligence and forethought. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The Future Compatible Campus can assist all of us in framing a workable plan and translating that plan into action. We know that we must prepare for the future; Oblinger and Rush help us do so with intelligence and forethought. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Preface and Chapter Summary
Acknowledgments
Part 1: The Rationale for the Future Compatible Campus
ch. 1 Transforming the Academy (Kristine A. Hafner and Diana G. Oblinger)
Part 2: Planning for the Future
ch. 2 A Strategy for I/T Investments (William H. Graves)
ch. 3 Strategic Information Technology Planning in Higher Education (Charles R. Moran)
ch. 4 Staging for the Launch: An Implementation Planning Framework (Thomas C. Wunderle)
ch. 5 Student Services for the 21st Century: Creating the Student-Centered Environment (Martha A. Beede and Darlene J. Burnett)
Part 3: Moving Toward the Future in Teaching and Learning
ch. 6 Student Mobile Computing (Diana G. Oblinger, Mark Resmer, and James R. Mingle)
ch. 7 Wake Forest University's Strategic Plan for Technology (David G. Brown)
ch. 8 Collaborative Learning (Edwin J. Pinheiro)
ch. 9 Instructional Technology and the Mainstream: The Risks of Success (William H. Geoghegan)
ch. 10 Making Ends Meet: A Faculty Perspective on Computing and Scholarship (James S. Noblitt)
Part 4: Developing the Infrastructure
ch. 11 The Importance of the Campus Network Infrastructure (Richard Nichols)
ch. 12 Planning for Success: Are You Ready for Clent/Server? (David L. Bellamy and Danuta C. McCall)
ch. 13 Designing Classrooms for the 21st Century (Kathryn L. Conway)
ch. 14 Prepare Today for the Digital Library of Tomorrow (Richard P. Hulser)
ch. 15 Managing Innovation: Project Implementation in Higher Education (D. Lawrence Bivins)
Part 5: Measuring Success
ch. 16 Knowing How It Is All Working: The Role of Performance Measurements (James W. Cortada)
Index
The Future Compatible Campus can assist all of us in framing a workable plan and translating that plan into action. We know that we must prepare for the future; Oblinger and Rush help us do so with intelligence and forethought. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Preface and Chapter Summary
Acknowledgments
Part 1: The Rationale for the Future Compatible Campus
ch. 1 Transforming the Academy (Kristine A. Hafner and Diana G. Oblinger)
Part 2: Planning for the Future
ch. 2 A Strategy for I/T Investments (William H. Graves)
ch. 3 Strategic Information Technology Planning in Higher Education (Charles R. Moran)
ch. 4 Staging for the Launch: An Implementation Planning Framework (Thomas C. Wunderle)
ch. 5 Student Services for the 21st Century: Creating the Student-Centered Environment (Martha A. Beede and Darlene J. Burnett)
Part 3: Moving Toward the Future in Teaching and Learning
ch. 6 Student Mobile Computing (Diana G. Oblinger, Mark Resmer, and James R. Mingle)
ch. 7 Wake Forest University's Strategic Plan for Technology (David G. Brown)
ch. 8 Collaborative Learning (Edwin J. Pinheiro)
ch. 9 Instructional Technology and the Mainstream: The Risks of Success (William H. Geoghegan)
ch. 10 Making Ends Meet: A Faculty Perspective on Computing and Scholarship (James S. Noblitt)
Part 4: Developing the Infrastructure
ch. 11 The Importance of the Campus Network Infrastructure (Richard Nichols)
ch. 12 Planning for Success: Are You Ready for Clent/Server? (David L. Bellamy and Danuta C. McCall)
ch. 13 Designing Classrooms for the 21st Century (Kathryn L. Conway)
ch. 14 Prepare Today for the Digital Library of Tomorrow (Richard P. Hulser)
ch. 15 Managing Innovation: Project Implementation in Higher Education (D. Lawrence Bivins)
Part 5: Measuring Success
ch. 16 Knowing How It Is All Working: The Role of Performance Measurements (James W. Cortada)
Index


Basics of Teaching for Christians: Preparation, Instruction, Evaluation
Additional Info:
Helps educators regain focus in their teaching by offering a concise guide to their craft's essential elements: preparation, instruction, and evaluation. (From the Publisher)
Helps educators regain focus in their teaching by offering a concise guide to their craft's essential elements: preparation, instruction, and evaluation. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Helps educators regain focus in their teaching by offering a concise guide to their craft's essential elements: preparation, instruction, and evaluation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Preparation
ch. 2 Instruction
ch. 3 Evaluation
Conclusion
Notes
Select Bibliography
Index
Helps educators regain focus in their teaching by offering a concise guide to their craft's essential elements: preparation, instruction, and evaluation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Preparation
ch. 2 Instruction
ch. 3 Evaluation
Conclusion
Notes
Select Bibliography
Index

Providing Culturally Relevant Adult Education: A Challenge for the Twenty-First Century
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education offers an examination of theoretical and practical issues in providing adult education services to socially, politically, and culturally marginalized groups in the United States, with a particular focus on learner culture from the perspective of authors who share that cultural background." "Culturally relevant adult education focuses on popular culture, that is, learner culture and the cultural context of adult education ...
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education offers an examination of theoretical and practical issues in providing adult education services to socially, politically, and culturally marginalized groups in the United States, with a particular focus on learner culture from the perspective of authors who share that cultural background." "Culturally relevant adult education focuses on popular culture, that is, learner culture and the cultural context of adult education ...
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education offers an examination of theoretical and practical issues in providing adult education services to socially, politically, and culturally marginalized groups in the United States, with a particular focus on learner culture from the perspective of authors who share that cultural background." "Culturally relevant adult education focuses on popular culture, that is, learner culture and the cultural context of adult education programs. The contributors to this volume present and discuss various issues, models, and practices that marginalized learners can use to take control of their learning and their lives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Culture as Context for Education: The Need for Culturally Relevant Adult Education (Talmadge C. Guy)
ch. 2 Adult Learning: Moving Toward More Inclusive Theories and Practices (Donna D. Amstutz)
ch. 3 Giving Voice: Inclusion of African American Students' Polyrhythmic Realities in Adult Basic Education (Vanessa Sheared)
ch. 4 The Quest for Visibility in adult Education: The Hispanic Experience (Jorge Jeria)
ch. 5 Navajo Language and Culture in Adult Education (Louise Lockard)
This volume of New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education offers an examination of theoretical and practical issues in providing adult education services to socially, politically, and culturally marginalized groups in the United States, with a particular focus on learner culture from the perspective of authors who share that cultural background." "Culturally relevant adult education focuses on popular culture, that is, learner culture and the cultural context of adult education programs. The contributors to this volume present and discuss various issues, models, and practices that marginalized learners can use to take control of their learning and their lives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Culture as Context for Education: The Need for Culturally Relevant Adult Education (Talmadge C. Guy)
ch. 2 Adult Learning: Moving Toward More Inclusive Theories and Practices (Donna D. Amstutz)
ch. 3 Giving Voice: Inclusion of African American Students' Polyrhythmic Realities in Adult Basic Education (Vanessa Sheared)
ch. 4 The Quest for Visibility in adult Education: The Hispanic Experience (Jorge Jeria)
ch. 5 Navajo Language and Culture in Adult Education (Louise Lockard)

Spitwad Sutras: Classroom Teaching as Sublime Vocation
Additional Info:
This work goes beyond the basics of classroom management to consider the path of both teacher and student toward authentic intellectual maturity and spiritual growth. It provides a framework for stripping away the external and personal pressures that bleed intellectual content out of classroom teaching so that teachers may, in fact, experience their vocation as "sublime." Written in the novelistic first-person narrative, it is a seasoned teacher's story of his ...
This work goes beyond the basics of classroom management to consider the path of both teacher and student toward authentic intellectual maturity and spiritual growth. It provides a framework for stripping away the external and personal pressures that bleed intellectual content out of classroom teaching so that teachers may, in fact, experience their vocation as "sublime." Written in the novelistic first-person narrative, it is a seasoned teacher's story of his ...
Additional Info:
This work goes beyond the basics of classroom management to consider the path of both teacher and student toward authentic intellectual maturity and spiritual growth. It provides a framework for stripping away the external and personal pressures that bleed intellectual content out of classroom teaching so that teachers may, in fact, experience their vocation as "sublime." Written in the novelistic first-person narrative, it is a seasoned teacher's story of his initiation from graduate student at the University of Chicago to ninth-grade teacher in a Catholic high school where he manned the battle lines in provincial, petty, sometime even violent world of American secondary school. It is also the story of how a certain Brother Blake, a 67-year-old practitioner of the "pedagogy of the sublime," passed on his vision of classroom teaching as a sublime vocation. A major contribution to the field by the acclaimed author of The Ignorant Perfection of Ordinary People. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Vocation or Provocation?
ch. 2 The Dialectics of Discipline
ch. 3 Breakthrough
ch. 4 The Lost Art
ch. 5 Classroom Praxis from A to B
ch. 6 Ceremonies Sacred and Profane
ch. 7 Attempting the Impossible
ch. 8 Teaching Social Science: The Lost Civilization of Octopia
ch. 9 Teaching English Composition: The Spirit and the Semicolon
ch. 10 Teaching Social Justice: The Classroom as Culture Clash
ch. 11 Teaching Sex Education
ch. 12 Teaching Literature: Making the World Safe for Franz Kafka
ch. 13 Higher Education
ch. 14 Program Notes
Maxims, Aphorisms, Insights, and Reflections on the Art of Classroom Teaching
Selected Readings
Index
This work goes beyond the basics of classroom management to consider the path of both teacher and student toward authentic intellectual maturity and spiritual growth. It provides a framework for stripping away the external and personal pressures that bleed intellectual content out of classroom teaching so that teachers may, in fact, experience their vocation as "sublime." Written in the novelistic first-person narrative, it is a seasoned teacher's story of his initiation from graduate student at the University of Chicago to ninth-grade teacher in a Catholic high school where he manned the battle lines in provincial, petty, sometime even violent world of American secondary school. It is also the story of how a certain Brother Blake, a 67-year-old practitioner of the "pedagogy of the sublime," passed on his vision of classroom teaching as a sublime vocation. A major contribution to the field by the acclaimed author of The Ignorant Perfection of Ordinary People. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Vocation or Provocation?
ch. 2 The Dialectics of Discipline
ch. 3 Breakthrough
ch. 4 The Lost Art
ch. 5 Classroom Praxis from A to B
ch. 6 Ceremonies Sacred and Profane
ch. 7 Attempting the Impossible
ch. 8 Teaching Social Science: The Lost Civilization of Octopia
ch. 9 Teaching English Composition: The Spirit and the Semicolon
ch. 10 Teaching Social Justice: The Classroom as Culture Clash
ch. 11 Teaching Sex Education
ch. 12 Teaching Literature: Making the World Safe for Franz Kafka
ch. 13 Higher Education
ch. 14 Program Notes
Maxims, Aphorisms, Insights, and Reflections on the Art of Classroom Teaching
Selected Readings
Index

Millennials Rising: The Next Great Generation
Additional Info:
By the authors of the bestselling 13th Gen, the first in-depth examination of the Millennials—the generation born after 1982.
In this remarkable account, certain to stir the interest of educators, counselors, parents, and people in all types of business as well as young people themselves, Neil Howe and William Strauss introduce the nation to a powerful new generation: the Millennials. They will also explain:
Why today's ...
By the authors of the bestselling 13th Gen, the first in-depth examination of the Millennials—the generation born after 1982.
In this remarkable account, certain to stir the interest of educators, counselors, parents, and people in all types of business as well as young people themselves, Neil Howe and William Strauss introduce the nation to a powerful new generation: the Millennials. They will also explain:
Why today's ...
Additional Info:
By the authors of the bestselling 13th Gen, the first in-depth examination of the Millennials—the generation born after 1982.
In this remarkable account, certain to stir the interest of educators, counselors, parents, and people in all types of business as well as young people themselves, Neil Howe and William Strauss introduce the nation to a powerful new generation: the Millennials. They will also explain:
Why today's teens are smart, well-behaved, and optimisitc, and why you won't hear older people say that.
Why they get along so well with their Boomer and Xer parents.
Why Millennial collegians will bring a new youth revolution to America's campuses.
Why names like "Generation Y" and "Echo Boom" just don't work for today's kids.
Having looked at oceans of data, taken their own polls, and talked to hundreds of kids, parents, and teachers, Howe and Strauss explain how Millennials are turning out to be so dramatically different from Xers and boomers and how, in time, they will become the next great generation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One - where They come From
ch. 1 The Next Great Generation
ch. 2 From Babies on Board to Power Teens
ch. 3 The Coming Millennial Revolution
Part Two - who They are
ch. 4 The Baby Boomlet (demography)
ch. 5 Kinderpolitics (political economy)
ch. 6 Ground Zero of the Culture Wars (family)
ch. 7 Raising Standards for Regular Kids (school)
ch. 8 Jiggy with It (pace of life)
ch. 9 Zero Tolerance (conduct)
ch. 10 Junior Citizens (community)
ch. 11 The Happiness Business (culture)
ch. 12 Rocket Cash (commerce)
ch. 13 Planet Pokemon (world)
Part Three - where They're going
ch. 14 The Clock Is Tickin'
ch. 15 Hero Generations in History
ch. 16 A Capacity for Greatness
Millennials Rising
Afterword
Notes
By the authors of the bestselling 13th Gen, the first in-depth examination of the Millennials—the generation born after 1982.
In this remarkable account, certain to stir the interest of educators, counselors, parents, and people in all types of business as well as young people themselves, Neil Howe and William Strauss introduce the nation to a powerful new generation: the Millennials. They will also explain:
Why today's teens are smart, well-behaved, and optimisitc, and why you won't hear older people say that.
Why they get along so well with their Boomer and Xer parents.
Why Millennial collegians will bring a new youth revolution to America's campuses.
Why names like "Generation Y" and "Echo Boom" just don't work for today's kids.
Having looked at oceans of data, taken their own polls, and talked to hundreds of kids, parents, and teachers, Howe and Strauss explain how Millennials are turning out to be so dramatically different from Xers and boomers and how, in time, they will become the next great generation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One - where They come From
ch. 1 The Next Great Generation
ch. 2 From Babies on Board to Power Teens
ch. 3 The Coming Millennial Revolution
Part Two - who They are
ch. 4 The Baby Boomlet (demography)
ch. 5 Kinderpolitics (political economy)
ch. 6 Ground Zero of the Culture Wars (family)
ch. 7 Raising Standards for Regular Kids (school)
ch. 8 Jiggy with It (pace of life)
ch. 9 Zero Tolerance (conduct)
ch. 10 Junior Citizens (community)
ch. 11 The Happiness Business (culture)
ch. 12 Rocket Cash (commerce)
ch. 13 Planet Pokemon (world)
Part Three - where They're going
ch. 14 The Clock Is Tickin'
ch. 15 Hero Generations in History
ch. 16 A Capacity for Greatness
Millennials Rising
Afterword
Notes

The Close: A Young Woman's First Year at Seminary
Additional Info:
An intimate and inspiring chronicle of a young woman entering a vocation that for centuries has been the exclusive dominion of menSet in the context of the Church Year, The Close is an enthralling account of one young woman's spiritual journey. It is both a personal meditation on faith, in the spirit of Kathleen Norris's Cloister Walk, and a fascinating behind-the-scenes story of a graduate student's first year, in the ...
An intimate and inspiring chronicle of a young woman entering a vocation that for centuries has been the exclusive dominion of menSet in the context of the Church Year, The Close is an enthralling account of one young woman's spiritual journey. It is both a personal meditation on faith, in the spirit of Kathleen Norris's Cloister Walk, and a fascinating behind-the-scenes story of a graduate student's first year, in the ...
Additional Info:
An intimate and inspiring chronicle of a young woman entering a vocation that for centuries has been the exclusive dominion of menSet in the context of the Church Year, The Close is an enthralling account of one young woman's spiritual journey. It is both a personal meditation on faith, in the spirit of Kathleen Norris's Cloister Walk, and a fascinating behind-the-scenes story of a graduate student's first year, in the mode of Scott Turow's One L. Raised in a liberal, interfaith home, Breyer, responding to an inner call to a spiritual vocation, began her training at New York's General Theological Seminary in 1997. She describes her intense immersion in daily prayer, the rigors and rewards of the academic program, and the challenging tension between secular and spiritual that marks her training, including working as a chaplain at Bellevue Hospital. She probes the day-to-day meanings of such profound issues as exaltation, enlightenment, and redemption, illuminating the unique experience of a young person of faith preparing to live and hoping to thrive in a secular modern world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Coming into the Kingdom
ch. 1 Advent
ch. 2 Christmas
ch. 3 Epiphany
ch. 4 Lent
ch. 5 Easter
ch. 6 Pentecost
Acknowledgments
An intimate and inspiring chronicle of a young woman entering a vocation that for centuries has been the exclusive dominion of menSet in the context of the Church Year, The Close is an enthralling account of one young woman's spiritual journey. It is both a personal meditation on faith, in the spirit of Kathleen Norris's Cloister Walk, and a fascinating behind-the-scenes story of a graduate student's first year, in the mode of Scott Turow's One L. Raised in a liberal, interfaith home, Breyer, responding to an inner call to a spiritual vocation, began her training at New York's General Theological Seminary in 1997. She describes her intense immersion in daily prayer, the rigors and rewards of the academic program, and the challenging tension between secular and spiritual that marks her training, including working as a chaplain at Bellevue Hospital. She probes the day-to-day meanings of such profound issues as exaltation, enlightenment, and redemption, illuminating the unique experience of a young person of faith preparing to live and hoping to thrive in a secular modern world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Coming into the Kingdom
ch. 1 Advent
ch. 2 Christmas
ch. 3 Epiphany
ch. 4 Lent
ch. 5 Easter
ch. 6 Pentecost
Acknowledgments
Additional Info:
Can Christian Faith sustain the life of the mind? To many academics this question seems absurd. In their judgment, religion is fundamentally dogmatic, whereas the life of the mind requires openness, creativity, and imagination. This assumption about the nature of religion in general, and Christianity in particular, has contributed significantly over the past century to the divorce between faith and learning at countless colleges and universities in the United States.<...
Can Christian Faith sustain the life of the mind? To many academics this question seems absurd. In their judgment, religion is fundamentally dogmatic, whereas the life of the mind requires openness, creativity, and imagination. This assumption about the nature of religion in general, and Christianity in particular, has contributed significantly over the past century to the divorce between faith and learning at countless colleges and universities in the United States.<...
Additional Info:
Can Christian Faith sustain the life of the mind? To many academics this question seems absurd. In their judgment, religion is fundamentally dogmatic, whereas the life of the mind requires openness, creativity, and imagination. This assumption about the nature of religion in general, and Christianity in particular, has contributed significantly over the past century to the divorce between faith and learning at countless colleges and universities in the United States.
In this powerful -- yet very personal -- reflection on faith and scholarship, Richard T. Hughes counters the widespread perception of Christians as steeped in narrowness and dogmatism, and provides a compelling argument that faith, properly pursued, in fact nourishes the openness and curiosity that make a life of the mind possible. Neither an assessment of contemporary church-related higher education nor a lamentation over the process of secularization, this book is instead a badly needed aid for academics in both private and public institutions who want to connect Christian faith with scholarship and teaching in meaningful and effective ways.
Defining the "life of the mind" in terms of disciplined search for truth, genuine conversation with diverse viewpoints, critical thinking and analysis, and intellectual creativity, Hughes shows that such life, far from being impeded by Christian faith, can actually be enhanced by it -- but only if Christians learn to think theologically and to break through the particularities of their own traditions.
Hughes first examines the way the deism of the Founding Fathers defines the values of the modern academy in the United States, and he asks how the Christian tradition might interact with these values in meaningful ways. He then looks at four different Christian traditions -- Catholic, Reformed, Anabaptist, and Lutheran -- and the different ways they sustain the life of the mind. When he turns to teaching, Hughes uses his own classroom work as an illustration of how a commitment to some of the great themes of Christian theology can undergird both the form and the content of the teaching task. Finally, in an especially poignant chapter, Hughes explores how good teaching and scholarship can be rooted in human suffering and tragedy.
After a spate of books and articles that merely mourn the decline of Christian intellectual life, here -- at last -- is a volume that offers a constructive assessment of how Christian faith can indeed sustain the life of the mind. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 The Religion of the Republic and the Life of the Mind
ch. 3 Christian Faith and the Life of the Mind
ch. 4 The Power of Christian Traditions
ch. 5 What Might It Mean to Teach from a Christian Perspective?
ch. 6 The Questions of Distinctiveness and Proclamation
Postscript: Tragedy, Christian Faith, and the Life of the Mind
Personal Reflections
Can Christian Faith sustain the life of the mind? To many academics this question seems absurd. In their judgment, religion is fundamentally dogmatic, whereas the life of the mind requires openness, creativity, and imagination. This assumption about the nature of religion in general, and Christianity in particular, has contributed significantly over the past century to the divorce between faith and learning at countless colleges and universities in the United States.
In this powerful -- yet very personal -- reflection on faith and scholarship, Richard T. Hughes counters the widespread perception of Christians as steeped in narrowness and dogmatism, and provides a compelling argument that faith, properly pursued, in fact nourishes the openness and curiosity that make a life of the mind possible. Neither an assessment of contemporary church-related higher education nor a lamentation over the process of secularization, this book is instead a badly needed aid for academics in both private and public institutions who want to connect Christian faith with scholarship and teaching in meaningful and effective ways.
Defining the "life of the mind" in terms of disciplined search for truth, genuine conversation with diverse viewpoints, critical thinking and analysis, and intellectual creativity, Hughes shows that such life, far from being impeded by Christian faith, can actually be enhanced by it -- but only if Christians learn to think theologically and to break through the particularities of their own traditions.
Hughes first examines the way the deism of the Founding Fathers defines the values of the modern academy in the United States, and he asks how the Christian tradition might interact with these values in meaningful ways. He then looks at four different Christian traditions -- Catholic, Reformed, Anabaptist, and Lutheran -- and the different ways they sustain the life of the mind. When he turns to teaching, Hughes uses his own classroom work as an illustration of how a commitment to some of the great themes of Christian theology can undergird both the form and the content of the teaching task. Finally, in an especially poignant chapter, Hughes explores how good teaching and scholarship can be rooted in human suffering and tragedy.
After a spate of books and articles that merely mourn the decline of Christian intellectual life, here -- at last -- is a volume that offers a constructive assessment of how Christian faith can indeed sustain the life of the mind. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 The Religion of the Republic and the Life of the Mind
ch. 3 Christian Faith and the Life of the Mind
ch. 4 The Power of Christian Traditions
ch. 5 What Might It Mean to Teach from a Christian Perspective?
ch. 6 The Questions of Distinctiveness and Proclamation
Postscript: Tragedy, Christian Faith, and the Life of the Mind
Personal Reflections

Higher Education Service-Learning Sourcebook
Additional Info:
Service-learning in higher education symbiotically combines community service and academic study--that both fields strengthen in the union is one reason for the movement's increasing popularity. This comprehensive guide to service-learning in colleges and universities includes an A-Z of key terms and concepts, a print and electronic resource guide, a directory of opportunities, and more.
Service-learning in higher education symbiotically combines community service and academic study--that both fields strengthen in the union is one reason for the movement's increasing popularity. This comprehensive guide to service-learning in colleges and universities includes an A-Z of key terms and concepts, a print and electronic resource guide, a directory of opportunities, and more.
Additional Info:
Service-learning in higher education symbiotically combines community service and academic study--that both fields strengthen in the union is one reason for the movement's increasing popularity. This comprehensive guide to service-learning in colleges and universities includes an A-Z of key terms and concepts, a print and electronic resource guide, a directory of opportunities, and more.
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Definitions and Terms and Concepts
ch. 2 Literature and Online Resources
ch. 3 Colleges and Universities with Service-Learning Programs or Courses
ch. 4 Service-Learning and Service Organizations, Associations, and Networks
ch. 5 Conferences, Colloquia, Institutes, and Academies
ch. 6 Awards, Scholarships, Fellowships, Internships, and Grants
App E-mail Questionnaire Used for Directory Entries
Bibliography
Index
Service-learning in higher education symbiotically combines community service and academic study--that both fields strengthen in the union is one reason for the movement's increasing popularity. This comprehensive guide to service-learning in colleges and universities includes an A-Z of key terms and concepts, a print and electronic resource guide, a directory of opportunities, and more.
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Definitions and Terms and Concepts
ch. 2 Literature and Online Resources
ch. 3 Colleges and Universities with Service-Learning Programs or Courses
ch. 4 Service-Learning and Service Organizations, Associations, and Networks
ch. 5 Conferences, Colloquia, Institutes, and Academies
ch. 6 Awards, Scholarships, Fellowships, Internships, and Grants
App E-mail Questionnaire Used for Directory Entries
Bibliography
Index

Riches for the Poor: The Clemente Course in the Humanities
Additional Info:
In this groundbreaking work, Shorris examines the nature of poverty in America today. Why are people poor, and why do they stay poor? Shorris argues that they lack politics, or the ability to participate fully in the public world; knowing only the immediacy and oppression of force, the poor remain trapped and isolated. To test his theory, he created an experimental school teaching art, logic, philosophy, and poetry to poor ...
In this groundbreaking work, Shorris examines the nature of poverty in America today. Why are people poor, and why do they stay poor? Shorris argues that they lack politics, or the ability to participate fully in the public world; knowing only the immediacy and oppression of force, the poor remain trapped and isolated. To test his theory, he created an experimental school teaching art, logic, philosophy, and poetry to poor ...
Additional Info:
In this groundbreaking work, Shorris examines the nature of poverty in America today. Why are people poor, and why do they stay poor? Shorris argues that they lack politics, or the ability to participate fully in the public world; knowing only the immediacy and oppression of force, the poor remain trapped and isolated. To test his theory, he created an experimental school teaching art, logic, philosophy, and poetry to poor people. Shorris hoped that, by studying the humanities, his students would learn to reflect and negotiate rather than simply react -- and would use this knowledge to break the cycle of poverty on their own. The results of his experiment proved nothing short of astonishing.
Here is the full story -- a completely revised and expanded edition of Shorris's New American Blues -- of the landmark endeavor that has spawned nearly two dozen programs in the United States, Canada, and Mexico, and that has been lauded from town meetings in the Yukon to the front page of the New York Times. Included in this book are reading lists and detailed information on the organization, staffing, and teaching methods used in the course. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Intentions
ch. 1 Richer Than Rockefeller
ch. 2 A Game of Poverty: Definitions
ch. 3 Born for Each Other
ch. 4 The Golden Age of Poverty
ch. 5 The Surround of Force
ch. 6 The Mirror of Force
ch. 7 The Fallacy of Work
ch. 8 Citizenship by Exclusion
ch. 9 Across Cultures
ch. 10 Political Inventions
ch. 11 A Prison Epiphany
ch. 12 adical Humanism
ch. 13 The Clemente Experiment Begins
ch. 14 The Bard Course
ch. 15 The Curriculum
ch. 16 Variations and Self-Criticism
ch. 17 Other Countries, Other Cultures
ch. 18 Conclusion: A Dangerous Corollary
Appendix
Index
In this groundbreaking work, Shorris examines the nature of poverty in America today. Why are people poor, and why do they stay poor? Shorris argues that they lack politics, or the ability to participate fully in the public world; knowing only the immediacy and oppression of force, the poor remain trapped and isolated. To test his theory, he created an experimental school teaching art, logic, philosophy, and poetry to poor people. Shorris hoped that, by studying the humanities, his students would learn to reflect and negotiate rather than simply react -- and would use this knowledge to break the cycle of poverty on their own. The results of his experiment proved nothing short of astonishing.
Here is the full story -- a completely revised and expanded edition of Shorris's New American Blues -- of the landmark endeavor that has spawned nearly two dozen programs in the United States, Canada, and Mexico, and that has been lauded from town meetings in the Yukon to the front page of the New York Times. Included in this book are reading lists and detailed information on the organization, staffing, and teaching methods used in the course. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Intentions
ch. 1 Richer Than Rockefeller
ch. 2 A Game of Poverty: Definitions
ch. 3 Born for Each Other
ch. 4 The Golden Age of Poverty
ch. 5 The Surround of Force
ch. 6 The Mirror of Force
ch. 7 The Fallacy of Work
ch. 8 Citizenship by Exclusion
ch. 9 Across Cultures
ch. 10 Political Inventions
ch. 11 A Prison Epiphany
ch. 12 adical Humanism
ch. 13 The Clemente Experiment Begins
ch. 14 The Bard Course
ch. 15 The Curriculum
ch. 16 Variations and Self-Criticism
ch. 17 Other Countries, Other Cultures
ch. 18 Conclusion: A Dangerous Corollary
Appendix
Index

Michigan Journal of Community Service Learning: Service-Learning Course Design Workbook
Additional Info:
This companion volume to the Michigan Journal of Community Service Learning clarifies the conceptualization of academic service-learning (and how it is different from other community-based pedagogical models), establishes clear criteria to determine bona fide service-learning courses, and provides a resource that walks an instructor through the process of designing and developing a service-learning course. Rich with planning worksheets, this workbook is a must-have resource for faculty and those responsible for ...
This companion volume to the Michigan Journal of Community Service Learning clarifies the conceptualization of academic service-learning (and how it is different from other community-based pedagogical models), establishes clear criteria to determine bona fide service-learning courses, and provides a resource that walks an instructor through the process of designing and developing a service-learning course. Rich with planning worksheets, this workbook is a must-have resource for faculty and those responsible for ...
Additional Info:
This companion volume to the Michigan Journal of Community Service Learning clarifies the conceptualization of academic service-learning (and how it is different from other community-based pedagogical models), establishes clear criteria to determine bona fide service-learning courses, and provides a resource that walks an instructor through the process of designing and developing a service-learning course. Rich with planning worksheets, this workbook is a must-have resource for faculty and those responsible for faculty development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
A Growing Problem
Purpose of this Workbook
Using this Workbook
Section 1: Clarifying the Conceptualization
Section 2: Foundational Resources
Section 3: Relevant and Meaningful Service with the Community
Section 4: Enhanced Academic Learning
Section 5: Purposeful Civic Learning
Section 6: Final Thoughts
Section 7: Companion Resources
This companion volume to the Michigan Journal of Community Service Learning clarifies the conceptualization of academic service-learning (and how it is different from other community-based pedagogical models), establishes clear criteria to determine bona fide service-learning courses, and provides a resource that walks an instructor through the process of designing and developing a service-learning course. Rich with planning worksheets, this workbook is a must-have resource for faculty and those responsible for faculty development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
A Growing Problem
Purpose of this Workbook
Using this Workbook
Section 1: Clarifying the Conceptualization
Section 2: Foundational Resources
Section 3: Relevant and Meaningful Service with the Community
Section 4: Enhanced Academic Learning
Section 5: Purposeful Civic Learning
Section 6: Final Thoughts
Section 7: Companion Resources

Techniques and strategies for interpreting student evaluations
Additional Info:
Examines the critical subject of student evaluations of teaching, furnishing both the research base behind the use of student ratings and practical suggestions for interpreting the data they provide. Focuses on all phases of the student rating process - from data gathering methods to presentation of results. Topics include methods of encouraging meaningful evaluations, midsemester feedback, uses of quality teams and focus groups, and creating questions that target individual faculty ...
Examines the critical subject of student evaluations of teaching, furnishing both the research base behind the use of student ratings and practical suggestions for interpreting the data they provide. Focuses on all phases of the student rating process - from data gathering methods to presentation of results. Topics include methods of encouraging meaningful evaluations, midsemester feedback, uses of quality teams and focus groups, and creating questions that target individual faculty ...
Additional Info:
Examines the critical subject of student evaluations of teaching, furnishing both the research base behind the use of student ratings and practical suggestions for interpreting the data they provide. Focuses on all phases of the student rating process - from data gathering methods to presentation of results. Topics include methods of encouraging meaningful evaluations, midsemester feedback, uses of quality teams and focus groups, and creating questions that target individual faculty needs and interest. With a humorous look at the popular myths surrounding student evaluations and emerging research on what is known concerning student evaluations and their use, this volume argues that the evaluation of teaching is a learning process in itself. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
EDITOR'S NOTES (Karron G. Lewis).
ch. 1. Faculty Thoughts and Concerns About Student Ratings (John C. Ory)
ch. 2. Encouraging Your Students to Give Feedback (Marilla D. Svinicki).
ch. 3. Making Sense of Student Written Comments (Karron G. Lewis).
ch. 4. Using Midsemester Student Feedback and Responding to It (Karron G. Lewis).
ch. 5. Use of Electronic Tools to Enhance Student Evaluation Feedback (Devorah Lieberman, Nancy Bowers, David R. Moore).
ch. 6. Taking Student Criticism Seriously: Using Student Quality Teams to Guide Critical Reflection (Larry Spence, Lisa Firing Lenze).
ch. 7. Making Sense and Making Use of Feedback from Focus Groups (Richard Tiberius).
ch. 8. Writing Teaching Assessment Questions for Precision and Reflection (William L. Rando)
. ch. 9. Interpreting the Numbers: Using a Narrative to Help Others Read Student Evaluations of Your Teaching Accurately (Jennifer Franklin).
INDEX.
Examines the critical subject of student evaluations of teaching, furnishing both the research base behind the use of student ratings and practical suggestions for interpreting the data they provide. Focuses on all phases of the student rating process - from data gathering methods to presentation of results. Topics include methods of encouraging meaningful evaluations, midsemester feedback, uses of quality teams and focus groups, and creating questions that target individual faculty needs and interest. With a humorous look at the popular myths surrounding student evaluations and emerging research on what is known concerning student evaluations and their use, this volume argues that the evaluation of teaching is a learning process in itself. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
EDITOR'S NOTES (Karron G. Lewis).
ch. 1. Faculty Thoughts and Concerns About Student Ratings (John C. Ory)
ch. 2. Encouraging Your Students to Give Feedback (Marilla D. Svinicki).
ch. 3. Making Sense of Student Written Comments (Karron G. Lewis).
ch. 4. Using Midsemester Student Feedback and Responding to It (Karron G. Lewis).
ch. 5. Use of Electronic Tools to Enhance Student Evaluation Feedback (Devorah Lieberman, Nancy Bowers, David R. Moore).
ch. 6. Taking Student Criticism Seriously: Using Student Quality Teams to Guide Critical Reflection (Larry Spence, Lisa Firing Lenze).
ch. 7. Making Sense and Making Use of Feedback from Focus Groups (Richard Tiberius).
ch. 8. Writing Teaching Assessment Questions for Precision and Reflection (William L. Rando)
. ch. 9. Interpreting the Numbers: Using a Narrative to Help Others Read Student Evaluations of Your Teaching Accurately (Jennifer Franklin).
INDEX.
Additional Info:
In The Scope of Our Art a diverse group of theological teachers explores the spiritual dimensions of their vocation as religious educators. Drawing on a rich array of resources, including Scripture, The Rule of St. Benedict, medieval women mystics, the Methodist theologian Georgia Harkness, and Simone Weil, as well as their own teaching experiences, the contributors discuss the vital relationships between academic and spiritual formation, religious commitments and teaching practices, ...
In The Scope of Our Art a diverse group of theological teachers explores the spiritual dimensions of their vocation as religious educators. Drawing on a rich array of resources, including Scripture, The Rule of St. Benedict, medieval women mystics, the Methodist theologian Georgia Harkness, and Simone Weil, as well as their own teaching experiences, the contributors discuss the vital relationships between academic and spiritual formation, religious commitments and teaching practices, ...
Additional Info:
In The Scope of Our Art a diverse group of theological teachers explores the spiritual dimensions of their vocation as religious educators. Drawing on a rich array of resources, including Scripture, The Rule of St. Benedict, medieval women mystics, the Methodist theologian Georgia Harkness, and Simone Weil, as well as their own teaching experiences, the contributors discuss the vital relationships between academic and spiritual formation, religious commitments and teaching practices, and individual and institutional vocation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Formative Practices of the Theological Teacher's Vocation (W. Clark Gilpin)
Writing as a Spiritual Discipline (Stephanie Paulsell)
Reading as a Spiritual Discipline (Paul J. Griffiths)
Contemplation in the Midst of Chaos: Contesting the Maceration of the Theological Teacher (Bonnie J. Miller-McLemore)
My Vocational Kinship with the United States' First Female Theologian (Rosemary Skinner Keller)
Theological Teachers in Their Classrooms Teaching as Conversation (Susan M. Simonaitis)
Teaching as a Ministry of Hope (Paul J. Wadell)
Teaching as Cultivating Wisdom for a Complex World (Lois Malcolm)
Teaching and Learning as Ceaseless Prayer (Michael Battle)
Theological Teachers in Their Schools: "Yea, the Work of Our Hands, Establish Thou It": On Stability in the Academic Life (Claire Mathews McGinnis)
Vocation in the Outback (Frederick W. Norris)
Negotiating the Tensions of Vocation (L. Gregory Jones)
The Formation of Vocation - Institutional and Individual (Leanne van Dyke)
Attending to the Collective Vocation (Gordon T. Smith)
Contributors
In The Scope of Our Art a diverse group of theological teachers explores the spiritual dimensions of their vocation as religious educators. Drawing on a rich array of resources, including Scripture, The Rule of St. Benedict, medieval women mystics, the Methodist theologian Georgia Harkness, and Simone Weil, as well as their own teaching experiences, the contributors discuss the vital relationships between academic and spiritual formation, religious commitments and teaching practices, and individual and institutional vocation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Formative Practices of the Theological Teacher's Vocation (W. Clark Gilpin)
Writing as a Spiritual Discipline (Stephanie Paulsell)
Reading as a Spiritual Discipline (Paul J. Griffiths)
Contemplation in the Midst of Chaos: Contesting the Maceration of the Theological Teacher (Bonnie J. Miller-McLemore)
My Vocational Kinship with the United States' First Female Theologian (Rosemary Skinner Keller)
Theological Teachers in Their Classrooms Teaching as Conversation (Susan M. Simonaitis)
Teaching as a Ministry of Hope (Paul J. Wadell)
Teaching as Cultivating Wisdom for a Complex World (Lois Malcolm)
Teaching and Learning as Ceaseless Prayer (Michael Battle)
Theological Teachers in Their Schools: "Yea, the Work of Our Hands, Establish Thou It": On Stability in the Academic Life (Claire Mathews McGinnis)
Vocation in the Outback (Frederick W. Norris)
Negotiating the Tensions of Vocation (L. Gregory Jones)
The Formation of Vocation - Institutional and Individual (Leanne van Dyke)
Attending to the Collective Vocation (Gordon T. Smith)
Contributors
Additional Info:
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful ...
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful ...
Additional Info:
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful stories speak to complex issues of audience, purpose, genre, and voice that writers routinely address. Using the strategies found in The Work of Writing will make the job of the writer more manageable, more productive, and more rewarding. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Author
ch. 1 The Work of Writing
ch. 2 Contributing to the Professional Conversation
ch. 3 Meeting Readers' Needs and Expectations
ch. 4 Finding Your Professional Voice
ch. 5 Seeing the Project Through
Afterword
App. A: Organizing a Writing Group
App. B: Sample Book Proposal Guidelines
App. C: A Few Good Books on Writingv References
Index
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful stories speak to complex issues of audience, purpose, genre, and voice that writers routinely address. Using the strategies found in The Work of Writing will make the job of the writer more manageable, more productive, and more rewarding. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Author
ch. 1 The Work of Writing
ch. 2 Contributing to the Professional Conversation
ch. 3 Meeting Readers' Needs and Expectations
ch. 4 Finding Your Professional Voice
ch. 5 Seeing the Project Through
Afterword
App. A: Organizing a Writing Group
App. B: Sample Book Proposal Guidelines
App. C: A Few Good Books on Writingv References
Index


The Heart of Learning: Spirituality in Education
Additional Info:
This collection draws together the most important teachers and spiritual figures of our time to help students, teachers, parents, and lifelong learners understand more about why we learn and teach. The Heart of Learning shows how learning can be far more than an intellectual process - that it can be a way to connect with the mysteries and wonders both in ourselves and in the world. The book welcomes the ...
This collection draws together the most important teachers and spiritual figures of our time to help students, teachers, parents, and lifelong learners understand more about why we learn and teach. The Heart of Learning shows how learning can be far more than an intellectual process - that it can be a way to connect with the mysteries and wonders both in ourselves and in the world. The book welcomes the ...
Additional Info:
This collection draws together the most important teachers and spiritual figures of our time to help students, teachers, parents, and lifelong learners understand more about why we learn and teach. The Heart of Learning shows how learning can be far more than an intellectual process - that it can be a way to connect with the mysteries and wonders both in ourselves and in the world. The book welcomes the spirit back into the learning process without dogmatism or exclusion. It provides a unified, inspiring, and immensely practical new paradigm for how learning can mean more, accomplish more, and inspire the best in each of us. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Pt. I Sacredness: The Ground of Learning
ch. 1 The Grace of Great Things: Reclaiming the Sacred in Knowing, Teaching, and Learning
ch. 2 Educating for Mission, Meaning, and Compassion
ch. 3 Buddhist Education: The Path of Wisdom and Knowledge
ch. 4 Unlearning to See the Sacred
Pt. II Identity
ch. 5 Education and the Human Heart
ch. 6 Commitment and Openness: A Contemplative Approach to Pluralism
ch. 7 Embracing Freedom: Spirituality and Liberation
Pt. III Relationship and Community
ch. 8 Reassembling the Pieces: Architecture as Pedagogy
ch. 9 Education and the Western Spiritual Tradition
ch. 10 Learning as Initiation: Not-Knowing, Bearing Witness, and Healing
Pt. IV Tradition and Innovation
ch. 11 Holistic Education for an Emerging Culture
ch. 12 Spirituality and Leadership
ch. 13 Spirituality in Education: A Dialogue
ch. 14 Where Do We Go from Here?
Conclusion: The Heart of Learning
Acknowledgments
Notes and References
Bibliography
This collection draws together the most important teachers and spiritual figures of our time to help students, teachers, parents, and lifelong learners understand more about why we learn and teach. The Heart of Learning shows how learning can be far more than an intellectual process - that it can be a way to connect with the mysteries and wonders both in ourselves and in the world. The book welcomes the spirit back into the learning process without dogmatism or exclusion. It provides a unified, inspiring, and immensely practical new paradigm for how learning can mean more, accomplish more, and inspire the best in each of us. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Pt. I Sacredness: The Ground of Learning
ch. 1 The Grace of Great Things: Reclaiming the Sacred in Knowing, Teaching, and Learning
ch. 2 Educating for Mission, Meaning, and Compassion
ch. 3 Buddhist Education: The Path of Wisdom and Knowledge
ch. 4 Unlearning to See the Sacred
Pt. II Identity
ch. 5 Education and the Human Heart
ch. 6 Commitment and Openness: A Contemplative Approach to Pluralism
ch. 7 Embracing Freedom: Spirituality and Liberation
Pt. III Relationship and Community
ch. 8 Reassembling the Pieces: Architecture as Pedagogy
ch. 9 Education and the Western Spiritual Tradition
ch. 10 Learning as Initiation: Not-Knowing, Bearing Witness, and Healing
Pt. IV Tradition and Innovation
ch. 11 Holistic Education for an Emerging Culture
ch. 12 Spirituality and Leadership
ch. 13 Spirituality in Education: A Dialogue
ch. 14 Where Do We Go from Here?
Conclusion: The Heart of Learning
Acknowledgments
Notes and References
Bibliography

Team Teaching and Learning in Adult Education
Additional Info:
"This volume illustrates several successful applications of team teaching and learning in educational contexts ranging from the traditional classroom to the online classroom, to the workplace, to the community. The emphasis on practice is intentional; it is designed to vivify the inclusive nature of teaming relative to including different perspectives, different pedagogical methods, and both teachers and learners in the multidirectional process of adult learning. The authors provide in-depth discussions ...
"This volume illustrates several successful applications of team teaching and learning in educational contexts ranging from the traditional classroom to the online classroom, to the workplace, to the community. The emphasis on practice is intentional; it is designed to vivify the inclusive nature of teaming relative to including different perspectives, different pedagogical methods, and both teachers and learners in the multidirectional process of adult learning. The authors provide in-depth discussions ...
Additional Info:
"This volume illustrates several successful applications of team teaching and learning in educational contexts ranging from the traditional classroom to the online classroom, to the workplace, to the community. The emphasis on practice is intentional; it is designed to vivify the inclusive nature of teaming relative to including different perspectives, different pedagogical methods, and both teachers and learners in the multidirectional process of adult learning. The authors provide in-depth discussions of theory on subjects including collaborative learning, action learning, and learning for social transformation and for professional development. Team teaching's challenges and demands are confronted with directness and ingenuity. This volume is a resource for educators in a variety of settings - both those wishing to explore the underpinnings of team teaching and learning, as well as those preparing to implement this promising teaching-learning alternative." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 The Many Faces of Team Teaching and Learning: An Overview (Mary-Jane Eisen)
ch. 2 Creating and Maintaining Team-Taught Interdisciplinary General Education (Marcia Bundy Seabury and Karen A. Barret)
ch. 3 Team Teaching in Adult Higher Education Classrooms: Toward Collaborative Knowledge Construction (Candace Harris and Anne N.C. Harvey)
ch. 4 This Isn't Kansas Anymore, Toto: Team Teaching Online (Gabriele Strohschen and Tom Heaney)
ch. 5 Working as a Learning Coach Team in Action Learning (Judy O'Neil and Sharon L. Lamm)
ch. 6 Volunteer Trainer Development in Adult Literacy: Using a Team-Based Strategy to Negotiate National and Local Interests (D. Todd Evans and Jane M. Hugo)
ch. 7 Team Teaching and Learning in Diversity Training for National Service Programs (Viviana Aguilar and Ginlin Woo)
ch. 8 Co-Learning in the Community (Regina M. Curry and Phyllis Cunningham)
ch. 9 Team Teaching and Learning in Adult Education: From Negotiating (Elizabeth J. Tisdell and Mary-Jane Eisen)
Relationships to Implementing Learning Alternatives
Index
"This volume illustrates several successful applications of team teaching and learning in educational contexts ranging from the traditional classroom to the online classroom, to the workplace, to the community. The emphasis on practice is intentional; it is designed to vivify the inclusive nature of teaming relative to including different perspectives, different pedagogical methods, and both teachers and learners in the multidirectional process of adult learning. The authors provide in-depth discussions of theory on subjects including collaborative learning, action learning, and learning for social transformation and for professional development. Team teaching's challenges and demands are confronted with directness and ingenuity. This volume is a resource for educators in a variety of settings - both those wishing to explore the underpinnings of team teaching and learning, as well as those preparing to implement this promising teaching-learning alternative." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 The Many Faces of Team Teaching and Learning: An Overview (Mary-Jane Eisen)
ch. 2 Creating and Maintaining Team-Taught Interdisciplinary General Education (Marcia Bundy Seabury and Karen A. Barret)
ch. 3 Team Teaching in Adult Higher Education Classrooms: Toward Collaborative Knowledge Construction (Candace Harris and Anne N.C. Harvey)
ch. 4 This Isn't Kansas Anymore, Toto: Team Teaching Online (Gabriele Strohschen and Tom Heaney)
ch. 5 Working as a Learning Coach Team in Action Learning (Judy O'Neil and Sharon L. Lamm)
ch. 6 Volunteer Trainer Development in Adult Literacy: Using a Team-Based Strategy to Negotiate National and Local Interests (D. Todd Evans and Jane M. Hugo)
ch. 7 Team Teaching and Learning in Diversity Training for National Service Programs (Viviana Aguilar and Ginlin Woo)
ch. 8 Co-Learning in the Community (Regina M. Curry and Phyllis Cunningham)
ch. 9 Team Teaching and Learning in Adult Education: From Negotiating (Elizabeth J. Tisdell and Mary-Jane Eisen)
Relationships to Implementing Learning Alternatives
Index

The New Update on Adult Learning Theory
Additional Info:
"This volume is an up-to-date version of the popular Update on Adult Learning Theory published in 1993. Traditional theories of andragogy and self-directed learning are revisited, and the burgeoning scholarship on transformational learning and informal and incidental learning is reviewed. Three chapters are devoted to new developments in perspectives introduced in 1993 - women's learning, context-based learning (situated cognition), and critical and postmodern theories. Finally, three very recent approaches to adult learning ...
"This volume is an up-to-date version of the popular Update on Adult Learning Theory published in 1993. Traditional theories of andragogy and self-directed learning are revisited, and the burgeoning scholarship on transformational learning and informal and incidental learning is reviewed. Three chapters are devoted to new developments in perspectives introduced in 1993 - women's learning, context-based learning (situated cognition), and critical and postmodern theories. Finally, three very recent approaches to adult learning ...
Additional Info:
"This volume is an up-to-date version of the popular Update on Adult Learning Theory published in 1993. Traditional theories of andragogy and self-directed learning are revisited, and the burgeoning scholarship on transformational learning and informal and incidental learning is reviewed. Three chapters are devoted to new developments in perspectives introduced in 1993 - women's learning, context-based learning (situated cognition), and critical and postmodern theories. Finally, three very recent approaches to adult learning are presented in this New Update on Adult Learning Theory: emotion and imagination in adult learning, the brain and consciousness, and somatic and narrative knowing. The concluding chapter assesses the contributions of the last decade in expanding our understanding of adult learning." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors Notes
ch. 1 Andragogy and Self-Directed Learning: Pillars of Adult Learning Theory (Sharan B. Merriam)
ch. 2 An Update on Transformational Learning (Lisa M. Baumgartner)
ch. 3 Informal and Incidental Learning (Victoria J. Marsick and Karen E. Watkins)
ch. 4 A New Look at Women's Learning (Elisabeth R. Hayes)
ch. 5 Context-Based Adult Learning (Catherine A. Hansman)
ch. 6 Critical and Postmodern Perspectives on Adult Learning (Deborah W. Kilgore)
ch. 7 The Power of Feelings: Emotion, Imagination, and the Construction of Meaning in Adult Learning (John M. Dirx)
ch. 8 The Brain and Consciousness: Sources of Information for Understanding Adult Learning (Lillian H. Hill)
ch. 9 Off the Beaten Path: Some Creative Approaches to Adult Learning (M. Carolyn Clark)
ch. 10 Something Old, Something New: Adult Learning Theory for the Twenty-First Century (Sharan B. Merriam)
Index
"This volume is an up-to-date version of the popular Update on Adult Learning Theory published in 1993. Traditional theories of andragogy and self-directed learning are revisited, and the burgeoning scholarship on transformational learning and informal and incidental learning is reviewed. Three chapters are devoted to new developments in perspectives introduced in 1993 - women's learning, context-based learning (situated cognition), and critical and postmodern theories. Finally, three very recent approaches to adult learning are presented in this New Update on Adult Learning Theory: emotion and imagination in adult learning, the brain and consciousness, and somatic and narrative knowing. The concluding chapter assesses the contributions of the last decade in expanding our understanding of adult learning." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors Notes
ch. 1 Andragogy and Self-Directed Learning: Pillars of Adult Learning Theory (Sharan B. Merriam)
ch. 2 An Update on Transformational Learning (Lisa M. Baumgartner)
ch. 3 Informal and Incidental Learning (Victoria J. Marsick and Karen E. Watkins)
ch. 4 A New Look at Women's Learning (Elisabeth R. Hayes)
ch. 5 Context-Based Adult Learning (Catherine A. Hansman)
ch. 6 Critical and Postmodern Perspectives on Adult Learning (Deborah W. Kilgore)
ch. 7 The Power of Feelings: Emotion, Imagination, and the Construction of Meaning in Adult Learning (John M. Dirx)
ch. 8 The Brain and Consciousness: Sources of Information for Understanding Adult Learning (Lillian H. Hill)
ch. 9 Off the Beaten Path: Some Creative Approaches to Adult Learning (M. Carolyn Clark)
ch. 10 Something Old, Something New: Adult Learning Theory for the Twenty-First Century (Sharan B. Merriam)
Index

Promoting Journal Writing in Adult Education
Additional Info:
The use of journal writing to enhance reflective practice is not well documented in the adult education literature. This New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education volume brings insights relating to journal writing to bear on the theory and practice of adult education. The goal of this volume is to establish journal writing as an integral part of the teaching and learning process, point out how journal writing can blur ...
The use of journal writing to enhance reflective practice is not well documented in the adult education literature. This New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education volume brings insights relating to journal writing to bear on the theory and practice of adult education. The goal of this volume is to establish journal writing as an integral part of the teaching and learning process, point out how journal writing can blur ...
Additional Info:
The use of journal writing to enhance reflective practice is not well documented in the adult education literature. This New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education volume brings insights relating to journal writing to bear on the theory and practice of adult education. The goal of this volume is to establish journal writing as an integral part of the teaching and learning process, point out how journal writing can blur the boundaries between personal and professional, and suggest ways that adult educators can play a role in using journal writing to enhance reflection in learning. The chapter authors give examples of how journal writing can be, and has been, integrated into educational areas as diverse as health education, higher education, education for women, and English as a Second Language. The individual chapters go beyond description. The authors raise practical and ethical issues about the use and place of journal writing and provide suggestions for educators working in a variety of settings. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Using Journal Writing to Enhance Reflective Practice (David Bond)
ch. 2 Uses and Benefits of Journal Writing (Roger Hiemstra)
ch. 3 Ethical Concerns Relating to Journal Writing (Leona M. English)
ch. 4 Responding to Journals in a Learning Process (Tara J. Fenwick)
ch. 5 Journal Writing in Health Education (Angela J. Gillis)
ch. 6 Women, Journal Writing, and the Reflective Process (Elizabeth A. Peterson and Ann M. Jones)
ch. 7 Journal Writing in Adult ESL: Improving Practice Through Reflective Writing (Richard A. Oren)
ch. 8 Journal Writing in Higher Education (Peter Jarvis)
ch. 9 Journal Writing in Practice: From Vision to Reality (Leona M. English and Marie A. Gillen)
Index
The use of journal writing to enhance reflective practice is not well documented in the adult education literature. This New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education volume brings insights relating to journal writing to bear on the theory and practice of adult education. The goal of this volume is to establish journal writing as an integral part of the teaching and learning process, point out how journal writing can blur the boundaries between personal and professional, and suggest ways that adult educators can play a role in using journal writing to enhance reflection in learning. The chapter authors give examples of how journal writing can be, and has been, integrated into educational areas as diverse as health education, higher education, education for women, and English as a Second Language. The individual chapters go beyond description. The authors raise practical and ethical issues about the use and place of journal writing and provide suggestions for educators working in a variety of settings. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Using Journal Writing to Enhance Reflective Practice (David Bond)
ch. 2 Uses and Benefits of Journal Writing (Roger Hiemstra)
ch. 3 Ethical Concerns Relating to Journal Writing (Leona M. English)
ch. 4 Responding to Journals in a Learning Process (Tara J. Fenwick)
ch. 5 Journal Writing in Health Education (Angela J. Gillis)
ch. 6 Women, Journal Writing, and the Reflective Process (Elizabeth A. Peterson and Ann M. Jones)
ch. 7 Journal Writing in Adult ESL: Improving Practice Through Reflective Writing (Richard A. Oren)
ch. 8 Journal Writing in Higher Education (Peter Jarvis)
ch. 9 Journal Writing in Practice: From Vision to Reality (Leona M. English and Marie A. Gillen)
Index

Transforming the City: Reframing Education for Urban Ministry
Additional Info:
Experience teaches that traditional approaches to ministry education do not work well in the ever-changing climate of the city. The dynamic, complex nature of inner-city life demands that we begin to think differently about urban ministry and how we develop leaders. Transforming the City offers a new way to look at ministry training and presents a number of informative case studies that can help in equipping people to minister effectively ...
Experience teaches that traditional approaches to ministry education do not work well in the ever-changing climate of the city. The dynamic, complex nature of inner-city life demands that we begin to think differently about urban ministry and how we develop leaders. Transforming the City offers a new way to look at ministry training and presents a number of informative case studies that can help in equipping people to minister effectively ...
Additional Info:
Experience teaches that traditional approaches to ministry education do not work well in the ever-changing climate of the city. The dynamic, complex nature of inner-city life demands that we begin to think differently about urban ministry and how we develop leaders. Transforming the City offers a new way to look at ministry training and presents a number of informative case studies that can help in equipping people to minister effectively in the urban context.
The book is built around six case studies that chronicle very different examples of urban theological education and that highlight both the challenge and the promise of creative approaches to education for ministry in multicultural urban locales. Commentaries by noted urban educators and church leaders point to the pitfalls and opportunities of urban ministry. Also included are helpful background notes and suggestions for how to teach each case study. Purposely designed for a variety of educational settings, Transforming the City is the best resource now available for exploring the task of urban ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Invitation to Dialogue
How Did We Get Here? A Survey of Important Historical, Social, and Theological Issues That Occasioned the Rise of Urban Theological Education
Using Case Studies in Urban Theological Education
Cases Studies and Commentaries on Critical Issues Facing Urban Theological Education<
Case Study: Another World
Case Study: Setting the Captives Free
Case Study: Service and Survival
Case Study: A Shifting of Paradigms
Case Study: Whose Program Is It?
Case Study: A Metro Strategy
Paradigms for Urban Transformation
Authors and Contributors
Experience teaches that traditional approaches to ministry education do not work well in the ever-changing climate of the city. The dynamic, complex nature of inner-city life demands that we begin to think differently about urban ministry and how we develop leaders. Transforming the City offers a new way to look at ministry training and presents a number of informative case studies that can help in equipping people to minister effectively in the urban context.
The book is built around six case studies that chronicle very different examples of urban theological education and that highlight both the challenge and the promise of creative approaches to education for ministry in multicultural urban locales. Commentaries by noted urban educators and church leaders point to the pitfalls and opportunities of urban ministry. Also included are helpful background notes and suggestions for how to teach each case study. Purposely designed for a variety of educational settings, Transforming the City is the best resource now available for exploring the task of urban ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Invitation to Dialogue
How Did We Get Here? A Survey of Important Historical, Social, and Theological Issues That Occasioned the Rise of Urban Theological Education
Using Case Studies in Urban Theological Education
Cases Studies and Commentaries on Critical Issues Facing Urban Theological Education<
Case Study: Another World
Case Study: Setting the Captives Free
Case Study: Service and Survival
Case Study: A Shifting of Paradigms
Case Study: Whose Program Is It?
Case Study: A Metro Strategy
Paradigms for Urban Transformation
Authors and Contributors

Fresh Approaches to the Evaluation of Teaching
Additional Info:
Student ratings have long been the primary means of evaluating teaching in higher education, but are they sufficient to meet the increasing demands in public accountability and the changes in learning needs? This volume explores a wide range of alternative approaches to assessing teaching performance and presents methods for documenting and judging teaching that have often been overlooked in the sometimes acrimonious debate about the reliability and validity of student ...
Student ratings have long been the primary means of evaluating teaching in higher education, but are they sufficient to meet the increasing demands in public accountability and the changes in learning needs? This volume explores a wide range of alternative approaches to assessing teaching performance and presents methods for documenting and judging teaching that have often been overlooked in the sometimes acrimonious debate about the reliability and validity of student ...
Additional Info:
Student ratings have long been the primary means of evaluating teaching in higher education, but are they sufficient to meet the increasing demands in public accountability and the changes in learning needs? This volume explores a wide range of alternative approaches to assessing teaching performance and presents methods for documenting and judging teaching that have often been overlooked in the sometimes acrimonious debate about the reliability and validity of student questionnaires. Contributors discuss the underlying issue and principals that affect all forms of evaluation - making links between teaching methods and learning outcomes. They explore the goals and applications of the teaching portfolio, a widely used alternative to the sole reliance on student ratings; and discuss the strength and weaknesses of evaluating teaching through teaching awards. They also examine technology and its importance in automated evaluation systems, the role of formative evaluation in the scholarship of teaching; the role of evaluation in the accreditation of university teachers; and the evaluation of teaching for entire programs, departments, and institutions. Presenting a concept of interpretive and critical evaluation that considers knowledge about teaching as communicative and emancipatory, this volume is a frank and invigorating analysis of the emerging theories and applications of teaching evaluation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Broadening Out Approach to Teaching Evaluation (Christopher Knapper)
ch. 2 Interpretive and Critical Evaluation (Patricia Cranton)
ch. 3 Using Portfolios to Document Good Teaching: Premises, Purposes, Practices (Christopher Knapper, W. Alan Wright)
ch. 4 Evaluating Teaching Through Teaching Awards (Ellen Carusetta)
ch. 5 Using Technology to Facilitate Evaluation (Michael Theall, Jennifer Franklin)
ch. 6 Formative Evaluation and the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (Ronald Smith)
ch. 7 Using Student Outcomes to Evaluate Teaching: A Cautious Exploration (Tara J. Fenwick)
ch. 8 Teaching Evaluation and Accreditation (Liz Beaty)
ch. 9 Broadening the Context for Teaching Evaluation (Robert Cannon)
Index
Student ratings have long been the primary means of evaluating teaching in higher education, but are they sufficient to meet the increasing demands in public accountability and the changes in learning needs? This volume explores a wide range of alternative approaches to assessing teaching performance and presents methods for documenting and judging teaching that have often been overlooked in the sometimes acrimonious debate about the reliability and validity of student questionnaires. Contributors discuss the underlying issue and principals that affect all forms of evaluation - making links between teaching methods and learning outcomes. They explore the goals and applications of the teaching portfolio, a widely used alternative to the sole reliance on student ratings; and discuss the strength and weaknesses of evaluating teaching through teaching awards. They also examine technology and its importance in automated evaluation systems, the role of formative evaluation in the scholarship of teaching; the role of evaluation in the accreditation of university teachers; and the evaluation of teaching for entire programs, departments, and institutions. Presenting a concept of interpretive and critical evaluation that considers knowledge about teaching as communicative and emancipatory, this volume is a frank and invigorating analysis of the emerging theories and applications of teaching evaluation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Broadening Out Approach to Teaching Evaluation (Christopher Knapper)
ch. 2 Interpretive and Critical Evaluation (Patricia Cranton)
ch. 3 Using Portfolios to Document Good Teaching: Premises, Purposes, Practices (Christopher Knapper, W. Alan Wright)
ch. 4 Evaluating Teaching Through Teaching Awards (Ellen Carusetta)
ch. 5 Using Technology to Facilitate Evaluation (Michael Theall, Jennifer Franklin)
ch. 6 Formative Evaluation and the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (Ronald Smith)
ch. 7 Using Student Outcomes to Evaluate Teaching: A Cautious Exploration (Tara J. Fenwick)
ch. 8 Teaching Evaluation and Accreditation (Liz Beaty)
ch. 9 Broadening the Context for Teaching Evaluation (Robert Cannon)
Index


Learning Through Writing: A Compendium of Assignments and Techniques
Additional Info:
Learning Through Writing is a collection of assignments, techniques, and tips that have proven successful at the university level. These readily transferable activities can be used by university instructors in all disciplines as a resource to help students to improve the quality of their writing, and, ultimately, their learning.
The assignments in this guide aim to develop students' analytical skills, writing skills, library research skills, and comprehension of ...
Learning Through Writing is a collection of assignments, techniques, and tips that have proven successful at the university level. These readily transferable activities can be used by university instructors in all disciplines as a resource to help students to improve the quality of their writing, and, ultimately, their learning.
The assignments in this guide aim to develop students' analytical skills, writing skills, library research skills, and comprehension of ...
Additional Info:
Learning Through Writing is a collection of assignments, techniques, and tips that have proven successful at the university level. These readily transferable activities can be used by university instructors in all disciplines as a resource to help students to improve the quality of their writing, and, ultimately, their learning.
The assignments in this guide aim to develop students' analytical skills, writing skills, library research skills, and comprehension of subject matter. To help the reader find relevant assignments quickly, assignments with the same primary purpose have been grouped together. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Acknowledgment of Contributors
ch. 1 Principles of Writing and Learning
Basic Theories and Assumptions about Writing
Using Writing as a Learning Tool
How Do Students Use Writing to Learn?
ch. 2 Writing Across the Disciplines
Patrolling the Academic Mall: Writing Across the Disciplines
ch. 3 Tips for Teachers
Writing Assignments in Larger Classes
Responding to Student Writers - Some Guidelines
Using Writing as a Learning Tool: Professional Development Exercises
Students With Literacy Problems: Suggestions for Instructors
ch. 4 Writing Assignments to Improve Comprehension
The Abstract Exercise
Evaulating "Pop" Psychology
Apply Research
Linking the Theory to Students' Own Personalities
Demonstrating the Relevance of Cell Biology
Writing a Mathematics Class: Two Examples
ch. 5 Writing Assignments To Improve Analytical Skills
The Critique Exercise
Writing in Medicine
Writing Research Grant Proposals
Writing Abstracts to Improve Interpretation and Synthesis
Sharpening Students' Analytical Skills
Students Respond to Readings
Close Analysis of a Single Paragraph
Taking on the Critics
ch. 6 Tips for Student Writiers
Essential Features of Academic Writing: A Writing Centre Handout
Recommendations to Strenthen Term Papers
Guidelines for Essays
Essay Assessment Sheet
ch. 7 Assignments that Emphasize Feedback and the Process of Writing
Weekly Feedback to Improve Performance
Encouraging Students to Address Comments on Previous Papers
Peer Review to Increase the Quality of Students' Work
A Pre-Writing Activity: Planning to Write Using the Planning Diamond
Trying Titles First
Emphasizing the Process of Writing
Using Frequent Feedback to Improve Laboratory Reports
Evidence-Based Case Report in Pharmacy
ch. 8 Different Formats for Assignments
Asking Students to Design and Answer an Exam Question
Learning Journals
Learning to Write in a Foreign Language: The No-Red-Ink Method
Using Journals and a Mock Courtroom to Teach Literature and Feminist Theory
Combining Writing and In-Class Presentations
Letter Writing: Four Assignments
Wordy and Redundant Sentences in Scientific Writing
A Sesquipedalian Vignette
Writing an Editorial and Defending it in the Classroom
Application of Dental Biomaterials Science in a Clinical Setting
Reviewing the Reviews
Informal Writing in an English Class
Blurring the Line Between Fiction and Non-Fiction
Writing-Intensive Laboratory Reports
The Classroom as an Editorial Board
The Professional Identity Scrapbook and the History of a Discipline
ch. 9 Demonstrating the Writing Process
Writing a "Live" Essay in Class
ch. 10 Encouraging Effective Use of the Library
Why Use Library Assignments?
Faculty-Librarian Cooperation
Developing Information Literacy: One View From the Library
Applying the Earlham College Model
Library Assignment: A Step-Wise Worksheet
Indexes: A Valuable Research Tool
Beyond the Research Paper: Ideas for Other Types of Library Assignments
Eight Easy Pieces
Tips for Designing Effective Library Assignments
ch. 11 Writing and Computers
Introduction
Using Computers in Your Class: A Dozen Specific Suggestions
Commenting on Eectronic Papers
Software for Teaching Writing
OWLs (Online Writing Labs)
Resources
References
Learning Through Writing is a collection of assignments, techniques, and tips that have proven successful at the university level. These readily transferable activities can be used by university instructors in all disciplines as a resource to help students to improve the quality of their writing, and, ultimately, their learning.
The assignments in this guide aim to develop students' analytical skills, writing skills, library research skills, and comprehension of subject matter. To help the reader find relevant assignments quickly, assignments with the same primary purpose have been grouped together. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Acknowledgment of Contributors
ch. 1 Principles of Writing and Learning
Basic Theories and Assumptions about Writing
Using Writing as a Learning Tool
How Do Students Use Writing to Learn?
ch. 2 Writing Across the Disciplines
Patrolling the Academic Mall: Writing Across the Disciplines
ch. 3 Tips for Teachers
Writing Assignments in Larger Classes
Responding to Student Writers - Some Guidelines
Using Writing as a Learning Tool: Professional Development Exercises
Students With Literacy Problems: Suggestions for Instructors
ch. 4 Writing Assignments to Improve Comprehension
The Abstract Exercise
Evaulating "Pop" Psychology
Apply Research
Linking the Theory to Students' Own Personalities
Demonstrating the Relevance of Cell Biology
Writing a Mathematics Class: Two Examples
ch. 5 Writing Assignments To Improve Analytical Skills
The Critique Exercise
Writing in Medicine
Writing Research Grant Proposals
Writing Abstracts to Improve Interpretation and Synthesis
Sharpening Students' Analytical Skills
Students Respond to Readings
Close Analysis of a Single Paragraph
Taking on the Critics
ch. 6 Tips for Student Writiers
Essential Features of Academic Writing: A Writing Centre Handout
Recommendations to Strenthen Term Papers
Guidelines for Essays
Essay Assessment Sheet
ch. 7 Assignments that Emphasize Feedback and the Process of Writing
Weekly Feedback to Improve Performance
Encouraging Students to Address Comments on Previous Papers
Peer Review to Increase the Quality of Students' Work
A Pre-Writing Activity: Planning to Write Using the Planning Diamond
Trying Titles First
Emphasizing the Process of Writing
Using Frequent Feedback to Improve Laboratory Reports
Evidence-Based Case Report in Pharmacy
ch. 8 Different Formats for Assignments
Asking Students to Design and Answer an Exam Question
Learning Journals
Learning to Write in a Foreign Language: The No-Red-Ink Method
Using Journals and a Mock Courtroom to Teach Literature and Feminist Theory
Combining Writing and In-Class Presentations
Letter Writing: Four Assignments
Wordy and Redundant Sentences in Scientific Writing
A Sesquipedalian Vignette
Writing an Editorial and Defending it in the Classroom
Application of Dental Biomaterials Science in a Clinical Setting
Reviewing the Reviews
Informal Writing in an English Class
Blurring the Line Between Fiction and Non-Fiction
Writing-Intensive Laboratory Reports
The Classroom as an Editorial Board
The Professional Identity Scrapbook and the History of a Discipline
ch. 9 Demonstrating the Writing Process
Writing a "Live" Essay in Class
ch. 10 Encouraging Effective Use of the Library
Why Use Library Assignments?
Faculty-Librarian Cooperation
Developing Information Literacy: One View From the Library
Applying the Earlham College Model
Library Assignment: A Step-Wise Worksheet
Indexes: A Valuable Research Tool
Beyond the Research Paper: Ideas for Other Types of Library Assignments
Eight Easy Pieces
Tips for Designing Effective Library Assignments
ch. 11 Writing and Computers
Introduction
Using Computers in Your Class: A Dozen Specific Suggestions
Commenting on Eectronic Papers
Software for Teaching Writing
OWLs (Online Writing Labs)
Resources
References

God our Teacher: Theological Basics in Christian Education
Additional Info:
A topic of frequent discussion in religious education circles is the relationship between theology and practice. How does Christian theology work itself out in the teaching ministries of the church? Noted Christian education thinker Robert Pazmiño contemplates this debate and offers a contemporary overview of the messages theology brings to Christian education.
Sensitive to today s expanding global culture, God Our Teacher reaffirms the essential role theology ...
A topic of frequent discussion in religious education circles is the relationship between theology and practice. How does Christian theology work itself out in the teaching ministries of the church? Noted Christian education thinker Robert Pazmiño contemplates this debate and offers a contemporary overview of the messages theology brings to Christian education.
Sensitive to today s expanding global culture, God Our Teacher reaffirms the essential role theology ...
Additional Info:
A topic of frequent discussion in religious education circles is the relationship between theology and practice. How does Christian theology work itself out in the teaching ministries of the church? Noted Christian education thinker Robert Pazmiño contemplates this debate and offers a contemporary overview of the messages theology brings to Christian education.
Sensitive to today s expanding global culture, God Our Teacher reaffirms the essential role theology plays in developing educational practices and conventions, and carefully fleshes out what it means to use the Trinity as a model for ordering educational thought and practice. This book will be welcomed by all those involved in fostering the growth and development of Christian education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1. God For Us: The Trinity and Teaching
ch. 2. God Despite Us: Sin and Salvation
ch. 3. God With Us: Jesus, the Master Teacher
ch. 4. God In Us: The Holy Spirit and Teaching
ch. 5. God Through Us: The Church and Teaching
ch. 6. God Beyond Us: Our Future in Christian Education
Conclusion
Appendix Crossing Over to Postmodernity: Educational Invitations
Notes
Select Bibliography
Index
A topic of frequent discussion in religious education circles is the relationship between theology and practice. How does Christian theology work itself out in the teaching ministries of the church? Noted Christian education thinker Robert Pazmiño contemplates this debate and offers a contemporary overview of the messages theology brings to Christian education.
Sensitive to today s expanding global culture, God Our Teacher reaffirms the essential role theology plays in developing educational practices and conventions, and carefully fleshes out what it means to use the Trinity as a model for ordering educational thought and practice. This book will be welcomed by all those involved in fostering the growth and development of Christian education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1. God For Us: The Trinity and Teaching
ch. 2. God Despite Us: Sin and Salvation
ch. 3. God With Us: Jesus, the Master Teacher
ch. 4. God In Us: The Holy Spirit and Teaching
ch. 5. God Through Us: The Church and Teaching
ch. 6. God Beyond Us: Our Future in Christian Education
Conclusion
Appendix Crossing Over to Postmodernity: Educational Invitations
Notes
Select Bibliography
Index

Applying the Science of Learning to University Teaching and Beyond
Additional Info:
It is sadly true that most of the way we teach and learn is uninformed by laboratory findings in human cognition. Although researchers have made considerable progress in understanding the cognitive and social variables that mediate in the learning process, very little of this basic knowledge has been translated into practice, many research questions that are critically important for directing educational reform remain unanswered, and few in the scientific community ...
It is sadly true that most of the way we teach and learn is uninformed by laboratory findings in human cognition. Although researchers have made considerable progress in understanding the cognitive and social variables that mediate in the learning process, very little of this basic knowledge has been translated into practice, many research questions that are critically important for directing educational reform remain unanswered, and few in the scientific community ...
Additional Info:
It is sadly true that most of the way we teach and learn is uninformed by laboratory findings in human cognition. Although researchers have made considerable progress in understanding the cognitive and social variables that mediate in the learning process, very little of this basic knowledge has been translated into practice, many research questions that are critically important for directing educational reform remain unanswered, and few in the scientific community have been actively involved in the efforts to reform higher education. This edited volume is among many recent attempts to build on empirically-validated learning activities to enhance what and how much is learned and how well and how long it is remembered. Thus, the movement for a real "Science of Learning" has taken hold-the application of scientific principles to the study of learning-both under the controlled conditions of the laboratory and in the messy real-world settings where most of us go about the business of learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Learning That Lasts a Lifetime: Teaching for Long-Term Retention and Transfer (Diane F. Halpern, Milton D. Hakel)
ch. 2 Biology Is to Medicine as Psychology Is to Education: True or False? (Nora S. Newcombe)
ch. 3 Successful Lecturing: Presenting Information in Ways That Engage Effective Processing (Robert A. Bjork)
ch. 4 Improving Comprehension Through Discourse Processing (Arthur C. Graesser, Natalie K. Person, Xiangen Hu)
ch. 5 The Theory of Successful Intelligence as a Basis for Instruction and Assessment in Higher Education (Robert J. Sternberg, Elena L. Grigorenko)
ch. 6 Cognitive Theory and the Design of Multimedia Instruction: An Example of the Two-Way Street Between Cognition and Instruction (Richard E. Mayer)
ch. 7 Issues, Examples, and Challenges in Formative Assessment (Earl Hunt, James W. Pellegrino)
ch. 8 Cognitive Psychology and College-Level Pedagogy: Two Siblings That Rarely Communicate (Margaret W. Matlin)
Index
It is sadly true that most of the way we teach and learn is uninformed by laboratory findings in human cognition. Although researchers have made considerable progress in understanding the cognitive and social variables that mediate in the learning process, very little of this basic knowledge has been translated into practice, many research questions that are critically important for directing educational reform remain unanswered, and few in the scientific community have been actively involved in the efforts to reform higher education. This edited volume is among many recent attempts to build on empirically-validated learning activities to enhance what and how much is learned and how well and how long it is remembered. Thus, the movement for a real "Science of Learning" has taken hold-the application of scientific principles to the study of learning-both under the controlled conditions of the laboratory and in the messy real-world settings where most of us go about the business of learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Learning That Lasts a Lifetime: Teaching for Long-Term Retention and Transfer (Diane F. Halpern, Milton D. Hakel)
ch. 2 Biology Is to Medicine as Psychology Is to Education: True or False? (Nora S. Newcombe)
ch. 3 Successful Lecturing: Presenting Information in Ways That Engage Effective Processing (Robert A. Bjork)
ch. 4 Improving Comprehension Through Discourse Processing (Arthur C. Graesser, Natalie K. Person, Xiangen Hu)
ch. 5 The Theory of Successful Intelligence as a Basis for Instruction and Assessment in Higher Education (Robert J. Sternberg, Elena L. Grigorenko)
ch. 6 Cognitive Theory and the Design of Multimedia Instruction: An Example of the Two-Way Street Between Cognition and Instruction (Richard E. Mayer)
ch. 7 Issues, Examples, and Challenges in Formative Assessment (Earl Hunt, James W. Pellegrino)
ch. 8 Cognitive Psychology and College-Level Pedagogy: Two Siblings That Rarely Communicate (Margaret W. Matlin)
Index
Additional Info:
Underneath its dry, scholarly title, this collection of essays is a lively read not only for scholars, institutional administrators and foundation officers, but for anyone interested in the evolving role of religion in American intellectual life over the last half century. The product of a three-year Lilly Foundation Seminar on Religion and Higher Education, this well-edited book is comprised of short, thought-provoking pieces from some of the country's leading lights ...
Underneath its dry, scholarly title, this collection of essays is a lively read not only for scholars, institutional administrators and foundation officers, but for anyone interested in the evolving role of religion in American intellectual life over the last half century. The product of a three-year Lilly Foundation Seminar on Religion and Higher Education, this well-edited book is comprised of short, thought-provoking pieces from some of the country's leading lights ...
Additional Info:
Underneath its dry, scholarly title, this collection of essays is a lively read not only for scholars, institutional administrators and foundation officers, but for anyone interested in the evolving role of religion in American intellectual life over the last half century. The product of a three-year Lilly Foundation Seminar on Religion and Higher Education, this well-edited book is comprised of short, thought-provoking pieces from some of the country's leading lights in the humanities and social sciences. Divided into parts, the book addresses foundational issues, the theme of religion and scholarship, and teaching. Philosopher of religion Nicholas Wolterstorff opens the first essay with a question: What has moved the topic of religion and scholarship "from small pockets of inquiry out into the open public arena"? Postmodernism's interest in the "perspectival" has brought new prominence to old questions of religious thinkers and institutions. How do religious colleges retain and renew their identity in face of increasingly diverse student bodies and new opportunities for government funding, particularly in the natural sciences? Authors offer creative, religiously grounded possibilities for their disciplines: for example, a sacramental political theory and a vision of contemporary literary theory as a revival of Augustine's insights on language and finitude. In first-person reflections, this collection offers a vivid and informative account of religion and scholarship over the last few decades and poses constructive questions for its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Preface
Pt. I Foundational Issues and Concerns
ch. 1 Scholarship Grounded in Religion (Nicholas Wolterstorff)
ch. 2 Does Religion Have Anything Worth Saying to Scholars? (James Turner)
ch. 3 The Potential for Pluralism: Religious Responses to the Triumph of Theory and Method in American Academic Culture (Alan Wolfe)
ch. 4 Enough Already: Universities Do Not Need More Christianity (David A. Hollinger)
ch. 5 Where Are the Universities of Tomorrow? (Mark R. Schwehn)
Pt. II Religion and Scholarship: Disciplinary Perspectives
ch. 6 Faith Histories (John McGreevy)
ch. 7 Sociology and the Study of Religion (Nancy T. Ammerman)
ch. 8 What We Make of a Diminished Thing: Religion and Literary Scholarship (Roger Lundin)
ch. 9 Historical Theology Today and Tomorrow (Brian E. Daley)
ch. 10 Institutions and Sacraments: The Catholic Tradition and Political Science (Clarke E. Cochran)
ch. 11 Selving Faith: Feminist Theory and Feminist Theology Rethink the Self (Seren Jones)
ch. 12 Religious Concerns in Scholarship: Engaged Fallibilism in Practice (Richard J. Bernstein)
Pt. III Religious Perspectives and Teaching: Reflections on Practice
ch. 13 Teaching History as a Christian (Mark A. Noll)
ch. 14 Questions of Teaching (Denis Donoghue)
ch. 15 Teaching and Religion in Sociology (Robert Wuthnow)
ch. 16 Does, or Should, Teaching Reflect the Religious Perspective of the Teacher? (Jean Bethke Elshtain)
ch. 17 "Stopping the Heart": The Spiritual Search of Students and the Challenge to a Professor in an Undergraduate Literature Class (Susan Handelman)
Concluding Reflections on the Lilly Seminar (Francis Oakley)
Epilogue (Nicholas Wolterstorff)
Members of the Lilly Seminar on Religion and Higher Education
Underneath its dry, scholarly title, this collection of essays is a lively read not only for scholars, institutional administrators and foundation officers, but for anyone interested in the evolving role of religion in American intellectual life over the last half century. The product of a three-year Lilly Foundation Seminar on Religion and Higher Education, this well-edited book is comprised of short, thought-provoking pieces from some of the country's leading lights in the humanities and social sciences. Divided into parts, the book addresses foundational issues, the theme of religion and scholarship, and teaching. Philosopher of religion Nicholas Wolterstorff opens the first essay with a question: What has moved the topic of religion and scholarship "from small pockets of inquiry out into the open public arena"? Postmodernism's interest in the "perspectival" has brought new prominence to old questions of religious thinkers and institutions. How do religious colleges retain and renew their identity in face of increasingly diverse student bodies and new opportunities for government funding, particularly in the natural sciences? Authors offer creative, religiously grounded possibilities for their disciplines: for example, a sacramental political theory and a vision of contemporary literary theory as a revival of Augustine's insights on language and finitude. In first-person reflections, this collection offers a vivid and informative account of religion and scholarship over the last few decades and poses constructive questions for its future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Preface
Pt. I Foundational Issues and Concerns
ch. 1 Scholarship Grounded in Religion (Nicholas Wolterstorff)
ch. 2 Does Religion Have Anything Worth Saying to Scholars? (James Turner)
ch. 3 The Potential for Pluralism: Religious Responses to the Triumph of Theory and Method in American Academic Culture (Alan Wolfe)
ch. 4 Enough Already: Universities Do Not Need More Christianity (David A. Hollinger)
ch. 5 Where Are the Universities of Tomorrow? (Mark R. Schwehn)
Pt. II Religion and Scholarship: Disciplinary Perspectives
ch. 6 Faith Histories (John McGreevy)
ch. 7 Sociology and the Study of Religion (Nancy T. Ammerman)
ch. 8 What We Make of a Diminished Thing: Religion and Literary Scholarship (Roger Lundin)
ch. 9 Historical Theology Today and Tomorrow (Brian E. Daley)
ch. 10 Institutions and Sacraments: The Catholic Tradition and Political Science (Clarke E. Cochran)
ch. 11 Selving Faith: Feminist Theory and Feminist Theology Rethink the Self (Seren Jones)
ch. 12 Religious Concerns in Scholarship: Engaged Fallibilism in Practice (Richard J. Bernstein)
Pt. III Religious Perspectives and Teaching: Reflections on Practice
ch. 13 Teaching History as a Christian (Mark A. Noll)
ch. 14 Questions of Teaching (Denis Donoghue)
ch. 15 Teaching and Religion in Sociology (Robert Wuthnow)
ch. 16 Does, or Should, Teaching Reflect the Religious Perspective of the Teacher? (Jean Bethke Elshtain)
ch. 17 "Stopping the Heart": The Spiritual Search of Students and the Challenge to a Professor in an Undergraduate Literature Class (Susan Handelman)
Concluding Reflections on the Lilly Seminar (Francis Oakley)
Epilogue (Nicholas Wolterstorff)
Members of the Lilly Seminar on Religion and Higher Education

Assessment & Learning: The Ice Approach
Additional Info:
Assessment and Learning: The ICE Approach shows how to maximize learning potential through an improved understanding and appreciation of the learning process. ICE represents the three stages of learning: Ideas: The building blocks of learning Connections: Establishing and articulating the relationships among Ideas Extensions: Learning is internalized and used in novel ways. The authors show how to recognize the stages of learning development--from a state of beginning to one of ...
Assessment and Learning: The ICE Approach shows how to maximize learning potential through an improved understanding and appreciation of the learning process. ICE represents the three stages of learning: Ideas: The building blocks of learning Connections: Establishing and articulating the relationships among Ideas Extensions: Learning is internalized and used in novel ways. The authors show how to recognize the stages of learning development--from a state of beginning to one of ...
Additional Info:
Assessment and Learning: The ICE Approach shows how to maximize learning potential through an improved understanding and appreciation of the learning process. ICE represents the three stages of learning: Ideas: The building blocks of learning Connections: Establishing and articulating the relationships among Ideas Extensions: Learning is internalized and used in novel ways. The authors show how to recognize the stages of learning development--from a state of beginning to one of competence and expertise--and demonstrate how educators can foster that development in their classrooms. ICE is a framework for assessing learning growth--across students, across subjects, across ages, and across levels of schooling. To encourage and assess learning progress, the authors provide comprehensive guidelines for developing effective discussion questions, developing qualitative rubrics, selecting and using experiential learning activities, journals in the classroom, projects, presentations, and assignments, grading and reporting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
vii Acknowledgments
1 1. Ideas, Connections, and Extensions
1 Introduction to ICE
6 The Theory Behind ICE
9 2. Applying ICE to Teaching and Learning
13 Monitoring Progress in Hard-to-Assess Areas
15 Class Discussions
17 Sample Question Starters
18 Guidelines for Developing Good Discussion Questions
19 Group and Experiential Work
21 Guidelines for Selecting and Using Experiential Learning Activities
23 Journal Assessment
27 Guidelines for Effective Use of Journals
28 Projects, Presentations, and Assignments
29 Guidelines for Successful Use of Projects, Presentations, and Assignments
30 Mapping Progress Through Rubrics
31 Constructing ICE Rubrics
33 Differences Between Quantitative and Qualitative Rubrics
38 Differences Between Checklists and ICE Rubrics
40 Summarizing Progress with Tests
42 Tables of Specifications
47 Grading and Reporting Progress
52 A Final Note About Grading
53 Sharing ICE With Learners
59 A Final Note About Sharing ICE with Learners
60 Students' Reactions to ICE
63 3. The Versatility of ICE
63 Across Curriculum Areas
63 Drama and Music
65 Trades and Technology
67 Sports and Physical Education
68 Across Products of Learning
69 Language Arts
72 Second Language Acquisition
74 Social Studies
75 Sciences
77 Math and Math Readiness
79 Music
81 Conclusion
83 Black Line Masters
85 Bibliography
Assessment and Learning: The ICE Approach shows how to maximize learning potential through an improved understanding and appreciation of the learning process. ICE represents the three stages of learning: Ideas: The building blocks of learning Connections: Establishing and articulating the relationships among Ideas Extensions: Learning is internalized and used in novel ways. The authors show how to recognize the stages of learning development--from a state of beginning to one of competence and expertise--and demonstrate how educators can foster that development in their classrooms. ICE is a framework for assessing learning growth--across students, across subjects, across ages, and across levels of schooling. To encourage and assess learning progress, the authors provide comprehensive guidelines for developing effective discussion questions, developing qualitative rubrics, selecting and using experiential learning activities, journals in the classroom, projects, presentations, and assignments, grading and reporting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
vii Acknowledgments
1 1. Ideas, Connections, and Extensions
1 Introduction to ICE
6 The Theory Behind ICE
9 2. Applying ICE to Teaching and Learning
13 Monitoring Progress in Hard-to-Assess Areas
15 Class Discussions
17 Sample Question Starters
18 Guidelines for Developing Good Discussion Questions
19 Group and Experiential Work
21 Guidelines for Selecting and Using Experiential Learning Activities
23 Journal Assessment
27 Guidelines for Effective Use of Journals
28 Projects, Presentations, and Assignments
29 Guidelines for Successful Use of Projects, Presentations, and Assignments
30 Mapping Progress Through Rubrics
31 Constructing ICE Rubrics
33 Differences Between Quantitative and Qualitative Rubrics
38 Differences Between Checklists and ICE Rubrics
40 Summarizing Progress with Tests
42 Tables of Specifications
47 Grading and Reporting Progress
52 A Final Note About Grading
53 Sharing ICE With Learners
59 A Final Note About Sharing ICE with Learners
60 Students' Reactions to ICE
63 3. The Versatility of ICE
63 Across Curriculum Areas
63 Drama and Music
65 Trades and Technology
67 Sports and Physical Education
68 Across Products of Learning
69 Language Arts
72 Second Language Acquisition
74 Social Studies
75 Sciences
77 Math and Math Readiness
79 Music
81 Conclusion
83 Black Line Masters
85 Bibliography

Teacher Thinking in Cultural Contexts
Additional Info:
Francisco Rio's book sheds light on current scholarship around teacher thinking in cultural contexts and identifies promising practices that take into account context specific influences. (From the Publisher)
Francisco Rio's book sheds light on current scholarship around teacher thinking in cultural contexts and identifies promising practices that take into account context specific influences. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Francisco Rio's book sheds light on current scholarship around teacher thinking in cultural contexts and identifies promising practices that take into account context specific influences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Teacher Thinking in Urban Schools: The Need for a Contextualized Research Agenda (Alfredo J. Artiles)
ch. 2 Teachers', Administrators', and Staff's Implicit Thinking about "At-Risk" Urban High School Latino Students (Martha Montero-Sieburth)
ch. 3 Teacher Thinking and Perceptions of African-American Male Achievement in the Classroom (Clara A. New)
ch. 4 Resistance and Rethinking: White Student Teachers in Predominately African-American Schools (Maureen D. Gillette)
ch. 5 Teachers' Principles of Practice for Teaching in Multicultural Classrooms (Francisco A. Ríos)
ch. 6 Teaching Writing in a Multicultural Classroom: Students and Teacher as Storytellers (Dawn Abt-Perkins)
ch. 7 Tacit Messages: Teachers' Cultural Models of the Classroom (Mary Lynn Hamilton)
ch. 8 Teachers' Choices for Infusing Multicultural Content: Assimilating Multicultural Practices into Schemata for Instruction in the Content Area (Carmen Montecinos, and Deborah L. Tidwell)
ch. 9 Teaching Concerns Revisited: The Multicultural Dimension (Patricia L. Marshall)
ch. 10 Using a Constructivist Approach to Challenge Preservice Teachers' Thinking about Diversity in Education (Teresita E. Aguilar Cathy A. Pohan)
ch. 11 Learning to Teach in Cross-Cultural Settings: The Significance of Trusting Relations (Linda Valli)
ch. 12 Coalition Building as a Means for Changing Teachers' Cultural Knowledge about Multicultural Education (Marilynne Boyle-Baise Judith Washburn)
Conclusion: New Directions in Teacher Thinking: Linking Theory to Practice
Notes
References
Index
Francisco Rio's book sheds light on current scholarship around teacher thinking in cultural contexts and identifies promising practices that take into account context specific influences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Teacher Thinking in Urban Schools: The Need for a Contextualized Research Agenda (Alfredo J. Artiles)
ch. 2 Teachers', Administrators', and Staff's Implicit Thinking about "At-Risk" Urban High School Latino Students (Martha Montero-Sieburth)
ch. 3 Teacher Thinking and Perceptions of African-American Male Achievement in the Classroom (Clara A. New)
ch. 4 Resistance and Rethinking: White Student Teachers in Predominately African-American Schools (Maureen D. Gillette)
ch. 5 Teachers' Principles of Practice for Teaching in Multicultural Classrooms (Francisco A. Ríos)
ch. 6 Teaching Writing in a Multicultural Classroom: Students and Teacher as Storytellers (Dawn Abt-Perkins)
ch. 7 Tacit Messages: Teachers' Cultural Models of the Classroom (Mary Lynn Hamilton)
ch. 8 Teachers' Choices for Infusing Multicultural Content: Assimilating Multicultural Practices into Schemata for Instruction in the Content Area (Carmen Montecinos, and Deborah L. Tidwell)
ch. 9 Teaching Concerns Revisited: The Multicultural Dimension (Patricia L. Marshall)
ch. 10 Using a Constructivist Approach to Challenge Preservice Teachers' Thinking about Diversity in Education (Teresita E. Aguilar Cathy A. Pohan)
ch. 11 Learning to Teach in Cross-Cultural Settings: The Significance of Trusting Relations (Linda Valli)
ch. 12 Coalition Building as a Means for Changing Teachers' Cultural Knowledge about Multicultural Education (Marilynne Boyle-Baise Judith Washburn)
Conclusion: New Directions in Teacher Thinking: Linking Theory to Practice
Notes
References
Index

Transforming the Curriculum for Multicultural Understandings: A Practitioner's Handbook
Additional Info:
This book's basic premise is that present demographics suggest concepts of inclusion and cultural reflection are essential to any academic endeavor. Teachers and future teachers need to be aware of the emergence of multicultural education and how that plays out in the classroom. The volume presents a historical overview of the concept and stresses the need for greater awareness. (From the Publisher)
This book's basic premise is that present demographics suggest concepts of inclusion and cultural reflection are essential to any academic endeavor. Teachers and future teachers need to be aware of the emergence of multicultural education and how that plays out in the classroom. The volume presents a historical overview of the concept and stresses the need for greater awareness. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book's basic premise is that present demographics suggest concepts of inclusion and cultural reflection are essential to any academic endeavor. Teachers and future teachers need to be aware of the emergence of multicultural education and how that plays out in the classroom. The volume presents a historical overview of the concept and stresses the need for greater awareness. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "Rationale for a Multicultural Curriculum"
ch. 2 "Historical Look at the Emergence of Diversity"
ch. 3 "A Transformation of the Curriculum"
ch. 4 "Boyer's Stages of Ethnic Growth"
ch. 5 "Institutionalizing a Multicultural Curriculum"
ch. 6 "Baptiste's Typology of Multiculturalism"
ch. 7 "Moving the Environment toward Multiculturalism"
ch. 8 "Cross-Racial, Cross-Ethnic Teaching and Learning"
ch. 9 "Critical Issues for Practitioners"
ch. 10 "Relationships of Poverty and Learning"
ch. 11 "Instruction with a Multicultural Philosophy"
ch. 12 "Diversity Issues in Educational Research"
ch. 13 "Questions about Multicultural Education."
app.1 "The King Holiday"
app.2 "Administrator's Checklist"
app.3 "Boyer's Elementary-Secondary Inventory"
app.4 "Basic Administrative Competencies"
Bibliography
This book's basic premise is that present demographics suggest concepts of inclusion and cultural reflection are essential to any academic endeavor. Teachers and future teachers need to be aware of the emergence of multicultural education and how that plays out in the classroom. The volume presents a historical overview of the concept and stresses the need for greater awareness. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "Rationale for a Multicultural Curriculum"
ch. 2 "Historical Look at the Emergence of Diversity"
ch. 3 "A Transformation of the Curriculum"
ch. 4 "Boyer's Stages of Ethnic Growth"
ch. 5 "Institutionalizing a Multicultural Curriculum"
ch. 6 "Baptiste's Typology of Multiculturalism"
ch. 7 "Moving the Environment toward Multiculturalism"
ch. 8 "Cross-Racial, Cross-Ethnic Teaching and Learning"
ch. 9 "Critical Issues for Practitioners"
ch. 10 "Relationships of Poverty and Learning"
ch. 11 "Instruction with a Multicultural Philosophy"
ch. 12 "Diversity Issues in Educational Research"
ch. 13 "Questions about Multicultural Education."
app.1 "The King Holiday"
app.2 "Administrator's Checklist"
app.3 "Boyer's Elementary-Secondary Inventory"
app.4 "Basic Administrative Competencies"
Bibliography

Multicultural Education: Issues and Perspectives
Additional Info:
This handy reference is designed to help present and future educators acquire the concepts, paradigms, and explanations needed to become effective practitioners in culturally, racially, and language diverse classrooms and schools. The Fourth Edition reflects current and emerging research, concepts, and debates about the education of students from both genders and from different cultural, racial, ethnic, and language groups. (From the Publisher)
This handy reference is designed to help present and future educators acquire the concepts, paradigms, and explanations needed to become effective practitioners in culturally, racially, and language diverse classrooms and schools. The Fourth Edition reflects current and emerging research, concepts, and debates about the education of students from both genders and from different cultural, racial, ethnic, and language groups. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This handy reference is designed to help present and future educators acquire the concepts, paradigms, and explanations needed to become effective practitioners in culturally, racially, and language diverse classrooms and schools. The Fourth Edition reflects current and emerging research, concepts, and debates about the education of students from both genders and from different cultural, racial, ethnic, and language groups. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Issues and Concepts
ch. 1 Multicultural Education: Characteristics and Goals / James A. Banks)
The Nature of Multicultural Education
Multicultural Education: An International Reform Movement
The Historical Development of Multicultural Education
How Multicultural Education Developed
Multicultural Education and Tension among Diverse Groups
The Nature of Culture in the United States
The Social Construction of Categories
The Dimensions of Multicultural Education
ch. 2 Culture in Society and in Educational Practices (Frederick Erickson)
Culture: An Overview
Alternative Definitions and Conceptions of Culture
Cultural Issues in Education and Society
Teaching and Learning Multiculturally
Conclusion: On Diversity of Tongues and Their Educational Potential
ch. 3 Race, Class, Gender, and Disability in the Classroom (Carl A. Grant, Christine E. Sleeter)
Race, Class, Gender, Language, Disability, and Classroom Life
Approaches to Multicultural Education
Ms. Julie Wilson and Her Approach To Teaching
Social Class and Religion
ch. 4 Inner Cities, Affluent Suburbs, and Unequal Educational Opportunity (Jean Anyon)
Differences between Affluent Suburban and Inner-City-Schooling
Consequences of These Differences
What Teachers Can Do
To Make a Difference
ch. 5 Religious Diversity and Education (James K. Uphoff)
Definitions of Religion
Religious Diversity in the United States
Educational Implications
Gender
Gender Bias: From Colonial America to Today's Classrooms (David Sadker, Myra Sadker)
This handy reference is designed to help present and future educators acquire the concepts, paradigms, and explanations needed to become effective practitioners in culturally, racially, and language diverse classrooms and schools. The Fourth Edition reflects current and emerging research, concepts, and debates about the education of students from both genders and from different cultural, racial, ethnic, and language groups. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Issues and Concepts
ch. 1 Multicultural Education: Characteristics and Goals / James A. Banks)
The Nature of Multicultural Education
Multicultural Education: An International Reform Movement
The Historical Development of Multicultural Education
How Multicultural Education Developed
Multicultural Education and Tension among Diverse Groups
The Nature of Culture in the United States
The Social Construction of Categories
The Dimensions of Multicultural Education
ch. 2 Culture in Society and in Educational Practices (Frederick Erickson)
Culture: An Overview
Alternative Definitions and Conceptions of Culture
Cultural Issues in Education and Society
Teaching and Learning Multiculturally
Conclusion: On Diversity of Tongues and Their Educational Potential
ch. 3 Race, Class, Gender, and Disability in the Classroom (Carl A. Grant, Christine E. Sleeter)
Race, Class, Gender, Language, Disability, and Classroom Life
Approaches to Multicultural Education
Ms. Julie Wilson and Her Approach To Teaching
Social Class and Religion
ch. 4 Inner Cities, Affluent Suburbs, and Unequal Educational Opportunity (Jean Anyon)
Differences between Affluent Suburban and Inner-City-Schooling
Consequences of These Differences
What Teachers Can Do
To Make a Difference
ch. 5 Religious Diversity and Education (James K. Uphoff)
Definitions of Religion
Religious Diversity in the United States
Educational Implications
Gender
Gender Bias: From Colonial America to Today's Classrooms (David Sadker, Myra Sadker)

The Intuitive Practitioner: on the value of not always knowing what one is doing
Additional Info:
Much of the time, experienced professionals in both education and other fields cannot explain what they are doing, or tell you what they know; and students cannot articulate their learning. Yet professional development and practice are often discussed as if conscious understanding and deliberation are of the essence. The Intuitive Practitioner tackles this apparent paradox head on, and explores the dynamic relationship between reason and intuition in the context of ...
Much of the time, experienced professionals in both education and other fields cannot explain what they are doing, or tell you what they know; and students cannot articulate their learning. Yet professional development and practice are often discussed as if conscious understanding and deliberation are of the essence. The Intuitive Practitioner tackles this apparent paradox head on, and explores the dynamic relationship between reason and intuition in the context of ...
Additional Info:
Much of the time, experienced professionals in both education and other fields cannot explain what they are doing, or tell you what they know; and students cannot articulate their learning. Yet professional development and practice are often discussed as if conscious understanding and deliberation are of the essence. The Intuitive Practitioner tackles this apparent paradox head on, and explores the dynamic relationship between reason and intuition in the context of professional practice. Focusing mainly on the professional world of the teacher, but with illustrative discussions of medical and business practice, the contributors delicately unpick the vexed and neglected nature of intuition, and demonstrate the vital role it plays in the development of professional judgement and expertise. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on contributors
Introduction (Terry Atkinson and Guy Claxton)
Pt. 1 Perspectives on intuition in professional learning and practice
ch. 1 Intuition and the crisis in teacher professionalism (John Furlong)
ch. 2 The anatomy of intuition (Guy Claxton)
ch. 3 Trusting your own judgement (or allowing yourself to eat the pudding) (Lucy Atkinson)
Pt. 2 Intuition and initial teacher education
ch. 4 Learning to teach: intuitive skills and reasoned objectivity (Terry Atkinson)
ch. 5 Awareness and intuition: how student teachers read their own lessons (Peter John)
ch. 6 The role of intuition in mentoring and supporting beginning teachers (Elisabeth Lazarus)
ch. 7 Elaborated intuition and task-based English language teacher education (Arlene Gilpin and Gerald Clibbon)
Pt. 3 Intuition and continuing professional development
ch. 8 The development of professional intuition (Agnes McMahon)
ch. 9 The formal and the intuitive in science and medicine (Richard Brawn)
ch. 10 Complex decision making in the classroom: the teacher as an intuitive practitioner
ch. 11 Developing intuition through management education
Pt. 4 Intuition and assessment
ch. 12 Assessment and intuition
ch. 13 Measurement, judgement, criteria and expertise: intuition in assessment from three different subject perspectives
ch. 14 Intuition, culture and the development of academic literacy
Pt. 5 The Intuitive Practitioner: a critical overview
ch. 15 The Intuitive Practitioner: a critical overview
Index
Much of the time, experienced professionals in both education and other fields cannot explain what they are doing, or tell you what they know; and students cannot articulate their learning. Yet professional development and practice are often discussed as if conscious understanding and deliberation are of the essence. The Intuitive Practitioner tackles this apparent paradox head on, and explores the dynamic relationship between reason and intuition in the context of professional practice. Focusing mainly on the professional world of the teacher, but with illustrative discussions of medical and business practice, the contributors delicately unpick the vexed and neglected nature of intuition, and demonstrate the vital role it plays in the development of professional judgement and expertise. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on contributors
Introduction (Terry Atkinson and Guy Claxton)
Pt. 1 Perspectives on intuition in professional learning and practice
ch. 1 Intuition and the crisis in teacher professionalism (John Furlong)
ch. 2 The anatomy of intuition (Guy Claxton)
ch. 3 Trusting your own judgement (or allowing yourself to eat the pudding) (Lucy Atkinson)
Pt. 2 Intuition and initial teacher education
ch. 4 Learning to teach: intuitive skills and reasoned objectivity (Terry Atkinson)
ch. 5 Awareness and intuition: how student teachers read their own lessons (Peter John)
ch. 6 The role of intuition in mentoring and supporting beginning teachers (Elisabeth Lazarus)
ch. 7 Elaborated intuition and task-based English language teacher education (Arlene Gilpin and Gerald Clibbon)
Pt. 3 Intuition and continuing professional development
ch. 8 The development of professional intuition (Agnes McMahon)
ch. 9 The formal and the intuitive in science and medicine (Richard Brawn)
ch. 10 Complex decision making in the classroom: the teacher as an intuitive practitioner
ch. 11 Developing intuition through management education
Pt. 4 Intuition and assessment
ch. 12 Assessment and intuition
ch. 13 Measurement, judgement, criteria and expertise: intuition in assessment from three different subject perspectives
ch. 14 Intuition, culture and the development of academic literacy
Pt. 5 The Intuitive Practitioner: a critical overview
ch. 15 The Intuitive Practitioner: a critical overview
Index

Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students in Higher Education: A Perilous Passage?
Additional Info:
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the ...
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the ...
Additional Info:
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the processes through which individuals gain the knowledge, skills, and values necessary for successful entry into a professional career requiring an advanced level of specialized knowledge and skills. The first two sections, "The Professional and Socialization" and "Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs," describe the various elements of this socialization process, drawing from research on adult socialization, role acquisition, and career development. The third section, "A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students," presents a conceptual model of graduate and professional student socialization that assumes socialization occurs through an interactive set of stages. The fourth section, "Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes," illustrates several changing patterns in graduate education that are exerting pressure for reform. The fifth section, "Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences among Academic Programs," contrasts socialization processes across academic program goals, faculty expectations, and student peer culture. The final section, "Easing the Perilous Passage," discusses modifying the graduate degree program and faculty and administrator roles, increasing diversity, and offering support to students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
The Professions and Socialization
The Professions in Society
Characterizing Socialization
Dimensions of Socialization
Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs
Stages of Socialization
Core Elements of Socialization
Structural Engagement
A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Linear Models of Socialization
Nonlinear Models of Socialization
An Interactive Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes
Diversity
International Graduate Students
Professionalism
Professionalization
Ethics
Technology and Distance Learning
Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences Among Academic Programs
Knowledge Acquisition
Investment
Involvement
Structural Engagement
Easing the Perilous Passage
Modifying the Program
Increasing Diversity
Offering Support for Students
Modifying Faculty and Administrative Roles
References
Index
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the processes through which individuals gain the knowledge, skills, and values necessary for successful entry into a professional career requiring an advanced level of specialized knowledge and skills. The first two sections, "The Professional and Socialization" and "Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs," describe the various elements of this socialization process, drawing from research on adult socialization, role acquisition, and career development. The third section, "A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students," presents a conceptual model of graduate and professional student socialization that assumes socialization occurs through an interactive set of stages. The fourth section, "Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes," illustrates several changing patterns in graduate education that are exerting pressure for reform. The fifth section, "Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences among Academic Programs," contrasts socialization processes across academic program goals, faculty expectations, and student peer culture. The final section, "Easing the Perilous Passage," discusses modifying the graduate degree program and faculty and administrator roles, increasing diversity, and offering support to students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
The Professions and Socialization
The Professions in Society
Characterizing Socialization
Dimensions of Socialization
Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs
Stages of Socialization
Core Elements of Socialization
Structural Engagement
A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Linear Models of Socialization
Nonlinear Models of Socialization
An Interactive Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes
Diversity
International Graduate Students
Professionalism
Professionalization
Ethics
Technology and Distance Learning
Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences Among Academic Programs
Knowledge Acquisition
Investment
Involvement
Structural Engagement
Easing the Perilous Passage
Modifying the Program
Increasing Diversity
Offering Support for Students
Modifying Faculty and Administrative Roles
References
Index

Peer Learning in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Peer learning, where students support each others learning, is for many one of the most effective and natural forms of learning. It can form one of the most essential and satisfying parts of a student's higher education experience. As a key developing technique in higher education this book will meet the needs of many who are interested in developing a more formal approach to peer learning in their own work. ...
Peer learning, where students support each others learning, is for many one of the most effective and natural forms of learning. It can form one of the most essential and satisfying parts of a student's higher education experience. As a key developing technique in higher education this book will meet the needs of many who are interested in developing a more formal approach to peer learning in their own work. ...
Additional Info:
Peer learning, where students support each others learning, is for many one of the most effective and natural forms of learning. It can form one of the most essential and satisfying parts of a student's higher education experience. As a key developing technique in higher education this book will meet the needs of many who are interested in developing a more formal approach to peer learning in their own work. The book discusses practical methods of developing more effective learning through the systematic implementation of peer learning approaches. It draws on the direct experience of the authors in their own classes across a range of disciplines. While the emphasis is on higher education, many of the ideas can be applied more widely to further education and professional learning.
Key issues addressed include:
What is peer learning and what is it good for?
What are the design and class management issues that need addressing?
How best can peer learning be introduced and fostered?
What issues need to be considered by teachers and students?
What are the implications for assessment?
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Introduction: making the move to peer learning (David Boud)
ch. 2 Designing peer learning (Jane Sampson and Ruth Cohen)
ch. 3 Strategies for peer learning: some examples (Jane Sampson and Ruth Cohen)
ch. 4 Implementing and managing peer learning (Ruth Cohen and Jane Sampson)
ch. 5 Peer learning and assessment (David Boud)
ch. 6 Team-based learning in management education (Ray Gordon) and Robert Connor)
ch. 7 Project management teams: a model of best practice in design (Jenny Toynbee Wilson)
ch. 8 Peer learning in law: using a group journal (James Cooper)
ch. 9 Autonomy, uncertainty and peer learning in IT project work (Brian Lederer and Richard Raban)
ch. 10 Peer learning using computer supported roleplay-simulations (Robert McLaughlan and Denise Kirkpatrick)
ch. 11 Aligning peer assessment with peer learning for large classes: the case for an online self and peer assessment system (Mark Freeman and Jo McKenzie)
ch. 12 Conclusion: challenges and new directions (David Boud)
Peer learning, where students support each others learning, is for many one of the most effective and natural forms of learning. It can form one of the most essential and satisfying parts of a student's higher education experience. As a key developing technique in higher education this book will meet the needs of many who are interested in developing a more formal approach to peer learning in their own work. The book discusses practical methods of developing more effective learning through the systematic implementation of peer learning approaches. It draws on the direct experience of the authors in their own classes across a range of disciplines. While the emphasis is on higher education, many of the ideas can be applied more widely to further education and professional learning.
Key issues addressed include:
What is peer learning and what is it good for?
What are the design and class management issues that need addressing?
How best can peer learning be introduced and fostered?
What issues need to be considered by teachers and students?
What are the implications for assessment?
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Introduction: making the move to peer learning (David Boud)
ch. 2 Designing peer learning (Jane Sampson and Ruth Cohen)
ch. 3 Strategies for peer learning: some examples (Jane Sampson and Ruth Cohen)
ch. 4 Implementing and managing peer learning (Ruth Cohen and Jane Sampson)
ch. 5 Peer learning and assessment (David Boud)
ch. 6 Team-based learning in management education (Ray Gordon) and Robert Connor)
ch. 7 Project management teams: a model of best practice in design (Jenny Toynbee Wilson)
ch. 8 Peer learning in law: using a group journal (James Cooper)
ch. 9 Autonomy, uncertainty and peer learning in IT project work (Brian Lederer and Richard Raban)
ch. 10 Peer learning using computer supported roleplay-simulations (Robert McLaughlan and Denise Kirkpatrick)
ch. 11 Aligning peer assessment with peer learning for large classes: the case for an online self and peer assessment system (Mark Freeman and Jo McKenzie)
ch. 12 Conclusion: challenges and new directions (David Boud)
Additional Info:
Lecturing remains the staple teaching technique for most professionals in higher education. Lecturing can be a chore, a terror or an exhilarating experience. One thing that is certain: for students, good lecturing shows, is expected and pays dividends.
This book does not deal with the dry theory of lecturing, but rather it brings together the advice, experience and guidance of many experienced successful lecturers from the UK, US, ...
Lecturing remains the staple teaching technique for most professionals in higher education. Lecturing can be a chore, a terror or an exhilarating experience. One thing that is certain: for students, good lecturing shows, is expected and pays dividends.
This book does not deal with the dry theory of lecturing, but rather it brings together the advice, experience and guidance of many experienced successful lecturers from the UK, US, ...
Additional Info:
Lecturing remains the staple teaching technique for most professionals in higher education. Lecturing can be a chore, a terror or an exhilarating experience. One thing that is certain: for students, good lecturing shows, is expected and pays dividends.
This book does not deal with the dry theory of lecturing, but rather it brings together the advice, experience and guidance of many experienced successful lecturers from the UK, US, Australia and New Zealand. Together they provide stimulating and motivating practical examples of how to improve lecturing technique and confidence.
Written for less experienced lecturers seeking to improve their lecturing, and those with more experience who want to develop their skills further, this book is outcomes focused and covers a range of key lecturing issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Introduction
Part 1 Key competencies in lecturing
ch. 1 Learning from objectives (Stanley Yeo)
ch. 2 New at this (Sally Brown)
ch. 3 The smart student (Marilyn Baird)
ch. 4 The mobile phone (Brian Hinton and Catherine Manathunga)
Part 2 Orchestrating learning in lectures
ch. 5 I fell asleep in my own lecture (Bob Lord)
ch. 6 Just give us the right answer (Brenda Smith)
ch. 7 Playing the crowded house (Brad Haseman)
ch. 8 We might have to learn it but we shouldn't have to think about it (Lorraine Stefani)
Part 3 Dealing with feedback
ch. 9 Getting to know you (Mark Griffin)
ch. 10 Is it me? (Helen Whiffen)
ch. 11 This is all irrelevant! (Peter Knight and Gary Lee)
ch. 12 Getting sacked (Phil Race)
Part 4 Authenticity: living your values in lectures
ch. 13 Learning from the inside out (Peter Frederick)
ch. 14 Teaching power (Lyn Carson)
ch. 15 Clearly, you can't do it (Gina Wisker)
ch. 16 How can I lecture that topic? (Joy Higgs)
ch. 17 From big water to reflective pools (William M Timpson and Bill G. Wright)
Insights from the case studies
Further reading
Index
Lecturing remains the staple teaching technique for most professionals in higher education. Lecturing can be a chore, a terror or an exhilarating experience. One thing that is certain: for students, good lecturing shows, is expected and pays dividends.
This book does not deal with the dry theory of lecturing, but rather it brings together the advice, experience and guidance of many experienced successful lecturers from the UK, US, Australia and New Zealand. Together they provide stimulating and motivating practical examples of how to improve lecturing technique and confidence.
Written for less experienced lecturers seeking to improve their lecturing, and those with more experience who want to develop their skills further, this book is outcomes focused and covers a range of key lecturing issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Introduction
Part 1 Key competencies in lecturing
ch. 1 Learning from objectives (Stanley Yeo)
ch. 2 New at this (Sally Brown)
ch. 3 The smart student (Marilyn Baird)
ch. 4 The mobile phone (Brian Hinton and Catherine Manathunga)
Part 2 Orchestrating learning in lectures
ch. 5 I fell asleep in my own lecture (Bob Lord)
ch. 6 Just give us the right answer (Brenda Smith)
ch. 7 Playing the crowded house (Brad Haseman)
ch. 8 We might have to learn it but we shouldn't have to think about it (Lorraine Stefani)
Part 3 Dealing with feedback
ch. 9 Getting to know you (Mark Griffin)
ch. 10 Is it me? (Helen Whiffen)
ch. 11 This is all irrelevant! (Peter Knight and Gary Lee)
ch. 12 Getting sacked (Phil Race)
Part 4 Authenticity: living your values in lectures
ch. 13 Learning from the inside out (Peter Frederick)
ch. 14 Teaching power (Lyn Carson)
ch. 15 Clearly, you can't do it (Gina Wisker)
ch. 16 How can I lecture that topic? (Joy Higgs)
ch. 17 From big water to reflective pools (William M Timpson and Bill G. Wright)
Insights from the case studies
Further reading
Index

The Vitality of Senior Faculty Members: Snow on the Roof-Fire in the Furnace
Additional Info:
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Senior Faculty and Institutional Vitality
The Case of Stephen Abbot
The Productivity of Senior Faculty
Looking Inside for Vitality - Internal factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Looking Outside for Vitality - Institutional factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Conclusions and Themes to Guide Approaches to the vitality of Senior Faculty
Approaches to Faculty and Institutional Vitality
Appendix
References
Index
ASHE-ERIC Higher Education Reports
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Senior Faculty and Institutional Vitality
The Case of Stephen Abbot
The Productivity of Senior Faculty
Looking Inside for Vitality - Internal factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Looking Outside for Vitality - Institutional factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Conclusions and Themes to Guide Approaches to the vitality of Senior Faculty
Approaches to Faculty and Institutional Vitality
Appendix
References
Index
ASHE-ERIC Higher Education Reports

So You Want to Use Role-Play? A New Approach in How to Plan
Additional Info:
Role-play has escaped from the drama studio and established itself as one of the most effective learning techniques in language, literature, history, geography and other curriculum subjects. It is also a crucial component of most management and human relationship training.
Few teachers have the expertise to maximize the potential of role-play. In this accessible volume the authors demonstrate through numerous examples, how role-play can be applied to all ...
Role-play has escaped from the drama studio and established itself as one of the most effective learning techniques in language, literature, history, geography and other curriculum subjects. It is also a crucial component of most management and human relationship training.
Few teachers have the expertise to maximize the potential of role-play. In this accessible volume the authors demonstrate through numerous examples, how role-play can be applied to all ...
Additional Info:
Role-play has escaped from the drama studio and established itself as one of the most effective learning techniques in language, literature, history, geography and other curriculum subjects. It is also a crucial component of most management and human relationship training.
Few teachers have the expertise to maximize the potential of role-play. In this accessible volume the authors demonstrate through numerous examples, how role-play can be applied to all kinds of interactive contexts. They provide a wealth of proven practical strategies and techniques, including sound advice on what not to do. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Examples of a Range of Genres (1)
ch. 2 Role-Work for Training Adults-Examples of a Range of Genres (2)
ch. 3 Dimensions of Role-Play
ch. 4 Sign in Role-Play
ch. 5 Who Are You Teaching?
ch. 6 How Do We Tackle Racism?
ch. 7 Role-Work With The Police on Racism-`Stereotyping'
ch. 8 Practical Issues, Leader Taking a Role And Learning Outcomes
Index
Role-play has escaped from the drama studio and established itself as one of the most effective learning techniques in language, literature, history, geography and other curriculum subjects. It is also a crucial component of most management and human relationship training.
Few teachers have the expertise to maximize the potential of role-play. In this accessible volume the authors demonstrate through numerous examples, how role-play can be applied to all kinds of interactive contexts. They provide a wealth of proven practical strategies and techniques, including sound advice on what not to do. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Examples of a Range of Genres (1)
ch. 2 Role-Work for Training Adults-Examples of a Range of Genres (2)
ch. 3 Dimensions of Role-Play
ch. 4 Sign in Role-Play
ch. 5 Who Are You Teaching?
ch. 6 How Do We Tackle Racism?
ch. 7 Role-Work With The Police on Racism-`Stereotyping'
ch. 8 Practical Issues, Leader Taking a Role And Learning Outcomes
Index

"Why Are All the Black Kids Sitting Together in the Cafeteria?" And Other Conversations About Race
Additional Info:
In 'Why Are All the Black Kids Sitting Together in the Cafeteria?' And Other Conversations About Race, Dr. Tatum provides us with a new way of thinking and talking about race through the lens of racial identity. She explains that all of us have a racial identity and must strive to affirm it. For people of color, the development of a constructive racial identity requires being able to recognize ...
In 'Why Are All the Black Kids Sitting Together in the Cafeteria?' And Other Conversations About Race, Dr. Tatum provides us with a new way of thinking and talking about race through the lens of racial identity. She explains that all of us have a racial identity and must strive to affirm it. For people of color, the development of a constructive racial identity requires being able to recognize ...
Additional Info:
In 'Why Are All the Black Kids Sitting Together in the Cafeteria?' And Other Conversations About Race, Dr. Tatum provides us with a new way of thinking and talking about race through the lens of racial identity. She explains that all of us have a racial identity and must strive to affirm it. For people of color, the development of a constructive racial identity requires being able to recognize and reject the bombardment of negative stereotypes and to embrace a history of resistance and empowerment rather than passive victimization. For Whites, the challenge is to engage in a process of racial identity development which leads to an awareness of White privilege and a determination to actively work against injustice - and this requires the strength to reject a system that rewards them, and to reclaim the legacy of White allies. For many, this is uncharted territory. This book provides a road map for those who want to make the journey and better understand the racial dynamics of their daily lives. Tatum extends her ideas about racial identity development beyond the usual Black-White paradigm to embrace the unique circumstances of Latinos, American Indians, Asians, as well as biracial youth. Also included is a list of resources for further reading as well as a list of books for parents and teachers to recommend to children of all ages. Using real-life examples and the latest research, Tatum presents strong evidence that straight talk about our racial identities - whatever they may be - is essential if we are serious about facilitating communication across racial and ethnic divides. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Defining Racism
ch. 2 The Complexity of Identity
ch. 3 The Early Years
ch. 4 Identity Development in Adolescence
ch. 5 Racial Identity in Adulthood
ch. 6 The Development of White Identity
ch. 7 White Identity and Affirmative Action
ch. 8 Critical Issues in Latino, American Indian, and Asian Pacific American Identity Development
ch. 9 Identity Development in Multiracial Families
ch. 10 Embracing a Cross-Racial Dialogue 193 App.: Getting Started: A Resource Guide
Notes
Bibliography
Acknowledgments
Index
In 'Why Are All the Black Kids Sitting Together in the Cafeteria?' And Other Conversations About Race, Dr. Tatum provides us with a new way of thinking and talking about race through the lens of racial identity. She explains that all of us have a racial identity and must strive to affirm it. For people of color, the development of a constructive racial identity requires being able to recognize and reject the bombardment of negative stereotypes and to embrace a history of resistance and empowerment rather than passive victimization. For Whites, the challenge is to engage in a process of racial identity development which leads to an awareness of White privilege and a determination to actively work against injustice - and this requires the strength to reject a system that rewards them, and to reclaim the legacy of White allies. For many, this is uncharted territory. This book provides a road map for those who want to make the journey and better understand the racial dynamics of their daily lives. Tatum extends her ideas about racial identity development beyond the usual Black-White paradigm to embrace the unique circumstances of Latinos, American Indians, Asians, as well as biracial youth. Also included is a list of resources for further reading as well as a list of books for parents and teachers to recommend to children of all ages. Using real-life examples and the latest research, Tatum presents strong evidence that straight talk about our racial identities - whatever they may be - is essential if we are serious about facilitating communication across racial and ethnic divides. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Defining Racism
ch. 2 The Complexity of Identity
ch. 3 The Early Years
ch. 4 Identity Development in Adolescence
ch. 5 Racial Identity in Adulthood
ch. 6 The Development of White Identity
ch. 7 White Identity and Affirmative Action
ch. 8 Critical Issues in Latino, American Indian, and Asian Pacific American Identity Development
ch. 9 Identity Development in Multiracial Families
ch. 10 Embracing a Cross-Racial Dialogue 193 App.: Getting Started: A Resource Guide
Notes
Bibliography
Acknowledgments
Index
Additional Info:
What constitutes theological literacy in the new millennium? Scholars such as Elisabeth Schssler Fiorenza and David Tracy discuss this weighty question in Theological Literacy for the Twenty-First Century, a heavy but thoughtful collection of essays. The book's most helpful aspect is its diversity of Christian traditions: there are discussions of evangelical, Orthodox, Catholic and mainline Protestant views here, and contributors also weigh in about Hispanic, African-American and feminist hermeneutics. The ...
What constitutes theological literacy in the new millennium? Scholars such as Elisabeth Schssler Fiorenza and David Tracy discuss this weighty question in Theological Literacy for the Twenty-First Century, a heavy but thoughtful collection of essays. The book's most helpful aspect is its diversity of Christian traditions: there are discussions of evangelical, Orthodox, Catholic and mainline Protestant views here, and contributors also weigh in about Hispanic, African-American and feminist hermeneutics. The ...
Additional Info:
What constitutes theological literacy in the new millennium? Scholars such as Elisabeth Schssler Fiorenza and David Tracy discuss this weighty question in Theological Literacy for the Twenty-First Century, a heavy but thoughtful collection of essays. The book's most helpful aspect is its diversity of Christian traditions: there are discussions of evangelical, Orthodox, Catholic and mainline Protestant views here, and contributors also weigh in about Hispanic, African-American and feminist hermeneutics. The essayists' understanding of what is required for theological literacy may be a bit inflated (how many people in the pews spout five-gallon words such as "postcoloniality" or "grandiloquent"?), but academics will appreciate the collection's depth and currency. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword (Rodney L. Petersen)
Pt. I Theology: What is the Real Thing?
ch. 1 On Theological Education: A Reflection (David Tracy)
ch. 2 Theology and Theologians: An Orthodox Perspective (Alkiviadis C. Calivas)
ch. 3 On the Complexity of Theological Literacy (Roberty Cummings Neville)
ch. 4 Renewing Ways of Life: The Shape of Theological Education (S. Mark Heim)
ch. 5 Identity, Formation, Dignity: The Impacts of Artificial Intelligence upon Jewish and Christian Understandings of Personhood (Anne Foerst and Rodney L. Petersen)
Pt. II Theology and Institutional Expression
ch. 6 Where Catholicism Has Been, and Where It Is Going (Raymond G. Helmick)
ch. 7 The Theological Is Also Personal: The "Place" of Evangelical Protestant Women in the Church (Alice Mathews)
ch. 8 Public Works: Bridging the Gap between Theology and Public Ethics (William Johnson Everett)
ch. 9 Christian Scholarship and the Demographic Transformation of the Church (Andrew F. Walls)
Pt. III Hermeneutics: How We Understand and Interpret the Bible
ch. 10 Theological Literacy for the Twenty-first Century (Walter C. Kaiser, Jr.)
ch. 11 The Ethos of Interpretation: Biblical Studies in a Postmodern and Postcolonial Context (Elisabeth Schussler Fiorenza)
ch. 12 Living in the Hyphen: Theological Literacy from an Hispanic American Perspective (Alvin Padilla)
ch. 13 Reading the World Religiously: Literate Christianity in a World of Many Religions (Francis X. Clooney)
Pt. IV The Rhetoric of Theology
ch. 14 Healing Traumatic Memories: A Spiritual Journey (Ruth H. Bersin)
ch. 15 A Prophetic Religious Education for Y2K and Beyond: And Black Boys Shall See Visions (Fred Smith)
ch. 16 Theological Literacy and Fluency in a New Millennium: A Pastoral Theological Perspective (Carrie Doehring)
ch. 17 Theological Literacy: Some Catholic Reflections (Brian O. McDermott)
ch. 18 Theological Literacy: Problem and Promise (Wesley J. Wildman)
ch. 19 Wisdom for Life: The Horizon of Theological Literacy (Thomas Groome)
Pt. V Theological Literacy in Seminary and University
ch. 20 Theological Education as Formation for Ministry (John E. MacInnis)
ch. 21 The Classic Idea of the University: Its Relevance in the Twenty-first Century (Jan Milic Lochman)
Contributors
Index of Names and Subjects
Index of Scripture References
What constitutes theological literacy in the new millennium? Scholars such as Elisabeth Schssler Fiorenza and David Tracy discuss this weighty question in Theological Literacy for the Twenty-First Century, a heavy but thoughtful collection of essays. The book's most helpful aspect is its diversity of Christian traditions: there are discussions of evangelical, Orthodox, Catholic and mainline Protestant views here, and contributors also weigh in about Hispanic, African-American and feminist hermeneutics. The essayists' understanding of what is required for theological literacy may be a bit inflated (how many people in the pews spout five-gallon words such as "postcoloniality" or "grandiloquent"?), but academics will appreciate the collection's depth and currency. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword (Rodney L. Petersen)
Pt. I Theology: What is the Real Thing?
ch. 1 On Theological Education: A Reflection (David Tracy)
ch. 2 Theology and Theologians: An Orthodox Perspective (Alkiviadis C. Calivas)
ch. 3 On the Complexity of Theological Literacy (Roberty Cummings Neville)
ch. 4 Renewing Ways of Life: The Shape of Theological Education (S. Mark Heim)
ch. 5 Identity, Formation, Dignity: The Impacts of Artificial Intelligence upon Jewish and Christian Understandings of Personhood (Anne Foerst and Rodney L. Petersen)
Pt. II Theology and Institutional Expression
ch. 6 Where Catholicism Has Been, and Where It Is Going (Raymond G. Helmick)
ch. 7 The Theological Is Also Personal: The "Place" of Evangelical Protestant Women in the Church (Alice Mathews)
ch. 8 Public Works: Bridging the Gap between Theology and Public Ethics (William Johnson Everett)
ch. 9 Christian Scholarship and the Demographic Transformation of the Church (Andrew F. Walls)
Pt. III Hermeneutics: How We Understand and Interpret the Bible
ch. 10 Theological Literacy for the Twenty-first Century (Walter C. Kaiser, Jr.)
ch. 11 The Ethos of Interpretation: Biblical Studies in a Postmodern and Postcolonial Context (Elisabeth Schussler Fiorenza)
ch. 12 Living in the Hyphen: Theological Literacy from an Hispanic American Perspective (Alvin Padilla)
ch. 13 Reading the World Religiously: Literate Christianity in a World of Many Religions (Francis X. Clooney)
Pt. IV The Rhetoric of Theology
ch. 14 Healing Traumatic Memories: A Spiritual Journey (Ruth H. Bersin)
ch. 15 A Prophetic Religious Education for Y2K and Beyond: And Black Boys Shall See Visions (Fred Smith)
ch. 16 Theological Literacy and Fluency in a New Millennium: A Pastoral Theological Perspective (Carrie Doehring)
ch. 17 Theological Literacy: Some Catholic Reflections (Brian O. McDermott)
ch. 18 Theological Literacy: Problem and Promise (Wesley J. Wildman)
ch. 19 Wisdom for Life: The Horizon of Theological Literacy (Thomas Groome)
Pt. V Theological Literacy in Seminary and University
ch. 20 Theological Education as Formation for Ministry (John E. MacInnis)
ch. 21 The Classic Idea of the University: Its Relevance in the Twenty-first Century (Jan Milic Lochman)
Contributors
Index of Names and Subjects
Index of Scripture References

A New Academic Compact: Revisioning the Relationship between Faculty and Their Institutions
Additional Info:
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From ...
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From ...
Additional Info:
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Participants
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Section I: The Compact ch. 1 A New Academic Compact (Jerry Berberet) ch. 2 Professional Development Across the Faculty Career (Marion Terenzio)
ch. 3 Faculty as Institutional Citizens (Lawry Finsen)
ch. 4 Faculty Workload (Linda A. McMillin)
Section II: The Compact in Action
ch. 5 Shared Governance at Butler University (Patricia Bacon)
ch. 6 Workload Differentiation at Ithaca College (Garry Brodhead)
ch. 7 Workload Rebalancing at St. Mary's College of California (Ed Biglin)
Section III: The Compact in Context
ch. 8 A Panel of Experts Responds (Christine M. Licata, Robert M. Diamond, Mary Burgan, Charles E. Glassick, C. J. Weiser, Ric Weibl)
ch. 9 Reflections on The Faculty Work Project (Jon Wergin)
ch. 10 A Holistic Model For Faculty and Institutional Development (Jacqueline A. Mintz)
ch. 11 Institutional Governance (Thomas C. Longin)
Bibliography
Index
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Participants
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Section I: The Compact ch. 1 A New Academic Compact (Jerry Berberet) ch. 2 Professional Development Across the Faculty Career (Marion Terenzio)
ch. 3 Faculty as Institutional Citizens (Lawry Finsen)
ch. 4 Faculty Workload (Linda A. McMillin)
Section II: The Compact in Action
ch. 5 Shared Governance at Butler University (Patricia Bacon)
ch. 6 Workload Differentiation at Ithaca College (Garry Brodhead)
ch. 7 Workload Rebalancing at St. Mary's College of California (Ed Biglin)
Section III: The Compact in Context
ch. 8 A Panel of Experts Responds (Christine M. Licata, Robert M. Diamond, Mary Burgan, Charles E. Glassick, C. J. Weiser, Ric Weibl)
ch. 9 Reflections on The Faculty Work Project (Jon Wergin)
ch. 10 A Holistic Model For Faculty and Institutional Development (Jacqueline A. Mintz)
ch. 11 Institutional Governance (Thomas C. Longin)
Bibliography
Index

Enter the River: Healing Steps from White Privilege Toward Racial Reconciliation
Additional Info:
The Bible tells of Naaman the Syrian, who entered the Jordan River to be cleansed. Comparing the affliction of racism to Naaman's illness, Enter the River by Jody Miller Shearer invites readers into their own healing. He explores definitions of prejudice and racism, the different effects of racism on white persons and people of color, affirmative action, and many other issues. The accessible presentation provides a strong foundation for study ...
The Bible tells of Naaman the Syrian, who entered the Jordan River to be cleansed. Comparing the affliction of racism to Naaman's illness, Enter the River by Jody Miller Shearer invites readers into their own healing. He explores definitions of prejudice and racism, the different effects of racism on white persons and people of color, affirmative action, and many other issues. The accessible presentation provides a strong foundation for study ...
Additional Info:
The Bible tells of Naaman the Syrian, who entered the Jordan River to be cleansed. Comparing the affliction of racism to Naaman's illness, Enter the River by Jody Miller Shearer invites readers into their own healing. He explores definitions of prejudice and racism, the different effects of racism on white persons and people of color, affirmative action, and many other issues. The accessible presentation provides a strong foundation for study and action. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 Why Be Concerned About Racism?
ch. 2 Why Is Talking About Racism So Hard?
ch. 3 What Is Prejudice?
ch. 4 What is Racism?
ch. 5 How Does Racism Afflict People of Color?
ch. 6 How Does Racism Afflict White People?
ch. 7 What Does It Mean to Be White?
ch. 8 How Can We Celebrate Our Cultures?
ch. 9 What Does This Mean for the Church?
ch. 10 What About Affirmative Action?
ch. 11 So What Can We Do About Racism?
Afterword
Appendix A: A Church of Many Peoples Confronts Racism
Appendix B: Ten Ways to Make a Third World Person Lose Effectiveness in an Organization
Notes
Resource List
Scripture Index
Index
The Bible tells of Naaman the Syrian, who entered the Jordan River to be cleansed. Comparing the affliction of racism to Naaman's illness, Enter the River by Jody Miller Shearer invites readers into their own healing. He explores definitions of prejudice and racism, the different effects of racism on white persons and people of color, affirmative action, and many other issues. The accessible presentation provides a strong foundation for study and action. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 Why Be Concerned About Racism?
ch. 2 Why Is Talking About Racism So Hard?
ch. 3 What Is Prejudice?
ch. 4 What is Racism?
ch. 5 How Does Racism Afflict People of Color?
ch. 6 How Does Racism Afflict White People?
ch. 7 What Does It Mean to Be White?
ch. 8 How Can We Celebrate Our Cultures?
ch. 9 What Does This Mean for the Church?
ch. 10 What About Affirmative Action?
ch. 11 So What Can We Do About Racism?
Afterword
Appendix A: A Church of Many Peoples Confronts Racism
Appendix B: Ten Ways to Make a Third World Person Lose Effectiveness in an Organization
Notes
Resource List
Scripture Index
Index
Additional Info:
This volume, like its series companions, goes beyond simple "how-to" to discuss the implementation of service-learning within religious studies and what that discipline contributes to the pedagogy of service learning. The volume contains both theoretical and pedagogical essays by scholar-teachers in religious studies education, plus a resource guide. (From the Publisher)
This volume, like its series companions, goes beyond simple "how-to" to discuss the implementation of service-learning within religious studies and what that discipline contributes to the pedagogy of service learning. The volume contains both theoretical and pedagogical essays by scholar-teachers in religious studies education, plus a resource guide. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This volume, like its series companions, goes beyond simple "how-to" to discuss the implementation of service-learning within religious studies and what that discipline contributes to the pedagogy of service learning. The volume contains both theoretical and pedagogical essays by scholar-teachers in religious studies education, plus a resource guide. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreward (Raymond Brady Williams)
About This Series (Edward Zlotkowski)
Introduction (Richard Devine, Joseph A. Favazza, and F. Michael McLain)
Part I: Service-Learning and the Discipline of Religious Studies
ch. 1 Service-Learning and the Dilemma of Religious Studies: Descriptive or Normative? (Fred Glennon)
ch. 2 Creating the Engaged University: Service-Learning, Religious Studies, and Institutional Mission (Charles R. Strain)
Part II:Service-Learning and Its Communities
ch. 3 Making Meaning: Reflection on Community, Service, and Learning (Keith Morton)
ch. 4 On En/Countering the Other (Elizabeth M. Bounds, Barbara A.B. Patterson, and Tinna Pippin)
ch. 5 Service-Learning and Community Partnerships: Curricula of Mutuality (Peter M. Antoci and Sandra K. Smith Speck)
ch. 6 Expanding the Horizon of Engagement: Pioneering Work at the University of Denver (M. Elizabeth Blissman)
Part III Course Chapters
ch. 7 Toward an Assessment-Based Approach to Service-Learning Course Design (Thomas G. McGowan)
ch. 8 Service-Learning in an Introduction to Theology Course (Robert Masson)
ch. 9 "God and Human Suffering" as a Service -Learning Course (Chris Johnson)
ch. 10 "Religion and Social Engagement: Labor and Business Ethics" (John Leahy and Kim Bobo)
ch. 11 Making a Difference with Service-Learning: "Christian Ethis and Modern Problems" (Walter H. Schuman)
ch. 12 The Interweaving of "World Religions" and Service-Learning in a Community College Setting (Raj Ayyar)
ch. 13 The Role of Service-Learning in the Transformation of "Islam: Faith and Practice" (Jonathan Brumberg-Kraus)
ch. 14 "The History and Religion of Ancient Israel": An Introductory Course to the Hebrew Bible (Bradley D. Dudley)
ch. 15 "Fieldwork in the Jewish Community" (Terry Smith Hatkoff)
Print and Electronic Resource Guide
Contributors to this Volume
This volume, like its series companions, goes beyond simple "how-to" to discuss the implementation of service-learning within religious studies and what that discipline contributes to the pedagogy of service learning. The volume contains both theoretical and pedagogical essays by scholar-teachers in religious studies education, plus a resource guide. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreward (Raymond Brady Williams)
About This Series (Edward Zlotkowski)
Introduction (Richard Devine, Joseph A. Favazza, and F. Michael McLain)
Part I: Service-Learning and the Discipline of Religious Studies
ch. 1 Service-Learning and the Dilemma of Religious Studies: Descriptive or Normative? (Fred Glennon)
ch. 2 Creating the Engaged University: Service-Learning, Religious Studies, and Institutional Mission (Charles R. Strain)
Part II:Service-Learning and Its Communities
ch. 3 Making Meaning: Reflection on Community, Service, and Learning (Keith Morton)
ch. 4 On En/Countering the Other (Elizabeth M. Bounds, Barbara A.B. Patterson, and Tinna Pippin)
ch. 5 Service-Learning and Community Partnerships: Curricula of Mutuality (Peter M. Antoci and Sandra K. Smith Speck)
ch. 6 Expanding the Horizon of Engagement: Pioneering Work at the University of Denver (M. Elizabeth Blissman)
Part III Course Chapters
ch. 7 Toward an Assessment-Based Approach to Service-Learning Course Design (Thomas G. McGowan)
ch. 8 Service-Learning in an Introduction to Theology Course (Robert Masson)
ch. 9 "God and Human Suffering" as a Service -Learning Course (Chris Johnson)
ch. 10 "Religion and Social Engagement: Labor and Business Ethics" (John Leahy and Kim Bobo)
ch. 11 Making a Difference with Service-Learning: "Christian Ethis and Modern Problems" (Walter H. Schuman)
ch. 12 The Interweaving of "World Religions" and Service-Learning in a Community College Setting (Raj Ayyar)
ch. 13 The Role of Service-Learning in the Transformation of "Islam: Faith and Practice" (Jonathan Brumberg-Kraus)
ch. 14 "The History and Religion of Ancient Israel": An Introductory Course to the Hebrew Bible (Bradley D. Dudley)
ch. 15 "Fieldwork in the Jewish Community" (Terry Smith Hatkoff)
Print and Electronic Resource Guide
Contributors to this Volume

Creating Learning Centered Classrooms: What Does Learning Theory Have to Say?
Additional Info:
Reviews research and theories on college student learning. Examines attribution theory, self-efficacy in students, social constructivism, and Freire's theory of conscientization. Also explores theories that support or refute popular assumptions about college classrooms. (From the Publisher)
Reviews research and theories on college student learning. Examines attribution theory, self-efficacy in students, social constructivism, and Freire's theory of conscientization. Also explores theories that support or refute popular assumptions about college classrooms. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Reviews research and theories on college student learning. Examines attribution theory, self-efficacy in students, social constructivism, and Freire's theory of conscientization. Also explores theories that support or refute popular assumptions about college classrooms. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Frameworks for the college classroom
ch. 2 Attribution theory
ch. 3 The self-efficacy of college students
ch. 4 Social constructivism as a basis for learning
ch. 5 Freire's theory of conscientization
ch. 6 Other theories: challenging classroom assumptions
ch. 7 A need for classroom-based research
ch. 8 Implications fo r the college classroom
ch. 9 Concepts of academic learning
Reviews research and theories on college student learning. Examines attribution theory, self-efficacy in students, social constructivism, and Freire's theory of conscientization. Also explores theories that support or refute popular assumptions about college classrooms. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Frameworks for the college classroom
ch. 2 Attribution theory
ch. 3 The self-efficacy of college students
ch. 4 Social constructivism as a basis for learning
ch. 5 Freire's theory of conscientization
ch. 6 Other theories: challenging classroom assumptions
ch. 7 A need for classroom-based research
ch. 8 Implications fo r the college classroom
ch. 9 Concepts of academic learning
Additional Info:
George Bernard Shaw thought that a Catholic university was a contradiction in terms--"university" represents intellectual freedom and "Catholic" represents dogmatic belief. Scholars, university administrators, and even the Vatican have staked out positions debating Shaw's observation. In this refreshing book, George Dennis O'Brien argues that contradiction arises both from the secular university's limited concept of academic freedom and the church's defective notion of dogma. Truth is a central concept for ...
George Bernard Shaw thought that a Catholic university was a contradiction in terms--"university" represents intellectual freedom and "Catholic" represents dogmatic belief. Scholars, university administrators, and even the Vatican have staked out positions debating Shaw's observation. In this refreshing book, George Dennis O'Brien argues that contradiction arises both from the secular university's limited concept of academic freedom and the church's defective notion of dogma. Truth is a central concept for ...
Additional Info:
George Bernard Shaw thought that a Catholic university was a contradiction in terms--"university" represents intellectual freedom and "Catholic" represents dogmatic belief. Scholars, university administrators, and even the Vatican have staked out positions debating Shaw's observation. In this refreshing book, George Dennis O'Brien argues that contradiction arises both from the secular university's limited concept of academic freedom and the church's defective notion of dogma. Truth is a central concept for both university and church, and O'Brien's book is built on the idea that there are different areas of truth--scientific, artistic, and religious--each with its own proper warrant and "method." In this light, he argues that one can reverse Shaw's comparison and uncover academic dogma and Christian freedom, university "infallibility" and dogmatic "fallibility."
Drawing on theology and the history of philosophy, O'Brien shows how religious truth relates to the work of a Catholic university. He then turns to the current controversies over Pope John Paul II's recent statement, Ex Corde Ecclesiae, which seeks to make Catholic universities conform to the church's official teaching office. O'Brien rejects the conventional "institutional-juridical" model used by the Vatican as improper both to faith and academic freedom. He argues for a "sacramental" model, one that respects the different kinds of "truth"--thus preserving the integrity of both church and university while making their combination in a Catholic university not only possible but desirable. O'Brien concludes with a practical consideration of how the ideal Catholic university might be expressed in the actual life of the contemporary curriculum and extracurriculum.
For anyone concerned about the place of religion in higher education, The Idea of a Catholic University will be essential reading. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Biblical Foundations of the Modern University
ch. 2 Science: The Truth of Universities
ch. 3 Art: Signatured Truth
ch. 4 Religion: Truth of Presence
ch. 5 "I Am the Truth"
ch. 6 Academic Dogma and Catholic Freedom
ch. 7 Fallible Church and Infallible Academy or Infallible Church and Fallible Academy
ch. 8 A Thought Experiment: A Holocaust University
ch. 9 Ex Corde Ecclesiae
ch. 10 Lex Orandi, Lex Credendi
ch. 11 A Contrarian University
ch. 12 Practical/Praxis Postscript
Notes
Index
George Bernard Shaw thought that a Catholic university was a contradiction in terms--"university" represents intellectual freedom and "Catholic" represents dogmatic belief. Scholars, university administrators, and even the Vatican have staked out positions debating Shaw's observation. In this refreshing book, George Dennis O'Brien argues that contradiction arises both from the secular university's limited concept of academic freedom and the church's defective notion of dogma. Truth is a central concept for both university and church, and O'Brien's book is built on the idea that there are different areas of truth--scientific, artistic, and religious--each with its own proper warrant and "method." In this light, he argues that one can reverse Shaw's comparison and uncover academic dogma and Christian freedom, university "infallibility" and dogmatic "fallibility."
Drawing on theology and the history of philosophy, O'Brien shows how religious truth relates to the work of a Catholic university. He then turns to the current controversies over Pope John Paul II's recent statement, Ex Corde Ecclesiae, which seeks to make Catholic universities conform to the church's official teaching office. O'Brien rejects the conventional "institutional-juridical" model used by the Vatican as improper both to faith and academic freedom. He argues for a "sacramental" model, one that respects the different kinds of "truth"--thus preserving the integrity of both church and university while making their combination in a Catholic university not only possible but desirable. O'Brien concludes with a practical consideration of how the ideal Catholic university might be expressed in the actual life of the contemporary curriculum and extracurriculum.
For anyone concerned about the place of religion in higher education, The Idea of a Catholic University will be essential reading. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Biblical Foundations of the Modern University
ch. 2 Science: The Truth of Universities
ch. 3 Art: Signatured Truth
ch. 4 Religion: Truth of Presence
ch. 5 "I Am the Truth"
ch. 6 Academic Dogma and Catholic Freedom
ch. 7 Fallible Church and Infallible Academy or Infallible Church and Fallible Academy
ch. 8 A Thought Experiment: A Holocaust University
ch. 9 Ex Corde Ecclesiae
ch. 10 Lex Orandi, Lex Credendi
ch. 11 A Contrarian University
ch. 12 Practical/Praxis Postscript
Notes
Index

Teaching Working Class
Additional Info:
Since the 1970s, working-class individuals have made up an increasing proportion of students enrolled in institutions of higher education. At the same time, working-class studies has emerged as a new academic discipline, updating a long tradition of scholarship on labor history and proletarian literature to include discussions of working-class culture, intersections of class with race and ethnicity, and studies of the representation of the working class in popular culture. These ...
Since the 1970s, working-class individuals have made up an increasing proportion of students enrolled in institutions of higher education. At the same time, working-class studies has emerged as a new academic discipline, updating a long tradition of scholarship on labor history and proletarian literature to include discussions of working-class culture, intersections of class with race and ethnicity, and studies of the representation of the working class in popular culture. These ...
Additional Info:
Since the 1970s, working-class individuals have made up an increasing proportion of students enrolled in institutions of higher education. At the same time, working-class studies has emerged as a new academic discipline, updating a long tradition of scholarship on labor history and proletarian literature to include discussions of working-class culture, intersections of class with race and ethnicity, and studies of the representation of the working class in popular culture. These developments have generated new ideas about teaching that incorporate both a sensitivity to the working-class roots of many students and the inclusion of course content informed by an awareness of class culture. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Teaching Working Class(Sherry Lee Linkon )
Writing the Personal: Narrative, Social Class, and Feminist Pedagogy (Ann E. Green )
Border Crossings: Working-Class Encounters in Higher Education (Richard A. Greenwald, and Elizabeth A. Grant)
Reversals of Fortune: Downward Mobility and the Writing of Nontraditional Students (Anne Aronson)
The (Dis)location of Culture: On the Way to Literacy (Joanna Brooks, Fern Cayetano)
Between Dirty Dishes and Polished Discourse: How Working-Class Moms Construct Student Identities (Eileen Ferretti)
The Shape of the form: Working-Class Students and the Academic Essay (Linda Adler-Kassner)
What Kinds of Tools? Teaching Critical Analysis and Writing to Working-Class Students (Joseph Heathcott )
"Just American"? Reversing Ethnic and Class Assimilation in the Academy (Caroline Pari)
To Know, to Remember, to Realize: Illinois Labor Works - A History Workers Can Use (Robert Bruno, and Lisa Jordan)
Striking Close to Home: Students Confront the 1985 Hormel Strike (Colette Hyman)
Critical Literacy and the Organizing Model of Unionism: Reading and Writing History at a Steelworkers' Union Hall (Kelly Belanger, Linda Strom, John Russo)
Telling Toil: Issues in Teaching Labor Literature (Laura Hapke)
Films of and for a Working-Class World (Tom Zaniello)
Teaching Working-Class Literature to Mixed Audiences (Renny Christopher)
Class, Race, and Culture: Teaching Intercultural Communication (Anthony Esposito )
Immigrant Fiction, Working-and Middle-Class White Students, and Multicultural Empathy: A Pedagogical Balancing Act (Charles Johanningsmeier0
Teaching the Convergence of Race and Class in Introductory Asian American Studies (John Streamas )
Difficult Dialogues: Working-Class Studies in a Multicultural Literature Classroom (Terry Easton, Jennifer Lutzenberger)
Notes
Contributors
Index
Since the 1970s, working-class individuals have made up an increasing proportion of students enrolled in institutions of higher education. At the same time, working-class studies has emerged as a new academic discipline, updating a long tradition of scholarship on labor history and proletarian literature to include discussions of working-class culture, intersections of class with race and ethnicity, and studies of the representation of the working class in popular culture. These developments have generated new ideas about teaching that incorporate both a sensitivity to the working-class roots of many students and the inclusion of course content informed by an awareness of class culture. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Teaching Working Class(Sherry Lee Linkon )
Writing the Personal: Narrative, Social Class, and Feminist Pedagogy (Ann E. Green )
Border Crossings: Working-Class Encounters in Higher Education (Richard A. Greenwald, and Elizabeth A. Grant)
Reversals of Fortune: Downward Mobility and the Writing of Nontraditional Students (Anne Aronson)
The (Dis)location of Culture: On the Way to Literacy (Joanna Brooks, Fern Cayetano)
Between Dirty Dishes and Polished Discourse: How Working-Class Moms Construct Student Identities (Eileen Ferretti)
The Shape of the form: Working-Class Students and the Academic Essay (Linda Adler-Kassner)
What Kinds of Tools? Teaching Critical Analysis and Writing to Working-Class Students (Joseph Heathcott )
"Just American"? Reversing Ethnic and Class Assimilation in the Academy (Caroline Pari)
To Know, to Remember, to Realize: Illinois Labor Works - A History Workers Can Use (Robert Bruno, and Lisa Jordan)
Striking Close to Home: Students Confront the 1985 Hormel Strike (Colette Hyman)
Critical Literacy and the Organizing Model of Unionism: Reading and Writing History at a Steelworkers' Union Hall (Kelly Belanger, Linda Strom, John Russo)
Telling Toil: Issues in Teaching Labor Literature (Laura Hapke)
Films of and for a Working-Class World (Tom Zaniello)
Teaching Working-Class Literature to Mixed Audiences (Renny Christopher)
Class, Race, and Culture: Teaching Intercultural Communication (Anthony Esposito )
Immigrant Fiction, Working-and Middle-Class White Students, and Multicultural Empathy: A Pedagogical Balancing Act (Charles Johanningsmeier0
Teaching the Convergence of Race and Class in Introductory Asian American Studies (John Streamas )
Difficult Dialogues: Working-Class Studies in a Multicultural Literature Classroom (Terry Easton, Jennifer Lutzenberger)
Notes
Contributors
Index

Exiles from Eden: Religion and the Academic Vocation in America
Additional Info:
Exiles From Eden sounds a call to the American academic community to begin seeking a solution to the many problems facing higher education today by rediscovering a proper sense of its vocation. Schwehn argues that the modern university has forgotten its spiritual foundations and that it needs to reappropriate those foundations before it can creatively and responsibly reform itself. The first part of the book offers a critical examination of ...
Exiles From Eden sounds a call to the American academic community to begin seeking a solution to the many problems facing higher education today by rediscovering a proper sense of its vocation. Schwehn argues that the modern university has forgotten its spiritual foundations and that it needs to reappropriate those foundations before it can creatively and responsibly reform itself. The first part of the book offers a critical examination of ...
Additional Info:
Exiles From Eden sounds a call to the American academic community to begin seeking a solution to the many problems facing higher education today by rediscovering a proper sense of its vocation. Schwehn argues that the modern university has forgotten its spiritual foundations and that it needs to reappropriate those foundations before it can creatively and responsibly reform itself. The first part of the book offers a critical examination of the ethos of the modern academy, especially its understanding of knowledge, teaching, and learning. Schwehn then formulates a description of the "new cultural context" within which the world of higher learning is presently situated. Finally, he develops a view of knowledge and inquiry that is linked essentially to character, friendship, and community. In the process, he demonstrates that the practice of certain spiritual virtues is and always has been essential to the process of genuine learning - even within the secular academy. Schwehn critiques philosophies of higher education he sees as misguided, from Weber and Henry Adams to Derek Bok, Allan Bloom, and William G. Perry, Jr., drawing out valid insights, while always showing the theological underpinnings of the so-called secular thinkers. He emphasizes the importance of community, drawing on both the secular communitarian theory of Richard Rorty and that of the Christian theorist Parker Palmer. Finally, he outlines his own prescription for a classroom-centered spiritual community of scholars. Exiles From Eden examines the relationship between religion and higher learning in a way that is at once historical and philosophical and that is both critical and constructive. It calls for nothing less than a reunion of the intellectual, the moral, and the spiritual virtues within the world of higher education in America. It will engage all those concerned with higher education in America today: faculty, students, parents, alumni, administrators, trustees, and foundation officers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The Academic Vocation
ch. 2 Communities of Learning
ch. 3 Spirited Inquiry
ch. 4 Questions and Considerations
ch. 5 Adams's Education
ch. 6 Conclusion: Adam's Exile
Index
Exiles From Eden sounds a call to the American academic community to begin seeking a solution to the many problems facing higher education today by rediscovering a proper sense of its vocation. Schwehn argues that the modern university has forgotten its spiritual foundations and that it needs to reappropriate those foundations before it can creatively and responsibly reform itself. The first part of the book offers a critical examination of the ethos of the modern academy, especially its understanding of knowledge, teaching, and learning. Schwehn then formulates a description of the "new cultural context" within which the world of higher learning is presently situated. Finally, he develops a view of knowledge and inquiry that is linked essentially to character, friendship, and community. In the process, he demonstrates that the practice of certain spiritual virtues is and always has been essential to the process of genuine learning - even within the secular academy. Schwehn critiques philosophies of higher education he sees as misguided, from Weber and Henry Adams to Derek Bok, Allan Bloom, and William G. Perry, Jr., drawing out valid insights, while always showing the theological underpinnings of the so-called secular thinkers. He emphasizes the importance of community, drawing on both the secular communitarian theory of Richard Rorty and that of the Christian theorist Parker Palmer. Finally, he outlines his own prescription for a classroom-centered spiritual community of scholars. Exiles From Eden examines the relationship between religion and higher learning in a way that is at once historical and philosophical and that is both critical and constructive. It calls for nothing less than a reunion of the intellectual, the moral, and the spiritual virtues within the world of higher education in America. It will engage all those concerned with higher education in America today: faculty, students, parents, alumni, administrators, trustees, and foundation officers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The Academic Vocation
ch. 2 Communities of Learning
ch. 3 Spirited Inquiry
ch. 4 Questions and Considerations
ch. 5 Adams's Education
ch. 6 Conclusion: Adam's Exile
Index

The Advancement of Theological Education
Additional Info:
A study of the work which theological schools do in the preparation of persons for the parish ministry. (From the Publisher)
A study of the work which theological schools do in the preparation of persons for the parish ministry. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A study of the work which theological schools do in the preparation of persons for the parish ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
ch. 1 Some recent trends in theological education
ch. 2 Trends in the economics of theological education
ch. 3 Problems of government
ch. 4 Theological Faculties
ch. 5 The course of study
ch. 6 Theological teaching in classroom, field, and library
ch. 7 Theological students: Varieties of types and experience
ch. 8 The school as community
ch. 9 The line of advance
ch. 10 The Theological education of negro ministers
Index
A study of the work which theological schools do in the preparation of persons for the parish ministry. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
ch. 1 Some recent trends in theological education
ch. 2 Trends in the economics of theological education
ch. 3 Problems of government
ch. 4 Theological Faculties
ch. 5 The course of study
ch. 6 Theological teaching in classroom, field, and library
ch. 7 Theological students: Varieties of types and experience
ch. 8 The school as community
ch. 9 The line of advance
ch. 10 The Theological education of negro ministers
Index

Making Sense of the Institutional Mission: Student Cultures at an Evangelical University: A Dissertation
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introducing the issues: seeking coherence in undergraduate education
ch. 2 The Biola university saga: as integrationist orientation
ch. 3 Biola since 1981: The University
ch. 4 Student cultures: enhancing the institutional mission
ch. 5 Student Cultures: Non- Conformists, Outsiders, and Rebels
ch. 6 Making Sense of the Institutional Mission
ch. 7 Epilogue
Appendices
Bibliography
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introducing the issues: seeking coherence in undergraduate education
ch. 2 The Biola university saga: as integrationist orientation
ch. 3 Biola since 1981: The University
ch. 4 Student cultures: enhancing the institutional mission
ch. 5 Student Cultures: Non- Conformists, Outsiders, and Rebels
ch. 6 Making Sense of the Institutional Mission
ch. 7 Epilogue
Appendices
Bibliography

Teaching for Commitment: Liberal Education, Indoctrination, and Christian Nurture
Additional Info:
This book covers the fields of religion, philosophy, epistemology, ethics, and education. The very practical nature of the problem examined, and Thiessen's straightforward and non-technical presentation, will be of interest to parochial and public school boards, teachers, and parents, as well as religious groups, educationalists, and philosophers of education. (From the Publisher)
This book covers the fields of religion, philosophy, epistemology, ethics, and education. The very practical nature of the problem examined, and Thiessen's straightforward and non-technical presentation, will be of interest to parochial and public school boards, teachers, and parents, as well as religious groups, educationalists, and philosophers of education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book covers the fields of religion, philosophy, epistemology, ethics, and education. The very practical nature of the problem examined, and Thiessen's straightforward and non-technical presentation, will be of interest to parochial and public school boards, teachers, and parents, as well as religious groups, educationalists, and philosophers of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 The Charge of Religious Indoctrination
ch. 2 Liberal Education: The Context of the Charge of Indoctrination
ch. 3 Content of Indoctrination and the Scientific Ideal
ch. 4 Methods of Indoctrination and the Ideal of Rationality
ch. 5 Intentions of the Indoctrinator and the Ideal of Autonomy
ch. 6 Consequences of Indoctrination and the Ideal of Critical Openness
ch. 7 Institutional Indoctrination and the Democratic Ideal of Liberal Institution
ch. 8 Religious Indoctrination Vs. Liberal Education: Some Conclusions
ch. 9 Some Practical Suggestions
Notes
Bibliography
Index
This book covers the fields of religion, philosophy, epistemology, ethics, and education. The very practical nature of the problem examined, and Thiessen's straightforward and non-technical presentation, will be of interest to parochial and public school boards, teachers, and parents, as well as religious groups, educationalists, and philosophers of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 The Charge of Religious Indoctrination
ch. 2 Liberal Education: The Context of the Charge of Indoctrination
ch. 3 Content of Indoctrination and the Scientific Ideal
ch. 4 Methods of Indoctrination and the Ideal of Rationality
ch. 5 Intentions of the Indoctrinator and the Ideal of Autonomy
ch. 6 Consequences of Indoctrination and the Ideal of Critical Openness
ch. 7 Institutional Indoctrination and the Democratic Ideal of Liberal Institution
ch. 8 Religious Indoctrination Vs. Liberal Education: Some Conclusions
ch. 9 Some Practical Suggestions
Notes
Bibliography
Index

Gender and Teaching
Additional Info:
Gender and Teaching provides a vivid, focused, and interactive overview of the important gender issues in education today. This is accomplished through conversations among experts, practitioners, and readers that are informed by representative case studies and by a range of theoretical approaches to the issues. Gender and Teaching is the third volume in the "Reflective Teaching and the Social Conditions of Schooling" series edited by Daniel P. Liston and Kenneth ...
Gender and Teaching provides a vivid, focused, and interactive overview of the important gender issues in education today. This is accomplished through conversations among experts, practitioners, and readers that are informed by representative case studies and by a range of theoretical approaches to the issues. Gender and Teaching is the third volume in the "Reflective Teaching and the Social Conditions of Schooling" series edited by Daniel P. Liston and Kenneth ...
Additional Info:
Gender and Teaching provides a vivid, focused, and interactive overview of the important gender issues in education today. This is accomplished through conversations among experts, practitioners, and readers that are informed by representative case studies and by a range of theoretical approaches to the issues. Gender and Teaching is the third volume in the "Reflective Teaching and the Social Conditions of Schooling" series edited by Daniel P. Liston and Kenneth M. Zeichner. It follows the same format as previous volumes in the series.
Part I includes four cases dealing with related aspects of gendered experiences in schools (nonsexist elementary school curricula, gender and race implications of special education assignment practices, homophobia in high schools and classrooms, and teaching as a woman's profession), followed by a set of teachers', administrators', and professors' reactions to each case.
Part II is an elaboration of four "public arguments"--conservative, liberal, women-centered, and radical multicultural--pertaining to the issues raised in the cases in Part I. These arguments exemplify clusters of orientations, organized around general values rather than hard and fast principles.
Part III presents the authors' own interpretations of the issues raised throughout the work and provides activities and topics for reflection and an annotated bibliography of additional resources.
Content and Pedagogical Features:
*Readers are encouraged throughout to interact with the text. They can respond to each case and compare their responses to those of others in the field.
*The cases and discussions that follow help students begin to evolve their own "practical theories"; explore and perhaps modify some of their basic beliefs and assumptions; become acquainted with other points of view; and look further into the connections and intersections of gender with other structural dynamics and practices--those of race, class, and culture--as intrinsic to their explorations into the social conditions of schooling.
*The major strands in feminist theory about women and education are presented so that students can analyze the differences among them, come up with positions of their own, and learn to defend them.
*Although the authors draw on historical and sociological frameworks that show how women have historically been discriminated against in our schools and in our society, their goal is an education that is equally fair to everyone, boys as well as girls.
Gender and Teaching is pertinent for all prospective and practicing teachers at any stage of their training. It can be used in any undergraduate or graduate course that addresses issues of gender and teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Preface
Preface
I Case Studies and Reactions
Case 1: "Sexism and the Classroom"
Case 2: "Gender, Race, and Teacher Expectations"
Case 3: "Who Gets Hurt?"
Case 4: "A Woman's Career?"
II Public Arguments
A "Conservative View": Upholding Traditional Values and High Standards
A "Liberal-Progressive View": Education for Equality and Democracy
A "Women-Centered View": Celebrating Difference
A "Radical-Multicultural View": Gender, Culture, and Societal Transformation
III Final Arguments, and Some Suggestions and Resources for Further Reflection
The Centrality of Gender for Reflective Teaching and Learning: Understanding the Interplay of Gender, Race, Class, and Culture in Educational Settings
Exercises for Further Reflection
Conclusion
Bibliography
Index
Gender and Teaching provides a vivid, focused, and interactive overview of the important gender issues in education today. This is accomplished through conversations among experts, practitioners, and readers that are informed by representative case studies and by a range of theoretical approaches to the issues. Gender and Teaching is the third volume in the "Reflective Teaching and the Social Conditions of Schooling" series edited by Daniel P. Liston and Kenneth M. Zeichner. It follows the same format as previous volumes in the series.
Part I includes four cases dealing with related aspects of gendered experiences in schools (nonsexist elementary school curricula, gender and race implications of special education assignment practices, homophobia in high schools and classrooms, and teaching as a woman's profession), followed by a set of teachers', administrators', and professors' reactions to each case.
Part II is an elaboration of four "public arguments"--conservative, liberal, women-centered, and radical multicultural--pertaining to the issues raised in the cases in Part I. These arguments exemplify clusters of orientations, organized around general values rather than hard and fast principles.
Part III presents the authors' own interpretations of the issues raised throughout the work and provides activities and topics for reflection and an annotated bibliography of additional resources.
Content and Pedagogical Features:
*Readers are encouraged throughout to interact with the text. They can respond to each case and compare their responses to those of others in the field.
*The cases and discussions that follow help students begin to evolve their own "practical theories"; explore and perhaps modify some of their basic beliefs and assumptions; become acquainted with other points of view; and look further into the connections and intersections of gender with other structural dynamics and practices--those of race, class, and culture--as intrinsic to their explorations into the social conditions of schooling.
*The major strands in feminist theory about women and education are presented so that students can analyze the differences among them, come up with positions of their own, and learn to defend them.
*Although the authors draw on historical and sociological frameworks that show how women have historically been discriminated against in our schools and in our society, their goal is an education that is equally fair to everyone, boys as well as girls.
Gender and Teaching is pertinent for all prospective and practicing teachers at any stage of their training. It can be used in any undergraduate or graduate course that addresses issues of gender and teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Preface
Preface
I Case Studies and Reactions
Case 1: "Sexism and the Classroom"
Case 2: "Gender, Race, and Teacher Expectations"
Case 3: "Who Gets Hurt?"
Case 4: "A Woman's Career?"
II Public Arguments
A "Conservative View": Upholding Traditional Values and High Standards
A "Liberal-Progressive View": Education for Equality and Democracy
A "Women-Centered View": Celebrating Difference
A "Radical-Multicultural View": Gender, Culture, and Societal Transformation
III Final Arguments, and Some Suggestions and Resources for Further Reflection
The Centrality of Gender for Reflective Teaching and Learning: Understanding the Interplay of Gender, Race, Class, and Culture in Educational Settings
Exercises for Further Reflection
Conclusion
Bibliography
Index

Politics and Religion in the United States
Additional Info:
This important book examines the ways in which politics and religion have interacted with each other in the United States from the days of the early colonial period through the 1990s. Unique in the way it sets the contemporary discussion of politics and religion in the larger context of the entire scope of U.S. history, this book traces significant themes over time showing students how the events of the 1990...
This important book examines the ways in which politics and religion have interacted with each other in the United States from the days of the early colonial period through the 1990s. Unique in the way it sets the contemporary discussion of politics and religion in the larger context of the entire scope of U.S. history, this book traces significant themes over time showing students how the events of the 1990...
Additional Info:
This important book examines the ways in which politics and religion have interacted with each other in the United States from the days of the early colonial period through the 1990s. Unique in the way it sets the contemporary discussion of politics and religion in the larger context of the entire scope of U.S. history, this book traces significant themes over time showing students how the events of the 1990s have their roots in a long process of development.
In addition, this volume offers students and teachers an excellent means of keeping up with contemporary developments virtually as rapidly as they occur. The authors have developed their own World Wide Web site to be used in conjunction with the book. This site offers a large variety of relevant links and includes an update area in which important new developments will be posted. Moreover, each chapter of the book has references to several relevant Web sites. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Politics and Religion Website
Introduction
Pt. I Religion and History
ch. 1 The Colonial Experience
ch. 2 Religion and Politics: Intentions of the Founders
ch. 3 Religion and Politics in United States History, 1800-1959
ch. 4 Religion and Politics Since 1960
Pt. II Religion and the First Amendment
ch. 5 The Establishment Clause
Ch. 6 The Free Exercise Clause
Pt. III Religion and Public Opinion
ch. 7 Public Opinion About Religion and Politics
ch. 8 Religious Orientations and Political Orientations Among White Americans
ch. 9 Religion and Politics Among Black Americans
Pt. IV Effects of Religious Influences in Politics
ch. 10 Religious Groups as Political Interest Groups
ch. 11 The Debate on the Role of Religion in Public Life
App. A Profiles of Religious Groups in the United States
App. B Further Information About NORC GSS Question Wording
Index
This important book examines the ways in which politics and religion have interacted with each other in the United States from the days of the early colonial period through the 1990s. Unique in the way it sets the contemporary discussion of politics and religion in the larger context of the entire scope of U.S. history, this book traces significant themes over time showing students how the events of the 1990s have their roots in a long process of development.
In addition, this volume offers students and teachers an excellent means of keeping up with contemporary developments virtually as rapidly as they occur. The authors have developed their own World Wide Web site to be used in conjunction with the book. This site offers a large variety of relevant links and includes an update area in which important new developments will be posted. Moreover, each chapter of the book has references to several relevant Web sites. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Politics and Religion Website
Introduction
Pt. I Religion and History
ch. 1 The Colonial Experience
ch. 2 Religion and Politics: Intentions of the Founders
ch. 3 Religion and Politics in United States History, 1800-1959
ch. 4 Religion and Politics Since 1960
Pt. II Religion and the First Amendment
ch. 5 The Establishment Clause
Ch. 6 The Free Exercise Clause
Pt. III Religion and Public Opinion
ch. 7 Public Opinion About Religion and Politics
ch. 8 Religious Orientations and Political Orientations Among White Americans
ch. 9 Religion and Politics Among Black Americans
Pt. IV Effects of Religious Influences in Politics
ch. 10 Religious Groups as Political Interest Groups
ch. 11 The Debate on the Role of Religion in Public Life
App. A Profiles of Religious Groups in the United States
App. B Further Information About NORC GSS Question Wording
Index

Spiritual Marketplace: Baby Boomers and the Remaking of American Religion
Additional Info:
In large chain bookstores the "religion" section is gone and in its place is an expanding number of topics including angels, Sufism, journey, recovery, meditation, magic, inspiration, Judaica, astrology, gurus, Bible, prophesy, evangelicalism, Mary, Buddhism, Catholicism, and esoterica. As Wade Clark Roof notes, such changes over the last two decades reflect a shift away from religion as traditionally understood to more diverse and creative approaches. But what does this splintering ...
In large chain bookstores the "religion" section is gone and in its place is an expanding number of topics including angels, Sufism, journey, recovery, meditation, magic, inspiration, Judaica, astrology, gurus, Bible, prophesy, evangelicalism, Mary, Buddhism, Catholicism, and esoterica. As Wade Clark Roof notes, such changes over the last two decades reflect a shift away from religion as traditionally understood to more diverse and creative approaches. But what does this splintering ...
Additional Info:
In large chain bookstores the "religion" section is gone and in its place is an expanding number of topics including angels, Sufism, journey, recovery, meditation, magic, inspiration, Judaica, astrology, gurus, Bible, prophesy, evangelicalism, Mary, Buddhism, Catholicism, and esoterica. As Wade Clark Roof notes, such changes over the last two decades reflect a shift away from religion as traditionally understood to more diverse and creative approaches. But what does this splintering of the religious perspective say about Americans? Have we become more interested in spiritual concerns or have we become lost among trends? Do we value personal spirituality over traditional religion and no longer see ourselves united in a larger community of faith? Roof first credited this religious diversity to the baby boomers in his bestselling A Generation of Seekers (1993). He returns to interview many of these people, now in mid-life, to reveal a generation with a unique set of spiritual values--a generation that has altered our historic interpretations of religious beliefs, practices, and symbols, and perhaps even our understanding of the sacred itself.
The quest culture created by the baby boomers has generated a "marketplace" of new spiritual beliefs and practices and of revisited traditions. As Roof shows, some Americans are exploring faiths and spiritual disciplines for the first time; others are rediscovering their lost traditions; others are drawn to small groups and alternative communities; and still others create their own mix of values and metaphysical beliefs. Spiritual Marketplace charts the emergence of five subcultures: dogmatists, born-again Christians, mainstream believers, metaphysical believers and seekers, and secularists. Drawing on surveys and in-depth interviews for over a decade, Roof reports on the religious and spiritual styles, family patterns, and moral vision and values for each of these subcultures. The result is an innovative, engaging approach to understanding how religious life is being reshaped as we move into the next century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: On Maps and Terrains
ch. 1 Varieties of Spiritual Quest
ch. 2 The Making of a Quest Culture
ch. 3 Spiritual Marketplace
ch. 4 On Being Fluid and Grounded
ch. 5 A Quest for What?
ch. 6 Redrawing the Boundaries
ch. 7 Realigning Family and Religion
ch. 8 Moral Vision and Values
Conclusion: "Whirl Is King, Having Driven Out Zeus"
App.: Methodology
Notes
Index
In large chain bookstores the "religion" section is gone and in its place is an expanding number of topics including angels, Sufism, journey, recovery, meditation, magic, inspiration, Judaica, astrology, gurus, Bible, prophesy, evangelicalism, Mary, Buddhism, Catholicism, and esoterica. As Wade Clark Roof notes, such changes over the last two decades reflect a shift away from religion as traditionally understood to more diverse and creative approaches. But what does this splintering of the religious perspective say about Americans? Have we become more interested in spiritual concerns or have we become lost among trends? Do we value personal spirituality over traditional religion and no longer see ourselves united in a larger community of faith? Roof first credited this religious diversity to the baby boomers in his bestselling A Generation of Seekers (1993). He returns to interview many of these people, now in mid-life, to reveal a generation with a unique set of spiritual values--a generation that has altered our historic interpretations of religious beliefs, practices, and symbols, and perhaps even our understanding of the sacred itself.
The quest culture created by the baby boomers has generated a "marketplace" of new spiritual beliefs and practices and of revisited traditions. As Roof shows, some Americans are exploring faiths and spiritual disciplines for the first time; others are rediscovering their lost traditions; others are drawn to small groups and alternative communities; and still others create their own mix of values and metaphysical beliefs. Spiritual Marketplace charts the emergence of five subcultures: dogmatists, born-again Christians, mainstream believers, metaphysical believers and seekers, and secularists. Drawing on surveys and in-depth interviews for over a decade, Roof reports on the religious and spiritual styles, family patterns, and moral vision and values for each of these subcultures. The result is an innovative, engaging approach to understanding how religious life is being reshaped as we move into the next century. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: On Maps and Terrains
ch. 1 Varieties of Spiritual Quest
ch. 2 The Making of a Quest Culture
ch. 3 Spiritual Marketplace
ch. 4 On Being Fluid and Grounded
ch. 5 A Quest for What?
ch. 6 Redrawing the Boundaries
ch. 7 Realigning Family and Religion
ch. 8 Moral Vision and Values
Conclusion: "Whirl Is King, Having Driven Out Zeus"
App.: Methodology
Notes
Index
Additional Info:
In the modern university, religion is often taken to school--primarily in the sense of being critiqued, disciplined, and domesticated. In this provocative book, Stephen Webb steps into the middle of current controversies about the place of religion in secular high schools and colleges. Speaking explicitly as a Christian theologian, but also as one who accepts the reality of religious pluralism, Webb argues that the teaching of religion is itself a ...
In the modern university, religion is often taken to school--primarily in the sense of being critiqued, disciplined, and domesticated. In this provocative book, Stephen Webb steps into the middle of current controversies about the place of religion in secular high schools and colleges. Speaking explicitly as a Christian theologian, but also as one who accepts the reality of religious pluralism, Webb argues that the teaching of religion is itself a ...
Additional Info:
In the modern university, religion is often taken to school--primarily in the sense of being critiqued, disciplined, and domesticated. In this provocative book, Stephen Webb steps into the middle of current controversies about the place of religion in secular high schools and colleges. Speaking explicitly as a Christian theologian, but also as one who accepts the reality of religious pluralism, Webb argues that the teaching of religion is itself a religious activity, that teachers of religion should not disguise their own faiths in the classroom, and that high schools and universities should allow more--not less--space for religious voices.
Taking Religion to School, rather than rehearse tired debates, bursts with creative insight and strategic reframings of the crucial questions about religion and pedagogy. Webb's penetrating analysis and vivid autobiographical reflections will benefit professors of religious studies, high school teachers of religion, students, seminary-and university-based theologians, and all others concerned with the many points of contention over religious education in our day. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Teaching Religion Religiously
ch. 1. Confessions of a Theologian: How I Learned Why I Teach
ch. 2. Religion Lost and Found in Public Education
ch. 3. The Theology of Teaching and the Teaching of Theology
ch. 4. Classroom Confessions: Redeeming a Theological Trope for Pedagogy
ch. 5. Religion Amid the Ruins of the Postmodern University
ch. 6. The Mystery of the Disappearing Chaplain: A Case Study of Wabash College
ch. 7. Teaching the Freedom to Believe: A Dialogue with William C. Placher
ch. 8. Theology and Religious Studies: How Every Religion Teacher is a Theologian Now
Notes
In the modern university, religion is often taken to school--primarily in the sense of being critiqued, disciplined, and domesticated. In this provocative book, Stephen Webb steps into the middle of current controversies about the place of religion in secular high schools and colleges. Speaking explicitly as a Christian theologian, but also as one who accepts the reality of religious pluralism, Webb argues that the teaching of religion is itself a religious activity, that teachers of religion should not disguise their own faiths in the classroom, and that high schools and universities should allow more--not less--space for religious voices.
Taking Religion to School, rather than rehearse tired debates, bursts with creative insight and strategic reframings of the crucial questions about religion and pedagogy. Webb's penetrating analysis and vivid autobiographical reflections will benefit professors of religious studies, high school teachers of religion, students, seminary-and university-based theologians, and all others concerned with the many points of contention over religious education in our day. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Teaching Religion Religiously
ch. 1. Confessions of a Theologian: How I Learned Why I Teach
ch. 2. Religion Lost and Found in Public Education
ch. 3. The Theology of Teaching and the Teaching of Theology
ch. 4. Classroom Confessions: Redeeming a Theological Trope for Pedagogy
ch. 5. Religion Amid the Ruins of the Postmodern University
ch. 6. The Mystery of the Disappearing Chaplain: A Case Study of Wabash College
ch. 7. Teaching the Freedom to Believe: A Dialogue with William C. Placher
ch. 8. Theology and Religious Studies: How Every Religion Teacher is a Theologian Now
Notes

Exclusion & Embrace: A Theological Exploration of Identity, Otherness, and Reconciliation
Additional Info:
Life at the end of the twentieth century presents us with a disturbing reality. Otherness, the simple fact of being different in some way, has come to be defined as in and of itself evil. Miroslav Volf contends that if the healing word of the gospel is to be heard today, Christian theology must find ways of speaking that address the hatred of the other. Reaching back to the New ...
Life at the end of the twentieth century presents us with a disturbing reality. Otherness, the simple fact of being different in some way, has come to be defined as in and of itself evil. Miroslav Volf contends that if the healing word of the gospel is to be heard today, Christian theology must find ways of speaking that address the hatred of the other. Reaching back to the New ...
Additional Info:
Life at the end of the twentieth century presents us with a disturbing reality. Otherness, the simple fact of being different in some way, has come to be defined as in and of itself evil. Miroslav Volf contends that if the healing word of the gospel is to be heard today, Christian theology must find ways of speaking that address the hatred of the other. Reaching back to the New Testament metaphor of salvation as reconciliation, Volf proposes the idea of embrace as a theological response to the problem of exclusion. Increasingly we see that exclusion has become the primary sin, skewing our perceptions of reality and causing us to react out of fear and anger to all those who are not within our (ever-narrowing) circle. In light of this, Christians must learn that salvation comes, not only as we are reconciled to God, and not only as we "learn to live with one another," but as we take the dangerous and costly step of opening ourselves to the other, of enfolding him or her in the same embrace with which we have been enfolded by God. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: The Cross, the Self, and the Other
ch. 1 Distance and Belonging
ch. 2 Exclusion
ch. 3 Embrace
ch. 4 Gender Identity
ch. 5 Oppression and Justice
ch. 6 Deception and Truth
ch. 7 Violence and Peace
Bibliography
Index
Life at the end of the twentieth century presents us with a disturbing reality. Otherness, the simple fact of being different in some way, has come to be defined as in and of itself evil. Miroslav Volf contends that if the healing word of the gospel is to be heard today, Christian theology must find ways of speaking that address the hatred of the other. Reaching back to the New Testament metaphor of salvation as reconciliation, Volf proposes the idea of embrace as a theological response to the problem of exclusion. Increasingly we see that exclusion has become the primary sin, skewing our perceptions of reality and causing us to react out of fear and anger to all those who are not within our (ever-narrowing) circle. In light of this, Christians must learn that salvation comes, not only as we are reconciled to God, and not only as we "learn to live with one another," but as we take the dangerous and costly step of opening ourselves to the other, of enfolding him or her in the same embrace with which we have been enfolded by God. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: The Cross, the Self, and the Other
ch. 1 Distance and Belonging
ch. 2 Exclusion
ch. 3 Embrace
ch. 4 Gender Identity
ch. 5 Oppression and Justice
ch. 6 Deception and Truth
ch. 7 Violence and Peace
Bibliography
Index


Advice for New Faculty Members
Additional Info:
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest ...
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest ...
Additional Info:
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest preparation times and a greater reliance on spontaneity and student participation. Similarly, new faculty can use its rule-based practices to write with ease, increasing productivity, creativity, and publishability through brief, daily sessions of focused and relaxed work. And they can socialize more successfully by learning about often-misunderstood aspects of academic culture, including mentoring. Each rule in Advice for New Faculty Members has been tested on hundreds of new faculty and proven effective over the long run -- even in attaining permanent appointment. It is the first guidebook to move beyond anecdotes and surmises for its directives, based on the author's extensive experience and solid research in the areas of staff and faculty development. For new teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface.
Introduction: Why New Professors Need Timely Advice.
ch. 1 Moderate Work at Teaching
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
Summary and Extension of the Nihil Nimus Approach to Teaching.
ch. 2 Write in Mindful Ways.
Rationale for a Mindful Approach to Writing.
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
A Summary of Chapter 2 and its Mindful Ways of Writing.
ch. 3 Socialize and Serve with Compassion.
Introduction: Why Compassion Is Ultimately Important.
Learn about Academic Culture, Early, Patiently.
Let Others Do Some of Your Work.
Combine Self-Service with Service for Others.
General Summary: Catalog Summary of Nihil Nimus Rules
Sources.
Appendix: Readings by the Numbers.
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest preparation times and a greater reliance on spontaneity and student participation. Similarly, new faculty can use its rule-based practices to write with ease, increasing productivity, creativity, and publishability through brief, daily sessions of focused and relaxed work. And they can socialize more successfully by learning about often-misunderstood aspects of academic culture, including mentoring. Each rule in Advice for New Faculty Members has been tested on hundreds of new faculty and proven effective over the long run -- even in attaining permanent appointment. It is the first guidebook to move beyond anecdotes and surmises for its directives, based on the author's extensive experience and solid research in the areas of staff and faculty development. For new teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface.
Introduction: Why New Professors Need Timely Advice.
ch. 1 Moderate Work at Teaching
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
Summary and Extension of the Nihil Nimus Approach to Teaching.
ch. 2 Write in Mindful Ways.
Rationale for a Mindful Approach to Writing.
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
A Summary of Chapter 2 and its Mindful Ways of Writing.
ch. 3 Socialize and Serve with Compassion.
Introduction: Why Compassion Is Ultimately Important.
Learn about Academic Culture, Early, Patiently.
Let Others Do Some of Your Work.
Combine Self-Service with Service for Others.
General Summary: Catalog Summary of Nihil Nimus Rules
Sources.
Appendix: Readings by the Numbers.

Creating Contexts for Learning and Self-Authorship: Constructive Developmental Pedagogy
Additional Info:
An insightful approach to improving the process of education. (From the Publisher)
An insightful approach to improving the process of education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
An insightful approach to improving the process of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
PART ONE Worlds Apart: The Need for Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 1 Seeking Self-Authorship: The World of Educators
ch. 2 The Developmental Nature of Self-Authorship: The World of Students
ch. 3 Crossing the Border
PART TWO Bridging Multiple Worlds: Forms of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 4 Learning Scientific Inquiry: Revising and Creating Science
ch. 5 Investigating Together: Building One's Own Construction of Mathematics
ch. 6 Using Narrative to Promote Self-Authorship: Educational Storytelling
PART THREE The Problems and Promise of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 7 Rebuilding Educators' and Students' Worlds
ch. 8 The Challenges of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 9 The Possibilities of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
Appendices
References
Index
An insightful approach to improving the process of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
PART ONE Worlds Apart: The Need for Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 1 Seeking Self-Authorship: The World of Educators
ch. 2 The Developmental Nature of Self-Authorship: The World of Students
ch. 3 Crossing the Border
PART TWO Bridging Multiple Worlds: Forms of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 4 Learning Scientific Inquiry: Revising and Creating Science
ch. 5 Investigating Together: Building One's Own Construction of Mathematics
ch. 6 Using Narrative to Promote Self-Authorship: Educational Storytelling
PART THREE The Problems and Promise of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 7 Rebuilding Educators' and Students' Worlds
ch. 8 The Challenges of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
ch. 9 The Possibilities of Constructive-Developmental Pedagogy
Appendices
References
Index

So You Want to Be a Professor? A Handbook for Graduate Students
Additional Info:
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a ...
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a ...
Additional Info:
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a Professor begins with a discussion of jobs in academia and how to find them. Chapters cover a wide range of political skills for future academic success, including lecturing, organizing a course, meeting your first class, testing, maintaining a research program, and writing for publication. No other book provides such a practical overview of essential career-building skills. Even junior faculty will benefit from the advice in this engaging, comprehensive book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Employment Opportunities in Academia
ch. 2 Getting an Academic Job
ch. 3 Learning to Teach
ch. 4 Organizing a Course
ch. 5 Presenting a Course
ch. 6 Meeting Your First Class
ch. 7 Testing and Evaluation
ch. 8 Advising and Mentoring
ch. 9 Research and Scholarship
ch. 10 Publishing
ch. 11 Getting Tenure
ch. 12 Academic Integrity
ch. 13 Getting Fired
ch. 14 The Academic Career
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a Professor begins with a discussion of jobs in academia and how to find them. Chapters cover a wide range of political skills for future academic success, including lecturing, organizing a course, meeting your first class, testing, maintaining a research program, and writing for publication. No other book provides such a practical overview of essential career-building skills. Even junior faculty will benefit from the advice in this engaging, comprehensive book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Employment Opportunities in Academia
ch. 2 Getting an Academic Job
ch. 3 Learning to Teach
ch. 4 Organizing a Course
ch. 5 Presenting a Course
ch. 6 Meeting Your First Class
ch. 7 Testing and Evaluation
ch. 8 Advising and Mentoring
ch. 9 Research and Scholarship
ch. 10 Publishing
ch. 11 Getting Tenure
ch. 12 Academic Integrity
ch. 13 Getting Fired
ch. 14 The Academic Career

Scholarship in the Postmodern Era: New Venues, New Values, New Visions
Additional Info:
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; ...
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; ...
Additional Info:
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; and its third looks to the future of scholarship, identifying trends, causative factors, and potentialities that promise to shape scholars and their scholarship in the new millennium. One of the greatest legacies of Scholarship Reconsidered is the advocacy of a more holistic and humane approach to promoting, evaluating, and rewarding scholarship. This volume hopes to help nurture that legacy.
This is the 90th volume of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Beyond Scholarship Reconsidered: Toward an Enlarged Vision of the Scholarly Work of Faculty Members (R. Eugene Rice)
ch. 2 Transforming the Scholarly Process Through Information Technology (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 3 Nurturing Scholarship Through Holistic Faculty Development: A Synergistic Approach (Kenneth J. Zahorski)
ch. 4 New Conceptions of Scholarship for a New Generation of Faculty Members (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 5 Engendering Trust Through Institutional Policies and Practices (Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 The Soul of Scholarship (Kina S. Mallard
ch. 7 Defining Scholarship for the Twenty-First Century (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 8 Student-Faculty Collaborations, Undergraduate Research, and Collaboration as an Administrative Model (Ronald L. Dotterer)
ch. 9 Nurturing an Ethos of Community Engagement (Jerry Berberet)
Index
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; and its third looks to the future of scholarship, identifying trends, causative factors, and potentialities that promise to shape scholars and their scholarship in the new millennium. One of the greatest legacies of Scholarship Reconsidered is the advocacy of a more holistic and humane approach to promoting, evaluating, and rewarding scholarship. This volume hopes to help nurture that legacy.
This is the 90th volume of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Beyond Scholarship Reconsidered: Toward an Enlarged Vision of the Scholarly Work of Faculty Members (R. Eugene Rice)
ch. 2 Transforming the Scholarly Process Through Information Technology (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 3 Nurturing Scholarship Through Holistic Faculty Development: A Synergistic Approach (Kenneth J. Zahorski)
ch. 4 New Conceptions of Scholarship for a New Generation of Faculty Members (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 5 Engendering Trust Through Institutional Policies and Practices (Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 The Soul of Scholarship (Kina S. Mallard
ch. 7 Defining Scholarship for the Twenty-First Century (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 8 Student-Faculty Collaborations, Undergraduate Research, and Collaboration as an Administrative Model (Ronald L. Dotterer)
ch. 9 Nurturing an Ethos of Community Engagement (Jerry Berberet)
Index

The Teacher's Calling: A Spirituality for Those Who Teach
Additional Info:
Teaching is more, much more, than getting up in front of a class full of students and presenting information to them. It is, affirms distinguished educator, writer and lecturer Gloria Durka, a true vocation, "a calling that makes claims on our souls".
Her book, which is written for teachers of all grade levels, is a journey into the soul of education and the heart of the teacher. In ...
Teaching is more, much more, than getting up in front of a class full of students and presenting information to them. It is, affirms distinguished educator, writer and lecturer Gloria Durka, a true vocation, "a calling that makes claims on our souls".
Her book, which is written for teachers of all grade levels, is a journey into the soul of education and the heart of the teacher. In ...
Additional Info:
Teaching is more, much more, than getting up in front of a class full of students and presenting information to them. It is, affirms distinguished educator, writer and lecturer Gloria Durka, a true vocation, "a calling that makes claims on our souls".
Her book, which is written for teachers of all grade levels, is a journey into the soul of education and the heart of the teacher. In seven chapters, she covers such ideas as teaching from the heart; teaching courageously, creatively, wisely and morally; and, the greatest challenge of all, facing one's own vulnerabilities. Each chapter ends with prayers and reflections that help readers enrich their spirituality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching from the Heart: The Soul of the Teacher
ch. 2 Teaching Courageously: Showing How
ch. 3 Teaching Creatively: Imagining How
ch. 4 Teaching Wisely: Knowing How
ch. 5 Teaching Morally: The Ethic of Caring
ch. 6 Facing Ourselves Facing the Unfamiliar: Multiple Vulnerabilities
ch. 7 The Joy of Teaching: A Portrait of Possibility
Notes
Bibliography
Teaching is more, much more, than getting up in front of a class full of students and presenting information to them. It is, affirms distinguished educator, writer and lecturer Gloria Durka, a true vocation, "a calling that makes claims on our souls".
Her book, which is written for teachers of all grade levels, is a journey into the soul of education and the heart of the teacher. In seven chapters, she covers such ideas as teaching from the heart; teaching courageously, creatively, wisely and morally; and, the greatest challenge of all, facing one's own vulnerabilities. Each chapter ends with prayers and reflections that help readers enrich their spirituality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching from the Heart: The Soul of the Teacher
ch. 2 Teaching Courageously: Showing How
ch. 3 Teaching Creatively: Imagining How
ch. 4 Teaching Wisely: Knowing How
ch. 5 Teaching Morally: The Ethic of Caring
ch. 6 Facing Ourselves Facing the Unfamiliar: Multiple Vulnerabilities
ch. 7 The Joy of Teaching: A Portrait of Possibility
Notes
Bibliography

Developing and Implementing Service-Learning Programs
Additional Info:
A relative newcomer in higher education, service-learning nevertheless has caught on at campuses across the country. While thousands of students, teachers, and community partners are realizing the benefits of this experiential form of education, many others still have questions, particularly, "What exactly is service-learning?" and "How can I do it effectively?" This volume of New Directions for Higher Education answers both questions, beginning with a brief overview and then presenting ...
A relative newcomer in higher education, service-learning nevertheless has caught on at campuses across the country. While thousands of students, teachers, and community partners are realizing the benefits of this experiential form of education, many others still have questions, particularly, "What exactly is service-learning?" and "How can I do it effectively?" This volume of New Directions for Higher Education answers both questions, beginning with a brief overview and then presenting ...
Additional Info:
A relative newcomer in higher education, service-learning nevertheless has caught on at campuses across the country. While thousands of students, teachers, and community partners are realizing the benefits of this experiential form of education, many others still have questions, particularly, "What exactly is service-learning?" and "How can I do it effectively?" This volume of New Directions for Higher Education answers both questions, beginning with a brief overview and then presenting a series of chapters on getting started, promoting reflection, and otherwise making service-learning work effectively in a variety of settings, from liberal arts colleges to research institutions. Both newcomers and veterans will appreciate the clear, practical advice on such matters as finding community partners, reaching diverse populations, and integrating service-learning and research. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Why Service-Learning? (Bruce W. Speck)
ch. 2 A Smart Start to Service-Learning (Maureen Shubow Rubin)
ch. 3 Service-Learning Is for Everybody (Robert Shumer)
ch. 4 Creating Your Reflection Map (Janet Eyler )
ch. 5 The Internet in Service-Learning (Mark Canada)
ch. 6 A Comprehensive Model for Assessing Service-Learning and Community-University Partnerships (Barbara A. Holland)
ch. 7 The National Society for Experiential Education in Service-Learning (Lawrence Neil Bailis)
ch. 8 Advancing Service-Learning at Research Universities (Andrew Furco)
ch. 9 How Professors Can Promote Service-Learning in a Teaching Institution (Kathy O'Byrne)
ch. 10 Humanistic Learning and Service-Learning at the Liberal Arts College (Edward Zlotkowski)
ch. 11 Additional Resources (Elaine K. Ikeda)
Index
A relative newcomer in higher education, service-learning nevertheless has caught on at campuses across the country. While thousands of students, teachers, and community partners are realizing the benefits of this experiential form of education, many others still have questions, particularly, "What exactly is service-learning?" and "How can I do it effectively?" This volume of New Directions for Higher Education answers both questions, beginning with a brief overview and then presenting a series of chapters on getting started, promoting reflection, and otherwise making service-learning work effectively in a variety of settings, from liberal arts colleges to research institutions. Both newcomers and veterans will appreciate the clear, practical advice on such matters as finding community partners, reaching diverse populations, and integrating service-learning and research. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Why Service-Learning? (Bruce W. Speck)
ch. 2 A Smart Start to Service-Learning (Maureen Shubow Rubin)
ch. 3 Service-Learning Is for Everybody (Robert Shumer)
ch. 4 Creating Your Reflection Map (Janet Eyler )
ch. 5 The Internet in Service-Learning (Mark Canada)
ch. 6 A Comprehensive Model for Assessing Service-Learning and Community-University Partnerships (Barbara A. Holland)
ch. 7 The National Society for Experiential Education in Service-Learning (Lawrence Neil Bailis)
ch. 8 Advancing Service-Learning at Research Universities (Andrew Furco)
ch. 9 How Professors Can Promote Service-Learning in a Teaching Institution (Kathy O'Byrne)
ch. 10 Humanistic Learning and Service-Learning at the Liberal Arts College (Edward Zlotkowski)
ch. 11 Additional Resources (Elaine K. Ikeda)
Index

The Course Portfolio: How Faculty Can Examine Their Teaching to Advance Practice and Improve Student Learning
Additional Info:
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty ...
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty ...
Additional Info:
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty in a range of disciplines who have developed and used course portfolios, as well as an annotated resource list. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface (Margaret A. Miller)
Acknowledgements
Introduction (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 1: Course Anatomy: The Dissection and Analysis of Knowledge Through Teaching (Lee S. Shulman)
ch. 2: Defining Features and Significant Functions of the Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Survey Course in American History (William W. Cutler, III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course
ch. 3: Why Now: Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Slavery Course in American History (William W. Cutler III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course (Donna Martsoff)
Chapter 3: Why Now? Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 3: A Course Portfolio for a Colloquium in 2oth-Century American Foreign Relations (Mary Ann Heiss)
Case Study 4: A Course Portfolio in Mathematics (Orin Chein)
ch. 4: How to Develop a Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 5: A Course Portfolio for Midcareer Reflection (Deborah M. Langsam)
Case Study 6: Post-Tenure Review: A Case Study of a Course Portfolio Within a Personnel File (Charles W. Mignon)
Case Study 7: A Portfolio That Makes a Point (Eli Passow)
ch. 5: Putting the Focus on Student Learning (Daniel Bernstein)
Case Study 8: A Course Portfolio for a Creative Writing Course (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 9: A Hypertext Portfolio for an Experimental American Literature Course (Randy Bass)
ch. 6: Audiences and Occasions: Using Course Portfolios for Peer Collaboration and Review of Teaching (Pat Hutchings)
Works Cited
Resources for Further Work (Laurie Milford and Pat Hutchings)
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty in a range of disciplines who have developed and used course portfolios, as well as an annotated resource list. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface (Margaret A. Miller)
Acknowledgements
Introduction (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 1: Course Anatomy: The Dissection and Analysis of Knowledge Through Teaching (Lee S. Shulman)
ch. 2: Defining Features and Significant Functions of the Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Survey Course in American History (William W. Cutler, III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course
ch. 3: Why Now: Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Slavery Course in American History (William W. Cutler III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course (Donna Martsoff)
Chapter 3: Why Now? Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 3: A Course Portfolio for a Colloquium in 2oth-Century American Foreign Relations (Mary Ann Heiss)
Case Study 4: A Course Portfolio in Mathematics (Orin Chein)
ch. 4: How to Develop a Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 5: A Course Portfolio for Midcareer Reflection (Deborah M. Langsam)
Case Study 6: Post-Tenure Review: A Case Study of a Course Portfolio Within a Personnel File (Charles W. Mignon)
Case Study 7: A Portfolio That Makes a Point (Eli Passow)
ch. 5: Putting the Focus on Student Learning (Daniel Bernstein)
Case Study 8: A Course Portfolio for a Creative Writing Course (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 9: A Hypertext Portfolio for an Experimental American Literature Course (Randy Bass)
ch. 6: Audiences and Occasions: Using Course Portfolios for Peer Collaboration and Review of Teaching (Pat Hutchings)
Works Cited
Resources for Further Work (Laurie Milford and Pat Hutchings)

Educating Culturally Responsive Teachers
Additional Info:
Offering a conceptual framework and practical strategies for teacher preparation in schools with increasingly diverse racial and ethnic student populations, this book presents a coherent approach to educating culturally responsive teachers. The authors focus on the importance of recruiting and preparing a diverse teaching force, as they propose a vision for restructuring the teacher education curriculum, reconceiving the pedagogy used to prepare prospective teachers, and transforming the institutional context in ...
Offering a conceptual framework and practical strategies for teacher preparation in schools with increasingly diverse racial and ethnic student populations, this book presents a coherent approach to educating culturally responsive teachers. The authors focus on the importance of recruiting and preparing a diverse teaching force, as they propose a vision for restructuring the teacher education curriculum, reconceiving the pedagogy used to prepare prospective teachers, and transforming the institutional context in ...
Additional Info:
Offering a conceptual framework and practical strategies for teacher preparation in schools with increasingly diverse racial and ethnic student populations, this book presents a coherent approach to educating culturally responsive teachers. The authors focus on the importance of recruiting and preparing a diverse teaching force, as they propose a vision for restructuring the teacher education curriculum, reconceiving the pedagogy used to prepare prospective teachers, and transforming the institutional context in order to support the curricular and pedagogical changes they recommend. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 The Shifting Demographic Landscape
ch. 2 Developing Fundamental Orientations for Teaching a Changing Student Population
ch. 3 Fostering Culturally Responsive Teaching
ch. 4 Modeling the Practice of Culturally Responsive Teaching
ch. 5 The Institutional Context Needed to Educate Culturally Resposive
Teachers
Conclusion
Notes
References
Index
Offering a conceptual framework and practical strategies for teacher preparation in schools with increasingly diverse racial and ethnic student populations, this book presents a coherent approach to educating culturally responsive teachers. The authors focus on the importance of recruiting and preparing a diverse teaching force, as they propose a vision for restructuring the teacher education curriculum, reconceiving the pedagogy used to prepare prospective teachers, and transforming the institutional context in order to support the curricular and pedagogical changes they recommend. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 The Shifting Demographic Landscape
ch. 2 Developing Fundamental Orientations for Teaching a Changing Student Population
ch. 3 Fostering Culturally Responsive Teaching
ch. 4 Modeling the Practice of Culturally Responsive Teaching
ch. 5 The Institutional Context Needed to Educate Culturally Resposive
Teachers
Conclusion
Notes
References
Index
Additional Info:
In this much needed resource, Maryellen Weimer-one of the nation's most highly regarded authorities on effective college teaching-offers a comprehensive work on the topic of learner-centered teaching in the college and university classroom. As the author explains, learner-centered teaching focuses attention on what the student is learning, how the student is learning, the conditions under which the student is learning, whether the student is retaining and applying the learning, and ...
In this much needed resource, Maryellen Weimer-one of the nation's most highly regarded authorities on effective college teaching-offers a comprehensive work on the topic of learner-centered teaching in the college and university classroom. As the author explains, learner-centered teaching focuses attention on what the student is learning, how the student is learning, the conditions under which the student is learning, whether the student is retaining and applying the learning, and ...
Additional Info:
In this much needed resource, Maryellen Weimer-one of the nation's most highly regarded authorities on effective college teaching-offers a comprehensive work on the topic of learner-centered teaching in the college and university classroom. As the author explains, learner-centered teaching focuses attention on what the student is learning, how the student is learning, the conditions under which the student is learning, whether the student is retaining and applying the learning, and how current learning positions the student for future learning. To help educators accomplish the goals of learner-centered teaching, this important book presents the meaning, practice, and ramifications of the learner-centered approach, and how this approach transforms the college classroom environment. Learner-Centered Teaching shows how to tie teaching and curriculum to the process and objectives of learning rather than to the content delivery alone. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Lessons on Learning
Part 1 What Changes When Teaching Is Learner-Centered?
ch. 2 The Balance of Power
ch. 3 The Function of Teacher
ch. 4 The Role of the Teacher
ch. 5 The Responsibility for Learning
ch. 6 The Purpose and Processes of Evaluation
Part 2 Implementing the Learner-Centered Approach
ch. 7 Responding to Resistance
ch. 8 Taking a Developmental Approach
ch. 9 Making Learner-Centered Teaching Work
App. A Syllabus and Learning Log
App. B Handouts That Develop Learning Skills
App. C: Reading Lists
References
Index
In this much needed resource, Maryellen Weimer-one of the nation's most highly regarded authorities on effective college teaching-offers a comprehensive work on the topic of learner-centered teaching in the college and university classroom. As the author explains, learner-centered teaching focuses attention on what the student is learning, how the student is learning, the conditions under which the student is learning, whether the student is retaining and applying the learning, and how current learning positions the student for future learning. To help educators accomplish the goals of learner-centered teaching, this important book presents the meaning, practice, and ramifications of the learner-centered approach, and how this approach transforms the college classroom environment. Learner-Centered Teaching shows how to tie teaching and curriculum to the process and objectives of learning rather than to the content delivery alone. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Lessons on Learning
Part 1 What Changes When Teaching Is Learner-Centered?
ch. 2 The Balance of Power
ch. 3 The Function of Teacher
ch. 4 The Role of the Teacher
ch. 5 The Responsibility for Learning
ch. 6 The Purpose and Processes of Evaluation
Part 2 Implementing the Learner-Centered Approach
ch. 7 Responding to Resistance
ch. 8 Taking a Developmental Approach
ch. 9 Making Learner-Centered Teaching Work
App. A Syllabus and Learning Log
App. B Handouts That Develop Learning Skills
App. C: Reading Lists
References
Index
Additional Info:
"All of us teach," begins Mark Schwehn's anthology of readings on teaching and learning. Teaching is woven into the fabric of our everyday lives. It includes training children, forming habits and characters, witnessing to a way of life, nurturing reflection and imagination, and imparting goals as well as facts and skills. Teachers are parents, grandparents, spouses, friends, neighbors, pastors, siblings, and co-workers, as well as professional educators. Most people know ...
"All of us teach," begins Mark Schwehn's anthology of readings on teaching and learning. Teaching is woven into the fabric of our everyday lives. It includes training children, forming habits and characters, witnessing to a way of life, nurturing reflection and imagination, and imparting goals as well as facts and skills. Teachers are parents, grandparents, spouses, friends, neighbors, pastors, siblings, and co-workers, as well as professional educators. Most people know ...
Additional Info:
"All of us teach," begins Mark Schwehn's anthology of readings on teaching and learning. Teaching is woven into the fabric of our everyday lives. It includes training children, forming habits and characters, witnessing to a way of life, nurturing reflection and imagination, and imparting goals as well as facts and skills. Teachers are parents, grandparents, spouses, friends, neighbors, pastors, siblings, and co-workers, as well as professional educators. Most people know good teaching when they encounter it, Schwehn argues, and few would identify it with a list of techniques. Although good teaching often seems closer to an art than a skill, teaching is not an occult practice, but a public activity that can be improved by practice and questioning and demonstrated by good examples.
Through Schwehn's choice of examples and deft introductions, Everyone a Teacher is an argument for a rich account of good teaching. It invites reflection yet avoids the abstractions of psychology and educational theory. From Socrates teaching a Greek slave boy geometry to Mark Twain's river-boat pilot on the Mississippi, from a real classroom of kindergarten children in Chicago to the parents who tenderly raise their child in Agee's A Death in the Family, the readings remind us of the historical and human importance of teaching and of the qualities of good teaching. These readings are intended to help us all think about the meaning of teaching and learning, for the sake of improving our teaching in everyday life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Everyone a Teacher: Introduction
I. Why Teach? The Gains and Losses of Learning
II. What Is Teaching? Ancient Showing and Modern Telling
III. Forms and Ways of Teaching
IV. Teaching at Home; At Home Teaching
"All of us teach," begins Mark Schwehn's anthology of readings on teaching and learning. Teaching is woven into the fabric of our everyday lives. It includes training children, forming habits and characters, witnessing to a way of life, nurturing reflection and imagination, and imparting goals as well as facts and skills. Teachers are parents, grandparents, spouses, friends, neighbors, pastors, siblings, and co-workers, as well as professional educators. Most people know good teaching when they encounter it, Schwehn argues, and few would identify it with a list of techniques. Although good teaching often seems closer to an art than a skill, teaching is not an occult practice, but a public activity that can be improved by practice and questioning and demonstrated by good examples.
Through Schwehn's choice of examples and deft introductions, Everyone a Teacher is an argument for a rich account of good teaching. It invites reflection yet avoids the abstractions of psychology and educational theory. From Socrates teaching a Greek slave boy geometry to Mark Twain's river-boat pilot on the Mississippi, from a real classroom of kindergarten children in Chicago to the parents who tenderly raise their child in Agee's A Death in the Family, the readings remind us of the historical and human importance of teaching and of the qualities of good teaching. These readings are intended to help us all think about the meaning of teaching and learning, for the sake of improving our teaching in everyday life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Everyone a Teacher: Introduction
I. Why Teach? The Gains and Losses of Learning
II. What Is Teaching? Ancient Showing and Modern Telling
III. Forms and Ways of Teaching
IV. Teaching at Home; At Home Teaching

Religion in Higher Education: The Politics of the Multifaith Campus
Additional Info:
Examines how the higher education sector in Britain has responded to changes due to religious diversity. Takes particular account of the perspectives of chaplains in higher education, and also considers the perspectives of religious, student-run, and academic organizations concerned with religion in universities. Explores the role that religion plays in shaping a new generation of British Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs, and examines issues such as the staffing of chaplaincies, religious ...
Examines how the higher education sector in Britain has responded to changes due to religious diversity. Takes particular account of the perspectives of chaplains in higher education, and also considers the perspectives of religious, student-run, and academic organizations concerned with religion in universities. Explores the role that religion plays in shaping a new generation of British Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs, and examines issues such as the staffing of chaplaincies, religious ...
Additional Info:
Examines how the higher education sector in Britain has responded to changes due to religious diversity. Takes particular account of the perspectives of chaplains in higher education, and also considers the perspectives of religious, student-run, and academic organizations concerned with religion in universities. Explores the role that religion plays in shaping a new generation of British Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs, and examines issues such as the staffing of chaplaincies, religious dietary needs, and equal opportunity policies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Religion in Higher Education in Britain Since 1945
ch. 3 University Faith Communities: Diversity, Identity and Rights
ch. 4 Chaplaincies: Organisation, Funding and Staffing
ch. 5 Meeting Student Needs
ch. 6 Religion and the Corporate Life of Universities: Equal Opportunities?
ch. 7 Student Voices
ch. 8 Religion in Higher Education and Public Life: Some Conclusions
Appendices
References
Index
Examines how the higher education sector in Britain has responded to changes due to religious diversity. Takes particular account of the perspectives of chaplains in higher education, and also considers the perspectives of religious, student-run, and academic organizations concerned with religion in universities. Explores the role that religion plays in shaping a new generation of British Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs, and examines issues such as the staffing of chaplaincies, religious dietary needs, and equal opportunity policies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Religion in Higher Education in Britain Since 1945
ch. 3 University Faith Communities: Diversity, Identity and Rights
ch. 4 Chaplaincies: Organisation, Funding and Staffing
ch. 5 Meeting Student Needs
ch. 6 Religion and the Corporate Life of Universities: Equal Opportunities?
ch. 7 Student Voices
ch. 8 Religion in Higher Education and Public Life: Some Conclusions
Appendices
References
Index

Learning Together: Keeping Teachers and Students Actively Involved in Learning by Writing Across the Curriculum: A Sourcebook of Ideas and Writing Exercises
Additional Info:
Keeping Teachers and Students Actively Involved by Writing Across the Curriculum -- Writing is an evolutionary process whereby the author revises his/her ideas, values and approaches, not just a mechanical act of placing words in a correct sequence with appropriate grammar. It is intensely personal and interactive with the subject matter, whether in the form of a brief One-Minute Paper at the end of class, a five-minute summary during ...
Keeping Teachers and Students Actively Involved by Writing Across the Curriculum -- Writing is an evolutionary process whereby the author revises his/her ideas, values and approaches, not just a mechanical act of placing words in a correct sequence with appropriate grammar. It is intensely personal and interactive with the subject matter, whether in the form of a brief One-Minute Paper at the end of class, a five-minute summary during ...
Additional Info:
Keeping Teachers and Students Actively Involved by Writing Across the Curriculum -- Writing is an evolutionary process whereby the author revises his/her ideas, values and approaches, not just a mechanical act of placing words in a correct sequence with appropriate grammar. It is intensely personal and interactive with the subject matter, whether in the form of a brief One-Minute Paper at the end of class, a five-minute summary during class, an extended essay, or research paper. The purpose of this book is to provide a wide range of examples of writing across the curriculum (WAC) activities in order to encourage teachers to use writing in their classes regularly as a way of stimulating critical thinking in their students and providing variety in their teaching methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Why Use Writing Across the Curriculum
ch. 2 Writing Across the Curriculum Exercises
1 Motivational - General
2 Personal Reflection/Motivation
3 Group Processing
4 Content/Personal Reflection
5 Content/Enhancing
6 Additional Samples of Writing Assignments
WAC Web Pages
Keeping Teachers and Students Actively Involved by Writing Across the Curriculum -- Writing is an evolutionary process whereby the author revises his/her ideas, values and approaches, not just a mechanical act of placing words in a correct sequence with appropriate grammar. It is intensely personal and interactive with the subject matter, whether in the form of a brief One-Minute Paper at the end of class, a five-minute summary during class, an extended essay, or research paper. The purpose of this book is to provide a wide range of examples of writing across the curriculum (WAC) activities in order to encourage teachers to use writing in their classes regularly as a way of stimulating critical thinking in their students and providing variety in their teaching methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Why Use Writing Across the Curriculum
ch. 2 Writing Across the Curriculum Exercises
1 Motivational - General
2 Personal Reflection/Motivation
3 Group Processing
4 Content/Personal Reflection
5 Content/Enhancing
6 Additional Samples of Writing Assignments
WAC Web Pages

Organizing to Collaborate: A Taxonomy of Higher Education Practices for Promoting Interdependence Within the Classroom, Across the Campus, and Beyond the College
Additional Info:
This book focuses on the terms "collaborative learning," "cooperative learning," and "learning community" in which they have been bandied about in American higher education with great frequency and enthusiasm. One primary purpose of this monograph is to provide a more precise delineation of postsecondary practices that are subsumed or assumed to be embraced by the umbrella terms, collaborative learning, cooperative learning, and learning community, and organize these practices into a ...
This book focuses on the terms "collaborative learning," "cooperative learning," and "learning community" in which they have been bandied about in American higher education with great frequency and enthusiasm. One primary purpose of this monograph is to provide a more precise delineation of postsecondary practices that are subsumed or assumed to be embraced by the umbrella terms, collaborative learning, cooperative learning, and learning community, and organize these practices into a ...
Additional Info:
This book focuses on the terms "collaborative learning," "cooperative learning," and "learning community" in which they have been bandied about in American higher education with great frequency and enthusiasm. One primary purpose of this monograph is to provide a more precise delineation of postsecondary practices that are subsumed or assumed to be embraced by the umbrella terms, collaborative learning, cooperative learning, and learning community, and organize these practices into a coherent classification system or taxonomy. Other major objectives of the taxonomy are to: (a) create a common language for improving the clarity of communication and discourse about diverse forms of collaboration in higher education; (b) articulate a strong, research-based rationale for greater use of collaboration practices in postsecondary education, (c) provide a panoramic overview of, and a convenient catalogue for, the wide range of collaborative initiatives that have been imp! lemented at colleges and universities; and (d) serve as a stimulus for triggering wider use of collaborative practices in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Section I: Introduction to the Taxonomy
ch. 1 Purposes and Organization of the Taxonomy
ch. 2 Organization of Taxonomy
ch. 3 Limitations of Taxonomy
ch. 4 Rationale of Taxonomy
Conclusion
Section II: A Taxonomy of Collaborative Practices in Higher Education
Introduction
ch. 5 Collaboration between Students
ch. 6 Collaboration between Faculty
ch. 7 Faculty-Student Collaboration
ch. 8 Cross-Functional Teams
ch. 9 Inter-Institutional Collaboration
ch. 10 Inter-Segmental Collaboration
ch. 11 College-Community Collaboration
Conclusion
This book focuses on the terms "collaborative learning," "cooperative learning," and "learning community" in which they have been bandied about in American higher education with great frequency and enthusiasm. One primary purpose of this monograph is to provide a more precise delineation of postsecondary practices that are subsumed or assumed to be embraced by the umbrella terms, collaborative learning, cooperative learning, and learning community, and organize these practices into a coherent classification system or taxonomy. Other major objectives of the taxonomy are to: (a) create a common language for improving the clarity of communication and discourse about diverse forms of collaboration in higher education; (b) articulate a strong, research-based rationale for greater use of collaboration practices in postsecondary education, (c) provide a panoramic overview of, and a convenient catalogue for, the wide range of collaborative initiatives that have been imp! lemented at colleges and universities; and (d) serve as a stimulus for triggering wider use of collaborative practices in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Section I: Introduction to the Taxonomy
ch. 1 Purposes and Organization of the Taxonomy
ch. 2 Organization of Taxonomy
ch. 3 Limitations of Taxonomy
ch. 4 Rationale of Taxonomy
Conclusion
Section II: A Taxonomy of Collaborative Practices in Higher Education
Introduction
ch. 5 Collaboration between Students
ch. 6 Collaboration between Faculty
ch. 7 Faculty-Student Collaboration
ch. 8 Cross-Functional Teams
ch. 9 Inter-Institutional Collaboration
ch. 10 Inter-Segmental Collaboration
ch. 11 College-Community Collaboration
Conclusion

Igniting Student Involvement, Peer Interaction, and Teamwork: A Taxonomy of Specific Cooperative Learning Structures and Collaborative Learning Strategies
Additional Info:
The student-centered pedagogical practices of cooperative learning, collaborative learning, and team learning can be united and defined inclusively as two or more learners who work interdependently toward a common goal, on a common task, that culminates with a consensual decision or creation of a common product. The purpose of this monograph is to provide a description and rationale for a taxonomy designed to delineate and categorize itself is included as ...
The student-centered pedagogical practices of cooperative learning, collaborative learning, and team learning can be united and defined inclusively as two or more learners who work interdependently toward a common goal, on a common task, that culminates with a consensual decision or creation of a common product. The purpose of this monograph is to provide a description and rationale for a taxonomy designed to delineate and categorize itself is included as ...
Additional Info:
The student-centered pedagogical practices of cooperative learning, collaborative learning, and team learning can be united and defined inclusively as two or more learners who work interdependently toward a common goal, on a common task, that culminates with a consensual decision or creation of a common product. The purpose of this monograph is to provide a description and rationale for a taxonomy designed to delineate and categorize itself is included as a separate unit, with the intention that it may serve as a stand-alone "user’s manual" or "procedural index file" containing specific, step-by-step practices that can be accessed conveniently and implemented expeditiously. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Section 1 Introduction to the Taxonomy
ch. 1 Purposes of the Taxonomy
ch. 2 Organization of the Taxonomy
ch. 3 Names for Structures
ch. 4 Number of Structures
ch. 5 Rationale for Structures
Section 2 A Taxonomy of Collaborative Learning Strategies and Cooperative Learning Structures
ch. 6 Pairing (Dyadic) Structures
ch. 7 Small-Group Structures
ch. 8 Structures for Promoting Positive Interdependence
ch. 9 Structures for Promoting Individual Accountability
ch. 10 Structures for Facilitating Team Formation
ch. 11 Structures Designed for Teamwork Outside the Classroom
ch. 12 Structures for Promoting Between Team Interaction & Whole Class Synergy
Conclusion
References
The student-centered pedagogical practices of cooperative learning, collaborative learning, and team learning can be united and defined inclusively as two or more learners who work interdependently toward a common goal, on a common task, that culminates with a consensual decision or creation of a common product. The purpose of this monograph is to provide a description and rationale for a taxonomy designed to delineate and categorize itself is included as a separate unit, with the intention that it may serve as a stand-alone "user’s manual" or "procedural index file" containing specific, step-by-step practices that can be accessed conveniently and implemented expeditiously. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Section 1 Introduction to the Taxonomy
ch. 1 Purposes of the Taxonomy
ch. 2 Organization of the Taxonomy
ch. 3 Names for Structures
ch. 4 Number of Structures
ch. 5 Rationale for Structures
Section 2 A Taxonomy of Collaborative Learning Strategies and Cooperative Learning Structures
ch. 6 Pairing (Dyadic) Structures
ch. 7 Small-Group Structures
ch. 8 Structures for Promoting Positive Interdependence
ch. 9 Structures for Promoting Individual Accountability
ch. 10 Structures for Facilitating Team Formation
ch. 11 Structures Designed for Teamwork Outside the Classroom
ch. 12 Structures for Promoting Between Team Interaction & Whole Class Synergy
Conclusion
References
Additional Info:
Faculty and students alike have become so accustomed to meeting in spaces that are sterile in appearance, unable to accommodate different instructional approaches, and uncomfortable in supporting adult bodies that most have taken these conditions as a fact of college life. The lack of extensive dialogue on the importance of learning spaces in higher education environments prompted the essays in this volume.
The chapter authors look at the ...
Faculty and students alike have become so accustomed to meeting in spaces that are sterile in appearance, unable to accommodate different instructional approaches, and uncomfortable in supporting adult bodies that most have taken these conditions as a fact of college life. The lack of extensive dialogue on the importance of learning spaces in higher education environments prompted the essays in this volume.
The chapter authors look at the ...
Additional Info:
Faculty and students alike have become so accustomed to meeting in spaces that are sterile in appearance, unable to accommodate different instructional approaches, and uncomfortable in supporting adult bodies that most have taken these conditions as a fact of college life. The lack of extensive dialogue on the importance of learning spaces in higher education environments prompted the essays in this volume.
The chapter authors look at the topic of learning spaces from a variety of perspectives, elaborating on the relationship between physical space and learning, arguing for an expanded notion of the concept of learning spaces and furnishings, talking about the context within which decision making for learning spaces takes place, and discussing promising approaches to the renovation of old learning spaces and the construction of new ones.
This volume is also augmented with a Web site that contains diagrams, virtual tours, additional documents pertaining to learning space design, and links to other relevant sites. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 A Tale of Two Classrooms (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 2 Designing Collaborative Learning Places: Psychological Foundations and New Frontiers (Ken A. Graetz, Michael J. Goliber)
ch. 3 Embracing the Hybrid Model: Working at the Intersections of Virtual and Physical Learning Spaces (Thomas D. Skill, Brian A. Young)
ch. 4 The Impact of Changes in Teaching and Learning on Furniture and the Learning Environment (Paul Cornell)
ch. 5 Navigating the White Waters of Collaborative Work in Shaping Learning Environments (Deborah J. Bickford)
ch. 6 Educator and Architect Partnerships for Success (James Butz)
ch. 7 Developing a Classroom Vision and Implementation Plan (Julia Christensen Hughes)
ch. 8 Put Your Money Where Your Mouth Is: A Case Study (Joan DeGuire North)
ch. 9 Innovative Models of Learning Environments (William Dittoe)
ch. 10 Improving the Environment for Learning: An Expanded Agenda (Nancy Van Note Chism, Deborah J. Bickford)
Index
Faculty and students alike have become so accustomed to meeting in spaces that are sterile in appearance, unable to accommodate different instructional approaches, and uncomfortable in supporting adult bodies that most have taken these conditions as a fact of college life. The lack of extensive dialogue on the importance of learning spaces in higher education environments prompted the essays in this volume.
The chapter authors look at the topic of learning spaces from a variety of perspectives, elaborating on the relationship between physical space and learning, arguing for an expanded notion of the concept of learning spaces and furnishings, talking about the context within which decision making for learning spaces takes place, and discussing promising approaches to the renovation of old learning spaces and the construction of new ones.
This volume is also augmented with a Web site that contains diagrams, virtual tours, additional documents pertaining to learning space design, and links to other relevant sites. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 A Tale of Two Classrooms (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 2 Designing Collaborative Learning Places: Psychological Foundations and New Frontiers (Ken A. Graetz, Michael J. Goliber)
ch. 3 Embracing the Hybrid Model: Working at the Intersections of Virtual and Physical Learning Spaces (Thomas D. Skill, Brian A. Young)
ch. 4 The Impact of Changes in Teaching and Learning on Furniture and the Learning Environment (Paul Cornell)
ch. 5 Navigating the White Waters of Collaborative Work in Shaping Learning Environments (Deborah J. Bickford)
ch. 6 Educator and Architect Partnerships for Success (James Butz)
ch. 7 Developing a Classroom Vision and Implementation Plan (Julia Christensen Hughes)
ch. 8 Put Your Money Where Your Mouth Is: A Case Study (Joan DeGuire North)
ch. 9 Innovative Models of Learning Environments (William Dittoe)
ch. 10 Improving the Environment for Learning: An Expanded Agenda (Nancy Van Note Chism, Deborah J. Bickford)
Index

The Modern Practice of Adult Education: A Postmodern Critique
Additional Info:
Briton challenges the dominant depoliticized vision of adult education, calling into question the modernist tenets and moral integrity of contemporary adult education practice. By examining his own struggle to escape the confines of modernist thought, the author delivers a succinct yet decisive critique of modern educational practice and challenges educators to reconceptualize their field of endeavor as a postmodern pedagogy of engagement. In refusing to deny its conjectural foundations, to ...
Briton challenges the dominant depoliticized vision of adult education, calling into question the modernist tenets and moral integrity of contemporary adult education practice. By examining his own struggle to escape the confines of modernist thought, the author delivers a succinct yet decisive critique of modern educational practice and challenges educators to reconceptualize their field of endeavor as a postmodern pedagogy of engagement. In refusing to deny its conjectural foundations, to ...
Additional Info:
Briton challenges the dominant depoliticized vision of adult education, calling into question the modernist tenets and moral integrity of contemporary adult education practice. By examining his own struggle to escape the confines of modernist thought, the author delivers a succinct yet decisive critique of modern educational practice and challenges educators to reconceptualize their field of endeavor as a postmodern pedagogy of engagement. In refusing to deny its conjectural foundations, to mask its tenuous structure, or to defend its precarious integrity, the book assumes a form that distinguishes it markedly from its modernist counterparts. In favoring commentary over empirical evidence, a multiplicity of voices over a prescriptive narrative, the development of an ethical attitude toward practice over formulaic prescriptions for practice, and inter- over intra-disciplinary sources to substantiate its claims, this work calls into question a whole range of modernist predilections. By repeatedly breaching the narrowly prescribed parameters of adult education's orthodoxy and constantly promoting reflective inquiry, this book reveals how different, yet equally valid, forms of evidence can be drawn upon to develop an ethical postmodern perspective that calls the modern instrumental practice of adult education into question. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Ch. 1 Engaging the Question of Adult Education
Ch. 2 The Fear of Falling into Error
Ch. 3 Facing the Dilemma
Ch. 4 Enlightenment and Modernity
Ch. 5 Choosing a Research Paradigm
Ch. 6 Toward a Postmodern Pedagogy of Engagement in Adult Education
Postscript: Living through the Question of Adult Education
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Briton challenges the dominant depoliticized vision of adult education, calling into question the modernist tenets and moral integrity of contemporary adult education practice. By examining his own struggle to escape the confines of modernist thought, the author delivers a succinct yet decisive critique of modern educational practice and challenges educators to reconceptualize their field of endeavor as a postmodern pedagogy of engagement. In refusing to deny its conjectural foundations, to mask its tenuous structure, or to defend its precarious integrity, the book assumes a form that distinguishes it markedly from its modernist counterparts. In favoring commentary over empirical evidence, a multiplicity of voices over a prescriptive narrative, the development of an ethical attitude toward practice over formulaic prescriptions for practice, and inter- over intra-disciplinary sources to substantiate its claims, this work calls into question a whole range of modernist predilections. By repeatedly breaching the narrowly prescribed parameters of adult education's orthodoxy and constantly promoting reflective inquiry, this book reveals how different, yet equally valid, forms of evidence can be drawn upon to develop an ethical postmodern perspective that calls the modern instrumental practice of adult education into question. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Ch. 1 Engaging the Question of Adult Education
Ch. 2 The Fear of Falling into Error
Ch. 3 Facing the Dilemma
Ch. 4 Enlightenment and Modernity
Ch. 5 Choosing a Research Paradigm
Ch. 6 Toward a Postmodern Pedagogy of Engagement in Adult Education
Postscript: Living through the Question of Adult Education
Notes
Bibliography
Index


Teaching College in An Age of Accountability
Additional Info:
Teaching College in an Age of Accountability provides professors with the insights and tools necessary to achieve higher levels on accountability assessment outcomes while preparing students for enhancing their own career success in a more complex future. In recent years, many initiatives have been implemented by a number of state legislatures and boards of trustees to increase "institutional effectiveness." These measures have made colleges and universities aware that practices once ...
Teaching College in an Age of Accountability provides professors with the insights and tools necessary to achieve higher levels on accountability assessment outcomes while preparing students for enhancing their own career success in a more complex future. In recent years, many initiatives have been implemented by a number of state legislatures and boards of trustees to increase "institutional effectiveness." These measures have made colleges and universities aware that practices once ...
Additional Info:
Teaching College in an Age of Accountability provides professors with the insights and tools necessary to achieve higher levels on accountability assessment outcomes while preparing students for enhancing their own career success in a more complex future. In recent years, many initiatives have been implemented by a number of state legislatures and boards of trustees to increase "institutional effectiveness." These measures have made colleges and universities aware that practices once accepted as sacrosanct within the culture will, from this time forward, be assessed regularly for their contribution to achieving more accountable outcomes. Teaching College in an Age of Accountability is the first book that focuses exclusively on the implications of this trend on the work of individual professors. Accountability proponents generally call for increased access to higher education for all citizens, improved retention of students once they are enrolled, and graduation and placement rates that recognize the investment of tax and institutional funds in students' success. This book equips professors to address each of these outcome goals in a proactive manner. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Rise of Accountability in Higher Education
ch. 2 Implications of Accountability on Your Teaching
ch. 3 Today's College Students
ch. 4 Strategic Course Planning
ch. 5 Launching Your Course Effectively
ch. 6 Managing the Context of Your Course
ch. 7 Instructor-Directed Learning Methods
ch. 8 Student-Driven Learning Methods
ch. 9 Infusing Technology into Your Teaching
ch. 10 Managing the Examination Process
ch. 11 Alternative Methods of Assessing Student Learning
ch. 12 Bringing Your Course to an Effective Conclusion
ch. 13 Evaluating the Effectiveness of Your Teaching
ch. 14 Maintaining Your Edge
References
Index
Teaching College in an Age of Accountability provides professors with the insights and tools necessary to achieve higher levels on accountability assessment outcomes while preparing students for enhancing their own career success in a more complex future. In recent years, many initiatives have been implemented by a number of state legislatures and boards of trustees to increase "institutional effectiveness." These measures have made colleges and universities aware that practices once accepted as sacrosanct within the culture will, from this time forward, be assessed regularly for their contribution to achieving more accountable outcomes. Teaching College in an Age of Accountability is the first book that focuses exclusively on the implications of this trend on the work of individual professors. Accountability proponents generally call for increased access to higher education for all citizens, improved retention of students once they are enrolled, and graduation and placement rates that recognize the investment of tax and institutional funds in students' success. This book equips professors to address each of these outcome goals in a proactive manner. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 The Rise of Accountability in Higher Education
ch. 2 Implications of Accountability on Your Teaching
ch. 3 Today's College Students
ch. 4 Strategic Course Planning
ch. 5 Launching Your Course Effectively
ch. 6 Managing the Context of Your Course
ch. 7 Instructor-Directed Learning Methods
ch. 8 Student-Driven Learning Methods
ch. 9 Infusing Technology into Your Teaching
ch. 10 Managing the Examination Process
ch. 11 Alternative Methods of Assessing Student Learning
ch. 12 Bringing Your Course to an Effective Conclusion
ch. 13 Evaluating the Effectiveness of Your Teaching
ch. 14 Maintaining Your Edge
References
Index
Additional Info:
From the Publisher
"Those who ponder these pages will be renewed to love God with all their minds, to pursue truth, and to live faithfully."--David S. Dockery, Union University
What purpose do purely intellectual pursuits have in the lives of Christians? Why should Christians study subjects that have little bearing on their future careers and ministry? In a style reminiscent of the work of Arthur Holmes ...
From the Publisher
"Those who ponder these pages will be renewed to love God with all their minds, to pursue truth, and to live faithfully."--David S. Dockery, Union University
What purpose do purely intellectual pursuits have in the lives of Christians? Why should Christians study subjects that have little bearing on their future careers and ministry? In a style reminiscent of the work of Arthur Holmes ...
Additional Info:
From the Publisher
"Those who ponder these pages will be renewed to love God with all their minds, to pursue truth, and to live faithfully."--David S. Dockery, Union University
What purpose do purely intellectual pursuits have in the lives of Christians? Why should Christians study subjects that have little bearing on their future careers and ministry? In a style reminiscent of the work of Arthur Holmes and Harry Blamires, veteran professor of philosophy Clifford Williams addresses these issues and more in this succinct and accessible examination of the life of the mind.
Christians cultivating the life of the mind actively pursue situations and discussions that require experimentation, reflection, and perseverance. They are interested in the acquisition of knowledge that is both unrelated and directly related to their faith. Williams answers common Christian objections to such activities, describes the virtues of the person who engages in the life of the mind, and asserts that the life of the mind is justifiably a Christian calling.
The Life of the Mind, the newest addition to the RenewedMinds imprint, is directed toward students contemplating the importance of college and intellectual activity in general, but it will be enjoyed by all committed to developing a Christian mind.
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Why Do We Like to Think?
ch. 2 Is Thinking Good for Its Own Sake?
ch. 3 The Effects of Thinking
ch. 4 Tensions between the Life of the Mind and Christian Faith
ch. 5 Is the Life of the Mind at Odds with Culture?
ch. 6 The Crowd and the Community
ch. 7 The Hermit and the Explorer
Appendix
Questions for Reflection
Notes
From the Publisher
"Those who ponder these pages will be renewed to love God with all their minds, to pursue truth, and to live faithfully."--David S. Dockery, Union University
What purpose do purely intellectual pursuits have in the lives of Christians? Why should Christians study subjects that have little bearing on their future careers and ministry? In a style reminiscent of the work of Arthur Holmes and Harry Blamires, veteran professor of philosophy Clifford Williams addresses these issues and more in this succinct and accessible examination of the life of the mind.
Christians cultivating the life of the mind actively pursue situations and discussions that require experimentation, reflection, and perseverance. They are interested in the acquisition of knowledge that is both unrelated and directly related to their faith. Williams answers common Christian objections to such activities, describes the virtues of the person who engages in the life of the mind, and asserts that the life of the mind is justifiably a Christian calling.
The Life of the Mind, the newest addition to the RenewedMinds imprint, is directed toward students contemplating the importance of college and intellectual activity in general, but it will be enjoyed by all committed to developing a Christian mind.
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Why Do We Like to Think?
ch. 2 Is Thinking Good for Its Own Sake?
ch. 3 The Effects of Thinking
ch. 4 Tensions between the Life of the Mind and Christian Faith
ch. 5 Is the Life of the Mind at Odds with Culture?
ch. 6 The Crowd and the Community
ch. 7 The Hermit and the Explorer
Appendix
Questions for Reflection
Notes
Additional Info:
Few people have influenced the development of Christian schools in the Reformed tradition in North America and around the world as much as Nicholas Wolterstorff. As a tribute to his contributions, educators Gloria Goris Stronks and Clarence W. Joldersma have drawn together the world-renowned Christian philosopher's thoughts and reflections on Christian education over the last three decades. The guiding principle in making selections was the inclusion of pieces that discuss ...
Few people have influenced the development of Christian schools in the Reformed tradition in North America and around the world as much as Nicholas Wolterstorff. As a tribute to his contributions, educators Gloria Goris Stronks and Clarence W. Joldersma have drawn together the world-renowned Christian philosopher's thoughts and reflections on Christian education over the last three decades. The guiding principle in making selections was the inclusion of pieces that discuss ...
Additional Info:
Few people have influenced the development of Christian schools in the Reformed tradition in North America and around the world as much as Nicholas Wolterstorff. As a tribute to his contributions, educators Gloria Goris Stronks and Clarence W. Joldersma have drawn together the world-renowned Christian philosopher's thoughts and reflections on Christian education over the last three decades. The guiding principle in making selections was the inclusion of pieces that discuss what makes education truly Christian. Wolterstorff's writings on education are divided into four sections that focus on the nature of Christian education, the criticisms of Christian education, Christian learning within a pluralistic society, and the goals of Christian education. Of special interest is Wolterstorff's increasing concern with the role of justice in Christian education. Educating for Life portrays Wolterstorff's evolving thinking on education while paying tribute to him as one of the premier Christian philosophers of our day. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part 1 The Nature of Christian Education
ch. 1 Curriculum: By What Standard?
ch. 2 Crucial Curriculum Concerns
ch. 3 A Return to Basic Christian Education
ch. 4 Between Isolation and Accommodation
ch. 5 Beyond 1984 in Philosophy of Christian Education
ch. 6 The School as Educative Agent
ch. 7 Teaching for Tomorrow Today
Part 2 Challenges and Objections to Christian Education
ch. 8 Christ Is Lord
ch. 9 The Christian School and Its Contemporary Challenges
ch. 10 Looking to the Eighties: Do Christian Schools Have a Future?
Part 3 Christian Education in a Pluralistic Society
ch. 11 Religion and the Schools
ch. 12 Human Rights in Education: The Rights of Parents
ch. 13 The Schools We Deserve
Part 4 Educating for Shalom
ch. 14 Task and Invitation
ch. 15 Teaching for Gratitude
ch. 16 Teaching for Justice
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Few people have influenced the development of Christian schools in the Reformed tradition in North America and around the world as much as Nicholas Wolterstorff. As a tribute to his contributions, educators Gloria Goris Stronks and Clarence W. Joldersma have drawn together the world-renowned Christian philosopher's thoughts and reflections on Christian education over the last three decades. The guiding principle in making selections was the inclusion of pieces that discuss what makes education truly Christian. Wolterstorff's writings on education are divided into four sections that focus on the nature of Christian education, the criticisms of Christian education, Christian learning within a pluralistic society, and the goals of Christian education. Of special interest is Wolterstorff's increasing concern with the role of justice in Christian education. Educating for Life portrays Wolterstorff's evolving thinking on education while paying tribute to him as one of the premier Christian philosophers of our day. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part 1 The Nature of Christian Education
ch. 1 Curriculum: By What Standard?
ch. 2 Crucial Curriculum Concerns
ch. 3 A Return to Basic Christian Education
ch. 4 Between Isolation and Accommodation
ch. 5 Beyond 1984 in Philosophy of Christian Education
ch. 6 The School as Educative Agent
ch. 7 Teaching for Tomorrow Today
Part 2 Challenges and Objections to Christian Education
ch. 8 Christ Is Lord
ch. 9 The Christian School and Its Contemporary Challenges
ch. 10 Looking to the Eighties: Do Christian Schools Have a Future?
Part 3 Christian Education in a Pluralistic Society
ch. 11 Religion and the Schools
ch. 12 Human Rights in Education: The Rights of Parents
ch. 13 The Schools We Deserve
Part 4 Educating for Shalom
ch. 14 Task and Invitation
ch. 15 Teaching for Gratitude
ch. 16 Teaching for Justice
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
This work examines the landscape of religiously affiliated higher education in America from the perspective of faculty members critically committed to the future of church-related institutions. The book includes articles on a variety of topics from members of the Rhodes Consultation on the Future of the Church-Related College, a project that has involved ninety church-related institutions since 1996. (From the Publisher)
This work examines the landscape of religiously affiliated higher education in America from the perspective of faculty members critically committed to the future of church-related institutions. The book includes articles on a variety of topics from members of the Rhodes Consultation on the Future of the Church-Related College, a project that has involved ninety church-related institutions since 1996. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This work examines the landscape of religiously affiliated higher education in America from the perspective of faculty members critically committed to the future of church-related institutions. The book includes articles on a variety of topics from members of the Rhodes Consultation on the Future of the Church-Related College, a project that has involved ninety church-related institutions since 1996. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Preface
Pt. 1 Introduction
A Review of Research on Church-Related Higher Education (Stephen R. Haynes)
Pt. 2 Postmodern Opportunity
The Habit of Empathy: Postmodernity and the Future of the Church-Related College (Paul Lakeland)
Prolegomena to Any Postmodern Hope for the Church-Related College (Margaret Falls-Corbitt)
A Sense of Place and the Place of Sense (William J. Cahoy)
Pt. 3 Academic Vocation
Conversation and Authority: A Tension in the Inheritance of the Church-Related College (Richard Kyte)
Beyond the Faith-Knowledge Dichotomy: Teaching As Vocation (Elizabeth Newman)
The Erotic Imagination and the Catholic Academy (John Neary)
Pt. 4 Pedagogy and Praxis
"Academic" vs. "Confessional" Study of the Bible in the Postmodern Classroom: A Response to Philip Davies and David Clines (Julia M. O'Brien)
Teaching the Conflicts, For the Bible Tells Me So (Timothy K. Beal)
A Pedagogy of Eucharistic Accompaniment (Dominic P. Scibilia)
Pt. 5 Mission and Curriculum
One-Armed Embrace of Postmodernity: International Education and Church-Related Colleges (Ketih Graber Miller)
Religion and the Curriculum at Church-Related Colleges (Marcia Bunge)
From the Ties that Bind to Way-Stations: The Dynamics of Religious Commitment among Students and Their Families (D. Jonathan Grieser, and Corrie E. Norman)
Afterword: A Typology of Church-Related Colleges and Universities (Stephen R. Haynes)
Notes
Bibliography
Contributors
This work examines the landscape of religiously affiliated higher education in America from the perspective of faculty members critically committed to the future of church-related institutions. The book includes articles on a variety of topics from members of the Rhodes Consultation on the Future of the Church-Related College, a project that has involved ninety church-related institutions since 1996. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Preface
Pt. 1 Introduction
A Review of Research on Church-Related Higher Education (Stephen R. Haynes)
Pt. 2 Postmodern Opportunity
The Habit of Empathy: Postmodernity and the Future of the Church-Related College (Paul Lakeland)
Prolegomena to Any Postmodern Hope for the Church-Related College (Margaret Falls-Corbitt)
A Sense of Place and the Place of Sense (William J. Cahoy)
Pt. 3 Academic Vocation
Conversation and Authority: A Tension in the Inheritance of the Church-Related College (Richard Kyte)
Beyond the Faith-Knowledge Dichotomy: Teaching As Vocation (Elizabeth Newman)
The Erotic Imagination and the Catholic Academy (John Neary)
Pt. 4 Pedagogy and Praxis
"Academic" vs. "Confessional" Study of the Bible in the Postmodern Classroom: A Response to Philip Davies and David Clines (Julia M. O'Brien)
Teaching the Conflicts, For the Bible Tells Me So (Timothy K. Beal)
A Pedagogy of Eucharistic Accompaniment (Dominic P. Scibilia)
Pt. 5 Mission and Curriculum
One-Armed Embrace of Postmodernity: International Education and Church-Related Colleges (Ketih Graber Miller)
Religion and the Curriculum at Church-Related Colleges (Marcia Bunge)
From the Ties that Bind to Way-Stations: The Dynamics of Religious Commitment among Students and Their Families (D. Jonathan Grieser, and Corrie E. Norman)
Afterword: A Typology of Church-Related Colleges and Universities (Stephen R. Haynes)
Notes
Bibliography
Contributors

Teaching Levi-Strauss
Additional Info:
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Claude Levi-Strauss's mid-twentieth century work in structural anthropology revolutionized the study of myth, kinship, and totemism, with lasting effects in cultural studies generally and especially in religious studies. This book provides an introduction to this revolution through generous reproductions of some of Levi-Strauss's most important writing on religion. Reactions and responses, both positive and negative, to the revolution are also included, ...
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Claude Levi-Strauss's mid-twentieth century work in structural anthropology revolutionized the study of myth, kinship, and totemism, with lasting effects in cultural studies generally and especially in religious studies. This book provides an introduction to this revolution through generous reproductions of some of Levi-Strauss's most important writing on religion. Reactions and responses, both positive and negative, to the revolution are also included, ...
Additional Info:
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Claude Levi-Strauss's mid-twentieth century work in structural anthropology revolutionized the study of myth, kinship, and totemism, with lasting effects in cultural studies generally and especially in religious studies. This book provides an introduction to this revolution through generous reproductions of some of Levi-Strauss's most important writing on religion. Reactions and responses, both positive and negative, to the revolution are also included, as well as some of Levi-Strauss's replies to his critics. A general introduction by the volume editor provides a framework for understanding the historical development and contemporary meaning of structuralism for religious studies. This volume provides an unparalleled resource for teaching students about structuralism through Levi-Strauss's own essays and classic critiques of the theory. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Preface
Volume Preface
Acknowledgments & References to Reprinted Articles
Introduction (Hans H. Penner)
Part 1 Essays by Levi-Strauss
ch. 1 Introduction to Marcel Mauss
ch. 2 Totemism: "Towards the Intellect"
ch. 3 The Structural Study of Myth
ch. 4 The Story of Asdiwal
ch. 5 Four Winnebago Myths
Part 2 Essays on Levi-Strauss
ch. 6 Structuralism, Anthropology and Levi-Strauss (Hans H. Penner)
ch. 7 Science or Bricolage? (David Maybury-Lewis)
ch. 8 Levi-Strauss and Myth (K. O. L. Burridge)
ch. 9 The Meaning of Myth (Mary Douglas)
ch. 10 Structure, Sign and Play (Jacques Derrida)
ch. 11 Absent Meaning (Dan Sperber)
Part 3 Levi-Strauss Responds
ch. 12 The Meaning and Use of the Notion of Model
ch. 13 Finale
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Claude Levi-Strauss's mid-twentieth century work in structural anthropology revolutionized the study of myth, kinship, and totemism, with lasting effects in cultural studies generally and especially in religious studies. This book provides an introduction to this revolution through generous reproductions of some of Levi-Strauss's most important writing on religion. Reactions and responses, both positive and negative, to the revolution are also included, as well as some of Levi-Strauss's replies to his critics. A general introduction by the volume editor provides a framework for understanding the historical development and contemporary meaning of structuralism for religious studies. This volume provides an unparalleled resource for teaching students about structuralism through Levi-Strauss's own essays and classic critiques of the theory. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series Preface
Volume Preface
Acknowledgments & References to Reprinted Articles
Introduction (Hans H. Penner)
Part 1 Essays by Levi-Strauss
ch. 1 Introduction to Marcel Mauss
ch. 2 Totemism: "Towards the Intellect"
ch. 3 The Structural Study of Myth
ch. 4 The Story of Asdiwal
ch. 5 Four Winnebago Myths
Part 2 Essays on Levi-Strauss
ch. 6 Structuralism, Anthropology and Levi-Strauss (Hans H. Penner)
ch. 7 Science or Bricolage? (David Maybury-Lewis)
ch. 8 Levi-Strauss and Myth (K. O. L. Burridge)
ch. 9 The Meaning of Myth (Mary Douglas)
ch. 10 Structure, Sign and Play (Jacques Derrida)
ch. 11 Absent Meaning (Dan Sperber)
Part 3 Levi-Strauss Responds
ch. 12 The Meaning and Use of the Notion of Model
ch. 13 Finale
Additional Info:
Here is one teacher's story about his personal journey toward a safe classroom for his students. He explains how new technologies, rising education costs - but most important personal, inward changes - forced a reexamination of his teaching methods and goals. (From the Publisher)
Here is one teacher's story about his personal journey toward a safe classroom for his students. He explains how new technologies, rising education costs - but most important personal, inward changes - forced a reexamination of his teaching methods and goals. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Here is one teacher's story about his personal journey toward a safe classroom for his students. He explains how new technologies, rising education costs - but most important personal, inward changes - forced a reexamination of his teaching methods and goals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: Fear
ch. 1 Teaching: What’s love got to do with it?
ch. 2 Grammar School: The Strength of Memories
ch. 3 Junior High School: It Gets Complicated
ch. 4 High School: For the Fun of It
ch. 5 Brown University: It was a Start
ch. 6 Temple University: Not Learning to Teach
ch. 7 Kansas. If I only had a Heart, Courage and a Brain
ch. 8 The Return To Temple: The Odyssey
ch. 9 I Could Not Do It Anymore
ch. 10 The Garden
ch. 11 The Safe Classroom: Teaching as Community
ch. 12 Jazz
Postscript: Hope
List of Works Cited
Here is one teacher's story about his personal journey toward a safe classroom for his students. He explains how new technologies, rising education costs - but most important personal, inward changes - forced a reexamination of his teaching methods and goals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: Fear
ch. 1 Teaching: What’s love got to do with it?
ch. 2 Grammar School: The Strength of Memories
ch. 3 Junior High School: It Gets Complicated
ch. 4 High School: For the Fun of It
ch. 5 Brown University: It was a Start
ch. 6 Temple University: Not Learning to Teach
ch. 7 Kansas. If I only had a Heart, Courage and a Brain
ch. 8 The Return To Temple: The Odyssey
ch. 9 I Could Not Do It Anymore
ch. 10 The Garden
ch. 11 The Safe Classroom: Teaching as Community
ch. 12 Jazz
Postscript: Hope
List of Works Cited
Additional Info:
Interest in church-related higher education has increased greatly in recent years. Teaching as an Act of Faith is a practical guidebook on strategies to incarnate mission and epitomize theological and theoretical reflection in the classroom. In original essays, distinguished practitioners from fourteen liberal arts disciplines and Roman Catholic, Wesleyan, Anabaptist, Lutheran, and Reformed traditions demonstrate how they have been able link religious values more directly to their teaching. (From the ...
Interest in church-related higher education has increased greatly in recent years. Teaching as an Act of Faith is a practical guidebook on strategies to incarnate mission and epitomize theological and theoretical reflection in the classroom. In original essays, distinguished practitioners from fourteen liberal arts disciplines and Roman Catholic, Wesleyan, Anabaptist, Lutheran, and Reformed traditions demonstrate how they have been able link religious values more directly to their teaching. (From the ...
Additional Info:
Interest in church-related higher education has increased greatly in recent years. Teaching as an Act of Faith is a practical guidebook on strategies to incarnate mission and epitomize theological and theoretical reflection in the classroom. In original essays, distinguished practitioners from fourteen liberal arts disciplines and Roman Catholic, Wesleyan, Anabaptist, Lutheran, and Reformed traditions demonstrate how they have been able link religious values more directly to their teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction: An Odyssey of the Mind and Spirit
Pt. 1 The Social Sciences
ch. 1 Teaching Economics While Keeping the Faith
ch. 2 Scuttling the Schizophrenic Student Mind: On Teaching the Unity of Faith and Learning in Psychology
ch. 3 At the Lectern Between Jerusalem and Sarajevo: A Christian Approach to Teaching Political Science
ch. 4 Sociology and Faith: Inviting Students into the Conversation
Pt. 2 The Natural Sciences
ch. 5 Developing a Christian Perspective on the Nature of Mathematics
ch. 6 Christian Theism: Alive and Well in the Physics and Astronomy Classroom
ch. 7 A Careful Convergence: Integrating Biology and Faith in the Church-Related College
Pt. 3 The Fine Arts
ch. 8 "I Love to Tell the Story:" Teaching Theatre at a Church-Related College
ch. 9 Toward a Christian Pedagogy of Art
ch. 10 Music Pedagogy and the Christian Faith: A Twenty-Year Journey of Discovery
Pt. 4 The Humanities
ch. 11 An Ignatian Approach to Teaching Philosophy
ch. 12 Teaching Literature as Mediation: A Christian Practice
ch. 13 Faith, Learning, and the Teaching of History
ch. 14 Christian Faith and the Teaching of Speech Communication
Conclusion: A Prudent Synergy: Pedagogy for Mind and Spirit
App Christianity and Higher Education: A Selected Bibliography
App Ecumenical Christian Professional Associations
Notes on Contributors
Index
Interest in church-related higher education has increased greatly in recent years. Teaching as an Act of Faith is a practical guidebook on strategies to incarnate mission and epitomize theological and theoretical reflection in the classroom. In original essays, distinguished practitioners from fourteen liberal arts disciplines and Roman Catholic, Wesleyan, Anabaptist, Lutheran, and Reformed traditions demonstrate how they have been able link religious values more directly to their teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction: An Odyssey of the Mind and Spirit
Pt. 1 The Social Sciences
ch. 1 Teaching Economics While Keeping the Faith
ch. 2 Scuttling the Schizophrenic Student Mind: On Teaching the Unity of Faith and Learning in Psychology
ch. 3 At the Lectern Between Jerusalem and Sarajevo: A Christian Approach to Teaching Political Science
ch. 4 Sociology and Faith: Inviting Students into the Conversation
Pt. 2 The Natural Sciences
ch. 5 Developing a Christian Perspective on the Nature of Mathematics
ch. 6 Christian Theism: Alive and Well in the Physics and Astronomy Classroom
ch. 7 A Careful Convergence: Integrating Biology and Faith in the Church-Related College
Pt. 3 The Fine Arts
ch. 8 "I Love to Tell the Story:" Teaching Theatre at a Church-Related College
ch. 9 Toward a Christian Pedagogy of Art
ch. 10 Music Pedagogy and the Christian Faith: A Twenty-Year Journey of Discovery
Pt. 4 The Humanities
ch. 11 An Ignatian Approach to Teaching Philosophy
ch. 12 Teaching Literature as Mediation: A Christian Practice
ch. 13 Faith, Learning, and the Teaching of History
ch. 14 Christian Faith and the Teaching of Speech Communication
Conclusion: A Prudent Synergy: Pedagogy for Mind and Spirit
App Christianity and Higher Education: A Selected Bibliography
App Ecumenical Christian Professional Associations
Notes on Contributors
Index
Additional Info:
"When I read this book it was like starting over as a teacher. I had been convinced of the importance of the flipped classroom, but not until Fink’s approach did I see how the various components of my courses—the goals and outcomes, assignments, learning activities, and evaluation—need to be aligned and integrated in a coherent way. For too long these connections were implicit and students had to ...
"When I read this book it was like starting over as a teacher. I had been convinced of the importance of the flipped classroom, but not until Fink’s approach did I see how the various components of my courses—the goals and outcomes, assignments, learning activities, and evaluation—need to be aligned and integrated in a coherent way. For too long these connections were implicit and students had to ...
Additional Info:
Offering methods for improving teaching practices in higher education, Fink challenges educators to shift from the content-oriented "information dump" approach toward one that is learning-centered. Fink outlines his taxonomy of significant learning and shows how to combine new and traditional techniques to create powerful learning experiences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Creating Significant Learning Experiences
ch. 2 A Taxonomy of Significant Learning
ch. 3 Designing Significant Learning Experiences I: Getting Started
ch. 4 Designing Significant Learning Experiences II: Shaping the Learning Experience
ch. 5 Changing the Way We Teach
ch. 6 Better Organizational Support for Faculty
ch. 7 The Human Significance of Good Teaching and Learning
App. A Planning Your Course: A Decision Guide
App. B: Suggested Readings
References
Index
"When I read this book it was like starting over as a teacher. I had been convinced of the importance of the flipped classroom, but not until Fink’s approach did I see how the various components of my courses—the goals and outcomes, assignments, learning activities, and evaluation—need to be aligned and integrated in a coherent way. For too long these connections were implicit and students had to figure out how it all made sense. At the beginning of every semester, I pull Fink off the shelf and do a few of the exercises to make sure my courses are ready to go. I strongly recommend you do the same."
Kathleen Cahalan, St. John's School of Theology and Seminary
Offering methods for improving teaching practices in higher education, Fink challenges educators to shift from the content-oriented "information dump" approach toward one that is learning-centered. Fink outlines his taxonomy of significant learning and shows how to combine new and traditional techniques to create powerful learning experiences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Creating Significant Learning Experiences
ch. 2 A Taxonomy of Significant Learning
ch. 3 Designing Significant Learning Experiences I: Getting Started
ch. 4 Designing Significant Learning Experiences II: Shaping the Learning Experience
ch. 5 Changing the Way We Teach
ch. 6 Better Organizational Support for Faculty
ch. 7 The Human Significance of Good Teaching and Learning
App. A Planning Your Course: A Decision Guide
App. B: Suggested Readings
References
Index
Additional Info:
Educating Citizens reports on how some American colleges and universities are preparing thoughtful, committed, and socially responsible graduates. Many institutions assert these ambitions, but too few act on them. The authors demonstrate the fundamental importance of moral and civic education, describe how the historical and contemporary landscapes of higher education have shaped it, and explain the educational and developmental goals and processes involved in educating citizens. They examine the challenges ...
Educating Citizens reports on how some American colleges and universities are preparing thoughtful, committed, and socially responsible graduates. Many institutions assert these ambitions, but too few act on them. The authors demonstrate the fundamental importance of moral and civic education, describe how the historical and contemporary landscapes of higher education have shaped it, and explain the educational and developmental goals and processes involved in educating citizens. They examine the challenges ...
Additional Info:
Educating Citizens reports on how some American colleges and universities are preparing thoughtful, committed, and socially responsible graduates. Many institutions assert these ambitions, but too few act on them. The authors demonstrate the fundamental importance of moral and civic education, describe how the historical and contemporary landscapes of higher education have shaped it, and explain the educational and developmental goals and processes involved in educating citizens. They examine the challenges colleges and universities face when they dedicate themselves to this vital task and present concrete ways to overcome those challenges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Educating Citizens in a Pluralistic Society
ch. 2 The Broader Undergraduate Context
ch. 3 When Educating Citizens is a Priority
ch. 4 The Multiple Dimensions of Moral and Civic Development
ch. 5 Pedagogical Strategies for Educating Citizens
ch. 6 Weaving Moral and Civic Learning into the Curriculum
ch. 7 Faculty: The Cornerstone
ch. 8 Moral and Civic Learning Beyond the Classroom
ch. 9 Assessment in Moral and Civic Education
ch. 10 Bringing Moral and Civic Learning to Center Stage References
Name Index
Subject Index
Educating Citizens reports on how some American colleges and universities are preparing thoughtful, committed, and socially responsible graduates. Many institutions assert these ambitions, but too few act on them. The authors demonstrate the fundamental importance of moral and civic education, describe how the historical and contemporary landscapes of higher education have shaped it, and explain the educational and developmental goals and processes involved in educating citizens. They examine the challenges colleges and universities face when they dedicate themselves to this vital task and present concrete ways to overcome those challenges. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Educating Citizens in a Pluralistic Society
ch. 2 The Broader Undergraduate Context
ch. 3 When Educating Citizens is a Priority
ch. 4 The Multiple Dimensions of Moral and Civic Development
ch. 5 Pedagogical Strategies for Educating Citizens
ch. 6 Weaving Moral and Civic Learning into the Curriculum
ch. 7 Faculty: The Cornerstone
ch. 8 Moral and Civic Learning Beyond the Classroom
ch. 9 Assessment in Moral and Civic Education
ch. 10 Bringing Moral and Civic Learning to Center Stage References
Name Index
Subject Index
Additional Info:
Did affirmative action programs solve the problem of race on American college campuses, as several recent books would have us believe? If so, why does talking about race in anything more than a superficial way make so many students uncomfortable? Written by college instructors from many disciplines, this volume of essays takes a bold first step toward a nationwide conversation. Each of the twenty-nine contributors addresses one central question: what ...
Did affirmative action programs solve the problem of race on American college campuses, as several recent books would have us believe? If so, why does talking about race in anything more than a superficial way make so many students uncomfortable? Written by college instructors from many disciplines, this volume of essays takes a bold first step toward a nationwide conversation. Each of the twenty-nine contributors addresses one central question: what ...
Additional Info:
Did affirmative action programs solve the problem of race on American college campuses, as several recent books would have us believe? If so, why does talking about race in anything more than a superficial way make so many students uncomfortable? Written by college instructors from many disciplines, this volume of essays takes a bold first step toward a nationwide conversation. Each of the twenty-nine contributors addresses one central question: what are the challenges facing a college professor who believes that teaching responsibly requires an honest and searching examination of race?
Professors from the humanities, social sciences, sciences, and education consider topics such as how the classroom environment is structured by race; the temptation to retreat from challenging students when faced with possible reprisals in the form of complaints or negative evaluations; the implications of using standardized evaluations in faculty tenure and promotion when the course subject is intimately connected with race; and the varying ways in which white faculty and faculty of color are impacted by teaching about race. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Race in the College Classroom
Part I Authority and (Il)Legitimacy
Two Voices from the Front Lines: A Conversation about Race in the Classroom (Karen Elias and Judith C. Jones)
Teaching in Florida: The End of Affirmative Action and the Politics of Race (Sarika Chandra)
A Ghost in the Collaborative Machine: The White Male Teacher in the Multicultural Classroom (Peter Kerry Powers)
Decentering Whiteness: Resisting Racism in the Women's Studies Classroom (Pattie Duncan)
Smashing the Rules of Racial Standing (Maureen T. Reddy)
When the Political is Personal: Life on the Multiethnic Margins (Jennifer Ho)
The Entanglements of Teaching Nappy Hair (Rebecca Meacham)
Beyond Bull Conner: Teaching Slavery in Alabama (Fred Ashe)
Fear and the Professorial Center (Kevin Everod Quashie)
Part 2 Rewards and Punishments
Out on a Limb: Race and the Evaluation of Frontline Teaching (Bonnie TuSmith)
Whiteness on a White Canvas: Teaching Race in a Predominantly White University (Karyn D. McKinney)
Gift Wrapped or Paper Bagged?: Packaging Race for the Classroom (Rajini Srikanth)
The Question of Comfort: The Impact of Race on/in the College Classroom (Virginia Whatley Smith)
Far More than Frybread: The Tender Issue of Race in Teaching Literature (Roberta J. Hill)
Menaced by Resistance: The Black Teacher in the Mainly White School/Classroom (Gîtahi Gîtîtî)
Strategies for Surviving Race in the Classroom (Karen J. Leong)
Traps, Pitfalls, and Obstacles: Challenges to Confronting Racism in Academia (Brenda Bourdreau and Tami Eggleston)
Part 3 Transformative Practices
Confronting the "Screaming Baboon": Notes on Race, Literature, and Pedagogy (José L. Torres-Padilla)
Centering the Margins: A Chicana in the English Classroom (Norma E. Cantú)
Race, Discomfort, and Love in a University Classroom (Daniel P. Liston)
Moonwalking Technoshamans and the Shifting Margin: Decentering the Colonial Classroom (Louis Owens)
The Colorblind Cyberclass: Myth and Fact (Sharon Packer)
Skinwalking and Color Linecrossing: Teaching Writing Against Racism (Gary L. Lemons)
Racing into the Academy: Pedagogy and Black Faculty (A. Yemisi Jimoh and Charlene Johnson)
Between a Rock and a Hard Place: Teaching the Biology of Human Variation and the Social Construction of Race (Joseph L. Graves Jr.)
Conclusion: Teaching to Make a Difference (Bonnie TuSmit and Maureen T. Reddy
Selected References
Contributors
Did affirmative action programs solve the problem of race on American college campuses, as several recent books would have us believe? If so, why does talking about race in anything more than a superficial way make so many students uncomfortable? Written by college instructors from many disciplines, this volume of essays takes a bold first step toward a nationwide conversation. Each of the twenty-nine contributors addresses one central question: what are the challenges facing a college professor who believes that teaching responsibly requires an honest and searching examination of race?
Professors from the humanities, social sciences, sciences, and education consider topics such as how the classroom environment is structured by race; the temptation to retreat from challenging students when faced with possible reprisals in the form of complaints or negative evaluations; the implications of using standardized evaluations in faculty tenure and promotion when the course subject is intimately connected with race; and the varying ways in which white faculty and faculty of color are impacted by teaching about race. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Race in the College Classroom
Part I Authority and (Il)Legitimacy
Two Voices from the Front Lines: A Conversation about Race in the Classroom (Karen Elias and Judith C. Jones)
Teaching in Florida: The End of Affirmative Action and the Politics of Race (Sarika Chandra)
A Ghost in the Collaborative Machine: The White Male Teacher in the Multicultural Classroom (Peter Kerry Powers)
Decentering Whiteness: Resisting Racism in the Women's Studies Classroom (Pattie Duncan)
Smashing the Rules of Racial Standing (Maureen T. Reddy)
When the Political is Personal: Life on the Multiethnic Margins (Jennifer Ho)
The Entanglements of Teaching Nappy Hair (Rebecca Meacham)
Beyond Bull Conner: Teaching Slavery in Alabama (Fred Ashe)
Fear and the Professorial Center (Kevin Everod Quashie)
Part 2 Rewards and Punishments
Out on a Limb: Race and the Evaluation of Frontline Teaching (Bonnie TuSmith)
Whiteness on a White Canvas: Teaching Race in a Predominantly White University (Karyn D. McKinney)
Gift Wrapped or Paper Bagged?: Packaging Race for the Classroom (Rajini Srikanth)
The Question of Comfort: The Impact of Race on/in the College Classroom (Virginia Whatley Smith)
Far More than Frybread: The Tender Issue of Race in Teaching Literature (Roberta J. Hill)
Menaced by Resistance: The Black Teacher in the Mainly White School/Classroom (Gîtahi Gîtîtî)
Strategies for Surviving Race in the Classroom (Karen J. Leong)
Traps, Pitfalls, and Obstacles: Challenges to Confronting Racism in Academia (Brenda Bourdreau and Tami Eggleston)
Part 3 Transformative Practices
Confronting the "Screaming Baboon": Notes on Race, Literature, and Pedagogy (José L. Torres-Padilla)
Centering the Margins: A Chicana in the English Classroom (Norma E. Cantú)
Race, Discomfort, and Love in a University Classroom (Daniel P. Liston)
Moonwalking Technoshamans and the Shifting Margin: Decentering the Colonial Classroom (Louis Owens)
The Colorblind Cyberclass: Myth and Fact (Sharon Packer)
Skinwalking and Color Linecrossing: Teaching Writing Against Racism (Gary L. Lemons)
Racing into the Academy: Pedagogy and Black Faculty (A. Yemisi Jimoh and Charlene Johnson)
Between a Rock and a Hard Place: Teaching the Biology of Human Variation and the Social Construction of Race (Joseph L. Graves Jr.)
Conclusion: Teaching to Make a Difference (Bonnie TuSmit and Maureen T. Reddy
Selected References
Contributors

Spirituality, Ethics, Religion, and Teaching: A Professor's Journey
Additional Info:
This book is a first-person, pedagogical reflection on what the author - an applied philosopher with an appointment in a professional school - has learned about being a teacher and a student, over a thirty-five-year career in a "public ivy" university. This narrative recounts a series of life-changing, intellectual, and emotional insights gleaned over three decades from students, colleagues, scholars, and mentors. The author's personal story traces the struggle to ...
This book is a first-person, pedagogical reflection on what the author - an applied philosopher with an appointment in a professional school - has learned about being a teacher and a student, over a thirty-five-year career in a "public ivy" university. This narrative recounts a series of life-changing, intellectual, and emotional insights gleaned over three decades from students, colleagues, scholars, and mentors. The author's personal story traces the struggle to ...
Additional Info:
This book is a first-person, pedagogical reflection on what the author - an applied philosopher with an appointment in a professional school - has learned about being a teacher and a student, over a thirty-five-year career in a "public ivy" university. This narrative recounts a series of life-changing, intellectual, and emotional insights gleaned over three decades from students, colleagues, scholars, and mentors. The author's personal story traces the struggle to create a passionate spirituality of teaching, one that reframes traditional notions of religion and spirituality, as well as one that attempts to correct conventional misunderstandings of postmodernism. Nash's story is every educator's story - lived in unique ways at every level of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Passion to Teach...and to Learn
ch. 2 Meeting My Mentor: The Passion for Politics
ch. 3 Becoming a Constructivist: The Passion to Teach About Morality
ch. 4 Real World Ethics: The Passion To Make the Right Decisions
ch. 5 A Spirituality of Teaching: The Passion for Meaning
ch. 6 Passionate Teaching-Spiritual Learning: The Power of Narratives
References
This book is a first-person, pedagogical reflection on what the author - an applied philosopher with an appointment in a professional school - has learned about being a teacher and a student, over a thirty-five-year career in a "public ivy" university. This narrative recounts a series of life-changing, intellectual, and emotional insights gleaned over three decades from students, colleagues, scholars, and mentors. The author's personal story traces the struggle to create a passionate spirituality of teaching, one that reframes traditional notions of religion and spirituality, as well as one that attempts to correct conventional misunderstandings of postmodernism. Nash's story is every educator's story - lived in unique ways at every level of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Passion to Teach...and to Learn
ch. 2 Meeting My Mentor: The Passion for Politics
ch. 3 Becoming a Constructivist: The Passion to Teach About Morality
ch. 4 Real World Ethics: The Passion To Make the Right Decisions
ch. 5 A Spirituality of Teaching: The Passion for Meaning
ch. 6 Passionate Teaching-Spiritual Learning: The Power of Narratives
References
Additional Info:
The inaugural title of a series in which faculty members at Lesley University in Cambridge, Massachusetts will address critical issues in arts education for university faculty, classroom teachers, and students of education, based on the innovation programs in the arts there. The 25 contributions discuss creating the teacher and changing the world, collaborative learning and improvisation, constructing a space for creativity in science, and other topics. (From the Publisher)
The inaugural title of a series in which faculty members at Lesley University in Cambridge, Massachusetts will address critical issues in arts education for university faculty, classroom teachers, and students of education, based on the innovation programs in the arts there. The 25 contributions discuss creating the teacher and changing the world, collaborative learning and improvisation, constructing a space for creativity in science, and other topics. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The inaugural title of a series in which faculty members at Lesley University in Cambridge, Massachusetts will address critical issues in arts education for university faculty, classroom teachers, and students of education, based on the innovation programs in the arts there. The 25 contributions discuss creating the teacher and changing the world, collaborative learning and improvisation, constructing a space for creativity in science, and other topics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Co-creators and Contributors
Come to Dinner: An Invitation to a Party (Debora C. Sherman)
The Possibilities of Passion (Elijah Mirochnik)
ch. 1 Creating the Teacher and Changing the World (William Ayers)
ch. 2 The Telling of Racism - Narratives for Healing and Change (Cecelia Baldwin)
ch. 3 Who Cares? A Play about Passion in Teaching and in the Researching of Teaching (Tom Barone)
ch. 4 Experimenting with Postmodernism: The New "Gothic" in Arts-Based Pedagogy, Inquiry, and Teacher Development (C.T. Patrick Diamond and Carol Mullen)
ch. 5 I Teach, Therefore I Am (Mary Aswell Doll)
ch. 6 Beyond Methods? Teaching as an Aesthetic and Spirit-ful Quest (William E. Doll, Jr.)
ch. 7 Constructing the Sacred: Empathic Engagement, Aesthetic Regard, and Discernment in Clinical Teaching (Susan H. Gere, Lisa Tsoi Hoshmand and Rick Reinkraut)
ch. 8 Collaborative Learning and Improvisation: Our Stories Experience (Lynne Hamer, Sandra Spickard Prettyman and Lynette Brown)
ch. 9 The Challenge of Constructivist Teaching (George E. Hein)
ch. 10 Uncovering an Artistic Identity While Learning to Teach Through the Arts (Victoria R. Jacobs, Merryl R. Goldberg and Tom R. Bennett)
ch. 11 Images, Movements, and Sounds: Working Toward Meaning (Patricia James)
ch. 12 Transforming Experience: Readers' Theater as Pedagogy (A Readers' Theater Script in Three Parts) (Jean L. Konzal, Susan Finley and kelli Jo Kerry Moran)
ch. 13 "Taking Care" as a Pedagogue/Actor/Son in a Theater/Drama Process (Warren Linds)
ch. 14 The Breath of Interpreting Movements (Rebecca Luce-Kapler)
ch. 15 The Intertwining of Voice and Structure: Reflections on Teaching and Learning (Susan Martin)
ch. 16 Imagining the New: Constructing a Space for Creativity in Science (Margery D. Osborne and David J. Brady)
ch. 17 Becoming My Own Juliet: Teacher Transformation through Acting Shakespeare (Carol Philips)
ch. 18 Why I Send the Poet to Teach My Courses (Mary Clare Powell)
ch. 19 A Pedagogy that Presupposes Passion (Rosalie M. Romano)
ch. 20 The Dance Critic, the Classroom, and the Re-Education of Perception (Janice Ross)
ch. 21 Reading and Art in the Lives of Teachers (Mary Kay Rummel and Elizabeth P. Quintero)
ch. 22 Multi-Genre Case Studies (Karen Covington Soul)
ch. 23 The Favorite Song (Kim Stafford)
ch. 24 Entertaining Doubts: Enjoyment and Ambiguity in White, Antiracist Classrooms (Audrey Thompson)
ch. 25 Finding Center and Balancing There: Spirals of Change in Art and Testing (Gwendolyn Yoppolo
The inaugural title of a series in which faculty members at Lesley University in Cambridge, Massachusetts will address critical issues in arts education for university faculty, classroom teachers, and students of education, based on the innovation programs in the arts there. The 25 contributions discuss creating the teacher and changing the world, collaborative learning and improvisation, constructing a space for creativity in science, and other topics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Co-creators and Contributors
Come to Dinner: An Invitation to a Party (Debora C. Sherman)
The Possibilities of Passion (Elijah Mirochnik)
ch. 1 Creating the Teacher and Changing the World (William Ayers)
ch. 2 The Telling of Racism - Narratives for Healing and Change (Cecelia Baldwin)
ch. 3 Who Cares? A Play about Passion in Teaching and in the Researching of Teaching (Tom Barone)
ch. 4 Experimenting with Postmodernism: The New "Gothic" in Arts-Based Pedagogy, Inquiry, and Teacher Development (C.T. Patrick Diamond and Carol Mullen)
ch. 5 I Teach, Therefore I Am (Mary Aswell Doll)
ch. 6 Beyond Methods? Teaching as an Aesthetic and Spirit-ful Quest (William E. Doll, Jr.)
ch. 7 Constructing the Sacred: Empathic Engagement, Aesthetic Regard, and Discernment in Clinical Teaching (Susan H. Gere, Lisa Tsoi Hoshmand and Rick Reinkraut)
ch. 8 Collaborative Learning and Improvisation: Our Stories Experience (Lynne Hamer, Sandra Spickard Prettyman and Lynette Brown)
ch. 9 The Challenge of Constructivist Teaching (George E. Hein)
ch. 10 Uncovering an Artistic Identity While Learning to Teach Through the Arts (Victoria R. Jacobs, Merryl R. Goldberg and Tom R. Bennett)
ch. 11 Images, Movements, and Sounds: Working Toward Meaning (Patricia James)
ch. 12 Transforming Experience: Readers' Theater as Pedagogy (A Readers' Theater Script in Three Parts) (Jean L. Konzal, Susan Finley and kelli Jo Kerry Moran)
ch. 13 "Taking Care" as a Pedagogue/Actor/Son in a Theater/Drama Process (Warren Linds)
ch. 14 The Breath of Interpreting Movements (Rebecca Luce-Kapler)
ch. 15 The Intertwining of Voice and Structure: Reflections on Teaching and Learning (Susan Martin)
ch. 16 Imagining the New: Constructing a Space for Creativity in Science (Margery D. Osborne and David J. Brady)
ch. 17 Becoming My Own Juliet: Teacher Transformation through Acting Shakespeare (Carol Philips)
ch. 18 Why I Send the Poet to Teach My Courses (Mary Clare Powell)
ch. 19 A Pedagogy that Presupposes Passion (Rosalie M. Romano)
ch. 20 The Dance Critic, the Classroom, and the Re-Education of Perception (Janice Ross)
ch. 21 Reading and Art in the Lives of Teachers (Mary Kay Rummel and Elizabeth P. Quintero)
ch. 22 Multi-Genre Case Studies (Karen Covington Soul)
ch. 23 The Favorite Song (Kim Stafford)
ch. 24 Entertaining Doubts: Enjoyment and Ambiguity in White, Antiracist Classrooms (Audrey Thompson)
ch. 25 Finding Center and Balancing There: Spirals of Change in Art and Testing (Gwendolyn Yoppolo
Additional Info:
In his 1980 book When Dreams and Heroes Died, Arthur Levine presented a portrait of a generation of college students without heroes - a generation optimistic about their own futures, but pessimistic about the future of the country and the world. These students turned inward, away from activism and community and toward individual and material gain, a trend that continued throughout the 80s and showed little sign of changing. But when ...
In his 1980 book When Dreams and Heroes Died, Arthur Levine presented a portrait of a generation of college students without heroes - a generation optimistic about their own futures, but pessimistic about the future of the country and the world. These students turned inward, away from activism and community and toward individual and material gain, a trend that continued throughout the 80s and showed little sign of changing. But when ...
Additional Info:
In his 1980 book When Dreams and Heroes Died, Arthur Levine presented a portrait of a generation of college students without heroes - a generation optimistic about their own futures, but pessimistic about the future of the country and the world. These students turned inward, away from activism and community and toward individual and material gain, a trend that continued throughout the 80s and showed little sign of changing. But when Levine returned to campuses in the 1990s, he discovered a startling and encouraging shift in the attitudes of the new generation of students. When Hope and Fear Collide examines a generation motivated by a conflicting sense of hope and fear. While today's students fear a great many things both on a global level and on a local level, they are less pessimistic than the previous generation, as they look for ways to make a difference in their world. Levine and Jeanette Cureton explore what shaped this change and how those who deal with students on a daily basis can use the change to enrich the college experience. The book examines how students come to grips with the challenges of politics, academics, and personal relationships on campus and draws implications for their futures. Levine and Cureton base their findings on research carried out in the same manner as in Levine's landmark study. The data they present give those who deal with students on a daily basis the information and tools they need to help those students chart a meaningful course through college. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Generation Without a Name
ch. 2 Flaws, Problems, and Decline: The New Localism
ch. 3 Campus Politics: Let the Buyer Beware!
ch. 4 Multiculturalism: The Campus Divided
ch. 5 Personal Life: Retreat from Intimacy
ch. 6 Academics: Search for an Insurance Policy
ch. 7 The Future: Doing Well or Doing Good
ch. 8 Conclusion: A Transitional Generation
App. A Studies Used in This Report
App. B Campus Contacts
References
Index
In his 1980 book When Dreams and Heroes Died, Arthur Levine presented a portrait of a generation of college students without heroes - a generation optimistic about their own futures, but pessimistic about the future of the country and the world. These students turned inward, away from activism and community and toward individual and material gain, a trend that continued throughout the 80s and showed little sign of changing. But when Levine returned to campuses in the 1990s, he discovered a startling and encouraging shift in the attitudes of the new generation of students. When Hope and Fear Collide examines a generation motivated by a conflicting sense of hope and fear. While today's students fear a great many things both on a global level and on a local level, they are less pessimistic than the previous generation, as they look for ways to make a difference in their world. Levine and Jeanette Cureton explore what shaped this change and how those who deal with students on a daily basis can use the change to enrich the college experience. The book examines how students come to grips with the challenges of politics, academics, and personal relationships on campus and draws implications for their futures. Levine and Cureton base their findings on research carried out in the same manner as in Levine's landmark study. The data they present give those who deal with students on a daily basis the information and tools they need to help those students chart a meaningful course through college. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Generation Without a Name
ch. 2 Flaws, Problems, and Decline: The New Localism
ch. 3 Campus Politics: Let the Buyer Beware!
ch. 4 Multiculturalism: The Campus Divided
ch. 5 Personal Life: Retreat from Intimacy
ch. 6 Academics: Search for an Insurance Policy
ch. 7 The Future: Doing Well or Doing Good
ch. 8 Conclusion: A Transitional Generation
App. A Studies Used in This Report
App. B Campus Contacts
References
Index

The Disciplines Speak: Rewarding the Scholarly, Professional, and Creative Work of Faculty
Additional Info:
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Eugene Rice)
Editors' Note
Describing the Work of Faculty: Disciplinary Perspectives
Statements (Robert M. Diamond and Bromwyn E. Adam)
Statements
ch. 1 Humanities and Social Sciences
American Academy of Religion - Religious Studies and the Redefining Scholarship Project (A Report of the AAR Ad Hoc Committee on "Defining Scholarly Work")
American Historical Association - Redefining Historical Scholarship (Report of the American Historical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Redefining Scholarly Work)
Association of American Geographers - Toward a Reconsideration of Faculty Roles and Rewards in Geography, Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 2 Natural Sciences
American Chemical Society - Report of the American Chemical Society Task Force on the Definition of Scholarship in Chemistry (J. Ivan Legg; Laurence A. Nafie; Paula P. Brownlee; William E. Broderick; Norman C. Craig; Marcetta Y. Darensbourg; William B. DeLauder; Slayton A. Evans, Jr.; Ursula M. Mazur; Theodore E. Tabor; Edward K. Mellon; and Joseph G. Morse)
Joint Policy Board for Mathematics - Recognition and Rewards in the Mathematical Sciences (Report of the Joint Policy Board for Mathematics, Committee on Professional Recognition and Rewards (excerpt))
ch. 3 Fine, Performing and Applied Arts
National Office for Arts Accreditation in Higher Education - The Work of Arts Faculties in Higher Education
Landscape Architectural Accreditation Board
National Architectural Accrediting Board
National Association of Schools of Art and Design
National Association of Schools of Dance
National Association of Schools of Music
National Association of Schools of Theatre
4 Professional Programs
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business - Defining Scholarly Work in Management Education (William K. Laidlaw, Jr.)
Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication - Report of the Association for Education in Journalism & Mass Communication on the Definition of Scholarship in Journalism (Task Force)
Council of Administrators of Family and Consumer Sciences - Recognition and Rewards in the Family and Consumer Sciences
Appendix
National Education Association (NEA) Statement on Faculty Reward Structures
References and Resources
About AAHE
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Eugene Rice)
Editors' Note
Describing the Work of Faculty: Disciplinary Perspectives
Statements (Robert M. Diamond and Bromwyn E. Adam)
Statements
ch. 1 Humanities and Social Sciences
American Academy of Religion - Religious Studies and the Redefining Scholarship Project (A Report of the AAR Ad Hoc Committee on "Defining Scholarly Work")
American Historical Association - Redefining Historical Scholarship (Report of the American Historical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Redefining Scholarly Work)
Association of American Geographers - Toward a Reconsideration of Faculty Roles and Rewards in Geography, Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 2 Natural Sciences
American Chemical Society - Report of the American Chemical Society Task Force on the Definition of Scholarship in Chemistry (J. Ivan Legg; Laurence A. Nafie; Paula P. Brownlee; William E. Broderick; Norman C. Craig; Marcetta Y. Darensbourg; William B. DeLauder; Slayton A. Evans, Jr.; Ursula M. Mazur; Theodore E. Tabor; Edward K. Mellon; and Joseph G. Morse)
Joint Policy Board for Mathematics - Recognition and Rewards in the Mathematical Sciences (Report of the Joint Policy Board for Mathematics, Committee on Professional Recognition and Rewards (excerpt))
ch. 3 Fine, Performing and Applied Arts
National Office for Arts Accreditation in Higher Education - The Work of Arts Faculties in Higher Education
Landscape Architectural Accreditation Board
National Architectural Accrediting Board
National Association of Schools of Art and Design
National Association of Schools of Dance
National Association of Schools of Music
National Association of Schools of Theatre
4 Professional Programs
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business - Defining Scholarly Work in Management Education (William K. Laidlaw, Jr.)
Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication - Report of the Association for Education in Journalism & Mass Communication on the Definition of Scholarship in Journalism (Task Force)
Council of Administrators of Family and Consumer Sciences - Recognition and Rewards in the Family and Consumer Sciences
Appendix
National Education Association (NEA) Statement on Faculty Reward Structures
References and Resources
About AAHE

Field Guide to Academic Leadership: A Publication of the National Academy for Academic Leadership
Additional Info:
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for ...
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for ...
Additional Info:
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for significant change, while the bulk of the book offers material on leadership roles and challenges, teaching and learning, assessment, organizational issues, and position-specific issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Pt. 1 Basics
ch. 1 Pressures for Fundamental Reform: Creating a Viable Academic Future (Alan E. Guskin and Mary B. Marcy)
ch. 2 Requisites for Sustainable Institutional Change (Robert M. Diamond, Lion F. Gardiner and Daniel W.Wheeler)
Pt. 2 Leadership
ch. 3 Leadership and Change (Dale W. Lick)
ch. 4 Mission and Vision Statements: An Essential First Step (William G. Tierney)
ch. 5 Moving Mountains: Institutional Culture and Transformational Change (Judith A. Ramaley)
ch. 6 Building on Style for More Effective Relationships and Results (Robert M. Diamond and Charles M. Spuches)
Pt. 3 Academics
ch. 7 Research on Learning and Student Development and Its Implications (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 8 Student Development: Monitoring the Quality of Learning and Development (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 9 Curricula and Courses: Administrative Issues (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 10 Teaching Strategies for the Twenty-First Century (James Eison)
ch. 11 Technology in the Learning Process (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 12 Improving Academic Advising: Issues and Action Areas for Campus Leaders (Franklin P. Wilbur)
ch. 13 Faculty Development: An Investment for the Future (Marilla Svinicki)
Pt. 4 Assessment
ch. 14 Evaluation and Assessment: An Institutional Context (Michael Theall)
ch. 15 Academic Program Review (Jon F. Wergin)
ch. 16 Leadership in Faculty Evaluation (Michael Theall)
ch. 17 The Mission-Driven Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
Pt. 5 Other Issues
ch. 18 Supportive Financial Systems (Susan Stetson Clarke)
ch. 19 Enhancing Student Learning Through Collaboration Between Academic Affairs and Student Affairs (George D. Kuh and Sara E. Hinkle)
ch. 20 Dealing with Technology: Administrative Issues (Steven W. Gilbert and Stephen C. Ehrmann)
ch. 21 Diversity Issues (Joseph H. Silver, Sr.)
Pt. 6 Position-Specific Issues for Academic Leaders
ch. 22 The Role of Governing Boards: Issues, Recommendations, and Resources
ch. 23 Creating Change: Suggestions for the New President (Kenneth A. Shaw)
ch. 24 Transforming the Small College: A Challenge for Presidential Leadership (Eugene Hotchkiss)
ch. 25 Presidents and Chief Academic Officers of Community Colleges (Louis S. Albert)
ch. 26 Chief Academic Officers (Leo M. Lambert)
ch. 27 Academic Deans (Deryl R. Leaming)
ch. 28 Chairs as Institutional Leaders (Daniel W. Wheeler)
Pt. 7 Conclusion
ch. 29 Some Final Observations (Robert M. Diamond)
App Participants at Minnowbrook Conferences
Glossary of Academic Terms
Name Index
Subject Index
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for significant change, while the bulk of the book offers material on leadership roles and challenges, teaching and learning, assessment, organizational issues, and position-specific issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Pt. 1 Basics
ch. 1 Pressures for Fundamental Reform: Creating a Viable Academic Future (Alan E. Guskin and Mary B. Marcy)
ch. 2 Requisites for Sustainable Institutional Change (Robert M. Diamond, Lion F. Gardiner and Daniel W.Wheeler)
Pt. 2 Leadership
ch. 3 Leadership and Change (Dale W. Lick)
ch. 4 Mission and Vision Statements: An Essential First Step (William G. Tierney)
ch. 5 Moving Mountains: Institutional Culture and Transformational Change (Judith A. Ramaley)
ch. 6 Building on Style for More Effective Relationships and Results (Robert M. Diamond and Charles M. Spuches)
Pt. 3 Academics
ch. 7 Research on Learning and Student Development and Its Implications (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 8 Student Development: Monitoring the Quality of Learning and Development (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 9 Curricula and Courses: Administrative Issues (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 10 Teaching Strategies for the Twenty-First Century (James Eison)
ch. 11 Technology in the Learning Process (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 12 Improving Academic Advising: Issues and Action Areas for Campus Leaders (Franklin P. Wilbur)
ch. 13 Faculty Development: An Investment for the Future (Marilla Svinicki)
Pt. 4 Assessment
ch. 14 Evaluation and Assessment: An Institutional Context (Michael Theall)
ch. 15 Academic Program Review (Jon F. Wergin)
ch. 16 Leadership in Faculty Evaluation (Michael Theall)
ch. 17 The Mission-Driven Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
Pt. 5 Other Issues
ch. 18 Supportive Financial Systems (Susan Stetson Clarke)
ch. 19 Enhancing Student Learning Through Collaboration Between Academic Affairs and Student Affairs (George D. Kuh and Sara E. Hinkle)
ch. 20 Dealing with Technology: Administrative Issues (Steven W. Gilbert and Stephen C. Ehrmann)
ch. 21 Diversity Issues (Joseph H. Silver, Sr.)
Pt. 6 Position-Specific Issues for Academic Leaders
ch. 22 The Role of Governing Boards: Issues, Recommendations, and Resources
ch. 23 Creating Change: Suggestions for the New President (Kenneth A. Shaw)
ch. 24 Transforming the Small College: A Challenge for Presidential Leadership (Eugene Hotchkiss)
ch. 25 Presidents and Chief Academic Officers of Community Colleges (Louis S. Albert)
ch. 26 Chief Academic Officers (Leo M. Lambert)
ch. 27 Academic Deans (Deryl R. Leaming)
ch. 28 Chairs as Institutional Leaders (Daniel W. Wheeler)
Pt. 7 Conclusion
ch. 29 Some Final Observations (Robert M. Diamond)
App Participants at Minnowbrook Conferences
Glossary of Academic Terms
Name Index
Subject Index
Additional Info:
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
One of the central questions of the field of Religious Studies is "What is religion and how might we best understand it?" Sigmund Freud was surely a paradigmatic cartographer of this terrain. Among the first theorists to explore the unconscious fantasies, fears, and desires underlying religious ideas and practices, Freud can be considered one of the founders of the field. Yet ...
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
One of the central questions of the field of Religious Studies is "What is religion and how might we best understand it?" Sigmund Freud was surely a paradigmatic cartographer of this terrain. Among the first theorists to explore the unconscious fantasies, fears, and desires underlying religious ideas and practices, Freud can be considered one of the founders of the field. Yet ...
Additional Info:
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
One of the central questions of the field of Religious Studies is "What is religion and how might we best understand it?" Sigmund Freud was surely a paradigmatic cartographer of this terrain. Among the first theorists to explore the unconscious fantasies, fears, and desires underlying religious ideas and practices, Freud can be considered one of the founders of the field. Yet Freud's legacy is deeply contested. With his reputation at perhaps its lowest point since he came to public attention a century ago, students often assume that Freud is sexist, dangerous, passe, and irrelevant to the study of religion. How can Freud be taught in this climate of critique and controversy? The fourteen contributors to this volume, all recognized scholars of religion and psychoanalysis, describe how they address Freud's contested legacy by "teaching the debates." They describe their courses on Freud and religion, their innovative pedagogical practices, and the creative ways they work with resistance.
Part I focuses on institutional and curricular contexts: contributors describe how they teach Freud at a Catholic and Jesuit undergraduate institution, a liberal seminary, and a large multicultural university. In Part II contributors describe courses structured around psychoanalytic interpretations of religious figures and phenomena: Ramakrishna, Jesus and Augustine, myth and mysticism. Part III focuses explicitly on courses structured around major debates over gender, Judaism, anti-Semitism, religion, and ritual. Part IV describes courses in which psychoanalysis is presented as a powerful pedagogy of transformation and insight. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Introduction: Teaching Freud and Religion
I. Institutional and Curricular Contexts: Teaching Freud and Religion in Undergraduate Institutions, Graduate Programs, and Seminaries
ch. 1 Teaching Freud in the Language of Our Students: The Case of a Religiously Affiliated Undergraduate Institution (Diane Jonte-Pace)
ch. 2 Freud and/as the Jew in the Multicultural University (Jay Geller)
ch. 3 Teaching Freud in the Seminary (Kirk A. Bingaman)
ch. 4. Teaching Freud, Teaching Freud's Values: A Graduate Course (Volney Gay)
II. Teaching Freud as Interpreter of Religious Texts and Practices
ch. 5 "Let Him Rejoice in the Roseate Light!": Teaching Psychoanalysis and Mysticism (William Parsons)
ch. 6 Teaching Freud While Interpreting Jesus (Donald Capps)
ch. 7 Teaching Freud and Interpreting Augustine's Confessions (Sandra Lee Dixon)
ch. 8 Psychoanalyzing Myth: From Freud to Winnicott (Robert A. Segal)
III. Teaching the Controversies
ch. 9 Rethinking Freud: Gender, Ethnicity, and the Production of Scientific Thought (Janet Liebman Jacobs)
ch. 10 Why Do We Have to Read Freud? (Carol Delaney)
ch. 11 Teaching Freud in Religion and Culture Courses: A Dialogical Approach (Mary Ellen Ross)
IV. Teaching the Teachings, Teaching the Practice
ch. 12 Teaching the Hindu Tantra with Freud: Transgression as Critical Theory and Mystical Technique (Jeffrey J. Kripal)
ch. 13 The Challenge of Teaching Freud: Depth Psychology and Religious Ethics (Ernest Wallwork)
ch. 14 Teaching Freud's Teachings (James E. Dittes)
Index
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
One of the central questions of the field of Religious Studies is "What is religion and how might we best understand it?" Sigmund Freud was surely a paradigmatic cartographer of this terrain. Among the first theorists to explore the unconscious fantasies, fears, and desires underlying religious ideas and practices, Freud can be considered one of the founders of the field. Yet Freud's legacy is deeply contested. With his reputation at perhaps its lowest point since he came to public attention a century ago, students often assume that Freud is sexist, dangerous, passe, and irrelevant to the study of religion. How can Freud be taught in this climate of critique and controversy? The fourteen contributors to this volume, all recognized scholars of religion and psychoanalysis, describe how they address Freud's contested legacy by "teaching the debates." They describe their courses on Freud and religion, their innovative pedagogical practices, and the creative ways they work with resistance.
Part I focuses on institutional and curricular contexts: contributors describe how they teach Freud at a Catholic and Jesuit undergraduate institution, a liberal seminary, and a large multicultural university. In Part II contributors describe courses structured around psychoanalytic interpretations of religious figures and phenomena: Ramakrishna, Jesus and Augustine, myth and mysticism. Part III focuses explicitly on courses structured around major debates over gender, Judaism, anti-Semitism, religion, and ritual. Part IV describes courses in which psychoanalysis is presented as a powerful pedagogy of transformation and insight. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Introduction: Teaching Freud and Religion
I. Institutional and Curricular Contexts: Teaching Freud and Religion in Undergraduate Institutions, Graduate Programs, and Seminaries
ch. 1 Teaching Freud in the Language of Our Students: The Case of a Religiously Affiliated Undergraduate Institution (Diane Jonte-Pace)
ch. 2 Freud and/as the Jew in the Multicultural University (Jay Geller)
ch. 3 Teaching Freud in the Seminary (Kirk A. Bingaman)
ch. 4. Teaching Freud, Teaching Freud's Values: A Graduate Course (Volney Gay)
II. Teaching Freud as Interpreter of Religious Texts and Practices
ch. 5 "Let Him Rejoice in the Roseate Light!": Teaching Psychoanalysis and Mysticism (William Parsons)
ch. 6 Teaching Freud While Interpreting Jesus (Donald Capps)
ch. 7 Teaching Freud and Interpreting Augustine's Confessions (Sandra Lee Dixon)
ch. 8 Psychoanalyzing Myth: From Freud to Winnicott (Robert A. Segal)
III. Teaching the Controversies
ch. 9 Rethinking Freud: Gender, Ethnicity, and the Production of Scientific Thought (Janet Liebman Jacobs)
ch. 10 Why Do We Have to Read Freud? (Carol Delaney)
ch. 11 Teaching Freud in Religion and Culture Courses: A Dialogical Approach (Mary Ellen Ross)
IV. Teaching the Teachings, Teaching the Practice
ch. 12 Teaching the Hindu Tantra with Freud: Transgression as Critical Theory and Mystical Technique (Jeffrey J. Kripal)
ch. 13 The Challenge of Teaching Freud: Depth Psychology and Religious Ethics (Ernest Wallwork)
ch. 14 Teaching Freud's Teachings (James E. Dittes)
Index

Ethics of Inquiry: Issues in the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
Additional Info:
Intended as a resource to assist faculty and campuses in thinking carefully about ethical dimensions of the scholarship of teaching and learning, Ethics of Inquiry provides an overview of the issues, sets the context and offers multiple perspectives from which to view these issues. The volume includes seven case studies by scholars of teaching and learning reflecting on ethical dimensions and dilemmas in their work. Each case is followed by ...
Intended as a resource to assist faculty and campuses in thinking carefully about ethical dimensions of the scholarship of teaching and learning, Ethics of Inquiry provides an overview of the issues, sets the context and offers multiple perspectives from which to view these issues. The volume includes seven case studies by scholars of teaching and learning reflecting on ethical dimensions and dilemmas in their work. Each case is followed by ...
Additional Info:
Intended as a resource to assist faculty and campuses in thinking carefully about ethical dimensions of the scholarship of teaching and learning, Ethics of Inquiry provides an overview of the issues, sets the context and offers multiple perspectives from which to view these issues. The volume includes seven case studies by scholars of teaching and learning reflecting on ethical dimensions and dilemmas in their work. Each case is followed by three commentaries by respondents, including students, with diverse points of view. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Lee S. Shulman)
Introduction
Ethics and Aspiration in the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (Pat Hutchings)
Case 1
ch. 1 The Ethics of Comparison: A Statistician Wrestles with the Orthodoxy of a Control Group (John P. Holcomb, Jr.)
Commentary 1 (Roberto L. Corrado)
Commentary 2 (Joan B. Garfield)
Commentary 3 (Caroline Hodges Persell)
Case 2
ch. 2 Using Student Work as Evidence (David Takacs)
Commentary 1 (Amy Driscoll)
Commentary 2 (Kevin Miller)
Commentary 3 (Cynthia Scheinberg)
Case 3
ch. 3 Refining Questions and Renegotiating Consent (Suzanne Burgoyne)
Commentary 1 (Richard Gale)
Commentary 2 (Peter J. Markie)
Commentary 3 (Helen A. Neville)
Case 4
ch. 4 Balancing Pedagogic Needs with the Needs of a Classroom Experiment (Charles McDowell)
Commentary 1 (Peter Alexander)
Commentary 2 (Heather E. Bullock)
Commentary 3 (Eileen M. Tanner)
Case 5
ch. 5 Too Close for Comfort and/or Validity (Tomás Galguera)
Commentary 1 (Camille Calica)
Commentary 2 (David M. Donahue)
Commentary 3 (Judith Haymore Sandholtz)
Case 6
ch. 6 From Private to Public Classrooms: 'Inadequate' Student Texts in the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (James E. Seitz)
Commentary 1 (Christie Raney)
Commentary 2 (Mariolina Rizzi Salvatori)
Commentary 3 (Annette Seitz)
Case 7
ch. 7 Giving Public Students' Work: The Movie (Sherry Linkon)
Commentary 1 (Randy Bass)
Commentary 2 (Thomas Hatch)
Commentary 3 (John Stern)
ch. 8 Questions To Shape Practice
Annotated Bibliography
Research Ethics and the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (James Bequette, and Chris Bjork)
Biographical Notes
Intended as a resource to assist faculty and campuses in thinking carefully about ethical dimensions of the scholarship of teaching and learning, Ethics of Inquiry provides an overview of the issues, sets the context and offers multiple perspectives from which to view these issues. The volume includes seven case studies by scholars of teaching and learning reflecting on ethical dimensions and dilemmas in their work. Each case is followed by three commentaries by respondents, including students, with diverse points of view. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Lee S. Shulman)
Introduction
Ethics and Aspiration in the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (Pat Hutchings)
Case 1
ch. 1 The Ethics of Comparison: A Statistician Wrestles with the Orthodoxy of a Control Group (John P. Holcomb, Jr.)
Commentary 1 (Roberto L. Corrado)
Commentary 2 (Joan B. Garfield)
Commentary 3 (Caroline Hodges Persell)
Case 2
ch. 2 Using Student Work as Evidence (David Takacs)
Commentary 1 (Amy Driscoll)
Commentary 2 (Kevin Miller)
Commentary 3 (Cynthia Scheinberg)
Case 3
ch. 3 Refining Questions and Renegotiating Consent (Suzanne Burgoyne)
Commentary 1 (Richard Gale)
Commentary 2 (Peter J. Markie)
Commentary 3 (Helen A. Neville)
Case 4
ch. 4 Balancing Pedagogic Needs with the Needs of a Classroom Experiment (Charles McDowell)
Commentary 1 (Peter Alexander)
Commentary 2 (Heather E. Bullock)
Commentary 3 (Eileen M. Tanner)
Case 5
ch. 5 Too Close for Comfort and/or Validity (Tomás Galguera)
Commentary 1 (Camille Calica)
Commentary 2 (David M. Donahue)
Commentary 3 (Judith Haymore Sandholtz)
Case 6
ch. 6 From Private to Public Classrooms: 'Inadequate' Student Texts in the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (James E. Seitz)
Commentary 1 (Christie Raney)
Commentary 2 (Mariolina Rizzi Salvatori)
Commentary 3 (Annette Seitz)
Case 7
ch. 7 Giving Public Students' Work: The Movie (Sherry Linkon)
Commentary 1 (Randy Bass)
Commentary 2 (Thomas Hatch)
Commentary 3 (John Stern)
ch. 8 Questions To Shape Practice
Annotated Bibliography
Research Ethics and the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (James Bequette, and Chris Bjork)
Biographical Notes

Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators
Additional Info:
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and ...
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and ...
Additional Info:
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and Teaching Notes to Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Teaching and Learning with Case Studies
ch. 1. Overview: Using Cases in Higher Education
ch. 2. Case Studies as Teaching Tools
ch. 3. Essential Elements of Effective Case Teaching
ch. 4. Post-Discussion Learning
Annotated Bibliography
Appendix Kansas State University Case
Index
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and Teaching Notes to Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Teaching and Learning with Case Studies
ch. 1. Overview: Using Cases in Higher Education
ch. 2. Case Studies as Teaching Tools
ch. 3. Essential Elements of Effective Case Teaching
ch. 4. Post-Discussion Learning
Annotated Bibliography
Appendix Kansas State University Case
Index

Where We Stand: Class Matters
Additional Info:
Drawing on both her roots in Kentucky and her adventures with Manhattan Coop boards, Where We Stand is a successful black woman's reflection - personal, straight forward, and rigorously honest - on how our dilemmas of class and race are intertwined, and how we can find ways to think beyond them. (From the Publisher)
Drawing on both her roots in Kentucky and her adventures with Manhattan Coop boards, Where We Stand is a successful black woman's reflection - personal, straight forward, and rigorously honest - on how our dilemmas of class and race are intertwined, and how we can find ways to think beyond them. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Drawing on both her roots in Kentucky and her adventures with Manhattan Coop boards, Where We Stand is a successful black woman's reflection - personal, straight forward, and rigorously honest - on how our dilemmas of class and race are intertwined, and how we can find ways to think beyond them. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
preface: where we stand
introduction: Class Matters
ch. 1 Making the Personal Political: Class in the Family
ch. 2 Coming to Class Consciousness
ch. 3 Class and the Politics of Living Simply
ch. 4 Money Hungry
ch. 5 The Politics of Greed
ch. 6 Being Rich
ch. 7 The Me-Me Class: The Young and the Ruthless
ch. 8 Class and Race: The New Black Elite
ch. 9 Feminism and Class Power
ch. 10 White Poverty: The Politics of Invisibility
ch. 11 Solidarity with the Poor
ch. 12 Class Claims: Real Estate Racism
ch. 13 Crossing Class Boundaries
ch. 14 Living without Class Hierarchy
Drawing on both her roots in Kentucky and her adventures with Manhattan Coop boards, Where We Stand is a successful black woman's reflection - personal, straight forward, and rigorously honest - on how our dilemmas of class and race are intertwined, and how we can find ways to think beyond them. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
preface: where we stand
introduction: Class Matters
ch. 1 Making the Personal Political: Class in the Family
ch. 2 Coming to Class Consciousness
ch. 3 Class and the Politics of Living Simply
ch. 4 Money Hungry
ch. 5 The Politics of Greed
ch. 6 Being Rich
ch. 7 The Me-Me Class: The Young and the Ruthless
ch. 8 Class and Race: The New Black Elite
ch. 9 Feminism and Class Power
ch. 10 White Poverty: The Politics of Invisibility
ch. 11 Solidarity with the Poor
ch. 12 Class Claims: Real Estate Racism
ch. 13 Crossing Class Boundaries
ch. 14 Living without Class Hierarchy
Additional Info:
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Despite the importance of Islam in global affairs and the role of Islamic Studies in Religious Studies, little attention has been given to the basic questions of how Islam should be taught. This volume brings together a number of leading scholars of Islamic Studies with rich experience in teaching Islam in a diversity of undergraduate settings, from large public universities to ...
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Despite the importance of Islam in global affairs and the role of Islamic Studies in Religious Studies, little attention has been given to the basic questions of how Islam should be taught. This volume brings together a number of leading scholars of Islamic Studies with rich experience in teaching Islam in a diversity of undergraduate settings, from large public universities to ...
Additional Info:
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Despite the importance of Islam in global affairs and the role of Islamic Studies in Religious Studies, little attention has been given to the basic questions of how Islam should be taught. This volume brings together a number of leading scholars of Islamic Studies with rich experience in teaching Islam in a diversity of undergraduate settings, from large public universities to small private colleges. Topics addressed include Islamic law, the Quran, Sufism, women in Islam, Islam in America, and teaching about Islam through Arabic literature and the use of new information technology. Along with providing practical information about structuring courses and assignments, the contributors examine the place of Islamic Studies in the larger theoretical framework of Religious Studies and liberal arts curricula. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One Theoretical and Pedagogical Frames For Presenting Islam In The Religious Studies Classroom
ch. 1 What Can't Be Left Out: The Essentials of Teaching Islam as a Religion (Brannon M. Wheeler)
ch. 2 On the ``Introduction to Islam'' (A. Kevin Reinhart)
ch. 3 Recent Critical Scholarship and the Teaching of Islam(Keith Lewinstein)
ch. 4 Islamicate Civilization: The View from Asia (Bruce B. Lawrence)
Part Two Dimensions of Muslim Faith, Community, and Order
ch. 5 The Essential Shari'ah: Teaching Islamic Law in the Religious Studies Classroom (Jonathan E. Brockopp)
ch. 6 Disparity and Context: Teaching Quranic Studies in North America (Jane Dammen Mcauliffe)
ch. 7 Between Orientalism and Fundamentalism: Problematizing the Teaching of Sufism (Carl W. Ernst)
ch. 8 Engendering and Experience: Teaching a Course on Women in Islam (Zayn Kassam)
Part Three Contemporary Issues and Challenges In Teaching Islam as a Religion
ch. 9 The Wedding of Zein: Islam through a Modern Novel (Michael A. Sells)
ch. 10 Teaching about Muslims in America (Marcia K. Hermansen)
ch. 11 Corporating Information Technology into Courses on Islamic Civilization (Corinne Blake)
ch. 12 Teaching Religion in the Twenty-First Century (Tazim R. Kassam)
Index
AAR Teaching Religious Studies Series (Oxford University Press)
Despite the importance of Islam in global affairs and the role of Islamic Studies in Religious Studies, little attention has been given to the basic questions of how Islam should be taught. This volume brings together a number of leading scholars of Islamic Studies with rich experience in teaching Islam in a diversity of undergraduate settings, from large public universities to small private colleges. Topics addressed include Islamic law, the Quran, Sufism, women in Islam, Islam in America, and teaching about Islam through Arabic literature and the use of new information technology. Along with providing practical information about structuring courses and assignments, the contributors examine the place of Islamic Studies in the larger theoretical framework of Religious Studies and liberal arts curricula. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One Theoretical and Pedagogical Frames For Presenting Islam In The Religious Studies Classroom
ch. 1 What Can't Be Left Out: The Essentials of Teaching Islam as a Religion (Brannon M. Wheeler)
ch. 2 On the ``Introduction to Islam'' (A. Kevin Reinhart)
ch. 3 Recent Critical Scholarship and the Teaching of Islam(Keith Lewinstein)
ch. 4 Islamicate Civilization: The View from Asia (Bruce B. Lawrence)
Part Two Dimensions of Muslim Faith, Community, and Order
ch. 5 The Essential Shari'ah: Teaching Islamic Law in the Religious Studies Classroom (Jonathan E. Brockopp)
ch. 6 Disparity and Context: Teaching Quranic Studies in North America (Jane Dammen Mcauliffe)
ch. 7 Between Orientalism and Fundamentalism: Problematizing the Teaching of Sufism (Carl W. Ernst)
ch. 8 Engendering and Experience: Teaching a Course on Women in Islam (Zayn Kassam)
Part Three Contemporary Issues and Challenges In Teaching Islam as a Religion
ch. 9 The Wedding of Zein: Islam through a Modern Novel (Michael A. Sells)
ch. 10 Teaching about Muslims in America (Marcia K. Hermansen)
ch. 11 Corporating Information Technology into Courses on Islamic Civilization (Corinne Blake)
ch. 12 Teaching Religion in the Twenty-First Century (Tazim R. Kassam)
Index

Religion on Campus
Additional Info:
The first intensive, close-up investigation of the practice and teaching of religion at American colleges and universities, Religion on Campus is an indispensable resource for all who want to understand what religion really means to today's undergraduates.
To explore firsthand how college students understand, practice, and learn about religion, the authors visited four very different U.S. campuses: a Roman Catholic university in the East, a state university ...
The first intensive, close-up investigation of the practice and teaching of religion at American colleges and universities, Religion on Campus is an indispensable resource for all who want to understand what religion really means to today's undergraduates.
To explore firsthand how college students understand, practice, and learn about religion, the authors visited four very different U.S. campuses: a Roman Catholic university in the East, a state university ...
Additional Info:
The first intensive, close-up investigation of the practice and teaching of religion at American colleges and universities, Religion on Campus is an indispensable resource for all who want to understand what religion really means to today's undergraduates.
To explore firsthand how college students understand, practice, and learn about religion, the authors visited four very different U.S. campuses: a Roman Catholic university in the East, a state university in the West, a historically black university in the South, and a Lutheran liberal arts college in the North. They interviewed students, faculty members, and administrators; attended classes; participated in worship services; observed prayer and Bible study groups; and surveyed the general ethos of each campus. The resulting study makes fascinating and important reading for anyone--including students, parents, teachers, administrators, clergy, and scholars--concerned with the future of young Americans.
Challenging theories of the secularization of higher education and the decline of religion on campus, this book reveals that both the practice and the study of religion are thriving, nourished by a campus culture of diversity, tolerance, and choice.(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 West University
ch. 3 South University
ch. 4 East University
ch. 5 North College
ch. 6 Conclusion
App. A Research Methods
App. B In-Class Questionnaire
Index
The first intensive, close-up investigation of the practice and teaching of religion at American colleges and universities, Religion on Campus is an indispensable resource for all who want to understand what religion really means to today's undergraduates.
To explore firsthand how college students understand, practice, and learn about religion, the authors visited four very different U.S. campuses: a Roman Catholic university in the East, a state university in the West, a historically black university in the South, and a Lutheran liberal arts college in the North. They interviewed students, faculty members, and administrators; attended classes; participated in worship services; observed prayer and Bible study groups; and surveyed the general ethos of each campus. The resulting study makes fascinating and important reading for anyone--including students, parents, teachers, administrators, clergy, and scholars--concerned with the future of young Americans.
Challenging theories of the secularization of higher education and the decline of religion on campus, this book reveals that both the practice and the study of religion are thriving, nourished by a campus culture of diversity, tolerance, and choice.(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 West University
ch. 3 South University
ch. 4 East University
ch. 5 North College
ch. 6 Conclusion
App. A Research Methods
App. B In-Class Questionnaire
Index

How Minority Students Experience College: Implications for Planning and Policy
Additional Info:
Have three decades of integration and multicultural initiatives in higher education delivered a better education to all students? Are majority and minority students reaping similar benefits, specifically in predominantly white colleges? Do we know what a multicultural campus should look like, and how to design one that is welcoming to all students and promotes a learning environment?
Through a unique qualitative study involving seven colleges and universities considered ...
Have three decades of integration and multicultural initiatives in higher education delivered a better education to all students? Are majority and minority students reaping similar benefits, specifically in predominantly white colleges? Do we know what a multicultural campus should look like, and how to design one that is welcoming to all students and promotes a learning environment?
Through a unique qualitative study involving seven colleges and universities considered ...
Additional Info:
Have three decades of integration and multicultural initiatives in higher education delivered a better education to all students? Are majority and minority students reaping similar benefits, specifically in predominantly white colleges? Do we know what a multicultural campus should look like, and how to design one that is welcoming to all students and promotes a learning environment?
Through a unique qualitative study involving seven colleges and universities considered national models of commitment to diversity, this book presents the views and voices of minority students on what has been achieved and what remains to be done.
The direct quotations that form the core of this book give voice to Black, Hispanic, Asian, Native American and bi-racial students. They offer in their own words their perceptions of their campus cultures and practices, the tensions they encounter and what works for them.
Rather than elaborating or recommending specific models or solutions, this book aims to provide insights that will enable the reader better to understand and articulate the issues that need to be addressed to achieve a well-adapted multicultural campus.
Presidents, academic affairs professionals, student affairs personnel and faculty concerned with equity and diversity will find this book helpful and enlightening. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Authors
Introduction
ch. 1 Defining Multiculturalism
ch. 2 Institutional Characteristics and Profiles
ch. 3 Research Methods and Procedures for Inquiry
ch. 4 Reality of Campus Culture
ch. 5 The Lack of Multiculturalism and How It Affects Students
ch. 6 Coping: Involvement, Identity, and Educational Outcomes
ch. 7 Discussions, Conclusions, and Suggestions
App. A General Assurances
App. B Consent Form
App. C Demographic Form
App. D Facilitator Form
App. E Interview Protocol
App. F Content Areas
References
Index
Have three decades of integration and multicultural initiatives in higher education delivered a better education to all students? Are majority and minority students reaping similar benefits, specifically in predominantly white colleges? Do we know what a multicultural campus should look like, and how to design one that is welcoming to all students and promotes a learning environment?
Through a unique qualitative study involving seven colleges and universities considered national models of commitment to diversity, this book presents the views and voices of minority students on what has been achieved and what remains to be done.
The direct quotations that form the core of this book give voice to Black, Hispanic, Asian, Native American and bi-racial students. They offer in their own words their perceptions of their campus cultures and practices, the tensions they encounter and what works for them.
Rather than elaborating or recommending specific models or solutions, this book aims to provide insights that will enable the reader better to understand and articulate the issues that need to be addressed to achieve a well-adapted multicultural campus.
Presidents, academic affairs professionals, student affairs personnel and faculty concerned with equity and diversity will find this book helpful and enlightening. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Authors
Introduction
ch. 1 Defining Multiculturalism
ch. 2 Institutional Characteristics and Profiles
ch. 3 Research Methods and Procedures for Inquiry
ch. 4 Reality of Campus Culture
ch. 5 The Lack of Multiculturalism and How It Affects Students
ch. 6 Coping: Involvement, Identity, and Educational Outcomes
ch. 7 Discussions, Conclusions, and Suggestions
App. A General Assurances
App. B Consent Form
App. C Demographic Form
App. D Facilitator Form
App. E Interview Protocol
App. F Content Areas
References
Index
Additional Info:
In Teaching Preaching, Katie Cannon, one of Clark's myriad preaching proteges, conceives her role as purely "presentational": "to bring Clark face to face with a reading audience, allow him to explain the formal elements of preaching from the inside out, and let each lecture mediate its own message." She also allows Clark to speak in his own expressive vernacular, with its double negatives, deliberate redundancy, signifying wordplay, and colloquially coined ...
In Teaching Preaching, Katie Cannon, one of Clark's myriad preaching proteges, conceives her role as purely "presentational": "to bring Clark face to face with a reading audience, allow him to explain the formal elements of preaching from the inside out, and let each lecture mediate its own message." She also allows Clark to speak in his own expressive vernacular, with its double negatives, deliberate redundancy, signifying wordplay, and colloquially coined ...
Additional Info:
In Teaching Preaching, Katie Cannon, one of Clark's myriad preaching proteges, conceives her role as purely "presentational": "to bring Clark face to face with a reading audience, allow him to explain the formal elements of preaching from the inside out, and let each lecture mediate its own message." She also allows Clark to speak in his own expressive vernacular, with its double negatives, deliberate redundancy, signifying wordplay, and colloquially coined cussedness. While Clark lucidly explicates all the elements of sermon preparation and delivery, he never tires of stressing the development of a "theoethical consciousness": "a transformative vision that focuses on Jesus as the chief cornerstone of the preaching person as well as of the preaching subject." This book will be an invaluable resource for ministers who struggle from Sunday to Sunday to find their ethical voice in the preparation of each and every sermon. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Ch. 1 Taking the Holiness of Preaching Seriously
Ch. 2 Bearing the Cross in This Holy Course
Ch. 3 A - Not The, but A - Theological Definition of Preaching
Ch. 4 A Critique of Contemporary Preaching
Ch. 5 The Sermonic Text
Ch. 6 Creative Textual Selections
Ch. 7 Three Textual Testers
Ch. 8 Sermonic Title, Introduction, and Proposition
Ch. 9 Definition, Elaboration, and Exemplification of the Sermonic Body
Ch. 10 Sermonic Clarification
Ch. 11 Justification
Ch. 12 Transitions
Ch. 13 Substance and Form in Proclaiming a Relevant Gospel
Ch. 14 Procedures in the Conclusion of the Sermon
Ch. 15 Anatomy of the Idea
Ch. 16 Four Bitter Pills for Black Revolutionary Religion
In Teaching Preaching, Katie Cannon, one of Clark's myriad preaching proteges, conceives her role as purely "presentational": "to bring Clark face to face with a reading audience, allow him to explain the formal elements of preaching from the inside out, and let each lecture mediate its own message." She also allows Clark to speak in his own expressive vernacular, with its double negatives, deliberate redundancy, signifying wordplay, and colloquially coined cussedness. While Clark lucidly explicates all the elements of sermon preparation and delivery, he never tires of stressing the development of a "theoethical consciousness": "a transformative vision that focuses on Jesus as the chief cornerstone of the preaching person as well as of the preaching subject." This book will be an invaluable resource for ministers who struggle from Sunday to Sunday to find their ethical voice in the preparation of each and every sermon. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Ch. 1 Taking the Holiness of Preaching Seriously
Ch. 2 Bearing the Cross in This Holy Course
Ch. 3 A - Not The, but A - Theological Definition of Preaching
Ch. 4 A Critique of Contemporary Preaching
Ch. 5 The Sermonic Text
Ch. 6 Creative Textual Selections
Ch. 7 Three Textual Testers
Ch. 8 Sermonic Title, Introduction, and Proposition
Ch. 9 Definition, Elaboration, and Exemplification of the Sermonic Body
Ch. 10 Sermonic Clarification
Ch. 11 Justification
Ch. 12 Transitions
Ch. 13 Substance and Form in Proclaiming a Relevant Gospel
Ch. 14 Procedures in the Conclusion of the Sermon
Ch. 15 Anatomy of the Idea
Ch. 16 Four Bitter Pills for Black Revolutionary Religion
Additional Info:
In their fascinating study of this generation, Millennials Go To College, Howe & Strauss examine how these ‘kids' will re-shape our world, and it's an optimistic new world if their prediction holds true. Despite the facts that Millennials have not experienced many of the events that we older folks have, they are a determined bunch and, if they're successful, will re-energize much of our roller-coaster economy. (From the Publisher)
In their fascinating study of this generation, Millennials Go To College, Howe & Strauss examine how these ‘kids' will re-shape our world, and it's an optimistic new world if their prediction holds true. Despite the facts that Millennials have not experienced many of the events that we older folks have, they are a determined bunch and, if they're successful, will re-energize much of our roller-coaster economy. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In their fascinating study of this generation, Millennials Go To College, Howe & Strauss examine how these ‘kids' will re-shape our world, and it's an optimistic new world if their prediction holds true. Despite the facts that Millennials have not experienced many of the events that we older folks have, they are a determined bunch and, if they're successful, will re-energize much of our roller-coaster economy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 A new generation goes to college
ch. 2 Meet the millennials
ch. 3 Life before college
ch. 4 Millennials by the numbers
ch. 5 Seven core traits
Special
Sheltered
Confident
Team-oriented
Conventional
Pressured
Achieving
ch. 6 Graduation and beyond
ch. 7 The next great collegiate generation
In their fascinating study of this generation, Millennials Go To College, Howe & Strauss examine how these ‘kids' will re-shape our world, and it's an optimistic new world if their prediction holds true. Despite the facts that Millennials have not experienced many of the events that we older folks have, they are a determined bunch and, if they're successful, will re-energize much of our roller-coaster economy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 A new generation goes to college
ch. 2 Meet the millennials
ch. 3 Life before college
ch. 4 Millennials by the numbers
ch. 5 Seven core traits
Special
Sheltered
Confident
Team-oriented
Conventional
Pressured
Achieving
ch. 6 Graduation and beyond
ch. 7 The next great collegiate generation

A Post-Modern Perspective on Curriculum
Additional Info:
Doll offers a post-modernist, process-oriented vision of teaching and curriculum built from the base of a constructivist and experiential epistemology where we engage ourselves in a conversation with each other in the context of our collective history and seek meaning through alternative interpretations and transformations. In this book he ably demonstrates the power of historical reflection to illuminate our present position on the cusp of change, and he provides a ...
Doll offers a post-modernist, process-oriented vision of teaching and curriculum built from the base of a constructivist and experiential epistemology where we engage ourselves in a conversation with each other in the context of our collective history and seek meaning through alternative interpretations and transformations. In this book he ably demonstrates the power of historical reflection to illuminate our present position on the cusp of change, and he provides a ...
Additional Info:
Doll offers a post-modernist, process-oriented vision of teaching and curriculum built from the base of a constructivist and experiential epistemology where we engage ourselves in a conversation with each other in the context of our collective history and seek meaning through alternative interpretations and transformations. In this book he ably demonstrates the power of historical reflection to illuminate our present position on the cusp of change, and he provides a powerful vision of what might be. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Introduction
Part I The Modern Paradigm: A Closed Vision
ch. 1 Descartes' and Newton's World Views
Pre-Modern Order
Descartes' Method
Newton's Stable Universe
ch. 2 Curriculum Carryovers
America and Technology
The Scientific Curriculum
The Tyler Rationale
Part II The Post-Modern Paradigm: An Open Vision
ch. 3 Piaget and Living Systems
The Biological World-View
Evolution and Entropy - Problems and Promises
Piaget's Equilibrium Model
ch. 4 Prigogine and Chaotic Order
Concepts of Chaos
Ilya Prigogine, Self-Organization, and Dissipative Structures
ch. 5 The Cognitive Revolution, Bruner, and a New Epistemology
Concepts of Cognition
Bruner
A New Epistemology
ch. 6 Dewey, Whitehead, and Process Thought
Traditions of Permanence, Change, and Interpretation
John Dewey and the Concept of Process
Alfred North Whitehead and the Concept of Process
Process Thought Beyond Dewey and Whitehead
Part III An Educational Vision
ch. 7 Constructing a Curriculum Matrix
Curriculum Concepts
The Four R's - An Alternative to the Tyler Rationale
References
Index
About the Author
Doll offers a post-modernist, process-oriented vision of teaching and curriculum built from the base of a constructivist and experiential epistemology where we engage ourselves in a conversation with each other in the context of our collective history and seek meaning through alternative interpretations and transformations. In this book he ably demonstrates the power of historical reflection to illuminate our present position on the cusp of change, and he provides a powerful vision of what might be. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Introduction
Part I The Modern Paradigm: A Closed Vision
ch. 1 Descartes' and Newton's World Views
Pre-Modern Order
Descartes' Method
Newton's Stable Universe
ch. 2 Curriculum Carryovers
America and Technology
The Scientific Curriculum
The Tyler Rationale
Part II The Post-Modern Paradigm: An Open Vision
ch. 3 Piaget and Living Systems
The Biological World-View
Evolution and Entropy - Problems and Promises
Piaget's Equilibrium Model
ch. 4 Prigogine and Chaotic Order
Concepts of Chaos
Ilya Prigogine, Self-Organization, and Dissipative Structures
ch. 5 The Cognitive Revolution, Bruner, and a New Epistemology
Concepts of Cognition
Bruner
A New Epistemology
ch. 6 Dewey, Whitehead, and Process Thought
Traditions of Permanence, Change, and Interpretation
John Dewey and the Concept of Process
Alfred North Whitehead and the Concept of Process
Process Thought Beyond Dewey and Whitehead
Part III An Educational Vision
ch. 7 Constructing a Curriculum Matrix
Curriculum Concepts
The Four R's - An Alternative to the Tyler Rationale
References
Index
About the Author

Handbook for Academic Authors, Fourth edition
Additional Info:
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Preface
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the Third Edition
Preface to the Fourth Edition
ch. 1 The Publishing Partnership
ch. 2 Journal Articles
ch. 3 Revising a Dissertation
ch. 4 Finding a Publisher for the Scholarly Book
ch. 5 Working with Your Publisher
ch. 6 Multiauthor Books and Anthologies
ch. 7 Finding a Publisher for the College Textbook
ch. 8 Working with Your Textbook Publisher
ch. 9 Books for General Readers
ch. 10 The Mechanics of Authorship
ch. 11 Costs and Prices
ch. 12 Electronic Publishing
Bibliography
Index
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Preface
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the Third Edition
Preface to the Fourth Edition
ch. 1 The Publishing Partnership
ch. 2 Journal Articles
ch. 3 Revising a Dissertation
ch. 4 Finding a Publisher for the Scholarly Book
ch. 5 Working with Your Publisher
ch. 6 Multiauthor Books and Anthologies
ch. 7 Finding a Publisher for the College Textbook
ch. 8 Working with Your Textbook Publisher
ch. 9 Books for General Readers
ch. 10 The Mechanics of Authorship
ch. 11 Costs and Prices
ch. 12 Electronic Publishing
Bibliography
Index

The Foreign Self: Truth Telling as Educational Inquiry
Additional Info:
Unidentified contributors, but perhaps foreign language teachers, explain how situating oneself outside of a familiar context can lead to self-examination, which is itself the basis of education. Cross-cultural educators and language teachers are the intended audience for this semiotic, intercultural exploration of the idea of self. (From the Publisher)
Unidentified contributors, but perhaps foreign language teachers, explain how situating oneself outside of a familiar context can lead to self-examination, which is itself the basis of education. Cross-cultural educators and language teachers are the intended audience for this semiotic, intercultural exploration of the idea of self. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Unidentified contributors, but perhaps foreign language teachers, explain how situating oneself outside of a familiar context can lead to self-examination, which is itself the basis of education. Cross-cultural educators and language teachers are the intended audience for this semiotic, intercultural exploration of the idea of self. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Gloria Ladson-Billings)
Introduction (François V. Tochon)
ch. 1 Blending Oil into Water: Making the Invisible Visible and Giving a Voice to the Silenced (Jung Euen Choi)
ch. 2 Hail to the Email: Tales about Foreign Language Education in a Globalized Age (Sabine Raizler and Gloria Carter)
ch. 3 Minority Languages in the Classroom: Promise becomes Possibility (Elizabeth R. Miller)
ch. 4 Practicum Students' Confessions on Truth-telling in Reflections: Kurosawa’s Dreams (Mary K. Thompson-Cooper)
ch. 5 Finding the Truth in Our Inclusive Community (Amy Krauthamer-Maloney)
ch. 6 Between Black-and-White and Blue-White-Red: Pictorial Illustrations and Color in the Foreign Language Textbook (Hyo-Kyung Ahn)
ch. 7 The Truth about Grooms (or, How to Tell Those Tuxedoed Men Apart) (Marcus B. Weaver-Hightower)
ch. 8 Families of the Soul: The Truth on Method (François V. Tochon)
Bibliography
Unidentified contributors, but perhaps foreign language teachers, explain how situating oneself outside of a familiar context can lead to self-examination, which is itself the basis of education. Cross-cultural educators and language teachers are the intended audience for this semiotic, intercultural exploration of the idea of self. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Gloria Ladson-Billings)
Introduction (François V. Tochon)
ch. 1 Blending Oil into Water: Making the Invisible Visible and Giving a Voice to the Silenced (Jung Euen Choi)
ch. 2 Hail to the Email: Tales about Foreign Language Education in a Globalized Age (Sabine Raizler and Gloria Carter)
ch. 3 Minority Languages in the Classroom: Promise becomes Possibility (Elizabeth R. Miller)
ch. 4 Practicum Students' Confessions on Truth-telling in Reflections: Kurosawa’s Dreams (Mary K. Thompson-Cooper)
ch. 5 Finding the Truth in Our Inclusive Community (Amy Krauthamer-Maloney)
ch. 6 Between Black-and-White and Blue-White-Red: Pictorial Illustrations and Color in the Foreign Language Textbook (Hyo-Kyung Ahn)
ch. 7 The Truth about Grooms (or, How to Tell Those Tuxedoed Men Apart) (Marcus B. Weaver-Hightower)
ch. 8 Families of the Soul: The Truth on Method (François V. Tochon)
Bibliography

Religious Studies, Theology, and the University: Conflicting Maps, Changing Terrain
Additional Info:
This collection explores the highly contested relationship of religious studies and theology and the place of each, if any, in secular institutions of higher education. The founding narrative of religious studies, with its sharp distinction between teaching religion and teaching about religion, grows less compelling in the face of globalization and the erosion of modernism. These essays take up the challenge of thinking through the identity and borders of religious ...
This collection explores the highly contested relationship of religious studies and theology and the place of each, if any, in secular institutions of higher education. The founding narrative of religious studies, with its sharp distinction between teaching religion and teaching about religion, grows less compelling in the face of globalization and the erosion of modernism. These essays take up the challenge of thinking through the identity and borders of religious ...
Additional Info:
This collection explores the highly contested relationship of religious studies and theology and the place of each, if any, in secular institutions of higher education. The founding narrative of religious studies, with its sharp distinction between teaching religion and teaching about religion, grows less compelling in the face of globalization and the erosion of modernism. These essays take up the challenge of thinking through the identity and borders of religious studies and theology for our time. Reflecting a broad range of positions, the authors explore the religious/secular conceptual landscape that has dominated the modern West, and in the process address the revision of the academic study of religion and theology now underway. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction (Linell E. Cady and Delwin Brown)
ch. 2 The Study of Religion as an Anthropology of Credibility (Russell T. McCutcheon)
ch. 3 Why "Theology" Won't Work (Ivan Strenski)
ch. 4 Our Subject "Over There?" Scrutinizing the Distance Between Religion and Its Study (Christopher Chesnek)
ch. 5 Other People's Theologies: The New Hubris of History of Religions (Richard C. Martin)
ch. 6 Embodied Theology (Sam Gill)
ch. 7 From Theology to theology: The Place of "God-Talk" in Religious Studies (William D. Hart)
ch. 8 Territorial Disputes: Religious Studies and Theology in Transition (Linell E. Cady)
ch. 9 Academic Theology in the University or Why an Ex-Queen's Heir Should Be Made a Subject (Delwin Brown)
ch. 10 Rethinking Theology and Religious Studies(Sheila Greeve Davaney)
ch. 11 Religious Studies and the Alienation of Theology (Darrell J. Fasching)
ch. 12 The Place of Academic Theology in the Study of Religion from the Perspective of Liberal Education (Paula M. Cooey)
ch. 13 The Epistemic Publicity of Academic Black Theology (Frederick L. Ware)
ch. 14 Theology and Cultural Contest in the University (Kathryn Tanner)
Bibliography
Contributors
Index
This collection explores the highly contested relationship of religious studies and theology and the place of each, if any, in secular institutions of higher education. The founding narrative of religious studies, with its sharp distinction between teaching religion and teaching about religion, grows less compelling in the face of globalization and the erosion of modernism. These essays take up the challenge of thinking through the identity and borders of religious studies and theology for our time. Reflecting a broad range of positions, the authors explore the religious/secular conceptual landscape that has dominated the modern West, and in the process address the revision of the academic study of religion and theology now underway. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction (Linell E. Cady and Delwin Brown)
ch. 2 The Study of Religion as an Anthropology of Credibility (Russell T. McCutcheon)
ch. 3 Why "Theology" Won't Work (Ivan Strenski)
ch. 4 Our Subject "Over There?" Scrutinizing the Distance Between Religion and Its Study (Christopher Chesnek)
ch. 5 Other People's Theologies: The New Hubris of History of Religions (Richard C. Martin)
ch. 6 Embodied Theology (Sam Gill)
ch. 7 From Theology to theology: The Place of "God-Talk" in Religious Studies (William D. Hart)
ch. 8 Territorial Disputes: Religious Studies and Theology in Transition (Linell E. Cady)
ch. 9 Academic Theology in the University or Why an Ex-Queen's Heir Should Be Made a Subject (Delwin Brown)
ch. 10 Rethinking Theology and Religious Studies(Sheila Greeve Davaney)
ch. 11 Religious Studies and the Alienation of Theology (Darrell J. Fasching)
ch. 12 The Place of Academic Theology in the Study of Religion from the Perspective of Liberal Education (Paula M. Cooey)
ch. 13 The Epistemic Publicity of Academic Black Theology (Frederick L. Ware)
ch. 14 Theology and Cultural Contest in the University (Kathryn Tanner)
Bibliography
Contributors
Index

Interdisciplinary Studies Today
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is a practical compendium of advice and information on the development, administration, and assessment of interdisciplinary studies programs and schools. A bibliographic orientation to hands-on access, including electronic retrieval of information, precedes chapters reviewing the design of interdisciplinary courses, and how the role of administrators in interdisciplinary programs can further institutitonal goals. The final chapter looks beyond the local campus to ...
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is a practical compendium of advice and information on the development, administration, and assessment of interdisciplinary studies programs and schools. A bibliographic orientation to hands-on access, including electronic retrieval of information, precedes chapters reviewing the design of interdisciplinary courses, and how the role of administrators in interdisciplinary programs can further institutitonal goals. The final chapter looks beyond the local campus to ...
Additional Info:
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is a practical compendium of advice and information on the development, administration, and assessment of interdisciplinary studies programs and schools. A bibliographic orientation to hands-on access, including electronic retrieval of information, precedes chapters reviewing the design of interdisciplinary courses, and how the role of administrators in interdisciplinary programs can further institutitonal goals. The final chapter looks beyond the local campus to national and international support networks. The contributors, who share their extensive experience in the teaching and administration of interdisciplinary studies, provide many examples of good (and bad) praxis. This is the 58th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Finding Interdisciplinary Knowledge and Information (Julie Thompson Klein)
ch. 2 Designing Interdisciplinary Courses (William H. Newell)
ch. 3 The Administration and Governance of Interdisciplinary Programs (Beth A. Casey)
ch. 4 Assessing Interdisciplinary Learning (Michael Field, Russell Lee, Mary Lee Field)
ch. 5 Organizational Networking: Taking the Next Step (Nelson E. Bingham)
Index
This volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is a practical compendium of advice and information on the development, administration, and assessment of interdisciplinary studies programs and schools. A bibliographic orientation to hands-on access, including electronic retrieval of information, precedes chapters reviewing the design of interdisciplinary courses, and how the role of administrators in interdisciplinary programs can further institutitonal goals. The final chapter looks beyond the local campus to national and international support networks. The contributors, who share their extensive experience in the teaching and administration of interdisciplinary studies, provide many examples of good (and bad) praxis. This is the 58th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Finding Interdisciplinary Knowledge and Information (Julie Thompson Klein)
ch. 2 Designing Interdisciplinary Courses (William H. Newell)
ch. 3 The Administration and Governance of Interdisciplinary Programs (Beth A. Casey)
ch. 4 Assessing Interdisciplinary Learning (Michael Field, Russell Lee, Mary Lee Field)
ch. 5 Organizational Networking: Taking the Next Step (Nelson E. Bingham)
Index

Religion in Public Life: A Dilemma for Democracy
Additional Info:
Prayer in public schools, abortion, gay and lesbian rights - these bitterly divisive issues dominate American politics today, revealing deep disagreements over basic moral values. In a highly readable account that draws on legal arguments, political theory, and philosophy, Ronald F. Thiemann explores the proper role of religious convictions in American public life. He proposes that religion can and should play an active, positive part in our society even as ...
Prayer in public schools, abortion, gay and lesbian rights - these bitterly divisive issues dominate American politics today, revealing deep disagreements over basic moral values. In a highly readable account that draws on legal arguments, political theory, and philosophy, Ronald F. Thiemann explores the proper role of religious convictions in American public life. He proposes that religion can and should play an active, positive part in our society even as ...
Additional Info:
Prayer in public schools, abortion, gay and lesbian rights - these bitterly divisive issues dominate American politics today, revealing deep disagreements over basic moral values. In a highly readable account that draws on legal arguments, political theory, and philosophy, Ronald F. Thiemann explores the proper role of religious convictions in American public life. He proposes that religion can and should play an active, positive part in our society even as it maintains a fundamental commitment to pluralist, democratic values. Arguing that both increased secularism and growing religious diversity since the 1960s have fragmented commonly held values, Thiemann observes that there has been an historical ambivalence in American attitudes towards religion in public life. He proposes abandoning the idea of an absolute wall between church and state and all the conceptual framework built around that concept in interpreting the First Amendment. He returns instead to James Madison's views and the Constitutional principles of liberty, equality, and toleration. Refuting both political liberalism (as too secular) and communitarianism (as failing to meet the challenge of pluralism), Thiemann offers a new definition of liberalism that gives religions a voice in the public sphere as long as they heed the Constitutional principles of liberty, equality, and toleration or mutual respect. The American republic, Thiemann notes, is a constantly evolving experiment in constructing a pluralistic society from its many particular communities. Religion can act as a positive force in its moral renewal, by helping to shape common cultural values. All those interested in finding solutions to today's divisive political discord, in finding ways to disagree civilly in a democracy, and in exploring the extent to which religious convictions should shape the development of public policies will find that this book offers an important new direction for religion and the nation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 Religion in Public Life: An American Dilemma
ch. 2 Our Contemporary Dilemma In Historical Perspective: Religion, Values, and the Framing of the Constitution
ch. 3 The Constitutional Tradition: A Perplexing Legacy
ch. 4 Political Liberalism and Public Religion
ch. 5 Political Liberalism Revisioned
ch. 6 Public Religion in a Pluralistic Democracy: A Proposal
ch. 7 Beyond the Wall of Separation: Reconceiving American Public Life
Index
Prayer in public schools, abortion, gay and lesbian rights - these bitterly divisive issues dominate American politics today, revealing deep disagreements over basic moral values. In a highly readable account that draws on legal arguments, political theory, and philosophy, Ronald F. Thiemann explores the proper role of religious convictions in American public life. He proposes that religion can and should play an active, positive part in our society even as it maintains a fundamental commitment to pluralist, democratic values. Arguing that both increased secularism and growing religious diversity since the 1960s have fragmented commonly held values, Thiemann observes that there has been an historical ambivalence in American attitudes towards religion in public life. He proposes abandoning the idea of an absolute wall between church and state and all the conceptual framework built around that concept in interpreting the First Amendment. He returns instead to James Madison's views and the Constitutional principles of liberty, equality, and toleration. Refuting both political liberalism (as too secular) and communitarianism (as failing to meet the challenge of pluralism), Thiemann offers a new definition of liberalism that gives religions a voice in the public sphere as long as they heed the Constitutional principles of liberty, equality, and toleration or mutual respect. The American republic, Thiemann notes, is a constantly evolving experiment in constructing a pluralistic society from its many particular communities. Religion can act as a positive force in its moral renewal, by helping to shape common cultural values. All those interested in finding solutions to today's divisive political discord, in finding ways to disagree civilly in a democracy, and in exploring the extent to which religious convictions should shape the development of public policies will find that this book offers an important new direction for religion and the nation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 Religion in Public Life: An American Dilemma
ch. 2 Our Contemporary Dilemma In Historical Perspective: Religion, Values, and the Framing of the Constitution
ch. 3 The Constitutional Tradition: A Perplexing Legacy
ch. 4 Political Liberalism and Public Religion
ch. 5 Political Liberalism Revisioned
ch. 6 Public Religion in a Pluralistic Democracy: A Proposal
ch. 7 Beyond the Wall of Separation: Reconceiving American Public Life
Index
Additional Info:
This book goes beyond the "how-to's" of teaching to offer a pedagogy founded in spirituality, providing teachers with the elements necessary to create a truly multicultural classroom. (From the Publisher)
This book goes beyond the "how-to's" of teaching to offer a pedagogy founded in spirituality, providing teachers with the elements necessary to create a truly multicultural classroom. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book goes beyond the "how-to's" of teaching to offer a pedagogy founded in spirituality, providing teachers with the elements necessary to create a truly multicultural classroom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Teaching in a Diverse World
ch. 1 Perceptive Attentiveness: Forming Critical Minds and Discerning Hearts
ch. 2 Listening and Understanding
ch. 3 Seeing Clearly
ch. 4 Acting Differently
ch. 5 Staying Faithful
Conclusion: Critical Minds, Discerning Hearts, and the Hospitable Classroom Notes
This book goes beyond the "how-to's" of teaching to offer a pedagogy founded in spirituality, providing teachers with the elements necessary to create a truly multicultural classroom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Teaching in a Diverse World
ch. 1 Perceptive Attentiveness: Forming Critical Minds and Discerning Hearts
ch. 2 Listening and Understanding
ch. 3 Seeing Clearly
ch. 4 Acting Differently
ch. 5 Staying Faithful
Conclusion: Critical Minds, Discerning Hearts, and the Hospitable Classroom Notes

Teaching Cross-Culturally: An Incarnation Model for Learning and Teaching
Additional Info:
How can Christian educators teach effectively in different cultures? Here are winning principles drawn from educational theory and personal experience. How can Christian educators teach effectively within a culture not their own? In what sense is teaching part of the Great Commission? These questions are being asked more and more often in our increasingly global community. In the opening chapter of Teaching Cross-Culturally, Judith Lingenfelter recounts two contrasting teaching experiences ...
How can Christian educators teach effectively in different cultures? Here are winning principles drawn from educational theory and personal experience. How can Christian educators teach effectively within a culture not their own? In what sense is teaching part of the Great Commission? These questions are being asked more and more often in our increasingly global community. In the opening chapter of Teaching Cross-Culturally, Judith Lingenfelter recounts two contrasting teaching experiences ...
Additional Info:
How can Christian educators teach effectively in different cultures? Here are winning principles drawn from educational theory and personal experience. How can Christian educators teach effectively within a culture not their own? In what sense is teaching part of the Great Commission? These questions are being asked more and more often in our increasingly global community. In the opening chapter of Teaching Cross-Culturally, Judith Lingenfelter recounts two contrasting teaching experiences she had early in her career.
First, she taught junior high students in a rough urban setting near Pittsburgh. Next, she taught elementary students at a school on the small island of Yap in the western Pacific. Both experiences, she discovered, were examples of cross-cultural teaching. Teaching Cross-Culturally is designed to complement Sherwood Lingenfelter's highly successful Ministering Cross-Culturally. It takes similar insights and applies them specifically to an educational setting. It also guides readers with little understanding of cross-cultural challenges in ministry and helps them see how cultural sensitivity and effective teaching are inseparably linked. Chapters include discussions about how to uncover cultural biases, how to address intelligence and learning styles, and teaching for biblical transformation. Teaching Cross-Culturally is ideal for the western-trained educator who plans to work in a non-western setting. Missionaries, "tentmakers, " and those who teach in an increasingly multicultural North America will find this book helpful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Teaching Cross-Culturally
The Hidden Curriculum
Understanding Traditional Learning Strategies
Formal Schooling and Traditional Learning
Intelligence and Learning Styles
The Role of the Teacher
Teaching for Change
False Expectations
Learning to Teach Cross-Culturally
References
Index
How can Christian educators teach effectively in different cultures? Here are winning principles drawn from educational theory and personal experience. How can Christian educators teach effectively within a culture not their own? In what sense is teaching part of the Great Commission? These questions are being asked more and more often in our increasingly global community. In the opening chapter of Teaching Cross-Culturally, Judith Lingenfelter recounts two contrasting teaching experiences she had early in her career.
First, she taught junior high students in a rough urban setting near Pittsburgh. Next, she taught elementary students at a school on the small island of Yap in the western Pacific. Both experiences, she discovered, were examples of cross-cultural teaching. Teaching Cross-Culturally is designed to complement Sherwood Lingenfelter's highly successful Ministering Cross-Culturally. It takes similar insights and applies them specifically to an educational setting. It also guides readers with little understanding of cross-cultural challenges in ministry and helps them see how cultural sensitivity and effective teaching are inseparably linked. Chapters include discussions about how to uncover cultural biases, how to address intelligence and learning styles, and teaching for biblical transformation. Teaching Cross-Culturally is ideal for the western-trained educator who plans to work in a non-western setting. Missionaries, "tentmakers, " and those who teach in an increasingly multicultural North America will find this book helpful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Teaching Cross-Culturally
The Hidden Curriculum
Understanding Traditional Learning Strategies
Formal Schooling and Traditional Learning
Intelligence and Learning Styles
The Role of the Teacher
Teaching for Change
False Expectations
Learning to Teach Cross-Culturally
References
Index

A Classroom of One: How Online Learning is Changing Our Schools and Colleges
Additional Info:
This is Gene Maeroff's "report from the front" on the short history and status of online learning in the United States and around the world. Maeroff is a reporter who takes you to the schools from Penn State's World Campus to the Florida Virtual School to the newly emerging online learning initiatives in Afghanistan. His journey ultimately provides a snapshot of the way in which technology is changing the minds ...
This is Gene Maeroff's "report from the front" on the short history and status of online learning in the United States and around the world. Maeroff is a reporter who takes you to the schools from Penn State's World Campus to the Florida Virtual School to the newly emerging online learning initiatives in Afghanistan. His journey ultimately provides a snapshot of the way in which technology is changing the minds ...
Additional Info:
This is Gene Maeroff's "report from the front" on the short history and status of online learning in the United States and around the world. Maeroff is a reporter who takes you to the schools from Penn State's World Campus to the Florida Virtual School to the newly emerging online learning initiatives in Afghanistan. His journey ultimately provides a snapshot of the way in which technology is changing the minds of people with regard to the nature of higher education. He looks at the method of electronic delivery, the quality of the information being delivered and quality of interaction it engenders. He looks at the way learners are adapting to this new technology and how much responsibility is put on the student's shoulders. Finally, and maybe tellingly, he looks at the business of online learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 An Invitation to a Revolution
ch. 2 Delivering the Goods
ch. 3 The Nature of Interaction
ch. 4 Facilitating the Conversation
ch. 5 Adapting to the New
ch. 6 Responsibility for Learning
ch. 7 The Business of Online Education
ch. 8 Focusing E-Learning on Careers
ch. 9 But Is It Legitimate?
ch. 10 Controlling the Process
ch. 11 In School, on Campus
ch. 12 Serving Those Least Served
ch. 13 Redefining the Educational Institution
ch. 14 Online Courses across the Gamut
ch. 15 Educational Purposes in the Cyber Era
Notes
Bibliography
Index
This is Gene Maeroff's "report from the front" on the short history and status of online learning in the United States and around the world. Maeroff is a reporter who takes you to the schools from Penn State's World Campus to the Florida Virtual School to the newly emerging online learning initiatives in Afghanistan. His journey ultimately provides a snapshot of the way in which technology is changing the minds of people with regard to the nature of higher education. He looks at the method of electronic delivery, the quality of the information being delivered and quality of interaction it engenders. He looks at the way learners are adapting to this new technology and how much responsibility is put on the student's shoulders. Finally, and maybe tellingly, he looks at the business of online learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 An Invitation to a Revolution
ch. 2 Delivering the Goods
ch. 3 The Nature of Interaction
ch. 4 Facilitating the Conversation
ch. 5 Adapting to the New
ch. 6 Responsibility for Learning
ch. 7 The Business of Online Education
ch. 8 Focusing E-Learning on Careers
ch. 9 But Is It Legitimate?
ch. 10 Controlling the Process
ch. 11 In School, on Campus
ch. 12 Serving Those Least Served
ch. 13 Redefining the Educational Institution
ch. 14 Online Courses across the Gamut
ch. 15 Educational Purposes in the Cyber Era
Notes
Bibliography
Index

Understanding Self-Regulated Learning
Additional Info:
Self-regulated learning is an important new area of research on college learning and teaching. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is to provide a sampling of some of the central issues regarding self-regulated learning in college courses and classrooms. These issues include the definition of self-regulated learning, how to improve students' self-regulated learning, and how faculty can use the ideas from this research to ...
Self-regulated learning is an important new area of research on college learning and teaching. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is to provide a sampling of some of the central issues regarding self-regulated learning in college courses and classrooms. These issues include the definition of self-regulated learning, how to improve students' self-regulated learning, and how faculty can use the ideas from this research to ...
Additional Info:
Self-regulated learning is an important new area of research on college learning and teaching. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is to provide a sampling of some of the central issues regarding self-regulated learning in college courses and classrooms. These issues include the definition of self-regulated learning, how to improve students' self-regulated learning, and how faculty can use the ideas from this research to improve their own teaching. The chapters in this volume reflect current research and thinking about self-regulated learning for college students. While more research and development is needed on this topic, the authors provide an immediate context for efforts to improve college learning and teaching. This is the 63rd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Disciplinary differences in knowledge validation
What is taught in an undergraduate lecture? Differences between a matched pair of pure and applied disciplines
Disciplinary differences in classroom teaching behaviors
The relationship of disciplinary differences and the value of class preparation time to student ratings of teaching
Disciplinary and institutional differences in undergraduate education goals
Disciplines with an affinity for the improvement of undergraduate education
Discipline-specific pedagogical knowledge in Linguistics and Spanish
Subject-matter differences in secondary schools: Connections to higher education
Disciplinary differences in what is taught and in students' perceptions of what they learn and of how they are taught
Approaches to studying and perceptions of the learning environment across disciplines
Disciplinary differences in students' perceptions of success: Modifying misperceptions with attributional retraining
Concluding remarks: On the meaning of disciplinary differences
Self-regulated learning is an important new area of research on college learning and teaching. The purpose of this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning is to provide a sampling of some of the central issues regarding self-regulated learning in college courses and classrooms. These issues include the definition of self-regulated learning, how to improve students' self-regulated learning, and how faculty can use the ideas from this research to improve their own teaching. The chapters in this volume reflect current research and thinking about self-regulated learning for college students. While more research and development is needed on this topic, the authors provide an immediate context for efforts to improve college learning and teaching. This is the 63rd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Disciplinary differences in knowledge validation
What is taught in an undergraduate lecture? Differences between a matched pair of pure and applied disciplines
Disciplinary differences in classroom teaching behaviors
The relationship of disciplinary differences and the value of class preparation time to student ratings of teaching
Disciplinary and institutional differences in undergraduate education goals
Disciplines with an affinity for the improvement of undergraduate education
Discipline-specific pedagogical knowledge in Linguistics and Spanish
Subject-matter differences in secondary schools: Connections to higher education
Disciplinary differences in what is taught and in students' perceptions of what they learn and of how they are taught
Approaches to studying and perceptions of the learning environment across disciplines
Disciplinary differences in students' perceptions of success: Modifying misperceptions with attributional retraining
Concluding remarks: On the meaning of disciplinary differences

Redesigning Higher Education: Producing Dramatic Gains in Student Learning
Additional Info:
Scrutinizes the theoretical links between critique and prescription. Examines the growing wisdom on student learning, college outcomes, and different options for instruction and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Scrutinizes the theoretical links between critique and prescription. Examines the growing wisdom on student learning, college outcomes, and different options for instruction and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Scrutinizes the theoretical links between critique and prescription. Examines the growing wisdom on student learning, college outcomes, and different options for instruction and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 What is student development and how does it happen?
ch. 2 The curriculum: framework for development
ch. 3 Instruction: teaching, testing, and communicating outcomes
ch. 4 The campus climate: context for development
ch. 5 Academic advising: guiding development
ch. 6 Can today's students learn? Achieving success with high standards for all
ch. 7 Improving quality: the need for a sea change
ch. 8 Producing results: leadership for quality
ch. 9 A call to action: a new kind of community
Scrutinizes the theoretical links between critique and prescription. Examines the growing wisdom on student learning, college outcomes, and different options for instruction and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 What is student development and how does it happen?
ch. 2 The curriculum: framework for development
ch. 3 Instruction: teaching, testing, and communicating outcomes
ch. 4 The campus climate: context for development
ch. 5 Academic advising: guiding development
ch. 6 Can today's students learn? Achieving success with high standards for all
ch. 7 Improving quality: the need for a sea change
ch. 8 Producing results: leadership for quality
ch. 9 A call to action: a new kind of community

Educative Assessment: Designing Assessments to Inform and Improve Student Performance
Additional Info:
In this book, Grant Wiggins outlines design standards for performance-based assessments that promise students - no matter what their ability - clear and worthy performance targets, useful feedback, coaching, and the opportunity to progress toward excellence. Educative Assessment furnishes the information needed to design performance-based assessments, craft performance tasks that meet rigorous educational standards, score assessments fairly, and structure and judge student portfolios. It also shows how performance assessment can ...
In this book, Grant Wiggins outlines design standards for performance-based assessments that promise students - no matter what their ability - clear and worthy performance targets, useful feedback, coaching, and the opportunity to progress toward excellence. Educative Assessment furnishes the information needed to design performance-based assessments, craft performance tasks that meet rigorous educational standards, score assessments fairly, and structure and judge student portfolios. It also shows how performance assessment can ...
Additional Info:
In this book, Grant Wiggins outlines design standards for performance-based assessments that promise students - no matter what their ability - clear and worthy performance targets, useful feedback, coaching, and the opportunity to progress toward excellence. Educative Assessment furnishes the information needed to design performance-based assessments, craft performance tasks that meet rigorous educational standards, score assessments fairly, and structure and judge student portfolios. It also shows how performance assessment can be used to improve curriculum and instruction, grading, and reporting, as well as teacher accountability. In addition, the book includes numerous design templates and flowcharts, strategies for design and troubleshooting, and myriad examples of assessment tasks and scoring rubrics that Wiggins has developed and repeatedly refined using feedback from clients in schools, districts, and state departments of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Educative Assessment: A Vision
ch. 2 Ensuring Authentic Performance
ch. 3 Providing Ongoing Feedback
ch. 4 Promoting Student Understanding
ch. 5 Standards and Criteria
ch. 6 Individual Performance Tasks
ch. 7 Scoring Rubrics
ch. 8 Portfolio as Evidence
ch. 9 Curriculum and Instruction
ch. 10 Grading and Reporting
ch. 11 Teaching and Accountability
ch. 12 Feasibility: Real and Imagined
ch. 13 Next Steps
Notes
Bibliography
Index
In this book, Grant Wiggins outlines design standards for performance-based assessments that promise students - no matter what their ability - clear and worthy performance targets, useful feedback, coaching, and the opportunity to progress toward excellence. Educative Assessment furnishes the information needed to design performance-based assessments, craft performance tasks that meet rigorous educational standards, score assessments fairly, and structure and judge student portfolios. It also shows how performance assessment can be used to improve curriculum and instruction, grading, and reporting, as well as teacher accountability. In addition, the book includes numerous design templates and flowcharts, strategies for design and troubleshooting, and myriad examples of assessment tasks and scoring rubrics that Wiggins has developed and repeatedly refined using feedback from clients in schools, districts, and state departments of education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Educative Assessment: A Vision
ch. 2 Ensuring Authentic Performance
ch. 3 Providing Ongoing Feedback
ch. 4 Promoting Student Understanding
ch. 5 Standards and Criteria
ch. 6 Individual Performance Tasks
ch. 7 Scoring Rubrics
ch. 8 Portfolio as Evidence
ch. 9 Curriculum and Instruction
ch. 10 Grading and Reporting
ch. 11 Teaching and Accountability
ch. 12 Feasibility: Real and Imagined
ch. 13 Next Steps
Notes
Bibliography
Index

The Craft of Research
Additional Info:
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing ...
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing ...
Additional Info:
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing research effectively. Clearly written and easy to use, it teaches the skills that are essential to the success of any research project. Wayne Booth, Gregory Colomb, and Joseph Williams chart every stage of the research process, from finding a topic and generating research questions about it to marshalling evidence, constructing arguments, creating a first draft, and revising that draft for a final report that meets the needs of a community of readers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Thinking in Print: The Uses of Research, Public and Private
ch. 2 Connecting with Your Reader: (Re)Creating Your Self and Your Audience
ch. 3 From Topics to Questions
ch. 4 From Questions to Problems
ch. 5 From Questions to Sources
ch. 6 Using Sources
ch. 7 Making Good Arguments: An Overview
ch. 8 Claims and Evidence
ch. 9 Warrants
ch. 10 Qualifications
ch. 11 Pre-Drafting and Drafting
ch. 12 Communicating Evidence Visually
ch. 13 Revising Your Organization and Argument
ch. 14 Revising Style: Telling Your Story Clearly
ch. 15 Introductions
Index
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing research effectively. Clearly written and easy to use, it teaches the skills that are essential to the success of any research project. Wayne Booth, Gregory Colomb, and Joseph Williams chart every stage of the research process, from finding a topic and generating research questions about it to marshalling evidence, constructing arguments, creating a first draft, and revising that draft for a final report that meets the needs of a community of readers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Thinking in Print: The Uses of Research, Public and Private
ch. 2 Connecting with Your Reader: (Re)Creating Your Self and Your Audience
ch. 3 From Topics to Questions
ch. 4 From Questions to Problems
ch. 5 From Questions to Sources
ch. 6 Using Sources
ch. 7 Making Good Arguments: An Overview
ch. 8 Claims and Evidence
ch. 9 Warrants
ch. 10 Qualifications
ch. 11 Pre-Drafting and Drafting
ch. 12 Communicating Evidence Visually
ch. 13 Revising Your Organization and Argument
ch. 14 Revising Style: Telling Your Story Clearly
ch. 15 Introductions
Index

Power Failure: Christianity in the Culture of Technology
Additional Info:
We live in a culture defined and sustained by technology. Usually we equate this access to technology with opportunity, affluence, even happiness: the good life. Albert Borgmann's Power Failure raises some crucial, if disconcerting, questions: If technology liberates us, exactly what kind of liberation does it promise? Do we really feel free? Are we prospering, and by what definition?
Borgmann looks at the relationship between Christianity and technology ...
We live in a culture defined and sustained by technology. Usually we equate this access to technology with opportunity, affluence, even happiness: the good life. Albert Borgmann's Power Failure raises some crucial, if disconcerting, questions: If technology liberates us, exactly what kind of liberation does it promise? Do we really feel free? Are we prospering, and by what definition?
Borgmann looks at the relationship between Christianity and technology ...
Additional Info:
We live in a culture defined and sustained by technology. Usually we equate this access to technology with opportunity, affluence, even happiness: the good life. Albert Borgmann's Power Failure raises some crucial, if disconcerting, questions: If technology liberates us, exactly what kind of liberation does it promise? Do we really feel free? Are we prospering, and by what definition?
Borgmann looks at the relationship between Christianity and technology by examining some of the invisible dangers of a technology-driven lifestyle. Specifically, he points out how devices and consumption have replaced physical things and practices in everyday life. Power Failure calls us to vigorous Christian practice in a technological age. These practices include citizen-based decision making, communal celebrations, and a vital connection with the table and the word through daily shared meals and the discipline of reading.
Examining the influences that shape people, this unique and insightful text will appeal to anyone interested in technology, philosophy, or cultural critique. Chapters include The Moral Significance of the Material Culture, Contingency and Grace, Power and Care, and The Culture of the Word and the Culture of the Table. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 The Circumstances of the Culture of Technology
ch. 1 The Invisibility of Contemporary Culture
ch. 2 The Moral Significance of Material Culture
ch. 3 Communities of Celebration
Part 2 The Place of Christianity in the Culture of Technology
ch. 4 Contingency and Grace
ch. 5 Power and Care
ch. 6 Liberty, Festivity, and Poverty
ch. 7 Courage and Fortitude
ch. 8 The Culture of the Word and the Culture of the Table
Notes
Index
We live in a culture defined and sustained by technology. Usually we equate this access to technology with opportunity, affluence, even happiness: the good life. Albert Borgmann's Power Failure raises some crucial, if disconcerting, questions: If technology liberates us, exactly what kind of liberation does it promise? Do we really feel free? Are we prospering, and by what definition?
Borgmann looks at the relationship between Christianity and technology by examining some of the invisible dangers of a technology-driven lifestyle. Specifically, he points out how devices and consumption have replaced physical things and practices in everyday life. Power Failure calls us to vigorous Christian practice in a technological age. These practices include citizen-based decision making, communal celebrations, and a vital connection with the table and the word through daily shared meals and the discipline of reading.
Examining the influences that shape people, this unique and insightful text will appeal to anyone interested in technology, philosophy, or cultural critique. Chapters include The Moral Significance of the Material Culture, Contingency and Grace, Power and Care, and The Culture of the Word and the Culture of the Table. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 The Circumstances of the Culture of Technology
ch. 1 The Invisibility of Contemporary Culture
ch. 2 The Moral Significance of Material Culture
ch. 3 Communities of Celebration
Part 2 The Place of Christianity in the Culture of Technology
ch. 4 Contingency and Grace
ch. 5 Power and Care
ch. 6 Liberty, Festivity, and Poverty
ch. 7 Courage and Fortitude
ch. 8 The Culture of the Word and the Culture of the Table
Notes
Index

Developing Adult Learners: Strategies for Teachers and Trainers
Additional Info:
Developing Adult Learners highlights the powerful and compelling voices of teachers and students who have discovered the excitement of growing and changing through learning. It is full of pragmatic advice for faculty members, part-time instructors, workplace educators, leadership trainers, and virtually anyone dedicated to helping adult learners achieve rich and rewarding experiences. (From the Publisher)
Developing Adult Learners highlights the powerful and compelling voices of teachers and students who have discovered the excitement of growing and changing through learning. It is full of pragmatic advice for faculty members, part-time instructors, workplace educators, leadership trainers, and virtually anyone dedicated to helping adult learners achieve rich and rewarding experiences. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Developing Adult Learners highlights the powerful and compelling voices of teachers and students who have discovered the excitement of growing and changing through learning. It is full of pragmatic advice for faculty members, part-time instructors, workplace educators, leadership trainers, and virtually anyone dedicated to helping adult learners achieve rich and rewarding experiences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Concepts and Foundations
Linking Learning with Development.
Key Theories That Inform Practice.
Teaching with Developmental Intentions.
Strategies and Exercises
Assessing.
Collaborating.
Experimenting.
Imagining.
Inquiring.
Performance-Simulating.
Reflecting.
Becoming an Effective Teacher of Adults
Teaching and Training Matters.
Observing Our Practices.
Accepting the Challenges of Growth.
Appendix A. An Experiential Theory of Development.
Appendix B. Constructive-Developmental Theories.
Appendix C. Relational Models of Development and the Ethic of Care.
Appendix D. Orientations to Teaching and Learning.
Appendix E. Typology of Learning.
Developing Adult Learners highlights the powerful and compelling voices of teachers and students who have discovered the excitement of growing and changing through learning. It is full of pragmatic advice for faculty members, part-time instructors, workplace educators, leadership trainers, and virtually anyone dedicated to helping adult learners achieve rich and rewarding experiences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Concepts and Foundations
Linking Learning with Development.
Key Theories That Inform Practice.
Teaching with Developmental Intentions.
Strategies and Exercises
Assessing.
Collaborating.
Experimenting.
Imagining.
Inquiring.
Performance-Simulating.
Reflecting.
Becoming an Effective Teacher of Adults
Teaching and Training Matters.
Observing Our Practices.
Accepting the Challenges of Growth.
Appendix A. An Experiential Theory of Development.
Appendix B. Constructive-Developmental Theories.
Appendix C. Relational Models of Development and the Ethic of Care.
Appendix D. Orientations to Teaching and Learning.
Appendix E. Typology of Learning.
Additional Info:
Learning to think in a discipline is a demanding scholarly task that is not often associated with the development of university students. Although the intellectual development of postsecondary students is gaining increased attention, relating student development to the process of inquiry in different disciplines is unexplored terrain. This book attempts to come to a deeper understanding of thinking processes by exploring the approaches to thinking taken in different disciplines and ...
Learning to think in a discipline is a demanding scholarly task that is not often associated with the development of university students. Although the intellectual development of postsecondary students is gaining increased attention, relating student development to the process of inquiry in different disciplines is unexplored terrain. This book attempts to come to a deeper understanding of thinking processes by exploring the approaches to thinking taken in different disciplines and ...
Additional Info:
Learning to think in a discipline is a demanding scholarly task that is not often associated with the development of university students. Although the intellectual development of postsecondary students is gaining increased attention, relating student development to the process of inquiry in different disciplines is unexplored terrain. This book attempts to come to a deeper understanding of thinking processes by exploring the approaches to thinking taken in different disciplines and then considering how these could be applied to student intellectual development.
Drawing on more than twenty-five years of research, Janet Donald shows how knowledge is structured and how professors and students perceive learning in their fields-and offers strategies for constructing and using knowledge that will help postsecondary institutions to promote students' intellectual development within and across the disciplines. The author first creates a framework for understanding student intellectual development and for learning to think in different disciplines. In succeeding chapters, she describes the principal methods of inquiry in each discipline and their effects on learning to think, examining what this means for students and how we might use it to improve the instructional process.
For faculty members, this book provides insight into the representation and development of curricula, courses, and programs to improve teaching and learning processes. Professors of education may find a specific use for the comparisons across disciplines in planning courses on teaching methods, as an aid in providing students with insight into how disciplines or fields of study are constructed, and in refining their own conceptual framework in their field. Administrators, particularly of programs and departments, will find suggestions for policy initiatives that are needed to create a supportive learning environment and for organizing teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Learning to Think: A Cross-Disciplinary Perspective
ch. 2 Orderly Thinking: Learning in a Structured Discipline
ch. 3 Hard Thinking: Applying Structured Knowledge to Unstructured Problems
ch. 4 Inductive Thinking: Knowledge-Intensive Learning
ch. 5 Multifaceted Thinking: Learning in a Social Science
ch. 6 Precedent and Reason: Case Versus Logic
ch. 7 Organizing Instruction and Understanding Learners
ch. 8 Criticism and Creativity: Thinking in the Humanities
ch. 9 Learning, Understanding, and Meaning
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Learning to think in a discipline is a demanding scholarly task that is not often associated with the development of university students. Although the intellectual development of postsecondary students is gaining increased attention, relating student development to the process of inquiry in different disciplines is unexplored terrain. This book attempts to come to a deeper understanding of thinking processes by exploring the approaches to thinking taken in different disciplines and then considering how these could be applied to student intellectual development.
Drawing on more than twenty-five years of research, Janet Donald shows how knowledge is structured and how professors and students perceive learning in their fields-and offers strategies for constructing and using knowledge that will help postsecondary institutions to promote students' intellectual development within and across the disciplines. The author first creates a framework for understanding student intellectual development and for learning to think in different disciplines. In succeeding chapters, she describes the principal methods of inquiry in each discipline and their effects on learning to think, examining what this means for students and how we might use it to improve the instructional process.
For faculty members, this book provides insight into the representation and development of curricula, courses, and programs to improve teaching and learning processes. Professors of education may find a specific use for the comparisons across disciplines in planning courses on teaching methods, as an aid in providing students with insight into how disciplines or fields of study are constructed, and in refining their own conceptual framework in their field. Administrators, particularly of programs and departments, will find suggestions for policy initiatives that are needed to create a supportive learning environment and for organizing teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Learning to Think: A Cross-Disciplinary Perspective
ch. 2 Orderly Thinking: Learning in a Structured Discipline
ch. 3 Hard Thinking: Applying Structured Knowledge to Unstructured Problems
ch. 4 Inductive Thinking: Knowledge-Intensive Learning
ch. 5 Multifaceted Thinking: Learning in a Social Science
ch. 6 Precedent and Reason: Case Versus Logic
ch. 7 Organizing Instruction and Understanding Learners
ch. 8 Criticism and Creativity: Thinking in the Humanities
ch. 9 Learning, Understanding, and Meaning
References
Name Index
Subject Index

Beyond Affirmative Action: Reframing the Context of Higher Education
Additional Info:
A century ago, universities were primarily in the business of molding upper-class young men for the professions. The world has changed, and universities have been forced to keep pace by experimenting with affirmative action, curriculum overhauls, part-time degree programs, and the like. But at the core of the modern university establishment is an ingrained academic culture that has operated in the same ways for centuries, contends Robert Ibarra, and in ...
A century ago, universities were primarily in the business of molding upper-class young men for the professions. The world has changed, and universities have been forced to keep pace by experimenting with affirmative action, curriculum overhauls, part-time degree programs, and the like. But at the core of the modern university establishment is an ingrained academic culture that has operated in the same ways for centuries, contends Robert Ibarra, and in ...
Additional Info:
A century ago, universities were primarily in the business of molding upper-class young men for the professions. The world has changed, and universities have been forced to keep pace by experimenting with affirmative action, curriculum overhauls, part-time degree programs, and the like. But at the core of the modern university establishment is an ingrained academic culture that has operated in the same ways for centuries, contends Robert Ibarra, and in Beyond Affirmative Action, he calls for a complete paradigm shift.
Why does academic culture, he asks, emphasize individual achievement over teamwork? Why do so many exams test discrete bits of knowledge rather than understanding of the big picture? Why is tenure awarded for scholarly publications rather than for sharing knowledge in diverse ways with students and a wider community? Why do undergraduates drop out? And why do so many bright graduate students and junior faculty—including many minorities, women, and some majority males—become disenchanted with academia or fail to be accepted and rewarded by the tenured faculty?
Ibarra introduces a theory of "multicontextuality," which proposes that many people learn better when teachers emphasize whole systems of knowledge and that education can create its greatest successes by offering and accepting many approaches to teaching and learning. This revolutionary paradigm also addresses why current thinking about academic systems and organizational culture, affirmative action, and diversity must be revised. Ibarra bases his groundbreaking proposals upon his own synthesis of findings from anthropological, educational, and psychological studies of how people from variouscultures learn, as well as findings from extended interviews he conducted with Latinos and Latinas who pursued graduate degrees and then either became university faculty or chose other careers. From his perspectives as a practicing anthropologist, teacher, researcher, and administrator, Ibarra provides a blueprint for change that will interest:
* Administrators developing campus strategic plans
* Boards, commissions, and agencies making policy for educational institutions
* Students and faculty struggling to find ways that academia can serve multiple constituencies
* Academic and career advisors to students
* Researchers in cognitive psychology, sociology, anthropology, education, and ethnic studies
* Businesses rethinking their organizational cultures and strategies
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Tables
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Pt. I Reframing the Context of Higher Education
ch. 1 Critical Junctures for Change
ch. 2 The Latino Study: Reconceptualizing Culture and Changing the Dynamics of Ethnicity
ch. 3 Multicontextuality: A Hidden Dimension in Higher Education
Pt. II Latinas and Latinos in Graduate Education and Beyond
ch. 4 The Graduate School Experience: Ethnicity in Transformation
ch. 5 "They Really Forget Who They Are": Latinos and Academic Organizational Culture
ch. 6 Latinos and Latinas Encountering the Professoriate
Pt. III The Engagement of Cultural in Academia
ch. 7 Teaching, Testing, and Measuring Intelligence: Uncovering the Evidence That Cultural Context Is Important
ch. 8 Reframing the Cultural Context of the Academy: A New Infrastructure for Teaching, Learning, and Institutional Change
App. 1 Institutions Attended by Interviewees
App. 2 Graduate Enrollment, 1986-1996
App. 3 Latino Faculty Issues
Notes
References
Index
A century ago, universities were primarily in the business of molding upper-class young men for the professions. The world has changed, and universities have been forced to keep pace by experimenting with affirmative action, curriculum overhauls, part-time degree programs, and the like. But at the core of the modern university establishment is an ingrained academic culture that has operated in the same ways for centuries, contends Robert Ibarra, and in Beyond Affirmative Action, he calls for a complete paradigm shift.
Why does academic culture, he asks, emphasize individual achievement over teamwork? Why do so many exams test discrete bits of knowledge rather than understanding of the big picture? Why is tenure awarded for scholarly publications rather than for sharing knowledge in diverse ways with students and a wider community? Why do undergraduates drop out? And why do so many bright graduate students and junior faculty—including many minorities, women, and some majority males—become disenchanted with academia or fail to be accepted and rewarded by the tenured faculty?
Ibarra introduces a theory of "multicontextuality," which proposes that many people learn better when teachers emphasize whole systems of knowledge and that education can create its greatest successes by offering and accepting many approaches to teaching and learning. This revolutionary paradigm also addresses why current thinking about academic systems and organizational culture, affirmative action, and diversity must be revised. Ibarra bases his groundbreaking proposals upon his own synthesis of findings from anthropological, educational, and psychological studies of how people from variouscultures learn, as well as findings from extended interviews he conducted with Latinos and Latinas who pursued graduate degrees and then either became university faculty or chose other careers. From his perspectives as a practicing anthropologist, teacher, researcher, and administrator, Ibarra provides a blueprint for change that will interest:
* Administrators developing campus strategic plans
* Boards, commissions, and agencies making policy for educational institutions
* Students and faculty struggling to find ways that academia can serve multiple constituencies
* Academic and career advisors to students
* Researchers in cognitive psychology, sociology, anthropology, education, and ethnic studies
* Businesses rethinking their organizational cultures and strategies
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Tables
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Pt. I Reframing the Context of Higher Education
ch. 1 Critical Junctures for Change
ch. 2 The Latino Study: Reconceptualizing Culture and Changing the Dynamics of Ethnicity
ch. 3 Multicontextuality: A Hidden Dimension in Higher Education
Pt. II Latinas and Latinos in Graduate Education and Beyond
ch. 4 The Graduate School Experience: Ethnicity in Transformation
ch. 5 "They Really Forget Who They Are": Latinos and Academic Organizational Culture
ch. 6 Latinos and Latinas Encountering the Professoriate
Pt. III The Engagement of Cultural in Academia
ch. 7 Teaching, Testing, and Measuring Intelligence: Uncovering the Evidence That Cultural Context Is Important
ch. 8 Reframing the Cultural Context of the Academy: A New Infrastructure for Teaching, Learning, and Institutional Change
App. 1 Institutions Attended by Interviewees
App. 2 Graduate Enrollment, 1986-1996
App. 3 Latino Faculty Issues
Notes
References
Index
Additional Info:
"When Frank Lears came to teach at Medford High School in the fall of 1969, he looked easy prey to Mark Edmundson and his school-hating pals. At the front of the class, they saw a small, nervous man wearing a moth-eaten suit two sizes too big, with a large paperclip fastened to the left lapel. Lears, just out of Harvard, struck the class as absurd, the kind of teacher they could ...
"When Frank Lears came to teach at Medford High School in the fall of 1969, he looked easy prey to Mark Edmundson and his school-hating pals. At the front of the class, they saw a small, nervous man wearing a moth-eaten suit two sizes too big, with a large paperclip fastened to the left lapel. Lears, just out of Harvard, struck the class as absurd, the kind of teacher they could ...
Additional Info:
"When Frank Lears came to teach at Medford High School in the fall of 1969, he looked easy prey to Mark Edmundson and his school-hating pals. At the front of the class, they saw a small, nervous man wearing a moth-eaten suit two sizes too big, with a large paperclip fastened to the left lapel. Lears, just out of Harvard, struck the class as absurd, the kind of teacher they could torment at will. And for some time, they did just that." "But Edmundson and his classmates radically underestimated Frank Lears. Lears got rid of their tired textbooks and brought in Kesey, Camus, and Freud. He ran a group psychology experiment that no one in the room ever forgot. He opened the class to a panel of SDS members and a crowd of proto-Black Panthers. He risked life and limb in a snowball fight with Edmundson and his football-playing buddies. He shook things up." Lears's opposition to the lockstep life of Medford High got under the skin and into the minds of Mark Edmundson and his friends - friends like Dubby O'Day, a fatalistic goof-off majoring in spitball ballistics. The conflicting ways of life represented by Lears and Medford's formidable football coach, Mace Johnson, confronted Edmundson with a choice. At real cost - the cost of conformity and belonging - Edmundson chose to go Lears's way. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
ch. 1 First Day
ch. 2 Mustangs
ch. 3 Blind Girl
ch. 4 My father, Frank Lears, tv, me
ch. 5 Franklin Lears fights back
ch. 6 Cute
ch. 7 Walrus
ch. 8 SDS comes to call
ch. 9 Black and white
ch. 10 Socrates rocks
"When Frank Lears came to teach at Medford High School in the fall of 1969, he looked easy prey to Mark Edmundson and his school-hating pals. At the front of the class, they saw a small, nervous man wearing a moth-eaten suit two sizes too big, with a large paperclip fastened to the left lapel. Lears, just out of Harvard, struck the class as absurd, the kind of teacher they could torment at will. And for some time, they did just that." "But Edmundson and his classmates radically underestimated Frank Lears. Lears got rid of their tired textbooks and brought in Kesey, Camus, and Freud. He ran a group psychology experiment that no one in the room ever forgot. He opened the class to a panel of SDS members and a crowd of proto-Black Panthers. He risked life and limb in a snowball fight with Edmundson and his football-playing buddies. He shook things up." Lears's opposition to the lockstep life of Medford High got under the skin and into the minds of Mark Edmundson and his friends - friends like Dubby O'Day, a fatalistic goof-off majoring in spitball ballistics. The conflicting ways of life represented by Lears and Medford's formidable football coach, Mace Johnson, confronted Edmundson with a choice. At real cost - the cost of conformity and belonging - Edmundson chose to go Lears's way. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
ch. 1 First Day
ch. 2 Mustangs
ch. 3 Blind Girl
ch. 4 My father, Frank Lears, tv, me
ch. 5 Franklin Lears fights back
ch. 6 Cute
ch. 7 Walrus
ch. 8 SDS comes to call
ch. 9 Black and white
ch. 10 Socrates rocks
Additional Info:
Since its inception in 1969, Change magazine has been the bellwether of higher education. It has framed the key issues confronting the academy, attracted the best minds, and shaped the debate.
In this important collection, Deborah DeZure and a panel of contributing editors have selected landmark articles on teaching and learning in higher education published in Change from its launch to the present.
Through the articles and ...
Since its inception in 1969, Change magazine has been the bellwether of higher education. It has framed the key issues confronting the academy, attracted the best minds, and shaped the debate.
In this important collection, Deborah DeZure and a panel of contributing editors have selected landmark articles on teaching and learning in higher education published in Change from its launch to the present.
Through the articles and ...
Additional Info:
Since its inception in 1969, Change magazine has been the bellwether of higher education. It has framed the key issues confronting the academy, attracted the best minds, and shaped the debate.
In this important collection, Deborah DeZure and a panel of contributing editors have selected landmark articles on teaching and learning in higher education published in Change from its launch to the present.
Through the articles and incisive commentaries we follow the controversies, witness the reception of innovations, and trace the threads of continuity of the past thirty years. What emerges is both an indispensable set of perspectives and a rich resource of models and ideas.
The book spans a period that began in the turmoil of student unrest in the 60's, and concludes at the close of 1999 with higher education grappling with the issues of purpose, accountability, technology and changing demographics.
What is striking about these articles is the vitality and relevance of the voices from the past. They offer valuable insights and inspiration as we plan for the future, and consider how to foster effective teaching and learning environments.
Organized by topic, the articles in each section are introduced by a recognized authority in the field. Deborah DeZure's Introduction and Conclusion offer both the context and an analysis of trends.
Learning from Change constitutes both fascinating reading and an important compass for administrators in higher education, directors of faculty development, and deans, department chairs and faculty engaged in leadership roles in the academy. It is an invaluable introduction and survey for anyone who wants to familiarize him or herself with the issues and trends. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Theodore J. Marchese)
Editor's Acknowledgements
Publisher's Acknowledgements
Introduction (Deborah DeZure)
Promoting a Culture of Teaching and Learning (Pat Hutchings)
Students: Portraits of Students - A Gallery Tour (K. Patricia Cross)
Curriculum (Jerry G. Gaff)
The Origins of Contemporary Learning Communities Residential Colleges, Experimental Colleges and Living-Learning Communities (Zelda F. Gamson)
Work, Service and Community Connections (Alfredo G. de los Santos, Jr.)
Philosophy, Psychology and Methods of Teaching (Wilbert J. McKeachie)
Visiting Across The Disciplines: Change and The National Teaching Project (James Wilkinson)
Science Education Reform: Getting Out The Word (Daniel L. Goroff)
Professional, Graduate and Teacher Education: Criticism and Reform (Joan S. Stark, and Malcolm A. Lowther)
Assessing Student Learning (Barbara D. Wright)
Evaluating Teaching (Peter Seldin)
Teacher Narratives (Diane Gillespie)
Media and Technology, Plus ca change (Kenneth C. Green)
Conclusions
Editor's and Contributing Editor's Biographies
Article Index by Author
Index
Since its inception in 1969, Change magazine has been the bellwether of higher education. It has framed the key issues confronting the academy, attracted the best minds, and shaped the debate.
In this important collection, Deborah DeZure and a panel of contributing editors have selected landmark articles on teaching and learning in higher education published in Change from its launch to the present.
Through the articles and incisive commentaries we follow the controversies, witness the reception of innovations, and trace the threads of continuity of the past thirty years. What emerges is both an indispensable set of perspectives and a rich resource of models and ideas.
The book spans a period that began in the turmoil of student unrest in the 60's, and concludes at the close of 1999 with higher education grappling with the issues of purpose, accountability, technology and changing demographics.
What is striking about these articles is the vitality and relevance of the voices from the past. They offer valuable insights and inspiration as we plan for the future, and consider how to foster effective teaching and learning environments.
Organized by topic, the articles in each section are introduced by a recognized authority in the field. Deborah DeZure's Introduction and Conclusion offer both the context and an analysis of trends.
Learning from Change constitutes both fascinating reading and an important compass for administrators in higher education, directors of faculty development, and deans, department chairs and faculty engaged in leadership roles in the academy. It is an invaluable introduction and survey for anyone who wants to familiarize him or herself with the issues and trends. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Theodore J. Marchese)
Editor's Acknowledgements
Publisher's Acknowledgements
Introduction (Deborah DeZure)
Promoting a Culture of Teaching and Learning (Pat Hutchings)
Students: Portraits of Students - A Gallery Tour (K. Patricia Cross)
Curriculum (Jerry G. Gaff)
The Origins of Contemporary Learning Communities Residential Colleges, Experimental Colleges and Living-Learning Communities (Zelda F. Gamson)
Work, Service and Community Connections (Alfredo G. de los Santos, Jr.)
Philosophy, Psychology and Methods of Teaching (Wilbert J. McKeachie)
Visiting Across The Disciplines: Change and The National Teaching Project (James Wilkinson)
Science Education Reform: Getting Out The Word (Daniel L. Goroff)
Professional, Graduate and Teacher Education: Criticism and Reform (Joan S. Stark, and Malcolm A. Lowther)
Assessing Student Learning (Barbara D. Wright)
Evaluating Teaching (Peter Seldin)
Teacher Narratives (Diane Gillespie)
Media and Technology, Plus ca change (Kenneth C. Green)
Conclusions
Editor's and Contributing Editor's Biographies
Article Index by Author
Index

The Miniature Guide to the Art of Asking Essential Questions
Additional Info:
The quality of our lives is determined by the quality of our thinking. The quality of our thinking, in turn, is determined by the quality of our questions, for questions are the engine, the driving force behind thinking. Without questions, we have nothing to think about. Without essential questions, we often fail to focus our thinking on the significant and substantive. When we ask essential questions, we deal with what ...
The quality of our lives is determined by the quality of our thinking. The quality of our thinking, in turn, is determined by the quality of our questions, for questions are the engine, the driving force behind thinking. Without questions, we have nothing to think about. Without essential questions, we often fail to focus our thinking on the significant and substantive. When we ask essential questions, we deal with what ...
Additional Info:
The quality of our lives is determined by the quality of our thinking. The quality of our thinking, in turn, is determined by the quality of our questions, for questions are the engine, the driving force behind thinking. Without questions, we have nothing to think about. Without essential questions, we often fail to focus our thinking on the significant and substantive. When we ask essential questions, we deal with what is necessary, relevant, and indispensable to a matter at hand. We recognize what is at the heart of the matter. Our thinking is grounded and disciplined. We are ready to learn. We are intellectually able to find our way about. To be successful in life, one needs to ask essential questions: essential questions when reading, writing, and speaking; when shopping, working, and parenting; when forming friendships, choosing life-partners, and interacting with the mass media and the Internet. Yet few people are masters of the art of asking essential questions. Most have never thought about why some questions are crucial and others peripheral. Essential questions are rarely studied in school. They are rarely modeled at home. Most people question according to their psychological associations. Their questions are haphazard and scattered. The ideas we provide are useful only to the extent that they are employed daily to ask essential questions. Practice in asking essential questions eventually leads to the habit of asking essential questions. But we can never practice asking essential questions if we have no conception of them. This mini-guide is a starting place for understanding concepts that, when applied, lead to essential questions. We introduce essential questions as indispensable intellectual tools. We focus on principles essential to formulating, analyzing, assessing, and settling primary questions. You will notice that our categories of question types are not exclusive. There is a great deal of overlap. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: The Power of Essential Questions
Part One: Analytic Questions
ch. 1 Questioning the Structure of Thinking
ch. 2 Asking One System, No System, and Conflicting System Questions
ch. 3 Questioning Dogmatic Absolutism and Subjective Relativism
ch. 4 Question Concepts
ch. 5 Conceptual Tools for Conceptual Questions
ch. 6 Questioning Data, Information, and Experience
ch. 7 Questioning Questions: Identifying Prior Questions
ch. 8 Asking Complex Interdisciplinary Questions
ch. 9 Interdisciplinary Questions: An Example
ch. 10 Questioning in Decision-Making and Problem-Solving
PartTwo: Evaluative Questions
ch. 11 Determining Value, Merit, and Worth
ch. 12 Evaluating Reasoning (Overall)
ch. 13 Evaluating Reasoning (The Parts)
ch. 14 Questioning Clarity and Precision
ch. 15 Questioning As We Read
ch. 16 Questioning As We Write
ch. 17 Asking Ethical Questions
ch. 18 Questioning Bias and Propaganda
Part Three: Questioning Within Academic Disciplines
ch. 19 Questioning the Fundamental Logic of Academic Disciplines
ch. 20 Questioning the Status of Disciplines
ch. 21 Questioning to Understand the Foundations of Academic Disciplines
Essential Questions in Science
Essential Questions in the Social Disciplines
Essential Questions in the Arts
Part Four: Questioning for Self-Knowledge and Self-Development
ch. 22 Questioning Ourselves as Learners
ch. 23 Questioning Our Egocentrism
ch. 24 Questioning Our Sociocentrism
ch. 25 Questioning to Develop Intellectual Dispositions
Conclusion: Questioning Systematically and Socratically
The quality of our lives is determined by the quality of our thinking. The quality of our thinking, in turn, is determined by the quality of our questions, for questions are the engine, the driving force behind thinking. Without questions, we have nothing to think about. Without essential questions, we often fail to focus our thinking on the significant and substantive. When we ask essential questions, we deal with what is necessary, relevant, and indispensable to a matter at hand. We recognize what is at the heart of the matter. Our thinking is grounded and disciplined. We are ready to learn. We are intellectually able to find our way about. To be successful in life, one needs to ask essential questions: essential questions when reading, writing, and speaking; when shopping, working, and parenting; when forming friendships, choosing life-partners, and interacting with the mass media and the Internet. Yet few people are masters of the art of asking essential questions. Most have never thought about why some questions are crucial and others peripheral. Essential questions are rarely studied in school. They are rarely modeled at home. Most people question according to their psychological associations. Their questions are haphazard and scattered. The ideas we provide are useful only to the extent that they are employed daily to ask essential questions. Practice in asking essential questions eventually leads to the habit of asking essential questions. But we can never practice asking essential questions if we have no conception of them. This mini-guide is a starting place for understanding concepts that, when applied, lead to essential questions. We introduce essential questions as indispensable intellectual tools. We focus on principles essential to formulating, analyzing, assessing, and settling primary questions. You will notice that our categories of question types are not exclusive. There is a great deal of overlap. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: The Power of Essential Questions
Part One: Analytic Questions
ch. 1 Questioning the Structure of Thinking
ch. 2 Asking One System, No System, and Conflicting System Questions
ch. 3 Questioning Dogmatic Absolutism and Subjective Relativism
ch. 4 Question Concepts
ch. 5 Conceptual Tools for Conceptual Questions
ch. 6 Questioning Data, Information, and Experience
ch. 7 Questioning Questions: Identifying Prior Questions
ch. 8 Asking Complex Interdisciplinary Questions
ch. 9 Interdisciplinary Questions: An Example
ch. 10 Questioning in Decision-Making and Problem-Solving
PartTwo: Evaluative Questions
ch. 11 Determining Value, Merit, and Worth
ch. 12 Evaluating Reasoning (Overall)
ch. 13 Evaluating Reasoning (The Parts)
ch. 14 Questioning Clarity and Precision
ch. 15 Questioning As We Read
ch. 16 Questioning As We Write
ch. 17 Asking Ethical Questions
ch. 18 Questioning Bias and Propaganda
Part Three: Questioning Within Academic Disciplines
ch. 19 Questioning the Fundamental Logic of Academic Disciplines
ch. 20 Questioning the Status of Disciplines
ch. 21 Questioning to Understand the Foundations of Academic Disciplines
Essential Questions in Science
Essential Questions in the Social Disciplines
Essential Questions in the Arts
Part Four: Questioning for Self-Knowledge and Self-Development
ch. 22 Questioning Ourselves as Learners
ch. 23 Questioning Our Egocentrism
ch. 24 Questioning Our Sociocentrism
ch. 25 Questioning to Develop Intellectual Dispositions
Conclusion: Questioning Systematically and Socratically

Affective Teaching
Additional Info:
In Affective Teaching, Lynne Rompelman extends the research on the affective domain by incorporating students' and teachers' voices regarding the nature of caring of teachers within an academic setting. (From the Publisher)
In Affective Teaching, Lynne Rompelman extends the research on the affective domain by incorporating students' and teachers' voices regarding the nature of caring of teachers within an academic setting. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In Affective Teaching, Lynne Rompelman extends the research on the affective domain by incorporating students' and teachers' voices regarding the nature of caring of teachers within an academic setting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Pt. 1 What Do We Know About the Affective Domain?
ch. 1 Affective Teachers
ch. 2 Affective Instruction
ch. 3 Affective Educational Settings
Pt. II How Do We Emphasize the Affective Domain in Teaching?
ch. 4 The Symbiotic Relationship Between the Cognitive and Affective Domains
ch. 5 An Assessment Tool to Determine Whether You Are an Affective Teacher
In Affective Teaching, Lynne Rompelman extends the research on the affective domain by incorporating students' and teachers' voices regarding the nature of caring of teachers within an academic setting. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Pt. 1 What Do We Know About the Affective Domain?
ch. 1 Affective Teachers
ch. 2 Affective Instruction
ch. 3 Affective Educational Settings
Pt. II How Do We Emphasize the Affective Domain in Teaching?
ch. 4 The Symbiotic Relationship Between the Cognitive and Affective Domains
ch. 5 An Assessment Tool to Determine Whether You Are an Affective Teacher
Additional Info:
Large classes are a fact of life in higher education. With 100 or more students in fixed seating, how does a faculty member structure the class to promote student learning? How does one manage the logistics of such a class? Are there alternatives to the lecture format? Are there actually advantages to the large class? Engaging Large Classes addresses these and many other questions.
Experienced teachers of large classes ...
Large classes are a fact of life in higher education. With 100 or more students in fixed seating, how does a faculty member structure the class to promote student learning? How does one manage the logistics of such a class? Are there alternatives to the lecture format? Are there actually advantages to the large class? Engaging Large Classes addresses these and many other questions.
Experienced teachers of large classes ...
Additional Info:
Large classes are a fact of life in higher education. With 100 or more students in fixed seating, how does a faculty member structure the class to promote student learning? How does one manage the logistics of such a class? Are there alternatives to the lecture format? Are there actually advantages to the large class? Engaging Large Classes addresses these and many other questions.
Experienced teachers of large classes across a wide range of disciplines and institutions offer instructional strategies and advice for both new and experienced faculty members. What many of the contributors have learned is that large classes can be just as stimulating and rewarding as small ones, and that the large size can yield surprisingly positive opportunities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Topic Location Guide
Preface
Part 1 Key Concepts
ch. 1 Course Design for Large Classes: A Learning-Centered ApproachJudith (Grunert O'Brien)
ch. 2 That's Not a Large Class; It's a Small Town: How Do I Manage? (Lynda G. Cleveland)
ch. 3 Planning and Assessing Large Classes (Michael Theall and Raoul A. Arreola)
ch. 4 Promoting Civility in Large Classes (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 5 Engaging Students Actively in Large Lecture Settings (Peter J. Frederick)
ch. 6 Team Learning in Large Classes (Larry K. Michaelsen)
ch. 7 Learning in the Dark: Applying Classroom Technology to Large Lecture Formats (Michael Smilowitz and Anne S. Gabbard-Alley)
ch. 8 Teaching for Inclusion (Mathew L. Ouellett)
ch. 9 Working with Teaching Assistants and Undergraduate Peer Facilitators to Address the Challenges of Teaching Large Classes (Jean Civikly-Powell and Donald H. Wulff)
ch. 10 Maintaining Intimacy : Strategies for the Effective Management of TAs in Innovative Large Classes (Leta F. Deithloff)
ch. 11 Teaching the Large Class: An Administrator's Perspective (J. Douglas Andrews)
ch. 12 Teaching Large Classes: A Brief Review of the Research (Christine A. Stanley and M. Erin Porter)
Part 2 Examples Across the Disciplines.Agriculture
ch. 13 What I Wish I had Known Before I Taught a Large Class (Emily Hoover)
ch. 14 A Management Lesson (Steven Tomlinson)
ch. 15 Eleven Very Basic Tips for Teaching Large Business Classes (Tom Campbell.Clincial Sciences)
ch. 16 Teaching Large Classes in Pharmacy Practice (James McAuley and Marialice Bennett)
ch. 17 Teaching Large Classes in Veterinary Medicine (Laurie A. Jaeger and Deborah Kochevar)
ch. 18 Making Large Classes Small Through Creative Teaching (John R. Hoyle)
ch. 19 A Learning-Focused Approach to a Large-Section Engineering Course(Robert Lundquist)
ch. 20 Getting Students in a Technical Class Involved in the Classroom (Doug Jacobson.English)
ch. 21 Managing Discussion in Large Classes (J. Dennis Huston.Law)
ch. 22 Defying the Norms: Teaching Large Law School Classes in Accordance with Good Pedagogy(Derrick Bell)
ch. 23 Mathematics and the Large Class: Meeting and Mastering the Challenge (Nancy J. Simpson)
ch. 24 Strength in Numbers: Making the Large Chemistry Lecture Class Work (Brian P. Coppola)
ch. 25 What My Students Have Taught Me (Brent L. Iverson)
ch. 26 Large-Class Instruction: Having a Private Conversation in a Crowded Room (James H. Stith)
ch. 27 Personalizing the Large Class in Psychology (Richard P. Halgin and Christopher E. Overtree)
ch. 28 Teaching Social Science to a Small Society (Linda B. Nilson)
ch. 29 Transforming the Horde (Robin Nagle)
Summary of Key Concepts for Teaching Large Classes and M. Erin Porter and Christine A. Stanley
Bibliography
Index
Large classes are a fact of life in higher education. With 100 or more students in fixed seating, how does a faculty member structure the class to promote student learning? How does one manage the logistics of such a class? Are there alternatives to the lecture format? Are there actually advantages to the large class? Engaging Large Classes addresses these and many other questions.
Experienced teachers of large classes across a wide range of disciplines and institutions offer instructional strategies and advice for both new and experienced faculty members. What many of the contributors have learned is that large classes can be just as stimulating and rewarding as small ones, and that the large size can yield surprisingly positive opportunities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Topic Location Guide
Preface
Part 1 Key Concepts
ch. 1 Course Design for Large Classes: A Learning-Centered ApproachJudith (Grunert O'Brien)
ch. 2 That's Not a Large Class; It's a Small Town: How Do I Manage? (Lynda G. Cleveland)
ch. 3 Planning and Assessing Large Classes (Michael Theall and Raoul A. Arreola)
ch. 4 Promoting Civility in Large Classes (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 5 Engaging Students Actively in Large Lecture Settings (Peter J. Frederick)
ch. 6 Team Learning in Large Classes (Larry K. Michaelsen)
ch. 7 Learning in the Dark: Applying Classroom Technology to Large Lecture Formats (Michael Smilowitz and Anne S. Gabbard-Alley)
ch. 8 Teaching for Inclusion (Mathew L. Ouellett)
ch. 9 Working with Teaching Assistants and Undergraduate Peer Facilitators to Address the Challenges of Teaching Large Classes (Jean Civikly-Powell and Donald H. Wulff)
ch. 10 Maintaining Intimacy : Strategies for the Effective Management of TAs in Innovative Large Classes (Leta F. Deithloff)
ch. 11 Teaching the Large Class: An Administrator's Perspective (J. Douglas Andrews)
ch. 12 Teaching Large Classes: A Brief Review of the Research (Christine A. Stanley and M. Erin Porter)
Part 2 Examples Across the Disciplines.Agriculture
ch. 13 What I Wish I had Known Before I Taught a Large Class (Emily Hoover)
ch. 14 A Management Lesson (Steven Tomlinson)
ch. 15 Eleven Very Basic Tips for Teaching Large Business Classes (Tom Campbell.Clincial Sciences)
ch. 16 Teaching Large Classes in Pharmacy Practice (James McAuley and Marialice Bennett)
ch. 17 Teaching Large Classes in Veterinary Medicine (Laurie A. Jaeger and Deborah Kochevar)
ch. 18 Making Large Classes Small Through Creative Teaching (John R. Hoyle)
ch. 19 A Learning-Focused Approach to a Large-Section Engineering Course(Robert Lundquist)
ch. 20 Getting Students in a Technical Class Involved in the Classroom (Doug Jacobson.English)
ch. 21 Managing Discussion in Large Classes (J. Dennis Huston.Law)
ch. 22 Defying the Norms: Teaching Large Law School Classes in Accordance with Good Pedagogy(Derrick Bell)
ch. 23 Mathematics and the Large Class: Meeting and Mastering the Challenge (Nancy J. Simpson)
ch. 24 Strength in Numbers: Making the Large Chemistry Lecture Class Work (Brian P. Coppola)
ch. 25 What My Students Have Taught Me (Brent L. Iverson)
ch. 26 Large-Class Instruction: Having a Private Conversation in a Crowded Room (James H. Stith)
ch. 27 Personalizing the Large Class in Psychology (Richard P. Halgin and Christopher E. Overtree)
ch. 28 Teaching Social Science to a Small Society (Linda B. Nilson)
ch. 29 Transforming the Horde (Robin Nagle)
Summary of Key Concepts for Teaching Large Classes and M. Erin Porter and Christine A. Stanley
Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
Neuroscience tells us that the products of the mind -- thought, emotions, artistic creation -- are the result of the interactions of the biological brain with our senses and the physical world: in short, that thinking and learning are the products of a biological process.
This realization, that learning actually alters the brain by changing the number and strength of synapses, offers a powerful foundation for rethinking teaching ...
Neuroscience tells us that the products of the mind -- thought, emotions, artistic creation -- are the result of the interactions of the biological brain with our senses and the physical world: in short, that thinking and learning are the products of a biological process.
This realization, that learning actually alters the brain by changing the number and strength of synapses, offers a powerful foundation for rethinking teaching ...
Additional Info:
Neuroscience tells us that the products of the mind -- thought, emotions, artistic creation -- are the result of the interactions of the biological brain with our senses and the physical world: in short, that thinking and learning are the products of a biological process.
This realization, that learning actually alters the brain by changing the number and strength of synapses, offers a powerful foundation for rethinking teaching practice and one's philosophy of teaching.
James Zull invites teachers in higher education or any other setting to accompany him in his exploration of what scientists can tell us about the brain and to discover how this knowledge can influence the practice of teaching. He describes the brain in clear non-technical language and an engaging conversational tone, highlighting its functions and parts and how they interact, and always relating them to the real world of the classroom and his own evolution as a teacher.
"The Art of Changing the Brain" is grounded in the practicalities and challenges of creating effective opportunities for deep and lasting learning, and of dealing with students as unique learners. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: A new perspective, some struggles, and a hope
ch. 1 The Sweet Edge: Learning is physical - we can understand!
ch. 2 Where we ought to Be: The natural relationship between brain structure and learning
ch. 3 Holding a Just Balance: Brain connections that change data into knowledge
ch. 4 Our Trade and our Art: Evolution of the brain and motivation of the learner
ch. 5 A Feeling of this Business: In the business of reason and memory, feelings count
ch. 6 What we Already Know: To begin, find out about existing neuron networks
ch. 7 Only Connect!: How teachers can change neuronal networks
ch. 8 Sense Luscious: Using the power of the sensory brain to help people learn
ch. 9 Waiting for Unity: Helping people comprehend their experience
ch. 10 The Courageous Leap: Creating knowledge by using the integrative frontal cortex
ch. 11 Test by Trial: Using the motor brain to close the loop of learning
ch. 12 We did this ourselves: Changing the brain through effective use of emotion
Epilogue
Index
About the Author
Neuroscience tells us that the products of the mind -- thought, emotions, artistic creation -- are the result of the interactions of the biological brain with our senses and the physical world: in short, that thinking and learning are the products of a biological process.
This realization, that learning actually alters the brain by changing the number and strength of synapses, offers a powerful foundation for rethinking teaching practice and one's philosophy of teaching.
James Zull invites teachers in higher education or any other setting to accompany him in his exploration of what scientists can tell us about the brain and to discover how this knowledge can influence the practice of teaching. He describes the brain in clear non-technical language and an engaging conversational tone, highlighting its functions and parts and how they interact, and always relating them to the real world of the classroom and his own evolution as a teacher.
"The Art of Changing the Brain" is grounded in the practicalities and challenges of creating effective opportunities for deep and lasting learning, and of dealing with students as unique learners. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: A new perspective, some struggles, and a hope
ch. 1 The Sweet Edge: Learning is physical - we can understand!
ch. 2 Where we ought to Be: The natural relationship between brain structure and learning
ch. 3 Holding a Just Balance: Brain connections that change data into knowledge
ch. 4 Our Trade and our Art: Evolution of the brain and motivation of the learner
ch. 5 A Feeling of this Business: In the business of reason and memory, feelings count
ch. 6 What we Already Know: To begin, find out about existing neuron networks
ch. 7 Only Connect!: How teachers can change neuronal networks
ch. 8 Sense Luscious: Using the power of the sensory brain to help people learn
ch. 9 Waiting for Unity: Helping people comprehend their experience
ch. 10 The Courageous Leap: Creating knowledge by using the integrative frontal cortex
ch. 11 Test by Trial: Using the motor brain to close the loop of learning
ch. 12 We did this ourselves: Changing the brain through effective use of emotion
Epilogue
Index
About the Author

Team-Based Learning
Additional Info:
Howard Hills' Team-Based Learning shows how the ability to learn lies at the heart of effective working in teams. His book identifies the ingredients that turn good teams into teams that improve. (From the Publisher)
Howard Hills' Team-Based Learning shows how the ability to learn lies at the heart of effective working in teams. His book identifies the ingredients that turn good teams into teams that improve. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Howard Hills' Team-Based Learning shows how the ability to learn lies at the heart of effective working in teams. His book identifies the ingredients that turn good teams into teams that improve. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: why write a book about Team-Based Learning?
Part One The Foundation for Team-Based Learning
ch. 1 Why do we work in terms so much?
ch. 2 Teams
ch. 3 Personality and its effects on learning together
ch. 4 Team culture
Part Two The Building Blocks and Tools for Team-Based Learning What Team-Based
ch. 5 Learning looks like
ch. 6 Understanding effective learning
ch. 7 Internal communication
Part Three The Roles of Those Involved in Team-Based Learning The role of the leader
ch. 8 The role of the individual
ch. 9 The role of the training department
References and further reading
Index
Howard Hills' Team-Based Learning shows how the ability to learn lies at the heart of effective working in teams. His book identifies the ingredients that turn good teams into teams that improve. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: why write a book about Team-Based Learning?
Part One The Foundation for Team-Based Learning
ch. 1 Why do we work in terms so much?
ch. 2 Teams
ch. 3 Personality and its effects on learning together
ch. 4 Team culture
Part Two The Building Blocks and Tools for Team-Based Learning What Team-Based
ch. 5 Learning looks like
ch. 6 Understanding effective learning
ch. 7 Internal communication
Part Three The Roles of Those Involved in Team-Based Learning The role of the leader
ch. 8 The role of the individual
ch. 9 The role of the training department
References and further reading
Index

The Majority in the Minority: Expanding the Representation of Latina/o Faculty, Administrators and Students in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Latinas/os are the largest ethnic minority group in the U.S. They are propelling minority communities to majority status in states as disparate as California, Florida, New Jersey, New York and Texas.
Their growth in the population at large is not reflected in higher education. In fact Latinos are the least represented population in our colleges and universities, whether as administrators, faculty or students; and as students ...
Latinas/os are the largest ethnic minority group in the U.S. They are propelling minority communities to majority status in states as disparate as California, Florida, New Jersey, New York and Texas.
Their growth in the population at large is not reflected in higher education. In fact Latinos are the least represented population in our colleges and universities, whether as administrators, faculty or students; and as students ...
Additional Info:
Latinas/os are the largest ethnic minority group in the U.S. They are propelling minority communities to majority status in states as disparate as California, Florida, New Jersey, New York and Texas.
Their growth in the population at large is not reflected in higher education. In fact Latinos are the least represented population in our colleges and universities, whether as administrators, faculty or students; and as students have one of the highest levels of attrition.
Opening access to Latinas/os, assuring their persistence as students in higher education, and their increased presence in college faculty and governance, is of paramount importance if they are to make essential economic gains and fully to participate in and contribute to American society.
In this ground-breaking book, twenty-four Latina/o scholars provide an historical background; review issues of student access and achievement, and lessons learned; and present the problems of status and barriers faced by administrators and faculty. The book includes narratives by graduate students, administrators and faculty that vividly bring these issues to life.
This is a book that should be read by policy makers, college administrators, student affairs personnel and faculty concerned about shaping the future of higher education -- and constitutes an invaluable resource for all leaders of the Latino community. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Laura I. Rendón)
Preface (Lee Jones and Jeanett Castellanos)
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Latina/o Undergraduate Experiences in American Higher Education (Jeanett Castellanos and Lee Jones)
ch. 2 Historical Perspectives on Latino Access to Higher Education, 1848-1990 (Victoria-Maria MacDonald and Teresa Garcia)
ch. 3 Access to Higher Education for Hispanic Students: Real or illusory? (Amaury Nora)
ch. 4 Latina/o and African American Students and Predominantly White Institutions: A Psychosociocultural Perspective of Cultural Congruity, Campus Climate, and Academic Persistence (Alberta M. Gloria and Jeanett Castellanos)
ch. 5 Active Faculty Involvement: Maximizing Student Achievement Efforts (Guadalupe Anaya and Darnell G. Cole)
ch. 6 Notes from a Latino Graduate Student at a Predominantly White University (Raymond "Ramón" Herrera)
ch. 7 Latins and the Undergraduate Experience: No Estamos Solas! (Veronica Orozco)
ch. 8 Latina/o Retention in Four-Year Institutions (Sylvia Hurtado and Mark Kamimura)
ch. 9 Latinos and Administrative Positions in American Higher Education (Roberto Haro and Juan Francisco Lara)
ch. 10 Latina/o Cultural Values and the Academy: Latinas Navigating through the Administrative Role (Kathleen Harris Canul)
ch. 11 Barriers to Accessing the Professoriate (Raymond V. Padilla)
ch. 12 Latina/o Faculty and the Tenure Process in Cultural Context (Robeto A. Ibarra)
ch. 13 Latinas and the Professoriate: An Interview with Patricia Arredondo (Patricia Arredondo and Jeanett Castellanos)
ch. 14 Discrimination and Merit in Higher Education: The Hispanic Professoriate (Richard R. Verdugo)
ch. 15 Developmental Career Challenges for Latina/o Faculty in Higher Education (Edward A. Delgado-Romero, Lisa Y. Flores, Alberta M. Gloria, Patricia Arredondo, and Jeanett Castellanos)
ch. 16 An Infrastructure that Facilitates the Retention of Latina/os in Higher Education (Jeanett Castellanos and Lee Jones)
Index
Latinas/os are the largest ethnic minority group in the U.S. They are propelling minority communities to majority status in states as disparate as California, Florida, New Jersey, New York and Texas.
Their growth in the population at large is not reflected in higher education. In fact Latinos are the least represented population in our colleges and universities, whether as administrators, faculty or students; and as students have one of the highest levels of attrition.
Opening access to Latinas/os, assuring their persistence as students in higher education, and their increased presence in college faculty and governance, is of paramount importance if they are to make essential economic gains and fully to participate in and contribute to American society.
In this ground-breaking book, twenty-four Latina/o scholars provide an historical background; review issues of student access and achievement, and lessons learned; and present the problems of status and barriers faced by administrators and faculty. The book includes narratives by graduate students, administrators and faculty that vividly bring these issues to life.
This is a book that should be read by policy makers, college administrators, student affairs personnel and faculty concerned about shaping the future of higher education -- and constitutes an invaluable resource for all leaders of the Latino community. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Laura I. Rendón)
Preface (Lee Jones and Jeanett Castellanos)
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Latina/o Undergraduate Experiences in American Higher Education (Jeanett Castellanos and Lee Jones)
ch. 2 Historical Perspectives on Latino Access to Higher Education, 1848-1990 (Victoria-Maria MacDonald and Teresa Garcia)
ch. 3 Access to Higher Education for Hispanic Students: Real or illusory? (Amaury Nora)
ch. 4 Latina/o and African American Students and Predominantly White Institutions: A Psychosociocultural Perspective of Cultural Congruity, Campus Climate, and Academic Persistence (Alberta M. Gloria and Jeanett Castellanos)
ch. 5 Active Faculty Involvement: Maximizing Student Achievement Efforts (Guadalupe Anaya and Darnell G. Cole)
ch. 6 Notes from a Latino Graduate Student at a Predominantly White University (Raymond "Ramón" Herrera)
ch. 7 Latins and the Undergraduate Experience: No Estamos Solas! (Veronica Orozco)
ch. 8 Latina/o Retention in Four-Year Institutions (Sylvia Hurtado and Mark Kamimura)
ch. 9 Latinos and Administrative Positions in American Higher Education (Roberto Haro and Juan Francisco Lara)
ch. 10 Latina/o Cultural Values and the Academy: Latinas Navigating through the Administrative Role (Kathleen Harris Canul)
ch. 11 Barriers to Accessing the Professoriate (Raymond V. Padilla)
ch. 12 Latina/o Faculty and the Tenure Process in Cultural Context (Robeto A. Ibarra)
ch. 13 Latinas and the Professoriate: An Interview with Patricia Arredondo (Patricia Arredondo and Jeanett Castellanos)
ch. 14 Discrimination and Merit in Higher Education: The Hispanic Professoriate (Richard R. Verdugo)
ch. 15 Developmental Career Challenges for Latina/o Faculty in Higher Education (Edward A. Delgado-Romero, Lisa Y. Flores, Alberta M. Gloria, Patricia Arredondo, and Jeanett Castellanos)
ch. 16 An Infrastructure that Facilitates the Retention of Latina/os in Higher Education (Jeanett Castellanos and Lee Jones)
Index
Additional Info:
Simulations create and use a complete environment within which students can interact to apply theory and practice skills to real-world issues related to their discipline. Simulations constitute a powerful tool for learning. They allow teachers simultaneously to integrate multiple teaching objectives in a single process. They motivate students, provide opportunities for active participation to promote deep learning, develop interactive and communication skills, and link knowledge and theory to application.
<...
Simulations create and use a complete environment within which students can interact to apply theory and practice skills to real-world issues related to their discipline. Simulations constitute a powerful tool for learning. They allow teachers simultaneously to integrate multiple teaching objectives in a single process. They motivate students, provide opportunities for active participation to promote deep learning, develop interactive and communication skills, and link knowledge and theory to application.
<...
Additional Info:
Simulations create and use a complete environment within which students can interact to apply theory and practice skills to real-world issues related to their discipline. Simulations constitute a powerful tool for learning. They allow teachers simultaneously to integrate multiple teaching objectives in a single process. They motivate students, provide opportunities for active participation to promote deep learning, develop interactive and communication skills, and link knowledge and theory to application.
This book provides an introduction to the use of simulations - from creating simple scenarios that can be completed in a single class period, to extended, complex simulations that may encompass a semester's curriculum.
Assuming no prior experience in their use, the authors provide a recipe approach to selecting and designing scenarios for all sizes of class; offer guidance on creating simulated environments to meet learning objectives; and practical advice on managing the process in the classroom through to the crucial processes of debriefing and assessment.
The detailed concluding description of how to plan and manage a complex simulation -- complete with its sample scenario and examples of documentation - provides a rich demonstration of the process.
This book will appeal to anyone, in virtually any field of study, looking for effective ways to bridge the gap between academic learning and discipline-specific practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Why Simulations Further Educational Goals
ch. 2 What is an Education Simulation?
ch. 3 Designing an Education Simulation
ch. 4 Managing an Education Simulation
ch. 5 Debriefing an Education Simulation
ch. 6 Responsible Assessment
ch. 7 An Extended Simulation
App. A Scenario Summary: SCIC/Inglewood v. City of L.A.
App. B Single-Synopsis Scenario: Pirates Landing
App. C Selective and Sequenced Scenario: SCIC/Inglewood v. City of Los Angeles Scenario Guide and Plan
App. D The Simulation News
App. E Simulation Office Memorandum: Logs
App. F Simulation Office Memorandum: General Office Procedures
App. G Simulation Office Memorandum: Simulation Center
References
Index
Simulations create and use a complete environment within which students can interact to apply theory and practice skills to real-world issues related to their discipline. Simulations constitute a powerful tool for learning. They allow teachers simultaneously to integrate multiple teaching objectives in a single process. They motivate students, provide opportunities for active participation to promote deep learning, develop interactive and communication skills, and link knowledge and theory to application.
This book provides an introduction to the use of simulations - from creating simple scenarios that can be completed in a single class period, to extended, complex simulations that may encompass a semester's curriculum.
Assuming no prior experience in their use, the authors provide a recipe approach to selecting and designing scenarios for all sizes of class; offer guidance on creating simulated environments to meet learning objectives; and practical advice on managing the process in the classroom through to the crucial processes of debriefing and assessment.
The detailed concluding description of how to plan and manage a complex simulation -- complete with its sample scenario and examples of documentation - provides a rich demonstration of the process.
This book will appeal to anyone, in virtually any field of study, looking for effective ways to bridge the gap between academic learning and discipline-specific practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Why Simulations Further Educational Goals
ch. 2 What is an Education Simulation?
ch. 3 Designing an Education Simulation
ch. 4 Managing an Education Simulation
ch. 5 Debriefing an Education Simulation
ch. 6 Responsible Assessment
ch. 7 An Extended Simulation
App. A Scenario Summary: SCIC/Inglewood v. City of L.A.
App. B Single-Synopsis Scenario: Pirates Landing
App. C Selective and Sequenced Scenario: SCIC/Inglewood v. City of Los Angeles Scenario Guide and Plan
App. D The Simulation News
App. E Simulation Office Memorandum: Logs
App. F Simulation Office Memorandum: General Office Procedures
App. G Simulation Office Memorandum: Simulation Center
References
Index

Working Effectively with Graduate Assistants
Additional Info:
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From ...
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From ...
Additional Info:
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Understanding the Challenges of Working With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 2 Establishing Supervisory Relationships With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 3 Recognizing and Adapting to Stages of Graduate Teaching Assistants' and Graduate Research Assistants' Development
ch. 4 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Special Challenges in Teaching
ch. 5 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Their Specific Instructional Roles
ch. 6 Preparing Graduate Research Assistants for Their Responsibilities
ch. 7 Addressing Special Considerations When Working With International Teaching Assistants
ch. 8 Assessing the Performance of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 9 Designing a Plan of Action
ch. 10 Selected References Useful to Supervisors of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
References
About the Authors
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Understanding the Challenges of Working With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 2 Establishing Supervisory Relationships With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 3 Recognizing and Adapting to Stages of Graduate Teaching Assistants' and Graduate Research Assistants' Development
ch. 4 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Special Challenges in Teaching
ch. 5 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Their Specific Instructional Roles
ch. 6 Preparing Graduate Research Assistants for Their Responsibilities
ch. 7 Addressing Special Considerations When Working With International Teaching Assistants
ch. 8 Assessing the Performance of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 9 Designing a Plan of Action
ch. 10 Selected References Useful to Supervisors of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
References
About the Authors

The Idea of a University
Additional Info:
Since its publication almost 150 years ago, John Henry Cardinal Newman's The Idea of a University has had extraordinary influence on the shaping and goals of higher education. This important and accessible edition includes new essays by five leading scholars who explore the background and present day relevance of Cardinal Newman's themes, a biographical sketch of his life, questions for discussion, expanded notes, and a glossary of names. (From the Publisher)
Since its publication almost 150 years ago, John Henry Cardinal Newman's The Idea of a University has had extraordinary influence on the shaping and goals of higher education. This important and accessible edition includes new essays by five leading scholars who explore the background and present day relevance of Cardinal Newman's themes, a biographical sketch of his life, questions for discussion, expanded notes, and a glossary of names. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Since its publication almost 150 years ago, John Henry Cardinal Newman's The Idea of a University has had extraordinary influence on the shaping and goals of higher education. This important and accessible edition includes new essays by five leading scholars who explore the background and present day relevance of Cardinal Newman's themes, a biographical sketch of his life, questions for discussion, expanded notes, and a glossary of names. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
University Teaching considered in nine discourses
University subjects discussed in occasional lectures and essays - four selections
Notes
Glossary
Since its publication almost 150 years ago, John Henry Cardinal Newman's The Idea of a University has had extraordinary influence on the shaping and goals of higher education. This important and accessible edition includes new essays by five leading scholars who explore the background and present day relevance of Cardinal Newman's themes, a biographical sketch of his life, questions for discussion, expanded notes, and a glossary of names. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
University Teaching considered in nine discourses
University subjects discussed in occasional lectures and essays - four selections
Notes
Glossary

Student-Assisted Teaching: A Guide to Faculty-Student Teamwork
Additional Info:
This innovative book provides a range of models for undergraduate student-assisted teaching partnerships to help faculty, faculty developers, and administrators make learning more student-centered, more effective, and more productive.
Each of the 31 models included in this volume is supported with practical details and focuses on four main aspects of a specific peer-assisted learning environment: 1) implementation, 2) evidence of effectiveness and learning benefits, 3) analysis of time and cost expenditures, and 4) ...
This innovative book provides a range of models for undergraduate student-assisted teaching partnerships to help faculty, faculty developers, and administrators make learning more student-centered, more effective, and more productive.
Each of the 31 models included in this volume is supported with practical details and focuses on four main aspects of a specific peer-assisted learning environment: 1) implementation, 2) evidence of effectiveness and learning benefits, 3) analysis of time and cost expenditures, and 4) ...
Additional Info:
This innovative book provides a range of models for undergraduate student-assisted teaching partnerships to help faculty, faculty developers, and administrators make learning more student-centered, more effective, and more productive.
Each of the 31 models included in this volume is supported with practical details and focuses on four main aspects of a specific peer-assisted learning environment: 1) implementation, 2) evidence of effectiveness and learning benefits, 3) analysis of time and cost expenditures, and 4) suggestions for replication.
The chapters present a range of approaches, applications, disciplines, institutions, and contexts, and demonstrate that student-faculty partnerships can be adapted to meet diverse needs in a variety of situations. Extensive appendices aid implementation by providing concrete examples of hiring documents, training syllabi, teaching materials, and evaluation methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the editors
Foreword
Preface
Introduction
Model Matrix
Part I. Undergraduate Students Assisting with Programs for First-Year Students
ch. 1 Establishing a Common Ground: A Cojoint Training Model for Instructors and Peer Educators. (Eve M. Adams, Susan C. Brown, and Terry L. Cook)
ch. 2 Lessons From Peers: The Design Exchange (Mark J. Chidister, Frank H. Bell, Jr., and Kurt M. Earnest)
ch. 3 Peer Teaching in the Experimental College (Robyn Gittleman and Howard Woolf)
ch. 4 Peer Facilitators as Lead Freshman Seminar Instructors Jean M. Henscheid)
ch. 5 The Teaching Teams Program: A Just-in-Time model for Peer Assistance (Harold P. Larson, Reed Mencke, Stacy J. Tollefson, Elizabeth Harrison, and Elena Berman)
ch. 6 The Teaching Teams Program: Transforming the Role of the Graduate Teaching Assistant (David A. Wood, Jr., Jennifer L. Hart, Stacy J. Tollefson, Dawn E. DeToro, and Julie Libarkin)
ch. 7 The Teaching Teams Program: Empowering Undergraduates in a Student-Centered Research University (Lacey A. Stover, Kristen A. Story, Amanda M. Skousen, Cynthia E. Jacks, Heather Logan, and Benjamin T. Bush)
ch. 8 Peer-Assisted Cooperative Learning: An Experiment in Educational Quality and Productivity (Judith E. Miller, david DiBiasio, John Minasian, and James S. Catterall)
ch. 9 Students: Managing to Learn; Teachers: Learning to Manage (Martin H. Murray)
ch. 10 Undergraduates Teaching in a Collaborative Learning Paradigm (Samuel B. Thompson, Sarah B. Westfall, and Christine Reimers)
ch. 11 Peers at Work: Tutors at Spelman College (Anne B. Warner and Christine K. Farris)
ch. 12 Students Mentoring Students in Portfolio Development (W. Alan Wright and Bruce Barton)
Part II. Undergraduate Students Assisting with Difficult Courses
ch. 13 The Experimental Study Group: An Alternative First-Year Program at MIT (David Custer and Peter Dourmashkin)
ch. 14 MASH (Math and Science Help): Supplemental Instruction at a Technological University (Ann garvin and Dale Snyder)
ch. 15 Undergraduate Peer Mentors in Mathematics (Miguel Paredes, Paul Pontius, Rene Torres, and Joseph Chance)
ch. 16 A Model for Integrating Technical Preceptors into the Classroom (Mary Poulton and John Kemeny)
ch. 17 Academic Excellence Workshops: Boosting Success in Technical Courses (Ruth A. Streveler)
ch. 18 Supplemental Instruction at an Urban Community College (Joyce Ship Zaritsky)
Part III. Undergraduate Students Assisting with Special Groups
ch. 19 Peer-Assisted Teaching and Learning in Distance education (Judith A. Couchman)
ch. 20 Using Structured Study Groups to Create Chemistry Honors Sections (Brian P. Coppola, Douglas S. Daniels, and Jason K. Pontrello)
ch. 21 Student Mentoring and Community in a University Honors Program (Ronald E. Mickel)
ch. 22 Where Undergraduates are the Experts: Peer-Based Instruction in the Writing Center (Dennis Paoli and Eric Hobson)
Part IV. Undergraduate Students Assisting in Courses and Programs for All Students
ch. 23 Peer Facilitators of In-Class Groups: Adapting Problem-Based Learning to the Undergraduate Setting (Deborah E. Allen and Harold B. White, III)
ch. 24 Student-Directed Instruction in an Undergraduate Psychopathology Course (Cheryl Golden and Calverta McMorris)
ch. 25 Peer Writing Tours (Lisa Lebduska)
ch. 26 The Workshop Project: Peer-Led team Learning in Chemistry (Jerry L. Sarquis. Linda J. Dixon, David K. Gosser, Jack A. Kampmeier, Vicki Roth, Victor S. Strozak, and Pratibha varma-Nelson)
ch. 27 An Introductory Psychology Laboratory designed and Taught by Undergraduate Teaching Interns (Stephen P. Stelzner, Michael G. Livingston, and Thomas Creed)
ch. 28 Undergraduate Teaching Assistants Bring Active Learning to Class (Melissa A. Thibodeau)
Part V. Undergraduate Students Assisting in Faculty Development
ch. 29 Student-Faculty Partnerships to develop Teaching and Enhance Learning (Milton D. Cox)
ch. 30 Educating the Critic: Student Driven Quality (Elizabeth Kinland, Lisa Firing Lenze, Lynn Melander Moore, and Larry D. Spence)
ch. 31 College Teachers and Student Consultants: Collaborating about Teaching and Learning (D. Lynn Sorenson)
This innovative book provides a range of models for undergraduate student-assisted teaching partnerships to help faculty, faculty developers, and administrators make learning more student-centered, more effective, and more productive.
Each of the 31 models included in this volume is supported with practical details and focuses on four main aspects of a specific peer-assisted learning environment: 1) implementation, 2) evidence of effectiveness and learning benefits, 3) analysis of time and cost expenditures, and 4) suggestions for replication.
The chapters present a range of approaches, applications, disciplines, institutions, and contexts, and demonstrate that student-faculty partnerships can be adapted to meet diverse needs in a variety of situations. Extensive appendices aid implementation by providing concrete examples of hiring documents, training syllabi, teaching materials, and evaluation methods. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the editors
Foreword
Preface
Introduction
Model Matrix
Part I. Undergraduate Students Assisting with Programs for First-Year Students
ch. 1 Establishing a Common Ground: A Cojoint Training Model for Instructors and Peer Educators. (Eve M. Adams, Susan C. Brown, and Terry L. Cook)
ch. 2 Lessons From Peers: The Design Exchange (Mark J. Chidister, Frank H. Bell, Jr., and Kurt M. Earnest)
ch. 3 Peer Teaching in the Experimental College (Robyn Gittleman and Howard Woolf)
ch. 4 Peer Facilitators as Lead Freshman Seminar Instructors Jean M. Henscheid)
ch. 5 The Teaching Teams Program: A Just-in-Time model for Peer Assistance (Harold P. Larson, Reed Mencke, Stacy J. Tollefson, Elizabeth Harrison, and Elena Berman)
ch. 6 The Teaching Teams Program: Transforming the Role of the Graduate Teaching Assistant (David A. Wood, Jr., Jennifer L. Hart, Stacy J. Tollefson, Dawn E. DeToro, and Julie Libarkin)
ch. 7 The Teaching Teams Program: Empowering Undergraduates in a Student-Centered Research University (Lacey A. Stover, Kristen A. Story, Amanda M. Skousen, Cynthia E. Jacks, Heather Logan, and Benjamin T. Bush)
ch. 8 Peer-Assisted Cooperative Learning: An Experiment in Educational Quality and Productivity (Judith E. Miller, david DiBiasio, John Minasian, and James S. Catterall)
ch. 9 Students: Managing to Learn; Teachers: Learning to Manage (Martin H. Murray)
ch. 10 Undergraduates Teaching in a Collaborative Learning Paradigm (Samuel B. Thompson, Sarah B. Westfall, and Christine Reimers)
ch. 11 Peers at Work: Tutors at Spelman College (Anne B. Warner and Christine K. Farris)
ch. 12 Students Mentoring Students in Portfolio Development (W. Alan Wright and Bruce Barton)
Part II. Undergraduate Students Assisting with Difficult Courses
ch. 13 The Experimental Study Group: An Alternative First-Year Program at MIT (David Custer and Peter Dourmashkin)
ch. 14 MASH (Math and Science Help): Supplemental Instruction at a Technological University (Ann garvin and Dale Snyder)
ch. 15 Undergraduate Peer Mentors in Mathematics (Miguel Paredes, Paul Pontius, Rene Torres, and Joseph Chance)
ch. 16 A Model for Integrating Technical Preceptors into the Classroom (Mary Poulton and John Kemeny)
ch. 17 Academic Excellence Workshops: Boosting Success in Technical Courses (Ruth A. Streveler)
ch. 18 Supplemental Instruction at an Urban Community College (Joyce Ship Zaritsky)
Part III. Undergraduate Students Assisting with Special Groups
ch. 19 Peer-Assisted Teaching and Learning in Distance education (Judith A. Couchman)
ch. 20 Using Structured Study Groups to Create Chemistry Honors Sections (Brian P. Coppola, Douglas S. Daniels, and Jason K. Pontrello)
ch. 21 Student Mentoring and Community in a University Honors Program (Ronald E. Mickel)
ch. 22 Where Undergraduates are the Experts: Peer-Based Instruction in the Writing Center (Dennis Paoli and Eric Hobson)
Part IV. Undergraduate Students Assisting in Courses and Programs for All Students
ch. 23 Peer Facilitators of In-Class Groups: Adapting Problem-Based Learning to the Undergraduate Setting (Deborah E. Allen and Harold B. White, III)
ch. 24 Student-Directed Instruction in an Undergraduate Psychopathology Course (Cheryl Golden and Calverta McMorris)
ch. 25 Peer Writing Tours (Lisa Lebduska)
ch. 26 The Workshop Project: Peer-Led team Learning in Chemistry (Jerry L. Sarquis. Linda J. Dixon, David K. Gosser, Jack A. Kampmeier, Vicki Roth, Victor S. Strozak, and Pratibha varma-Nelson)
ch. 27 An Introductory Psychology Laboratory designed and Taught by Undergraduate Teaching Interns (Stephen P. Stelzner, Michael G. Livingston, and Thomas Creed)
ch. 28 Undergraduate Teaching Assistants Bring Active Learning to Class (Melissa A. Thibodeau)
Part V. Undergraduate Students Assisting in Faculty Development
ch. 29 Student-Faculty Partnerships to develop Teaching and Enhance Learning (Milton D. Cox)
ch. 30 Educating the Critic: Student Driven Quality (Elizabeth Kinland, Lisa Firing Lenze, Lynn Melander Moore, and Larry D. Spence)
ch. 31 College Teachers and Student Consultants: Collaborating about Teaching and Learning (D. Lynn Sorenson)

Facilitating Students' Collaborative Writing
Additional Info:
Collaboration is interwoven in the writing process in both obvious and subtle ways--from a writer using the language that he or she inherited, to referring to the works of other writers both explicitly and implicitly, to writing together with a colleague. In this book, the author explains that collaborative writing can be a useful pedagogical tool professors can use to help students actively learn about the subject matter and about ...
Collaboration is interwoven in the writing process in both obvious and subtle ways--from a writer using the language that he or she inherited, to referring to the works of other writers both explicitly and implicitly, to writing together with a colleague. In this book, the author explains that collaborative writing can be a useful pedagogical tool professors can use to help students actively learn about the subject matter and about ...
Additional Info:
Collaboration is interwoven in the writing process in both obvious and subtle ways--from a writer using the language that he or she inherited, to referring to the works of other writers both explicitly and implicitly, to writing together with a colleague. In this book, the author explains that collaborative writing can be a useful pedagogical tool professors can use to help students actively learn about the subject matter and about themselves. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Pedagogical Support for Classroom Collaborative Writing Assignments
The Collaborative Nature of Writing
Collaborative Writing and Pedagogical Theory
Challenges to Integrating Collaborative Writing in the Classroom
The Role of the Professor in Classroom Collaborative Writing Assignments
Practical Benefits of Using Collaborative Writing in the Classroom
Conclusion
The Range of Collaborative Writing Opportunities
Brief In-class Collaborative Writing Assignments
Larger Collaborative Writing Projects
Conclusion
Constructing Collaborative Writing Assignments
The Writing Process
The Writing Assignment
The Collaborative Writing Assignment
Forming Groups, Training Students to Be Effective Collaborators, and Managing Collaborative Groups
Forming Groups
Training Students to Be Effective Collaborators
Managing Collaborative Groups
Conclusion
Collaborative Writing and Computers
Why Use Computer Technology to Teach Collaborative Writing?
What Problems Might Arise in Using Computer Technology to Teach Collaborative Writing?
Conclusion
Grading Students' Collaborative Writing Projects
Fairness
The Problem of Cheating
Rubrics
Methods of Assigning Grades
Conclusion
Conclusions and Recommendations
References
Index
Collaboration is interwoven in the writing process in both obvious and subtle ways--from a writer using the language that he or she inherited, to referring to the works of other writers both explicitly and implicitly, to writing together with a colleague. In this book, the author explains that collaborative writing can be a useful pedagogical tool professors can use to help students actively learn about the subject matter and about themselves. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Pedagogical Support for Classroom Collaborative Writing Assignments
The Collaborative Nature of Writing
Collaborative Writing and Pedagogical Theory
Challenges to Integrating Collaborative Writing in the Classroom
The Role of the Professor in Classroom Collaborative Writing Assignments
Practical Benefits of Using Collaborative Writing in the Classroom
Conclusion
The Range of Collaborative Writing Opportunities
Brief In-class Collaborative Writing Assignments
Larger Collaborative Writing Projects
Conclusion
Constructing Collaborative Writing Assignments
The Writing Process
The Writing Assignment
The Collaborative Writing Assignment
Forming Groups, Training Students to Be Effective Collaborators, and Managing Collaborative Groups
Forming Groups
Training Students to Be Effective Collaborators
Managing Collaborative Groups
Conclusion
Collaborative Writing and Computers
Why Use Computer Technology to Teach Collaborative Writing?
What Problems Might Arise in Using Computer Technology to Teach Collaborative Writing?
Conclusion
Grading Students' Collaborative Writing Projects
Fairness
The Problem of Cheating
Rubrics
Methods of Assigning Grades
Conclusion
Conclusions and Recommendations
References
Index

Grading Students' Classroom Writing: Issues and Strategies
Additional Info:
This report explores the connection between the process of writing and the process of grading. It also explains how to construct effective writing assignments, resolve issues of fairness and professional judgment, include students in the process of assessment, and provide effective feedback to students as they revise their writing. Speck synthesizes the best practices in teaching and learning to help faculty and part-time instructors envision grading as a process, not ...
This report explores the connection between the process of writing and the process of grading. It also explains how to construct effective writing assignments, resolve issues of fairness and professional judgment, include students in the process of assessment, and provide effective feedback to students as they revise their writing. Speck synthesizes the best practices in teaching and learning to help faculty and part-time instructors envision grading as a process, not ...
Additional Info:
This report explores the connection between the process of writing and the process of grading. It also explains how to construct effective writing assignments, resolve issues of fairness and professional judgment, include students in the process of assessment, and provide effective feedback to students as they revise their writing. Speck synthesizes the best practices in teaching and learning to help faculty and part-time instructors envision grading as a process, not a product. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Overview
Why is it Important to Integrate Grading into the Writing Process?
Why do Professors Need to Construct Effective Writing Assignments?
How Can Professors Ensure That Their Professional Judgments Are Fair?
How Can Professors Use Their Authority To Promote Students' Learning
How Can the Professors Help Students to Learn How to Respond Effectively in Writing?
What Support is Available to Help Professors Effectively Grade Student's Writing?
This report explores the connection between the process of writing and the process of grading. It also explains how to construct effective writing assignments, resolve issues of fairness and professional judgment, include students in the process of assessment, and provide effective feedback to students as they revise their writing. Speck synthesizes the best practices in teaching and learning to help faculty and part-time instructors envision grading as a process, not a product. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Overview
Why is it Important to Integrate Grading into the Writing Process?
Why do Professors Need to Construct Effective Writing Assignments?
How Can Professors Ensure That Their Professional Judgments Are Fair?
How Can Professors Use Their Authority To Promote Students' Learning
How Can the Professors Help Students to Learn How to Respond Effectively in Writing?
What Support is Available to Help Professors Effectively Grade Student's Writing?

Academic Life: Hospitality, Ethics, and Spirituality
Additional Info:
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ...
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ...
Additional Info:
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ways: as simply aggregations of individuals or as communities of intertwined persons. From these views, two different leadership values and positions emerge.
The first disposes us toward seeing academic conflict as inevitable and elevates heroic leadership styles where power is understood in terms of advancing one agenda over competitors. The second underwrites leadership as supporting openness to others and emphasizes the vital contributions that can follow.
By providing specific illustrations of the two modes of leadership and the nature of hospitality and openness, Academic Life presents a strong platform from which to build a rich and rewarding academic community. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The nature of insistent individualism
ch. 2 Why the prevalence of insistent individualism?
ch. 3 Hospitality as an essential virtue
ch. 4 Self, others, institutions, and the common good
ch. 5 Conversation as an essential metaphor
ch. 6 The uses of conversation
ch. 7 Community and covenant
ch. 8 Engaged, but not heroic, leadership
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ways: as simply aggregations of individuals or as communities of intertwined persons. From these views, two different leadership values and positions emerge.
The first disposes us toward seeing academic conflict as inevitable and elevates heroic leadership styles where power is understood in terms of advancing one agenda over competitors. The second underwrites leadership as supporting openness to others and emphasizes the vital contributions that can follow.
By providing specific illustrations of the two modes of leadership and the nature of hospitality and openness, Academic Life presents a strong platform from which to build a rich and rewarding academic community. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The nature of insistent individualism
ch. 2 Why the prevalence of insistent individualism?
ch. 3 Hospitality as an essential virtue
ch. 4 Self, others, institutions, and the common good
ch. 5 Conversation as an essential metaphor
ch. 6 The uses of conversation
ch. 7 Community and covenant
ch. 8 Engaged, but not heroic, leadership

The Peaceable Classroom
Additional Info:
The Peaceable Classroom first defines a pedagogy of nonviolence and then analyzes certain contemporary approaches to rhetoric and literary studies in light of nonviolent theory. (From the Publisher)
The Peaceable Classroom first defines a pedagogy of nonviolence and then analyzes certain contemporary approaches to rhetoric and literary studies in light of nonviolent theory. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The Peaceable Classroom first defines a pedagogy of nonviolence and then analyzes certain contemporary approaches to rhetoric and literary studies in light of nonviolent theory. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Preface
Prologue: I Am Not Yet Born
Old Lies
Inner Peace Studies and the World of the Writing Teacher
``Exterminate...the Brutes'' and Other Notes Toward a Spirituality of Teaching
The Force that Through the Green Fuse Drives the Flower
Silence and Slow Time
The Dancing Is Difficult
The Retro War
The Sibyl in the Bottle
Epilogue: The Booty of the Dove
One or Two Things
Works Cited
Credits
The Peaceable Classroom first defines a pedagogy of nonviolence and then analyzes certain contemporary approaches to rhetoric and literary studies in light of nonviolent theory. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Preface
Prologue: I Am Not Yet Born
Old Lies
Inner Peace Studies and the World of the Writing Teacher
``Exterminate...the Brutes'' and Other Notes Toward a Spirituality of Teaching
The Force that Through the Green Fuse Drives the Flower
Silence and Slow Time
The Dancing Is Difficult
The Retro War
The Sibyl in the Bottle
Epilogue: The Booty of the Dove
One or Two Things
Works Cited
Credits

Young Adult Catholics: Religion in the Culture of Choice
Additional Info:
"Leaders of the American Catholic community want to and need to reach out to young adults. But effective ministry to young adults depends on an understanding of the attitudes and the needs of the current generation of Catholics in their 20s and 30s. This is why Dean Hoge, William Dinges, Mary Johnson, and Juan Gonzales began their study of young adult Catholics. How do they actually live their Catholicism? Are ...
"Leaders of the American Catholic community want to and need to reach out to young adults. But effective ministry to young adults depends on an understanding of the attitudes and the needs of the current generation of Catholics in their 20s and 30s. This is why Dean Hoge, William Dinges, Mary Johnson, and Juan Gonzales began their study of young adult Catholics. How do they actually live their Catholicism? Are ...
Additional Info:
"Leaders of the American Catholic community want to and need to reach out to young adults. But effective ministry to young adults depends on an understanding of the attitudes and the needs of the current generation of Catholics in their 20s and 30s. This is why Dean Hoge, William Dinges, Mary Johnson, and Juan Gonzales began their study of young adult Catholics. How do they actually live their Catholicism? Are they alienated from the church? Are they cynical about the church's moral teachings? Do they take the pope's statements seriously? Do they attend Mass? Have significant numbers left for other churches? Do they want Catholic education for their children?" Seeking answers to these and other questions, the authors conducted a national survey in 1997, supplemented by a telephone survey and then by personal interviews with over 800 men and women across the country. The interviews put a human face on the information provided, and they form a compelling part of this timely narrative. Of special interest is the focus on Latino Catholics. The authors underscore observations that include the strength and tenacity of Catholic identity in spite of many challenges, the high level of personal decision making among those interviewed and surveyed, and the readiness of young Catholics for institutional reforms. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Catholicism in American Culture
ch. 2 Past Research on Young Catholics
ch. 3 Young Adult Catholics: Survey Results
ch. 4 Five Types of Catholic Involvement
ch. 5 Latino Young Adults
ch. 6 Experiences with Religious Education
ch. 7 Young Adult Catholic Spirituality
ch. 8 Catholic Identity of Young Adults
ch. 9 Catholic Identity and Tradition
ch. 10 Conclusion
App. A
App. B
Notes
References
Index
"Leaders of the American Catholic community want to and need to reach out to young adults. But effective ministry to young adults depends on an understanding of the attitudes and the needs of the current generation of Catholics in their 20s and 30s. This is why Dean Hoge, William Dinges, Mary Johnson, and Juan Gonzales began their study of young adult Catholics. How do they actually live their Catholicism? Are they alienated from the church? Are they cynical about the church's moral teachings? Do they take the pope's statements seriously? Do they attend Mass? Have significant numbers left for other churches? Do they want Catholic education for their children?" Seeking answers to these and other questions, the authors conducted a national survey in 1997, supplemented by a telephone survey and then by personal interviews with over 800 men and women across the country. The interviews put a human face on the information provided, and they form a compelling part of this timely narrative. Of special interest is the focus on Latino Catholics. The authors underscore observations that include the strength and tenacity of Catholic identity in spite of many challenges, the high level of personal decision making among those interviewed and surveyed, and the readiness of young Catholics for institutional reforms. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Catholicism in American Culture
ch. 2 Past Research on Young Catholics
ch. 3 Young Adult Catholics: Survey Results
ch. 4 Five Types of Catholic Involvement
ch. 5 Latino Young Adults
ch. 6 Experiences with Religious Education
ch. 7 Young Adult Catholic Spirituality
ch. 8 Catholic Identity of Young Adults
ch. 9 Catholic Identity and Tradition
ch. 10 Conclusion
App. A
App. B
Notes
References
Index
Additional Info:
"Exploring Spirituality and Culture in Adult and Higher Education is written from the unique perspective of teacher, researcher, and author Elizabeth Tisdell, who has extensive experience dealing with culture, gender, and educational equity issues in secular adult and higher education classrooms, and formerly in pastoral and religious education settings on college campuses. This book discusses how spiritual development is informed by culture and how this knowledge is relevant to teaching ...
"Exploring Spirituality and Culture in Adult and Higher Education is written from the unique perspective of teacher, researcher, and author Elizabeth Tisdell, who has extensive experience dealing with culture, gender, and educational equity issues in secular adult and higher education classrooms, and formerly in pastoral and religious education settings on college campuses. This book discusses how spiritual development is informed by culture and how this knowledge is relevant to teaching ...
Additional Info:
"Exploring Spirituality and Culture in Adult and Higher Education is written from the unique perspective of teacher, researcher, and author Elizabeth Tisdell, who has extensive experience dealing with culture, gender, and educational equity issues in secular adult and higher education classrooms, and formerly in pastoral and religious education settings on college campuses. This book discusses how spiritual development is informed by culture and how this knowledge is relevant to teaching and learning. For educators, an understanding of how spirituality is informed by culture, and how spirituality assists in meaning-making, can aid in their efforts to help their students' educational experiences become more transformative and culturally relevant." Throughout this book, Elizabeth Tisdell shows higher and adult educators how they can draw on both psychological and sociocultural aspects of spirituality to facilitate ongoing knowledge construction in their students - and themselves. For example, educators and students can use classroom activities that incorporate image, symbol, music, and art forms that focus on both the commonalities and differences of human experience. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Author
Pt. I Breaking the Silence: Spirituality and Culture in Adult Meaning-Making and Education
ch. 1 Introduction: Culture, Spirituality, and Adult Learning
ch. 2 Breaking the Silence: Defining Spirituality in a Culturally Relevant Education Context
ch. 3 Spirituality, Religion, and Culture in Lived Experience: Overlaps and Separations
ch. 4 Between the Cultural and the Universal: Themes and Variations of Spiritual Experience
Pt. II Claiming a Sacred Face: Identity and Spiritual Development
ch. 5 The Great Spiral: Spiritual Development as a Process of Moving Forward and Spiraling Back
ch. 6 Gender, Culture, and Spiritual Identity in Midlife Integration
ch. 7 The Role of Spiritual Experience in Developing a Positive Cultural Identity
ch. 8 Searching for Wholeness: Crossing Culture, White Identity, and Spiritual Development
Pt. III Spirituality in a Culturally Relevant and Transformative Teaching Practice
ch. 9 Approaching Transformative Teaching Grounded in Spirituality and Cultural Relevance
ch. 10 A Theory-in-Progress of a Spiritually Grounded, Culturally Relevant Pedagogy: Philosophical Underpinnings and New Directions
ch. 11 Stories from the Field: Spirituality and Culture in Adult Higher Education Classrooms
ch. 12 The Possibilities and Challenges of Spiritually Grounded, Culturally Relevant Teaching
Epilogue: Final Reflections
App.: Research Methodology
References
Index
"Exploring Spirituality and Culture in Adult and Higher Education is written from the unique perspective of teacher, researcher, and author Elizabeth Tisdell, who has extensive experience dealing with culture, gender, and educational equity issues in secular adult and higher education classrooms, and formerly in pastoral and religious education settings on college campuses. This book discusses how spiritual development is informed by culture and how this knowledge is relevant to teaching and learning. For educators, an understanding of how spirituality is informed by culture, and how spirituality assists in meaning-making, can aid in their efforts to help their students' educational experiences become more transformative and culturally relevant." Throughout this book, Elizabeth Tisdell shows higher and adult educators how they can draw on both psychological and sociocultural aspects of spirituality to facilitate ongoing knowledge construction in their students - and themselves. For example, educators and students can use classroom activities that incorporate image, symbol, music, and art forms that focus on both the commonalities and differences of human experience. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Author
Pt. I Breaking the Silence: Spirituality and Culture in Adult Meaning-Making and Education
ch. 1 Introduction: Culture, Spirituality, and Adult Learning
ch. 2 Breaking the Silence: Defining Spirituality in a Culturally Relevant Education Context
ch. 3 Spirituality, Religion, and Culture in Lived Experience: Overlaps and Separations
ch. 4 Between the Cultural and the Universal: Themes and Variations of Spiritual Experience
Pt. II Claiming a Sacred Face: Identity and Spiritual Development
ch. 5 The Great Spiral: Spiritual Development as a Process of Moving Forward and Spiraling Back
ch. 6 Gender, Culture, and Spiritual Identity in Midlife Integration
ch. 7 The Role of Spiritual Experience in Developing a Positive Cultural Identity
ch. 8 Searching for Wholeness: Crossing Culture, White Identity, and Spiritual Development
Pt. III Spirituality in a Culturally Relevant and Transformative Teaching Practice
ch. 9 Approaching Transformative Teaching Grounded in Spirituality and Cultural Relevance
ch. 10 A Theory-in-Progress of a Spiritually Grounded, Culturally Relevant Pedagogy: Philosophical Underpinnings and New Directions
ch. 11 Stories from the Field: Spirituality and Culture in Adult Higher Education Classrooms
ch. 12 The Possibilities and Challenges of Spiritually Grounded, Culturally Relevant Teaching
Epilogue: Final Reflections
App.: Research Methodology
References
Index

Religion, Politics, and the American Experience: Reflections on Religion and American Public Life
Additional Info:
This challenging collection of essays offers a refreshing approach to the troubling--and timely--subject of religion and public policy in America, and the ways in which issues of church and state affect our national identity.
The result of a series of conferences on religion and politics conducted by the Public Religion project at the University of Chicago, funded by a grant from the Pew Charitable Trust, this collection brings ...
This challenging collection of essays offers a refreshing approach to the troubling--and timely--subject of religion and public policy in America, and the ways in which issues of church and state affect our national identity.
The result of a series of conferences on religion and politics conducted by the Public Religion project at the University of Chicago, funded by a grant from the Pew Charitable Trust, this collection brings ...
Additional Info:
This challenging collection of essays offers a refreshing approach to the troubling--and timely--subject of religion and public policy in America, and the ways in which issues of church and state affect our national identity.
The result of a series of conferences on religion and politics conducted by the Public Religion project at the University of Chicago, funded by a grant from the Pew Charitable Trust, this collection brings together an extraordinarily diverse set of contributors. Represented within its pages are the ideas and opinions of scholars, politicians, and religious leaders with backgrounds in law, politics, history, and divinity, among them Senator Paul Simon of Illinois. With its wide range of critical approaches and varied perspectives, this volume makes a vibrant contribution to the national dialogue on politics and religion.
Chief among the essay topics are the evangelical roots of American political life; early conflicts between Enlightenment thinking and spiritual impulses in developing a national identity; the practical problems that today's politicians face in campaigning; the impact of constitutional and legal language regarding our definitions of religion; and the way in which the media's treatment of our spiritual life frames our perceptions of it. These thought-provoking essays will inspire readers to rethink, argue, perhaps act, but most importantly, to converse about this timely and important issue.
This volume will have wide cross-disciplinary appeal. Students and scholars of history, religious studies, and political science will find great value within its pages, as will scholars of divinity and law, and members of this general public concerned with the intersection of faith and politics in American life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Religion and American democracy (Jean Bethke Elshtain)
ch. 2 Toward a contextual appreciation of religion and politics (Laura R. Olson)
ch. 3 "A page of history is worth a volume of logic" : charting the legal pilgrimage of public religion (John Witte, Jr.)
ch. 4 Politicians, religion, and civil discourse (Paul Simon)
ch. 5 Religion, politics, and the media (Stewart M. Hoover)
ch. 6 Public religion and voluntary associations (Edward L. Queen II)
ch. 7 Evangelicals past and present (Mark Noll)
ch. 8 Public theology in service to a national conversation (Michael J. Himes)
This challenging collection of essays offers a refreshing approach to the troubling--and timely--subject of religion and public policy in America, and the ways in which issues of church and state affect our national identity.
The result of a series of conferences on religion and politics conducted by the Public Religion project at the University of Chicago, funded by a grant from the Pew Charitable Trust, this collection brings together an extraordinarily diverse set of contributors. Represented within its pages are the ideas and opinions of scholars, politicians, and religious leaders with backgrounds in law, politics, history, and divinity, among them Senator Paul Simon of Illinois. With its wide range of critical approaches and varied perspectives, this volume makes a vibrant contribution to the national dialogue on politics and religion.
Chief among the essay topics are the evangelical roots of American political life; early conflicts between Enlightenment thinking and spiritual impulses in developing a national identity; the practical problems that today's politicians face in campaigning; the impact of constitutional and legal language regarding our definitions of religion; and the way in which the media's treatment of our spiritual life frames our perceptions of it. These thought-provoking essays will inspire readers to rethink, argue, perhaps act, but most importantly, to converse about this timely and important issue.
This volume will have wide cross-disciplinary appeal. Students and scholars of history, religious studies, and political science will find great value within its pages, as will scholars of divinity and law, and members of this general public concerned with the intersection of faith and politics in American life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Religion and American democracy (Jean Bethke Elshtain)
ch. 2 Toward a contextual appreciation of religion and politics (Laura R. Olson)
ch. 3 "A page of history is worth a volume of logic" : charting the legal pilgrimage of public religion (John Witte, Jr.)
ch. 4 Politicians, religion, and civil discourse (Paul Simon)
ch. 5 Religion, politics, and the media (Stewart M. Hoover)
ch. 6 Public religion and voluntary associations (Edward L. Queen II)
ch. 7 Evangelicals past and present (Mark Noll)
ch. 8 Public theology in service to a national conversation (Michael J. Himes)

Reading the Bible from the Margins
Additional Info:
This introduction to reading and understanding the Bible focuses on perspectives that are often ignored. Here, emphasis is placed on how issues involving race, class, and gender influence our understanding of the Bible. The author shows how "standard" readings of the Bible are not always acceptable to people or groups on the "margins." The poor and those who are targets of discrimination because of their ethnic group or gender may ...
This introduction to reading and understanding the Bible focuses on perspectives that are often ignored. Here, emphasis is placed on how issues involving race, class, and gender influence our understanding of the Bible. The author shows how "standard" readings of the Bible are not always acceptable to people or groups on the "margins." The poor and those who are targets of discrimination because of their ethnic group or gender may ...
Additional Info:
This introduction to reading and understanding the Bible focuses on perspectives that are often ignored. Here, emphasis is placed on how issues involving race, class, and gender influence our understanding of the Bible. The author shows how "standard" readings of the Bible are not always acceptable to people or groups on the "margins." The poor and those who are targets of discrimination because of their ethnic group or gender may have quite different insights and understandings of biblical texts that can be of value to all readers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Liberating the Bible
The Bible in the Real World
Reading through Others' Eyes
ch. 1 Learning to Read: The Importance of Words
Defining Terms
Imposing Twenty-First-Century Meanings on Ancient Texts
Defining Racism
The Factor of Language
A Han Reading
Multiple Consciousness
The Center-Margin Dichotomy
ch. 2 Reading the Bible from the Center
A Privileged Reading
A Biblical Paradigm for Justifying Privilege
Pitfalls in Raising Consciousness
Words of Concern
Searching for the Abundant Life
ch. 3 Unmasking the Biblical Justification of Racism and Classism
Justifying Racism
Beyond the Black-and-White Dichotomy
African Americans
Amerindians
Asians
Jews
Justifying Classism
Classism from the Margins
ch. 4 Unmasking the Biblical Justification of Sexism
Justifying Patriarchy
Sexism from the Margins
Feminism among Women of Color
Justifying Homophobia
Homophobia from the Margins
The Hermeneutical Circle
ch. 5 Who Do You Say I Am?
The Economically Marginalized Christ
A Hispanic Christ
An Amerindian Christ
An Asian American Christ
A Black Christ
A Female Christ
A Gay Christ
Perceiving the Character of Divinity
God Sides with Today's Crucified People
God Is Victorious
ch. 6 Jesus Saves
The Rich Young Ruler, the Sinning Tax Collector, and the Begging Blind Man
More Than Just Climbing Sycamore Trees
I Once Was Blind
Of Sheep and Goats
Communal Essence of Justice
Are You Saved?
ch. 7 Can't We All Just Get Along?
The Dysfunctional Family
Forgive and Forget?
Power to Direct the Discourse
Power to Name
Power Not to See a Need to Repent
Power to Become the "Real" Victim
Cheap Forgiveness
What the Center Can Learn about the Bible
Exodus: God the Liberator
Amos: God the Seeker of Justice
The Gospels: God the Doer
Acts and the Letters from Paul: God the Subverter
The Bible in the Twenty-First Century
Notes
Bibliography
General Index
Scripture Index
This introduction to reading and understanding the Bible focuses on perspectives that are often ignored. Here, emphasis is placed on how issues involving race, class, and gender influence our understanding of the Bible. The author shows how "standard" readings of the Bible are not always acceptable to people or groups on the "margins." The poor and those who are targets of discrimination because of their ethnic group or gender may have quite different insights and understandings of biblical texts that can be of value to all readers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Liberating the Bible
The Bible in the Real World
Reading through Others' Eyes
ch. 1 Learning to Read: The Importance of Words
Defining Terms
Imposing Twenty-First-Century Meanings on Ancient Texts
Defining Racism
The Factor of Language
A Han Reading
Multiple Consciousness
The Center-Margin Dichotomy
ch. 2 Reading the Bible from the Center
A Privileged Reading
A Biblical Paradigm for Justifying Privilege
Pitfalls in Raising Consciousness
Words of Concern
Searching for the Abundant Life
ch. 3 Unmasking the Biblical Justification of Racism and Classism
Justifying Racism
Beyond the Black-and-White Dichotomy
African Americans
Amerindians
Asians
Jews
Justifying Classism
Classism from the Margins
ch. 4 Unmasking the Biblical Justification of Sexism
Justifying Patriarchy
Sexism from the Margins
Feminism among Women of Color
Justifying Homophobia
Homophobia from the Margins
The Hermeneutical Circle
ch. 5 Who Do You Say I Am?
The Economically Marginalized Christ
A Hispanic Christ
An Amerindian Christ
An Asian American Christ
A Black Christ
A Female Christ
A Gay Christ
Perceiving the Character of Divinity
God Sides with Today's Crucified People
God Is Victorious
ch. 6 Jesus Saves
The Rich Young Ruler, the Sinning Tax Collector, and the Begging Blind Man
More Than Just Climbing Sycamore Trees
I Once Was Blind
Of Sheep and Goats
Communal Essence of Justice
Are You Saved?
ch. 7 Can't We All Just Get Along?
The Dysfunctional Family
Forgive and Forget?
Power to Direct the Discourse
Power to Name
Power Not to See a Need to Repent
Power to Become the "Real" Victim
Cheap Forgiveness
What the Center Can Learn about the Bible
Exodus: God the Liberator
Amos: God the Seeker of Justice
The Gospels: God the Doer
Acts and the Letters from Paul: God the Subverter
The Bible in the Twenty-First Century
Notes
Bibliography
General Index
Scripture Index

Metateaching and the Instructional Map
Additional Info:
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different ...
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different ...
Additional Info:
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different aspects of teaching. Ideas from the fields of cartography and orienteering will give you a fresh angle from which to view your teaching practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Passages and Pathfinders
Introduction
ch. 1: Of Story and Journey, Map, and Place
ch. 2: The Essence of Maps
ch. 3: Metacognition and Metateaching
ch. 4: The Instructional Map Explained
ch. 5: Using the Instructional Map
ch. 6: Observations, Presentations. and Student Reflections
ch. 7: The Instructional Map and Various Instructional Approaches
References
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different aspects of teaching. Ideas from the fields of cartography and orienteering will give you a fresh angle from which to view your teaching practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Passages and Pathfinders
Introduction
ch. 1: Of Story and Journey, Map, and Place
ch. 2: The Essence of Maps
ch. 3: Metacognition and Metateaching
ch. 4: The Instructional Map Explained
ch. 5: Using the Instructional Map
ch. 6: Observations, Presentations. and Student Reflections
ch. 7: The Instructional Map and Various Instructional Approaches
References

The Ideal Seminary: Pursuing Excellence in Theological Education
Additional Info:
The president of Pittsburgh Theological Seminary addresses everyone who has a stake in theological schools and education: educators, administrators, students, and donors. He discusses institutional challenges, program challenges, and student concerns. Each chapter ends with an issue for discussion. (From the Publisher)
The president of Pittsburgh Theological Seminary addresses everyone who has a stake in theological schools and education: educators, administrators, students, and donors. He discusses institutional challenges, program challenges, and student concerns. Each chapter ends with an issue for discussion. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The president of Pittsburgh Theological Seminary addresses everyone who has a stake in theological schools and education: educators, administrators, students, and donors. He discusses institutional challenges, program challenges, and student concerns. Each chapter ends with an issue for discussion. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Why Seminary Education?
Part I. Institutional Challenges
Seminary Education and Leadership
The Search for Excellence among Theological Schools
Academic Freedom and Seminary Education
) Who Owns the Seminary?
Part II. Program Challenges
Tomorrow's Seminary Curriculum
Making the World Your Classroom
The Globalization and Multiculturalization of Theological Education
Expanding the Horizons of Seminary Education
Part III. Student Concerns
Who Is Qualified to Minister?
Going through Seminary without Losing Your Faith
The Place of Prayer in Seminary Education
Toward the Ideal Seminary
Afterword: Developing a Strategy for Financial Stability
(7) Notes
Bibliography
Acknowledgments
Index
The president of Pittsburgh Theological Seminary addresses everyone who has a stake in theological schools and education: educators, administrators, students, and donors. He discusses institutional challenges, program challenges, and student concerns. Each chapter ends with an issue for discussion. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Why Seminary Education?
Part I. Institutional Challenges
Seminary Education and Leadership
The Search for Excellence among Theological Schools
Academic Freedom and Seminary Education
) Who Owns the Seminary?
Part II. Program Challenges
Tomorrow's Seminary Curriculum
Making the World Your Classroom
The Globalization and Multiculturalization of Theological Education
Expanding the Horizons of Seminary Education
Part III. Student Concerns
Who Is Qualified to Minister?
Going through Seminary without Losing Your Faith
The Place of Prayer in Seminary Education
Toward the Ideal Seminary
Afterword: Developing a Strategy for Financial Stability
(7) Notes
Bibliography
Acknowledgments
Index

Making a Difference: University Students of Color Speak Out
Additional Info:
In Making a Difference, students of color relate their first-hand experiences with educational systems and campus living conditions. Their narratives provide an insider perspective useful to anyone working on diversity issues who is trying to improve institutional culture and policy. The contextualizing essays following the student narratives are written by academics and student affairs professionals who draw links between issues of institutional access, recruitment and retention of students and faculty ...
In Making a Difference, students of color relate their first-hand experiences with educational systems and campus living conditions. Their narratives provide an insider perspective useful to anyone working on diversity issues who is trying to improve institutional culture and policy. The contextualizing essays following the student narratives are written by academics and student affairs professionals who draw links between issues of institutional access, recruitment and retention of students and faculty ...
Additional Info:
In Making a Difference, students of color relate their first-hand experiences with educational systems and campus living conditions. Their narratives provide an insider perspective useful to anyone working on diversity issues who is trying to improve institutional culture and policy. The contextualizing essays following the student narratives are written by academics and student affairs professionals who draw links between issues of institutional access, recruitment and retention of students and faculty of color, curriculum changes, teaching strategies--especially for teaching whiteness and racial identity formation, campus climate, and the relation between an individual institution's history of dealing with race to developments in public policy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: Genesis of This Project (Julia Lesage)
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Conceptualizing Diversity (Julia Lesage)
Part I University Students of Color in Their Own Voices
ch. 1 School, Language, and Identity
ch. 2 Hopes and Coalitions and the Realities of Campus Life
ch. 3 Reframing the Educational Process and the Community as a Whole
Part II Race and Ethnic Relations in Higher Education
ch. 4 The Tellers, the Tales, and the Audience: Narratives by Students of Color (Debbie Storrs and Julia Lesage)
ch. 5 Diversity in Higher Education Nationwide (Donna Wong)
ch. 6 A Historical Look at Students of Color at the University of Oregon (Donna Wong)
ch. 7 Hate Crimes, White Backlash, and Teaching about Whiteness (Abby L. Ferber)
Conclusion: This Is Only the Beginning (Abby L. Ferber and Donna Wang)
App A Checklist Method of Evaluating Diversity in Your Institution
Resources
About the Authors
Index
In Making a Difference, students of color relate their first-hand experiences with educational systems and campus living conditions. Their narratives provide an insider perspective useful to anyone working on diversity issues who is trying to improve institutional culture and policy. The contextualizing essays following the student narratives are written by academics and student affairs professionals who draw links between issues of institutional access, recruitment and retention of students and faculty of color, curriculum changes, teaching strategies--especially for teaching whiteness and racial identity formation, campus climate, and the relation between an individual institution's history of dealing with race to developments in public policy. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: Genesis of This Project (Julia Lesage)
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Conceptualizing Diversity (Julia Lesage)
Part I University Students of Color in Their Own Voices
ch. 1 School, Language, and Identity
ch. 2 Hopes and Coalitions and the Realities of Campus Life
ch. 3 Reframing the Educational Process and the Community as a Whole
Part II Race and Ethnic Relations in Higher Education
ch. 4 The Tellers, the Tales, and the Audience: Narratives by Students of Color (Debbie Storrs and Julia Lesage)
ch. 5 Diversity in Higher Education Nationwide (Donna Wong)
ch. 6 A Historical Look at Students of Color at the University of Oregon (Donna Wong)
ch. 7 Hate Crimes, White Backlash, and Teaching about Whiteness (Abby L. Ferber)
Conclusion: This Is Only the Beginning (Abby L. Ferber and Donna Wang)
App A Checklist Method of Evaluating Diversity in Your Institution
Resources
About the Authors
Index

Called to Teach: The Vocation of the Presbyterian Educator
Additional Info:
Presbyterian educators Duncan Ferguson and William Weston argue that the calling to teach in higher education is distinctively Reformed and a primary mission of the Presbyterian church. This collection of essays first lays the biblical, theological, and historical foundations for this calling, then explores how it is lived out today in educational institutions -- church-related as well as secular. Concluding that today's church must have the nurture of the teacher ...
Presbyterian educators Duncan Ferguson and William Weston argue that the calling to teach in higher education is distinctively Reformed and a primary mission of the Presbyterian church. This collection of essays first lays the biblical, theological, and historical foundations for this calling, then explores how it is lived out today in educational institutions -- church-related as well as secular. Concluding that today's church must have the nurture of the teacher ...
Additional Info:
Presbyterian educators Duncan Ferguson and William Weston argue that the calling to teach in higher education is distinctively Reformed and a primary mission of the Presbyterian church. This collection of essays first lays the biblical, theological, and historical foundations for this calling, then explores how it is lived out today in educational institutions -- church-related as well as secular. Concluding that today's church must have the nurture of the teacher as a central part of its mission, Called to Teach will be a welcomed resource for all those who have the vocation of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Contributors
Introduction
ch. 1 The Dying Light and Glowing Embers of Presbyterian Higher Education (William Weston)
Section 1 The Calling to Teach: Foundations
ch. 2 The Biblical Foundations of Presbyterian Education (Darwin K. Glassford)
ch. 3 God, Creation, and Covenant: The Reformed Tradition and the Vocation of the Presbyterian Teacher (Timothy A. Beach-Verhey)
ch. 4 The Reformed Understanding of Vocation in History (R. Ward Holder and John Kuykendall)
Section 2 The Context of Teaching: Engagement
ch. 5 The American Presbyterian College (William Weston and Dale Soden)
ch. 6 Teaching in the Collegiate Institutions of the Church (Duncan S. Ferguson)
ch. 7 Teaching in the Theological Schools of the Church (W. Eugene March)
Section 3 Case Studies of Teaching: Application
ch. 8 The Vocation of Teaching in the Church-Related College Introduction (Margaret Cowan)
The Vocation of Teaching at Maryville College (Margaret Cowan)
Faith and Learning at Waynesburg College (Jeffrey Kisner)
Rhodes College: More than Historical (Stephen Haynes)
ch. 9 The Vocation of Teaching in Secular and Public Colleges and Universities (Iain S. Maclean and Cynthia Boyle)
ch. 10 Teaching and Learning in Presbyterian Theological Education Introduction (Edward C. (Ted) Zaragosa)
From the Exception to the Norm: Women in Seminaries and Ministry (Cynthia M. Campbell)
A Reformed Theological Perspective at Johnson C. Smith Theological Seminary (David M. Wallace)
Presbyterian Teaching at a United Methodist Seminary (Edward C. (Ted) Zaragoza)
ch. 11 The Dawning of the Light (Duncan S. Ferguson)
The Vocation of the Presbyterian Teacher: A Select Annotated Bibliography (Arlin C. Migliazzo)
Notes
References
Index of Scripture References
Index of Subjects and Names
Presbyterian educators Duncan Ferguson and William Weston argue that the calling to teach in higher education is distinctively Reformed and a primary mission of the Presbyterian church. This collection of essays first lays the biblical, theological, and historical foundations for this calling, then explores how it is lived out today in educational institutions -- church-related as well as secular. Concluding that today's church must have the nurture of the teacher as a central part of its mission, Called to Teach will be a welcomed resource for all those who have the vocation of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Contributors
Introduction
ch. 1 The Dying Light and Glowing Embers of Presbyterian Higher Education (William Weston)
Section 1 The Calling to Teach: Foundations
ch. 2 The Biblical Foundations of Presbyterian Education (Darwin K. Glassford)
ch. 3 God, Creation, and Covenant: The Reformed Tradition and the Vocation of the Presbyterian Teacher (Timothy A. Beach-Verhey)
ch. 4 The Reformed Understanding of Vocation in History (R. Ward Holder and John Kuykendall)
Section 2 The Context of Teaching: Engagement
ch. 5 The American Presbyterian College (William Weston and Dale Soden)
ch. 6 Teaching in the Collegiate Institutions of the Church (Duncan S. Ferguson)
ch. 7 Teaching in the Theological Schools of the Church (W. Eugene March)
Section 3 Case Studies of Teaching: Application
ch. 8 The Vocation of Teaching in the Church-Related College Introduction (Margaret Cowan)
The Vocation of Teaching at Maryville College (Margaret Cowan)
Faith and Learning at Waynesburg College (Jeffrey Kisner)
Rhodes College: More than Historical (Stephen Haynes)
ch. 9 The Vocation of Teaching in Secular and Public Colleges and Universities (Iain S. Maclean and Cynthia Boyle)
ch. 10 Teaching and Learning in Presbyterian Theological Education Introduction (Edward C. (Ted) Zaragosa)
From the Exception to the Norm: Women in Seminaries and Ministry (Cynthia M. Campbell)
A Reformed Theological Perspective at Johnson C. Smith Theological Seminary (David M. Wallace)
Presbyterian Teaching at a United Methodist Seminary (Edward C. (Ted) Zaragoza)
ch. 11 The Dawning of the Light (Duncan S. Ferguson)
The Vocation of the Presbyterian Teacher: A Select Annotated Bibliography (Arlin C. Migliazzo)
Notes
References
Index of Scripture References
Index of Subjects and Names

Using Film to Teach New Testament
Additional Info:
Boyer describes a teaching method which uses popular movies to explore themes encountered in the New Testament. Topics include, for example, martyrdom in Witness and The Gospel of Luke and apocalypse in Waterworld and The Book of Revelation. A modernized film interpretation of Shakespeare's Rome. (From the Publisher)
Boyer describes a teaching method which uses popular movies to explore themes encountered in the New Testament. Topics include, for example, martyrdom in Witness and The Gospel of Luke and apocalypse in Waterworld and The Book of Revelation. A modernized film interpretation of Shakespeare's Rome. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Boyer describes a teaching method which uses popular movies to explore themes encountered in the New Testament. Topics include, for example, martyrdom in Witness and The Gospel of Luke and apocalypse in Waterworld and The Book of Revelation. A modernized film interpretation of Shakespeare's Rome. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Teaching Literature
The New Testament is Literature
Literary Redaction Criticism: The Dreamer of Oz: L. Frank Baum and The Wizard of Oz
The Elements of a Story: The Wizard of Oz
Teaching Mark's Gospel
The Good Mother
Phenomenon
Sommersby
The Shawshank Redemption
Teaching Matthew's Gospel
Being There
Willow
Teaching Luke's Gospel
Witness
Teaching John's Gospel
Jeremiah Johnson
Powder
The Shawshank Redemption
Teaching the Acts of the Apostles
The Mission
Teaching Pauline Theology
Regarding Henry
The Doctor
Teaching the Book of Revelation
Pale Rider
The Milagro Beanfield War
Waterworld
Teaching the "Vineyard" Metaphor
A Walk in the Clouds
Teaching Hermeneutics
Romeo and Juliet
Boyer describes a teaching method which uses popular movies to explore themes encountered in the New Testament. Topics include, for example, martyrdom in Witness and The Gospel of Luke and apocalypse in Waterworld and The Book of Revelation. A modernized film interpretation of Shakespeare's Rome. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Teaching Literature
The New Testament is Literature
Literary Redaction Criticism: The Dreamer of Oz: L. Frank Baum and The Wizard of Oz
The Elements of a Story: The Wizard of Oz
Teaching Mark's Gospel
The Good Mother
Phenomenon
Sommersby
The Shawshank Redemption
Teaching Matthew's Gospel
Being There
Willow
Teaching Luke's Gospel
Witness
Teaching John's Gospel
Jeremiah Johnson
Powder
The Shawshank Redemption
Teaching the Acts of the Apostles
The Mission
Teaching Pauline Theology
Regarding Henry
The Doctor
Teaching the Book of Revelation
Pale Rider
The Milagro Beanfield War
Waterworld
Teaching the "Vineyard" Metaphor
A Walk in the Clouds
Teaching Hermeneutics
Romeo and Juliet

Humor as an Instructional Defibrillator: Evidence-Based Techniques in Teaching and Assessment
Additional Info:
Grab those paddles. Charge 300. Clear! "Ouch!" Now how do you feel? "Great!"
Humor can be used as a systematic teaching or assessment tool in your classroom and course Web site. It can shock students to attention and bring deadly, boring course content to life. Since some students have the attention span of goat cheese, we need to find creative online and offline techniques to hook them, engage their ...
Grab those paddles. Charge 300. Clear! "Ouch!" Now how do you feel? "Great!"
Humor can be used as a systematic teaching or assessment tool in your classroom and course Web site. It can shock students to attention and bring deadly, boring course content to life. Since some students have the attention span of goat cheese, we need to find creative online and offline techniques to hook them, engage their ...
Additional Info:
Grab those paddles. Charge 300. Clear! "Ouch!" Now how do you feel? "Great!"
Humor can be used as a systematic teaching or assessment tool in your classroom and course Web site. It can shock students to attention and bring deadly, boring course content to life. Since some students have the attention span of goat cheese, we need to find creative online and offline techniques to hook them, engage their emotions, and focus their minds and eyeballs on learning.
This book offers numerous techniques on how to effectively use humor in lectures and in-class activities, printed materials, course Web sites and course tests and exams.
These techniques can convert any course into an adult version of Sesame Street. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Part I Teaching
ch. 1 Creating Humor to Hook Your Students
ch. 2 The Active Ingredients in Humor and Laughter
ch. 3 Lights, Camera, Active Learning!
ch. 4 www.hilariouscourse.yeahright
Part II Assessment
ch. 5 Assessment is Like a box of Chocolates ...
ch. 6 Do-It-Yourself Test Construction
ch. 7 Detecting Flaws in This Old Test
ch. 8 Injecting Jest into Your Test
Conclusions
References
Index
Grab those paddles. Charge 300. Clear! "Ouch!" Now how do you feel? "Great!"
Humor can be used as a systematic teaching or assessment tool in your classroom and course Web site. It can shock students to attention and bring deadly, boring course content to life. Since some students have the attention span of goat cheese, we need to find creative online and offline techniques to hook them, engage their emotions, and focus their minds and eyeballs on learning.
This book offers numerous techniques on how to effectively use humor in lectures and in-class activities, printed materials, course Web sites and course tests and exams.
These techniques can convert any course into an adult version of Sesame Street. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Part I Teaching
ch. 1 Creating Humor to Hook Your Students
ch. 2 The Active Ingredients in Humor and Laughter
ch. 3 Lights, Camera, Active Learning!
ch. 4 www.hilariouscourse.yeahright
Part II Assessment
ch. 5 Assessment is Like a box of Chocolates ...
ch. 6 Do-It-Yourself Test Construction
ch. 7 Detecting Flaws in This Old Test
ch. 8 Injecting Jest into Your Test
Conclusions
References
Index

Service-Learning and Learning Communities: Tools for Integration and Assessment
Additional Info:
"This publication attempts to provide fundamental theory about service-learning and learning communities, along with descriptions of best practices, lessons learned, and assessment strategies. The text is designed to provide resources to help readers offer service-learning experiences for their students. Learning communities are now commonly structured into colleges and universities across the United States, and research suggests that they increase student engagement and persistence. Coupling learning communities and service learning provides ...
"This publication attempts to provide fundamental theory about service-learning and learning communities, along with descriptions of best practices, lessons learned, and assessment strategies. The text is designed to provide resources to help readers offer service-learning experiences for their students. Learning communities are now commonly structured into colleges and universities across the United States, and research suggests that they increase student engagement and persistence. Coupling learning communities and service learning provides ...
Additional Info:
"This publication attempts to provide fundamental theory about service-learning and learning communities, along with descriptions of best practices, lessons learned, and assessment strategies. The text is designed to provide resources to help readers offer service-learning experiences for their students. Learning communities are now commonly structured into colleges and universities across the United States, and research suggests that they increase student engagement and persistence. Coupling learning communities and service learning provides contexts for learning and deepens students' learning experiences, but it requires adjustments to the organization, management, and planning of activities for the course."
Table Of Content:
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Service-Learning in Learning Communities
ch. 2 Service-Learning and Civic Engagement
ch. 3 Service-Learning Basics
ch. 4 Assessment of Service-Learning
ch. 5 Portfolio Development
ch. 6 Portfolio Evaluation
ch. 7 Utilizing Case Studies to Link Theory to the Service-Learning Experience
ch. 8 Establishing and Maintaining Community Service-Learning Partners
ch. 9 Risk Management
ch. 10 What Works: Lessons Learned the hard Way
ch. 11 Leading Change on Campus
Appendix: Sample norms
1. Risk Assessment and Release
2. Partners Application
3. Letter of Understanding
4. Supervisor's Evaluation of Service Learner
5. Student Evaluation of Service-Learning
6. Service-Learning Faculty evaluation
7. Service-Learning Partners Agreement
Works Cited
About the Authors
"This publication attempts to provide fundamental theory about service-learning and learning communities, along with descriptions of best practices, lessons learned, and assessment strategies. The text is designed to provide resources to help readers offer service-learning experiences for their students. Learning communities are now commonly structured into colleges and universities across the United States, and research suggests that they increase student engagement and persistence. Coupling learning communities and service learning provides contexts for learning and deepens students' learning experiences, but it requires adjustments to the organization, management, and planning of activities for the course."
Table Of Content:
Preface and Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Service-Learning in Learning Communities
ch. 2 Service-Learning and Civic Engagement
ch. 3 Service-Learning Basics
ch. 4 Assessment of Service-Learning
ch. 5 Portfolio Development
ch. 6 Portfolio Evaluation
ch. 7 Utilizing Case Studies to Link Theory to the Service-Learning Experience
ch. 8 Establishing and Maintaining Community Service-Learning Partners
ch. 9 Risk Management
ch. 10 What Works: Lessons Learned the hard Way
ch. 11 Leading Change on Campus
Appendix: Sample norms
1. Risk Assessment and Release
2. Partners Application
3. Letter of Understanding
4. Supervisor's Evaluation of Service Learner
5. Student Evaluation of Service-Learning
6. Service-Learning Faculty evaluation
7. Service-Learning Partners Agreement
Works Cited
About the Authors

A Many Colored Kingdom: Multicultural Dynamics for Spiritual Formation
Additional Info:
A Many Colored Kingdom explores Christian formation and teaching in the church, with a particular focus on intercultural and interethnic relationships.
Well qualified to speak on issues of diversity, the authors describe relevant aspects of their own personal journeys, presented in compelling narrative form. They go on to identify key issues emerging from their Scripture studies and teaching experiences. A final chapter contains a conversation among the authors ...
A Many Colored Kingdom explores Christian formation and teaching in the church, with a particular focus on intercultural and interethnic relationships.
Well qualified to speak on issues of diversity, the authors describe relevant aspects of their own personal journeys, presented in compelling narrative form. They go on to identify key issues emerging from their Scripture studies and teaching experiences. A final chapter contains a conversation among the authors ...
Additional Info:
A Many Colored Kingdom explores Christian formation and teaching in the church, with a particular focus on intercultural and interethnic relationships.
Well qualified to speak on issues of diversity, the authors describe relevant aspects of their own personal journeys, presented in compelling narrative form. They go on to identify key issues emerging from their Scripture studies and teaching experiences. A final chapter contains a conversation among the authors as they respond to one another's insights and concerns.
This book will be required reading for those engaged in as well as those preparing for a life of teaching and ministry in our increasingly multicultural world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction : An exploration and an experiment / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier, S. Steve Kang, and Gary A. Parrett
ch. 1 Three stories / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier, S. Steve Kang, and Gary A. Parrett
ch. 2 Lord of the nations / Gary A. Parrett and S. Steve Kang
ch. 3 The wondrous cross and the broken wall / Gary A. Parrett
ch. 4 Salient theoretical frameworks for forming kingdom citizens / S. Steve Kang
Prejudice and conversion / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier
ch. 5 Becoming a culturally sensitive minister / Gary A. Parrett
ch. 6 The formation process in a learning community / S. Steve Kang
ch. 7 From hospitality to Shalom / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier
Conclusion : Living the biblical vision / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier, S. Steve Kang, and Gary A. Parrett
A Many Colored Kingdom explores Christian formation and teaching in the church, with a particular focus on intercultural and interethnic relationships.
Well qualified to speak on issues of diversity, the authors describe relevant aspects of their own personal journeys, presented in compelling narrative form. They go on to identify key issues emerging from their Scripture studies and teaching experiences. A final chapter contains a conversation among the authors as they respond to one another's insights and concerns.
This book will be required reading for those engaged in as well as those preparing for a life of teaching and ministry in our increasingly multicultural world. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction : An exploration and an experiment / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier, S. Steve Kang, and Gary A. Parrett
ch. 1 Three stories / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier, S. Steve Kang, and Gary A. Parrett
ch. 2 Lord of the nations / Gary A. Parrett and S. Steve Kang
ch. 3 The wondrous cross and the broken wall / Gary A. Parrett
ch. 4 Salient theoretical frameworks for forming kingdom citizens / S. Steve Kang
Prejudice and conversion / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier
ch. 5 Becoming a culturally sensitive minister / Gary A. Parrett
ch. 6 The formation process in a learning community / S. Steve Kang
ch. 7 From hospitality to Shalom / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier
Conclusion : Living the biblical vision / Elizabeth Conde-Frazier, S. Steve Kang, and Gary A. Parrett

Visual Pedagogy: Media Cultures in and Beyond the Classroom
Additional Info:
In classrooms, museums, public health clinics and beyond, the educational uses of visual media have proliferated over the past fifty years. Film, video, television, and digital media have been integral to the development of new pedagogical theories and practices, globalization processes, and identity and community formation. Yet, Brian Goldfarb argues, the educational roles of visual technologies have not been fully understood or appreciated. He contends that in order to understand ...
In classrooms, museums, public health clinics and beyond, the educational uses of visual media have proliferated over the past fifty years. Film, video, television, and digital media have been integral to the development of new pedagogical theories and practices, globalization processes, and identity and community formation. Yet, Brian Goldfarb argues, the educational roles of visual technologies have not been fully understood or appreciated. He contends that in order to understand ...
Additional Info:
In classrooms, museums, public health clinics and beyond, the educational uses of visual media have proliferated over the past fifty years. Film, video, television, and digital media have been integral to the development of new pedagogical theories and practices, globalization processes, and identity and community formation. Yet, Brian Goldfarb argues, the educational roles of visual technologies have not been fully understood or appreciated. He contends that in order to understand the intersections of new media and learning, we need to recognize the sweeping scope of the technologically infused visual pedagogy both in and outside the classroom. From Samoa to the United States mainland to Africa and Brazil, from museums to city streets, Visual Pedagogy explores the educational applications of visual media in different institutional settings during the past half century. Looking beyond the popular media texts and mainstream classroom technologies that are the objects of most analyses of media and education, Goldfarb encourages readers to see a range of media subcultures as pedagogical tools. He illuminates the educational uses of visual technologies in schools and other venues. The projects he analyzes include media produced by AIDS/HIV advocacy groups and social services agencies for classroom use in the 90s; documentary and fictional cinemas of West Africa used by the French government and then by those resisting it; museum exhibitions; and TV Anhembi, a municipally sponsored collaboration between the television industry and community-based videographers in Sao Paolo, Brazil. Combining media studies, pedagogical theory, and art history, and including an appendix of visual media resources and ideas about the most productive ways to utilize visual technologies for educational purposes, Visual Pedagogy will be useful to educators, administrators, and activists. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: An Ethos of Visual Pedagogy
Pt. 1 Historicizing New Technologies in the Classroom
ch. 1 Media and Global Education: Television's Debut in Classrooms from Washington, D.C., to American Samoa
ch. 2 Students a Producers: Critical Video Production
ch. 3 Critical Pedagogy at the End of the Rainbow Curriculum: Media Activism in the Sphere of Sex Ed
ch. 4 Peer Education and Interactivity: Youth Cultures and New Media Technologies in Schools and Beyond
Pt. 2 Visual Pedagogy beyond Schools
ch. 5 Museum Pedagogy: The Blockbuster Exhibition as Educational Technology
ch. 6 A Pedagogical Cinema: Development Theory, Colonialism, and Postliberation African Film
ch. 7 Local Television and Community Politics in Brazil: Sao Paulo's TV Anhembi
App An Annotated List of Media Organizations, Distributors, and Resources
Notes
Bibliography
Index
In classrooms, museums, public health clinics and beyond, the educational uses of visual media have proliferated over the past fifty years. Film, video, television, and digital media have been integral to the development of new pedagogical theories and practices, globalization processes, and identity and community formation. Yet, Brian Goldfarb argues, the educational roles of visual technologies have not been fully understood or appreciated. He contends that in order to understand the intersections of new media and learning, we need to recognize the sweeping scope of the technologically infused visual pedagogy both in and outside the classroom. From Samoa to the United States mainland to Africa and Brazil, from museums to city streets, Visual Pedagogy explores the educational applications of visual media in different institutional settings during the past half century. Looking beyond the popular media texts and mainstream classroom technologies that are the objects of most analyses of media and education, Goldfarb encourages readers to see a range of media subcultures as pedagogical tools. He illuminates the educational uses of visual technologies in schools and other venues. The projects he analyzes include media produced by AIDS/HIV advocacy groups and social services agencies for classroom use in the 90s; documentary and fictional cinemas of West Africa used by the French government and then by those resisting it; museum exhibitions; and TV Anhembi, a municipally sponsored collaboration between the television industry and community-based videographers in Sao Paolo, Brazil. Combining media studies, pedagogical theory, and art history, and including an appendix of visual media resources and ideas about the most productive ways to utilize visual technologies for educational purposes, Visual Pedagogy will be useful to educators, administrators, and activists. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: An Ethos of Visual Pedagogy
Pt. 1 Historicizing New Technologies in the Classroom
ch. 1 Media and Global Education: Television's Debut in Classrooms from Washington, D.C., to American Samoa
ch. 2 Students a Producers: Critical Video Production
ch. 3 Critical Pedagogy at the End of the Rainbow Curriculum: Media Activism in the Sphere of Sex Ed
ch. 4 Peer Education and Interactivity: Youth Cultures and New Media Technologies in Schools and Beyond
Pt. 2 Visual Pedagogy beyond Schools
ch. 5 Museum Pedagogy: The Blockbuster Exhibition as Educational Technology
ch. 6 A Pedagogical Cinema: Development Theory, Colonialism, and Postliberation African Film
ch. 7 Local Television and Community Politics in Brazil: Sao Paulo's TV Anhembi
App An Annotated List of Media Organizations, Distributors, and Resources
Notes
Bibliography
Index


Understanding by Design
Additional Info:
What is understanding and how does it differ from knowledge? How can we determine the big ideas worth understanding? Why is understanding an important teaching goal, and how do we know when students have attained it? How can we create a rigorous and engaging curriculum that focuses on understanding and leads to improved student performance in today's high-stakes, standards-based environment?
Authors Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe answer these ...
What is understanding and how does it differ from knowledge? How can we determine the big ideas worth understanding? Why is understanding an important teaching goal, and how do we know when students have attained it? How can we create a rigorous and engaging curriculum that focuses on understanding and leads to improved student performance in today's high-stakes, standards-based environment?
Authors Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe answer these ...
Additional Info:
What is understanding and how does it differ from knowledge? How can we determine the big ideas worth understanding? Why is understanding an important teaching goal, and how do we know when students have attained it? How can we create a rigorous and engaging curriculum that focuses on understanding and leads to improved student performance in today's high-stakes, standards-based environment?
Authors Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe answer these and many other questions in this second edition of Understanding by Design. Drawing on feedback from thousands of educators around the world who have used the UbD framework since its introduction in 1998, the authors have revised and expanded their original work to guide educators across the K16 spectrum in the design of curriculum, assessment, and instruction. With an improved UbD Template at its core, the book explains the rationale of backward design and explores in greater depth the meaning of such key ideas as essential questions and transfer tasks. Readers will learn why the familiar coverage- and activity-based approaches to curriculum design fall short, and how a focus on the six facets of understanding can enrich student learning. With an expanded array of practical strategies, tools, and examples from all subject areas, the book demonstrates how the research-based principles of Understanding by Design apply to district frameworks as well as to individual units of curriculum.
Combining provocative ideas, thoughtful analysis, and tested approaches, Understanding by Design, Expanded 2nd Edition, offers teacher-designers a clear path to the creation of curriculum that ensures better learning and a more stimulating experience for students and teachers alike. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 What Is Backward Design?
ch. 2 What Is a Matter of Understanding?
ch. 3 Understanding Understanding
ch. 4 The Six Facets of Understanding
ch. 5 Thinking Like an Assessor
ch. 6 How Is Understanding Assessed in Light of the Six Facets?
ch. 7 What Is Uncoverage?
ch. 8 What the Facets Imply for Unit Design
ch. 9 Implications for Organizing Curriculum
ch. 10 Implications for Teaching
ch. 11 Putting It All Together: A Design Template
Afterword
Bibliography
What is understanding and how does it differ from knowledge? How can we determine the big ideas worth understanding? Why is understanding an important teaching goal, and how do we know when students have attained it? How can we create a rigorous and engaging curriculum that focuses on understanding and leads to improved student performance in today's high-stakes, standards-based environment?
Authors Grant Wiggins and Jay McTighe answer these and many other questions in this second edition of Understanding by Design. Drawing on feedback from thousands of educators around the world who have used the UbD framework since its introduction in 1998, the authors have revised and expanded their original work to guide educators across the K16 spectrum in the design of curriculum, assessment, and instruction. With an improved UbD Template at its core, the book explains the rationale of backward design and explores in greater depth the meaning of such key ideas as essential questions and transfer tasks. Readers will learn why the familiar coverage- and activity-based approaches to curriculum design fall short, and how a focus on the six facets of understanding can enrich student learning. With an expanded array of practical strategies, tools, and examples from all subject areas, the book demonstrates how the research-based principles of Understanding by Design apply to district frameworks as well as to individual units of curriculum.
Combining provocative ideas, thoughtful analysis, and tested approaches, Understanding by Design, Expanded 2nd Edition, offers teacher-designers a clear path to the creation of curriculum that ensures better learning and a more stimulating experience for students and teachers alike. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 What Is Backward Design?
ch. 2 What Is a Matter of Understanding?
ch. 3 Understanding Understanding
ch. 4 The Six Facets of Understanding
ch. 5 Thinking Like an Assessor
ch. 6 How Is Understanding Assessed in Light of the Six Facets?
ch. 7 What Is Uncoverage?
ch. 8 What the Facets Imply for Unit Design
ch. 9 Implications for Organizing Curriculum
ch. 10 Implications for Teaching
ch. 11 Putting It All Together: A Design Template
Afterword
Bibliography

Christian Higher Education Volume 2 Number 1
Additional Info:
Journal Issue
Journal Issue
Additional Info:
Journal Issue
Table Of Content:
ch.1 CHALLENGES TO CHRISTIAN HIGHER EDUCATION IN ASIA
ch. 2 CHRISTIAN UNIVERSITIES IN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE
ch. 3 CHALLENGES TO CHRISTIAN HIGHER EDUCATION IN ASIA: PERSPECTIVES OF A UNIVERSITY PRESIDENT
ch. 4 RELIGIOUS STUDIES IN CHRISTIAN UNIVERSITIES IN CONTEMPORARY ASIA: ITS RELATIONSHIP TO CHRISTIAN THEOLOGY
ch. 5 AN APPRECIATIVE INQUIRY INTO THE SPIRITUAL VALUES OF CHRISTIAN HIGHER EDUCATION
BOOK REVIEWS
Journal Issue
Table Of Content:
ch.1 CHALLENGES TO CHRISTIAN HIGHER EDUCATION IN ASIA
ch. 2 CHRISTIAN UNIVERSITIES IN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE
ch. 3 CHALLENGES TO CHRISTIAN HIGHER EDUCATION IN ASIA: PERSPECTIVES OF A UNIVERSITY PRESIDENT
ch. 4 RELIGIOUS STUDIES IN CHRISTIAN UNIVERSITIES IN CONTEMPORARY ASIA: ITS RELATIONSHIP TO CHRISTIAN THEOLOGY
ch. 5 AN APPRECIATIVE INQUIRY INTO THE SPIRITUAL VALUES OF CHRISTIAN HIGHER EDUCATION
BOOK REVIEWS

FIPSE: Thirty Years of Making a Difference
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.

The Power of Problem-Based Learning
Additional Info:
Problem-based learning is a powerful classroom process, which uses real world problems to motivate students to identify and apply research concepts and information, work collaboratively and communicate effectively. It is a strategy that promotes life-long habits of learning.
The University of Delaware is recognized internationally as a center of excellence in the use and development of PBL. This book presents the cumulative knowledge and practical experience acquired over ...
Problem-based learning is a powerful classroom process, which uses real world problems to motivate students to identify and apply research concepts and information, work collaboratively and communicate effectively. It is a strategy that promotes life-long habits of learning.
The University of Delaware is recognized internationally as a center of excellence in the use and development of PBL. This book presents the cumulative knowledge and practical experience acquired over ...
Additional Info:
Problem-based learning is a powerful classroom process, which uses real world problems to motivate students to identify and apply research concepts and information, work collaboratively and communicate effectively. It is a strategy that promotes life-long habits of learning.
The University of Delaware is recognized internationally as a center of excellence in the use and development of PBL. This book presents the cumulative knowledge and practical experience acquired over nearly a decade of integrating PBL in courses in a wide range of disciplines.
This "how to" book for college and university faculty. It focuses on the practical questions which anyone wishing to embark on PBL will want to know: "Where do I start?" – "How do you find problems?" – "What do I need to know about managing groups?" – "How do you grade in a PBL course?"
The book opens by outlining how the PBL program was developed at the University of Delaware -- covering such issues as faculty mentoring and institutional support -- to offer a model for implementation for other institutions.
The authors then address the practical questions involved in course transformation and planning for effective problem-based instruction, including writing problems, using the Internet, strategies for using groups, the use of peer tutors and assessment. They conclude with case studies from a variety of disciplines, including biochemistry, pre-law, physics, nursing, chemistry, political science and teacher education.
This introduction for faculty, department chairs and faculty developers will assist them to successfully harness this powerful process to improve learning outcomes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Why Problem-Based Learning? A Case Study of Institutional Change in Undergraduate Education (Barbara J. Duch, Susan E. Groh and Deborah E. Allen)
ch. 2 Faculty Mentoring Faculty: The Institute for Transforming Undergraduate Education (George H. Watson, Susan E. Groh)
ch. 3 Make it So: Administrative Support for Problem-Based Learning (John C. Cavanaugh)
ch. 4 Models for Problem-Based Instruction in Undergraduate Courses (Barbara J. Duch)
ch. 5 Writing Problems for Deeper Understanding (Barbara J. Duch)
ch. 6 Strategies for Using Groups (Deborah E. Allen, Barbara J. Duch and Susan E. Groh)
ch. 7 Getting Started in Problem-Based Learning (Harold B. White III)
ch. 8 Undergraduate Group Facilitators to Meet the Challenges of Multiple Classroom Groups (Deborah E. Allen and Harold B. Wright III)
ch. 9 Assessment Strategies in a Problem-Based Learning Course (Barbara J. Duch and Susan E. Groh)
ch. 10 Problem-Based Learning and the Three Cs of Technology (George H. Watson)
ch. 11 The Evolution of Problem-Based Learning in a Biotechnology Course (Sherry L. Kitto and Lesa G. Griffiths)
ch. 12 A PBL Course that Uses Research Articles as Problems (Harold B. White III)
ch. 13 Integrating Active Learning and the Use of Technology in Legal Studies Courses (Valerie P. Hans)
ch. 14 Problem-Based Learning in Large and Very Large Classes (Harry L. Shipman and Barbara J. Duch)
ch. 15 Problem-Based Learning: Preparing Nurses for Practice (Christine A. Cannon and Kathleen A. Schell)
ch. 16 The Large and the Small of It: A Case Study of Introductory Biology Courses (Richard S. Donham, Florence I. Schmieg and Deborah E. Allen)
ch. 17 PBL, Politics, and Democracy (Kurt Burch)
ch. 18 Using Problem-Based Learning in General Chemistry (Susan E. Groh)
ch. 19 A Skeptic's Look at PBL (Elizabeth M. Lieux
ch. 20 PBL in Preservice Teacher Education (Eugene Matusov, John St. Julien and James A. Whitson)
ch. 21 Introductory Physics: A Problem-Based Model (Barbara A. Williams)
Index
Problem-based learning is a powerful classroom process, which uses real world problems to motivate students to identify and apply research concepts and information, work collaboratively and communicate effectively. It is a strategy that promotes life-long habits of learning.
The University of Delaware is recognized internationally as a center of excellence in the use and development of PBL. This book presents the cumulative knowledge and practical experience acquired over nearly a decade of integrating PBL in courses in a wide range of disciplines.
This "how to" book for college and university faculty. It focuses on the practical questions which anyone wishing to embark on PBL will want to know: "Where do I start?" – "How do you find problems?" – "What do I need to know about managing groups?" – "How do you grade in a PBL course?"
The book opens by outlining how the PBL program was developed at the University of Delaware -- covering such issues as faculty mentoring and institutional support -- to offer a model for implementation for other institutions.
The authors then address the practical questions involved in course transformation and planning for effective problem-based instruction, including writing problems, using the Internet, strategies for using groups, the use of peer tutors and assessment. They conclude with case studies from a variety of disciplines, including biochemistry, pre-law, physics, nursing, chemistry, political science and teacher education.
This introduction for faculty, department chairs and faculty developers will assist them to successfully harness this powerful process to improve learning outcomes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Why Problem-Based Learning? A Case Study of Institutional Change in Undergraduate Education (Barbara J. Duch, Susan E. Groh and Deborah E. Allen)
ch. 2 Faculty Mentoring Faculty: The Institute for Transforming Undergraduate Education (George H. Watson, Susan E. Groh)
ch. 3 Make it So: Administrative Support for Problem-Based Learning (John C. Cavanaugh)
ch. 4 Models for Problem-Based Instruction in Undergraduate Courses (Barbara J. Duch)
ch. 5 Writing Problems for Deeper Understanding (Barbara J. Duch)
ch. 6 Strategies for Using Groups (Deborah E. Allen, Barbara J. Duch and Susan E. Groh)
ch. 7 Getting Started in Problem-Based Learning (Harold B. White III)
ch. 8 Undergraduate Group Facilitators to Meet the Challenges of Multiple Classroom Groups (Deborah E. Allen and Harold B. Wright III)
ch. 9 Assessment Strategies in a Problem-Based Learning Course (Barbara J. Duch and Susan E. Groh)
ch. 10 Problem-Based Learning and the Three Cs of Technology (George H. Watson)
ch. 11 The Evolution of Problem-Based Learning in a Biotechnology Course (Sherry L. Kitto and Lesa G. Griffiths)
ch. 12 A PBL Course that Uses Research Articles as Problems (Harold B. White III)
ch. 13 Integrating Active Learning and the Use of Technology in Legal Studies Courses (Valerie P. Hans)
ch. 14 Problem-Based Learning in Large and Very Large Classes (Harry L. Shipman and Barbara J. Duch)
ch. 15 Problem-Based Learning: Preparing Nurses for Practice (Christine A. Cannon and Kathleen A. Schell)
ch. 16 The Large and the Small of It: A Case Study of Introductory Biology Courses (Richard S. Donham, Florence I. Schmieg and Deborah E. Allen)
ch. 17 PBL, Politics, and Democracy (Kurt Burch)
ch. 18 Using Problem-Based Learning in General Chemistry (Susan E. Groh)
ch. 19 A Skeptic's Look at PBL (Elizabeth M. Lieux
ch. 20 PBL in Preservice Teacher Education (Eugene Matusov, John St. Julien and James A. Whitson)
ch. 21 Introductory Physics: A Problem-Based Model (Barbara A. Williams)
Index

Teaching the Art of Inquiry
Additional Info:
In this guide, Bob Hudspith and Herb Jenkins describe an approach to teaching that has been used successfully for many years at McMaster University, and which will be of wide interest to university teachers who wish to encourage critical thinking and self-directed research into their courses. The guide thoroughly documents the philosophy and rationale of inquiry-based learning, describes how the approach works in practice, and offers advice and numerous examples ...
In this guide, Bob Hudspith and Herb Jenkins describe an approach to teaching that has been used successfully for many years at McMaster University, and which will be of wide interest to university teachers who wish to encourage critical thinking and self-directed research into their courses. The guide thoroughly documents the philosophy and rationale of inquiry-based learning, describes how the approach works in practice, and offers advice and numerous examples ...
Additional Info:
In this guide, Bob Hudspith and Herb Jenkins describe an approach to teaching that has been used successfully for many years at McMaster University, and which will be of wide interest to university teachers who wish to encourage critical thinking and self-directed research into their courses. The guide thoroughly documents the philosophy and rationale of inquiry-based learning, describes how the approach works in practice, and offers advice and numerous examples on adapting the technique for a wide range of situations and disciplines.
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
An Example of Inquiry
Central Questions an the Process of Inquiry
Ideas for Teaching Inquiry
How and Where Inquiry Can Be Used
Communicating the Findings of Inquiry
Assessment
Common Difficulties
References
In this guide, Bob Hudspith and Herb Jenkins describe an approach to teaching that has been used successfully for many years at McMaster University, and which will be of wide interest to university teachers who wish to encourage critical thinking and self-directed research into their courses. The guide thoroughly documents the philosophy and rationale of inquiry-based learning, describes how the approach works in practice, and offers advice and numerous examples on adapting the technique for a wide range of situations and disciplines.
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
An Example of Inquiry
Central Questions an the Process of Inquiry
Ideas for Teaching Inquiry
How and Where Inquiry Can Be Used
Communicating the Findings of Inquiry
Assessment
Common Difficulties
References


Big Questions, Worthy Dreams: Mentoring Young Adults in Their Search For Meaning,Purpose, and Faith
Additional Info:
A smart, compassionate look at the important and often bewildering questions young adults face in their search for purpose, meaning and faith, and a clarion call to concerned adults to actively mentor the next generation. (From the Publisher)
A smart, compassionate look at the important and often bewildering questions young adults face in their search for purpose, meaning and faith, and a clarion call to concerned adults to actively mentor the next generation. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A smart, compassionate look at the important and often bewildering questions young adults face in their search for purpose, meaning and faith, and a clarion call to concerned adults to actively mentor the next generation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Young Adulthood in a Changing World: Promise and Vulnerability.
ch. 2 Meaning and Faith.
ch. 3 Becoming at Home in the Universe.
ch. 4 It Matters How We Think.
ch. 5 It All DepAnds . . . . On Belonging.
ch. 6 Imagination: The Power of Adult Faith.
ch. 7 The Gifts of a Mentoring Environment.
ch. 8 Mentoring Communities: Higher Education: A Community of Imagination
ch. 9 Culture as Mentor.
Notes.
The Author.
Index.
A smart, compassionate look at the important and often bewildering questions young adults face in their search for purpose, meaning and faith, and a clarion call to concerned adults to actively mentor the next generation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Young Adulthood in a Changing World: Promise and Vulnerability.
ch. 2 Meaning and Faith.
ch. 3 Becoming at Home in the Universe.
ch. 4 It Matters How We Think.
ch. 5 It All DepAnds . . . . On Belonging.
ch. 6 Imagination: The Power of Adult Faith.
ch. 7 The Gifts of a Mentoring Environment.
ch. 8 Mentoring Communities: Higher Education: A Community of Imagination
ch. 9 Culture as Mentor.
Notes.
The Author.
Index.

Teaching for Understanding: What It Is and How to Do It
Additional Info:
Teaching for Understanding describes the nature of understanding, strategies that support it, and factors which bear upon it in a way which makes it accessible to teachers in raining, practicing teachers, and lecturer in education. Its coverage includes understanding and its nature, constructing relationships and mental structures, surrogate teachers, metacognition, and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Teaching for Understanding describes the nature of understanding, strategies that support it, and factors which bear upon it in a way which makes it accessible to teachers in raining, practicing teachers, and lecturer in education. Its coverage includes understanding and its nature, constructing relationships and mental structures, surrogate teachers, metacognition, and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Teaching for Understanding describes the nature of understanding, strategies that support it, and factors which bear upon it in a way which makes it accessible to teachers in raining, practicing teachers, and lecturer in education. Its coverage includes understanding and its nature, constructing relationships and mental structures, surrogate teachers, metacognition, and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Understanding: A Worthwhile Goal
ch. 3 The Nature of Understanding
ch. 4 Making Connections
ch. 5 Mental Engagement
ch. 6 Supporting Understanding With Analogies
ch. 7 Using Surrogate Teachers
ch. 8 Failing to Understand
ch. 9 The Total Learning Environment
ch. 10 Knowing What Counts
ch. 11 Motivated to Understand
ch. 12 The Self-regulation of Learning
ch. 13 Evaluating Understanding
In Conclusion
Glossary
Teaching for Understanding describes the nature of understanding, strategies that support it, and factors which bear upon it in a way which makes it accessible to teachers in raining, practicing teachers, and lecturer in education. Its coverage includes understanding and its nature, constructing relationships and mental structures, surrogate teachers, metacognition, and assessment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Understanding: A Worthwhile Goal
ch. 3 The Nature of Understanding
ch. 4 Making Connections
ch. 5 Mental Engagement
ch. 6 Supporting Understanding With Analogies
ch. 7 Using Surrogate Teachers
ch. 8 Failing to Understand
ch. 9 The Total Learning Environment
ch. 10 Knowing What Counts
ch. 11 Motivated to Understand
ch. 12 The Self-regulation of Learning
ch. 13 Evaluating Understanding
In Conclusion
Glossary

Diversity Challenged: Evidence on the Impact of Affirmative Action
Additional Info:
In the courts and in referenda campaigns, affirmative action in college admissions is under full-scale attack. Though it was designed to help resolve a variety of serious racial problems, affirmative action's survival may turn on just one question--whether or not the educational value of diversity is sufficiently compelling to justify consideration of race as a factor in deciding whom to admit to colleges and universities. Diversity Challenged is designed to ...
In the courts and in referenda campaigns, affirmative action in college admissions is under full-scale attack. Though it was designed to help resolve a variety of serious racial problems, affirmative action's survival may turn on just one question--whether or not the educational value of diversity is sufficiently compelling to justify consideration of race as a factor in deciding whom to admit to colleges and universities. Diversity Challenged is designed to ...
Additional Info:
In the courts and in referenda campaigns, affirmative action in college admissions is under full-scale attack. Though it was designed to help resolve a variety of serious racial problems, affirmative action's survival may turn on just one question--whether or not the educational value of diversity is sufficiently compelling to justify consideration of race as a factor in deciding whom to admit to colleges and universities. Diversity Challenged is designed to address that question.
This book explores what is known about how increasing minority enrollment changes and enriches the educational process. In chapter after chapter, researchers and policymakers discuss substantial developing evidence showing that diversity of students can and usually does produce a broader educational experience, both in traditional learning and in preparing for jobs, professions, and effective citizenship in a multiracial democracy. The evidence also suggests that such benefits can be significantly increased by appropriate leadership and support on campus. Diversity may be challenged on college campuses today, but the research and evidence in this book shows how diversity works. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Student Diversity and Higher Learning (Neil L. Rudenstine)
ch. 2 A Policy Framework for Reconceptualizing the Legal Debate Concerning Affirmative Action in Higher Education (Scott R. Palmer)
ch. 3 Diversity and Affirmative Action: Evolving Principles and Continuing Legal Battles (Scott R. Palmer)
ch. 4 Maximizing the Benefits of Student Diversity: Lessons from School Desegregation Research (Janet Ward Schofield)
ch. 5 Is Diversity a Compelling Educational Interest?: Evidence from Louisville (Michal Kurlaender and John T. Yun)
ch. 6 Diversity and Legal Education: Student Experiences in Leading Law Schools (Gary Orfield and Dean Whitla)
ch. 7 The Positive Educational Effects of Racial Diversity on Campus (Mitchell J. Chang)
ch. 8 Linking Diversity and Educational Purpose: How Diversity Affects the Classroom Environment and Student Development (Sylvia Hurtado)
ch. 9 The Impact of Affirmative Action on Medical Education and the Nation's Health (Timothy Ready)
ch. 10 Racial Differences in the Effects of College Quality and Student Body Diversity on Wages (Kermit Daniel, Dan A. Black, and Jeffrey Smith)
ch. 11 Increasing Diversity Benefits: How Campus Climate and Teaching Methods Affect Student Outcomes (Jeffrey F. Milem)
ch. 12 Faculty Experience with Diversity: A Case Study of Macalester College (Roxane Harvey Gudeman)
ch. 13 Reflections on Affirmative Action: Its Origins, Virtues, Enemies, Champions, and Prospects (Paul M. Gaston)
In the courts and in referenda campaigns, affirmative action in college admissions is under full-scale attack. Though it was designed to help resolve a variety of serious racial problems, affirmative action's survival may turn on just one question--whether or not the educational value of diversity is sufficiently compelling to justify consideration of race as a factor in deciding whom to admit to colleges and universities. Diversity Challenged is designed to address that question.
This book explores what is known about how increasing minority enrollment changes and enriches the educational process. In chapter after chapter, researchers and policymakers discuss substantial developing evidence showing that diversity of students can and usually does produce a broader educational experience, both in traditional learning and in preparing for jobs, professions, and effective citizenship in a multiracial democracy. The evidence also suggests that such benefits can be significantly increased by appropriate leadership and support on campus. Diversity may be challenged on college campuses today, but the research and evidence in this book shows how diversity works. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Student Diversity and Higher Learning (Neil L. Rudenstine)
ch. 2 A Policy Framework for Reconceptualizing the Legal Debate Concerning Affirmative Action in Higher Education (Scott R. Palmer)
ch. 3 Diversity and Affirmative Action: Evolving Principles and Continuing Legal Battles (Scott R. Palmer)
ch. 4 Maximizing the Benefits of Student Diversity: Lessons from School Desegregation Research (Janet Ward Schofield)
ch. 5 Is Diversity a Compelling Educational Interest?: Evidence from Louisville (Michal Kurlaender and John T. Yun)
ch. 6 Diversity and Legal Education: Student Experiences in Leading Law Schools (Gary Orfield and Dean Whitla)
ch. 7 The Positive Educational Effects of Racial Diversity on Campus (Mitchell J. Chang)
ch. 8 Linking Diversity and Educational Purpose: How Diversity Affects the Classroom Environment and Student Development (Sylvia Hurtado)
ch. 9 The Impact of Affirmative Action on Medical Education and the Nation's Health (Timothy Ready)
ch. 10 Racial Differences in the Effects of College Quality and Student Body Diversity on Wages (Kermit Daniel, Dan A. Black, and Jeffrey Smith)
ch. 11 Increasing Diversity Benefits: How Campus Climate and Teaching Methods Affect Student Outcomes (Jeffrey F. Milem)
ch. 12 Faculty Experience with Diversity: A Case Study of Macalester College (Roxane Harvey Gudeman)
ch. 13 Reflections on Affirmative Action: Its Origins, Virtues, Enemies, Champions, and Prospects (Paul M. Gaston)

Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity
Additional Info:
A pioneer in queer theory and literary studies, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick brings together for the first time in Touching Feeling her most powerful explorations of emotion and expression. In essays that show how her groundbreaking work in queer theory has developed into a deep interest in affect, Sedgwick offers what she calls "tools and techniques for nondualistic thought," in the process touching and transforming such theoretical discourses as psychoanalysis, speech-act ...
A pioneer in queer theory and literary studies, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick brings together for the first time in Touching Feeling her most powerful explorations of emotion and expression. In essays that show how her groundbreaking work in queer theory has developed into a deep interest in affect, Sedgwick offers what she calls "tools and techniques for nondualistic thought," in the process touching and transforming such theoretical discourses as psychoanalysis, speech-act ...
Additional Info:
A pioneer in queer theory and literary studies, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick brings together for the first time in Touching Feeling her most powerful explorations of emotion and expression. In essays that show how her groundbreaking work in queer theory has developed into a deep interest in affect, Sedgwick offers what she calls "tools and techniques for nondualistic thought," in the process touching and transforming such theoretical discourses as psychoanalysis, speech-act theory, Western Buddhism, and the Foucauldian "hermeneutics of suspicion."
In prose sometimes somber, often high-spirited, and always accessible and moving, Touching Feeling interrogates-through virtuoso readings of works by Henry James, J. L. Austin, Judith Butler, the psychologist Silvan Tomkins and others-emotion in many forms. What links the work of teaching to the experience of illness? How can shame become an engine for queer politics, performance, and pleasure? Is sexuality more like an affect or a drive? Is paranoia the only realistic epistemology for modern intellectuals? Ultimately, Sedgwick's unfashionable commitment to the truth of happiness propels a book as open-hearted as it is intellectually daring. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Interlude, Pedagogic
ch. 1 Shame, Theatricality, and Queer Performativity: Henry James's The Art of the Novel
ch. 2 Around the Performative: Periperformative Vicinities in Nineteenth-Century Narrative
ch. 3 Shame in the Cybernetic Fold: Reading Silvan Tomkins
ch. 4 Paranoid Reading and Reparative Reading, or, You're So Paranoid, You Probably Think This Essay Is About You
ch. 5 Pedagogy of Buddhism
Works Cited
Index
A pioneer in queer theory and literary studies, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick brings together for the first time in Touching Feeling her most powerful explorations of emotion and expression. In essays that show how her groundbreaking work in queer theory has developed into a deep interest in affect, Sedgwick offers what she calls "tools and techniques for nondualistic thought," in the process touching and transforming such theoretical discourses as psychoanalysis, speech-act theory, Western Buddhism, and the Foucauldian "hermeneutics of suspicion."
In prose sometimes somber, often high-spirited, and always accessible and moving, Touching Feeling interrogates-through virtuoso readings of works by Henry James, J. L. Austin, Judith Butler, the psychologist Silvan Tomkins and others-emotion in many forms. What links the work of teaching to the experience of illness? How can shame become an engine for queer politics, performance, and pleasure? Is sexuality more like an affect or a drive? Is paranoia the only realistic epistemology for modern intellectuals? Ultimately, Sedgwick's unfashionable commitment to the truth of happiness propels a book as open-hearted as it is intellectually daring. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Interlude, Pedagogic
ch. 1 Shame, Theatricality, and Queer Performativity: Henry James's The Art of the Novel
ch. 2 Around the Performative: Periperformative Vicinities in Nineteenth-Century Narrative
ch. 3 Shame in the Cybernetic Fold: Reading Silvan Tomkins
ch. 4 Paranoid Reading and Reparative Reading, or, You're So Paranoid, You Probably Think This Essay Is About You
ch. 5 Pedagogy of Buddhism
Works Cited
Index

Twenty-First-Century Feminist Classrooms: Pedagogies of Identity and Difference
Additional Info:
This anti-racist feminist anthology brings together diverse and challenging theoretical perspectives on the experiences of radical educators who work to redefine pedagogies for communicating the claims of both insurgent disciplines--Women's Studies, African-American Studies, Latino Studies, Ethnic Studies, Queer Theory, etc.--and radicalized versions of traditional areas of study--History, Sociology, Foreign Languages, Literature, Philosophy. The authors' analyses of where and how feminist teachers stand in the fray of conflictive classroom dynamics ...
This anti-racist feminist anthology brings together diverse and challenging theoretical perspectives on the experiences of radical educators who work to redefine pedagogies for communicating the claims of both insurgent disciplines--Women's Studies, African-American Studies, Latino Studies, Ethnic Studies, Queer Theory, etc.--and radicalized versions of traditional areas of study--History, Sociology, Foreign Languages, Literature, Philosophy. The authors' analyses of where and how feminist teachers stand in the fray of conflictive classroom dynamics ...
Additional Info:
This anti-racist feminist anthology brings together diverse and challenging theoretical perspectives on the experiences of radical educators who work to redefine pedagogies for communicating the claims of both insurgent disciplines--Women's Studies, African-American Studies, Latino Studies, Ethnic Studies, Queer Theory, etc.--and radicalized versions of traditional areas of study--History, Sociology, Foreign Languages, Literature, Philosophy. The authors' analyses of where and how feminist teachers stand in the fray of conflictive classroom dynamics and institutional politics lead them to outline new inquiries into feminist pedagogy highlighted by an intense focus on identity, experience, and difference. In doing so, Twenty-First Century Feminist Classrooms opens a space for engaged feminist self-criticism that seeks to reinvigorate pedagogical practices grounded in multicultural feminist identities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Feminist Reflections on the Pedagogical Relevance of Identity
ch. 1 Toward a Pedagogy of Coalition
ch. 2 Unleashing the Demons of History: White Resistance in the U.S. Latino Studies Classroom
ch. 3 Student Resistance and Nationalism in the Classroom: Reflections on Globalizing the Curriculum
ch. 4 Feminist Pedagogy and the Appeal to Epistemic Privilege
ch. 5 Negotiating Subject Positions in a Service-Learning Context: Toward a Feminist Critique of Experiential Learning
ch. 6 Antiracist Pedagogy and Concientizacion: A Latina Professor's Struggle
ch. 7 Queer Theory and Feminist Pedagogy
ch. 8 "white girls" and "Strong Black Women:" Reflections on a Decade of Teaching Black History at Predominantly White Institutions (PWIs)
ch. 9 Teaching (About) Genocide
ch. 10 Decentering the White and Male Standpoints in Race and Ethnicity Courses
ch. 11 Representation, Entitlement, and Voyeurism: Teaching Across Difference
Contributors
Index
This anti-racist feminist anthology brings together diverse and challenging theoretical perspectives on the experiences of radical educators who work to redefine pedagogies for communicating the claims of both insurgent disciplines--Women's Studies, African-American Studies, Latino Studies, Ethnic Studies, Queer Theory, etc.--and radicalized versions of traditional areas of study--History, Sociology, Foreign Languages, Literature, Philosophy. The authors' analyses of where and how feminist teachers stand in the fray of conflictive classroom dynamics and institutional politics lead them to outline new inquiries into feminist pedagogy highlighted by an intense focus on identity, experience, and difference. In doing so, Twenty-First Century Feminist Classrooms opens a space for engaged feminist self-criticism that seeks to reinvigorate pedagogical practices grounded in multicultural feminist identities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Feminist Reflections on the Pedagogical Relevance of Identity
ch. 1 Toward a Pedagogy of Coalition
ch. 2 Unleashing the Demons of History: White Resistance in the U.S. Latino Studies Classroom
ch. 3 Student Resistance and Nationalism in the Classroom: Reflections on Globalizing the Curriculum
ch. 4 Feminist Pedagogy and the Appeal to Epistemic Privilege
ch. 5 Negotiating Subject Positions in a Service-Learning Context: Toward a Feminist Critique of Experiential Learning
ch. 6 Antiracist Pedagogy and Concientizacion: A Latina Professor's Struggle
ch. 7 Queer Theory and Feminist Pedagogy
ch. 8 "white girls" and "Strong Black Women:" Reflections on a Decade of Teaching Black History at Predominantly White Institutions (PWIs)
ch. 9 Teaching (About) Genocide
ch. 10 Decentering the White and Male Standpoints in Race and Ethnicity Courses
ch. 11 Representation, Entitlement, and Voyeurism: Teaching Across Difference
Contributors
Index

Getting Ready for Benjamin: Preparing Teachers for Sexual Diversity in the Classroom
Additional Info:
This text grew out of a symposium sponsored by the Lesbian and Gay Studies Special Interest Group at the American Educational Research Association conference in 1999, titled "Over the Rainbow and Under the Multicultural Umbrella." Twenty-eight educational scholars, theorists, and practitioners—most from the U.S.—contribute 19 chapters on the preparation of future teachers in such issues as the interrelationships of prejudice, sexual differences, teaching tolerance, discussing diversity, and deconstructing gender ...
This text grew out of a symposium sponsored by the Lesbian and Gay Studies Special Interest Group at the American Educational Research Association conference in 1999, titled "Over the Rainbow and Under the Multicultural Umbrella." Twenty-eight educational scholars, theorists, and practitioners—most from the U.S.—contribute 19 chapters on the preparation of future teachers in such issues as the interrelationships of prejudice, sexual differences, teaching tolerance, discussing diversity, and deconstructing gender ...
Additional Info:
This text grew out of a symposium sponsored by the Lesbian and Gay Studies Special Interest Group at the American Educational Research Association conference in 1999, titled "Over the Rainbow and Under the Multicultural Umbrella." Twenty-eight educational scholars, theorists, and practitioners—most from the U.S.—contribute 19 chapters on the preparation of future teachers in such issues as the interrelationships of prejudice, sexual differences, teaching tolerance, discussing diversity, and deconstructing gender and sexual identities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Part I Surveying the Landscape
ch. 1 The Challenges of Gay Topics in Teacher Education: Politics, Content, and Pedagogy (Arthur Lipkin)
ch. 2 "But No One in the Class Is Gay": Countering Invisibility and Creating Allies in Teacher Education Programs (Diana Straut, and Mara Sapon-Shevin)
ch. 3 What Do We Do in Physical Education? (Michael Gard)
ch. 4 "Pedophiles and Deviants": Exploring Issues of Sexuality, Masculinity, and Normalization in the Lives of Male Teacher Candidates (Deborah P. Berrill, and Wayne Martino)
ch. 5 Homophobia in the Schools: Student Teachers' Perceptions and Preparation to Respond (Jane A. Page, and Delores D. Liston)
ch. 6 Education by Association: The Shortcomings of Discourses of Privacy and Civility in Anti-Homophobia Education (Cris Mayo)
ch. 7 The Gay Ghetto in the Geography of Education Textbooks (Allison J. Young, and Michae J. Middleton)
Part II "Add Lgbt and Stir": Multiculturalism and Sexual Diversity
ch. 8 "Talking about Inclusion Like It's for Everyone": Sexual Diversity and the Inclusive Schooling Movement (Paula Kluth, and Kevin P. Colleary)
ch. 9 Revisioning Multiculturalism in Teacher Education: Isn't It Queer? (Will Letts)
ch. 10 Queer Developments in Teacher Education: Addressing Sexual Diversity, Homophobia, and Heterosexism (Tim Bedford)
ch. 11 Getting to the Heart of Teaching for Diversity (Genet Simone)
Pt. III Telling Our Stories
ch. 12 How My Teacher Education Program Failed ("Starr")
ch. 13 Visibility, Invisibility, and "The Thickness of Nondiversity": What I Learned from Karen (Rita M. Kissen, and Karen Phillips)
ch. 14 Heteronormativity and Common Sense in Science (Teacher) Education (Steve Fifield and Howard (Lee) Swain)
ch. 15 "I Was Afraid He Would Label Me Gay if I Stood Up for Gays": The Experience of Lesbian and Gay Elementary Education Credential Candidates at a Rural State University (Eric Rofes)
ch. 16 Teacher Educators and the Multicultural Closet: The Impact of Gay and Lesbian Content on an Undergraduate Teacher Education Seminar (James R. King, and Roger Brindley)
ch. 17 Can of Worms: A Queer TA in Teacher Ed (Karleen Pendleton Jiménez)
ch. 18 I'm Every Woman: Multiple Identities at Part of the Diversity Curriculum (Karen Glasgow)
ch. 19 Campus Dyke Meets Teacher Education: A Marriage Made in Social Justice Heaven (Ronni Sanlo)
Afterword: A Word about Getting Ready for Benjamin from His Mommies
Index
About the Contributors
This text grew out of a symposium sponsored by the Lesbian and Gay Studies Special Interest Group at the American Educational Research Association conference in 1999, titled "Over the Rainbow and Under the Multicultural Umbrella." Twenty-eight educational scholars, theorists, and practitioners—most from the U.S.—contribute 19 chapters on the preparation of future teachers in such issues as the interrelationships of prejudice, sexual differences, teaching tolerance, discussing diversity, and deconstructing gender and sexual identities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Part I Surveying the Landscape
ch. 1 The Challenges of Gay Topics in Teacher Education: Politics, Content, and Pedagogy (Arthur Lipkin)
ch. 2 "But No One in the Class Is Gay": Countering Invisibility and Creating Allies in Teacher Education Programs (Diana Straut, and Mara Sapon-Shevin)
ch. 3 What Do We Do in Physical Education? (Michael Gard)
ch. 4 "Pedophiles and Deviants": Exploring Issues of Sexuality, Masculinity, and Normalization in the Lives of Male Teacher Candidates (Deborah P. Berrill, and Wayne Martino)
ch. 5 Homophobia in the Schools: Student Teachers' Perceptions and Preparation to Respond (Jane A. Page, and Delores D. Liston)
ch. 6 Education by Association: The Shortcomings of Discourses of Privacy and Civility in Anti-Homophobia Education (Cris Mayo)
ch. 7 The Gay Ghetto in the Geography of Education Textbooks (Allison J. Young, and Michae J. Middleton)
Part II "Add Lgbt and Stir": Multiculturalism and Sexual Diversity
ch. 8 "Talking about Inclusion Like It's for Everyone": Sexual Diversity and the Inclusive Schooling Movement (Paula Kluth, and Kevin P. Colleary)
ch. 9 Revisioning Multiculturalism in Teacher Education: Isn't It Queer? (Will Letts)
ch. 10 Queer Developments in Teacher Education: Addressing Sexual Diversity, Homophobia, and Heterosexism (Tim Bedford)
ch. 11 Getting to the Heart of Teaching for Diversity (Genet Simone)
Pt. III Telling Our Stories
ch. 12 How My Teacher Education Program Failed ("Starr")
ch. 13 Visibility, Invisibility, and "The Thickness of Nondiversity": What I Learned from Karen (Rita M. Kissen, and Karen Phillips)
ch. 14 Heteronormativity and Common Sense in Science (Teacher) Education (Steve Fifield and Howard (Lee) Swain)
ch. 15 "I Was Afraid He Would Label Me Gay if I Stood Up for Gays": The Experience of Lesbian and Gay Elementary Education Credential Candidates at a Rural State University (Eric Rofes)
ch. 16 Teacher Educators and the Multicultural Closet: The Impact of Gay and Lesbian Content on an Undergraduate Teacher Education Seminar (James R. King, and Roger Brindley)
ch. 17 Can of Worms: A Queer TA in Teacher Ed (Karleen Pendleton Jiménez)
ch. 18 I'm Every Woman: Multiple Identities at Part of the Diversity Curriculum (Karen Glasgow)
ch. 19 Campus Dyke Meets Teacher Education: A Marriage Made in Social Justice Heaven (Ronni Sanlo)
Afterword: A Word about Getting Ready for Benjamin from His Mommies
Index
About the Contributors

Building a Scholarship of Assessment
Additional Info:
In this book, leading experts in the field examine the current state of assessment practice and scholarship, explore what the future holds for assessment, and offer guidance to help educators meet these new challenges. The contributors root assessment squarely in several related disciplines to provide an overview of assessment practice and scholarship that will prove useful to both the seasoned educator and those new to assessment practice. Ultimately, Building a ...
In this book, leading experts in the field examine the current state of assessment practice and scholarship, explore what the future holds for assessment, and offer guidance to help educators meet these new challenges. The contributors root assessment squarely in several related disciplines to provide an overview of assessment practice and scholarship that will prove useful to both the seasoned educator and those new to assessment practice. Ultimately, Building a ...
Additional Info:
In this book, leading experts in the field examine the current state of assessment practice and scholarship, explore what the future holds for assessment, and offer guidance to help educators meet these new challenges. The contributors root assessment squarely in several related disciplines to provide an overview of assessment practice and scholarship that will prove useful to both the seasoned educator and those new to assessment practice. Ultimately, Building a Scholarship of Assessment will help convince skeptics who still believe outcomes assessment is a fad and will soon fade away that this is an interdisciplinary area with deep roots and an exciting future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Pt. 1 History and Current Status of Assessment
ch. 1 An Emerging Scholarship: A Brief History of Assessment
ch. 2 Promoting Academic Improvement: Organizational and Administrative Dynamics That Support Student Assessment
Pt. 2 Theoretical-Foundations of Assessment
ch. 3 The Roots of Assessment: Tensions, Solutions, and Research Directions
ch. 4 A Scholar-Practitioner Model for Assessment
ch. 5 Enacting a Collaborative Scholarship of Assessment
ch. 6 The Scholarly Assessment of Student Development
Pt. 3 Methods of Assessment
ch. 7 Measurement Issues in Outcomes Assessment
ch. 8 Web Applications in Assessment
ch. 9 Information Support for Assessment
Pt. 4 Scholarly Assessment
ch. 10 Engaging and Supporting Faculty in the Scholarship of Assessment: Guidelines from Research and Best Practice
ch. 11 Scholarly Assessment of Student Learning in the Major and General Education
ch. 12 Program Review: A Spectrum of Perspectives and Practices
ch. 13 Accreditation and the Scholarship of Assessment
Pt. 5 Toward a Scholarship of Assessment
ch. 14 Characteristics of Effective Outcomes Assessment: Foundations and Examples
ch. 15 A Call for Transformation
References
Name Index
Subject Index
In this book, leading experts in the field examine the current state of assessment practice and scholarship, explore what the future holds for assessment, and offer guidance to help educators meet these new challenges. The contributors root assessment squarely in several related disciplines to provide an overview of assessment practice and scholarship that will prove useful to both the seasoned educator and those new to assessment practice. Ultimately, Building a Scholarship of Assessment will help convince skeptics who still believe outcomes assessment is a fad and will soon fade away that this is an interdisciplinary area with deep roots and an exciting future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
Pt. 1 History and Current Status of Assessment
ch. 1 An Emerging Scholarship: A Brief History of Assessment
ch. 2 Promoting Academic Improvement: Organizational and Administrative Dynamics That Support Student Assessment
Pt. 2 Theoretical-Foundations of Assessment
ch. 3 The Roots of Assessment: Tensions, Solutions, and Research Directions
ch. 4 A Scholar-Practitioner Model for Assessment
ch. 5 Enacting a Collaborative Scholarship of Assessment
ch. 6 The Scholarly Assessment of Student Development
Pt. 3 Methods of Assessment
ch. 7 Measurement Issues in Outcomes Assessment
ch. 8 Web Applications in Assessment
ch. 9 Information Support for Assessment
Pt. 4 Scholarly Assessment
ch. 10 Engaging and Supporting Faculty in the Scholarship of Assessment: Guidelines from Research and Best Practice
ch. 11 Scholarly Assessment of Student Learning in the Major and General Education
ch. 12 Program Review: A Spectrum of Perspectives and Practices
ch. 13 Accreditation and the Scholarship of Assessment
Pt. 5 Toward a Scholarship of Assessment
ch. 14 Characteristics of Effective Outcomes Assessment: Foundations and Examples
ch. 15 A Call for Transformation
References
Name Index
Subject Index

Technology-Enhanced Teaching and Learning: Leading and Supporting the Transformation on Your Campus
Additional Info:
The ability of the Internet and the World Wide Web to provide a wealth of on-line information that can be easily accessed at any time is changing the basic structure and operations of organizations, especially educational institutions.
Written by a blue-ribbon panel of contributors -- thirteen experts in various fields of educational technology and teaching and learning -- Technology-Enhanced Teaching and Learning: Leading and Supporting the Transformation on ...
The ability of the Internet and the World Wide Web to provide a wealth of on-line information that can be easily accessed at any time is changing the basic structure and operations of organizations, especially educational institutions.
Written by a blue-ribbon panel of contributors -- thirteen experts in various fields of educational technology and teaching and learning -- Technology-Enhanced Teaching and Learning: Leading and Supporting the Transformation on ...
Additional Info:
The ability of the Internet and the World Wide Web to provide a wealth of on-line information that can be easily accessed at any time is changing the basic structure and operations of organizations, especially educational institutions.
Written by a blue-ribbon panel of contributors -- thirteen experts in various fields of educational technology and teaching and learning -- Technology-Enhanced Teaching and Learning: Leading and Supporting the Transformation on Your Campus offers academic leaders the advice they need to help their institutions initiate, implement, and manage the transformation in order to become Internet-based communication and learning environments. The authors show how leaders can meet the challenge of the information age and the student demand for interactive learning by creating supportive environments that allow faculty to adapt to and sustain this sweeping institutional transformation. This book offers the insights, practical suggestions, and strategies that are essential for engaging the campus community in the transformation process. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Authors
ch. 1. Engaging the Faculty (Paul R. Hagner, Charles A. Schneebeck)
ch. 2. Creating a Context for Consensus (David G. Brown, Sally Jackson)
ch. 3. Managing Complexity in a Transforming Environmen (Vicki N. Suter)
ch. 4. Transforming Traditional Faculty Roles (William H. Graves)
ch. 5. The Holy Grail: Developing Scalable and Sustainable Support Solutions (Joel L. Hartman, Barbara Truman-Davis)
ch. 6. Designing and Delivering Instructional Technology: A Team Approach (Gerard L. Hanley)
ch. 7. Responding to Intellectual Property and Legal Issues (James L. Hilton, James G. Neal )
ch. 8. Form Follows Function: Establishing the Necessary Infrastructure (Bret L. Ingerman)
ch. 9. Assessing Conditions for Campus Transformation (Carole A. Barone, Paul R. Hagner)
Index
The ability of the Internet and the World Wide Web to provide a wealth of on-line information that can be easily accessed at any time is changing the basic structure and operations of organizations, especially educational institutions.
Written by a blue-ribbon panel of contributors -- thirteen experts in various fields of educational technology and teaching and learning -- Technology-Enhanced Teaching and Learning: Leading and Supporting the Transformation on Your Campus offers academic leaders the advice they need to help their institutions initiate, implement, and manage the transformation in order to become Internet-based communication and learning environments. The authors show how leaders can meet the challenge of the information age and the student demand for interactive learning by creating supportive environments that allow faculty to adapt to and sustain this sweeping institutional transformation. This book offers the insights, practical suggestions, and strategies that are essential for engaging the campus community in the transformation process. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Authors
ch. 1. Engaging the Faculty (Paul R. Hagner, Charles A. Schneebeck)
ch. 2. Creating a Context for Consensus (David G. Brown, Sally Jackson)
ch. 3. Managing Complexity in a Transforming Environmen (Vicki N. Suter)
ch. 4. Transforming Traditional Faculty Roles (William H. Graves)
ch. 5. The Holy Grail: Developing Scalable and Sustainable Support Solutions (Joel L. Hartman, Barbara Truman-Davis)
ch. 6. Designing and Delivering Instructional Technology: A Team Approach (Gerard L. Hanley)
ch. 7. Responding to Intellectual Property and Legal Issues (James L. Hilton, James G. Neal )
ch. 8. Form Follows Function: Establishing the Necessary Infrastructure (Bret L. Ingerman)
ch. 9. Assessing Conditions for Campus Transformation (Carole A. Barone, Paul R. Hagner)
Index

Risky Writing: Self-Disclosure and Self-Transformation in the Classroom
Additional Info:
This is the final volume in a trilogy of works that examine the impact of writing and reading about traumatic subjects. "Diaries to an English Professor" (1994) explores the ways in which undergraduate students use psychoanalytic diaries to probe conflicted issues in their lives. "Surviving Literary Suicide" (1999) investigates how graduate students respond to suicidal literature-novels and poems that portray and sometimes glorify self-inflicted death.
In Risky Writing, Jeffrey Berman ...
This is the final volume in a trilogy of works that examine the impact of writing and reading about traumatic subjects. "Diaries to an English Professor" (1994) explores the ways in which undergraduate students use psychoanalytic diaries to probe conflicted issues in their lives. "Surviving Literary Suicide" (1999) investigates how graduate students respond to suicidal literature-novels and poems that portray and sometimes glorify self-inflicted death.
In Risky Writing, Jeffrey Berman ...
Additional Info:
This is the final volume in a trilogy of works that examine the impact of writing and reading about traumatic subjects. "Diaries to an English Professor" (1994) explores the ways in which undergraduate students use psychoanalytic diaries to probe conflicted issues in their lives. "Surviving Literary Suicide" (1999) investigates how graduate students respond to suicidal literature-novels and poems that portray and sometimes glorify self-inflicted death.
In Risky Writing, Jeffrey Berman builds on those earlier studies, describing ways teachers can encourage college students to write safely on a wide range of subjects often deemed too personal or too dangerous for the classroom: grieving the loss of a beloved relative or friend, falling into depression, coping with the breakup of one's family, confronting sexual abuse, depicting a drug or alcohol problem, encountering racial prejudice. Berman points out that nearly everyone has difficulty talking or writing about such issues because they arouse shame and tend to be enshrouded in secrecy and silence. This is especially true for college students, who are just emerging from adolescence and find themselves at institutions that rarely promote self-disclosure.
Recognizing the controversial nature of his subject, Berman confronts academic opposition to personal writing head on. He also discusses the similarities between the "writing cure" and the "talking cure," the role of the teacher and audience in the self-disclosing classroom, and the pedagogical strategies necessary to minimize risk, including the importance of empathy and other befriending skills. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Risky Writing: Theoretical and Practical Implications
ch. 2 Seeing Ourselves through the Eyes of Others
ch. 3 The Dark Side of Diversity
ch. 4 Sexual Disclosures Revisited
ch. 5 Unmasking Shame
ch. 6 Writing under the Influence
ch. 7 Pedagogy of Risk
Afterword
Appendix
Works Cited
Student Writers
Index
This is the final volume in a trilogy of works that examine the impact of writing and reading about traumatic subjects. "Diaries to an English Professor" (1994) explores the ways in which undergraduate students use psychoanalytic diaries to probe conflicted issues in their lives. "Surviving Literary Suicide" (1999) investigates how graduate students respond to suicidal literature-novels and poems that portray and sometimes glorify self-inflicted death.
In Risky Writing, Jeffrey Berman builds on those earlier studies, describing ways teachers can encourage college students to write safely on a wide range of subjects often deemed too personal or too dangerous for the classroom: grieving the loss of a beloved relative or friend, falling into depression, coping with the breakup of one's family, confronting sexual abuse, depicting a drug or alcohol problem, encountering racial prejudice. Berman points out that nearly everyone has difficulty talking or writing about such issues because they arouse shame and tend to be enshrouded in secrecy and silence. This is especially true for college students, who are just emerging from adolescence and find themselves at institutions that rarely promote self-disclosure.
Recognizing the controversial nature of his subject, Berman confronts academic opposition to personal writing head on. He also discusses the similarities between the "writing cure" and the "talking cure," the role of the teacher and audience in the self-disclosing classroom, and the pedagogical strategies necessary to minimize risk, including the importance of empathy and other befriending skills. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Risky Writing: Theoretical and Practical Implications
ch. 2 Seeing Ourselves through the Eyes of Others
ch. 3 The Dark Side of Diversity
ch. 4 Sexual Disclosures Revisited
ch. 5 Unmasking Shame
ch. 6 Writing under the Influence
ch. 7 Pedagogy of Risk
Afterword
Appendix
Works Cited
Student Writers
Index

Developing Non-Hierarchical Leadership on Campus: Case Studies and Best Practices in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
I. Thinking about Non-Hierarchical Leadership Development
ch. 1 An Interview with Helen S. Astin (Kathleen N. McMahon)
ch. 2 The Emergence of Inclusive, Process-Oriented Leadership (Shannon K. Faris and Charles L. Outcalt)
ch. 3 A Multiple-Level Approach for Understanding the Nature of Leadership Studies (Francis J. Yammarino and Fred Dansereau)
ch. 4 Developing Social Change Agents: Leadership Development for the 1990s and Beyond (Marguerite Bounous-Hammarth)
ch. 5 New Ways of Leading in a Networked World (Cynthia Cherrey and Kathleen Allen)
ch. 6 Using Postmodern Feminism to Reconceptualize "Citizenship" and "Community" (Lori E. Varlotta)
II. Putting Theory into Action: Successful Campus Programs
ch. 7 Developing an Interdisciplinary Doctoral Program in Leadership Studies (Mark T. Green, Jacquelyn Alexander, and Ray Boryczka)
ch. 8 Miami's Leadership Commitment (Dennis S. Roberts)
ch. 9 Spheres of Confluence: Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action (David C. Robertson and Bryan J. Lubic)
ch. 10 The Peer-to-Peer Context (Sunshine B. Martin)
ch. 11 Common Cause: Different Routes (Cynthia Cherrey, Judi Biggs Garbuio, and Rachel Isgar)
ch. 12 Learning and Leading: A Class Project Provides Context (Nancy S. Huber)
ch. 13 Service, Spirituality, and Social Change (Diane Bischetti)
ch. 14 Designing Experiential Training Sessions for the Social Change Model of Leadership Development (Emily A. Langdon and Nancy B. Mathias)
ch. 15 Emerging Leaders: Leadership Development from a Community College Perspective (Heather Anderson, Paul Dale, James Rubin, Cindy Shoenhair, and Shelle Witten)
ch. 16 Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action: Creating Change on Our College Campus (Tammera J. Klumpyan and Emily A. Langdon)
ch. 17 Overcoming Resistance to Change in Higher Education (Mary Liscinsky, Christopher S. Chambers, and Christopher R. Foley)
ch. 18 The Advent of Leadership Development in the UCLA International Student Orientation Program (Mariana Zavala-Corzo)
III. The Complex Intersections of Leadership and Identity
ch. 19 Intercultural Leadership: A Program Model for Students in Higher Education (Daniel C. Adams and Patricia M. Aqui)
ch. 20 Transforming Communities: Students Dialoguing across Racial and Ethnic Boundaries (Wayne R. Millette and Roger Fisher)
ch. 21 The Lavender Leader: An Inqueery into Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Student Leadership (Ronni Sanlo)
IV. How We Define and Measure Success: Assessing Leadership Development
ch. 22 Developing Citizenship through Assessment: A Participatory Model for Guiding Learning and Leadership (Christine M. Cress)
ch. 23 Assessing Non-Hierarchical Leadership (Tracy M. Tyree)
Index
About the Contributors
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
I. Thinking about Non-Hierarchical Leadership Development
ch. 1 An Interview with Helen S. Astin (Kathleen N. McMahon)
ch. 2 The Emergence of Inclusive, Process-Oriented Leadership (Shannon K. Faris and Charles L. Outcalt)
ch. 3 A Multiple-Level Approach for Understanding the Nature of Leadership Studies (Francis J. Yammarino and Fred Dansereau)
ch. 4 Developing Social Change Agents: Leadership Development for the 1990s and Beyond (Marguerite Bounous-Hammarth)
ch. 5 New Ways of Leading in a Networked World (Cynthia Cherrey and Kathleen Allen)
ch. 6 Using Postmodern Feminism to Reconceptualize "Citizenship" and "Community" (Lori E. Varlotta)
II. Putting Theory into Action: Successful Campus Programs
ch. 7 Developing an Interdisciplinary Doctoral Program in Leadership Studies (Mark T. Green, Jacquelyn Alexander, and Ray Boryczka)
ch. 8 Miami's Leadership Commitment (Dennis S. Roberts)
ch. 9 Spheres of Confluence: Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action (David C. Robertson and Bryan J. Lubic)
ch. 10 The Peer-to-Peer Context (Sunshine B. Martin)
ch. 11 Common Cause: Different Routes (Cynthia Cherrey, Judi Biggs Garbuio, and Rachel Isgar)
ch. 12 Learning and Leading: A Class Project Provides Context (Nancy S. Huber)
ch. 13 Service, Spirituality, and Social Change (Diane Bischetti)
ch. 14 Designing Experiential Training Sessions for the Social Change Model of Leadership Development (Emily A. Langdon and Nancy B. Mathias)
ch. 15 Emerging Leaders: Leadership Development from a Community College Perspective (Heather Anderson, Paul Dale, James Rubin, Cindy Shoenhair, and Shelle Witten)
ch. 16 Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action: Creating Change on Our College Campus (Tammera J. Klumpyan and Emily A. Langdon)
ch. 17 Overcoming Resistance to Change in Higher Education (Mary Liscinsky, Christopher S. Chambers, and Christopher R. Foley)
ch. 18 The Advent of Leadership Development in the UCLA International Student Orientation Program (Mariana Zavala-Corzo)
III. The Complex Intersections of Leadership and Identity
ch. 19 Intercultural Leadership: A Program Model for Students in Higher Education (Daniel C. Adams and Patricia M. Aqui)
ch. 20 Transforming Communities: Students Dialoguing across Racial and Ethnic Boundaries (Wayne R. Millette and Roger Fisher)
ch. 21 The Lavender Leader: An Inqueery into Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Student Leadership (Ronni Sanlo)
IV. How We Define and Measure Success: Assessing Leadership Development
ch. 22 Developing Citizenship through Assessment: A Participatory Model for Guiding Learning and Leadership (Christine M. Cress)
ch. 23 Assessing Non-Hierarchical Leadership (Tracy M. Tyree)
Index
About the Contributors

Minding Women: Reshaping the Educational Realm
Additional Info:
Research on women and girls has exploded during the past twenty years. Since 1977, when the Harvard Educational Review published Carol Gilligan's now-classic article "In a Different Voice," in which she argued so persuasively that women and girls must be understood on their own terms, researchers have been discovering, uncovering, and recovering women's ways of knowing, being, thinking, teaching, and learning. Minding Women charts the wealth of thought and writing related ...
Research on women and girls has exploded during the past twenty years. Since 1977, when the Harvard Educational Review published Carol Gilligan's now-classic article "In a Different Voice," in which she argued so persuasively that women and girls must be understood on their own terms, researchers have been discovering, uncovering, and recovering women's ways of knowing, being, thinking, teaching, and learning. Minding Women charts the wealth of thought and writing related ...
Additional Info:
Research on women and girls has exploded during the past twenty years. Since 1977, when the Harvard Educational Review published Carol Gilligan's now-classic article "In a Different Voice," in which she argued so persuasively that women and girls must be understood on their own terms, researchers have been discovering, uncovering, and recovering women's ways of knowing, being, thinking, teaching, and learning. Minding Women charts the wealth of thought and writing related to women and girls and education that this process of discovery has produced.
Minding Women begins with a "Classics" section--articles that call attention to the lack of research on girls and women and describe the effect this has had on knowledge and society. The contributors then discuss feminist pedagogy, and how it has changed and been refined over time. Girls and young women are the focus of the next section. Too often their voices and viewpoints are excluded from these discussions, so some of their own writings are included here. The book then explores women's educational history, showcasing some of the rich work in this area over the past twenty years. Identity issues are addressed in the final section, acknowledging that substantial differences exist among groups of women and girls on how they experience the world and their roles, prospects, and lives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 In a different voice : women's conceptions of self and morality (Carol Gilligan)
ch. 2 Woman's place in man's life cycle (Carol Gilligan )
ch. 3 Excluding women from the educational realm (Jane Roland Martin )
ch. 4 Placing women in the liberal arts (Marilyn R. Schuster and Susan Van Dyne )
ch. 5 Mujeres unidas en acción: a popular education process (Eva Young and Mariwilda Padilla )
ch. 6 Freire and a feminist pedagogy of difference (Kathleen Weiler )
ch. 7 Chronicles (Kari Larsen ... [et al.] )
ch. 8 Sexuality, schooling, and adolescent females (Michelle Fine )
ch. 9 Voice, play, and a practice of ordinary courage in girls' and women's lives (Annie G. Rogers )
ch. 10 Sexual harassment in school (Nan Stein )
ch. 11 We who believe in freedom cannot rest until it's done (William Ayers )
ch. 12 ch. 1 Reconsidering a classic (Linda Eisenmann )
ch. 13 African American female elite (Linda M. Perkins )
ch. 14 Hidden Half : a history of Native American women's education (Deirdre A. Almeida-- ch. 15 Reflections on writing a history of women teachers (Kathleen Weiler )
ch. 16 How we find ourselves (Alex Wilson )
ch. 17 Colonizer/colonized Chicana ethnographer (Sofia Villenas )
ch. 18 Learning in the dark (Frances A. Maher and Mary Kay Thompson Tetreault)
ch. 19 Road to college (Stacey J. Lee )
Research on women and girls has exploded during the past twenty years. Since 1977, when the Harvard Educational Review published Carol Gilligan's now-classic article "In a Different Voice," in which she argued so persuasively that women and girls must be understood on their own terms, researchers have been discovering, uncovering, and recovering women's ways of knowing, being, thinking, teaching, and learning. Minding Women charts the wealth of thought and writing related to women and girls and education that this process of discovery has produced.
Minding Women begins with a "Classics" section--articles that call attention to the lack of research on girls and women and describe the effect this has had on knowledge and society. The contributors then discuss feminist pedagogy, and how it has changed and been refined over time. Girls and young women are the focus of the next section. Too often their voices and viewpoints are excluded from these discussions, so some of their own writings are included here. The book then explores women's educational history, showcasing some of the rich work in this area over the past twenty years. Identity issues are addressed in the final section, acknowledging that substantial differences exist among groups of women and girls on how they experience the world and their roles, prospects, and lives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 In a different voice : women's conceptions of self and morality (Carol Gilligan)
ch. 2 Woman's place in man's life cycle (Carol Gilligan )
ch. 3 Excluding women from the educational realm (Jane Roland Martin )
ch. 4 Placing women in the liberal arts (Marilyn R. Schuster and Susan Van Dyne )
ch. 5 Mujeres unidas en acción: a popular education process (Eva Young and Mariwilda Padilla )
ch. 6 Freire and a feminist pedagogy of difference (Kathleen Weiler )
ch. 7 Chronicles (Kari Larsen ... [et al.] )
ch. 8 Sexuality, schooling, and adolescent females (Michelle Fine )
ch. 9 Voice, play, and a practice of ordinary courage in girls' and women's lives (Annie G. Rogers )
ch. 10 Sexual harassment in school (Nan Stein )
ch. 11 We who believe in freedom cannot rest until it's done (William Ayers )
ch. 12 ch. 1 Reconsidering a classic (Linda Eisenmann )
ch. 13 African American female elite (Linda M. Perkins )
ch. 14 Hidden Half : a history of Native American women's education (Deirdre A. Almeida-- ch. 15 Reflections on writing a history of women teachers (Kathleen Weiler )
ch. 16 How we find ourselves (Alex Wilson )
ch. 17 Colonizer/colonized Chicana ethnographer (Sofia Villenas )
ch. 18 Learning in the dark (Frances A. Maher and Mary Kay Thompson Tetreault)
ch. 19 Road to college (Stacey J. Lee )

A Symposium: Knowledge Workers and Unions in the 21st Century
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Knowledge workers - trade unionism's new frontier (Charles Kerchner)
ch. 2 History, women's work, and the new unionism (Dorothy Sue Cobble)
ch. 3 Entertainment unions and higher education (Lois Gray)
Quality in instruction
ch. 4 Adapting to a new generation of college students (Richard C. Turner)
ch. 5 Learning to read and write : still a miracle (Norma Tilden)
ch. 6 Keeping wonder alive in today's college classroom (Elizabeth Ann Bartlett)
ch. 7 Trust, but verify - toward fairer student evaluations (John Daley)
Issues in the profession
ch. 8 Fear of the self in American academic life (Enid Bloch)
ch. 9 Fighting the culture wars in academia (James Fisher)
ch. 10 Bargaining for the future at Cal State (Terry Jones)
ch. 11 Tenure at Minnesota : a postmortem (Bud McClure)
ch. 12 Distance education : assessing costs and benefits (David Garson)
ch. 13 University senates and the law : a case study (Alan W. Clarke and Laurie Anne Whitt)
ch. 14 Faculty of color and traditional notions of service (Benjamin Baez)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Knowledge workers - trade unionism's new frontier (Charles Kerchner)
ch. 2 History, women's work, and the new unionism (Dorothy Sue Cobble)
ch. 3 Entertainment unions and higher education (Lois Gray)
Quality in instruction
ch. 4 Adapting to a new generation of college students (Richard C. Turner)
ch. 5 Learning to read and write : still a miracle (Norma Tilden)
ch. 6 Keeping wonder alive in today's college classroom (Elizabeth Ann Bartlett)
ch. 7 Trust, but verify - toward fairer student evaluations (John Daley)
Issues in the profession
ch. 8 Fear of the self in American academic life (Enid Bloch)
ch. 9 Fighting the culture wars in academia (James Fisher)
ch. 10 Bargaining for the future at Cal State (Terry Jones)
ch. 11 Tenure at Minnesota : a postmortem (Bud McClure)
ch. 12 Distance education : assessing costs and benefits (David Garson)
ch. 13 University senates and the law : a case study (Alan W. Clarke and Laurie Anne Whitt)
ch. 14 Faculty of color and traditional notions of service (Benjamin Baez)

Electronic Literacies: Language, Culture, and Power in Online Education
Additional Info:
Electronic Literacies is an insightful study of the challenges and contradictions that arise as culturally and linguistically diverse learners engage in new language and literacy practices in online environments. The role of the Internet in changing literacy and education has been a topic of much speculation, but very little concrete research has been done in the area. This book is one of the first attempts to document the role of ...
Electronic Literacies is an insightful study of the challenges and contradictions that arise as culturally and linguistically diverse learners engage in new language and literacy practices in online environments. The role of the Internet in changing literacy and education has been a topic of much speculation, but very little concrete research has been done in the area. This book is one of the first attempts to document the role of ...
Additional Info:
Electronic Literacies is an insightful study of the challenges and contradictions that arise as culturally and linguistically diverse learners engage in new language and literacy practices in online environments. The role of the Internet in changing literacy and education has been a topic of much speculation, but very little concrete research has been done in the area. This book is one of the first attempts to document the role of the Internet and other new digital technologies in the development of language and literacy. Warschauer looks at how the nature of reading and writing is changing, and how those changes are being addressed in the classroom. His focus is on the experiences of culturally and linguistically diverse learners who are at special risk of being marginalized from the information society. Literacies is highly relevant for those interested or involved in ESL, bilingual, and multicultural education; composition and literacy education; technology-based school reform; the social context of schooling, critical pedagogy, and cultural studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction: Surveying the Terrain of Literacy
ch. 2 Computers, Composition, & Christianity
ch. 3 Networking into Academic Discourse
ch. 4 Computer-Assisted Language Revitalization
ch. 5 Cyber Service Learning
ch. 6 Conclusion: Striving Toward Multiliteracies
Epilogue
App Researching the Online Classroom
References
Author Index
Subject Index
Electronic Literacies is an insightful study of the challenges and contradictions that arise as culturally and linguistically diverse learners engage in new language and literacy practices in online environments. The role of the Internet in changing literacy and education has been a topic of much speculation, but very little concrete research has been done in the area. This book is one of the first attempts to document the role of the Internet and other new digital technologies in the development of language and literacy. Warschauer looks at how the nature of reading and writing is changing, and how those changes are being addressed in the classroom. His focus is on the experiences of culturally and linguistically diverse learners who are at special risk of being marginalized from the information society. Literacies is highly relevant for those interested or involved in ESL, bilingual, and multicultural education; composition and literacy education; technology-based school reform; the social context of schooling, critical pedagogy, and cultural studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction: Surveying the Terrain of Literacy
ch. 2 Computers, Composition, & Christianity
ch. 3 Networking into Academic Discourse
ch. 4 Computer-Assisted Language Revitalization
ch. 5 Cyber Service Learning
ch. 6 Conclusion: Striving Toward Multiliteracies
Epilogue
App Researching the Online Classroom
References
Author Index
Subject Index

Using Cases to Improve College Teaching: A Guide to More Reflective Practice
Additional Info:
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have ...
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have ...
Additional Info:
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have written case studies, with their suggestions on how to proceed; (5) discuss nine issues that have emerged through the use of cases (how they can place the focus on learning as well as teaching, possible alternative formats, getting at the more subtle issues of practice, going beyond problems to the problematic, whether and how cases can represent best practice, including content issues, using cases to build on one another, creating occasions for more productive use of cases, and the impact of case use on teaching improvement); and (6) describe three possible scenarios illustrating how cases might contribute to a campus culture that takes teaching and learning seriously. Four additional cases and teaching suggestions are appended as is a list of 13 resource organizations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Cases about college teaching and learning - a picture of emerging practice
ch. 2 The Case for cases - a deeper rationale
ch. 3 Using cases on your campus - three examples and strategies for making them work
ch. 4 Writing cases on your campus
ch. 5 Achieving the promise of cases - next steps and emerging issues
ch. 6 Cases and campus culture
Appendices - References - Sources Cited, Projects, People, Materials, Additional Cases
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have written case studies, with their suggestions on how to proceed; (5) discuss nine issues that have emerged through the use of cases (how they can place the focus on learning as well as teaching, possible alternative formats, getting at the more subtle issues of practice, going beyond problems to the problematic, whether and how cases can represent best practice, including content issues, using cases to build on one another, creating occasions for more productive use of cases, and the impact of case use on teaching improvement); and (6) describe three possible scenarios illustrating how cases might contribute to a campus culture that takes teaching and learning seriously. Four additional cases and teaching suggestions are appended as is a list of 13 resource organizations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Cases about college teaching and learning - a picture of emerging practice
ch. 2 The Case for cases - a deeper rationale
ch. 3 Using cases on your campus - three examples and strategies for making them work
ch. 4 Writing cases on your campus
ch. 5 Achieving the promise of cases - next steps and emerging issues
ch. 6 Cases and campus culture
Appendices - References - Sources Cited, Projects, People, Materials, Additional Cases

Pedagogy of Freedom: Ethics, Democracy, and Civic Courage
Additional Info:
In "Pedagogy of Freedom" Paulo Freire travels ever more deeply into the territory where learning and activism are the essence of human life. This profound new book shows why an engaged way of learning and teaching is central to the creation of the individual, culture, and history. Freire finds in today's emerging global society a new context in which education cannot be indifferent to the reproduction of dominant ideologies and ...
In "Pedagogy of Freedom" Paulo Freire travels ever more deeply into the territory where learning and activism are the essence of human life. This profound new book shows why an engaged way of learning and teaching is central to the creation of the individual, culture, and history. Freire finds in today's emerging global society a new context in which education cannot be indifferent to the reproduction of dominant ideologies and ...
Additional Info:
In "Pedagogy of Freedom" Paulo Freire travels ever more deeply into the territory where learning and activism are the essence of human life. This profound new book shows why an engaged way of learning and teaching is central to the creation of the individual, culture, and history. Freire finds in today's emerging global society a new context in which education cannot be indifferent to the reproduction of dominant ideologies and the interrogation of them. He argues against "progressive" liberalism and its passive acceptance of a world where unemployment and hunger must inevitably co-exist with opulence. In so doing, he shows why an acceptance of fatalism leads to loss of personal and societal freedom-and how those individuals who think without optimism have lost their place in history. This book displays the striking creativity and profound insight that characterized Freire's work to the very end of his life-an uplifting and provocative exploration not only for educators, but for all who learn and live." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Translator's Notes
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Introductory Reflections
ch. 2 There Is No Teaching without Learning
Methodological Rigor
Research
Respect for What Students Know
A Capacity to Be Critical
Ethics and Aesthetics
Words Incarnated in Example
Risk, Acceptance of What Is New, and Rejection of Discrimination
Critical Reflection on Practice
Cultural Identity
ch. 3 Teaching Is Not Just Transferring Knowledge
Awareness of Our Unfinishedness
Recognition of One's Conditioning
Respect for the Autonomy of the Student
Common Sense
Humility, Tolerance, and the Struggle for the Rights of Educators
Capacity to Apprehend Reality
Joy and Hope
Conviction That Change Is Possible
Teaching Requires Curiosity
ch. 4 Teaching Is a Human Act
Self-Confidence, Professional Competence, and Generosity
Commitment
Education as a Form of Intervention in the World
Freedom and Authority
Decision Making That Is Aware and Conscientious
Knowing How to Listen
Education Is Ideological
Openness to Dialogue
Caring for the Students
Notes
Index
About the Author
In "Pedagogy of Freedom" Paulo Freire travels ever more deeply into the territory where learning and activism are the essence of human life. This profound new book shows why an engaged way of learning and teaching is central to the creation of the individual, culture, and history. Freire finds in today's emerging global society a new context in which education cannot be indifferent to the reproduction of dominant ideologies and the interrogation of them. He argues against "progressive" liberalism and its passive acceptance of a world where unemployment and hunger must inevitably co-exist with opulence. In so doing, he shows why an acceptance of fatalism leads to loss of personal and societal freedom-and how those individuals who think without optimism have lost their place in history. This book displays the striking creativity and profound insight that characterized Freire's work to the very end of his life-an uplifting and provocative exploration not only for educators, but for all who learn and live." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Translator's Notes
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Introductory Reflections
ch. 2 There Is No Teaching without Learning
Methodological Rigor
Research
Respect for What Students Know
A Capacity to Be Critical
Ethics and Aesthetics
Words Incarnated in Example
Risk, Acceptance of What Is New, and Rejection of Discrimination
Critical Reflection on Practice
Cultural Identity
ch. 3 Teaching Is Not Just Transferring Knowledge
Awareness of Our Unfinishedness
Recognition of One's Conditioning
Respect for the Autonomy of the Student
Common Sense
Humility, Tolerance, and the Struggle for the Rights of Educators
Capacity to Apprehend Reality
Joy and Hope
Conviction That Change Is Possible
Teaching Requires Curiosity
ch. 4 Teaching Is a Human Act
Self-Confidence, Professional Competence, and Generosity
Commitment
Education as a Form of Intervention in the World
Freedom and Authority
Decision Making That Is Aware and Conscientious
Knowing How to Listen
Education Is Ideological
Openness to Dialogue
Caring for the Students
Notes
Index
About the Author

Writing in Multicultural Settings
Additional Info:
The twenty essays and four responses ("cross-talks") in this volume, the fifth in the Research and Scholarship in Composition series, confront the challenges presented by the racial, ethnic, class, gender, religious, age, and physical-ability differences among today's writing students. The contributors, who teach in classrooms and writing centers at a variety of private and public institutions, discuss their immersion in students' discourses and cultures and balance descriptions of their teaching ...
The twenty essays and four responses ("cross-talks") in this volume, the fifth in the Research and Scholarship in Composition series, confront the challenges presented by the racial, ethnic, class, gender, religious, age, and physical-ability differences among today's writing students. The contributors, who teach in classrooms and writing centers at a variety of private and public institutions, discuss their immersion in students' discourses and cultures and balance descriptions of their teaching ...
Additional Info:
The twenty essays and four responses ("cross-talks") in this volume, the fifth in the Research and Scholarship in Composition series, confront the challenges presented by the racial, ethnic, class, gender, religious, age, and physical-ability differences among today's writing students. The contributors, who teach in classrooms and writing centers at a variety of private and public institutions, discuss their immersion in students' discourses and cultures and balance descriptions of their teaching experiences with careful and critical reflection.
The volume begins and ends with sections examining the tensions and conflicts in the classroom; the two sections in between focus more specifically on texts and curricula and on teaching English as a second language. The cross-talks that conclude each section synthesize and critique the essays.
Writing in Multicultural Settings is essential, thought-provoking reading for college administrators, writing teachers, and scholars and students in composition studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface to the Series
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Embracing a Multicultural Rhetoric (Bonnie Lisle and Sandra Mano)
ch. 2 Whose Voice Is It Anyway? Marked Features in the Writing of Black English Speakers (Denise Troutman)
ch. 3 Teaching American Indian Students: Interpreting the Rhetorics of Silence (Michelle Grijalva)
ch. 4 Exploring Bias in Essay Tests (Liz Hamp-Lyons)
ch. 5 "Real Niggaz's Don't Die": African American Students Speaking Themselves into Their Writing (Kermit E. Campbell)
ch. 6 Negotiating Authority through One-to-One Collaboration in the Multicultural Writing Center (Susan Blalock)
ch. 7 Cross-Talk: Talking Cross-Difference (Gail Y. Okawa)
ch. 8 Two Approaches to "Cultural Text": Toward Multicultural Literacy (Carol Severino)
ch. 9 Decolonizing the Classroom: Freshman Composition in a Multicultural Setting (Esha Niyogi De and Donna Uthus Gregory)
ch. 10 Writing Identities: The Essence of Difference in Multicultural Classrooms (Wendy S. Hesford)
ch. 11 Composition Readers and the Construction of Identity (Sandra Jamieson)
ch. 12 "But Isn't This the Land of the Free?": Resistance and Discovery in Student Responses to Farewell to Manzanar (Virginia A. Chappell)
ch. 13 Cross-Talk: Teachers, Texts, Readers, and Writers (Cecilia Rodríguez Milanés)
ch. 14 Contrastive Rhetoric: Implications for Teachers of Writing in Multicultural Classrooms (Ulla Connor)
ch. 15 Differences in ESL and Native-English-Speaker Writing: The Research and Its Implications (Tony Silva)
ch. 16 Cultural Conflicts in the Writing Center: Expectations and Assumptions of ESL Students (Muriel Harris)
ch. 17 Cross-Talk: ESL Issues and Contrastive Rhetoric (Ilona Leki)
ch. 18 The Place of Intercultural Literacy in the Writing Classroom (Juan C. Guerra)
ch. 19 The Politics of Difference: Toward a Pedagogy of Reciprocity (Mary Soliday)
ch. 20 An Afrocentric Multicultural Writing Project (Henry L. Evans)
ch. 21 "Better Than What People Told Me I Was": What Students of Color Tell Us about the Multicultural Composition Classroom (Carol A. Miller)
ch. 22 Students on the Border (Kate Mangelsdorf )
ch. 23 When the Writing Test Fails: Assessing Assessment at an Urban College (Barbara Gleason)
ch. 24 Cross-Talk: Toward Transcultural Writing Classrooms
Notes on Contributors (Keith Gilyard)
Works Cited
Index
The twenty essays and four responses ("cross-talks") in this volume, the fifth in the Research and Scholarship in Composition series, confront the challenges presented by the racial, ethnic, class, gender, religious, age, and physical-ability differences among today's writing students. The contributors, who teach in classrooms and writing centers at a variety of private and public institutions, discuss their immersion in students' discourses and cultures and balance descriptions of their teaching experiences with careful and critical reflection.
The volume begins and ends with sections examining the tensions and conflicts in the classroom; the two sections in between focus more specifically on texts and curricula and on teaching English as a second language. The cross-talks that conclude each section synthesize and critique the essays.
Writing in Multicultural Settings is essential, thought-provoking reading for college administrators, writing teachers, and scholars and students in composition studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface to the Series
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Embracing a Multicultural Rhetoric (Bonnie Lisle and Sandra Mano)
ch. 2 Whose Voice Is It Anyway? Marked Features in the Writing of Black English Speakers (Denise Troutman)
ch. 3 Teaching American Indian Students: Interpreting the Rhetorics of Silence (Michelle Grijalva)
ch. 4 Exploring Bias in Essay Tests (Liz Hamp-Lyons)
ch. 5 "Real Niggaz's Don't Die": African American Students Speaking Themselves into Their Writing (Kermit E. Campbell)
ch. 6 Negotiating Authority through One-to-One Collaboration in the Multicultural Writing Center (Susan Blalock)
ch. 7 Cross-Talk: Talking Cross-Difference (Gail Y. Okawa)
ch. 8 Two Approaches to "Cultural Text": Toward Multicultural Literacy (Carol Severino)
ch. 9 Decolonizing the Classroom: Freshman Composition in a Multicultural Setting (Esha Niyogi De and Donna Uthus Gregory)
ch. 10 Writing Identities: The Essence of Difference in Multicultural Classrooms (Wendy S. Hesford)
ch. 11 Composition Readers and the Construction of Identity (Sandra Jamieson)
ch. 12 "But Isn't This the Land of the Free?": Resistance and Discovery in Student Responses to Farewell to Manzanar (Virginia A. Chappell)
ch. 13 Cross-Talk: Teachers, Texts, Readers, and Writers (Cecilia Rodríguez Milanés)
ch. 14 Contrastive Rhetoric: Implications for Teachers of Writing in Multicultural Classrooms (Ulla Connor)
ch. 15 Differences in ESL and Native-English-Speaker Writing: The Research and Its Implications (Tony Silva)
ch. 16 Cultural Conflicts in the Writing Center: Expectations and Assumptions of ESL Students (Muriel Harris)
ch. 17 Cross-Talk: ESL Issues and Contrastive Rhetoric (Ilona Leki)
ch. 18 The Place of Intercultural Literacy in the Writing Classroom (Juan C. Guerra)
ch. 19 The Politics of Difference: Toward a Pedagogy of Reciprocity (Mary Soliday)
ch. 20 An Afrocentric Multicultural Writing Project (Henry L. Evans)
ch. 21 "Better Than What People Told Me I Was": What Students of Color Tell Us about the Multicultural Composition Classroom (Carol A. Miller)
ch. 22 Students on the Border (Kate Mangelsdorf )
ch. 23 When the Writing Test Fails: Assessing Assessment at an Urban College (Barbara Gleason)
ch. 24 Cross-Talk: Toward Transcultural Writing Classrooms
Notes on Contributors (Keith Gilyard)
Works Cited
Index
Additional Info:
The author offers an in-depth examination of resource-based learning as an important new paradigm for higher education. This concept shifts the focus from teaching to learning by requiring students to select their own learning materials from a wide range of real world information resources. A resource-based approach helps students assume more responsibility for their own learning. It also creates a strong partnership between faculty members and campus librarians. Breivik highlights ...
The author offers an in-depth examination of resource-based learning as an important new paradigm for higher education. This concept shifts the focus from teaching to learning by requiring students to select their own learning materials from a wide range of real world information resources. A resource-based approach helps students assume more responsibility for their own learning. It also creates a strong partnership between faculty members and campus librarians. Breivik highlights ...
Additional Info:
The author offers an in-depth examination of resource-based learning as an important new paradigm for higher education. This concept shifts the focus from teaching to learning by requiring students to select their own learning materials from a wide range of real world information resources. A resource-based approach helps students assume more responsibility for their own learning. It also creates a strong partnership between faculty members and campus librarians. Breivik highlights examples of colleges and universities that are already using this approach successfully and offers a framework to help educators create their own resource-based learning programs. This work will be of significant interest to academic leaders, faculty, and campus information providers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Move Toward a New Literacy
ch. 2 Resource-Based Learning
ch. 3 Successful Information Literacy Programs
ch. 4 Discipline-Specific Models
ch. 5 The Challenges of Human Resources
ch. 6 Institutional Challenges
ch. 7 Moving Forward
Postscript for Early Leaders
App. A Final Report of the American Library Association Presidential Committee on Information Literacy
App. B National Forum on Information Literacy Membership List
App. C Data Collection on Information Literacy Programs at Higher Education Institutions: Analysis and Report by the Association of College and Research Libraries, 1994-1995
App. D Writing Syllabus for Wheaton College Psychology
App. E King's College Competency Growth Plan in Library and Information Literacy for Students Majoring in Marketing
Selected Resources
Index
The author offers an in-depth examination of resource-based learning as an important new paradigm for higher education. This concept shifts the focus from teaching to learning by requiring students to select their own learning materials from a wide range of real world information resources. A resource-based approach helps students assume more responsibility for their own learning. It also creates a strong partnership between faculty members and campus librarians. Breivik highlights examples of colleges and universities that are already using this approach successfully and offers a framework to help educators create their own resource-based learning programs. This work will be of significant interest to academic leaders, faculty, and campus information providers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 The Move Toward a New Literacy
ch. 2 Resource-Based Learning
ch. 3 Successful Information Literacy Programs
ch. 4 Discipline-Specific Models
ch. 5 The Challenges of Human Resources
ch. 6 Institutional Challenges
ch. 7 Moving Forward
Postscript for Early Leaders
App. A Final Report of the American Library Association Presidential Committee on Information Literacy
App. B National Forum on Information Literacy Membership List
App. C Data Collection on Information Literacy Programs at Higher Education Institutions: Analysis and Report by the Association of College and Research Libraries, 1994-1995
App. D Writing Syllabus for Wheaton College Psychology
App. E King's College Competency Growth Plan in Library and Information Literacy for Students Majoring in Marketing
Selected Resources
Index

Assessing Students' Learning
Additional Info:
Assessment is most effective when it is conceived, discussed, and implemented by faculty and their classes. This sourcebook presents assessment strategies and information, based on recent research and practical experience, to provide new assessment ideas and approaches that emphasize student learning and effective teaching. (From the Publisher)
Assessment is most effective when it is conceived, discussed, and implemented by faculty and their classes. This sourcebook presents assessment strategies and information, based on recent research and practical experience, to provide new assessment ideas and approaches that emphasize student learning and effective teaching. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Assessment is most effective when it is conceived, discussed, and implemented by faculty and their classes. This sourcebook presents assessment strategies and information, based on recent research and practical experience, to provide new assessment ideas and approaches that emphasize student learning and effective teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch.1 Basic issues and Principles in classroom assessment (Jon F. Wergin)
ch.2 Faculty as a force to improve instruction through assessment (Georgine Loacker)
ch.3 Assessing Critical thinking across the curriculum (C. Blaine Carpenter, James C. Doig)
ch.4 Assessing writing: Theory and practice (Karen L. Greenberg)
ch.5 Assessing experiential learning (Susan Simosko)
ch.6 Assessing the departmental major (Bobby Fong)
ch.7 Grading students (Howard R. Pollio, W. Lee Humphreys)
ch.8 A synthesis with further recommendations (James H. McMillan)
Index
Assessment is most effective when it is conceived, discussed, and implemented by faculty and their classes. This sourcebook presents assessment strategies and information, based on recent research and practical experience, to provide new assessment ideas and approaches that emphasize student learning and effective teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch.1 Basic issues and Principles in classroom assessment (Jon F. Wergin)
ch.2 Faculty as a force to improve instruction through assessment (Georgine Loacker)
ch.3 Assessing Critical thinking across the curriculum (C. Blaine Carpenter, James C. Doig)
ch.4 Assessing writing: Theory and practice (Karen L. Greenberg)
ch.5 Assessing experiential learning (Susan Simosko)
ch.6 Assessing the departmental major (Bobby Fong)
ch.7 Grading students (Howard R. Pollio, W. Lee Humphreys)
ch.8 A synthesis with further recommendations (James H. McMillan)
Index

Knowing and Doing: Learning Through Experience
Additional Info:
The seemingly subtle difference between asking "What should we teach?" and "How will students be different as a result?" can lead to changes that permeate all aspects of an institution. Decisions about classroom content and methods, as well as larger curricular issues, depend on a clear view of intended outcomes - what we want students to know and be able to do with what they know. It is ironic that ...
The seemingly subtle difference between asking "What should we teach?" and "How will students be different as a result?" can lead to changes that permeate all aspects of an institution. Decisions about classroom content and methods, as well as larger curricular issues, depend on a clear view of intended outcomes - what we want students to know and be able to do with what they know. It is ironic that ...
Additional Info:
The seemingly subtle difference between asking "What should we teach?" and "How will students be different as a result?" can lead to changes that permeate all aspects of an institution. Decisions about classroom content and methods, as well as larger curricular issues, depend on a clear view of intended outcomes - what we want students to know and be able to do with what they know. It is ironic that college catalogues include assurances that graduates will be prepared to participate in society as contributing citizens, make informed decisions, and take on leadership roles, and yet the abilities necessary for these contributions are not explicitly taught. In contrast, the programs set forth in this volume assist students to integrate what they know with what they can do. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Experiential learning across the curriculum : assumptions and principle (Pat Hutchings, Allen Wutzdorff)
ch. 2 Liberal learning in engineering education : the WPI experience (William R. Grogan, Lance E. Schachterle, Francis C. Lutz)
ch. 3 The teachable moment : the Washington Center Internship Program (Mary Ryan)
ch. 4 Self-assessment : essential skills for adult learners (David O. Justice, Catherine Marienau)
ch. 5 An integrating seminar : bringing knowledge and experience together (Allen Wutzdorff, Pat Hutchings)
Conclusion : a view of learning (Allen Wutzdorff, Pat Hutchings)
The seemingly subtle difference between asking "What should we teach?" and "How will students be different as a result?" can lead to changes that permeate all aspects of an institution. Decisions about classroom content and methods, as well as larger curricular issues, depend on a clear view of intended outcomes - what we want students to know and be able to do with what they know. It is ironic that college catalogues include assurances that graduates will be prepared to participate in society as contributing citizens, make informed decisions, and take on leadership roles, and yet the abilities necessary for these contributions are not explicitly taught. In contrast, the programs set forth in this volume assist students to integrate what they know with what they can do. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Experiential learning across the curriculum : assumptions and principle (Pat Hutchings, Allen Wutzdorff)
ch. 2 Liberal learning in engineering education : the WPI experience (William R. Grogan, Lance E. Schachterle, Francis C. Lutz)
ch. 3 The teachable moment : the Washington Center Internship Program (Mary Ryan)
ch. 4 Self-assessment : essential skills for adult learners (David O. Justice, Catherine Marienau)
ch. 5 An integrating seminar : bringing knowledge and experience together (Allen Wutzdorff, Pat Hutchings)
Conclusion : a view of learning (Allen Wutzdorff, Pat Hutchings)

Universal Challenges in Faculty Work: Fresh Perspectives from Around the World
Additional Info:
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context ...
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context ...
Additional Info:
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context of universal themes. Faculty are responding to demands for social development and to pressures from the world of work. They are influenced by government policies and financial constraints. Regardless of the context within which they practice, faculty still struggle with the familiar issues of how to learn about teaching, how to juggle teaching and research, and how to evaluate both teaching and learning. The international perspectives presented in this volume give readers a fresh outlook on everyday concerns and introduce new thoughts on teaching and learning. This is the 72nd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context of universal themes. Faculty are responding to demands for social development and to pressures from the world of work. They are influenced by government policies and financial constraints. Regardless of the context within which they practice, faculty still struggle with the familiar issues of how to learn about teaching, how to juggle teaching and research, and how to evaluate both teaching and learning. The international perspectives presented in this volume give readers a fresh outlook on everyday concerns and introduce new thoughts on teaching and learning. This is the 72nd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This is an incredible, amusing, horrifying, yet true story, in which all names have been changed to protect the guilty. It tells how the author, a journalist turned college professor, came face to face with Generation X: jaded, un-achieving, highly demanding yet lacking any respect for standards or intelligence. These insouciant scholars wore bored looks, ample attitudes, and reversed baseball caps. They expected to earn top grades by just showing ...
This is an incredible, amusing, horrifying, yet true story, in which all names have been changed to protect the guilty. It tells how the author, a journalist turned college professor, came face to face with Generation X: jaded, un-achieving, highly demanding yet lacking any respect for standards or intelligence. These insouciant scholars wore bored looks, ample attitudes, and reversed baseball caps. They expected to earn top grades by just showing ...
Additional Info:
This is an incredible, amusing, horrifying, yet true story, in which all names have been changed to protect the guilty. It tells how the author, a journalist turned college professor, came face to face with Generation X: jaded, un-achieving, highly demanding yet lacking any respect for standards or intelligence. These insouciant scholars wore bored looks, ample attitudes, and reversed baseball caps. They expected to earn top grades by just showing up in class, which they interrupted with their portable TVs, cellular phones, or personal pagers. For his own survival as a teacher, Sacks decided to play a bizarre, cynical game: The Sandbox Experiment, in which he catered to the whims of his students as though they were kindergartners. It worked: Sacks became a great success as a 'teacher', got tenure, and now continues to 'teach' at the strange, appalling institution he calls 'The College'. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
pt. 1 The Sandbox Experiment
ch. 1 Coming into Teaching
ch. 2 Culture Shock
ch. 3 The Castle, with Apologies to Franz Kafka
ch. 4 Reflections on the Worth of Teachers
ch. 5 "We Are Grownups Now"
ch. 6 Where All the Kids ARe (Way) Above Average
ch. 7 Hooked on Hand-holding
ch. 8 "Hey Dad, Put It on Pause!"
ch. 9 The Sandbox Experiment
pt. 2 Education in Postmodern America
ch. 10 The Postmodern Revolt
ch. 11 The Balkanization of Knowledge and Power
ch. 12 The Postmodern Spectacle and Generation X
ch. 13 Postmodernity and the Entitlement Society
ch. 14 Adapting to a Postmodern World
Epilogue
Notes
Index
This is an incredible, amusing, horrifying, yet true story, in which all names have been changed to protect the guilty. It tells how the author, a journalist turned college professor, came face to face with Generation X: jaded, un-achieving, highly demanding yet lacking any respect for standards or intelligence. These insouciant scholars wore bored looks, ample attitudes, and reversed baseball caps. They expected to earn top grades by just showing up in class, which they interrupted with their portable TVs, cellular phones, or personal pagers. For his own survival as a teacher, Sacks decided to play a bizarre, cynical game: The Sandbox Experiment, in which he catered to the whims of his students as though they were kindergartners. It worked: Sacks became a great success as a 'teacher', got tenure, and now continues to 'teach' at the strange, appalling institution he calls 'The College'. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
pt. 1 The Sandbox Experiment
ch. 1 Coming into Teaching
ch. 2 Culture Shock
ch. 3 The Castle, with Apologies to Franz Kafka
ch. 4 Reflections on the Worth of Teachers
ch. 5 "We Are Grownups Now"
ch. 6 Where All the Kids ARe (Way) Above Average
ch. 7 Hooked on Hand-holding
ch. 8 "Hey Dad, Put It on Pause!"
ch. 9 The Sandbox Experiment
pt. 2 Education in Postmodern America
ch. 10 The Postmodern Revolt
ch. 11 The Balkanization of Knowledge and Power
ch. 12 The Postmodern Spectacle and Generation X
ch. 13 Postmodernity and the Entitlement Society
ch. 14 Adapting to a Postmodern World
Epilogue
Notes
Index

Successful Faculty Development and Evaluation: The Complete Teaching Portfolio
Additional Info:
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
What is a Teaching Portfolio?
What Goes into a Teaching Portfolio?
Evaluating Portfolios
Formative Evaluation Techniques
Shaping an Institutional Definition of Good Teaching
The Organizational Culture and Teaching Portfolios
The Role of Department Chairs
Conclusion
References
Index
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
What is a Teaching Portfolio?
What Goes into a Teaching Portfolio?
Evaluating Portfolios
Formative Evaluation Techniques
Shaping an Institutional Definition of Good Teaching
The Organizational Culture and Teaching Portfolios
The Role of Department Chairs
Conclusion
References
Index

Excellent Teaching in a Changing Academy: Essays in Honor of Kenneth Eble
Additional Info:
Are the new elitism and conservatism that are creeping into academia degrading undergraduate education? This volume seeks not to resolve the issues surrounding academia today but rather to mark the contested points in the debates on whether to incorporate cultural diversity in the curriculum, whether to compete for the research dollar, and how to evaluate faculty humanely in a changing atmosphere. As Eble urged, in the 1990s it is imperative ...
Are the new elitism and conservatism that are creeping into academia degrading undergraduate education? This volume seeks not to resolve the issues surrounding academia today but rather to mark the contested points in the debates on whether to incorporate cultural diversity in the curriculum, whether to compete for the research dollar, and how to evaluate faculty humanely in a changing atmosphere. As Eble urged, in the 1990s it is imperative ...
Additional Info:
Are the new elitism and conservatism that are creeping into academia degrading undergraduate education? This volume seeks not to resolve the issues surrounding academia today but rather to mark the contested points in the debates on whether to incorporate cultural diversity in the curriculum, whether to compete for the research dollar, and how to evaluate faculty humanely in a changing atmosphere. As Eble urged, in the 1990s it is imperative that we find ways to foster good teaching and learning in an academy that must change to meet the needs of students from different demographic backgrounds and with different levels of preparedness, and academy that is facing continuing political and budgetary pressures. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The degradation of undergraduate education (Kenneth Eble)
ch. 2 The art of deliberalizing: A handbook for the true professional (Wayne C. Booth)
ch. 3 The transforming of the American mind (Henry Louis Gates, Jr.)
ch. 4 Miss grimp revisited: Reconfiguring composition, literature, and cultural literacy (Feroza Jussawalla)
ch. 5 A coaching model for the teaching of writing (Anthony J. Walsh)
ch. 6 The politics of the classroom: Toward an oppositional pedagogy (Minette Marcroft)
ch. 7 The lower end of higher education: Freshmen, sophomores, the research university, and the community college (Timothy R. Bywater)
ch. 8 What good are computers in the writing classroom?
Encouraging and evaluating scholarship for the college teacher (Michael Dobberstein)
ch. 9 Kenneth Eble on writing in college: Ahead of his time (William J. McCleary)
ch. 10 The bush foundation's faculty development projects (Humphrey Doermann)
Are the new elitism and conservatism that are creeping into academia degrading undergraduate education? This volume seeks not to resolve the issues surrounding academia today but rather to mark the contested points in the debates on whether to incorporate cultural diversity in the curriculum, whether to compete for the research dollar, and how to evaluate faculty humanely in a changing atmosphere. As Eble urged, in the 1990s it is imperative that we find ways to foster good teaching and learning in an academy that must change to meet the needs of students from different demographic backgrounds and with different levels of preparedness, and academy that is facing continuing political and budgetary pressures. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The degradation of undergraduate education (Kenneth Eble)
ch. 2 The art of deliberalizing: A handbook for the true professional (Wayne C. Booth)
ch. 3 The transforming of the American mind (Henry Louis Gates, Jr.)
ch. 4 Miss grimp revisited: Reconfiguring composition, literature, and cultural literacy (Feroza Jussawalla)
ch. 5 A coaching model for the teaching of writing (Anthony J. Walsh)
ch. 6 The politics of the classroom: Toward an oppositional pedagogy (Minette Marcroft)
ch. 7 The lower end of higher education: Freshmen, sophomores, the research university, and the community college (Timothy R. Bywater)
ch. 8 What good are computers in the writing classroom?
Encouraging and evaluating scholarship for the college teacher (Michael Dobberstein)
ch. 9 Kenneth Eble on writing in college: Ahead of his time (William J. McCleary)
ch. 10 The bush foundation's faculty development projects (Humphrey Doermann)

Feminisms and Pedagogies of Everyday Life
Additional Info:
From the Publishers
Despite the intimidating reference to pedagogy in the title, the anthology is true to the encompassing notion of feminism as a foundation from which theories and disciplines can emanate in order to voice a variety of experience. The American, British, and Australian scholars provide compelling essays on identity, friendship, motherhood, hunger, the media, parenting, childcare, shame, and the silencing influences of legal systems and the academy. ...
From the Publishers
Despite the intimidating reference to pedagogy in the title, the anthology is true to the encompassing notion of feminism as a foundation from which theories and disciplines can emanate in order to voice a variety of experience. The American, British, and Australian scholars provide compelling essays on identity, friendship, motherhood, hunger, the media, parenting, childcare, shame, and the silencing influences of legal systems and the academy. ...
Additional Info:
From the Publishers
Despite the intimidating reference to pedagogy in the title, the anthology is true to the encompassing notion of feminism as a foundation from which theories and disciplines can emanate in order to voice a variety of experience. The American, British, and Australian scholars provide compelling essays on identity, friendship, motherhood, hunger, the media, parenting, childcare, shame, and the silencing influences of legal systems and the academy. Unusual for this type of collection is a lone wolf contribution about learning to be a man--the "other half" viewpoint by which feminism marks its progress.
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Learning Identities and Differences
ch. 2 Women and Friendships: Pedagogies of Care and Relationality
ch. 3 Motherhood as Pedagogy: Developmental Psychology and the Accounts of Mothers of Young Children
ch. 4 Learning to Be a Man: Dilemmas and Contradictions of Masculine Experience
ch. 5 Hunger as Ideology
ch. 6 "Girls' Mags" and the Pedagogical Formation of the Girl
ch. 7 Childhood and Parenting in Children's Popular Culture and Childcare Magazines
ch. 8 Play for Profit
ch. 9 Women in the Holocene: Ethnicity, Fantasy, and the Film The Joy Luck Club
ch. 10 The Pedagogy of Shame
ch. 11 Reconsidering the Notions of Voice and Experience in Critical Pedagogy
ch. 12 Legal Pedagogy as Authorized Silence(s)
ch. 13 Everyday Life in the Academy: Postmodernist Feminisms, Generic Seductions, Rewriting and Being Heard
Contributors
Index
From the Publishers
Despite the intimidating reference to pedagogy in the title, the anthology is true to the encompassing notion of feminism as a foundation from which theories and disciplines can emanate in order to voice a variety of experience. The American, British, and Australian scholars provide compelling essays on identity, friendship, motherhood, hunger, the media, parenting, childcare, shame, and the silencing influences of legal systems and the academy. Unusual for this type of collection is a lone wolf contribution about learning to be a man--the "other half" viewpoint by which feminism marks its progress.
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Learning Identities and Differences
ch. 2 Women and Friendships: Pedagogies of Care and Relationality
ch. 3 Motherhood as Pedagogy: Developmental Psychology and the Accounts of Mothers of Young Children
ch. 4 Learning to Be a Man: Dilemmas and Contradictions of Masculine Experience
ch. 5 Hunger as Ideology
ch. 6 "Girls' Mags" and the Pedagogical Formation of the Girl
ch. 7 Childhood and Parenting in Children's Popular Culture and Childcare Magazines
ch. 8 Play for Profit
ch. 9 Women in the Holocene: Ethnicity, Fantasy, and the Film The Joy Luck Club
ch. 10 The Pedagogy of Shame
ch. 11 Reconsidering the Notions of Voice and Experience in Critical Pedagogy
ch. 12 Legal Pedagogy as Authorized Silence(s)
ch. 13 Everyday Life in the Academy: Postmodernist Feminisms, Generic Seductions, Rewriting and Being Heard
Contributors
Index

Student Learning Outside the Classroom: Transcending Artificial Boundaries
Additional Info:
Explores the issue of institutional productivity and student learning outside the classroom. Reviews the conditions that can foster a climate where out-of-classroom experiences can contribute to greater educational productivity. (From the Publisher)
Explores the issue of institutional productivity and student learning outside the classroom. Reviews the conditions that can foster a climate where out-of-classroom experiences can contribute to greater educational productivity. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Explores the issue of institutional productivity and student learning outside the classroom. Reviews the conditions that can foster a climate where out-of-classroom experiences can contribute to greater educational productivity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Jonathan D. Fife)
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Warrant, Purpose, and Overview
Enhancing Institutional Productivity
Purpose
Overview and Scope
ch. 2 What the Literature Says about Life Outside the Classroom and Desired Outcomes of College
Guiding Frameworks
Educational Attainment
Outcomes Clusters
Summary
ch. 3 Conditions That Foster Involvement in Educationally Purposed Out-of-Class Activities
Clear, Coherent, and Consistently Expressed Educational Purposes
An Institutional Philosophy that Embraces a Holistic View of Talent Development
Complementary Institutional Policies and Practices Congruent with Students' Characteristics and Needs
High, Clear Expectations for Student Performance
Use of Effective Teaching Approaches
Systematic Assessment of Institutional Practices and Student Performance
Ample Opportunities for Student Involvement in Educationally Purposeful Out-of-Class Activities
Human Scale Settings Characterized by Ethics of Membership and Care
An Ethos of Learning that Pervades All Aspects of the Institution
ch. 4 Implications
General Recommendations
Recommendations for Various Groups
The Key Tasks
Need for Additional Research
Conclusion
References
Index
Explores the issue of institutional productivity and student learning outside the classroom. Reviews the conditions that can foster a climate where out-of-classroom experiences can contribute to greater educational productivity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Jonathan D. Fife)
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Warrant, Purpose, and Overview
Enhancing Institutional Productivity
Purpose
Overview and Scope
ch. 2 What the Literature Says about Life Outside the Classroom and Desired Outcomes of College
Guiding Frameworks
Educational Attainment
Outcomes Clusters
Summary
ch. 3 Conditions That Foster Involvement in Educationally Purposed Out-of-Class Activities
Clear, Coherent, and Consistently Expressed Educational Purposes
An Institutional Philosophy that Embraces a Holistic View of Talent Development
Complementary Institutional Policies and Practices Congruent with Students' Characteristics and Needs
High, Clear Expectations for Student Performance
Use of Effective Teaching Approaches
Systematic Assessment of Institutional Practices and Student Performance
Ample Opportunities for Student Involvement in Educationally Purposeful Out-of-Class Activities
Human Scale Settings Characterized by Ethics of Membership and Care
An Ethos of Learning that Pervades All Aspects of the Institution
ch. 4 Implications
General Recommendations
Recommendations for Various Groups
The Key Tasks
Need for Additional Research
Conclusion
References
Index

Educating for Freedom: The Paradox of Pedagogy
Additional Info:
The very notion of teaching freedom suggests a paradox. Ever since Rousseau, the project of liberal education has been situated in the matrix of the teacher-student relationship. Some theorists have even seen this relationship as erotic. Part one of this book explores the educational philosophies of Rousseau, Freud, Paolo Freire, Ivan Illich, and Michel Foucault. All these thinkers wrestle with the paradox, How can such a mutually dependent relationship foster ...
The very notion of teaching freedom suggests a paradox. Ever since Rousseau, the project of liberal education has been situated in the matrix of the teacher-student relationship. Some theorists have even seen this relationship as erotic. Part one of this book explores the educational philosophies of Rousseau, Freud, Paolo Freire, Ivan Illich, and Michel Foucault. All these thinkers wrestle with the paradox, How can such a mutually dependent relationship foster ...
Additional Info:
The very notion of teaching freedom suggests a paradox. Ever since Rousseau, the project of liberal education has been situated in the matrix of the teacher-student relationship. Some theorists have even seen this relationship as erotic. Part one of this book explores the educational philosophies of Rousseau, Freud, Paolo Freire, Ivan Illich, and Michel Foucault. All these thinkers wrestle with the paradox, How can such a mutually dependent relationship foster independence? The primary vehicle necessary to a liberating education, the personal relationship, is also the fundamental obstacle to the achievement of genuine liberation.
After reaching this conclusion, the authors turn away from the student-teacher relationship and the paradox of pedagogy to examine another type of teaching and learning--where two teachers who differ in fundamental ways engage in collegial teaching with students they have in common. Collegial teaching is described in its particularity, based on the authors' experiences at an unusual liberal arts college, The Evergreen State College. They find that the changed dynamics of equality and the altered structure of authority created by collegial teaching is rewarding for both teachers and students, and may be a way out of the paradox of pedagogy to intellectual freedom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 The Promise of a Personal Pedagogy: Rousseau's Emile
ch. 2 The Paradox of a Personal Pedagogy: Freud's Concept of Transference
ch. 3 The Promise of a Social Pedagogy: Paulo Freire's Culture Circles
ch. 4 The Paradox of a Social Pedagogy: The Institutional Analyses of Ivan Illich and Michel Foucault
ch. 5 Turning Away from the Student-Teacher Relationship / Turning Toward Colleagues
ch. 6 Collegial Teaching
Conclusion
Notes
Index
The very notion of teaching freedom suggests a paradox. Ever since Rousseau, the project of liberal education has been situated in the matrix of the teacher-student relationship. Some theorists have even seen this relationship as erotic. Part one of this book explores the educational philosophies of Rousseau, Freud, Paolo Freire, Ivan Illich, and Michel Foucault. All these thinkers wrestle with the paradox, How can such a mutually dependent relationship foster independence? The primary vehicle necessary to a liberating education, the personal relationship, is also the fundamental obstacle to the achievement of genuine liberation.
After reaching this conclusion, the authors turn away from the student-teacher relationship and the paradox of pedagogy to examine another type of teaching and learning--where two teachers who differ in fundamental ways engage in collegial teaching with students they have in common. Collegial teaching is described in its particularity, based on the authors' experiences at an unusual liberal arts college, The Evergreen State College. They find that the changed dynamics of equality and the altered structure of authority created by collegial teaching is rewarding for both teachers and students, and may be a way out of the paradox of pedagogy to intellectual freedom. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 The Promise of a Personal Pedagogy: Rousseau's Emile
ch. 2 The Paradox of a Personal Pedagogy: Freud's Concept of Transference
ch. 3 The Promise of a Social Pedagogy: Paulo Freire's Culture Circles
ch. 4 The Paradox of a Social Pedagogy: The Institutional Analyses of Ivan Illich and Michel Foucault
ch. 5 Turning Away from the Student-Teacher Relationship / Turning Toward Colleagues
ch. 6 Collegial Teaching
Conclusion
Notes
Index

Inquiry and Reflection: Framing Narrative Practice in Education
Additional Info:
Inquiry and Reflection shows how stories of schooling can elucidate difficult, and unexamined problems facing teachers. While professional texts tend to raise issues of power and its distribution and questions of culture and ideology, often the manner of presentation is abstract, and pre-service teachers have difficulty making connections. Yet literary, film, and video materials illuminate problems and suggest ideas to which teachers can actively respond. This book offers teacher educators ...
Inquiry and Reflection shows how stories of schooling can elucidate difficult, and unexamined problems facing teachers. While professional texts tend to raise issues of power and its distribution and questions of culture and ideology, often the manner of presentation is abstract, and pre-service teachers have difficulty making connections. Yet literary, film, and video materials illuminate problems and suggest ideas to which teachers can actively respond. This book offers teacher educators ...
Additional Info:
Inquiry and Reflection shows how stories of schooling can elucidate difficult, and unexamined problems facing teachers. While professional texts tend to raise issues of power and its distribution and questions of culture and ideology, often the manner of presentation is abstract, and pre-service teachers have difficulty making connections. Yet literary, film, and video materials illuminate problems and suggest ideas to which teachers can actively respond. This book offers teacher educators a variety of resources for articulating a critical pedagogy and suggests an alternative to the technical, job training approach to teacher education by providing a unique educational curricula that illuminates issues of power, ideology, and culture. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Narrative Frames
ch. 2 Reflection and Teaching
ch. 3 Education as a Liberal Art
ch. 4 Teaching and Teachers in Stories of Schooling
ch. 5 Turning the Gaze: Student Voice and Position in Schooling Narratives
ch. 6 More Stories
ch. 7 Toward Reflexive/Reflective Practice
Notes
Annotated Bibliography of Schooling Narratives
Index
Inquiry and Reflection shows how stories of schooling can elucidate difficult, and unexamined problems facing teachers. While professional texts tend to raise issues of power and its distribution and questions of culture and ideology, often the manner of presentation is abstract, and pre-service teachers have difficulty making connections. Yet literary, film, and video materials illuminate problems and suggest ideas to which teachers can actively respond. This book offers teacher educators a variety of resources for articulating a critical pedagogy and suggests an alternative to the technical, job training approach to teacher education by providing a unique educational curricula that illuminates issues of power, ideology, and culture. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Narrative Frames
ch. 2 Reflection and Teaching
ch. 3 Education as a Liberal Art
ch. 4 Teaching and Teachers in Stories of Schooling
ch. 5 Turning the Gaze: Student Voice and Position in Schooling Narratives
ch. 6 More Stories
ch. 7 Toward Reflexive/Reflective Practice
Notes
Annotated Bibliography of Schooling Narratives
Index

Pedagogy of Hope: Reliving Pedagogy of the Oppressed
Additional Info:
With Pedagogy of Hope, Freire explores his best-known analytical themes - with even deeper understanding and a greater wisdom. Certainly, all of these themes have to be analyzed as elements of a body of critical, liberationist pedagogy. In the present book, we come to understand the author's pedagogical thinking even better, through the critical seriousness, humanistic objectivity, and engaged subjectivity which, in all of Freire's books, are always wedded to ...
With Pedagogy of Hope, Freire explores his best-known analytical themes - with even deeper understanding and a greater wisdom. Certainly, all of these themes have to be analyzed as elements of a body of critical, liberationist pedagogy. In the present book, we come to understand the author's pedagogical thinking even better, through the critical seriousness, humanistic objectivity, and engaged subjectivity which, in all of Freire's books, are always wedded to ...
Additional Info:
With Pedagogy of Hope, Freire explores his best-known analytical themes - with even deeper understanding and a greater wisdom. Certainly, all of these themes have to be analyzed as elements of a body of critical, liberationist pedagogy. In the present book, we come to understand the author's pedagogical thinking even better, through the critical seriousness, humanistic objectivity, and engaged subjectivity which, in all of Freire's books, are always wedded to a unique creative innovativeness. (From the Publisher)
With Pedagogy of Hope, Freire explores his best-known analytical themes - with even deeper understanding and a greater wisdom. Certainly, all of these themes have to be analyzed as elements of a body of critical, liberationist pedagogy. In the present book, we come to understand the author's pedagogical thinking even better, through the critical seriousness, humanistic objectivity, and engaged subjectivity which, in all of Freire's books, are always wedded to a unique creative innovativeness. (From the Publisher)

Graduate Theological Education and the Human Experience of Disability
Additional Info:
Graduate Theological Education and the Human Experience of Disability examines graduate schools of theology and their limited familiarity with the study of disability -- and the presence of people with disabilities in particular -- on their campuses. Dubbed a "missing note" by one theologian, this text offers critical research and illuminates new pathways for theologia and practice in the community of faith. Reviews of previous literature, theology, and practices illuminate ...
Graduate Theological Education and the Human Experience of Disability examines graduate schools of theology and their limited familiarity with the study of disability -- and the presence of people with disabilities in particular -- on their campuses. Dubbed a "missing note" by one theologian, this text offers critical research and illuminates new pathways for theologia and practice in the community of faith. Reviews of previous literature, theology, and practices illuminate ...
Additional Info:
Graduate Theological Education and the Human Experience of Disability examines graduate schools of theology and their limited familiarity with the study of disability -- and the presence of people with disabilities in particular -- on their campuses. Dubbed a "missing note" by one theologian, this text offers critical research and illuminates new pathways for theologia and practice in the community of faith. Reviews of previous literature, theology, and practices illuminate how people with disabilities have historically been marginalized by the religious community. Theologians, people with disabilities and researchers offer suggestions for incorporating disability studies into theological education and religious life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: A Look Down the Road (Robert C. Anderson)
Access to Professional Education (Harold H. Wilke)
Integrating Welcome into the Seminary Curriculum (Bruce C. Birch)
In Search of the Disabled Human Body in Theological Education: Critical Perspectives on the Construction of Normalcy - An Overview (Robert C. Anderson)
Toward a Theology That Includes the Human Experience of Disability (Deborah Creamer)
Christian Theology and Human Disability: A Literature Review (W. Daniel Blair)
Healing and Hospitality in Jesus' Ministry (Bruce G. Epperly)
Inclusiveness as Hospitality in Worship Settings (Laurence Hull Stookey)
Each Made in God's Image, Each a Unit of God's Grace (Lu Leone with Ginny Thornburgh)
Index
Graduate Theological Education and the Human Experience of Disability examines graduate schools of theology and their limited familiarity with the study of disability -- and the presence of people with disabilities in particular -- on their campuses. Dubbed a "missing note" by one theologian, this text offers critical research and illuminates new pathways for theologia and practice in the community of faith. Reviews of previous literature, theology, and practices illuminate how people with disabilities have historically been marginalized by the religious community. Theologians, people with disabilities and researchers offer suggestions for incorporating disability studies into theological education and religious life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: A Look Down the Road (Robert C. Anderson)
Access to Professional Education (Harold H. Wilke)
Integrating Welcome into the Seminary Curriculum (Bruce C. Birch)
In Search of the Disabled Human Body in Theological Education: Critical Perspectives on the Construction of Normalcy - An Overview (Robert C. Anderson)
Toward a Theology That Includes the Human Experience of Disability (Deborah Creamer)
Christian Theology and Human Disability: A Literature Review (W. Daniel Blair)
Healing and Hospitality in Jesus' Ministry (Bruce G. Epperly)
Inclusiveness as Hospitality in Worship Settings (Laurence Hull Stookey)
Each Made in God's Image, Each a Unit of God's Grace (Lu Leone with Ginny Thornburgh)
Index

"How to Be a Perfect Stranger: A Guide to Etiquette in Other People's Religious Ceremonies, Vol. 2"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Foreword by Rev. Dr. Joan Brown Campbell, General Secretary, National Council of Churches
ch. 1 African American Methodist Churches
ch. 2 Baha’i
ch. 3 Christian and Missionary Alliance
ch. 4 The Christian Congregation
ch. 5 Church of the Brethren
ch. 6 Church of the Nazarene
ch. 7 Evangelical Free Church of America
ch. 8 International Church of the Foursquare Gospel
ch. 9 International Pentecostal Holiness Church
ch. 10 Mennonite/Amish
ch. 11 Native American
ch. 12 Orthodox Churches
ch. 13 Pentecostal Church of God
ch. 14 Reformed Church of America
ch. 15 Sikh
ch. 16 Unitarian Universalist
ch. 17 Wesleyan
Glossary
Calendar of Religious Holidays and Festivals
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Foreword by Rev. Dr. Joan Brown Campbell, General Secretary, National Council of Churches
ch. 1 African American Methodist Churches
ch. 2 Baha’i
ch. 3 Christian and Missionary Alliance
ch. 4 The Christian Congregation
ch. 5 Church of the Brethren
ch. 6 Church of the Nazarene
ch. 7 Evangelical Free Church of America
ch. 8 International Church of the Foursquare Gospel
ch. 9 International Pentecostal Holiness Church
ch. 10 Mennonite/Amish
ch. 11 Native American
ch. 12 Orthodox Churches
ch. 13 Pentecostal Church of God
ch. 14 Reformed Church of America
ch. 15 Sikh
ch. 16 Unitarian Universalist
ch. 17 Wesleyan
Glossary
Calendar of Religious Holidays and Festivals
Additional Info:
Our schools and colleges often make the intellectual life seem more impenetrable, narrowly specialized, and inaccessible than it is or needs to be, argues the eminent scholar and educator Gerald Graff, whose provocative book offers a wealth of practical suggestions for making the culture of ideas and arguments more readily understandable. (From the Publisher)
Our schools and colleges often make the intellectual life seem more impenetrable, narrowly specialized, and inaccessible than it is or needs to be, argues the eminent scholar and educator Gerald Graff, whose provocative book offers a wealth of practical suggestions for making the culture of ideas and arguments more readily understandable. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Our schools and colleges often make the intellectual life seem more impenetrable, narrowly specialized, and inaccessible than it is or needs to be, argues the eminent scholar and educator Gerald Graff, whose provocative book offers a wealth of practical suggestions for making the culture of ideas and arguments more readily understandable. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: In the Dark All Eggheads Are Gray
Pt. I Confusing the Issue
ch. 1 The University Is Popular Culture, But It Doesn't Know It Yet
ch. 2 The Problem Problem and Other Oddities of Academic Discourse
ch. 3 The Mixed-Message Curriculum
Pt. II Intellectualism and Its Discontents
ch. 4 Two Cheers for the Argument Culture
ch. 5 Paralysis by Analysis?
Pt. III Communicative Disorders
ch. 6 Unlearning to Write
ch. 7 Scholars and Sound Bites: The Myth of Academic Difficulty
ch. 8 Why Johnny Can't Argue
ch. 9 Outing Criticism
ch. 10 The Application Guessing Game with Andrew Hoberek
Pt. IV Teaching the Club
ch. 11 Hidden Intellectualism
ch. 12 A Word for Words and a Vote for Quotes
ch. 13 Wrestling with the Devil
ch. 14 Deborah Meier's Progressive Traditionalism
Epilogue: How to Write an Argument - What Students and Teachers Really Need to Know
Notes
Index
Our schools and colleges often make the intellectual life seem more impenetrable, narrowly specialized, and inaccessible than it is or needs to be, argues the eminent scholar and educator Gerald Graff, whose provocative book offers a wealth of practical suggestions for making the culture of ideas and arguments more readily understandable. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction: In the Dark All Eggheads Are Gray
Pt. I Confusing the Issue
ch. 1 The University Is Popular Culture, But It Doesn't Know It Yet
ch. 2 The Problem Problem and Other Oddities of Academic Discourse
ch. 3 The Mixed-Message Curriculum
Pt. II Intellectualism and Its Discontents
ch. 4 Two Cheers for the Argument Culture
ch. 5 Paralysis by Analysis?
Pt. III Communicative Disorders
ch. 6 Unlearning to Write
ch. 7 Scholars and Sound Bites: The Myth of Academic Difficulty
ch. 8 Why Johnny Can't Argue
ch. 9 Outing Criticism
ch. 10 The Application Guessing Game with Andrew Hoberek
Pt. IV Teaching the Club
ch. 11 Hidden Intellectualism
ch. 12 A Word for Words and a Vote for Quotes
ch. 13 Wrestling with the Devil
ch. 14 Deborah Meier's Progressive Traditionalism
Epilogue: How to Write an Argument - What Students and Teachers Really Need to Know
Notes
Index

Faculty of Color in Academe: Bittersweet Success
Additional Info:
Key Benefits: Faculty of Color in Academe focuses on inequities based on racial and ethnic differences within the professional workplace in higher education. This book draws on a comprehensive study of African American, Asian, Pacific American, American Indian, and Latino faculty in eight mid-western states. By using both narrative and statistical data, this book provides an in-depth view of the issues surrounding the successful recruitment, retention, and development of faculty ...
Key Benefits: Faculty of Color in Academe focuses on inequities based on racial and ethnic differences within the professional workplace in higher education. This book draws on a comprehensive study of African American, Asian, Pacific American, American Indian, and Latino faculty in eight mid-western states. By using both narrative and statistical data, this book provides an in-depth view of the issues surrounding the successful recruitment, retention, and development of faculty ...
Additional Info:
Key Benefits: Faculty of Color in Academe focuses on inequities based on racial and ethnic differences within the professional workplace in higher education. This book draws on a comprehensive study of African American, Asian, Pacific American, American Indian, and Latino faculty in eight mid-western states. By using both narrative and statistical data, this book provides an in-depth view of the issues surrounding the successful recruitment, retention, and development of faculty of color.
Key Topics: The authors attempt to capture and describe some of the similarities and differences experienced by faculty among each of the above mentioned racial/ethnic groups. Includes a comprehensive discussion of what needs to be done in order to achieve diversity in the teaching profession. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Faculty of Color in Academe: On the Brink of the Twenty-First Century.
Structure of the Book.
Some Preliminary Matters for the Reader.
ch. 2 Snapshots from the Literature: Elements Influencing the Workplace Environment.
Historical Legacy.
Faculty Diversity and Affirmative Action: Continued Resistance.
Some Common Themes and Recommendations.
A Bird's-Eye View — Literature on Faculty of Color by Racial and Ethnic Group: Findings and Recommendations.
ch. 3 The Nature and Extent of Minority Faculty Underrepresentation.
The Nature of Underrepresentation.
Patterns of Underrepresentation.
Explaining the Underrepresentation.
ch. 4 A Chill in the Air: In the Words of Faculty of Color.
Revisiting the Literature.
Description of the Study.
Overview of the Responses.
Chilly Climate: What Our Respondents Have to Say.
Themes of Special Significance to Each of Our Groups.
Manifestations of Interlocking Race and Gender Bias.
A Fine Balance.
Conclusion: Why We Must Listen.
ch. 5 Minority Faculty Hiring: Equality of Opportunity?
Faculty Development Programs: In General and for Minorities.
What Affects Minority Faculty Hiring? Hypothesized Determinants.
Achieving Parity: Effects of Hiring versus Turnover.
Factors Contributing to Increased Minority Faculty Hiring.
Implications.
ch. 6 Why Stay? Current Rewards and Promising Efforts.
Current Rewards and Satisfactions.
Recommendations from the Field: Accentuating the Positive.
Suggested Strategies.
Exemplary Programs.
Learning from Mistakes.
ch. 7 Market Forces: Ph.D. Pipelines versus Competitive Wages.
Summary of Results.
Details of the Analysis.
Appendix: The Data.
ch. 8 Moving beyond Myths and toward Community Diversity: Conclusions and Reflections.
Fresh Approaches.
Minority Faculty in Higher Education: Academic Angst Compounded.
Strategies for Improving the Representation and Circumstances of Faculty of Color.
The Role of Affirmative Action.
Organizational Change Process.
Diversifying Academia: Need for “Extramural” Support.
Myths as Barriers to Problem Solving.
The Importance of Acknowledgment: The Privilege of Ignorance, the Ignorance of Privilege.
Institutional Efforts.
Business as Unusual Not Business as Usual.
Bibliography.
Index
Key Benefits: Faculty of Color in Academe focuses on inequities based on racial and ethnic differences within the professional workplace in higher education. This book draws on a comprehensive study of African American, Asian, Pacific American, American Indian, and Latino faculty in eight mid-western states. By using both narrative and statistical data, this book provides an in-depth view of the issues surrounding the successful recruitment, retention, and development of faculty of color.
Key Topics: The authors attempt to capture and describe some of the similarities and differences experienced by faculty among each of the above mentioned racial/ethnic groups. Includes a comprehensive discussion of what needs to be done in order to achieve diversity in the teaching profession. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Faculty of Color in Academe: On the Brink of the Twenty-First Century.
Structure of the Book.
Some Preliminary Matters for the Reader.
ch. 2 Snapshots from the Literature: Elements Influencing the Workplace Environment.
Historical Legacy.
Faculty Diversity and Affirmative Action: Continued Resistance.
Some Common Themes and Recommendations.
A Bird's-Eye View — Literature on Faculty of Color by Racial and Ethnic Group: Findings and Recommendations.
ch. 3 The Nature and Extent of Minority Faculty Underrepresentation.
The Nature of Underrepresentation.
Patterns of Underrepresentation.
Explaining the Underrepresentation.
ch. 4 A Chill in the Air: In the Words of Faculty of Color.
Revisiting the Literature.
Description of the Study.
Overview of the Responses.
Chilly Climate: What Our Respondents Have to Say.
Themes of Special Significance to Each of Our Groups.
Manifestations of Interlocking Race and Gender Bias.
A Fine Balance.
Conclusion: Why We Must Listen.
ch. 5 Minority Faculty Hiring: Equality of Opportunity?
Faculty Development Programs: In General and for Minorities.
What Affects Minority Faculty Hiring? Hypothesized Determinants.
Achieving Parity: Effects of Hiring versus Turnover.
Factors Contributing to Increased Minority Faculty Hiring.
Implications.
ch. 6 Why Stay? Current Rewards and Promising Efforts.
Current Rewards and Satisfactions.
Recommendations from the Field: Accentuating the Positive.
Suggested Strategies.
Exemplary Programs.
Learning from Mistakes.
ch. 7 Market Forces: Ph.D. Pipelines versus Competitive Wages.
Summary of Results.
Details of the Analysis.
Appendix: The Data.
ch. 8 Moving beyond Myths and toward Community Diversity: Conclusions and Reflections.
Fresh Approaches.
Minority Faculty in Higher Education: Academic Angst Compounded.
Strategies for Improving the Representation and Circumstances of Faculty of Color.
The Role of Affirmative Action.
Organizational Change Process.
Diversifying Academia: Need for “Extramural” Support.
Myths as Barriers to Problem Solving.
The Importance of Acknowledgment: The Privilege of Ignorance, the Ignorance of Privilege.
Institutional Efforts.
Business as Unusual Not Business as Usual.
Bibliography.
Index
Additional Info:
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective ...
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective ...
Additional Info:
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective on how universities, departments and individual faculty have successfully sought to connect their research to the benefit of student learning and institutional mission. It directly addresses the ways teaching-research links can be developed.
Building on research, the literature and wide practical experience, the authors show how academic research activity can be connected to academic teaching activity in such a way as to ensure that neither operates in a vacuum and, most importantly, that each can be enhanced by the other.
The book addresses the issues at the individual, course and institutional levels, as well as at the level of public policy. An important work for faculty, faculty developers and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on the authors
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Overview: reshaping teaching in higher education to support the links between teaching and research
ch. 2 What research and scholarship tell us about teaching-research relationships in higher education
ch. 3 Academic research and student motivation in higher education
ch. 4 Designing the curriculum to link teaching and research
ch. 5 Organizing the institution to link teaching and research
ch. 6 Organizing the department to link teaching and research
ch. 7 Organizing the national and international administration of higher education to link teaching and research
References
Further reading
Index
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective on how universities, departments and individual faculty have successfully sought to connect their research to the benefit of student learning and institutional mission. It directly addresses the ways teaching-research links can be developed.
Building on research, the literature and wide practical experience, the authors show how academic research activity can be connected to academic teaching activity in such a way as to ensure that neither operates in a vacuum and, most importantly, that each can be enhanced by the other.
The book addresses the issues at the individual, course and institutional levels, as well as at the level of public policy. An important work for faculty, faculty developers and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on the authors
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Overview: reshaping teaching in higher education to support the links between teaching and research
ch. 2 What research and scholarship tell us about teaching-research relationships in higher education
ch. 3 Academic research and student motivation in higher education
ch. 4 Designing the curriculum to link teaching and research
ch. 5 Organizing the institution to link teaching and research
ch. 6 Organizing the department to link teaching and research
ch. 7 Organizing the national and international administration of higher education to link teaching and research
References
Further reading
Index


Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty
Additional Info:
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to ...
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to ...
Additional Info:
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to integrate personal strengths into course planning and delivery, provides additional course management tools, such as a model mentoring agreement and an exam development exercise. Brand new features include testimonials from 28 successful adjunct professors throughout North America, which open and close each of the book's 14 chapters, as well as a new chapter focused on infusing technology into the adjunct professor's instruction. The book includes a rich array of online support resources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 A Current Perspective on Adjunct Teaching
ch. 2 Formulating a Master Strategy
ch. 3 Today's College Students
ch. 4 Strategic Course Planning
ch. 5 Launching Your Course Effectively
ch. 6 Managing the Context of Your Course
ch. 7 Instructor-Directed Learning Methods
ch. 8 Student-Driven Learning Methods
ch. 9 Infusing Technology into Your Teaching
ch. 10 Managing the Examination Process
ch. 11 Alternative Methods of Assessing Student Learning
ch. 12 Bringing Your Course to an Effective Conclusion
ch. 13 Evaluating the Effectiveness of Your Teaching
ch. 14 Managing Your Adjunct Career
Bibliography
Index
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to integrate personal strengths into course planning and delivery, provides additional course management tools, such as a model mentoring agreement and an exam development exercise. Brand new features include testimonials from 28 successful adjunct professors throughout North America, which open and close each of the book's 14 chapters, as well as a new chapter focused on infusing technology into the adjunct professor's instruction. The book includes a rich array of online support resources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 A Current Perspective on Adjunct Teaching
ch. 2 Formulating a Master Strategy
ch. 3 Today's College Students
ch. 4 Strategic Course Planning
ch. 5 Launching Your Course Effectively
ch. 6 Managing the Context of Your Course
ch. 7 Instructor-Directed Learning Methods
ch. 8 Student-Driven Learning Methods
ch. 9 Infusing Technology into Your Teaching
ch. 10 Managing the Examination Process
ch. 11 Alternative Methods of Assessing Student Learning
ch. 12 Bringing Your Course to an Effective Conclusion
ch. 13 Evaluating the Effectiveness of Your Teaching
ch. 14 Managing Your Adjunct Career
Bibliography
Index